Xerox® ColorQube® 9303 Family Service Manual

708P90290
February 2013
Xerox ColorQube 9303 Family Service Manual
Prepared by:
Content Development and Language Services - Europe & Asia
Xerox Global Services
Bessemer Road,
Welwyn Garden City
Hertfordshire
AL7 1BU
United Kingdom
2009- 2013 Xerox Corporation. All Rights Reserved. XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other company trademarks are also acknowledged.
While every care has been taken in the preparation of this manual, no liability will be accepted by Xerox Europe arising out of any inaccuracies or omissions.
All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for informational purposes only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by certified, product trained service personnel only. Xerox does not warrant or represent that it will notify or provide to such customer any future change to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or
modules, components or parts of such equipment may affect whether Xerox is responsible to fix machine defects under the warranty offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You
should consult the applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer or third-party provided service.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................................................................................
How To Use This Manual ................................................................................................
Remote Control Panel .....................................................................................................
Change History................................................................................................................
Documentation Symbol ...................................................................................................
Mod/Tag Identification .....................................................................................................
Voltages Resistances and Tolerances ............................................................................
Safety Information ...........................................................................................................
Health and Safety Incident Reporting..............................................................................
Translated Warnings .......................................................................................................
ColorQube 9303 Family
iii
iv
iv
v
vii
vii
viii
ix
ix
x
February 2013
i
Introduction
Introduction
February 2013
ii
About This Manual
Section 5 Parts List
This manual is part of a multinational service documentation system that is structured in the
standard Xerox service manual format.
This section contains the detailed and illustrated spare parts list. Any part that is spared or that
must be removed to access a spared part is illustrated.
Organization
Section 6 General Procedures / Information
The service manual is the document used as the primary information source for repairing and
maintaining this family of products and is available as EDOC on a CDROM, or as a PDF on
CDROM. The information within the manual is divided into an introduction and eight other sections.
Section 1 Service Call Procedures
This section is used to start and complete a service call. The procedures in this section will
either direct you to a Repair Analysis Procedure (RAP), or identify a faulty component or subassembly.
Section 2 Status Indicator Repair Analysis Procedures
This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) and checkouts necessary to
diagnose, isolate and repair faults other than image quality faults.
The fault codes on the machine user interface are preceded with the number 3.
This manual describes the procedure for the fault under the heading 62-485-00 Supply
12 Volts Error RAP.
This section contains all other procedures, product specifications and general information. It
also contains Mod/Tag information. The abbreviations used in this Manual are in GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations.
Section 7 Wiring Data
This section contains PWB layout, lists of plug / jack locations and wiring diagrams of the
power distribution and wire networks in the machine.
Section 8 Principles of Operation
This section contains the Principles of Operation.
Publication Comments Sheet
A Publication Comment Sheet is provided at the rear of the PDF version of the manual.
For example a fault in the scanner might display 362-485-00 on the user interface.
Section 3 Image Quality

This section contains the Image Quality Repair Analysis Procedures (IQ RAPs), checkouts and
setup procedures necessary to diagnose, isolate and repair image quality faults.
Section 4 Repairs / Adjustments
This section contains all the repair and adjustment procedures.
Repairs
Repairs include procedures for the removal and installing of parts which have the following
special conditions:
When there is a personnel or machine safety issue.
When removal or installation cannot be determined from the exploded view of the parts
list.
When there is a cleaning or a lubricating activity associated with the procedure.
When the part requires an adjustment after a part is installed.
When a special tool is required for removal or installing a part.
Adjustments
Adjustments include procedures for the adjusting of the parts that must be within specification
for the correct operation of the system.
February 2013
iii
Introduction
About This Manual
How To Use This Manual
Remote Control Panel
Always start with the Service Call Procedures, Section 1. Perform SCP 1 Initial Actions and
verify the problem, then follow the directions given.
The ColorQube 9303F machines with system software version 071.XXX.XX.XXX or higher are
equipped with a remote control panel feature to allow remote user access to the UI.
How to Differentiate Between Machine Variants
The remote control panel feature enables users the ability to:
The machine will be identified in this manual by the identifiers ColorQube 9301 / 9302 / 9303.
Remotely view the local UI display graphics.
Operate both hard and soft buttons on the control panel.
When a procedure, parts list description or other reference is unique amongst different speeds
of machine, the appropriate speed range will be quoted. For example, 38ppm, 45ppm 55ppm.
Any artwork will also be specific.
The remote control panel on the remote user PC mimics the device control panel enabling the
remote user to operate the device as though they were standing at the machine. Remote
access to Service Mode (diagnostics) is also possible. Refer to GP 47 Remote Diagnostics.
NOTE: This manual services all configurations of the machine. Ignore references to options
not installed on the machine.
Warnings, Cautions And Notes

WARNING
A warning is used whenever an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or statement, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury.
A translated version of all warnings is in Translated Warnings.
CAUTION
A caution is used whenever an operation or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or
statement, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to the equipment.
NOTE: A note is used where it is essential to highlight a procedure, practice, condition or statement.
Introduction
How To Use This Manual,
February 2013
iv
Change History
This page gives information on major changes to the service manual. Please go to the relevant
update.
Bus Update May 2011
Bus Update September 2011
Bus Update June 2012
Bus Update February 2013
Bus Update May 2011
Wiring Diagram 8.2 Media Path Driver PWB (2 of 5)

Wiring Diagram 9.8 Marking Unit Heater PWB
Bus Update June 2012

The following procedures are updated:
12-024-00-171, 12-025-00-171 HVF Paddle Roller Position RAP
12-113-00-171, 12-114-00-171, 12-190-00-171 HVF BM Entry RAP
91-698-00 to 91-732-00 IOD Excessive Head Misalignment RAP
91-827-00 PQM Align Needed RAP
91-837-00 PQM Align Calibration Needed RAP
92-541-00, 92-570-00 Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
94-535-00 Drum Driver Command Curent Error RAP
94-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00 Lower Umbilical Thermal Error RAP
99-394-00 to 99-413-00 PEST Error 13 RAP
99-272-00 to 99-292-00 PEST Error 8 RAP
99-444-00 to 99-457-00 PEST Error 16 RAP
99-460-00 to 99-477-00 PEST Error 17 RAP
OF 3 Unresponsive Machine RAP
OF 12 Service Code RAP
IQ 9 Deletions in the Process Direction RAP
IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP
12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171 HVF Bin 1 Position RAP

12L-171 Tri-Folder Not Detected RAP
94-549 Drum Runout Calibration Error RAP
99-081-00 to 99-112-00 PEST Error 2 RAP
OF 5 Boot Up Failure RAP
OF 16 POST Error RAP
REP 12.19-171 Crease Roll Motor
REP 12.27-171 BM Staple Heads
REP 91.25 Drum and Front Drum Frame Assembly
REP 91.29 Printhead
REP 91.34 Drum Pulley
Parts List updated
GP 7 System Grounding Verification
GP 35 Copy and Print Speeds
GP 37 Post part Replacement Routines
Wiring Diagram 12.10
Principles of Operation (System Overview)
REP 91.13 Stitch / Roll Motor
REP 91.29 Printhead
ADJ 12.2-171 Tri-Folder Paper Settings
Parts List updated
Bus Update September 2011
GP 15 Location and Function of PWB LEDs
GP 37 Post Part Replacement Routines
01E +12V Distribution RAP

01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload RAP
Principles of Operation
12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP
19-300-00 to 19-310-00 Image Disk (HDD) Failure RAP

99-824-00 to 99-838-00 PEST Error 38 RAP
REP 1.9 Power Supply Unit
REP 3.7 Single Board Controller PWB
REP 3.9 NVM Module BWB and Battery
REP 3.10 Power Distribution PWB
REP 75.11 Tray 5 Elevator Tray Guides
REP 91.29 Printhead
Parts List updated
dC 967 Head to Drum Spacing Check
Wiring Diagram 1.5 Power Supply Unit (5 of 5)
Wiring Diagram 3.3 Single Board Controller PWB (3 of 3)
The following procedures are new:
REP 91.37 Stitch / Roll Motor Lead Screws
Bus Update February 2013

This revision of the service manual was produced to meet the requirements for the;
introduction of the dicovery

071.XXX.XX.XXX, GP 33.
2.0
software
platform,
general update to the ColorQube 9303F procedures.
system
software
version
Introduction. Remote Control Panel information
SCP 3 Fault Analysis, warning added
SCP 3 Wireless Connectivity RAP information added and GPs 41 to 49
12-473-00-171 to 12-478-00-171 Support Finger Position RAP
12D-171 Booklet Quality RAP
12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP, new figure 1
February 2013
v
Introduction
Change History
RAP 71-101-00 to 71-161-00 Tray 1 Mis-Feed Jam
dC103 Billing Plan
dC131 Table 3
dC131 Table 4
RAP 74-101-00, 74-160-00 to 74-161-00 Bypass Tray 4 Mis-Feed
dC131 Table 6
RAP 75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Mis-Feed
dC131 Table 17
RAP 82-502-00, 82-503-00 Horizontal Transport Motor M6 Failure
dC131 Table 20
RAP 88-500-00 to 88-502-00, 88-512-00 Preheat Thermal Error
dC134 Market Region
RAP 88-508-00 Registration / Preheat Air Pump Incorrect Current
dC301 NVM Initialization
RAP OF 1:- service bulletin T8009-12-06.
dC330 Component Control (Table 12)
RAP 89-125-00 to 89-128-00, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 Media Path Sensor 20 Failure
dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration (RaLPH)
RAP 99-272-00 to 99-292-00 PEST Error 8
TAG 012
RAP 99-394-00 to 99-413-00 PEST Error 13
TAG 014
RAP 99-534-00 to 99-548-00 PEST Error 21
TAG 015
RAP 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00, 94-546-00, 94-632-00, 94633-00 Drum Heat Error RAP
TAG 016
TAG 018
RAP 93-545-00 to 93-548-00 Ink Melt Conductivity Error
PJ Locations (table 8 PJ503 HVF PWB)
RAP IQ 9 Deletions in the Process Direction
WD 8.6 ( TAG 018 added)
RAP IQ 10 Incorrect Margin, Misregistration or Skew;- service bulletin T8009-12-06
WD 12.2 (Q12-318 was Q12-135)
RAP IQ 11 Smudges, Debris, Smears in the Process Direction, or Paper Stack Marks:service bulletin T8009-12-06.
WD 12.13 (PJ 501 deleted, PJ502 extended to replace PJ501)
WD 12.24 (PJ501 changed to PJ502)
P of O System Overview; memory options removed.
REP 3.8 Hard Disk Drive
REP 12.6-171 HVF Ejector Assembly
REP 89.2 Registration / Preheat Pumps
PL 1.15
PL 3.11
PL 5.15
PL 5.35
The following procedures are new:
RAP 16D Wireless Connectivity
RAP 22-360-00 Service Plan Mismatch
PL 12.110
GP 47 Remote Diagnostics
PL 20.10
GP 48 How to Re-Enter Optional Feature Installation Keys
PL 31.11
GP 49 USB Connection Mode
PL 88.10
PL 88.11
PL 91.20
PL 91.25
GP 1 Mode Service
GP 4 Machine Software
GP 5 Customer Administration Tools
GP 9 UI Services User Menu Map
GP 17 Network Clone Procedure
GP 33 Machine Features
GP40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyns and Abbreviations
GP42 How to set the IP Address of the PWS
GP 44 How to Disable the Firewall of the PWS
Introduction
Change History
P of O Motors (Registration/Preheat Assembly W/TAG 018 added)
P of O (Compiler Stapler Operation SH1 Home Sensor Q12-318)
P of O (SH1 Home sensor, Fig 4, Fig 5)
February 2013
vi
Documentation Symbol
Mod/Tag Identification
This symbol is displayed in the service documentation:
Figure 1, shows the Mod/Tag identification symbols.
ESD Caution Symbol
These with tag symbols are used to identify the components

or configurations that are part of a machine change covered
by this tag number.
CAUTION
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
These without tag symbols are used to identify the

components or configurations that are used when this
tag is not fitted.
Figure 1 Mod/Tag identification symbols
February 2013
vii
Introduction
Documentation Symbol, Mod/Tag Identification
Voltages Resistances and Tolerances

For AC power specifications, refer to GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements.
Signal description (event that

causes the signal level change)
DC Voltage Levels and Tolerances

DC Voltages should be measured between an available test point and a machine ground.
Table 1 shows the range of the common voltages.
Table 1 DC Voltage Levels
Nominal voltage Voltage tolerance range RAP reference
0 volts
0.00 to 0.10V
01L 0V Distribution RAP
+3.3V ESTAR
+/ 2.5%
01B +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP
+3.3V
+/ 2.5%
01C +3.3V Distribution RAP
+5.V
5.1V +/- 5%
01D +5V Distribution RAP
+12V
+/ 5%
-12V
+/ 5%
01F -12V Distribution RAP
+17V
See Note
01G +17V Distribution RAP
+24V
+/- 5%
01H +24V Distribution RAP
+50V
47V to 49V
01J +50V Distribution RAP
-50V
-47V to -49V
01K -50V Distribution RAP
Logic level when the

signal is available
Voltage supplied to
the signal circuit
Wire colour
Figure 1 Signal Nomenclature

Table 2 shows the signal tolerances.
Non-standard voltage levels will be quoted on the relevant circuit diagram. All other voltage levels are plus or minus 10%.
Table 2 Signal tolerances

Signal voltage
(H) logic level
(L) logic level
NOTE: During power self test and when in sleep mode, this supply is 17V unregulated and is
approximately +17V. When the machine is in active mode, this supply raises to +24V +/- 5%
+5V
+3.85V or greater
At or near 0.8V
+3.3V
+2V or greater
At or near 0.8V
Resistance Tolerances
Non standard signal tolerances will be quoted on the relevant wiring diagram.
All resistance measurement tolerances are plus or minus 10%, unless otherwise stated in the
procedure.
DC Signal Nomenclature
Figure 1 shows the signal nomenclature used in this manual.
NOTE: The logic level shown with the signal name will be the actual signal as measured with a
service meter. This will not necessarily be the same as the logic state shown on the diagnostic
screen.
Samples of RAP Reference Text

Throughout the manual there are linked references that extend the diagnostic procedure or
add more information:
GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.

NOTE: This links to a General Procedure.
WD 1.5
NOTE: This links to a relevant wiring diagram.
Install new components as necessary:
Tray 1 feed sensor, PL 81.25 Item 19.

NOTE: This links to the parts list. If installation of the new component is simple, the parts
list artwork is sufficient to show how the component is assembled in the machine. If installation of the new component is not simple, the parts listing will contain cross references to
repair procedures and adjustments, as necessary.
Introduction
Voltages Resistances and Tolerances
February 2013
viii
Safety Information
Health and Safety Incident Reporting
The warning that follows is for general guidance when live working.
I. Summary
This section defines requirements for notification of health and safety incidents involving Xerox
products (equipment and materials) at customer locations.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
Safety Icons
II. Scope
The safety icons that follow are displayed on the machine:
Xerox Corporation and subsidiaries worldwide.
Hot Surface Symbol
III. Objective
This symbol indicates hot surfaces. Take care when servicing the machine.
To enable prompt resolution of health and safety incidents involving Xerox products and to
ensure Xerox regulatory compliance.
IV. Definitions
Incident:
Lethal Voltage Symbol
An event or condition occurring in a customer account that has resulted in injury, illness or
property damage. Examples of incidents include machine fires, smoke generation, physical
injury to an operator or service representative. Alleged events and product conditions are
included in this definition.
This symbol indicates potentially lethal voltages. Take care when servicing the machine when
the power cord is connected.
V. Requirements
Initial Report:
1.
Xerox organizations shall establish a process for individuals to report product incidents to
Xerox Environment Health & Safety within 24 hours of becoming aware of the event.
2.
The information to be provided at the time of reporting is contained in Appendix A (Health

and Safety Incident Report involving a Xerox product).
3.
The initial notification may be made by any of the methods that follow:
Fuses
WARNING
Do not install a fuse of a different type or rating. Installing the wrong type or rating of
fuse can cause overheating and a risk of fire.
Part Replacement
For incidents in North America and Developing Markets West (Brazil, Mexico, Latin
American North and Latin American South):
Phone* Xerox EH&S at: +1-800-828-6571.
Electronic mail Xerox EH&S at: usa.xerox.ehs@xerox.com.
Fax Xerox EH&S at: +1-585-216-8817 [intelnet 8-219-8817].
For incidents in Europe and Developing Markets East (Middle East, Africa, India,
China and Hong Kong):
Only use genuine Xerox approved spare parts or components to maintain compliance with legislation and safety certification.
Phone* Xerox EH&S at: +44 (0) 1707 353434.
Electronic mail Xerox EH&S at: ehs-europe@xerox.com.
Disassembly Precautions
Fax Xerox EH&S at: +44 (0) 1707 353914 [intelnet 8 668 3914].
Do not leave the machine with any covers removed at a customer location.
*Initial notification made by phone must be followed within 24 hours by a completed incident report and sent to the indicated electronic mail address or fax number.
Re-assembly Precautions
NOTE: If sending a fax, please also send the original via internal mail.
Use extreme care during re-assembly. Check all harnesses to ensure they do not contact moving parts and do not get trapped between components.
Responsibilities for resolution:

1.
General Procedures
Observe all warnings displayed on the machine and written in the service procedures. Do not
attempt to perform any task that is not specified in the service procedures.
Business Groups / Product Design Teams responsible for the product involved in the incident shall:
a.
Manage field bulletins, customer correspondence, product recalls, safety retrofits.
b.
Fund all field retrofits.
February 2013
ix
Introduction
Safety Information, Health and Safety Incident Re-
2.
Field Service Operations shall:
Translated Warnings
a.
Preserve the Xerox product involved and the scene of the incident inclusive of any
associated equipment located in the vicinity of the incident.
Cleaning Warnings
b.
Return any affected equipment/part(s) to the location designated by Xerox EH&S

and/or the Business Division.
c.
3.
Implement all safety retrofits.
DANGER: Ne pas essuyer avec une ponge ou une serpillre et de l'eau si de l'huile est
renverse. Cela talerait l'huile et augmenterait la zone reprsentant un risque de chute.
Xerox EH&S shall:

a.
Manage and report all incident investigation activities.
b.
Review and approve proposed product corrective actions and retrofits, if necessary.
c.
Manage all communications and correspondence with government agencies.
d.
Define actions to correct confirmed incidents.
The Health and Safety Incident Report involving a Xerox Product (Form # EH&S-700) is available in the locations that follow:
On electronic documentation (EDOC), located in the folder \safety.
In the hardcopy, located at the end of the manual.
AVVERTENZA: non tentare di pulire una fuoriuscita di olio utilizzando uno spazzolone e
acqua per evitare di estendere l'area contaminata e aumentare il rischio di scivolare.
VORSICHT: Nicht versuchen, ausgetretenes l mit einem herkmmlichen Wischlappen
und Wasser zu beseitigen. Dadurch wird das l verteilt und es besteht eine noch
grere Rutschgefahr.
VI. Appendices
WARNING
Do not attempt to mop up the spilt oil with conventional mops and water. This will
spread the contamination and will extend the slip hazard.
AVISO: Abstngase de limpiar el aceite derramado a la manera convencional con una

fregona y agua, ya que ello slo provocara la extensin de la contaminacin y aumentara el peligro de deslizamiento.
WARNING
Do not clean the stripper blade. The stripper blade is very sharp and can cause injury. If
the stripper blade is dirty a new blade must be installed.
DANGER: Effectuez cette procdure avec prcaution. La lame du doigt dcolleur est
trs tranchante et peut tre source de blessures.
AVVERTENZA: Fare attenzione durante questa procedura. La lama del separatore
molto tagliente e pu causare lesioni personali.
VORSICHT: Bei diesem Vorgang vorsichtig vorgehen. Die Abstreifklinge ist sehr scharf
und es besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
AVISO: Tenga cuidado durante este procedimiento. El conjunto de dedos de despegue
es muy filudo y puede producir lesiones.
WARNING
Immediately clean an oil spill. Spilt oil is a slip hazard. Do not walk in the contaminated
area. Walking in the contaminated area will spread the contamination and contaminate
footwear. Contaminated footwear is a slip hazard.
DANGER: Dans le cas o de l'huile est renverse, nettoyez immdiatement pour viter
tout risque de chute. vitez de marcher dans la zone o de l'huile a t renverse pour
ne pas l'taler sur le sol et prvenir tout risque de chute.
AVVERTENZA: Pulire immediatamente una fuoriuscita di olio per evitare il rischio di
scivolare. Non camminare nell'area contaminata per evitare di diffondere l'area contaminata e di contaminare le calzature. Con le calzature contaminate si corre il rischio di
scivolare.
VORSICHT: lflecke unverzglich entfernen. Bei verschttetem l besteht Rutschgefahr. lverschmutzten Bereich nicht betreten. Durch Treten in eine llache breitet sich
die Verschmutzung aus und die Schuhe werden verunreinigt. Mit ligen Schuhsohlen
besteht Rutschgefahr.
AVISO: Limpie de inmediato el aceite derramado. El aceite derramado puede ocasionar
resbalones. No camine en la zona donde ocurri el derrame. Si camina en ella, se untar
de aceite los zapatos y esparcir el aceite a otras zonas. Los zapatos con aceite pueden
ocasionar resbalones
Introduction
Health and Safety Incident Reporting, Translated
February 2013
x
WARNING
Wear protective gloves when using solvents and cleaning agents, PL 26.10 Item 5
DANGER: Porter des gants de protection lors de l'utilisation de solvants et de produits
de nettoyage, PL 26.10 Item 5.
AVVERTENZA: utilizzare guanti protettivi durante l'impiego di solventi e soluzioni per
pulizia PL 26.10 Item 5.
VORSICHT: Beim Einsatz von Lsungs- und Reinigungsmitteln Handschuhe tragen PL
26.10 Item 5.
AVISO: Pngase guantes de proteccin cuando utilice disolventes y productos de limpieza PL 26.10 Item 5.
WARNING
Wear the protective gloves included in the silicon oil removal kit when using the syringe
to remove the oil.
DANGER: Il est indispensable de porter les gants de protection inclus dans le kit silicone de nettoyage de lhuile lors de lutilisation de la seringue de pour nettoyer lhuile.
AVVERTENZA:Quando si usa la siringa per rimuovere lolio, indossare i guanti protettivi
inclusi nel kit di rimozione dell'olio di silicone.
VORSICHT: Beim Entfernen von l mit der labsaugpumpe die im Reinigungsset fr die
Silikonlbeseitigung enthaltenen Schutzhandschuhe tragen.
AVISO: Pngase los guantes protectores incluidos en el kit de extraccin del aceite de
silicona cuando utilice la jeringa para extraer el aceite.
Electrical Warnings
WARNING
DANGER: Ne pas mettre la machine sous tension si un circuit de mise la masse est
dconnect. Les circuits de mise la masse permettent de garantir la scurit de la
machine lors d'un incident.
AVVERTENZA: Non accendere la macchina se uno dei conduttori di terra non connesso. In caso di guasti elettrici, tali conduttori garantiscono la sicurezza del sistema.
VORSICHT: Stromzufuhr zum Gert nicht einschalten, wenn keine Erdung gegeben ist.
AVISO: No encienda la mquina mientras est deconectado algn circuito de tierra. Los
circuitos de tierra mantienen la seguridad de la mquina en las situaciones de averas o
errores.
WARNING
Do not touch the ink loader melt plates while the machine is switched on. Dangerous
voltages may be present that could cause death or injury.
DANGER: Ne pas toucher les plaques de fusion du chargeur d'encre tant que la machine
est sous tension. Elles reprsentent un risque de chocs lectriques qui sont un danger
de mort ou peuvent entraner des blessures graves.
AVVERTENZA: non toccare le piastre di fusione del caricatore di inchiostro mentre la
macchina accesa. La presenza di voltaggi pericolosi comporta il rischio di morte o
lesioni personali.
VORSICHT: Die Schmelzplatten des Tintenfllbereichs nicht berhren, solange das
Gert eingeschaltet ist. An den Platten liegt eine Spannung an; es besteht Stromschlagbzw. Lebensgefahr!
AVISO: No toque las planchas fundidas del cargador de tinta mientras la mquina est
encendida, ya que podra haber tensiones peligrosas que podran provocar lesiones o
incluso la muerte.
WARNING
Do not attempt any repairs to the power cord or safety ground harness/conductor.
DANGER: Ne pas tenter de rparer le faisceau/conducteur de mise la masse ou du cordon d'alimentation.
Do not use the on/off switch as a safety disconnect device. The on/off switch is not a
disconnect device. Disconnect the power cord from the supply to isolate the equipment.
AVVERTENZA: non eseguire riparazioni sul cavo dell'alimentazione o sul conduttore di

terra di sicurezza.
DANGER: Ne pas utiliser l'interrupteur comme systme d'arrt d'urgence. Dconnecter

le cordon d'alimentation de la prise pour isoler l'quipement.
VORSICHT: Keine Reparaturen am Netzkabel oder am Schutzleiter vornehmen.
AVVERTENZA: Non usare l'interruttore di accensione/spegnimento come dispositivo di

sicurezza per il disinserimento dell'elettricit, in quanto l'interruttore non stato disegnato per questa funzione. Per isolare la macchina dalla corrente elettrica, scollegare il
cavo dell'alimentazione dalla presa a muro.
AVISO: No intente reparar el cable de alimentacin ni el conductor/mazo de tierra de

proteccin.
WARNING
Do not install a fuse of a different type or rating. Installing the wrong type or rating of
fuse can cause overheating and a risk of fire.
DANGER: Ne pas installer de fusible de type ou de calibre diffrent. Il existe un risque
de surchauffe voire d'incendie.
AVVERTENZA: per evitare rischi di surriscaldamento o d'incendio, non installare un fusibile di tipo o carica diversi da quelli esistenti.
VORSICHT: Der Netzschalter reicht zur Trennung von der Netzspannung NICHT aus. Um
das Gert von der Netzspannung zu trennen, den Netzstecker abziehen.
AVISO: No utilice el interruptor de encendido/apagado como dispositivo de desconexin seguro. El interruptor de encendido/apagado no es un dispositivo de desconexin.
Para aislar el equipo totalmente, desconecte el cable de alimentacin de la toma de corriente.
VORSICHT: Keine Sicherungen anderer Art oder anderer Leistung auf dem IOT-PWB
installieren - berhitzungs- und Brandgefahr.
AVISO: No instale un fusible de potencia o tipo distinto. Un fusible de potencia o tipo
distinto puede producir sobrecalentamiento y el riesgo de incendio.
WARNING
Do not switch on the electricity to the machine while a ground circuit is disconnected.
Ground circuits ensure that the machine remains safe during a fault condition.
February 2013
xi
Introduction
Translated Warnings
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 14. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
DANGER: Assurez-vous que la machine est hors tension lorsque vous effectuez des
tches ne ncessitant pas d'alimentation lectrique. Reportez-vous GP 14.
Dbranchez le cble d'alimentation pour prvenir tout risque d'lectrocution. Les chocs
lectriques peuvent prsenter un danger de mort ou entraner des blessures graves. De
plus, certaines pices, lorsqu'elles sont en mouvement, peuvent tre source de
blessures graves.
AVVERTENZA: Accertarsi di isolare la macchina dall'alimentazione elettrica quando si
eseguono attivit che non richiedono elettricit. Vedere GP 14. Scollegare il cavo di alimentazione. L'elettricit pu causare morte o lesioni personali. Le parti in movimento
possono causare lesioni personali.
VORSICHT: Sicherstellen, dass die Stromversorgung des Gerts bei Arbeiten, die
keinen Strom erfordern, ausgeschaltet ist. Siehe auch GP 14. Den Netzstecker ziehen.
Andernfalls besteht Stromschlaggefahr und Verletzungsgefahr durch bewegliche Teile.
AVISO: Asegrese de mantener la mquina aislada de la energa elctrica mientras realiza tareas que no necesitan electricidad. Consulte GP 14. Desconecte el cable de alimentacin. La energa elctrica puede producir lesiones o incluso la muerte. Las piezas
sueltas pueden producir lesiones.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 14. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
DANGER: Mettez la machine hors tension. Reportez-vous GP 14. Dconnectez le cordon d'alimentation de l'alimentation du client lorsque vous ralisez des tches qui ne
ncessitent pas d'lectricit. L'lectricit peut tre l'origine de blessures, voire d'un
accident mortel. Les pices amovibles peuvent tre l'origine de blessures.
AVVERTENZA: Spegnere la macchina. Vedere GP 14. Scollegare il cavo di alimentazione
dall'alimentatore quando si eseguono attivit che non richiedono elettricit. L'elettricit
pu causare morte o lesioni personali. Le parti in movimento possono causare lesioni
personali.
VORSICHT: Schalten Sie die Stromversorgung der Maschine ab. Siehe auch GP 14. Ziehen Sie das Stromkabel ab, wenn Sie Aufgaben ausfhren, fr die keine Stromversorgung bentigt wird. Stromschlge knnen Todesfllen oder Verletzungen verursachen.
Bewegliche Teile knnen zu Verletzungen fhren.
AVISO: Apague la electricidad de la mquina. Consulte el GP 14. Desconecte el cable de
alimentacin elctrica de la toma de pared mientras est realizando tareas que no
necesiten corriente. La electricidad puede causar daos o la muerte. Las partes mviles
pueden causar daos.
WARNING
Take care when measuring AC mains (line) voltage. Electricity can cause death or injury.
DANGER: Prendre des prcautions lors du relev de la tension de la prise de courant
alternatif. L'lectricit peut entraner des blessures graves voire mortelles.
AVVERTENZA: Procedere con cautela durante la misurazione della tensione CA della
rete. L'elettricit pu causare infortuni o morte.
VORSICHT: Bei der Netzspannungsprfung stets vorsichtig vorgehen
Introduction
Translated Warnings
AVISO: Tenga cuidado al medir la tensin de la lnea de alimentacin de corriente

alterna. La electricidad puede causar lesiones e incluso la muerte.
General Warnings
WARNING
A warning is used whenever an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or statement, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury.
DANGER: Une note Danger est utilise chaque fois qu'une procdure d'utilisation ou de
maintenance peut tre cause de blessure si elle n'est pas strictement respecte.
AVVERTENZA: Un segnale di avvertenza utilizzato ogni volta che una procedura operativa o di manutenzione, una pratica, una condizione o un'istruzione, se non strettamente osservata, potrebbe causare lesioni personali.
VORSICHT: Weist darauf hin, dass ein Abweichen von den angefhrten Arbeits- und
Wartungsanweisungen gesundheitliche Schden, mglicherweise sogar schwere Verletzungen zur Folge haben kann.
AVISO:Un aviso se utiliza siempre que un procedimiento de operacin o mantenimiento,
prctica o condicin puede causar daos personales si no se respetan estrictamente.
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the customers network before performing tasks that do not
need network access. Isolating the machine will prevent remote diagnostic access, GP
47.
AVERTISSEMENT: Isolez la machine du rseau des clients avant deffectuer les tches
qui ne ncessitent pas laccs au rseau. Cette isolation bloquera laccs diagnostique
distance, GP 47.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di eseguire attivit che non richiedono laccesso alla rete, isolare
la macchina dalla rete del cliente. Lisolamento della macchina impedisce laccesso alla
diagnostica remota (GP 47).
ACHTUNG: Fr Aufgaben, bei denen kein Netzwerkzugriff erforderlich ist, das Gert
vom Kundennetzwerk trennen. Hinweis: Bei Trennung des Gerts ist keine Ferndiagnose mglich (GP 47).
AVISO: Desconecte la mquina de la red del cliente para realizar operaciones que no
necesiten acceso a red. Desconectar la mquina de la red evitar que se genere el diagnstico de acceso remoto, GP 47.
WARNING
Do not leave an old stripper blade at the customers site.
DANGER: Ne pas laisser les lames usages du doigt dcolleur sur le site client.
AVVERTENZA: non lasciare mai una vecchia lama di separazione presso la sede del cliente.
VORSICHT: Alte Abstreifklingen nicht am Kundenstandort zurcklassen, sondern
entsorgen.
AVISO: No deje un conjunto de dedos de despegue antiguo en las instalaciones del cliente.
WARNING
Do not undock the HVF BM from the machine. The HVF BM is unstable when undocked
from the machine. Do not show the customer how to undock the HVF BM.
DANGER: Ne dconnectez pas le module HVF BM de la machine. Le module HCSS BM
devient instable lorsqu'il est dconnect de la machine. Ne dmontrez pas au client
February 2013
xii
comment dconnecter le module HCSS BM.
not show the customer how to undock Tray 5.
AVVERTENZA: Non sganciare il modulo HVF BM dalla macchina. Questo modulo non
stabile quando sganciato dalla macchina. Non mostrare al cliente come sganciare il
modulo HCSS BM.
DANGER: Attention ne pas faire tomber le magasin 5. Le magasin 5 nest pas stable
lorsquil est dtach de la machine. Ne pas montrer au client comment dtacher le
magasin 5.
VORSICHT: Docken Sie nicht den HVF BM von der Maschine ab. Der HCSS BM ist instabil, wenn er von der Maschine abgedockt ist. Zeigen Sie dem Kunden nicht, wie der
HCSS BM abgedockt wird.
AVVERTENZA: Fare attenzione a non destabilizzare il vassoio 5. Quando sganciato

dalla macchina, questo vassoio instabile: non mostrare al cliente come sganciarlo.
AVISO: No desacople el apilador o grapadora de alta capacidad HVF BM de la mquina.

sta no es estable cuando se desacopla de la mquina. No muestre al cliente cmo
desacoplar el apilador/grapadora de alta capacidad HCSS BM.
WARNING
VORSICHT: Behlter 5 nicht umstoen.Der Behlter ist nach der Trennung vom Gert
sehr instabil.Benutzer nicht im Trennen des Behlters vom Gert einweisen.
AVISO: Tenga cuidado de que no se caiga la bandeja 5. Cuando no est acoplada a la
mquina, la bandeja 5 es inestable.No le muestre al cliente como desacoplar la bandeja
5.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1 m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
DANGER: Ne pas travailler dans un espace restreint. 1 mtre d'espace est ncessaire
pour un dpannage en toute scurit.
AVVERTENZA: Non lavorare in uno spazio limitato; necessario uno spazio di almeno
un metro attorno alla macchina per la sicurezza dell'operatore.
VORSICHT: Nur mit ausreichendem Bewegungsspielraum (1 m) arbeiten.
AVISO: No trabaje en un espacio reducido. Se necesita 1 metro de espacio para trabajar
con seguridad.
USA and Canada. Do not install this machine in a hallway or exit route that does not
have 1.12 m (44 inches) of space additional to the normal space requirements in front of
the machine. To conform with fire regulations this additional 1.12 m (44 inches) of space
is needed in front of the machine in hallway and exit routes.
DANGER: tats-Unis et Canada. Si cette machine est installe dans un couloir ou une
voie de sortie, 1,12 m (44 pouces) d'espace supplmentaire l'espace normal doit tre
disponible devant la machine conformment aux normes de scurit d'incendie.
AVVERTENZA: N/A
WARNING
Mandatory safety warning. This procedure must be performed by 2 people. The module
is heavy.
DANGER: Avertissement obligatoire. Cette procdure doit tre effectue par 2 personnes. Le module est trs lourd.
AVVERTENZA: Avviso di sicurezza obbligatorio. A causa della pesantezza del modulo,
questa procedura deve essere eseguita da due persone.
VORSICHT: Verbindliche Sicherheitsvorschrift - dieser Vorgang muss von zwei Personen ausgefhrt werden, da das Modul sehr schwer ist.
AVISO: Aviso de seguridad obligatorio. Este procedimiento debe ejecutarse entre dos
personas. El mdulo pesa mucho.
VORSICHT: N/A
AVISO: Estados Unidos y Canad. No instale esta mquina en un corredor o ruta de salida que no tenga 1.12 m (44 pulgadas) de ancho delante de la mquina, sin incluir el
espacio que ocupe la mquina. Este espacio adicional de 1.12 m (44 pulgadas) delante
de la mquina en corredores y rutas de salida es necesario para cumplir los requisitos
de las normas sobre incendios.
WARNING
Use safe handling procedures when removing the module, GP 16. The module is heavy.
DANGER: Conformez-vous aux procdures de manipulation de scurit pour le retrait
du module. Reportez-vous GP 16. Le module est lourd.
AVVERTENZA: Utilizzare procedure di gestione sicure durante la rimozione del modulo.
Vedere GP 16. Il modulo pesante.
WARNING
Take care not to topple the LCSS. The LCSS is unstable when undocked from the
machine. Do not show the customer how to undock the LCSS.
DANGER: Attention ne pas faire tomber la trieuse/agrafeuse petite capacit. Elle n'est
pas stable lorsqu'elle est dtache de la machine. Ne pas montrer au client comment
dtacher la trieuse/agrafeuse.
AVVERTENZA: fare attenzione a non destabilizzare il modulo della pinzatrice/impilatore
da 2000 fogli. Quando sganciato dalla macchina, il modulo instabile: non mostrare al
cliente come sganciarlo
VORSICHT: Stapler nicht umstoen. Nach Trennung des Staplers vom Document Centre
ist dieser sehr instabil
AVISO: Tenga cuidado de que no se caiga el apilador/grapadora de baja capacidad.
Cuando no est acoplada a la mquina es inestable. No le muestre al cliente como desacoplar el apilador/grapadora de baja capacidad.
VORSICHT: Verwenden Sie sichere Vorgehensweisen zum Entfernen des Moduls. Siehe
auch GP 16. Das Modul ist sehr schwer.
AVISO: Utilice los procedimientos de seguridad cuando elimine el mdulo. Consulte el
GP 16. El mdulo es pesado.
Heat Warnings
WARNING
Do not touch the ink reservoir while it is hot.
DANGER: Ne pas toucher au rservoir d'encre tant qu'il est chaud.
AVVERTENZA: non toccare il serbatoio di inchiostro quando caldo.
VORSICHT: Den Tintenbehlter erst anfassen, wenn er abgekhlt ist.
AVISO: No toque el depsito de tinta mientras ste est caliente.
WARNING
WARNING
Take care not to topple Tray 5. Tray 5 is unstable when undocked from the machine. Do
Take care during this procedure. Motors will become hot during normal operation.
February 2013
xiii
Introduction
Translated Warnings
DANGER: Excuter cette procdure avec prcaution. Les moteurs peuvent devenir trs
chauds en fonctionnement normal.
booklet maker while the machine is powered on. The crease blade mechanism activates
quickly and with great force.
AVVERTENZA: procedere con cautela durante questa procedura. I motori si riscaldano

molto durante il funzionamento.
DANGER: Ne pas s'approcher du mchanisme de la lame de pliage lors d'une activit

proximit de la plieuse/brocheuse pendant que la machine est sous tension. Ce mcanisme s'active rapidement et avec force.
VORSICHT: Bei diesem Vorgang vorsichtig vorgehen, da Motoren im Normalbetrieb hei

werden knnen.
AVISO: Tenga cuidado al efectuar este procedimiento. Los motores alcanzan altas temperaturas durante su funcionamiento normal.
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. The drum will become hot during normal operation.
DANGER: Faites attention pendant cette procdure. Dans des conditions normales de
fonctionnement, le tambour devient chaud.
AVVERTENZA: Prestare attenzione durante questa procedura. Il tamburo diventa caldo
durante il normale funzionamento.
VORSICHT: Die Trommel wird im Normalbetrieb hei.
AVISO: Tome precauciones durante el procedimiento. El cilindro tend una temperatura
elevada durante el funcionamiento normal.
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. The registration/preheat assembly will become hot
during normal operation.
DANGER: Excuter cette procdure avec prcaution. Le module de cadrage/prchauffage peut devenir trs chaud en fonctionnement normal.
AVVERTENZA: procedere con cautela durante questa procedura. Il complessivo di registrazione/preriscaldamento raggiunge alte temperature durante il funzionamento.
VORSICHT: Bei diesem Vorgang vorsichtig vorgehen, da das Ausrichtungsmodul/
Vorheizaggregat im Normalbetrieb hei wird.
AVISO: Tenga cuidado al realizar este procedimiento, ya que el conjunto de registro/precalentamiento alcanza una elevada temperatura durante su funcionamiento normal.
AVVERTENZA: Quando la macchina accesa, tenersi a debita distanza dalla lama di piegatura mentre si opera in prossimit della stazione libretto. Il meccanismo della lama di
piegatura si attiva con velocit e forza notevoli.
VORSICHT: Wenn bei eingeschaltetem Gert nahe am Booklet Maker gearbeitet wird,
von der Schneidevorrichtung fernhalten. Die Schneidevorrichtung wird schnell und mit
viel Druck ausgelst.
AVISO: Mantngase apartado del mecanismo de la cuchilla hendedora cuando trabaje
junto al realizador de folletos si la mquina est encendida. Dicho mecanismo se activa
de forma rpida y con mucha fuerza.
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. Sharp edges may be present that can cause injury.
DANGER: Excuter cette procdure avec prcaution. La prsence de bords tranchants
peut entraner des blessures.
AVVERTENZA: procedere con cautela durante questa procedura. Possono essere presenti oggetti con bordi taglienti pericolosi.
VORSICHT: Bei diesem Vorgang vorsichtig vorgehen, damit keine Verletzungen durch
die scharfen Kanten entstehen.
AVISO: Tenga cuidado al efectuar este procedimiento. Puede haber bordes afilados que
podran producir lesiones.
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. The stripper blade is very sharp and can cause injury.
DANGER: Effectuez cette procdure avec prcaution. La lame du doigt dcolleur est
trs tranchante et peut tre source de blessures.
AVVERTENZA: Fare attenzione durante questa procedura. La lama del separatore
molto tagliente e pu causare lesioni personali.
Mechanical Warnings
WARNING
Do not remove the DADH while the DADH is lowered. In the lowered position the counterbalance springs are compressed and can cause injury when released.
DANGER: Ne pas retirer le CAD alors qu'il est en position basse. Dans cette position, les
ressorts compensateurs sont compresss et peuvent entraner des blessures s'ils se
relchent.
VORSICHT: Bei diesem Vorgang vorsichtig vorgehen. Die Abstreifklinge ist sehr scharf
und es besteht Verletzungsgefahr.
AVISO: Tenga cuidado durante este procedimiento. El conjunto de dedos de despegue
es muy filudo y puede producir lesiones.
AVVERTENZA: non rimuovere l'alimentatore automatico documenti quando

abbassato. In questa posizione, le molle del contrappeso sono compresse e possono
causare lesioni al rilascio.
VORSICHT: Vorlageneinzug nicht in abgesenkter Position entfernen. Bei abgesenktem
Vorlageneinzug sind die Ausgleichsfedern zusammengedrckt und knnen bei Freigabe Verletzungen verursachen.
AVISO: No quite el alimentador de documentos automtico si est bajado. Cuando est
bajado, los resortes de contrapeso estn comprimidos y pueden causar lesiones al
soltarse.
WARNING
Keep away from the crease blade mechanism when working in close proximity to the
Introduction
Translated Warnings
February 2013
xiv
1 Service Call Procedures

SCP 1 Initial Actions........................................................................................................
SCP 2 Call Actions ..........................................................................................................
SCP 3 Fault Analysis.......................................................................................................
SCP 4 Subsystem Maintenance......................................................................................
SCP 5 Final Actions ........................................................................................................
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-7
1-8
February 2013
1-1
Service Call Procedures
February 2013
1-2
SCP 1 Initial Actions
SCP 2 Call Actions
Use Service Call Procedures to find a problem with the machine.
Use SCP 2 Call Actions during a service call.
Always use SCP 1 Initial Actions to collect information on the machine performance. Do not
skip Initial Actions.
Procedure
1.
If this is the first service call to this machine perform the following actions:
a.
Also refer to GP 33 Machine Features.
Check the machine configuration with the customer.

Refer to dC131 Read / Write to check the following:
Procedure
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
1.
If the reason for the call is an oil spill from the machine, go to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.
2.
Ask the operator to describe or demonstrate the problem.

NOTE: If the machine is password protected, login into Service Copy Mode, refer to GP 1
Service Mode.
3.
If the problem is the result of an incorrect action by the operator, refer the operator to the
user documentation.
4.
Check the steps that follow:
Machine speed, refer to NVM ID 616-003. If incorrect a pre-serialized SIM is

required, obtain through normal channels.
Product identifier, refer to NVM ID 616-052. If necessary, correct within the

NVM location.
Service plan, refer to NVM ID 606-269. If necessary, correct in dC136 or

dC103.
b.
Check that all the required hardware and software is installed and enabled.
c.
Check that the machine tray settings are correct.
d.
Mark off the hardware options, software options or Tags installed on the Tag matrix
cards.
e.
Enter the machine information and the customer information in the service log book.
a.
The power lead is connected to the wall outlet and to the machine.
2.
b.
Documents are not loaded in the DADH or on the document glass.
3.
Review any copy, print and fax samples.
The paper is loaded correctly.
4.
If the paper in the trays does not match the paper specified on the UI, change the
paper or the specification to match.
Make sure the user access settings are correct. If necessary, refer to the user documentation.
5.
To prevent the deletion of the soft machine settings, perform an NVM save from service
mode on the UI using dC361 NVM Save and Restore in the maintenance routines.
c.
d.
All paper trays are closed.
e.
All covers are closed or installed.
6.
f.
If a telephone line is installed, make sure that the line is connected between the
machine and the wall jack.
g.
If a telephone line is installed, make sure that the customer telephone line is functioning.
h.
That there is sufficient supply of ink sticks.
i.
If the problem is media related. Check the relevant area of paper path for scraps of
media or sheets not easily visible to a customer
5.
Check the machine service log book for previous actions that relate to this call.
6.
Go to SCP 2 Call Actions.
Check and record the total print count.
If necessary perform GP 17 Network Clone Procedure.

NOTE: The clone file must be taken whenever the customer changes the network controller setting or the system software is changed. Advise the administrator to perform this procedure at a regular interval.
7.
Before switching off the machine or clearing the memory, check for a customer job in the
memory.
8.
Go to SCP 3 Fault Analysis.
February 2013
1-3
SCP 1, SCP 2
SCP 3 Fault Analysis

Use SCP 3 Fault Analysis to identify a fault.
Procedure
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the customers network before performing tasks that do not
need network access. Isolating the machine will prevent remote diagnostic access, GP
47.
If an error message or fault code appears, go to the relevant RAP. If necessary refer to OF 4
Status Codes and Messages RAP.
Figure 1 Splash screen
Check the fault history. Refer to GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files. If necessary, go to the relevant RAP.
Check if a Service Code is displayed on the Machine Information tab on the user interface,
refer to OF 12 Service Codes RAP. If necessary, perform OF 12 Service Codes RAP.
Power Up Problems
Sleep Mode Problems
User Interface Problems
Messages
Image Quality Problems
DADH Problems
Paper Supply and Paper Feed Problems
OCT Problems
LCSS Problems
HVF, HVF BM, Inserter and Tri-Folder Problems
Fax Problems
Other Problems
Additional Information
Go to the OF 3 Unresponsive Machine RAP if the machine has the faults that follow:
The machine is silent.
There is no information on the user interface.
There is no LED illumination on the user interface.
If the user interface is not illuminated or fails to respond correctly, go to OF 2 UI Touch

Screen Failure RAP.
If the user interface is illuminated, but there is no information, go to the 02-321-00 XEIP
Browser Dead RAP.
If the UI is offset, corrupted or has a problem selecting features, refer to GP 32 User Interface Panel Diagnostics, check panel calibration and the UI functions.
If a message is displayed, but not a fault code, go to OF 4 Status Code and Message
RAP.
Image Quality Problems
Go to the IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
DADH Problems
Go to the OF 3 Unresponsive Machine RAP if the machine has any of the faults that follow:
Messages
Power Up Problems
If the machine fails to enter or exit sleep mode, go to the OF 7 Sleep Mode RAP.
User Interface Problems
If a fault code is not displayed use the machine in all modes until the fault is found. Use the list
that follows to find the correct procedure for the machine fault. When the fault is cleared, go to
SCP 4 Subsystem Maintenance, then SCP 5 Final Actions.
Sleep Mode Problems
To check for Power on Self Test (POST) errors. Refer to OF 16 Post Error RAP.
If the UI displays The machine is not available or the machine does not come to a Ready
to scan your job state. Go to the OF 5 Boot Up Failure RAP.
The machine will not power up.
If the DADH does not detect the documents in the DADH input tray, go to 05B DADH Document Sensor Failure RAP.
If the DADH has a fault, but not a fault code, go to the 05A DADH Other Faults RAP.
If the DADH has detected a document of the wrong size. Perform the procedures that follow:
There is no information on the user interface.
62A Scanning Document Size RAP.
There is no LED illumination on the user interface.
05-257-00 Unknown Document Size RAP.
All the panel lights are on, the UI touch screen is illuminated and the machine then
powers off.
The UI touch screen repeatedly cycles back to the install wizard screen.
If the UI display stops on the splash screen, Figure 1, go to OF 16 POST Error RAP.
SCP 3
Paper Supply and Paper Feed Problems
For the paper supply faults that do not have a fault code, perform the relevant procedures
that follow:
February 2013
1-4
71A Tray 1 Empty RAP.
71B Tray 1 Wrong Size Paper RAP.
72A Tray 2 Empty RAP.
12K-171 HVF Initialization Failure RAP.
12L-171 Tri-Folder Not Detected RAP.
12J-171 Inserter Paper Sensing and +5V Supply RAP.
73A Tray 3 Out Of Paper RAP.
12N-171 Chad Bin Present and Bin Full RAP.
74A Bypass Tray RAP.
12M-171 Buffer Clamp RAP.
75B Tray 5 Empty RAP
If the machine produces a multifeed, go to the OF 8 Multifeed RAP.
If a booklet is not stapled or folded correctly go to:
ADJ 12.6-171 Booklet Compiling Position.
OCT Problems
ADJ 12.7-171 Booklet Crease Position.
ADJ 12.8-171 Booklet Staple Position.
If the prints adhere to each other in the OCT, check the static brush at the exit rolls PL
10.15 Item 5.
LCSS Problems
If the machine has an LCSS fault, but not a fault code, perform the relevant procedures
that follow:
If the tri-folder paper fold is not in the correct position, perform ADJ 12.2-171 Tri-Folder
Paper Settings.
Fax Problems
For Fax problems with no fault code, perform the relevant procedures that follow:
12A-110 Pause to Unload (PTU) Fault RAP.
20A Fax Entry RAP.
12B-110 Bin 1 Overload RAP.
20B Unable To Send A Fax RAP.
12C-110 LCSS Initialization Failure RAP.
20C Unable To Send A Fax To Some Machines RAP.
12D-110 LCSS Power Distribution RAP.
20D Unable To Receive A Fax RAP.
12E-110 LCSS Paper Entry RAP.
20E Fax Will Not Print RAP.
12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch Settings RAP.
20F Fax Tab Not Available RAP.
12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP.
20G Fax Module Checkout RAP.
12H-110 Copy Damage in the LCSS RAP.
20H Fax Problems on Digital Networks RAP.
12J-110 Mis-Registration in Stapled Sets and Non-Stapled Sets RAP.
12K-110 LCSS Poor Stacking RAP.
Ink leak. Go to the 93B Ink Leak Checkout RAP.
12L-110 Stapling Prime Failure RAP.
12M-110Staple Head Operation Failure RAP.
The ink level gauges on the UI do not correlate with the number of ink sticks in the ink
loader. Go to the OF 9 Ink Stick Count Mismatch.
12N-110 Chad Bin Present and Bin Full RAP.
The key plate is in the incorrect position and preventing the loading of the ink sticks. Go to
the OF 11 Unable to Load Ink Sticks.
Other Problems
If the punched holes are out of position, perform ADJ 12.3-110 Hole Punch Position.
If the machine has the problems that follow, go to the 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch
Settings RAP:
Intermittent failure. Go to the OF 10 Intermittent Failure RAP.
Machine noise. Go to the OF 1 Unusual Noise RAP.
False jam clearance messages.
Hot machine. Go to the OF 6 Fans and Air Systems RAP.
Communication errors between the LCSS and the machine.
Convenience stapler faults. Go to the OF 13 Convenience Stapler RAP.
Machine odour. Go to the OF 6 Fans and Air Systems RAP.
If the staples of a stapled set are not correct, go to the 12L-110 Stapling Prime Failure
RAP.
HVF, HVF BM, Inserter and Tri-Folder Problems
Check the fault history, GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files.
Xerox extensible interface platform faults. Go to the OF 14 Xerox Extensible Interface

Platform RAP.
If the machine has a fault in the HVF or HVF BM, but with no fault code, perform the relevant procedures that follow:
Xerox secure access faults. Go to the OF 15 Xerox Secure Access RAP.
12A-171 HVF BM Power Distribution RAP.
Network problems, go to the 16A Network Error Entry RAP.
12B-171 HVF BM to Machine Communication Interface and BM Present RAP.
If the foreign device is not detected, go to the 03A Foreign Device PWB Fault RAP.
12C-171 HVF BM Bin 2 Failure RAP.
Failure of wireless printing. Go to the 16D Wireless Connectivity RAP.
12D-171 Booklet Quality RAP.
Additional Information
12E-171 Copy Damage in the HVF BM RAP.
If necessary, refer to the following general procedures and information:
12F-171 Mis-Registration in Stapled and Unstapled Sets RAP.
GP 1 Service Mode
12G-171 HVF BM Poor Stacking RAP.
GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files
12H-171 Pause To Unload (PTU) RAP.
GP 3 Service Information
February 2013
1-5
SCP 3
GP 6 Marking Unit Maintenance Positions
GP 8 Special Tools and Consumables
GP 9 User Interface Service Menu Map
GP 10 How to Check a Motor
GP 11 How to Check a Sensor
GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch
GP 13 How to Check a Switch
GP 14 How to Switch Off the Machine or Switch On the Machine
GP 16 How to Safely Lift or Move Heavy Modules
GP 18 Machine Lubrication
GP 19 Machine SIM Card Matrix
GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications
GP 21 Installation Space Requirements
GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements
GP 23 Environmental Data
GP 24 Hardware Kit Contents
GP 25 First Copy / Print Out Time and Power On / Off Time
GP 26 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
GP 27 Cleaning Procedure
GP 28 Marking Unit Assembly Wiring Harnesses
GP 29 Component Locations
GP 30 How to Mask Jets / Jet Substitution
GP 31 How to Open and Close the Stripper Gate
GP 32 User Interface Panel Diagnostics
GP 34 Service Plan
GP 36 How to Unlock the Cleaning Unit
GP 38 How to Set the Date and Time
GP 39 How to Enable HTTP
GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations
GP 41 How to Configure the PWS to Ping a Device
GP 42 How to Set the IP Address of the PWS
GP 43 How to Change Ethernet Speed
GP 45 How to Check the Battery on the NVM Module PWB
GP 46 How to Identify the Different Printhead Connectors
SCP 3
February 2013
1-6
SCP 4 Subsystem Maintenance
Table 2 HFSI cleaning
Use SCP 4 Subsystem Maintenance to maintain the machine.
Procedure
WARNING
Go to the correct procedure:
HFSI
Lubrication
How to Clean the Machine
The
recommended
cleaning
Parts list
frequency
reference
Item
Component
Description
Drum fan
shroud
Drum fan
shroud
All sheets fed after last

HFSI reset
500k feeds
PL 94.20 Item 5

HFSI reset
400k feeds
PL 10.10 Item 9
Upper JL baf- Upper baffle

fle
Lubrication
To lubricate the machine, refer to ADJ 4.1 Machine Lubrication.
HFSI
How to Clean the Machine
The High Frequency Service Items are shown in Table 1 HFSI replacement and Table 2 HFSI
cleaning. To change HFSI settings, refer to dC135 CRU / HFSI Status.
To clean the machine, refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.
Table 1 HFSI replacement

The
recommended
life for new
component
Parts list
installation
reference
Item
Component
Description
Tray 1 feed
Feed rolls
All sheets fed from tray 1 600k feeds

after last HFSI reset
PL 81.25 Item 6
PL 81.25 Item 9
PL 81.25 Item 11
Tray 2 feed
Feed rolls

PL 81.26 Item 6
PL 81.26 Item 9
PL 81.26 Item 11
Tray 3 feed
Feed rolls

PL 81.30 Item 6
PL 81.30 Item 9
PL 81.30 Item 11
600k feeds
PL 74.10 Item 7
PL 74.10 Item 13
PL 74.10 Item 14
Bypass tray 4 Bypass tray

feeds
feed rolls
The total bypass tray 4

feeds after the last HFSI
reset
Tray 5 feeds

PL 81.45 Item 2
Inserter tray 6 Inserter feed

rolls
Total Inserter feeds
80k feeds
PL 12.310 Item 1
Transfix strip- Transfix stripper

per assembly

HFSI reset
460k feeds
PL 10.20 Item 14
Tray 5 feed
rolls
February 2013
1-7
SCP 4
SCP 5 Final Actions

Use SCP 5 Final Actions to complete the service call.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1.
If necessary, perform an NVM Restore from service mode on the UI using dC361 NVM
Save and Restore.
2.
If necessary, perform GP 17 Network Clone Procedure.

NOTE: The clone file will need to be taken whenever the customer changes the network
controller setting or after the system software is changed.
3.
If necessary, go to SCP 4 Subsystem Maintenance.
4.
Clear all fault counters, go to GP 1.
5.
Check that the Service Code on the Machine Information tab displays 0. If any number
other than 0 is displayed go to the OF 12 Service Codes RAP.
6.
Empty waste tray and reset waste tray count in the Call Closeout window in service mode.
7.
Operate the machine in all modes.
8.
Make copies and / or prints from all trays and check the registration and copy quality.
9.
Make a proof copy or print of a customer document.
10. If some of the customers selections were changed, return the selections to the customer
settings.
11. Mark off the hardware options, software options or Tags installed on the Tag matrix cards.
12. Perform an NVM Save from service mode on the UI using dC361 NVM Save and Restore
in the maintenance routines.
13. If some changes were made to the configuration or options were added, print the configuration report. Store the configuration report with the machine log book. Discard the previous version of the configuration report.
14. Make sure the machine and service area are clean. Refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedures.
15. If necessary, provide the customer with training.
16. At the completion of the service call, report the value of the usage counters.
SCP 5
February 2013
1-8
2 Status Indicator RAPs

Chain 1 - Standby Power
01-505-00 Mid Left Door Open RAP ...............................................................................
01-506-00 Upper Left Door Open RAP ...........................................................................
01-510-00 Front Door Open RAP....................................................................................
01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload RAP .....................................
01-530-00 +/- 50V Short Circuit and Overload RAP .......................................................
01-535-00 Power Interlock Failed: No Heater Requests RAP ........................................
01-540-00, 01-544-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Failure RAP ..................................................
01-542-00, 01-546-00 50V Failure RAP..........................................................................
01A AC Power Distribution RAP .....................................................................................
01B +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP ...............................................................................
01C +3.3V Distribution RAP............................................................................................
01D +5V Distribution RAP ...............................................................................................
01E +12V Distribution RAP .............................................................................................
01F -12V Distribution RAP ..............................................................................................
01G +17V Distribution RAP.............................................................................................
01H +24V Distribution RAP.............................................................................................
01J +50V Distribution RAP..............................................................................................
01K -50V Distribution RAP ..............................................................................................
01L 0V Distribution RAP..................................................................................................
Chain 5 - DADH
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-20
2-22
2-23
2-26
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-34
2-35
2-37
Chain 2 - User Interface

02-302-00, 02-306-00, 02-308-00 Flash Failure RAP .....................................................
02-315-00 Service Registry Bad Data RAP ....................................................................
02-316-00, 02-317-00 SRS Error RAP............................................................................
02-320-00 Data Time Out Error RAP ..............................................................................
02-321-00 XEIP Browser Dead RAP...............................................................................
02-380-00, 02-381-00 UI Communication Fault RAP......................................................
02-390-00 Configurable Services RAP ...........................................................................
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-40
2-41
2-41
2-42
Chain 3 - Machine Run Control

03-316-00 CCM Cannot Communicate with IOT RAP ....................................................
2-43
03-325-00 System Detects the Machine Clock Failed to Increment During Power On RAP 2-43
03-331-00, 03-332-00 Main Controller and Network Controller on the SBC PWB Cannot
Communicate RAP..........................................................................................................
2-44
03-338-00 The Main Controller on the SBC Has Reset RAP..........................................
2-44
03-346-00 Unable To Communicate With UI RAP ..........................................................
2-45
03-347-00 Main Controller PWB Cannot Communicate with UI PWB RAP ....................
2-45
03-355-00 CCM POST Failure Detected RAP ................................................................
2-46
03-362-00 CCS Power Fault RAP...................................................................................
2-46
03-397-00 System Configuration Recovery Attempt RAP...............................................
2-47
03-398-00, 03-399-00 SIM Card Fault RAP ....................................................................
2-47
03-401-00, 03-403-00 Fax Not Detected RAP ................................................................
2-48
03-417-00 Incompatible Fax Software RAP ....................................................................
2-48
03-777-00 Power Loss Detected RAP ............................................................................
2-49
03-788-00 CCS Runtime Could Not Enter Power Saver Mode S3 RAP .........................
2-49
03-790-00 Timezone Cannot Be Set RAP ......................................................................
2-50
03A Foreign Device PWB Fault RAP ..............................................................................
2-50
05-250-00, 05-251-00 DADH Checksum Error RAP .......................................................

05-252-00 DADH Stepper Controller Communications Error..........................................
05-253-00, 05-254-00 DADH Communications Error RAP .............................................
05-255-00 Late Pre Scan Message RAP ........................................................................
05-256-00 Eject Count Error RAP ...................................................................................
05-257-00 Unknown Document Size RAP ......................................................................
05-258-00, 05-307-00 DADH Cover Interlock Open RAP ...............................................
05-259-00, 05-260-00 DADH Active Line or Standby Error RAP ....................................
05-300-00 DADH Open RAP...........................................................................................
05-310-00 Document Too Short RAP .............................................................................
05-330-00, 05-331-00 DADH Feed Sensor Failure RAP ................................................
05-335-00 DADH TAR Sensor Failure RAP....................................................................
05-340-00 DADH Pre Registration Sensor Failure RAP .................................................
05-345-00, 05-346-00 DADH Exit Sensor Failure RAP...................................................
05-350-00, 05-352-00 DADH CVT Sensor Failure RAP .................................................
05A DADH Other Faults RAP..........................................................................................
05B DADH Document Sensor Failure RAP.....................................................................
05C DADH Motor Failure RAP ........................................................................................
05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP..............................................................................
05E Damaged Documents RAP......................................................................................
05F Platen Down Failure RAP ........................................................................................
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-53
2-55
2-56
2-56
2-57
2-57
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-63
2-64
2-64
2-65
2-65
2-66
2-67
Chain 10 - Transfix and Copy/Print Transportation

10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00, 10-148-00
Post Transfix Jam RAP ...................................................................................................
10-140-00 to 10-146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00 Exit Jam RAP....................................
10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP ...................................................................
10-545-00 Drum Position Error for Transfix RAP ............................................................
10-550-00 Drum Stall During Transfix RAP ....................................................................
10-555-00 Post Transfix Motor (M4) Over Current RAP .................................................
10-560-00, 10-565-00 Transfix Motor Over Current RAP ...............................................
10-570-00 Stripper Solenoid Over Current RAP .............................................................
10-571-00, 10-572-00 Stripper Latch Sensor Error RAP ................................................
2-69
2-71
2-72
2-74
2-75
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-78
Chain 12-65 - Offset Catch Tray

12-701-00-65 Offset Catch Tray Failure RAP .................................................................
2-79
Chain 12-110 - LCSS

12-024-00-110, 12-025-00-110 Paddle Roll Failure RAP ...............................................
12-043-00-110, 12-046-00-110 Hole Punch Operation Failure RAP ..............................
12-127-00-110 Sheet Late to Hole Punch RAP ..............................................................
12-151-00-110, 12-152-00-110 Sheet Late to Bin 1 RAP ...............................................
12-171-00-110, 12-172-00-110 Paper Exiting to Bin 0 RAP ...........................................
12-199-00-110 Unexpected Sheet at Finisher Entry RAP...............................................
12-310-00-110, 12-312-00-110, 12-313-00-110 Interlocks RAP.....................................
12-340-00-110, 12-341-00-110, 12-342-00-110 Ejector Movement Failure RAP ...........
12-371-00-110, 12-372-00-110, 12-378-00-110 Staple Head Unit Movement Failure RAP
February 2013
2-1
2-81
2-82
2-83
2-83
2-85
2-86
2-87
2-88
2-89
Status Indicator RAPs
12-392-00-110, 12-393-00-110, 12-394-00-110 Front Tamper Move Failure RAP ........

12-396-00-110, 12-397-00-110, 12-398-00-110, Rear Tamper Move Failure RAP ........
12-462-00-110 Bin 1 Movement Failure RAP .................................................................
12-492-00-110 to 12-494-00-110 IME to Finisher Failure RAP ......................................
12-762-00-110, 12-764-00-110, 12-765-00-110 IME to Finisher
Communication Failure RAP ...........................................................................................
12-950-00 IME Delivers Sheet Too Early RAP ...............................................................
12A-110 Pause To Unload (PTU) Fault RAP..................................................................
12B-110 Bin 1 Overload RAP .........................................................................................
12C-110 LCSS Initialization Failure RAP ........................................................................
12D-110 LCSS Power Distribution RAP .........................................................................
12E-110 LCSS Paper Entry RAP ....................................................................................
12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch Settings RAP ..............................................................
12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP................................................................................
12H-110 Copy Damage in the LCSS RAP ......................................................................
12J-110 Mis-Registration in Stapled Sets and Non-Stapled Sets RAP ..........................
12K-110 LCSS Poor Stacking RAP ................................................................................
12L-110 Stapling Prime Failure RAP ..............................................................................
12M-110 Staple Head Operation Failure RAP ................................................................
12N-110 Chad Bin Present and Bin Full RAP .................................................................
2-90
2-91
2-93
2-94
2-95
2-95
2-96
2-96
2-97
2-98
2-99
2-100
2-100
2-102
2-102
2-103
2-103
2-105
2-106
Chain 12-171 - HVF

12-024-00-171, 12-025-00-171 HVF Paddle Roller Position RAP .................................. 2-107
12-044-00-171 to 12-047-00-171 HVF Punch Head Position RAP ................................. 2-108
12-056-00-171, 12-057-00-171 Inserter Bottom Plate RAP ............................................ 2-109
12-061-00-171, 12-416-00-171 HVF BM Crease Blade Fault RAP ................................ 2-109
12-062-00-171 HVF BM Crease Roll Motor Failure RAP................................................ 2-110
12-063-00-171, 12-411-00-171 HVF BM Staple Unit 1 Failure RAP .............................. 2-111
12-065-00-171, 12-383-00-171 HVF BM Backstop Motor Fault RAP ............................. 2-112
12-066-00-171, 12-384-00-171, 12-419-00-171, 12-420-00-171 HVF BM
Tamper Fault RAP .......................................................................................................... 2-113
12-083-00-171, 12-440-00-171 to 12-444-00-171 HVF Paper Pusher Fault RAP .......... 2-113
12-113-00-171, 12-114-00-171, 12-190-00-171, 12-192-00-171 HVF BM Entry RAP ... 2-114
12-125-00-171, 12-126-00-171 HVF Entry Sensor RAP................................................. 2-116
12-141-00-171, 12-142-00-171 HVF Buffer Path Sensor RAP ....................................... 2-117
12-151-171, 12-152-171 HVF Compiler Exit Sensor RAP .............................................. 2-118
12-157-00-171, 12-158-00-171 HVF Buffer Position Sensor RAP.................................. 2-119
12-166-00-171 HVF BM Compiler Exit Jam RAP ........................................................... 2-120
12-171-00-171, 12-172-00-171 HVF Top Tray Exit Sensor Fault RAP........................... 2-121
12-181-00-171, 12-182-00-171 HVF BM Exit Jam RAP ................................................. 2-122
12-183-00-171, 12-184-00-171 HVF BM Paper Jam RAP.............................................. 2-125
12-185-00-171 to 12-187-00-171 Tri-Folder Exit Sensor and Assist Sensor RAP.......... 2-127
12-191-00-171, 12-193-00-171, 12-194-00-171, 12-196-00-171 Inserter Paper Jam RAP2-130
12-198-00-171, 12-199-00-171 HVF Paper Jam RAP .................................................... 2-132
12-288-00-171, 12-289-00-171 HVF Nip Split RAP ........................................................ 2-133
12-310-00-171, 12-312-00-171, 12-313-00-171 HVF Docking and Interlocks RAP ....... 2-134
12-316-00-171, 12-319-00-171 Inserter Interlocks RAP ................................................. 2-135
12-317-00-171, 12-318-00-171 Tri-folder Interlocks RAP............................................... 2-136
12-367-00-171, 12-368-00-171, 12-380-00-171 HVF Punch Unit Paper Edge Detect RAP2-137
12-369-00-171 to 12-377-00-171 HVF Stapler Position and Priming RAP ..................... 2-139
12-392-00-171 to 12-395-00-171 HVF Front Tamper Fault RAP.................................... 2-142
12-396-00-171 to 12-399-00-171 HVF Rear Tamper Fault RAP .................................... 2-143
12-403-00-171, 12-413-00-171, 12-414-00-171 HVF BM Staple Head 2 and

Stapler Module RAP........................................................................................................
12-415-00-171 HVF BM Crease Roll Gate Home RAP ..................................................
12-417-00-171, 12-418-00-171 HVF BM Flapper RAP ...................................................
12-450-00-171, 12-456-00-171 to 12-459-00-171 HVF Ejector Module RAP .................
12-451-00-171 to 12-455-00-171 HVF Ejector Roll and Lower Paddle Fault RAP .........
12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171 HVF Bin 1 Position RAP ............................................
12-463-00-171, 12-464-00-171 HVF BM +24V Failure RAP...........................................
12-465-00-171 to 12-468-00-171 Paddle Unit Position RAP ..........................................
12-473-00-171 to 12-478-00-171 Support Finger Position RAP .....................................
12-479-00-171 Inserter Paper Length Fault RAP ...........................................................
12-492-00-171 to 12-494-00-171 IME To Finisher Failure RAP .....................................
12-762-00-171, 12-764-00-171, 12-765-00-171 IME To Finisher
Communication Failure RAP ...........................................................................................
12A-171 HVF Power Distribution RAP ............................................................................
12B-171 HVF BM to Machine Communications Interface and BM Present RAP ...........
12C-171 HVF BM Bin 2 Failure RAP ..............................................................................
12D-171 Booklet Quality RAP .........................................................................................
12E-171 Copy Damage in the HVF BM RAP ..................................................................
12F-171 Mis-Registration in Stapled and Unstapled Sets RAP ......................................
12G-171 HVF BM Poor Stacking RAP ............................................................................
12H-171 Pause to Unload (PTU) RAP ............................................................................
12J-171 Inserter Paper Sensing and +5V Supply RAP...................................................
12K-171 HVF Initialization Failure RAP ..........................................................................
12L-171 Tri-Folder Not Detected RAP ............................................................................
12M-171 Buffer Path Clamp Problems RAP ...................................................................
12N-171 Chad Bin Present and Bin Full RAP .................................................................
2-144
2-145
2-146
2-147
2-148
2-151
2-153
2-154
2-155
2-157
2-159
2-159
2-160
2-162
2-163
2-164
2-168
2-168
2-169
2-169
2-170
2-172
2-173
2-173
2-174
Chain 16 - Network Controller

16-000-00 to 16-000-26 Cannot Create RPC With ENS RAP ........................................
16-001-09 to 16-001-90 Unable to Synchronize Startup RAP ........................................
16-002-09 to 16-002-19 Unable to Register as RPC RAP ..............................................
16-003-09 to 16-003-90 Too Many IPC Handles RAP ....................................................
16-004-14 to 16-005-92 RPC Failure to Register RAP ...................................................
16-006-09, 16-006-19 Cannot Register for Events RAP .................................................
16-007-92 to 16-010-99 Invalid IPC / RPC Data RAP ....................................................
16-013-14, 16-014-14 Copier Synchronization Error RAP ..............................................
16-015-14, 16-015-19 Data Store Variable Not Set RAP................................................
16-016-14, 16-016-19 Data Store Initialization Failed RAP ............................................
16-017-19 to 16-021-26 Send Event Failure / Could Not Get Host Name RAP..............
16-021-46 Unable to Get Host Name RAP .....................................................................
16-023-09, 16-023-26 RPC Call Failure RAP .................................................................
16-026-09 to 16-026-92 Memory Allocation Error RAP ..................................................
16-027-90 Unable to Obtain Queue ID RAP ...................................................................
16-028-09, 16-028-90 Unable to Complete RPC Call / Invalid Range RAP ...................
16-030-19 Unable to Obtain Client RAP .........................................................................
16-031-09 Invalid Event Notification RAP .......................................................................
16-032-19, 16-039-00 NVM Connection Failure / Pthread Create Error RAP ................
16-040-92 Semaphore Fault RAP ...................................................................................
16-048-09 Unable to Set Binding RAP............................................................................
16-048-14, 16-048-90 Cannot Set ESS Client Binding RAP...........................................
16-048-99 Unable to Set Client Binding RAP .................................................................
February 2013
2-2
2-177
2-177
2-178
2-178
2-179
2-179
2-180
2-180
2-181
2-181
2-182
2-182
2-183
2-183
2-184
2-184
2-185
2-185
2-186
2-186
2-187
2-187
2-188
16-150-09 Cannot Send Registration Event RAP ...........................................................

16-150-14 Unable to Obtain RPC Transport RAP...........................................................
16-150-19 Unable to Sync Peer RAP..............................................................................
16-150-26 Fault Service Failed to Write Log RAP ..........................................................
16-150-90 Invalid IPC Request Destination RAP............................................................
16-150-92 Consumer Interface Fault RAP ......................................................................
16-151-09 to 16-151-19 Invalid IPC Command / SNMP Reg Failure RAP .....................
16-151-26 Fault Service Failed to Get a Log RAP ..........................................................
16-151-90 Environment Variable Failure RAP ................................................................
16-152-09 Internal IPC Failure RAP................................................................................
16-152-14 Empty Internal Event Failure RAP .................................................................
16-152-19 Unable to Send Request to SESS RAP.........................................................
16-152-26 Unable to Send Request to SESS RAP.........................................................
16-153-09 Unable to Obtain IPC Queue RAP.................................................................
16-153-14 Unable to Initialize Event List RAP ................................................................
16-153-19 NVM Save Failure RAP .................................................................................
16-154-09 ESS Registration Configuration Error RAP....................................................
16-154-14 Cannot Create Internal Event Queue RAP ....................................................
16-154-19 NVM Read Failure RAP .................................................................................
16-155-19 ESS Failed to Boot from Alternate Disk RAP.................................................
16-156-19 Service Run Loop Failed RAP .......................................................................
16-160-09 ESS Reg Service Process Death RAP ..........................................................
16-161-09, 16-164-09 Cannot Send Reg Event / List Access Failure RAP ....................
16-162-09 to 16-163-09 Cannot Send Reg Event / ESS Services Failure RAP .............
16-429-00, 16-431-00 Unable to Write to Data Store / Get System Time RAP ..............
16-432-00 Unknown Scheduler Received RAP ..............................................................
16-433-00 RPC Call Failed RAP .....................................................................................
16-434-00 Unable to Change Scheduler RAP ................................................................
16-600-07 to 16-600-67 Cannot Create RPC Connection RAP ......................................
16-601-26 to 16-601-46 Queue Setup / System Control Failed / Invalid UI Info RAP.....
16-601-47 Diagnostics Service Failed IPC Queue Setup RAP .......................................
16-601-66, 16-601-67 Unable to Do Start Up Sync RAP ................................................
16-601-68 Unable to Start Up and Sync RAP .................................................................
16-601-105 Unable Synchronize At Start Up RAP..........................................................
16-602-07 to 16-602-105 RPC Service Registration Failure RAP ..................................
16-603-11, 16-603-28 Replace Handler Call Failed RAP ...............................................
16-603-46 to 16-603-67 Too Many IPC Handlers RAP...................................................
16-603-68, 16-604-105 Replace Handler Call Failed / Data Store Variable Not Set RAP
16-603-105, 16-604-14 RPC Call Failure to NC Reg Service RAP.................................
16-604-38 to 16-605-07 Could Not Register With Reg Service RAP ..............................
16-605-14, 16-605-105 Unable to Unregister As RPC Service / RPC Call Failure RAP.
16-605-26 Fault Service Timed Out Registering RAP.....................................................
16-605-35 to 16-605-67 RPC Call Failure to ESS RAP ..................................................
16-606-07 Cannot Register For Events RAP ..................................................................
16-606-35 to 16-606-99 Cannot Register For Events RAP.............................................
16-606-105 OS Problem RAP .........................................................................................
16-607-19 to 16-608-14 Invalid RPC Data / Unable to Free Resources RAP.................
16-608-26 Fault Service Failed to Unbind RAP ..............................................................
16-608-28 to 16-608-67 Unable to Free IPC Resources RAP ........................................
16-608-105 Unable Build UI SVC Obtain Client Failed RAP...........................................
16-609-07 Unknown Message Received RAP ................................................................
16-609-19, 16-609-105 Too Many IPC Handlers / Invalid RPC Data RAP .....................
2-188
2-189
2-189
2-190
2-190
2-191
2-191
2-192
2-192
2-193
2-193
2-194
2-194
2-195
2-195
2-196
2-196
2-197
2-197
2-198
2-198
2-199
2-199
2-200
2-200
2-201
2-201
2-202
2-202
2-203
2-203
2-204
2-204
2-205
2-205
2-206
2-206
2-207
2-207
2-208
2-208
2-209
2-209
2-210
2-210
2-211
2-211
2-212
2-212
2-213
2-213
2-214
16-609-26 Fault Service Encountered Error RAP ........................................................... 2-214

16-609-46 to 16-609-92 Invalid IPC Data Received RAP ............................................... 2-215
16-610-00, 16-610-07 IPC Send Failure RAP................................................................. 2-215
16-610-09 Cannot Send IPC Message RAP ................................................................... 2-216
16-610-11 to 16-610-90 Unable to Send IPC Message RAP.......................................... 2-216
16-610-92 Failure to Send Queue Status RAP ............................................................... 2-217
16-610-99 Unable to Send IPC Message RAP ............................................................... 2-217
16-611-07, 16-611-38 Client Removal Failed RAP ......................................................... 2-218
16-611-19 to 16-611-47 Unable to Remove RPC Connection RAP................................ 2-218
16-611-66 to 16-611-99 Unable to Remove RPC Connection RAP................................ 2-219
16-612-09 to 16-612-68 Unable to Do Shutdown Sync RAP .......................................... 2-219
16-613-09 to 16-614-19 DC Sync / Comms Error RAP................................................... 2-220
16-614-47 Invalid Software Upgrade RAP ...................................................................... 2-220
16-615-35, 16-615-46 Data Store Variable Not Set RAP................................................ 2-221
16-615-47 Multiple Software Upgrade File RAP ............................................................. 2-221
16-615-66 Data Store Variable Not Set RAP .................................................................. 2-222
16-615-67, 16-615-90, 16-616-38, 16-616-46 SESS Data Store Environmental
Variable RAP................................................................................................................... 2-222
16-616-47 IPC Message Failure RAP ............................................................................. 2-223
16-616-67 Submission Of E-mail OR IFax Job Failed RAP ............................................ 2-223
16-617-19 RPC Information Corrupt RAP ....................................................................... 2-224
16-617-47 TAR Extraction Failure RAP .......................................................................... 2-224
16-618-47 DLM SPI Extraction Failure RAP ................................................................... 2-225
16-619-14 to 16-619-93 Cannot Unregister From Registration Service RAP ................. 2-225
16-620-07 to 16-620-90 Registration Service Failed RAP .............................................. 2-226
16-620-92, 16-620-93, 16-620-99 Unable to Register With Network Controller
Registration Service RAP................................................................................................ 2-226
16-621-00, 16-621-07, 16-621-11, 16-621-28, 16-621-35, 16-621-38, 16-621-47, 16-621-66,
16-621-67, 16-621-93, 16-621-99 Unable to Obtain Host Name RAP............................ 2-227
16-622-07, 16-622-09, 16-622-11, 16-622-14, 16-622-19, 16-622-26, 16-622-28, 16-622-35,
16-622-38, 16-622-46, 16-622-47 Corrupt RPC Table RAP ........................................... 2-227
16-622-66, 16-622-67, 16-622-68 Unable to Register RPC Service RAP ...................... 2-228
16-623-35, 16-623-47, 16-624-46 ENS Service Failed to Respond In Time RAP .......... 2-228
16-625-35, 16-625-46, 16-625-66, 16-625-67, 16-625-90 Invalid IPC Type RAP........... 2-229
16-626-00, 16-626-11, 16-626-38, 16-626-47, 16-626-67 Memory Leak RAP ............... 2-229
16-628-07, 16-628-35, 16-628-46, 16-628-66, 16-628-67 Range Environment Variable RAP 2230
16-628-09, 16-629-11, 16-629-26, 16-629-46, 16-629-67, 16-629-68, 16-629-92,
16-629-93 No Acknowledgment For RPC Message RAP ............................................... 2-230
16-630-09, 16-630-26, 16-630-35, 16-630-38, 16-630-46, 16-630-47, 16-630-66,
16-630-67, 16-630-68, 16-630-99 Corrupt RPC RAP ..................................................... 2-231
16-631-19, 16-631-46, 16-631-19, 16-633-19, 16-634-46, 16-635-07, 16-635-35,
16-635-46, 16-635-99-16-636-35, 16-636-99 XDR Data Error RAP ............................... 2-231
16-637-11, 16-637-26, 16-637-38, 16-637-47, 16-637-66, 16-637-67, 16-637-93,
16-637-95 File Error RAP................................................................................................ 2-232
16-638-66, 16-638-67, 16-639-38, 16-639-46, 16-640-28, 16-640-35, 16-640-46,
16-641-00, 16-641-26, 16-641-46 O/S Failure RAP........................................................ 2-232
16-642-46, 16-642-47, 16-643-19, 16-643-26, 16-643-47, 16-644-11 Unable To
Close File RAP ................................................................................................................ 2-233
16-644-11, 16-644-26, 16-644-46, 16-644-47, 16-644-66, 16-644-67, 16-645-11, 16-645-26,
16-645-46, 16-645-47, 16-645-66, 16-645-67 Unable To Read From File RAP ............. 2-233
February 2013
2-3
16-646-26, 16-647-19, 16-647-26, 16-649-35, 16-650-35, 16-650-99

Invalid Service Attribute RAP .......................................................................................... 2-234
16-651-19, 16-651-35, 16-651-99, 16-652-38, 16-652-99, 16-653-38, 16-654-38,
16-654-99, 16-655-38, 16-656-38 Register Failure RAP ................................................ 2-234
16-658-07, 16-659-11, 16-659-28, 16-659-93, 16-659-95, 16-660-95, 16-660-99,
16-661-95 Parser Utility Open Failure RAP .................................................................... 2-235
16-662-11, 16-662-28, 16-662-93, 16-662-95, 16-663-28, 16-663-93, 16-663-95
Parser Utility Template Failed To Parse RAP ................................................................. 2-235
16-664-11, 16-664-28, 16-664-93, 16-664-95, 16-665-95
Parser Utility Closing Failure RAP .................................................................................. 2-236
16-666-11, 16-666-28, 16-666-93, 16-666-95 Parser Utility Invocation Failed RAP....... 2-236
16-667-11, 16-667-28, 16-667-95, 16-668-47 Parser Utility Set Status Failure RAP ..... 2-237
16-668-93, 16-668-95 Unable To Determine Local File Statistics RAP .......................... 2-237
16-669-28, 16-669-93, 16-669-95, 16-670-00 Unable To Write Job Template RAP ...... 2-238
16-670-11, 16-670-28, 16-670-47, 16-670-93, 16-671-00, 16-671-47
Unable To Decode Template File RAP ........................................................................... 2-238
16-617-93, 16-671-95, 16-672-09, 16-672-95, 16-673-95, 16-674-00, 16-674-09,
16-675-00, 16-6700-00, 16-700-35 File Error RAP ......................................................... 2-239
16-674-09, 16-675-00, 16-700-00, 16-701-00, 16-701-99, 16-702-00, 16-702-95,
16-707-00, 16-709-00 XSA Database Failure RAP ........................................................ 2-239
16-710-00, 16-710-35, 16-716-00, 16-728-00, 16-730-00, 16-730-28, 16-730-35, 16-730-66,
16-740-19, 16-750-07, 16-750-09, 16-750-11 Unable To Create Client Handle RAP .... 2-240
16-742-19 Hard Disk ODIO Failure RAP ........................................................................ 2-240
16-750-14, 16-750-19, 16-750-26, 16-750-35, 16-750-38, 16-750-46, 16-750-47,
16-750-66, 16-750-67, 16-750-90 Invalid Request RAP ................................................. 2-241
16-750-92, 16-750-93, 16-750-95, 16-751-00, 16-751-07, 16-751-09, 16-751-11,
16-751-14, 16-751-19, 16-751-26 Database Error RAP ................................................. 2-241
16-751-28, 16-751-35, 16-751-38, 16-751-46, 16-751-66, 16-751-67, 16-751-92, 1
6-751-93 Unknown Attribute RAP ................................................................................... 2-242
16-752-00, 16-753-00 File Cabinet Application Registration Error RAP ......................... 2-242
16-752-07, 16-752-09, 16-752-14, 16-752-19, 16-752-26, 16-752-28, 16-752-35,
16-752-46, 16-752-47 Invalid File Details RAP ............................................................... 2-243
16-752-66, 16-752-67, 16-752-92, 16-752-93, 16-752-95, 16-753-09, 16-753-14,
16-753-19, 16-753-26, 16-753-28 Scan to FAX Registration Error RAP ........................ 2-243
16-753-35, 16-753-46, 16-753-47, 16-753-66, 16-753-67, 16-753-90, 16-753-92,
16-753-93, 16-753-95, 16-753-09 Data Store Read Failure RAP................................... 2-244
16-754-14, 16-754-19, 16-754-26, 16-754-28, 16-754-35, 16-754-46, 16-754-47,
16-754-66, 16-754-67, 16-754-68 OS Error RAP ........................................................... 2-244
16-754-90, 16-754-92, 16-754-92, 16-754-93, 16-754-95, 16-755-00, 16-755-09,
16-755-14, 16-755-19, 16-755-26, 16-755-28 Fault Service Error RAP ......................... 2-245
16-755-35, 16-755-46, 16-755-47, 16-755-67, 16-755-90, 16-755-93, 16-755-99,
16-756-09, 16-756-14 Request Error RAP...................................................................... 2-245
16-756-35, 16-756-46, 16-756-47, 16-756-66, 16-756-67, 16-756-93, 16-757-09,
16-757-14, 16-757-19, 16-757-26 NVM Corrupt RAP..................................................... 2-246
16-757-35, 16-757-46, 16-757-47, 16-757-66, 16-757-67, 16-757-93, 16-758-09,
16-758-14, 16-758-19, 16-758-26 Unable to Write NVM Value RAP.............................. 2-246
16-758-35, 16-758-46, 16-758-47, 16-758-66, 16-758-67, 16-758-93, 16-759-09,
16-759-14, 16-759-19, 16-759-26 Service Run Loop Failed RAP .................................. 2-247
16-759-46, 16-759-47, 16-759-66, 16-759-67, 16-759-93, 16-760-09, 16-760-14,
16-760-19, 16-760-26, 16-760-46 Fail to Enable Process RAP...................................... 2-247
16-760-47, 16-760-67, 16-760-68, 16-760-93, 16-760-99, 16-761-09, 16-761-14,
16-761-19, 16-761-26, 16-761-46 File Error RAP ........................................................... 2-248
16-761-47 to 16-769-95 Other Network Faults 1 RAP ....................................................

16-810-00 to 16-16-819-47 Other Network Faults 6 RAP ...............................................
16-850-47 to 16-859-47 Other Network Faults 10 RAP ..................................................
16-891-00, 16-892-00 Edge Server Auto Registration Failed RAP.................................
16-985-19, 16-986-19 Network Scanning Application Registration Error RAP ...............
16-987-19, 16-988-19 Server Fax Application Registration Error RAP...........................
16-989-19 Disk Encryption Operation Failed RAP ..........................................................
16A Network Error Entry RAP .........................................................................................
16B FTP or SMB Unable to Connect to Remote Server RAP.........................................
16C Remote Directory Lock Failed RAP .........................................................................
16D Wireless Connectivity RAP ......................................................................................
2-248
2-249
2-250
2-251
2-252
2-253
2-253
2-254
2-254
2-255
2-255
2-256
2-256
2-257
2-257
2-258
2-258
2-259
2-259
2-260
2-260
2-261
2-261
2-262
2-262
2-263
2-263
2-264
2-264
2-266
2-267
Chain 19 - Image Processing

19-300-00 to 19-310-00 Image Disk (HDD) Failure RAP ................................................
19-401-00, 19-402-00 Stress Out of Memory RAP .........................................................
19-403-00 EPC Out of Memory RAP ..............................................................................
19-409-00 Job Integrity Failure RAP ...............................................................................
19-410-00 to 19-410-13 Image Structure Failure RAP ...................................................
19-750-00 EPC Memory Change Detected RAP ............................................................
19-752-00 Image Rotation Detected RAP.......................................................................
19-754-00 Image Disk Change RAP ...............................................................................
2-269
2-269
2-270
2-270
2-271
2-271
2-272
2-272
Chain 20 - Fax
20-302-00, 20-303-00 Fax Reset Failure RAP................................................................
20-305-00 Fax System Low Memory Unrecoverable RAP .............................................
20-320-00 Fax Fault Not Cleared by Reset RAP ............................................................
20-322-00 Non-Volatile Device not Installed RAP ..........................................................
20-323-00, 20-324-00 Fax System Memory Low RAP ...................................................
20-331-00, 20-338-00, 20-339-00, 20-341-00, 20-345-00 Fax Network Line 1 Fault RAP
20-332-00, 20-340-00 Fax Network Line 2 Fault RAP ....................................................
20-342-00 Fax File Integrity Fault RAP ...........................................................................
20-701-00 Fax Phone Book Download Failed RAP ........................................................
February 2013
2-4
2-273
2-273
2-274
2-274
2-275
2-275
2-276
2-276
2-277
20-710-00, 20-711-00 Image Overwrite Error RAP.........................................................

20A Fax Entry RAP .........................................................................................................
20B Unable To Send A Fax RAP ....................................................................................
20C Unable To Send A Fax To Some Machines RAP ....................................................
20D Unable To Receive A Fax RAP ...............................................................................
20E Fax Will Not Print RAP.............................................................................................
20F Fax Tab Not Available RAP .....................................................................................
20G Fax Module Checkout..............................................................................................
20H Fax Problems on Digital Networks RAP ..................................................................
2-277
2-278
2-278
2-279
2-280
2-281
2-281
2-282
2-282
Chain 22 - System Errors

22-300-05 to 22-309-04 Other Network Faults 24 RAP .................................................. 2-283
22-310-04 to 22-318-04 Other Network Faults 25 RAP .................................................. 2-283
22-315-04 One or More Modules Did Not Respond RAP ............................................... 2-284
22-319-04 IOT Integrity Problem While Printing a Job RAP ........................................... 2-284
22-321-00 SM Failed to Remove Scan to File RAP ........................................................ 2-285
22-321-04 Proposal Response Time Out Error RAP ...................................................... 2-285
22-325-01 Cleaning Unit Extended Life Mode Entered RAP .......................................... 2-286
22-328-00 Incomplete System Information RAP ............................................................. 2-286
22-330-00 Page Pack PIN Entry Locked RAP ................................................................ 2-287
22-330-01 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between UI and Copy Controller RAP............ 2-287
22-330-02 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between Copy Controller and ESS Print
Service RAP .................................................................................................................... 2-288
22-330-03 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between Copy Controller and Scan to File
Service RAP .................................................................................................................... 2-288
22-330-04 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between Copy Controller and Scan to Fax
Service RAP .................................................................................................................... 2-289
22-330-05 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between Queue Utility and DC Job Service RAP2-289
22-330-06 ESS Scan to Distribution Service not Responding to List Jobs RPC Call RAP 2-290
22-350-01, 22-350-02 Software Detects Non-Valid Xerox SOK RAP ............................. 2-290
22-351-01 to 22-351-03 SOK Write Failure RAP ............................................................ 2-291
22-352-00 Serial Number Missing RAP .......................................................................... 2-291
22-360-00 Service Plan Mismatch RAP .......................................................................... 2-292
22-371-00, 22-372-00 Fax Application Registration Error RAP ...................................... 2-292
22-701-04 Module Completion Message Received RAP ................................................ 2-293
22-720-00 Service Registry Bad Data/Corrupted RAP ................................................... 2-293
22-721-00 No Response From The Service Registry RAP ............................................. 2-294
22-750-04 to 22-755-17 Configuration Mismatch RAP ................................................... 2-294
Chain 42 - Fans and Cooling

42-504-00 Enclosure Fan Over Current RAP..................................................................
42-505-00 Abatement Fan Over Current RAP ................................................................
2-295
2-295
Chain 62 - Scanner
62-277-00 Scanner to DADH Communication Fail Entry RAP........................................
62-310-00 Scanner to Single Board Controller Communication Fail RAP ......................
62-450-00 to 62-472-00 Calibration Failure RAP ............................................................
62-473-00 UART RX Wrap Error RAP ............................................................................
62-474-00, 62-475-00 Stepper Speed/Reset Error RAP.................................................
62-476-00 Scan Carriage Home Sensor RAP.................................................................
62-477-00 to 62-481-00 Timing Errors RAP....................................................................
62-484-00 Apps Code Not Present RAP.........................................................................
2-297
2-297
2-298
2-299
2-299
2-300
2-301
2-301
62-485-00 +12V Supply Error RAP .................................................................................

62-486-00 +24V Supply Error RAP .................................................................................
62-487-00 System Phase Lock Loop (PLL) Error RAP ...................................................
62A Scanning Document Size RAP ................................................................................
62B LED Exposure Lamp Failure RAP ...........................................................................
2-302
2-302
2-303
2-303
2-304
Chain 70 to 75 - Paper Supply

70-312-00 Tray 1 to Tray 3 Communication Failure RAP ...............................................
70-305-00, 70-325-00 Lower Left Door Open RAP.........................................................
71-101-00 to 71-161-00 Tray 1 Mis-Feed Jam RAP .......................................................
71-215-00 Tray 1 Elevate Up Failure RAP......................................................................
71-320-00 Tray 1 Open In Run RAP ...............................................................................
71A Tray 1 Empty RAP ...................................................................................................
71B Tray 1 Wrong Size Paper RAP ................................................................................
72-215-00 Tray 2 Elevate Up Failure RAP......................................................................
72-320-00 Tray 2 Open in Run RAP ...............................................................................
72A Tray 2 Empty RAP ...................................................................................................
72B Tray 2 Wrong Size Paper RAP ................................................................................
73-212-00 Tray 3 Elevate Encoder Failure RAP .............................................................
73-215-00 Tray 3 Hoist Failure RAP ...............................................................................
73-320-00 Tray 3 Open in Run RAP ...............................................................................
73-325-00 Feeder HT Drawer Open in Run RAP............................................................
73A Tray 3 Out of Paper RAP .........................................................................................
74-101-00, 74-160-00 to 74-161-00 Bypass Tray 4 Mis-Feed RAP................................
74-120-00 Bypass Tray 4 Guides Move in Run RAP ......................................................
74-214-00 Bypass Tray 4 Nudger Failure RAP...............................................................
74A Bypass Tray 4 Size Sensing Problems RAP ...........................................................
75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Mis-Feed RAP.............................................
75-212-00, 75-215-00 Tray 5 Elevate Up Failure RAP ...................................................
75-213-00, 75-216-00 Tray 5 Elevate Down Failure RAP...............................................
75-312-00 IME to Tray 5 Communication Failure RAP ...................................................
75-320-00 Tray 5 Opened In Run RAP ...........................................................................
75-325-00 Tray 5 Undocked In Run RAP........................................................................
75A Tray 5 Door Open During Run RAP.........................................................................
75B Tray 5 Empty RAP ...................................................................................................
2-305
2-305
2-306
2-307
2-308
2-308
2-309
2-310
2-311
2-312
2-312
2-313
2-314
2-315
2-316
2-317
2-317
2-318
2-318
2-319
2-319
2-320
2-321
2-322
2-323
2-324
2-325
2-325
2-326
2-326
Chain 82 to 89 - Paper Transport

82-110-00 to 82-114-00, 82-152-00, 82-157-00 to 82-159-00, 82-164-00 to 82-166-00
Media Path Sensor (5) RAP ............................................................................................
82-125-00 to 82-133-00, 82-153-00, 82-160-00, 82-162-00, 82-163-00 Confirm
Sensor (16) RAP .............................................................................................................
82-132-00, 82-155-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Duplex Mode RAP ..................................
82-133-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Time out from Tray 5 RAP.........................................
82-140-00, 82-142-00 Media Path Sheet Too Wide or Narrow RAP ..............................
82-141-00, 82-147-00, 82-148-00, 82-154-00 Media Path Sensor 14 RAP....................
82-145-00, 82-146-00, 82-150-00, 82-151-00, 82-156-00
Media Path Sensor 14 Time Out in Duplex Mode RAP...................................................
82-161-00 Early Confirm Timeout RAP...........................................................................
82-500-00, 82-501-00 Vertical Transport Motor M2 Failure RAP....................................
82-502-00, 82-503-00 Horizontal Transport Motor M6 Failure RAP ...............................
February 2013
2-5
2-327
2-328
2-329
2-330
2-331
2-332
2-334
2-336
2-337
2-338
82-507-00, 82-508-00 Nip C and Nip D Release Solenoid Over Current RAP ...............
82-510-00 Trailer Slowdown Calculation Fail RAP .........................................................
83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-00
Media Path Sensor 13 Duplex Mode RAP ......................................................................
83-112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00, 83-119-00
Media Path Sensor 13 Invert Mode RAP ........................................................................
83-120-00 to 83-125-00 Media Path Sensor 17 RAP .....................................................
83-500-00 Output Transport Motor M5 Failure RAP .......................................................
83-504-00 HPP Diverter Solenoid Failure RAP ..............................................................
83-506-00 Nip D Release Solenoid Failure RAP ............................................................
88-500-00 to 88-502-00, 88-512-00 Preheat Thermal Error RAP ...................................
88-508-00 Registration / Preheat Air Pump Incorrect Current RAP ................................
89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00 Media Path Sensor 10 Failure RAP .......................
89-125-00 to 89-128-00, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 Media Path Sensor 20 Failure RAP.....
89-500-00, 89-502-00 Registration Motor Over Current RAP .........................................
89-504-00 Registration Sensor Over Current RAP .........................................................
89-520-00 Home Sensor Timeout RAP ..........................................................................
89-531-00 to 89-545-00 Registration Process Error RAP...............................................
89-550-00, 89-551-00 Media Registration Error RAP .....................................................
89-555-00 Media Registration Out of Range RAP ..........................................................
89-561-00 Media Registration Parameters Reset RAP ..................................................
89-562-00 Incorrect Media RAP......................................................................................
89-564-00 Calibration Image Error RAP .........................................................................
89-565-00, 89-566-00 Scan Measurement Was Out Of Range RAP .............................
89-567-00 Calibration Scan Detected Floating Point Exception RAP .............................
2-339
2-339
2-340
2-342
2-344
2-345
2-346
2-346
2-347
2-348
2-349
2-350
2-351
2-352
2-353
2-355
2-355
2-356
2-356
2-357
2-357
2-358
2-358
Chain 91 - Marking Unit

91-500-00, 91-600-00 Initial Position Error RAP.............................................................
91-501-00 to 91-502-00 Image Timing Error RAP ..........................................................
91-503-00 Print Image Data Did Not Arrive From the Controller in Time RAP ...............
91-504-00, 91-505-00 Printhead Stitch Motor Over Current RAP...................................
91-506-00 to 91-509-00 Roll Motor Over Current RAP ...................................................
91-510-00, 91-511-00 X Axis Motor Over Current RAP ..................................................
91-512-00, 91-605-00 Marking Unit Motor Short RAP ....................................................
91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00, 91-583-00 IOD Drive Error RAP ..............................
91-515-00 Vertical Wiper Motor Over Current RAP ........................................................
91-516-00 Low Pressure Assist Over Current RAP ........................................................
91-517-00 Marking Unit Air Pump Over Current RAP.....................................................
91-519-00 to 91-522-00, 91-655-00 to 91-658-00, 91-683-00 to 91-690-00,
91-807 to 91-811-00 Printhead NVM Read or Write Error RAP......................................
91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00 to 91-803-00,
91-856-00 to 91-859-00 Printhead Thermal Error RAP ..................................................
91-559-00 Marking Unit Components Out of Position RAP ............................................
91-560-00 Carriage Selection Time Out RAP .................................................................
91-562-00, 91-563-00 Upper Carriage Error RAP ..........................................................
91-565-00, 91-566-00 Upper Printhead Restraint Error RAP .........................................
91-567-00 to 91-568-00 Lower Carriage Error RAP .......................................................
91-570-00, 91-571-00 Lower Printhead Restraint Error RAP .........................................
91-572-00, 91-573-00, 91-575-00 Wiper Vertical Error RAP ..........................................
91-574-00, 91-576-00, 91-598-00 Wiper Horizontal Error RAP ......................................
91-586-00 Quad Wave Amplifier Short RAP...................................................................
91-587-00, 91-588-00 Quad Wave Amplifier Thermal Error RAP ...................................
2-359
2-359
2-360
2-360
2-361
2-362
2-363
2-364
2-365
2-366
2-366
2-367
2-368
2-369
2-371
2-372
2-373
2-374
2-375
2-376
2-377
2-378
2-379
91-607-00, 91-608-00 Printhead to Drum Error RAP ......................................................

91-610-00 to 91-613-00 Printhead Wave Amp Calibration Error RAP ............................
91-614-00 to 91-617-00 Printhead Data Error RAP ........................................................
91-630-00 IOD Scan Process Failure RAP .....................................................................
91-631-00 IOD Dark Adjust Failure RAP ........................................................................
91-636-00 IOD in Degraded Mode RAP .........................................................................
91-637-00 Drum Runout Calibration Needed RAP .........................................................
91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error RAP...............................................................
91-660-00 to 91-663-00, 91-820-00 to 91-823-00 Printhead Link Error RAP .................
91-669-00 Excessive Skew RAP ....................................................................................
91-670-00 Scanned Image Out of Sequence RAP .........................................................
91-671-00 Fiducials Not Found RAP ..............................................................................
91-672-00 Missing Jets RAP...........................................................................................
91-673-00 Floating Point Error RAP ...............................................................................
91-674-00 to 91-677-00, 91-812-00 to 91-815-00 Printhead Adjustment Error RAP ......
91-678-00 to 91-681-00, 91-816-00 to 91-819-00, 91-961-00 to 91-964-00,
Printhead Convergence Adjustment Error RAP ..............................................................
91-682-00 Ambient Thermistor Error RAP ......................................................................
91-698-00, 91-699-00, 91-706-00, 91-712-00, 91-718-00, 91-720-00, 91-729-00,
91-730-00, 91-732-00 IOD Excessive Head Misalignment RAP.....................................
91-721-00, 91-722-00, 91-735-00, 91-736-00 IOD Contamination Error RAP................
91-725-00 to 91-728-00, 91-945-00 to 91-948-00, IOD Bad Target Scan RAP ..............
91-824-00 PQM Insufficient Ink RAP ..............................................................................
91-825-00 PQM Insufficient Paper RAP .........................................................................
91-826-00 PQM Insufficient Jets RAP ............................................................................
91-827-00 PQM Align Needed RAP................................................................................
91-828-00 PQM Y-Dot Position Needed RAP.................................................................
91-829-00 PQM Drum Runout Needed RAP ..................................................................
91-830-00 PQM Uniformity Needed RAP .......................................................................
91-831-00 PQM Uniformity Reset Needed RAP .............................................................
91-832-00 PQM Empty Waste Tray RAP........................................................................
91-833-00 PQM Cleaning Pages Needed RAP ..............................................................
91-834-00 PQM Tool Not Usable RAP ...........................................................................
91-835-00 PQM Tool Manually Disabled RAP ................................................................
91-836-00 PQM System Busy RAP ................................................................................
91-837-00 PQM Align Calibration Needed RAP .............................................................
91-838-00 PQM: CLD Baseline Needed RAP.................................................................
91-842-00 to 91-845-00 Printhead Nvram Read or Decode Error RAP ..........................
91-848-00 to 91-851-00 IOD Align Calibration Error RAP ..............................................
91-852-00 to 91-854-00 Y Dot Position SVD Calculation RAP .......................................
91-855-00 Thermal Safety Circuit Failure Undetected RAP ...........................................
91-929-00 to 91-940-00 IOD Jet Position Noise RAP .....................................................
91-941-00 to 91-944-00 PQM Too Many Purges RAP ...................................................
91-949-00 to 91-952-00 Closed Loop Drift Baseline RAP ..............................................
91-953-00 to 91-960-00, 91-965-00 to 91-968-00 Closed Loop Drift Measurement RAP
91-970-00 to 91-981-00 Printhead Reservoir and Jet Stack Heater Unstable RAP .......
91A Printhead Communications RAP .............................................................................
2-379
2-380
2-381
2-381
2-382
2-383
2-385
2-386
2-387
2-388
2-388
2-389
2-389
2-390
2-390
2-391
2-392
2-393
2-395
2-396
2-397
2-397
2-398
2-398
2-399
2-399
2-400
2-400
2-401
2-401
2-402
2-402
2-403
2-403
2-404
2-404
2-405
2-405
2-406
2-406
2-407
2-408
2-409
2-410
2-411
Chain 92 - IOT Process Control

92-501-00 to 92-504-00, 92-519-00 Serial Link Safety Transient RAP...........................
92-505-00, 92-506-00 Marking Unit Communications Error RAP ...................................
92-510-00, 92-511-00 Marking Unit Ink Delivery Communications Error RAP ...............
February 2013
2-6
2-413
2-413
2-414
92-515-00, 92-516-00 Drum Driver Communications Error RAP ....................................

92-520-00 Power Supply Communications Error RAP....................................................
92-525-00, 92-526-00 Media Path Communications Error RAP .....................................
92-530-00 3TM Serial Link Error RAP.............................................................................
92-531-00 Paper Tray Module Communications Error RAP ...........................................
92-535-00, 92-536-00 Tray 5 Communications Error RAP .............................................
92-541-00 ADC Interrupt Storm Fault RAP .....................................................................
92-542-00 PS Interrupt Storm Fault RAP........................................................................
92-543-00, 92-544-00 MU Interrupt Storm Faults RAP...................................................
92-545-00 DD Interrupt Storm Fault RAP .......................................................................
92-546-00, 92-547-00 MP Interrupt Storm Faults RAP ...................................................
92-548-00 TTM Interrupt Storm Fault RAP .....................................................................
92-549-00 PFP Interrupt Storm Fault RAP......................................................................
92-551-00 CIS Interrupt Storm Fault RAP.......................................................................
92-550-00, 92-555-00 System Timer Error RAP .............................................................
92-552-00 SBC Interrupt Storm Fault RAP .....................................................................
92-554-00 AC Line Failed RAP .......................................................................................
92-556-00, 92-557-00, 92-558-00, 92-559-00 ECM Failure RAP ...................................
92-560-00, 92-561-00 Marking Unit Firmware Version Mismatch RAP ..........................
92-562-00 Drum Driver Firmware Version Mismatch RAP..............................................
92-563-00 Power Supply Firmware Version Mismatch RAP...........................................
92-564-00 Media Path Firmware Version Mismatch RAP...............................................
92-565-00 3TM Firmware Version Mismatch RAP..........................................................
92-566-00 Tray 5 Firmware Version Mismatch RAP.......................................................
92-567-00 ECM FPGA Version Mismatch RAP ..............................................................
92-568-00 ECM Initialization Error RAP..........................................................................
92-569-00 Image FPGA Version Mismatch RAP ............................................................
92-570-00 Interrupt Storm Fault RAP..............................................................................
92-571-00 Software Error RAP .......................................................................................
92-575-00 ADC Out of Range RAP.................................................................................
92-579-00 CDI Submit Sheet Error RAP.........................................................................
92-581-00 Image Transfer Error RAP .............................................................................
92-583-00 Cold Temperature Boot Time-out RAP ..........................................................
92-585-00 LVDS Contone Terminal Error During Image Transfer RAP..........................
92-586-00 Print Engine Speed Fault RAP.......................................................................
92-598-00, 92-599-00, 92-600-00, 92-610-000 to 92-614-00, IME NVRAM Error RAP..
92-803-00, 92-804-00 DSP2 Overlay Error RAP ............................................................
92-805-00 Fuse A Blown RAP ........................................................................................
92-806-00 Fuse B Blown RAP ........................................................................................
92-807-00 Diagnostic Routine Not Implemented RAP ....................................................
2-414
2-415
2-415
2-416
2-416
2-417
2-417
2-418
2-418
2-419
2-419
2-420
2-420
2-421
2-421
2-422
2-422
2-423
2-423
2-424
2-424
2-425
2-425
2-426
2-426
2-427
2-427
2-428
2-428
2-429
2-429
2-430
2-430
2-431
2-431
2-432
2-432
2-433
2-434
2-434
Chain 93 - Ink Delivery

93-501-00 to 93-516-00 Ink Loader Is Jammed RAP......................................................
93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Thermal Error RAP......................
93-523-00 to 93-526-00, 93-527-00 to 93-530-00, 93-532-00, 93-533-00, 93-957-00
Ink Melt Error RAP ..........................................................................................................
93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt Thermistor Error RAP................
93-535-00 to 93-537-00, 93-958-00 Upper Umbilical Thermal Error RAP ......................
93-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00 Lower Umbilical Thermal Error RAP ......................
93-545-00 to 93-548-00 Ink Melt Conductivity Error RAP ...............................................
93-549-00 to 93-552-00 and 93-557-00 to 93-560-00 Printheads 1 and 3 Printhead
Reservoir Fill Error RAP ..................................................................................................
2-435
2-435
2-436
2-437
2-438
2-439
2-440
2-440

Reservoir Fill Error RAP ..................................................................................................
93-565-00 to 93-599-00 and 93-800-00 to 93-812-00 Printheads 1, 2, 3 & 4 Ink Level
Sense Error RAP.............................................................................................................
93-813-00 to 93-820-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Level Sense Failure RAP ...........................
93-825-00, 93-892-00 Ink Key Plate Motor Over Current RAP .......................................
93-871-00 to 93-874-00 Ink Level Sense Error RAP.......................................................
93-890-00 Marking Unit Air Solenoid Over Current RAP ................................................
93-891-00 Ink Transport Over Current RAP....................................................................
93-901-00 to 93-904-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Fill Failure RAP...........................................
93-909-00 to 93-924-00 Printhead Reservoir Level Failure RAP....................................
93-933-00 to 93-936-00 Head Purge Failure RAP ..........................................................
93-937-00 to 93-940-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Leak Error RAP ..........................................
93A Ink Melt Reservoir Check RAP ................................................................................
93B Ink Leak Checkout RAP...........................................................................................
2-443
2-445
2-446
2-447
2-447
2-448
2-448
2-449
2-449
2-450
2-450
2-451
2-452
Chain 94 - Ink Transfer

94-504-00 Cleaning Unit Reservoir Pressure Low RAP..................................................
94-505-00 Cleaning Unit Reservoir Pressure High RAP.................................................
94-510-00, 94-512-00 Drum Image Initial Position Error RAP ........................................
94-514-00, 94-518-00 Drum Imaging Error RAP.............................................................
94-519-00 Drum Imaging Error RAP ...............................................................................
94-520-00 Cleaning Unit Drive Error RAP.......................................................................
94-522-00 Cleaning Unit Motor Stall RAP.......................................................................
94-524-00 Drum Drive Motor Over Current RAP ............................................................
94-526-00 Drum Drive Stall RAP ....................................................................................
94-527-00, 94-531-00 Cleaning Unit Early Life Over Current RAP.................................
94-528-00, 94-532-00, 94-533-00 Cleaning Unit Over Current RAP ..............................
94-534-00 Drum Drive Belt Slip RAP ..............................................................................
94-535-00 Drum Driver Command Current Error RAP....................................................
94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00, 94-546-00, 94-632-00,
94-633-00 Drum Heat Error RAP ....................................................................................
94-545-00 Drum Runout Calibration Error RAP ..............................................................
94-547-00, 94-555-00 Y-Axis Belt Ratio Error RAP ........................................................
94-548-00 Y-Axis Position Error RAP .............................................................................
94-549-00 Drum Runout Calibration Error RAP ..............................................................
94-551-00, 94-552-00, 94-553-00 Drum Y-Axis Error RAP.............................................
94-558-00, 94-560-00, 94-562-00, 94-564-00, 94-566-00
Cleaning Unit Position Error RAP....................................................................................
94-568-00, 94-570-00, 94-572-00, 94-573-00 Cleaning Unit Data Error RAP ................
94-574-00 Cleaning Unit Sync Error RAP .......................................................................
94-610-00, 94-612-00 Cleaning Unit Error RAP..............................................................
94-611-00 Cleaning Unit Removal Pump Test Fail RAP.................................................
94-615-00 Non Xerox Cleaning Unit Detected RAP........................................................
94-616-00 Cleaning Unit Low Oil Detected RAP.............................................................
94-617-00, 94-618-00 Oil Pump Error RAP ....................................................................
94-619 Cleaning Unit Delivery Line Blocked RAP...........................................................
94-620-00 Drum Fan Stall RAP.......................................................................................
94-621-00 Abatement Fan Stall RAP ..............................................................................
94-622-00 Cleaning Unit Unusable RAP.........................................................................
94-629-00 Extreme Customer Usage RAP .....................................................................
94-631-00 Cleaning Unit Connectivity Failure RAP ........................................................
February 2013
2-7
2-453
2-453
2-454
2-455
2-455
2-456
2-456
2-458
2-458
2-460
2-460
2-461
2-462
2-463
2-464
2-464
2-465
2-465
2-466
2-466
2-467
2-467
2-468
2-468
2-469
2-469
2-470
2-470
2-471
2-471
2-472
2-473
2-473
94-634-00, 94-635-00 DMU Thermistor Failure RAP......................................................

94A Enclosure Fan Error RAP ........................................................................................
94B Drum Drive Control Test Actions RAP .....................................................................
2-474
2-474
2-475
Chain 99 - PEST
99-000-00 to 99-067-00 PEST Error 1 RAP....................................................................
99-081-00 to 99-112-00 PEST Error 2 RAP....................................................................
99-120-00 to 99-140-00 PEST Error 3 RAP....................................................................
99-143-00 to 99-150-00 PEST Error 4 RAP....................................................................
99-180-00 to 99-217-00 PEST Error 5 RAP....................................................................
99-221-00 to 99-244-00 PEST Error 6 RAP....................................................................
99-250-00 to 99-271-00 PEST Error 7 RAP....................................................................
99-272-00 to 99-292-00 PEST Error 8 RAP....................................................................
99-293-00 to 99-312-00 PEST Error 9 RAP....................................................................
99-313-00 to 99-329-00 PEST Error 10 RAP..................................................................
99-330-00 to 99-349-00 PEST Error 11 RAP..................................................................
99-360-00 to 99-382-00 PEST Error 12 RAP..................................................................
99-394-00 to 99-413-00 PEST Error 13 RAP..................................................................
99-414-00 to 99-428-00 PEST Error 14 RAP..................................................................
99-429-00 to 99-443-00 PEST Error 15 RAP..................................................................
99-444-00 to 99-457-00 PEST Error 16 RAP..................................................................
99-460-00 to 99-477-00 PEST Error 17 RAP..................................................................
99-480-00 to 99-497-00 PEST Error 18 RAP..................................................................
99-500-00 to 99-515-00 PEST Error 19 RAP..................................................................
99-516-00 to 99-533-00 PEST Error 20 RAP..................................................................
99-534-00 to 99-548-00 PEST Error 21 RAP..................................................................
99-549-00 to 99-563-00 PEST Error 22 RAP..................................................................
99-564-00 to 99-565-00 PEST Error 23 RAP..................................................................
99-600-00 to 99-605-00 PEST Error 24 RAP..................................................................
99-606-00 to 99-610-00 PEST Error 25 RAP..................................................................
99-611-00 to 99-625-00 PEST Error 26 RAP..................................................................
99-626-00 to 99-640-00 PEST Error 27 RAP..................................................................
99-641-00 to 99-655-00 PEST Error 28 RAP..................................................................
99-656-00 to 99-670-00 PEST Error 29 RAP..................................................................
99-671-00 to 99-685-00 PEST Error 30 RAP..................................................................
99-686-00 to 99-700-00 PEST Error 31 RAP..................................................................
99-701-00 to 99-721-00 PEST Error 32 RAP..................................................................
99-730-00 to 99-742-00 PEST Error 33 RAP..................................................................
99-743-00 to 99-766-00 PEST Error 34 RAP..................................................................
99-767-00 to 99-782-00 PEST Error 35 RAP..................................................................
99-785-00 to 99-802-00 PEST Error 36 RAP..................................................................
99-805-00 to 99-823-00 PEST Error 37 RAP..................................................................
99-824-00 to 99-838-00 PEST Error 38 RAP..................................................................
99-839-00 to 99-871-00 PEST Error 39 RAP..................................................................
99-872-00 to 99-887-00 PEST Error 40 RAP..................................................................
99-890-00 to 99-904-00 PEST Error 41 RAP..................................................................
99-905-00 to 99-921-00 PEST Error 42 RAP..................................................................
99-922-00 to 99-938-00 PEST Error 43 RAP..................................................................
99-939-00 to 99-954-00 PEST Error 44 RAP..................................................................
99-955-00 to 99-962-00 PEST Error 45 RAP..................................................................
99-992-00 PEST Error 46 RAP .......................................................................................
99-996-00 to 99-999-00 PEST Error 47 RAP..................................................................
2-477
2-478
2-479
2-479
2-480
2-481
2-482
2-483
2-484
2-485
2-486
2-487
2-488
2-489
2-490
2-491
2-492
2-494
2-495
2-496
2-497
2-499
2-500
2-500
2-501
2-501
2-502
2-503
2-504
2-505
2-506
2-507
2-507
2-508
2-509
2-510
2-510
2-512
2-513
2-515
2-516
2-518
2-520
2-521
2-523
2-524
2-524
OF - Other Faults
OF 1 Unusual Noise RAP ...............................................................................................
OF 2 UI Touch Screen Failure RAP ................................................................................
OF 3 Unresponsive Machine RAP ..................................................................................
OF 4 Status Codes and Messages RAP .........................................................................
OF 4a Status Codes in Numerical Order ........................................................................
OF 4b Status Messages in Alphabetical Order ...............................................................
OF 5 Boot Up Failure RAP ..............................................................................................
OF 6 Fans and Air Systems RAP....................................................................................
OF 7 Sleep Mode RAP....................................................................................................
OF 8 Multi-feed RAP .......................................................................................................
OF 9 Ink Stick Count Mismatch.......................................................................................
OF 10 Intermittent Failure RAP .......................................................................................
OF 11 Unable to Load Ink Sticks ....................................................................................
OF 12 Service Code RAP ...............................................................................................
OF 13 Convenience Stapler RAP ...................................................................................
OF 14 Extensible Interface Platform RAP .......................................................................
OF 15 Xerox Secure Access RAP ..................................................................................
OF 16 POST Error RAP ..................................................................................................
February 2013
2-8
2-525
2-530
2-531
2-534
2-534
2-572
2-603
2-606
2-606
2-607
2-608
2-609
2-611
2-611
2-614
2-615
2-616
2-618
01-505-00 Mid Left Door Open RAP
01-506-00 Upper Left Door Open RAP
01-505-00 The mid door interlock switch detects that the mid left door is open.
01-506-00 The upper door interlock switch detects that the upper left door is open.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check the actuator on the mid left door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 16. If the actuator is
damaged, install a new mid left door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 16.
Check the actuator on the upper left door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 18. If the actuator is
damaged, install a new upper left door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 18.
Make sure the latch springs on the mid left door are installed correctly. Make sure that the
mid left door closes correctly. If necessary, install a new mid left door assembly, PL 70.30
Item 16.
Make sure the latch springs, PL 70.30 Item 20 on the upper left door are installed correctly. Make sure that the middle left door closes correctly. If necessary, install a new
upper left door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 18.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 01-101 to check the mid door interlock switch, S01-101, PL 82.10 Item 10.
Actuate S01-101. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check S01-101.
References:
Enter dC330 code 01-100 to check the upper door interlock switch, S01-100, PL 82.10 Item
10. Actuate S01-100. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
GP 13 How to Check a Switch.
PJ104, Media Path Driver PWB.
01C +3.3V Distribution RAP.
Mid door interlock switch, PL 82.10 Item 10.
Upper door interlock switch, PL 82.10 Item 10.
Media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5. PL 1.15 PL 1.15 Item 4 01-505-00 01-50600
Media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Check that S01-100 is installed correctly.

February 2013
2-9
01-505-00, 01-506-00
01-510-00 Front Door Open RAP

01-510-00 The front door interlock switch detects that the front door is open.
01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload

RAP
Initial Actions
01-525-00 An over current condition has been detected with the +24V, +12V, -12V or +5V supply.
WARNING
Check the actuator on the front door moulding, PL 81.11 Item 7. If the actuator is damaged, install a new front door assembly, PL 81.11 Item 11.
Make sure the access magnetic catch, PL 81.11 Item 8 is not missing. Make sure that the
front door closes correctly. If necessary, install a new front door assembly, PL 81.11 Item
11.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check the PEST fault history,
dC123. There are hard PEST faults shown.
Y
N
The yellow LED, Figure 1, illuminates within one minute.
Y
N
Perform the short circuit checks that follow:
Enter dC330 code 01-103 to check the front door interlock switch, S01-103, PL 1.15 Item 7.
Actuate S01-103. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
PJ801, Drum Driver PWB.
01B +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP.
Front door interlock switch, PL 1.15 Item 7.
Drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
+24V Short Circuit Check
-12V Short Circuit Check
If no short circuit is found and the supply is still not available, install a new power
supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4. The voltage on PJ902 pin 31 on the Drum driver PWB
is less than +1.5V.
Y
N
Install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.

Perform the RAP(s) given by the hard PEST fault code(s).

Procedure
Switch off the machine, GP 14.
Refer to WD 1.4. Disconnect PJDC1 from the power supply unit and check for a short circuit
between pin 11 of the disconnected PJ and the chassis. The circuit is good.
Y
N
Go to 01H and follow the procedure for the IME controller PWB.
Go to 01H and follow the procedure for the Quad wave amp PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01H and follow the procedure for the drum driver PWB.
With PJDC3 still disconnected from the power supply unit, check for a short circuit between pin
24 of the disconnected PJ and the chassis. The circuit is good.
01-510-00, 01-525-00
February 2013
2-10
N
Go to 01H and follow the procedure for the media path driver PWB.
between pins 17 to chassis and from pin 18 to the chassis with the PJDC4 disconnected. The
circuit is good.
Y
N
Go to 01H and follow the procedure for the power distribution PWB.
No short has been found in the +24V circuits, refer to the fault history for an insight into the
fault area, then go to 01H and check that area.
N
Go to 01F and follow the procedure for the drum driver PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01F and follow the procedure for the media path driver PWB.
No short has been found in the -12V circuits, refer to the fault history for an insight into the fault
area, then go to 01F and check that area.

Procedure

Procedure
Y
N
Go to 01E and follow the procedure for the IME controller PWB.
Go to 01E and follow the procedure for the Quad wave amp PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01E and follow the procedure for the drum driver PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01E and follow the procedure for the media path driver PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01E and follow the procedure for the power distribution PWB.
fault area, then go to 01E and check that area.

Procedure
Y
N
Go to 01F and follow the procedure for the IME controller PWB.
Go to 01F and follow the procedure for the Quad wave amp PWB.

Y
N
Go to 01D and follow the procedure for the IME controller PWB.
Go to 01D and follow the procedure for the Quad wave amp PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01D and follow the procedure for the drum driver PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01D and follow the procedure for the media path driver PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01D and follow the procedure for the power distribution PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01E and follow the procedure for the HDD.
The fault is still active.

Y
N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
February 2013
2-11
01-525-00
01-530-00 +/- 50V Short Circuit and Overload RAP

01-530-00 An over current condition has been detected with the +50V or -50V supply.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check the PEST fault history,
Y
N
The red LED, Figure 1, is illuminated.
Y
N
Perform the short circuit checks that follow:
Power supply unit
If no short circuit is found and the supply is still not available, install a new power
supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Yellow LED
Figure 1 Component location
Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4. The voltage on PJ902 pin 29 on the drum driver PWB
is less than +1.5V.
Y
N
Perform the RAP(s) given by the hard PEST fault code(s).

Procedure
Y
N
Go to 01J and follow the procedure for the IME controller PWB.
Go to 01J and follow the procedure for the Quad wave amp PWB.
Y
N
Go to 01J and follow the procedure for the media path driver PWB.
With PJDC3 still disconnected from the power supply unit, check for a short circuit between
pins 13 and 14 of the disconnected PJ and the chassis. the circuit is good.
Y
N
Go to 01J and follow the procedure for the drum driver PWB.
fault area, then go to 01J and check that area.
01-525-00, 01-530-00
February 2013
2-12
01-535-00 Power Interlock Failed: No Heater Requests RAP

Procedure
Y
N
Go to 01K and follow the procedure for the IME controller PWB.
Go to 01K and follow the procedure for the Quad wave amp PWB.
The fault is still active.
Y
N
01-535-00 The IME power interlock has failed because the AC power manager heater requests
are not being updated.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
Go to WD 9.3 and check the front door interlock switch (S01-103) and PJ801. The voltage at
PJ801 pin 4 on the drum driver PWB changes when the front door interlock switch is
actuated/deactuated.
Y
N
Refer to GP 13, How to Check a Switch. Check the wiring between the interlock switch
and PJ801 and repair the wiring as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. If necessary, install new
components:
Front door interlock switch, (S01-103), PL 1.15 Item 7.
Go to 01A, AC Power Distribution RAP and check for the correct AC supply. If necessary,
install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Power supply unit
Red LED
February 2013
2-13
01-530-00, 01-535-00
01-540-00, 01-544-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Failure RAP

01-540-00 The +24V, +12V, -12V and +5V supplies have shut down unexpectedly.
01-544-00 The IME +24V, +12V, -12V and +5V supplies have failed to switch on.
B
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Check pin 24 of PJ902 on the drum driver PWB. Pin
is short circuit to ground.
Y
N
24
Repair the wiring, REP 1.1.
Procedure
WARNING
Check that the three LEDs on the top of the power supply unit illuminate within one minute of
switch-on, Figure 1. The LEDs illuminate.
Y
N
Either the power supply unit is faulty or there is a short circuit. Refer to WD 9.4 and WD
1.4. Measure the voltage at pin 27 of PJ902 on the drum driver PWB. The voltage should
be greater than +2.5V, indicating the drum driver PWB is enabling the +24V, +12V, -12V
and +5V supplies in the power supply unit. The voltage is greater than +2.5V.
Y
N
Check the condition of the drum driver power supply interface cable between PJDC2
on the power supply unit and PJ902 on the drum driver PWB. It should be correctly
and securely connected at each end, and should be undamaged. This cable carries
power control signals from and to the power supply unit. The cable is good.
Y
N
Correct the cable connection or install a new drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item 10, as necessary.
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. The fault is still active.
Y
N
Go to 01H +24V Distribution RAP.
Other voltage supplies are inter-dependent. Also refer to the RAPs that follow:
01D +5V Distribution RAP.
01E +12V Distribution RAP.
01F -12V Distribution RAP.
01L 0V Distribution RAP.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Check pin 27 of PJ902 on the drum driver PWB. Pin
27 is short circuit to ground.
Y
N
Either the power supply unit is faulty or there is a short circuit. Go to 01-525-00 +24V, +/12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload RAP.
Power supply unit
Refer to WD 9.4 and WD 1.4. Measure the voltage at pin 24 of PJ902 on the drum driver PWB.
This can be measured on the top of the connector, while it is connected to the drum driver
PWB. The voltage should be greater than +2.5V, indicating that the power supply is enabled.
The yellow LED on the power supply unit should also be lit, Figure 1. The voltage is greater
than +2.5V.
Y
N
Check the condition of the drum driver power supply interface cable between PJDC2 on
the power supply unit and PJ902 on the drum driver PWB. It should be correctly and
securely connected at each end, and should be undamaged. This cable carries power
control signals from and to the power supply unit. The cable is good.
Y
N
Correct the cable connection or install a new drum driver power supply interface
cable, PL 1.15 Item 10, as necessary.
A
B
01-540-00, 01-544-00
February 2013
2-14
Three LEDs
01-542-00, 01-546-00 50V Failure RAP

01-542-00 The IME +50V or -50V supply has shutdown unexpectedly.
01-546-00 The IME +50V or -50V supply has failed to switch on.
Initial Actions
If possible, repair all the current listed faults, before performing this procedure, refer to dC123.
A
Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4. Check the red LED, Figure 1, is illuminated and the voltage on
PJ902 pin 26 on the Drum driver PWB is greater than +2.5V. The LED is illuminated and the
voltage is greater than 2.5V.
Y
N
Switch off the machine GP 14. Check PJ902 pin 26 on the drum driver PWB. Pin 26 is
shorted to ground.
Y
N
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the machine GP 14. Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4. Check the condition of the drum
driver power supply interface cable between PJDC2 on the power supply unit and PJ902 on
the drum driver PWB. It should be correctly and securely connected at each end, and should
be undamaged, PL 1.15 Item 10. The ribbon cable is secure and in good condition.
Y
N
Correct the cable connection or install a new drum driver power supply interface cable, PL
1.15 Item 10, as necessary.
Switch on the machine GP 14. The fault code is still present.
Y
N
Check the 3 LEDs on the power supply are illuminated, Figure 1. The 3 LEDs are on and
remain illuminated after 60 seconds.
Y
N
Either the power supply unit is not enabled or is faulty or there is a short circuit on the
+50V or -50V output circuits.
Power supply unit
NOTE: The voltage on PJ902 at pin 28 must be greater than +2.5V to enable +/-50V outputs.
Three LEDs
Green = +3.3V ESTAR
Yellow = +5V, Red = +50V
Switch on the machine GP 14. Go to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4. Check the voltage on PJ902
pin 28 on the drum driver PWB. The voltage is greater than +2.5V.
Y
N
Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4. Check the drum driver power supply interface cable for
short circuits on PJ902 at pin 28 and pin 29. The cable is good.
Y
N
Repair the drum driver power supply interface cable as necessary, REP 1.1. If
necessary, install a new drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item
10.
The control voltages are correct. If the +50V or -50V supplies are still not present, either
there is a power supply unit fault or there is a short circuit. Go to 01-530-00 +/-50V Short
Circuit and Overload RAP.
A
February 2013
2-15
01-542-00, 01-546-00
01A AC Power Distribution RAP
Power to the Power Supply Unit Check

Procedure
Use this RAP to diagnose faults with the AC power distribution throughout the machine.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check for PEST errors, go to
dC123 PEST Fault History. If a fault is given, perform the appropriate RAP. If the machine is
unresponsive, go to OF 3.
Check the green LED on top of the power supply, Figure 1. The green LED is lit.
Y
N
Check the customer AC supply. The AC supply is good.
Y
N
Inform the customer to resolve the power supply fault.
Check the power cord, PL 1.15 Item 1.
The ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10, is warm.
Y
N
Go to:
Procedure
Main Power Rocker Switch Check
AC Power is distributed widely throughout this machine. Either work through this RAP or if the
faulty area of the machine is known, select the required check from the list that follows:
Ink Reservoir Heaters Check
NOTE: If multiple heater failures are noted, the fault is likely to exist in one of the following:
Marking unit heater PWB supply, WD 9.8.
Head thermistors safety circuit, refer to the 99-394-00 to 99-413-00 PEST Error 13 RAP
WD 1.4, WD 9.2, WD 9.4 and WD 9.6 for IME common heater relay. The line signal must
be greater than +2.5V to close the relays
Check the power supply output for the items that follow:
Ink melt, refer to Ink Reservoir Heaters Check. If there is no voltage output, install a
new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2
Registration pre-heater, refer to Registration / Pre-Heaters Check. If there is no voltage output, install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2
Drum heaters, refer to Drum Heaters Check. If there is no voltage output, install a
new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2
Marking unit heater PWB supply, refer to Marking Unit Heater PWB Supply Check. If
there is no voltage output, install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2
AC power is present and the power interlocks are operating.

Procedure
Switch off the machine, GP 14, disconnect the power cord. Refer to WD 1.1. Disconnect
PJ8AC on the power supply unit and measure the continuity between pins 1 and 2 of the
cable, Continuity is measured when the main power rocker switch is in the on position
and open circuit is measured when the main power rocker switch is in the off position.
Y
N
Check the wiring between PJ8AC on the power supply unit and the main power rocker
switch and repair as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. If necessary, install new a main power
rocker switch, PL 1.15 Item 3.
Continuity is measured when the main power rocker switch is in off position.
Y
N
There is a short circuit or the switch has failed. Check the wiring between PJ8AC on the
power supply unit and the main power switch and repair as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. If
necessary, install new a main power rocker switch, PL 1.15 Item 3.
Power to the Power Supply Unit Check
Ink Melt Heaters Check
Drum Heaters Check
Registration / Pre-Heaters Check
Thermal Cutout Check
Finisher Supply Check
Marking Unit Heater PWB Supply Check
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14, and disconnect the power cord. Refer to WD
9.8. Disconnect PJ201 from the marking unit heater PWB. Check the electrical resistance of
the ink reservoir heaters, by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ201 harness as
follows:
Ink reservoir heater 1, pin 1 to pin 3. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 45-55
ohms.
Lower Umbilical Heater Check
Head 1 Reservoir and Jetstack Heaters Check
Upper Umbilical Heater Check

Procedure
Ink reservoir heater 2, pin 2 to pin 4. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 45-55
ohms.
The measured resistances are correct.

Y
N
Go to WD 9.8. Check the wiring between PJ201 on the marking unit heater PWB and the
ink reservoir heaters. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. If necessary, install a new
reservoir assembly, PL 93.10 Item 26.
A
01A
February 2013
2-16
A
The ink reservoir heaters are good. If necessary, install a new Marking unit heater PWB, PL
92.10 Item 5. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Ink Melt Heaters Check

Procedure
1.2. Disconnect PJ5AC from the power supply unit. Check the electrical resistance of the four
ink melt heaters by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ5AC harness as follows:
Black ink melt heater, pin 6 to pin 12. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 70-80
ohms.
Yellow ink melt heater, pin 6 to pin 13. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 70-80
ohms.
Cyan ink melt heater, pin 7 to pin 1. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 70-80
ohms.
Magenta ink melt heater, pin 7 to pin 11. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 70-80
ohms.
Check that pin 7 to chassis is open circuit.
Check that pin 6 to the chassis is open circuit.

Y
N
Go to WD 1.2. Check the wiring between PJ5AC and PJX to the ink melt heaters. Repair
the wiring as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. If necessary, install a new ink loader melt plate
assembly, PL 93.10 Item 3.
The ink melt heaters are good. If necessary, install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Drum Heaters Check

Procedure
1.2. Disconnect PJ5AC from the power supply unit. Check the electrical resistance of the two
drum heaters by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ5AC harness as follows:
Drum heater 1 first section, pin 15 to pin 16. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 4050 ohms.
Drum heater 1 second section, pin 15 to pin 17. Expect a cold resistance of approximately
40-50 ohms.
Drum heater 2 first section, pin 10 to pin 19. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 4050 ohms.
Drum heater 2 second section, pin 10 to pin 20. Expect a cold resistance of approximately
40-50 ohms.

Y
N
Go to WD 1.2. Check the wiring between PJ5AC on the power supply unit, and PJX to the
drum heaters. Repair the wiring as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. As necessary, install a
new drum, PL 94.20 Item 1.
Registration / Pre-Heaters Check

Procedure
1.2. Disconnect PJ5AC from the power supply unit. Check the electrical resistance of the registration/pre-heaters by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ5AC harness as follows:
Registration pre-heater 1, pin 3 to pin 9. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 50-60

ohms.

ohms.

Y
N
Go to WD 1.2. Check the wiring between PJ5AC on the power supply unit, and PJ140 to
the registration preheat assembly. Repair the wiring as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. As
necessary, install a new registration preheat assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.
The registration/pre-heaters are good. If necessary, install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15
Item 2.
Thermal Cutout Check

Procedure
1.2. Disconnect PJ5AC harness on the power supply unit. Check the continuity of the thermal
cutouts on the thermal cutout PWB, by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ5AC
harness as follows:
cutout for drum heater 1, pin 4 to pin 14. Expect a short circuit.
cutout for drum heater 2, pin 5 to pin 18. Expect a short circuit.
Check that pin 4 and 5 to the chassis is open circuit.

Y
N
Go to WD 1.2. Check the wiring between PJ5AC on the power supply unit and PJ140 to
the thermal cutout PWB, PL 88.10 Item 11. Repair as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. As
necessary, install a new thermal cutout PWB, PL 94.20 Item 11.
The thermal cutouts are good. Refer to WD 9.4. Switch on the electricity to the machine, GP
14, and check the voltage on PJ902 pin 1 or pin 2 on the drum driver PWB is greater than
+2.5V. Check the voltage on PJ902 pin 33 on the drum driver PWB is greater than +2.5V. The
voltages are good.
Y
N
Check the condition of harness between PJDC2 of the power supply unit and PJ 902 of the
drum driver PWB. The harness is good.
Y
N
Repair the harness, REP 1.1.
Go to Thermal Cutout Check
February 2013
2-17
01A
Finisher Supply Check

Procedure
Lower Umbilical Heater Check

Procedure
Verify that the machine is configured for a finisher and that the machine is ready to print. Refer
to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4. Check the Finisher On signal from PJDC2, pin 3 on the power supply
unit to PJ902, pin 3 on the drum driver PWB. The signal is good.
Y
N
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14, and disconnect the power cord. Repair
the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install new wiring, PL 1.15 Item 10. If necessary,
install new components:
Cord bracket assembly, PL 12.75 Item 4.
the lower umbilical heater, by measuring the resistance across pin 1 to pin 8 of the PJ701 harness, expect a cold resistance of approximately 85-95 ohms. The measured resistance is
correct.
Y
N
lower umbilical heater. Repair the wiring as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. If necessary,
install new components:
Power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Drum driver power supply interface cable (PJ902), PL 1.15 Item 10.
Marking unit heater PWB, PL 92.10 Item 5.
An HVF is installed.
Y
N
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14, and disconnect the power cord. Refer to
WD 1.1 and WD 12.1. Check the wiring between PJ3AC on the power supply unit and
CN1 on the LCSS power supply module, PL 12.75 Item 2. As necessary, repair the wiring,
REP 1.1. If necessary, install new components:
Cord bracket assembly, PL 12.75 Item 4.
LCSS power supply unit, PL 12.75 Item 2.

NOTE: Verify that no short circuits exist between the line, neutral and ground on the
harness to the finisher, before a new power supply unit is installed.
1.1 and WD 12.6. Check the wiring between PJ3AC on the power supply unit and CN1 on the
HVF power supply unit, PL 12.140 Item 1. As necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1. If necessary, install new components:
Power cord, PL 12.140 Item 4.
HVF power supply unit, PL 12.140 Item 1.

NOTE: Verify that no short circuits exist between the line, neutral and ground on the harness to the finisher, before a new power supply unit is installed.
The lower umbilical heater is good. If necessary, install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.

Procedure
the head 1 reservoir and jetstack heaters, by measuring the resistance across the pins of the
PJ701 harness as follows:
Head 1 reservoir heater, pin 2 to pin 3. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 95-105
ohms.
Head 1 first half jetstack heater, pin 5 to pin 4. Expect a cold resistance of approximately
495-505 ohms.
Head 1 second half jetstack heater, pin 5 to pin 6. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 495-505 ohms.
Check that pin 2 to ground and pin 5 to ground are open circuit.

Y
N
head 1 reservoir and jet stack heater. Repair the wiring as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. If
necessary, install a new printhead 1, PL 91.25 Item 2.
The head 1 heaters are good. If necessary, install a new marking unit heater PWB, PL 92.10
Item 5.
Marking Unit Heater PWB Supply Check

Procedure
Refer to WD 1.1 and WD 9.8, check the wiring between PJ4AC on the power supply unit and
PJ101 on the marking unit heater PWB. If necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1.

Procedure
ohms.
01A
Umbilical, PL 91.25 Item 10.
Head 3 first half jetstack heater, pin 12 to pin 11. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 495-505 ohms.
February 2013
2-18
Check that pin 9 and pin 12 to the chassis is open circuit.

Y
N
Item 5. Re-connect PJ701.
Upper Umbilical Heater Check

Procedure
the upper umbilical heater, by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ401 harness
as follows:
Upper umbilical heater, pin 1 to pin 7. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 85-95
ohms.

Y
N
upper umbilical heater. Repair the wiring as necessary, refer to REP 1.1. If necessary,
install a new umbilical, PL 91.20 Item 10.
B
Item 5.

Procedure
ohms.
Head 4 first half jetstack heater, pin 11 to pin 10. Expect a cold resistance of approximately 495-505 ohms.

Y
N
The head 4 heaters are good. Re-connect PJ401. If necessary, install a new marking unit
heater PWB, PL 92.10 Item 5.
The upper umbilical heater is good. If necessary, install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item
2.

Procedure
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14, and disconnect the power cord. Disconnect
PJ401 from the marking unit heater PWB. Check the electrical resistance of the head 2 reservoir and jetstack heaters, by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ401 harness as
follows:
ohms.
Head 2 first half jetstack heater, pin 5 to pin 4. Expect a cold resistance of approximately
495-505 ohms.

Y
N
Power supply unit
Green LED = +3.3V ESTA

Yellow LED = +5V
Red LED = +50V
B
February 2013
2-19
01A
Drum Driver PWB
Use this RAP to diagnose +3.3V ESTAR supply and distribution faults in the machine. This
supply is used to power the IME logic circuits. This supply is not to be confused with the +3.3V
supply, which is generated on the power distribution PWB. To diagnose +3.3V faults go to 01C.
Quad Wave Amp PWB
Ink Load Entry PWB
Printhead 1 to 4
3 Tray Module PWB
Procedure
IME Controller PWB
WARNING
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the power supply unit to the IME controller
PWB, refer to WD 1.4.
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the IME controller PWB, refer to:
Check the green LED, Figure 1, on top of the power supply unit. This is lit to indicate that the
+3.3V ESTAR supply is available in the power supply unit. The green LED is lit.
Y
N
The AC supply is good.
Y
N
Go to 01A AC Power Distribution RAP.
Go to the 01A AC Power Distribution RAP. Perform the Main Power Rocker Switch
Check.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check the PEST fault history, dC123. There
are hard PEST faults shown.
Y
N
Check that the +3.3V is within tolerance, +3.3V +/- 2.5% at JDC1 between pin 9 and pin
14 refer to WD 1.4.
WD 9.5
WD 9.6
WD 9.7
The components that follow are driven from +3.3V ESTAR from the IME controller PWB
Printheads, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2
Quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item 3
Marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4
If necessary, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1, or one of the components in the list above.
Media Path Driver PWB
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the power supply unit to the media path driver
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the media path driver PWB refer to:
WD 8.1
NOTE: To view the +3.3V ESTAR supply generation, refer to WD 1.3. +3.3V ESTAR is
only distributed on PJDC1 and PJDC3 on the power supply unit. A short circuit on this
output also disables the +17V output.
WD 8.2
WD 8.3
WD 8.4
The +3.3V supply is within tolerance.

Y
N
WD 8.5
Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
The components that follow are driven from +3.3V ESTAR from the media path driver
PWB:
Determine which PWB has the distribution fault, go to PWB Checks.

Perform the RAP(s) given by the hard PEST fault code(s), then return to this RAP.
PWB Checks
Check the PWBs below to determine which PWB has the distribution fault. Follow the distribution back to the supply. Repair the wiring, REP 1.1 or install a new PWB or power supply unit,
PL 1.15 Item 2 as necessary. Refer to GP 15 for the location and function of the LEDs on the
PWBs.
NOTE: Many of the PWBs have distribution fuses.
Select the required PWB:
Upper door interlink PL 82.10 Item 10
Vertical transport sensor PL 82.10 Item 7
3 tray module PL 73.16
Ink loader door switch PL 93.10 Item 19
Bypass width sensor PL 74.11 Item 6
Potentiometer PL 74.11 Item 10
Ink load entry PWB PL 93.10 Item 8
Tray 5 control PWB PL 75.68 Item 8
If necessary, install a new media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5, or one of the components in the list above.
IME Controller PWB
Marking Unit Heater PWB
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the marking unit heater PWB, refer to WD 9.8.
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the marking unit heater PWB, refer to WD 9.8
Marking Unit Driver PWB
If necessary, install a new marking unit heater PWB, PL 92.10 Item 5.
01B
February 2013
2-20
If necessary, install a new printhead 1 or printhead 3 PL 91.25 Item 2 or install a new

printhead 2 or printhead 4 PL 91.20 Item 2.
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the IME controller PWB, refer to WD 9.7.
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the marking unit driver PWB, refer to:
3 Tray Module PWB
WD 9.10
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the media path driver PWB, refer to WD 8.2
WD 9.11
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the 3 tray module PWB, refer to:
WD 9.12
If necessary, install a new marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
The +3.3V ESTAR LED on the drum driver PWB is shown in WD 9.2.
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the power supply unit, to the drum driver PWB,
refer to WD 1.5.
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the drum driver PWB, refer to:
WD 9.2
WD 9.3
WD 9.4
The +3.3V ESTAR LED on this PWB is shown in WD 9.2.
The components that follow are driven from +3.3V ESTAR from the drum driver PWB:
Front door interlock switch PL 1.15 Item 7
Waste tray sensor PL 91.05 Item 4
WD 7.3
WD 7.4
Drum Driver PWB
If necessary, install a new 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
If necessary, install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4, or one of the components in
the list above.
Quad Wave Amp PWB
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the IME controller PWB to the quad wave amp
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the quad wave amplifier PWB, refer to WD 9.13.
If necessary, install a new quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item 3.
Power supply unit
Ink Load Entry PWB
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the marking unit driver PWB to the ink load
entry PWB, refer to WD 8.4.
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the ink load entry PWB, refer to:
WD 9.17
WD 9.18
Green LED
If necessary, install a new ink load entry PWB, PL 93.10 Item 8.
Printhead 1 to 4
To view the +3.3V ESTAR distribution from the IME controller PWB to the printhead
PWBs, refer to:
WD 9.5
WD 9.6
For +3.3V ESTAR faults on the printheads, refer to:
WD 9.20
WD 9.21
The +3.3V ESTAR LEDs on these printheads are shown in:
WD 9.20
WD 9.21
February 2013
2-21
01B
WD 5.1.
Use this RAP to diagnose +3.3V supply and distribution faults. This supply is not to be confused with the +3.3 ESTAR supply, which is generated in the power supply unit. Go to 01B to
diagnose +3.3V ESTAR faults.
WD 5.2.
If necessary repair the wiring, REP 1.1.
If necessary, install a new DADH PWB, PL 5.10 Item 5.
Procedure
UI PWB
To view the +3.3V distribution from the single board controller PWB, refer to WD 3.2.
WARNING
For +3.3 faults on the UI PWB, refer to WD 3.2.
If necessary, install a new user interface control PWB, PL 2.10 Item 2 or user interface
status PWB, PL 2.10 Item 4.
The green LED is lit on the power supply, Figure 1.

Y
N
Go to 01B +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP.
Registration / Pre-heat Interface PWB
+3.3V is generated within this PWB from the +5V supply. Refer to WD 8.6.
PWBs.
To view the +3.3V supply generation, refer to WD 1.6.
Power Distribution PWB
For +3.3V faults on the power distribution PWB, refer to WD 1.6.
If necessary, install a new power distribution PWB, PL 3.11 Item 1.
If necessary, install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2
If necessary, install a new registration/pre-heat interface PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10.
IOD Pre-amplifier PWB
+3.3V is generated within this PWB from the +5V supply. Refer to WD 9.22.
If necessary, install a new IOD pre-amplifier PWB, PL 94.15 Item 4.
Single Board Controller PWB
To view the +3.3V distribution from the power distribution PWB, refer to WD 1.6.
For +3.3V faults on the single board controller PWB, refer to:
WD 3.1
WD 3.2
If necessary, install a new single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13.
Scanner PWB
For +3.3 faults on the scanner PWB, refer to:
WD 6.1
WD 6.2
WD 6.3
If necessary, install a new scanner PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8.
Power supply unit
Green LED
Full Width Array
To view the +3.3V distribution from the scanner PWB, refer to WD 6.3.
For +3.3 faults on the full width array, refer to WD 6.3.
If necessary, install a new scan carriage assembly, PL 62.15 Item 1.
DADH PWB
To view the +3.3V distribution from the DADH PWB, refer to WD 5.1.
For +3.3 faults on the DADH PWB, refer to:
01C
February 2013
2-22
NOTE: Many PWBs have distribution fuses.
Use this RAP to diagnose +5V supply and distribution faults.
Select the required PWB:
IME Controller PWB
Drum Driver PWB
3 Tray Module PWB
Tray 5 Control PWB
Scanner PWB
DADH PWB
HDD
Cleaning Unit PWB
LCSS PWB
HVF PWB
BM PWB (Booklet Maker)
Tri-folder PWB
Inserter PWB
OCT PWB
IME Controller PWB
NOTE: Refer to RAP 12A-171 to diagnose +5V supply and distribution faults on the HVF. Refer
to RAP 12D-110 to diagnose +5V supply and distribution faults on the LCSS.
Procedure
WARNING
NOTE: To view the +5V supply generation, refer to WD 1.3.
The yellow LED on top of the power supply unit, Figure 1, indicates that the +5V supply is
available in the power supply unit. The green LED is lit but the yellow led is extinguished.
Y
N
Go to the 01C 3.3V Distribution RAP.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check the PEST fault history, dC123. There
are hard PEST faults shown.
Y
N
Check that the +5V is within tolerance, +5V +/- 2% at JDC1 pin 17. Refer to WD 1.4. The
+5V is good.
Y
N
CAUTION
Do not disconnect or connect PJs while the machine has power on, to avoid equipment
damage.
Check for short circuits. Refer to 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload
RAP, +5V short circuit check. The circuit is good.
Y
N
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Disconnect connectors on the power supply to isolate the PWBs that follow:
PJDC1 to isolate the IME controller PWB.
PJDC3 to isolate drum driver PWB and media path driver PWB.
PJDC4 to isolate the power distribution PWB and HDD.
To view the +5V distribution from the power supply unit, refer to WD 1.4.
For +5V faults on the IME controller PWB, refer to:
WD 9.6
WD 9.7
The marking unit driver PWB PL 92.10 Item 4, is driven from +5V from the IME controller
PWB
Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1
If necessary, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1, or a new marking unit
driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4
Drum Driver PWB
Repair the short circuit. Refer to REP 1.1. Install new parts as necessary.
Determine which PWB has the distribution fault, go to PWB Checks.
PWB Checks
PWBs.
To view the +5V distribution from the power supply unit, refer to WD 1.5
For +5V faults on the drum driver PWB, refer to:
WD 9.1
WD 9.2
WD 9.3
The components that follow are driven from +5V from the drum driver PWB:
IOD assembly PL 94.15 Item 1
Front transfix motor encoder, part of the front transfix motor, PL 10.20 Item 11
Rear transfix motor encoder, part of the rear transfix motor, PL 10.20 Item 11
Front and rear transfix flexure encoder PL 10.20 Item 5
Drum position encoder assembly PL 94.20 Item 8
Registration/Pre-heat interface PWB PL 88.10 Item 10
Stripper latch sensor, PL 10.10 Item 17
Pre exit sensor, PL 10.10 Item 6.
Cleaning unit motor assembly, PL 94.10 Item 19
February 2013
2-23
01D

Cleaning unit home sensor, PL 94.10 Item 17
Post transfix sensor, PL 10.10 Item 6
If necessary, install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4, or one of the components in
the list above
3 Tray Module PWB
For +5V faults on the media path driver PWB, refer to:
WD 8.1
WD 8.2
WD 8.3
WD 8.4
WD 8.5
WD 8.6
The +5V LED on this PWB is shown in WD 8.5
The components that follow are driven from the media path driver PWB:
Registration/Pre-heat interface PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10 see below for components

driven by this PWB
Vertical transport sensor, PL 82.10 Item 7
Confirm sensor, PL 82.10 Item 7
Vertical transport motor encoder, part of the vertical transport motor, PL 82.10 Item
12
3 Tray module, PL 73.16 and components, see below for components driven by this
PWB
Bypass empty sensor, PL 74.10 Item 18
Bypass feed sensor, PL 74.10 Item 19
Bypass nudger home sensor, PL 74.10 Item 18
Tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8 see below for components driven by this PWB
OCT PL 12.00 Item 1
LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1, see below for components driven by this PWB
HVF PWB PL 12.140 Item 2, see below for components driven by this PWB
Duplex start sensor PL 10.15 Item 3
Exit sensor PL 10.15 Item 3
Duplex sensor PL 82.15 Item 3
Horizontal transport motor encoder, part of the horizontal transport motor, PL 82.15
Item 9
Duplex end sensor PL 82.15 Item 3
If necessary, install a new media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5, or one of the components in the list above.
To view the +5V distribution from the media path driver PWB, refer to WD 8.2.
For +5V faults on the 3 tray module PWB, refer to:
WD 7.3.
WD 7.4.
WD 7.5
The +5V LED on this PWB is shown in WD 7.3.
If necessary, install a new 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
To view the +5V distribution from the power distribution PWB, refer to WD 1.7.
For +5V faults on the power distribution PWB, refer to:
WD 1.6
WD 1.7
For +5V faults on the scanner PWB, refer to:
WD 6.1.
WD 6.2.
WD 6.3.
01D
To view the +5V distribution from the drum driver PWB, refer to WD 9.2.
To view +5V distribution from the media path driver PWB, refer to WD 8.1.
For +5V faults on the registration/preheat interface PWB, refer to WD 8.6.
The components that follow are driven from +5V from the reg/preheat interface PWB:
Reg/preheat home sensor, part of PL 88.10 Item 10.
Pre transfix sensor Q89-006. PL 88.10 Item 12.
If necessary, install a new Registration/Pre-heat interface PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10, or one
of the components in the list above.
To view the +5V distribution from the IME controller PWB, refer to WD 9.7
For +5V faults on the marking unit driver PWB, refer to WD 9.10
If necessary install a new marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4

Tray 5 Control PWB
For +5V faults on the tray 5 control PWB, refer to:
WD 7.1.
WD 7.2.
If necessary, install a new tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8.

For +5V faults on the single board controller PWB, refer to:
WD 3.1.
WD 3.2.
Scanner PWB
February 2013
2-24
DADH PWB
HDD
Note: This PWB does not have an external +5V supply. +5V is generated on-board from
the +3.3V supply, as shown in WD 5.2.
For +5V faults on the DADH PWB, refer to:
WD 5.1.
WD 5.2.
For +5V faults on HDD, refer to WD 1.5.
If necessary, install a new hard disk drive, PL 3.11 Item 2.

Cleaning Unit PWB
For +5V faults on the cleaning unit PWB, refer to WD 9.19.

NOTE: The +5V supply is generated internally on the cleaning unit PWB, refer to WD
9.19.
The reed switch assembly (level sensing), part of PL 94.10 Item 21, is driven from +5V
from the cleaning unit PWB:
NOTE: The cleaning unit PWB and reed switch are not spared individually, the next highest assembly is the cleaning unit.
If necessary, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.

LCSS PWB
To view the +5V distribution from the LCSS power supply module, refer to WD 12.1.
For +5V faults on the LCSS, refer to:
WD 12.1
WD 12.2
WD 12.3
WD 12.4
WD 12.5
If necessary, install a new LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.

HVF PWB
To view the +5V distribution from the HVF power supply module, refer to WD 12.6.
For +5V faults on the HVF, refer to:
WD 12.6
WD 12.7
WD 12.8
WD 12.9
WD 12.10
WD 12.11
WD 12.12
WD 12.13
WD 12.14
WD 12.15
If necessary, install a new HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2.

To view the +5V distribution from the HVF PWB, refer to WD 12.6.
For +5V faults on the BM, refer to:
WD 12.16
WD 12.17
WD 12.18
WD 12.19
If necessary, install a new BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.

Tri-folder PWB
To view the +5V distribution from the BM PWB, refer to WD 12.6.
For +5V faults on the tri-folder PWB, refer to WD 12.20.
If necessary, install a new tri-folder PWB, PL 12.205 Item 16.

Inserter PWB
For +5V faults on the inserter PWB, refer to:
WD 12.21
WD 12.22
If necessary, install a new inserter PWB, PL 12.310 Item 9.

OCT PWB
For +5V faults on the OCT, refer to WD 12.23.
If necessary, install a new OCT, PL 12.00 Item 1.
Power supply unit
Yellow LED
February 2013
2-25
01D
Scanner PWB
Full Width Array
UI PWB
WARNING
Quad Wave Amp PWB
Printheads 1 to 4
Procedure
available in the power supply unit. The +5V and +12V supplies are generated from the -12V/
+24V supply in the power supply unit. The yellow LED is lit.
Y
N
Check that the +12V is within tolerance, +12V +/- 5% at JDC1 pin 13. The +12V is good.
Y
N
Check for short circuits. Refer to the 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload
RAP, +5V short circuit check. The circuit is good.
Y
N
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Disconnect connectors on the power supply to isolate the
PWBs that follow:
WD 9.5
WD 9.6
WD 9.7
The items that follow are driven from +12V from the IME controller PWB:
Print heads, PL 91.25 Item 2, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Marking unit driver PWB PL 92.10 Item 4.
If necessary, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1, or one of the items in the
list above.
CAUTION
To avoid equipment damage, do not disconnect or connect PJs while the machine is switched
on.
IME Controller PWB
To view the +12V distribution from the IME controller PWB, refer to WD 9.7.
For +12V faults on the marking unit driver PWB, refer to:
WD 9.10
WD 9.12
The solenoid patch PWB, PL 93.10 Item 9 is driven from +12V from the marking unit
driver PWB
Solenoid Patch PWB
Repair the short circuit. Refer to REP 1.1. Install new parts as necessary.
To view the +12V distribution from the marking unit driver PWB, refer to WD 9.12.
PWBs.
For +12V faults on the solenoid patch PWB, refer to WD 9.14.
The components that follow are driven from +12V from the solenoid patch PWB:
If necessary, install a new solenoid patch PWB, PL 93.10 Item 9, or one of the items in the
list above.
PWB Checks
IME Controller PWB
Solenoid Patch PWB
Drum Driver PWB
Cleaning Unit
Registration/Pre-heat Interface PWB
01E
Reservoir pump PL 93.10 Item 11.
LPA valve solenoid PL 93.10 Item 15.
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.2
WD 9.3
WD 9.4
February 2013
2-26
Enclosure Fan, PL 1.15 Item 6.
Marking unit cooling fan, PL 1.15 Item 23.
Abatement fan assembly, PL 94.20 Item 11.
Cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.
Stripper Jam Clearance LED assembly, PL 10.10 Item 10
Registration/preheat Interface PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10
WD 1.7
Check for +12V on both sides of fuse F2 on the power distribution PWB. If +12V is not
present, check the wiring between PJ8 pin 11 on the power distribution PWB and PJ920
pin 5 on the scanner PWB.
If necessary, install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4, or one of the items in the list
above.
For +3.3V faults on the single board controller PWB, refer to:
Cleaning Unit
WD 3.1
WD 3.2
For +12V faults on the cleaning unit PWB, refer to WD 9.19.
If necessary repair the wiring, REP 1.1 or install a new DADH/IIT power comms harness,
PL 62.16 Item 7.
Scanner PWB
NOTE: The cleaning unit PWB is not spared individually, the next highest assembly is the
cleaning unit.
WD 6.1
WD 6.3
The scan carriage, PL 62.15 Item 6 is driven from +12V from the scanner PWB:
WD 8.1
WD 8.5
The components that follow are driven from +12V from the media path driver PWB:
Full Width Array
Exit illuminator, PL 10.15 Item 16.
To view the +12V distribution from the scanner PWB, refer to WD 6.3.
Horizontal illuminator, PL 82.15 Item 11.
For +12V faults on the full width array, refer to WD 6.3.
Registration/preheat illuminator PWB, PL 82.15 Item 17.
Registration/preheat interface PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10.
If necessary, install a new scan carriage assembly, PL 62.15 Item 1.
UI PWB
If necessary, install a new media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5, or one of the items in
the list above.
To view the +12V distribution from the single board controller PWB, refer to WD 3.2
For +12V faults on the UI PWB, refer to WD 3.2.
If necessary, install a new user interface control PWB, PL 2.10 Item 2 or user interface
status PWB, PL 2.10 Item 4.
Registration/Pre-heat Interface PWB
To view +12 V distribution from media path driver PWB, refer to WD 8.1.
For +12V faults on the registration/pre-heat interface PWB, refer to WD 8.6.
Quad Wave Amp PWB
The components that follow are driven from +12V from the reg/preheat interface PWB:
Registration scan bar Q89-005, PL 88.10 Item 2.
For +12V faults on quad wave amp PWB, refer to WD 9.13.
Registration/preheat air pumps MOT88-008, PL 88.10 Item 5.

If necessary, install a new registration/pre-heat interface PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10, or one
of the items in the list above
Printheads 1 to 4
To view the +12 V distribution from the IME controller PWB, refer to WD 9.5 and WD 9.6.
For +12V faults on the printhead, refer to WD 9.20 and WD 9.21.
If necessary, install a new printhead PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2.
WD 1.6
February 2013
2-27
01E
01F -12V Distribution RAP

Use this RAP to diagnose -12V supply and distribution faults.
NOTE: Refer to RAP 12A-171 to diagnose -12V supply and distribution faults on the HVF.
Refer to RAP 12D-110 to diagnose -12V supply and distribution faults on the LCSS.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
on.
NOTE: To view the -12V supply generation, refer to WD 1.3.
Power supply unit
Yellow LED
available in the power supply unit. The +5V and +12V supplies are generated from the -12V/
+24V supply in the power supply unit. The yellow LED is lit.
Y
N
Go to the 01-540-00, 01-544-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Failure RAP.
Check that the -12V is within tolerance, -12V +/- 5% at JDC1 pin 12. The -12V is good.
Y
N
Check for short circuits. Refer to the 01-525-00 +24V, +\-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload RAP, -12V short circuit check.
NOTE: The -12V supply is protected via a foldback circuit. A short circuit will result in 0V
output, but the power supply will not switch off. Removing the short will restore -12V output from the power supply.
If a short circuit is found, disconnect connectors on the power supply unit to isolate the
PWBs that follow:
PWBs.
IME Controller PWB
01E, 01F
To view the -12V distribution from the power supply unit, refer to WD 1.4.
For -12V faults on the IME controller PWB, refer to:
WD 9.5
WD 9.6
WD 9.7
The components that follow are driven from -12V from the IME controller PWB.
Print heads, PL 91.25 Item 2, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Quad wave amp PWB PL 92.10 Item 3.

If necessary, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1, or one of the items in the
list above.
February 2013
2-28
Drum Driver PWB
For -12V faults on the drum driver PWB, refer to WD 9.2.
If necessary, install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Procedure
WARNING
To view the -12V distribution from the IME controller PWB, refer to WD 9.7.
For -12V faults on the marking unit driver PWB, refer to WD 9.10.
Check the power distribution PWB. Follow the distribution back to the supply. Repair the wiring,
REP 1.1 or install a new PWB or power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2 as necessary.
Quad Wave Amp PWB
For -12V faults on quad wave amp PWB, refer to WD 9.13.
NOTE: The voltage of this supply varies. At start up, the output is +17V unregulated and an
average of about +17V can be measured. During the normal run mode, the output of this supply rises to +24V. The supply then drops back to +17V unregulated during the sleep mode. If
the yellow LED is lit on the power supply, the output should be about +24V.
Power distribution PWB
Printheads 1 to 4
To view the -12 V distribution from the IME controller PWB, refer to WD 9.5, WD 9.6 and
WD 9.7
For -12V faults on the printhead, refer to WD 9.20 and WD 9.21.
If necessary, install a new printhead PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2.
NOTE: A short circuit on this output also disables the +3.3V ESTAR output.
NOTE: A short circuit on the +3.3V may result in the +17V output being disabled from
overload.
NOTE: A missing or invalid power normal signal (refer to WD 8.2 on PJ402 pin 10) may
result in an overload on the +17V output, causing the supply to be disabled.
NOTE: The media path driver PWB receives -12V from the harness but it is not connected.
Power supply unit
WD 1.5
WD 1.6
Yellow LED
February 2013
2-29
01F, 01G

NOTE: This supply is not to be confused with the +17V supply, which is shown in WD 1.5.
E
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Check pin 27 of PJ902 on the drum driver
PWB. Pin 27 is short circuit to ground.
Y
N
NOTE: Refer to RAP 12A-171 to diagnose +24V supply and distribution faults on the HVF.
Refer to RAP 12D-110 to diagnose +24V supply and distribution faults on the LCSS.
Procedure
Repair the wiring, REP 1.1. Install new components as necessary.
WARNING
Check that the +24V is within tolerance, +24.5V +/- 5%, (+23.275V to +25.725V), at JDC1
pin 11. Refer to WD 1.4. The +24V is good.
Y
N
CAUTION
on.
PWB Checks
Check the PEST fault history, dC123. There are hard PEST faults shown.
Y
N
Check the LEDs on top of the power supply unit, Figure 1. The yellow LED is lit.
Y
N
The green LED is lit.
Y
N
Go to the 01C 3.3V Distribution RAP
PWBs.
Check for short circuits. Refer to the 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and
Overload RAP, +24V short circuit check.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Disconnect the following connectors on the power
supply unit to isolate the PWBs that follow:
PJDC3 to isolate the drum driver PWB and media path driver PWB.
PJDC4 to isolate the power distribution PWB and HDD.
A short circuit exists.

Y
N
Either the power supply unit is faulty or there is a short circuit. Refer to WD 9.4
and WD 1.4. Measure the voltage at pin 27 of PJ902 on the drum driver PWB.
The voltage should be greater than +2.5V, indicating the drum driver PWB is
enabling the +24V, +12V, -12V and +5V supplies in the power supply unit. The
voltage is greater than +2.5V.
Y
N
Check the condition of the drum driver power supply interface cable
between PJDC2 on the power supply unit and PJ902 on the drum driver
PWB. It should be correctly and securely connected at each end, and
should be undamaged. This cable carries power control signals from and
to the power supply unit. The cable is good.
Y
N
Install a new drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item
10, as necessary.
A
B
C
D
E
01H
Determine which PWB has the supply fault, go to PWB Checks.
IME Controller PWB
Solenoid Patch PWB
Scanner PWB
DADH PWB
3 Tray Module PWB
Drum Driver PWB
Tray 5 Control PWB
LCSS PWB
HVF PWB
Tri-folder PWB
Inserter PWB
OCT PWB
Cleaning Unit
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.6
WD 9.7
February 2013
2-30
The marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4, is driven from +24V from the IME controller PWB
WD 6.2
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the scanner PWB:
If necessary, install a new scanner PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8
DADH PWB
WD 9.10
For +24V faults on the DADH PWB, refer to:
WD 9.12
If necessary, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
The solenoid patch PWB, PL 93.10 Item 9 is driven from +24V from the marking unit
driver PWB:
Solenoid Patch PWB
To view the +24V distribution from the marking unit driver PWB, refer to WD 9.12.
For +24V faults on the solenoid patch PWB, refer to:
WD 9.14
WD 9.15
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the solenoid patch PWB:
Purge solenoid valves 1 to 4 SOL93-059, 060, 061, 062, part of PL 93.10 Item 10.
Black ink solenoid valves 5 to 8 SOL063,064, 065, 066, part of PL 93.10 Item 10
Yellow ink solenoid valves 9 to 12,SOL067, 068, 069, 070, part of PL 93.10 Item 10
Cyan ink solenoid valves 13 to 16 SOL071, 072, 073, 074, part of PL 93.10 Item 10
Magenta ink solenoid valves 17 to 20 SOL075, 076, 077, 078, part of PL 93.10 Item
10
If necessary, install a new solenoid patch PWB, PL 93.10 Item 9.
WD 1.6
WD 1.7
WD 5.1
WD 5.2
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the DADH PWB:
DADH CVT motor MOT05-099, PL 5.25 Item 9.
DADH feed motor MOT05-074, PL 5.15 Item 16.
DADH duplex solenoid SOL05-100, PL 5.30 Item 3.
Nudger motor MOT05-098, PL 5.15 Item 5.
DADH feed clutch CL05-062, PL 5.15 Item 9.
DADH cover interlock switch S05-212, PL 5.15 Item 11.
Check for +24V on both sides of fuse F8 on the power distribution PWB. If +24V is not
present, check the following wiring:
LED exposure lamp(s), PL 62.15 Item 2.
WD 8.2
WD 8.3
WD 8.4
WD 8.5
Bypass feed motor (M7) MOT74-420, PL 74.10 Item 2.
3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8.
OCT, PL 12.00 Item 1.
LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.
HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2.
Between PJ8 pins 7 and 9 on the power distribution PWB and PJ920 pins 1 and 3 on
the scanner PWB.
If necessary, install a new media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5
Between PJ8 pins 1, 3 and 5 on the power distribution PWB and PJ188 pins 1, 2 and
3 on the DADH PWB.
3 Tray Module PWB
To view the +24 distribution from the media path driver PWB, refer to WD 8.2
For +24V faults on the three trays module PWB, refer to:
WD 7.3
Scanner PWB
WD 7.4
To view the +24V distribution from the power distribution PWB, refer to WD 1.7
WD 7.5
The +24V LED on this PWB is shown in WD 7.3
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the 3 tray module PWB:
WD 6.1
February 2013
2-31
01H
T1 feed / elevator motor MOT71-002, PL 81.25 Item 22.
Transport motor 1 MOT12-223, PL 12.40 Item 2.
T2 feed / elevator motor MOT72-001, PL 81.26 Item 22.
SH1 motor MOT12-247, part of PL 12.55 Item 5.
T3 feed motor MOT73-001, PL 81.30 Item 22.
SU1 motor MOT12-249, part of PL 12.55 Item 5.
3 tray transport motor MOT70.025, PL 73.16 Item 3.
Tray up limit switch, S73-384, PL 81.30 Item 25.
Paddle roll motor MOT12-237, PL 12.25 Item 10.
Tray 3 elevate motor, MOT73-002, PL 73.16 Item 2.
Punch head motor MOT12-243, PL 12.20 Item 2.
Front tamper motor MOT12-226, part of PL 12.45 Item 1.
If necessary, install a new 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4
Rear tamper motor MOT12-227, part of PL 12.45 Item 1.
Drum Driver PWB
Bin 1 upper limit switch S12-190, PL 12.30 Item 3.
Top cover interlock switch S12-197, PL 12.75 Item 6.
Bin 1 lower limit switch S12-191, PL 12.35 Item 1.
WD 9.1
Bin 1 elevator motor MOT12.-241, PL 12.30 Item 8.
WD 9.2
If necessary, install a new LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.
Drum fan MOT42-064, PL 94.20 Item 4.
HVF PWB
Cleaning unit delivery pump, part of PL 94.10 Item 21.
To view the +24V distribution from the HVF power supply module, refer to WD 12.6.
Cleaning unit return reservoir pump, part of PL 94.10 Item 21.
For +24V faults on the HVF, refer to:
Cleaning unit PWB, part of PL 94.10 Item 21.
WD 12.6
WD 12.7
WD 12.8
Tray 5 Control PWB
WD 12.9
WD 12.10
For +24V faults on the tray 5 control PWB, refer to:
WD 12.13
WD 7.1.
WD 12.14
WD 7.2.
WD 12.15
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the tray 5 control PWB:
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the HVF PWB:
Tray 5 transport motor MOT75.018, PL 81.40 Item 2.
Elevator motor MOT75-019, PL 75.68 Item 4.
Buffer motor MOT12-262, PL 12.120 Item 1.
Upper limit switch S75-412, PL 75.68 Item 12.
Nip split motor MOT12-164, PL 12.125 Item 15.
Tray down limit switch S75-415, PL 75.70 Item 2.
Feed motor MOT75-117, PL 81.40 Item 3.
BM diverter solenoid SOL12-258, PL 12.120 Item 4.
Exit diverter solenoid SOL12-225, PL 12.120 Item 4.
If necessary, install a new tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8.
Bypass feed motor MOT12-263, PL 12.120 Item 2.
LCSS PWB
Set clamp solenoid SOL12-056, PL 12.120 Item 4.
To view the +24V distribution from the LCSS power supply module, refer to WD 12.1.
Docking interlock switch S12-177, PL 12.100 Item 16.
For +24V faults on the LCSS, refer to:
Front door interlock switch S12-303, PL 12.115 Item 28.
WD 12.1
Top cover interlock switch S12-197, PL 12.115 Item 24.
WD 12.3
Paddle unit motor MOT12-239, PL 12.120 Item 6.
WD 12.4
Paddle roll motor MOT12-238, part of PL 12.115 Item 2.
WD 12.5
Paper pusher motor MOT12-265, PL 12.115 Item 13.
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the LCSS PWB:
Bin 1 elevator motor MOT12-241, PL 12.105 Item 10.
Docking interlock switch S12-177, PL 12.15 Item 2.
Stapler gate safety switch S12-319, PL 12.115 Item 17.
Front door interlock switch S12-303, PL 12.75 Item 5.
Rear tamper motor MOT12-227, PL 12.110 Item 19.
01H
February 2013
2-32
Staple head 1 motor MOT12-247, part of PL 12.110 Item 12.
Stapler unit 1 motor MOT12-249, PL 12.110 Item 27.
Ejector motor MOT12-236, part of PL 12.110 Item 2.
Ejector roll motor MOT12-233, part of PL 12.110 Item 2.
Pressing & support motor MOT12-323, PL 12.110 Item 9.
Front tamper motor MOT12-226, PL 12.125 Item 6.
Punch unit motor MOT12-245, part of PL 12.125 Item 19.
Punch head motor MOT12-244, part of PL 12.125 Item 19.

If necessary, install a new HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2.
WD 12.22
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the inserter PWB:
Inserter top cover interlock switch S12-178, PL 12.305 Item 8.
Inserter jam cover interlock switch S12-179, PL 12.300 Item 18.
Inserter clutch CL12-260, PL 12.310 Item 3.
Inserter motor MOT12-261, PL 12.315 Item 1.
If necessary, install a new inserter PWB, PL 12.310 Item 9.
OCT PWB
For +24V faults on the OCT PWB, refer to WD 12.23.
For +24V faults on the BM, refer to:
The OCT offset motor MOT12-300, part of PL 12.00 Item 1, is driven from +24V from the
inserter PWB
If necessary, install a new OCT, PL 12.00 Item 1.
WD 12.17
WD 12.19
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the BM PWB:
BM SH1 motor MOT12-254, part of PL 12.185 Item 7.
BM SH2 motor MOT12-275, part of PL 12.185 Item 7.
BM compiler motor MOT 12-251, PL 12.175 Item 1.
BM backstop motor MOT 12-255, PL 12.160 Item 4.
BM tamper 1 motor MOT12-256, PL 12.155 Item 3.
BM stack hold solenoid SOL12-259 (1 of 2), PL 12.165 Item 17.
BM stack hold solenoid SOL12-259 (2 of 2), PL 12.165 Item 17.
BM conveyor drive motor MOT12-274, PL 12.190 Item 4.
BM crease roll gate motor MOT12-273, PL 12.175 Item 8.
BM crease roll motor MOT12-253, PL 12.175 Item 12.
BM crease blade motor MOT12-252, PL 12.170 Item 3.
BM flapper motor MOT12-271, PL 12.175 Item 1.

If necessary, install a new BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
Cleaning Unit
To view the +24V distribution from the drum driver PWB, refer to WD 9.2
For +24V faults on the cleaning unit PWB, refer to WD 9.19
The cleaning unit solenoid valve, part of PL 94.10 Item 21, is driven from +24V from the
cleaning unit PWB:

NOTE: The cleaning unit PWB is not spared individually, the next highest assembly is the
cleaning unit.
Tri-folder PWB
To view the +24V distribution from the BM PWB, refer to WD 12.6.
For +24V faults on the tri-folder PWB, refer to WD 12.20.
The components that follow are driven from +24V from the tri folder PWB:
Tri folder top cover interlock switch S12-210, PL 12.215 Item 3.
Tri folder front door interlock switch S12-209, PL 12.215 Item 2.
Tri folder diverter solenoid SOL12-267, PL 12.215 Item 16.
Tri folder assist gate solenoid SOL12-268, PL 12.215 Item 8.
Tri folder drive clutch CL12-269, PL 12.205 Item 9.
If necessary, install a new tri-folder PWB, PL 12.205 Item 16.
Inserter PWB
For +24V faults on the inserter PWB, refer to:
Power supply unit
WD 12.21
LEDs

February 2013
2-33
01H
WD 8.3
WD 8.5
Procedure
WARNING
Nip C release solenoid SOL82-007, PL 82.15 Item 4.
HPP diverter solenoid SOL83-004, PL 82.15 Item 5.
Exit/duplex diverter solenoid SOL83-006, PL 10.15 Item 14.
Nip D release solenoid SOL82-008, PL 70.30 Item 13.
To view the +50V generation, refer to WD 1.3.

Check the red LED on top of the power supply unit, Figure 1, that indicates that the +50V supply is available in the power supply unit. The red LED is lit and the AC supply is good.
Y
N
Check the PEST fault history, dC123. There are hard PEST faults shown.
Y
N
Check that the +50V is within tolerance, +50V +/- 2% at JDC1 pin 10. Refer to WD 1.4.
The +50V is good.
Y
N
If necessary, install a new media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Drum Driver PWB

1.
2.
For +50V faults on the drum driver PWB, refer to WD 9.2.
3.
4.
The stripper solenoid SOL10-021, PL 10.10 Item 3, is driven from +50V from the drum
driver PWB:
5.
6.
Quad Wave Amp PWB

Determine which PWB has the supply fault. Go to PWB Checks.
PWB Checks
PWBs.
1.
2.
For +50V faults on quad wave amp PWB, refer to WD 9.13.
3.
4.

1.
2.

IME Controller PWB
WD 9.5
WD 9.6
WD 9.7
3.
WD 9.10
WD 9.11
The Waste tray lock solenoid SOL91-044, PL 91.10 Item 17, is driven from +50V from the
marking unit driver PWB:
4.
5.
The components that follow are driven from +50V from the IME controller PWB:
Marking unit driver PWB PL 92.10 Item 4.
Quad wave amp PWB PL 92.10 Item 3.
WD 8.1
01J
February 2013
2-34
01K -50V Distribution RAP

Use this RAP to diagnose -50V supply and distribution faults.
Procedure
WARNING
To view the -50V generation, refer to WD 1.3.
Check the condition of the drum driver power supply interface cable between PJDC2 on the
power supply unit and PJ902 on the drum driver PWB. It should be correctly and securely connected at each end, and should be undamaged. This cable carries power control signals from
and to the power supply unit. The cable is good.
Y
N
Install a new drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item 10.
Power supply unit
Red LED
Check the red LED on top of the power supply unit, Figure 1 that indicates that the +50V supply is available in the power supply unit. The red LED is lit.
Y
N
The red LED is extinguished and the AC supply is good. Check the PEST fault history,
Y
N
Perform the 01-542-00, 01-546-00, 50V Failure RAP.
Check that the -50V is within tolerance, -50V +/- 2% at JDC1 pin 18. Refer to WD 1.4. The
50V is good.
Y
N
Go to PWB Checks.
PWB Checks
PWBs.
IME Controller PWB
For -50V faults on the IME controller PWB, refer to:
WD 9.5
WD 9.6
The quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item 3 is driven from -50V from the IME controller
PWB.
February 2013
2-35
01J, 01K
Quad Wave Amp PWB
For -50V faults on quad wave amp PWB, refer to WD 9.13.
Power supply unit
Red LED
01K
February 2013
2-36

Use this RAP to diagnose 0V faults.
Procedure
WARNING
LCSS PWB
HVF Control PWB
BM PWB (Booklet maker)
Tri-folder PWB
Inserter PWB
OCT PWB
Power Supply Unit
Refer to WD 1.3, WD 1.4 and WD 1.5.
Important: 0V return lines are connected together and to the chassis, both inside the
power supply units and at the PWBs.
If necessary install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
To measure the continuity of a 0V line between the power supply unit and a PWB, isolate
the line concerned by disconnecting the PJs at both ends. In this way there will be no misleading parallel paths. As necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1 or install a new harness.
The same applies between the power distribution PWB and other PWBs.
To check the connection of a 0V line to chassis via the power supply unit, connect the PJ
at the power supply unit only, disconnect from the PWB, and measure the continuity to the
chassis. As necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1 or install a new power supply unit, PL
1.15 Item 2.
Refer to WD 1.6 and WD 1.7.
If necessary install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.

If necessary, install a new single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13 or associated
components.
To check the connection of a 0V line to chassis via the PWB, connect the power PJ at the
PWB only, disconnect from the power supply unit, and measure the continuity to the chassis. If necessary repair the wiring or install a new PWB.
To check the 0V line between a PWB and a component, (sensor, motor, etc.), disconnect
the PWB PJ, then check the wiring for condition, short circuits, open circuits etc. As necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1, install a new harness, component or PWB.
UI Control PWB, Touch Screen and UI Status PWB
This procedure lists the wiring diagrams that show the occurrence of 0V lines. Select the suspect area from the list below, check the wiring for condition, short circuits and open circuits.
Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new harness or faulty component.
Power Supply Unit

UI Control PWB, Touch Screen and UI Status PWB
Foreign Device Interface PWB
DADH PWB
Scanner PWB
Tray 5 Control PWB
3 Tray Module PWB
Drum Driver PWB
IME Controller PWB
Quad Wave Amp PWB
Solenoid Patch PWB
Ink Load Entry PWB
Cleaning Unit PWB
Printheads 1, 2, 3 and 4 PWBs
Refer to WD 3.1. If necessary, install new components from the list that follows:
UI control PWB, PL 2.10 Item 2.
Touch screen, PL 2.10 Item 3.
UI status PWB, PL 2.10 Item 4.
LCD to PWB harness, PL 2.10 Item 11.
UI control to UI status harness, PL 2.10 Item 9.
If necessary, install a new user interface control PWB.
If necessary, install a new touch screen, PL 2.10 Item 3.
If necessary, install a new user interface status PWB, PL 2.10 Item 4.

Refer to WD 3.3.
If necessary, install a new foreign device interface PWB, PL 3.11 Item 23, or associated
components.
DADH PWB
Refer to WD 5.1 and WD 5.2
If necessary, install a new DADH PWB, PL 5.10 Item 5, or associated components.

Scanner PWB
Refer to WD 6.1, WD 6.2 and WD 6.3
If necessary, install a new scanner PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8, or associated components.

Tray 5 Control PWB
February 2013
2-37
01L

If necessary, install a new tray 5 control PWB PL 75.68 Item 8, or associated components.
3 Tray Module PWB
Cleaning Unit PWB
If necessary, install a new 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4, or associated components
Refer to WD 8.1, WD 8.2, WD 8.3, WD 8.4 and WD 8.5.
If necessary, install a new media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5 or associated components.
Drum Driver PWB
Refer to WD 9.1, WD 9.2, WD 9.3 and WD 9.4.
If necessary, install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4, or associated components
IME Controller PWB
Refer to WD 1.1, WD 9.5, WD 9.6 and WD 9.7
If necessary, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1, or associated components.
Refer to WD 9.8
If necessary, install a new marking unit heater PWB, PL 92.10 Item 5, or associated components.
Refer to WD 9.9, WD 9.10, WD 9.11 and WD 9.12
If necessary, install a new marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4, or associated components.
Quad Wave Amp PWB
Refer to WD 9.13
If necessary, install a new quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item 3, or associated components.
Solenoid Patch PWB

If necessary, install a new reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10, or associated components.
Refer to WD 9.19
If necessary, install a new cleaning unit PWB, PL 94.10 Item 21, or associated components.
Printheads 1, 2, 3 and 4 PWBs

If necessary, install a new printhead 1, 2, 3 or 4 PWB, PL 91.20 Item 3 and PL 91.25 Item
3.
Refer to WD 9.22
If necessary, install a new IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1, or associated components.

LCSS PWB
The LCSS low voltage power comes from its own power supply module as shown in WD
12.1. Refer to WD 12.1, WD 12.2, WD 12.3, WD 12.4 and WD 12.5
If necessary, install a new LCSS power supply module, PL 12.75 Item 2, LCSS PWB, PL
12.75 Item 1, or associated components.
HVF Control PWB
The HVF low voltage power comes from its own power supply module as shown in WD
12.6. Refer to WD 12.6, WD 12.7, WD 12.8, WD 12.9, WD 12.10, WD 12.11, WD 12.12,
WD 12.13, WD 12.14 and WD 12.15
If necessary, install a new HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2, or associated components.

BM PWB (Booklet maker)
The BM low voltage power comes from the HVF power supply module as shown in WD
12.6. Refer to WD 12.6, WD 12.16, WD 12.17, WD 12.18 and WD 12.19.
If necessary, install a new BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10, or associated components.

Tri-folder PWB
The tri-folder low voltage power comes from the HVF power supply module as shown in
WD 12.6. Refer to WD 12.6 and WD 12.20
If necessary, install a new tri-folder PWB, PL 12.205 Item 16, or associated components.
Inserter PWB
The inserter low voltage power comes from the HVF power supply module as shown in
WD 12.14. Refer to WD 12.14, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22
If necessary, install a new inserter PWB, PL 12.310 Item 9, or associated components.

OCT PWB
Ink Load Entry PWB
The OCT low voltage power comes from the media path driver PWB, as shown in WD 8.5.
If necessary, install a new OCT, PL 12.00 Item 1, or media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item
5.

If necessary, install a new ink load entry PWB, PL 93.10 Item 8, or associated components.
01L
February 2013
2-38
02-302-00, 02-306-00, 02-308-00 Flash Failure RAP
02-315-00 Service Registry Bad Data RAP
02-302-00 Flash rewrite failure.
02-315-00 Service registry bad or corrupted data
02-306-00 Flash erase failure.
Procedure
WARNING
02-308-00 Flash download failure.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Switch the machine off, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
1.
February 2013
2-39
02-302-00, 02-306-00, 02-308-00, 02-315-00
02-316-00, 02-317-00 SRS Error RAP
02-320-00 Data Time Out Error RAP
02-316-00 SRS returns to LUI invalid fields, invalid data or missing data.
02-320-00 UI does not receive requested data from the CCM within the specified time out window.
02-317-00 LUI gets no response from SRS.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
02-316-00, 02-317-00, 02-320-00
February 2013
2-40
02-321-00 XEIP Browser Dead RAP
02-380-00, 02-381-00 UI Communication Fault RAP
02-321-00 The user interface has detected that the EIP (Extensible Interface Platform) browser
does not respond, or is known to be not working.
02-380-00 Communication via H-H USB net path connection between SBC and UI panel is not
working
Procedure
02-381-00 Communication via USB connection between SBC and UI panel is not working.
WARNING
CAUTION
Before a new user interface assembly is installed, identify the machine software level (GP 4).
Check the compatibility of the software on the new user interface assembly. Install the software
to meet the customer machine requirements. Use the Customer Administration Tool (CAT), GP
5.
Perform the following steps:
1.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Before a new user interface assembly is installed, identify the machine software level (GP 4).
Check the compatibility of the software on the new user interface assembly. Install the software
to meet the customer machine requirements. Use the Customer Administration Tool (CAT), GP
5.
Perform the following steps:
NOTE: If the UI is unavailable, the power down request cannot be confirmed. The
machine will power down automatically after 60 seconds.
2.
Ensure the Custom Services button is enabled on the user interface, as detailed in the
System Administrators Guide. If necessary, re-load the software set, GP 4 Machine Software.
3.
Check that the machine is communicating with the network, for example by sending a
print job. If necessary, check the network cable and check with the customer that their
network and web browser are running correctly.
4.
Refer to WD 3.1. Check the communications cable between PJ905 on the UI PWB and
PJ19 on the single board controller PWB. If necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1, or
install a new user interface harness, PL 2.10 Item 7. If necessary, install new components:
Single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13.
User interface control PWB, PL 2.10 Item 2.
1.

2.
Refer to WD 3.1. Check the communications cable between PJ905 on the UI PWB to
install a new user interface harness, PL 2.10 Item 7. If necessary, install new components:
February 2013
2-41
02-321-00, 02-380-00, 02-381-00
02-390-00 Configurable Services RAP

02-390-00 During power up all configurable services have not achieved a stable state after 5
minutes from power up.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
Reload the software set, GP 4 Machine Software.
02-390-00
February 2013
2-42
03-316-00 CCM Cannot Communicate with IOT RAP

03-316-00 The communications between the single board controller PWB through the media
path PWB and to the IME controller PWB have failed.
Initial Actions
WARNING
03-325-00 System Detects the Machine Clock Failed to

Increment During Power On RAP
03-325-00 The software has detected that the machine clock has failed to increment within 1.5
seconds during the power on self test operation.
Initial Actions
WARNING
If the fault occurs during a software upgrade, wait 15 minutes for the software programming operation to complete, before performing the next action.
Check the fault history file for other 03-xxx fault codes. If the 03-xxx fault codes occur randomly, the cause may be due to electrical noise. Go to OF 10 Intermittent Failure RAP.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Ensure all the connectors on the single board controller
PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13, media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5 and the IME controller
PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1 are correctly and securely seated. Switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
If the fault was detected during a software upgrade. Re-load the software set, GP 4
Machine Software.
3.
Refer to WD 3.3, WD 8.2, WD 8.4 and WD 9.5. Check the wiring between PJ20 on the
single board controller PWB and PJ402 on the media path driver PWB. Check the wiring
between PJ408 on the media path driver PWB and PJ402 on the IME controller PWB.
4.
NOTE: The machine may continue to boot with this fault, but printing may be disabled. The status code, 03-505 is raised with this fault code.
1.
2.
Re-load the software set, GP 4.
3.
Check the battery on the NVM module PWB, GP 45.
4.
Battery, PL 3.11 Item 18.
NVM module PWB, PL 3.11 Item 17.
SBC drawer service loop harness, PL 3.11 Item 16.
IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-43
03-316-00, 03-325-00
03-331-00, 03-332-00 Main Controller and Network

Controller on the SBC PWB Cannot Communicate RAP
03-338-00 The Main Controller on the SBC Has Reset RAP

03-338-00 System detects that the software in the single board controller PWB has been reset.
This was due either to the watch dog timing out or the software writing to an illegal address.
03-331-00 Integral network communication error on the single board controller PWB.
03-332-00 The main controller and network controller (integral components of the single board
controller PWB) were unable to communicate within a 12 minutes time span.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the fault history file for other 03-xxx fault codes. If the 03-xxx fault codes occur randomly, the cause may be due to electrical noise. Go to the OF 10 Intermittent Failure RAP.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
2.
Check the network connection to the single board controller PWB PJ14 is correctly
inserted.
3.
Re-load the software set, GP 4 Machine Software.
4.
1.
2.
3.
If the fault remains, install a new single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13.
03-331-00, 03-332-00, 03-338-00
February 2013
2-44
03-346-00 Unable To Communicate With UI RAP
03-347-00 Main Controller PWB Cannot Communicate with

UI PWB RAP
03-346-00 Unable to re-establish communication with the UI after 30 seconds.
03-347-00 The single board controller PWB to UI control PWB communications have failed.
Procedure
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
1.
2.
Reload the software set, GP 4 Machine Software.
Procedure
1.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Ensure all the connectors on the single board controller,
PL 3.11 Item 13 and the UI control PWB, PL 2.10 Item 2 are correctly and securely
seated. Switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
3.
Refer to WD 3.2. Check the wiring between PJ19 on the single board controller PWB and
PJ900, PJ901 and PJ905 on the User Interface control PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. If necessary, install a new user interface harness, PL 2.10 Item 7.
4.
February 2013
2-45
03-346-00, 03-347-00
03-355-00 CCM POST Failure Detected RAP
03-362-00 CCS Power Fault RAP
03-355-00 The software has detected a CCM POST failure during the NVM integrity test/NVM
battery failure.
03-362-00 The single board controller software has failed to exit from a timer loop and has
detected that this is caused by an abnormal power condition.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check that the battery on the NVM module PWB is located correctly and in good condition, GP 45.
Reseat the NVM module PWB, PL 3.11 Item 17.
Procedure
1.
2.
Check the wiring and connections between the power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2, the
power distribution PWB, PL 3.11 Item 1 and the single board controller PWB, PL 3.11
Item 13. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
3.
Go to the following RAPs and check the low voltage supplies to the single board controller
PWB:
Procedure
NOTE: The machine may continue to boot with this fault, but printing may be disabled. The status code, 03-505 is raised with this fault code.
1.
2.
Re-load the software set, GP 4.
3.
03-355-00, 03-362-00
01G +17V Distribution RAP.
01H +24V Distribution RAP.
As necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1, or install new components as necessary:
Power distribution PWB, PL 3.11 Item 1.
PDB to SBC Harness (PJ17), PL 3.11 Item 10.
February 2013
2-46
03-397-00 System Configuration Recovery Attempt RAP
03-398-00, 03-399-00 SIM Card Fault RAP
03-397-00 System configuration is lost and an attempted recovery made (from SIM).
03-398-00 SIM card serial number mismatch between the option and the machine
Initial Actions
03-399-00 SIM card data cannot be processed by the machine.
WARNING
Procedure
1.
2.
Check that the SIM card is installed.
3.
2.
Check that the machine serial number is correct, refer to dC132.
3.
Check that the SIM card is a valid option for this machine, GP 19. There is a mismatch
between the SIM card and the machine and the two are not compatible. Obtain a SIM
card that is compatible with this machine.
Check for damage to the SIM card:
NOTE: The SIM card is also referred to as the product enablement key.
Enter dC131.
Select CCS NVM ID 616-3 Product Configuration.
Check that the value is set to 112 or 113 or 114. If the value is set to 49, the SIM card
is missing or damaged. Obtain a SIM card that is compatible with this machine.
4.
5.
Check that the battery on the NVM module PWB is located correctly and in good condition, GP 45.
6.
Product enablement key, PL 3.11 Item 22.
Product enablement key, PL 3.11 Item 22.
Perform an NVM restore, refer to NVM Save and Restore, dC361.

If an NVM restore cannot be completed perform the following:
Set the market region. Enter dC134, set value to appropriate market region.
Enter Service Admin.

a.
9.
1.
NOTE: A pre-serialized SIM card will be required. Escalate the request through normal
channels.
Check that the SIM card is a valid option for this machine, GP 19. If there is a mismatch
between the SIM card and the machine then the two are not compatible. Obtain a SIM
card that is compatible with this machine.
8.
WARNING
4.
7.
Procedure
Press and hold the # key, * key and the Stop key.
b.
Enter the passcode 2732. Touch the Enter button on the UI.
c.
Select machine status / Paper Management / Tray Contents
d.
Set the tray 3 contents as appropriate to the machine location A4 or 8.5 x 11

inch.
Rest all counters and exit diagnostics.
February 2013
2-47
03-397-00, 03-398-00, 03-399-00
03-401-00, 03-403-00 Fax Not Detected RAP
03-417-00 Incompatible Fax Software RAP
03-401-00 The basic fax module has not been detected or confirmed.
03-417 The fax software version supplied at power up is not compatible with the image processing software.
03-403-00 Extended fax PWB has not been confirmed or detected. This is for information only.
The machine does not have an extended fax PWB.
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Perform the following:
2.
Check that the Fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1, has been installed.
Reload the software set, GP 4, Machine Software.
3.
Perform the Initial Actions in 20A Fax Entry RAP.
If necessary, install a new Fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1.
4.
Perform the 20G Fax Module Checkout RAP.
5.
If necessary, install a new Fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1.
6.
If necessary, re-load the software set, GP 4 Machine Software.
7.
03-401-00, 03-403-00, 03-417-00
February 2013
2-48
03-777-00 Power Loss Detected RAP

03-777-00 This fault code in the fault history file indicates that the system has previously
detected a power input loss.
Procedure
03-788-00 CCS Runtime Could Not Enter Power Saver

Mode S3 RAP
03-788 The copy control software could not enter power save mode. The copy control software
was unable to update its parameters from the UI, when the machine previously came out of
sleep mode. It was then unable to re-enter the sleep mode, S3.
WARNING
1.
Check with the customer that the AC mains (line) input power supply is not experiencing
interruptions.
2.
Check with the customer that the machine does not share a power supply with any other
equipment. Sharing a power supply may cause the safety over current device to switch off
the electrical supply to the machine. This would cause a 03-777-00 fault. If possible,
ensure the machine is connected to a dedicated power supply.
3.
4.
Go to 01A AC Power Distribution RAP and check the power input circuit and its connectors.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Refer to WD 3.1. Check the wiring between PJ19 on the single board controller PWB and
PJ900, PJ901 and PJ905 on the UI Control PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP
1.1.
4.
February 2013
2-49
03-777-00, 03-788-00
03-790-00 Timezone Cannot Be Set RAP
03A Foreign Device PWB Fault RAP
03-790-00 At power up the Timezone is not valid due to NVM corruption, or OS file system
problem. Timezone overridden to GMT: DST disabled.
Use this RAP when the foreign interface device is not detected.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
Reset the time zone in customer domain tools, refer to GP 5.
CAUTION
Do not show the customer how to install a temporary shorting link. Do not leave a shorting link
installed.

Ensure the foreign device interface PWB, PL 3.11 Item 14 is securely connected to the
single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13.
Procedure
If available check the operation of the foreign interface device with a foreign interface test tool,
PL 26.10 Item 14, in conjunction with the 7655/65/75 indicator/instruction chart.
To check a foreign interface device if the test tool is not available/suitable, perform the procedure that follows:
Refer to WD 3.3. Check the foreign device interface harness, PL 3.11 Item 23. The harness
is good.
Y
N
Perform the following as necessary:
Repair the harness, REP 1.1.

Install a new foreign device interface harness, PL 3.11 Item 23.
NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the harness from the bulkhead connector to the foreign
device.
Check the +3.3V supply to PJ25 at pins 1, 5, 9, 16 and 22 on the single board controller PWB.
The +3.3V supply is good.
Y
N
Check the +3.3V distribution. Refer to:

Disconnect the foreign device. Install a temporary shorting link between pins 2 and 3 on the
foreign device interface harness bulkhead connector. Check the voltage at pin 2. 0V is measured.
Y
N
Install a new foreign device interface PWB, PL 3.11 Item 14.
Install a temporary shorting link between pins 1 and 3 on the foreign device interface harness
bulkhead connector. Check the display. The machine is enabled.
Y
N
Install a new foreign device interface PWB, PL 3.11 Item 14.

The enable circuits are working correctly.
NOTE: Currently the signals used for billing, e.g. machine function, premium tray, etc. cannot
be adequately measured with a standard meter.
03-790-00, 03A
February 2013
2-50
05-250-00, 05-251-00 DADH Checksum Error RAP
05-252-00 DADH Stepper Controller Communications Error
05-250-00 The DADH flash memory is corrupted. A kernel checksum error has been detected.
05-252-00 DADH PWB to stepper motors communications have failed.
05-251-00 The DADH flash memory is corrupted. An application checksum error has been
detected.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
Procedure
1.
2.
WARNING
Procedure
1.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Ensure all the connectors on the DADH PWB, PL 5.10
Item 5, are correctly and securely seated. Switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
Refer to WD 5.1. Check the wiring between PJ181 on the DADH PWB and the feed
motor, PL 5.15 Item 16 and the CVT motor, PL 5.25 Item 9. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
3.
DADH feed motor, PL 5.15 Item 16.
DADH CVT motor, PL 5.25 Item 9.
DADH PWB, PL 5.10 Item 5.
February 2013
2-51
05-250-00, 05-251-00, 05-252-00
05-253-00, 05-254-00 DADH Communications Error RAP
05-255-00 Late Pre Scan Message RAP
05-253-00 The DADH PWB to single board controller PWB communications have failed.
05-255-00 The DADH pre scan status message was not received in time.
05-254-00 The DADH PWB to single board controller PWB communications are out of
sequence.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Procedure
1.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Ensure all the connectors on the DADH PWB, PL 5.10
Item 5, scanner PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8 and the single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item
13 are correctly and securely seated. Switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
If the fault was detected during a software upgrade. Re-load the software set, GP 4
Machine Software.
3.
Refer to WD 3.1, WD 5.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between PJ188 on the DADH
PWB and PJ921 on the scanner PWB. Check the wiring between PJ922 on the scanner
PWB and PJ15 on the single board controller PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP
1.1.
4.
DADH communication/power cable, PL 5.10 Item 6.
DADH/IIT power comms harness, PL 62.16 Item 7.
Scanner PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8.
05-253-00, 05-254-00, 05-255-00
February 2013
2-52
05-256-00 Eject Count Error RAP
05-257-00 Unknown Document Size RAP
05-256-00 The number of ejections from the DADH did not match the number of feeds.
05-257-00 The DADH has failed to detect the document size during pre-feed.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Make sure that a bright light is not above the DADH input tray. Refer to TAG D-007 and
check size sensor 1 and size sensor 2. If necessary, adjust the position of the machine.
Remove all documents from the DADH and input tray.
Make sure that the sensors and the area around the sensors are clean.
Procedure
NOTE: The DADH width sensor is a potentiometer. The arm on the potentiometer is attached
to the width guides. This gives a variable voltage to indicate the paper width setting.
Enter dC330 code 05-221 to check the DADH tray size sensor 1 Q05-221, PL 5.35 Item 8.
Actuate Q05-221. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 5.2. Check Q05-221.
References:
P/J190, DADH PWB.
DADH tray size sensor 1, PL 5.35 Item 8.
Enter dC330 code 05-222 to check the DADH tray size sensor 2 Q05-222, PL 5.35 Item 8.
Actuate Q05-222. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
P/J190, DADH PWB.
DADH tray size sensor 2, PL 5.35 Item 8.
Open the DADH top cover. Enter dC330 code 05-204 to check the DADH feed sensor, Q05204, PL 5.15 Item 2. Actuate Q05-204. The display changes.
February 2013
2-53
05-256-00, 05-257-00
N
References:
P/J184, DADH PWB.
DADH width sensor

Q05-095
DADH feed sensor, PL 5.15 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 05-206 to check the DADH pre-reg sensor, Q05-206, PL 5.25 Item 1. Actuate Q05-206. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
P/J184, DADH PWB.
Arm
DADH pre-reg sensor, PL 5.25 Item 1.
Completely open the DADH width guides. Refer to WD 5.2. Measure the voltage at P/J190 pin
8. Completely close the DADH width guides. The voltage changes from approximately 3.3V
to approximately 0V.
Y
N
Remove the DADH input tray assembly, PL 5.35 Item 1. Make sure the arm of the DADH
width sensor is installed correctly, Figure 1. Check the mechanical operation of the width
guides. Install new components as necessary:
DADH width sensor, PL 5.35 Item 11.
DADH input tray assembly, PL 5.35 Item 1.
Go to dC131. Check that the IIT DADH NVM parameters for the detection of the size of paper
are correct. Install new components as necessary:

05-257-00
February 2013
2-54
05-258-00, 05-307-00 DADH Cover Interlock Open RAP

Actuator
05-258-00 The DADH cover interlock switch detects that the top cover is open during initialization.
05-307-00 The DADH cover interlock switch detects that the top cover is open.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Remove all documents from the DADH.
Check the switch actuator on the DADH cover, Figure 1. If the actuator is damaged, install
a new DADH top cover, PL 5.20 Item 15.
Make sure the latch springs, PL 5.20 Item 7 are installed correctly. Make sure that the top
cover closes correctly. If necessary, install a new top access cover assembly, PL 5.20
Item 17.
Check that the EPC memory PWB, PL 3.11 Item 21, is correctly seated.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 05-212 to check the DADH cover interlock switch, Figure 1, S05-212. Actuate S05-212. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 5.1. Check S05-212.
References:
P/J187, DADH PWB.
DADH cover interlock switch,

S05-212
DADH cover interlock switch, PL 5.15 Item 11.
February 2013
2-55
05-258-00, 05-307-00
05-259-00, 05-260-00 DADH Active Line or Standby Error

RAP
05-259-00 The DADH active line is in the wrong state during the scan
05-300-00 DADH Open RAP

05-300-00 The platen down sensor detects that the DADH is open during run.
Initial Actions
WARNING
05-260-00 The DADH is not in standby at the start of the job.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the DADH platen down sensor magnet, PL 5.10 Item 10 is installed and aligned
correctly to the platen down sensor.
NOTE: The DADH has two magnets, the magnet on the left front corner of the DADH actuates
the platen down sensor, refer to PL 5.10 Item 10.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
Refer to WD 5.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between PJ188 on the DADH PWB and
PJ921 on the scanner PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
2.
Enter dC330 code 62-019 to check the platen down sensor, Q62-019, PL 62.16 Item 5. Open
and close the DADH. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
PJ927, Scanner PWB.
Platen down sensor, PL 62.16 Item 5.
Perform the steps that follow. Install new components as necessary:
05-259-00, 05-260-00, 05-300-00
Check that Q62-019 is installed correctly.
Check the DADH frame for distortion, go to ADJ 5.2. If the DADH frame is distorted, install
a new DADH, PL 5.10 Item 9.
February 2013
2-56
05-310-00 Document Too Short RAP
05-330-00, 05-331-00 DADH Feed Sensor Failure RAP
05-310-00 The DADH detects a document that is shorter than 110mm.
05-330-00 The DADH feed sensor does not detect the lead edge of the document within the
correct time after the feed motor runs.
Initial Actions
05-331-00 The DADH feed sensor does not detect the trail edge of the document within the
correct time.
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
Make sure that the documents are longer than 110 mm (4.3 inches).
Check for toner contamination on and in the locality of the DADH feed sensor Q05-204,
PL 5.15 Item 2.
Procedure
If the documents are longer than 110mm, go to the procedures that follow:
05-330-00, 05-331-00 CVT - DADH Feed Sensor Failure RAP.
05-335-00 DADH TAR Sensor Failure RAP.
05-350-00, 05-352-00 DADH CVT Sensor Failure RAP.
05-340-00 CVT-DADH Pre-Reg Sensor Failure RAP.
Make sure that the customer is not using damaged documents. If the DADH damages the
documents, go to the 05E Damaged Documents RAP.
Clean the DADH feed sensor, PL 5.15 Item 2, and the area around the sensor, Figure 2.
Check that the feed roll assembly is installed correctly, refer to REP 5.14.
Check that the CVT roll is installed correctly, refer to REP 5.15.
Make sure that the feed rolls are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4. If necessary,
install a new feed roll assembly, PL 5.15 Item 1 or feed roll assembly cover, PL 5.15 Item
21.
Go to dC135 CRU/HFSI Status. Check the count of the document feeder feed roller. If the
count is near end of life, install a new feed roll assembly, PL 5.15 Item 1.
Check the operation of the feed yoke, Figure 1. Make sure that the feed yoke shaft is
under the moulded clip of the feed housing. Make sure that the feed yoke spring, PL 5.15
Item 7 is connected to the feed housing and to the feed yoke.
Make sure that the front feed gate, PL 5.15 Item 12 and the rear feed gate, PL 5.15 Item
13 are locked in the down position.
Check the DADH CVT sensor and actuator for damage, PL 5.20 Item 12.
Procedure
Open the DADH top cover. Remove the DADH rear cover, PL 5.10 Item 1. Hold the DADH
cover interlock switch closed, PL 5.15 Item 11. Enter dC330 code 05-204 to check the DADH
feed sensor, Q05-204. Actuate Q05-204. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
P/J184, DADH PWB.
DADH feed sensor, PL 5.15 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 05-074 to run the DADH feed motor, MOT05-074. MOT05-074 runs.
February 2013
2-57
05-310-00, 05-330-00, 05-331-00
N
Go to the 05C DADH Motor Failure RAP.
Clip
While MOT 05-074 runs, stack the code 05-062 to energize the DADH feed clutch, CL05-062.
NOTE: The feed clutch disengages after 30 seconds. The feed motor stops after 3 minutes.
CL05-062 energizes, the nudger rolls and the feed rolls rotate.
Y
N
Go to the 05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP and check CL05-062.
ADJ 5.1 DADH Drive Belt Adjustment.
Feed yoke and

spring
Enter dC330 code 05-098, to run the DADH nudger motor. The feed roll assembly lowers,
then raises after 10 seconds.
Y
N
Refer to WD 5.1. Check the nudger motor.
References:
GP 10 How to Check a motor.
P/J183, DADH PWB and P/J201.
Feed yoke shaft
DADH nudger motor, PL 5.15 Item 5.
DADH feed assembly, PL 5.15 Item 18.
Check that the DADH feed sensor, Q05-204 is installed correctly, Figure 2. If necessary,
install a new feed roll assembly, PL 5.15 Item 1.
Ensure the feed motor drive belt and DADH CVT motor belt are tensioned correctly, ADJ
5.1.
When large documents are fed (A3 or 11x17 inch), check the items that follow:
Check that the DADH CVT motor rotates freely, refer to the 05C DADH Motor Failure
RAP.
Check the CVT motor drive belt, refer to ADJ 5.1 DADH Drive Belt Adjustment.
Check that the CVT roll is clean and rotates freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
If necessary install a new DADH feed motor, PL 5.25 Item 9.
Go to the 05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP and check CL05-062.
Make sure that the size of the documents are sensed correctly. Refer to the 05-257-00
Document Size Sensor Failure RAP.
Front and rear feed

gates
Front and rear

feed gates
05-330-00, 05-331-00
February 2013
2-58
05-335-00 DADH TAR Sensor Failure RAP

05-335-00 The DADH TAR sensor does not detect the lead edge of the document within the
correct time.
CVT motor MOT 05-099

Top cover interlock switch
Initial Actions
WARNING
Feed motor
MOT05-074
Feed clutch
CL05-062
Clean the feed rolls, refer to ADJ 5.4. If necessary, install a new feed roll assembly, PL
5.15 Item 1.
Procedure
NOTE: To get access to the DADH TAR sensor, remove the DADH top cover, PL 5.20 Item 15.
Open the DADH top cover. Enter dC330 code 05-096 to check the DADH TAR sensor, Q05096, PL 5.20 Item 11. Actuate Q05-096. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
01C +3.3V Distribution PWB.
P/J201
Nudger motor
MOT 05-098
DADH feed sensor

Q05-204
Feed roll assembly
DADH TAR sensor, PL 5.20 Item 11.
Remove the DADH rear cover, PL 5.10 Item 1. Hold the DADH cover interlock switch closed,
PL 5.15 Item 11. Enter dC330 code 05-074 to run the DADH feed motor, MOT05-074, PL 5.15
Item 16. MOT05-074 runs.
Y
N
The takeaway roll rotates.
Y
N
Perform the steps follow:
Check the feed motor drive belt, PL 5.35 Item 5.
ADJ 5.1 Feed Motor Drive Belt Adjustment.
Check the takeaway roll and pulley, PL 5.35 Item 6 and PL 5.35 Item 15, refer to GP
7.
Check that the DADH TAR sensor, Q05-096 is installed correctly.
Go to the 05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP and check the DADH feed clutch.
Make sure that the takeaway roll is clean and rotates freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
February 2013
2-59
05-330-00, 05-331-00, 05-335-00
Make sure that the takeaway roll idlers are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
05-340-00 DADH Pre Registration Sensor Failure RAP
Check the takeaway roll static eliminator and ground harness, PL 5.35 Item 7.
Make sure that the DADH ground harness is connected correctly, PL 5.10 Item 11.
05-340-00 The DADH pre registration sensor does not detect the lead edge of the document
within the correct time.
ADJ 5.1 Feed Motor Drive Belt Adjustment.
Initial Actions
DADH takeaway roll, PL 5.35 Item 6.
DADH top access cover assembly, PL 5.20 Item 17.
WARNING
If the fault continues, make sure that documents correctly continue past the previous sensor in
the document path. Refer to the 05-330-00, 05-331-00 DADH Feed Sensor Failure RAP.
Remove the DADH top cover assembly, PL 5.20 Item 16. Make sure the harnesses are
routed correctly and away from the document path, Figure 1.
Procedure
NOTE: To access the DADH pre registration sensor, remove the DADH top cover, PL 5.20 Item
15.
Open the top access cover assembly. Enter dC330 code 05-206 to check the DADH pre registration sensor, Q05-206, PL 5.25 Item 1. Actuate Q05-206. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
P/J186, DADH PWB.
01C +3.3V Distribution PWB.
DADH pre registration sensor, PL 5.25 Item 1.
PL 5.15 Item 11. Enter dC330 code 05-099 to check the DADH CVT motor, MOT05-099, PL
5.25 Item 9. MOT05-099 runs.
Y
N
The CVT roll rotates.
Y
N
Check the DADH CVT motor drive belt, PL 5.25 Item 11.
Check the DADH CVT motor tension spring. Make sure that the DADH CVT motor
drive belt tension is correct, ADJ 5.1.
Check the CVT roll pulley, PL 5.25 Item 17.
If necessary, install a new DADH CVT roll, PL 5.25 Item 5.

The fault only occurs in duplex mode.
05-335-00, 05-340-00
February 2013
2-60
05-345-00, 05-346-00 DADH Exit Sensor Failure RAP
N
Go to the Final Checkout.
This fault can be caused by the DADH feed motor running too slowly in reverse. Refer to the
05C DADH Motor Failure RAP. If the fault continues, go to Final Checkout.
Final Checkout
05-345-00 The DADH exit sensor does not detect the lead edge of the document within the
correct time in the forward mode.
05-346-00 The DADH exit sensor does not detect the trail edge of the document within the correct time in the forward mode.
Initial Actions
Check that Q05-206 is installed correctly, PL 5.25 Item 1.
Make sure that the CVT idler rolls are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Make sure that the CVT roll is clean, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Make sure the feed motor drive belt and the DADH CVT motor drive belt are tensioned
correctly, ADJ 5.1.
WARNING
DADH CVT roll, PL 5.25 Item 5.
DADH top access cover assembly, PL 5.20 Item 17.
If the fault continues, make sure that documents correctly exit the previous sensor in the document path. Refer to the 05-350-00, 05-352-00 DADH CVT Sensor Failure RAP.
Remove all documents from the DADH exit tray. Raise the DADH, remove all documents
that are wound around the CVT roll.
Make sure that the customer has set the document width guides correctly.
Procedure
NOTE: The DADH exit sensor is a reflective type sensor.
Ground harness
Enter dC330 code 05-209 to check the DADH exit sensor, Q05-209, PL 5.30 Item 13. Raise
the DADH. Actuate Q05-209. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
P/J189, DADH PWB.
DADH pre registration

sensor Q05-206
Sensor harness
DADH exit sensor, PL 5.30 Item 13.
Close the DADH. Open the DADH top cover. Remove the DADH rear cover, PL 5.10 Item 1.
Hold the DADH cover interlock switch closed. Enter dC330 code 05-099 to run the DADH CVT
motor, MOT05-099, PL 5.25 Item 9. MOT05-099 runs.
Y
N
Y
N
Check the DADH CVT motor DADH CVT motor drive belt, PL 5.25 Item 11.
Check the DADH CVT motor tension spring, PL 5.25 Item 10. Make sure the DADH
CVT motor drive belt tension is correct, ADJ 5.1.

A
February 2013
2-61
05-340-00, 05-345-00, 05-346-00
A
NOTE: The exit roll idlers remain lowered for 30 seconds.
Final Checkout
Enter dC330 code 05-100 to energize the DADH duplex solenoid, SOL05-100, PL 5.30 Item 3,
to lower the exit roll idlers PL 5.30 Item 6. The exit roll idlers lower.
Y
N
Refer to WD 5.1. Check SOL05-100.

References:
GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Check the baffle assembly link arm, PL 5.30 Item 11. Make sure that the link arm is
connected correctly to the DADH duplex solenoid, refer to REP 5.5.
DADH duplex solenoid, PL 5.30 Item 3.
Lower baffle assembly, PL 5.30 Item 14.
Enter dC330 code 05-074 to run the DADH feed motor, MOT05-074, PL 5.15 Item 16.
MOT05-074 runs.
Y
N
Check that the pre-scan idlers are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Check that the post-scan idlers are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Check the CVT ramp assembly for damage and rough edges, PL 62.10 Item 5.
Check the duplex gate for damage and rough edges, PL 5.25 Item 12.
Check that the DADH exit sensor, Q05-209 is installed correctly, PL 5.30 Item 13.
Make sure the DADH feed motor drive belt and DADH CVT motor drive belt are tensioned correctly, ADJ 5.1.
For 05-345-00 and 05-346-00 faults:
Top access cover assembly, PL 5.20 Item 17.
For 05-346-00 faults:
Make sure that the exit rolls are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Make sure that the exit roll idlers are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Make sure the tension springs on the exit roll shaft are in the correct position, refer to
REP 5.5
Check the exit roll static eliminator and ground harness, PL 5.35 Item 7.
Check the restack arm for damage or rough edges, PL 5.35 Item 3.

The exit roll rotates.
Y
N
Check the feed motor drive belt, PL 5.35 Item 5.
Check the feed motor tension spring, PL 5.15 Item 17. Check the feed motor drive
belt tension, ADJ 5.1.
Check the exit roll and pulley, PL 5.35 Item 6 and PL 5.35 Item 15.
DADH exit roll, PL 5.35 Item 6.
If the fault continues, make sure that all documents correctly exit the previous sensor in the
document path. Refer to the 05-340-00 DADH Pre-Reg Sensor Failure RAP.
If necessary, install a new DADH input tray assembly, PL 5.35 Item 1.

The fault only occurs in duplex mode.
Y
N
NOTE: During normal operation, the exit roll idlers remain raised (closed) in simplex mode. In
duplex mode, the exit roll idlers remain raised unless the document is longer than 280 mm (11
inches). The exit roll idlers raise and lower while feeding longer documents in duplex mode.
Exit diagnostics mode. Close the DADH top cover. Make two copies in duplex mode. Check
that the second document is held in the feed rolls, PL 5.15 Item 1, until the first document is fed
into the output tray. The feed rolls held the second document.
Y
N
Go to the 05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP.
05-345-00, 05-346-00
February 2013
2-62
05-350-00, 05-352-00 DADH CVT Sensor Failure RAP
05-350-00 The DADH CVT sensor does not detect the lead edge of the document within the
correct time in the forward mode.
05-352-00 The DADH CVT sensor does not detect the lead edge of the document within the
correct time in the reverse mode.
Initial Actions
WARNING
N
NOTE: The exit roll idlers remain lowered for 30 seconds.

Enter dC330 code 05-100 to check the DADH duplex solenoid, SOL05-100. Energize SOL05100 to lower the exit roll idlers, PL 5.35 Item 6. The exit roll idlers lower.
Y
N
Refer to WD 5.1. Check SOL05-100.
References:
P/J181, DADH PWB.
Procedure
NOTE: To get access to the DADH CVT sensor, remove the DADH top cover, PL 5.20 Item 15.
Enter dC330 code 05-097 to check the DADH CVT sensor Q05-097, PL 5.20 Item 12. Actuate
Q05-097. The display changes.
Y
N
References:
P/J186 and P/J191, DADH PWB.
DADH duplex solenoid, PL 5.30 Item 3.
NOTE: During normal operation, the exit roll idlers remain raised (closed) in simplex mode. In
duplex mode, the exit roll idlers remain raised unless the document is longer than 280 mm (11
inches). The exit roll idlers raise and lower while feeding longer documents in duplex mode.
Exit the diagnostics mode. Close the DADH top cover. Make two copies in duplex mode.
Check that the second document is held in the feed rolls until the first document is fed into the
output tray. The feed rolls held the second document.
Y
N
Go to the 05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP.
DADH CVT sensor, PL 5.20 Item 12.
The fault is caused if the DADH feed motor runs too slowly in reverse, refer to the 05C DADH
Motor Failure RAP. If the fault continues, go to the Final Checkout.
Final Checkout
PL 5.15 Item 11. Enter dC330 code 05-099 to check the DADH CVT motor, MOT05-099, PL
5.25 Item 9. MOT05-099 runs.
Y
N
Y
N
Perform the steps that follow. Install new components as necessary:
Check that the CVT roll is clean and rotates freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Check the DADH CVT sensor, PL 5.20 Item 12 is installed correctly.
Check the takeaway roll static eliminator and ground harness, PL 5.35 Item 7.
Make sure the feed motor drive belt tension is correct, ADJ 5.1.
If the fault continues, make sure that documents correctly exit the previous sensor in the document path. Refer to the 05-335-00 DADH TAR Sensor Failure RAP.
Check the DADH CVT motor drive belt, PL 5.25 Item 11.
Check the DADH CVT motor tension spring. Make sure that the DADH CVT motor
drive belt tension is correct, ADJ 5.1.

The fault only occurs in duplex mode (fault code 05-352-00).
February 2013
2-63
05-350-00, 05-352-00
05A DADH Other Faults RAP
05B DADH Document Sensor Failure RAP
This RAP gives the additional information on common DADH problems. Perform the RAP for
all current fault codes before this RAP is performed.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Clean the DADH document sensor, PL 5.35 Item 19 and the area around the sensor.
The DADH document sensor can fail to detect the last document in a document set if
static electricity is on the input tray. If necessary, clean the input tray with antistatic fluid,
refer to ADJ 5.4.
Go to the correct RAP:
05B DADH Document Sensor Failure RAP.
05C DADH Motor Failure RAP.
05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP.
05E Damaged Documents RAP.
05F Platen Down Failure RAP.
Procedure
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 05-102 to check the DADH document sensor, Q05-102, PL 5.35 Item 19.
The display changes.
Y
N
References:
P/J184, DADH PWB.
DADH document sensor, PL 5.35 Item 19.
If the problem continues, install new components as necessary:
05A, 05B
DADH document sensor, PL 5.35 Item 19.
February 2013
2-64
05C DADH Motor Failure RAP
05D DADH Feed Clutch Failure RAP
Procedure
Use this RAP when the DADH feed clutch does not operate correctly.
WARNING
Also use this RAP if the feed clutch energizes at the wrong time in duplex mode, which causes:
Mis-feeds.
The feed rolls to reverse and eject the original documents into the DADH input tray.
Procedure
Go to the correct procedure:
DADH Feed Motor Failure
WARNING
DADH CVT Motor Failure
DADH Feed Motor Failure
NOTE: In duplex mode, the DADH feed motor runs in the forward and reverse direction. The
duplex mode component control code is provided to reverse the drive of the feed motor.
Refer to WD 5.1. Check the DADH feed clutch, CL05-062, PL 5.15 Item 9.
NOTE: When referring to WD 5.1, the Motor on (pulses) +24V indicated on PJ204, will read
+12V on a digital meter.
References:
References:
GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
DADH feed clutch, PL 5.15 Item 9, or the alternative DADH feed clutch and spacer kit W/
TAG D-005, PL 5.15 Item 28.
Refer to WD 5.1. Check the DADH feed motor, MOT05-074, PL 5.15 Item 16.
DADH feed motor, PL 5.15 Item 16.
DADH CVT Motor Failure

Refer to WD 5.1. Check the DADH CVT motor, MOT05-099, PL 5.25 Item 9.
NOTE: When referring to WD 5.1, the Motor on (pulses) +24V indicated on PJ203, will read
+12V on a digital meter.
References:
DADH CVT motor, PL 5.25 Item 9.
February 2013
2-65
05C, 05D
05E Damaged Documents RAP

Use this RAP if the documents get damaged by the DADH.
Baffle assembly
Procedure
WARNING
Duplex gate

1.
If the DADH damages the underside of the documents mid-way along the lead edge,
install a new feed roll assembly, PL 5.15 Item 1.
2.
ADJ 5.2 DADH height adjustment.
3.
Check the input tray for damage, PL 5.35 Item 1.
4.
5.
CVT roll
Make sure that the document width guides move freely.
Check that the takeaway roll assembly, PL 5.35 Item 17 and exit roll assembly, PL
5.35 Item 6 for damage and contamination, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Check the restack arm for damage, PL 5.35 Item 3.
Open the DADH top access cover assembly, PL 5.20 Item 17.
Check the document path for damage.
Check the takeaway roll idlers and CVT roll idlers, PL 5.20 Item 3 for damage. Make
sure the idlers are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Post scan idlers
Raise the DADH. Lower the baffle assembly, Figure 1.
Remove any pieces of paper.
Check the duplex gate, PL 5.25 Item 12 for damage. Make sure the duplex gate
moves freely.
Check the CVT roll, PL 5.25 Item 5 for damage. If necessary, clean the CVT roll,
ADJ 5.4.
Check the pre-scan idlers, PL 5.25 Item 6 and post scan idlers, PL 5.30 Item 4 for
damage. Make sure the idlers are clean and rotate freely, refer to ADJ 5.4.
Check the document path for damage.
Check the baffle assembly, PL 5.30 Item 14 for damage.
Check the exit roll idlers for damage, PL 5.30 Item 6. Make sure the idlers are clean
and rotate freely, ADJ 5.4.
6.
Check the CVT ramp assembly, PL 62.10 Item 5 for damage.
7.
Make sure that the customers documents are within the specification, refer to GP 20.
05E
February 2013
2-66
Pre-scan idlers
05F Platen Down Failure RAP

Use this RAP when the platen down sensor does not respond to opening and closing the
DADH.
Procedure
Go to 05-300-00 DADH Open RAP.
February 2013
2-67
05F
05F
February 2013
2-68
10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,

10-148-00 Post Transfix Jam RAP
10-110-00 Timing sensor 11 detects that the sheet is too long.
Procedure
If glossy media is used, instruct the customer to feed the media from the bypass tray and
select glossy for the media type.
Refer to Figure 1. Lower the drum stripper gate and baffle assembly, GP 31. Check that the
stripper blade shaft is installed correctly. Slide the shaft forwards and backwards and feel for
the shaft to engage on the detent. Raise the stripper blade into the operating position. Check
that the stripper blade shaft lock is engaging correctly at the front and rear. The
stripper
blade latch mechanism is good.
Y
N
Install new stripper components as necessary, PL 10.10, PL 10.12.
10-111-00 Timing sensor 11 detects that the sheet is too short.

10-112-00 The lead edge is late to timing sensor 11.
10-113-00 The trail edge is late from timing sensor 11.
Check the drum stripper blade timing. Print three copies of TP 14 Drum Stripper Blade Test
Page. Stripper blade timing is good.
Y
N
Check the stripper solenoid SOL10-021 PL 10.10 Item 3. Refer to 10-570-00 Stripper
Solenoid Over Current RAP.

10-127-00 The lead edge was late to timing sensor 12.
10-128-00 The trail edge was late from timing sensor 12.
Cheat the front door interlock. Enter dC330 code 10-018 to run the post transfix motor (M4), PL
10.10 Item 5. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.2. Check the post transfix motor (M4). Refer to:
10-147-00 The lead edge is early to timing sensor 11.

Initial Actions
WARNING
PJ303, Media path driver PWB.
01J +50V Distribution RAP.
WARNING
Post transfix motor (M4), PL 10.10 Item 5.
WARNING
Observe roller drive J, PL 10.10 Item 1 and roller drive L, PL 10.10 Item 2. The rollers rotate.
Y
N
Check the gear drive, drive gears and roller drives, PL 10.10.
If necessary, install new components:
Check that the media loaded into the trays matches the UI display.
Check for obstructions in the paper path.
Drive gears, PL 10.10 Item 13.
Check the jam clearance guide 3b is latched correctly, PL 10.12 Item 1.
Gear drive, PL 10.10 Item 4.
Ensure that the springs for both the front and rear latch forks, PL 10.10 Item 14, are not
broken or fallen off.
Roller drive J, PL 10.10 Item 1.
Roller drive L, PL 10.10 Item 2.
Ensure that the springs are orientated the correct way. The longer end hook of the spring
should be hooked from under the stripper cam, PL 10.10 Item 18.
If the displayed fault code is 10-112-00, check the transfix stripper blade, PL 10.20 Item
14 for damage. Refer to REP 10.6 Transfix Blade. Install new components as required.
Go to dC135 CRU/HFSI Status. Check the count of the transfix stripper. If the count is
near end of life, install a new transfix stripper blade, PL 10.20 Item 14.
Unlatch the stripper gate, GP 31. Enter dC330 code 10-015, post transfix sensor (11), Q10015, PL 10.10 Item 6. Manually actuate Q10-015. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 9.3. Check the post transfix sensor (11), Q10-015. Refer to:
If the displayed fault code is 10-112-00, check the drum stripper blade assembly, PL
10.12 Item 3 for damage or contamination. Refer to REP 10.21 Stripper Blade, Gate and
Baffle. Install new components as required.
PJ802, Drum driver PWB.
Check for multifeeds. If there are multifeeds, refer to the OF 8 Multifeed RAP.
A
February 2013
2-69
10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-
Post transfix sensor (11), PL 10.10 Item 6.
B
Run dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration. If the fault persists, check the following:
Enter dC330 code 10-016 pre exit sensor (12), Q10-016, PL 10.10 Item 6. Manually actuate
Q10-016. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 9.3. Check the pre exit sensor (12), Q10-016. Refer to:

Pre exit sensor (12), PL 10.10 Item 6.
Detent in shaft
Closed
Stripper blade lock

(Front and rear)
Enter dC330 code 82-007 to energize the nip C release solenoid, SOL82-007, PL 82.15 Item
4. SOL82-007 energizes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.1. Check the nip C release solenoid, SOL82-007. Refer to:
Open
Nip C release solenoid, PL 82.15 Item 4.
Enter dC330 code 82-008 to energize the nip D release solenoid, SOL82-008, PL 70.30 Item
13, SOL82-008 energizes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.3. Check the nip D release solenoid, SOL82-008. Refer to:
Stripper blade shaft
Figure 1 Component Location
Nip D release solenoid, PL 70.30 Item 13.
Re-enter the dC330 codes 82-007 and 82-008. Check that nip C and nip D open fully and close
fully when the solenoids energize and de-energize. The nips operate correctly.
Y
N
Check for obstructions. Install new components as necessary:
Horizontal paper path components, PL 82.15.
Left hand upper door components, PL 70.30.
B
10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-
February 2013
2-70
A
Enter dC330 code 83-006 exit duplex diverter solenoid, SOL83-006, PL 10.15 Item 14. Press
Start. SOL83-006 energizes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.1. Check SOL83-006. Refer to:
10-140-00 to 10-146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00 Exit Jam

RAP
10-142-00 Timing sensor 15 detects that the sheet is too long after invert.
10-143-00 Timing sensor 15 detects that the sheet is too short after invert.
10-145-00 The trail edge is late from timing sensor 15.

10-150-00 The lead edge is early to timing sensor 15 after invert.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the jam clearance guide 3b and 4a are latched correctly
Check for multifeeds. If there are multifeeds, refer to the OF 8 Multifeed Rap.
If glossy media is used, instruct the customer to feed the media from the bypass tray and
select glossy for the media type.
Cheat the front door interlock. Enter dC330 code 10-017 exit sensor (15), Q10-017, PL 10.15
Item 3. Raise and lower handle 4a to actuate Q10-017. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.5. Check Q10-017. Refer to:
Exit / duplex diverter solenoid, PL 10.15 Item 14.
Enter dC330 code 83-001 exit motor (M5), MOT83-001. MOT83-001 runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.2. Check MOT83-001. Refer to:
Procedure
Check that the media loaded into the trays matches the UI display.
Enter dC330 code 10-018 Post transfix motor (M4) MOT10-018. MOT10-018 runs.
Y
N
10-151-00 The trail edge is late from timing sensor 15 after invert.
The diverter gate moves and retracts freely within one second.
Y
N
Check the operation and condition of the diverter gate. If necessary install new diverter
gate components, PL 10.15, or install a new exit paper path assembly, PL 10.15 Item 19,
as necessary.
10-146-00 The lead edge is late to timing sensor 15 after invert.
10-144-00 The lead edge is late to timing sensor 15.
Exit motor (M5), PL 10.15 Item 11.
The exit paper path rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the drive belt, pulleys and drive gears on the exit paper path assembly, PL 10.15.
Exit sensor (15), PL 10.15 Item 3.
Roller nip N, PL 10.15 Item 1.
Roller nip P, PL 10.15 Item 6.
Pulley 3 mm driven, PL 10.15 Item 7.
A
B
February 2013
2-71
10-140-00 to 10-146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
Belt 3 mm (112T), PL 10.15 Item 8.
10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP
Belt 3 mm (92T), PL 10.15 Item 9.
10-500-00 Insufficient force is detected by the front transfix flexure encoder.
Pulley 3 mm (21T one way), PL 10.15 Item 10.
Drive gear, PL 10.15 Item 12.
10-505-00 Insufficient force is detected by the rear transfix flexure encoder.
Check the following:
The bearings, shafts and rolls on the exit paper path assembly, PL 10.15.
10-511-00 The transfix load timing error.
Roller nip N, PL 10.15 Item 1.
10-512-00 Transfix unloading is not detected in time.
Roller nip P, PL 10.15 Item 6.
10-516-00 Transfix flexure encoder reading does not change during transfix homing (for possible future use).
10-517-00 Transfix out of position during unload (for possible future use).
10-521-00 Transfix load front position error.
10-522-00 Transfix load rear position error.
10-523-00 Transfix unload front position error.
10-524-00 Transfix unload rear position error.
10-525-00 Transfix motor failure.
10-530-00 Transfix gap set failure.
10-535-00 The transfix load gain/offset calibration is inconsistent with expected value.
10-536-00 Transfix calibration NVM reset error.
10-537-00 The front transfix flexure encoder did not reach home position on time.
10-538-00 The rear transfix flexure encoder did not reach home position on time.
10-540-00 The transfix task was late.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the ground wire is connected at the front of the transfix roller.
Procedure
Enter dC978 Transfix Calibration Values. Check the calibration values against the label on the
front of the drum frame, Figure 1. The calibration values match.
Y
N
Enter the correct transfix load values in NVM. Run test prints to verify that the problem is
corrected. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A
10-140-00 to 10-146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00, 10-
February 2013
2-72
A
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Use a screwdriver to manually rotate the transfix gear, Figure
2. This action will move the transfix roller. Move the transfix roller onto, then off the drum. Perform the action at the front and rear.
Check that the transfix mechanisms operate smoothly. Watch for the transfix roller or
encoder moving up and down. Check that the effort to move the front and rear transfix
mechanisms is similar.
Transfix motor, PL 10.20 Item 11.
NOTE: The transfix motors will give some resistance to movement. If the transfix mechanisms move without any resistance, this indicates a problem.
While the transfix roller is away from the drum, spin the roller. Check that the roller spins
freely without binding or generating unusual noise.
Check that the gear train and the transfix bearings are good. Check for excessive movement between the linkage arm and the pin. This is caused by missing or worn bushing
inside the front or rear transfix linkage assembly, PL 10.20 Item 8 and PL 10.20 Item 10.
The transfix components are good.

Y
N
Install new transfix components as necessary, PL 10.20.
Enter dC962 Transfix Load Test and run the test. The transfix load test passed.
Y
N
If errors are indicated, check out the fault description displayed.
If the fault still occurs, perform the following:
1.
For fault codes 10-500 or 10-505, make sure that the relevant transfix encoder screws are
tight and the relevant transfix encoder is secured to the frame.
2.
Recheck the fault code description, use it to aid in identifying which link assembly is at
fault. Inspect for worn or damaged gears and check for a cracked linkage. Install new
components as necessary:
Switch on the machine, GP 14. Check dC123 PEST Fault History if a fault is displayed. Enter
dC140 Analog Monitor. Use a screwdriver to manually rotate the front and rear transfix gears.
Monitor all encoders:
10-010 Rear transfix flexure encoder.
10-011 Rear transfix motor encoder.
10-012 Front transfix flexure encoder.
10-013 Front transfix motor encoder.
Manually move the front and rear flexure encoder harness wires. A good encoder is indicated by a value between 5 and 100 ticks.
3.
Front compound gear, PL 10.20 Item 7.
Front transfix linkage assembly, PL 10.20 Item 8.
Rear compound gear, PL 10.20 Item 9.
Rear transfix linkage assembly, PL 10.20 Item 10.
Check the transfix roll ground wire, refer GP 7 System Grounding Verification.
If more than 100 ticks, check for loose encoder or intermittent short.
If less than 5 ticks, check for open or missing code strip.
Repair the harness as required, REP 1.1.
The display changes for all encoders.
Y
N
Refer to WD 9.1 and WD 9.3. Check and the wiring between the drum driver PWB and the
relevant transfix flexure motor encoder. Repair as necessary. REP 1.1. Refer to:
PJ 401, PJ 501, PJ 801, Drum Driver PWB.
Calibration label for front and

rear transfix values
Figure 1 Calibration label
If the wiring is good, install new components as necessary:
Transfix flexure encoder, PL 10.20 Item 5.
Enter dC330 codes 10-019 and 10-020 to run the front and rear transfix motors. When the
motors run the transfix drive arms will move up and down approximately 10 times. The
motors run.
Y
N
Refer to WD 9.1. Check the relevant motor. Refer to:

B
February 2013
2-73
10-500-00 to 10-540-00
10-545-00 Drum Position Error for Transfix RAP

10-545-00 The drum was not at the correct position to start the transfix operation.
Rear transfix motor and
encoder
Initial Actions
WARNING
Rear transfix flexure

encoder
CAUTION
Use care when working near the drum. The drum can be damaged easily, which will cause
print quality defects.
Front transfix motor and

encoder
Check for damage or debris that restricts drum or drum encoder movement.
Procedure
Install a new IME Controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
Screwdriver slot (also at

rear)
Front transfix flexure

encoder
Figure 2 Transfix component locations
10-500-00 to 10-540-00, 10-545-00
February 2013
2-74
10-550-00 Drum Stall During Transfix RAP
10-555-00 Post Transfix Motor (M4) Over Current RAP
10-550-00 The drum stalled during transfix.
10-555-00 The post transfix motor M4 is taking too much current.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Check that the print media loaded into all of the trays matches the UI display for each tray. If
necessary correct the settings or load the correct media.
NOTE: Media that is too thick will cause drive errors if the machine is not expecting thick
media. For media specification refer to GP 20
Procedure
1.
GP 7 System Ground Check.
2.
dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration.
3.
If the fault remains, go to the 94-534-0094-526-00 Drum Drive Belt Slip RAP.
WARNING
Manually rotate roller drives J and L, Figure 1. Check that the rollers rotate freely and are free
of defects or debris. The rollers are good.
Y
N
Clean the rollers, GP 27 or install new rollers PL 10.10 Item 1 and PL 10.10 Item 2.
Enter dC330 10-018 to run the post transfix motor (M4), (MOT10-018), PL 10.10 Item 5. The
motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.2. Check the post transfix motor (M4). Refer to:
Post transfix motor (M4), PL 10.10 Item 5
If the error persists, install new components as necessary.
Post transfix motor (M4), PL 10.10 Item 5
February 2013
2-75
10-550-00, 10-555-00
10-560-00, 10-565-00 Transfix Motor Over Current RAP

10-560-00 Front transfix motor over current.
Roller drive J
Post transfix motor
10-565-00 Rear transfix motor over current.
Procedure
Refer to the 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP.
Roller drive L
10-555-00, 10-560-00, 10-565-00
February 2013
2-76
10-570-00 Stripper Solenoid Over Current RAP

Stripper blade lock
(Front and rear)
10-570-00 Stripper solenoid over current.
Detent in shaft
Initial Actions
WARNING
Closed
WARNING
WARNING
Check the harness leading to the stripper solenoid, PL 10.10 Item 3.
Procedure
Open
Refer to Figure 1. Lower the stripper gate and baffle assembly, GP 31. Check that the stripper
blade shaft is installed correctly. Slide the shaft forwards and backwards and feel for the shaft
to engage on the detent. Raise the stripper blade into the operating position. Check that the
stripper blade shaft lock is engaging correctly at the front and rear. The stripper blade latch
mechanism is good.
Y
N
Install new stripper components as necessary, PL 10.10, PL 10.12.
Stripper blade shaft
Enter dC330 code 10-021 to energize the stripper solenoid, SOL10-021, PL 10.10 Item 3.
The solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 9.2. Check the stripper solenoid. Refer to:
GP 12, How to Check a Solenoid.
P/J601, Drum driver PWB.
Stripper solenoid assembly, PL 10.10 Item 3.
Check for obstructions that could prevent the stripper solenoid from engaging the stripper
blade. Install new components as necessary, PL 10.10, PL 10.12.
February 2013
2-77
10-570-00
10-571-00, 10-572-00 Stripper Latch Sensor Error RAP
10-571-00 Stripper latch sensor time out.
Check all components in the stripper system for damage, PL 10.10. Pay special attention to:
10-572-00 Stripper latch bad sensor state.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Front latchfork, PL 10.10 Item 11
Back latchfork, PL 10.10 Item 12.
Return spring, PL 10.10 Item 14.
Stripper latch cam, PL 10.10 Item 15.
Install new components as necessary, PL 10.10.
WARNING
WARNING
Unlatch, then fully latch the stripper blade, GP 31.
Procedure
Enter the dC330 code 10-014 to monitor the stripper latch sensor, PL 10.10 Item 17. Stack
dC330 code 10-023 to run the post transfix motor (M4), PL MOT10-018, PL 10.10 Item 5 in
reverse to latch the stripper gate. MOT10-018 runs.
Y
N
GP 10, How to Check a Motor.
P/J303, Media Path Driver PWB.
Stack the code 10-025 to run the post transfix motor (M4) to unlatch the stripper gate. The
sensor display changes.
Y
N
Remove the post transfix motor (M4) and the gear drive, refer to REP 10.8. Check for
damage. The gear drive is good.
Y
N
Refer to WD 9.3. Check the stripper latch sensor, Q10-014. Refer to:
GP 11, How to Check a Sensor
P/J801 Drum driver PWB.
Stripper latch sensor, PL 10.10 Item 17.
A
10-571-00, 10-572-00
February 2013
2-78
12-701-00-65 Offset Catch Tray Failure RAP

12-701 The offset catch tray (OCT) fails to offset the paper stack.
Sensor actuator
Initial Actions
WARNING
OCT index sensor

Q12-212
Check that the offset catch tray is correctly installed and there is no obstruction to prevent
movement between offset positions. If the tray is damaged, install a new OCT PL 12.00
Item 1.
OCT feed offset motor

MOT12-300
Procedure
1.
Go to WD 12.23, check the OCT wiring.
2.
Repair the wiring or install a new OCT, PL 12.00 Item 1.
3.
4.
Check the OCT feed offset motor, Figure 1.
5.
Check the gears and rack for damage, rotational failure and foreign material.
6.
Check the OCT index sensor, Figure 1.
7.
Check the OCT tray 90% full sensor, Figure 1.
8.
Check the communication link between the OCT and the media path driver board PWB,
WD 8.5 and WD 12.23.
9.
Check the sensor actuator.
OCT module, PL 12.00 Item 1
OCT tray 90% full sensor

Q12-211
February 2013
2-79
12-701-00-65
12-701-00-65
February 2013
2-80
12-024-00-110, 12-025-00-110 Paddle Roll Failure RAP
P/J310, LCSS PWB.
12-024-00-110 The paddle is not at the home position.
12D-110 LCSS Power Distribution RAP
12-025-00-110 The paddle fails to rotate.
NOTE: The paddle is in the home position when the sensor flag is located between the sensor
jaws. If a jam occurs in the compiler, bin 1 will not be available.
NOTE: With reference to WD 12.3 component control codes;
Code 12-237 drives the paddle roll motor until the paddle wheel shaft assembly is at the home
position.
Code 12-238 runs the paddle roll motor.
Initial Actions
Paddle roll motor, PL 12.25 Item 10.
Enter dC330 code 12-238 and stack the code 12-186, to actuate the paddle roll motor home
sensor Q12-186. The display cycles high/low.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.4. Check Q12-186.
Refer to:
WARNING
GP 11, How to Check a Sensor.
P/J314, LCSS PWB.
WARNING
Paddle roll motor home sensor, PL 12.25 Item 11.

That there is no paper or other obstructions in the vicinity of the paddle.
The paddle roll position sensor bracket is holding the sensor in the correct position, i.e.
the flag is in the middle of the sensor gap and the sensor does not touch any moving components.
Check that the paper type is set correctly. If heavyweight paper is used but not set in the
UI, the compiler capacity can be exceeded. Refer to 12J-110 Mis-Registration in Stapled
Sets and Non-stapled Sets RAP.
Check the position of the paddles. With the paddle roll in the home position both sets of
paddles must be within the output cover, if they are not, refer to REP 12.12-110 Paddle
Wheel Shaft Assembly. If any of the paddles are out of alignment to other paddles, install
a new paddle wheel shaft assembly, PL 12.25 Item 4 or a new paddle, PL 31.10 Item 4.
LCSS PWB DIP switch settings, refer to 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch Settings RAP.
Procedure
NOTE: All LCSS interlocks must be made to supply +24V to the motors.
NOTE: In diagnostics, actuating any LCSS sensor or switch can change the displayed state on
the UI. Make sure that the correct sensor or switch is tested.
Run the paddle roll motor MOT 12-238, PL 12.25 Item 10. Enter dC330 codes 12-237 paddle
roll motor home position and 12-238 paddle roll motor run. The paddle rotates correctly.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.3. Check the paddle roll motor MOT12-238.
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-81
12-024-00-110, 12-025-00-110
12-043-00-110, 12-046-00-110 Hole Punch Operation Failure

RAP
12-043-00-110 The hole punch fails to perform a punch cycle.
12-046-00-110 The hole punch is not at the home position.
A
Enter dC330 code 12-194 to actuate the punch head home sensor Q12-194, PL 12.20 Item 1.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.2, check Q12-194.
Refer to:
P/J307, LCSS PWB.
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
Punch head home sensor, PL 12.20 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-244. The punch cycles.

Y
N
Go to WD 12.3, check the hole punch motor MOT12-243, PL 12.20 Item 2.
Refer to:
Check the LCSS PWB DIP switch settings, refer to 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch Settings RAP.
Check that the hole punch is present and correctly installed.
Check that the punch has not jammed in the down position. This can occur with transparencies and labels.
NOTE: The home position of the punch unit is when the cut-out in the actuator is between
the punch head home sensor jaws.
P/J311, LCSS PWB.
Code 12-243 moves the hole punch to the home position.

Code 12-244 cycles the hole punch until time-out.
Punch head motor assembly, PL 12.20 Item 2.
Procedure
Go to WD 12.2. Check the link between P/J307 pins 10 and 11, LCSS PWB. The
good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring or connector.
link
is
Enter dC330 code 12-195 to actuate the punch head present sensor Q12-195, PL 12.20 Item
1. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J307, LCSS PWB.
Punch head present sensor, PL 12.20 Item 1.
NOTE: The chad bin collects the pieces of paper cut out by the hole punch. The chad bin level
sensor will not operate if the tray is incorrectly installed. Ensure the chad bin is fully inserted
and the lever engages in the slot.
Enter dC330 code 12-193. Actuate the chad bin level sensor Q12-193, using a strip of paper,
PL 12.20 Item 7. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J307, LCSS PWB.
Chad bin level sensor, PL 12.20 Item 7.
A
12-043-00-110, 12-046-00-110
February 2013
2-82
12-127-00-110 Sheet Late to Hole Punch RAP
12-151-00-110, 12-152-00-110 Sheet Late to Bin 1 RAP
12-127-00-110 Sheet late at the punch sensor.
12-151-00-110 The trailing edge of the sheet is late to the compile exit sensor, Q12-106.
Initial Actions
12-152-00-110 The leading edge of the sheet is late to the compile exit sensor, Q12-106.
WARNING
WARNING
The LCSS PWB DIP switch settings, refer to 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch Settings
RAP.
Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct position for the size of paper in the
tray.
For a paper jam at the entrance to the LCSS. Check that there is no obstruction that
would prevent a sheet from arriving in position for punching, refer to the 12H-110 Copy
Damage in the LCSS RAP.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE: Paper is diverted to bin 0 when the diverter gate solenoid is energized.
Paper is fed to bin 1 when the diverter gate solenoid is de-energized.
Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct position for the size of paper in all
trays.
The tensioner on the intermediate paper drive belt. Check that the tensioner is free to
move and that the tensioner pulley is free to rotate. If necessary re-lubricate the tensioner
and tensioner pulley, REP 12.3-110. Refer to GP 18 Machine Lubrication.
The punch sensor 1, Q12-078 for chad debris, PL 12.20 Item 7.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-078 to actuate the punch sensor Q12-078. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
NOTE: The tensioner arm and the tensioner pulley require different lubricants, refer to
REP 12.3-110 for details
That the drive pulleys on both transport motor 1 and 2 are secure and do not slip on the
motor shaft.
All the transport drive belts are correctly fitted and are in a good condition.
All the transport rolls and idler pulleys are free to rotate.
The diverter gate and linkage for free movement.
P/J307, LCSS PWB.
A paper jam in the path to bin 1, to the compiler, and for poor stacking on bin 1.
Ensure that the LCSS is fully latched to the machine, refer to REP 12.13-110.
Torn paper fragments from a previous jam clearance action.
Punch sensor, PL 12.20 Item 7.
Refer to the 12H-110 Copy Damage in the LCSS RAP and the 12J-110 Mis-Registration in Stapled Sets and Non-Stapled Sets RAP.
Procedure
Figure 1. Enter dC330 code 12-224 to run the transport motor 2 MOT12-224. The
runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.3. Check MOT12-224.
Refer to:
motor
A
February 2013
2-83
12-127-00-110, 12-151-00-110, 12-152-00-110
GP 10, How to check a motor.
P/J309, LCSS PWB.
Transport motor 1, PL 12.40 Item 2.

If the fault is still present, perform 12-396-00-110, 12-397-00-110, 12-398-00-110, Rear Tamper
Move Failure RAP.
NOTE: A software problem can cause the machine to incorrectly display the fault code 12-15200-110.
Figure 1. Enter dC330 code 12-225 to the exit diverter solenoid S12-225. The diverter solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.2. Check SOL12-225.
Refer to:
GP 12, How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
P/J306, LCSS PWB.
Exit diverter solenoid, PL 12.60 Item 12.
Compile exit
sensor Q12-106
Figure 1. Enter dC330 code 12-106 to actuate the compile exit sensor Q12-106. The display
changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
GP 11, How to Check a sensor.
P/J313, LCSS PWB.
Exit diverter
solenoid
S12-225
Transport motor 2
MOT12-224
Transport motor 1 MOT12-223
Compiler exit sensor, PL 12.65 Item 4.
Figure 1. Enter dC330, code 12-223 to run the transport motor 1, MOT12-223. The
runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J305, LCSS PWB.
motor
B
12-151-00-110, 12-152-00-110
February 2013
2-84
12-171-00-110, 12-172-00-110 Paper Exiting to Bin 0 RAP
Refer to:
12-171-00-110 The leading edge of the sheet is late to the top exit sensor.
P/J309, LCSS PWB.
12-172-00-110 The trailing edge of the sheet is late from the top exit sensor.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
tray.
All the transport drive belts are correctly fitted and are in a good condition.
All he transport rolls and idler pulleys are free to rotate.
The diverter gate and linkage for free movement.
A paper jam in the path to bin 0.
Torn paper fragments from a previous jam clearance action.
A paper jam in the path to the top tray. If the jams occur shortly after install. Check the gap
between the entry guide cover, PL 12.70 Item 5 and the paper guide PL 12.60 Item 10. If
the gap is less than 1mm, adjust or install a new entry guide cover. Refer to the replacement procedure in REP 12.15-110.
P/J306, LCSS PWB.
P/J313, LCSS PWB.
Top tray exit sensor, PL 12.60 Item 11.
Enter dC330 code 12-223 to run the transport motor 1, MOT12-223, Figure 1 The
runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-224 to run transport motor 2 MOT12-224, Figure 1. The motor runs.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 12-107 to actuate the top tray exit sensor Q12-107, Figure 1. The display
changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.4.Check Q12-107.
Refer to:
NOTE: Paper is diverted to bin 0 when the diverter gate solenoid is energized.
Refer to the 12H-110 Copy Damage in the LCSS RAP and the 12J-110 Mis-Registration in Stapled Sets and Non-Stapled Sets RAP.
Paper is fed to bin 1 when the diverter gate solenoid is de-energized.
NOTE: The tensioner arm and the tensioner pulley require different lubricants, refer to
REP 12.3-110.
The drive pulleys on both transport motor 1 and 2 are secure and do not slip on the motor
shaft.
Enter dC330 code 12-225 to energize the exit diverter solenoid S12-225, Figure 1. The
diverter gate solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Refer to:
The tensioner on the intermediate paper drive belt. Check that the tensioner is free to
move and that the tensioner pulley is free to rotate. If necessary lubricate the tensioner
and tensioner pulley, REP 12.3-110. Refer to GP 18 Machine Lubrication.
P/J305, LCSS PWB.
motor
B
February 2013
2-85
12-171-00-110, 12-172-00-110
12-199-00-110 Unexpected Sheet at Finisher Entry RAP
12-199-00-110 The leading edge of the sheet detected at finisher entry, without first receiving a
paper at IOT exit sensor command.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Top tray exit
sensor Q12-107
CAUTION
Do not connect the output device power cord directly to the AC wall outlet. The output device
cannot operate without the machine. The machine controls the distribution of electricity to the
output device for correct power on and power off sequencing.
Exit diverter
solenoid
S12-225
Transport motor 2
MOT12-224
Transport motor 1
MOT12-223
Check the fault history file for related fault codes.
Check that the communication harness from the finisher to the IME is secure.
Check the size of paper in the paper trays is correct.
Procedure
1.
Switch off the machine, the switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
Check the communication harness. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
3.
Un-dock the LCSS, REP 12.13-110, Check the paper path for obstructions and damage.
Cheat the docking interlock switch.
4.
Check the entry sensor GP 11. Enter dC330 code 12-077 to actuate the entry sensor
Q12-077, PL 12.70 Item 3.
5.
Go to WD 12.1. Check the wiring and PJ connections between the entry sensor and
PJ304 on the LCSS PWB.
If necessary install new components:

12-171-00-110, 12-172-00-110, 12-199-00-110
Entry sensor, PL 12.70 Item 3.
February 2013
2-86
12-310-00-110, 12-312-00-110, 12-313-00-110 Interlocks

RAP
12-312-00-110 Top Cover Interlock RAP

Check the top cover interlock switch S12-197, PL 12.75 Item 6, as follows:
12-310-00-110 The docking interlock is open during run mode.
Check the switch actuator.
Enter dC330 code 12-197, actuate the top cover interlock switch. If the display does not
change, refer to:
12-312-00-110 The top cover interlock is open during run mode.

12-313-00-110 The front door interlock is open during run mode.
Initial Actions
WARNING
GP 13, How to Check a switch.
P/J315, LCSS PWB.
Go to WD 12.4. Check the wiring between P/J315 and the top cover interlock switch.
If necessary install a new top cover interlock switch, PL 12.75 Item 6.
12-313-00-110 Front Door Interlock RAP
WARNING
Check the front door interlock switch S12-303, PL 12.75 Item 5, as follows:
Check the switch actuator.
Enter dC330 code 12-303, actuate the front door interlock switch. If the display does not
change, refer to:
GP 13, How to Check a switch.
P/J302, LCSS PWB.
Go to WD 12.1. Check the wiring between P/J302 and the front door interlock switch.
If necessary install a new front door interlock switch, PL 12.75 Item 5.
The LCSS is docked to the machine.
The LCSS front door is closed.
The LCSS top cover is closed.
Procedure
Go to WD 12.1. Check for +24V on P/J 302 pin 1. If the voltage is not present, refer to 12D-110
LCSS Power Distribution RAP and 01L 0V Distribution RAP.
Go to the appropriate RAP:
12-310-00-110 Docking Interlock RAP
12-312-00-110 Top Cover Interlock RAP
12-313-00-110 Front Door Interlock RAP
12-310-00-110 Docking Interlock RAP

Un-dock the LCSS REP 12.13-110. Check the docking interlock S12-177, PL 12.15 Item 2, as
follows:
Check the interlock actuator on the machine is not damaged or missing.

NOTE: The wiring harness passes underneath the docking interlock switch housing. If
this harness is not correctly positioned, the switch can be mis-located, giving intermittent
docking interlock problems.
Enter dC330 code 12-177, actuate the docking interlock. If the display does not change,
refer to:
GP 13, How to Check a Switch.
P/J302, LCSS PWB.
Go to WD 12.1. Check the wiring between P/J 302 and the docking interlock switch.
If necessary, install a new docking interlock switch, PL 12.15 Item 2.
February 2013
2-87
12-310-00-110, 12-312-00-110, 12-313-00-110
12-340-00-110, 12-341-00-110, 12-342-00-110 Ejector

Movement Failure RAP
Refer to:
P/J304, LCSS PWB.

12-340-00-110 The ejector is not at the home position.

12-341-00-110 The ejector is not at the out position.
12-342-00-110 The ejector fails to perform a cycle of operation.
NOTE: A cycle of operation for the ejector is to cycle from the home position to the out position
and back to the home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Un-dock the LCSS, REP 12.13-110, Check for any obstructions that would prevent the
ejector from moving. Cheat the docking interlock switch.
Procedure
Code 12-234 moves the ejector assembly to the home position.
Code 12-235 moves the ejector assembly to the out position.
Code 12-236 cycles the ejector until time-out.
Enter dC330 code 12-185, actuate the ejector out sensor Q12-185, PL 12.50 Item 3. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J304, LCSS PWB.

If the ejector is still not moving, install a new ejector assembly, PL 12.50 Item 1.
Go to WD 12.1. +5v is available at P/J 304 between pins 7 and 8.
Y
N
Go to the 12D-110 LCSS Power Distribution RAP and 01L 0V Distribution RAP.
Ejector out sensor, PL 12.50 Item 3.

Enter dC330 code 12-184, actuate the ejector home sensor Q12-184, PL 12.50 Item 3. The
display changes.
Y
N
A
12-340-00-110, 12-341-00-110, 12-342-00-110
Ejector home sensor, PL 12.50 Item 3.

Enter dC330 code 12-236 to check the movement of the ejector, PL 12.50 Item 1. The ejector motor cycles.
Y
N
Check that the large tie-wrap around the motor of the ejector assembly has not cut
through the motor wires and caused a short circuit to the case of the motor. If necessary
cut the tie-wrap, then tape and isolate the wires. The ejector motor cycles.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.1. Check the ejector motor home MOT12-234.
Refer to:
P/J303, LCSS PWB.

Ejector assembly, PL 12.50 Item 1.

The ejector cycles noisily, colliding with the end stops.
Y
N
Check the stapler to ensure the staples are correctly formed. Mis-formed staples can
cause the set to hang in the stapler causing ejector movement failures. The staples are
correctly formed.
Y
N
Clear the staple head of any mis-formed staples, then check the operation of the stapler. If necessary, install a new staple head unit, PL 12.55 Item 5.
Connect a service meter at P/J 304 between pins 8 and 9. Slowly rotate the ejector motor
encoder. The voltage changes between +5V and 0V.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.1. Check the wiring and connectors between the ejector motor encoder sensor and the LCSS PWB. If necessary repair the wiring, REP 1.1. If the wiring is good,
install a new ejector motor encoder sensor, PL 12.50 Item 3.
Perform the 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP. If necessary install a new LCSS PWB, PL
12.75 Item 1.
February 2013
2-88
12-371-00-110, 12-372-00-110, 12-378-00-110 Staple Head

Unit Movement Failure RAP
12-371-00-110 The staple head unit fails to move.
Figure 1, Component location.
12-372-00-110 The staple head unit is not at the home position.
Stapler traverse assembly, PL 12.55 Item 1.
12-378-00-110 The staple head unit is not indexed correctly.

NOTE: The home position is when the staple head unit is at the corner stapling position (fully
to the front of the LCSS and rotated through 45 degrees).
Initial Actions
Enter dC330 code 12-135. Actuate the stapler home sensor Q12-135 by moving the stapler
unit to and from the home position, using the green thumb-wheel. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
WARNING
GP 11. How to check a sensor.
Figure 1.
P/J308, LCSS PWB.
WARNING
Un-dock the LCSS from the machine, REP 12.13-110, move the ejector assembly fully to
the right, manually move the stapler unit along the full length of the track using the green
thumb-wheel. Check the home sensor flag and the two dual position flags for damage,
see NOTE. Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the stapling unit from
moving. If necessary, install a new staple head unit, PL 12.55 Item 5 or a new stapler
traverse assembly, PL 12.55 Item 1.
NOTE: For dual position stapling, the SU1 front index sensor uses two flags.
Dock the LCSS to the machine.
Procedure
NOTE: With reference to WD 12.3, component control codes;
Code 12-045 increments the stapling unit motor in the reverse direction.
Code 12-250 cycles the stapling unit between home, first and second stapling positions.
Enter dC330 code 12-235 to move the ejector assembly fully to the right, PL 12.50 Item 1.
Enter code 12-250. The stapling unit cycles back and forth along the track.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.3. Check the SU1 motor, MOT12-249.
Refer to:
P/J308, LCSS PWB.
Stapler home sensor, PL 12.55 Item 3.
Enter dC330 code 12-235 to move the ejector assembly fully to the right. Enter code 12-168.
Actuate the stapler index sensor Q12-168 by moving the stapler unit to and from the flag position (approximately 115 mm (4.5 inches) from the front of the track), using the green thumbwheel. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J308, LCSS PWB.
Code 12-249 increments the stapling unit motor in the forward direction.
Stapler index sensor, PL 12.55 Item 3.
A
February 2013
2-89
12-371-00-110, 12-372-00-110, 12-378-00-110
12-392-00-110, 12-393-00-110, 12-394-00-110 Front Tamper

Move Failure RAP
12-392-00-110 Front tamper fails to move from the home position.
12-393-00-110 Front tamper fails to return to the home position.
12-394-00-110 Front tamper does not return to the away home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
SU1 Motor
MOT12-249
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the tamper assembly from operating
correctly. If necessary, install a new tamper assembly, PL 12.45 Item 1.
Jams can be caused by removing prints from bin 1 before the machine has finished printing. If the tampers are touched while they are moving, they may stall and cause the
machine to shutdown. The resulting shutdown can cause un-clearable jams in the finisher
and the tray 3 and tray 4 to paper path interface.
Jams can also be caused if the tray settings do not match the paper in the trays. Make
sure the tray settings are correct.
Check the condition and the tension of the front tamper drive belt. Tensioning is achieved
by a spring on the motor, the motor should be free to move.
If there is a large jam of paper above bin 1 that has obstructed the tampers, this has probably been caused by poorly stacked sets failing to actuate the bin 1 upper level sensor.
Staple head
unit
Stapler index sensor
Q12-168
Stapler home
sensor Q12-135
Check the paper for defects that could degrade the tamping operation e.g. curl,
paper condition, buckling or paper type. Refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Check the operation of the paddle roll, refer to 12-024-00-110, 12-025-00-110 Paddle Roll Failure RAP.
Check the operation of the bin 1 upper level sensor, refer to 12-462-00-110 Bin 1
Movement Failure RAP.
Refer to the 12J-110 Mis-Registration in Stapled Sets and Non-Stapled Sets RAP.
Check the LCSS PWB DIP switch settings, refer to 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch
Settings RAP.
Procedure
Code 12-226 moves the front tamper to the home position.
Code 12-228 moves the front tamper inboard (away from home).
Code 12-230 moves both tampers to the A4 LEF position.
Code 12-231 moves both tampers to the 8.5 x 11 LEF position.
Code 12-232 Cycles the tampers in and out until time-out.
12-371-00-110, 12-372-00-110, 12-378-00-110, 12-392-
February 2013
2-90
Enter dC330 codes 12-226 and 12-228 alternately. The front tamper moves between the
home and inboard positions.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.3. Check the front tamper motor, MOT12-226, PL 12.45 Item 1.
Refer to:
P/J312, LCSS PWB.

Tamper assembly, PL 12.45 Item 1.
12-398-00-110 Rear tamper fails to move from the away home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 12-180, actuate the front tamper home sensor, Q12-180, PL 12.45 Item 3.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J312, LCSS PWB.

NOTE: The front tamper home sensor is bonded onto the tamper unit and is not
replaceable. Therefore, failure of this sensor will require the replacement of the
tamper assembly.
Enter dC330 code 12-182, actuate the front tamper away sensor, Q12-182, PL 12.45 Item 3.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J312, LCSS PWB.
12-396-00-110 Rear tamper fails to move from the home position.

12-397-00-110 Rear tamper fails to return to the home position.
12-396-00-110, 12-397-00-110, 12-398-00-110, Rear Tamper

Move Failure RAP
WARNING
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the tamper assembly from operating
correctly. If necessary, install a new tamper assembly, PL 12.45 Item 1.
Jams can be caused by removing prints from bin 1 before the machine has finished printing. If the tampers are touched while they are moving, they may stall and cause the
machine to shutdown. The resulting shutdown can cause un-clearable jams in the finisher
and the tray 3 and tray 4 to paper path interface.
Jams can also be caused if the tray settings do not match the paper in the trays. Make
sure the tray settings are correct.
Check the condition of the rear tamper drive belt and that it is correctly tensioned. Tensioning is achieved by a spring on the motor, the motor should be free to move.
If there is a large jam of paper above bin 1 that has obstructed the tampers, this has probably been caused by poorly stacked sets failing to actuate the bin 1 upper level sensor.
Check the paper for defects that could degrade the tamping operation e.g. curl,
paper condition, buckling or paper type. Refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Check the operation of the paddle roll, refer to 12-024-00-110, 12-025-00-110 Paddle Roll Failure RAP.
Check the operation of the bin 1 upper level sensor, refer to 12-462-00-110 Bin 1
Check the LCSS PWB DIP switch settings, refer to 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch
Settings RAP.
Front tamper away sensor, PL 12.45 Item 3.
February 2013
2-91
12-392-00-110, 12-393-00-110, 12-394-00-110, 12-
Procedure
P/J312, LCSS PWB.
Code 12-227 moves the rear tamper to the home position.
Code 12-229 moves the rear tamper inboard (away from home).
Rear tamper away sensor, PL 12.45 Item 3.
Code 12-230 moves both tampers to the A4 LEF position.
Code 12-231 moves both tampers to the 8.5 x 11 LEF position.

Code 12-232 Cycles the tampers in and out until time-out.

Enter dC330 codes 12-227 and 12-229 alternately. The rear tamper moves between the
home and inboard positions.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.3. Check the rear tamper motor, MOT12-227, PL 12.45 Item 1.
Refer to:
P/J312, LCSS PWB.
Enter dC330 code 12-181, actuate the rear tamper home sensor, Q12-181, PL 12.45 Item 3.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J312, LCSS PWB.

NOTE: The rear tamper home sensor is bonded onto the tamper unit and is not
replaceable. Therefore, failure of this sensor will require the replacement of the
tamper assembly.
Enter dC330 code 12-183, actuate the rear tamper away sensor, Q12-183, PL 12.45 Item 3.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
12-396-00-110, 12-397-00-110, 12-398-00-110,
February 2013
2-92
12-462-00-110 Bin 1 Movement Failure RAP

12-462-00-110 Bin 1 failed to leave the bin 1 upper level sensor during stacking or failed to initialise correctly.
NOTE: The home position of bin 1 is when the bin is just lower than the stack level sensor. See
the final actions at the end of the procedure.
Remove the LCSS rear cover. Enter dC330 code 12-192, bin 1 motor encoder sensor Q12-192
PL 12.30 Item 11, then slowly rotate the encoder disk by hand. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J304, LCSS PWB.

Two sensors and two switches monitor the level of paper in bin 1 and the position of the tray:
The bin 1 upper level sensor, detects the top of the paper stack in bin 1, or the empty bin
1, PL 12.35 Item 3.
The bin 1 90% full sensor, detects when the tray has descended to a position where the
tray is 90% full, PL 12.30 Item 5.
Bin 1 upper limit switch, prevents over travel, S12-190, PL 12.30 Item 3.
Bin 1 lower limit switch, prevents over travel, S12-191, PL 12.35 Item 1.

Code 12-241 elevates bin 1 to the home position.
Code 12-059 elevates bin 1 incrementally up.
Bin 1 motor encoder sensor Q12-192, PL 12.30 Item 11.

Enter dC330 code 12-242. Bin 1 cycles down and up.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.5. Check the bin 1 elevator motor, MOT12-241, PL 12.30 Item 8.
Refer to:
Code 12-060 elevates bin 1 incrementally down.
Code 12-242 cycles bin 1 up and down until time-out.
Initial Actions
P/J318, LCSS PWB.
WARNING
Bin 1 elevator motor, PL 12.30 Item 8.
WARNING
Check for a physical obstruction that would prevent bin 1 from moving, such as an item of
furniture.
Check that bin 1 is level front to back, if necessary perform ADJ 12.1-110 LCSS Bin 1
Level.
If there is a large jam of paper above bin 1, this has probably been caused by poorly
stacked sets failing to actuate the bin 1 upper level sensor.
Perform the relevant check:
If paper is overflowing the tray when it is at the lower limit, check the tray 90% full sensor.
If paper cannot be fed to bin 1 when it is at the highest position, check the bin 1 upper
level sensor.
Check the front and rear bin 1 drive belts. If necessary install new components, PL 12.30 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-188, actuate the bin 1 upper level sensor Q12-188, PL 12.35 Item 3.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J314, LCSS PWB.
REP 12.13-110 LCSS Un-docking.
Procedure
Bin 1 upper level sensor, PL 12.35 Item 3.
Enter dC330 code 12-190, actuate the bin 1 upper limit switch S12-190, PL 12.30 Item 3. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-93
12-462-00-110
12-492-00-110 to 12-494-00-110 IME to Finisher Failure RAP
P/J315, LCSS PWB.
12-492-00-110 CDI Communications failure with the finisher.
12-493-00-110 The finisher failed to cycle up.
Bin 1 upper limit switch, PL 12.30 Item 3.
12-494-00-110 The finisher failed to return a prep time to the IME within 1 second.
Initial Actions
Enter dC330 code 12-191, actuate the bin 1 lower limit switch S12-191, PL 12.35 Item 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
WARNING
WARNING
P/J317, LCSS PWB.
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine
12D-110 LCSS Power Generation RAP.
Check that the communication harness from the finisher is plugged in to the IME.
REP 12.13-110 LCSS Un-docking.
Procedure
Bin 1 lower limit switch, PL 12.35 Item 1.
Refer to in line connector PJ904 and to WD 8.5. Switch the machine off, GP 14 and disconnect
PJ904 on the back of the image processing module. Reconnect PJ904 and switch the machine
on, GP 14. If the fault is still present check for damaged pins on PJ904 and on the media path
driver PWB. Install new components as required.
Enter dC330 code 12-187, actuate the bin 1 90% full sensor Q12-187, PL 12.30 Item 5. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J316, LCSS PWB.
12D-110, LCSS Power Distribution RAP.
Bin 1 90% full sensor, PL 12.30 Item 5.
As final actions, check the following sequence of operation:
Paper is delivered to the tray until the bin 1 upper level sensor, Q12-188 is actuated.
The bin 1 elevator motor MOT12-241 lowers the tray until the bin 1 upper level sensor,
Q12-188 is de-actuated.
The Bin 1 elevator motor raises the tray until the paper stack height actuates the Bin 1
upper level sensor, then the Bin 1 elevator motor lowers the tray to continue the cycle.
When the tray is emptied, the tray returns to the home position. The tray is elevated until
the bin 1 upper level sensor, Q12-188 is made. The tray is then lowered until the bin 1
upper level sensor, Q12-188 is just cleared. In the home position the bin 1 upper limit
switch, S12-190 is actuated.
12-462-00-110, 12-492-00-110 to 12-494-00-110
February 2013
2-94
12-762-00-110, 12-764-00-110, 12-765-00-110 IME to

Finisher Communication Failure RAP
12-950-00 IME Delivers Sheet Too Early RAP

12-950-00 IME delivers sheet to finisher before the finisher preparation time has expired.
12-762-00-110 Communications failure between the IME and the finisher.
Procedure
WARNING
12-764-00-110 The IME cannot detect a finisher plugged in.
12-765-00-110 The IME has detected an incompatible / unknown finisher.
Initial Actions
WARNING
1.
For a single occurrence of this fault, take no action.
2.
For multiple occurrences of this fault, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine,
GP 14. If the fault remains, reinstall software, GP 4.
WARNING
Check that the actuator, PL 12.15 Item 7 is attached to the right hand machine frame and
is making the docking interlock.
Check that the LCSS has initialized correctly, refer to 12C-110 LCSS Initialization Failure
RAP.
Procedure
on, GP 14. If the fault is still present check for damaged pins on PJ904 and on the media path
driver PWB. Install new components as required.
February 2013
2-95
12-762-00-110, 12-764-00-110, 12-765-00-110, 12-
12A-110 Pause To Unload (PTU) Fault RAP
12B-110 Bin 1 Overload RAP
Use this RAP when the pause to unload (PTU) feature fails to operate.
Use this RAP to resolve a fault on the bin 1 90% full sensor.
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
RAP.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 12-187, actuate the bin 1 90% full sensor Q12-187, PL 12.30 Item 5. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
GP 11, How to Check a sensor.
P/J316, LCSS PWB.
Enter dC330 code 12-324 to illuminate the pause to unload LED PL 12.75 Item 3. The
LED
illuminates.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.4. Disconnect PJ312. +2V is available at PJ312 between pins B10 and
B12 when the code is entered.
Y
N
Perform the 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP. If necessary install a new LCSS
PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.
12D-110 LCSS Power Generation RAP.
Bin 1 90% full sensor, PL 12.30 Item 5.
Check the wiring between the LCSS PWB and the pause to unload PWB. The wiring is
good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Install a new pause to unload PWB, PL 12.75 Item 3.
Enter dC330 code 12-208 to actuate the pause to unload switch S12-208. The
display
changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.4. Check the wiring between the LCSS PWB and the pause to unload PWB.
The wiring is good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Refer to the 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP. Install new components as necessary:
Pause to unload PWB, PL 12.75 Item 3.

12A-110, 12B-110
February 2013
2-96
12C-110 LCSS Initialization Failure RAP
When an initialization command is received from the machine, the units are initialized in two
stages:
Rear tamper not at home, refer to 12-396-00-110, 12-397-00-110, 12-398-00-110, Rear

Tamper Move Failure RAP.-
Paddle not at home, refer to 12-024-00-110, 12-025-00-110 Paddle Roll Failure RAP.
Bin 1 not at home, refer to 12-462-00-110 Bin 1 Movement Failures RAP.
Punch not at home, refer to 12-043-00-110, 12-046-00-110 Hole Punch Operation Failure
RAP
Staple head not at home, refer to 12M-110 Staple Head Operation Failure RAP.
Stapling unit not at home, refer to 12-371-00-110, 12-372-00-110, 12-378-00-110 Staple

Head Unit Movement Failure RAP.
Ejector not at home, refer to 12-340-00-110, 12-341-00-110, 12-342-00-110 Ejector

The following units are initialized sequentially:

1.
If the staple head is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
2.
If the stapling unit is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
3.
If the ejector is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
The following units are then initialized simultaneously:

1.
If the front tamper is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
2.
If the rear tamper is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
3.
If the hole punch is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
4.
If the paddle is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
5.
If the stacker is not at the home position, it is driven to the home position
NOTE: The staple cartridge must be fully pushed home.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not install a new LCSS PWB until the cause of the damage to the old LCSS PWB has been
determined, go to 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP.
LED 1
Check the fuse on the LCSS PWB, If the fuse (F1) is good, continue at the procedure. If the
fuse not good, install a new LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.
Check the LCSS PWB DIP switch settings, refer to 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch Settings
RAP.
Remove the LCSS covers, REP 12.1-110, so that the units can be viewed. Cheat the front door
interlock switch and the top cover interlock switch. Check that LED 2 is illuminated, this shows
that all interlocks are made. If the LED fails to illuminate, go to 12-310-00-110, 12-312-00-110,
12-313-00-110 Interlocks RAP.
Procedure
Figure 1. Check that the software heartbeat is present on LED 1. The LED should flash twice
per second if the LCSS software is running. If necessary re-load the LCSS software, refer to
GP 4 Machine Software.
Fuse
(F1)
LED 2
Figure 1 LED location
If the initialization sequence fails to place any unit at the home position, refer to the appropriate
RAPs:
Front tamper not at home, refer to 12-392-00-110, 12-393-00-110, 12-394-00-110 Front

Tamper Move Failure RAP
February 2013
2-97
12C-110
WARNING
The LCSS has an integral power supply providing +24V and +5V supplies to the LCSS PWB.
The AC power for the LCSS power supply comes from the LVPS and base module of the
machine.
Do not install a fuse of a different type or rating. Installing the wrong type or
rating of fuse can cause overheating and a risk of fire.
Procedure
Go to WD 12.1. Disconnect the +24V harness to the docking interlock switch,

S12-177.
Go to WD 12.1. Disconnect the +24V harness to the front door interlock switch,
S12-303.
Go to WD 12.4. Disconnect the +24V harness to the top cover interlock switch,
S12-197.
Go to WD 12.1. Disconnect the +24V harness to the transport motor 1, MOT12223.
WARNING
Go to WD 12.3. Disconnect the +24V harness to the transport motor 2, MOT12224.
Go to WD 12.3. Disconnect the +24V harness to the SU1 motor SU1 motor,
MOT12-249.
Go to WD 12.3. Disconnect the +24V harness to the paddle roll motor, MOT12238.
Go to WD 12.4. Disconnect the +24V harness to the bin 1 lower limit switch,
S12-191.
Go to WD 12.3. Disconnect the +24V harness to the front tamper motor

MOT12-226.
Go to WD 12.3. Disconnect the +24V harness to the rear tamper motor MOT12227.
Go to WD 12.5. Disconnect the +24V harness to the bin 1 elevator motor

MOT12-241.
Go to WD 12.5. Disconnect the +24V harness to the bin 1 lower limit switch,
S12-191.
Go to WD 12.3 Disconnect the +24V harness to the hole punch motor, MOT12243.
Go to WD 12.2 Disconnect the +24V harness to the staple head 1 motor,

MOT12-247.
Check each harness for short circuits and overheating, GP 7.
Install new components as necessary.
Install a new fuse F1 on the LCSS PWB, switch on the machine, GP 14.
Monitor the voltage at the left end of the fuse and re-connect the circuits one at
a time. Energize the re-connected components using dC330 control codes.
If the voltage drops below +22V, switch off the machine, GP 14. Re-check the
component and harness for overheating or short circuits. Install new components as necessary.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not connect the finisher power cord directly to the AC wall outlet. The finisher cannot operate without the machine. The machine controls the distribution of electricity to the finisher for
correct power on and power off sequencing.
Close or cheat all the LCSS interlocks. Refer to GP 15 for the location and function of the
LEDs on the PWBs. The LEDs on the LCSS PWB are illuminated, PL 12.75 Item 1.
Y
N
+24V is available at Fuse (F1) on the LCSS PWB.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.1. +24V is available at P/J300 between pins 1 and 2, also between
pins 5 and 3.
Y
N
Disconnect P/J 300. +24V is available at P/J300 between pins 1 and 2, also
between pins 5 and 3 on the end of the harness.
Y
N
Loosen the 4 screws and lift the power supply module away from the
LCSS frame, PL 12.75 Item 2. Go to WD 12.1. ACL is available at CN1
between pins 1 and 3.
Y
N
Go to the 01A AC Power RAP and check the AC output voltages.
Check the wiring between CN2 and P/J 300. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Install a new power supply module, PL 12.75 Item 2.
Check for a short circuit or an overload in the wiring or components connected
to the +24V on the LCSS PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
Go to WD 12.4 +24V is available at PJ315 pin 5 on the LCSS PWB.
Y
N
Go to the 12-310-00-110, 12-312-00-110, 12-313-00-110 Interlocks RAP.
A
Perform the 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP, if necessary install a new LCSS PWB,
PL 12.75 Item 2.
Go to WD 12.1. +5V is available at P/J300 between pins 4 and 6, also between pins 7 and
8.
12D-110
February 2013
2-98
N
Disconnect P/J300. +5V is available at P/J300 between pins 4 and 6, also between
pins 7 and 8 on the end of the harness.
Y
N
Loosen the 4 screws and lift the power supply module away from the LCSS frame.
Go to WD 12.1. ACL is available at CN1 between pins 1 and 3.
Y
N
Check the wiring between CN2 and P/J300. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
12E-110 LCSS Paper Entry RAP

The leading edge of the sheet is late to the entry sensor Q12-077, PL 12.70 Item 3.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Install a new power supply module, PL 12.75 Item 2.
Refer to the 12H-110 Copy Damage in the LCSS RAP.
Check for a short circuit or overload in the wiring or components connected to +5V on the
LCSS PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
Perform the 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP. If necessary install a new LCSS PWB, PL
12.75 Item 1.
tray.
Check the input guide for damage or wear that could cause paper to jam.
Paper jam in the machine to LCSS paper path, ADJ 12.2-110 Machine to LCSS Alignment.
IOT exit path and feed rolls.
Feeding performance from a paper tray loaded with a new ream of paper.
Procedure
Lower the paper entry guide assembly, PL 12.40 Item 8, to access the entry sensor. Enter
dC330 code 12-077, actuate the entry sensor Q12-077. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J304, LCSS PWB.
Make sure that the paper correctly continues past the previous sensor in the paper path. Refer
to the 10-140-00 to 10-146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00 Exit Jam RAP.
February 2013
2-99
12D-110, 12E-110
12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP Switch Settings RAP
12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP
To show the correct settings for the DIP switches on the LCSS PWB.
Use this RAP to determine the cause of damage to the LCSS PWB, so that the cause can be
repaired before a new LCSS PWB is installed.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Problems that can result from incorrect DIP switch settings are:
Communication errors between the LCSS and machine.
Erratic behavior of the LCSS.
WARNING
Check the fuse on the LCSS PWB. If the fuse is good, continue at the procedure. If the fuse not
good, install a new LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.
False jam clearance instructions for the LCSS and/or the machine exit area.
WARNING
Check the DIP switch settings, Figure 1. If necessary, switch off the machine, GP 14. Correct
the DIP switch setting, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
Procedure
The LCSS PWB can be damaged by a component connected to it going short-circuit. If a new
LCSS PWB is installed and power applied to the machine, the new LCSS PWB will be damaged in the same way. The cause of the damage must be found by following this procedure.
Remove the LCSS PWB and inspect the components shown in Figure 1 for damage. The damage to the component may be in the form of a crack, a small crater or a burnt patch. Refer to
Table 1 to locate the component causing the damage to the LCSS PWB.
Figure 1 DIP switch settings
12F-110, 12G-110
February 2013
2-100
Table 1 LCSS PWB Drive Components

LCSS PWB Driven
component component
Normal resistance
measurement +/- 10%
Spared part and

references
U13
Transport
motor 1
PJ305 pin 1 to 3 = 2.8 ohms.

PJ305 pin 1 to 4 = 2.8 ohms.
PJ305 pin 2 to 5 = 2.8 ohms.
PJ305 pin 2 to 6 = 2.8 ohms.
Transport motor 1, PL 12.40

Item 2. 12-171-00-110, 12172-00-110 RAP
U15
Transport
motor 2
PJ309 pin 1 to 4 = 1.3 ohms.

PJ309 pin 1 to 5 = 1.3 ohms.
PJ309 pin 2 to 6 = 1.3 ohms.
PJ309 pin 2 to 7 = 1.3 ohms.
Transport motor 2, PL 12.60

Item 5. 12-171-00-110, 12172-00-110 RAP
U4
Hole punch
motor
PJ311 pin 1 to 2 = 6 ohms
Hole punch motor, PL 12.20

Item 2. 12-043-00-110, 12046-00-110 RAP
U2
Paddle motor
PJ310 pin 1 to 3 = 29 ohms.

Paddle motor assembly, PL

12.25 Item 10. 12-024-00110, 12-025-00-110 RAP
U1
SU1 motor
(stapler indexing)
PJ308 pin B9 to B11 = 20 ohms.

Stapler traverse assembly,

PL 12.55 Item 1. 12-371-00110, 12-372-00-110, 12-37800-110 RAP
U12
Ejector motor
PJ303 pin 1 to 2 = 8 ohms
Ejector assembly, PL 12.50

Item 1. 12-340-00-110, 12341-00-110, 12-342-00-110
RAP
Q4, B5,
R93, R95
Diverter gate
solenoid
PJ306 pin 1 to pin 2 = 74 ohms
Diverter gate solenoid, PL

12.60 Item 12. 12-171-00110, 12-172-00-110 RAP
U14
Bin 1 elevator
motor
PJ318 pin 1 to 2 = 7.7 ohms
Bin 1 elevator motor, PL

12.30 Item 8. 12-462-00-110
RAP
Figure 1 LCSS PWB components
Table 1 LCSS PWB Drive Components

NOTE: If difficulty is found in connecting the service meter probes to the connector headers on
the LCSS PWB, refer to the RAP quoted in Table 1 and make the measurement at another
point in the harness to the driven component.
LCSS PWB Driven

component component
Normal resistance
measurement +/- 10%
Spared part and

references
U9
Rear tamper
motor
PJ312 pin A1 to A3 = 29 ohms.

Tamper assembly, PL 12.45

Item 1. 12-396-00-110, 12397-00-110, 12-398-00-110,
RAP
U8
Staple head
motor
PJ308 pin A8 to A10 = 20 ohms. Staple head unit, PL 12.55

PJ308 pin A9 to A11 = 20 ohms Item 5. 12M-110 RAP
U7
Front tamper
motor

Tamper assembly, PL 12.45

Item 1. 12-392-00-110, 12393-00-110, 12-394-00-110
RAP
If the defective driven component is found using the table checks, disconnect the connector
closest to the driven component, then check the driven component again to identify any short
circuit in the wiring to the driven component. Repair the wiring or install new parts as necessary.
If the defective driven component can not be found using the table checks, refer to GP 7, check
each driven component to ensure that it is not seized. Motors should rotate reasonably easily.
Solenoid armatures should slide easily in the coil. Also check the drive components to ensure
that they rotate easily, if necessary install new parts.
When the a new driven component has been installed or the defective drive components have
been repaired, install a new LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.
February 2013
2-101
12G-110
12H-110 Copy Damage in the LCSS RAP

Use this RAP to identify and correct the causes of copy damage in the LCSS.
12J-110 Mis-Registration in Stapled Sets and Non-Stapled

Sets RAP
Procedure
Use this RAP to identify and correct the causes of mis-registration in stapled sets, resulting in
staples missing some sheets in the set, or poorly registered non-stapled sets.
WARNING
WARNING
Look for torn paper in the LCSS paper path. Torn fragments can pass through the IOT and
LCSS paper path without causing a problem until they finally wedge themselves at some
point. A likely place for a piece of paper to be wedged is at the hole punch assembly,
where the top and bottom guides form the narrowest part of the paper path.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
The most likely cause of mis-registration is paper condition and/or damage such as curl, wrinkle, creases, dog ears, etc.
Ensure that the shaft diverter assembly, PL 12.60 Item 13, operates correctly and has full
movement.
Curl, wrinkle and creases are probably caused in the IOT, go to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Ensure that the hole punches park at the fully open position. If they protrude even slightly,
a jam will occur in the narrow paper path of the hole punch.
For other copy/print damage and dog ears, go to the 12H-110 Copy Damage in the LCSS RAP.
Ensure that the jam clearance guide, PL 12.70 Item 6, closes and latches correctly. Check
that the magnet at the rear is located and functions correctly. Check the clip at the front is
positioned correctly, PL 12.70 Item 7.
Check that bin 1 is seated correctly and the bin 1 alignment clip is in position, PL 12.10
Item 13.
Ensure that all idler rolls in the LCSS paper path are free to rotate, particularly those on
the jam clearance guide, where the paper turns through 90 degrees.
Turn over the paper stack in the tray in use.
Use a new ream of paper in the tray in use.
Ensure that the paper path ribs of the jam clearance guide, PL 12.70 Item 6, and the entry
guide cover, PL 12.70 Item 5, are free of scores and nicks. Check also for contamination
and glue from label stock.
Paper type, especially recycled paper, can lead to registration problems. Try changing to
a different brand or type of paper.
Ensure that the guides in the paper trays are correctly set and reported on the UI for the
paper size loaded.
Check that paper type is set correctly. If heavyweight paper is used but not set in the UI,
the compiler capacity can be exceeded.
Check for obstructions in the compiler.
Ensure that the paddle roll operates correctly and that the paddles are not damaged. The
paddles should park completely inside the top section of the compiler, with the shorter
paddle in a vertical position. If all of the paddles are out of position, check the paddle roll
position sensor, PL 12.25 Item 11, the flag, PL 12.25 Item 7 and the paddle motor assembly, PL 12.25 Item 10. If only one paddle is mis-aligned with the others, it can be re-positioned by hand (they are not bonded to the shaft).
Ensure that the tampers operate correctly, i.e. are not stalling or losing position during the
job. Inspect the tampers for damage, if necessary install new parts. PL 12.45.
Inspect the bin 1 entry nips for roll damage. The idlers should be held against the rubber
driving rolls and they should be free to rotate within their support springs. If necessary,
install new parts, PL 12.65.
Inspect the four spring loaded guides on the output cover, PL 12.10 Item 7. Ensure that
they are correctly located and are free to move up and down.
12H-110, 12J-110
February 2013
2-102
12K-110 LCSS Poor Stacking RAP
12L-110 Stapling Prime Failure RAP
Use this RAP to find the cause of poor stacking in the LCSS.
Use this RAP when the staples in the stapling head are not primed.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Check the following;
Look for sets that are not dropping back fully in bin 1 and therefore not operating the bin 1
level sensor:
Large paper sizes should not be stacked on top of small paper sizes.
Ensure that the paper stack in each paper tray has been fanned.
Turn over the paper stack in each paper tray.
Ensure that all paper or other copy stock being used is within the size and weight
specifications. Refer to GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications.
The staple cartridge has staples in it and is correctly installed,
Try using a fresh ream of paper.
The leading staples in the staple head have been primed, Figure 3.
Ensure that the edge guides of all paper trays are adjusted correctly for the paper
size and that the trays are fully closed.
Check that bin 1 is seated correctly and the bin 1 alignment clip is in position, PL
12.10 Item 13.
Check that the sheets of staples in the cartridge are feeding one at a time. If staple
sheets overlap, they will jam in the cartridge. If necessary, install a new staple cartridge, PL 26.10 Item 16.
Labels must not be fed to bin 1, feed all labels bin 0 only.
It is recommended that transparencies are fed to bin 0 whenever possible.
Check that bin 1 is level front to back. If necessary perform ADJ 12.1-110 LCSS Bin 1
Level.
Check that the bin 1 upper level sensor Q12-188 is working correctly. Refer to the 12-46200-110 Bin 1 Movement Failure RAP.
Check the operation of the front and rear tampers. Refer to 12-392-00-110, 12-393-00110, 12-394-00-110 Front Tamper Move Failure RAP and 12-396-00-110, 12-397-00-110,
12-398-00-110, Rear Tamper Move Failure RAP.
Check that the output device is not near an air conditioning or ventilation output duct. Air
flow across the output bins can cause poor stacking.
NOTE: The term priming refers to 2 staples at the front of the cartridge, that have been preformed automatically by the action of the stapler, refer to Figure 3.
NOTE: The SH 1 low staples sensor, SH 1 cartridge sensor, SH 1 home sensor and the SH 1
priming sensor are all integral to the staple head unit. These sensors can be checked using
component control codes but they cannot be exchanged as components.
Procedure
Figure 1. Enter dC330 code 12-196, actuate the SH1 paper sensor Q12-196. The
changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
PJ308, LCSS PWB.
display
SH1 paper sensor, PL 12.55 Item 4.
A
February 2013
2-103
12K-110, 12L-110
A
NOTE: If the SH1 priming sensor does not see staples in the primed position, the staple head
cycles a number of times to prime the staple head. This occurs when the LCSS interlocks are
made.
Follow the customer instruction label inside the LCSS front door to remove the staple cartridge,
slide out the top sheet of staples from the cartridge, to expose a fresh sheet of staples on the
top of the stack. Ensure the forming plate is fully closed, Figure 2. Install the staple cartridge
and close the door. The stapler will now cycle a few times to feed and prime the new sheet of
staples. Open the door and remove the staple cartridge. Examine the sheet of staples that
have been fed to the staple forming part of the stapler, by opening the forming plate, Figure 3.
The first two staples have been partially formed.
Y
N
Install a new staple cartridge, PL 26.10 Item 16 and repeat the check. If the first two staples are not partially formed install a new staple head unit, PL 12.55 Item 5. Perform SCP
5 Final Actions
Install a new staple head unit, PL 12.55 Item 5. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Primed staples
Forming plate
closed
Figure 2 Staple cartridge closed
SH1 paper sensor

Q12-196
Staple head unit
12L-110
February 2013
2-104
12M-110 Staple Head Operation Failure RAP

Use this RAP when the staple head fails to cycle or the staple head is not at the home position.
NOTE: The home position is with the jaws of the staple head fully open.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not run code 12-247 without 2 sheets of paper in the stapler jaws. Running this code without the paper in position can cause damage to the machine.
RAP.
The staple head unit is correctly installed PL 12.55 Item 5.
Staples
Forming plate open
NOTE: With reference to WD 12.2, component control codes;

Code 12-247 cycles the staple head 1 motor.
Code 12-248 reverses the staple head 1 motor to the home position.
Procedure
Figure 3 Staple cartridge open
NOTE: After repairing the fault using this RAP, switch off the machine, then switch on the
machine, GP 14, to enable operation of the staple head.
Place two sheet of paper in the stapler jaws then enter dC330 code 12-247 to cycle the staple
head once. Enter code 12-248 to reverse the staple head to the home position. The
staple
head operates as expected.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.2. Check the wiring and connectors between the LCSS PWB and the staple
head. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Refer to:
P/J 308, LCSS PWB
A
February 2013
2-105
12L-110, 12M-110
A
12N-110 Chad Bin Present and Bin Full RAP
Staple head unit, PL 12.55 Item 5.
Use this RAP when there is a false indication of a missing or full chad bin.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the chad bin is fully inserted.
Check that the actuator for the chad bin level sensor engages in the slot of the chad bin.
Check that the sensor hole in the side of the chad bin is clear of obstructions.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-193. Actuate the chad bin level sensor Q12-193, using a strip of paper,
PL 12.20 Item 7. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.2. Check the chad bin level sensor Q12-193.
Refer to:
P/J307, LCSS PWB.
12M-110, 12N-110
February 2013
2-106
12-024-00-171, 12-025-00-171 HVF Paddle Roller Position

RAP
12-024-00-171 The paddle roller has failed to return to the home position.
Pusher
12-025-00-171 The paddle roller has failed to move from the home position.
Paddle roll
home sensor
Q12-186
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for damage or any obstruction that would prevent paddle movement. If necessary,
install new components.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-238 paddle roll motor run, to check the movement of the paddle, Figure
1. The paddle turns.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.10. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the paddle
roller motor, MOT12-238. Refer to:
12A-171 HVF Power Distribution RAP.
Paddle roll
motor
MOT12-238
Paddle unit, PL 12.115 Item 2.
Stack the code 12-186 paddle roll home sensor, Q12-186. The display changes as the paddle rotates.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.9. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the paddle
roller home sensor, Q12-186. Refer to:
Figure 1 Components
February 2013
2-107
12-024-00-171, 12-025-00-171
12-044-00-171 to 12-047-00-171 HVF Punch Head Position

RAP
12-044-00-171 The punch head has failed to return to the home position within the required time.
12-045-00-171 The punch head has failed to move from the home position within the required
time.
12-046-00-171 The punch unit has failed to return to the home position within the required time.
12-047-00-171 The punch unit has failed to move from the home position within the required
time.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Hole punch module, PL 12.125 Item 19.
Enter dC330, code 12-114 for the punch unit home sensor and stack the code 12-245 or 12246 to take the punch unit motor to home, then away from home. Observe the condition of the
sensor on the UI. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.12. Check the wiring from the sensor to the PWB. Repair as necessary,
REP 1.1. Check the punch unit home sensor, Q12-114. Refer to:
Check the punch head area for any obstruction or damage that could prevent the free movement of the head or the unit. If necessary, install new components.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-244 for the punch head motor, MOT12-244, Figure 1. The control code
12-243, punch head move home, can also be used The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.24. Check the wiring from the motor to the PWB. Repair as necessary, REP
1.1. Check the punch head motor, MOT12-244. Refer to:
Punch head motor,

MOT12-244
Punch head home
sensor, Q12-194
Punch unit home

sensor, Q12-114
Enter dC330, code 12-194 for the punch head home sensor and stack the code 12-244 for the
punch head motor. Observe the condition of the sensor on the UI. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.12. Check the wiring from the sensor to the PWB. Repair as necessary,
REP 1.1. Check the punch head home sensor, Q12-194. Refer to:
Punch unit motor,

MOT12-245
Enter dC330, code 12-245 for the punch unit motor to travel in the forward direction, or enter
the code 12-246 for the punch unit motor to travel in the reverse direction. The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.24. Check the wiring from the motor to the PWB. Repair as necessary, REP
1.1. Check MOT12-245. Refer to:
A
12-044-00-171 to 12-047-00-171
February 2013
2-108
12-056-00-171, 12-057-00-171 Inserter Bottom Plate RAP

12-056-00-171 The inserter bottom plate has failed to return to the home position.
12-061-00-171, 12-416-00-171 HVF BM Crease Blade Fault

RAP
12-057-00-171 The inserter bottom plate has failed to lift.
12-061-00-171 The crease blade has failed to clear the crease blade home sensor.
Initial Actions
12-416-00-171 The crease blade has failed to return to the home position.
WARNING
Check that the bottom plate area is clear and that there is no damage or obstructions. Install
new components as necessary.
Initial Actions
Turn the crease blade knob (6d) PL 12.150 Item 4 to ensure that the crease blade mechanism is free to move. If necessary, clear any paper jam in the area of the blade.
Ensure that the crease blade assembly is level front to back and is installed correctly,
refer to REP 12.36-171.
Check the following parts for damage:
Procedure
Crease blade assembly, PL 12.170 Item 13.
Enter dC330, code 12-261 for the inserter motor MOT12-261. The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14 and WD 12.22. Check the wiring from the inserter motor PL 12.315 Item
1 to the HVF PWB PL 12.140 Item 2. Repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the inserter
motor, MOT12-261. Refer to:
Connecting rods, PL 12.170 Item 9.
Crank, PL 12.170 Item 8.
WARNING
Inserter Motor, PL 12.315 Item 1.
WARNING
Enter dC330, code 12-085 for the inserter bottom plate sensor, then actuate the inserter bottom plate sensor Q12-085. The display changes.
Y
N
Go WD 12.13 and WD 12.21. Check the wiring from the inserter bottom plate sensor PL
12.300 Item 16 to the HVF PWB PL 12.140 Item 2. Repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check
the inserter bottom plate sensor, Q12-085. Refer to:

Inserter bottom plate sensor, PL 12.300 Item 16.

Enter dC330, code 12-315 for the inserter pickup sensor, then actuate the inserter pick sensor
Q12-315 PL 12.310 Item 10. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22. Check the wiring from the inserter pickup sensor PL 12.310 Item 10 to the HVF PWB. Check the inserter pickup sensor. Refer to:

Inserter pickup sensor, PL 12.310 Item 10.

Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-214. Actuate the BM crease blade home sensor Q12-214, PL 12.170
Item 1, by rotating the crease blade knob PL 12.150 Item 4, so that the actuator moves into
and out of the BM crease blade home sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
BM crease blade home sensor, PL 12.170 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-215. Actuate the BM crease blade motor encoder sensor Q12-215, PL
12.170 Item 1 by slowly rotating the crease blade knob PL 12.150 Item 4. The
display
changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.16. Check the BM crease blade motor encoder, Q12-215.
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-109
12-056-00-171, 12-057-00-171, 12-061-00-171, 12-
12-062-00-171 HVF BM Crease Roll Motor Failure RAP
12-062-00-171 The HVF BM crease roll motor has failed to run.
Initial Actions
BM crease blade motor encoder sensor, PL 12.170 Item 1.
Clear any paper jam in the area of the crease rolls.
Enter dC330, code 12-252 to run the BM crease blade motor, MOT12-252, PL 12.170 Item 3.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.18. Check MOT 12-252.
Refer to:

BM crease blade motor assembly, PL 12.170 Item 3.
WARNING
WARNING
Procedure
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or bad connectors, REP 1.1. If necessary install new components.
Release the crease roll nip pressure by moving the crease roll handle (6c), PL 12.150 Item 5,
fully counter clockwise. Remove the BM right hand cover, PL 12.185 Item 15, to access the
crease rolls. Enter dC330 code 12-216. Actuate the BM crease roll motor encoder sensor by
rotating the crease rolls slowly by hand. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.17. Check the BM crease roll motor encoder sensor, Q12-216, PL 12.175
Item 9.
Refer to:
BM crease roll motor encoder sensor, PL 12.175 Item 9.
Enter dC330, code 12-253 to run the BM crease roll motor, MOT12-253, PL 12.175 Item 12.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.18. Check the BM crease roll motor, MOT12-253.
Refer to:
BM crease roll motor, PL 12.175 Item 12.
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or bad connectors, REP 1.1. If necessary install new components:
12-061-00-171, 12-416-00-171, 12-062-00-171
BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10
February 2013
2-110
12-063-00-171, 12-411-00-171 HVF BM Staple Unit 1 Failure

RAP
12-063-00-171 The HVF BM staple unit 1 has failed to leave the home position.
12-411-00-171 The HVF BM staple unit 1 has failed to return to the home position.
A
Enter dC330, code 12-254 to run the BM SH1 motor. The staple head cycled.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.16 and WD 12.19. Check the wiring and connectors.
The wiring and connectors are good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring or connectors, REP 1.1.
Initial Actions
Install a new BM staple head 1, PL 12.185 Item 7.
WARNING
Check that there is no damage or obstruction that would prevent the stapling unit from
cycling.
Check that the sheets of staples in the cartridge are feeding one at a time. If staple sheets
overlap, they will jam in the cartridge. If necessary, install a new staple cartridge, PL
12.185 Item 8.
Check for jammed staples in the stapler head.
Ensure that the customer job does not exceed the capacity of the booklet maker. Refer to
12D-171 Booklet Quality RAP for booklet maker quality specifications.
BM staple head 1, PL 12.185 Item 7.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-217 to check the BM staple head (SH) carrier closed sensor, Q12-217,
PL 12.185 Item 18. Open and close the staple head carrier. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.16. Check the BM SH carrier closed sensor, Q12-217.
Refer to:
BM Stapler head carrier closed sensor, PL 12.185 Item 18.
Remove the HVF front door, refer to REP 12.1-171 HVF Covers. Pull out the BM module.
Remove the staple head 1 cover, PL 12.185 Item 14. Enter dC330, code 12-218 to check the
BM SH1 home switch. Manually rotate the staple head to actuate the BM SH1 home switch.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.16. Check the BM SH 1 home switch, S12-218.
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-111
12-063-00-171, 12-411-00-171
12-065-00-171, 12-383-00-171 HVF BM Backstop Motor

Fault RAP
12-065-00-171 The HVF BM backstop motor fails to move.
BM backstop motor, PL 12.160 Item 4.
Enter dC330 code 12-259 to energize the BM stack hold solenoid, SOL12-259, PL 12.165 Item
17. The solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.17. Check the BM stack hold solenoid, SOL12-259.
Refer to:
12-383-00-171 The HVF BM backstop is not at the home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction that could prevent the backstop mechanism from
moving.
Check the following items:
Back stop assembly, PL 12.165 Item 18.
Damaged BM back stop drive belt, PL 12.160 Item 7.
Damaged BM back stop belt, PL 12.165 Item 15.
Damaged pulley, PL 12.160 Item 5.
Damaged pulley on the BM back stop drive shaft, PL 12.165 Item 14.
BM guide home sensor, PL 12.160 Item 18.
Damaged pulley on the BM back stop idler shaft, PL 12.160 Item 13.
The BM back stop drive belt is tensioned correctly. Refer to REP 12.20-171.
The BM back stop belt is tensioned correctly. Refer to REP 12.26-171.

Code 12-255 runs the BM backstop motor to the A4 position.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-204. Actuate the BM guide home sensor, Q12-204, PL 12.160 Item 18.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM guide home sensor, PL 12.160 Item 18.
Enter dC330, code 12-255 to run the BM backstop motor, MOT12-255, PL 12.160 Item 4. The
motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.17. Check MOT12-255
Refer to:
A
12-065-00-171, 12-383-00-171
February 2013
2-112
12-066-00-171, 12-384-00-171, 12-419-00-171, 12-420-00171 HVF BM Tamper Fault RAP
12-083-00-171, 12-440-00-171 to 12-444-00-171 HVF Paper

Pusher Fault RAP
12-066-00-171 The HVF BM tamper has failed to clear the home sensor.
12-083-00-171 The paper pusher motor has stalled.
12-384-00-171 The HVF BM tamper is not at the home sensor.
12-440-00-171 The paper pusher has failed to return to the home, (upper) position.
12-419-00-171 The HVF BM tamper home fault.

12-441-00-171 The paper pusher has failed to move from the home, (upper) position.
12-420-00-171 The HVF BM tamper move fault.
Initial Actions
12-442-00-171 The paper pusher has failed to return to the away, (lower) position.
WARNING
12-443-00-171 The paper pusher has failed to move from the away, (lower) position.
12-444-00-171 The stapler gate safety switch has failed.
Check for a jam or other obstruction that could prevent the tamper mechanism from moving.
Initial Actions
Check for damaged tamper components, PL 12.155.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-205. Actuate the BM tamper 1 home sensor, Q12-205, PL 12.155 Item
Y
N
Go to WD 12.18. Check Q12-205
Refer to:

BM tamper 1 home sensor, PL 12.155 Item 1.
Check for a jam or other obstruction that could prevent the paper pusher from moving.
Check for damaged paper pusher components.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-265 to run the paper pusher motor, MOT12-265, PL 12.115 Item 13.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
WARNING
Enter dC330, code 12-256, to run the BM tamper 1 motor, MOT12-256, PL 12.155 Item 3.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
12A-171 HVF Power Distribution RAP
Paper pusher motor, PL 12.115 Item 13.
Go to WD 12.11. Check the stapler gate safety switch S12-319.

Refer to:
GP 13 How to check a switch.
P/J304, HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2.
BM tamper 1 motor, PL 12.155 Item 3.
BM tamper 1 home sensor, PL 12.155 Item 1.

The switch is good.

Y
N
Sensor assembly, PL 12.115 Item 22.
HVF PWB PL 12.140 Item 2.
A
February 2013
2-113
12-066-00-171, 12-384-00-171, 12-419-00-171, 12-
A
Enter dC330, code 12-092. Manually actuate the paper pusher upper sensor, Q12-092, PL
12.115 Item 16. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:

Paper pusher upper sensor, PL 12.115 Item 16.
12-113-00-171 The paper leading edge is late arriving at the HVF booklet exit sensor.
12-114-00-171 The paper trailing edge is late leaving the HVF booklet exit sensor.
12-125-00-171 The entry sensor is not turned on within a specified time.
12-113-00-171, 12-114-00-171, 12-190-00-171, 12-192-00-171

HVF BM Entry RAP
12-190-00-171 The paper leading edge is late arriving at the BM entry sensor.
12-192-00-171 The paper trailing edge is late leaving the BM entry sensor.
Enter dC330, code 12-094. Manually actuate the paper pusher lower sensor, Q12-094, PL
Y
N
Refer to:
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the bypass transport.
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the BM paper entry guide.
Paper pusher lower sensor, PL 12.115 Item 16.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-087. Manually actuate the HVF booklet exit sensor, Q12-087, Figure 1.
Y
N
Refer to:
Paper pusher upper / lower sensor, PL 12.115 Item 16.
Paper pusher motor assembly, PL 12.115 Item 13.
Sensor assembly, PL 12.115 Item 22.
HVF booklet exit sensor, PL 12.135 Item 3.
Enter dC330, code 12-258. Energize the BM diverter solenoid SOL12-258, Figure 1. The
solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM diverter solenoid, PL 12.120 Item 4.
A
12-083-00-171, 12-440-00-171 to 12-444-00-171 , 12-
February 2013
2-114
A
Enter dC330, code 12-263 to run the bypass feed motor, MOT12-263, Figure 1. The
runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.8. Check the bypass feed motor, MOT 12-263.
Refer to:
B
motor
BM paper present sensor, PL 12.185 Item 5.
Check the drive belt on the motor. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Install a new drive belt, PL 12.175 Item 15.
Bypass Feed motor, PL 12.120 Item 2.
Check the drive belt on the motor. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Install a new drive belt, PL 12.120 Item 8.
Enter dC330, code 12-089. Manually actuate the BM entry sensor, Q12-089, Figure 2. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM diverter gate, PL 12.125 Item 9.
BM compiler motor, PL 12.175 Item 1.
Bypass Feed motor, PL 12.120 Item 2.
BM diverter solenoid,
SOL12-258
BM entry sensor, PL 12.150 Item 16.
Enter dC330, code 12-251 to run the BM compiler motor, MOT12-251, Figure 2. The
runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
motor
HVF booklet exit sensor,

Q12-087
Lower the stapler bracket assembly, Figure 2. Enter dC330 code 12-170 BM paper present
sensor, Q12-170. Actuate Q12-170. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Bypass Feed motor

MOT12-263
B
February 2013
2-115
12-113-00-171, 12-114-00-171, 12-190-00-171, 12-
12-125-00-171, 12-126-00-171 HVF Entry Sensor RAP

12-125-00-171 The entry sensor is not turned on within a specified time.
BM entry sensor
Q12-089
12-126-00-171 The paper trailing edge is late leaving the entry sensor.
BM compiler
motor,
MOT12-251
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the entrance guide.
Check the entrance guide for damage.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-077. Manually actuate the entry sensor, Q12-077, PL 12.135 Item 2.
Y
N
Refer to:


Enter dC330, code 12-263 to run the bypass feed motor, MOT12-263, PL 12.120 Item 2. The
motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.8. Check MOT 12-263
Refer to:
BM paper present sensor,
Q12-170

Stapler bracket assembly
Bypass feed motor, PL 12.120 Item 2.
Check the transport motor 1 belt. The belt is good.

Y
N
Install a new transport motor 1 belt, PL 12.120 Item 7.
Entry sensor, PL 12.135 Item 2
If the fault remains, make sure that the paper correctly continues past the previous sensor in
the paper path. Refer to the 10-140-00 to 10-146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00 Exit Jam RAP.
12-113-00-171, 12-114-00-171, 12-190-00-171, 12-192-
February 2013
2-116
12-141-00-171, 12-142-00-171 HVF Buffer Path Sensor RAP
12-141-00-171 The paper trailing edge is late leaving the buffer path sensor.
Buffer motor, PL 12.120 Item 1.
12-142-00-171 The paper leading edge is late arriving at the buffer path sensor.
Check the buffer feed motor belt, PL 12.120 Item 9. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Install a new buffer feed motor belt, PL 12.120 Item 9.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Buffer path sensor, PL 12.135 Item 2.
Check for a jam or other obstruction in buffer path transport.
Buffer motor, PL 12.120 Item 1.
Check the paper guide for damage.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-321. Manually actuate the buffer path sensor, Q12-321, PL 12.135 Item
Y
N
Refer to:
Enter dC330, code 12-258. Energize the BM diverter solenoid SOL12-258, PL 12.120 Item 4.
Y
N
Refer to:
HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2
Enter dC330, code 12-262 to run the buffer motor, MOT12-262, PL 12.120 Item 1. The motor
runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-117
12-141-00-171, 12-142-00-171
12-151-171, 12-152-171 HVF Compiler Exit Sensor RAP
12-151-00-171 The paper trailing edge is late leaving the compiler exit sensor.
12-152-00-171 The paper leading edge is late arriving at the compiler exit sensor.
Check the transport motor 2 drive belt. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Install a new transport motor 2 drive belt, PL 12.120 Item 10.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the paper guide.
Diverter gate, PL 12.125 Item 7.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-106. Manually actuate the compiler exit sensor, Q12-106, Figure 1.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.7. Check the sensor, Q12-106.
Refer to:
Exit diverter solenoid,

SOL12-225
Compile exit sensor
(Q12-106)
Enter dC330, code 12-225. Energize the exit diverter solenoid SOL12-225, Figure 1. The
solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Refer to:

Transport motor 2 - Exit
(MOT12-224)
Enter dC330, code 12-224 to run the transport motor 2, MOT 12-224, Figure 1. The
runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.8. Check the transport motor 2, MOT 12-224.
Refer to:
motor
A
12-151-171, 12-152-171
February 2013
2-118
12-157-00-171, 12-158-00-171 HVF Buffer Position Sensor

RAP
12-157-00-171 The paper leading edge is late arriving at the buffer position sensor.
12-158-00-171 The paper trailing edge is late leaving the buffer position sensor.
N
Refer to:
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction in inserter transport.
Enter dC330, code 12-086. Manually actuate the buffer position sensor, Q12-086, PL 12.135
Item 2. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Bypass feed motor, PL 12.120 Item 2.
Check the bypass feed motor drive belt, PL 12.120 Item 8. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Install a new bypass feed motor drive belt, PL 12.120 Item 8.
Procedure
Buffer position sensor, PL 12.135 Item 2.
Enter dC330, code 12-223 to run the transport motor 1, MOT 12-223, PL 12.120 Item 2. The
motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.7. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check MOT12-223.
Refer to:
Check the transport motor 1 drive belt, PL 12.120 Item 7. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Enter dC330, code 12-263 to run the bypass feed motor, MOT12-263, PL 12.120 Item 2. The
motor runs.
February 2013
2-119
12-157-00-171, 12-158-00-171
A
Unlatch the entrance baffle assembly, PL 12.150 Item 22. Run again MOT12-251. The
entry roll rotates.
Y
N
Check the following components:
12-166-00-171 HVF BM Compiler Exit Jam RAP

12-166-00-171 The trail edge is late leaving the BM compiler exit sensor.
Initial Actions
WARNING
If necessary, remove any paper from the booklet maker.
Check that there is no damage or obstruction in the booklet compiling area or the paper
path to the booklet compiling area.
Check that the stapler bracket assembly, PL 12.185 Item 10, is correctly latched.
Check the operation of the BM tampers, refer to the 12-066-00-171, 12-384-00-171, 12419-00-171, 12-420-00-171 HVF BM Tamper Failure RAP. If the tampers are operating
correctly, go to ADJ 12.5-171 Booklet Tamping and check the tampers are correctly
adjusted.
BM compiler motor belt, PL 12.175 Item 15.
BM entry roll pulley, PL 12.150 Item 14.
BM entry roll, PL 12.150 Item 15.
BM

Make a 60 page booklet (15 sheets of paper). Check that the top sheet of paper has not been
torn from the booklet. The booklet is good.
Y
N
Check that the components in the lower crease roll gear and clutch assembly are correctly installed. Refer to the replacement procedure in REP 12.52-171 BM Crease Rolls,
Gears and Bearings.
Procedure
Lower the stapler bracket assembly, Figure 1. Enter dC330 code 12-170 BM paper present
sensor, Q12-170. Actuate Q12-170. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Go to WD 12.18. Check the connectors and harness between PJ568 and PJ556. Refer to REP
1.1. The wiring and connectors are good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring, REP 1.1 or install new components as necessary.
Enter dC330 code 12-251 BM compiler motor, MOT12-251. MOT12-251 runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Install new components as necessary
A
12-166-00-171
February 2013
2-120
12-171-00-171, 12-172-00-171 HVF Top Tray Exit Sensor

Fault RAP
12-171-00-171 The paper leading edge is late arriving at the top exit sensor.
BM entry roll
12-172-00-171 The paper trailing edge is late leaving the top exit sensor.
Initial Actions
WARNING
BM compiler motor,
MOT12-251
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the paper guide.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-107. Manually actuate the top tray exit sensor, Q12-107, PL 12.135 Item
Y
N
Refer to:

Q12-170
Enter dC330, code 12-225. Energize the exit diverter solenoid SOL12-225, PL 12.120 Item 4.
Y
N
Refer to:

Stapler bracket assembly
Enter dC330, code 12-224 to run the transport motor 2, MOT12-224, PL 12.120 Item 1. The
motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-121
12-166-00-171, 12-171-00-171, 12-172-00-171
12-181-00-171, 12-182-00-171 HVF BM Exit Jam RAP
12-181-00-171 The lead edge is late arriving at the BM exit sensor.

12-182-00-171 The trail edge is late leaving the BM exit sensor.
Check the transport motor 2 drive belts (A) & (B). The drive belts are good.
Y
N
Install a new transport motor 2 drive belt (A) PL 12.120 Item 10 and/or transport motor
drive belt (B), PL 12.120 Item 11.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Top exit sensor, PL 12.135 Item 3.
Diverter exit gate, PL 12.125 Item 7.
Turn the crease blade knob (6d) to ensure that the crease blade mechanism is free to
move. If necessary, clear any paper jam in the exit area.
For 12-182-00 faults. Remove and re-seat the BM staple cartridge. Check for missformed staple which may cause the sheet to snag and skew.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-215. Actuate the BM crease blade motor encoder sensor, Q12-215, Figure 1 by rotating the crease blade knob (6d). The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Release the crease roll nip pressure by moving the crease roll handle fully counter clockwise.
Remove the BM right hand cover, PL 12.185 Item 15 to access the crease rolls. Enter dC330
code 12-216. Actuate the BM crease roll motor encoder sensor by rotating the crease rolls
slowly by hand. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
12-171-00-171, 12-172-00-171, 12-181-00-171, 12-182-
February 2013
2-122
A
Enter dC330 code 12-213. Actuate the BM exit sensor, Q12-213, Figure 2. The
changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
B
display
Refer to:
BM crease roll gate motor, PL 12.175 Item 8.
BM exit sensor, PL 12.185 Item 17.
The BM module has a tri-folder module installed.

Y
N
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or bad connectors, REP 1.1. If
necessary install a new BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
Enter dC330, code 12-253 to run the BM crease roll motor, MOT12-253. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Check the drive assembly for wear, damage, contamination and misalignment, PL 12.205 Item
12. The condition of the drive assembly is good.
Y
N
Install a new drive assembly, PL 12.205 Item 12.
Check the drive coupler, PL 12.205 Item 17 is engaged with the BM crease roll motor encoder
disc, PL 12.175 Item 13. The coupler and encoder are correctly engaged.
Y
N
Align the drive coupler, refer to REP 12.68-171 Tri-folder Drive Install Kit.
Enter dC330, code 12-253 to run the BM crease roll motor, MOT12-253. The motor drives
the gears.
Y
N
Crease roll drive train gears, PL 12.180.
Check the condition of the drive belt, PL 12.205 Item 11. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Install a new tri-folder install kit, PL 12.205 Item 14.
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or bad connectors, REP 1.1. If necessary install a new BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
Enter dC330, code 12-252 to run the BM crease blade motor, MOT12-252. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM crease blade motor, PL 12.170 Item 3.
BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10
NOTE: The BM crease roll gate motor has two component control codes:
12-273 cycles the crease roll gate.
12-276 opens the crease roll gate.
Enter dC330, code 12-273 to cycle the BM crease roll gate motor, MOT12-273. The
runs.
Y
N
motor
B
February 2013
2-123
12-181-00-171, 12-182-00-171
BM crease roll gate motor, MOT12-273
BM crease blade
motor encoder
sensor, Q12-215
BM exit sensor, Q12-213

BM crease blade motor,
MOT12-252
BM crease roll motor, MOT12-253
BM crease roll motor encoder, Q12-216
12-181-00-171, 12-182-00-171
February 2013
2-124
12-183-00-171, 12-184-00-171 HVF BM Paper Jam RAP
12-183-00-171 The BM PWB has detected an unexpected sheet in the booklet maker paper
path.
12-184-00-171 The BM PWB has detected a stray sheet in the booklet maker paper path after
jam clearance.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the booklet maker paper path.
Check the paper path for damage.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-170. Manually actuate the BM paper present sensor, Q12-170, Figure 1.
Y
N
Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 12-213. Manually actuate the BM exit sensor, Figure 2. The
changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM entry sensor, PL 12.150 Item 16.
The HVF has a tri-folder.

Y
N
The fault may be intermittent, check the wiring, REP 1.1. If necessary install a new BM
PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
Enter dC330 code 12-164. Manually actuate the tri-folder entry sensor, Q12-164, Figure 3.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.19 and WD 12.20. Check Q12-164. Check the wiring between PJ602 pin 10
on the tri-folder control PWB and PJ563 pin 1 on the BM PWB.
Refer to:
Tri-folder entry sensor, PL 12.215 Item 11.
Tri-folder control PWB, PL 12.205 Item 16.
The fault may be intermittent, check the wiring, REP 1.1. If necessary install a new BM PWB,
PL 12.175 Item 10.
display
BM exit sensor, PL 12.185 Item 17.
Enter dC330 code 12-089. Manually actuate the BM entry sensor, Q12-089, Figure 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-125
12-183-00-171, 12-184-00-171
BM entry sensor,
Q12-089
BM exit sensor, Q12-213

Q12-170
12-183-00-171, 12-184-00-171
February 2013
2-126
12-185-00-171 to 12-187-00-171 Tri-Folder Exit Sensor and

Assist Sensor RAP
12-185-00-171 The lead edge is late arriving at the tri-folder exit sensor.
12-186-00-171 The trail edge is late leaving the tri-folder exit sensor.
12-187-00-171 The lead edge is late arriving at the tri-folder assist gate sensor.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Tri-folder entry sensor

Q12-164
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the tri-folder.
Check the tri-folder for damage.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-165. Manually actuate the tri-folder assist gate sensor, Q12-165, Figure
Y
N
Go to WD 12.19 and WD 12.20. Check Q12-165.
Refer to:

Tri-folder assist gate sensor, PL 12.215 Item 6.
Enter dC330 code 12-166. Manually actuate the tri-folder exit sensor, Q12-166, Figure 2. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Tri-folder exit sensor, PL 12.215 Item 12.
Enter dC330 code 12-267 to energize the tri-folder diverter solenoid, SOL12-267. The
noid energizes.
February 2013
2-127
sole-
12-183-00-171, 12-184-00-171, 12-185-00-171 to 12-
A
Y
N
Go to WD 12.19 and WD 12.20. Check SOL12-267.
Refer to:
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Tri-folder diverter solenoid, PL 12.215 Item 16.
Tri-folder crease roll

clutch, CL12-269
Enter dC330 code 12-268 to energize the tri-folder assist gate solenoid, SOL12-268, Figure 1.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.19 and WD 12.20. Check SOL12-268.
Refer to:
Tri-folder assist gate

sensor, Q12-165
Tri-folder assist gate solenoid, PL 12.215 Item 8.
Enter dC330 code 12-269 to energize the tri-folder crease roll clutch, CL12-269, Figure 1. The
clutch energizes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.19 and WD 12.20. Check CL12-269.
Refer to:

Tri-folder crease roll clutch, PL 12.205 Item 9.
Tri-folder diverter
solenoid, SOL12-267
Tri-folder assist gate

solenoid, SOL12-268
Enter dC330, code 12-273 to run the BM crease roll motor, MOT12-253, Figure 3. The motor
runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
12-185-00-171 to 12-187-00-171
February 2013
2-128
Tri-folder exit
sensor, Q12-166

BM crease roll motor,
MOT12-253
February 2013
2-129
12-185-00-171 to 12-187-00-171
12-191-00-171, 12-193-00-171, 12-194-00-171, 12-196-00171 Inserter Paper Jam RAP
12-191-00-171 The leading edge is late arriving at the inserter standby sensor.
12-193-00-171 The trailing edge is late leaving the inserter standby sensor.
12-194-00-171 The leading edge is late arriving at the inserter pickup sensor.
12-196-00-171 The trailing edge is late leaving the inserter pickup sensor.
Fault code 12-191-00 may also be generated where a fault in the inserter causes jamming in
the IME.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Inserter TE sensor, PL 12.310 Item 11.
Inserter PWB, PL 12.310 Item 9.
Enter dC330 code 12-083. Manually actuate the inserter LE sensor, Q12-083, Figure 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the inserter.
Check the inserter for damage.
Check the condition of the inserter feed rolls. Use a cloth dampened with water to clean
the rolls. If necessary, install a new inserter pickup assembly, PL 12.310 Item 1.
Go to dC135 CRU/HFSI Status. Check the count of the inserter feed roller set. If the count
is near end of life, install a new inserter pickup assembly, PL 12.310 Item 1.
Inserter LE sensor, PL 12.310 Item 11.
Enter dC330 code 12-316. Manually actuate the inserter acceleration sensor Q12-316, Figure
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22. Check the sensor.
Refer to:
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-315. Manually actuate the inserter pickup sensor, Q12-315, Figure 1.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22 Check Q12-315.
Refer to:

Inserter pickup sensor, PL 12.310 Item 10.
Enter dC330 code 12-084. Manually actuate the inserter TE sensor, Q12-084, Figure 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
12-191-00-171, 12-193-00-171, 12-194-00-171, 12-196-
Inserter acceleration sensor, PL 12.300 Item 10.
Enter dC330 code 12-320. Manually actuate the inserter standby sensor Q12-320. The
age changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14. Check the sensor.
Refer to:
volt-
Inserter standby sensor, PL 12.135 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 12-260 to energize the inserter clutch CL12-260. The clutch energizes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22. Check CL 12-260.
B
February 2013
2-130
B
Refer to:
Inserter clutch,
CL12-260
Inserter TE sensor
Q12-084
Inserter clutch, PL 12.310 Item 3.
Inserter pickup sensor

Q12-315
Inserter LE Sensor
Q12-083
Enter dC330, code 12-261 to run the inserter motor, MOT12-261. The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14 and WD 12.22. Check MOT12-261.
Refer to:
Inserter motor, PL 12.315 Item 1.
Inserter acceleration
sensor
Q12-316

Inserter motor,
MOT12-261
Inserter Standby
Sensor Q12-320
February 2013
2-131
12-191-00-171, 12-193-00-171, 12-194-00-171, 12-
12-198-00-171, 12-199-00-171 HVF Paper Jam RAP
12-198-00-171 A stray sheet was detected in the finisher, after a jam clearance.
12-199-00-171 An unexpected sheet has been detected in the finisher.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the HVF paper path.
Check the paper path for damage.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-077. Manually actuate the entry sensor, Q12-077, Figure 1. The
play changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Enter dC330, code 12-106. Manually actuate the compile exit sensor, Q12-106, Figure 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
disEnter dC330, code 12-107. Manually actuate the top tray exit sensor, Q12-107, Figure 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Enter dC330, code 12-086. Manually actuate the buffer position sensor, Q12-086, Figure 1.
Y
N
Refer to:
HVF BM machines only, enter dC330, code 12-087. Manually actuate the HVF booklet exit
sensor, Q12-087, Figure 1. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Enter dC330, code 12-321. Manually actuate the buffer path sensor, Q12-321, Figure 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
12-198-00-171, 12-199-00-171
February 2013
2-132
12-288-00-171, 12-289-00-171 HVF Nip Split RAP

12-288-00-171 The nip split has failed to operate.
Top tray exit
sensor Q12-107
12-289-00-171 The nip split has failed to return to the home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Compile exit
sensor
Q12-106
Buffer path sensor

Q12-321
Check for a jam or other obstruction in the nip split.
Check the nip split for damage.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-264 to run the nip split motor, MOT12-264, Figure 1. The
mechanism can be heard.
Y
N
Refer to:
nip-split
Entry sensor
Q12-077
Buffer position sensor
Q12-086
HVF booklet exit sensor

Q12-087
Nip split motor, PL 12.125 Item 15.
Enter dC330 code 12-088. Manually actuate the nip home sensor, Q12-088, Figure 1. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:

Nip home sensor, PL 12.135 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-091. Manually actuate the nip split sensor, Q12-091. The
changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
display
A
February 2013
2-133
12-198-00-171, 12-199-00-171, 12-288-00-171, 12-
A
Nip split sensor, PL 12.135 Item 1.
12-310-00-171, 12-312-00-171, 12-313-00-171 HVF Docking

and Interlocks RAP
12-310-00-171 The finisher was detected to be undocked in the run mode.
12-312-00-171 The top cover interlock was detected open during a run.
12-313-00-171 The finisher front door interlock was detected open during a run.
Initial Actions
Nip split sensor,
Q12-091
WARNING
Ensure the HVF is correctly docked to the machine and all interlocks are closed.
Check the interlock actuator for damage.
Procedure
Go to the relevant procedure:
Nip home sensor,

Q12-088
Nip split motor,

MOT12-264
12-177-00-171 Docking Interlock

12-197-00-171 Top Cover Interlock
12-303-00-171 Front Door Interlock
12-177-00-171 Docking Interlock

Check the docking interlock switch, S12-177, Figure 1.
REAR VIEW
Check the switch actuator mounted on the machine is correctly installed and un-broken.
Enter dC330, code 12-177, actuate the switch and check the display.
Refer to:
WD 12.8.
Check the wiring.
If necessary, install a new docking interlock switch, PL 12.100 Item 16.
12-197-00-171 Top Cover Interlock

Check the top cover interlock switch, S12-197, Figure 1.
Check the switch actuator is not damaged.
Refer to:
WD 12.8.
Check the wiring, REP 1.1.
If necessary, install a new top cover interlock switch, PL 12.115 Item 24.
12-303-00-171 Front Door Interlock

Check the front door interlock switch, S12-303, Figure 1.
Check the switch actuator on the inside of the front door is not damaged.
Enter dC330, code 12-303 actuate the switch and check the display.
Refer to:
WD 12.8.

12-288-00-171, 12-289-00-171, 12-310-00-171, 12-312-
February 2013
2-134
If necessary, install a new front door interlock switch, PL 12.115 Item 28.
12-316-00-171, 12-319-00-171 Inserter Interlocks RAP

12-316-00-171 The inserter top cover interlock was detected open in the run mode.
12-319-00-171 The inserter left hand door was detected open in the run mode.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the inserter top cover and left hand door can be fully closed and that the interlocks
are actuated. Remove any obstruction as necessary.
Procedure
S12-197
12-316-00-171 Inserter Top Cover Interlock
12-319-00-171 Inserter Jam Cover Interlock
12-316-00-171 Inserter Top Cover Interlock

Check the inserter top cover interlock switch, S12-178, Figure 1.
Check the switch actuator mounted on the machine is correctly installed and un-broken.
Refer to:
WD 12.14 and WD 12.21.
If necessary, install a new inserter top cover interlock switch, PL 12.305 Item 8.
12-319-00-171 Inserter Jam Cover Interlock

Check the inserter jam cover interlock switch, S12-179, Figure 1.
Check the switch actuator is not damaged.
Enter dC330, code 12-179 actuate the switch and check the display.
Refer to:
Docking interlock switch,

S12-177
WD 12.14 and WD 12.21.
If necessary, install a new inserter jam cover interlock switch, PL 12.300 Item 18.
Front door interlock switch,

S12-303
February 2013
2-135
12-310-00-171, 12-312-00-171, 12-313-00-171, 12-
12-317-00-171, 12-318-00-171 Tri-folder Interlocks RAP

12-317-00-171 The tri-folder top cover interlock was detected open during a run.
12-318-00-171 The tri-folder front door interlock was detected open during a run.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the tri-folder top cover and front door can be fully closed and that the interlocks are
actuated. Remove any obstruction as necessary.
Procedure
Figure 1. The two yellow, +24V interlock LEDs on the BM PWB will extinguish if a tri-folder
interlock is open.
Check that the yellow, +24V interlock LED on the BM control PWB is lit. The LED is lit.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.9, WD 12.17, WD 12.19, WD 12.20. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the tri-folder top cover interlock switch and the tri-folder front door
interlock switch, S12-209. Refer to:

Inserter jam cover interlock
switch, S12-179
Inserter top cover interlock

switch, S12-178
Tri-folder top cover interlock switch, PL 12.215 Item 3.
Tri-folder front door interlock switch, PL 12.215 Item 2.
Tri-folder PWB, PL 12.205 Item 16.
Enter dC330, code 12-209 tri-folder front door interlock switch, S12-209. Open the tri-folder
front door. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.19 and WD 12.20. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
Check the tri-folder front door interlock, S12-209. Refer to:
Tri-folder front door interlock switch, PL 12.215 Item 2.
Enter dC330, code 12-210 tri-folder top cover interlock sensor, Q12-210. Open the tri-folder
top cover. The display changes.
12-316-00-171, 12-319-00-171, 12-317-00-171, 12-318-
February 2013
2-136
N
Go to WD 12.19 and WD 12.20. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
Check the tri-folder top cover interlock sensor, Q12-210. Refer to:
12-367-00-171 The punch unit failed to detect the edge of the A4 LE feed paper.
12-368-00-171 The punch unit failed to detect the edge of the 8.5x 11 SE feed paper.
12-367-00-171, 12-368-00-171, 12-380-00-171 HVF Punch

Unit Paper Edge Detect RAP
12-380-00-171 The punch unit failed to detect the edge of the 8.5x11 LE feed paper.
Tri-folder top cover interlock sensor, PL 12.200 Item 10.
Initial Actions
WARNING

Tri-folder top cover
interlock switch

interlock sensor
Q12-210
Check that the paper path through the punch is clear, Figure 1.
Check the punch module is seated at the rear or the machine.
Check that a ColorQube punch unit is installed. A ColorQube unit has 3 sensors on the
unit, Figure 1.
Procedure
Figure 1. Punch sensor 1, Q12-078 detects 8.5x11 LE feed paper. Punch sensor 2, Q12-075
detects 8.5x11 SE feed paper. Punch sensor 3, Q12-076 detects A4 LE feed paper.
Enter dC330, enter the relevant code then actuate and check each of the three punch sensors.
code 12-078 for punch sensor 1.

Y
N
Go to WD 12.12 for punch sensor 1 and WD 12.24 for punch sensors 2 & 3. Check the
wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to:

Tri-folder front door
interlock switch, S12209
Punch sensor 1, PL 12.125 Item 17.
Enter dC330, code 12-223 transport motor 1, to check that the motor runs. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-137
12-317-00-171, 12-318-00-171, 12-367-00-171, 12-
A
Check the transport motor 1 drive belt, PL 12.120 Item 7. The drive belt is good.
Y
N
Enter dC330, code 12-245 punch unit motor, to check that the motor runs. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Transport motor 1
drive belt
Punch sensor
1 (Q12-078)
Punch sensor
2 (Q12-075)
Punch sensor
3 (Q12-076)
REAR VIEW
Transport motor 1
(MOT12-223)
12-367-00-171, 12-368-00-171, 12-380-00-171
February 2013
2-138
12-369-00-171 to 12-377-00-171 HVF Stapler Position and

Priming RAP
12-369-00-171 The stapler return end home failure.

12-370-00-171 The stapler end home failure.
Stapler assembly, PL 12.110 Item 14.
With the stapler unit still at the inboard end, enter dC330, code 12-135. Manually actuate the
stapler unit home sensor, Q12-135 Figure 2. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
12-371-00-171 The stapler did not move from the home position within the required time.
12-372-00-171 The stapler did not return to the home position within the required time.
12-373-00-171 The stapler did not enter the mid home position.
12-374-00-171 The stapler did not leave the mid home position.
12-375-00-171 The stapler jaw did not enter the home position.
12-376-00-171 The stapler jaw did not leave the home position.
Stapler unit home sensor, PL 12.110 Item 15.
12-377-00-171 A stapler priming failure was detected.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Enter dC330, code 12-045 to send the stapler unit to the outboard end of the machine. Enter
code 12-176, stapler unit mid home sensor. Manually actuate the stapler unit mid home sensor,
Q12-176, Figure 2. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
CAUTION
Do not run code 12-247 without 2 sheets of paper in the stapler jaws. Running this code without the paper in position can cause damage to the machine.
If stapling has failed, perform the following:
Check that the staple head unit is correctly installed.
Check that the staple cartridge has staples in it and is correctly installed in the staple
head.
Check that the leading staples in the staple head have been primed.
overlap, they will jam in the cartridge. If necessary, install a new cartridge.
Procedure
NOTE: Sensors Q12-133, Q12-134, Q12-317 and Q12-318 are integral to the staple head unit
and although they can be checked they are not spared separately.
Stapler unit mid home sensor, PL 12.110 Item 15.
Place two sheets of paper in the stapler jaws. Raise the finisher top cover. Figure 1, fully lower
the paper pusher, then lower the top cover. Enter dC330, code 12-247 to run the staple head 1
motor, MOT12-247. The motor runs.
Y
N
Enter dC330, code 12-319, stapler gate safety switch. Manually actuate the stapler gate
safety switch. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the locations of the components.

Enter dC330, code 12-249 to run the stapler unit 1 motor, MOT12-249 and send it to the
inboard end of the machine. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Stapler gate safety switch, PL 12.115 Item 17.
A
February 2013
2-139
12-369-00-171 to 12-377-00-171
C
Refer to:
Stapler assembly, PL 12.110 Item 14.
N
Go to WD 12.10, check for a change in signal level at PJ301 pin 12, while code 12-247 is
running. The signal level changes.
Y
N
Check the wiring between PJ301 pin 12 and the stapler unit. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install a new stapler assembly, PL 12.110 Item 14.
Remove the stapled paper and raise the paper pusher fully upwards. Go to WD 12.10. +5V is
available at T502 between pins 1 and 4, also between pin 1 and 7 on the staple head.
Y
N
Check the wiring between T502 and PJ301. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install a new HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2.
Enter dC330, code 12-134 actuate the stapler priming sensor, Q12-134, by removing and
installing the staple cartridge. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.10. Check for a change in signal level at PJ301 pin 9 when Q12-134 is
being actuated. The signal level changes.
Y
N
Y
N

Enter dC330, code 12-133, actuate the low staples sensor, Q12-133, by removing and installing the staple cartridge. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.10, check for a change in signal level at PJ301 pin 13 when Q12-133 is
Y
N
Check the wiring between PJ391 pin 13 and the staple head unit. The wiring is
good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring REP 1.1.

Enter dC330, code 12-317 actuate the stapler cartridge sensor, Q12-317, by removing and
installing the staple cartridge. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.10. Check for a change in signal level at PJ301 pin 10 when Q12-317 is
Y
N
Y
N
Install a new stapler assembly PL 12.110 Item 14.
With the 2 sheets of paper still in place enter dC330 code 12-318 to monitor the staple jaw
home sensor Q12-318, stack the code 12-247 to cycle the staple head. The
display
changes.
12-369-00-171 to 12-377-00-171
February 2013
2-140
Stapler unit mid home

sensor, Q12-176
Paper pusher
Stapler gate safety

switch, S12-319
Stapler unit home

sensor, Q12-135
February 2013
2-141
12-369-00-171 to 12-377-00-171
A
Stack the dC330 code 12-182, tamper front away sensor, Q12-182. Move the tamper using the
control codes 12-226 and 12-228. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.15. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check Q12-182.
Refer to:
12-392-00-171 to 12-395-00-171 HVF Front Tamper Fault

RAP
12-392-00-171 The front tamper did not move from the home position.
12-393-00-171 The front tamper did not return to the home position.
12-394-00-171 The front tamper did not enter the away position.
12-395-00-171 The front tamper did not move from the away position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Tamper front away sensor, PL 12.135 Item 1.
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the front tamper from operating correctly.
Jams can be caused if the tray settings do not match the paper in the trays. Make sure the
tray settings are correct.
Procedure
Figure 1 shows the location of the components.
Enter dC330, code 12-228 to move the tamper inboard, then enter 12-226 to move the tamper
outboard. The tamper moves.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.15. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the front
tamper motor home, MOT12-226. Refer to:
Front tamper motor, PL 12.125 Item 6.
Stack the dC330 code 12-180, front tamper home sensor, Q12-180. Move the tamper using the
control codes 12-226 and 12-228. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Tamper front away

sensor, Q12-182
Tamper front home

sensor, Q12-180
Front tamper
motor, MOT12-226
Tamper front home sensor, PL 12.135 Item 1.
A
12-392-00-171 to 12-395-00-171
February 2013
2-142
12-396-00-171 to 12-399-00-171 HVF Rear Tamper Fault

RAP
12-396-00-171 The rear tamper tray did not move from the home position.
N
Refer to:
12-397-00-171 The rear tamper tray did not return to the home position.
12-398-00-171 The rear tamper tray did not move from the away position.
12-399-00-171 The rear tamper tray did not return to the away position.
Rear tamper away sensor, PL 12.110 Item 15.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the rear tamper from operating correctly.
Check that the drive belt is securely in position, Figure 1.
Jams can be caused if the tray settings do not match the paper in the trays. Make sure the
tray settings are correct.
Procedure
Enter the dC330 code, 12-229 to move the rear tamper inboard. (The code 12-227 can be
used to move the rear tamper outboard.) The tamper moves.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the rear
tamper motor, MOT12-227. Refer to:
Rear tamper motor,

MOT12-227
Rear tamper
away sensor,
Q12-183
Rear tamper
home sensor,
Q12-181
Rear tamper motor, PL 12.110 Item 19.
Stack the dC330 code, 12-181, rear tamper home sensor, Q12-181. Move the rear tamper
motor using the code 12-229. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Rear tamper home sensor, PL 12.110 Item 15.
Enter the dC330 code, 12-183, rear tamper away sensor. Use a piece of paper inserted from
the rear of the machine to actuate the rear tamper away sensor, Q12-183. The
display
changes.
February 2013
2-143

12-396-00-171 to 12-399-00-171
12-403-00-171, 12-413-00-171, 12-414-00-171 HVF BM

Staple Head 2 and Stapler Module RAP
12-403-00-171 The booklet maker staple head 2 motor has failed to move.
12-413-00-171 The booklet maker staple head 2 is not detected in the home position.
12-414-00-171 The booklet maker stapler module is not detected in the home (staple head
closed) position during hard / soft initialize, or at set boundary.
Initial Actions
Enter dC330, code 12-275 to run the BM SH2 motor. The staple head cycled.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.16 and WD 12.19. Check the wiring and connectors.
The wiring and connectors are good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring or connectors, REP 1.1.
WARNING
Install a new BM staple head 2, PL 12.185 Item 7.
Check that there is no damage or obstruction that would prevent the stapling unit from
cycling.
BM staple head carrier closed sensor, PL 12.185 Item 18.
BM staple head 2 assembly, PL 12.185 Item 7.
overlap, they will jam in the cartridge. If necessary, install a new staple cartridge, PL
12.185 Item 8.
Ensure that the customer job does not exceed the capacity of the booklet maker. Refer to
12D-171 Booklet Quality RAP for booklet maker quality specifications.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 12-217 to check the BM staple head carrier closed sensor, Q12-217, Figure
1. Open and close the staple head carrier. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM staple head carrier closed sensor, PL 12.185 Item 18.
Remove the HVF front door, refer to REP 12.1-171 HVF Covers. Pull out the BM module.
Remove the staple head 2 cover, PL 12.185 Item 14. Enter dC330, code 12-220 to check the
BM SH2 home switch. Manually rotate the staple head to actuate the BM SH2 home switch.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.16. Check the BM SH 2 home switch, S12-220.
Refer to:
BM staple head carrier

closed sensor, Q12-217
BM staple head 2
assembly
A
12-403-00-171, 12-413-00-171, 12-414-00-171
February 2013
2-144
12-415-00-171 HVF BM Crease Roll Gate Home RAP

12-415-00-171 The crease roll gate is not at the home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or other obstruction that can prevent the crease roll gate mechanism from
moving.
Check the following parts for damage:
Crease roll gate rack gears, PL 12.180 Item 8.
Crease roll gate racks, PL 12.180 Item 14.
BM crease gate home sensor,

Q12-222
BM crease roll gate

motor, MOT12-273
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-222. Actuate the BM crease roll gate home sensor, Q12-222, Figure 1.
Y
N
Refer to:
BM crease roll gate home sensor, PL 12.175 Item 9.
NOTE: The BM crease roll gate motor has two component control codes:
12-273 cycles the crease roll gate.
12-276 opens the crease roll gate.
Enter dC330, code 12-273 to cycle the BM crease roll gate motor, MOT12-273. The
runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
motor
BM crease roll gate motor, PL 12.175 Item 8.
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or bad connectors, REP 1.1. If necessary install a new BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
February 2013
2-145
12-415-00-171
12-417-00-171, 12-418-00-171 HVF BM Flapper RAP

12-417-00-171 The booklet maker flapper did not return to the home position.
12-418-00-171 The booklet maker flapper did not move from the home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the BM flapper from rotating.
Procedure
NOTE: All HVF BM interlocks must be made to supply +24V to the motors.
Enter dC330, code 12-271 to check the BM flapper motor, MOT12-271, Figure 1. The
flapper rotates.
Y
N
Refer to:
12A-171, HVF Power Distribution RAP.
BM
BM flapper motor, PL 12.175 Item 1.
BM flapper, PL 12.150 Item 23.
Enter dC330, code 12-207. Actuate the flapper home sensor, Q12-207. The
changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
display
BM Flapper motor,
MOT12-271
Flapper home
sensor, Q12-207
Flapper home sensor, PL 12.150 Item 12.
12-417-00-171, 12-418-00-171
February 2013
2-146
12-450-00-171, 12-456-00-171 to 12-459-00-171 HVF Ejector

Module RAP
12-450-00-171 The ejector module motor has stalled
12-456-00-171 The ejector module did not return to the home position.
12-457-00-171 The ejector module did not move from the home position.
12-458-00-171 The ejector module did not return to the out position.
12-459-00-171 The ejector module did not move from the out position.
WARNING
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the ejector module from operating
correctly.
Check the ribbon cable on the ejector for kinks and potential breaks in the conductors.
Go to 12K-171 HVF Initialization Failure RAP to determine when the fault occurs.
Check the harness to the ejector unit and the connectors under the unit.
Procedure
Enter the dC330 code 12-184, ejector home sensor, Q12-184. Stack the dC330 code 12-249 to
move the stapler unit inboard. This action moves the stapler unit inboard, and moves the ejector module to the out position. The display changes.
Y
N
The ejector module moved to the out position.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.15. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the
ejector motor, MOT12-236. Refer to:

Exit diagnostics mode, selecting the re-boot option. This returns the ejector module to the
home position. Enter the dC330 code, 12-185, ejector out sensor, Q12-185. Stack the dC330
code, 12-249 to move the stapler unit inboard. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.11. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the ejector
out sensor, Q12-185. Refer to:
Initial Actions
Exit the diagnostics mode, selecting the re-boot option. This returns the ejector module to the
home position. Enter the dC330 code 12-096, ejector motor encoder sensor, Q12-096. Stack
the dC330 code, 12-249 to move the stapler unit inboard. The display changes condition
for a few seconds.
Y
N
Refer to:
home sensor, Q12-184. Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-147
12-450-00-171, 12-456-00-171 to 12-459-00-171
12-451-00-171 to 12-455-00-171 HVF Ejector Roll and

Lower Paddle Fault RAP
12-451-00-171 The ejector roll motor has stalled.
12-452-00-171 The ejector roll did not return to the home position.
12-453-00-171 The ejector roll did not move from the home position.
12-454-00-171 The lower paddle has failed to return to the home position.
12-455-00-171 The lower paddle has failed to move from the home position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for any damage or obstructions that would prevent the ejector roll and lower paddle
from operating correctly.
Procedure
Ejector motor,
MOT12-236
Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 show the component locations.

Enter dC330 code, 12-242 to lower the bin 1 stacker tray. Enter dC330 code 12-249, staple unit
1 forward. This moves the ejector module to the out position. Enter dC330 code 12-098, ejector plate home sensor, Q12-098. Manually turn the ejector belts a few centimeters. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Ejector motor encoder

sensor, Q12-096
Ejector home sensor,

Q12-184
Ejector out sensor,

Q12-185
Enter the dC330 code 12-097, ejector roll motor encoder sensor, Q12-097. Enter the code, 12233 to rotate the ejector roll motor one cycle of the ejector plates in the forward direction. The
display changes.
Y
N
The ejector roll motor turned.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.15. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check
MOT12-233. Refer to:
12-450-00-171, 12-456-00-171 to 12-459-00-171, 12-
February 2013
2-148
B
roll motor encoder sensor, Q12-097. Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 12-099, ejector lower paddle home sensor. Rotate the lower paddle
upwards and inwards for one full rotation, Figure 3. The voltage changes from a logic high
to a low, and then back to high.
Y
N
lower paddle home sensor, S12-099. Refer to:
Ejector roll motor

MOT12-233
Enter dC330 code 12-202, Ejector paper present sensor, Q12-202. Actuate the ejector paper
present sensor by placing a sheet of paper on the ejector module. The display changes.
Y
N
paper present sensor, Q12-202. Refer to:

Ejector roll motor encoder
sensor, Q12-097
Ejector plate home

sensor, Q12-098
February 2013
2-149
12-451-00-171 to 12-455-00-171
Rotate paddle 1
complete turn
Ejector paper
present sensor,
Q12-202

Ejector lower
paddle home
sensor, S12099
RIGHT UNDER-SIDE VIEW OF EJECTOR
12-451-00-171 to 12-455-00-171
February 2013
2-150
12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171 HVF Bin 1 Position RAP
12-460-00-171 Bin 1 motor has stalled.
If the tray is not at the lower limit, enter the dC330 code 12-191, bin 1 lower limit switch.
Manually actuate the switch, Figure 1. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check S12191. Refer to:
12-461-00-171 Bin 1 did not actuate the bin 1 upper level sensor during stacking.
12-462-00-171 Bin 1 did not leave the bin 1 upper level sensor during stacking or the stacker
failed to initialize correctly.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that bin 1 is not damaged and there are no obstructions that would prevent bin 1
from moving.
Press the pause to unload button (PTU) to lower bin 1. Press again the pause to unload
button to raise bin 1.
Bin 1 lower limit switch, PL 12.105 Item 7.
Go to WD 12.10. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the bin 1 elevator motor, MOT12-241. Refer to:
Procedure
NOTE: The bin 1 90% full sensor and the bin 1 lower limit switch are mounted on the same
bracket. This bracket can be in either of two positions. It is in the upper position, only when a
tri-folder module is installed.
NOTE: The bin 1 upper level sensor controls the height of the tray during normal use. The sensor is in two parts: the receiver at the rear of the tray and the transmitter at the front of the tray.
Only the LED of the front sensor is used and only the light sensitive transistor of the rear sensor is used. Refer to WD 12.13.
Bin 1 elevator motor, PL 12.105 Item 10.
Enter the dC330 code, 12-163, bin 1 motor encoder sensor. Turn the encoder wheel. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13. Check the wiring and repair as necessary. Check Q12-163. Refer to:
NOTE: If required, the following component control codes can be used to move bin 1 tray:
12-059, elevator motor up.
12-060, elevator motor down.
Bin 1 motor encoder sensor, PL 12.105 Item 3.
12-241, elevator home.
12-242, elevator cycle.

Place a 1 cm (0.4 inch) stack of paper on the bin 1 tray. Switch off the machine, then switch on
the machine. The bin 1 tray moves during initialization.
Y
N
If the tray is not at the upper limit, enter the dC330 code 12-190, bin 1 upper limit switch.
Manually actuate the switch, Figure 1. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check S12190. Refer to:
Enter the dC330 code 12-188, bin 1 upper level sensor. Remove the paper from the tray. Actuate the sensor by breaking the light beam from the front transmitter to the rear receiver. The
display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13 and WD 12.15. Check the wiring and repair as necessary. Check the two
parts of the bin 1 upper level sensor, Q12-188. Refer to:
Bin 1 upper level sensor (transmitter), PL 12.110 Item 20.
Bin 1 upper level sensor (receiver), PL 12.110 Item 16.
Bin 1 upper limit switch, PL 12.105 Item 7.
C
February 2013
2-151
12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171
C
Enter the dC330 code 12-187, bin 1 90% full sensor. Actuate the sensor using a piece of
paper. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13. Check the wiring and repair as necessary. Check Q12-187. Refer to:

Bin 1 motor encoder
sensor, Q12-163
Bin1 90% full sensor, PL 12.105 Item 3.
Paper pressing sensor Q12-322
Bin 1 lift
motor,
MOT12-451
Lower the bin 1 tray by pressing the PTU switch. Enter the dC330 code 12-322, paper pressing
display
sensor Q12-322. Actuate the paper pressing sensor using a sheet of paper. The
changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.12. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the paper
pressing sensor, Q12-322. Refer to:
Bin 1 upper level sensor

(transmitter), Q12-188
Paper pressing sensor, PL 12.110 Item 17.
Bin 1 upper level sensor,

(receiver)

Bin 1 upper limit
switch, S12-190
Bin 1 90% full
sensor, Q12-187
Bin 1 lower limit

switch, S12-191
12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171
February 2013
2-152
12-463-00-171, 12-464-00-171 HVF BM +24V Failure RAP

12-463-00-171 The booklet maker control PWB has failed to detect +24V at the input from the
HVF.
12-464-00-171 The booklet maker control PWB has detected an internal +24V failure, such as
over current, short circuit or under voltage.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
B
If a inserter is installed, go to PJ703. +24V is available between PJ703 pin 1 and PJ111
pin 1.
Y
N
Go to 12-316-00-171, 12-319-00-171 HVF Inserter Interlock RAP
Go to WD 12.6. +24V is available at PJ601 between pins 1 and pin 4.
Y
N
Install a new BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
Go to WD 12.6. +24V is available at PJ601 between pins 4 and 6.
Y
N
Go to the 12-310-00-171, 12-312-00-171, 12-313-00-171 Docking and Interlocks
RAP.
The +24V supply is good. Go to SCP 5 Final actions.
Ensure the HVF BM is correctly docked to the machine and all interlocks are closed.
The +24V supply is good. Go to SCP 5 Final actions.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 1. Close or cheat all the HVF BM interlocks. The HVF BM performs a
mechanical reset.
Y
N
Go to WD 1.1. ACL is available at PJ3AC on the LVPS and base module between
pins 1 and 2.
Y
N
Y
N
Figure 1. +24V is available at T001 on the HVF power supply between pins 1
and 5.
Y
N
Install a new HVF power supply module, PL 12.140 Item 1.
Check the connectors and harness between T001 and PJ111. Repair the harness as
necessary, REP 1.1.
Go to WD 12.6. +24V is available at PJ111 between pins 1 and 4 and between pins 3
and 6.
Y
N
Go to the 12-310-00-171, 12-312-00-171, 12-313-00-171 Interlocks RAP.
Y
N
+24V is available at PJ131 between pins 1 and 2.
Y
N
Check the connectors and harness between PJ559 and PJ131. Repair the harness
as necessary, REP 1.1.
A
February 2013
2-153
12-463-00-171, 12-464-00-171
12-465-00-171 to 12-468-00-171 Paddle Unit Position RAP

12-465-00-171 The paddle unit has failed to return to the upper position.
12-466-00-171 The paddle unit has failed to move from the upper position.
12-467-00-171 The paddle unit has failed to return to the lower position.
12-468-00-171 The paddle unit has failed to move from the lower position.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the paddle unit from operating correctly.
Procedure
NOTE: All HVF BM interlocks must be made to supply +24V to the motors.
Enter dC330, code 12-239 to run the paddle unit motor, MOT12-239, Figure 1. The
runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.10. Check the paddle unit motor, MOT12-239.
Refer to:
motor
Paddle unit motor, PL 12.120 Item 6.
The paddle unit moves.

Y
N
Check the drive gears on the paddle unit. Install new components as necessary, PL
12.115 Item 2.
Enter dC330, code 12-174 paddle unit upper sensor, Q12-174. Select code 12-240 to run the
paddle unit motor. The sensor status changes.
Y
N
Refer to:
Tri-folder unit
HVF power
supply module
BM PWB
HVF PWB

Enter dC330, code 12-175 paddle unit lower sensor, Q12-175. Select code 12-239 to run the
paddle unit motor. The sensor status changes.
12-463-00-171, 12-464-00-171, 12-465-00-171 to 12-
February 2013
2-154
N
Refer to:
12-473-00-171 to 12-478-00-171 Support Finger Position

RAP
12-473-00-171 The pressing and support motor does not return to initial position within the
required time.
12-474-00-171 The pressing and support motor does not move out to initial position within the
required time.
12-475-00-171 The pressing and support motor does not return to home position within the
required time.

12-476-00-171 The pressing and support motor does not move out of home position within the
required time.
Paddle unit upper

sensor, Q12-174.
Paddle unit lower

sensor, Q12-175.
12-477-00-171 The pressing and support motor does not return to out position within the
required time.
12-478-00-171 The pressing and support motor does not move out of out position within the
required time.
Procedure
WARNING
NOTE: When manually extending the fingers to check the sensors, the pressing and support A
sensor operates first, followed by the pressing and support B sensor. The pressing and support
C sensor operates when the fingers are fully extended. All three sensors are spared as part of
the rear tamper assembly.
Figure 2 shows the component locations.
Remove the HVF front door and front cover REP 12.1-171. Remove the upper right side cover
REP 12.5-171. Cheat the front door interlock. Enter dC330 code 12-249 SU1 Motor Forward,
to move staple head to the rear of the HVF. Disconnect then reconnect the pressing and support A sensor, Figure 2.
Enter dC330 code 12-172, pressing and support A sensor, Q12-172. Note the position of the
support fingers at rest. Turn the gear wheel shown in Figure 1, downwards. The support fingers
extend to the right as the gear is turned. Extend the support fingers approximately 6 mm (0.25
inch). The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.12. Check Q12-172. Refer to:
Paddle unit motor,

MOT12-239
Rear tamper assembly, PL 12.110 Item 29.

A
February 2013
2-155
12-465-00-171 to 12-468-00-171, 12-473-00-171 to
A
Enter the dC330 code 12-171 pressing and support B sensor, Q12-171. Turn the gear wheel to
extend the support fingers approximately 25 mm (1 inch). The display changes.
Y
N
Enter the dC330 code 12-173, pressing and support C sensor, Q12-173. Turn the gear wheel
to extend the support fingers approximately 105 mm (4.1 inch). The display changes.
Y
N
Pressing and
support C sensor,
Q12-173
Gear wheel
Make several small sets of prints. Check that the support fingers extend between each set.
The support fingers extended.
Y
N
Remove the HVF top cover and rear cover, REP 12.1-171. Enter the dC330 code 12-093,
pressing and support encoder sensor, Q12-093. Manually turn the support motor encoder
disc. The display changes.
Y
N
Pressing and support

B sensor,
Pressing and support A
Q12-171
sensor, Q12-172.
Pressing and support encoder sensor, PL 12.110 Item 15.
Go to WD 12.15 and check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Install new components as necessary:
Motor encoder assembly, PL 12.110 Item 18.
Pressing and
support encoder
sensor, Q12-093
motor, MOT12-323
12-473-00-171 to 12-478-00-171
February 2013
2-156
12-479-00-171 Inserter Paper Length Fault RAP

12-479-00-171 A shorter than expected sheet has been fed from the inserter.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the inserter paper path is clear of obstructions and the sensors are clean.
Procedure
Enter the dC330 code 12-079, inserter paper length sensor 1, Q12-079. Actuate the sensor.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22. Check the inserter paper length sensor 1,
Q12-079. Refer to:

A sensor
Inserter paper length sensor 1, PL 12.300 Item 12.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22. Check the inserter paper length sensor 2,
Q12-080. Refer to:
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14 and WD 12.22. Check the inserter paper length sensor 3, Q12-090.
Refer to:
A
February 2013
2-157
12-473-00-171 to 12-478-00-171, 12-479-00-171
B
Inserter unit motor, PL 12.315 Item 1.
Enter the dC330 code 12-084, inserter TE sensor, Q12-084. Actuate the sensor. The display
changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13 and WD 12.21. Check the inserter TE sensor, Q12-084. Refer to:

Inserter paper length
sensor 1, Q12-079
sensor 2, Q12-080
sensor 3, Q12-090
Inserter TE sensor, PL 12.310 Item 11.
Inserter TE sensor,
Q12-084
Enter the dC330 code 12-083, inserter LE sensor, Q12-083. Actuate the sensor. The display
changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13 and WD 12.21. Check the inserter LE sensor, Q12-083. Refer to:
Inserter LE sensor, PL 12.310 Item 11.
Inserter clutch,
CL12-260
Enter the dC330 code 12-260, to energize the inserter clutch, CL12-260. The inserter clutch
energizes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22. Check the inserter clutch, CL12-260. Refer to:
Inserter motor,
MOT12-261
Inserter LE sensor,
Q12-083
Inserter clutch, PL 12.310 Item 3.
Enter the dC330 code 12-261, to run the inserter motor, MOT12-261. The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.14 and WD 12.22. Check MOT12-261. Refer to:
B
12-479-00-171
February 2013
2-158
12-492-00-171 to 12-494-00-171 IME To Finisher Failure

RAP
12-762-00-171, 12-764-00-171, 12-765-00-171 IME To

Finisher Communication Failure RAP
12-492-00-171 CDI Communications failure with the finisher.
12-762-00-171 Communications failure between the IME and the finisher
12-493-00-171 The finisher failed to cycle up.
12-764-00-171 The IME cannot detect a finisher plugged in.
12-494-00-171 The finisher failed to return a prep time to the IME within 1 second.
12-765-00-171 The IME has detected an incompatible / unknown finisher.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check that the finisher is not incompatible for fault 12-762-00 and 12-765-00.
Check the finisher power cord is plugged into the IME.
Check that the actuator, PL 12.100 Item 17 is attached to the right hand machine frame
and is making the docking interlock.
Go to 12K-171 HVF Initialization Failure RAP to determine when the fault occurs.
Procedure
on, GP 14. If the fault is still present check for damaged pins on PJ904 and on the Media Path
Driver PWB.
Procedure
Power communications cable, PL 12.140 Item 7.
on, GP 14. If the fault is still present check for damaged pins on PJ904 and on the Media Path
Driver PWB.
February 2013
2-159
12-492-00-171 to 12-494-00-171, 12-762-00-171, 12-
The HVF has an integral power supply providing +24V and +5V supplies to the HVF PWB and
HVF BM PWB. The AC power for the HVF power supply comes from the LVPS and base module of the machine. Refer to Figure 3 for component location.
Check the in-line fuse, F1 (10A), and as necessary install a new fuse, PL 12.140
Item 5. Check the connectors and harness between T001 and PJ111. Repair the
harness as necessary, REP 1.1.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Go to WD 12.6 and WD 12.8. Close the front door and top cover and ensure the HVF is
docked to the machine. +24V is available at PJ111 pin 1 and PJ112 pins 8.
Y
N
Go to the 12-310-00-171, 12-312-00-171, 12-313-00-171 Docking and Interlocks
RAP.
WARNING

Y
N
Y
N
Install a new HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2
CAUTION
Do not connect the HVF power cord directly to the AC wall outlet. The HVF cannot operate
without the machine. The machine controls the distribution of electricity to the HVF/HVF BM for
correct power on and power off sequencing.
Ensure the HVF/HVF BM is correctly docked to the machine and all interlocks are closed.
Refer to HVF PWB and BM PWB LEDs to identify the status of the PWBs.
as necessary.
Y
N
Y
N
Procedure
Close or cheat all the HVF BM interlocks. The HVF BM performs a mechanical reset.
Y
N
Y
N
+5V is available at T001 on the HVF power supply module between pins 4 and
8.
Y
N
Go to WD 1.1. ACL is available at PJ3AC on the LVPS and base module
Y
N
If an inserter is installed, go to PJ703. +24V is available between PJ703 pin 1 and
PJ111 pin 1.
Y
N
Go to 12-316-00-171, 12-319-00-171 HVF Inserter Interlock RAP
Y
N
Y
N

Go to WD 12.6. Disconnect PJ113. +5V is available at the harness end of PJ113
Y
N
Check the connectors and harness between T001 and PJ113. Repair the harness as necessary, REP 1.1.
Y
N
Y
N

Y
N
+24V is available at T001 between pins 5 and 3.
A
12A-171
N
February 2013
2-160
D
D
The +24V and +5V supplies are good. Go to SCP 5 Final actions.
LED 8 - red, steady. This indicates that the HVF top cover, front door and docking interlocks are all closed and +24V is available at the HVF module.
LED 9 - red, steady. This indicates that the +5V supply is present in the HVF module.
Figure 2 shows the LEDs on the BM PWB.

Y
N
Go to the 12-310-00-171, 12-312-00-171, 12-313-00-171 Docking and Interlocks RAP.
The +24V and +5V supplies are good. Go to SCP 5 Final actions.
HVF PWB and BM PWB LEDs

Figure 1 shows the LEDs on the HVF PWB.
Figure 2 LEDs on the BM control PWB

The LEDs are:
LED 1 - red, steady. This indicates a fault or other abnormal status.
LED 2 - yellow, flashing at about 1Hz. This indicates that the software is operating in normal mode. In other modes, e.g., software downloading, the flashing rate is higher.
LED 3 - orange, steady. This indicates either:
Figure 1 LEDs on the HVF PWB

The LEDs are:
LED 1 - red. Not used.
LED 3 - red, flashing. This indicates the functioning of the CPU. When flashing at 2Hz,
(every 1/2 second), the software is running normally. When flashing at about 1/4Hz,
(every 4 seconds), this indicates that the software is encountering a code problem and a
possible software upgrade is needed. If this LED is OFF, the CPU does not function and a
new HVF PWB is needed.
that the tri-folder front door and top cover interlocks are closed, and +24V is available to the BM module or, if the tri-folder in not installed;
that the interlock cheater is present in PJ553 on the BM control PWB the logic
cheater is present in PL563 on the BM control PWB.
LED 4 - orange, steady. This indicates that the +24V supply is within voltage and current
limits, and that the power limiting circuit has not been active for over a set time limit.
LED 5 - blue, steady. this indicates that the +5V supply is present in the BM module.
February 2013
2-161
12A-171
12B-171 HVF BM to Machine Communications Interface

and BM Present RAP
A communication fault exists between the HVF BM and the machine.
Procedure
WARNING
WD 12.9 and WD 12.19 show the communications between the booklet maker and the HVF
PWB. For communications between the HVF PWB and the machine go to WD 12.9.
The pulses on the connections between PJ133 and PJ562 cannot be measured, but may be
detected using a meter that can record maximum and minimum voltage levels, or by using an
AC voltage range. Check the wiring and repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
Booklet maker PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
If the machine indicates that the booklet maker is not present, check that PJ133, pin 6 is held
at 0V. If necessary, repair the wiring, REP 1.1 or install a new HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2.
Tri-folder unit
In-line fuse,
(F1)
HVF power
supply module
HVF PWB
BM PWB
12A-171, 12B-171
February 2013
2-162
12C-171 HVF BM Bin 2 Failure RAP
Bin 2 fails to remove the finished booklets from the exit area of the booklet maker.
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or bad connectors, REP 1.1. If necessary install new conveyor belts, PL 12.190 Item 1.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for a jam or any other obstruction that could prevent the conveyor belt mechanism from
moving.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-206. Actuate the BM bin 2 path transport full sensor, Q12-206, Figure 1.
Y
N
If a tri-folder is installed, go to WD 12.18. Check the connection at PJ583 on the tri-folder.
The connection are good.
Y
N
Check the connectors and harness at the tri-folder. Repair the harness as necessary, REP 1.1.
Refer to:
BM bin 2 90% full

sensor Q12-206
BM conveyor drive
motor, MOT12-274
BM bin 2 90% full sensor PL 12.190 Item 5.
NOTE: The BM conveyor belts drive motor stops after 10 seconds.
Enter dC330, code 12-274 to run the BM conveyor drive motor, MOT12-274. The motor runs.
Y
N
If a tri-folder is installed, go to WD 12.17. Check the connection at PJ583 on the tri-folder.
The connection are good.
Y
N
Check the connectors and harness at the tri-folder. Repair the harness as necessary, REP 1.1.
Refer to:
BM conveyor belts drive motor, PL 12.190 Item 4.
A
February 2013
2-163
12C-171
12D-171 Booklet Quality RAP
Examine the booklets for defects. Refer to the following:
Use this RAP to identify and correct the causes of poor booklet quality in the HVF BM.
Top and Bottom Edge Alignment.
Open Side Edge Alignment.
The following booklet quality problems are covered in this RAP:
Badly Formed Booklet Staples
The alignment of the top and bottom edges of the booklet are not within specification.
Booklet Compiler is Not Correct
The alignment of the open side edges of the booklet are not within specification.
Skewed Booklet Crease.
The booklet staples are badly formed.
Booklet Crease is Off Centre.
The booklet compiling is not correct (page order is wrong).
Booklet Staple Position is Not On The Fold.
The booklet crease is skewed greater than the specification.
The Booklet is Not Sufficiently Creased.
The booklet crease is off-centre, greater than the specification.
Top and Bottom Edge Alignment
The booklet staple position is not within the specification.
The booklet is not sufficiently creased.
Figure 1, open out the booklet at the centre page and press it onto a flat surface. Measure the
mis-alignment of the top and bottom edges of the booklet.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the paper loaded in the paper trays matches the paper size displayed on the
UI.
Ensure that the paper being fed to the BM conforms to the specification, GP 20 Paper and
Media Size Specification.
Ensure that the booklets being produced do not exceed the maximum contents given in
Table 1.
Table 1 Booklet contents
Maximum
number of
booklet
pages
Maximum
number of
unstapled
sheets
Media
Paper weight
Maximum
number of
sheets
Plain paper
60 to 80gsm (16 to 21lb bond)
15
60
Heavyweight
90gsm (24lb bond)
13
52
Heavyweight
120gsm (32lb bond)
10
40
Heavyweight
160gsm (43lb bond)
28
Heavyweight
216gsm (58lb bond)
20
Plain paper
with heavyweight cover
60 to 80 gsm (16 to 21lb bond) 14 including

with 160 gsm (43lb bond) cover 1 cover
56
Measure the total scatter
Check the machine and HVF BM paper paths for any obstruction that could cause misalignment of the paper fed to the BM compiling area.
Figure 1 Top and bottom alignment
Procedure
Table 2 Top and bottom edge alignment
Produce three 4 sheet / 16 page booklets, using 80gsm (20lb) paper. Paper size and weight
must conform the specification in GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specification.
12D-171
Paper weight
95% of booklets 99.7% of booklets
80gsm (20lb)
1mm
2mm
All other BM approved weights in GP 20
2mm
3mm
February 2013
2-164
If the top and bottom edge alignment does not conform to the specification in Table 2, check
the operation of the BM tampers, refer to the 12-066-00-171, 12-384-00-171, 12-419-00-171,
12-420-00-171 HVF BM Tamper Failure RAP. If the tampers are operating correctly, go to ADJ
12.5-171 Booklet Tamping and check the tampers are correctly adjusted.
If the booklet skew does not conform to the specification in Table 4. Perform the following:
Check the operation of the BM stack hold solenoids, refer to 12-065-00-171, 12-383-00171 HVF Booklet Back Stop failure RAP.
If the stack hold solenoids are operating correctly, check for contamination or debris in the
compiling area of the BM that could cause the mis-alignment.
If the open side edge alignment does not conform to the specification in Table 3, check the
operation of the BM stack hold solenoids, refer to the 12-065-00-171, 12-383-00-171 HVF
Booklet Back Stop Failure RAP. If the stack hold solenoids are operating correctly, check carefully for any contamination or debris in the compiling area of the BM, that could cause the misalignment.
Badly Formed Booklet Staples

If the booklet staples are not formed correctly, perform ADJ 12.3-171 Staple Anvil Alignment.
Booklet Compiler is Not Correct
Open Side Edge Alignment
If the page order of the booklets is not correct, perform ADJ 12.6-171 Booklet Compiling Position.
mis-alignment of the open side edges of the booklet.
Skewed Booklet Crease

amount of booklet skew.
Measure the total scatter
Figure 2 Open side edge alignment

Table 3 Open side edge alignment
Paper weight
95% of booklets 99.7% of booklets
80gsm (20lb)
1mm
2mm
All other BM approved weights in GP 20
2mm
3mm
February 2013
2-165
12D-171
2.
ADJ 12.9-171 Booklet Marker Skew.
3.
Check the BM back stop assembly for damage. If necessary, install a new BM back stop
Booklet Crease is Off Centre

position of the booklet crease.
Measure from the booklet

edge to the crease
The amount of skew is the difference

between the two measurements
Figure 3 Booklet skew

Table 4 Skew tolerance
Paper weight
Paper size A4,

8.5x11in,
8.5x13in or
8.5x14in
Paper size A4,

8.5x11in,
8.5x13in or
8.5x14in
Paper size A3
or 11x17in
95% of
booklets
99.7% of
booklets
99.7% of
95% of booklets booklets
Less than
1.0mm
Less than
1.5mm
Less than 2.5mm Less than

1.4mm
Less than 3.0mm Less than
2.1mm
80gsm (20lb)
All other booklet
maker approved
weights in GP 20
Paper size A3
or 11x17in
Table 5 Crease position and tolerance
Less than
3.1mm
Less than
3.6mm
If the booklet skew does not conform to the specification in Table 4, perform the following:
1.
Check the operation of the BM stack hold solenoids, refer to the 12-065-00-171, 12-38300-171 HVF Booklet Back Stop Failure RAP. If the stack hold solenoids are operating correctly, check for any contamination or debris in the compiling area of the BM, that could
cause the mis-alignment.
12D-171
Figure 4 Booklet crease position
Paper size
Edge to crease measurement
A4
148.5 +/- 1.5mm
A3
210 +/- 1.5mm
8.5x11 inch
139.5 +/- 1.5mm
8.5x13 inch
165.1 +/- 1.5mm
8.5x14 inch
178.0 +/- 1.5mm
11x17 inch
216.0 +/- 1.5mm
February 2013
2-166
If the booklet crease position does not conform to the specification in Table 5, perform ADJ
12.7-171 Booklet Crease Position.
Booklet Staple Position is Not On The Fold

position of the booklet staple from the crease line.
Staple position
must align with the
crease +/-1.5mm
Figure 6 Booklet creasing

Table 6 Creasing tolerance
Paper size A4,
8.5x11in,
8.5x13in or
Paper weight 8.5x14in
Figure 5 Booklet staple position
If the booklet staple position does not conform to the specification in Figure 5, perform ADJ
12.8-171 Booklet Staple Position.
The Booklet is Not Sufficiently Creased
Paper size A4,

8.5x11in, 8.5x13in Paper size A3 or Paper size A3 or
or 8.5x14in
11x17in
11x17in
95% of booklets 99.7% of booklets 95% of booklets 99.7% of booklets
80gsm (20lb)
Less than 30mm Less than 35mm
Less than 22mm
Less than 25mm
If the open dimension of the booklets does not conform to the specification in Table 6, install
new crease nip springs, PL 12.170 Item 12.
Figure 6, Measure the open dimension of the booklets.
February 2013
2-167
12D-171
12E-171 Copy Damage in the HVF BM RAP

Use this RAP to identify and correct the causes of copy damage in the HVF BM.
12F-171 Mis-Registration in Stapled and Unstapled Sets

RAP
Procedure
Use this RAP to identify and correct the causes of mis-registration in stapled sets, resulting in
staples missing some sheets in the set, or poorly registered non-stapled sets.
WARNING
Check the alignment between the IME and the HVF BM, ADJ 12.1-171.
Look for paper fragments in the HVF BM paper path. Paper fragments can move through
the IME and HVF BM paper path without causing a problem until they finally wedge themselves at some point. A likely place for a fragment of paper to be wedged is at the hole
punch assembly, where the top and bottom guides form the narrowest part of the paper
path.
Ensure that the exit diverter solenoid SOL12-225, PL 12.120 Item 4, energizes correctly
and has full movement.
Ensure that the hole punches park at the fully open position. If they protrude, even
slightly, a jam will occur in the narrow paper path of the hole punch. Refer to the 12-04400-171 to 12-047-00-171 Punch Head Position RAP.
Check that all the idler rolls in the HVF BM paper path are free to rotate, particularly those
on the jam clearance guides. Refer to ADJ 4.1 Machine Lubrication.
Make sure that the jam clearance guides 5a, 5b and 5c close and latch correctly.
Check that the paper path ribs of the BM paper guide 6e, PL 12.150 Item 7 and the upper
exit guide PL 12.125 Item 8 are free of scores and nicks. Check also for contamination
and glue from label stock.
Procedure
WARNING
A probable cause of mis-stapled or mis-compiled sheets is a defective paddle unit or ejector
assembly.
If output prints 2 to 100 in the compile area are not fully pulled back against the HVF backstops inspect the paddles of the paddle unit for physical signs of wear, PL 12.115 Item 25.
If output print 1 in the compile area is not fully pulled back against the HVF backstops
inspect the ejector paddle assembly for physical signs of wear, PL 12.110 Item 22.
A probable cause of mis-registration is the condition of the paper and/or damage such as, curl,
wrinkle, creases, dog ears, etc.
Curl, wrinkle and creases are probably caused in the IME, go to the IQ 1 Image Quality
Entry RAP.
For other copy / print damage and dog ears, go to the 12E-171 Copy Damage in the HVF
BM RAP.
Check the alignment between the IME and the HVF BM, ADJ 12.1-171.
Turn over the paper stack in the tray in use.
Make sure that the compiler carriage tampers move to the correct paper size.
Use a new ream of paper in the tray in use.
Check that the paper size reported on the user interface corresponds to the actual paper
size loaded in the trays, refer to the 71B Tray 1 and 2 Wrong Size Paper RAP.
Paper type, especially recycled paper, can lead to registration problems. Try changing to
a different brand or type of paper.
Make sure that the BM tampers move to the correct paper size, refer to the 12-066-00171, 12-384-00-171, 12-419-00-171, 12-420-00-171 HVF BM Tamper Failure RAP.
Ensure that the guides in the paper trays are correctly set and reported on the UI for the
paper size loaded, refer to the 71B Tray 1 and 2 Wrong Size Paper RAP.
Ensure that the BM paper guide, PL 12.150 Item 7, closes and latches correctly.
If heavy-weight paper is used, the paper can stop in the vertical transport and cause a
fault. The fault is caused when the vertical transport motor is over loaded. Check the position of the jam clearance guides 5a, 5b and 5C. Check the vertical transport rolls and
bearings for contamination. If necessary remove and clean the drive shaft and the bearings. If the problem continues then install a new transport motor,.
Check that paper type is set correctly. If heavyweight paper is used but not set in the UI,
the compiler capacity can be exceeded.
Check for obstructions in the compiler.
Ensure the paddle roll mechanism in the eject housing operating correctly, refer to the 12024-00-171, 12-025-00-171 Paddle Roll Position RAP.
Make sure that the BM tampers move to the correct paper size, refer to 12-066-00-171,
12-384-00-171, 12-419-00-171, 12-420-00-171 HVF BM Tamper Failure RAP.
12E-171, 12F-171
February 2013
2-168
12G-171 HVF BM Poor Stacking RAP
12H-171 Pause to Unload (PTU) RAP
Use this RAP to find the cause of poor stacking in the HVF BM.
Use this RAP to diagnose pause to unload problems.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Check the following;
Figure 1 shows the component locations. Go to WD 12.15. Check the wiring and the voltages.
Refer to PJ903. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. Install new components as necessary:
Look for sets that are not dropping back fully in the bin 1 tray and therefore not being
detected by the kicker fingers and sensors:
Large paper sizes should not be stacked on top of small paper sizes.
Ensure that the paper stack in each paper tray has been fanned.
Turn over the paper stack in each paper tray.
Ensure that all paper or other copy stock being used is within the size and weight
specifications. Refer to GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications.
Try using a fresh ream of paper.
Ensure that the edge guides of all paper trays are adjusted correctly for the paper
size and that the trays are fully closed.
Labels must not be fed to bin1, but to bin 0 only.
It is recommended that transparencies are fed to bin 0 whenever possible.
Check that the bin 1 upper limit switch, S12-190 and the bin 1 lower limit switch, S12-191
are working correctly. Refer to the 12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171 Bin 1 Position RAP.
Check that the HVF BM is not positioned near an air conditioning or ventilation output
duct. Air flow across the output bins can cause poor stacking.
PTU PWB, PL 12.140 Item 3.
PTU PWB
PTU switch,
S12-208
PTU LED
February 2013
2-169
12G-171, 12H-171
12J-171 Inserter Paper Sensing and +5V Supply RAP
Use this RAP to find the cause of inserter empty, inserter paper width and +5v supply problems.
Procedure
WARNING
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the component locations.
If a +5V supply problem is suspected, perform the following:
Go to the 12A-171 HVF Power Distribution RAP. Check the 0V and +5V supply from the HVF
PWB to the inserter PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
To diagnose inserter paper sensing and paper width problems, perform the following:
Enter the dC330 code 12-082 inserter unit empty sensor, Q12-082. Actuate the sensor. The
display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13 and WD 12.21. Check Q12-082. Refer to:
N
Go to WD 12.13, WD 12.21 and WD 12.22 and check the inserter paper width sensor 2.
Refer to:
PJ8 and PJ4 on the Inserter PWB.
Inserter paper width sensor 2, PL 12.300 Item 13.
Go to WD 12.13 and WD 12.22. Measure the voltage from the inserter acceleration sensor
(Q12-316), while actuating the sensor with paper. The voltage changes.
Y
N
Check the inserter acceleration sensor (Q12-316). Refer To:
GP 11 How to check a Sensor.
Inserter acceleration sensor, PL 12.300 Item 10.

Go to WD 12.14 and WD 12.22. Measure the voltage from the inserter pickup sensor (Q12315) while actuating the sensor with paper. The voltage changes.
Y
N
Check the inserter pickup sensor (Q12-315). Refer to:
GP 11 How to check a Sensor.
Install new component as necessary:
Inserter unit empty sensor, PL 12.300 Item 11.
Enter dC330 code 12-081, inserter paper width sensor 1, Q12-081. Actuate the sensor. The
display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.13 and WD 12.21. Check Q12-081. Refer to:
Inserter pickup sensor PL 12.310 Item 10.

Perform SCP 5 final actions.
Inserter paper width sensor 1, PL 12.300 Item 13.
Enter dC330 code 169, inserter paper width sensor 2, Q12-169. Actuate the sensor. The display changes.
12J-171
February 2013
2-170
Inserter paper width sensor

1, (Q12-081)
Inserter unit empty sensor,

Q12-082
Inserter paper width

sensor 2, (Q12-169)
Inserter Pickup
sensor (Q12-315)
Inserter acceleration
sensor (Q12-316)
February 2013
2-171
12J-171
12K-171 HVF Initialization Failure RAP
When an initialization command is received from the machine, the HVF is initialized with the
following actions:
Staple head not at home, refer to 12-369-00-171 to 12-377-00-171 HVF stapler Position
and Priming RAP.
Ejector not at home, refer to 12-450-00-171, 12-456-00-171 to 12-459-00-171 HVF Ejector Module RAP.
The buffer motor fails to start, refer to 12-141-00-171, 12-142-00-171 HVF Buffer Path
RAP.
Entry feed motor 1 fails to start, refer to 12-125-00-171, 12-126-00-171 HVF Entry Sensor
RAP.
Transport motor 2 fails to start, refer to 12-171-00-171, 12-172-00-171 HVF Top Exit Sensor RAP.
The booklet maker diverter solenoid fails to energizes, refer to 12-113-00-171, 12-114-00171, 12-190-00-171, 12-192-00-171 HVF BM Entry RAP.
The exit diverter solenoid fails to energies, refer to 12-171-00-171, 12-172-00-171 HVF
Top Exit Sensor RAP.
Either of the BM staple heads are not at the home position, refer to 12-063-00-171, 12411-00-171 HVF BM Stapler Unit 1 Failure RAP or 12-403-00-171, 12-413-00-171, 12414-00-171 HVF BM Stapler Head 2 and Stapler Module RAP.
The BM tampers are not at the home position, refer to 12-066-00-171, 12-384-00-171, 12419-00-171, 12-420-00-171 HVF BM Tamper Failure RAP.
The BM backstop is not at the home position, refer to 12-065-00-171, 12-383-00-171 HVF
BM Backstop Failure RAP.
The BM crease roll gate is not at the home position, refer to 12-415-00-171 HVF BM
Crease Roll Gate Home RAP.
The BM crease blade is not at the home position, refer to 12-061-00-171, 12-416-00-171
HVF BM Creasing RAP.
1.
The stacker tray moves down and then up.
2.
The lower paddle rotates to home position.
3.
The paddle unit moves up.
4.
The paper pusher comes down
5.
The ejector moves out.
6.
The staple head moves to the rear.
7.
The staple head moves back home, front.
8.
The pusher moves up to home position
9.
The ejector moves back into home position.
10. The pressing and support fingers come out and then move in.
11. The paddle unit moves down.
12. The paddles in the paddle unit rotate twice.
13. The HVF should now be ready to run if all these checks completed successfully.
NOTE: The HVF initialization procedure can be triggered by opening and closing the HVF front
door, or by raising and lowering the top tray. When this is done the tray will not lower completely, but will adjust its position.
The booklet maker is initialized as follows:
1.
The BM tampers are driven to their home position, unless already home.
2.
The BM backstop is driven to the home position, unless already home.
3.
The BM crease roll gate is driven to the home position, unless already home.
4.
The BM crease blade is driven to the home position, unless already home.
5.
The BM staple heads are driven to their home position, unless already home.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Open the HVF front door. Cheat the front door interlock switch. Fully pull out the BM module
Procedure
If the initialization sequence fails to place any unit at the home position, refer to the appropriate
RAPs:
Front tamper not at home, refer to 12-392-00-171 to 12-395-00-171 HVF Front tamper
Tray RAP
Rear tamper not at home, refer to 12-396-00-171 to 12-399-00-171 HVF Rear Tamper
Tray RAP.
Paddle not at home, refer to 12-024-00-171, 12-025-00-171 Paddle Roll Position RAP.
Bin 1 not at home, refer to 12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171 HVF Bin 1 Position RAP.
Punch not at home, refer to 12-044-00-171 to 12-047-00-171 Punch head Position RAP
12K-171
February 2013
2-172
12L-171 Tri-Folder Not Detected RAP
12M-171 Buffer Path Clamp Problems RAP
Use this RAP when the machine fails to detect the tri-folder module.
Use this RAP when having problems with the buffer path clamp on the HVF. Problems in this
area result in paper jams at the exit and poor compiling.
NOTE: The machine must be loaded with A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch SEF paper for the tri-folder to
function. Also, booklet mode will only be available if A4, 11, 14 or 17 inch paper is loaded in the
machine.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for damage or obstructions that would prevent the tri-folder from operating correctly.
Procedure
Go to WD 12.19. Check the wiring of the tri-folder present link, and repair as necessary, REP
1.1. Check for 0V at PJ563, pin 7. Refer to:
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the solenoid and the clamp can move freely without obstruction.
Procedure
Enter the dC330 code 12-056, set clamp solenoid. The solenoid actuates.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.8 and check the wiring. Repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check SOL12-056.
Refer to:
Set clamp solenoid, PL 12.120 Item 4.
February 2013
2-173
12L-171, 12M-171
12N-171 Chad Bin Present and Bin Full RAP

Use this RAP when there is a false indication of a missing or full chad bin.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the chad sensor hole in the side of the bin is clear of obstruction. Check that the bin
is fully inserted and is empty.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-118, chad bin present sensor, Q12-118. Remove the chad bin and actuate the sensor manually. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.12 and check the wiring. Repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check the chad bin
present sensor, Q12-118. Refer to:
As necessary, install new components:

Set clamp solenoid,
SOL12-056
REAR VIEW
Chad bin present sensor, PL 12.125 Item 18.
Enter the dC330 code, 12-193, chad bin level sensor, Q12-193. Remove the chad bin and
actuate the sensor with paper. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 12.12 and check the wiring. Repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Check Q12-193.
Refer to:
12M-171, 12N-171
February 2013
2-174
Chad bin level sensor,

(Q12-193)
Chad bin present

sensor, (Q12-118)
UNDERSIDE VIEW
February 2013
2-175
12N-171
12N-171
February 2013
2-176
16-000-00 to 16-000-26 Cannot Create RPC With ENS RAP
16-001-09 to 16-001-90 Unable to Synchronize Startup RAP
16-000-00 Format services non shutdown ESS faults
16-001-09 Unable to do startup synchronization
16-000-01 ENS service non shutdown ESS faults
16-000-09 Cannot create RPC connection with ENS
16-001-26 Unable to Start up and synchronize with SC
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
If a single occurrence, the network controller (ESS) will automatically re-boot.
1.
If a single occurrence, take no action.
2.
For multiple occurrences, reinstall software, GP 4.
2.
For multiple occurrences switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
3.
If the fault remains, reinstall software, GP 4.
February 2013
2-177
16-000-00 to 16-000-26, 16-001-09 to 16-001-90
16-002-09 to 16-002-19 Unable to Register as RPC RAP
16-003-09 to 16-003-90 Too Many IPC Handles RAP
16-002-09 Unable to Register as an RPC server
16-003-09 Too many IPC handles
16-003-14 Too many IPC handles
16-003-19 Too many IPC handlers
16-003-90 Utility insert handler failure
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
For multiple occurrences, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
3.
16-002-09 to 16-002-19, 16-003-09 to 16-003-90
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-178
16-004-14 to 16-005-92 RPC Failure to Register RAP
16-006-09, 16-006-19 Cannot Register for Events RAP
16-004-14 RPC call failure to ESS registration service
16-006-09 Cannot register for events
16-004-19 RPC connect failure to ESS registration service
16-004-26 RPC connect failure to ESS registration service
Procedure
WARNING
16-004-46 RPC connect failure to ESS registration service (to register with)
1.
2.

16-005-46 RPC call failure to ESS registration service (to register with)
16-005-90 RPC call failure to ESS registration failed
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-179
16-004-14 to 16-005-92, 16-006-09, 16-006-19
16-007-92 to 16-010-99 Invalid IPC / RPC Data RAP
16-013-14, 16-014-14 Copier Synchronization Error RAP
16-007-92 Invalid RPC data received
16-013-14 Digital copier ENS synchronization error
16-009-09 Invalid IPC data received
16-014-14 Digital copier ENS synchronization error
16-010-14 Unable to send IPC
Procedure
WARNING
16-010-99 IPC open, create, signal queue failed
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
16-007-92 to 16-010-99, 16-013-14, 16-014-14
1.
2.
February 2013
2-180
16-015-14, 16-015-19 Data Store Variable Not Set RAP
16-016-14, 16-016-19 Data Store Initialization Failed RAP
16-015-14 SESS data store environmental variable not set
16-016-14 Data store initialization failed
16-016-19 Data store initialization failed
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
If a single occurrence, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
1.
2.
For multiple occurrences, reinstall the software, GP 4.
2.
February 2013
2-181
16-015-14, 16-015-19, 16-016-14, 16-016-19
16-017-19 to 16-021-26 Send Event Failure / Could Not Get

Host Name RAP
16-017-19 Send event failure. Unable to send event to ESS ENS
16-021-46 Unable to Get Host Name RAP

16-021-46 Unable to get Host Name
Procedure
WARNING
16-021-19 ESS PM registration connect error
16-021-26 Service could not get Host name
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
16-017-19 to 16-021-26, 16-021-46
February 2013
2-182
16-023-09, 16-023-26 RPC Call Failure RAP
16-026-09 to 16-026-92 Memory Allocation Error RAP
16-023-09 RPC call failure to ENS
16-026-09 Memory allocation failure
16-023-26 RPC call failure to ENS
16-026-14 Malloc error
Procedure
WARNING
16-026-90 Malloc error
1.
Procedure
2.
3.
WARNING
1.
2.
For multiple occurrences, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14
3.
February 2013
2-183
16-023-09, 16-023-26, 16-026-09 to 16-026-92
16-027-90 Unable to Obtain Queue ID RAP
16-028-09, 16-028-90 Unable to Complete RPC Call / Invalid

Range RAP
16-027-90 Unable to obtain well known queue ID
16-028-09 Unable to complete RPC call
Procedure
WARNING
16-028-90 Invalid range string
1.
2.
16-027-90, 16-028-09, 16-028-90
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-184
16-030-19 Unable to Obtain Client RAP
16-031-09 Invalid Event Notification RAP
16-030-19 Unable to obtain client RPC handle to EJS
16-031-09 Invalid event notification received
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
February 2013
2-185
16-030-19, 16-031-09
16-032-19, 16-039-00 NVM Connection Failure / Pthread

Create Error RAP
16-040-92 Semaphore Fault RAP

16-040-92 Semaphore fault
16-032-19 NVM connection failure
Procedure
WARNING
16-039-00 Pthread create error
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-032-19, 16-039-00, 16-040-92
1.
2.
February 2013
2-186
16-048-09 Unable to Set Binding RAP
16-048-14, 16-048-90 Cannot Set ESS Client Binding RAP
16-048-09 Unable to set binding
16-048-14 Cannot set ESS client binding
Procedure
16-048-90 Cannot set ESS client binding
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14
2.
February 2013
2-187
16-048-09, 16-048-14
16-048-99 Unable to Set Client Binding RAP
16-150-09 Cannot Send Registration Event RAP
16-048-99 Unable to set client binding
16-150-09 Cannot send Registration Event
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
16-048-99, 16-150-09
February 2013
2-188
16-150-14 Unable to Obtain RPC Transport RAP
16-150-19 Unable to Sync Peer RAP
16-150-14 Unable to obtain RPC transport
16-150-19 Unable to sync peer (within ESS) infrastructure services
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-189
16-150-14, 16-150-19
16-150-26 Fault Service Failed to Write Log RAP
16-150-90 Invalid IPC Request Destination RAP
16-150-26 Fault Service Failed to write log
16-150-90 Invalid IPC request destination
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
16-150-26, 16-150-90
February 2013
2-190
16-150-92 Consumer Interface Fault RAP
16-151-09 to 16-151-19 Invalid IPC Command / SNMP Reg

Failure RAP
16-150-92 Consumer interface fault
16-151-09 Invalid IPC command
Procedure
WARNING
16-151-14 SNMP event registration failed
1.
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14
2.
16-151-19 Invalid IPC command
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-191
16-150-92, 16-151-09 to 16-151-19
16-151-26 Fault Service Failed to Get a Log RAP
16-151-90 Environment Variable Failure RAP
16-151-26 Fault service failed to get a log handle
16-151-90 Put environment variable failure
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
16-151-26, 16-151-90
February 2013
2-192
16-152-09 Internal IPC Failure RAP
16-152-14 Empty Internal Event Failure RAP
16-152-09 Internal IPC failure
16-152-14 Empty internal event received by ENS
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
February 2013
2-193
16-152-09, 16-152-14
16-152-19 Unable to Send Request to SESS RAP
16-152-26 Unable to Send Request to SESS RAP
16-152-19 Unable to send request to SESS
16-152-26 Unable to send request to SESS
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
If a single occurrence, reinstall software, GP 4.
2.
2.
3.
For multiple occurrences, first check the harness connections then if problem persists
install a new HDD, PL 3.11 Item 2.
16-152-19, 16-152-26
February 2013
2-194
16-153-09 Unable to Obtain IPC Queue RAP
16-153-14 Unable to Initialize Event List RAP
16-153-09 Unable to obtain IPC queue
16-153-14 Can not initialize internal event list
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
February 2013
2-195
16-153-09, 16-153-14
16-153-19 NVM Save Failure RAP
16-154-09 ESS Registration Configuration Error RAP
16-153-19 NVM save failure
16-154-09 ESS Registration service configuration error
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
If problem persists there could be a bad software release. Install new software, GP 4.
16-153-19, 16-154-09
February 2013
2-196
16-154-14 Cannot Create Internal Event Queue RAP
16-154-19 NVM Read Failure RAP
16-154-14 Cannot create internal event
16-154-19 NVM read failure
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
February 2013
2-197
16-154-14, 16-154-19
16-155-19 ESS Failed to Boot from Alternate Disk RAP
16-156-19 Service Run Loop Failed RAP
16-155-19 ESS failed to boot from alternate disk partition
16-156-19 Service run loop failed
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
16-155-19, 16-156-19
February 2013
2-198
16-160-09 ESS Reg Service Process Death RAP
16-161-09, 16-164-09 Cannot Send Reg Event / List Access

Failure RAP
16-160-09 ESS Registration Service Process Death
16-161-09 Cannot send registration event
Procedure
WARNING
16-164-09 List access failure (create, add, find, delete)
1.
2.
3.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-199
16-160-09, 16-161-09, 16-164-09
16-162-09 to 16-163-09 Cannot Send Reg Event / ESS

Services Failure RAP
16-429-00, 16-431-00 Unable to Write to Data Store / Get

System Time RAP
16-162-09 ESS platform manager services process death
16-429-00 Unable to write to data store
16-163-09 ESS DM agent services process death
16-431-00 Unable to get system time
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
16-162-09 to 16-163-09, 16-429-00, 16-431-00
February 2013
2-200
16-432-00 Unknown Scheduler Received RAP
16-433-00 RPC Call Failed RAP
16-432-00 Unknown scheduler received
16-433-00 RPC call failed
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-201
16-432-00, 16-433-00
16-434-00 Unable to Change Scheduler RAP
16-600-07 to 16-600-67 Cannot Create RPC Connection

RAP
16-434-00 Unable to change scheduler received
16-600-07 Cannot create RPC connection to ENS
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.

16-600-66 Unable to create RPC connection to ENS
16-600-67 Unable to create RPC connection to ENS
Procedure
WARNING
16-434-00, 16-600-07 to 16-600-67
1.
2.
February 2013
2-202
16-601-26 to 16-601-46 Queue Setup / System Control

Failed / Invalid UI Info RAP
16-601-47 Diagnostics Service Failed IPC Queue Setup

RAP
16-601-26 Fault Service Failed IPC Queue Setup
16-601-47 Diagnostics service failed IPC queue setup
16-601-35 System control initialization Failed
Procedure
WARNING
16-601-46 Invalid UI information (RPC data) returned
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
February 2013
2-203
16-601-26 to 16-601-46, 16-601-47
16-601-66, 16-601-67 Unable to Do Start Up Sync RAP
16-601-68 Unable to Start Up and Sync RAP
16-601-66 Unable to do start up synchronization
16-601-68 Unable to start up & synchronize with SC
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
If a single occurrence switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
16-601-66, 16-601-67, 16-601-68
1.
2.
February 2013
2-204
16-601-105 Unable Synchronize At Start Up RAP
16-602-07 to 16-602-105 RPC Service Registration Failure

RAP
16-602-07 RPC service registration failure
Procedure
WARNING
16-602-09 Unable to unregistered as RPC service during shutdown
1.
2.
16-602-11 RPC server register failed

16-602-28 RPC server registration failed
16-602-66 Unable to register as an RPC server
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-205
16-601-105, 16-602-07 to 16-602-105
16-603-11, 16-603-28 Replace Handler Call Failed RAP
16-603-46 to 16-603-67 Too Many IPC Handlers RAP
16-603-11 Replace handler call failed
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-603-11, 16-603-28, 16-603-46 to 16-603-67
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-206
16-603-68, 16-604-105 Replace Handler Call Failed / Data

Store Variable Not Set RAP
16-603-105, 16-604-14 RPC Call Failure to NC Reg Service

RAP
16-603-105 RPC call failure to network controller registration service.
16-604-14 Unable to unregister as RPC service during shutdown. Registration failed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-207
16-603-68, 16-604-105, 16-603-105, 16-604-14
16-604-38 to 16-605-07 Could Not Register With Reg

Service RAP
16-605-14, 16-605-105 Unable to Unregister As RPC

Service / RPC Call Failure RAP
16-604-38 Could not register with registration service
16-604-99 Could not register with registration service
16-605-105 Unable to unregister as RPC service during shutdown
16-605-07 Unable to register with registration service
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-604-38 to 16-605-07, 16-605-14, 16-605-105
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-208
16-605-26 Fault Service Timed Out Registering RAP
16-605-35 to 16-605-67 RPC Call Failure to ESS RAP
16-605-26 Fault service timed out registering with registration service
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Procedure
2.
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-209
16-605-26, 16-605-35 to 16-605-67
16-606-07 Cannot Register For Events RAP
16-606-35 to 16-606-99 Cannot Register For Events RAP
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
Procedure
WARNING

16-606-07, 16-606-35 to 16-606-99
1.
2.
February 2013
2-210
16-606-105 OS Problem RAP
16-607-19 to 16-608-14 Invalid RPC Data / Unable to Free

Resources RAP
16-606-105 OS problem
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-607-47 Invalid RPC disk diagnostic data received

16-607-105 Service run loop failed
16-608-09 Unable to free IPC resources
16-608-11 IPC unregister failed
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-211
16-606-105, 16-607-19 to 16-608-14
16-608-26 Fault Service Failed to Unbind RAP
16-608-28 to 16-608-67 Unable to Free IPC Resources RAP
16-608-26 Fault service failed to unbind with SC
16-608-28 IPC unregister fail
Procedure
WARNING
16-608-38 Unable to unregister as IPC server
1.
2.
Procedure
WARNING
16-608-26, 16-608-28 to 16-608-67
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-212
16-608-105 Unable Build UI SVC Obtain Client Failed RAP
16-609-07 Unknown Message Received RAP
16-608-105 Unable build UI SVC obtain client failed
16-609-07 Unknown message received from DM agent
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-213
16-608-105, 16-609-07
16-609-19, 16-609-105 Too Many IPC Handlers / Invalid

RPC Data RAP
16-609-26 Fault Service Encountered Error RAP

16-609-26 Fault service encountered error trying to get IPC message
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
16-609-19, 16-609-105, 16-609-26
1.
2.
February 2013
2-214
16-609-46 to 16-609-92 Invalid IPC Data Received RAP
16-610-00, 16-610-07 IPC Send Failure RAP
16-610-00 IPC send failure to ESS triple A service for queue command authorization
16-609-47 Invalid IPC data received. Get SC diagnostics handle failed;
16-610-07 IPC send failure to DM agent
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-215
16-609-46 to 16-609-92, 16-610-00, 16-610-07
16-610-09 Cannot Send IPC Message RAP
16-610-11 to 16-610-90 Unable to Send IPC Message RAP
16-610-09 Cannot send IPC message to ESS platform manage
16-610-11 IPC communication failed
Procedure
16-610-19 Unable to send IPC message
WARNING
16-610-28 IPC communication failed
1.
2.

16-610-90 IPC send response error
Procedure
WARNING
16-610-09, 16-610-11 to 16-610-90
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-216
16-610-92 Failure to Send Queue Status RAP
16-610-99 Unable to Send IPC Message RAP
16-610-92 Failure to send queue status
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-217
16-610-92, 16-610-99
16-611-07, 16-611-38 Client Removal Failed RAP
16-611-19 to 16-611-47 Unable to Remove RPC Connection

RAP
16-611-07 Client removal failure
16-611-09 Unable to remove RPC connection
16-611-38 Client removal failure
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.

Procedure
WARNING
16-611-07, 16-611-38, 16-611-19 to 16-611-47
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-218
16-611-66 to 16-611-99 Unable to Remove RPC Connection

RAP
16-612-09 to 16-612-68 Unable to Do Shutdown Sync RAP

16-612-09 Unable to do shutdown synchronization
Procedure
16-612-47 Downgrade not permitted
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
February 2013
2-219
16-611-66 to 16-611-99, 16-612-09 to 16-612-68
16-613-09 to 16-614-19 DC Sync / Comms Error RAP
16-614-47 Invalid Software Upgrade RAP
16-613-09 DC registration synchronization error
16-614-47 Invalid SW upgrade file
16-613-14 DC ENS synchronization error
Procedure
WARNING
16-613-19 DC sys mgr sync error

16-614-09 DC registration communications error
16-614-14 Digital copier ENS registration error
1.
Verify that the correct software file is being used, refer to GP 4.
16-614-19 DC sys mgr communications error
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-613-09 to 16-614-19, 16-614-47
February 2013
2-220
16-615-35, 16-615-46 Data Store Variable Not Set RAP
16-615-47 Multiple Software Upgrade File RAP
16-615-47 Multiple SW upgrade files in directory
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
1.
Ensure that there is only one software upgrade file in the directory, refer to GP 4.
February 2013
2-221
16-615-35, 16-615-46, 16-615-47
16-615-66 Data Store Variable Not Set RAP
16-615-67, 16-615-90, 16-616-38, 16-616-46 SESS Data

Store Environmental Variable RAP
16-615-67 SESS data store environmental variable not set.
Procedure
WARNING
16-615-90 Corrupt environment variable, configuration script error.
1.
2.
16-616-35 SESS Faults 206 or 207. Data store not created. Corrupt environment.
16-616-38 Shared memory fault when initializing with the data store.
16-616-46 SESS Faults 206 or 207, data store not created, corrupt environment variable.
Procedure
WARNING
16-615-66, 16-615-67, 16-615-90, 16-616-38, 16-616-46
1.
For a single occurrence, take no action.
2.
3.
If the fault remains, reinstall the software, GP 4.
February 2013
2-222
16-616-47 IPC Message Failure RAP
16-616-67 Submission Of E-mail OR IFax Job Failed RAP
16-616-47 IPC message failure.
16-616-67 Submission of e-mail or IFax job failed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
February 2013
2-223
16-616-47, 16-616-67
16-617-19 RPC Information Corrupt RAP
16-617-47 TAR Extraction Failure RAP
16-617-19 Invalid event information or data. ENS failure, system RPC information corrupt.
16-617-47 TAR extraction failure
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
For a single occurrence, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
1.
2.
2.
16-617-19, 16-617-47
February 2013
2-224
16-618-47 DLM SPI Extraction Failure RAP
16-619-14 to 16-619-93 Cannot Unregister From

Registration Service RAP
16-618-47 DLM SPI Extraction failure
16-619-14 Registration service failed to respond in time.
Procedure
WARNING
16-619-19 Registration service failed to respond in time.
1.
2.
For a multiple occurrence, reinstall software, GP 4.
16-619-26 Could not register with Registration Service. Communication failure, software error.
16-619-46 Unable to unregister with Network Controller Registration Service. Registration Service was too slow to respond.
16-619-47 DMPR Failure at web.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-225
16-618-47, 16-619-14 to 16-619-93
16-620-07 to 16-620-90 Registration Service Failed RAP

16-620-07 Registration Service failed.
16-620-92, 16-620-93, 16-620-99 Unable to Register With

Network Controller Registration Service RAP
16-620-92 Unable to unregister with network controller registration service due to registration
service failure.
16-620-93 Unable to unregister with network controller registration service due to registration
service failure.
Procedure
WARNING
16-620-47 Upgrade request rejected.
Procedure
1.
2.
WARNING
1.
2.
16-620-07 to 16-620-90, 16-620-92, 16-620-93, 16-620-
February 2013
2-226
16-621-00, 16-621-07, 16-621-11, 16-621-28, 16-621-35, 16621-38, 16-621-47, 16-621-66, 16-621-67, 16-621-93, 16-62199 Unable to Obtain Host Name RAP
16-622-07, 16-622-09, 16-622-11, 16-622-14, 16-622-19, 16622-26, 16-622-28, 16-622-35, 16-622-38, 16-622-46, 16-62247 Corrupt RPC Table RAP
16-621-00 Unable to get host name. Configuration error.
16-622-07 Corrupt O/S RPC table.
16-622-09 Corrupt O/S table.
16-622-11 Corruptly O/S table.
16-621-35 Failed to get host name using GetHostName call.
16-621-66 Unable to get host name.
16-621-67 Unable to get host name.
16-622-47 Software upgrade file failure.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
For single occurrence, switch on the machine, then switch off the machine, GP 14.
1.
For single occurrence, switch on the machine, then off the machine, GP 14.
2.
For multiple occurrence, reinstall software, GP 4.
2.
For multiple occurrence, reinstall software, GP 4.
February 2013
2-227
16-621-00, 16-621-07, 16-621-11, 16-621-28, 16-621-
16-622-66, 16-622-67, 16-622-68 Unable to Register RPC

Service RAP
16-623-35, 16-623-47, 16-624-46 ENS Service Failed to

Respond In Time RAP
16-622-66 Unable to unregister as RPC service during shutdown.
16-623-35 ENS Service failed to respond in time.
16-622-67 Unable to register as RPC service during shutdown.
16-623-47 ENS service failed to respond in time.
16-622-68 Unable to register as RPC service during shutdown.
16-624-46 RPC corrupted o/s failure.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
For a single occurrences, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
2.
16-622-66, 16-622-67, 16-622-68, 16-623-35, 16-623-47,
February 2013
2-228
16-625-35, 16-625-46, 16-625-66, 16-625-67, 16-625-90

Invalid IPC Type RAP
16-626-00, 16-626-11, 16-626-38, 16-626-47, 16-626-67

Memory Leak RAP
16-625-35 Unknown message received. Software version mismatch.
16-626-00 Memory leak, software bug memory corrupt. Virtual memory exhausted. Process
size exceeding system limits.
16-625-46 Software version mismatch.

16-625-66 Invalid IPC message type.

16-625-67 Invalid IPC message type.
16-625-90 Known service sends message that does not make sense.
Procedure
WARNING
16-626-67 Memory allocation failed.
1.
2.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-229
16-625-35, 16-625-46, 16-625-66, 16-625-67, 16-625-
16-628-07, 16-628-35, 16-628-46, 16-628-66, 16-628-67

Range Environment Variable RAP
16-628-09, 16-629-11, 16-629-26, 16-629-46, 16-629-67, 16629-68, 16-629-92, 16-629-93 No Acknowledgment For RPC
Message RAP
16-628-07 Range environment variable not set. Set to invalid numeric string.
16-628-09 Unable to complete RPC call.
16-629-11 Fault service call to PSW callback failed.
16-629-26 Fault service call to PSW callback failed.
16-629-46 No acknowledgment for RPC message.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-629-92 No acknowledgment for RPC message. RPC time out calling program received void
response due to corrupt RPC.
16-629-93 No acknowledgment for RPC message. RPC time out calling program received void
response due to corrupt RPC.
Procedure
WARNING
16-628-07, 16-628-35, 16-628-46, 16-628-66, 16-628-67,
1.
2.
February 2013
2-230
16-630-09, 16-630-26, 16-630-35, 16-630-38, 16-630-46, 16630-47, 16-630-66, 16-630-67, 16-630-68, 16-630-99 Corrupt
RPC RAP
16-631-19, 16-631-46, 16-631-19, 16-633-19, 16-634-46, 16635-07, 16-635-35, 16-635-46, 16-635-99-16-636-35, 16-63699 XDR Data Error RAP
16-630-09 Corrupt O/S RPC table.
16-631-19 Software error in the ENS service or in the service generating the fault.
16-630-26 Corrupt system configuration.
16-631-46 Software error in the ENS or in the service generating the fault.
16-630-35 Unable to get RPC client handle. Corrupt system configuration.
16-633-19 Invalid system configuration. NVM corrupted.
16-630-38 Null pointer returned when obtain client attempted.
16-634-46 Unable to specify shutdown routine during initialization.
16-635-07 Cannot free XDR data.
16-635-35 Cannot free XDR data.
16-630-66 Unable to get RPC client handle.
16-635-46 Unable to free XDR data.
16-635-99 Unable to convert serialized data to internal data structure.
16-636-35 Unable to convert serialized data to internal data structure. Unable to free XDR
data.

16-636-99 Unable to convert serialized data to internal structure. Unable to free XDR data.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
1.
2.
February 2013
2-231
16-630-09, 16-630-26, 16-630-35, 16-630-38, 16-630-
16-637-11, 16-637-26, 16-637-38, 16-637-47, 16-637-66, 16637-67, 16-637-93, 16-637-95 File Error RAP
16-637-11 Failed to open system jobs file.
16-638-66, 16-638-67, 16-639-38, 16-639-46, 16-640-28, 16640-35, 16-640-46, 16-641-00, 16-641-26, 16-641-46 O/S
Failure RAP
16-638-66 Unable to initialize with queue library.
16-637-26 Failed to open system jobs file.
16-638-67 Unable to initialize with queue library.
16-637-38 Disk write error.
16-639-38 O/S failure memory.
16-637-47 Failed to open a file. Bad disk.
16-639-46 O/S failure memory.
16-637-66 File I/O error.
16-640-28 Calling program received void.
16-640-35 RPC send corrupt.
16-640-46 O/S failure.
16-641-00 Cannot log fault to network controller fault log. Either registration or network controller fault service is not available.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-641-26 Unable to log a fault on the network controller.

16-641-46 Cannot log fault to network controller fault service.
Procedure
WARNING
16-637-11, 16-637-26, 16-637-38, 16-637-47, 16-637-66,
1.
2.
February 2013
2-232
16-642-46, 16-642-47, 16-643-19, 16-643-26, 16-643-47, 16644-11 Unable To Close File RAP
16-642-46 Software error.
16-644-11, 16-644-26, 16-644-46, 16-644-47, 16-644-66, 16644-67, 16-645-11, 16-645-26, 16-645-46, 16-645-47, 16-64566, 16-645-67 Unable To Read From File RAP
16-644-11 Common logging utility failed to get log size.
16-644-26 Common logging utility failed to get log size.
16-643-19 Disk write error.
16-644-47 Failed while trying to get data for next process to be verified.
16-643-26 Failed to close system jobs file.
16-643-47 Failed to close a file.
Procedure
WARNING
16-645-11 Failed write to system jobs file.
1.
2.
16-645-26 Failed write to system jobs file.

16-645-46 Failed to write to a file.
16-645-47 Failed to write to a file.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
For multiple occurrences, reinstall software GP 4.
February 2013
2-233
16-642-46, 16-642-47, 16-643-19, 16-643-26, 16-643-
16-646-26, 16-647-19, 16-647-26, 16-649-35, 16-650-35, 16650-99 Invalid Service Attribute RAP
16-646-26 Failed to delete system jobs file.
16-651-19, 16-651-35, 16-651-99, 16-652-38, 16-652-99, 16653-38, 16-654-38, 16-654-99, 16-655-38, 16-656-38 Register
Failure RAP
16-651-19 IPC, OS, SESS or SC operation.
16-647-19 Lynx OS not responding
16-651-35 IPC and OS failure. SESS not responding.
16-647-26 Diagnostic failure, O/S failure.
16-651-99 IPC and OS failure. SESS not responding.
16-652-38 SPI enroll failed. Unable to enroll SPI callbacks.
16-650-35 Service making invalid attribute request.
16-650-99 Service making invalid attribute request.
Procedure
WARNING
16-653-38 When DM passes completed job logged an invalid job.
1.
2.
16-654-38 DM returned from SPI register function because of error.

16-654-99 DM returned from log function because of error.
16-655-38 DM returned to SPI register function because of error.
16-656-38 RPC processing fault.
Procedure
WARNING
16-646-26, 16-647-19, 16-647-26, 16-649-35, 16-650-35,
1.
2.
February 2013
2-234
16-658-07, 16-659-11, 16-659-28, 16-659-93, 16-659-95, 16660-95, 16-660-99, 16-661-95 Parser Utility Open Failure
RAP
16-662-11, 16-662-28, 16-662-93, 16-662-95, 16-663-28, 16663-93, 16-663-95 Parser Utility Template Failed To Parse
RAP
16-662-11 Parser utility template failed to parse.
16-659-11 Parser utility open failure.
16-660-95 Cannot read local directory entries.
16-660-99 Service initialization failed.
16-661-95 Cannot create spool directory.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
February 2013
2-235
16-658-07, 16-659-11, 16-659-28, 16-659-93, 16-659-
16-664-11, 16-664-28, 16-664-93, 16-664-95, 16-665-95

Parser Utility Closing Failure RAP
16-666-11, 16-666-28, 16-666-93, 16-666-95 Parser Utility

Invocation Failed RAP
16-664-11 Parser utility parser closing failed.
16-666-11 Parser utility invocation failed.
16-665-95 Unable to detach from child thread.
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-664-11, 16-664-28, 16-664-93, 16-664-95, 16-665-95,
1.
2.
February 2013
2-236
16-667-11, 16-667-28, 16-667-95, 16-668-47 Parser Utility

Set Status Failure RAP
16-668-93, 16-668-95 Unable To Determine Local File

Statistics RAP
16-667-11 Parser utility set status failed.
16-668-93 Unable to determine local file statistics.
16-668-95 Unable to determine local file statistics.
Procedure
WARNING
16-668-47 Failed to write NVM.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
1.
2.
February 2013
2-237
16-667-11, 16-667-28, 16-667-95, 16-668-47, 16-668-
16-669-28, 16-669-93, 16-669-95, 16-670-00 Unable To Write

Job Template RAP
16-670-11, 16-670-28, 16-670-47, 16-670-93, 16-671-00, 16671-47 Unable To Decode Template File RAP
16-669-28 Unable to write job template to network controller disk.
16-670-11 Unable to decode template file.
16-670-47 Failed to save NVM.
16-670-00 Unable to lock/unlock data store.
Procedure
16-671-00 Sort jobs failed.
WARNING
16-671-47 Failed to initialize NVM.
1.
2.
Procedure
WARNING
16-669-28, 16-669-93, 16-669-95, 16-670-00, 16-670-11,
1.
For a single occurrence, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine GP 14.
2.
February 2013
2-238
16-617-93, 16-671-95, 16-672-09, 16-672-95, 16-673-95, 16674-00, 16-674-09, 16-675-00, 16-6700-00, 16-700-35 File
Error RAP
16-674-09, 16-675-00, 16-700-00, 16-701-00, 16-701-99, 16702-00, 16-702-95, 16-707-00, 16-709-00 XSA Database
Failure RAP
16-671-93 Unable to encode template file.
16-674-09 RPC server not responding.
16-671-95 Unable to encode template file.
16-675-00 Database server not responding.
16-672-09 Software error. File system corruption.
16-700-00 In a list job request, an unknown attribute was requested.
16-700-35 Unknown attribute requested passes into a function.
16-701-00 LOA failure. Unable to communicate with XSA database.
16-674-00 RPC server not responding.
Procedure
WARNING
16-707-00 Unknown queue request received.
1.
16-709-00 Unknown modify request received.
2.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-239
16-617-93, 16-671-95, 16-672-09, 16-672-95, 16-673-
16-710-00, 16-710-35, 16-716-00, 16-728-00, 16-730-00, 16730-28, 16-730-35, 16-730-66, 16-740-19, 16-750-07, 16-75009, 16-750-11 Unable To Create Client Handle RAP
16-710-00 Service being communicated to is dead. System resource corrupted.
16-742-19 Hard Disk ODIO Failure RAP

16-742-19 Hard disk ODIO failure
Procedure
WARNING
16-710-35 Service trying to communicate to is dead. System resources corrupted.
16-716-00 Data store not created. Corrupt environment variable.

16-728-00 Range environment variable set to invalid numeric string.
1.
2.
16-730-00 Unable to create client handle.

16-740-19 Immediate image overwrite failed on network controller hard disk.
16-750-07 Message received from DM not processed correctly.
16-750-09 Service tried to register and service is already registered.
16-750-11 Template cache file is missing.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-710-00, 16-710-35, 16-716-00, 16-728-00, 16-730-00,
February 2013
2-240
16-750-14, 16-750-19, 16-750-26, 16-750-35, 16-750-38, 16750-46, 16-750-47, 16-750-66, 16-750-67, 16-750-90 Invalid
Request RAP
16-750-92, 16-750-93, 16-750-95, 16-751-00, 16-751-07, 16751-09, 16-751-11, 16-751-14, 16-751-19, 16-751-26
Database Error RAP
16-750-14 Too many messages sent to SESS system control.
16-750-92 Unable to open bit map captured to disk. bad or full disk.
16-750-19 Invalid request data from calling service.
16-750-93 IFS error when requesting memory.
16-750-26 Invalid number of faults requested.
16-750-95 Local spool area does not exist.
16-750-35 Data store failure.
16-751-00 Database err known by service registry or registry not available.
16-750-38 Initialization of SPI and job tracking table failed in SVC initialize service.
16-751-07 Message received from network controller AAA not processed correctly.
16-750-46 Client requested an unknown object or invalid object type.
16-751-09 Registration receives unrequested ENS notification.
16-750-47 Bad parameter returned.
16-751-11 Initialization procedure fails.
16-750-66 Failure to set service state.
16-751-14 SC not responding.
16-750-67 Failure to set service state.
16-751-19 Invalid permission to change date.
16-750-90 Unexpected service sends this message.
16-751-26 Unrecognized code. Service raises code that the fault service doesnt know how to
handle.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
1.
2.
February 2013
2-241
16-750-14, 16-750-19, 16-750-26, 16-750-35, 16-750-
16-751-28, 16-751-35, 16-751-38, 16-751-46, 16-751-66, 16751-67, 16-751-92, 16-751-93 Unknown Attribute RAP
16-752-00, 16-753-00 File Cabinet Application Registration

Error RAP
16-751-28 Templates attributes are invalid, or syntax error.
16-752-00 File cabinet application registration error
16-751-35 Invalid queue ID.
16-753-00 File cabinet application un-registration error
16-751-38 Unknown attribute returned for completed job list.
Procedure
WARNING
16-751-46 Client requested an unknown object or invalid object type.

16-751-47 Failed to replace the current directory with directory from alt. partition.
16-751-66 Unable to send event to network controller ENS.
1.
2.
16-751-67 Unable to send event to network controller ENS.

16-751-92 Cannot set job to complete.
16-751-93 Invalid template attribute.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-751-28, 16-751-35, 16-751-38, 16-751-46, 16-751-66,
February 2013
2-242
16-752-07, 16-752-09, 16-752-14, 16-752-19, 16-752-26, 16752-28, 16-752-35, 16-752-46, 16-752-47 Invalid File Details
RAP
16-752-66, 16-752-67, 16-752-92, 16-752-93, 16-752-95, 16753-09, 16-753-14, 16-753-19, 16-753-26, 16-753-28 Scan to
FAX Registration Error RAP
16-752-07 Data store error.
16-752-66 Scan to FAX services registration error.
16-752-09 Configuration control problem.
16-752-67 Scan to FAX services registration error.
16-752-14 SC not responding. SC IPC queue does not exist.
16-752-92 Configuration problem.
16-752-19 RPC failure.
16-752-93 Error accessing jobs in job list.
16-752-26 Unrecognized SESS error code.
16-752-95 File transfer failure.
16-752-28 Template cache file is missing.
16-753-09 Software bug.
16-752-35 Invalid queue ID.
16-753-14 Calling service used an invalid event number.
16-752-46 Invalid row of table object.
16-753-19 Invalid event information or data. ENS failure. System RPC information corrupt.
16-752-47 Invalid test pattern source.
16-753-26 PSW failure. O/S failure. CCM failure.
Procedure
16-753-28 Cannot communicate with UI for template list request.
WARNING
1.
2.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-243
16-752-07, 16-752-09, 16-752-14, 16-752-19, 16-752-
16-753-35, 16-753-46, 16-753-47, 16-753-66, 16-753-67, 16753-90, 16-753-92, 16-753-93, 16-753-95, 16-753-09 Data
Store Read Failure RAP
16-754-14, 16-754-19, 16-754-26, 16-754-28, 16-754-35, 16754-46, 16-754-47, 16-754-66, 16-754-67, 16-754-68 OS
Error RAP
16-753-35 Unable to change EJS status to offline.
16-754-14 Receipt is not there. Failure on ENS side.
16-753-46 Invalid table row.
16-754-19 Shutdown request reason unknown.
16-753-47 Failed to close a directory during verification check. Corrupt disk.
16-754-26 Fault service encountered error reading fault log. File system corrupted.
16-753-66 Data store read failure.
16-754-28 Initialization procedure fails.
16-753-67 Data store read failure.
16-754-35 OS corrupt.
16-754-46 Attempted to write a read only object. Software configuration error.
16-753-92 Configuration problem.
16-754-47 Failed to replace a file that was missing with file from alt. partition.
16-753-93 Error adding jobs in job list.
16-754-66 OS problem.
16-753-95 Requested transfer protocol not supported.
16-754-67 OS problem.
16-754-09 Still registered services after time out.
16-754-68 Initialize procedure fails.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
16-753-35, 16-753-46, 16-753-47, 16-753-66, 16-753-67,
February 2013
2-244
16-754-90, 16-754-92, 16-754-92, 16-754-93, 16-754-95, 16755-00, 16-755-09, 16-755-14, 16-755-19, 16-755-26, 16-75528 Fault Service Error RAP
16-754-90 Software bug.
16-755-35, 16-755-46, 16-755-47, 16-755-67, 16-755-90, 16755-93, 16-755-99, 16-756-09, 16-756-14 Request Error RAP
16-755-35 OS corrupt. Software corrupt. Data store corrupt.
16-755-46 Mismatched data type during object write. Software configuration error or request
mishandled configuration index data.
16-754-92 Data store failure.
16-755-47 Failed to repair the permission of the current file being checked.
16-754-93 Error deleting jobs from job list.
16-755-67 Cancel request failed.
16-754-95 Unable to remove advisory lock on network server.
16-755-90 Software limit reached.
16-755-00 Service registry cannot initialize database.
16-755-93 Unable to initialize with IFS.
16-755-09 Cannot register new service due to too many entries in SRV table.
16-755-99 Unable to abort job fault.
16-755-14 Message buffer full. Full queue.
16-756-09 Service not registered.
16-755-19 SESS system control broken or too many IPC messages.
16-756-14 Client provided wrong binding information. Client not required as RPC server.
16-755-26 Disk write error. Software error.
16-755-28 Cancel request failed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
February 2013
2-245
16-754-90, 16-754-92, 16-754-92, 16-754-93, 16-754-
16-756-35, 16-756-46, 16-756-47, 16-756-66, 16-756-67, 16756-93, 16-757-09, 16-757-14, 16-757-19, 16-757-26 NVM
Corrupt RAP
16-757-35, 16-757-46, 16-757-47, 16-757-66, 16-757-67, 16757-93, 16-758-09, 16-758-14, 16-758-19, 16-758-26 Unable
to Write NVM Value RAP
16-756-35 OS corrupt. Software error. NVM error.
16-757-35 OS corrupt. Software error. NVM corrupt.
16-756-46 Poll select failed.
16-757-46 O/S failure.
16-756-47 Executable missing or corrupt. Invalid test parameters.
16-757-47 Failed while trying to replace the file with a file from alt. partition. Configuration error.
16-756-66 Unable to read NVM value.
16-757-66 Unable to write NVM.
16-756-67 Unable to read NVM value.
16-757-67 Unable to write NVM.
16-756-93 IPA operation failed.
16-757-93 Unable to set ICS document state.
16-757-09 System RPC corrupt.
16-758-09 Invalid service failure reported.
16-757-14 Programming bug. Attempted to shorten time out.
16-758-14 RPC communications error to client.
16-757-19 System manager died or communications link failed.
16-758-19 Unable to unregister registration service.
16-757-26 Software error. Bad disk.
16-758-26 Fault service encountered error trying to access its own queue ID.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
16-756-35, 16-756-46, 16-756-47, 16-756-66, 16-756-67,
February 2013
2-246
16-758-35, 16-758-46, 16-758-47, 16-758-66, 16-758-67, 16758-93, 16-759-09, 16-759-14, 16-759-19, 16-759-26 Service
Run Loop Failed RAP
16-759-46, 16-759-47, 16-759-66, 16-759-67, 16-759-93, 16760-09, 16-760-14, 16-760-19, 16-760-26, 16-760-46 Fail to
Enable Process RAP
16-758-35 Unable to change EJS state to offline.
16-759-46 Process no in correct state, O/S failure.
16-758-46 Failed setting up monitor routine with registration service.
16-759-47 Failed to abort the requested process.
16-758-47 Error searching for job ID during print job submission. Print submission tool failed.
16-759-66 OA event register failed.
16-758-66 Service run loop failed.
16-759-67 OA event register failed.
16-758-67 Service loop failed.
16-759-93 Unable to create.dat file.
16-758-93 Unable to obtain data store object handle.
16-760-09 Software error. Check fault log for more specific reasons.
16-760-14 Software error. Calling service not registered.
16-759-14 Request for wildcard from non-NC
16-760-19 Any network controller start up.
16-759-19 Network controller failed cold reset 3 times in a row.
16-760-26 Software failure.
16-759-26 Service requesting information of fault service. Software error.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
February 2013
2-247
16-758-35, 16-758-46, 16-758-47, 16-758-66, 16-758-
16-760-47, 16-760-67, 16-760-68, 16-760-93, 16-760-99, 16761-09, 16-761-14, 16-761-19, 16-761-26, 16-761-46 File
Error RAP
16-761-47 to 16-769-95 Other Network Faults 1 RAP
16-760-47 Found incorrect checksum partition 1 during software verify check. Bad disk and
bad software.
16-761-68 Login gets no response from SRS.
16-760-67 Create list failed.
16-761-95 Unable to read template pool configuration information.
16-760-68 SRS returns to login service. Invalid fields, invalid data or missing data.
16-762-09 Netware process failed. Software error. Check fault log for more specific reasons.
16-761-47 Failed to initialize. Files needed for software verify.

16-761-67 Failed to retrieve public list.
16-761-93 Image conversion to TIFF failed.
16-762-14 Invalid internal table type.

16-760-93 Job report failure from CCM.
16-762-19 DC platform mgr communication error.
16-760-99 RPC failure. CCM not responding.
16-762-26 Unable to become client of SCS diagnostic service.
16-762-46 Hardware failure.
16-761-14 Invalid RPC data.
16-762-47 Missing file found during software verify check. Disk access problem. Configuration
problem.
16-762-67 Invalid index for recipient list.
16-761-19 Any network controller shut down.
16-762-68 Service registry bad data corrupted.

16-761-26 Unable to become client of UI.
16-762-93 IFS Image done call failed.

16-762-95 Unable to read document repository configuration information.
Procedure
16-763-14 Reached internal limit for events.
WARNING
16-763-19 System manager died, its platform crashed or RPC comm corrupt.
16-763-26 No acknowledgment to RPC message. RPC time-out.
1.
16-763-47 Invalid permission found during software verify check.
2.
16-763-67 Failed to retrieve LDAP list.
16-763-93 Document image count not found.

16-763-95 Internal destination error.
16-764-09 Apple talk process failure. Software error. Check fault log for more specific reasons.
16-764-14 Internal logic error.
16-764-19 System call to signal failed.
16-764-47 Found incorrect checksum during software verify check. Bad disk and bad software.
16-764-67 Create list failed.
16-765-19 Set status failed.
16-765-47 Novell daemon not running.
16-760-47, 16-760-67, 16-760-68, 16-760-93, 16-760-99,
February 2013
2-248
16-765-67 Failed to retrieve recipient list.
16-765-93 Unable to access data store.
16-766-09 Adobe process failure. Check faults log for more specific reasons.
16-770-19 SESS/DM job command not processed.
16-766-19 DM admin error.


16-766-47 No servers responded.
16-770-47 Network controller attached to both queue and server.
16-766-67 Failed to bind to LDAP server.

16-770-67 Required attribute missing.
16-766-93 TIFF handle has become null.

16-766-95 Cannot create image file name.
16-771-19 UI/PSW/RDT/ RPC corrupt.
16-767-19 Request to cancel spooling job error. Job map library unable to cancel job.

16-767-47 Server name in configuration list is not up.
16-771-47 Failed to configure novell network.
16-767-67 Error performing LDAP search.

16-767-93 Get document image count failed.

16-767-95 Cannot determine filing policy for transfer.
16-772-46 TCPIP address already being used.
16-768-19 Job map library unable to hold or release jobs.

16-772-47 Failed doing registration or RPC call.
16-768-47 Network controller not attached to server.
16-772-95 Invalid transfer request.
16-768-67 Error performing public search.

16-768-93 Increment image count failed.
16-768-95 Cannot get network advisory lock file name.
16-769-19 Novell network failed to respond to request.
16-773-46 Failed requesting platform reset.
16-774-09 Check fault log for more specific reasons.
16-769-47 Network controller not attached to the print queue.

16-774-19 Client provided wrong binding info. Client not registered as RPC server. System
RPC info is corrupt.
16-769-67 Failed to cancel search request.

16-769-93 IFS de-register call failed.
16-774-46 BOOTP status file error.
16-769-95 Cannot determine appropriate lock name and address.
Procedure
16-775-19 Data store not configured. Software error.
WARNING
1.
2.
16-775-46 TCPIP missing configuration data.

16-775-95 Cannot create temporary file name.
February 2013
2-249
16-761-47 to 16-769-95, 16-770-09 to 16-779-95
16-776-46 TCPIP invalid interface.
16-780-00 Power save request time out.
16-776-95 Cannot clean up after job completion.
16-780-19 Power saver request time out.
16-777-19 Software error. Data store corrupt, missing configuration.
16-780-46 TCPIP enable interface.
16-777-46 TCPIP invalid addressing.
16-780-47 SESS diagnostic failure.
16-777-95 Cannot log requested network server.
16-780-95 Cannot determine the remote directory.
16-781-19 Customer software upgrade file is corrupted on transfer.
16-778-46 TCPIP socket failure.
16-781-46 TCPIP NVRAM failure.
16-778-95 Cannot generate confirmation sheet.

16-779-00 System manager power saver complete callback failed. System manager failed or
communications link failed.

16-782-09 Network controller configuration synchronization process failure. Software error.
check fault log for more specific reasons.
16-782-19 Software upgrade manifest file does not match software upgrade files.
16-779-19 System manager callback SM power save completed failed.
16-782-46 TCPIP gateway failure.
16-779-46 TCPIP interface attach.

16-779-95 Cannot create the template/job log name.
16-783-09 Software error. IPC failure. SC not processing IPC.
Procedure
16-783-19 Network controller does not enter upgrade mode. Network controller does not
respond to upgrade prep command.
WARNING
1.
2.
16-783-46 TCPIP host file failure.

16-784-09 Software error. Registration service out of date.
16-784-19 Software upgrade aborted, IOT failed to enter upgrade mode. IOT does not respond
to upgrade prep command.
16-784-46 TCPIP resolve file failure.
16-785-09 Network controller agent process failure. Software error. Check fault log for more
specific reasons.
16-770-09 to 16-779-95, 16-780-00 to 16-789-47
February 2013
2-250
16-785-19 UI does not respond to upgrade prep command.
16-785-46 TCPIP resolve file failure.
16-790-19 Option load failure software.

16-786-09 Software error. Check alt log for more specific reasons.
16-791-19 Scan to file DLM is not defined.
16-786-19 Network controller ntar of upgrade file fails.
16-791-46 DHCP V6 failure

16-786-46 TCPIP ELT file failure.
16-792-19 Lan fax DLM is not defined.
16-787-09 Software error. Check fault log more specific reasons.

16-787-19 Network controller times out. Cannot communicate with IOT.
16-793-19 Job based accounting DLM is not defined.

16-787-46 TCPIP IPC failure.

16-794-09 Cross platform synchronization error.
16-794-19 Install password mismatch.

16-788-46 Failed performing dynamic DNS update.



16-789-46 Failed performing autonet IP process.

16-798-19 Option already enabled.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-799-19 Option already enabled.
Procedure
WARNING
1. For a single occurrence, switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
2. For multiple occurrences, reinstall software, GP 4.
February 2013
2-251
16-780-00 to 16-789-47, 16-790-09 to 16-799-47

16-800-09 List access failure (create, add, find, delete.)
16-800-19 Option not supported.
16-800-46 Unable to connect to device when setting up IP over Ethernet.
16-801-09 Invalid SESS event/IPC error.
16-801-19 Serial mismatch.
16-801-46 Unable to connect to device when setting up IP over token ring.
16-802-09 Web service edge client process death.
16-807-09 Job log service unavailable.

16-807-19 State change failed.
16-808-00 Job tracker death error.
16-808-09 Job tracker service unavailable.
16-809-00 Kerberos death error.
16-809-09 Kerberos service unavailable.
Procedure
WARNING
16-802-19 Counters do not match.

16-802-46 Error occurred when attempting to get the IP data from the DHCP server.
1.
2.
16-803-46 Unable to get the IP address from the RARP server.

16-805-19 Accounting install failed.
16-806-00 CPI death error.
16-806-09 CPI service unavailable.
16-806-19 Counters did not increment.
16-807-00 Job log service death error.
16-800-09 to 16-809-47
February 2013
2-252
16-810-00 to 16-16-819-47 Other Network Faults 6 RAP
16-810-00 Scan to distribution death error.
16-820-47 SESS diagnostics failure.
16-810-09 Scan service available.
16-810-19 Failed to remove accounting.

16-811-00 SMB death error.

16-811-09 SMB service unavailable.
16-811-19 Failed to initiate operation.

16-812-00 TCP/IP death error.
16-812-09 TCPIP service unavailable.
16-812-19 Failed to change the enable upgrade flag.
16-813-00 WS scan temp death error.
Procedure
16-813-09 Scan service unavailable
WARNING
16-814-00 Scan compressor death error.

16-814-09 Scan compressor service unavailable.
1.
2.
16-815-09 Service registry process death.

16-816-09 EIP service not responding.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-253
16-810-00 to 16-16-819-47, 16-820-47 to 16-829-47
16-830-47 Unable to get the default router for the device.
16-840-47 Corrupt OS, software error.
16-831-47 Unable to get the subnet mask for the device.
16-841-47 Corrupt file system.
16-832-47 Failure while getting local IP devices on the network.
16-842-47 Machine out of configuration. Software error.
16-833-47 Failure while perfuming ARP command.
16-843-47 Corrupt OS machine in bad running state. Software error.
16-834-47 Failed to get a default file server from the config. utility.
16-835-47 Failed to the novell frame type from the config. utility.
16-836-47 Failed SESS call to initialize netware.
16-837-47 Diagnostic name returned from SESS not found in list.
16-838-47 Failed to setup catching alarm signals for repair time outs.
16-848-47 Error reading the fault file from fault service.
16-839-47 Failure to repair a file of file length 0. Corrupt disk.
16-849-47 Error creating command array from stream editor.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
16-830-47 to 16-839-47, 16-840-47 to 16-849-47
February 2013
2-254
16-850-47 Failed adding stream to stream editor array.
16-860-47 No machines responded to an ICMP echo request.
16-851-47 Failed on call to stream editor.
16-861-47 Failed setting up monitor routine with registration service.
16-852-47 Unable to read a fault for the error report.
16-862-47 Command not valid to cancel.
16-853-47 Failed getting the last reset time for the error report.
16-863-47 Illegal buffer length.
16-854-47 Failed calling fault service for the error report.
16-864-47 Illegal local session number.
16-855-47 Failed sending event for diagnostic test.
16-865-47 SESS NETBIOS test session closed.
16-856-47 Failed doing a unix c system call.
16-866-47 SESS NETBIOS test command cancelled.
16-857-47 Abort request, unable to find process.
16-867-47 SESS NETBIOS test name de-registered. Name de-registered, session active.
16-858-47 Failed to dump the fault logs.
16-868-47 SESS NETBIOS test local session table full. Local session table full.
16-859-47 Software verify test returned error.
16-869-47 SESS NETBIOS test no listen in remote computer.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
February 2013
2-255
16-850-47 to 16-859-47, 16-860-47 to 16-869-47
16-870-47 SESS NETBIOS test illegal name number.
16-880-47 SESS PCI test failed on put message call.
16-871-47 SESS NETBIOS test cannot find name or no answer.
16-881-47 SESS PCI test invalid argument.
16-872-47 SESS NETBIOS test name in use.
16-882-47 SESS PCI test failed on put message call.
16-873-47 SESS NETBIOS test name deleted.
16-883-47 SESS PCI test failed on ioctl call.
16-874-47 SESS NETBIOS test session abnormal end.
16-884-47 SESS PCI test control flag area too small.
16-875-47 SESS NETBIOS test name conflict. Name conflict on network.
16-885-47 SESS PCI test driver not initialized.
16-876-47 Software verify setup SIGTERM failed.
16-886-47 SESS PCI test info request failed.
16-877-47 SESS PCI test unknown error.
16-887-47 SESS PCI test driver failed to register.
16-878-47 SESS PCI test failed to open driver.
16-888-47 SESS PCI test driver failed to unregister.
16-879-47 SESS PCI test failed flushing stream buffer.
16-889-47 Software verify get data failed.
Procedure
16-890-47 Software verify get next proc failed.
WARNING
1.
2.
16-870-47 to 16-879-47, 16-880-47 to 16-890-47
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-256
16-891-00, 16-892-00 Edge Server Auto Registration Failed

RAP
16-891-00 Edge server auto registration failed

16-900-19 Failed to open SMC driver.
16-901-19 Failed to make ioctl call using SMC driver.
16-892-00 Edge server communication failed
16-902-19 Address specified is invalid.
Procedure
16-903-19 Result from ioctl does not match FD.
WARNING
1.
2.
16-904-19 Invalid ioctl request.

16-905-19 Unknown ioctl failure.
16-906-19 Malloc failed for net upgrade.
16-908-19 Error opening file.
16-909-19 Error transfer data to CCM.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-257
16-891-00, 16-892-00, 16-900-19 to 16-909-19
16-910-19 Failed untar file.
16-920-19 ELT daemon start failed.
16-911-19 Error changing directory.
16-922-19 NVM store failed.
16-912-19 Install script did not execute.
16-923-19 Failed saving persistent data.
16-913-19 Write failure to file.
16-924-19 Failed in restoring persistent data.
16-914-19 Shared memory was corrupted.
16-925-19 Failed saving web config data.
16-915-19 Open failed.
16-926-19 Failed to save data store values.
16-916-19 CRC failed.
16-927-19 Failed to restore web config data.
16-917-19 Failed to close on checksum.
16-928-19 Failed to install files.
16-918-19 CRC comparison failed.
16-929-19 Failed to restore data store values.
16-919-19 Restart request failed.
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
16-910-19 to 16-919-19, 16-920-19 to 16-929-19
1.
2.
February 2013
2-258
16-930-19 Failed to remove jobs.
16-940-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Machine in diagnostics mode.
16-931-19 Failed to close on SMC driver.
16-941-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Network controller cannot communicate with main controller.
16-932-19 NVM write failure.
16-942-19 Auto-upgrade failed upgrade is invalid. Incompatible with main controller.
16-933-19 Failed to remove file.
16-943-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Upgrade file invalid. Installed software is more recent.
16-934-19 Job based accounting not enough dc memory.
16-944-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Upgrade file is invalid. File corruption detected.
16-935-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Cannot read/write attributes to machine.
16-945-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Upgrade file is invalid. File not appropriate for current machine
software.
16-936-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Cannot connect to remote server.

16-946-19 Failed install scan to email.
16-937-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Cannot access directory on remote server.
16-947-19 Failed to install internet fax.
16-938-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Cannot access directory remote server.
16-948-19 Remove of scan to email option failed.
16-939-19 Auto-upgrade failed. Multiple upgrade files found on remote server.
16-949-19 Remove of internet fax option failed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
1.
2.
Verify that the correct software file is being used, refer to GP 4.
3.
February 2013
2-259
16-930-19 to 16-939-19, 16-940-19 to 16-949-19
16-950-19 Scan to email image processing hardware not available.
16-960-19 Failed to install SMTP.
16-951-19 Internet fax image processing hardware not available.
16-961-19 Failed to remove kerberos.
16-952-19 Scan to email memory size error.
16-962-19 Failed to remove SMB.
16-953-19 Internet fax memory size error.
16-963-19 Failed to remove SMTP.
16-954-19 Set by internet fax service when it gets no response from service registry when trying to register.
16-964-19 Failed to cancel operation.

16-965-19 Failed to send platform unavailable.
16-955-19 Internet Fax application un-registration error

16-966-19 Failed to install job tracker.
16-956-19 E-mail application registration error
16-967-19 Failed to remove job tracker.
16-957-19 E-mail application un-registration error
16-968-19 Failed to install POP3.
16-958-19 Failed to install kerberos.
16-969-19 Failed to remove POP3.
16-959-19 Failed to install SMB.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
16-950-19 to 16-959-19, 16-960-19 to 16-969-19
1.
2.
February 2013
2-260
16-975-19 Failed to install immediate image overwrite.
16-980-00 DM request handle NULL. Null data received from DM.

16-980-19 Network controller PM failed to install G4. Option load failure software.
16-976-19 Failed to install immediate image overwrite.
16-980-35 DM request handle NULL. Null data received from DM.

16-977-00 Queue list jobs failure. Request to SESSs document manager failed for list jobs.
Corrupt data sent to DM communication problem Dm failed.
16-977-19 Network controller PM failed to remove disk overwrite. Option load failure software.
16-981-00 Object handler corrupted. Null handle returned. Data store corrupt.
16-981-35 Unable to obtain job handle which is used to fetch data store attributes.
16-982-00 Unknown finishing value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-977-35 Queue list jobs failure. Request to SESSs document manager failed for list jobs.
Corrupt data sent to DM. Communication problem DM failed.
16-982-19 Failed to remove embedded fax.

16-982-35 Unknown finishing value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-978-00 Unable to get copy jobs. Invalid data communication problem.

16-983-00 Unknown offset value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-978-19 Network controller PM failed to remove job overwrite. Option load failure software.
16-983-19 Failed to remove G4.
16-978-35 Unable to get copy jobs. Invalid data communication problem.
16-983-35 Unknown offset value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-979-00 Unknown attribute returned. Invalid data returned data store corrupt
16-984-00 Unknown job state reason value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-984-35 Unknown job state reason value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-979-19 Network controller PM failed to remove embedded fax. Option load failure software.
16-985-00 Unknown medium type value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-979-35 Unknown attribute returned. Invalid data returned data store corrupt.
16-985-35 Unknown medium type value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
Procedure
16-986-00 Unknown collection value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
WARNING
16-986-35 Unknown collection value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
1.
2.
16-987-00 Unknown tray value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-987-35 Unknown tray value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-988-00 Unknown signature value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-988-35 Unknown signature value returned. Unable to map attribute or invalid data.
16-989-00 Unknown plex value returned. Unable to map attribute. Invalid information received 2.
16-989-35 Unknown plex value returned. Unable to map attribute. Invalid information received 3.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-261
16-975-19 to 16-979-35, 16-980-00 to 16-989-35
16-985-19, 16-986-19 Network Scanning Application

Registration Error RAP
16-987-19, 16-988-19 Server Fax Application Registration

Error RAP
16-985-19 Network scanning application registration error
16-987-19 Server Fax application registration error
16-986-19 Network scanning application un-registration error
16-988-19 Server Fax application un-registration error
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
2.
16-985-19, 16-986-19, 16-987-19, 16-988-19
February 2013
2-262
16-989-19 Disk Encryption Operation Failed RAP
16-989-19 Disk encryption operation failed
16-990-00 Promote response from DM received with errors. Software error.

16-990-35 Promote response from DM received with errors. Software error.
Procedure
WARNING
16-991-00 Request to DM to promote job failed. Failure status returned on call to request
library to promote job. Data store problem.
16-991-35 Request to DM to promote job failed. Failure status returned on call to request
library to promote job. Data store problem.
1.
2.
16-992-00 Unable to build SESS job identifier for promote routing that converts the job ID
returned. Null memory allocation error.
16-992-35 Unable to build SESS job identifier for promote routine that converts the job ID
returned. Null memory allocation error.
16-993-00 Unable to get admin name from data store for promote. Request library call failed.
16-993-35 Unable to get admin name from data store for promote. Request library call failed.
16-994-00 Cancel response from DM received with errors. Software error.
16-994-35 Cancel response with errors. A job could not be cancelled.
16-995-00 Request to DM to cancel job failed.
16-995-35 Request to DM to cancel job failed.
16-996-00 Routine that converts the job ID returned. Null memory allocation error.
16-996-35 Routine that converts the job ID returned. Null memory allocation error.
16-997-00 Request library call failed.
16-997-35 Request library call failed.
16-998-00 Job not found in held table.
16-998-35 Job not set to released state. Job not found in held table.
16-999-00 Could not obtain job PIN for authorization.
16-999-35 Could not obtain job PIN for authorization.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
February 2013
2-263
16-989-19, 16-990-00 to 16-999-35
16A Network Error Entry RAP
16B FTP or SMB Unable to Connect to Remote Server RAP
Use this RAP when the customer reports network failures. e.g. Cannot connect to the scan
server when using the FPT or SMB protocols, or when a folder on the scan server cannot be
opened.
Either the machine cannot connect, find or login to the scan server.
NOTE: The fault message will be printed on the confirmation report. The report may take several minutes to print after scanning the document.
NOTE: The FTP/SMB protocol will be followed by a colon and port number, :21 is for FTP and
:139 is for SMB.
Initial Actions
Scan the document using the default template and one other template. The fault is present
on both templates.
Y
N
The template that failed is incorrectly configured. Ask the customer or system administrator to verify the settings of the web template that failed, including the login password.
Consult your manager before troubleshooting the customers network, as the policy varies
according to region.
Procedure
Procedure
NOTE: If it is possible to log into the web UI by entering the IP address of the machine, then
the network controller on the single board controller PWB is good.
1.
Check that the machines date and time are correctly set, refer to GP 38.
2.
Print a configuration report.
3.
Check with customer that the printing of the confirmation report is enabled. If necessary,
ask the customer to enable printing of the confirmation report.
4.
5.
Ensure that the machine is configured for scan to file:

a.
Check the back of the configuration report under the heading Workflow Scanning.
b.
If a IP address or name is not listed next to Alt1 Repository Protocol, ask the customer to configure the machine before continuing.
Ask the customer to open the machines CWIS page. The machines CWIS page can be
opened.
Y
N
Look at the front of the configuration report. Make sure that HTTP is enabled and set to
port 80. The settings are correct.
Y
N
Enable HTTP, GP 39 and set the port to 80 on the UI. Restart this RAP from the
beginning. If this path has been followed previously, escalate the fault to the system
Administrator. If the customer does not have a System Administrator, they should
contact the Customer Support Centre or request a Xerox analyst troubleshoot their
network which will be subject to a charge.
Disconnect the network cable from the machine. Make sure the PWS network adaptor
settings are set to Auto. Use a crossover cable, PL 26.10 Item 2 to connect the PWS to
the machine. Either the two LEDs on the SBC PWB or the PWS are lit, indicating a
connection.
Y
N
16B FTP or SMB Unable to Connect to Remote Server RAP.
16C Remote Directory Lock Failed RAP.
1.
Change the network speed setting of the machine, GP 43.
2.
If either the two LEDs on the SBC PWB or the PWS are not lit, repeat the steps
in GP 43.
3.
If the LEDs light, use the new network speed setting. Inform the customer that
the network speed has been changed then follow the Yes path from this step.
4.
If the LEDs do not light, install a new single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item
13.
Correctly configure the IP address of the PWS, GP 42. Make sure the firewall of the PWS
is disabled, GP 44. Ping the machine from the PWS, GP 41.
NOTE: Re-enable the PWS firewall after completion of this procedure.
The machine responds to the ping request.
Y
N
Perform an Altboot, GP 4.
A
16A, 16B
The machine software is up to date.

Y
N
Upgrade the software, GP 4. The fault persists.
B
February 2013
2-264
C
Y
N
Perform the Customers Settings Check. Changes were made to the customers
settings.
Y
N
Escalate the fault to the system Administrator. If the customer does not have a
System Administrator, they should contact the Customer Support Centre or
request a Xerox analyst troubleshoot their network which will be subject to a
charge.

The customer can ping the default gateway IP address.
Y
N
Escalate the fault to the system Administrator. If the customer does not have a System Administrator, they should contact the Customer Support Centre or request a
Xerox analyst troubleshoot their network which will be subject to a charge.
Retry the job. The job was successful.

Y
N
charge.
Perform the Customers Settings Check. Changes were made to the customers settings.
Y
N

Y
N
Y
N
E
Y
N
charge.

Y
N
Y
N
Escalate the fault to the system Administrator. If the customer does not have a System
Administrator, they should contact the Customer Support Centre or request a Xerox analyst troubleshoot their network which will be subject to a charge.
Ask the customer to ping the scan servers IP address or name.

NOTE: The scan server is the computer that the job is being sent. The scan servers IP address
or name is displayed on the confirmation report.
The customer can ping the scan server.
Y
N
Check the configuration report for default gateway IP address listed under TCP/IPv6 Settings. A default gateway IP address is listed.
Y
N
Perform the Customers Settings Check. Changes were made to the customers
settings.
Y
N
charge.
C

Y
N
Escalate the fault to the system Administrator. If the customer does not have a System
Administrator, they should contact the Customer Support Centre or request a Xerox analyst troubleshoot their network which will be subject to a charge.
Customers Settings Check

NOTE: Both the configuration and confirmation reports are required to check the customers
settings. Corrections must be made through the machines CWIS page.
Check the following with the customer, ask the customer to correct any errors:
1.
That the scan server is switched on and online.

NOTE: The scan server is the computer that the job is being sent.
February 2013
2-265
16B
2.
That the scan servers IP address or name is correct.
16C Remote Directory Lock Failed RAP
3.
That the path and user name are correct.
4.
(SMB protocol only) That the Share name is correct, referred too as the Volume on the
configuration report.
Use this RAP when the customer reports that the machine has logged onto the scan server,
but cannot create a folder inside of the scan directory. The creation of the scan folder is necessary for the machine to successfully complete the can to file job.
5.
Check with System Administrator that the correct password has been entered on the
machines CWIS page.
NOTE: The scan server is the computer that the job is being sent.
NOTE: The password is not printed on the configuration or confirmation reports.
Procedure
The machines login name that it is using to log onto the scan server, for this file repository,
does not have sufficient rights. Ask the customer to verify the rights for this user at the scan
server, or escalate the problem to their System Administrator. If the customer does not have a
System Administrator, they should contact the Customer Support Centre or request a Xerox
analyst troubleshoot their network which will be subject to a charge.
16B, 16C
February 2013
2-266
16D Wireless Connectivity RAP
c.
Check the network name listed next to SSID on the configuration report.
Use this RAP when the customer reports wireless network failures when using the Xerox wireless print kit.
d.
If the network name does not match the customers wireless network, ask the customer to configure the wireless network setup before continuing.
NOTE: The customer must use the Xerox wireless adapter kit, PL 31.11 Item 4. Other wireless
network adapters are not supported.
Initial Actions
Consult your manager before troubleshooting the customers network, as the policy varies
according to region.
7.
e.
Check the IP address under the heading Connectivity Protocols.
f.
Ask the customer to confirm that the correct IP address is listed under TCP/IPv4 or
TCP/IPv6.
g.
If the wireless IP address is incorrect or is not present, ask the customer to configure
the wireless network setup before continuing.
Confirm that the customers wireless network can be detected at the machines location.
a.
Ask the customer to confirm that the wireless network is switched on and can be
received at the machines location. Or use your PWS or a smartphone to detect the
customers wireless network.
b.
To use a PWS with Windows 7 to confirm the customers wireless network can be
detected, perform relevant procedure below.
Procedure
1.
Check that the USB wireless network adapter, PL 3.11 Item 25 is plugged into a USB port
on the machine.
2.
If the USB wireless network adapter is connected using the USB extension cable, PL 3.11
Item 26 check that the extension cable is also plugged into a USB port on the machine.
3.
Print a configuration report.

a.
4.
5.
Windows 7
Check with the customer that printing of configuration reports is enabled. If necessary, ask the customer to enable printing of the configuration report.
Click on the Wireless Networking icon in the notification area of the task bar. If
necessary, click on the Show hidden icons button to show the wireless networking icon.
ii.
Confirm that the customers network name (SSID) is displayed in the list that
pops up.
Ensure that the USB ports are enabled.
Windows XP
a.
Check the configuration report under the heading Connectivity Physical Connections.
i.
Right click on the Network Connection icon in the notification area of the taskbar.
b.
If Software Tools is not listed next to USB Connection Mode, ask the customer to
enable USB. Or enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 5. Enable USB.
ii.
Click on View Available Wireless Networks.
iii.
Confirm that the customers network name (SSID) is displayed in the list that
pops up.
i.
Refer to GP 4 USB Port Security Setting Check.
ii.
Refer to GP 49 USB Connection Mode.
NOTE: Do not attempt to connect the PWS or smartphone to the customers wireless network.
Confirm the USB port is functional.

a.
Check that the LED on the wireless network adapter flashes when the machine is in
standby.
b.
Connect the wireless network adapter to a different USB port if available.
c.
Perform dC361 NVM Save. If the NVM can be saved to a USB flash drive, the USB
port is functional.
8.
d.
If the USB port checks fail, install a new SBC PWB.
Ensure that the machine is configured for wireless printing.

a.
Check the configuration report under the heading Connectivity Physical Connections.
b.
If wireless is disabled, ask the customer to enable wireless printing. Or enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 5. Enable wireless printing.
i.
If the wireless network signal strength is weak, ensure that the wireless network adapter
is connected via the USB extension lead. If possible change the mounting position of the
adapter to improve the reception. To view the signal strength, enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 5.
a.
NOTE: It is not necessary to perform the NVM restore procedure.
6.
i.
9.
Select Network Settings.
b.
Select Network Connectivity.
c.
Select Wireless.
d.
The signal strength is displayed in the text frame.
e.
Move the wireless network adapter and extension lead until the strongest signal
strength is found.
If necessary, install a new wireless network adapter kit, PL 31.11 Item 4.
ii.
Select Network Connectivity.
iii.
Select Wireless.
iv.
Select OK.
v.
Select Enable Wireless Network.
February 2013
2-267
16D
16D
February 2013
2-268
19-300-00 to 19-310-00 Image Disk (HDD) Failure RAP
19-401-00, 19-402-00 Stress Out of Memory RAP
19-300-00 Unable to read or write data from the image disk.
19-401-00 Out of memory caused by a stress document.
19-301-00 Unable to write data to the image disk.
19-402-00 Out of memory caused by a stress job.
19-302-00 Bad data received from the disk (i.e. disk returns data other than a read or write
operation in response to a read or write request from).
Procedure
19-303-00 Unable to format the image disk.
19-310-00 Disk system does not return capacity information during power up.
WARNING
If this fault remains for more than five minutes, switch off the machine, then switch on the
machine, GP 14. The fault has cleared.
Y
N
Perform a software upgrade, GP 4.
Procedure
WARNING
Go to SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 3.3. Check that the SATA cable from PJ222 on the single board controller PWB to
PJ210 on the hard disk drive is correctly connected and not damaged. If necessary, install a
new cable, PL 3.11 Item 3.
Refer to WD 1.5 and WD 3.3. Check the power harness from PJDC4 on the power supply unit
to PJ211 on the hard disk drive. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Repair the harness, REP 1.1 or install a new harness, PL 3.11 Item 12, as necessary.
Refer to WD 3.3. Measure +5V between pins 3 and 2 on PJ211 at the hard disk drive. +5V
was measured.
Y
N
Go to 01D +5V Distribution RAP.
If necessary, perform a software upgrade, GP 4.
Hard disk drive, PL 3.11 Item 2.
February 2013
2-269
19-300-00 to 19-310-00, 19-401-00, 19-402-00
19-403-00 EPC Out of Memory RAP
19-409-00 Job Integrity Failure RAP
19-403-00 Out of memory with greater than one job in EPC.
19-409-00 Video determines that it cannot guarantee the integrity of the job being processed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
No service action is required. Re-scan the job.
19-403-00, 19-409-00
1.
Switch the off machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
Re-run all the uncompleted jobs.
February 2013
2-270
19-410-00 to 19-410-13 Image Structure Failure RAP
19-750-00 EPC Memory Change Detected RAP
19-410-00 The system has detected a mark output time-out.
19-750-00 The system detects that the EPC memory size configuration has changed during
the power on sequence.
19-410-01 The system has detected a mark output time-out.
Procedure
19-410-02 The system has detected a compress image time-out.
WARNING
19-410-03 The system has detected a decompress image time-out.

19-410-04 The system has detected a merge image time-out.
No service action required. Re-run the job.

19-410-05 The system has detected a rotate image time-out.
19-410-06 The system has detected a network Input failure.
19-410-07 The system has detected an e-fax send/receive failure.
19-410-08 The system has detected a scan input failure.
19-410-09 The system has detected a byte counter error.
19-410-10 The system has detected the image set up was too late.
19-410-11 The system has detected a DMA master abort.
19-410-12 The system has detected a Huffman error, (image encoding error).
19-410-13 The system has detected an EOR error.
Procedure
WARNING
If this fault remains for more than five minutes, switch off the machine, then switch on the
machine, GP 14. Re-run the job. The fault has cleared.
Y
N
Perform a software re-load, GP 4.
February 2013
2-271
19-410-00 to 19-410-13, 19-750-00
19-752-00 Image Rotation Detected RAP
19-754-00 Image Disk Change RAP
19-752-00 The system detects that the image rotation configuration has changed during the
Power On sequence.
19-754-00 The system detects that the Image disk configuration (present vs. not present) has
changed during the power on sequence.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Re-run the job.
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Re-run the job. The
cleared.
Y
N
Go to 19-300-00 to 19-310-00 Image Disk (HDD) Failure RAP.
fault
has
19-752-00, 19-754-00
February 2013
2-272
20-302-00, 20-303-00 Fax Reset Failure RAP
20-305-00 Fax System Low Memory Unrecoverable RAP
The fax card will automatically reset itself.
The fax card will automatically reset itself.
20-302-00 Unexpected reset fault due to fax card hardware or software error.
20-305-00 Unrecoverable fax system low memory due to fax card hardware or software error
20-303-00 Unrecoverable fault due to fax card hardware or software error.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
Make a backup of the phone book and the customer settings, refer to dC361 Save and
Restore.
Make a backup of the phone book and the customer settings, refer to dC361 NVM Save
and Restore.
Procedure
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. The fault still occurs.
Y
N
Go to SCP 5 and complete the final actions.
Procedure
Y
N
Clear the fax card NVM. Go to dC301 NVM Initialization, select Embedded Fax NVM initialization and perform the routine, All Data. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Reload the software, GP 4. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Go to RAP 20G Fax Module Checkout.
Clear the images from the fax card. Go to dC301 NVM Initialization. Select Embedded Fax
NVM Initialization. Perform the routine, All Data. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Reload the software, GP 4.

February 2013
2-273
20-302-00, 20-303-00, 20-305-00
20-320-00 Fax Fault Not Cleared by Reset RAP
20-322-00 Non-Volatile Device not Installed RAP
20-320-00 After five instances of an unrecoverable fax fault and has not been cleared by a
card reset.
20-322-00 The non-volatile device has not been installed on the embedded fax card.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
and Restore.
and Restore.
Procedure
Procedure
Y
N
Y
N
Clear the fax card NVM. Go to dC301 NVM Initialization. Select Embedded Fax NVM initialization. Perform the routine, All data. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Clear the fax card NVM. Go to dC301 NVM Initialization. Select Embedded Fax NVM initialization. Perform the routine, All data. The fault still occurs.
Y
N
Install new parts as necessary:
20-320-00, 20-322-00
Fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1.
February 2013
2-274
20-323-00, 20-324-00 Fax System Memory Low RAP
20-331-00, 20-338-00, 20-339-00, 20-341-00, 20-345-00 Fax

Network Line 1 Fault RAP
20-323-00 The fax system memory is low, less than 6Mb.
20-331-00 No communication via the PSTN 1 port.
20-324-00 There is not enough memory to use the fax service.
20-338-00 Fax Communication Error at power up or reboot.
Initial Actions
WARNING
20-339-00 Internal fax card fault.
and Restore.
20-341-00 Miscellaneous basic card problems.

20-345-00 Fax port 1 modem failure.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
Y
N
Y
N

and Restore.
Procedure
Y
N
Check the connection between the fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1 and the fax connector PWB,
PL 20.05 Item 2. The connections are good.
Y
N
Install new parts as necessary:
Fax connector PWB, PL 20.05 Item 2.
Fax module, PPL 20.05 Item 1.
Check that the customer line is operational, plug a phone into the line and check for a dial tone.
If a phone is not available then use a line test tool, PL 26.11 Item 16. The phone line connection is good.
Y
N
The telephone line has a fault, inform the customer to have the line checked by the telephone company.
Install new parts in the following order:
Telephone cable, PL 20.05 Item 3.
February 2013
2-275
20-323-00, 20-324-00, 20-331-00, 20-338-00, 20-339-
20-332-00, 20-340-00 Fax Network Line 2 Fault RAP
20-342-00 Fax File Integrity Fault RAP
20-332-00 No communication via the PSTN 2 port.
20-342-00 An error has occur when accessing the file on a non-volatile device.
20-340-00 Fax port 2 modem failure.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
and Restore.
and Restore.
Procedure
Y
N
Procedure
Y
N
Check that the customer line is operational, plug a phone into the line and check for a dial tone.
If a phone is not available then use a line test tool, PL 26.11 Item 16. The phone line connection is good.
Y
N
The telephone line has a fault, advise the customer to have the line checked by the telephone company.
Clear the fax card NVM. Go to dC301 NVM Initialization. Select Embedded Fax NVM initialisation. Perform the routine, All data. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Install new parts in the following order:
20-332-00, 20-340-00, 20-342-00
February 2013
2-276
20-701-00 Fax Phone Book Download Failed RAP
20-710-00, 20-711-00 Image Overwrite Error RAP
20-701-00 The fax phone book download failed.
20-710 Immediate image overwrite error has occurred on the fax card when overwriting the
job.
Initial Actions
20-711 On demand image overwrite error has occurred on the fax card when overwriting the
memory.
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the Fax module is correctly grounded.
Procedure
1.
Reload the machine software, GP 4.
2.
Install a new single board controller, PL 3.11 Item 13.
and Restore.
Procedure
WARNING
Y
N
Y
N
Perform an Altboot, GP 4. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Install a new single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13.

February 2013
2-277
20-701-00, 20-710-00, 20-711-00
20A Fax Entry RAP
20B Unable To Send A Fax RAP
Use this RAP to isolate components which contribute to Fax communications failure.
Use this RAP to isolate components which contribute to a send failure.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check that the telephone line cables are properly connected. Fax Line 1 from the telephone line outlet connects to line 1 socket on the machine. Fax line 2 (if installed) from
the telephone line outlet connects to line 2 socket on the machine.
Use a hand set to dial remote number and listen to dial type, (tone / pulse)
Check the ground connection on the fax module
Check the Fault History. If the fault codes are 20-331-00, 20-338-00, 20-339-00, 20-34100, 20-345-00 or 20-332-00, 20-340-00, then go to the appropriate RAP.
Check the Fax setup for any active feature that would inhibit the sending of a Fax, such
as: Delayed start time, Local name and ID are set, Dialing type or junk Fax prevention.
Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting and check the following:
Fax Country setting
Line Setup
Options
Dial type setting, tone / pulse.

Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Settings / Print Fax Reports. Print
a Activity Report and check for error codes.
Refer to the 20A Fax Entry RAP and complete all of the initial actions.
Procedure
Verify with the customer that PSTN / PABX (Public Switched Telephone Network / Private
Automatic Branch Exchange) line is operational. Connect a telephone handset into line outlet
and listen for a dial tone. Use a known good telephone handset. The dial tone is present.
Y
N
Use the line test tool, PL 26.11 Item 16 to check the telephone line. The green normal
indicator light is on.
Y
N
Ask the customer to request a line check by the telephone company.
Use a telephone handset to dial a known good number. The ring back is heard.
Y
N
Enable audio line monitor (Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting
/ Transmission Defaults / Audio Line Monitor) and set to Enable and High volume.
Dial the Fax number and listen for a dial tone or dialing and answer tones. A Fax tone is
present.
Y
N
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Reset the value at the following location:
NVM ID 200-415 Line1CurrentDetect = 0
NVM ID 200-416 Line2CurrentDetect = 0 A Fax tone is present.
Y
N
Go to the 20G Fax Module Checkout.
Procedure
The Fax tab is available
Y
N
Go to 20F Fax Tab Not Available RAP.
The machine will send a Fax to all machines.
Y
N
The machine will send a fax to some machines.
Y
N
Go to 20B Unable To Send A Fax RAP.
The Fax is working correctly. Send a three page test Fax to a known good Fax
machine. Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting / Print Fax
Reports. Print a Protocol Report and check for errors.
Go to 20C Unable To Send A Fax To Some Machines RAP.

The machine will receive a fax from the remote machine.
Y
N
Go to 20D Unable To Receive A Fax RAP.
The dial tone - dialling answer tones are present.

Y
N
The exchange is receiving the digits too quickly or is not processing the digits correctly. Ask the customer if the exchange is DTMF (Dual Tone Multiple Frequency) or
pulse dialing.
Ensure that the machine is set for the correct dialing tone.
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Reset the values at NVM ID 200-201
FaxLine1DialTypeDef and at NVM ID 200-202 FaxLine2DialTypeDef set to 0 =
Tone or 1 = Pulse.
Insert a pause ( , ) between the first and second digit of the dial string. In the
Dialling Options select Dialling Characters / Pause / Add Character / Save.
The Fax prints out.

Y
N
Go to 20E Fax Will Not Print RAP.
The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Go to 20G Fax module Checkout RAP.
The Fax is working correctly. Send a three page test Fax to a known good Fax machine. Print a
Protocol Report and check for errors.
A
20A, 20B
February 2013
2-278
B
The Fax only dials once and hangs up or the busy tone has unusual timing, frequency or
level. The busy tones are recognized.
Y
N
Check the number for a voice or tone answer.
The Fax is working correctly. Send a three page test Fax to a known good Fax machine.
Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting / Print Fax Reports. Print a
Protocol Report and check for errors. Re-enter the details from the fax options
Check that the customer is dialing the correct number. The number is correct.
Y
N
Ask the customer to dial the number using the appropriate access codes.
The dial tone - dialling answer tones are present.
Y
N
The exchange is receiving the digits too quickly or is not processing the digits correctly.
Ask the customer if the exchange is DTMF (Dual Tone Multiple Frequency) or pulse dialing.
Ensure that the machine is set for the correct dialing tone.
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Reset the values at NVM ID 200-201
FaxLine1DialTypeDef and at NVM ID 200-202 FaxLine2DialTypeDef set to 0 = Tone
or 1 = Pulse.
Insert a pause ( , ) between the first and second digit of the dial string. In the Dialling
Options select Dialling Characters / Pause / Add Character / Save.
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Set NVM ID 200-397 FaxTimeBeforeDial to 13.
The Fax only dials once and hangs up or the busy tone has unusual timing, frequency or level.
Are the busy tones recognized.
Y
N
Check the number for a voice or tone answer.
Check that the values at NVM ID 200-237 to 200-241 are set to the correct defaults
to match the appropriate country setting.
The fax is working correctly. Send a three page test Fax to a known good Fax machine.
Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting / Print Fax Reports. Print a Protocol Report and check for errors. Re-enter the details from the fax options
Use this RAP to isolate components which contribute to a failure to send a Fax to some
machines.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Enable audio line monitor (Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting /
Transmission Defaults / Audio Line Monitor) and set to Enable. Select High volume and max
time.
present.
Y
N
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Reset the value at the following location:
NVM ID 200-415 Line1CurrentDetect = 0
NVM ID 200-416 Line2CurrentDetect = 0 A Fax tone is present.
Y
N
Go to the 20G Fax Module Checkout.
20C Unable To Send A Fax To Some Machines RAP
Procedure
The correct number is being dialled to make the connection. The connection is made.
Y
N
The exchange is not processing the digits correctly, the machine needs longer pause
between digits.
Insert a pause ( , ) between the first and second digit of the dial string. In the Dialling
Options select Dialling Characters / Pause / Add Character / Save.
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Change setting at NVM ID 200-410 FaxDTMFInterdigitTime to 100.
Call the fax number from a known good telephone and listen for the answer fax tone. The Fax
tone is heard.
Y
N
Fax on remote end is not picking up or no Fax is connected. Advise customer to check the
machine at the remote end.
Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting / Print Fax Reports. Print a Protocol Report. The Protocol Report shows RNR (Receive Not Ready) is received from the
remote Fax repeatedly until time out and DCN (Disconnect). Check communication failure after
V34-PH2 / V34-PH3 or DCS / TCF. The remote Fax receives and prints the Fax.
Y
N
Compatibility problem with remote Fax.
Print a Protocol Report and check for communication errors.
Line quality too poor for Super G3 to function correctly. Possible mains interference
on line.
Disable V34 (Super G3). Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Reset the value at the following locations:
NVM ID 200-087 T30MaxSpeedL1Tx = 11 (14400).
NVM ID 200-088 T30MaxSpeed2Tx = 11 (14400).

If mains noise, try installing and using line 2 instead of line 1.
When sending to a PC fax or fax server that has an ISDN card, there is a need to
customize the CEQ values. Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Set the value at NVM ID
203-031 to 0.
The Protocol Report shows MCF (Message Confirmation) is not sent by the remote Fax (last
page), only DCN (Disconnect). The failure report printed out, but the remote fax prints
multiple copies of the job or failed page.
Y
N
Print a Protocol Report and check for errors.
The machine will resend up to 10 times before printing the failure report.
Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings/ Embedded Fax Setting / Transmission Defaults / Automatic Resend. Set number of resend to 1 or 2.
February 2013
2-279
20B, 20C
20D Unable To Receive A Fax RAP
Use this RAP to isolate components which contribute to the fax not received from the machine.
Print a Protocol Report and check for errors.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Do not touch the test pads on the embedded fax PWB while the fax cable is connected
to the machine. Dangerous voltages may be present that could cause death or injury.
Receive a three page test Fax from the original Fax machine. Print a Protocol Report and
check for errors. The Protocol Report shows communication failure after CSI / DIS
(Called Subscriber Identified / Digital Identification Signal) or DCS / TCF (Digital Command Signal / Training Check) or after V34-PH2 / V34-PH3 or EQM (Eye Quality Monitor)
value greater than 5000.
Y
N
The problem may be intermittent, inform the operator of the remote machine, they should
report the problem to the telephone company.
Procedure
Verify with the customer that PSTN / PABX (public switched telephone network / private automatic branch exchange) line is operational. Use a known good telephone handset or use the
line test tool, PL 26.11 Item 16 to check the telephone line. The dial tone is present.
Y
N
Ensure Fax service is enabled and supported on that line by a PBX administrator.
Confirm line is standard PSTN / PBX analogue line
Line quality too poor for Super G3 or G3 to function correctly. Possible mains interference
on line. Possible DSL line, not properly filtered.
Ask customer to request Fax capable service from telephone company.
If mains noise, install a new fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1. Use line 1.
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Set the value at the following locations:
Call the handset from another telephone. The phone rings.

Y
N
Ensure Fax service is enabled and supported on that line by a PBX administrator.
NVM ID 200-085 T30 Maximum resolution Line 1 Rx = 7
NVM ID 200-086 T30 Maximum resolution Line 2 Rx = 7
This sets the receive resolution capabilities for line 1 and line 2 to 400 x 400 max, this will
shorten the DIS.
Enable audio line monitor (Enter Admin / Tools / Service Setting / Embedded Fax Setting /
Transmission Defaults / Audio Line Monitor) and set to Enable and High volume.
present.
Y
N
Go to 20G Embedded Fax Checkout
The DIS field is too long to enable successful communication.

Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write. Change NVM ID 200-141 USSTOCKSUPPORTRAX to 0
(disable).
Disable V34 (Super G3). Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write and reset the value at the following locations:
NVM ID 200-089 T30MaxSpeedL1Rx = 11 (14400)
If the problem still exists try a lower line receive (Rx) speed: 12 = 12000, 13 = 9600, 14 =
7200, 15 = 4800, 16 = 2400
Send a three page test Fax from a known good fax machine.
Reconnect the fax and call the fax number from a independent telephone line and listen for a
Fax tone. The machine answers and a fax tone is heard.
Y
N
Enter Admin / Tools / Service Settings / Embedded Fax Setting / Print Fax Reports. Print
Activity Report. Check for receive calls on the Activity Report. Machine probably does not
bleep to indicate incoming call.
Check that the NVM values at NVM ID 200-203, NVM ID 200-423 and 200-426 are set to
the correct defaults to match the appropriate country setting. The machine answers and
a Fax tone is heard.
Y
N
Go to 20G Fax Module Checkout
A
20D
February 2013
2-280
20E Fax Will Not Print RAP
20F Fax Tab Not Available RAP
Use this RAP to solve fax printing problems.
Use this RAP to isolate the problem when the Fax tab is not available or greyed out.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check the condition of the paper in all trays.
Check that the paper trays are loaded with the appropriate paper sizes for printing the
Fax. Refer to GP 20.
Check for the correct installation of the fax option. Refer to the system administration
guide CD1, for the install instruction. Follow the screen prompts.
Procedure
Procedure
If the received fax has mixed size documents (example, the first prints are 8.5 x 11 and
then followed by 8.5 x 14 prints). Check in the All Incomplete Jobs queue, the job will
print 8.5 x 11 pages without printing 8.5 x 14 pages and then the job will be deleted.
In Tools menu, go to Fax setup and select:
Receive Defaults.
Receive Printing mode and change to Manual.
In paper sizes, select correct page for each size to match the paper in the tray.
Save and then change back to Auto. Save and Exit.
The Fax tab is displayed on the user interface screen.

Y
N
The fax installation was not completed.
Go to Admin / Tools / Service Setting / Embedded Fax Setting / Fax Setup. Select Enable
and Save. Switch off the machine and switch on the machine, GP 14. This will initiate the
Fax Install Wizard and follow the prompts on the screen to complete the install of the
Fax.
The Fax tab is displayed after installation.
Y
N
Check that the fax module is installed correctly, PL 20.05.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 14.
If the User Interface is asking for a size paper that is not loaded in trays.
2.
In Tools menu, go to Fax setup and select:
Receive Defaults.
Receive Printing mode.
Select manual, change small paper setting to None and Save.
Check the fax connector PWB ribbon cable, PL 3.11 Item 7 connection between the
single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13 and the fax connector PWB, PL 20.05
Item 2.
NOTE: For small, long and large paper sizes select NONE if the corresponding
paper is not loaded in the paper trays.
Change setting to Auto and Save.
Check the connection between the fax module and the fax connector PWB, PL
20.05.
3.
Switch on the machine, GP 14.
The super fine tab is displayed.

Y
N
The Server Fax may be enabled.
Go to Admin / Tools / Service Setting / Embedded Fax Setting / Fax Setup and press Disable and Save. This will disable the Server Fax.
After installing Fax Module. The Fax selection tab is greyed out and requesting a pass
code to enable the Fax (Scan to E-mail installed).
Y
N
The fax is installed correctly. Send a three page test fax to a known good fax machine.
Perform an AltBoot, GP 4.
NOTE: Software should only be loaded on a working machine. Loading or reloading software
onto a machine (or fax card) that has a fault will not work.
February 2013
2-281
20E, 20F
20G Fax Module Checkout
20H Fax Problems on Digital Networks RAP
Use this RAP to check for problems with the fax module.
Use this RAP to isolate the problem when using digital networks.
Initial Actions
The Fax option was designed as an analogue Group 3 device. This will have the best performance when connected to a dedicated analog phone PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) line or POTS (Plain Old Telephone system).
WARNING
The Fax option will function on the following technologies:
ADSL - Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
DSL - Digital Subscriber Line
Check that the embedded fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 4 is located correctly.
VOIP - Voice Over Internet Protocol
Check that the fax module is correctly grounded.
FOIP - Fax Over Internet Protocol, (T.38 protocol).
For copy quality defects, go to IQ 27 Unacceptable Received Fax Image Quality RAP.
T1 Trunk / E1 Trunk (Europe).

NOTE: Due to the compression used on the technologies. The level of performance
will be lower than on a PSTN or POTS.
Procedure
Go to WD 3.2 and WD 3.1. Check the +3.3V, +5V and +12V voltages. The
good.
Y
N
Refer to the following:
voltages
are
The Fax option will not function on the following technology:
ISDN - Integrated Services Digital Network
Initial Actions
WARNING
Install a new components as required.
Switch off the machine GP 14. Disconnect the following:
The Fax module from the fax connector PWB, PL 20.05.
Check with the customer or IT person on what network the Fax service is being used and
what is the quality of service.
The Fax connector PWB ribbon cable from the single board controller PWB, PL 3.11.
Check that an analogue adapter or a connection for analogue terminals are available.
Check that the connectors are clean and not damaged. If the connectors are damaged then
install new components as necessary:
Ask the customer to check with service provider that an analogue port for Fax service has
been provided and enabled.
Procedure
Fax connector PWB ribbon cable, PL 3.11 Item 7
Go to 20A Fax Entry RAP.
Request the latest SPAR release.
Disable V34.
Reconnect the following:
The Fax connector PWB ribbon cable to the single board controller PWB.
The fax module to the fax connector PWB.
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write and reset the value at the following locations:
Switch on the machine, GP 14. The fault is cleared.

Y
N
Return to the original fault code RAP and perform the remaining actions in the procedure.
NVM ID 200-087 T30MaxSpeedL1Tx = 11 (14400)
NVM ID 200-088 T30MaxSpeedL2Tx = 11 (14400)
Go to SCP 5 and perform the final actions.
NVM ID 203-105 V34toV21FallbackTime = 20
20G, 20H
If problems are still not resolved after these actions, then escalate the problem using the
normal escalation process
February 2013
2-282
22-300-05 Image complete not received from video.
22-310-04 Pages received from extended job service out of sequence.
22-300-10 Failed to transfer image due to decoding error.
22-314-04 Module registration error.
22-300-16 When machine determines that it needs to do a reset in order to avoid an impending
real time clock overflow.
22-316-04 Job requires paper tray that does not exist.

22-317-04 Job requires finishing capability that does not exist.
22-301-05 Scan resources not available.

22-318-04 Job requires an IOT capability that does not exist.
22-309-04 Consecutive no accepts received from a module exceeds threshold value (currently
20). Five consecutive 22-309-04 will cause 22-319-04.
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
February 2013
2-283
22-300-05 to 22-309-04, 22-310-04 to 22-318-04
22-315-04 One or More Modules Did Not Respond RAP
22-319-04 IOT Integrity Problem While Printing a Job RAP
22-315-04 One or more modules did not respond with completion message.
22-319-04 Integrity problem while printing a job. The IOT cycles down and up 10 times without
printing a page within the same job causing the fault. The system automatically executes a
reset.
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
22-315-04, 22-319-04
1.
2.
Delete the original job, then rerun the job.
February 2013
2-284
22-321-00 SM Failed to Remove Scan to File RAP
22-321-04 Proposal Response Time Out Error RAP
22-321-00 SM failed to remove the scan to file.
22-321-04 Proposal response time out error - RS422 configuration mismatch.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Check machine configuration.
February 2013
2-285
22-321-00, 22-321-04
22-325-01 Cleaning Unit Extended Life Mode Entered RAP
22-328-00 Incomplete System Information RAP
22-325-01 Cleaning unit extended life mode entered (CU snooze mode).
22-328-00 Incomplete system information. The accounting service data has been corrupted.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
22-325-01, 22-328-00
February 2013
2-286
22-330-00 Page Pack PIN Entry Locked RAP

22-330-00 An incorrect page pack PIN has been entered more than 3 times and entry is now
locked for 24 hours. Only one retry is now possible every 24 hours.
Procedure
22-330-01 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between UI and

Copy Controller RAP
22-330-01 List jobs request timed out between UI and copy controller.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Obtain a new PIN and try again.
February 2013
2-287
22-330-00, 22-330-01
22-330-02 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between Copy

Controller and ESS Print Service RAP

Controller and Scan to File Service RAP
22-330-02 List jobs request timed out between copy controller and ESS print service.
22-330-03 List jobs request timed out between copy controller and scan to file service.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
22-330-02, 22-330-03
February 2013
2-288

Controller and Scan to Fax Service RAP
22-330-05 List Jobs Request Timed Out Between Queue

Utility and DC Job Service RAP
22-330-04 List jobs request timed out between copy controller and scan to Fax service.
22-330-05 List jobs request timed out between queue utility and DC job service.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
February 2013
2-289
22-330-04, 22-330-05
22-330-06 ESS Scan to Distribution Service not

Responding to List Jobs RPC Call RAP
22-350-01, 22-350-02 Software Detects Non-Valid Xerox

SOK RAP
22-330-06 ESS scan to distribution service not responding to list RPC call.
22-350-01 Software detected non-valid Xerox SOK 1.
Procedure
22-350-02 Software detected non-valid Xerox SOK 2 or 3.
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
22-330-06, 22-350-01, 22-350-02
1.
2.
Ignore all requested options from the software option key (SOK).
February 2013
2-290
22-351-01 to 22-351-03 SOK Write Failure RAP
22-352-00 Serial Number Missing RAP
22-351-01 SOK 1 write failure.
22-352-00 Serial number has been lost.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
2.
Ignore all requested options from the software option key (SOK).
Check the fault history file for 03-xxx fault codes. Go to the appropriate RAP.
Procedure
1.
Check that the machine serial number is correct on the UI or the option to install the correct value is available, refer to dC132.
2.
Check that the SIM card is present in the SIM slot in the image processing module, PL
3.11 Item 22.
3.
4.
Enter dC131. Select CCS NVM ID 616-003 Product Configuration. Perform the following:
a.
Check that the values are set to 112 = 9301, 113 = 9302 or 114 = 9303 as appropriate to what speed the machine should be. No further action should be required as
the machine has recovered its configuration from the SIM card.
b.
If the value is 0 the machine has never been installed. A blank SIM card of the
appropriate speed, billing plan and service plan can be installed. This should have
been supplied with the machine so a replacement would need to be obtained
through normal process to complete a missing part not delivered at install.
c.
If the value is 49, this is the default at manufacture. Any other number is likely
caused by a memory corruption. For all these instances a pre-serialized SIM card/
SW module will be required. Escalate the request through normal channels to obtain
one.
February 2013
2-291
22-351-01 to 22-351-03, 22-352-00
22-360-00 Service Plan Mismatch RAP

22-360-00 Three way sync of the service plan could not be resolved. The service plan information has been lost.
22-371-00, 22-372-00 Fax Application Registration Error

RAP
22-371-00 Set by the fax service when it gets no response from the service registry when trying to register.
Procedure
22-372-00 Set by the fax service when it gets no response from the service registry when trying to un-register.
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING

1.
Set the service plan, dC136.
22-360-00, 22-371-00, 22-372-00
1.
2.
Check the fax connections.
3.
February 2013
2-292
22-701-04 Module Completion Message Received RAP
22-720-00 Service Registry Bad Data/Corrupted RAP
22-701-04 Module completion message received after IOT returned to standby.
22-720-00 Service bad data/corrupted.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
February 2013
2-293
22-701-04, 22-720-00
22-721-00 No Response From The Service Registry RAP
22-750-04 to 22-755-17 Configuration Mismatch RAP
22-721-00 Triple A gets no response from the service registry service.
22-750-04 Output device configuration mismatch.
Procedure
22-750-17 When the system detects that the accessory card configuration mismatch has
changed during the power on sequence.
WARNING
22-751-04 Paper tray configuration mismatch.

22-754-17 When the system detects the UI configuration has changed during the power on
sequence.
22-755-17 After the 2nd user confirmation of configuration mismatch if the system detects that
the RDT configuration has changed during the power on sequence.
Procedure
WARNING
22-721-00, 22-750-04 to 22-755-17
February 2013
2-294
42-504-00 Enclosure Fan Over Current RAP
42-505-00 Abatement Fan Over Current RAP
42-504-00 The enclosure fan current demand is inconsistent with expected value.
42-505-00 The abatement fan current demand is inconsistent with expected value.
Procedure
Procedure
Go to OF 6 Fans and Air Systems RAP.
Go to OF 6 Fans and Air Systems RAP.
February 2013
2-295
42-504-00, 42-505-00
42-504-00, 42-505-00
February 2013
2-296
62-277-00 Scanner to DADH Communication Fail Entry

RAP
62-310-00 Scanner to Single Board Controller

Communication Fail RAP
62-277-00 A communication failure between scanner PWB and DADH PWB has been
detected.
62-310-00 A communication failure between the scanner PWB and the single board controller
PWB has been detected.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Procedure
Procedure
Remove the DADH rear cover, PL 5.10 Item 1. Remove the scanner PWB cover, refer to REP
62.12. Refer to WD 5.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between PJ188 on the DADH PWB and
PJ921 on the scanner PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Re-seat loose connectors or install new components as necessary:
Remove the scanner PWB cover, refer to REP 62.12. Refer to WD 6.1 and WD 3.1. Check the
wiring between PJ922 on the scanner PWB and PJ15 on the single board controller PWB.
The wiring is good.
Y
N
DADH Communication/power cable, PL 5.10 Item 6.
IIT video/SBC PWB harness, PL 62.10 Item 13.
Refer to WD 3.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between PJ920 on the scanner PWB and PJ18
on the single board controller PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Refer to WD 1.7 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring and voltages between PJ920 on the scanner
PWB and PJ8 on the power distribution PWB. Wiring and voltages are good.
Y
N
Refer to WD 1.5 and WD 1.6. Check the wiring between PJ1 on the power distribution PWB
and PJDC4 on the power supply unit. Check for the correct voltages from the power supply at
PJDC4 and at PJ1 on the power distribution PWB. Wiring and voltages are good.
Y
N
February 2013
2-297
62-277-00, 62-310-00
62-450-00 to 62-472-00 Calibration Failure RAP
Initial Actions
62-450-00 Calibration dark range not clear.
WARNING
62-451-00 Calibration dark range not done.
62-452-00 Calibration Pixel offset not clear.

62-453-00 Calibration Pixel offset not done.
62-454-00 Calibration gain range not clear.
62-455-00 Calibration gain range not done.
62-456-00 Calibration Pixel gain not clear.
62-457-00 Calibration Pixel gain not done.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 62-002 to activate the exposure lamps. Exposure lamps illuminate.
Y
N
Go to 62B Exposure Lamp Failure RAP.
Remove the scanner PWB cover, refer to REP 62.12. Refer to WD 6.3. Check the wiring
between PJ928 on the scanner PWB and the scan carriage assembly. The wiring is good.
Y
N
62-458-00 Calibration dark range errors.

62-459-00 Calibration pixel offset hi errors.
62-460-00 Calibration pixel offset lo errors.
62-461-00 Calibration gain range errors.
62-462-00 Calibration pixel gain hi errors.
62-463-00 Calibration pixel gain lo errors.
62-464-00 Scan controller busy error.
62-465-00 Dark loop settle error.
Scan carriage assembly, PL 62.15 Item 1.
Scan carriage ribbon cable, PL 62.15 Item 4.
Refer to WD 3.1, WD 3.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between:
PJ922 on the scanner PWB and PJ15 on the single board controller PWB.
PJ920 on the scanner PWB and PJ18 on the single board controller PWB.
The wiring is good.

Y
N
62-466-00 Dark range rail error.
62-468-00 Colour state error.
Go to IQ 29, refer to the CVT and Document Glass Checkout. Check the white calibration strip
on the front undersides of the document and CVT glass. Calibration strip is clean.
Y
N
Clean with film remover, PL 26.11 Item 14.
62-469-00 FPGA Comms error.
62-467-00 Gain range rail error.
62-470-00 FPGA Read error.

62-471-00 FPGA write wrap error.
62-472-00 FPGA Bus time out error.
62-450-00 to 62-472-00
February 2013
2-298
62-473-00 UART RX Wrap Error RAP
62-474-00, 62-475-00 Stepper Speed/Reset Error RAP
62-473-00 UART RX wrap error.
62-474-00 Stepper speed error.
Initial Actions
62-475-00 Move before reset error.
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
Go to 62-473-00 UART RX Wrap Error RAP.
Procedure
Refer to WD 3.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between PJ18 on the single board controller
PWB and PJ920 on the scanner PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Re-seat loose connectors or install a new DADH/IIT power comms harness, PL 62.16
Item 7.
February 2013
2-299
62-473-00, 62-474-00, 62-475-00
A
Enter dC330 code 62-018 carriage home sensor, Q62-018. Stack codes 62-023 and 62-024 to
move the carriage home, then away from home. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 6.2. Check Q62-018:
62-476-00 Scan Carriage Home Sensor RAP

62-476-00 Carriage home sensor is not cleared or made in time.
Initial Actions
WARNING
PJ923, Scanner PWB.
Procedure
Visually check the scanner carriage alignment through the document glass. Carriage
ment is good.
Y
N
Perform ADJ 62.2 Scan Carriage Assembly.
align-
Carriage home sensor PL 62.15 Item 7.
Refer to WD 1.7, WD 3.1, WD 3.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between:
PJ8 on the power distribution PWB and PJ920 on the scanner PWB.
PJ15 on the single board controller PWB and PJ922 on the scanner PWB.
The wiring is good.

Y
N
Re-seat loose connectors, repair the wiring or install new components as necessary:
IIT video SBC PWB harness, PL 62.10 Item 13.
Enter dC330 code 62-023 carriage motor, MOT62-063. The scan carriage returns to the
home position.
Y
N
Check the condition and adjustment of the scan drive belt, refer to ADJ 62.3 Carriage
Motor and Scanner Drive Belt. The scan drive belt is good.
Y
N
Install a new scan drive belt, PL 62.16 Item 12.
PJ929, Scanner PWB.
Carriage motor and bracket assembly PL 62.16 Item 15.
A
62-476-00
February 2013
2-300
62-477-00 to 62-481-00 Timing Errors RAP
62-484-00 Apps Code Not Present RAP
62-477-00 Stepper busy error.
62-484-00 Apps code not present.
62-478-00 Real time error.
Procedure
WARNING
62-479-00 Page synchronization error.

62-480-00 Initialize time error.
62-481-00 DADH client time out.
Procedure
WARNING
February 2013
2-301
62-477-00 to 62-481-00, 62-484-00
62-485-00 +12V Supply Error RAP
62-486-00 +24V Supply Error RAP
62-485-00 +12V supply error.
62-486-00 +24V supply error.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 62-021 12V Detect. The 12V supply is detected.
Y
N
Check the +12V power supply, refer to:
01E +12V distribution RAP.
Enter dC330 code 62-020 24V Detect. The +24V supply is detected.
Y
N
Check the +24V power supply, refer to:
01L 0V distribution RAP.
and PJ920 on the scanner PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
01H +24V distribution RAP.
01L 0V distribution RAP.
and PJ920 on the scanner PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
and PJDC4 on the power supply unit. The wiring is good.
Y
N
and PJDC4 on the power supply unit. The wiring is good.
Y
N
62-485-00, 62-486-00
February 2013
2-302
62-487-00 System Phase Lock Loop (PLL) Error RAP
62A Scanning Document Size RAP
62-487-00 System phase lock loop (PLL) error.
The scanner has encountered a document that is larger than expected.
Procedure
The scanner has encountered a document of unknown size. The document size sensors have
incorrectly determined the size of the original.
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
NOTE: If necessary, temporarily install the document glass when checking the document size
sensors to ensure that the document is the correct distance from the sensor.
Check that the input module angle sensor actuator is not damaged. If necessary install a new
input module angle sensor actuator PL 62.15 Item 10. Enter dC330 code 62-301 angle sensor,
Q62-301. Actuate Q62-301. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 6.2. Check Q62-301, PL 62.15 Item 7.
PJ923, Scanner PWB.
Angle sensor, PL 62.15 Item 7.
Raise the DADH. Enter dC330 code 62-251 document size sensor 1, Q62-251. Actuate Q6225 by placing a piece of paper on the document glass above the sensor. Repeat the test for
Q62-252 document size sensor 2, Q62-252. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 6.2. Check Q62-251 and Q62-252.
PJ923, Scanner PWB.
Document size sensor 1 or 2, PL 62.16 Item 10.
Refer to WD 1.7, WD 3.1, WD 3.2 and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between:
February 2013
2-303
62-487-00, 62A
The wiring is good.

Y
N
62B LED Exposure Lamp Failure RAP

The LED lamp(s) do not illuminate.
Procedure
WARNING
Enter dC330, input code 62-002 to activate the exposure lamps. The exposure lamps illuminate.
Y
N
Remove the scanner PWB cover, refer to REP 62.12. Refer to WD 1.7, WD 3.1, WD 3.2
and WD 6.1. Check the wiring between:
The wiring is good.

Y
N
Refer to WD 6.2. Check the wiring between PJ926 on the scanner PWB and the LED
Exposure lamps, PL 62.15 Item 2. The wiring is good.
Y
N
LED exposure lamps, PL 62.15 Item 2.
Refer to WD 6.2. Check the in line ribbon harness PL 62.15 Item 3 between CN1 and
CN2. The harness is good.
Y
N
LED exposure lamps, PL 62.15 Item 2.
In line ribbon harness, PL 62.15 Item 3.

62A, 62B
February 2013
2-304
70-312-00 Tray 1 to Tray 3 Communication Failure RAP
70-305-00, 70-325-00 Lower Left Door Open RAP
70-312-00 IME to tray 1, tray 2 and tray 3 communications failure.
70-305-00 Lower left door open.
Procedure
70-325-00 Lower left door open during run.
WARNING
Initial Actions
Ensure the lower left door assembly, PL 70.25 Item 5 is closed.
Check the door hinge and latch for damage, PL 70.25.
Refer to WD 7.3 and WD 8.2. Perform the following:
Procedure
1.
2.
Check the harness between PJ950 on the 3 tray module PWB and PJ 401 on the media
path driver PWB.
3.
Check the PJ connections and wiring. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
WARNING
3 Tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Media path driver PWB to 3 tray module PWB harness (PJ950 to PJ401), PL 1.15 Item
21.
Enter dC330 code 01-302 lower door interlock, Q01-301, PL 70.10 Item 18. Press Start. Manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check the lower door interlock. Refer to:
PJ953, 3 tray module PWB.
Lower door interlock sensor, PL 70.10 Item 18.
Check that the sensor is correctly located.
Check that the actuator on the lower left door assembly is not damaged or missing.
If necessary, install a new lower left door assembly, PL 70.25 Item 5.
February 2013
2-305
70-312-00, 70-305-00, 70-325-00
71-101-00 to 71-161-00 Tray 1 Mis-Feed Jam RAP
71-101-00 Tray 1 misfeed jam
71-106-00 LE late to TAR1 sensor from tray 1.

71-130-00 TTM1 TE late at TAR.
Enter dC330 code 71-395 TAR 1 sensor, Q71-395, PL 73.16 Item 11. Press Start. Open the left
door and manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check takeaway roll sensor 1, Q71-395. Refer to:
71-132-00 TTM1 LE too early at TAR.

71-150-00 TTM1 too long at TAR.
71-151-00 TTM1 too short at TAR.
71-152-00 TTM1 too long at TAR no auto purge.

71-153-00 TTM1 too short at TAR no auto purge.
71-154-00 TTM1 mismatch long at TAR.
71-155-00 TTM1 mismatch short at TAR.
TAR 1 Sensor, PL 73.16 Item 11.
Check that the nudger spring is installed correctly, PL 81.25 Item 10. Check that the spring is
not damaged. The spring is good.
Y
N
Install a new spring, PL 81.25 Item 10.
71-160-00 Extra pick retry O.K.

71-161-00 Extra pick retry fail.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 70-025 3 tray transport motor, MOT70-025, PL 73.16 Item 3. Press Start.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Check the condition of the paper in tray 1. Refer to IQ 1 and GP 20.
Check that the paper guides are set correctly.
Check that the lower left door, PL 70.25 Item 5 is latched correctly.
Check the condition of the tray 1 feed, nudger and retard rolls. Use a cloth dampened with
water to clean the rolls, GP 27. If necessary, install a new tray 1 feed roll kit, PL 81.25
Item 28.
3 tray transport motor, PL 73.16 Item 3
3 Tray Module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Go to dC135 CRU/HFSI Status. Check the count of the tray 1 feed roll set. If the count is
near end of life, install a new tray 1 feed roll kit, PL 81.25 Item 28.
Procedure
Observe the takeaway rolls, PL 73.16. The takeaway rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and gears, PL 73.16 Item 7.
Enter dC330 code 71-101 tray 1 feed sensor, Q71-101, PL 81.25 Item 19. Press Start. Remove
tray 1 and tray 2. Manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.3. Check tray 1 feed sensor, Q71-101. Refer to:
Check the condition of the takeaway rolls, PL 73.16. The takeaway rolls are good.
Y
N
Clean or install new takeaway rolls, PL 73.16 Item 9.
A
71-101-00 to 71-161-00
B
February 2013
2-306
71-215-00 Tray 1 Elevate Up Failure RAP
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the feed mechanism, the paper tray must be pulled out before MOT 71002 is run in diagnostics.
Enter dC330 code 71-002 tray 1 feed / elevate motor, MOT71-002, PL 81.25 Item 22. Press
start. The feed rolls rotate.
Y
N
Remove the tray feed assembly, REP 81.1. Manually rotate the feed roll shaft. The drive
gears rotate.
Y
N
Check the gears for damage. If necessary, install new components, PL 81.25.
71-215-00 Tray 1 stack height sensor did not actuate within the correct time after the feed / elevator motor turned on.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
Install the tray 1 feed assembly.

Instal new Components as necessary:
Tray 1 feed / elevate motor, PL 81.25 Item 22.
The nudger roll rotates.

Y
N
Check the nudger roll drive belt and drive coupling for damage. If necessary, install new
components, PL 81.25.
With the paper tray removed. Manually move the retard nip split mechanism. The retard roll
moves against the feed roll.
Y
N
Check the retard roll drive coupling and mechanism for damage.
If necessary, install new components, PL 81.25.
Check the feed roll assembly, PL 81.25 Item 11.
Check the feed assembly, PL 81.25 Item 1.
Check for paper or obstructions behind the tray.

Check that the tray 1 stack height sensor, PL 81.25 Item 17 is clean and located correctly.
Ensure that the tray is pushed fully home.
Check the stack height mechanism actuator in the feeder, PL 81.25.
Check the drive gears and coupling on the tray, PL 70.10.
Check the elevator drive coupling on the feeder assembly, PL 81.25.
Check for the lift plate is not bowed under the elevate plate assembly.
Enter dC330 code 71-336 tray 1 stack height sensor, Q71-336, PL 81.25 Item 17. Press Start.
Pull out tray 1. Manually actuate the sensor. The display changes
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.3. Check tray 1 stack height sensor, Q71-336. Refer to:

Tray 1 stack height sensor, PL 81.25 Item 17.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the elevator and paper feed mechanism, the paper tray must be pulled
out before MOT71-002 is run in diagnostics.
Enter dC330 code 71-002 tray 1 feed / elevator motor, MOT71-002, PL 81.25 Item 22. Pull out
tray 1. Press Start. The motor runs
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.3. Check tray 1 feed / elevator motor, MOT71-002. Refer to:

Tray 1 feed / elevator motor, PL 81.25 Item 22.

Check the feeder / elevator motor drive gears, PL 81.25.
Check the tray 1 stack height mechanism on the feeder assembly,

If the fault still occurs, go to 71A Tray 1 Empty RAP.
February 2013
2-307
71-101-00 to 71-161-00, 71-215-00
71-320-00 Tray 1 Open In Run RAP
71A Tray 1 Empty RAP
71-320-00 Tray 1 was opened during run when the paper is fed from tray 1.
Use this RAP when the copier display instructs the operator to add paper to the tray that is not
empty.
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
Check for obstructions behind the tray.
Ensure the tray is pushed fully home.
Check the tray 1 location catch for damage, PL 70.10 Item 17.
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 71-201. Press Start. Manually actuate the tray empty sensor Q71-201, PL
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.3. Check tray 1 empty sensor, Q71-201.
Refer to:
Procedure
Tray 1 and tray 2 do not have a dedicated home sensor. The 5 size sensing switches on the 3
tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4, are used. When at least one switch is actuated the tray is
closed. When no switches are actuated, the tray is open.
Enter dC330 codes 71-311, 71-312, 71-313, 71-314 and 71-315. Press Start. Remove the tray
and manually actuate each switch. The display changes for each switch.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check tray 1 size switches. Refer to:
PJ951, 3 tray module PWB
Tray 1 empty sensor, PL 81.25 Item 19.
Check that the sensor is free of paper dust and is located correctly.
Check the paper feed mechanism and feedhead, PL 81.25 Item 1.
Check the length and width sensing bracket on the paper tray, PL 70.10 Item 12, PL 70.10
Item 13.
If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
71-320-00, 71A
February 2013
2-308
71B Tray 1 Wrong Size Paper RAP

Use this RAP when the paper fed from the tray does not match the paper size indicated by the
tray paper size switch. Tray 1 and tray 2 feed mechanisms are identical.
Initial Actions
Check that the tray paper guides are set up to the edges of the paper.
Check for paper down the back of the tray.
Make sure the guides are located in the tray base slots if a standard paper size is used.
Check the length and width bracket on the rear of the tray, PL 70.10 Item 12 and PL 70.10
Item 13.
Procedure
Refer to Table 1. Compare the paper size in the tray to the size switches actuated.
Enter dC330 and relevant component control code as shown in the table. Press Start. Manually
display
actuate the paper size switch on the 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4. The
changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check the tray 1 size switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 at the switch on the 3 tray
module PWB. Check the voltage on the centre pin of the relevant switch on the rear of the
PWB. Refer to:
Size
switch 1
(S71-311)
Size
switch 2
(S71-312)
Size
switch 3
(S71-313)
Size
switch 4
(S71-314)
Size
switch 5
(S71-315)
A5 SEF
5.5 x 8.5 inch SEF
0V
+3.3V
0V
0V
+3.3V
A4 LEF
+3.3V
0V
0V
0V
+3.3V
A4 SEF
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
0V
0V
A3 SEF
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
A5 SEF
B5 SEF and JIS B5
5.5 x 8.5 inch SEF
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
EXEC 184 x 267 mm

B5 SEF and JIS B5
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
8.5 x 11 LEF (Letter)
0V
0V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
8.5 x 11 SEF (Letter)
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
0V
8.5 x 13 SEF (Folio)

216 x 330 mm
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
8.5 x 14 SEF (Legal)

B4 SEF and JIS B4
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
11 x 17 SEF (Tabloid)
0V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Paper
WARNING
Table 1 Tray 1 paper size table
Set the paper tray paper guides to a standard size of paper. Push in the tray. Refer to Table 1 to
identify the switches that should be actuated.
Enter dC330 and relevant component control code to operate the size switch as shown in the
table. Press Start. Open and close the tray and observe the change of state of the size switch.
Set the paper guides to various other paper sizes, to actuate all 5 size switches The
size
switches change to the correct state for the paper size selected.
Y
N
Item 13. Install new parts as required.
If the problem is random, check the paper tray for worn or damaged parts. If necessary install a
new tray assembly, PL 70.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-309
71B
72-101-00 Tray 2 misfeed jam.

72-106-00 LE late to TAR 2 sensor.
72-110-00 LE late to TAR 1 sensor from tray 2.
N

72-131-00 TTM2 LE late at TAR.

hand door and manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check TAR 2 sensor, Q72-396. Refer to:
72-133-00 TTM2 LE too early at TAR1.


TAR sensor 2, PL 73.16 Item 11.
Check that the nudger spring is installed correctly, PL 81.26 Item 10. Check that the spring is
not damaged. The spring is good.
Y
N

Initial Actions
WARNING
hand door and manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Check the condition of the paper in tray 2. Refer to IQ 1 and GP 20.
Check that the paper guides are set correctly.
Check that the left hand door is latched correctly.
Item 28.
Go to dC135 CRU / HFSI Status. Check the count of the tray 2 feed roll set. If the count is
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 72-102 tray 2 feed sensor, Q72-102, PL 81.26 Item 19. Press Start. Remove
tray 1 and tray 2 then manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
TAR 1 sensor, PL 73.16 Item 11.
Enter dC330 code 70-025 3 tray module transport motor, MOT70-025, PL 73.16 Item 3. Press
Start. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check 3 tray module transport motor, MOT81-025. Refer to:
A
72-101-00 to 72-161-00
February 2013
2-310
PJ956 on 3 tray module PWB.
72-215-00 Tray 2 hoist failure
Initial Actions
3 tray module transport motor, PL 73.16 Item 3.
WARNING
Observe the takeaway rolls. The transport rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and gears, PL 73.16 Item 7.
Check the condition of the takeaway rolls, PL 73.16. The takeaway rolls are good.
Y
N
Clean or Install new takeaway rolls, PL 73.16 Item 9.
Procedure
CAUTION
Enter dC330 code 72-001 tray 2 feed / elevator motor, MOT72-001, PL 81.26 Item 22. Press
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.3. Check tray 2 feed / elevator motor, MOT72-001. Refer to:
With the paper tray removed. Manually move the retard nip split mechanism, PL 81.26. The
retard roll moves against the feed roll.
Y
N
Check the retard roll drive coupling and mechanism for damage.
If necessary, install new components, PL 81.26.
Check the feed assembly, PL 81.26 Item 1.
Pull out tray 1. Manually actuate the sensor. The display changes
Y
N


CAUTION
To prevent damage to the elevator and paper feed mechanism, the paper tray must be pulled
out before MOT72-001 is run in diagnostics.

Y
N
Check the nudger roll drive belt and drive coupling for damage. If necessary, install a new
components, PL 81.26 Item 12.
Check that the tray 2 stack height sensor, PL 81.26 Item 17 is clean and located correctly.
Check the stack height mechanism actuator on the back of the tray, PL 81.26.
Check the drive gears and coupling on the tray, PL 70.10.
Check the elevator drive coupling on the feeder assembly, PL 81.26.
Check for the lift plate is not bowed under the elevate plate assembly.
Enter dC330 code 72-001 tray 2 feed / elevate motor, MOT72-001, PL 81.26 Item 22. Pull out
tray 2. Press Start. The motor runs
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.3. Check tray 2 feed / elevate motor, MOT72-001. Refer to:


Check the feeder / elevator motor drive gears, PL 81.26.
Check the tray 2 stack height mechanism on the feeder assembly,
If the fault still occurs then go to 72A Tray 2 Empty RAP.
February 2013
2-311
72-101-00 to 72-161-00, 72-215-00
72-320-00 Tray 2 Open in Run RAP
72A Tray 2 Empty RAP
72-320-00 Tray 2 was opened during run.
Use this RAP when the copier display instructs the operator to add paper to the tray that is not
empty.
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
Check the tray 2 location catch for damage, PL 70.10 Item 17.
WARNING
Tray 2 empty sensor, Q72-201. Enter dC330 code 72-201, PL 81.26 Item 19. Press Start.
Manually actuate the tray empty sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.3. Check tray 2 empty sensor, Q72-201.
Refer to:
Procedure
Tray 1 and tray 2 do not have a dedicated home sensor. The 5 size switches on the 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4, are used. When at least one switch is actuated, the tray is closed.
When all switches are not actuated, the tray is open.
Enter dC330 and enter code 72-321, 72-322, 72-323, 72-324 and 72-325 one at a time. Press
Start. Remove the tray and manually actuate each switch. The display changes for each
switch.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check tray 2 size switches. Refer to:
Check that the sensor is free of paper dust.
Check the paper feed mechanism, PL 81.26 Item 1.
Check the size switches on the 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Item 13
72-320-00, 72A
February 2013
2-312
72B Tray 2 Wrong Size Paper RAP

Use this RAP when the paper fed from the tray does not match the paper size indicated by the
tray paper size switch. Tray 1 and tray 2 feed mechanisms are identical.
NOTE: Standard sizes will be offered as indicated, as well a custom sizes limited to the range
supported.
Table 1 Tray 2 paper size table
Size
switch 1
(S72-321)
Size
switch 2
(S72-322)
Size
switch 3
(S72-323)
Size
switch 4
(S72-324)
Size
switch 5
(S72-325)
A5 SEF
5.5 x 8.5 inch SEF
0V
+3.3V
0V
0V
+3.3V
A4 LEF
+3.3V
0V
0V
0V
+3.3V
A4 SEF
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
0V
0V
A3 SEF
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
A5 SEF
B5 SEF and JIS B5
5.5 x 8.5 inch SEF
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
EXEC 184 x 267 mm

B5 SEF and JIS B5
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
8.5 x 11 LEF (Letter)
0V
0V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
8.5 x 11 SEF (Letter)
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
0V
8.5 x 13 SEF (Folio)

216 x 330 mm
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
8.5 x 14 SEF (Legal)

B4 SEF and JIS B4
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
11 x 17 SEF (Tabloid)
0V
0V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Initial Actions
WARNING
Paper
Check that the tray paper guides are set up to the edges of the paper.
Make sure the guides are located in the tray base slots if a standard paper size is used.
Check the length sensing bracket, PL 70.10 Item 12 and width sensing bracket, PL 70.10
Item 13 on the rear of the tray.
Procedure
Refer to Table 1. Compare the paper size in the tray to the size switches actuated.
Enter dC330 and relevant component control code as shown in the table. Press Start. Manually
The
display
actuate the paper size switch on the 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check tray 2 size switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 at the switch on the 3 tray module PWB. Check the voltage on the centre pin of the relevant switch on the rear of the
PWB. Refer to:
Set the paper tray paper guides to a standard size of paper. Push in the tray. Refer to Table 1 to
identify the switches that should be actuated.
Enter dC330 and relevant component control code to operate the size switch as shown in the
table. Press Start. Open and close the tray and observe the change of state of the size switch.
Set the paper guides to other paper sizes, to actuate all 5 size switches The size switches
change to the correct state for the paper size selected.
Y
N
Item 13. Install new parts as necessary.
If the problem is random, check the paper tray for worn or damaged parts. If necessary install a
new tray assembly, PL 70.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-313
72B
73-101-00 Tray 3 misfeed jam.
N
73-140-00 TTM3 TE late at HZ XP
73-141-00 TTM3 LE too early HZ XP
Enter dC330 code 73-397 TAR 3 sensor, Q73-397, PL 81.35 Item 18. Press Start. Pull out the
horizontal transport assembly, PL 81.35 Item 1. Manually actuate the sensor by placing a piece
of paper over the sensor but not in the nip rolls. Push in the horizontal transport. The display
changes.
Y
N

Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the condition of the paper in tray 3. Refer to GP 20.
Ensure that the tray 3 paper tray guides are set correctly, ADJ 73.1.
Check that the EPC memory PWB is installed and seated correctly, PL 3.11 Item 21.
Item 26.
Remove the right side cover, PL 70.25 Item 4. Check that the nudger spring is installed correctly, PL 81.30 Item 10. Check that the spring is not damaged. The spring is good.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 70-398 tray 3 transport sensor (2), Q70-398, PL 81.35 Item 18. Press Start.
Pull out the horizontal transport assembly, PL 81.35 Item 1. Manually actuate the sensor by
placing a piece of paper over the sensor but not in the nip rolls. Push in the horizontal transport. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check tray 3 transport sensor (2), Q70-398. Refer to:
Procedure
Tray 3 transport sensor (2), PL 81.35 Item 18.
Enter dC330 code 73-103 tray 3 feed sensor, Q73-103, PL 81.30 Item 19. Open tray 3. Press
Start. Manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
A
73-101-00 to 73-161-00
February 2013
2-314
A
Enter dC330 code 70-025 3 tray transport motor, MOT70-025, PL 73.16 Item 3. Press Start.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check 3 tray transport motor, MOT70-025. Refer to:

Enter dC330 code 73-001 tray 3 feed motor, MOT73-001, PL 81.30 Item 22. Press Start. The
motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check tray 3 feed motor, MOT73-001. Refer to:

Tray 3 feed motor, PL 81.30 Item 22.
Check the tray 3 feed assembly, PL 81.30 Item 1. Refer to REP 81.2 and check the feed
head housing location.
Check the tray is level. Perform the following:
Remove the tray front cover.
2.
Elevate the tray to the stack height position.
3.
Hold the elevator drive gear and pull out the tray. Check that the tray is level.
4.
If the tray is not level then install new elevator cables, PL 73.15 Item 18.
Enter dC140 Analog Monitor select code 073-003 3TM elevator encoder. Perform the routine
for the encoder. The encoder routine is good.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check the 3TM elevator encoder sensor, Q73-003. Refer to:

NOTE: In this check place a piece of paper in the sensor. The check is difficult due
to the problem in moving the timing disc.
Tray 3 elevator motor, PL 73.16 Item 2.
Check the encoder wheel for damage and that it is located on the motor correctly. If necessary
install new components, PL 73.16.
1.
Check that the encoder sensor and wheel are clean.
Check that the encoder is located correctly, PL 73.16 Item 2.
Pull out the relevant tray and allow it to move fully down. Close the tray. The tray moves up.
Y
N
Go to 73-215-00 Tray 3 Hoist Failure RAP.
CAUTION
Procedure
The transport rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the gears and drive belt, PL 73.16.
Initial Actions
WARNING
73-212-00 Tray 3 encoder failure on hoist.
73-212-00 Tray 3 Elevate Encoder Failure RAP
If the fault still occurs, check the following:
The takeaway roll 3, PL 81.35 Item 16.
The transport roll 2, PL 81.35 Item 15.
The transport roll 1, PL 81.35 Item 14.
February 2013
2-315
73-101-00 to 73-161-00, 73-212-00
73-215-00 Tray 3 Hoist Failure RAP
73-215-00 Tray 3 hoist failure.
Initial Actions
WARNING

Check that the tray elevator cables and mechanisms are located correctly. Refer to REP
73.3.
If the tray only elevates up by 25 mm (1 inch) and stops. Go to 73A RAP and check the
tray empty actuator.
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check that the tray 3 limit switch, PL 81.30 Item 25, is not actuated.
While not actuated, check for +24V at both contacts on the switch. Refer to:
Tray 3 limit switch, PL 81.30 Item 25.
Refer to WD 7.5. Check tray 3 elevator motor, MOT73-002. Refer to:
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 73-303 tray 3 home sensor, Q73-303, PL 73.16 Item 8. Press Start. Pull out
the tray. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check tray 3 home sensor, Q73-303. Refer to:
Check elevator cables, PL 73.15.
Check elevator motor drive coupling, PL 73.16 Item 2.
Check tray elevator drive gears and drive coupling, PL 73.15 Item 11.
Tray 3 home sensor, PL 73.16 Item 8.
If the fault still occurs, then go to 73A Tray 3 Out of Paper RAP.
Pull out tray 3. Manually actuate the stack height sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 73-002 tray 3 elevator motor, MOT73-002, PL 73.16 Item 2. Pull out tray 3.
Press Start. The motor runs.
73-215-00
February 2013
2-316
73-320-00 Tray 3 Open in Run RAP
73-325-00 Feeder HT Drawer Open in Run RAP
73-320-00 Tray 3 open during run when the paper is fed from tray 3.
73-325-00 Tray 3 horizontal transport drawer open in run.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that the transport is pushed fully home.
Check the tray 3 home sensor, PL 73.16 Item 8 actuator on the tray.
Check the tray 3 latch parts (on the tray and on the machine base), PL 73.16 Item 1.
Check the switch actuator on the back of the drawer, part of the horizontal transport, PL
73.16 Item 18.
Check the latch on the rear of the horizontal transport, PL 81.35 above the connector for
damage
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 73-303 tray 3 home sensor, Q73-303, PL 73.16 Item 8. Press Start. Open
and fully close the tray. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check tray 3 home sensor, Q73-303. Refer to:
Check for obstructions behind the transport.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 70-100 horizontal transport home switch, Q70-100, on the 3 tray module
PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4. Press Start. Open and fully close the horizontal transport. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.5. Check horizontal transport home switch, Q70-100. The home switch is
located on the 3 tray module PWB. Check the voltage on the centre pin of the switch on
the rear of the PWB. Refer to:
3 tray module control PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Check the tray 3 home sensor is secure and correctly positioned.

Check the alignment of the actuator to the sensor on the horizontal transport., PL 81.35 Item 1.
HT and main harness latch, PL 73.16 Item 18.
Horizontal transport assembly, PL 81.35 Item 1.
February 2013
2-317
73-320-00, 73-325-00
73A Tray 3 Out of Paper RAP
74-101-00, 74-160-00 to 74-161-00 Bypass Tray 4 Mis-Feed RAP
Use this RAP when the copier display instructs the operator to add paper to tray 3 when the
tray is not empty.
74-101-00 Tray 4 misfeed jam. The feed sensor did not actuate in the correct time after paper
feed from the bypass tray
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the position of the tray empty sensor, PL 81.30 Item 19.
Clean the tray empty sensor.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 73-201 tray 3 empty sensor, PL 81.30 Item 19. Press Start.
Use a piece of paper to manually actuate the tray empty sensor with a piece of paper. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.4. Check tray 3 empty sensor, Q73-201. Refer to:

Pull out tray 3. Manually actuate the stack height sensor. The display changes
Y
N

Check the condition of the paper in tray. Refer to GP 20.

Check the paper guides are set correctly.
Check the condition of the bypass tray 4 feed, nudger and retard rolls. Use a cloth dampened
with water to clean the rolls, GP 27. If necessary, install a new tray 4 feed roll kit, PL 31.11
Item 26.
Go to dC135 CRU/HFSI Status. Check the count of the tray 4 bypass feed roll set. If the
count is near end of life, install a new tray 4 feed roll kit, PL 31.11 Item 26.
Procedure
Bypass feed sensor, PL 74.10 Item 19.
Enter dC330 code 74-420 bypass feed motor (M7), MOT74-420, PL 74.10 Item 2. Support the
nudger assembly. Press Start. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.3. Check bypass feed motor (M7), MOT74-420. Refer to:
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 74-406 bypass feed sensor, Q74-406, PL 74.10 Item 19. Press Start. Manually actuate the bypass feed sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.3. Check bypass feed sensor, Q74-406. Refer to:
Initial Actions
The fault may be intermittent. Perform the following:
Bypass module, PL 74.10 Item 1.
Check that the base plate in tray 3 is located correctly.
Check that PJ958 harness is connected correctly and not damaged. Refer to REP 81.2
Tray 3 Paper Feed Assembly. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
73A, 74-101-00, 74-160-00 to 74-161-00
Check the takeaway nip rolls, PL 70.30 Item 12.

February 2013
2-318
74-120-00 Bypass Tray 4 Guides Move in Run RAP
74-214-00 Bypass Tray 4 Nudger Failure RAP
74-120-00 Bypass tray 4 paper guides moved during run.
74-214-00 Bypass tray 4 nudger failed to operate.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check the feeder assembly, PL 74.10 for damage.
1.
Check that the paper guides are in the correct position.
Check that the nudger home sensor, PL 74.10 Item 18 is positioned correctly.
2.
Check the paper guides for damage.
3.
Check the operation of the paper guides and the function of the width sensor, Q74-415.
Refer to dC140 Analog Monitor and check the voltage on the potentiometer, refer to WD
8.3.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 74-413 bypass nudger home sensor, Q74-413, PL 74.10 Item 18. Press
Start. Manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.3. Check Q74-413. Refer to:
Bypass nudger home sensor, PL 74.10 Item 18.
Enter dC330 code 74-420 Bypass feed motor, MOT74-420, PL 74.10 Item 2. Press Start. The
motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.3. Check bypass feed motor, MOT74-420. Refer to:
Check the cam mechanism for the nudger home sensor. Manually rotate the cam and check for
damage. Install new parts as required, PL 74.10.
If necessary, install a new bypass module, PL 74.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-319
74-120-00, 74-214-00
74A Bypass Tray 4 Size Sensing Problems RAP
Use this RAP to troubleshoot problems when the bypass tray 4 fails to indicate the correct
paper size.
N
NOTE: The width sensor is a potentiometer. The arm on the potentiometer is attached to
the bypass tray side guide. This gives a variable voltage to indicate the paper width setting.
Initial Actions
Refer to WD 8.3. Check bypass width potentiometer, Q74-415. Refer to:
WARNING
Check the condition of the media used in the bypass tray. Refer to IQ 1 and GP 20.
Check that the width sensor guide is up to the edge of the paper.
If there is a width sensing problem, then check that the bypass tray width sensing potentiometer, PL 74.11 Item 10 is not damaged.
Ensure that the customer is not filling the tray above the max fill line.
Procedure
Clean the feed, retard and nudger roll with a cloth dampened with water, GP 27.
Enter dC330 code 74-335 bypass empty sensor, Q74-335, PL 74.10 Item 18. Press Start. Manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.3. Check the bypass empty sensor, Q74-335. Refer to:
If necessary, install new components as required, PL 74.10.
Bypass empty sensor, PL 74.10 Item 18.
Enter dC330 code 74-350 bypass width sensor Q74-350, PL 74.11 Item 6. Press Start. Move
the width guides to actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.3.Check bypass width sensor, Q74-350. Refer to:
Bypass width sensor, PL 74.11 Item 6.
Enter dC140 code 74-415 Bypass width potentiometer, Q74-415, PL 74.11 Item 10. Press
Start. Move the width guides to actuate the sensor. The display changes.
74A
February 2013
2-320
75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Mis-Feed RAP

75-101-00 Tray 5 feed sensor did not actuate in the correct time after paper feed from tray 5.
Initial Actions
WARNING
A
The feed shaft rotates.
Y
N
Check the drive gears between the motor and the feed shaft. Install new components as
necessary:
Motor drive gear, PL 81.40 Item 5.
Gear 30T bearing, PL 81.40 Item 18.
Gear 29T, PL 81.45 Item 11.
The feed roll rotates.

Y
N
Check the one way coupling between the feed roller and the clutch. Install new components as necessary:
One way coupling, PL 81.45 Item 4.
Check the condition of the paper in tray 5. Refer to GP 20.
Clutch, PL 81.45 Item 10.
Check that the middle left side door, PL 70.30 Item 16 is correctly latched.
Feed roller, PL 81.45 Item 2.
Check that the paper tray is set to the correct paper size.
Item 20.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 75-105 tray 5 feed sensor, Q75-105 PL 81.45 Item 6. Press Start. Manually
actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N

Y
N
Check the nudger pulley and nudger roller. Check the roller belt between the feed roller
and the nudger roller. Install new components as necessary:
Nudger pulley, PL 81.45 Item 3.
Roller belt, PL 81.45 Item 15.
Nudger roller, PL 81.45 Item 8.
The retard roll rotates.

Y
N
Check the coupling between the retard roller, retard clutch and clutch. Install new components as necessary:
Retard clutch, PL 81.46 Item 3.
PJ504, tray 5 control PWB.
Clutch, PL 81.46 Item 7.
Retard roller, PL 81.46 Item 2.

Enter dC330 code 75-011 tray 5 transport motor, MOT75-018 PL 81.40 Item 2. Press Start.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.1. Check tray 5 transport motor, MOT75-018. Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 75-117 tray 5 feed motor, MOT75-117, PL 81.40 Item 3. Open the door.
Press Start. The motor runs.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 feed motor, MOT75-117. Refer to:
GP 10 How to Check a motor.
Tray 5 transport motor, PL 81.40 Item 2.
Tray 5 feed motor, PL 81.40 Item 3.
A
The take away roller rotates.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and the one way pulley clutch for damage, GP 7. Check the belt tensioner. Install new components as necessary:
Drive belt, PL 81.40 Item 7.

B
February 2013
2-321
75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00
One way pulley clutch, PL 81.46 Item 4.
75-212-00, 75-215-00 Tray 5 Elevate Up Failure RAP
Take away roller, PL 81.46 Item 5.
75-212-00 A signal was not detected by the encoder when the elevator motor was driving up.
Enter dC330 code 82-125 confirm sensor (16), Q82-125, PL 82.10 Item 7. Press Start.
Open the left hand door and manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.1. Check confirm sensor (16), Q82-125. Refer to:
Confirm sensor (16), PL 82.10 Item 7.
Media path control PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
75-215-00 The tray 5 stack height sensor did not actuate in expected time during hoist.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for obstructions in the tray.
Check that the door latches correctly.
Open and close the tray 5 door. If the tray moves up check for intermittent failures. Refer
to WD 7.1 and WD 7.2.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 75-010 tray 5 door switch, S75-010, PL 75.60 Item 6. Press Start. Manually
toggle the door interlock switch. The display changes.
Y
N
Check the wiring to the switch, REP 1.1.
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 switch, S75-010. Refer to:
Tray 5 door interlock switch, PL 75.60 Item 6.
Tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8
Manually actuate the stack height sensor on the paper feed assembly. The display changes.
Y
N
Check the voltage on PJ504 pin 4 on the tray 5 control PWB. Manually actuate the tray upper
limit switch (S75-412), PL 75.68 Item 12, on the paper feed assembly. The voltage changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.1. Check tray 5 upper limit switch, S75-412. Refer to:
A
75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00, 75-212-00, 75-215-
February 2013
2-322
75-213-00, 75-216-00 Tray 5 Elevate Down Failure RAP
75-213-00 Tray 5 encoder failure on lower. A signal was not detected by the encoder when the
elevator motor was driving down.
Tray 5 stack upper limit switch, PL 75.68 Item 12.
75-216-00 Tray 5 lower failure. The tray 5 stack down sensor did not actuate in expected time
during lower.
Enter dC140 code 75-015 tray 5 elevator encoder sensor, Q75-015, PL 75.68 Item 5. Press
Start. Manually lift the motor to actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 elevator encoder, Q75-015. Refer to:
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for obstructions in the tray.
Check that the door latches correctly.
Open and close the tray 5 door. If the tray moves down, check for intermittent failures.
Elevator encoder sensor, PL 75.68 Item 5.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 75-019 tray 5 elevator motor (up), MOT75-019, PL 75.68 Item 4. Press
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.1. Check tray 5 elevator motor, MOT75-019. Refer to:
The tray 5 elevator motor is operating correctly. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter dC330 code 75-010 tray 5 door switch, S75-010, PL 75.60 Item 6. Press Start. Manually
toggle the door interlock switch. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 door interlock switch, S75-010. Refer to:
Tray 5 door interlock switch, PL 75.60 Item 6.
Enter dC330 code 75-012 tray 5 down sensor, Q75-012, PL 75.68 Item 9. Press Start. Manually actuate the stack down sensor actuator. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 down sensor, Q75-012. Refer to:
Tray 5 down sensor, PL 75.68 Item 9.
Check the voltage on PJ504 pin 6 on the tray 5 control PWB, WD 7.1. Manually actuate the
tray 5 down limit switch (S75-415), PL 75.70 Item 2, on the paper tray. The voltage changes.
February 2013
2-323
75-212-00, 75-215-00, 75-213-00, 75-216-00
75-312-00 IME to Tray 5 Communication Failure RAP
N
Refer to WD 7.1. Check tray 5 down limit switch, S75-415. Refer to:
75-312-00 Image marking engine to tray 5 communications failure.
NOTE: Tray down limit switch S75-415 is located in the paper tray. Press the plate under
the paper tray to actuate the switch.
Procedure
WARNING
Tray 5 down limit switch, PL 75.70 Item 2.
1.
2.
Check the communications link between the tray 5 control PWB and PJ704 on the media
path driver PWB.
Enter dC140 code 75-015 tray 5 elevator motor encoder sensor, Q75-015, PL 75.68 Item 5.
Press Start. Manually lift the motor to actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 elevator motor encoder, Q75-015. Refer to:
Communication harness, PL 75.68 Item 26.
Elevator motor encoder sensor, PL 75.68 Item 5.
Enter dC330 code 75-373 tray 5 elevator motor (down), MOT75-019, PL 75.68 Item 4. Press
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.1. Check tray 5 elevator motor (down), MOT75-019. Refer to:
The tray 5 elevator motor is operating correctly. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
75-213-00, 75-216-00, 75-312-00
February 2013
2-324
75-320-00 Tray 5 Opened In Run RAP
75-325-00 Tray 5 Undocked In Run RAP
75-320-00 Tray 5 was opened during run when the paper is fed from tray 5.
75-325-00 Tray 5 was undocked during run when the paper is fed from tray 5.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that the door is pushed fully home.
Ensure the tray base is located correctly.
Check the switch actuator on the door.
Check for obstructions between the tray 5 module and the machine.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 75-010 tray 5 door switch, S75-010, PL 75.60 Item 6. Press Start. Open and
fully close the door The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 door switch, S75-010. Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 75-017 tray 5 docking switch, S75-017, PL 75.64 Item 1. Press Start.
Undock and dock tray 5, refer to REP 75.7. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 docking switch, S75-017. Refer to:
Tray 5 door switch, PL 75.60 Item 6.
Tray 5 docking switch, PL 75.64 Item 1.
Check that the door opens and closes and latches correctly. If necessary install new front door
Check the docking latch, PL 75.62 Item 6 on tray 5 is latched onto the machine.
Check the slide assembly, PL 75.62 Item 12.
February 2013
2-325
75-320-00, 75-325-00
75A Tray 5 Door Open During Run RAP
75B Tray 5 Empty RAP
Use this RAP when the tray 5 door is open during run when the paper is fed from tray 5.
Use this RAP to solve problems associated with the tray 5 empty sensor.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that the door is pushed fully home.
Check that the hole in the tray, directly under the sensor is clear and not obstructed.
Check the switch actuator on the door.
Check the sensor for contamination.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 75-010 tray 5 door switch, S75-010, PL 75.60 Item 6. Press Start. Open and
fully close the door The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.2. Check tray 5 door switch, S75-010. Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 75-016 tray 5 empty sensor, Q75-016, PL 81.45 Item 6. Press Start.
Manually actuate the tray empty sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to WD 7.1. Check tray 5 empty sensor, Q75-016. Refer to:
The fault may be intermittent. Perform the steps that follow:
Check the wiring harness for damaged wire. If necessary repair the harness, REP 1.1.
Check that tray 5 empty sensor is located correctly.
75A, 75B
February 2013
2-326
82-110-00 to 82-114-00, 82-152-00, 82-157-00 to 82-159-00,

82-164-00 to 82-166-00 Media Path Sensor (5) RAP
82-110-00 The sheet has arrived at the media path sensor (5) too early.
Vertical transport sensor (5), PL 82.10 Item 7.
82-111-00 The media path sensor (5) has detected a sheet mismatch, the sheet was too long.
82-112-00 The media path sensor (5) has detected a sheet mismatch, the sheet was too short.
82-113-00 Media path sensor (5) lead edge timeout.
Enter dC330 code 82-001 vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001. Press Start. The motor
runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check the vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001. Refer to:
82-114-00 Media path sensor (5) trail edge timeout.

82-152-00 The sheet has arrived at the media path sensor (5) too early.
82-157-00 The media path sensor (5) has detected the sheet was too long. The machine will
auto purge the media path.
82-158-00 The media path sensor (5) has detected the sheet was too short. The machine will
82-165-00 The media path sensor (5) has detected the sheet was too short. The machine will
not auto purge the media path.
82-159-00 MP MP2 stall bridged sheet zone 1A.

82-164-00 The media path sensor (5) has detected the sheet was too long. The machine will
not auto purge the media path.
Vertical transport motor (M2), PL 82.10 Item 12.
The vertical transport rolls, PL 82.10 rotate.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and gears on the vertical transport, PL 82.10.
82-166-00 TTM horizontal transport bridge sheet in zone 1A.
Initial Actions
Transport rolls, PL 82.10.
Drive belts, PL 82.10.
Drive gears, PL 82.10.
WARNING
Enter dC140 Analog Monitor. Select 82-100 vertical transport motor encoder (M2). Press Start.
The number of ticks (i.e. 36 ticks) will flash on the display and then return to show 0 ticks.
Repeat by selecting stop and then start on the popup menu, the number only remains for a few
seconds. The number of ticks is displayed.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check the vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001 and the encoder wire
harness. Refer to:
Check the paper stack in the tray.
Check that the tray guides are against the edges of the paper.
Check that the tray is pushed fully home.
Check that the upper and mid left side doors are latched.
If glossy media is used then instruct the customer to feed the media from the bypass tray
and select glossy for the media type.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 82-110 vertical transport sensor (5), Q82-110. Press Start. Open the mid left
door then manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check the vertical transport sensor (5), Q82-110. Refer to:
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the transport roll assembly, PL 82.10.
The idler rolls in the middle left door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 16.
The transport rolls for wear, PL 82.10.
A
February 2013
2-327
82-110-00 to 82-114-00, 82-152-00, 82-157-00 to 82-
82-125-00 to 82-133-00, 82-153-00, 82-160-00, 82-162-00,

82-163-00 Confirm Sensor (16) RAP
82-125-00 The sheet has arrived at the confirm sensor (16) too early.
82-126-00 The confirm sensor (16) has detected the sheet was too long. The machine will auto
purge the media path.
82-127-00 The confirm sensor (16) has detected the sheet was too short. The machine will
runs.
Y
N
82-128-00 The confirm sensor (16) has detected a sheet mismatch, the sheet was too long.
82-129-00 The confirm sensor (16) has detected a sheet mismatch, the sheet was too short.
82-130-00 Lead edge late to the confirm sensor (16) from the tree tray module.
82-131-00 Trail edge late at the confirm sensor (16).

82-153-00 The sheet has arrived at the confirm sensor (16) too early.
82-160-00 MP MP2 stall bridged sheet zone 2
82-162-00 The confirm sensor (16) has detected the sheet was too long. The machine will not
The vertical transport rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the vertical transport, PL 82.10.
82-163-00 The confirm sensor (16) has detected the sheet was too short. The machine will not
Initial Actions
WARNING
Y
N
Check the paper stack in the tray.
Check that the tray guides are against the edges of the paper.
Check that the tray is pushed fully home.
Check that the upper and mid left doors are fully latched.
If a 82-130-00 fault occurs when feeding from the bypass tray. Check the bypass feed roll
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 82-125 confirm sensor (16), Q82-125. Press Start. Open the upper left door
then manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check the confirm sensor (16), Q82-125. Refer to:
Check the wiring for damage and correct harness routing to the vertical paper path.
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the transport roll assembly, PL 82.10,
The idler rolls in the upper left side door, PL 70.30 Item 4.
The transport rolls for wear, PL 82.10 Item 1, PL 82.10 Item 2.
A
82-125-00 to 82-133-00, 82-153-00, 82-160-00, 82-162-
February 2013
2-328
82-132-00, 82-155-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Duplex Mode

RAP
82-132-00 Lead edge timed out, sheet late at the media path sensor 16 in duplex mode.
82-155-00 Lead edge too early at the media path sensor 16 in duplex mode.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001and the encoder wire harness. Refer to:
Check the vertical and horizontal transport rolls for contamination or wear.
Check that the upper and middle left side doors are fully latched.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 82-125 confirm sensor (16), Q82-125. Press Start. Open the left hand door
and manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check confirm sensor (16), Q82-125. Refer to:

Confirm sensor 16, PL 82.10 Item 7.
Enter dC330 code 82-002 vertical transport motor (M2) (reverse), MOT82-001. Press Start.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001. Refer to:
Vertical Transport motor 2, PL 82.10 Item 12.

Y
N
Enter dC330 code 82-004 Horizontal transport motor (M6) (reverse), MOT82-003. Press Start.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003. Refer to:
Horizontal transport motor (M6), PL 82.15 Item 9.
The horizontal transport rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the horizontal transport, PL 82.10 / PL 82.15.
Enter dC140 Analog Monitor. Select 82-102 horizontal transport motor encoder (M6). Press
Start. The number of ticks (i.e. 36 ticks) will flash on the display and then return to show 0 ticks.
A
February 2013
2-329
82-132-00, 82-155-00
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003 and the encoder wire
harness. Refer to:
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the horizontal and vertical transport assembly.

NOTE: Calibration of the registration / preheat assembly, dC625, is only required when:
The registration / preheat assembly is removed or replaced.
The horizontal transport assembly is removed or replaced.
82-133-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Time out from Tray 5 RAP

82-133-00 Lead edge late to the media path sensor 16 when feeding from tray 5.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the paper in tray 5.
Check that the paper guides are set the correct paper size.
Check tray 5 feed assembly, PL 81.45 Item 2.
Check that the upper and middle left side doors are fully latched, PL 70.30 Item 14, PL
70.30 Item 16.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 82-125 confirm sensor (16), Q82-125. Press Start. Open the left hand door
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check confirm sensor (16), Q82-125. Refer to:
Calibration of the registration / preheat assembly is NOT required when:
A printhead is replaced.
The IOD assembly is removed or replaced.
01D, +5V Distribution RAP.
runs.
Y
N

Y
N
A
82-132-00, 82-155-00, 82-133-00
February 2013
2-330
82-140-00, 82-142-00 Media Path Sheet Too Wide or Narrow

RAP
82-140-00 Media path sheet too wide.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001and the encoder wire harness. Refer to:
82-142-00 Media path sheet too narrow.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the paper guides are set correctly in the paper tray.
Check for the correct size of paper in the tray.
The paper size shown on the UI screen indicates the same paper size that is in the paper
tray. If different, then reset the paper guides in the tray so that the two match.
Procedure
This dimension is measured by the registration scan bar (10) Q89-005 on the registration / preheat assembly.
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the transport roll assembly, PL 82.10.
Refer to WD 8.6. Check the connection of the ribbon cable between the registration scan
bar and PJ1 on the registration / preheat interface PWB.
Remove the registration / preheat assembly, REP 89.1.
Check tray 5 feed assembly, PL 81.45 Item 2.
Check and clean the registration scan bar sensor, PL 88.10 Item 2.
Remove and clean the scan bar baffle and the scan bar with lint free cloth, PL 26.10
Item 6.
If the fault is still present then install new components as necessary:
1.
Registration / preheat assembly, PL 88.10 Item 1.
2.
Media Path Driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
February 2013
2-331
82-133-00, 82-140-00, 82-142-00
82-141-00, 82-147-00, 82-148-00, 82-154-00 Media Path

Sensor 14 RAP
82-141-00 or 82-154-00 The sheet has arrived too early at media path sensor 14.
82-147-00 Lead edge time out, sheet late at the media path sensor 14 at pre-registration.
82-148-00 Trail edge time out, sheet late clearing at the media path sensor 14 at pre-registration.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the upper left side door is latched correctly.
Procedure
Duplex end sensor (14), PL 82.15 Item 3.
Enter dC330 code 83-125 duplex end sensor (14), Q83-125, PL 82.15 Item 3. Press Start.
Open the front door and manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check duplex end sensor (14), Q83-125. Refer to:
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001 and check the encoder
wire harness. Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 82-003 Horizontal transport motor (M6) (forward), MOT82-003. Press Start.
The motor runs.
Y
N
runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check vertical transport motor, MOT82-001. Refer to:

Y
N
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the horizontal transport, PL 82.15.
Transport rolls, PL 82.15 Item 10.
Drive belts, PL 82.15 Item 7.
Vertical Transport motor (M2), PL 82.10 Item 12.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the vertical transport, PL 82.10
A
82-141-00, 82-147-00, 82-148-00, 82-154-00
NOTE: Under powered stepper motors can still operate in component control. Check dC123
PEST fault history and check for under powered motors.
February 2013
2-332
N
harness. Refer to:
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check SOL82-007. Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 89-007 registration motor A1 (M3), MOT89-007. Press Start. The
runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check registration motor A1 (M3), MOT89-007. Refer to:
motor
Enter dC330 code 82-008 Nip D release solenoid, SOL82-008, PL 70.30 Item 13. Press Start.
SOL82-008 energizes.
Y
N
Registration / preheat assembly, PL 88.10 Item 1
Media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5
runs.
Y
N
motor
Registration / preheat IF PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10
Enter dC330 code 89-016 Registration / preheat hatch open. Press Start. The hatch opens.
Y
N
Check the hatch lift mechanism for damage.
Enter dC330 code 82-007 Nip C release solenoid, SOL82-007. Press Start. The
energizes.
Enter dC330 code 83-004 HPP diverter solenoid, SOL83-004. Press Start. Check that the
diverter gate moves correctly when activating the solenoid The solenoid energizes.
Y
N

HPP diverter solenoid, PL 82.15 Item 5.

The bearing, shaft and rolls on the horizontal and vertical transport assembly, PL 82.10 /
PL 82.15.
Check the grounding of the horizontal paper path, GP 7.


solenoid
February 2013
2-333
82-141-00, 82-147-00, 82-148-00, 82-154-00
A
Y
N
82-145-00, 82-146-00, 82-150-00, 82-151-00, 82-156-00

Media Path Sensor 14 Time Out in Duplex Mode RAP
82-145-00 The sheet was too long to clear sensor 14 in duplex mode.
82-146-00 The sheet was too short to clear the media path sensor 14 in duplex mode.
82-150-00 Lead edge late too the media path sensor 14 in duplex mode.
82-156-00 Lead edge of sheet too early at the media path sensor 14 in duplex mode.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Transport rolls, PL 82.10 Item 1, PL 82.10 Item 2.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check vertical transport motor (M2), MOT82-001 and the encoder wire
harness. Refer to:
82-151-00 Trail edge late too clear the media path sensor 14 in duplex mode.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 83-125 duplex end sensor (14), Q83-125. Press Start. Open the front door
Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check duplex end sensor (14), Q83-125. Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 82-008 nip D release solenoid, SOL82-008. Press Start. The
energize.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.3. Check nip D release solenoid, SOL82-008. Refer to:
Duplex end sensor 14, PL 82.15 Item 3.
runs.
Y
N
energizes.
Y
N
Vertical Transport motor (M2), PL 82.10 Item 12.
A
82-145-00, 82-146-00, 82-150-00, 82-151-00, 82-156-00
solenoid
solenoid
B
February 2013
2-334
B
diverter gate moves correctly when activating the solenoid The solenoid energizes.
Y
N
runs.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 82-003 Horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003. Press Start. The
motor runs.
Y
N

runs.
Y
N
motor
motor

Y
N
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the horizontal transport, PL 82.15.
Registration / preheat IF PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the horizontal and vertical transport assembly,
Drive gears, PL 82.15
Check the grounding of the horizontal paper path, GP 7.

Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003and encoder wire harness. Refer to:
C
February 2013
2-335
82-145-00, 82-146-00, 82-150-00, 82-151-00, 82-156-
A
Enter dC330 code 70-025 3 tray transport motor, MOT70-025. Press Start. The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 7.5. Check 3 tray transport motor, MOT70-025. Refer to:
82-161-00 Early Confirm Timeout RAP

82-161-00 Early confirm timeout.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the tray 3 horizontal transport rolls.
Enter dC330 code 73-397 TAR 3 Sensor, Q73-397, PL 81.35 Item 18. Press Start. Pull out the
horizontal transport. Manually actuate the sensor by placing a piece of paper over the sensor
but not in the nip rolls. Push in the horizontal transport.
NOTE: Sensors Q73-397 and Q70-398 in the horizontal transport, have the same item number. Ensure you check the correct sensor.
Y
N
Go to WD 7.4. Check TAR 3 Sensor, Q73-397. Refer to:
Check for obstructions in the tray 3 horizontal transport paper path.
Procedure
The transport rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the gears and drive belt, PL 73.16.
If the fault still occurs, check the grounding of the following, GP 7:
The takeaway roll assembly, PL 81.35 Item 16.
The transport roll 2 assembly, PL 81.35 Item 15.
The transport roll 1 assembly, PL 81.35 Item 14.
Enter dC330 code 70-398 tray 3 transport sensor, Q70-398, PL 81.35 Item 18. Press Start. Pull
out the horizontal transport. Manually actuate the sensor by placing a piece of paper over the
sensor but not in the nip rolls. Push in the horizontal transport.
NOTE: Sensors Q73-397 and Q70-398 in the horizontal transport, have the same item number. Ensure you check the correct sensor.
Y
N
Go to WD 7.4. Check tray 3 transport sensor, Q70-398. Refer to:
Tray 3 transport sensor, PL 81.35 Item 18.
A
82-161-00
February 2013
2-336
82-500-00, 82-501-00 Vertical Transport Motor M2 Failure

RAP
82-500-00 Transport motor M2 over current fault.
82-501-00 Transport motor M2 stalled.
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the transport roll assembly,
Transport rolls, PL 82.10 Item 1, PL 82.10 Item 2.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the vertical transport rolls, gears and drive belts for contamination or wear.
Procedure
runs.
Y
N
Y
N
Check the wiring for damage and correct harness routing to the vertical paper path.
February 2013
2-337
82-500-00, 82-501-00
A
Y
N
harness. Refer to:
82-502-00, 82-503-00 Horizontal Transport Motor M6

Failure RAP
82-503-00 Transport motor M6 stalled.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for obstructions in the horizontal paper path.
Check the nip rolls on the horizontal paper path, PL 82.15 Item 10.
Procedure
Clean the pre transfix sensor 20, PL 88.10 Item 12 and refer to GP 27. The fault remains.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 89-006 pre transfix sensor (20), Q89-006. Press Start. Manually actuate the
sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.6. Check pre transfix sensor 20, Q89-006. Refer to:
Check the wiring for damage, REP 1.1.
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the horizontal paper path, PL 82.15 Item 14.
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the horizontal paper path, PL 82.15.
Transport drive belts, PL 82.15 Item 7.
REP 89.1 Registration / preheat Assembly and Lower Platelet Assembly
Drive belt, PL 82.15 Item 8.
PJ5, Registration / preheat IF PWB.
Pre transfix sensor (20), PL 88.10 Item 12.
Registration / preheat IF PWB, PL 88.10 Item 10.
Media path PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Enter dC330 code 82-003 horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003. Press Start. The
motor runs.
Y
N
A
82-502-00, 82-503-00
February 2013
2-338
82-507-00, 82-508-00 Nip C and Nip D Release Solenoid

Over Current RAP
82-510-00 Trailer Slowdown Calculation Fail RAP

82-510-00 System timing error.
82-507-00 An over current condition was detected with nip C release solenoid.
Procedure
WARNING
82-508-00 An over current condition was detected with nip D release solenoid.
Procedure
WARNING
Refer to WD 8.1, WD 8.2, WD 8.3, WD 8.4 and WD 8.5. Perform the following:
Check the PJ connections on the media path driver PWB.
Check the wiring for damage.
Check the nip C release solenoid mechanism, PL 82.15 Item 4.
Check the nip D release solenoid mechanism, PL 70.30 Item 13.
Check the nip C release solenoid, refer to WD 8.1, and GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid
or Clutch.
Check the nip D release solenoid, refer to WD 8.3, and GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid
or Clutch.
Go to WD 1.5 and WD 8.5. Check the harness and voltages between PJ 803 on the
media path driver PWB and PJDC3 on the power supply unit. Install new components or
repair harness as necessary, REP 1.1.
Media Path Driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Power Supply Unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
February 2013
2-339
82-507-00, 82-508-00, 82-510-00
83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 Media

Path Sensor 13 Duplex Mode RAP
83-110-00 The sheet too long over media path sensor 13 at duplex start.
83-111-00 The sheet too short over media path sensor 13 at duplex start.
A
The diverter gate moves freely.
Y
N
Check the operation and condition of the diverter gate. If necessary install a new exit
paper path assembly, PL 10.15 Item 19.
Enter dC330 code 83-001 exit motor (M5), MOT83-001. Press Start. The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.2. Check exit motor (M5), MOT83-001. Refer to:
83-113-00 Media path invert sensor 13 too short at duplex start.

83-114-00 Duplex start sensor 13 LE timeout
83-118-00 Sheet arrived too early at the media path sensor 13.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the exit paper path and transport rolls for contamination or wear, PL 10.15.
If the fault was caused while running glossy media. Instruct the customer to feed the
media from the bypass tray and select glossy for the media type on the UI.
The exit paper path rolls rotate.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the exit paper path, PL 10.15.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 83-110 duplex start sensor (13), Q83-110. Press Start. Open the front door
Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check duplex start sensor (13), Q83-110. Refer to:
N and P nip rolls, PL 10.15 Item 1.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Duplex start sensor (13), PL 10.15 Item 3.
Enter dC330 code 83-006 exit duplex diverter solenoid, SOL83-006. Press Start. The
noid energize.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check exit duplex diverter, SOL83-006. Refer to:
soleThe horizontal paper path rolls rotate.

Y
N
Nip and takeaway rolls, PL 82.15 Item 10.
A
83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-00
B
February 2013
2-340
B
Y
N
harness. Refer to:
01L 0V DIstribution RAP.
HPP diverter solenoid, PL 82.15 Item 5
Horizontal paper path assembly, PL 82.15 Item 1.
Check the bearings, drive shafts and nip rolls on the exit paper path, PL 10.15.
Enter dC330 code 82-007 nip C release solenoid, SOL 82-007, press start. The
energizes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1, check SOL 82-007, refer to:
PJ405 Media Path Driver PWB.
solenoid
Enter dC330 code 82-008 nip D release solenoid, SOL 82-008, press start. The
energizes.
Y
N
solenoid
Enter dC330 code 83-004 HPP diverter solenoid, SOL 83-004, press start. Ensure that the
HPP diverter gate moves fully when the solenoid is energized and returns fully when the solenoid is generalized. The solenoid energizes and the diverter gate moves correctly.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1, check SOL 83004. Refer to:
C
February 2013
2-341
83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-
83-112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00, 83-119-00 Media

Path Sensor 13 Invert Mode RAP
83-112-00 The sheet too long over media path sensor 13 at invert.
The diverter gate moves freely.

Y
N
Check the operation and condition of the diverter gate. If necessary install a new diverter
gate, PL 10.15 Item 17.
83-115-00 The trailing edge times out over media path sensor 13 at invert
83-116-00 The leading edge was late too media path sensor 13at invert
83-117-00 The trailing edge was late over media path sensor 13 at invert.
83-119-00 Lead edge of sheet arrive too early at media path sensor 13 when inverting to output
Y
N
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the exit paper path rolls.
If tabbed sheets are used, inform the customer to ensure that the sheets are fed with tab
trailing.
If pre-drilled paper is used, check that the pre-drilled pages are fed with the holes trailing.
The Exit paper path rolls rotate.

Y
N
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 83-110 duplex start sensor (13), Q83-110. Press Start. Open the front door
Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check duplex start sensor (13), Q83-110. Refer to:
N and P nip rolls, PL 10.15.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Duplex start sensor (13), PL 10.15 Item 3.

Enter dC330 code 83-006 exit / duplex diverter solenoid, SOL83-006. Press Start. The
noid energize.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.1. Check exit / duplex diverter solenoid, SOL83-006. Refer to:
A
83-112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00, 83-119-00
sole-
The horizontal paper path rolls rotate.

Y
N
Nip and takeaway rolls, PL 82.15 Item 10.
B
February 2013
2-342
Y
N
harness. Refer to:
N
Check the bearings, drive shafts and nip rolls on the exit paper path, PL 10.15.
energizes.
Y
N
solenoid
energizes.
Y
N
PJ405 Media Path Driver PWB
solenoid
February 2013
2-343
83-112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00, 83-119-
83-120-00 to 83-125-00 Media Path Sensor 17 RAP
83-120-00 Detected a sheet length too long over media path sensor 17.
83-121-00 Detected a sheet length too short over media path sensor 17.
83-122-00 Lead edge of sheet to late at media path sensor 17.
83-124-00 Trail edge of sheet failed to clear media path sensor 17 in time when inverting to
output
83-125-00 Lead edge of sheet arrives too early at media path sensor 17.
Initial Actions
WARNING

Y
N
Check the drive belts and drive gears on the horizontal transport, PL 82.15.
83-123-00 The trailing edge was late to clear media path sensor 17.
Drive belts, PL 82.15 Item 7 and PL 82.15 Item 8.
Drive gears, PL 82.15 Item 6, PL 82.15 Item 13 and PL 82.15 Item 16.
Y
N
Check the vertical and horizontal transport rolls.
If tabbed sheets are used, inform the customer to ensure that the sheets are fed with tab
trailing.
If pre-drilled paper is used, check that the pre-drilled pages are fed with the holes trailing.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 83-010 duplex sensor (17), Q83-010. Press Start. Open the front door and
manually actuate the sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check duplex sensor (17), Q83-010. Refer to:
Y
N
Duplex sensor 17, PL 82.15 Item 3.
A
83-120-00 to 83-125-00
Enter dC330 code 82-003 Horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003. Press Start. Then
enter the code 82-004 to run the motor in reverse. The motor runs in both forward and
reverse directions.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.5. Check Horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003. Refer to:
energizes.
Y
N
solenoid
B
February 2013
2-344
83-500-00 Output Transport Motor M5 Failure RAP
Initial Actions
energizes.
Y
N
PJ405 Media Path Driver PWB
WARNING
solenoid
Procedure
Y
N
The idler rolls in the middle left door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 16.
The transport rolls for wear, PL 82.10 Item 1 and PL 82.10 Item 2.
The components are all working correctly, check the paper path for any foreign object that
would hinder paper transport.
Check the items that follow, if necessary install new components:
The bearing, shaft and rolls on the horizontal transport assembly, PL 82.15.
Check for obstructions in the exit paper path.
The bearing, shaft and nip rolls on the nip roller N, PL 10.15 Item 1.
Check the wiring for damage.
Nip rolls, PL 10.15 Item 1 and PL 10.15 Item 6.
Drive belts, PL 10.15 Item 8 and PL 10.15 Item 9.
Drive gears, PL 10.15 Item 12.
February 2013
2-345
83-120-00 to 83-125-00, 83-500-00
83-504-00 HPP Diverter Solenoid Failure RAP
83-506-00 Nip D Release Solenoid Failure RAP
83-504-00 HPP diverter solenoid over current fault.
83-506-00 Nip D release solenoid over current fault.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 83-004 HPP diverter solenoid, SOL83-004. Press Start. The
energizes.
Y
N
Procedure
solenoid
Enter dC330 code 82-008 Nip D release solenoid, SOL82-008, PL 70.30 Item 13. Press Start.
SOL82-008 energizes.
Y
N
Check the operation and condition of the diverter gate. Ensure that the energized solenoid
moves the diverter gate fully. If necessary install a new horizontal paper path assembly, PL
82.15 Item 1.
83-504-00, 83-506-00
Check the operation of the nip release link arm, PL 70.30 Item 10. If necessary, install a new
upper left door, PL 70.30 Item 18.
February 2013
2-346
88-500-00 to 88-502-00, 88-512-00 Preheat Thermal Error

RAP
88-501-00 The registration / preheat assembly is too slow to warm up.
The resistance of both pre-heaters is within specification.

Y
N
Check the wiring between PJ5AC, WD 1.2 on the power supply unit and PJ140 on the
Registration / preheat assembly. Repair damaged wiring or install a new registration / preheat assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.
88-502-00 The registration / preheat assembly thermistor has failed.
Install a new power supply, PL 1.15 Item 2.
88-500-00 The registration / preheat assembly is too hot.
88-512-00 The preheat heater went unstable while printing.

Registration / preheat
interface PWB
Initial Actions
WARNING
If the fault code is 88-500-00 then install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Check the 2 wiring harnesses leading to the registration / preheat assembly interface
PWB, Figure 1.
Check the 2 wiring harnesses leading to the chassis bulkhead from the registration / preheat assembly.
Procedure
Enter dC335 and test the registration / preheat thermistor. Select RaLPH in the component list.
NOTE: The registration / preheat thermistor is mounted on the underside of the heater plate.
The temperature read out changes as the RaLPH warms up, cools down and is approximately correct.
Y
N
Install a new registration / preheat assembly, PL 88.10 Item 1. Calibrate the new assembly, dC625.
Check the resistance at media path driver PWB, WD 8.1 from PJ104 pin 16 to 17. Resistance
should measure approximately 240K ohms cold or 42K ohms hot. The resistance is within
specification.
Y
N
Check connections at media path driver PWB, WD 8.1 PJ104 pin 16 to registration / preheat interface PWB, WD 8.6 PJ4 pin 3 and media path driver PWB, WD 8.1 from PJ104
pin 17 to registration / preheat interface PWB, WD 8.6 PJ4 pin 2. Repair or install new
components as necessary.
Refer to WD 1.2. Disconnect PJ5AC from the power supply unit. Check the electrical resistance of the registration/pre-heaters by measuring the resistance across the pins of the PJ5AC
harness as follows:

ohms.

ohms.
Thermal cut out on the

heater located under
the lower plate.
Thermal cut out on the

heater located under
the upper plate.

NOTE: Calibration of the registration/preheat assembly, dC625 is only required when:
The registration / preheat assembly is removed or replaced,
February 2013
2-347
88-500-00 to 88-502-00, 88-512-00
88-508-00 Registration / Preheat Air Pump Incorrect

Current RAP
88-508-00 The registration / preheat air pumps are drawing incorrect current.
Procedure
WARNING
Registration / preheat
air pumps
NOTE: Air pump motors vibrate slightly when running, feeling the motor as it starts, stops and
runs is the best way to determine if the motor is operating. Use dc330 to test.
NOTE: W/TAG 018 machines do not have air pumps install as standard. However, the preheat
air pumps in a replacement registration/preheat assembly will function when the unit is
installed, refer to service bulletin T8009-12-06.
Enter dC330 and test the registration / preheat air pumps MOT88-008, Figure 1. Refer to GP
10, How to Check a Motor. The pumps run.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.6. Check connections at PJ5 of the registration / preheat interface PWB
and at each pump. The connections are secure.
Y
N
Reseat all connections to the pump motors and registration / preheat interface PWB.
Refer to WD 8.1. Check for +12V at PJ104 pin 21 on the media path driver PWB. +12V
is present.
Y
N
Check the +12V distribution, go to the 01E +12V Distribution RAP. If necessary,
install a new media driver path PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Refer to WD 8.1. Check the wiring between PJ104 on the media path driver PWB and PJ4
on the registration / preheat interface PWB. If the wiring is good, install new air pumps PL
88.10 Item 3, PL 88.10 Item 5. If the error persists, install a new registration / preheat
assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.
The fault may be intermittent, if the error persists, install new air pumps PL 88.10 Item 3, PL
88.10 Item 5.
88-508-00

NOTE: Calibration of the registration / preheat assembly, dC625 is only required when:
The registration/preheat assembly is removed or replaced,
February 2013
2-348
89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00 Media Path Sensor 10

Failure RAP
89-110-00 The sheet is too long at registration.

89-111-00 The sheet is too short over media path sensor 10 at registration.
89-112-00 The leading edge was late to the media path sensor 10 at registration.
N
89-113-00 The trailing edge was late over media path sensor 10 at registration.
89-129-00 The sheet arrives late at nip rolls A.
energizes.
Y
N
Initial Actions
WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury
If the registration / preheat assembly was recently removed and reinstalled or installed a new
prior to this fault occurring. Check that the ribbon cable to the registration / preheat interface
PWB is seated correctly. Go to REP 89.1 and refer to figure 2 location of ribbon cable.
Procedure
Open the registration / preheat assembly cover assembly and heat shield. Refer to REP 10.7
to release the cover assembly. Insert a sheet of paper into the registration / preheat assembly
and cover the registration scan bar, PL 88.10 Item 2, Q89-005. Close the front door assembly.
The UI reports a paper jam in area 3a.
Y
N
Check the connection of the ribbon cable at the scan bar (sensor 10) and at the registration / preheat interface PWB, WD 8.6.
Reseat all connections to the registration / preheat interface PWB.
Install a new registration / preheat assembly, PL 88.10 Item 1.
solenoid
Enter dC330 code 82-008 Nip D release solenoid, SOL82-008. Press Start. The
energizes.
Y
N
solenoid

runs.
Y
N
motor
diverter gate moves correctly when activating the solenoid. The solenoid energizes.
Y
N

runs.
motor
A
February 2013
2-349
89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00
A
The motor runs.
Y
N
89-125-00 to 89-128-00, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 Media Path

Sensor 20 Failure RAP
89-125-00 The sheet is too long over media path sensor 20 at pre-transfix.
89-126-00 The sheet is too short over media path sensor 20 at pre-transfix.
89-127-00 The leading edge was late at media path sensor 20 at pre-transfix.
89-128-00 The trailing edge was late at media path sensor 20 at pre-transfix.
89-130-00 The lead edge of the sheet was too early at media path sensor 20.
89-131-00 The media path sensor 20 static jam, sensor may be dusty.

Y
N
Check the drive belt and drive gears on the horizontal transport, PL 82.10 / PL 82.15.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the registration transport for contamination or paper debris.
Check for shingled or multi-feed sheets. Go to OF 8 Multi-feed RAP and check the appropriate tray.
Start. Manually rotate the drive gears forward and backward. The display changes.
Y
N
Procedure
Clean the pre transfix sensor 20, PL 88.10 Item 12 and refer to GP 27. The fault remains.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 89-006 pre transfix sensor (20), Q89-006. Press Start. Manually actuate the
sensor. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.6. Check pre transfix sensor 20, Q89-006. Refer to:
Check the horizontal transport rolls and nip rolls. PL 82.15 Item 10.

REP 89.1 Registration / preheat Assembly and Lower Platelet Assembly
Pre transfix sensor (20), PL 88.10 Item 12.
Media path PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
A
89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00, 89-125-00 to 89-
February 2013
2-350
A
installed, refer to service bulletin T8009-12-06
Enter dC330 code 88-008 registration / preheat air pumps, MOT88-008. Press Start. The air
pumps run.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.6. Check registration / preheat air pumps, MOT88-008. Refer to:
89-500-00, 89-502-00 Registration Motor Over Current RAP

89-500-00 Motor M3_A1 current demand is inconsistent with expected value.
89-502-00 Motor M3_A2 current demand is inconsistent with expected value.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check and clear the media path.
Registration / preheat air pumps, PL 88.10 Item 5.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 1. Enter dC330 and test the registration motors (MOT89-007 and MOT89-008).
Refer to GP 10 How to check a motor. The motors run.
Y
N
Refer to WD 8.1. Check connections at PJ202 on the media path driver PWB. The connections are good.
Y
N
Reseat connections to the registration motors and registration / preheat interface
PWB. Check the bulkhead connector. Reseat the in-line connector to the chassis
bulkhead.
Check the registration transport for obstructions.
Check operation of the registration rollers when the motors are run. The rollers rotate.
Y
N
Check registration roller drive belts and drive gears for damage or debris.
If the fault persists, install a new registration / preheat assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.
The fault may be intermittent, if the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
Registration / preheat assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-351
89-125-00 to 89-128-00, 89-130-00, 89-131-00, 89-
89-504-00 Registration Sensor Over Current RAP

89-504-00 The registration sensor 10 current demand is inconsistent with expected value.
Procedure
WARNING
Registration motor A1
(M3), MOT89-007
Perform dC969 Clean Ink Smears. The pages exit the registration.
Y
N
Open the registration / preheat assembly cover assembly and heat shield. Refer to REP
10.7 to release the cover assembly. Insert a sheet of paper into the registration / preheat
assembly and cover the registration scan bar, Q89-005, Figure 1. Close the front door
assembly. The UI reports a paper jam in area 3a.
Y
N
PJ 1, Registration / preheat Interface PWB.
01C +3.3V Power Distribution RAP.

Registration motor A2
(M3), MOT89-008
The fault may be intermittent, if the error persists, install a new registration / preheat
assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.
The fault may be intermittent, if the error persists, install a new registration / preheat assembly
PL 88.10 Item 1.

89-500-00, 89-502-00, 89-504-00
February 2013
2-352
89-520-00 Home Sensor Timeout RAP

89-520-00 Stance sensor timeout.
The home sensor, mounted on the registration / preheat interface PWB, reports a value inconsistent with expected value.
Registration
scan bar,
Q89-005
Procedure
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 89-004 to check the registration / preheat home sensor Q89-004, Figure 1.
Manually rotate the drive shaft to actuate the sensor, Figure 2. The display changes.
Y
N
Check that the flag on the drive gear for damage, Figure 1.
Go to WD 8.6. Check the registration / preheat home sensor, Q89-004.
Refer to:
PJ4, Registration / preheat interface PWB.
01D +5V Power Distribution RAP.

Cover assembly
Figure 1 Registration/preheat assembly.
runs.
Y
N
runs.
Y
N
motor
motor
A
February 2013
2-353
89-504-00, 89-520-00
Perform the following actions:
Check for wiring damage or obstructions preventing jam clearance hatch movement.
Refer to REP 89.1.
If the error persists, install a new registration / preheat assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.
Reg / preheat home sensor Q89-004

(mounted on the PWB)
Sensor flag on
the drive gear
Rotate the drive shaft

89-520-00
February 2013
2-354
89-531-00 to 89-545-00 Registration Process Error RAP
89-550-00, 89-551-00 Media Registration Error RAP
89-531-00 The registration sensor (10) failed to detect the leading edge.
89-550-00 The registration sensor detected excessive skew on the incoming media.
89-551-00 The registration sensor detected excessive offset on the incoming media.
89-532-00 The registration sensor (10) timed out or failed to complete normally.
Initial Actions
89-533-00 The registration sensor (10) generated a floating point exception.
Ensure that the tray 3 paper tray guides are set correctly, ADJ 73.1.
89-534-00 The registration sensor (10) scan failed.
Check and clean the vertical and horizontal transport nip rolls up to the registration / preheat assembly.
89-540-00 Sensor 10 post registration processing failure.
Perform dC625 Registration / preheat Calibration routine.
Procedure
89-541-00 Sensor 10 post processing leading edge not detected.
Run the job from a different tray. The fault still occurs.
Y
N
Check the tray from which the fault occurs and install new components as necessary.
89-542-00 Sensor 10 post processing lateral edge not detected.

89-543-00 Sensor 10 post processing leading edge error.
89-544-00 Sensor 10 post processing lateral edge error.
89-545-00 Sensor 10 post processing leading edge crossing too small.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check for damage or debris that restricts movement of the assembly.
Check for dust or media debris around the registration scan bar.
Procedure
energizes.
Y
N


Enter dC330 code 82-008 Nip D release solenoid, SOL83-008. Press Start. The
energizes.
Y
N
solenoid

Enter dC715 Active registration control and disable registration control. Enter dC969 Clean Ink
Smears and run the routine. The pages exit the registration / preheat assembly.
Y
N
Go to the 89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00 Media Path Sensor 10 Failure RAP.
Install a new registration / preheat assembly, PL 88.10 Item 1
solenoid

Check the vertical and horizontal transport rolls and drive belts.Install new parts as necessary.
Refer to PL 82.10 for the vertical transport and PL 82.15 for the horizontal transport.

February 2013
2-355
89-531-00 to 89-545-00, 89-550-00, 89-551-00
89-555-00 Media Registration Out of Range RAP
89-561-00 Media Registration Parameters Reset RAP
89-555-00 The stored registration correction values are out of range.
89-561-00 Registration / preheat assembly calibration failed.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Calibrate the assembly using dC625 registration calibration routine.
If the fault 89-555-00 occurs and the media has severe skew or offset, go to 89-550-00,
89-551-00 Media Registration Error RAP.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Perform dC969 to print chase sheets to determine if NVM is restored. Chase sheets print without error.
Y
N
Open the registration / preheat assembly cover assembly and heat shield. Refer to REP
10.7 to release the cover assembly. Insert a sheet of paper into the registration / preheat
assembly and cover the registration scan bar, PL 88.10 Item 2, Q89-005. Close the front
door assembly. The UI reports a paper jam in area 3a.
Y
N
PJ 1, Registration / preheat Interface PWB.
01C +3.3V Power Distribution RAP.

Check system grounding, go to GP 7. The system grounding is good.
Y
N
Correct any system grounding issues, then retest.
Check for debris or obstructions in the media path.
Enter dC625 and run the registration calibration routine. Calibration is successful.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.6. Check all connections.
Refer to:
PJ 1 Registration / preheat interface PWB.
PJ 2 to PJ 701 on the Drum driver PWB.
PJ 4 to PJ 104 on the Media path driver PWB.
Reseat any loose connections.

Check system grounding, go to GP 7. The system grounding is good.
Y
N
Correct any system grounding issues, then retest.
Registration / preheat assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.

Install a new registration / preheat assembly PL 88.10 Item 1.

Check and clear the registration / preheat assembly.
89-555-00, 89-561-00
February 2013
2-356
89-562-00 Incorrect Media RAP
89-564-00 Calibration Image Error RAP
89-562-00 No media of the specified size is available.
89-564-00 The machine failed to create a calibration image or sheet.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check that the machines settings match the media loaded in all trays.
If the fault occurs when dC625 Registration / preheat Calibration is run. Then ensure that
there is a minimum of 30 sheets loaded in the tray of A4 or 8.5 x 11inch media in long
edge feed orientation.
Procedure
Procedure
Check that the correct media in the appropriate paper tray. If necessary load the correct media
and / or adjust the paper guides.
If the correct media is loaded, trouble shoot the relevant tray:
74A Bypass Tray Size Sensing Problems RAP.
This fault is caused by a hardware memory failure within the IME.

Remove and reseat the NVRAM, PL 92.10 Item 11 on the IME Controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item
1. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Install the RAM from a new IME Controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
For tray 3, check the settings in the UI match what is loaded.

Tray 5 is fixed so this fault will not be seen.
February 2013
2-357
89-562-00, 89-564-00
89-565-00, 89-566-00 Scan Measurement Was Out Of

Range RAP
89-567-00 Calibration Scan Detected Floating Point

Exception RAP
89-565-00 The intermediate registration value is not valid.
89-567-00 Calibration scan detected floating point exception. This occurs because the scan
did not detect the registration calibration image correctly.
89-566-00 The computed calibration parameter is out of range.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
If the media has severe skew or offset, go to 89-550-00, 89-551-00 Media Registration
Error RAP.
If the media has severe skew or offset, go to 89-550-00, 89-551-00 Media Registration
Error RAP.
Check for a Service code to indicate the machine is running in degraded mode, refer to
OF 12 Service Code RAP.
Check for a Service code to indicate the machine is running in degraded mode, refer to
OF 12 Service Code RAP.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
An error with either IOD alignment or Y runout needs to be resolved before running the dC625
Registration / preheat Calibration. Refer to 91-637-00 Drum Runout Calibration Needed RAP.
Check connections between the registration / preheat interface PWB at PJ2 and drum driver
PWB at PJ701. Refer to WD 8.6 and WD 9.2. Repair harness as necessary, REP 1.1.
If the fault continues install new components in order:
1.
2.
89-565-00, 89-566-00, 89-567-00
February 2013
2-358
91-500-00, 91-600-00 Initial Position Error RAP
91-501-00 to 91-502-00 Image Timing Error RAP
91-500-00 The staggered full width array (SFWA) was not left at the correct position to start the
imaging process.
91-501-00 Printhead image timing error.

91-502-00 Marking sequence timing error.
91-600-00 The staggered full width array (SFWA) stitch or roll motor un-initialized failure.
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
The SWFA was not in the correct position to start the imaging process. The mechanisms were
or may have been moved manually instead of under the software control. This fault will not
occur under normal operation.
Use care when opening the marking unit drawer when hot. Ink can spill from the ink reservoir
located at the back of the drawer if opened with too much force. Ink cross-color contamination
could also occur.
1.
Do not touch the exposed face of the printheads. Surface contamination or minor damage can
destroy the printhead. Printheads must only be cleaned by a purge cycle.
2.
Manually move the upper and lower carriages to the parked position, refer to GP 6.
3.
4.
If the fault is still present then re-load the software, GP 4.
CAUTION
NOTE: The LED on the upper (master) printhead circuit board indicates the presence of +3.3
V.
Retry the affected job. Print samples may help to identify the cause of the fault.
Check the error history for similar or related events.
Check the service loop for abrasions, PL 92.10 Item 9.
Procedure
Check system grounding, refer to GP 7. The system grounding is good.
Y
N
Correct any system grounding faults, refer to GP 7. Pay particular attention to the exit,
transfix roller, and drum ground connections.
Make a copy from the DADH. The fault remains.
Y
N
Install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-359
91-500-00, 91-600-00, 91-501-00 to 91-502-00
91-503-00 Print Image Data Did Not Arrive From the

Controller in Time RAP
91-504-00, 91-505-00 Printhead Stitch Motor Over Current

RAP
91-503-00 The image did not reach the IME controller PWB.
91-504-00 The printhead stitch adjust motor 1 current demand exceeds expected value.
Procedure
91-505-00 The printhead stitch adjust motor 2 current demand exceeds expected value.
WARNING
Go to 92-581-00 Image Transfer Error RAP.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
NOTE: Override the front door interlock to provide voltage to the motor under test.
Ensure that the harnesses leading to the motors and surrounding components are routed
correctly and secured by the harness clamps, refer to GP 28. Focus on areas above and
behind the umbilicals.
Check for damage or debris that restricts printhead movement.
Procedure
Open the marking unit drawer, GP 6 to observe the motors, Figure 1. Enter dC330 code 91029 or 91-030 to run the relevant printhead stitch adjust motor, MOT91-029 (1) or MOT91-030
(2).
NOTE: Movement of the motors is small. If necessary, mark the lead screw of the motor to see
the movement.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.9 and WD 9.10. Check MOT91-029 or MOT91-030.
Refer to:

NOTE: The motor will not turn freely due to the gear reduction.
PJ303 (motor 1) or PJ102 (motor 2), Marking Unit Driver PWB.
01H +24V Power Distribution RAP.
Printhead stitch adjust motor 1, PL 91.25 Item 4.
A
91-503-00, 91-504-00, 91-505-00
February 2013
2-360
A
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment, then check the image quality, refer
to IQ 1.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking motor or printhead movement. The printhead area
is free of obstructions.
Y
N
Clean the area and retest.
Check the wire routing along the carriage for abrasions. Install a new wire harness or repair the
harness, REP 1.1 as necessary. If the error persists, install a new printhead stitch adjust motor,
PL 91.20 Item 4.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment, then check the image quality, refer to IQ
1.
91-506-00 to 91-509-00 Roll Motor Over Current RAP

91-506-00 The printhead roll adjust motor 1 current demand exceeds expected value.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
Ensure that the harnesses leading to the printhead and surrounding component are
routed correctly and secured by the harness clamps, refer to GP 28. Focus on areas
above and behind the umbilicals.
Check for damage or debris that restricts printhead movement.
Procedure
Printhead stitch
adjust motor 1,
MOT91-029
Printhead stitch
adjust motor 2,
MOT91-030
Open the marking unit drawer, GP 6 to observe the motors. Enter dC330 code to run the relevant printhead roll adjust motor, MOT91-024 (1), MOT91-026 (2), MOT91-027 (3), MOT91-028
(4), Figure 1.
NOTE: Movement of the motors is small. If necessary, mark the lead screw of the motor to see
the movement.
The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.9 or WD 9.10. Check the relevant motor.
Refer to:

NOTE: The motor will not turn freely due to the gear reduction.
PJ303 (motor 1 and 3) PJ102 (motor 2 and 4), Marking Unit Driver PWB.
Printhead roll adjust motor, PL 91.20 Item 4 or PL 91.25 Item 4.

A
February 2013
2-361
91-504-00, 91-505-00, 91-506-00 to 91-509-00
91-510-00, 91-511-00 X Axis Motor Over Current RAP
Marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment, then check the image quality, refer
to IQ 1.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking motor or printhead movement. The
free of obstructions.
Y
N
printhead
is
91-510-00 The upper X axis motor current demands exceed expected value.
91-511-00 The lower X axis motor current demands exceed expected value.
Initial Actions
WARNING
harness, REP 1.1 as necessary. If the error persists, install a new printhead roll adjust motor,
PL 91.20 Item 4.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment, then check the image quality, refer to IQ
1.
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
Check the harness leading to the carriage and surrounding components, refer to GP 28.
Focus on areas above and behind the umbilicals.
Check for damage to the harness and possible shorts.
Procedure
Printhead roll
adjust motor 4,
MOT91-028
Printhead roll
adjust motor 2,
MOT91-026
Printhead roll
adjust motor 1,
MOT91-024
Open the marking unit drawer, GP 6 to observe the motors. Enter dC330 codes 91-033 and 91034 to run the upper X axis drive motor, MOT91-033 and the lower X axis drive motor, MOT91034, Figure 1. MOT91-033 and MOT91-034 run.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.9 and WD 9.11. Check MOT91-033 or MOT91-034.
Refer to:
Printhead roll
adjust motor 3,
MOT91-027
PJ303 (lower) PJ102 (upper), Marking Unit Driver PWB.
Upper axis drive motor, PL 91.20 Item 5.
Lower axis drive motor, PL 91.25 Item 5.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking motor or printhead movement. The

free of obstructions.
Y
N
printhead
is
harness, REP 1.1 as necessary. If the error persists, install new components as necessary:
91-506-00 to 91-509-00, 91-510-00, 91-511-00
Upper axis drive motor, PL 91.20 Item 5.
February 2013
2-362
Lower axis drive motor, PL 91.25 Item 5.
91-512-00, 91-605-00 Marking Unit Motor Short RAP
91-512-00 The carriage docking motor current demand exceeds expected value.
91-605-00 One of several marking unit motors, driven by the marking unit driver PWB, is drawing more current than expected.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
X axis drive motor lower,
MOT91-034
X axis drive motor upper,

MOT91-033
Ensure that the harnesses leading to the marking unit motors are secured by the harness
clamps, refer to GP 28.
Check for damage or debris restricting motor movement.
Procedure
Enter dC330. Run the following motors:
Code 91-021 Carriage drive select motor, MOT91-021, part of the carriage drive train, PL
91.10 Item 1. Refer to WD 9.11.
Code 91-023 HM vertical motion motor, MOT91-023, PL 91.15 Item 12. Refer to WD 9.11.
Code 91-024 Printhead roll adjust motor 1, MOT91-024, PL 91.25 Item 4. Refer to WD
9.10.
Code 91-025 HM horizontal motion motor, MOT91-025, part of the HM horizontal drive
gearbox, PL 91.15 Item 15. Refer to WD 9.11.
9.9.
9.10.
9.9.
Code 91-029 Printhead stitch adjust motor 1, MOT91-029, PL 91.25 Item 4. Refer to WD
9.10.
Code 91-030 Printhead stitch adjust motor 2, MOT91-030, PL 91.20 Item 4. Refer to WD
9.9.
Code 91-031 Carriage drive motor, MOT91-031, PL 91.10 Item 16. Refer to WD 9.11.
Code 91-033 X axis drive motor upper, MOT91-033, PL 91.20 Item 5. Refer to WD 9.9.
Code 91-034 X axis drive motor lower, MOT91-034, PL 91.25 Item 5. Refer to WD 9.11.
The motors run.
February 2013
2-363
91-510-00, 91-511-00, 91-512-00, 91-605-00
N
Go to the relevant wiring diagram. Check the relevant motor.
Refer to:
91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00, 91-583-00 IOD Drive Error

RAP
PJ102, PJ303, PJ304, PJ401, PJ605, PJ607, Marking Unit Driver PWB.
91-514-00 IOD drive stall.
01J +50V Power Distribution RAP.
91-513-00 The IOD shuttle motor current is inconsistent with the expected value.
91-581-00 IOD Home time-out.

91-583-00 IOD stall recovery failed.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the wiring harnesses connecting motors to the marking unit driver PWB. Pay particular
attention to wiring routed near the carriages. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install new wiring or repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not disconnect and reconnect the flex cables at the IOD PWB. the flex cables are easily
damaged. The cable must only be handled in the area of the blue backer.
CAUTION
Check the IOD to drum driver PWB cable, PL 94.15 Item 5.
Check for damage or debris that restricts IOD movement.
Procedure
Go to dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test. Select test option 1 Move IOD Scan Bar. Follow
instructions on the screen and observe the IOD movement. Select Position and run in the
order:
1. Select Home (moves slowly to the front until a stall is encountered) and return to park
position.
2.
Select Rear (moves to the rear) and return to park position.
If the initial fault was 91-581-00 and a ticking noise is heard during the test then install a new
IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1.
NOTE: Always end in the Park position (centre) to protect the IOD sensor from debris.
The IOD sensor runs to all positions without unusual noises.
Y
N
1.
2.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking motor movement.

Go to WD 9.22. Check the IOD shuttle motor, MOT91-043, Figure 1.
Refer to:
PJ660, IOD pre amplifier PWB.
01H +24V Power Distribution RAP
A
91-512-00, 91-605-00, 91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00,
February 2013
2-364
91-515-00 Vertical Wiper Motor Over Current RAP
If necessary, install a new IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1.
91-515-00 The HM vertical motion motor current demand exceeds expected value.
Enter diagnostics select Diagnostic Routines and select dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test.
Select test option 10 to dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment then follow Measure Head
Alignment. Follow the instructions on the screen. The procedure ran without declaring a
fault.
Y
N
Refer to the appropriate RAP for the new fault code.
Initial Actions
WARNING
If the fault is intermittent. Check the wire routing to the IOD for abrasions. Repair the harness,
REP 1.1 as necessary. If the error persists, install a new Drum Driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
NOTE: Override the front door interlock to provide voltage to the device under test.
Check belts, gears, pulleys and wiper alignment, PL 91.15.
NOTE: Calibration of the registration / preheat assembly is only required when:
Check for damage or debris that restricts wiper movement.
Check the harness leading to the motor and surrounding components. Refer to GP 28.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 91-023 to run the HM vertical motion motor, MOT91-023, PL 91.15 Item 12.
MOT91-023 runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
PJ401, Marking Unit Driver PWB.
HM vertical motion motor, PL 91.15 Item 12.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking motor, gearbox, or belt movement. The
moves up and down smoothly.
Y
N
Clean the wiper drive components and retest.
wiper
Check the wiring harness. Repair the harness, REP 1.1 as necessary. If the error persists,
install a new HM vertical motion motor, PL 91.15 Item 12.
IOD shuttle motor,

MOT91-043
February 2013
2-365
91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00, 91-583-00, 91-515-
91-516-00 Low Pressure Assist Over Current RAP
91-517-00 Marking Unit Air Pump Over Current RAP
91-516-00 The low pressure assist solenoid valve current demand exceeds expected value.
91-517-00 The marking unit ink load air pump current demand exceeds expected value.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check the harnesses leading to the ink reservoir and sensing components.
Check the harness leading to the pump and surrounding components.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
1.
2.
Go to WD 9.14. Check the low pressure assist (LPA) valve solenoid, SOL91-045, PL
93.10 Item 15.
Go to WD 9.14. Check the reservoir pump, MOT93-050, PL 93.10 Item 11.

Refer to:
Refer to:
PJ130, Solenoid Patch PWB.
PJ130, Solenoid Patch PWB.
01E +12V Power Distribution RAP
01E +12V Power Distribution RAP
2.
Check the reservoir pump harness. Repair the harness, REP 1.1 as necessary.
Check the solenoid valve harness. Repair the harness, REP 1.1 as necessary.
If the error persists, install a new components as necessary:
If the error persists, install new components as necessary:
Ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
91-516-00, 91-517-00
February 2013
2-366
91-519-00 to 91-522-00, 91-655-00 to 91-658-00, 91-683-00

to 91-690-00, 91-807 to 91-811-00 Printhead NVM Read or
Write Error RAP
91-519-00 Printhead 1 NVM error detected. HCD read failure.
Go to GP 7 to check the system grounding. The system grounding is good.

Y
N
Repair any grounding issues found, GP 7.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14. The fault is still present.
Y
N
The fault is an NVM write error generated when dC972 is performed. Re-try the relevant
routine:

91-655-00 Printhead 1 field corrections corrupt. HFC read or write failure.
Faults 91-655-00 to 91-658-00, 91-949-00 to 91-952-00, dC972 option 3 Head to

Head Uniformity.
Faults 91-687-00 to 91-690-00, dC972 option 4 TRC Generation.
Faults 91-807-00 to 91-810-00, dC972 option 3, Head to Head Uniformity, then

option 5, Y Dot Position Correction.
The fault is still present.
Y
N
Complete the remaining routines in dC972, up to and including option 5.

91-683-00 Printhead 1 TRC read failed.
Perform Final Actions.

91-687-00 Printhead 1 TRC write failed.
The fault is a NVM read error generated during machine initialization. The fault is generated
by a newly installed printhead.
Y
N
Y
N

91-807-00 Attempt to read or write printhead 1 NVM HAY or HAU sections failed.
91-811-00 Machine has timed out waiting for the adjustment load task to complete reading
printhead NVM.
Perform dC972 option 1. Select manual and all 4 printheads. Switch off, then switch on the
machine, GP 14. The fault remains.
Y
N
Procedure
Final Actions
WARNING

1.
Go to WD 9.5, WD 9.6, WD 9.7, WD 9.20 and WD 9.21. Check all connections:
2.
PJ101, Printhead PWB.
PJ201, PJ301, PJ902, PJ904, IME Controller PWB.

CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
Check that the ribbon cables connecting the relevant printhead to the IME controller PWB are
correctly and securely connected, and not damaged. Re-seat the ribbon cable as necessary.
The wiring is good.
N
Install new ribbon cables as necessary, PL 92.10.
Printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2.


February 2013
2-367
91-519-00 to 91-522-00, 91-655-00 to 91-658-00, 91-
91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

to 91-803-00, 91-856-00 to 91-859-00 Printhead Thermal
Error RAP
91-555-00 Printhead 1 Reservoir Thermistor value inconsistent with expected value.
91-523-00 Printhead 1 Left Jet Heater is Too Hot
91-664-00 Printhead 1 thermal failure.
91-527-00 Printhead 1 Left Jet Heater is Too Slow
91-800-00 Head 1 thermal glitch.
91-531-00 Printhead 1 Left Jet Thermistor value inconsistent with expected value.
91-856-00 Head 1 thermal persistent glitch.
91-535-00 Printhead 1 Right Jet Heater is Too Hot
Initial Actions

WARNING
91-539-00 Printhead 1 Right Jet Heater is Too Slow

CAUTION

91-543-00 Printhead 1 Right Jet Thermistor value inconsistent with expected value.
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
91-547-00 Printhead 1 Reservoir Heater Too Hot
The video cable (striped and labeled A, PL 92.10 Item 7) and the wave amp cable (white and
labeled B, PL 92.10 Item 8) should not be interchanged at the printhead connectors. Damage
to the printhead and IME controller PWB will occur if the cables are installed incorrectly

Check all 3 wiring harness leading to the indicated printhead. Focus on areas above and
behind the umbilicals. Ensure each harness is securely and correctly seated, refer to GP
28.
91-551-00 Printhead 1 Reservoir Heater Too Slow
Procedure
Check for damage to the cables connecting each printhead. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install new cables as necessary, PL 92.10.

A
91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-
February 2013
2-368
A
Perform the printhead thermal tests, dC335. The tests complete successfully.
Y
N
Check the PEST fault history, dC123 for marking unit heater faults (umbilicals, printheads
and ink melt reservoir). All marking unit heaters have failed.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.8, WD 9.13 and WD 9.20, WD 9.21. Check the connections and wiring:
PJ101 and PJ301, Printhead PWB.
Disconnect the 8 pin AC printhead connector. Inspect the pins at both ends for
damage.
PJ401, PJ701, Marking Unit Heater PWB.

The error is intermittent. Refer to GP 7 and check system grounding. Repair any ground issues
found.
Initial Actions
CAUTION
Check the +3.3V ESTAR distribution to the marking unit heater PWB, refer to the 01B
+3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP. If the fault is still present, install new components as necessary:
Marking unit heater PWB cable, PL 92.10 Item 12.
91-559-00 The carriage or wiper components are out of position for a requested action.
WARNING
Refer to WD 1.1 and WD 9.8, check the wiring between PJ4AC on the Power Supply Unit
and PJ101 on the Marking Unit Heater PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
The home position sensors are monitored as wiper or carriage motion is performed. This fault
occurs when carriage or wiper motion is requested and the sensors are not in the expected
state.
91-559-00 Marking Unit Components Out of Position RAP
Do not handle or attempt to clean the wiper blade. Wiper blade contamination can damage the
printheads.
CAUTION
CAUTION
could also occur.
Check for damage or debris that restricts movement of the wiper.
Check the harness leading to the vertical and horizontal wiper drives and home sensor.
Refer to GP 28.
Procedure
Check the position of the carriages. The carriages are docked to the drum.
Y
N
Perform dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check. dC967 runs successfully.
Y
N
Perform ADJ 91.1 Printhead Attachment Check.

Enter dC330. Run the following motors:
Code 91-023 HM vertical motion motor, MOT91-023, PL 91.15 Item 12.
Code 91-033 X axis drive motor upper, MOT91-033, PL 91.20 Item 5.
Code 91-034 X axis drive motor lower, MOT91-034, PL 91.25 Item 5.
Code 91-031 carriage docking motor, MOT91-031, PL 91.10 Item 16.
The motors run.

Y
N
Go to WD 9.9 and WD 9.11. Check MOT91-023, MOT91-033 and MOT91-034.
Refer to:
PJ303 (lower), PJ102 (upper) and PJ401, Marking Unit Driver PWB.
A
February 2013
2-369
91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-
X axis drive motor upper, PL 91.20 Item 5.
X axis drive motor lower, PL 91.25 Item 5.
Carriage drive train, PL 91.10 Item 1.
Upper carriage
home sensor,
Q91-012
Lower carriage home

sensor, Q91-011
Enter dC330 codes 91-011 and 91-012 to check the lower carriage home sensor, Q91-011 and
display
the upper carriage home sensor, Q91-012, Figure 1. Actuate each sensor. The
changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.11. Check Q91-011 and Q91-012.
Refer to:
01B +3.3V ESTAR Power Distribution RAP.
Lower carriage home sensor, PL 91.10 Item 8.
Upper carriage home sensor, PL 91.10 Item 8.
Check the condition of the wiper assembly including wiper motors, gearbox, and belts:
Ensure that the wiper, PL 91.15 Item 13 is aligned horizontally.
Check the HM belt, PL 91.15 Item 2 and the horizontal drive cable, PL 91.15 Item 16.
Check that they are positioned and tensioned correctly. Install new components as necessary, PL 91.15.
Enter dC965. Run the printhead maintenance cycle test. Observe the wiper assembly motion.
Check that the wiper moves up and down smoothly. Check also that the paddle correctly positions the wiper. The wiper operation is good.
Y
N
Clean the wiper drive components and retest. Check the wiring harness. Repair the harness, REP 1.1 as necessary. Install new components as necessary:
Vertical belts, PL 91.15 Item 2.
Horizontal drive cable, PL 91.15 Item 16.
Check the area surrounding the carriage, wiper assembly, and umbilicals for wiring damage or
obstructions that prevent carriage or wiper movement. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.11. Install new wiring or repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
Go to WD 9.9 and WD 9.11. Check all connections:
PJ303 (lower), PJ102 (upper) and PJ401, Marking Unit Driver PWB.
91-559-00
February 2013
2-370
91-560-00 Carriage Selection Time Out RAP

91-560-00 The carriage drive select motor timed out moving to stop.
Upper carriage home

sensor, Q91-012
Initial Actions
WARNING
Selector
CAUTION
CAUTION
Lower carriage home

sensor, Q91-011
could also occur.
NOTE: Override the front door interlock to provide voltage to the device under test.
Carriage drive train
NOTE: The carriage drive select motor (MOT91-021) is not spared individually, it is only supplied as part of the carriage drive train assembly.
Check the wire harness leading to the carriage drive select motor and carriage home sensors, Figure 1.
Carriage drive select

motor, MOT91-021
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 91-021 carriage drive select motor, MOT91-021. Figure 1. MOT91-021
runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Install new components as necessary;
Check for obstructions or damage inside the carriage drive train. Observe the gearbox operation and that the selector moves up and down. The drives are good.
Y
N
Install new components as necessary;
Upper or lower carriage drive gear, PL 91.10 Item 9 and PL 91.10 Item 10.
If the error persists, install a new carriage drive train, PL 91.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-371
91-560-00
91-562-00, 91-563-00 Upper Carriage Error RAP
91-562-00 Print Head Carriage no edge found.
91-563-00 Upper Print Head Carriage unexpected event.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
could also occur.
Check for obstructions, damage or debris that restricts carriage movement.
Check the harness leading to the carriage drive and their related sensors. Refer to GP 28.
Enter dC330 code 91-012 to test the upper carriage home sensor, Q91-012. Actuate Q91-012.
Y
N
Refer to:
Procedure
Move the marking unit into the service position, GP 6.
Check the area surrounding the carriage and umbilicals for wiring damage or obstructions that
prevent carriage movement. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 91-031 to run the carriage docking motor, MOT91-031, part of the carriage
drive train, Figure 1. MOT91-031 runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 91-011 to test the lower carriage home sensor, Q91-011. Actuate Q91-011.
Y
N
Refer to:
Check for obstructions or damage inside carriage drive train. The drives are good.
Y
N
Install a new carriage drives train, PL 91.10 Item 1.
Observe the motor and gearbox operation, the selector moves up and down. Enter dC330
code 91-021 carriage drive select motor, MOT91-021, part of the carriage drive train, Figure 1.
MOT91-021 runs.
Y
N
Refer to:

Y
N
Go to WD 9.9 and WD 9.11. Check all connections:
PJ605, PJ 607, PJ304, Marking Unit Driver PWB.
A
91-562-00, 91-563-00
February 2013
2-372
91-565-00, 91-566-00 Upper Printhead Restraint Error RAP

Upper carriage docking
motor, MOT91-031
91-565-00 Upper printhead carriage time-out moving restraint

91-566-00 Upper printhead carriage restraint stalled.
Upper carriage
home sensor,
Q91-012
Procedure
These fault codes are shown for information only. The machine does not have carriage
restraint motors.
Lower carriage home

sensor, Q91-011

motor, MOT91-021
February 2013
2-373
91-562-00, 91-563-00, 91-565-00, 91-566-00
91-567-00 to 91-568-00 Lower Carriage Error RAP
Refer to:
91-567-00 Lower Print Head Carriage no edge found.

91-568-00 Lower Print Head Carriage unexpected event.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
could also occur.
Check the harness leading to carriage drive and related sensors. Refer to GP 28.
Check for damage or debris that restricts carriage movement.

Check the area surrounding the carriage and umbilicals for wiring damage or obstructions that
prevent carriage movement. The wiring is good and correctly secured in the cable
clamps.
Y
N
Correctly secure the wiring. Install new wiring or repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
Enter dC330 code 91-032 to run the carriage docking motor, MOT91-031, part of the carriage
drive train, Figure 1. MOT91-031 runs.
Y
N
Refer to:

PJ605, Marking Unit Driver PWB

Carriage drives train, PL 91.10 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 91-011 to test the lower carriage home sensor, Q91-011. Actuate Q91-011.
Y
N
Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 91-012 to test the upper carriage home sensor, Q91-012. Actuate Q91-012.
Y
N
Refer to:
Check for obstructions or damage inside carriage drive train. The drives are good.
Y
N
Install a new carriage drives train, PL 91.10 Item 1.
Procedure

Y
N
Observe the motor and gearbox operation, the selector moves up and down. Enter dC330
code 91-021 carriage drive select motor, MOT91-021, part of the carriage drive train, Figure 1.
MOT91-021 runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.11. Check all connections:
PJ607, PJ304, Marking Unit Driver PWB.
A
91-567-00 to 91-568-00
February 2013
2-374
91-570-00, 91-571-00 Lower Printhead Restraint Error RAP

motor, MOT91-021
91-570-00 Lower printhead carriage timeout moving restraint.

91-571-00 Lower printhead carriage restraint stalled.
Procedure
Lower carriage home
sensor, Q91-011
These fault codes are shown for information only. The machine does not have carriage
restraint motors.
carriage docking
motor, MOT91-031
February 2013
2-375
91-567-00 to 91-568-00, 91-570-00, 91-571-00
91-572-00, 91-573-00, 91-575-00 Wiper Vertical Error RAP

91-572-00 Printhead wiper vertical motion edge not found.
91-573-00 The wiper encountered an unexpected event while in vertical motion.
91-575-00 The vertical wiper could not complete the requested motion.
NOTE: Invalid move errors are typically the result of mechanisms being moved manually
instead of under machine control.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
printheads.
CAUTION
A
Enter dC330 code 91-014 to test the HM position sensor, Q91-014. Actuate Q91-014. The
display changes.
Y
N
Refer to:

HM position sensor, PL 91.15 Item 17.

Check the area surrounding the carriage, wiper assembly, and umbilicals for wiring damage or
obstructions that prevent carriage or wiper movement. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install new wiring or repair, REP 1.1 as necessary.
CAUTION
could also occur.
Check the HM tension spring is connected, Figure 1. If necessary install a new spring, PL
91.15 Item 14.
Check that the wiper is level. Refer to the Replacement procedure in REP 91.3.
Check HM wiper, PL 91.15 Item 13 for full travel.
Check for damage or debris that restricts wiper movement.
HM vertical motion
motor, MOT91-023
Procedure
Cheat the front door interlock. Open the marking unit drawer, GP 6 to observe wiper motion.
Enter dC330 code 91-023 to run the HM vertical motion motor, MOT91-023, Figure 1.
NOTE: The HM vertical motion motor will run a complete cycle.
MOT91-023 runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
HM position sensor,
Q91-014
Check the springs are connected and

the belts are tensioned.(Front and
rear.)

A
91-572-00, 91-573-00, 91-575-00
February 2013
2-376
A
Check the alignment of the HM wiper PL 91.15 Item 13. Refer to REP 91.3. HM wiper alignment is good
Y
N
Install a new HM wiper, PL 91.15 Item 13.
91-574-00, 91-576-00, 91-598-00 Wiper Horizontal Error

RAP
91-574-00 The head maintenance (HM) wiper did not reach position on time.
91-576-00 The head maintenance (HM) wiper was not in the expected vertical position.
Check the position and tension of the horizontal drive cable, PL 91.15 Item 16 and HM belt, PL
91.15 Item 2. Position and tension are good.
Y
N
91-598-00 The head maintenance (HM) horizontal motion motor stalled.

NOTE: Invalid move errors are typically the result of mechanisms being moved manually
instead of under machine control.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
could also occur.
Horizontal drive cable, PL 91.15 Item 16
HM belt, PL 91.15 Item 2
Check the HM drive pulley, PL 91.15 Item 18 and HM idler pulley, PL 91.15 Item 19. Drive
and idler pulleys are good.
Y
N
CAUTION
printheads.
HM drive pulley, PL 91.15 Item 18
HM idler pulley, PL 91.15 Item 19
Check the horizontal drive paddle, PL 91.15 Item 5, for proper travel. Paddle travel is good.
Y
N
Install new horizontal drive paddle, PL 91.15 Item 5.
Enter dC965 Printhead Maintenance Cycle Test. Test horizontal motion. Observe HM Wiper
motion. The HM Wiper moves smoothly.
Y
N
Clean the wiper drive components and retest.
HM wiper, PL 91.15 Item 13.
Check the harness leading to the horizontal wiper motor.
Check for damage or debris that restricts horizontal motion.
HM horizontal motion motor, PL 91.15 Item 15.
Switch off, then switch on the machine.
Procedure
Cheat the front door interlock. Move the marking unit into the maintenance position, GP 6 to
observe wiper motion. Enter dC330 code 91-025 to run the HM horizontal motion motor,
MOT91-025, Figure 1. MOT91-025 runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Check the area surrounding the wiper assembly and umbilicals for wiring damage or obstructions that prevent HM Wiper movement. The wiring is good.
Y
N
HM horizontal motion motor, PL 91.15 Item 15.
A
February 2013
2-377
91-574-00, 91-576-00, 91-598-00
91-586-00 Quad Wave Amplifier Short RAP

91-586-00 the quad wave amplifier current demand is inconsistent with the expected value.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
HM horizontal motion
motor, MOT91-025
Check the ribbon cables connecting the quad wave amp PWB and printheads for abrasions or
possible electrical arc points, PL 92.10. The cables and connectors are good.
Y
N
Check that the marking unit cooling fan, PL 1.15 Item 23 runs. The fan runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.4. Check the marking unit cooling fan.
Refer to:
01E +12V Power Distribution RAP.
Quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item 3.
Install a new quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item 3.
91-574-00, 91-576-00, 91-598-00, 91-586-00
February 2013
2-378
91-587-00, 91-588-00 Quad Wave Amplifier Thermal Error

RAP
91-587-00 The quad wave amp PWB is too hot.
91-607-00, 91-608-00 Printhead to Drum Error RAP

91-607-00 Head to drum contact. Following printhead replacement, thermal data indicates the
printhead is in contact with the drum. System should reboot into diagnostics mode when this
fault is detected.
91-588-00 The quad wave amp PWB thermistor reading is invalid.
91-608-00 Head to drum measurement is outside tolerance.
Initial Actions
NOTE: The machine runs a proximity check when a new printhead is detected.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
NOTE: The eight thermistors are located on the quad wave amp PWB, one for each amplifier.
If any one amplifier overheats, this fault is generated.
Check the wiring harness leading to the marking unit fan and the quad wave amp PWB.
Procedure
Check that the marking unit cooling fan, PL 1.15 Item 23 runs. The fan runs.
Y
N
Refer to:
Go to WD 9.13. Check the ribbon cable connecting PJ590 on the quad wave amp PWB to
PJ101 on the IME controller PWB. Check the ribbon cable for damage, and that it is connected
correctly. Check for continuity through the ribbon cable. The cable and connector are good.
Y
N
Correctly connect the ribbon cable. If necessary, install a new Quad wave amp / IME controller PWB cable, PL 92.10 Item 13.
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
Check installation of the printhead. Check the following:
The AC wiring to the printhead.
The interface ribbon harness to the printhead, refer to REP 91.21.
The two securing screws for the printhead are tight and seated correctly, refer to REP 91.21.
The printhead is installed correctly.
Y
N
Remove the printhead. Check for debris or damage that would prevent the correct printhead installation.
Check the following:.
The umbilical is seated in the ball plate, refer to REP 91.31.
The nozzles on the umbilicals are clean.
Ink or debris on the ball plate, refer to REP 91.31.
Ink or debris on the back of the printhead.
The cables are correctly routed on the umbilical, refer to REP 91.31.
Re-install the printhead. Starting with the left screw, alternately tighten each screw 2 or 3
turns until each screw is completely tight. Do not overtighten. Switch on the machine
directly into service mode, GP 1. Run dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check.
NOTE: When a printhead is re-installed into the same location from where it was
removed, the head to drum spacing check will not run automatically.
Check all connections leading to the printhead. If the error persists, install a new printhead PL
91.20 Item 2.

February 2013
2-379
91-587-00, 91-588-00, 91-607-00, 91-608-00
91-610-00 Printhead 1 wave amp calibration error.
B
Perform the following check:
Disconnect the video cable and the wave amp cable from the suspect printhead.
Refer to Figure 1.
The resistance between GND and VPP should be 5K ohms or greater
Perform the same check between GND and VSS.
If the resistance is 4 ohms or less, then the printhead is shorted.
91-610-00 to 91-613-00 Printhead Wave Amp Calibration

Error RAP
The printhead resistances are good.

Y
N
Install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2.
Procedure
WARNING
Check the cable between the IME controller PWB and quad wave amp PWB for damage.
Install new cable as necessary, PL 92.10 Item 13.
CAUTION
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
to the printhead and IME controller PWB will occur if the cables are installed incorrectly.
All 4 fault codes are recorded in the fault history, dC122.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.13, WD 9.20, WD 9.21.
Check for damage to the video cable (striped and labeled A) and the wave amp cable
(white and labeled B) connecting each printhead to the quad wave amp PWB.
Reseat the video cable and the wave amp cable on the printhead connectors PJ101 and
PJ301. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install new cables as necessary:
Video cable, PL 92.10 Item 7.
Wave amp cable, PL 92.10 Item 8.
Go to WD 9.13, WD 9.20 and WD 9.21.

Check and reseat all connections on the IME controller PWB and quad wave amp PWB
PJ201 and PJ301, PJ902 and PJ904, IME Controller PWB.
PJ110, PJ150, PJ930 and PJ970, Quad wave amp PWB.
The cables are good.

Y
N
Install new cables as necessary:
Video cable, PL 92.10 Item 7.
Wave amp cable, PL 92.10 Item 8.

Figure 1 Printhead PWB
91-610-00 to 91-613-00
February 2013
2-380
91-614-00 to 91-617-00 Printhead Data Error RAP
91-630-00 IOD Scan Process Failure RAP
91-614-00 Printhead 1 field data corrupt.
91-630-00 The IOD scan process has failed.
The IOD scans a target on the drum to optimize print quality and to check for missing jets. During this scanning process, the drum with the target on it moves over the stationary scan bar of
the IOD. The image is scanned multiple times. Each scan is initiated by a signal from the drum
encoder. If a lower than expected number of scans is encountered, this fault is raised.

Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
Check the harness leading to the indicated printhead.

Check for damage to surrounding harnesses.
Procedure
All 4 fault codes are recorded in the fault history, dC122.
Y
N
Enter dC972 and run the Printhead Uniformity test. The test completes successfully.
Y
N
WARNING
WARNING
Check the harness and the plug connections to the drum drive motor and the drum position
encoder.
Procedure
Go to dC122 Fault History and dC123 PEST Fault History. Check for drum drive faults occurring at the same time as the current 91-630 fault. A drum drive related fault was declared.
Y
N
Refer to WD 1.1 and WD 9.1. Check the drum drive motor and the drum position encoder.
Install the following components in the listed order. After the installation of each component perform the dC971 routine, then check for the 91-630-00 fault. Continue with component installation until the 91-630-00 fault is cleared, then go to SCP 5 Final actions.
1. Install a new drum position encoder assembly, PL 94.20 Item 8.
2.
Install a new drum belt, PL 94.20 Item 2. Clean the drum drive pulley with IPA.
3.
4.
Install a new drum drive motor, PL 94.20 Item 6.
If the fault is still present then install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or loose connectors. Repair the
wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
When all faults are cleared, go to SCP 5 Final actions.
Check the system grounding, refer to GP 7. The system grounding is good.

Y
N
Correct any system grounding issues, GP 7, then retest.
Check the ribbon cables from the IME controller PWB for abrasions. Install a new ribbon
cable, PL 92.10 as necessary. If the error persists, install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item
2.
Refer to the appropriate RAP and follow the procedure to rectify any other fault. After completing the RAP perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment adjust. Follow the on screen instructions
and run the routine. If a 91-630-00 fault occurs then return to the start of this procedure. If the
fault is cleared then go to SCP 5 Final actions.

February 2013
2-381
91-614-00 to 91-617-00, 91-630-00
91-631-00 IOD Dark Adjust Failure RAP

91-631-00 The IOD dark adjust failed.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not connect the harness to the IOD PWB with the machine powered on. Damage to the IOD
sensor may result.
Check for damage or debris that restricts IOD movement.
Procedure
CAUTION
12 pin flex cable.
CAUTION
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment. Go to dC122 Fault History. Check for
another occurrence of fault 91-631. The fault reoccurred.
Y
N
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or loose connectors. Repair the
wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. Install new components as necessary:
Go to WD 9.1 and WD 9.22. Check the cable between PJ101 on the Drum Driver PWB and
PJ1 on the IOD Pre Amplifier PWB. The connections and cable are good.
Y
N
Correct the cable and connections. Install new components as necessary:
IOD to drum driver PWB cable, PL 94.15 Item 5.
Remove the IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1. Check that the 12 pin flex cable is connected at
the sensor, Figure 1. Handle the flex cable only in the area of the blue backer and hold the fold
closed. If the connections are good then install a new IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1. The
fault is cleared.
Y
N
Perform SCP 5 Final actions
91-631-00
February 2013
2-382
91-636-00 IOD in Degraded Mode RAP

91-636-00 The machines print quality maintenance software periodically runs corrective procedures to maintain output quality. This error indicates that these procedures are suspended due
to unrecoverable errors.
3.
If the routine is found to be in degraded mode. Refer to Table 2 and perform the actions
as required.
4.
Check and clear all related faults listed in dC122 by using the appropriate RAP to return
the status to optimal.
NOTE: The optimal value for all settings is 0.
This procedure describes how to return a machine to normal operation from fault tolerant
mode, also known as IOD degraded mode. Fault tolerant mode is indicated by the fault code
91-636-00 or by the service code displayed on the UI, refer to the OF 12 Service Code RAP.
Initial Actions
Check the PEST error log (dC123) for component failures.
Check service code displayed on the machine information UI, refer to OF 12.
Check the fault history (dC122) to verify fault tolerant mode.
Check that the EPC memory PWB is installed and seated correctly, PL 3.11 Item 21.
5.
When the routine is returned to optimal, recheck the current status values of the other
routines.
6.
Repeat this procedure (1 through to 5) until all the routines report a NVM status value of
0.
Table 1 Print Quality Management Status Check
Adjustment Routine
Head to Head Alignment Adjustment
Procedure
WARNING
If the IOD sensor detects an imaging problem, one or more attempts are made to correct the
error. If the machine is unable to self-correct specific imaging errors, it suspends operation of
one or more of these normal print-quality adjustment routines. Refer to Table 1.
1.
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and check the status of each routine by entering the NVM
chain-link listed in Table 1.
2.
Check if the routine is in degraded state by checking the status value in dC131 NVM
Read/Write with the value in Table 2.
NVM NVM NVM

Manual
Chain Link Settings Procedure Comment
490
019
0-4
dC971
Manual and Automatic

Refer to dC131 for NVM settings
Drum Runout Calibra- 492

tion
069
0 or 1
dC977
Printhead Uniformity
490
008
0-4
dC972
Option 3

TRC Generation
490
011
0-4
dC972
Option 4
Y-dot position
490
005
0-4
dC972
Option 5

Table 2 Routine Status Value and Description

NVM
Status
IOD
Value NVM Description Degraded Actions
Do not manually write

status value to NVM
dC971 Head to Head

Alignment
Optimal
No
No
Do not write
dC971 Head to Head

Alignment
Non-Optimal
no
Run the routine
Do not write
dC971 Head to Head

Alignment
Auto Disabled
Yes
Run the routine
Do not write
dC971 Head to Head

Alignment
Manually Disabled Yes
Set status to 4 to Manually Enabled and run the routine
dC971 Head to Head

Alignment
Manually Enabled No
Run the routine
dC977 Drum Runout
Optimal
No
No
Do not write
dC977 Drum Runout
Non-Optimal
Yes
Run the routine
Do not write
Adjustment Routines
February 2013
2-383
91-636-00
Table 2 Routine Status Value and Description
Adjustment Routines
NVM
Status
IOD
Value NVM Description Degraded Actions
Do not manually write

status value to NVM
dC972 Printhead Unifor- 0

mity
Optimal
No
No
Do not write

mity
Non-Optimal
No
No
Do not write

mity
Auto Disabled
Yes
Run the dC972 in automatic mode to calibrate the printer uniformity. Fix issues that prevent successful completion. If the print
quality is unacceptable, then run the following:
1. Run option 3 in Manual
Do not write

mity

mity
Manually Enabled Yes
2.
Run option 4 in Manual
3.
Run option 5 for high quality calibration.
Set status to 4 to Manually Enabled

2.
3.
Run option 5 for high quality calibration.
2.
3.
Run option 5 for high quality calibrate.
TRC Generation
Optimal
No
No
Do not write
TRC Generation
Non-Optimal
Yes
Run dC972 option 4.
Do not write
TRC Generation
Auto Disabled
Yes
Run dC972 option 4.
Do not write
TRC Generation
Set status to 4 to Manually Enable and run dC972 option 4.
TRC Generation
Run dC972 option 4.
Y-dot Position Correction 0
Optmal
No
No
Do not write
Non-Optimal
Yes
Run dC972 option 5.
Do not write
Auto Disabled
Yes
Run dC972 option 5.
Do not write
Set status to 4 to Manually Enabled and run dC972 option 5.
Run dC972 option 5.
The NVM descriptions are explained below.
Optimal means that the calibration firmware has successfully optimized the Print Quality
related to the routine executed.
Non-Optimal state indicates that the calibration firmware has not yet had a chance to execute the related Print Quality routine. Non-Optimal state also indicates that the routine
could have run with failures, but not reached Auto disabled state. Execute the routine
manually and check dC122 for associated fault reports.
91-636-00
Auto Disabled state refers to when the routine was executed and failed more than a specified number of retries. See Table 3 for maximum number of retries for each routine before
it is automatically disabled.
If manually disabled, both automatic and manual executions are blocked. To clear manually disabled, set the manually enabled flag by using the NVM value of 4 (use the specified tools NVM chain and link). When manually enabled, the tool will transition to nonoptimal state and the memories of all failure counters associated with the tool are cleared.
February 2013
2-384
Only Manually Enabled and Manually Disabled NVM Status values (3 and 4) are to be
written to NVM. DO NOT write any other Status value (0, 1 or 2) to NVM.
Table 3 Consecutive Failures

NVM NVM
Chain Link
Maximum number
of retries before
Comment
disabling
Head to Head Alignment Adjust
Maximum of 2 retries before

disable.
Not in NVM. Reset at reboot
Drum Runout
Not in the NVM. Routine can

only be executed manually.
Head to Head Uniformity
490
004
Maximum number of 3 retries

before disable.
Routine can only be executed

manually.
Maximum of 3 retries before

disable.
Adjustment Routine
TRC Generation
Y-dot position Correction
490
010
91-637-00 Drum Runout Calibration Needed RAP

91-637-00 The drum runout table in NVM dC301 was reset. This fault clears when the drum
runout (also known as Y runout) diagnostic routine is manually run, and the values are properly
set in NVM. This fault can be caused by corruption of the NVM, a calibration error during the
drum runout routine or encoder problems.
Initial Actions
Check the fault history and service codes (refer to OF 12) for fault codes 94-534-00, 94-547-00
and 94-555-00. If the fault codes are present then go to the appropriate RAP before proceeding with this RAP.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Run dC971 to perform a complete alignment of all the printheads.
From dC612, run the TP 16 Stitch Identification Test Pages. Examine the horizontal lines print,
also used to evaluate Y stitch, to determine if runout correction is incorrect. Drum runout calibration is needed.
Y
N
Perform SCP 5 Final actions.
Enter dC977 to re-calibrate the drum runout values. The drum runout completes without
error.
Y
N
1. Perform the RAP associated with the error code received during the drum runout
calibration.
2.
Go to WD 9.1 and WD 9.22. Check the IOD sensor, part of the IOD assembly, PL
94.15 Item 1. Refer to:
PJ1, IOD Pre Amplifier PWB.
01D +5V Power Distribution RAP
Enter dC612 and make Y runout prints and examine. The prints are good (no runout).
Y
N
Drum position encoder assembly, PL 94.20 Item 8.

CAUTION
Do not connect the harness to the IOD PWB J1 with the machine powered on. Damage to the
IOD Sensor may result.
February 2013
2-385
91-636-00, 91-637-00
91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error RAP
CAUTION
Do not disconnect and reconnect the flex cables at the IOD PWB. The flex cables are easily
91-638-00 The IOD has detected chronic jets.
Observe the IOD sensor, wait for the IOD sensor to be initialized. The IOD sensor runs to all
positions without unusual noise.
Y
N
Perform the actions that follow:
Also use this RAP to recover weak, sputtering or missing jets not detected by the IOD.
Inspect the harness connection PJ101 on the drum driver PWB. Ensure the harness
is correctly connected and there are no broken wires. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. Install new components as necessary.
Inspect the harness connection to PJ1 IOD Pre-Amplifier PWB. Ensure the harness
is correctly connected and there are no broken wires. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. Install new components as necessary:
Go to WD 9.22. Check MOT91-043, refer to:
GP 10 How to Check A Motor

WARNING
Enter the customer administration tools, GP 5. On the Tools tab select Troubleshooting then
Automatic Light Lines Fix. Set Quick Fix to On. Set Full Fix to Eco Fix.
NOTE: Ensure that the customers Automatic Light Lines and Full Fix settings are restored to
the original settings when the fault has been corrected.
NOTE: By setting Quick Fix to On, except for service jet test pages (executed via dC968) all
images will use jet substitution.
Procedure
Remove the IOD assembly, REP 91.22. Inspect the IOD assembly for debris.
Remove any debris that may be in the gear train, then re-install the IOD assembly. If
no obvious problems are found by inspection, install a new IOD assembly, PL 94.15
Item 1.
Switch on the machine, GP 14. The fault still exists.

Y
N
Initial Actions
NOTE: Before printing TP 20 or TP 21, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded
long edge feed into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched
paper.
Fault code 91-638 is displayed in the fault history, dC122.
Y
N
Print the service Jet Test Pages, TP 21. There are more than 21 chronic or masked
jets.
Y
N
A chronic jet is less than 10 jets from another chronic or masked jet.
Y
N
Mask the chronic jet, GP 30 How to Mask Jets / Jet Substitution.
Go to Procedure A.
Go to Procedure A.
Go to Procedure A.
Procedure A
Procedure
Print five copies of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. The missing jet is visible
on both solids and dithers.
Y
N
Go to IQ 9 Line Deletions in the Process Direction RAP. Perform the Missing Jet Checkout.
Empty the waste tray. Perform dC968 Head Purge and dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment on the faulty heads up to three times. After each purge / alignment cycle, print five copies
of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Remove the waste tray and check that ink is present. Ink is present.
A
91-637-00, 91-638-00
February 2013
2-386
A
Y
N
An empty waste tray can indicate a problem with the purge system. Refer to 93-54900 to 93-552-00 and 93-557-00 to 93-560-00 Printheads 1 and 3 Printhead Reservoir Fill Error RAP or 93-553-00 to 93-556-00 and 93-561-00 to 93-564-00 Printheads 2 and 4 Printhead Reservoir Fill Error RAP.
91-660-00 to 91-663-00, 91-820-00 to 91-823-00 Printhead

Link Error RAP
91-660-00 Printhead 1 link broken.
Print print five copies at A3 (11x17) or 10 copies at A4 (8.5x11) of TP 10 Solid Fill Test
Pages (refer to TP 2 to TP 10). Print five copies of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test
are
Pages. Perform dC968 Head Purge. Print TP 21 Service Jet Test Pages. There
more than 21 chronic or masked jets.
Y
N
A chronic jet is less than 10 jets from another chronic or masked jet.
Y
N
Mask the chronic jet, GP 30 How to Mask Jets / Jet Substitution.
Perform Procedure B.

91-820-00 Printhead 1 link error.
Perform Procedure B.
Procedure
Procedure B
Procedure
WARNING
Perform dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser Self Test. The self test was successful.
Y
N
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.
Go to the 91-519-00 to 91-522-00, 91-655-00 to 91-658-00, 91-683-00 to 91-690-00, 91-807 to

91-811-00 Printhead NVM Read or Write Error RAP.
Print TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing Test Pages. Evaluate the oil bar chase
page only. Test page is good.
Y
N
Go to the IQ 21 Oil on Output RAP.
Perform dC965 Printhead Maintenance Cycle test. Observe wiper motion during the test. Look
for erratic wiper motion that may indicate wiper chatter or a motor failure. The wiper moves
smoothly across the printhead.
Y
N
Check the printhead maintenance wiper assembly. Refer to:
91-572-00, 91-573-00, 91-575-00 Wiper Vertical Error RAP.
91-574-00, 91-576-00, 91-598-00 Wiper Horizontal Error RAP.
Print five copies of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 6 Reset Head Uniformity Data. Select the
faulty printheads. Print five copies of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. The
test pages are good.
Y
N
Install new printheads as necessary, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2.
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 1 Printhead Uniformity. Select all printheads.
February 2013
2-387
91-638-00, 91-660-00 to 91-663-00, 91-820-00 to 91-
91-669-00 Excessive Skew RAP
91-670-00 Scanned Image Out of Sequence RAP
91-669-00 The scanned image has too much skew to process.
91-670-00 The expected image did not match the scanned image.
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Check the CVT glass for contamination, if necessary clean the glass. Refer to ADJ 62.1
Optics Cleaning Procedure.
Load the test patterns correctly in the DADH, refer to dC972 Print Head Uniformity. Refer to the
illustrations in Option 3 Manual and Option 4 Manual.
Check the DADH operation.
Check the media path for debris or wear.
Check the media and the media settings.
Procedure
Remove the documents from the DADH. Perform dC608 DADH Registration and dC609 Document Glass Registration.
Check the document guides on the DADH. Make sure that they are correctly adjusted to the
document size. Re-scan the test patterns. The fault remains.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Print Head Uniformity.
Go to IQ 10 Margin, Mis-registration or Skew RAP.
91-669-00, 91-670-00
February 2013
2-388
91-671-00 Fiducials Not Found RAP
91-672-00 Missing Jets RAP
91-671-00 The test pattern fiducials (on/off line pattern) for jet alignment could not be found.
91-672-00 Too many missing jets were detected to perform the operation.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
This fault is only raised when running a head calibration service diagnostics routine. The fault
indicates that there are too many missing jets Go to 91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error
RAP.
1.
Check the CVT glass for contamination, if necessary clean the glass. Refer to ADJ 62.1
2.
Remove the documents from the DADH. Perform dC608 DADH Registration and dC609
Document Glass Registration
3.
Load the test patterns correctly in the DADH, refer to dC972 Print Head Uniformity. Refer
to the illustrations in Option 3 Manual and Option 4 Manual.
4.
Check the contrast and print quality of the fiducials and the horizontal line above the fiducials, Figure 1. If the print quality is poor, go to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP. Perform the
procedure for Deletions in the process direction.
Horizontal line
Fiducials
Figure 1 Fiducials
February 2013
2-389
91-671-00, 91-672-00
91-673-00 Floating Point Error RAP
91-674-00 to 91-677-00, 91-812-00 to 91-815-00 Printhead

Adjustment Error RAP
91-673-00 The machine has detected a floating point calculation error.
91-674-00 The required voltage or normal adjustment exceeds the maximum on printhead 1.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Clean the DADH, ADJ 5.4.
2.
Clean the optics ADJ 62.1.
3.
Perform dC608 Document Feeder Registration.
4.
Perform the 91-669-00 Excessive Skew RAP.
NOTE: Faults 91-674-00 to 91-677-00 are raised when a manual dC972 option 3 Head to
Head Uniformity is performed and an unusually large adjustment is calculated. The routine will
abort without saving changes.
5.
Perform the 91-671-00 Fiducials Not Found RAP.
91-812-00 The required voltage adjustment exceeds the maximum on printhead 1.

NOTE: Faults 91-812-00 to 91-815-00 are raised when an automatic dC972 option 3 Head to
Head Uniformity is performed and errors are detected. The routine will abort without saving
changes.
Procedure
WARNING
Check the test pattern (TP 1) that was printed for evidence of colour mixing or wrong colours. If
necessary, the test pattern can be printed from dC972, option 3 Head to Head Uniformity.
Colour mixing or wrong colours are evident.
Y
N
The best quality, bright white plain paper available must be used for the manual uniformity
calibration, go to dC972 Printhead Uniformity and refer to Media Requirements.
NOTE: Automatic uniformity has no specific media requirements.
The correct media is used.
Y
N
Load the correct media, then perform the following dC972 routines:
1.
Option 3 Head to Head Uniformity - manual.
2.
Option 4 TRC Generation - manual.
3.
Option 5 Y Dot Position Correction, select all heads.
Perform the following dC972 routines:

1.
Option 6 Reset Head Uniformity Data.
2.
A
91-673-00, 91-674-00 to 91-677-00, 91-812-00 to 91-
February 2013
2-390
1.
91-678-00 to 91-681-00, 91-816-00 to 91-819-00, 91-961-00

to 91-964-00, Printhead Convergence Adjustment Error
RAP
2.
91-678-00 Voltage and/or norm adjustment can not bring printhead 1 into tolerance.
The fault remains.

Y
N
Install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2.

Perform the relevant procedure:
IQ 14 Some Colours Uneven RAP.
IQ 15 Wrong Colour RAP.
When the image quality fault is corrected, perform the following dC972 routines:
2.
NOTE: Faults 91-678-00 to 91-681-00 are raised when a manual dC972 option 3 Head to
Head Uniformity is performed and errors are detected. The machine will complete the routine
but may have an image quality defect.
3.
91-816-00 Voltage adjustment can not bring printhead 1 into tolerance.
1.

91-961-00 IOD CLD Adjust measurement did not converge for head 1.
NOTE: Faults 91-816-00 to 91-819-00 and 91-961-00 to 91-964-00 are raised when an automatic dC972 option 3 Head to Head Uniformity is performed and errors are detected. The routine will abort without saving changes.
Procedure
WARNING
Image quality is good.
Y
N
Y
N
The best quality, bright white plain paper available must be used for the manual uniformity calibration, go to dC972 Printhead Uniformity and refer to Media Requirements.
A
February 2013
2-391
91-674-00 to 91-677-00, 91-812-00 to 91-815-00, 91-
B
NOTE: Automatic uniformity has no specific media requirements.
91-682-00 Ambient Thermistor Error RAP
The correct media is used.

Y
N
Load the correct media, then perform the following dC972 routines:
91-682-00 The ambient thermistor reading is invalid.
1.
This fault is raised if the ADC reading for the ambient thermistor is not within the range of a
valid temperature reading. The fault is not a fatal error and the operation of the printer will continue if this fault is reported.
2.
3.
The ambient thermistor is used to determine the marking unit fan speed that is needed to effectively cool the wave amps. If the ambient thermistor is not operational the wave amp will still be
cooled by the fan but possibly not as efficiently.

1.
Option 6 Reset Head Uniformity Data.
2.
Procedure
The fault remains.

Y
N
1.
2.
WARNING
The ambient thermistor is mounted on the Marking Unit Driver PWB and if this thermistor goes
open or short circuit it would be necessary to replace the PWB.
If this fault occurs, install a new Marking Unit Driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
Perform the Final Checkout.

Perform the relevant procedure:
When the image quality fault is corrected, perform the following dC972 routines:
1.
2.
3.
If the fault remains, perform the Final Checkout.

1.
2.
If the fault remains, perform the Final Checkout.
Final Checkout
Go to WD 6.2. Check the wiring between the LED exposure lamps and PJ926 on the Scanner
PWB. Install new components as necessary:
LED exposure lamp, PL 62.15 Item 2.
Printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2.
91-678-00 to 91-681-00, 91-816-00 to 91-819-00, 91-
February 2013
2-392
91-698-00, 91-699-00, 91-706-00, 91-712-00, 91-718-00, 91720-00, 91-729-00, 91-730-00, 91-732-00 IOD Excessive
Head Misalignment RAP
91-698-00 IOD excessive stitch or roll misalignment.
91-699-00 IOD stitch / roll motors not zeroed.
91-706-00 The IOD detects printhead 1 Y axis is at the limit of travel.
91-712-00 The IOD detects printhead 2 Y-axis is at the limit of travel.
Procedure
NOTE: The LED on upper (master) printhead PWB indicates the presence of +3.3V.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment. The adjustment completed successfully.
Y
N
Check the fault history, dC122. A new fault code is listed.
Y
N
Perform dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test. Follow the instructions to run the following motors:
Printhead stitch adjust motor 2 (upper stitch motor), PL 91.20 Item 4, (MOT91030)
91-718-00 The IOD detects printhead 4 X-axis is at the limit of travel.
Printhead stitch adjust motor 1 (lower stitch motor), PL 91.25 Item 4, (MOT91029)
CAUTION
91-729-00 The IOD target Y-position out of range.
Do not repeatedly operate a roll motor. Repeated operation of a roll motor can overheat and damage the motor.
91-730-00 The IOD target Y-position out of far range.
Printhead roll adjust motor 2, PL 91.20 Item 4, (MOT91-026)
X-axis drive motor upper (upper carriage motor), PL 91.20 Item 5, (MOT91033)
X-axis drive motor lower (lower carriage motor), PL 91.25 Item 5, (MOT91-034)
Initial Actions
WARNING
MOT91-030 runs and printhead 2 moves left or right.

Y
N
CAUTION
could also occur.
1.
Refer to WD 9.9, check MOT91-030.

Check the wiring between PJ102 on the marking unit driver PWB and
MOT91-030.
CAUTION
Refer to:
Do not tilt the printhead excessively while warm. If possible, allow adequate time for the ink to
solidify before removing the printhead. Once removed, rest the printhead on the screws that
secure the lower (slave) circuit board.
CAUTION
2.
Check the wiring harnesses leading to carriage drive and sensing components. Focus on
areas above and behind the umbilicals.
Check for damage or debris that restricts carriage movement.
CAUTION
Check the MOT91-030 lead screw, PL 91.20 Item 21 for cracks. If necessary, install a new lead screw.
MOT91-029 runs and printhead 1 moves left or right.

Y
N
1.

MOT91-029.
A
February 2013
2-393
C
91-698-00, 91-699-00, 91-706-00, 91-712-00, 91-718-
Refer to:
N
1.
Refer to:
2.

MOT91-024.


MOT91-026 runs and printhead 2 moves up or down.
Y
N
1.
2.
Refer to WD 9.9 check MOT91-026.

MOT91-026.
1.
2.

MOT91-027.
Refer to:
Printhead roll adjust motor 1, PL 91.25 Item 4.

Y
N
Refer to:


Y
N
1.
2.

MOT91-028.
2.

A
MOT91-033 runs and the upper carriage moves left or right.

Y
N
Check the wiring between PJ102 on the marking unit driver PWB and MOT91033.
Refer to:
Refer to:
91-698-00, 91-699-00, 91-706-00, 91-712-00, 91-718-00,
February 2013
2-394
X-axis drive motor upper, PL 91.20 Item 5.
D
D
MOT91-034 runs and the lower carriage moves left or right.
Y
N
Check the wiring between PJ303 on the marking unit driver PWB and MOT91034.
Refer to:

X-axis drive motor lower, PL 91.25 Item 5.
Procedure
WARNING
Inspect the docking pins and docking surfaces for debris that could prevent the
carriage from fully docking. Clean the docking pins and surfaces as necessary,
GP 27.
2.
Move the marking unit back into the operational position, refer to GP 6.
3.
Observe the carriage as it moves into the docked position.
WARNING
CAUTION
To do this enter the Diagnostic tab and select dC612 Print Test Patterns. Select
TP 16, Stitch Identification Test Pages. The carriage will move into the docked
position to enable printing.
The carriage docks correctly against the drum.
Y
N
Inspect the marking unit drive system for broken or bound linkages. Install new
components necessary. PL 91.10.
Check the fault history, dC122.
If fault codes 91-712-00 and 91-720-00 are listed install a new upper carriage
If fault codes 91-706-00 and 91-732-00 are listed install a new lower carriage assembly, PL 91.25 Item 1.
If the fault is intermittent. Check the area surrounding the carriage and umbilicals for
wiring damage or obstructions. Repair the harness, REP 1.1 as necessary.
Go to the appropriate RAP.
Enter dC612 and print TP 16, Stitch Identification Test Pages and check that the print quality is
good.
91-722-00 IOD calibration 2D.
91-736-00 IOD static scanbar artifact.

1.
91-721-00 IOD calibration.
91-735-00 IOD non-static scanbar artifact.
91-721-00, 91-722-00, 91-735-00, 91-736-00 IOD

Contamination Error RAP
Do not connect the harness to the IOD PWB with the machine powered on. This may damage
the IOD sensor.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Perform dC969 Cleaning Ink Smears. Check the prints. The prints are clean.
Y
N
Repeat dC969 until the prints are clean.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment. The routine completes successfully.
Y
N
Enter dC330 and select 94-009 Drum Drive Slew Speed. Select start and inspect the
drum for contamination as it rotates. The drum is clean.
Y
N
Clean the drum, GP 27.
Clean the IOD, GP 27.
Check the wire routing under the IOD for abrasions. Repair the harness, REP 1.1 as necessary. If the fault remains, install new components as necessary:
February 2013
2-395
91-698-00, 91-699-00, 91-706-00, 91-712-00, 91-718-
91-725-00 to 91-728-00, 91-945-00 to 91-948-00, IOD Bad

Target Scan RAP
91-725-00 IOD target.
If the head purge does not correct the missing jets, go to 91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic
Jet Error RAP.
Perform dC969 Clean Ink Smears. Check the prints. The prints are clean.
Y
N
Repeat dC969 until the prints are clean.
91-726-00 IOD target missing.

91-727-00 IOD target corrupted.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment. The routine completes successfully.

Y
N
Clean the IOD, GP 27.
91-728-00 IOD target missing or corrupted.
Open the stripper blade, GP 31 and check for contamination. If the blade is contaminated, install a new stripper blade, PL 10.12 Item 3
Check for components that could be rubbing on the drum. Correct as required.
91-945-00 IOD Invalid CLD row measurement avg on head 1.

Enter dC330 code 94-009 Drum Drive Slew speed. Select start and inspect the drum for contamination as it rotates. The drum is clean.
Y
N
Clean the drum, GP 27.

Initial Actions
WARNING

If the fault is intermittent. Check the harness under the IOD for abrasions. Repair the harness,
REP 1.1 as necessary.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not connect the harness to the IOD PWB with the machine powered on. This may damage
the IOD sensor.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Procedure
NOTE: Before printing the jet test page, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x11 inch plain paper is loaded
LEF into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched paper.
Select dC968 Head Purge. Select Print Jet Test Pages. Check the prints for missing jets, refer
to IQ 1. The prints are good.
Y
N
Perform dC968 Head Purge.
A
91-725-00 to 91-728-00, 91-945-00 to 91-948-00,
February 2013
2-396
91-824-00 PQM Insufficient Ink RAP
91-825-00 PQM Insufficient Paper RAP
91-824-00 The machine has insufficient ink to perform the print quality maintenance routine.
91-825-00 The machine has insufficient paper to perform the print quality maintenance routine.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Load additional ink.
1.
Load additional media into the relevant tray.
2.
If the fault remains, go to the 93-871-00 to 93-874-00 Ink Level Sense Error RAP.
2.
If the fault remains, go to the 73A Tray 3 Out of Paper RAP.
February 2013
2-397
91-824-00, 91-825-00
91-826-00 PQM Insufficient Jets RAP
91-827-00 PQM Align Needed RAP
91-826-00 Insufficient jets are available to perform the print quality maintenance routine.
91-827-00 A head to head alignment is required before the print quality maintenance routine
can be performed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Go to the 91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error RAP.
WARNING
The dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment is a prerequisite for the calibration that was
manually requested. The previous attempt may have aborted.
91-826-00, 91-827-00
1.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment - manual.
2.
Check the stitch adjust and roll adjust motor lead screws, PL 91.20 Item 21 and PL 91.25
Item 21 for cracks. Install new components as necessary.
3.
Enter dC122 Fault History. Check for device faults that prevent completion of the routine.
February 2013
2-398
91-828-00 PQM Y-Dot Position Needed RAP
91-829-00 PQM Drum Runout Needed RAP
91-828-00 A Y dot position correction is required before the print quality maintenance routine
can be performed.
91-829-00 A drum runout calibration is required before the print quality maintenance routine
can be performed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
The dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 5 Y Dot Position Correction is a prerequisite for the
calibration that was manually requested. The previous attempt may have aborted.
Go to the 91-637-00 Drum Runout Calibration Needed RAP.

1.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 5 Y Dot Position Correction. Select all printheads.
2.
February 2013
2-399
91-828-00, 91-829-00
91-830-00 PQM Uniformity Needed RAP
91-831-00 PQM Uniformity Reset Needed RAP
91-830-00 Printhead uniformity is required before the print quality maintenance routine can be
performed.
91-831-00 A printhead uniformity reset is required before the print quality maintenance routine
can be performed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
The dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 3 Head to Head Uniformity is a prerequisite for the calibration that was manually requested. The previous attempt may have aborted.
The dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 6 Reset Head Uniformity Data is a prerequisite for the
calibration that was manually requested. The previous attempt may have aborted.
1.
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 3 Head to Head Uniformity.
1.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 6 Reset Head Uniformity Data. Select all printheads.
2.
2.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 1 Printhead Uniformity - manual and select all printheads.
91-830-00, 91-831-00
February 2013
2-400
91-832-00 PQM Empty Waste Tray RAP
91-833-00 PQM Cleaning Pages Needed RAP
91-832-00 The waste tray must be emptied before the print quality maintenance routine can be
performed.
91-833-00 The cleaning pages requested by the print quality maintenance routine can not be
printed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Empty the ink waste tray and reset the waste counter.
1.
Check that the machine has sufficient ink and A4 or letter size paper loaded.
2.
2.
Empty the ink waste tray and reset the waste counter.
3.
Check that the machine is in a ready to copy state. If necessary, go to the OF 5 Boot Up
Failure RAP.
4.
If the cleaning pages still fail to print, go to dC968 Head Purge and reprint the cleaning
pages.
If the message to empty the waste tray or the message Waste Tray not detected (missing).
Insert the Waste Tray, will not clear. Perform the following steps:
1.
Enter Service mode, GP 1. Select Call Closeout and select Reset Waste Counter.
2.
Check that the magnet is still located on the bottom of the waste tray. If necessary install
a new waste tray, PL 91.10 Item 15.
3.
Refer to WD 9.4 and check the waste tray sensor and the wiring harness. Install new
Waste tray sensor, PL 91.05 Item 4.
February 2013
2-401
91-832-00, 91-833-00
91-834-00 PQM Tool Not Usable RAP
91-835-00 PQM Tool Manually Disabled RAP
91-834-00 The requested print quality maintenance routine is not usable.
91-835-00 A print quality maintenance routine has been manually disabled.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Go to the 91-636-00 IOD in Degraded Mode RAP.
1.
2.
Empty the ink waste tray.
3.
Check that the machine is in a ready to copy state. If necessary, go to the OF 5 Boot Up
Failure RAP.
4.
Enter dC122 Fault History. Check for a new fault code. Go to the appropriate RAP.
5.
Re-run the diagnostic routine that failed.
91-834-00, 91-835-00
February 2013
2-402
91-836-00 PQM System Busy RAP
91-837-00 PQM Align Calibration Needed RAP
91-836-00 The print quality maintenance system is busy.
91-837-00 PQM align stitch offset out of calibration. A head to head alignment is required
before the print quality maintenance routine can be performed.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
The system is currently performing a previously requested dC971 Head to Head Alignment or
dC968 Head Purge. Wait for the system busy message (on the status lines) to clear and retry
the aborted calibration.
WARNING
The dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment is a prerequisite after heads are changed or if
NVRAM reset (Reset All).
1.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment - manual.
2.
Check the stitch adjust and roll adjust motor lead screws, PL 91.20 Item 21 and PL 91.25
Item 21 for cracks. Install new components as necessary.
3.
February 2013
2-403
91-836-00, 91-837-00
91-838-00 PQM: CLD Baseline Needed RAP

91-838-00 PQM: CLD Baseline Needed. The Closed Loop Drift (CLD) baseline has not been
run after installation of new printheads.
Procedure
91-842-00 to 91-845-00 Printhead Nvram Read or Decode

Error RAP
91-842-00 Printhead 1 Nvram jet mask section read or decode error.
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
Check that the ribbon cables connecting the relevant printhead to the IME controller PWB are
correctly and securely connected, and not damaged. Re-seat the ribbon cable as necessary.
The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install new ribbon cables as necessary, PL 92.10.

Procedure
WARNING
This RAP is for information only, no service action is necessary. These fault codes will be automatically cleared by the machine.
Go to GP 7 to check the system grounding. The system grounding is good.

Y
N
Repair any grounding faults found, GP 7.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Head to Head Uniformity - manual. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP
14. The fault remains.
Y
N
IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1
NOTE: CLD Baseline is automatically and transparently run as part of the Head to Head Uniformity routine. This will only occur once after the installation of a printhead.
91-838-00, 91-842-00 to 91-845-00
February 2013
2-404
91-848-00 to 91-851-00 IOD Align Calibration Error RAP

91-848-00 IOD align calibration: X stitch measurement limit excessive X stitch was measured
and the align calibration process cannot complete.
91-849-00 IOD align calibration: Y stitch measurement limit excessive Y stitch was measured
and the align calibration process cannot complete.
91-850-00 IOD align calibration: X offset correction limit align calibration resulted in an X stitch
correction value that is too large.
91-851-00 IOD align calibration: Y offset correction limit align calibration resulted in an Y stitch
correction value that is too large.
91-852-00 to 91-854-00 Y Dot Position SVD Calculation

RAP
91-852-00 PQM: TRC Wait for Ypos SVD Complete.
91-853-00 PQM: Unif Wait for Ypos SVD Complete.
91-854-00 PQM: Ydp Wait for Ypos SVD Complete.
NOTE: The above codes were designed for tracking background software calibrations that run
during the boot-up of the machine. No service action is required.
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
The above fault codes may initiate if machine activities are requested manually or automatically during the calculation process. If the faults are persistent perform the following:
1. Enter dC122 Fault History. If necessary perform the relevant RAP.
Enter dC612 and print TP 16. Check the stitch identification test pages. A stitch defect is
present
Y
N
2.
3.
If the fault is still present then re-load the software, GP 4.
Manually disable the IOD align calibration:

1. Enter dC131 NVM read/write NVM ID 490-41 and change value to 3.
2.
Enter dC971 and start the routine.
3.
Enter dC612 and print TP 16 and check the identification test pages.
A stitch defect is present

Y
N
Manually re-enable the IOD align calibration:
2.
3.
A stitch defect is present

Y
N
Go to 91-698-00, 91-699-00, 91-706-00, 91-712-00, 91-718-00, 91-720-00, 91-729-00, 91730-00, 91-732-00 IOD Excessive Head Misalignment RAP.
Enter dC612 and print TP 16 Stitch Identification and check that the print quality is good.
If the stitch defect is still present, swap the print heads around to move the artifact to the outside of the page.
February 2013
2-405
91-848-00 to 91-851-00, 91-852-00 to 91-854-00
91-855-00 Thermal Safety Circuit Failure Undetected RAP
91-929-00 to 91-940-00 IOD Jet Position Noise RAP
91-855-00 Thermal Safety Circuit Fail.
91-929-00 IOD excessive Head 1 X position noise.

Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.

91-933-00 IOD excessive Head 1 Y position noise.
91-937-00 IOD excessive Head 1 roll position noise.
CAUTION
The above code will initiate if there was a individual printhead thermal safety circuit failure that
was unidentifiable by the IME controller PWB.
Go to the 91A Printhead Communications RAP.

Position measurement errors (position noise) are caused by one or more pixels landing on the
drum surface at a distance that is far from the expected position. This position noise causes
the head to exceed the limits set for the jet position noise.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
CAUTION
Do not tilt the printhead excessively while warm. If possible, allow adequate time for the ink to
solidify before removing the printhead. Once removed, rest the printhead on the screws that
secure the lower (slave) circuit board.
CAUTION
to the printhead and IME controller PWB will occur if the cables are installed incorrectly
CAUTION
NOTE: The LED on upper (master) printhead circuit board indicates the presence of +3.3V.
91-855-00, 91-929-00 to 91-940-00
Check in dC122 Fault History and note the last fault code.
February 2013
2-406
Procedure
91-941-00 to 91-944-00 PQM Too Many Purges RAP
Enter dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment.

Enter dC122 Fault History and observe the last fault shown. The fault is cleared.
Y
N
Perform dC968 Head Purge on all 4 Heads.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Print Head uniformity and run option 5, Y-Dot Position Correction.
Y
N
Install a new printhead as required:
Printhead upper carriage, PL 91.20 Item 2.
91-941-00 PQM too many purges head1.
Printhead lower carriage, PL 91.25 Item 2.

Initial Actions
If the customer has complained that the printing speed of the machine is slow, refer to
service bulletin T7536 Troubleshooting Productivity Issues.
If the Fault History dC122 shows the fault code 91-638-00 perform the IOD Detects
Chronic Jet Error RAP.
Enter dC612 Print Test Patterns. Select and print TP 16 Stitch Identification and
check that print quality is good. Go to SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure
Enter dC612 Print Test Patterns. Select and print TP 16 Stitch Identification and check
that the print quality is good. Go to SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter dC612 Print Test Patterns. Select and print TP 16 Stitch Identification and check that
print quality is good. Go to SCP 5 Final Actions.
WARNING
Go to the eCenterware page for the machine, then download the service log file from the Maintenance Assistant tab. This file will list the last 5 power on dates and print counts. The
last
five power on dates occurred in the previous two weeks.
Y
N
Print the jet test pages from dC968. All jets are present.
Y
N
Keep the jet test pages. Go to IQ 9 Deletion in the process Direction RAP.
On each of the jet test pages there is a listing of the jet fix status. Refer to Table 1 for
details of the jet conditions that will result in automatic purges. There are more than 2
jets of 3 or more colours (a total of at least 6 jets) on the same printhead, listed as
either missing or chronic.
Y
N
Replace all printheads with listed bad jets, REP 91.29. If no jets are marked as bad,
the machine has recovered, perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new printhead as required:
Upper printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2.
Lower printhead, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Remove the inner cover, PL 81.11 Item 2. Enter dC968, then purge the printhead with
multiple missing jets. Observe the purge routine. Print the jet test pages. The
purge
sequence cleaned the printheads.
Y
N
Perform 93-933-00 to 93-936-00 Head Purge Failure RAP.
There are more than 2 jets of 3 or more colours (a total of at least 6 jets) on the
same head listed as either missing or chronic.
Y
N
The machine has recovered, perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A
February 2013
2-407
91-929-00 to 91-940-00, 91-941-00 to 91-944-00
B
Remove the IOD assembly, REP 91.22. Inspect the IOD for contamination or malfunction.
If necessary install a new IOD assembly PL 94.15 Item 1.
Each power cycle can result in a cold purge, which will cause the waste tray to fill up at a faster
rate than is customary. Confirm if the customer is turning the machine off on a regular basis.
Instruct the customer that it is not necessary to turn the machine off frequently, discuss the
power save option intelligent ready with the customer, refer to GP 5 & GP 14.
91-949-00 to 91-952-00 Closed Loop Drift Baseline RAP

91-949-00 IOD CLD Baseline measurement out of range on head 1.
Table 1 Automatic purges based on printer model

Number of missing jets that trigger a proactive purge (includes chronic or masked jets
for total count).
NOTE: The above faults are raised when the routine dC 972 option 3 Head to Head Uniformity
- manual is performed and a unusually large or small measurement is obtained for the CLD
baseline. The Head to Head Uniformity may be actable but the CLD baseline may abort.
Model
Number
Colour
Total
Mono Total
Mono/Colour
Consecutive
Logic
Operand
9301
Never
OR
WARNING
9302
OR
9303
OR
Procedure
Y
N
Perform in listed order the following procedures;
1. Enter dC612 then print TP 12 chase pages to clean ink from the drum.
2.
Enter dC968 then perform the Jet test pages routine. Check for a large number of
missing jets, refer to TP 21.
3.
dC 972 option 3 Head to Head Uniformity - manual.
The fault remains.

Y
N
Perform in listed order the following dC972 procedures;
1. Option 4 TRC Generation.
2.
Check the fault history for chain 91 faults in the link code range 500-999 that have IOD in
the fault name, refer to GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files. As necessary perform any
associated RAPs, and then clean the drum GP 27.
Perform the relevant procedures;
91-941-00 to 91-944-00, 91-949-00 to 91-952-00
February 2013
2-408
91-953-00 to 91-960-00, 91-965-00 to 91-968-00 Closed

Loop Drift Measurement RAP
C
Print new test patterns from dC972, option 3. The print quality is good.
Y
N
Install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2, PL 91.25 Item 2.
91-953-00 IOD CLD Adjust measurement out of range on head 1.

Go to SCP 5 Final Actions
Go to SCP 5 Final Actions
Enter dC968 then perform the Jet test pages routine. Check for a large number of missing
jets, refer to TP 21.
Check the fault history for chain 91 faults in the link code range 500-999 that have IOD in
the fault name, refer to GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files. As necessary perform any
associated RAPs, and then clean the drum GP 27.

91-957-00 IOD CLD Fiducial search error for head 1.
Perform the relevant procedures;
IQ 14 Some Colours Uneven RAP
IQ 15 Wrong Colour RAP

91-965-00 IOD CLD Sensitivity error for head 1.
NOTE: The above faults are raised when the routine dC 972 option 3 Head to Head Uniformity
manual or automatic is performed, and a unusually large or small measurement is obtained or
the image on the drum is partially missing. The routine will abort without saving changes.
Procedure
WARNING
Y
N
Enter dC612 then print TP 12 chase pages to clean ink from the drum, then run dC972
option 3 Head to Head Uniformity - automatic. The fault remains.
Y
N
Print new test patterns from dC972, option 3. The quality of the prints is good.
Y
N
Perform in listed order the following dC972 routines;
1. Option 6 Reset Head Uniformity Data.
2.
Option 3 Head to Head Uniformity - Manual.
3.
Option 4 TRC Generation.
4.
Option 5 Y Dot Position Correction - select all heads.
February 2013
2-409
91-953-00 to 91-960-00, 91-965-00 to 91-968-00
91-970-00 to 91-981-00 Printhead Reservoir and Jet Stack

Heater Unstable RAP
91-970-00 Head 1 right jet stack heater went unstable while printing.
Lower carriage harness, PL 91.25 Item 12 or upper carriage harness, PL 91.20

Item 12.
91-973-00 Head 4right jet stack heater went unstable while printing.
Y
N
91-974-00 Head 1 left jet stack heater went unstable while printing.
91-978-00 Head 1 reservoir heater went unstable while printing.
The fault may be intermittent. Go to WD 9.8. Check for loose connections between:
Procedure
WARNING
The marker unit driver PWB and the relevant printhead.
Refer to:
Go to WD 9.4. Check that the marking unit cooling fan is running, Figure 1. The fan is running.
Y
N
Refer to:
PJ701, Marking unit heater PWB
Lower carriage harness, PL 91.25 Item 12 or Upper carriage harness, PL 91.20 Item 12.
Printhead upper, PL 91.20 Item 2 or Printhead lower, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Marking unit heater PWB, PL 92.10 Item 5
OF 6 Fans and Air Systems RAP
Marking unit fan, PL 1.15 Item 23.
Enter dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser, then run the relevant Test. The test is good.
Y
N
Y
N
Refer to:
01A AC Power Distribution RAP, Head 1 to 4 Reservoir and Jet stack Heater
Checks.
Marking Unit Fan
91-970-00 to 91-981-00
February 2013
2-410
91A Printhead Communications RAP
This RAP gives additional information on printhead communication problems. Perform the
RAP for all current fault codes before this RAP is performed.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
could also occur.
N
Repair any grounding issues found, GP 7.
CAUTION
Check the harness leading to the indicated printhead.
Check for damage to surrounding harnesses.
Procedure
Check that the ribbon cables connecting the printheads to the wave amp PWB and IME controller PWB are securely connected and not damaged. Re-seat the ribbon cables as necessary. The wiring is securely connected and undamaged.
Y
N
Repair or replace the damaged cables as necessary, REP 1.1.
Check and note the voltages at the test points on the IME controller PWB, Figure 1. All 4 test
points read +3.2V.
Y
N
If any test point reads +2.1V install a new video cable, PL 92.10 Item 7, for the indicated printhead.
If any test point reads 0V check the PEST error log for error 99-395-00. If error 99395-00 is found switch off the machine, GP 14, then disconnect the heater harness
to the affected printhead, Figure 2. Switch on the machine and check the test point
for the affected printhead. If the voltage is still 0V then install a new printhead, PL
91.20 Item 2, PL 91.25 Item 2.
NOTE: Ignore any error messages associated with the disconnected heater harness.
If any test point reads +0.3V go to dC335 and check all set point mode temperatures
for the suspect printhead. Look for non responsive heaters, irregular temperature
fluctuations or other symptoms that would indicate a thermistor error on the printhead. If necessary compare the results of the suspect printhead with temperatures
reported from a known good printhead. If thermistor errors are detected install a new
printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Figure 1 IME controller PWB test points
Check the system grounding, GP 7. The grounding is good.
February 2013
2-411
91A
Heater harnesses connections
Figure 2 Heater harness connections to printheads
91A
February 2013
2-412
92-501-00 to 92-504-00, 92-519-00 Serial Link Safety

Transient RAP
92-505-00, 92-506-00 Marking Unit Communications Error

RAP
92-501-00 MpSerialLinkSafetyTransient.
92-505-00 Marker unit communications failure
92-502-00 MuSerialLinkSafetyTransient.
92-506-00 Marker unit communications failure
92-503-00 MuidSerialLinkSafetyTransient.
Initial Actions
WARNING
92-504-00 DDSerialLinkSafetyTransient.
92-519-00 PsSerialLinkDownTransient.
Procedure
WARNING
If the fault 92-505-00 is accompanied by 92-510-00 and 92-575-00. Check for a loss of
connection on the cable between the IME controller and the marking unit driver PWB.
Procedure
Go to WD 9.7 and WD 9.10. Check for loose connections between:
1.
Refer to:
Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 14.
The IME controller PWB and the marking unit driver PWB.
PJ903, IME controller PWB.
PJ203, Marking unit driver PWB.
Marking unit driver PWB cable (PJ203), PL 92.10 Item 14.
February 2013
2-413
92-501-00 to 92-504-00, 92-519-00, 92-505-00, 92-
92-510-00, 92-511-00 Marking Unit Ink Delivery

Communications Error RAP
92-515-00, 92-516-00 Drum Driver Communications Error

RAP
92-510-00 Ink delivery communications failure on marking unit driver PWB.
92-515-00 Drum driver communications failure
92-511-00 Ink delivery communications failure on marking unit driver PWB.
92-516-00 Drum driver communications error
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Go to WD 9.2 and WD 9.6. Check for loose connections between the drum driver PWB and the
IME controller PWB, refer to:
connection on the cable between the IME controller and the marking unit driver PWB. Go
to 92-505-00, 92-506-00 Marking Unit Communications Error RAP.
Procedure
Check for loose connections on the marking unit driver PWB. If the fault persists, install new
92-510-00, 92-511-00, 92-515-00, 92-516-00
February 2013
2-414
92-520-00 Power Supply Communications Error RAP
92-525-00, 92-526-00 Media Path Communications Error

RAP
92-520-00 Power supply communications error
92-525-00 Media path communications failure
Procedure
WARNING
92-526-00 Media path communications error
Initial Actions
WARNING
Go to WD 9.4 and WD 1.4. Check the connections between the PJ902 on the drum driver PWB
and PJDC2 on the power supply Unit.
Drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item 10.
Check the MU Drawer service loop harness for damage, PL 92.10 Item 9.
Procedure
Go to WD 8.4 and WD 9.5. Check for bad wiring between PJ402, on the IME controller PWB
and PJ408 on the Media path driver PWB.
February 2013
2-415
92-520-00, 92-525-00, 92-526-00
92-530-00 3TM Serial Link Error RAP
92-531-00 Paper Tray Module Communications Error RAP
92-530-00 Three trays module serial link error.
92-531-00 Paper tray module (3TM) communication error.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Go to WD 8.2 and WD 7.3. Check the wiring between:
Go to 92-530-00 3TM Serial Link Error RAP.
The media path driver PWB and the 3 tray module (3TM) PWB.
Refer to:
PJ950, 3TM PWB.
3 Tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
92-530-00, 92-531-00
February 2013
2-416
92-535-00, 92-536-00 Tray 5 Communications Error RAP
92-541-00 ADC Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-535-00 Tray 5 control PWB serial communications error.
92-541-00 ADC interrupt storm.
92-536-00 Tray 5 communications error.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
Go to WD 7.1. and WD 8.4. Check for loose connections between:
The tray 5 control PWB and the media path driver PWB.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow before installing a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
Refer to:
PJ502, PJ513, Media path driver PWB.
PJ704, Marking unit driver PWB.
Remove and reinsert the following communication connectors. There should be a click when
the connector is correctly seated.
Move the marking unit to the maintenance position, GP 6. Four connectors on the IME
controller PWB PJ201, PJ301, PJ401, PJ402, WD 9.5.
If the problem continues then reseat the print head video cables (marked with letter A). If this is
a hard failure then try reseating or install new print head video cables, one at a time. Look for
faults 91-519-00 to 91-522-00, 91-660-00 to 91-667 and 91-523-00 to 91-546-00 may help to
isolate which head cable has a problem. Install new components as necessary, PL 92.10.
February 2013
2-417
92-535-00, 92-536-00, 92-541-00
92-542-00 PS Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-543-00, 92-544-00 MU Interrupt Storm Faults RAP
92-542-00 PS interrupt storm.
92-543-00 MU interrupt storm.
Initial Actions
92-544-00 MUID interrupt storm.
WARNING
Procedure
1.
2.
If the fault persists, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
92-542-00, 92-543-00, 92-544-00
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
Install a new marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
February 2013
2-418
92-545-00 DD Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-546-00, 92-547-00 MP Interrupt Storm Faults RAP
92-545-00 DD interrupt storm.
92-546-00 MP interrupt storm.
Initial Actions
92-547-00 IMD interrupt storm.
WARNING
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
Install a new media path PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
February 2013
2-419
92-545-00, 92-546-00, 92-547-00
92-548-00 TTM Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-549-00 PFP Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-548-00 TTM interrupt storm.
92-549-00 PFP (Tray 5) interrupt storm.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Procedure
Procedure
1.
Refer to WD 7.3 and WD 8.2. Check the wiring between PJ401 on media path driver PWB
and PJ950 on 3 tray module PWB. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly. Repair the
wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
1.
Refer to WD 7.1 and WD 8.4. Check the wiring between PJ704 on media path driver PWB
and PJ502 on the tray 5 control PWB. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly. Repair
the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1.
2.
2.
Media path driver PWB to tray 3 module harness, PL 1.15 Item 21.
92-548-00, 92-549-00
February 2013
2-420
92-551-00 CIS Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-550-00, 92-555-00 System Timer Error RAP
92-551-00 CIS interrupt storm.
92-550-00 Safety timer time out.
Initial Actions
92-555-00 System timer skipped.
WARNING

Check the following wiring. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly. Repair the wiring
a.
b.
2.
WARNING
Procedure
1.
Initial Actions
Refer to WD 8.6 and WD 9.2. Between PJ2 on the registration / preheat Interface
PWB and PJ701 on the drum driver PWB. Between PJ1 on the registration / preheat
interface PWB and the registration scan bar, PL 88.10 Item 2. If necessary, install a
new drum driver MR sensor harness, PL 1.15 Item 9.
Procedure
Re-install the machine software, GP 4. The fault remains.
Y
N
Install a new IME control PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
Refer to WD 9.1 and WD 9.22. Between PJ101 on the drum driver PWB and PJ1 on
the IOD pre amp PWB. Between PJ2 on the IOD pre amp PWB and the IOD scan
bar, PL 94.15. If necessary, install a new IOD to drum driver PWB cable, PL 94.15
Item 5.
February 2013
2-421
92-551-00, 92-550-00, 92-555-00
92-552-00 SBC Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-554-00 AC Line Failed RAP
92-552-00 SBC interrupt storm.
92-554-00 The AC power cord has been disconnected or the AC supply has failed.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check that the AC power cord is correctly connected.
Procedure
Procedure
Go to the 01A AC Power Distribution RAP.
1.
Refer to WD 3.3 and WD 8.2. Check the ribbon cable between PJ402 on the media path
driver PWB and PJ20 on the single board controller PWB. Ensure the connectors are
seated correctly.
2.
92-552-00, 92-554-00
February 2013
2-422
92-556-00, 92-557-00, 92-558-00, 92-559-00 ECM Failure

RAP
92-560-00, 92-561-00 Marking Unit Firmware Version

Mismatch RAP
92-556-00 ECM PCI access failure.
92-560-00 Marking unit firmware version mismatch.
92-557-00 ECM ADC failed.
92-561-00 Marking unit firmware version mismatch.
92-558-00 ECM PS line cross failed.
Procedure
WARNING
92-559-00 ECM FPGA access error.
Initial Actions
Switch Off the machine then switch On the Machine, GP 14.
Procedure
WARNING
Check the wiring and connectors to the IME control PWB. The wiring and connectors are
good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring, Go to REP 1.1.
Install a new IME control PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-423
92-556-00, 92-557-00, 92-558-00, 92-559-00, 92-560-
92-562-00 Drum Driver Firmware Version Mismatch RAP
92-563-00 Power Supply Firmware Version Mismatch RAP
92-562-00 Drum driver firmware version mismatch.
92-563-00 IME power supply firmware version mismatch.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
92-562-00, 92-563-00
February 2013
2-424
92-564-00 Media Path Firmware Version Mismatch RAP
92-565-00 3TM Firmware Version Mismatch RAP
92-564-00 Media path firmware version mismatch.
92-565-00 3 trays module firmware version mismatch.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Install a new media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Install a new 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
February 2013
2-425
92-564-00, 92-565-00
92-566-00 Tray 5 Firmware Version Mismatch RAP
92-567-00 ECM FPGA Version Mismatch RAP
92-566-00 Paper feeder platform firmware version mismatch.
92-567-00 ECM FPGA Version Mismatch. The IME and CCS software is incompatible.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Install a new tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8.
A software upgrade must be performed, GP 4 Machine Software.
92-566-00, 92-567-00
February 2013
2-426
92-568-00 ECM Initialization Error RAP
92-569-00 Image FPGA Version Mismatch RAP
92-568-00 IME controls did not initialize correctly.
92-569-00 Image FPGA version mismatch.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
The fault will occur if the IME controller PWB was replaced with an incompatible version
of software on it.
Procedure
Procedure
Re-install the machine software, GP 4. The fault remains.
Y
N
February 2013
2-427
92-568-00, 92-569-00
92-570-00 Interrupt Storm Fault RAP
92-571-00 Software Error RAP
92-570-00 Interrupt storm fault.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Procedure
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow before installing a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
If the fault is still present, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
Remove and reinsert the following communication connectors. There should be a click when
the connector is correctly seated.
PJ16 on the single board controller PWB, WD 3.2.
The RJ45 type in line connector (part of the service loop), WD 9.5 located behind the
lower rear cover to the right of the power supply unit.
If the problem continues then install a new service loop, PL 92.10 Item 9.
92-570-00, 92-571-00
February 2013
2-428
92-575-00 ADC Out of Range RAP
92-579-00 CDI Submit Sheet Error RAP
92-575-00 Analog to digital conversion of thermistor readings inconsistent with expected value.
92-579-00 A CDI submit sheet error has been detected.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check the PEST log history dC123 to determine which thermistor is at fault.
connection on the cable between the IME controller and the marking unit driver PWB. Go
to 92-505-00, 92-506-00 Marking Unit Communications Error RAP.
Procedure
Re-install the machine software, GP 4.
Procedure
If a PEST code is available then go the appropriate RAP. Install new components as required.
February 2013
2-429
92-575-00, 92-579-00
92-581-00 Image Transfer Error RAP
92-583-00 Cold Temperature Boot Time-out RAP
92-581-00 Image transfer failure from Single board controller PWB to IME controller PWB.
92-583-00 Cold temperature boot time-out.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Go to WD 9.5 and WD 3.1. Check for loose connections between the IME controller PWB
and the single board controller PWB. Refer to:
Procedure
PJ5, Single board controller PWB.
Ensure the ambient temperature in the room is above 6 degrees C.
2.
Check the following components for damage:
Service loop, PL 92.10 Item 9.
Check the RJ45 type in-line connector between PJ401 on IME controller PWB and
PJ5 on single board controller PWB. The connector is behind the rear cover PL
70.25 Item 8 on the 3 tray module to the right of the marking unit cooling fan, PL 1.15
Item 23.
3.
4.
If the machine temperature is above 5 degrees C and the 92-583 fault occurs, it would indicate
that the reservoir thermistor is at fault. Refer to WD 9.16. Install new components as required:
Solenoid Patch PWB, PL 93.10 Item 9.
Reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Check all ground connections in this area, refer to GP 7.
Re-install the machine software, GP 4.

Service loop, PL 92.10 Item 9.
92-581-00, 92-583-00
February 2013
2-430
92-585-00 LVDS Contone Terminal Error During Image

Transfer RAP
92-586-00 Print Engine Speed Fault RAP

92-586-00 The print engine is running at default speed.
92-585-00 LVDS contone terminal error during image transfer.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check the MU Drawer service loop, PL 92.10 Item 9 for damage.
Check all ground connections in this area, refer to GP 7.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Go to WD 9.5 and WD 3.1. Check for loose connections between the IME controller PWB
and the single board controller PWB. Refer to:
PJ5, Single board controller PWB.
Reseat the printhead ribbon cables, refer to REP 91.29.

February 2013
2-431
92-585-00, 92-586-00
92-598-00, 92-599-00, 92-600-00, 92-610-000 to 92-614-00,

IME NVRAM Error RAP
Critical system settings have been reset to their default values. The system can continue operating, but requires manual configuration to custom settings.
92-803-00, 92-804-00 DSP2 Overlay Error RAP

92-803-00 DSP2 overlay setup time-out.
92-804-00 DSP2 overlay cleanup time-out.
These faults are raised when a DSP2 motor is enabled during IOD calibration.
92-598-00 NVM dynamic data corrupted.
NOTE: The DSP2 motors are:
92-599-00 NVM system constants corrupted.

92-600-00 NVM critical settings corrupted.
92-598-00 to 92-600-00 faults are raised during initialization if the CRC values for the
described section of the IME NVRAM are invalid. When this occurs, the IME sets defaults values.
92-610-00 EngNvNewMagic Invalid - NVM magic number detected by IME.
Tray 1 feed/elevator motor.
Tray 2 feed/elevator motor.
Tray 3 feed motor.
Tray 5 feed motor.
Tray 5 transport motor.
Cleaning unit motor.
Front transfix motor.
Rear transfix motor.
92-611-00 EngNvNewFormat - Invalid NVM format number detected by IME
Procedure
92-610-00 and 92-611-00 faults are raised during initialization if the data ID for the magic number or format number is not the expected value. When this occurs, the IME sets defaults values.
92-612-00 EngNvCDIFactoryReset - IOT CDI NVM factory init has been performed.
WARNING
92-613-00 EngNvCDISystemReset - IOT CDI NVM system init has been performed.
92-614-00 EngNvCDIUserReset - IOT CDI NVM user init has been performed.
92-612-00 to 92-614-00 faults are raised when a dC301 is sent to the IME for a factory, system
or user initialization. When this occurs, the IME sets defaults values.
Procedure
WARNING
These faults are for information only. If a service action is required, a separate fault code will be
raised.
92-598-00, 92-599-00, 92-600-00, 92-610-000 to 92-614-
February 2013
2-432
92-805-00 Fuse A Blown RAP
92-805-00 Fuse A on the drum driver PWB has blown.
N
Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. The fault remains.
Y
N
Procedure
WARNING
Check fuse A for continuity.
NOTE: The fuse is located below PJ601 on the drum driver PWB and is marked F602. The
fuse is non-reparable.
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. The fault remains.
Y
N
Install a new IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1. Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Fuse A is blown.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.2. +24V is available PJ602, pin 12.
Y
N
Go to WD 1.5. +24V is available at PJDC3, pin 15.
Y
N
Go to 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload RAP and check
for a short circuit.
Check the wiring between the power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2, and the drum driver
PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4, for an open circuit. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.2 and WD 9.6. Check the wiring between PJ603 on the drum driver PWB and
PJ403 on the IME controller PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.2. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit connector, PL 94.10 Item 6 and
PJ601 on the drum driver PWB.
NOTE: If necessary, remove the drum drive motor to gain access to the cleaning unit connector, refer to REP 91.33.
The wiring is good.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.1 and WD 9.22. Check the wiring between the IOD shuttle motor and PJ101 on the
drum driver PWB. The wiring is good.
February 2013
2-433
92-805-00
92-806-00 Fuse B Blown RAP
92-807-00 Diagnostic Routine Not Implemented RAP
92-806-00 Fuse B on the drum driver PWB has blown.
92-807-00 In dC972 automatic TRC generation is not implemented.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE: Fuse B is non-reparable.
Go to dC972 Printhead Uniformity. Perform a manual TRC generation.
Go to WD 9.2. +24V is available PJ602, pin 12.

Y
N
Go to WD 1.5. +24V is available at PJDC3, pin 15.
Y
N
Go to 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and Overload RAP and check for a
short circuit.
Check the wiring between the power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2, and the drum driver
PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4, for an open circuit. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.2. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit connector, PL 94.10 Item 6 and
PJ601 on the drum driver PWB.
NOTE: If necessary, remove the drum drive motor to gain access to the cleaning unit connector, refer to REP 91.33.
The wiring is good.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.4. Check the wiring between the abatement fan and PJ901 on the drum driver
PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. The fault remains.
Y
N
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. The fault remains.
Y
N
Install a new abatement fan assembly, PL 94.20 Item 11. Install a new drum driver PWB, PL
1.15 Item 4.
92-806-00, 92-807-00
February 2013
2-434
93-501-00 to 93-516-00 Ink Loader Is Jammed RAP
93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Thermal

Error RAP
93-501-00 Black ink loader is jammed.
93-520-00 Ink melt reservoir heater is too hot
93-506-00 Magenta ink loader is jammed.
93-521-00 Ink melt reservoir is heating too slowly
93-511-00 Cyan ink loader is jammed.
93-522-00 Ink melt reservoir thermistor fault
93-516-00 Yellow ink loader is jammed.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Check for jammed ink sticks.
Check for non Xerox ink sticks and report as appropriate.
Check for wrong colour ink sticks loaded.
Procedure
WARNING
Check that the machine is installed to allow adequate airflow. Refer to GP 21 Installation
Space Requirements.
Procedure
Check that the marking unit cooling fan is running, Figure 1. The fan is running.
Y
N
Refer to:
Go to 93-891-00 Ink Transport Over Current RAP.
Check the PEST fault history, dC123 for marking unit heater faults (umbilicals, printheads and
ink melt reservoir). All marking unit heaters have failed.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.8. Check the resistance and continuity of the reservoir heaters and wiring.
The resistance should be approximately 45-55 ohms between pins 1 and 3 and between
pins 2 and 4 on PJ201 on the Marking Unit Heater PWB. The resistance is correct.
Y
N
Install a new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Check the wiring between the marking unit driver PWB, the solenoid patch PWB and the
ink melt reservoir thermistor. Check that the ink reservoir thermistor is not open or
shorted. Refer to:
WD 9.9, WD 9.12 and WD 9.16.
A
February 2013
2-435
93-501-00 to 93-516-00, 93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-
PJ760, PJ910, PJ630 Solenoid patch PWB.
93-523-00 to 93-526-00, 93-527-00 to 93-530-00, 93-532-00,

93-533-00, 93-957-00 Ink Melt Error RAP
The wiring and thermistor is good.

Y
N
Install a new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
93-523-00 Cyan ink melter is too hot

93-524-00 Cyan ink melter is heating too slowly
93-526-00 Magenta ink melter is too hot

93-527-00 Magenta ink melter is heating too slowly
Refer to WD 1.1 and WD 9.8, check the wiring between PJ4AC on the Power Supply Unit and
PJ101 on the Marking Unit Heater PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
93-529-00 Yellow ink melter is too hot

93-530-00 Yellow ink melter is heating too slowly
93-532-00 Black ink melter is too hot
Check the +3.3V ESTAR distribution to the marking unit heater PWB, refer to the 01B +3.3V
ESTAR Distribution RAP. If the fault is still present, install new components as necessary:
93-533-00 Black ink melter is heating too slowly
Initial Actions
93-957-00 Melt reservoir heater went unstable while printing
WARNING
WARNING
Check that the machine is installed to allow adequate airflow. Refer to GP 21 Installation
Space Requirements.
Check that the ink sticks are not jammed in the ink stick transport and at the melt plate
assembly, below the ink low sensors.
Check that the ink sticks are in contact with the melt plate.
Procedure
Marking Unit Fan
Check that the marking unit fan is running, Figure 1. The fan is running.
Y
N
Refer to:
A
93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00, 93-523-00 to 93-526-
February 2013
2-436
A
Go to WD 1.2, WD 8.4 and WD 9.17. Check the wiring between:
The power supply unit and the ink melt heaters. Ensure that the ink melt heaters are correctly connected to PJ5AC on the Power supply unit.
93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt

Thermistor Error RAP
93-525-00 Cyan ink melter thermistor fault
NOTE: The 4 heater harnesses are colour coded to the corresponding letter on the ink
melt plate assembly. Refer to REP 91.16.
The media path driver PWB, the ink load entry PWB and the ink thermistors.
93-531-00 Yellow ink melter thermistor fault
Refer to:
P/J5AC Power supply unit
P/J406 Media path driver PWB
P/J301 Ink load entry PWB
01A AC Power Distribution RAP.
93-528-00 Magenta ink melter thermistor fault
93-534-00 Black ink melter thermistor fault
Initial Actions
WARNING
The wiring is good.

Y
N
WARNING
Remove the ink loader melt plate assembly, PL 93.10 Item 3. Remove any debris on the ink
side of the ink melt heaters.
Check that the ink melt thermistors are connected.
Procedure
Ink loader melt plate assembly, PL 93.10 Item 3
Ink load sensor assembly, PL 93.10 Item 7.
Go to WD 9.17 and WD 8.4. Check the following wiring:
Between the ink melt thermistors and PJ301 on the Ink Load Entry PWB.
Between PJ901 on the Ink Load Entry PWB and PJ406 on the Media Path Driver PWB.
The wiring is good.

Y
N
Ink loader melt plate assembly, PL 93.10 Item 3.
Ink load sensor assembly, PL 93.10 Item 7.
Marking Unit Fan
February 2013
2-437
93-523-00 to 93-526-00, 93-527-00 to 93-530-00, 93-
93-535-00 to 93-537-00, 93-958-00 Upper Umbilical Thermal

Error RAP

Y
N
93-535-00 Upper umbilical heater is too hot

93-536-00 Upper umbilical is heating too slowly
93-537-00 Upper umbilical thermistor fault
93-958-00 Upper Umbilical heater went unstable while printing
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check that the machine is installed to allow adequate airflow. Refer to GP 21 Installation Space
Requirements.

The fault may be intermittent. Go to WD 9.8 and WD 9.9. Check for loose connections
between:
The marker unit driver PWB and the upper umbilical thermistor.
The marking unit heater PWB and the upper umbilical heater.
Refer to:
Procedure
Y
N
Go to WD 9.4. Check the marking unit fan.
Refer to:
P/J401, Marking Unit Heater PWB.
P/J102, Marking Unit Driver PWB.

If the fault persists, install new components as necessary.


Upper umbilical, PL 91.20 Item 10.

Enter dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Select Graph to run the Upper Umbilical Test.
The test is good (the heater reaches and remains at the set point).
Y
N
Y
N
Between PJ102 on the Marking Unit Driver PWB and the upper umbilical thermistor. Measure the resistance between PJ102 pins B9 and B10. The resistance is widely variable, but must not be an open circuit.
Between PJ401 on the Marking Unit Heater PWB and the upper umbilical
heater. Measure the resistance between PJ401 pins 1 and 7. The resistance
should be approximately 80-100 ohms.
Refer to:

Marking Unit Fan
93-535-00 to 93-537-00, 93-958-00
February 2013
2-438
93-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00 Lower Umbilical Thermal

Error RAP
93-538-00 Lower umbilical heater is too hot
A
Y
N
Go to WD 9.4. Check the marking unit fan.
Refer to:
93-959-00 Lower Umbilical heater went unstable while printing
Procedure
93-539-00 Lower umbilical is heating too slowly

93-540-00 Lower umbilical thermistor is faulty
WARNING
Enter dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Select Graph to run the Lower Umbilical Test.
The test is good.
Y
N
Y
N
Between PJ303 on the Marking Unit Driver PWB and the lower umbilical thermistor. Measure the resistance between PJ303 pins B4 and B5. The resistance
is widely variable, but must not be an open circuit.
Between PJ701 on the Marking Unit Heater PWB and the lower umbilical
heater. Measure the resistance between PJ701 pins 1 and 8. The resistance
should be approximately 80-100 ohms.
The fault may be intermittent. Go to WD 9.8 and WD 9.10. Check for loose connections
between:
The marker unit driver PWB and the lower umbilical thermistor.
The marking unit heater PWB and the lower umbilical heater.
Refer to:
PJ303, Marking unit driver PWB
PJ701, Marking unit heater PWB
Lower umbilical, PL 91.25 Item 10.
Refer to:
Y
N
Marking Unit Fan
A
February 2013
2-439
93-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00
93-545-00 to 93-548-00 Ink Melt Conductivity Error RAP
93-549-00 to 93-552-00 and 93-557-00 to 93-560-00

Printheads 1 and 3 Printhead Reservoir Fill Error RAP
93-545-00 The black melt reservoir ink conductivity is out of usable range.
93-549-00 Head 1 black reservoir did not fill within the correct time.
93-546-00 The magenta melt reservoir ink conductivity is out of usable range.
93-550-00 Head 1 magenta reservoir did not fill within the correct time.
93-547-00 The cyan melt reservoir ink conductivity is out of usable range.
93-551-00 Head 1 cyan reservoir did not fill within the correct time.
93-548-00 The yellow melt reservoir conductivity is out of usable range.
93-552-00 Head 1 yellow reservoir did not fill within the correct time.
Initial Actions
Check for ink stick jams.
Check for non Xerox ink sticks and report as appropriate.
Check for wrong colour ink sticks loaded.
Check that the ink sticks are in contact with the melt plate.
Check that the tips of the melt plates are the correct colour.
Check for reservoir contamination from ink shards getting into the incorrect colour reservoir.
Check the ink melt plate for damage may cause melt ink to enter the incorrect colour reservoir.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Check that the ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10 is in good condition with no ink overflow. Check
for damage that may cause the reservoir to leak. The reservoir is good.
Y
N
Check that the umbilical clamp fasteners are tight, refer to REP 91.31. If the fasteners are
loose, clean the area, then firmly tighten the fasteners. If necessary, install a new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Go to WD 9.9 and WD 9.16. Check the wiring between the ink level sensors, the solenoid
patch PWB and the marking unit driver PWB.
Refer to:
P/J101, Marking Unit Driver PWB.
PJ380, PJ 760, PJ780 Solenoid Patch PWB.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not remove the solenoid patch PWB, PL 93.10 Item 9.
NOTE: If the printhead reservoirs do not fill, it can cause massive jet loss. If necessary, refer to
the IQ 9 Deletions in the Process Direction RAP.
Move the marking unit into the service position, GP 6. Check that the air channels from ink reservoir solenoids 5, 7, 11, 12, 15, 16, 17, and 19 is free of ink, Figure 1.
If the ink has blocked the air channels then install a new umbilical and ink reservoir at the same
time. Failure to replace both units will cause another ink reservoir failure.
NOTE: Some ink discolouration of the air channels is normal.
The channels are free of ink.
Y
N
Install a new lower umbilical, PL 91.25 Item 10 and new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Check that the print heads, drum and waste tray are clean, without excessive ink contamination.
NOTE: Excessive ink contamination will be obvious.
Ink level sensor cable (Ribbon cable), PL 93.10 Item 18.
The print heads, drum and waste tray are clean.

Y
N
The print area is contaminated with excessive ink. The purge line is blocked. Perform the
steps that follow:
GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.
Install a new purge line filter, PL 91.25 Item 9.
A
93-545-00 to 93-548-00, 93-549-00 to 93-552-00 and 93-
February 2013
2-440
Install a new purge line, PL 91.25 Item 11.
If the ink contamination has reached the ink reservoir through the purge line, install a
new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Cyan ink solenoid valve 16, SOL93-074.
Magenta ink solenoid valve 17, SOL93-075.
Go to WD 9.6, WD 9.7, WD 9.20, WD 9.21. Check the ribbon cables between the printheads
and the IME Controller PWB. Refer to:
P/J101, P/J301, Printhead PWB
P/J902, P/J904 IME controller PWB
All solenoids energize

Y
N
Go to WD 9.14, WD 9.15 and WD 9.12. Check the ink reservoir solenoids.
Refer to:
The ribbon cables are good.

Y
N
Re-seat the ribbon cables or install new cables, PL 92.10.
P/J430, P/J110, P/J410, P/J610, P/J810 Solenoid patch PWB.
P/J801, Marking unit driver PWB
Check that the level sense connection at PJ601 on the Printhead PWB is in good condition and
is properly and securely connected. The connection is good.
Y
N
Print head, PL 91.20 Item 2, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Disconnect the air hose between the lower and upper purge hoses on the ink reservoir, Figure
2.
Enter dC330 and stack the code 93-050 to run the reservoir pump MOT93-050, PL 93.10 Item
11 and code 91-045 low pressure assist valve SOL 91.045, PL 93.10 Item 15. The pump will
run for approximately 10 seconds. If the pump runs, then the air pressure from the disconnected air hose is sufficient to feel on the skin, or partially inflate a rubber glove. The
pump
runs
Y
N
Go to WD 9.14. Check the connection from the solenoid patch PWB to the reservoir pump
motor (MOT93-050) at PJ130.
Go to WD 9.14 and WD 9.12. Check the ink reservoir pump motor.
Refer to:
P/J130, Solenoid patch PWB.
Ink Reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Switch off the machine then switch on the machine GP 14. Allow the printheads to try and
recover. The fault is cleared
Y
N
Install a new ink reservoir PL 93.10 Item 10.
Before installing a new ink reservoir. Check that the 4 screws securing the solenoid patch
PWB are not loose. If necessary tighten but do not overtighten the screws. Check that the
check valves on the umbilicals are securely fixed to the umbilicals, PL 91.25 Item 19. If
the clips are damaged, install a new umbilical, PL 91.25 Item 20. The fault is still
present.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity.
Install new components;
1.
Install the relevant new printhead PL 91.25 Item 2.
2.
Reconnect the air hose from the pump to the ink reservoir, Figure 2.
Enter the correct dC330 output code to check the ink reservoir solenoids associated with the
fault code:
Purge solenoid valve 3, SOL93-061.
Black ink solenoid valve 5, SOL93-063.
Yellow ink solenoid valve 11, SOL93-069.
February 2013
2-441
93-549-00 to 93-552-00 and 93-557-00 to 93-560-00
Black ink reservoir
Solenoid patch
PWB
Upper purge hose pair

for the upper umbilical
Disconnect the air hose

from the ink reservoir
Lower purge hose pair

for the lower umbilical
Ink reservoir solenoids and the relevant channels
Figure 2 Reservoir pump air hose
93-549-00 to 93-552-00 and 93-557-00 to 93-560-00
February 2013
2-442
93-553-00 to 93-556-00 and 93-561-00 to 93-564-00

Printheads 2 and 4 Printhead Reservoir Fill Error RAP
If the ink contamination has reached the melt reservoir through the purge line, install
a new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Move the marking unit to the service position, GP 6. Go to WD 9.5, WD 9.20, WD 9.21. Check
the ribbon cables between the printheads and the IME Controller PWB. Refer to:
P/J101, P/J301, Printhead PWB
P/J201, P/J301 IME controller PWB
The ribbon cables are good.

Y
N
Re-seat the ribbon cables or install new cables, PL 92.10.
Check that the level sense connection at PJ601 on the Printhead PWB is in good condition and
is properly and securely connected. The connection is good.
Y
N
Print head, PL 91.20 Item 2, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not remove the solenoid patch PWB, PL 93.10 Item 9.
NOTE: If the printhead reservoirs do not fill, it can cause massive jet loss. If necessary, refer to
the IQ 9 Deletions in the Process Direction RAP.
2.
Enter dC330 and stack the code 93-050 to run the reservoir pump MOT93-050, PL 93.10 Item
11 and code 91-045 low pressure assist valve SOL 91.045, PL 93.10 Item 15. The pump will
run for approximately 10 seconds. If the pump runs, then the air pressure from the disconnected air hose is sufficient to feel on the skin, or partially inflate a rubber glove. The
pump
runs
Y
N
Go to WD 9.14. Check the connection from the solenoid patch PWB to the reservoir pump
motor MOT93-050 at PJ130.
Go to WD 9.14 and WD 9.12. Check the ink reservoir pump motor.
Refer to:
Move the marking unit into the service position, GP 6. Check that the air channels from ink reservoir solenoids 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 18 and 20 is free of ink, Figure 1.
If the ink has blocked the air channels then install a new umbilical and ink reservoir at the same
time. Failure to replace both units will cause another ink reservoir failure.
NOTE: Some ink discolouration of the air channels is normal.

The channels are free of ink.
Y
N
Install a new upper umbilical, PL 91.20 Item 10 and a new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Check that the print area is clean, without excessive ink contamination.
NOTE: Excessive ink contamination will be obvious.
The print area is clean.
Y
N
The print area is contaminated with excessive ink. The purge line may be blocked. Perform the steps that follow:
Install a new purge line filter PL 91.20 Item 9.
ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
Enter the correct dC330 output code to check the ink reservoir solenoids associated with the
fault code:
A
February 2013
2-443
93-553-00 to 93-556-00 and 93-561-00 to 93-564-00

Black ink reservoir
All solenoids energise

Y
N
Refer to:
Solenoid patch
PWB
Switch off, then switch on the machine GP 14, to try and allow the printheads to recover. The
fault is cleared
Y
N
Install a new ink reservoir PL 93.10 Item 10.
Before installing a new ink reservoir. Check that the 4 screws securing the solenoid patch
PWB are not loose. If necessary tighten but do not overtighten the screws. Check that the
check valves on the umbilicals are securely fixed to the umbilicals, PL 91.25 Item 19. If
the clips are damaged, install a new umbilical, PL 91.25 Item 20. The fault is still
present.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity.
Install the relevant printhead PL 91.20 Item 2.
Ink reservoir solenoids and the relevant channels
93-553-00 to 93-556-00 and 93-561-00 to 93-564-00
February 2013
2-444
93-565-00 to 93-599-00 and 93-800-00 to 93-812-00

Printheads 1, 2, 3 & 4 Ink Level Sense Error RAP
93-565-00 Head 1 black reservoir level sense failure
93-566-00 Head 1 magenta reservoir level sense failure
93-567-00 Head 1 cyan reservoir level sense failure
93-568-00 Head 1 yellow reservoir level sense failure


from the reservoir



93-581-00 Head 1 black reservoir level sense open circuit
93-582-00 Head 1 magenta reservoir level sense open circuit
93-583-00 Head 1 cyan reservoir level sense open circuit
93-584-00 Head 1 yellow reservoir level sense open circuit
February 2013
2-445
93-553-00 to 93-556-00 and 93-561-00 to 93-564-00,
93-813-00 to 93-820-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Level Sense

Failure RAP

93-813-00 Black melt reservoir level sense open circuit
93-814-00 Magenta melt reservoir level sense open circuit

93-815-00 Cyan melt reservoir level sense open circuit
93-597-00 Head 1 black reservoir level sense short circuit
93-816-00 Yellow melt reservoir level sense open circuit
93-598-00 Head 1 magenta reservoir level sense short circuit
93-817-00 Black melt reservoir level sense short circuit
93-599-00 Head 1 cyan reservoir level sense short circuit
93-818-00 Magenta melt reservoir level sense short circuit
93-800-00 Head 1 yellow reservoir level sense short circuit
93-819-00 Cyan melt reservoir level sense short circuit

93-820-00 Yellow melt reservoir level sense short circuit
Procedure
WARNING

1.
If the ink sticks are not in contact with the melt plate correct the ink stick jam. Install new
components as necessary PL 93.10.
2.
Refer to:

Procedure
WARNING
P/J380, P/J760, P/J780 Solenoid patch PWB.
3.
If the sensor continues to report a fault, install a new ink melt reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
4.
Verify the fault code. Go to the relevant RAP:
Head 1 and head 3 faults.

Reservoir Fill Error RAP
Head 2 and head 4 faults.

Reservoir Fill Error RAP
93-565-00 to 93-599-00 and 93-800-00 to 93-812-00, 93-
February 2013
2-446
93-825-00, 93-892-00 Ink Key Plate Motor Over Current

RAP
93-871-00 to 93-874-00 Ink Level Sense Error RAP

93-871-00 Black melt reservoir level sense failure.
93-825-00 The ink key plate motor is over current.
93-872-00 Magenta melt reservoir level sense failure
93-892-00 Indicates an over current interrupt from the motor driver chip.
93-873-00 Cyan melt reservoir level sense failure
Initial Actions
93-874-00 Yellow melt reservoir level sense failure
WARNING
Clean the ink loading area to ensure that the ink key plate moves smoothly.
Procedure
The ink key motor can overheat if run repeatedly. Allow 2 minutes between each run of the ink
key motor.
Enter dC330 code 93-051 or 052 or 053, to run the ink key plate motor, MOT93-051, PL 93.10
Y
N
Refer to:
P/J406, Media path driver PWB.

Ink key plate motor, PL 93.10 Item 14.
Ink loader upper assembly, PL 93.10 Item 1.
Refer to:
P/J101, Marking Unit Driver PWB
P/J380, P/J760, P/J780 Solenoid Patch PWB.
NOTE: Ink level sense errors can be caused by ink cross contamination. If the machine was
recently moved, cross contamination may have occurred. If the cross contamination is severe,
it may be necessary to install a new ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
WARNING
CAUTION
Procedure
The key plate moves when the motor runs.

Y
N
Clean the ink loading area to ensure that the ink key plate moves smoothly. If necessary,
install a new ink loader upper assembly, PL 93.10 Item 1.
The fault may be intermittent, check the wiring to the ink key plate motor. If necessary, install a
new ink loader upper assembly, PL 93.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-447
93-825-00, 93-892-00, 93-871-00 to 93-874-00
93-890-00 Marking Unit Air Solenoid Over Current RAP
93-891-00 Ink Transport Over Current RAP
93-890-00 The marking unit air solenoid is taking too much current.
93-891-00 The ink transport motor is taking too much current.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Go to the 91-516-00 Low Pressure Assist Over Current RAP.
Check the ink loader assembly for debris blocking the transport belts.
Check the ink loader for damage close to the transport motor.
Procedure
Enter dC330 codes 93-048 and 93-049 to run the ink transport motor PL 93.10 Item 5, forward
and in reverse. The motor runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 8.4. Check the ink transport motor.
Refer to:
Ink transport motor, PL 93.10 Item 5.
The ink stick transport belts move.

Y
N
93-890-00, 93-891-00
Ink transport drive gear, PL 93.10 Item 6.
Check for obstructions and debris that may cause the transport belts to jam intermittently.
Check for damage to the ink loader upper assembly, PL 93.10 Item 1.
February 2013
2-448
93-901-00 to 93-904-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Fill Failure RAP

93-901-00 Black melt reservoir over fill failure
93-909-00 to 93-924-00 Printhead Reservoir Level Failure

RAP
93-902-00 Magenta melt reservoir over fill failure
93-903-00 Cyan melt reservoir over fill failure
93-904-00 Yellow melt reservoir over fill failure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING

Ensure that the melt plates on the ink loader are operating correctly. Check the last 40 faults for
the following codes:
93-523 to 534
The last 40 faults is clear of ink melt plate faults

Y
N
Perform the relevant RAP:

93-523-00 to 93-526-00, 93-527-00 to 93-530-00, 93-532-00, 93-533-00, 93-957-00

Ink Melt Error RAP
93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt Thermistor Error RAP
Perform dC612 Print Test Pattern. Run 100 solid fills of the affected colour. Check the ink
melt reservoir for overfill. The ink reservoir is good.
Y
N
Go back to the beginning of this RAP.

Procedure
patch PWB and the marking unit driver PWB. Refer to:
WARNING
P/J380, P/J760, P/J780 Solenoid patch PWB.
Clear the fault code by:
Switch the machine off and then switch the machine on, GP 14.
The wiring is good.

Y
N
Repair the wiring REP 1.1.
February 2013
2-449
93-901-00 to 93-904-00, 93-909-00 to 93-924-00
93-933-00 to 93-936-00 Head Purge Failure RAP
93-937-00 to 93-940-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Leak Error RAP
93-933-00 Head 1 purge failure
93-937-00 A leak has been detected in the black melt reservoir
93-938-00 A leak has been detected in the magenta melt reservoir
93-939-00 A leak has been detected in the cyan melt reservoir
93-940-00 A leak has been detected in the yellow melt reservoir
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Check that all purge lines are connected. Re-install all purge lines as necessary.
Procedure
Clean ink leakages as necessary, refer to GP 27.

Check the purge line components for damage. Ensure that the purge lines are clean and not
contaminated. Ensure that the purge line is connected to the ink melt reservoir The
purge
line are clean and undamaged
Y
N
Purge line, PL 91.20 Item 11.
Purge line filter, PL 91.20 Item 9.
Ink reservoir assembly, PL 93.10 Item 26.
Printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2
Perform 93A Ink melt reservoir check.
Procedure
That the ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10 is installed correctly and not damaged.
That the upper umbilical, PL 91.20 Item 10 is installed correctly and not damaged. Also
check the connection between the upper umbilical to ink melt reservoir. Ensure the gasket
is installed correctly. Refer to REP 91.31.
That the lower umbilical, PL 91.25 Item 10 is installed correctly and not damaged. Also
check the connection between the lower umbilical to ink melt reservoir. Ensure the gasket
is installed correctly. Refer to REP 91.31.
The components are good

Y
N
Ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10
Go to WD 9.9 and WD 9.16. Check the wiring and connectors between PJ101 on the Marking
Unit Driver PWB and PJ760 on the Solenoid patch PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP
1.1. If necessary install new components:
93-933-00 to 93-936-00, 93-937-00 to 93-940-00
February 2013
2-450
A
Enter the correct dC330 code to check the ink reservoir solenoids:
93A Ink Melt Reservoir Check RAP

Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
That the ink melt reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10 is installed correctly and not damaged.
That the upper umbilical, PL 91.20 Item 10 is installed correctly and not damaged. Also
check for leaks at the connection between the upper umbilical to ink melt reservoir. Refer
to REP 91.31.
That the lower umbilical, PL 91.25 Item 10 is installed correctly and not damaged. Also
check for leaks at the connection between the lower umbilical to ink melt reservoir. Refer
to REP 91.31.
That the air tubes, part of the ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10 are installed correctly and
not damaged.
The components are good

Y
N
Ink reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10
All solenoids energise

Y
N
Refer to:
Move the marking unit to the service position, GP 6.

1.
Enter dC330 and stack the code 93-050 to run the ink reservoir pump MOT93-050, PL 93.10
Item 11 and code 91-045 low pressure assist valve SOL 91.045, PL 93.10 Item 15. The pump
will run for approximately 10 seconds. If the pump runs, then the air pressure from the disconnected air hose is sufficient to feel on the skin, or partially inflate a rubber glove. The
pump
runs
Y
N
Go to WD 9.14 and WD 9.12. Check the ink reservoir pump.
Refer to:
Turn the machine off, then on, GP 14. Check the PEST log for the following codes:
For 99-150-00, go to the 99-143-00 to 99-150-00 PEST Error 4 RAP.
For 99-292-00 to 99-312-00, go to the 99-293-00 to 99-312-00 PEST Error 9 RAP.
For 99-460-00, go to the 99-444-00 to 99-457-00 PEST Error 16 RAP.
For 99-461-00 to 99-467-00 or 99-470-00 to 99-477-00, go to the 99-460-00 to 99-477-00

PEST Error 17 RAP.
A
February 2013
2-451
93A
For 99-564-00, 99-565-00 or 99-568-00 to 99-580-00, go to the 99-564-00 to 99-565-00

PEST Error 23 RAP.
For 99-682-00, 99-684-00, 99-685-00, go to the 99-671-00 to 99-685-00 PEST Error 30

RAP.
93B Ink Leak Checkout RAP

This RAP is to be used when an ink leak is present in the machine.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Wait for the ink and other components to cool before attempting the removal procedures.
Check the following areas for leaking ink:
Umbilical / Ink reservoir connection. If present perform the following:

1.
Remove the umbilicals, refer to REP 91.31.
2.
Check the upper check valve unit, PL 91.20 Item 19 and reservoir gasket PL 91.20
Item 18. Clean as necessary, refer to GP 27.
3.
Check the lower check valve unit, PL 91.25 Item 19 and reservoir gasket PL 91.25
Item 18. Clean as necessary, refer to GP 27.
4.
Reassemble the components.
Umbilical / printhead connection, If present perform the following:

1.
2.


from the ink reservoir

Check the connection and gasket. Clean as necessary, refer to GP 27.
Ink reservoir or umbilical leaking elsewhere, If present perform the following:

Upper umbilical kit, PL 91.20 Item 20.
Lower umbilical kit, PL 91.25 Item 20.
Ink reservoir assembly, PL 93.10 Item 26.
Printheads leaking elsewhere, if present perform the following:
2.
Lower purge line filter assembly, PL 91.25 Item 17.
Remove the printhead, refer to REP 91.29.

Reassemble the components.
1.
93A, 93B
Upper purge line filter assembly, PL 91.20 Item 17.
4.
1.
3.
2.
Check the purge line filter assemblies, install a new assembly if necessary:
Upper printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2.
Lower printhead, PL 91.25 Item 2.
Check melt plates and melt plate housing for debris that can cause incorrect delivery of
ink from loader to ink reservoir.
Check for correct ink loader installation.
February 2013
2-452
94-504-00 Cleaning Unit Reservoir Pressure Low RAP
94-505-00 Cleaning Unit Reservoir Pressure High RAP
94-504-00 Cleaning unit reservoir pressure is too low.
94-505-00 Cleaning unit reservoir pressure is too high.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21 and continue with the procedure.
Cheat the front door interlock. Listen at the front of the cleaning unit. The cleaning unit can
be heard running.
Y
N
Y
N
NOTE: Ensure the new cleaning unit is above 6 degrees Celsius or 43 degrees Fahrenheit. Do
not install a very cold cleaning unit.
Check the fault history, GP 2. Multiple occurrences of fault 94-504-00 are listed.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.2, WD 9.4 and WD 9.19. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit and the drum
driver PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new cleaning unit interface harness,
PL 1.15 Item 17.
Check for grounding faults, GP 7 System Grounding Verification. If the fault remains, install a
new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. The fault is still present.
Y
N
Remove the new cleaning unit. Remove the drum drive motor and belt, refer to REP
91.24. Check that the 12 pin connector on the rear of the machine is connected correctly
and not damaged. The 12 pin connector is good.
Y
N
Install a new 12 pin connector, PL 94.10 Item 6.
Go to WD 9.2, WD 9.4 and WD 9.19. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit and the
drum driver PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new harness, PL
1.15 Item 17. Reinstall the original cleaning unit. The fault is still present.
Y
N
Remove the cleaning unit. Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. Reinstall the
original cleaning unit. The fault is still present.
Y
N
Check for grounding faults, GP 7 System Grounding Verification.
Remove the front door interlock cheat. Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Cheat the
front door interlock. Listen at the front of the cleaning unit. The cleaning unit can be heard
running.
Y
N
Remove the cleaning unit. Remove the drum drive motor and belt, refer to REP 91.24. Check
that the 12 pin connector on the rear of the machine is connected correctly and not damaged.
The 12 pin connector is good.
February 2013
2-453
94-504-00, 94-505-00
94-510-00, 94-512-00 Drum Image Initial Position Error RAP
N
Install a new 12 pin connector, PL 94.10 Item 6.
94-510-00 The imaging software detected the drum at the wrong position.
driver PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new harness, PL 1.15 Item
17. Reinstall the cleaning unit. Cheat the front door interlock. Listen at the front of the cleaning
unit. The cleaning unit can be heard running.
Y
N
Remove the cleaning unit. Install a new drum drive motor PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. unit. Cheat the
front door interlock. Listen at the front of the cleaning unit. The cleaning unit can be heard
running.
Y
N
94-512-00 The drum has stalled during imaging.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Perform the 94-534-00 Drum Drive Belt Slip RAP.
2.
If the fault remains, reload the software, GP 4 Machine Software.
94-505-00, 94-510-00, 94-512-00
February 2013
2-454
94-514-00, 94-518-00 Drum Imaging Error RAP
94-519-00 Drum Imaging Error RAP
94-514-00 Image data not ready when needed during drum revolution
94-519-00 Drum Imaging Failure
94-518-00 Software timing error during imaging
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Reload the software, GP 4 Machine Software.
2.
If the fault remains, install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
1.
Perform the dC977 Drum Runout Calibration.
2.
Perform the dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test.
If the fault remains, install new components as necessary:
February 2013
2-455
94-514-00, 94-518-00, 94-519-00
94-520-00 Cleaning Unit Drive Error RAP
94-522-00 Cleaning Unit Motor Stall RAP
94-520-00 Cleaning unit motor is taking too much current.
94-522-00 Cleaning unit motor stall.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Go to dC123 Pest Fault History and check for faults related to the drum, drum drive or drum
control components.
Go to dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. Perform a full speed exercise. The fault remains.
Y
N
control components.
Go to dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. Perform a full speed exercise. The fault remains.
Y
N
Go to dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. Perform a slow speed exercise. The fault remains.
Y
N
Print TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing Test Pages. Evaluate the metering blade
timing test page only. The metering blade engages and disengages with the drum correctly.
Y
N
Remove the cleaning unit, refer to REP 94.1. Ensure the cleaning unit camshaft is
unlocked, refer to REP 91.32, Figure 4. If necessary, use a screwdriver to manually rotate
the cam shaft, Figure 1. Go to dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. Perform a full speed exerciser. The fault remains.
Y
N
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Go to dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser.
Perform a full speed exercise. The fault remains.
Y
N
Remove the drum drive motor and belt, refer to REP 91.24. Check the 12 pin connector, PL
94.10 Item 12. Check the cleaning unit motor, PL 94.10 Item 24 for damage. Go to WD 9.2.
Check the wiring between the cleaning unit and the drum driver PWB. Repair the wiring as
necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new harness, PL 1.15 Item 17.
12 pin connector, PL 94.10 Item 12.
Cleaning unit motor assembly, PL 94.10 Item 19.
Reinstall the original cleaning unit.

Enter dC140 code 94-103 to monitor the cleaning unit motor encoder, PL 94.10 Item 20.
Use a screwdriver to manually rotate the cam shaft. The display changes.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.2 and WD 9.3. Check the cleaning unit motor and encoder.
Refer to:
P/J601, P/J802 Drum driver PWB.
01D+5V Distribution RAP.
Reinstall the original cleaning unit. Install new components as necessary:
Enter dC330 code 94-105 to monitor the cleaning unit home sensor, PL 94.10 Item 17.
Use a screwdriver to manually rotate the camshaft. Ensure that cam rotates through the
whole of allowable travel. The display changes.
A
94-520-00, 94-522-00
February 2013
2-456
A
Y
N
Go to WD 9.3. Check the cleaning unit motor and encoder.
Refer to:
Cleaning unit home sensor, PL 94.10 Item 17.
Check that the camshaft rotates freely. The camshaft rotates freely.
Y
N
1.
Inspect the camshaft for obstructions that would prevent it from moving freely.
2.
Remove the camshaft assembly, PL 94.10 Item 4, REP 91.32. Check the bushings, PL 94.10 Item 8 and PL 94.10 Item 14 for wear or damage. Install new
Camshaft assembly, PL 94.10 Item 4.
Remove the drum drive motor and belt, refer to REP 91.24. Check the 12 pin connector,
PL 94.10 Item 12. Go to WD 9.2. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit and the
drum driver PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new harness, PL
1.15 Item 17.
Cam shaft
February 2013
2-457
94-522-00
94-524-00 Drum Drive Motor Over Current RAP
94-526-00 Drum Drive Stall RAP
94-524-00 Drum drive motor is taking too much current.
94-526-00 Drum has stalled.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Check that the print media loaded into all of the trays matches the UI display for each tray.
If necessary correct the settings or load the correct media. Media that is too thick for the
machine settings will cause drive errors.
Check the trays for mixed media weights and correct if necessary.
Check for evidence of multi-feeds. Multiple sheets of media may cause drum drive errors.
If multi-feeds are indicated go to OF 8 Multi-feed RAP.
control components.
Check the fault history for Mis-Feed Jam fault codes 71-101-00 to 71-155-00, 72-101-00
to 72-155-00, 73-101-00 to 73-155-00, 74-101-00 and 75-101-00. If the fault codes are
present, perform the appropriate RAP before proceeding with this RAP.
Check the fault history, dC122 for 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 or 10-550 fault codes. If the
fault codes are present, perform the appropriate RAP before proceeding with this RAP.
1.
Enter dC978 Transfix Calibration Values. Check the calibration values against the label
on the front of the drum frame. If necessary, enter the correct transfix load values.
Procedure
Check the wiring between PJ6AC on the power supply unit and CN1 on the drum drive
motor.
Refer to WD 1.1. Repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
2.
3.
Go to WD 1.1, WD 9.1 and WD 9.3. Check the wiring between the drum drive motor
encoder and the Drum driver PWB, PJ802. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. If
necessary install a new harness:
Drum driver to front components harness (PJ501), PL 1.15 Item 14.
Cleaning unit interface harness (PJ601, PJ802), PL 1.15 Item 17.
NOTE: The calibration values are found on a label on the drum frame behind the inner
cover, PL 81.11 Item 2.
Procedure
control components.
Remove the drum drive motor, REP 91.24. Perform the following:
Refer to Figure 1. Perform the following:
Check that the motor shaft rotates freely.
Check for a resistance of 510 to 1800 ohms across pins 1 and 6 of the drum drive
motor encoder.
Check the resistance of the winding on the drum drive motor. The resistance should
be in the range 9 to 12 ohms. Check across pin 1 and pin 2, pin 2 and pin 3 and pin
1 and pin 3, all three values should be the same. If the resistance is outside of this
range, install a new drum drive motor.
1.
While the transfix roller is not loaded, spin the roller. Check that the roller spins freely
without binding or generating unusual noise. Check the surface of the transfix roller for
contamination or damage. Install new components as necessary, PL 10.20.
2.
Remove the drum and abatement fan assembly, refer to REP 91.24. Release the drum
belt tension. With the drum drive and transfix roller disengaged from the drum, manually
rotate the drum. If the drum does not rotate freely, install new components as necessary,
PL 94.20 and PL 31.11.
4.
Check system grounds, refer to GP 7. Pay particular attention to the media path baffles,
3.
Remove the drum drive motor, refer to REP 91.24. Check that the motor shaft rotates
freely. If necessary, install a new drum drive motor, PL 94.20 Item 6.
5.
4.
If 10-536 is in the fault history, dC122, check the transfix calibration values, dC978. If the
transfix values have been reset, re-enter the correct transfix values.
Drum drive motor, PL 94.20 Item 6.
94-524-00, 94-526-00
February 2013
2-458
5.
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check for, power supply,
drum motor thermal protection circuit and drum motor current feedback PEST faults then
perform the relevant RAP.
6.
Check the fault history, dC122 for 94-550 or 94-551 faults. If either fault is present, perform the relevant RAP.
7.
Check system grounds, refer to GP 7. Pay particular attention to the media path baffles,
8.
Drum drive belt, PL 94.20 Item 2.

encoder

encoder

encoder

rear)

encoder
Transfix value label (on

front of drum frame)
February 2013
2-459
94-526-00
94-527-00, 94-531-00 Cleaning Unit Early Life Over Current

RAP
94-528-00, 94-532-00, 94-533-00 Cleaning Unit Over

Current RAP
94-527-00 Oil delivery pump (early life) is taking too much current.
94-528-00 Drum driver oil pump 1 is taking too much current.
94-531-00 Oil delivery pump (early life) is taking too much current.
94-532-00 Drum driver oil pump 2 is taking too much current.
Procedure
94-533-00 Drum driver oil valve is taking too much current.
WARNING
These faults are shown for information only. No corrective actions are necessary. If the fault
becomes more serious, faults 94-528-00, 94-532-00 or 94-533-00 will be raised.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Make 20 copies. Wait 1 minute. The fault is still
present with the new cleaning unit.
Y
N
Remove the new cleaning unit, refer to REP 94.1. Remove the drum drive motor and belt, refer
to REP 91.24. Check the 12 pin connector, PL 94.10 Item 6. Go to WD 9.2. Check the wiring
between the cleaning unit and the drum driver PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1
or install a new harness, PL 1.15 Item 17. Reinstall the original cleaning unit.
94-527-00, 94-531-00, 94-528-00, 94-532-00, 94-533-00
February 2013
2-460
94-534-00 Drum Drive Belt Slip RAP
5.
Remove the drum and abatement fan assembly, refer to REP 91.24. Manually rotate the
drum and observe the drum motor. Abrupt rotations of the drum motor about its tensioning
pivot indicates problems with the drum belt, such as voids or contamination in the
grooves.
6.
Check the drum belt tensioner mechanism. Make sure that the tensioner is latched correctly and applying tension to the motor bracket. Inspect the motor bracket for free rotation around its pivot, allowing tension to be transmitted to the drum belt.
94-534-00 Excessive slipping of the drum belt.
Initial Actions
WARNING
7.
Release the drum belt tension. Make sure that the drum drive motor pivots freely.
8.
With the drum drive and transfix roller disengaged from the drum, manually rotate the
drum. If the drum does not rotate freely, install new components as necessary:
CAUTION
Check the fault history for Mis-Feed Jam fault codes 71-101-00 to 71-155-00, 72-101-00
to 72-155-00, 73-101-00 to 73-155-00, 74-101-00 and 75-101-00. If the fault codes are
present then perform the appropriate RAP before proceeding with this RAP.
9.
Drum, PL 94.20 Item 1.
Drum pulley, PL 94.20 Item 3.
Remove the drum drive motor and drum belt, REP 91.24. Perform the following:
Perform the necessary actions:
Clean the drum pulley, GP 27.
Clean the drum belt, GP 27.
Clean the drum drive motor pulley, GP 27.
If necessary install a new belt, PL 94.20 Item 2.
10. Check system grounds, refer to GP 7. Pay particular attention to the media path baffles,
11. Refer to WD 1.1 and WD 9.3. Perform the following:
Check the fault history, dC122 for 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 or 10-550 fault codes. If the
fault codes are present, perform the appropriate RAP before proceeding with this RAP.
a.
Enter dC978 Transfix Calibration Values. Check the calibration values against the label
on the front of the drum frame. If necessary, enter the correct transfix load values.
Check the wiring between PJ6AC and the drum drive motor. Repair as necessary,
REP 1.1.
b.
Check the drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item 10. If necessary,
install a new drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item 10.
c.
Check the wiring between the drum drive motor encoder and the Drum driver PWB,
PJ802. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1. If necessary install a new cleaning
unit interface harness (PJ601, PJ802), PL 1.15 Item 17.
Procedure
control components.
Refer to Figure 1. Perform the following:
1.
2.
While the transfix roller is not loaded, spin the roller. Check that the roller spins freely
without binding or generating unusual noise. Check the surface of the transfix roller for
contamination or damage. Install new components as necessary, PL 10.20.
If 10-536 is in the fault history, dC122, check the transfix calibration values, dC978. If the
transfix values have been reset, re-enter the correct transfix values.
12. Install new components as necessary:
Drum drive belt, PL 94.20 Item 2.
3.
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check for, power supply,
drum motor thermal protection circuit and drum motor current feedback PEST faults then
4.
Check the fault history, dC122 for 94-550 or 94-551 faults. If either fault is present, perform the relevant RAP.
February 2013
2-461
94-534-00
94-535-00 Drum Driver Command Current Error RAP

94-535-00 The drum driver PWB fails to monitor the drum drive current.
encoder
Procedure
WARNING

encoder
Refer to:
P/JDC2, Power supply unit.

encoder

rear)

encoder
1.
Switch off the machine, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check for PEST faults then
2.
Go to WD 9.2. Check the ribbon cable, PL 1.15 Item 10 between the power supply unit
and the drum driver PWB.
3.
Transfix value label (on

front of drum frame)
94-534-00, 94-535-00
February 2013
2-462
94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00, 94546-00, 94-632-00, 94-633-00 Drum Heat Error RAP
NOTE: If the drum heater test fails to work correctly. Switch the machine off and then on, GP
14. Enter dC335 and rerun the drum heater test.
The tests were good.
Y
N
Go to WD 1.2, WD 9.1 and WD 9.3. Check the wiring between:
94-536-00 Drum front heater is too hot

94-538-00 Drum front heater is heating too slowly
94-540-00 Drum front thermistor is faulty
94-542-00 Drum rear heater is too hot
The power supply unit and the drum heaters.
The power supply unit and the thermal cutout PWB.
The drum driver PWB and the front and rear thermistors.
Refer to:
94-544-00 Drum rear heater is heating too slowly

94-546-00 Drum rear thermistor is faulty
NOTE: Field engineering have observed that the following two fault codes 94-632-00 and 94633-00 have appeared during the normal printing process, with 99 % of their occuranceies
having no consequences. Therefore, it is advised that either code can be treated as a soft fault
code and generally ignored unless either fault code reoccurs persistantly.
94-633-00 Drum rear heater went unstable while printing
Initial Actions
Check that the machine is installed to allow adequate airflow. Refer to GP 21 Installation Space
Requirements.
Procedure
WARNING
Enter dC330 code 42-064 to run the drum fan, PL 94.20 Item 4. The fan runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.1. Check the drum fan.
Refer to:
P/J5AC, Power supply unit.
P/J501, P/J801 Drum Driver PWB
94-632-00 Drum front heater went unstable while printing
Front drum thermistor PL 94.20 Item 9
Rear drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 10.
Thermal cutout PWB, PL 88.10 Item 11.
The fault may be intermittent. Go to WD 1.2, WD 9.1 and WD 9.3. Check for loose connections
between:
The power supply unit and the drum heaters.
The power supply unit and the thermal cutout PWB.
The drum driver PWB and the front and rear thermistors.
Refer to:
P/J5AC Power supply unit.
P/J501, P/J801 Drum driver PWB
01A, AC Power Distribution RAP.
01B, +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP.
Front drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 9.
Drum fan, PL 94.20 Item 4.
Thermal cutout PWB, PL 88.10 Item 11.
Enter dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Select the front drum heater. Set the Setpoint
Mode to Ready. Select Graph to run the test. Check that the temperature is correct and stable.
Repeat the test for the rear drum heater.
February 2013
2-463
94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-
94-545-00 Drum Runout Calibration Error RAP
94-547-00, 94-555-00 Y-Axis Belt Ratio Error RAP
94-545-00 Drum runout calibration error - drum motor encoder.
94-547-00 Y-axis belt ratio error.
Procedure
94-555-00 Y-axis belt ratio hard error.
WARNING
control components.
Enter dC140 code 94-101 to monitor the drum drive motor encoder. Manually rotate the drum.
The display changes
Y
N
Go to WD 1.1 and WD 9.3. Check the wiring between the drum drive motor encoder and
the drum driver PWB.
Refer to:
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Check the drum belt tensioner. Make sure that the tensioner is latched correctly and
applying tension to the drum belt. Release the drum belt tension. Make sure that the drum
drive motor pivots freely.
2.
Remove the drum belt, PL 94.20 Item 2. Check the drum belt for contamination or damage. Clean the drum belt as necessary, GP 27.
3.
For fault 94-547-00. Check the drum drive motor pulley for contamination, clean as necessary, GP 27.
4.
Install a new drum belt, PL 94.20 Item 2.
The wiring is good.

Y
N
94-545-00, 94-547-00, 94-555-00
February 2013
2-464
94-548-00 Y-Axis Position Error RAP
94-549-00 Drum Runout Calibration Error RAP
94-548-00 The drum position was incorrect after repositioning.
94-549-00 Drum runout calibration - drum encoder.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
control components.
Enter dC140 code 94-102 to monitor the drum position encoder. Manually rotate the drum.
The display changes
Y
N
Go to WD 9.1. Check the wiring between the drum position encoder and the drum driver
PWB.
Refer to:
The wiring is good.

Y
N
Remove the drum drive motor, PL 94.20 Item 6. Check that the motor shaft rotates freely. The
motor shaft rotates freely.
Y
N
With the drum drive motor removed, check rotation of the drum. The drum rotates freely.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.1. Check the wiring between the drum position encoder and the drum driver PWB.
Refer to:
The wiring is good.

Y
N

February 2013
2-465
94-548-00, 94-549-00
94-551-00, 94-552-00, 94-553-00 Drum Y-Axis Error RAP
94-558-00, 94-560-00, 94-562-00, 94-564-00, 94-566-00

Cleaning Unit Position Error RAP
94-551-00 Drum Y-axis home calculation error.
94-558-00 Cleaning unit timing error
94-552-00 Drum Y-axis Initialization error.
94-560-00 Cleaning unit position error
94-553-00 Drum Y-axis home data error.
94-562-00 Cleaning unit fast forward home time-out
Procedure
WARNING
94-564-00 Cleaning unit slow forward home time-out
1.
2.
94-566-00 Cleaning unit reverse home time-out
Procedure
WARNING
Go to the 94-522-00 Cleaning Unit Motor Stall RAP.
94-551-00, 94-552-00, 94-553-00, 94-558-00, 94-560-00,
February 2013
2-466
94-568-00, 94-570-00, 94-572-00, 94-573-00 Cleaning Unit

Data Error RAP
94-568-00 Cleaning unit usage data read error
94-574-00 Cleaning Unit Sync Error RAP

94-574-00 Cleaning unit NVM sync access error
Procedure
WARNING
94-570-00 Cleaning unit usage data write error
94-572-00 Cleaning unit usage data detect error

94-573-00 Cleaning unit usage data version error
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14. The fault remains.
Y
N
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. The fault is still present.
Y
N
Reinstall the original cleaning unit. Remove the drum drive motor and belt, refer to REP 91.24.
Check the 12 pin connector, PL 94.10 Item 6. Go to WD 9.2 and WD 9.4. Check the wiring
between the cleaning unit and the drum driver PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1
or install a new harness, PL 1.15 Item 17.
February 2013
2-467
94-568-00, 94-570-00, 94-572-00, 94-573-00, 94-574-
94-610-00, 94-612-00 Cleaning Unit Error RAP
94-611-00 Cleaning Unit Removal Pump Test Fail RAP
94-610-00 Cleaning unit delivery pump test fail
94-611-00 Cleaning unit removal pump test fail
94-612-00 Cleaning unit valve test fail
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
Go to the 94-504-00 Cleaning Unit Reservoir Pressure Low RAP.
Check the fault history, GP 2. Multiple occurrences of fault 94-610-00 are listed.
Y
N
Go to dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. Perform a cleaning unit self test. The
fault
remains.
Y
N
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14 to clear the fault. Perform SCP 5 Final
Actions.
Y
N
Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new cleaning unit interface harness,
PL 1.15 Item 17.
Check for grounding faults, GP 7 System Grounding Verification. If the fault remains, install a
94-610-00, 94-612-00, 94-611-00
February 2013
2-468
94-615-00 Non Xerox Cleaning Unit Detected RAP
94-616-00 Cleaning Unit Low Oil Detected RAP
94-615-00 A non Xerox cleaning unit has been detected.
94-616-00 Low oil is detected in the cleaning unit, before the scheduled end of life.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE: This procedure is only to be performed when the machine does not reorganize a genuine Xerox cleaning unit.
1.
Verify that the cleaning unit is a Xerox item. Remove, then reinstall the cleaning unit.
2.
If the fault remains, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.
CAUTION
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Switch off, then switch on the machine GP 14.
Cheat the front door interlock. Listen at the front of the cleaning unit. The cleaning unit can
be heard running.
Y
N
The fault is still present.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.2, WD 9.4 and WD 9.19. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit and the
drum driver PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.1 or install a new harness, PL 1.15 Item 17.
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. The fault is still present.
Y
N
Remove the front door interlock cheat. Remove the new cleaning unit. Go to WD 9.2, WD 9.4
and WD 9.19. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit and the drum driver PWB. The wiring is good.
Y
N
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. Reinstall the new cleaning unit. Cheat the front
door interlock. Listen at the front of the cleaning unit. The cleaning unit can be heard running.
Y
N
Check for grounding faults, go to GP 7 System Grounding Verification.
February 2013
2-469
94-615-00, 94-616-00
94-617-00, 94-618-00 Oil Pump Error RAP
94-619 Cleaning Unit Delivery Line Blocked RAP
94-617-00 Oil delivery pump stalled
94-619-00 Oil delivery line blocked.
94-618-00 Oil removal pump stalled
Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
Check the fault history, GP 2. Multiple occurrences of faults 94-617-00 or 94-618-00 are
listed.
Y
N
Y
N
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4. Reinstall the new cleaning unit. Cheat the front
door interlock. Listen at the front of the cleaning unit. The cleaning unit can be heard running.
Y
N
Check for grounding faults, go to GP 7 System Grounding Verification.
94-617-00, 94-618-00, 94-619
February 2013
2-470
94-620-00 Drum Fan Stall RAP
94-621-00 Abatement Fan Stall RAP
94-620-00 The drum fan has stalled.
94-621-00 The abatement fan has stalled.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
Check the harness leading to the fan.
Check the harness leading to the fan.
Check for damage or debris that restricts movement of the fan.
Check for damage or debris that restricts movement of the fan.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 42-064 to run the drum fan, PL 94.20 Item 4. The drum fan runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.1. Check the drum fan.
Refer to:
Enter dC330 code 42-062 to run the abatement fan, Figure 1. The abatement fan runs.
Y
N
Go to WD 9.4. Check the abatement fan.
Refer to:
Drum fan, PL 94.20 Item 4.
Abatement fan assembly, PL 94.20 Item 11.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking fan rotation. The fan is clean.
Y
N
Clean ducts and filters as necessary, GP 27.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking fan rotation. The fan is clean.
Y
N
Clean ducts and filters as necessary, GP 27.
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or loose connectors. Repair the wiring
as necessary, REP 1.1. If necessary install a new drum fan PL 94.20 Item 4.
The fault may be intermittent, check for damaged wiring or loose connectors. Repair the wiring
as necessary, REP 1.1. If necessary install a new abatement fan, PL 94.20 Item 11.
February 2013
2-471
94-620-00, 94-621-00
94-622-00 Cleaning Unit Unusable RAP

94-622-00 Cleaning unit previously marked unusable.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not reuse a cleaning unit that has oil contamination.
Abatement fan
94-621-00, 94-622-00
February 2013
2-472
94-629-00 Extreme Customer Usage RAP
94-631-00 Cleaning Unit Connectivity Failure RAP
94-629-00 DM Gel countdown enabled.
94-631-00 Persistent cleaning unit connectivity failure.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
This fault is shown for information only. No corrective actions are necessary.
February 2013
2-473
94-629-00, 94-631-00
94-634-00, 94-635-00 DMU Thermistor Failure RAP
94A Enclosure Fan Error RAP
94-634-00 DMU Thermistor Fail. The IME timed out waiting for the cleaning unit to warm-up.
The IME has assumed that the cleaning unit thermistor has failed, although the cleaning unit is
at operational temperature.
Use this RAP to troubleshoot problems with the drum driver enclosure fan, MOT 42-063.
94-635-00 DMU thermistor sensor fail. Anomalous data received when using pressure sensor
to determine CU oil level. The IME will revert to open loop oil consumption algorithm.
Procedure
These faults are shown for information only. No corrective actions are necessary.
94-634-00, 94-635-00, 94A
Procedure
WARNING
Referring to WD 9.4 and PL 1.15, check the enclosure fan is running. Check the wiring to the
drum driver PWB. Install new components as necessary:
Enclosure fan, MOT42-063, PL 1.15 Item 6.
February 2013
2-474
94B Drum Drive Control Test Actions RAP
Use this RAP to resolve problems identified by dC708 Drum Drive Control Test.
6 Drum calibrate failed on encoder signal
Procedure

Go to WD 9.1. Check the wiring between the drum encoder and the drum driver PWB
Refer to:
NOTE: On issue of the service manual (March 2011), dC708 was considered to be unreliable.
Therefore, it is advisable to go to dC122 Fault History and dC123 PEST Fault History then
check for drum drive related faults.
Run dC708 Drum Drive Control Test. Observe the results of the test and perform the relevant
actions. On completion repeat the dC708 Drum Drive Control Test, and check for additional
actions, then return to the originating RAP.
Drum encoder, PL 94.20 Item 8.
0 Drum drive test normal
Passed test successfully
7 Drum following error higher than normal

1.
1 Low power slew test failed

Check the following for damage:
1.
The wiring between PJ6AC on the power supply unit and the drum drive motor.
Remove the drum fan shroud, PL 94.20 Item 5 and manually rotate the drum.
If the drum rotates freely install a new drum drive motor, PL 94.20 Item 6.
If the drum does not rotate freely remove the drum drive belt, PL 94.20 Item 2.
Refer to WD 1.1. Repair as necessary, REP 1.1.

2.
The drum driver power supply interface cable, PL 1.15 Item 10, install a new cable if necessary.
3.
The cleaning unit interface harness, PL 1.15 Item 17. Check between the drum drive
motor and the drum driver PWB. Repair the harness if necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to WD
1.1 and WD 9.3, PJ 802.
4.
If the no obvious damage is found replace the drum drive motor then the drum drive PWB.
Manually rotate the drum. If the drum spins freely install a new drum drive
motor.
If the drum does not spin freely inspect the drum for obstructions and correct as
necessary.
8 Belt slip test failed

Inspect, clean or replace the drum belt as required, PL 94.20 Item 2.
9 Slew under load test failed: excessive motor torque with transfix loaded
2 Hall analog signal out of range
Check the transfix roller, PL 10.20 Item 1, for free rotation.
Referring to WD 9.3 check for +0.8V between PJ802 pin 12 and ground.
If the transfix roller does not rotate freely check for obstructions and repair as necessary
or install a new transfix roller.
If +0.7V to +0.9V is found install a new drum drive motor, PL 94.20 Item 6.
If no voltage is found install a new drum drive PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
3 Analog sine or cosine drum encode signals out of range

1.
Install a new drum encoder, PL 94.20 Item 8.
2.
If the fault persists install a new drum drive PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
4 Drum home failed on index calibration

Clean the drum encoder or replace if necessary, PL 94.20 Item 8.
5 Drum calibrate failed on hall signal
Go to WD 1.1 and WD 9.1. Check the wiring between the drum motor and the drum driver
PWB
Refer to:
Drum encoder, PL 94.20 Item 8.
February 2013
2-475
94B
94B
February 2013
2-476
99-000-00 to 99-067-00 PEST Error 1 RAP
Table 1 PEST Hard and Soft Fault Codes
99-000-00 PEST test started.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-057
Hard
Go to the 91A Printhead Communications RAP. Check pins 7 to 11 on

the video cable from the IME controller PWB to the printhead 3 PWB.
99-058
Hard

the video cable from the IME controller to the printhead 4 PWB.
99-059
Hard
Go to the 91A Printhead Communications RAP. Check pins 14 to 27

on the video cable from the IME controller PWB to the printhead 1
PWB.
99-060
Hard

on the video cable from the IME controller to the printhead 2 PWB.
99-061
Hard

on the video cable from the IME controller PWB to the printhead 3
PWB.
99-062
Hard

on the video cable from the IME controller to the printhead 4 PWB.
99-066
Hard
Go to the 92-530-00 RAP. Check the 3 tray module harness for damage.
99-067
Hard
Go to the 92-535-00, 92-536-00 RAP. Check for loose connections.
99-052-00 Board link, MUD link broken.

99-053-00 Board link, PS link broken.
99-055-00 Cable video, printhead 1.
99-066-00 Board link, 3TM link broken.
99-067-00 Board link, PFP ink broken.
Procedure
WARNING
Refer to Table 1. Perform the relevant action. For an explanation of PEST codes refer to
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-000
Soft
For information only. Indicates the start of the PEST procedure.
99-052
Hard
Refer to WD 9.7 and WD 9.10. Check the wiring between the marking
unit driver PWB and the IME controller PWB. If the wiring harness is
good, then install new marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4 or
99-053
Hard
Go to the 92-520-00 RAP. Check for loose or damaged connections.
99-055
Hard

the video cable from the IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1 to the
printhead 1 PWB, PL 91.25 Item 2.
99-056
Hard

the video cable from the IME controller PWB to the printhead 2 PWB.
February 2013
2-477
99-000-00 to 99-067-00
99-081-00 to 99-112-00 PEST Error 2 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-083
Hard
Go to 91-610-00 to 91-613-00. Check the video and wave amp

cables to printhead 3.
The fault indicates a failure of the wave amp power signals
between the quad wave amp PWB and the IME controller PWB.
99-084
Hard

99-085
Hard

99-086
Hard

between the wave amp PWB and the IME controller PWB.
99-087
Hard

99-088
Hard

between the wave amp PWB and the IME controller PWB.
99-100
Hard
Safe mode indicates a firm ware mismatch. Check code version

and upgrade or revert as appropriate. If problem continues install a
99-110
Hard
Go to 94-505-00 RAP.
Procedure
99-111
Hard
dC123.
99-112
Hard
Go to 94-505-00 RAP. Check the wiring between the cleaning unit

and the drum driver PWB.
99-081-00 Wave amp cable, VPP or VSS head 1 open.

99-085-00 Wave amp cable, VPP or VSS head 1 short.
99-100-00 Board link, DDB safe mode.
99-110-00 Solenoid, DMU valve over current.
99-111-00 Stripper solenoid over current.
99-112-00 Pump, DMU delivery over current.
Initial Actions
WARNING

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-081
Hard

99-082
Hard

99-081-00 to 99-112-00
February 2013
2-478
99-120-00 to 99-140-00 PEST Error 3 RAP
99-143-00 to 99-150-00 PEST Error 4 RAP
99-120-00 Media path driver PWB safe mode.
99-143-00 Thermistor, MU ambient open.
99-121-00 Motor, H bridge enable MPD open.
99-144-00 Thermistor, MU ambient short.
99-130-00 Solenoid, nip C over current.
99-150-00 Solenoid, ink delivery valves over current.
99-131-00 Solenoid, nip D over current.
Initial Actions
WARNING
99-133-00 Solenoid, duplex over current.
99-134-00 Solenoid, CAR diverter over current.

99-140-00 Board link, MUD safe mode.
Procedure
Initial Actions
dC123.
WARNING

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-143
Soft
Go to the 91-682-00 RAP. Check that the temperature reading is

within range.
99-144
Soft
Go to the 91-682-00 RAP. Check that the temperature reading is

within range.
99-150
Hard
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-120
Hard
Safe mode indicates a firm ware mismatch. Check code version and
upgrade or revert as appropriate. If problem continues install a new
media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
99-121
Hard
Go to 82-132-00, 82-155-00 RAP. Check the horizontal transport

motor.
99-130
Hard
99-131
Hard
99-133
Hard
99-134
Hard
99-140
Hard
Safe mode indicates a firm ware mismatch. Check code version and
upgrade or revert as appropriate. If problem continues install a new
marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
February 2013
2-479
99-120-00 to 99-140-00, 99-143-00 to 99-150-00
99-180-00 to 99-217-00 PEST Error 5 RAP
99-180-00 Board link 3TM safe mode.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-212
Soft
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Check all 24V devices for heat or
noise and the harnesses for damage or short circuits (i.e. chaffing). If a 24V component has been replaced then check that harness first.
To isolate 5 major areas:
1. Unplug all drum driver PWB connectors except PJ602,
PJ603 and PJ 902.
99-185-00 Board link PFP safe mode.

99-210-00 Power, drum driver board ADC ref to 3.3V / out of range.
99-211-00 Power DDB ADC ref to 24V out of range.
99-212-00 Power 24V base above max.
If the fault 99-212 is removed but other 99-xxx errors occur,

Then check all 24V components and harnesses to the drum
driver PWB.
99-213-00 Power 24V base below min.

2.
99-214-00 Power 24V base not stable.

Then check all 24V components and harnesses to the media
path driver PWB.
99-215-00 Power DDB ADC 50V APG out of range.

99-216-00 Power 50V base above max.
3.
99-217-00 Power 50V base below min.
WARNING
4.
5.
dC123.
Hard/Soft
Action
99-180
Hard
Safe mode indicates a firm ware mismatch. Check IME code version vs. 3TM PLD version and upgrade or revert as appropriate. If
problem continues install a new 3 Trays module PWB, PL 73.16
Item 4.
99-185
Hard
Safe mode indicates a firm ware mismatch. Check IME code version vs. tray 5 PLD version and upgrade or revert as appropriate.
If problem continues install a new tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68
Item 8.
Soft
Go to the 01B RAP.
Soft
Go to the 01H RAP.
99-180-00 to 99-217-00
Remove power to the CBC tray by disconnecting PJ1 on the

power distribution PWB.
If the fault 99-212 is removed and replaced by a soft error 99213. Then check all 24V components and harnesses.

Code
Remove power to the quad wave amp PWB, by disconnecting PJ101 on the IME controller PWB.
If the fault 99-212 is removed and no 99 errors occur, but a
91-610 error occurrs.Then check all 24V components and
harnesses to the quad wave amp PWB.
Procedure
99-211
Unplug all marking unit driver PWB connectors except

PJ203.
Then check all 24V components and harnesses to the marking unit driver PWB.
Initial Actions
99-210
Unplug all media path driver PWB connectors except PJ803,

PJ408 and PJ 402.
If none of those solve the problem, then try disconnecting the

printhead connectors from the IME controller PWB. This will also
raise head link errors so check for both.
The error could be internal to one of the PWBs, refer to the 01H
RAP.
99-213
Soft
Go to the 01H RAP.
99-214
Soft
Go to the 01H RAP.
99-215
Soft
Go to the 01J RAP and the 01K RAP.
February 2013
2-480
99-221-00 to 99-244-00 PEST Error 6 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-216
Soft
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Check all 50V devices for heat or
noise and the harnesses for damage or short circuits (i.e. chaffing). If a 50V component has been replaced then check that harness first.
To isolate 4 major areas:
1. Unplug all drum driver PWB connectors except PJ602,
PJ603 and PJ 902.
2.
3.
99-221-00 Main board 1.225V out of range.
Unplug all media path driver PWB connectors except PJ803,

PJ408 and PJ 402.
99-237-00 AC power gauge is not stable.

Then check all 50V components and harnesses to the media
path driver PWB.
99-240-00 Power DDB ADC 5V off missing.
Unplug all marking unit driver PWB connectors except

PJ203.
99-236-00 Power AC base above max.
99-241-00 Power DDB ADC +12V off missing.

99-242-00 Power DDB ADC -12V off missing.
Remove power to the quad wave amp PWB, by disconnecting PJ101 on the IME controller PWB.
The error could be internal to one of the PWBs, refer to the 01J
RAP and the 01K RAP.
Soft
99-232-00 Power AC voltage above max.

99-235-00 Power AC base below min.
If the fault 99-216 is removed and no 99 errors occur, but a

91-610 error occurrs.Then check all 50V components and
harnesses to the quad wave amp PWB.
99-217
99-231-00 Power AC voltage middle error.

Then check all 50V components and harnesses to the drum
driver PWB.

Then check all 50V components and harnesses to the marking unit driver PWB.
4.
99-230-00 Power AC voltage below min.
99-243-00 Power DDB ADC +50V off missing.

99-244-00 Power IMEC ADC -50V off missing.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Go to the 01J RAP and the 01K RAP.
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-221
Soft
Go to the 01B RAP.
99-230
Soft
Go to the 01A RAP.
99-231
Soft
Go to the 01A RAP.
99-232
Soft
Go to the 01A RAP.
99-235
Soft
Go to the 01A RAP.
99-236
Soft
Go to the 01A RAP.
99-237
Soft
Go to the 01A RAP.
February 2013
2-481
99-180-00 to 99-217-00, 99-221-00 to 99-244-00
99-250-00 to 99-271-00 PEST Error 7 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-250-00 Power IMEC ADC 1.1V out of range.
99-240
Hard
The power supply is good and believes the voltage is OK. But check
for a wiring harness failure between the power supply and the drum
driver PWB or an internal failure of the drum driver PWB. Check and
repair the drum driver / media path power harness, PL 1.15 Item 15.
Install a new Drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Refer to the 01D +5V Distribution RAP.
99-251-00 Power 1.2V out of range.
Refer to the 01E +12V Distribution RAP.
99-255-00 Power IMEC ADC -50V out of range.
Refer to the 01F -12V Distribution RAP.
99-259-00 Power DDB ADC +24V out of range.
Refer to the 01J +50V Distribution RAP.
Initial Actions
for a wiring harness failure between the power supply at PJDC1 and
the IME controller PWB at PJ701 or an internal failure of the IME controller PWB. Check and repair the harness, REP 1.1. Install a new IME
controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
Refer to the 01K -50V Distribution RAP.
Procedure
99-241
99-242
99-243
99-244
Hard
Hard
Hard
Hard
99-221-00 to 99-244-00, 99-250-00 to 99-271-00

99-256-00 Power DDB ADC 5.0V out of range.

99-258-00 Power DDB ADC -12V out of range.

99-270-00 Fuse DDB 5V open.
99-271-00 Fuse DDB 12V open.
WARNING
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-250
Soft
Go to the 01B RAP.
99-251
Soft
Go to the 01B RAP.
99-252
Soft
Go to the 01B RAP.
99-253
Soft
Go to the 01B RAP.
99-254
Soft
Go to the 01B RAP.
99-255
Soft
Go to the 01K RAP.
99-256
Soft
Go to the 01D RAP.
99-257
Soft
Go to the 01E RAP.
99-258
Soft
Go to the 01F RAP.
99-259
Soft
Go to the 01H RAP.
99-260
Soft
Go to the 01J RAP.
99-270
Soft
Go to the 01D RAP. Check downstream devices for short circuits

and bad wiring harnesses.
99-271
Soft
Go to the 01E RAP. Check downstream devices for short circuits

and bad wiring harnesses.
February 2013
2-482
99-272-00 to 99-292-00 PEST Error 8 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-274
Hard
Go to the 01J RAP. Refer to WD 9.1 and WD 9.2 Check down stream of
the drum driver PWB for short circuits and bad wiring harnesses. Refer
to the 01-530-00 +/- 50V Short Circuit and Overload RAP. If no direct
short is found, first replace the stripper solenoid assembly (PL 10.10
Item 3) before any other suspect 50V components. After the short has
been repaired install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
99-280
Hard
Go to the 01B RAP. Check downstream for short circuits and bad wiring
harnesses.
99-281
Hard
Go to the 01D RAP. Check down stream for short circuits and bad wiring
harnesses. Refer the 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and
Overload RAP.
99-282
Hard
Go to the 01E RAP. Check downstream for short circuits and bad wiring
harnesses. Refer to the 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short Circuit and
Overload RAP.
99-283
Hard
Go to the 01H RAP. Check downstream devices for short circuits and
bad wiring harnesses. Refer to the 01-525-00 +24V, +/-12V, +5V Short
99-284
Hard
Go to the 01H RAP. Check down stream devices for short circuits and
99-285
Hard
Check for +12V at the media path driver PWB, PJ803, WD 8.5.
If the voltage is good go to the 01H RAP.
If the voltage is not good, go to the 01E +12v Distribution RAP.
99-286
Hard
Go to the 01D RAP. Check downstream devices for short circuits and
99-287
Hard
Go to the 01D RAP. Check downstream devices for short circuits and
Procedure
99-290
Hard
dC123.
Go to the 01B RAP. Check downstream devices for short circuits and
bad wiring harnesses.
99-291
Hard
Go to the 01E RAP. Check downstream devices for short circuits and
99-292
Hard
99-272-00 Drum driver PWB, 24V fuse A (F602) open.

99-273-00 Drum driver PWB, 24V fuse B (F603) open.
99-274-00 Drum driver PWB, 50V fuse open.
99-280-00 Media path driver PWB, 3.3V over current detected.
99-281-00 Media path driver PWB, 5V fuse (F803) open.
99-282-00 Media path driver PWB, 12V fuse (F802) open.
99-283-00 Media path driver PWB, 24V fuse A (F702) open.
99-284-00 Media path driver PWB, 24V fuse B (F701) open.
99-285-00 Media path driver PWB, 24V fuse C (F801) open.
99-286-00 Media path driver PWB, 50V fuse A (F902) open.
99-287-00 Media path driver PWB, 50V fuse B (F904) open.
99-290-00 Marking unit driver PWB, 12V fuse 3.3V open.
99-291-00 Marking unit driver PWB, 12V fuse open.
99-292-00 Marking unit driver PWB, 24V fuse open.
Initial Actions
WARNING

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-272
Soft
99-273
Soft
February 2013
2-483
99-272-00 to 99-292-00
99-293-00 to 99-312-00 PEST Error 9 RAP
99-293-00 Fuse MUD 50V open.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-304
Hard
Check that PJ801 on the marking unit driver PWB is securely connected. Check the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary, REP
1.1. Refer to WD 9.12.
99-305
Hard
1.1. Refer to WD 9.9 and WD 9.16.
99-306
Hard
Check that PJ901 on the marking unit heater PWB is securely connected. Check the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary, REP
1.1. Refer to WD 9.8 and WD 9.12.
99-307
Hard
99-308
Hard
99-309
Hard
99-310
Hard
Check that PJ430 on the solenoid patch PWB is securely connected.

Check the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
Refer to WD 9.14.
99-311
Hard

Refer to WD 9.14.
99-312
Hard

Refer to WD 9.15.
99-301-00 Connector, marking unit driver PWB.

99-310-00 Connector, MU solenoid patch PWB.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-293
Hard
Go to the 01D RAP.
99-301
Hard
Check PJ303 on the marking unit driver PWB and its wiring. Refer to
WD 9.10.
99-302
Hard
Check PJ102 on the marking unit driver PWB and its wiring. Refer to
WD 9.9.
99-303
Hard
99-293-00 to 99-312-00
February 2013
2-484
99-313-00 to 99-329-00 PEST Error 10 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-314
Hard

Refer to WD 9.15.
99-315
Hard

Refer to WD 9.14.
99-316
Hard

Refer to WD 9.16.
99-317
Hard

Refer to WD 9.16.
99-320
Hard
This fault code is for future use and is included for reference only.
99-321
Hard
Check that PJ902 on the drum driver PWB is securely connected.

99-322
Hard

99-323
Hard

99-324
Hard

Refer to WD 9.2, and WD 8.6.
99-325
Hard

Refer to WD 9.1.
WARNING
99-326
Hard

99-327
Hard

Refer to WD 9.4.
99-328
Hard

99-329
Hard


99-320-00 Connector IME other open.
99-321-00 Connector, drum driver PWB.
Initial Actions
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-313
Hard

Refer to WD 9.15.
February 2013
2-485
99-313-00 to 99-329-00
99-330-00 to 99-349-00 PEST Error 11 RAP
99-330-00 Connector, IOD pre-amplifier PWB.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-332
Hard
Check that PJ4 on the registration / preheat interface is securely connected. Check the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary,
REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.6.
99-333
Hard
99-334
Hard
99-340
Hard
Check that PJ202 on the media path driver PWB is securely connected. Check the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary,
99-341
Hard
REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.1 and WD 8.6.
99-342
Hard
REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.1 and WD 8.5.
99-343
Hard
99-344
Hard
REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.4, WD 9.17 and WD 9.18.
99-345
Hard
99-346
Hard
Check that PJ202 on the media path driver PWB harness to registration motor (M3) is securely connected. Check the wiring for an open
circuit, repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.1.
99-347
Hard
Check that PJ104 on the media path driver PWB harness to vertical
transport motor (M2) is securely connected. Check the wiring for an
open circuit, repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.1.
99-348
Hard
Check that PJ303 on the media path driver PWB harness to exit
motor (M5) is securely connected. Check the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.2.
99-349
Hard
Check that PJ905 on the media path driver PWB harness to horizontal transport motor (M6) is securely connected. Check the wiring for
an open circuit, repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to WD 8.5.
99-331-00 Connector DMU hot plug open.

99-332-00 Connector, registration / preheat interface PWB.
99-340-00 Connector, media path driver PWB.
99-346-00 Connector, MPD harness M3
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-330
Hard
Check that PJ2 to the IOD pre-amp PWB, refer to WD 9.22 and WD
9.1 and PJ1 on the registration / pre-heat interface PWB, refer to WD
8.6 are securely connected. Check the wiring for an open circuit,
repair as necessary, REP 1.1.
99-331
Hard
99-330-00 to 99-349-00
February 2013
2-486
99-360-00 to 99-382-00 PEST Error 12 RAP
99-360-00 Connectors TTM 1 open.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-366
Hard
LCSS: Go to the 12-199-00-110 Unexpected Sheet at Finisher Entry

RAP.
OCT: Go to the 12-701-00-65 Offset Catch Tray Failure RAP.
HVF: Go to the 12-762-00-171, 12-764-00-171, 12-765-00-171 IME to
Finisher Communication Failure RAP.
Check the communication harness between the finisher and PJ904 on
the media path driver PWB.
99-370
Hard
Check that PJ4AC on the power supply is securely connected. Check

the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to
WD 1.1.
99-371
Hard
Check that PJ5AC on the power supply is securely connected. Check

the wiring for an open circuit, repair as necessary, REP 1.1. Refer to
WD 1.2.
99-372
Hard
99-373
Hard
99-374
Hard
99-375
Hard
99-380
Hard
99-381
Hard
99-382
Soft
99-361-00 Connector TTM 2 open.

99-362-00 Connector TTM 3 open.
99-365-00 Power supply unit.
99-370-00 Connector, PS J4AC marking unit.
99-371-00 Connector, PS J5AC.
99-372-00 Connector AC PS heater 3 open.
99-373-00 Connector AC PS fuse 1 open.
99-380-00 Fan power supply short.
99-381-00 Fan power supply open.
99-382-00 Fan power supply stalled.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-360
Hard
99-361
Hard
99-362
Hard
99-365
Hard
Go to the 01A RAP. Check that the finisher power cord is securely
connected to the IME.
February 2013
2-487
99-360-00 to 99-382-00
99-394-00 to 99-413-00 PEST Error 13 RAP
99-394-00 Power triacs PS short triac.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-405
Hard
Refer to IME Controller test points TP703-706 (Lower Left corner of

the board, with labels HD1-HD4 to indicate which head)
Check at each test point.
99-395-00 Power, triacs MUH short triac.

99-405-00 Power, head thermistors safety circuit error.
If the voltage is ~3.2V, then that head is good.
If the voltage is ~2.1V then the video cable has an open contact. Install a new video cable, PL 92.10 Item 7, for the indicated printhead.
99-412-00 Heater, head reservoir 3 open.
If the voltage is ~0.02V, then it has a thermistor / temperature

error, check the PEST fault history, dC123 for shorted triac.
Unplug AC heaters to that head, if still bad, install a new printhead.

Initial Actions
WARNING
If all 4 voltages are OK, it may be intermittent, try POPO to catch the
fault again and measure immediately.
Refer to the 91A Printhead Communications RAP.
99-410
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-80000 to 91-803-00, 91-856-00 to 91-859-00 Printhead Thermal Error
RAP. Check the AC / heater cabling to printhead 1. If it is open or
short, install a new a cable. If necessary, install a new printhead.
99-411
Hard
99-412
Hard
99-413
Hard
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-394
Hard
Check the PEST fault history, dC123 for power supply heater faults
(ink melt plates, pre heater, drum heater).
99-395
Hard
Check the PEST fault history, dC123 for marking unit heater faults
(umbilicals, printheads and ink melt reservoir). Identify which heater
is open and install new components as necessary.
Then install a new marking unit heater PWB, PL 92.10 Item 5.
99-394-00 to 99-413-00
If the voltage is ~0.3V then check the cable on that head and
look for a thermistor error on another head.
February 2013
2-488
99-414-00 to 99-428-00 PEST Error 14 RAP
99-414-00 Heater, head reservoir 1 short.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-415
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

to 91-803-00, 91-856-00 to 91-859-00 Printhead Thermal Error RAP.
Check the AC / heater cabling to printhead 2. If it is open or short, install
a new a cable. If necessary, install a new printhead.
99-416
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-417
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-418
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-419
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-420
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-421
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-422
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-423
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-424
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-425
Soft
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00


99-418-00 Heater, head reservoir 1 below min.
99-422-00 Heater, head reservoir 1 above max.
99-426-00 Heater, jet stack H1 left open.
99-427-00 Heater, jet stack H1 right open.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-414
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

February 2013
2-489
99-414-00 to 99-428-00
99-429-00 to 99-443-00 PEST Error 15 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-426
Hard
99-427
99-428
Hard
Hard
Go to the 01A AC Power Distribution RAP. Check the AC / heater

cabling to printhead 1. If it is open or short, install a new a cable. If necessary, install a new printhead.

99-434-00 Heater, jet stack H1 left short.
99-435-00 Heater, jet stack H1 right short.
99-442-00 Heater, jet stack H1 left below min.
99-443-00 Heater, jet stack H1 right below min.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
99-414-00 to 99-428-00, 99-429-00 to 99-443-00
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-429
Hard
Go to the 01A AC Power Distribution RAP. Select the Head 2 Reservoir and Jetstack Heaters Check. Install new components as
required.
February 2013
2-490
99-444-00 to 99-457-00 PEST Error 16 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-430
Hard
required.
99-431
Hard
required.
99-432
Hard
required.
99-433
Hard
required.
99-434
Hard
required.
99-435
Hard
required.
99-436
Hard
99-438
Hard
required.
required.
99-440
Hard
required.
99-441
Hard
required.
99-442
Soft
required.
Soft

99-450-00 Heater, jet stack H1 left above max.
99-451-00 Heater, jet stack H1 right above max.
required.
99-443
Hard
Hard
required.
99-437
99-439
required.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-444
Soft
Go to the 01A AC Power Distribution RAP. Select the Head 2 Reservoir and Jetstack Heaters Check. Install new components as required.
99-445
Soft
99-446
Soft
February 2013
2-491
99-429-00 to 99-443-00, 99-444-00 to 99-457-00
99-460-00 to 99-477-00 PEST Error 17 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-447
Soft
99-460-00 Heater, umbilical upper open.
99-461-00 Heater, umbilical lower open.
99-448
Soft
99-462-00 Heater, umbilical upper short.
99-449
Soft
99-463-00 Heater, umbilical lower short.
99-450
Soft
99-464-00 Heater, umbilical upper below min.
99-451
Soft
99-465-00 Heater, umbilical lower below min.
99-452
Soft
99-466-00 Heater, umbilical upper above max.
99-453
Soft
99-467-00 Heater, umbilical lower above max.
99-454
Soft
99-455
Soft
99-472-00 Heater, melt reservoir 1 short.
99-456
Soft
99-473-00 Heater, melt reservoir 2 short.
99-457
Soft
99-474-00 Heater, melt reservoir 1 below min.
99-470-00 Heater, melt reservoir 1 open.

99-471-00 Heater, melt reservoir 2 open.
99-475-00 Heater, melt reservoir 2 below min.

99-476-00 Heater, melt reservoir 1 above max.
99-477-00 Heater, melt reservoir 2 above max.
Initial Actions
WARNING
99-444-00 to 99-457-00, 99-460-00 to 99-477-00
PEST fault 99-471 can be raised as a hard or a soft fault. Enter dC123 PEST Fault History. A hard fault will appear before the 99-999 separator and a soft fault will appear after
the 99-999 separator.
February 2013
2-492
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-466
Soft
Go to 93-535-00 to 93-537-00, 93-958-00 Upper Umbilical Thermal

Error RAP. Check the AC / heater cabling umbilical. If it is open or
short replace cable, otherwise replace the umbilical.

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-467
Soft
99-460
Hard
Check the dC123 PEST log for addition heater faults.

If there are multiple heater open faults for the marking unit (12 head
heaters, 2 umbilical heaters and 2 melt reservoir heaters).
Check the cable between marking unit driver PWB at PJ701

and marking unit heater PWB at PJ901.
Go to the 93-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00 Lower Umbilical Thermal Error RAP. Check the AC / heater cabling umbilical. If it is open
or short install a new cable. If necessary, install a new umbilical.
99-470
Soft
Go to the 93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Thermal Error RAP. Check the AC / heater cabling umbilical. If it is open
or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new reservoir.
Enter dC330 component control to attempt to activate one

heater (this will enable the AC relays) check that AC voltage is
at the marking Unit heater PWB at PJ101.
99-471
Soft
If voltages are not present, check the AC cable between the

marking unit PWB at PJ101 and the power supply at PJ4AC.
or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new reservoir. This
soft fault is raised only if reservoir 2 heater is open.
99-471
Hard
or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new reservoir. This
hard fault is raised if both reservoir 1 and 2 heaters are open.
99-472
Hard
99-473
Hard
99-474
Soft
99-475
Soft
99-476
Soft
99-477
Soft
If the cable is OK. Check the power supply unit fuses. These
fuses are inside the power supply unit and not replaceable.
If a fuse is blown, isolate and repair the cause of the blown fuse
and then install a new power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
If voltages are present at the marking unit heater PWB.

Check the fuses on the PWB.
If a fuse is blown, isolate and repair the cause of the blown fuse
and then install a new marking unit heater PWB, PL 92.10 Item
5.
If there is only this one heater fault, check the AC / heater

cabling to the umbilical. If it is open or short replace the cable,
otherwise install a new umbilical.
Refer to the 93-535-00 to 93-537-00, 93-958-00 Upper Umbilical

Thermal Error RAP. Run the upper umbilical test.
99-461
Hard
99-462
Hard

99-463
Hard
99-464
Soft

99-465
Soft
February 2013
2-493
99-460-00 to 99-477-00
99-480-00 to 99-497-00 PEST Error 18 RAP
Table 1 PEST codes and action

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-481
Hard
Go to the 93-523-00 to 93-526-00, 93-527-00 to 93-530-00, 93-53200, 93-533-00, 93-957-00 Ink Melt Error RAP. Check the AC / heater
cabling umbilical. If it is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new ink melt plate assembly.
99-482
Hard
99-483
Hard
99-484
Hard
99-485
Hard
99-486
Hard
99-487
Hard
99-490
Soft
99-491
Soft
Procedure
99-492
Soft
99-493
Soft
99-480-00 Heater, ink melter cyan open.

99-481-00 Heater, ink melter magenta open.
99-482-00 Heater, ink melter yellow open.
99-483-00 Heater, ink melter black open.
99-484-00 Heater, ink melter cyan short.
99-485-00 Heater, ink melter magenta short.
99-486-00 Heater, ink melter yellow short.
99-487-00 Heater, ink melter black short.
99-490-00 Heater, ink melter cyan below min.
99-491-00 Heater, ink melter magenta below min.
99-492-00 Heater, ink melter yellow below min.
99-493-00 Heater, ink melter black below min.
99-494-00 Heater, ink melter cyan above max.
99-495-00 Heater, ink melter magenta above max.
99-496-00 Heater, ink melter yellow above max.
99-497-00 Heater, ink melter black above max.
Initial Actions
WARNING
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-480
Hard
99-480-00 to 99-497-00
February 2013
2-494
99-500-00 to 99-515-00 PEST Error 19 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-494
Soft
99-495
99-496
99-497
Soft
Soft
Soft
99-500-00 Thermistor, ink melter cyan open.
99-501-00 Thermistor, ink melter magenta open.

99-502-00 Thermistor, ink melter yellow open.
99-503-00 Thermistor, ink melter black open.
99-504-00 Thermistor, ink melter cyan short.
99-505-00 Thermistor, ink melter magenta short.
99-506-00 Thermistor, ink melter yellow short.
99-507-00 Thermistor, ink melter black short.
99-510-00 Heater, drum front open.
99-511-00 Heater, drum rear open.
99-512-00 Heater, drum front short.
99-513-00 Heater, drum rear short.
99-514-00 Heater, drum front below min temp.
99-515-00 Heater, drum rear below min temp.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-500
Hard
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt

Thermistor Error RAP. Check the AC / heater cabling umbilical. If it is
open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new ink melt
plate assembly.
99-501
Hard
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt

plate assembly.
February 2013
2-495
99-480-00 to 99-497-00, 99-500-00 to 99-515-00
99-516-00 to 99-533-00 PEST Error 20 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-502
Hard
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt

plate assembly.
99-503
99-504
99-505
99-506
99-507
Hard
Hard
Hard
Hard
Hard
99-516-00 Heater, drum front above max.
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt

plate assembly.
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt
plate assembly.
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt
plate assembly.
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt
plate assembly.
Go to the 93-525-00, 93-528-00, 93-531-00, 93-534-00 Ink Melt
plate assembly.
99-510
Hard
Go to 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00, 94546-00, 94-632-00, 94-633-00 RAP.
99-511
Hard
Go to the 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00,

94-546-00, 94-632-00, 94-633-00 Drum Heat Error RAP.
99-512
Hard
Go to the 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00,

94-546-00, 94-632-00, 94-633-00 Drum Heat Error RAP. Check the
AC / heater cabling to the drum heater. If it is open, check the drum
thermal cutout PWB, PL 88.10 Item 11.
99-513
Hard
Go to the 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00,

99-514
Soft
Go to the 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00,

99-515
Soft
Go to the 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00,

99-500-00 to 99-515-00, 99-516-00 to 99-533-00
99-517-00 Heater, drum rear above max.

99-520-00 Heater, media preheat 1 open.
99-521-00 Heater, media preheat 2 open.
99-522-00 Heater, media preheat 1 and 2 open.
99-523-00 Heater, media preheat 1 short.
99-524-00 Heater, media preheat 2 short.
99-525-00 Heater, media preheat 1 below min.
99-526-00 Heater, media preheat 2 below min.
99-527-00 Heater, media preheat 1 above max.
99-528-00 Heater, media preheat 2 above max.
99-530-00 Thermistor, umbilical upper open.
99-531-00 Thermistor, umbilical lower open.
99-532-00 Thermistor, umbilical upper short.
99-533-00 Thermistor, umbilical lower short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-516
Soft
Go to the 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00,

99-517
Soft
Go to the 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00,

February 2013
2-496
99-534-00 to 99-548-00 PEST Error 21 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-534-00 Front drum thermistor, open circuit.
99-520
Soft
Go to the 88-500-00 to 88-502-00, 88-512-00 Preheat Thermal Error

RAP. Check the registration / preheat thermistor.
99-535-00 Front drum thermistor, short circuit.

99-536-00 Rear drum thermistor, short circuit.
99-521
Soft
Go to the 88-500-00 to 88-502-00, 88-512-00 RAP. Check the registration / preheat sensor.
99-522
Soft

RAP. Check the AC / heater cabling to registration / preheat sensor.
If it is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new
registration / preheat sensor.
99-537-00 Rear drum thermistor, open circuit.

99-539-00 Wave amp thermistor, short circuit.

99-541-00 Thermistor, jet stack H1 left open circuit.

99-523
99-524
99-525
99-526
99-527
99-528
Hard
Hard
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft

99-530
Hard
Go to the 93-535-00 to 93-537-00, 93-958-00 Upper Umbilical Thermal Error RAP. Check the DC cabling to the umbilical. If it is open or
short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new umbilical.
99-531
Hard
Go to the 93-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00 Lower Umbilical Thermal Error RAP. Check the DC cabling to the umbilical. If it is open or
99-532
Hard
Go to the 93-535-00 to 93-537-00, 93-958-00 Upper Umbilical Thermal Error RAP. Check the DC cabling to the umbilical. If it is open or
99-533
Hard
Go to the 93-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00 Lower Umbilical Thermal Error RAP. Check the DC cabling to the umbilical. If it is open or
99-538-00 Wave amp thermistor, open circuit.
99-540-00 Thermistor, jet stack H1 right open circuit.

99-548-00 Thermistor, jet stack H1 right short circuit.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-534
Hard
February 2013
2-497
Refer to WD 9.1. Check the DC cabling to the front drum thermistor. If it

is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new front
drum thermistor PL 94.20 Item 9.
99-516-00 to 99-533-00, 99-534-00 to 99-548-00
Code
Hard/Soft Action
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-535
Hard
Refer to WD 9.1. Check the DC cabling to the front drum thermistor. If it

is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new front
99-545
Hard
99-536
Hard
Refer to WD 9.3. Check the DC cabling to the rear drum thermistor. If it

is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new rear
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

Make sure the small ribbon cable on the right side of the printhead 3 is
securely seated. If necessary, install a new printhead.
99-546
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-547
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-548
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-537
Hard
Refer to WD 9.3. Check the DC cabling to the rear drum thermistor. If it

is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new rear
99-538
Hard
Go to the 91-587-00, 91-588-00 Quad Wave Amplifier Thermal Error

RAP. Check the quad wave amp / IME controller PWB cable, PL 92.10
Item 13. Go to 01E +12V Distribution RAP. Go to 01F -12V Distribution
RAP.
If an open circuit or a short circuit is found, install a new quad wave amp
/ IME controller PWB cable.
If the circuit is good, install a new quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item
3.
99-539
Hard
Go to the 91-587-00, 91-588-00 Quad Wave Amplifier Thermal Error

RAP. Check the quad wave amp / IME controller PWB cable, PL 92.10
Item 13. Go to 01E +12V Distribution RAP.
Go to 01F -12V Distribution RAP.
If an open circuit or a short circuit is found install a new quad wave amp
/ IME controller PWB cable.
If the circuit is good install a new quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item
3.
99-540
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-541
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-542
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-543
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-544
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

99-534-00 to 99-548-00
February 2013
2-498
99-549-00 to 99-563-00 PEST Error 22 RAP
99-549-00 Thermistor, jet stack H1 left short.

99-550-00 Thermistor, jet stack H2 right short.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-552
Hard
99-553
Hard
99-554
Hard
99-555
Hard
99-556
Hard
99-557
Hard
99-558
Hard
99-559
Hard
99-560
Hard
99-561
Hard
99-562
Hard
99-563
Hard

99-556-00 Thermistor, head reservoir H1 open.
99-560-00 Thermistor, head reservoir H1 short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-549
Hard
99-550
Hard
99-551
Hard
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
February 2013
2-499
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00

Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
Go to the 91-523-00 to 91-558-00, 91-664-00 to 91-667-00, 91-800-00
99-549-00 to 99-563-00
99-564-00 to 99-565-00 PEST Error 23 RAP
99-600-00 to 99-605-00 PEST Error 24 RAP
99-564-00 Thermistor, melt reservoir open.
99-600-00 Purge solenoid valve head 1.
99-565-00 Thermistor, melt reservoir short.
99-601-00 Solenoid, ink purge valve H2 open.
Initial Actions
WARNING
99-604-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 yellow open.

99-605-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 cyan open.
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-564
Hard
Go to the 93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Thermal Error RAP. Check the DC cabling to the reservoir. If it is open or
short, install a new cable.
Hard
WARNING
99-565
Initial Actions
Go to the 93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Thermal Error RAP. Check the DC cabling to the reservoir. If it is open or
short, install a new cable.
Procedure
dC123.
Code
99-564-00 to 99-565-00, 99-600-00 to 99-605-00
Hard/Soft Action
99-600 Hard
Go to the 93A Ink Melt Reservoir Check RAP. Check the DC cabling to
the reservoir. If it is open or short replace, install a new cable. If necessary, install a new ink reservoir.
99-601 Hard
99-602 Hard
99-603 Hard
99-604 Hard
99-605 Hard
February 2013
2-500
99-606-00 to 99-610-00 PEST Error 25 RAP
99-611-00 to 99-625-00 PEST Error 26 RAP
99-606-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 magenta open.
99-611-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H2 black open.
99-608-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H2 cyan yellow open.
Initial Actions
WARNING

Procedure
dC123.
99-620-00 Solenoid, ink purge valve H1 short.

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-606
Hard
the reservoir. If it is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary,
install a new ink reservoir.
99-607
Hard
99-608
Hard
99-609
Hard
99-610
Hard

99-624-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 cyan short.
99-625-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 magenta short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-611
Hard
February 2013
2-501
99-606-00 to 99-610-00, 99-611-00 to 99-625-00
99-626-00 to 99-640-00 PEST Error 27 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-626-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 yellow short.
99-612
Hard
99-627-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 black short.
99-613
Hard
99-614
Hard
99-615
Hard
99-616
Hard
99-617
Hard
99-618
Hard

Hard
99-620
Hard
Hard
99-619
99-621
99-622
Hard
99-623
Hard
99-624
Hard
99-625
Hard
99-611-00 to 99-625-00, 99-626-00 to 99-640-00

99-640-00 Solenoid, ink purge valve H1 below min.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-626
Hard
February 2013
2-502
99-641-00 to 99-655-00 PEST Error 28 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-627
Hard
99-628
Hard
99-629
Hard
99-630
Hard
99-631
Hard
99-632
Hard
99-633
Hard
99-644-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1cyan below min.

99-645-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 magenta below min.
99-646-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 yellow below min.
99-647-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 black below min.
99-648-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H2 cyan below min.
Hard
99-635
Hard
Hard
99-634
99-636
99-637
Hard
99-638
Hard
99-639
Hard
99-640
Soft

Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-641
Soft
February 2013
2-503
99-626-00 to 99-640-00, 99-641-00 to 99-655-00
99-656-00 to 99-670-00 PEST Error 29 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-642
Soft
99-643
Soft
99-644
Soft
99-645
Soft
99-646
Soft
99-647
Soft
99-648
Soft

99-660-00 Solenoid, ink purge valve H1 above max.
99-664-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1cyan above max.
99-665-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 magenta above max.
99-666-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 yellow above max.
99-668-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H2 cyan above max.
Soft
99-650
Soft
Soft
99-649
99-651
99-652
Soft
99-653
Soft
99-654
Soft
99-655
Soft
99-641-00 to 99-655-00, 99-656-00 to 99-670-00
99-667-00 Solenoid, ink dose valve H1 black above max.

Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-656
Soft
February 2013
2-504
the reservoir. If it is open or short, install a new cable. If necessary, install
a new ink reservoir.
99-671-00 to 99-685-00 PEST Error 30 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-657
Soft
99-658
Soft
99-659
Soft
99-660
Soft
99-661
Soft
99-662
Soft
99-663
Soft

99-682-00 Solenoid, LPA valve below min.
99-684-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResRef cyan open.

99-685-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResRef magenta open.
99-664
Soft
Initial Actions
99-665
Soft
99-666
Soft
Procedure
99-667
Soft
99-668
Soft
99-669
Soft
99-670
Soft
WARNING
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-671
Soft
99-672
Soft
99-673
Soft
February 2013
2-505
99-656-00 to 99-670-00, 99-671-00 to 99-685-00
99-686-00 to 99-700-00 PEST Error 31 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-674
Soft
99-675
Soft
99-676
Soft
99-686-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResRef yellow open.
99-677
Soft
99-678
Soft
99-679
Soft
99-682
Soft
Go to the 91-516-00 Low Pressure Assist Over Current RAP. Check the
low pressure assist solenoid valve.
99-684
Hard
Go to the 93-545-00 to 93-548-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Level Sense Error

RAP. Check the DC cabling to the reservoir. If it is open or short, install a
new cable. If necessary, install a new ink reservoir.
99-685
Hard
Go to the 93-545-00 to 93-548-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Level Sense Error

RAP. Check the DC cabling to the reservoir. If it is open or short, install a
new cable. If necessary, install a new ink reservoir.
99-671-00 to 99-685-00, 99-686-00 to 99-700-00
99-687-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResRef black open.

99-688-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResFull cyan open.
99-689-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResFull magenta open.
99-690-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResFull yellow open.
99-691-00 Sensor, ADC ink level MeltResFull black open.
99-700-00 Pump, ink delivery air open.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-686 Hard
Check the DC cabling to the reservoir. If it is open or short, install a new

cable. If necessary, install a new ink reservoir. Go to the 93-545-00 to 93548-00 RAP for related wiring diagrams.
99-687 Hard

99-688 Hard

99-689 Hard

99-690 Hard

99-691 Hard

99-700 Hard

cable. If necessary, install a new ink reservoir. Go to the 91-517-00 Marking Unit Air Pump Over Current RAP for related wiring diagrams.
February 2013
2-506
99-701-00 to 99-721-00 PEST Error 32 RAP
99-730-00 to 99-742-00 PEST Error 33 RAP
99-701-00 Pump, ink delivery air short.
99-730-00 Pump, ralph air pumps open.
99-702-00 Pump, ink delivery air stall.
99-731-00 Pump, ralph air pumps short.
99-710-00 Fan, rear closure open.

99-732-00 Pump, ralph air pumps stall.
99-711-00 Fan, rear closure short.

99-712-00 Fan, rear closure stall.
99-735-00 Thermistor, media preheat short.
99-715-00 Fan, marking drawer open.
99-736-00 Thermistor, media preheat open.
99-716-00 Fan, marking drawer short.

99-740-00 Solenoid, CAR diverter open.
99-717-00 Fan, marking drawer stall.

99-721-00 Fan, drum cooling short.
99-741-00 Solenoid, CAR diverter short.
Initial Actions
99-742-00 Solenoid, CAR diverter below min.
WARNING
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Procedure
dC123.

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-701 Hard
Go to the 91-517-00 Marking Unit Air Pump Over Current RAP. Check
the DC cabling to the reservoir. If it is open or short, install a new cable. If
necessary, install a new ink reservoir.
99-702 Soft
Go to the 91-517-00 Marking Unit Air Pump Over Current RAP. Check
the DC cabling to the reservoir. If it is open or short, install a new cable. If
necessary, install a new ink reservoir.
99-710 Hard
Go to the 94A Enclosure Fan Error RAP. Check the cabling to the fan. If
necessary, install a new enclosure fan.
99-711
Hard
99-712 Soft
99-715 Soft
Go to the 93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 RAP. Check the cabling to

the fan. If it is open or short replace the cable, otherwise replace the fan.
99-716 Hard
Go to the 93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Thermal

Error RAP. Check the marking unit cooling fan.
99-717 Soft
Go to the 93-520-00, 93-521-00, 93-522-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Thermal

Error RAP. Check the marking unit cooling fan.
99-721 Hard
Go to the OF 6 Fans and Air Systems RAP. Check the cabling to the
drum cooling fan. If necessary, install a new drum cooling fan.

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-730
Soft
Go to the 89-125-00 to 89-128-00, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 Media Path

Sensor 20 Failure RAP. Check the cable to the pumps. If shorted, install
a new registration / preheat assembly. If the problem persists, check the
DC cabling to registration / preheat transport.
99-731
Hard

99-732
Soft

99-735
Hard

RAP. Check the DC cabling to the registration / preheat transport. If
necessary, install a new registration / preheat assembly.
99-736
Hard

RAP. Check the DC cabling to the registration / preheat transport. If
necessary, install a new registration / preheat assembly.
February 2013
2-507
99-701-00 to 99-721-00, 99-730-00 to 99-742-00
99-743-00 to 99-766-00 PEST Error 34 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-740
Hard
99-741
99-742
Hard
Soft
99-743-00 Solenoid, CAR diverter above max.
Go to the 83-504-00 HPP Diverter Solenoid Failure RAP. Check the DC

cabling to the solenoid. If necessary, install a new HPP diverter solenoid.
99-745-00 Solenoid, duplex open.

99-746-00 Solenoid, duplex short.
99-747-00 Solenoid, duplex below min.
99-748-00 Solenoid, duplex above max.
99-750-00 Solenoid, nip C open.
99-751-00 Solenoid, nip C short.
99-752-00 Solenoid, nip C below min.
99-753-00 Solenoid, nip C above max.
99-755-00 Solenoid, nip D open.
99-756-00 Solenoid, nip D short.
99-757-00 Solenoid, nip D below min.
99-758-00 Solenoid, nip D above max.
99-765-00 Solenoid, stripper open.
99-766-00 Solenoid, stripper short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
99-730-00 to 99-742-00, 99-743-00 to 99-766-00
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-743
Soft
February 2013
2-508

99-767-00 to 99-782-00 PEST Error 35 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-745
Hard
99-746
99-747
Hard
Soft
99-767-00 Solenoid, stripper below min.
Go to the 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-00

Media Path Sensor 13 Duplex Mode RAP. Check the DC cabling to the
exit duplex diverter solenoid. If necessary, install a new exit duplex
diverter solenoid.
Go to the 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-00
diverter solenoid.
Go to the 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-00
diverter solenoid.
99-748
Soft
Go to the 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83-114-00, 83-118-00

diverter solenoid.
99-750
Hard
Go to the 89-550-00, 89-551-00 Media Registration Error RAP. Check

the DC cabling to the nip C release solenoid. If necessary, install a new
nip C release solenoid.
99-751
Hard

99-768-00 Solenoid, stripper above max.

99-780-00 Pump, DMU delivery open.
99-781-00 Pump, DMU delivery short.
99-782-00 Pump, DMU delivery stall.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-752
Soft

99-767
Soft
Go to the 10-570-00 Stripper Solenoid Over Current RAP. Check the

DC cabling to the stripper solenoid. If necessary, install a new stripper
solenoid.
99-753
Soft

99-768
Soft
Go to the 10-570-00 Stripper Solenoid Over Current RAP. Check the

DC cabling to the stripper solenoid. If necessary, install a new stripper
solenoid.
99-755
Hard
Go to the 83-506-00 Nip D Release Solenoid Failure RAP. Check the

DC cabling to the nip D release solenoid. If necessary, install a new nip
D release solenoid.
99-780
Hard
Go to the 94-528-00, 94-532-00, 94-533-00 Cleaning Unit Over Current

RAP. Check the DC cabling to the cleaning unit. If necessary, install a
new cleaning unit.
99-756
Hard

D release solenoid.
99-781
Soft

new cleaning unit.
99-757
Soft

D release solenoid.
99-782
Soft

new cleaning unit.
99-758
Soft

D release solenoid.
99-765
Hard
Go to the 10-570-00 Stripper Solenoid Over Current RAP. Check the DC

cabling to the stripper solenoid. If necessary, install a new stripper solenoid.
99-766
Hard
Go to the 10-570-00 Stripper Solenoid Over Current RAP. Check the DC

cabling to the stripper solenoid. If necessary, install a new stripper solenoid.
February 2013
2-509
99-743-00 to 99-766-00, 99-767-00 to 99-782-00
99-785-00 to 99-802-00 PEST Error 36 RAP
99-805-00 to 99-823-00 PEST Error 37 RAP
99-785-00 Pump, DMU return open.
99-805-00 Motor, drum maint above max.
99-786-00 Pump, DMU return short.
99-810-00 Motor, head roll 1 open.
99-801-00 Motor, drum maint open.
99-811-00 Motor, head roll 1 short.
99-802-00 Motor, drum maint short.
Initial Actions
WARNING

Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-785
Hard

new cleaning unit.
Soft

new cleaning unit.
99-801
Hard
Refer to WD 9.2 and WD 9.3. Check the DC cabling to the cleaning unit
motor. Measure the resistance between PJ601 pins 5 and 10 on the
drum driver PWB for an open or short circuit and to the chassis for a
short circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the cleaning unit motor. If
a short is measured, the drum driver PWB may be damaged and be
reported as an open error. If short error is reported, the cleaning unit
motor is drawing excessive power. Install new components as necessary, cleaning unit motor assembly, PL 94.10 Item 19, Drum driver
Hard
Refer to WD 9.2 and WD 9.3. Check the DC cabling to the cleaning unit
motor. Measure the resistance between PJ601 pins 5 and 10 on the
drum driver PWB for an open or short circuit and to the chassis for a
short circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the cleaning unit motor. If
a short is measured, the drum driver PWB may be damaged and be
reported as an open error. If short error is reported, the cleaning unit
motor is drawing excessive power. Install new components as necessary, cleaning unit motor assembly, PL 94.10 Item 19, Drum driver
99-785-00 to 99-802-00, 99-805-00 to 99-823-00
99-818-00 Motor, head roll 1-4 power fault.

99-819-00 Motor, head roll 1-4 power fault.
99-786
99-802
99-820-00 Motor, head stitch 1 open.

99-821-00 Motor, head stitch 1 short.
99-822-00 Motor, head stitch 2 open.
99-823-00 Motor, head stitch 2 short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-805 Soft
Go to the 94-520-00 Cleaning Unit Drive Error RAP. Check the cleaning
unit motor.
99-810 Soft
Go to the 91-506-00 to 91-509-00 Roll Motor Over Current RAP. Check

printhead 1 roll adjust motor.
February 2013
2-510

Code
Hard/Soft
99-811 Hard
Action
Code
Refer to WD 9.10. Check the DC cabling to the printhead roll adjust

motor 1. Measure the resistance at PJ303 on the marking unit driver
PWB for an open or short circuit and to the chassis for a short circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the printhead roll adjust
motor 1. If a short is measured, the marking unit driver PWB may be
damaged and be reported as an open error. If short error is reported,
the printhead roll adjust motor 1. is drawing excessive power.
Install new components as necessary, printhead roll adjust motor 1, PL
91.25 Item 4, marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
Refer to the 91-506-00 to 91-509-00 Roll Motor Over Current RAP.
99-818 Soft

printhead roll adjust motors.
99-819 Soft

printhead roll adjust motors.
99-820 Soft
Go to the 91-504-00, 91-505-00 Printhead Stitch Motor Over Current

RAP. Check printhead 1 stitch adjust motor.
99-821 Hard
Refer to WD 9.10. Check the DC cabling to the printhead stitch adjust

If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the printhead stitch adjust
the printhead stitch adjust motor 1. is drawing excessive power.
Install new components as necessary, printhead stitch adjust motor 1,
PL 91.25 Item 4, marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
Refer to the 91-504-00, 91-505-00 Printhead Stitch Motor Over Current
99-822 Soft

99-823 Hard
Refer to WD 9.9. Check the DC cabling to the printhead stitch adjust

If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the printhead stitch adjust
the printhead roll adjust motor 2 is drawing excessive power.
Install new components as necessary, printhead stitch adjust motor 2,
PL 91.20 Item 4, marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
Refer to the 91-504-00, 91-505-00 Printhead Stitch Motor Over Current
99-812 Soft

99-813 Hard
Refer to WD 9.9. Check the DC cabling to the printhead roll adjust motor
2. Measure the resistance at PJ102 on the marking unit driver PWB for
an open or short circuit and to the chassis for a short circuit.
99-814 Soft

99-815 Hard
Refer to WD 9.10. Check the DC cabling to the printhead roll adjust

the printhead roll adjust motor 3. is drawing excessive power.
99-816 Soft

99-817 Hard
Refer to WD 9.9. Check the DC cabling to the printhead roll adjust motor
4. Measure the resistance at PJ102 on the marking unit driver PWB for
Check printhead 4 roll adjust motor.
February 2013
2-511
Hard/Soft
Action
99-805-00 to 99-823-00
99-824-00 to 99-838-00 PEST Error 38 RAP
99-824-00 Motor, head stitch 1-2 power fault.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-830
Hard
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the carriage drive select

motor. Measure the resistance at PJ607 on the marking unit driver PWB
for an open or short circuit and to the chassis for a short circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the carriage drive select
motor. If a short is measured, the marking unit driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
If a short error is reported, the motor is drawing excessive power.
Install new components as necessary, carriage drive chain, PL 91.10
Item 1, marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10 Item 4.
Refer to the 91-560-00 Carriage Selection Time Out RAP. Check the
carriage drive select motor.
99-831
Hard
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the carriage drive select

If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the carriage drive select
Install new components as necessary, carriage drive chain, PL 91.10
Refer to the 91-560-00 Carriage Selection Time Out RAP. Check the
carriage drive select motor.
99-832
Hard
Refer to WD 9.2 and WD 9.6 Check the cable between PJ603 on the
drum driver PWB and PJ403 on the IME controller PWB. Ensure the
connectors are fully seated.
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the carriage docking motor.
Measure the resistance at PJ605 on the marking unit driver PWB for an
open or short circuit and to the chassis for a short circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the carriage docking
Install new components as necessary, carriage docking motor, PL 91.10
Refer to the 91-567-00 to 91-568-00 Lower Carriage Error RAP.
99-833
Hard
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the carriage docking motor.

If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the carriage docking
Install new components as necessary, carriage docking motor, PL 91.10
Refer to the 91-567-00 to 91-568-00 Lower Carriage Error RAP.
99-829-00 Motor, carriage restraint upper/lower fault.

99-830-00 Motor, carriage select open.
99-831-00 Motor, carriage select short.
99-832-00 Motor, carriage drive open.
99-833-00 Motor, carriage drive short.
99-834-00 Motor, carriage drive power fault.
99-835-00 Motor, head maint vertical open.
99-836-00 Motor, head maint vertical short.
99-837-00 Motor, head maint horizontal open.
99-838-00 Motor, head maint horizontal short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-824
Soft

RAP. Check printhead 1 and 2 stitch adjust motor.
99-829
Soft
This fault code is shown for information only. The machine does not
have carriage restraint motors.
99-824-00 to 99-838-00
February 2013
2-512
99-839-00 to 99-871-00 PEST Error 39 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-834
Soft
99-835
99-836
99-837
99-838
Hard
Hard
Hard
Hard
99-839-00 Motor, head maint vertical short.
Go to the 91-567-00 to 91-568-00 Lower Carriage Error RAP. Check the

carriage drive select motor. If the motor is good, check the harness
between PJ603 on the drum driver PWB and PJ403 on the IME controller PWB.
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the HM vertical motion
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the HM vertical motion
If short error is reported, the motor is drawing excessive power.
Install new components as necessary, HM vertical motion motor, PL
Refer to the 91-559-00 Marking Unit Components Out of Position RAP.
Check the HM vertical motion motor.
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the HM vertical motion
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the HM vertical motion
Install new components as necessary, HM vertical motion motor, PL
Refer to the 91-559-00 Marking Unit Components Out of Position RAP.
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the HM horizontal motion
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the HM horizontal motion
Install new components as necessary, HM horizontal motion motor, PL
Refer to the 91-512-00, 91-605-00 Marking Unit Motor Short RAP.
Check the HM horizontal motion motor.
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the HM horizontal motion
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the HM horizontal motion
Install new components as necessary, HM horizontal motion motor, PL
Refer to the 91-512-00, 91-605-00 Marking Unit Motor Short RAP.
Check the HM horizontal motion motor.
99-840-00 Motor, X axis upper open.

99-841-00 Motor, X axis upper short.
99-842-00 Motor, X axis upper power low.
99-843-00 Motor, X axis upper power high.
99-845-00 Motor, X axis lower open.
99-846-00 Motor, X axis lower short.
99-847-00 Motor, X axis lower power low.
99-848-00 Motor, X axis lower power high.
99-860-00 Motor, IOD shuttle open.
99-861-00 Motor, IOD shuttle short.
99-863-00 Motor, IOD shuttle power low.
99-864-00 Motor, IOD shuttle power high.
99-870-00 Motor, ink keyplate open.
99-871-00 Motor, ink keyplate short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-839
Soft
February 2013
2-513
Go to the 91-559-00 Marking Unit Components Out of Position RAP.

99-824-00 to 99-838-00, 99-839-00 to 99-871-00
Code
Hard/Soft Action
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-840
Hard
99-847
Soft
Go to the 91-510-00, 91-511-00 X Axis Motor Over Current RAP. Check

the lower X axis drive motor.
99-848
Soft

the lower X axis drive motor.
99-860
Hard
Refer to WD 9.22. Check the DC cabling to the IOD shuttle motor. Measure the resistance at PJ660 on the IOD pre-amplifier PWB for an open
or short circuit and to the chassis for a short circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the IOD shuttle motor. If a
short is measured, the IOD pre-amplifier PWB may be damaged and be
reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1.
Refer to the 91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00, 91-583-00 IOD Drive
Error RAP. Check the IOD shuttle motor.
99-861
Hard
Refer to WD 9.22. Check the DC cabling to the IOD shuttle motor. Measure the resistance at PJ660 on the IOD pre-amplifier PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the IOD shuttle motor. If a
short is measured, the IOD pre-amplifier PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, IOD assembly, PL 94.15 Item 1.
Refer to the 91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00, 91-583-00 IOD Drive
Error RAP. Check the IOD shuttle motor.
99-841
Hard
Refer to WD 9.9. Check the DC cabling to the X axis drive motor upper.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the X axis drive motor
upper. If a short is measured, the marking unit driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, X axis drive motor upper, PL
Refer to the 91-510-00, 91-511-00 X Axis Motor Over Current RAP.
Check the upper X axis drive motor.
Refer to WD 9.9. Check the DC cabling to the X axis drive motor upper.
upper. If a short is measured, the marking unit driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, X axis drive motor upper, PL
Check the upper X axis drive motor.
99-842
Soft

the upper X axis drive motor.
99-843
Soft

the upper X axis drive motor.
99-863
Soft
Go to the 91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00, 91-583-00 IOD Drive Error

RAP. Check the IOD shuttle motor.
99-845
Hard
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the X axis drive motor lower.
lower. If a short is measured, the marking unit driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, X axis drive motor lower, PL
Check the lower X axis drive motor.
99-864
Soft
Go to the 91-513-00, 91-514-00, 91-581-00, 91-583-00 IOD Drive Error

RAP. Check the IOD shuttle motor.
99-870
Soft
Go to the 93-825-00, 93-892-00 Ink Key Plate Motor Over Current RAP.
Check the ink key plate motor.
99-871
Hard
Refer to WD 8.4. Check the DC cabling to the ink key plate motor. Measure the resistance at PJ406 on the media path driver PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the ink key plate motor. If a
short is measured, the media path driver PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, ink key plate motor, PL 93.10
Item 14, media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Refer to the 93-825-00, 93-892-00 Ink Key Plate Motor Over Current
RAP. Check the ink key plate motor.
99-846
Hard
Refer to WD 9.11. Check the DC cabling to the X axis drive motor lower.
lower. If a short is measured, the marking unit driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, X axis drive motor lower, PL
Check the lower X axis drive motor.
99-839-00 to 99-871-00
February 2013
2-514
99-872-00 to 99-887-00 PEST Error 40 RAP
99-872-00 Motor, ink SKU power low.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-876
Hard
Refer to WD 8.4. Check the DC cabling to the ink transport motor. Measure the resistance at PJ406 on the media path driver PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the ink transport motor. If
a short is measured, the media path driver PWB may be damaged and
be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, ink transport motor, PL 93.10
Refer to the 93-891-00 Ink Transport Over Current RAP. Check the ink
transport motor.
99-877
Soft
Go to the 93-891-00 Ink Transport Over Current RAP. Check the ink
transport motor.
99-878
Soft
transport motor.
99-880
Hard
Enter dC123 Pest fault history and check for PEST error 99-886 or 99887, if present then follow those RAPs first.
Refer to WD 1.1. Then check the resistance at the drum motor leads
(should be 10.5 ohms typical, valid range 9.0 to 12.0 ohms, between
any 2 of the 3 leads, 3 measurements). Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4.
Check the Interface harness and connectors for damage between the
drum driver PWB at PJ902 and the power supply at PJDC2 (pins 11,
13, 15, 17). If above are OK, install a new power supply, PL 1.15 Item 2.
If fault still present, install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Note: This motor is disabled by front door interlock; soft error 99-992
will be given instead, the drum motor test will be skipped. This error will
only be activated if door interlock is OK.
Refer to the 94-524-00 RAP. Check the drum drive motor.
99-881
Hard
Refer to WD 1.1. Then check the resistance at the drum motor leads
(should be 10.5 ohms typical, valid range 9.0 to 12.0 ohms, between
any 2 of the 3 leads, 3 measurements). Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4.
Check the Interface harness and connectors for damage between the
drum driver PWB at PJ902 and the power supply at PJDC2 (pins 11,
13, 15, 17). If above are OK, install a new power supply, PL 1.15 Item 2.
If fault is still present, install a new drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Note: This motor is disabled by front door interlock; soft error 99-992
will be given instead, the drum motor test will be skipped. This error will
only be activated if door interlock is OK.
Refer to the 94-524-00 RAP. Check the drum drive motor.
99-882
Soft
Go to the 94-524-00 RAP. Check the drum drive motor.
99-883
Soft
99-886
Soft
99-887
Soft
If persistent, install a new drum motor, PL 94.20 Item 6.
99-873-00 Motor, ink SKU power high.

99-875-00 Motor, ink load belt drive open.
99-876-00 Motor, ink load belt drive short.
99-877-00 Motor, ink load belt drive power low.
99-878-00 Motor, ink load belt drive power high.
99-880-00 Motor, drum drive open.
99-881-00 Motor, drum drive short.
99-882-00 Motor, drum drive power low.
99-883-00 Motor, drum drive power high.
99-886-00 Motor, drum drive current feedback.
99-887-00 Motor, drum drive thermal fuse.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-872
Soft
99-873
Soft
99-875
Soft
transport motor.
February 2013
2-515
99-872-00 to 99-887-00
99-890-00 to 99-904-00 PEST Error 41 RAP
Initial Actions
99-890-00 Motor, transfix front open.
WARNING
99-891-00 Motor, transfix front short.
99-892-00 Motor, transfix front motor encoder.

99-893-00 Motor, transfix front below min.
99-894-00 Motor, transfix front above max.
Procedure
dC123.
99-895-00 Motor, transfix rear open.

99-896-00 Motor, transfix rear short.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-890
Hard
Refer to WD 9.1. Check the DC cabling to the front transfix motor. Measure the resistance at PJ401 on the drum driver PWB for an open or
short circuit and to the chassis for a short circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the front transfix motor. If a
short is measured, the drum driver PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, front transfix motor, PL 10.20
Item 11, Drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Refer to the 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the front
transfix motor.
99-891
Hard
Refer to WD 9.1. Check the DC cabling to the front transfix motor. Measure the resistance at PJ401 on the drum driver PWB for an open or
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the front transfix motor. If a
Install new components as necessary, front transfix motor, PL 10.20
Refer to the 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the front
transfix motor.
99-892
Hard
Refer to WD 9.1 and WD 9.3. Check the DC cabling to the front transfix
flexure encoder. Measure the resistance at PJ801 on the drum driver
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the front transfix flexure
encoder. If a short is measured, the drum driver PWB may be damaged
and be reported as an open error.
If short error is reported, the encoder is drawing excessive power.
Install new components as necessary, front transfix encoder, PL 10.20
Refer to 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the front
transfix motor encoder. If the fault remains, install a new front transfix
motor, PL 10.20 Item 11.
99-983
Soft
Go to the 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the front

transfix motor.
99-897-00 Motor, transfix rear motor encoder.

99-898-00 Motor, transfix rear below min.
99-899-00 Motor, transfix rear above max.
99-901-00 Motor, MP2 open.
99-902-00 Motor, MP2 short.
99-904-00 Motor, MP2 power fault.
99-890-00 to 99-904-00
February 2013
2-516
Code
Hard/Soft Action
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-894
Soft
Go to the 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the front

transfix motor.
99-901
Hard
99-895
Hard
Refer to WD 9.1. Check the DC cabling to the rear transfix motor. Measure the resistance at PJ401 on the drum driver PWB for an open or
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the rear transfix motor. If a
Install new components as necessary, rear transfix motor, PL 10.20 Item
11, Drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Go to the 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the rear
transfix motor.
Refer to WD 8.1. Check the DC cabling to the vertical transport motor.

Measure the resistance at PJ202 on the media path driver PWB for an
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the vertical transport
motor. If a short is measured, the media path driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, vertical transport motor, PL 82.10
Refer to the 82-132-00, 82-155-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Duplex Mode
RAP. Check the vertical transport motor.
99-902
Hard
Refer to WD 8.1. Check the DC cabling to the vertical transport motor.

If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the vertical transport
Install new components as necessary, vertical transport motor, PL 82.10
Refer to the 82-132-00, 82-155-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Duplex Mode
99-904
Soft
Go to the 82-132-00, 82-155-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Duplex Mode

99-896
Hard
Refer to WD 9.1. Check the DC cabling to the rear transfix motor. Measure the resistance at PJ401 on the drum driver PWB for an open or
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the rear transfix motor. If a
Install new components as necessary, rear transfix motor, PL 10.20 Item
11, Drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Refer to the 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the rear
transfix motor.
99-897
Hard
Refer to WD 9.1 and WD 9.3. Check the DC cabling to the rear transfix
flexure encoder. Measure the resistance at PJ801 on the drum driver
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the rear transfix flexure
encoder. If a short is measured, the drum driver PWB may be damaged
If short error is reported, the encoder is drawing excessive power.
Install new components as necessary, rear transfix encoder, PL 10.20
Go to 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP. Check the rear transfix motor. If the fault remains, install a new rear transfix motor, PL 10.20
Item 11.
99-898
Soft

transfix motor.
99-899
Soft

transfix motor.
February 2013
2-517
99-890-00 to 99-904-00
99-905-00 to 99-921-00 PEST Error 42 RAP
Initial Actions
99-905-00 Motor, MP6 open
WARNING
99-906-00 Motor, MP6 short
99-909-00 Motor, MP6 power high

99-910-00 Motor, M3A1 open
99-911-00 Motor, M3A1 short
Procedure
dC123.
99-912-00 Motor, M3A1 power low

99-913-00 Motor, M3A1 power high
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-905
Hard
Refer to WD 8.1 and WD 8.5. Check the DC cabling to the horizontal

transport motor. Measure the resistance at PJ303 on the media path
driver PWB for an open or short circuit and to the chassis for a short
circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the horizontal transport
Install new components as necessary, horizontal transport motor, PL
82.15 Item 9, media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Refer to the 82-132-00, 82-155-00 Media Path Sensor 16 Duplex
Mode RAP. Check the horizontal transport motor.
99-906
Hard
Refer to WD 8.1 and WD 8.5. Check the DC cabling to the horizontal

transport motor. Measure the resistance at PJ303 on the media path
driver PWB for an open or short circuit and to the chassis for a short
circuit.
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the horizontal transport
Install new components as necessary, horizontal transport motor, PL
RAP. Check the horizontal transport motor.
99-909
Soft

RAP. Check the horizontal transport motor.
99-910
Hard
Refer to WD 8.1. Check the DC cabling to the registration motor A1.

If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the registration motor A1.
If a short is measured, the media path driver PWB may be damaged
Install new components as necessary, registration / preheat assembly, PL 88.10 Item 1, media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Refer to the 89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00 Media Path Sensor 10
Failure RAP. Check the registration motor A1.
99-915-00 Motor, M3A2 open

99-916-00 Motor, M3A2 short
99-917-00 Motor, M3A2 power low
99-918-00 Motor, M3A2 power high
99-920-00 Motor, MP4 open
99-921-00 Motor, MP4 short
99-905-00 to 99-921-00
February 2013
2-518
Code
Hard/Soft Action
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-911
Hard

Install new components as necessary, registration / preheat assembly,
PL 88.10 Item 1, media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
99-920
Hard
Refer to WD 8.2. Check the DC cabling to the post transfix motor (M4).
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the post transfix motor
(M4). If a short is measured, the media path driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, post transfix motor (M4), PL
Refer to the 10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-14700, 10-148-00 Post Transfix Jam RAP. Check the post transfix motor.
99-912
Soft
Go to the 89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00 Media Path Sensor 10

99-921
Hard
99-913
Soft

99-915
Hard

Refer to WD 8.2. Check the DC cabling to the post transfix motor (M4).
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the post transfix motor
(M4). If a short is measured, the media path driver PWB may be damaged and be reported as an open error.
Install new components as necessary, post transfix motor (M4), PL
Refer to the 10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-14700, 10-148-00 Post Transfix Jam RAP. Check the post transfix motor.
99-916
Hard

99-917
Soft

99-918
Soft

February 2013
2-519
99-905-00 to 99-921-00
99-922-00 to 99-938-00 PEST Error 43 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-925
Hard
Refer to WD 8.2. Check the DC cabling to the exit motor (M5). Measure
the resistance at PJ303 on the media path driver PWB for an open or
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the exit motor (M5). If a
Install new components as necessary, exit motor (M5), PL 10.15 Item
11, media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Refer to the 83-500-00 Output Transport Motor M5 Failure RAP. Check
the exit motor.
99-926
Hard
Refer to WD 8.2. Check the DC cabling to the exit motor (M5). Measure
the resistance at PJ303 on the media path driver PWB for an open or
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the exit motor (M5). If a
Install new components as necessary, exit motor (M5), PL 10.15 Item
11, media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Refer to the 83-500-00 Output Transport Motor M5 Failure RAP. Check
the exit motor.
99-936-00 Motor, 3TM horizontal transport short.
99-927
Soft
Go to the 83-500-00 Output Transport Motor M5 Failure RAP. Check the

exit motor.
99-937-00 Motor, 3TM tray 3 elevator open.
99-928
Soft
Go to the 83-500-00 Output Transport Motor M5 Failure RAP. Check the

exit motor.
99-938-00 Motor, 3TM tray 3 elevator short.
99-930
Soft
Go to the 74-101-00, 74-160-00 to 74-161-00 Bypass Tray 4 Mis-Feed

RAP. Check the bypass feed motor.
Initial Actions
99-931
Hard
Refer to WD 8.3. Check the DC cabling to the bypass feed motor. Measure the resistance at PJ405 on the media path driver PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the bypass feed motor. If a
Install new components as necessary, bypass module, PL 74.10 Item 1,
media path driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 5.
Refer to the 74-101-00, 74-160-00 to 74-161-00 Bypass Tray 4 MisFeed RAP. Check the bypass feed motor.
99-932
Soft

99-933
Soft

99-922-00 Motor, MP4 power low.

99-923-00 Motor, MP4 power high.
99-925-00 Motor, MP5 open.
99-926-00 Motor, MP5 short.
99-927-00 Motor, MP5 power low.
99-928-00 Motor, MP5 power high.
99-930-00 Motor (M7), MSI tray 4 feed open.
99-931-00 Motor (M7), MSI tray 4 feed short.
99-932-00 Motor (M7), MSI tray 4 feed power low.
99-933-00 Motor (M7), MSI tray 4 feed power high.
99-934-00 Motor, 3TM horizontal transport power low.
99-935-00 Motor, 3TM horizontal transport open.
WARNING
Check connections of the indicated component
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-922
Soft
Go to the 10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,

10-148-00 Post Transfix Jam RAP. Check the post transfix motor.
99-934
Soft
Go to the 71-101-00 to 71-161-00 RAP. Check the 3 tray transport

motor.
99-923
Soft
Go to the 10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,

10-148-00 Post Transfix Jam RAP. Check the post transfix motor.
99-935
Soft
Go to the 71-101-00 to 71-161-00 RAP. Check the 3 tray transport

motor.
99-922-00 to 99-938-00
February 2013
2-520
99-939-00 to 99-954-00 PEST Error 44 RAP

Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-936
Hard
99-939-00 Motor, 3TM tray 3 elevator power fault.
Refer to WD 7.5. Check the DC cabling to the 3 tray transport motor.

Measure the resistance at PJ956 on the 3 tray module PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the 3 tray transport motor.
If a short is measured, the 3 tray module PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, 3 tray transport motor, PL 73.16
Item 3, 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Refer to the 71-101-00 to 71-161-00 RAP. Check the 3 tray transport
motor.
99-937
Soft
Go to the 73-215-00 Tray 3 Hoist Failure RAP. Check the tray 3 elevator
motor.
99-938
Hard
Refer to WD 7.5. Check the DC cabling to the tray 3 elevator motor.

Measure the resistance at PJ957 on the 3 tray module PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the tray 3 elevator motor.
If a short is measured, the 3 tray module PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, tray 3 elevator motor, PL 73.16
Item 2, 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Refer to the 73-215-00 Tray 3 Hoist Failure RAP. Check the tray 3 elevator motor.
99-940-00 Motor, 3TM tray 1 feed open.

99-941-00 Motor, 3TM tray 1 feed short.
99-942-00 Motor, 3TM tray 1 feed power low.
99-950-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 transport open.
99-951-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 transport short.
99-952-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 transport power fault.
99-953-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 elevate open.
99-954-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 elevate short.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-939
Soft
Go to the 73-215-00 Tray 3 Hoist Failure RAP. Check the tray 3 elevator
motor.
99-940
Soft
Go to the 71-101-00 to 71-161-00 Tray 1 Mis-Feed Jam RAP. Check the

tray 1 feed / elevate motor.
February 2013
2-521
99-922-00 to 99-938-00, 99-939-00 to 99-954-00
Code
Hard/Soft Action
Code
Hard/Soft Action
99-941
Hard
Refer to WD 7.3. Check the DC cabling to the tray 1 feed / elevate

motor. Measure the resistance at PJ951 on the 3 tray module PWB for
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the tray 1 feed / elevate
motor. If a short is measured, the 3 tray module PWB may be damaged
Install new components as necessary, tray 1 feed / elevate motor, PL
81.25 Item 22, 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Refer to the 71-101-00 to 71-161-00 Tray 1 Mis-Feed Jam RAP. Check
the tray 1 feed / elevate motor.
99-951
Hard
Refer to WD 7.1. Check the DC cabling to the tray 5 transport motor.

Measure the resistance at PJ503 on the tray 5 control PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the tray 5 transport motor.
If a short is measured, the tray 5 control PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, tray 5 transport motor, PL 81.40
Item 2, tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8.
Go to the 75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Mis-Feed RAP.
Check the tray 5 transport motor.
99-942
Soft

tray 1 feed / elevate motor.
99-952
Soft

99-943
Soft
Go to the 72-215-00 Tray 2 Elevate Up Failure RAP. Check the tray 2

feed / elevate motor.
99-953
Soft
Go to the 75-212-00, 75-215-00 Tray 5 Elevate Up Failure RAP. Check

the tray 5 elevator motor.
99-944
Hard
Refer to WD 7.3. Check the DC cabling to the tray 2 feed / elevate

motor. Measure the resistance at PJ952 on the 3 tray module PWB for
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the tray 2 feed / elevate
motor. If a short is measured, the 3 tray module PWB may be damaged
Install new components as necessary, tray 2 feed / elevate motor, PL
81.26 Item 22, 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Refer to the 72-215-00 Tray 2 Elevate Up Failure RAP. Check the tray 2
99-954
Hard
Refer to WD 7.1. Check the DC cabling to the tray 5 elevator motor.

Measure the resistance at PJ504 on the tray 5 control PWB for an open
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the elevator motor. If a
short is measured, the tray 5 control PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, elevator motor, PL 75.68 Item 4,
tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8.
Refer to the 75-212-00, 75-215-00 Tray 5 Elevate Up Failure RAP.
Check the tray 5 elevator motor.
99-945
Soft
Go to the 72-215-00 Tray 2 Elevate Up Failure RAP. Check the tray 2

99-946
Soft

tray 3 feed motor.
99-947
Hard
Refer to WD 7.4. Check the DC cabling to the tray 3 feed motor. Measure the resistance at PJ953 on the 3 tray module PWB for an open or
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the tray 3 feed motor. If a
short is measured, the 3 tray module PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, tray 3 feed motor, PL 81.30 Item
22, 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item 4.
Refer to the 73-101-00 to 73-161-00 Tray 3 Mis-Feed Jam RAP. Check
the tray 3 feed motor.
99-948
Soft

tray 3 feed motor.
99-950
Soft

99-939-00 to 99-954-00
February 2013
2-522
99-955-00 to 99-962-00 PEST Error 45 RAP
99-955-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 elevate power fault.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-961
Hard
Refer to WD 12.23. Check the DC cabling to the OCT offset motor.

Measure the resistance at PJ495 on the OCT PWB for an open or
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the OCT offset motor.
If a short is measured, the OCT PWB may be damaged and be
Install new components as necessary, OCT module, PL 12.00 Item
1.
Refer to the 12-701-00-65 Offset Catch Tray Failure RAP. Check
the OCT feed offset motor.
99-962
Soft
Go to the 12-701-00-65 Offset Catch Tray Failure RAP. Check the

OCT feed offset motor.
99-956-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 feed open.

99-957-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 feed short.
99-958-00 Motor, PFP tray 5 feed power low.
99-960-00 Motor, OCT offset open.
99-961-00 Motor, OCT offset short.
99-962-00 Motor, OCT offset power low.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Procedure
dC123.
Code
Hard/Soft
Action
99-955
Soft
Go to the 75-212-00, 75-215-00 Tray 5 Elevate Up Failure RAP.

Check the tray 5 elevator motor.
99-956
Soft
Go to the 75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Mis-Feed

RAP. Check the tray 5 feed motor.
99-957
Hard
Refer to WD 7.2. Check the DC cabling to the tray 5 feed motor.

Measure the resistance at PJ511 on the tray 5 control PWB for an
If a fault is found, repeat the measurement at the tray 5 feed motor.
If a short is measured, the tray 5 control PWB may be damaged
Install new components as necessary, tray 5 feed motor, PL 81.40
Item 3, tray 5 control PWB, PL 75.68 Item 8.
Refer to the 75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Mis-Feed
99-958
Soft
Go to the 75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Mis-Feed

99-960
Soft
Go to the 12-701-00-65 Offset Catch Tray Failure RAP. Check the

OCT feed offset motor.
February 2013
2-523
99-955-00 to 99-962-00
99-992-00 PEST Error 46 RAP
99-996-00 to 99-999-00 PEST Error 47 RAP
99-992-00 Front door interlock open.
99-996-00 PEST failed to complete.
Initial Actions
99-997-00 Misc.
WARNING
99-999-00 Hard / soft fault separator.
Procedure
dC123.
Hard/Soft Action
99-992
Soft
WARNING
Procedure

Code
Initial Actions
dC123.
Go to the 01-510-00 Front Door Open RAP. Check the front door interlock switch.
99-992-00, 99-996-00 to 99-999-00

Code
Description
Hard/Soft Action
99-996
PEST failed to
complete
Hard
View the last indicated PEST faults, dC123, to find the

failure area.
99-997
Misc
Hard
99-999
Hard / soft fault

separator
Soft
Information only: indicates change from a hard fault to

a soft fault and vice versa in the PEST fault list,
dC123.
February 2013
2-524
OF 1 Unusual Noise RAP
Possible causes and potential solutions are:
Use this RAP to isolate unusual noises in the machine.
Grinding noise.
Possible causes are:
NOTE: Due to the intermittent nature of unusual noises, this RAP can only give guidance on
how to isolate noises. This RAP will not find all possible causes. When machines become old
and worn, unusual noises may arise that are not covered in this RAP.
Procedure
The intermediate feed bearing, PL 5.15 Item 22 can stick, preventing the feed roll
from free wheeling as the document is transported by takeaway roll.
Large flat spots, confined to one or two areas on the retard roll, which causes feed
noise and an increase in 05-330, 05-331and 05-335 jams.
Solution:
WARNING
1.
Install a new the feed assembly, PL 5.15 Item 18.
Noise from the DADH input tray.

Ask the customer if there are any specific machine functions that are noisy.
Document guides.
Solution:
2.
Ask the customer to demonstrate the function of the machine that generates the unusual
noise.
3.
Check the Fault and Error logs.
4.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Wait for two minutes, switch on the machine and allow the
machine to perform a normal initialization and warm-up.
5.
Run the machine in all modes. Also use the diagnostics to run individual components. Go
to the relevant subsection:
DADH
Scanner
Tray 1 and 2 Assembly
Tray 3 Assembly
Bypass Tray 4 Assembly
Tray 5 Assembly
Vertical Paper Path
Horizontal Paper Path
Exit Paper Path
Registration / pre-heat Assembly
Nips / Diverters
Drum Drive motor / transfix motor / stripper assembly
Fans
Clean the DADH input tray in the area below the input guides with antistatic fluid, PL
26.10 Item 11.
Squeaks from the DADH.

DADH exit roll assembly or takeaway roll assembly, PL 5.35 Item 6.
Solution:
Remove and clean the shafts and plastic bushes with antistatic fluid, PL 26.10 Item
11.
Knocking noise.
The feed motor and CVT motor are not tensioned correctly, causing the drive belts to
slip.
Solution:
Adjust the DADH drive belts, ADJ 5.1.
Gear rattle.
A loose meshing of the clutch and motor gears PL 5.15 Item 9 and PL 5.15 Item 16.
Solution:
Adjust the DADH drive belts, ADJ 5.1.
Stripper Blade
Scanner
LCSS
HVF / HVF BM
DADH
Run the following components:
Enter dC330 code 05-099 DADH CVT motor to rotate the DADH CVT roll, PL 5.25 Item 5.
Enter dC330 code 05-074 feed motor, to run the DADH takeaway rolls, PL 5.35 Item 6.
Enter dC330 code 05-074 and add code 05-062 feed clutch, to energize the feed clutch
and run the drive shaft, PL 5.15 Item 9.
Enter dC330 code 05-074 and add code 05-098 nudger motor, to energize the nudger
Grinding.
The scan carriage is moving erratically and the scan motor is generating a grinding
sound. The teeth of the scanner drive belt are not engaging with the capstan on the
scan motor. PL 62.16 Item 12.
Solution:
February 2013
2-525
Perform ADJ 62.3 Scan Motor and Scanner Drive Belt adjustment.
OF 1
Tray 1 and 2 Assembly
Remove tray 1 and tray 2 and run the following components:
No drive or a knocking noise from the bypass feed motor.
Enter code dC330 code 71-002 T1 Feed / Elevate Motor, to run the tray 1 feed motor, PL
81.25 Item 22. The paper tray must be open when the motor is running.
Incorrectly aligned or damaged parts.
Enter code dC330 code 72-001 T2 Feed / Elevate Motor, to run the tray 2 feed motor, PL
81.26 Item 22. The paper tray must be open when the motor is running.
Contamination of the drive shafts and the bearings.
Open left hand door.
Check the bypass feed motor, rolls and bearings, PL 73.16.
Enter dC330 code 70-025 3 tray transport motor, to run tray 1 and tray 2 transport rolls,
PL 73.16 Item 3.
Adjust or install new components as necessary.

Contamination of the drive shafts and bearings.
Incorrectly adjusted or worn drive belts.
Tray 5 Assembly
Run the components as follows:
Squeaks.
Solution:
Solution:
Remove and clean the drive shafts, bearings, GP 27.
Check 3 tray transport drive belt. Install new parts as necessary, PL 73.16 Item 7.
Open the tray 5 door to lower the elevator.
Close the door or actuate the interlock.
Enter dC330 code 75-019 Tray 5 Elevator Motor Up to drive the tray up, PL 75.68 Item 4.
Enter dC330 code 75-020 Tray 5 Elevator Motor Down to drive the tray down.
Enter dC330 code 75-018 Tray 5 Transport Motor to operate the tray 5 transport motor,
PL 81.40 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 75-117 Tray 5 Feed Motor to operate the tray 5 feed motor, PL 81.40
Item 3.
Check for parts that are damaged or out of position.
Tray 3 Assembly
Contamination of the drive shafts and the bearings.
Solution:
Enter dC330 code 73-001 T3 Feed Motor, to operate the tray 3 feed motor, PL 81.30 Item
22. The paper tray must be open when motor is running.
Check the motor, rolls, bearings, PL 73.16. Clean as necessary, GP 27.
Pull out tray 3 and let the tray drop, then push the tray back in.
Vertical Paper Path
Enter dC330 code 73-002 T3 Elevate Motor, to elevate tray 3, PL 73.16 Item 2. The paper
tray must be open when the motor is running.
NOTE: A door cheat for the main door is not required.
Enter dC330 code 70-025 3 Tray Transport motor to run the 3 tray transport motor, PL
73.16 Item 3.
Run the components as follows:
Enter dC330 code 82-001 Vertical Trans Motor Fwd (M2) to run the vertical transport
motor forward, PL 82.10 Item 12. To diagnose the source of the noise, run the motor with
the upper left door and mid left door closed, then opened.
Enter dC330 code 82-002 Vertical Trans Motor Rev (M2) to run the vertical transport
motor in reverse.
No drive or a knocking noise from the 3 tray transport motor.

The 3 tray transport motor, PL 73.16 Item 3.
Worn or stretched elevator cables, PL 73.15 Item 17, PL 73.15 Item 18, PL 73.15
Item 19.
Solution:
Contamination of the drive shafts, idler rolls or bearings.
Check the drive belt and gears, PL 73.16.
Solution:
Check that the paper trays are correctly positioned and that the tray moves freely
inside the tray assembly.
Check the motor, rolls, bearings, and drive belts, PL 82.10. Clean as necessary, GP 27.
Check the idler rolls in the upper left door assembly, PL 70.30. Clean as necessary, GP
27.
Check the bearings on the end of the transport roller drive 2, PL 82.10 Item 1 and the
transport roller TAR vertical, PL 82.10 Item 2. Clean as necessary, GP 27.
Bypass Tray 4 Assembly

Enter dC330 code 74-420 Bypass Feed Motor, to run the bypass feed motor, PL 74.10
Item 2.
OF 1
February 2013
2-526
Enter dC330 code 82-003 Horizontal Trans Motor Fwd (M6), to run the horizontal transport motor forward, PL 82.15 Item 9. To diagnose the source of the noise, run the motor
with the horizontal paper path (handle 4b) closed, then opened.
Enter dC330 code 82-004 Horizontal Trans Motor Rev (M6), to run the horizontal transport motor in reverse.
Registration / pre-heat Assembly

Enter dC330 code 89-007 Registration Motor A1 to run registration motor A1, PL 88.11
Item 8.
Enter dC330 code 89-008 Registration Motor A2 to run registration motor A2, PL 88.11
Item 8.
Contamination of the drive shafts, idler rolls or bearings.
Possible causes:
Solution:
If the noise does not repeat, the source is the exit paper path, PL 10.15 Item 19. Adjust or
install new components as necessary.
Check the motor, takeaway rolls, bearings, and drive belts, PL 82.15. Clean as necessary,
GP 27.
Registration motor A1 and A2, PL 88.11 Item 8.
Incorrectly adjusted of worn drive belts, PL 88.11 Item 4.
Check the idler rolls in the horizontal paper path assembly, PL 82.15. Clean as necessary,
GP 27.
Solution:
Clean contamination on the drive shafts and the bearings
Exit Paper Path
If the noise repeats perform the following:
Enter dC330 code 10-018 Post Transfix Motor (M4) to run the post-transfix motor forward,
PL 10.10 Item 5.
Enter dC330 code 83-001 Exit Motor Fwd (M5) to run the exit motor forward, PL 10.15
Item 11.
Enter dC330 code 83-002 Exit Motor Rev (M5) to run the exit motor in reverse. Used for
duplex and paper invert.
Enter dC330 code 89-011 Nip A: Open to disengage all of the registration/ pre-heat
Assembly idlers, PL 88.10 Item 20.
Enter dC330 code 89-012 Nip A: Narrow to engage idlers 3 and 4, PL 88.10 Item 20.
Enter dC330 code 89-013 Nip A: Medium to engage idlers 2 and 5, PL 88.10 Item 20.
Enter dC330 code 89-014 Nip A: Wide to engage idlers 1 and 6, PL 88.10 Item 20.
Possible causes:
Possible causes:
Post-transfix motor (M4), PL 10.10 Item 5.
Solution:
Idlers in stripper gate and baffle assembly, PL 10.12 Item 1.
Solution:
Enter dC330 code 10-025 Strip Gate Unlatch and open the stripper gate and baffle
Stack the code 10-018 Post Transfix Motor (M4) to run the post-transfix motor forward, PL
10.10 Item 5.
If the noise repeats, the source is the M4 motor or gear assembly. Install new parts as
necessary.
Incorrectly aligned or damaged registration/ pre-heat Assembly idlers, PL 88.10 Item 20.
Enter dC330 code 88-008 Reg/Preheat Air Pumps to switch on the registration/pre-heat
air pump, PL 88.10 Item 5.
Possible causes:
Registration/pre-heat air pump.
If the noise does not repeat, the source is one of the idlers in the stripper gate and baffle
assembly, PL 10.12.
Solution:
Close stripper gate and baffle assembly.
Nips / Diverters
Enter dC330 code 10-023 Strip Gate Latch.
Open horizontal paper path assembly, PL 82.15 Item 1.
If the noise repeats, the source is the M5 motor, idlers or gear assembly, PL 10.15. Adjust
or install new components as necessary.
Enter dC330 code 82-008 Nip D Solenoid to open the nip 'D' release solenoid, PL 70.30
Item 13. Used for short-edge feed and fast color mode.
February 2013
2-527
OF 1
Enter dC330 code 82-007 Nip C Release Solenoid to open the nip 'C' release solenoid,
PL 82.15 Item 4. Used for short-edge feed and fast color mode.
Fans
Enter dC330 code 83-004 HPP Diverter Solenoid to run the HPP diverter solenoid, PL
82.15 Item 5. Used for duplex only.
Enter dC330 code 83-006 Exit Duplex Diverter Solenoid to run the exit/duplex diverter
solenoid, PL 10.15 Item 14. Used for duplex and paper invert.
Enter dC330 code 42-062 Abatement Fan to run the abatement fan, PL 94.20 Item 11.
Possible causes:
Enter dC330 code 42-063 Enclosure Fan to run the enclosure fan, PL 1.15 Item 6.
Enter dC330 code 42-064 Drum Fan to run the drum fan, PL 94.20 Item 4.
Solution:
Possible causes:
Bearings in the cooling fans have worn or failed.
Drum Drive motor / transfix motor / stripper assembly
Solution:
NOTE: A door cheat for the main door is required.

Enter dC330 code 94-009 Drum Drive Motor Slew Speed to run the drum drive motor at
slew speed, PL 94.20 Item 6.
Enter dC330 code 94-017 Drum Drive Motor Transfix Speed to run the drum drive motor
at transfix speed, PL 94.20 Item 6.
Enter dC330 code 94-018 Drum Drive Motor Imaging Speed to run the Drum drive motor
at print speed, PL 94.20 Item 6.
Check for parts that are damaged or out of position.
Stripper Blade
Scraping noise.
The noise is caused by the stripper blade PL 10.12 Item 3 pressing to heavily on the
drum PL 94.20 Item 1.
Possible causes:
Solution:
Ensure the stripper blade is correctly latched, refer to GP 31.
Large vibrations that can shake the printer are only caused by contamination on the drum
drive motor pulley. These vibrations are intermittent as the print cycle can temporarily
clear the contamination.
Watch the drum spin. If the noise is cyclic and repeats once per drum revolution, the noise
is associated with the drum, PL 94.20 Item 1 or drum heater, PL 94.20 Item 28.
If the noise repeats ~10x per drum revolution, the noise is associated with the drum
Solution:
Remove the drum belt, PL 94.20 Item 2 and repeat the noise evaluation to further isolate
the noise source.
Clean contamination on the drive shafts and the bearings
LCSS
Enter dC330 code 12-223 Transport Motor 1, to run the entry transport rolls, PL 12.40
Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 12-224 Transport Motor 2, to run the entry rolls, PL 12.60 Item 5.
Enter dC330 code 12-238 Paddle Roll Motor run, rotates the paddle wheel, PL 12.25 Item
10.
Enter dC330 code 12-232 Tamp Mot Cycle, cycles the front and rear tampers, PL 12.45
Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-236 Eject Mot Cycle, cycles the eject assembly, PL 12.50 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-242 Bin 1 Elevator Motor Cycle, to move bin 1 up and down, PL
12.30 Item 8.
Enter dC330 code 10-024 Transfix Front and Back to operate the front and rear transfix
motors, PL 10.20 Item 11 and run a transfix cycle.
Enter dC330 code 10-021 Stripper Solenoid to engage the stripper system, PL 10.10 Item
3.
NOTE: The bin will move down and then move up to the home position.
Enter dC330 code 12-244 Punch Head run, rotates the punch head, PL 12.20 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 12-250 SU1 Mot Cycle, cycles the stapler from the front to the rear, PL
12.55 Item 5.
Possible causes:
Front and rear transfix motors, PL 10.20 Item 11.
2 knocks for each stapled set.
Solution:
Solution:
OF 1
Go to the 12-340-00-110, 12-341-00-110, 12-342-00-110 Ejector Movement Failure

RAP.
Noise from the right hand side of the machine.
February 2013
2-528
Solution:
Enter dC330 code 12-250 SU1 Motor Cycle, to run the stapler unit cycle routine, PL
12.110 Item 12.
Enter dC330 code 12-251 BM Compiler Motor, runs the compiler BM entry roll, PL 12.175
Item 1.
The LCSS is not aligned correctly.
Check the machine to LCSS alignment, ADJ 12.2-110.
NOTE: The tray moves down for 15 seconds and then stops.
Clicking Noise from the LCSS
Enter dC330 code 12-252 BM Crease Blade Motor, to move crease blade assembly, PL
12.175 Item 8.
Enter dC330 code 12-273 BM Crease Roll Gate Motor, to move the crease blade assembly, PL 12.175 Item 8 and the crease roll gate, PL 12.180 Item 19.
Enter dC330 code 12-253 BM Crease Roll Motor, to rotate the two crease rolls, PL 12.175
Item 12.
Enter dC330 code 12-255 BM Back Stop Motor, to move the back stop assembly, PL
12.160, PL 12.165.
Enter dC330 code 12-256 BM Tamper 1 Motor, to move the tamper rack and fingers, PL
12.155 Item 3.
Enter dC330 code 12-274 BM Conveyor Drive motor, to run the output tray conveyor
belts, PL 12.190 Item 4.
Enter dC330 code 12-271 BM flapper Motor, to run the BM flapper, PL 12.175 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-273 BM Crease Roll Gate Motor, to move the crease roll gate up
and down, PL 12.180 Item 19.
Enter dC330 code 12-261 Inserter Motor, to run inserter main drives, PL 12.315 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-253 BM Crease Roll Motor, to run the tri-roller drives, PL 12.175
Item 12.
Enter dC330 code 12-269 Clutch Drive, to engage the HVF clutch drive to drive tri-folding
rolls, PL 12.175 Item 12.
The staple head continually operating for approximately 15 seconds. This occurs
every time the LCSS top cover or front door is opened then closed, because the stapler is attempting to prime the staple head, by indexing the staple stick forward and
pre-forming two staples.
Solution:
Check the staple cartridge for jammed staples and remove any that are found.
Ensure the staple cartridge is fully seated.
Ensure that the correct staple cartridge is installed.
Perform 12L-110 Stapling Failure RAP.
HVF / HVF BM
CAUTION
Ensure that the first tamper in the compiler carriage is returned to the home position before the
second tamper is checked in diagnostics.
Enter dC330 code 12-223 Transport Motor 1, to run the input transport roll, PL 12.120
Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 12-224 Transport Motor 2, to run the exit drive shafts to feed paper to
the top tray or to the stacker tray, PL 12.120 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 12-226 Front Tamper Motor Home, to move the front tamper to the
home position PL 12.125 Item 6.
Noise from the right hand side of the machine.
Enter dC330 code 12-227 Rear Tamper Motor Home, to move the rear tamper to the
home position, PL 12.125 Item 6.
The HVF BM is not aligned correctly.
Enter dC330 code 12-228 Front Tamper Motor Move, to move the front tamper to the centre of the compiler, PL 12.125 Item 6
Bin 1 not aligned correctly on the main drive belts, PL 12.105 Item 6.
Enter dC330 code 12-229 Rear Tamper Motor Move, to move the rear tamper to the centre of the compiler tray, PL 12.125 Item 6.
Check that the Bin 1 is level, refer to REP 12.38-171 HVF Stacker Drive Belts.
Enter dC330 code 12-238 Paddle Roll Motor Run, to lift the paddle unit and rotate the
paddle rolls, PL 12.115 Item 2.
Adjust the components if appropriate.
Enter dC330 code 12-237 Paddle Motor Home, to lift the paddle unit to the up position, PL
12.115 Item 2.
Install new parts as necessary.
Enter dC330 code 12-241 Bin 1 Elevator Motor Home, to move Bin 1 up to the home position, PL 12.105 Item 10.
Mis-adjusted or worn drive belts. PL 12.120.
Enter dC330 code 12-242 Bin 1 Elevator Motor Cycle, to move Bin 1 up / down until time
out or stop, PL 12.105 Item 10.
The support fingers on the ejector hit bin1 each time they are moved out.
Enter dC330 code 12-249 SU1 Motor Fwd, to move the stapler unit to the front, PL 12.110
Item 12.
Adjust the belt tension as required.
Pre-load bin 1 with 30 sheets of paper this acts a a damper and will stop the noise.
Enter dC330 code 12-248 SU1 Motor Rev Home, to move the stapler unit to the rear, PL
12.110 Item 12.
Solution:
Check the machine to HVF BM alignment, ADJ 12.1-171.
Knocking.
Solution:
Squeak.
February 2013
2-529
OF 1
OF 2 UI Touch Screen Failure RAP
The transport drive shaft or bearings. PL 12.130.
Check that the paper guides are closed and located correctly.
Use this RAP to solve user interface touch screen problems when the machine has power but
either the display is missing, is too dark or the user interface touch screen responds incorrectly
or does not refresh.
Solution:
Initial Actions
Clicking Noise from the HVF BM.
WARNING
The noise is caused by the transport motor 2, dC330 code 12-224, continually operating for approximately 15 seconds. This occurs every time the top tray, PL 12.100
Item 9, or the front door, PL 12.100 Item 3, is opened then closed.
If the UI is blank. Check that the NVM module PWB, PL 3.11 Item 17 is seated correctly.
Refer to GP 1 to access the user interface diagnostics.
NOTE: When a new staple cartridge is installed the stapler makes a repeating noise.
This is normal it is the stapler performing a priming cycle.
Press the Machine Status key. Select the Tools tab. Select Device Settings, then Display
Brightness. Adjust the brightness level.
Refer to REP 2.1 to access the user interface assembly.
Perform 12-369-00-171 to 12-377-00-171 HVF Stapler Position and Priming RAP.
Check and re-seat the PJs on the user interface control PWB.
If the UI fails to boot, observe the progress icon on the screen to determine the failure.
Solution:
Ensure the staple cartridge is fully seated and that the correct cartridge is installed.
Yellow progress block = XUI code booting up.
Non moving green block = Code loaded but not communicating.
Moving green block = ESS is operational and XUI is trying to communicate with IME
and CCS.
If the problem occurs while entering or exiting sleep mode, go to the OF 7 Sleep Mode
RAP.
Procedure
Refer to WD 3.2. Check the +3.3V from PJ223 on the single board controller PWB to PJ900 on
the user interface control PWB. +3.3V is measured.
Y
N
Check the wiring and harness between the single board controller PWB and the user
interface control PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.2, or install a new harness,
PL 2.10 Item 7. If the wiring is good, go to 01C +3.3V Distribution RAP.
Refer to WD 3.2. Check the +12V from PJ223, pin 19 on the single board controller PWB to
PJ901, pin 5 on the user interface control PWB. +12V is measured.
Y
N
Check the wiring and harness between the single board controller PWB and the user
interface control PWB. Repair the wiring as necessary, REP 1.2, or install a new user
interface harness, PL 2.10 Item 7. If the wiring is good, go to 01E +12V Distribution RAP.
Reload the machine software, GP 4. The fault remains.
Y
N
Check that the ribbon cables between the user interface control PWB and the touch screen are
in good condition and are securely and correctly connected. Check the wiring and ribbon
cables on the touch screen assembly. As necessary, install new components:
LCD to PWB harness, (40-way ribbon cable), PL 2.10 Item 11.
User interface touch screen assembly, PL 2.10 Item 3.

OF 1, OF 2
February 2013
2-530
Use the following procedure if the machine fails to reach an operational state when switched
on. The UI screen displays: blank, energy saver, splash only, progress and Xerox, or repeatedly cycles back to the install wizard screen each time the machine is switched on.
N
Go to 01A AC Power Distribution RAP and perform the Main Power
Rocker Switch check. The switch is good
Y
N
Install a new main power rocker switch, PL 1.15 Item 3.
Initial Actions
WARNING
The +3.3V ESTAR has a short circuit. Check for short circuits to chassis at
PJDC1 pins 14,15 and 16 refer to WD 1.4. Go to 01B +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP. Check the supply to the IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
Check the SBC PWB 7-Segment LED display unit, Figure 3 and the IME POST LEDs for
a POST error code, OF 16.
If the problem occurs while entering or exiting sleep mode, go to OF 7 Sleep Mode RAP.
There is a short or an over load in the marking unit on 3.3V ESTAR. Disconnect
all PJs from the Media Path Driver PWB and the Drum Driver PWB until the
short is found. If necessary refer to the following RAPs:
Open the image processing module, PL 3.11.
Reseat the system memory PWB, PL 3.11 Item 4.
Reseat the EPC memory PWB, PL 3.11 Item 21.
Check the battery on the NVM module PWB is located correctly and in good condition, GP 45.
Reseat the NVM module PWB, PL 3.11 Item 17.
Reseat the connectors on the single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13.
01B +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP, refer to Drum driver PWB and Media
path driver PWB checkouts.
There is a short or an overload on the +17V or +3.3V supplies from the Power Distribution PWB or the power distribution PWB is faulty. Disconnect all PJs until the fault
is found. If necessary refer to the following RAPs:
Check with the customer that their power supply is good. If necessary, connect the
machine to a known good AC supply. If the machine operates correctly at the new supply,
inform the customer that the original supply must be at fault.
01G +17V Distribution RAP.
Go to the 01B 3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP.
Check that the SIM card is inserted correctly in the back of the machine. Refer to GP 19.
Remove the rear cover, PL 81.10 Item 1. Check the LEDs on the power supply unit, Figure 1.
Disconnect the output device then temporarily install a finisher bypass connector, PL
26.10 Item 7.
Orange LED indicates +24V, +/-12V and +5V are good.
Green LED indicates +3.3V ESTAR and +17V are good.
Red LED indicates +/-50V are good.
If the UI screen displays the energy star green screen and the SBC PWB 7-Segment LED
display unit, Figure 3 cycles through a sequence of 0 then alternating between 6 and U,
there is a hard drive fault. Ensure that the connectors on the hard drive are securely connected. Ensure that PJ222 on the single board controller is securely connected.
All LEDs are lit

Y
N
Go to the relevant voltage distribution RAP:
Procedure
01F -12V Distribution RAP.
01K -50V Distribution RAP.
Refer to 01-540-00, 01-544-00 RAP and 01-542-00, 01-546-00 RAP.
Switch on the machine, GP 14. Observe the power light button on the UI. The power button
flashes.
Y
N
Remove the rear cover, PL 81.10 Item 1. Observe the green LED on the power supply
unit, Figure 1. The green LED on the power supply unit is lit.
Y
N
Disconnect PJDC4 on the Power Supply Unit. Toggle the power switch. The green
LED is lit.
Y
N
Connect PJDC4. Disconnect PJDC3 on the Power Supply Unit. Toggle the
power switch. The green LED is lit.
Y
N
Connect PJDC3 and disconnect PJDC1. Toggle the power switch. The
green LED is lit.
The green Xerox screen is displayed.

Y
N
Go to OF 2 UI Touch Screen Failure RAP. The UI is good
February 2013
2-531
OF 3
E
Y
N
Check the seven segment display on the single board controller PWB. The seven segment display the decimal point is flashing heart beat.
Y
N
Go to the 01C +3.3V Distribution RAP and check the +3.3V supply to the single
board controller PWB. If the +3.3V supply to the PWB is good install a new single
board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13.
Check the connections to the hard disk drive, PL 3.11 Item 2. If the connections are good
perform the actions that follow:
Install a new hard disk drive, PL 3.11 Item 2.

NOTE: If a new hard drive is installed then the software will need to be reloaded.
The green progress screen is displayed.

Y
N
The display stays at the green Xerox screen. Observe the LEDs on the IME controller,
Figure 2. Perform the relevant action:
If the green LED is blinking, reload the software, GP 4.
Green
Orange
Red
The single board controller is not booting or there is a communication problem

between the single board controller PWB and the IME controller PWB.
Reboot in diagnostics state, GP 1 and refer to How to enter directly into service
mode. Enter dC123 PEST Fault History and dC122 Fault History. Review the
fault history then go to the indicated RAP.
Figure 1 Power LEDs
Check the power supplies to the power distribution PWB, single board controller PWB, HDD, scanner, DADH PWB, finisher, tray 5 and 3 tray module.
Go to the relevant voltage distribution RAP:
Check the connections to the single board controller, hard disk drive and harness PJ 5,
PL 3.11 Item 2. If the connections are good perform the actions that follow:
Harness hard disk drive / Single board controller PWB, PL 3.11 Item 3.
Install a new hard disk drive, PL 3.11 Item 2.

OF 3
February 2013
2-532
7-Segment LED display unit
Green LED
Figure 3 7-Segment LED display unit
Red LED blink code.
Figure 2 IME Controller LEDs
February 2013
2-533
OF 3
OF 4 Status Codes and Messages RAP
OF 4a Status Codes in Numerical Order
Use this RAP for faults and messages without fault codes.
Status Code Tables
Table 1 Chain 01 Status codes
Example: Status code 01-510-00 Front door is open. Video displayed requesting the front door
to be closed.
The fault code format is HCC-LLL-EE where HCC is the chain, LLL is the link and EE is the
extension number. All faults are displayed with hundred digit 3 which can be ignored. This digit
is not shown on any fault codes in this manual.
Table 14 Chain 70 to 78 Status codes
The status code format is HCC-LLL-EE where HCC is the chain, LLL is the link and EE is the
extension number. The hundreds digit H is not used and can be ignored. This digit is not shown
on any status codes in this manual.
Example: Fault code 301-510-00 Front door is open when machine running.
Refer to GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files.
Most recent fault and messages can be displayed on the UI without entering diagnostics, by
pressing the Machine Status button on the keypad, touching the Fault tab on the UI, then select
as appropriate:
Current Faults.
Current Messages.
Fault History.
The tables in this procedure bring together the status codes, the relevant RAP or procedure
references, and some of the UI messages.
NOTE: Not all status codes are shown in the active message window. Some status codes have
no messages.
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
01-101-00 Paper jam in area

4b
UI Message
IME jam at zone 4b

(horizontal), open the
front door
Clear the paper jam in area 4b. Print

and copy services are disabled.
Refer to 82-145-00, 82-146-00, 82150-00, 82-151-00, 82-156-00 RAP,
82-141-00, 82-147-00, 82-148-00,
82-154-00 RAP, 89-110-00 to 89113-00, 89-129-00 RAP

4a
IME jam at zone 4a

(exit), open the front
door
Clear the paper jam in area 4a. Print

Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP
Procedure
WARNING
Enter the Fault Codes and History Files, GP 2 and identify and clear any active faults. Go to
the following RAPs to identify a status code or message:
OF 4a Status Codes in Numerical Order
OF 4b Status Messages in Alphabetical Order
OF 4, OF 4a
February 2013
2-534

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Status
Code
Reference / Action
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
01-103-00 Paper jam in areas IME jam at zone 4a

Clear the paper jam in area 4a and
4a and 4b
(exit) and 4b (horizon- 4b. Print and copy services are distal), open the front door abled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00RAP

3a and 4b
(registration) and 4b
front door

4b. Print and copy services are disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP

3b
IME jam at zone 3b

(post transfix), open the and copy services are disabled
front door

3a and 4a

3b and 4b
IME jam at zone 3b

(post transfix) and 4b
front door
Clear the paper jam in area 3b and

4b. Print and copy services are disabled
01-106-00 Paper jam in areas IME jam at zone 3b

3b and 4a
(post transfix) and 4a
door

4a. Print and copy services are disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP

4a. Print and copy services are disabled.
Refer to 89-110-00 to 89-113-00,
89-129-00 RAP, 89-125-00 to 89128-00, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 RAP,
89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00
RAP
01-107-00 Paper jam in areas IME jam at zone 3b

3b, 4a and 4b
(post transfix), 4a (exit)
and 4b (horizontal),
open the front door
Clear the paper jam in area 3b, 4a

and 4b. Print and copy services are
disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP

3a
IME jam at zone 3a

(registration) and 4a
door

3a, 4a and 4b
(registration), 4a (exit)
open the front door
Clear the paper jam in area 3a, 4a

disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP

3a and 3b
(post transfix), open the
front door

Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP
IME jam at zone 3a

(registration / preheat), and copy services are disabled.
open the front door
Refer to 89-110-00 to 89-113-00,
89-129-00 RAP, 89-125-00 to 89128-00, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 RAP
February 2013
2-535
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

3a, 3b and 4b
(registration), 3b (post
transfix) and 4b (horizontal), open the front
door

3a, 3b and 4a
transfix) and 4a (exit),
open the front door

3a, 3b, 4a and 4b (registration), 4a (exit)
open the front door

Status
Code
Reference / Action
Clear the paper jam in area 3a, 3b
disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP
and 4a. Print and copy services are
disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP
disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00,
10-125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00,
10-148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10146-00, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00
RAP, 83-110-00, 83-111-00, 83-11300, 83-114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83112-00, 83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83117-00, 83-119-00 RAP
01-500-00 Do not switch the The IME power switch Print jobs sent to the device will not
power on again
is moved to the off posi- print and may be lost
tion
while powering
down is in progress
01-505-00 Middle left side
door is open
The IME middle left

Copying and printing are not availdoor (below bypass
able. Perform the 01-505-00 Middle
tray) is open
Left Door Open RAP
(without tray 5 installed)
01-506-00 Top left side door is The IME upper left door Copying and printing are not availopen
(bypass tray) is open
able. Perform the 01-506-00 Upper
Left Door Open RAP
OF 4a
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
01-510-00 Front door is open The front door is open. Copying and printing are not available. Perform the 01-510-00 Front
Door Open RAP
01-540-01 Check the settings for tray 1
Paper removed or
added to tray 1
Confirm the tray 1 settings
Paper removed or
added to tray 2
Paper removed or
added to tray 3
Paper removed or
added to tray 4
Paper removed or
added to tray 5
Paper removed or
added to tray 6
01-545-01 Tray 1 guides are

not set properly
Dedicated tray 1 closed Reload the required paper and corwith media size other
rectly adjust the paper guides
than what was set
01-545-02 Tray 2 guides are

not set properly
Dedicated tray 2 closed Reload the required paper and correctly adjust the paper guides
with media size other
than what was set
01-550-00 -
NC status code - system is in power save

mode
01-551-00 -
ESS status code - sys- Printing will start when a job is

received or a user initiates a job at
tem is in sleep mode
the machine
Printing will start when a job is

received or a user initiates a job at
the machine

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
02-517-00 -
PagePack grace period

active
02-518-00 -
PagePack grace period

expired
02-520-00 The machine is not avail- A software error has

occurred.
able
02-521-00 -
February 2013
2-536
Switch the machine off

then on, GP 14
The XEIP browser is dead or Perform the 02-321-00

not responding
XEIP Browser Dead
RAP

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
02-590-00 Machine power on failed. Configurable services are

Power off then on and
not stable at power on
notify system administrator

Status
Code
Reference / Action
then on, GP 14. If the
problem persists, perform the 02-390-00
Configurable Services
RAP

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
03-504-00 The machine is

offline
NC status code
Switch the machine off then on,

GP 14

offline
NC status code

GP 14
03-505-00 System error. Power The digital copier is not Perform 03-325-00 RAP and 03off then on and notify available
355-00 RAP
system administrator
03-518-00 Network controller
The network controller
not available. Power is not available.
off then on and notify

GP 14. If the fault remains, reinstall software, GP 4. If the problem persists, perform the 03-33100, 03-332-00 Main Controller
and Network Controller on the
SBC PWB Cannot Communicate
RAP
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
03-547-00 A Fax service error Basic Fax not detected

has occurred. Power or confirmed
off then on

GP 14. If the problem persists,
perform the 20-331-00, 20-33800, 20-339-00, 20-341-00, 20345-00 Fax Network Line 1 Fault
RAP
03-548-00 Fax line 2 is unavail- Extended Fax not

able. Notify your sys- detected or confirmed
tem administrator.
Check the Fax line connection
03-549-00 Fax memory error.

Power off then on
and notify system
administrator
Fax POST failure status Switch the machine off, then on

GP 14
03-550-00 A Fax service error Fax card is unavailable Switch the machine off then on,
has occurred. Power
off then on
RAP
03-551-00 A Fax service error The Fax service is
has occurred. Power unavailable
off then on

RAP
Go to dC301. Perform a copier
NVM initialization and NVM data
select all. After initialization perform the routines dC977 and
dC978
-
03-521-00 No message
CCM to UI communica- Switch the machine off then on,

GP 14
tion are lost
03-555-00 Please wait... Main- The machine has

tenance in progress. entered intrusive cusScan, copy and print tomer tools mode.
services not available
The machine is in non

intrusive diagnostic
mode
03-556-00 Please wait The

scanner is initializing.
The machine has

entered intrusive diagnostic mode
03-538-00 Machine active registration disabled.

Turn power off then
on to enable
The machine active reg- Re-enable the active registration

istration has been dis- mode in dC715
abled via the dC715
Active Registration
Control Routine
03-558-00 Please complete all Not defined

steps required by the
external accounting
device to access this
service
03-546-00 Incompatible Fax

software detected
(upgrade required)
Incompatible Fax soft- The embedded Fax software verware detected at power sion is incompatible with the system. A software upgrade should
on
be performed.
Refer to 03-417-00 RAP
03-558-01 Please insert card

Not defined
into the external
accounting device to
access this service
03-558-02 Please enter access Not defined
code into external
access this service
February 2013
2-537
Power on while the IIT

is being initialized
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Status
Code
Reference / Action
03-558-03 Please insert money Not defined

into the external
access this service
03-558-04 Please insert key

Not defined
counter into the
external accounting
device to access this
service
UI Message
03-559-06 Provide payment or

the current job may
be deleted.

the current job may
be deleted.
Generic FDI. Unable to The Job cannot be completed

complete the current
due to insufficient funds. Complete all steps required by the
job.
external accounting device to
continue the job
03-559-01 Provide payment.
Walk Up FDI. Unable to The Job cannot be completed

complete the current
due to insufficient funds. Comjob.
plete all steps required by the
continue the job
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Walk up coin entered

The Job cannot be completed
FDI. Not defined - FDI due to insufficient funds. Cominactivity timer disabled plete all steps required by the
continue the job. To immediately
delete this job, select the Close
button, then the Job Status button
located on the control panel and
then your job. If no action is
taken, the job will be deleted
03-561-00 Please wait... the

The system is recoversystem is attempting ing
to recover
Wait until the system recovers
03-562-00 Some jobs may have When some jobs may

been deleted
have been deleted
Removed upon user intervention
03-563-00 The network control- Network service are

being established
ler is initializing.
Copy and print jobs
may be delayed
Please wait, the Network Controller is initializing. No user intervention is required. Printing is
currently unavailable. If the problem persists, perform the 03-33100, 03-332-00 Main Controller
and Network Controller on the
SBC PWB Cannot Communicate
RAP
03-559-02 Enter your access

code or the current
job may be deleted.
Walk up code entered

FDI. Not defined

continue the job
03-559-03 Provide payment.
Walk up coin entered

FDI. Not defined

continue the job. To cancel this
job, press the hard-panel Job Status button, select the job and then
the Delete button
03-564-00 Image rotation is not Image rotation is not

available. Power off available
then on and notify

GP 14
03-565-00 System error. Power System fault

off them on and

GP 14
03-597-00 Communication
The document feeder is Perform 05-250-00, 05-251-00
error. Power off then not available. Use the
RAP
on and notify sysdocument glass
tem administrator

the current job may
be deleted.
Walk up key entered

FDI. Not defined

continue the job

the current job may
be deleted.
Walk up FDI. Unable to

complete the current job
- FDI inactivity timer
enabled

continue the job, select the Close
button, then the Job Status button
located on the control panel and
then your job.If no action is taken,
the job will be deleted
OF 4a
03-598-00 System error. Power Unable to set ready

off then on and notify mode. Printing and
system administrator copying services are
not available
February 2013
2-538
Perform the 03-788-00 CCS

Runtime Could Not Enter Power
Saver Mode S3 RAP

Status
Code

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
04-565-00 System error. Power IME controller commuoff then on and notify nication failure
System fault. Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14
04-568-00 The output tray is

The OCT is full.
full. Empty the output
tray
Empty the tray.
04-569-00 The output tray is

almost full
The OCT detects that it The tray is almost full. The tray
is 90% full
may be emptied now or when it is
full. Printing and other machine
services are unaffected
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
05-526-00 Paper jam in the document feeder
A sheet is left over the DADH

document present sensor
after a jam. The 05-330 fault
is raised
The fault is reset when

DADH top cover
closed after jam
cleared. If the problem
persists, perform the
05-330-00, 05-331-00
RAP
05-527-00 Reload sheets in document feeder
Documents are in the DADH

at power on or exit from
power save
Remove the sheets

from the original input
tray
Document feeder tray loaded -
05-538-00 Communication error.

The DADH is not available.

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
The DADH is raised.
Close the DADH. If the

fault remains, perform
the 05-300-00 DADH
Open RAP.
05-502-00 The document feeder top The DADH top cover is open. Close the DADH top
cover is open
cover. If the fault
remains, perform the
05-258-00, 05-307-00
DADH Cover Interlock
Open RAP.
Post feed and takeaway roll

jam
Remove the sheet. If

the problem persists,
perform the 05-330-00,
05-331-00 Feed Sensor Failure RAP
A sheet is left over the DADH

CVT sensor, the DADH post
feed sensor or the TAR sensor after a jam.
Remove sheet. If the

problem persists, perform the 05-350-00,
05-352-00 RAP
The Document feeder tray is

empty
Perform the 05B

DADH Document Sensor Failure RAP
05-539-00 Document feeder - feed

roller has been replaced
A document feeder
fault has occurred,
copy jobs can only be
made from the document glass. Printing
can continue.
DADH feed head CRU

None
replaced. Message automatically cleared half a second
after setting
05-542-00 Communication error.

DADH document transport
needs service
Perform 05A RAP
05-546-00 The document size was On pre-feed the DADH fails to Reload the originals or
different than expected. recognize the size of the doc- select the document
The job has been deleted ument
size. If the problem
05-257-00 RAP
05-547-00 Re-order document
feeder - feed roller but
DO NOT replace until
prompted
DADH feed roll assembly

near end of life
Re-order a feed roll

assembly PL 5.15 Item
1.
05-560-00 Remove the document. It Upon fault 05-310 being

is too short to be fed by raised
Document Feeder.
Remove the short document from DADH during jam clearance, If

perform the 05-310-00
RAP
05-570-00 Scan and copy services

not available. Print service is available
Remove, then re-load

all document in the
DADH
February 2013
2-539
DADH jam
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
05-578-00 Re-order document

feeder - feed roller but
DO NOT replace until
prompted
DADH roller feeds reaches

near end of life limit.
Order new DADH feed

roll assembly, PL 5.15
Item 1
05-579-00 Replace the document

feed roller
DADH roller feeds reaches

end of life
Install new DADH feed

roll assembly, PL 5.15
Item 1.
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
12-579-00 Hole punching not avail- Hole punching is not available

able. Power off then on
and notify system administrator
05-585-00 Select confirm if the doc- When status 05-579 is active Select confirm if the
document feeder - feed
ument feeder - feed roller and the DADH top cover is
opened (status 05-502)
roller was replaced
was replaced.
UI Message
Reason for Message
The finisher unit (LCSS) is not Dock the output modcorrectly docked. Printing has ule. If the problem
stopped
12-310-00-110, 12312-00-110, 12-31300-110 RAP
12-600-01 Finisher is not docked.

Re-dock finisher now
The finisher unit (HVF without Dock the output modtri-folder) is not correctly
ule. If the problem
docked. Printing has stopped persists, perform the
12-310-00-171, 12312-00-171, 12-31300-171 RAP

The finisher unit (HVF with tri- Dock the output modfolder) is not correctly docked. ule. If the problem
Printing has stopped
12-310-00-171, 12312-00-171, 12-31300-171 RAP
Reference / Action
Transfix calibration
Refer to OF 12 Service Code
NVRAM parameters are RAP
reset.

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
PTU selected whilst marking

job is running
Pressing the Pause to

Unload button will
cancel this request
12-411-00 The current job exceeds Copy Job will exceed the out- Empty the tray
the tray capacity, you will put destinations capacity
be prompted to empty the
tray
12-564-00 The finisher front door is
open
The finisher front door is open Close the finisher

front door
(LCSS)

open

(HVF - all variants)
front door

open

(HVF with tri-folder)
front door
12-601-00 Close the finisher top tray LCSS finisher top cover is
Close the top cover
open (cover over output tray)
12-602-00 Close finisher top cover
The finisher top cover is open Close the finisher top

cover.
12-606-00 Close finisher top cover
The inserter top cover is open Close the inserter top

cover
12-607-00 Close the finisher folder

top cover
The tri-folder top cover is

open (HVF with tri-folder)
12-608-00 Close the finisher folder

front door
The tri-folder unit front door is Close the tri-folder

open (HVF with trifolder)
front door
Close the tri-folder top

cover
12-609-00 Close finisher inserter left The inserter left cover is open Close the inserter left
side door
(HVF without Tri-folder)
cover
12-610-00 Paper jam in the finisher
OF 4a
Check that the hole

punch unit is correctly installed. Switch
the machine off then
on, GP 14. If the problem persists, perform
the 12-043-00-110,
12-046-00-110 RAP
for LCSS, 12-044-00171 to 12-047-00-171
RAP for HVF

Status
Code
Reference / Action
February 2013
2-540
Paper is detected over the

entry sensor (LCSS)
Clear the paper jam. If

perform the 12-19900-110 RAP

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

entry sensor (HVF without tri- the problem persists,
folder)
perform the 12-12500-171, 12-126-00171 RAP

stacker exit sensor at powerup, interlock status change or
after shutdown. (LCSS)
Clear the paper jam.

If the problem persists, perform the 12151-00-110, 12-15200-110 RAP
After receiving the paper at

IOT exit sensor the entry sensor is not made within 1000
ms. (LCSS). Paper jam near
the entry to the finisher unit.

Paper jam near the output to

the stacker tray. Sheet over
2nd top exit sensor

If the problem persists, perform the 12151-171, 12-152-171
RAP
Paper jam near the entry to

the finisher unit (HVF without the problem persists,
tri-folder)
perform the 12-12500-171, 12-126-00171 RAP


hole punch position sensor at
power-up, interlock status
change or after shutdown.
(LCSS)
If entry sensor made to the

stacker bin exit sensor made
exceeds 1600 ms (A4 LEF 1st
page/A3 SEF all pages) or
1100 ms (A4 LEF mid set
page) or 900 ms (A4 LEF last
page of set). (LCSS)

the stacker tray. Sheet over
2nd top exit sensor

RAP
Sheet over the inserter pickup Clear the area or If

sensor
Sheet over the inserter tab

standby sensor
Sheet over the buffer position Clear the area. If the

sensor
problem persists, perform the 12-198-00171, 12-199-00-171
RAP
Sheet over the HVF exit into

BM sensor
Clear the area. If the

RAP
Page over the exit HVF into

BM sensor (sensor in area
6a) cleared via area 6a
Clear the paper jam
12-617-00 Tray 6 (Inserter) is empty. Tray 6 (Inserter) detects no

Add paper
paper present
Paper is detected over the top

tray exit sensor at power-up,
interlock status change or
after shutdown (LCSS)

Add paper to tray 6.
If the problem persists, perform the 12J171 RAP.
Paper is detected over the top Clear the paper jam.

tray exit sensor
the top tray. (LCSS)

the top tray. (HVF)

February 2013
2-541

problem persists, perform the 12-191-00171, 12-193-00-171,
12-194-00-171, 12196-00-171 RAP
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Page over the exit HVF into

BM sensor (sensor in area
6a) cleared via area 6a
Clear the paper jam
Sheet over the stacker bin

exit sensor

12-152-171
Sheet over the tri-folder entry Clear the area. If the

sensor
RAP
Sheet over the booklet maker Clear the area. If the

entry sensor (without triproblem persists, perform the 12-183-00folder)
171, 12-184-00-171
RAP
Sheet over the booklet maker Clear the area. If the

entry sensor (with tri-folder)
RAP
Sheet over the booklet maker Clear the jam from the
exit sensor (without tri-folder) output bin. If the problem persists, perform
the 12-181-00-171,
12-182-00-171 RAP
Sheet over the booklet maker Clear the jam from the
exit sensor (with tri-folder)
output bin. If the problem persists, perform
the 12-181-00-171,
12-182-00-171 RAP
12-640-00 Hole punch not detected

(missing). Please insert
the hole punch.
The finisher punch unit is

missing or incorrectly
installed.
12-641-00 The hole punch waste

The chad bin has been
container is not detected. removed from the finisher
Please re-insert.
OF 4a
Make sure that the

punch unit is correctly installed.
Reinstall the chad bin.
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
12-642-00 Booklet maker staples

The booklet maker staples
low. Re-order booklet sta- are low
ple cartridge
The booklet maker

staple cartridge supplies are low. Reorder staple cartridge, PL 12.185 Item
8
12-643-00 Booklet maker staple car- The booklet maker staple car- The booklet maker
staple cartridge is
tridge is empty
tridge is empty
empty. Follow the
instructions at the
printer to load a new
staple cartridge, PL
12.185 Item 8. Printing can continue, but
stapled booklet making is unavailable
12-643-01 Booklet maker staple car- The booklet maker staple car- Install a new booklet
maker staple cartridge
tridge is empty
tridge is empty
12-644-00 Booklet maker staple car- The booklet maker staple car- The booklet maker
tridge is empty. Replace tridge is empty and HVF fin- staple cartridge is
isher front door open
empty. User intervennow
tion is required to
install a new booklet
maker staple cartridge, PL 12.185 Item
8. Printing and copying can continue without stapled booklet
making
container is full. Empty
hole punch waste container
The hole punch chad bin is

full and needs emptying.
(LCSS)
Hole punch waste

container is full, jobs
requesting hole
punching will be held.
Empty the chad bin

Hole Punch Waste Container
The hole punch chad bin is

full and needs emptying.
(HVF)
Hole punch waste

container is full, jobs
requesting hole
Empty the chad bin
12-653-00 Stapling fault. Power off

Stapling disabled, out of serthen on and notify system vice. (LCSS)
administrator
February 2013
2-542
Perform the 12-37100-110, 12-372-00110, 12-378-00-110

RAP

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
12-665-00 Finisher main tray is out Bin 1 out of service status

of service. Power off then (LCSS)
on and notify system
administrator
Perform the 12-15100-110, 12-152-00110 RAP
12-692-00 Finisher top tray is full.

Empty top tray.
Empty the top tray
The finisher top tray is full
12-701-00 Output tray offsetting is

OCT offset failure occurred
not available. Power off
then on and notify system
administrator
Perform the 12-70100-65 RAP
12-715-00 Staple cartridge is empty. The finisher's main staple car- Install new staple cartridge is empty. Follow the
tridge, PL 12.55 Item
Replace now
instructions at the printer to
7.
load a new staple cartridge.
Non staple printing can continue. (LCSS)
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
12-718-00 Paper jam in finisher

folder unit
Sheet over the tri- folder

assist sensor

If the problem persists, perform the 12185-00-171 to 12187-00-171 RAP
12-719-00 Paper jam in finisher

folder unit
Sheet over the tri- folder exit

sensor

12-720-00 Booklet stapler not available. Power off then on

Failure of any BM or TF function. The booklet maker and

tri-folder are currently unavailable
Check for obstructions in the HVF BM

and the tri-folder.
Check that the HVF
BM and tri-folder
interlocks are made.
Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14.
Check the current
fault codes list for
HVF BM or tri-folder
faults and perform the
appropriate RAP
12-715-01 Staple cartridge is empty. HVF staple cartridge is empty Install a new staple
Replace now.
cartridge. If the problem persists, perform
the 12-369-00-171 to
12-377-00-171 RAP
12-716-00 Staple cartridge supplies
are low.
LCSS and HVF staples are

low
The finisher's main

staple cartridge supplies are low. Reorder staple cartridge. Printing can
continue. LCSS PL
12.55 Item 7, HVF PL
12.110 Item 31.
HVFBM PL 12.185
Item 8.
Sheet over the HVF BM com- Clear the HFV BM

piler paper present sensor
paper present sensor
(without tri-folder)
area 6e. If the problem persists, perform
the 12-166-00-171
RAP
Sheet over the HVF BM com- Clear the HFV BM
paper present sensor
piler paper present sensor
area 6e. If the prob(with tri-folder)
lem persists, perform
the 12-166-00-171
RAP
12-721-00 Stapling fault. Power off

Stapler is not in position
administrator
The stapler module is

open, close the stapler module
12-726-00 Booklet stapler not avail- Failure of the booklet maker

stapling functions
Perform 12-063-00171, 12-411-00-171

RAP for staple unit 1,
and 12-403-00-171,
12-413-00-171, 12414-00-171 RAP for
staple unit 2
12-727-00 The booklet maker tray in The booklet maker output tray The booklet maker
the finisher is nearly full. is nearly full
tray is near full. User
intervention will be
required soon to
empty the tray to
allow continued booklet making. Print and
copy services can
continue; other
machine services are
unaffected.
February 2013
2-543
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
12-728-00 The booklet maker tray in The booklet maker output tray Empty the tray. If necthe finisher is full. Empty is full
essary, If the problem
the tray
12C-171 RAP
12-729-00 Finisher top tray is nearly The finisher top output bin is
full
nearly full
12-730-00 Finisher main tray is full
12-730-01 Finisher main tray is full
The stacker tray is full

(LCSS and HVF)
The stacker tray is full

(HVF)
The top output bin is

nearly full. This output
bin may need to be
unloaded soon. Printing can continue.
The middle output bin
is full. This output bin
needs to be unloaded.
Printing to this output
bin is disabled.
If the problem persists, perform the 12462-00-110 RAP or
12-460-00-171 to 12462-00-171 RAP
The middle output bin
is full. This output bin
needs to be unloaded.
Printing to this output
bin is disabled.
12-731-00 Tray 6 (inserter) is empty. Post process inserter tray

Load more media. If
Load more media for
(tray 6) is empty. Jobs will be the problem persists,
insertion
held if inserts are required
perform the 12J-171
RAP
Sheet detected near the PPI

pickup sensor
Clear the jam. If the

12-194-00-171, 12196-00-171 RAP
Sheet detected near the PPI

tab standby sensor
Clear the jam. If the

problem persists, perform the12-191-00171, 12-193-00-171,
12-194-00-171, 12196-00-171 RAP
12-734-00 Finisher main tray is

nearly full
Stacker tray bin is nearly full
No action necessary
OF 4a
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Sheet detected near the

buffer sensor
Clear the sheet. If the

RAP and 12-141-00171, 12-142-00-171
RAP
Sheet detected near the exit

HVF to BM entry sensor.
(without tri-folder)

12-190-00-171, 12192-00-171 RAP
Sheet detected near exit HVF Clear the sheet. If the

to BM entry sensor.
problem persists, per(with tri-folder)
form the 12-113-00171, 12-114-00-171,
12-190-00-171, 12192-00-171 RAP
12-740-00 Tray is ready for unloading. Press the button on

finisher to return tray to
ready position
Finisher tray is ready for

unloading
12-741-00 Please wait... The output

tray is lowering
The machine is paused for

Follow the instrucunloading. Need to press the tions. If the problem
button on the pop up screen persists, perform the
12H-171
12-742-00 Output tray on-line
Pause to unload time-out

warning
Follow the instructions to unload the

tray.
Finisher has gone

back on-line
12-743-00 Booklet stapler not avail- Booklet making & tri-folding

unavailable.
February 2013
2-544
Booklet making and

tri-folding is unavailable. Switch the
machine off then on,
GP 14. Check the current fault code list for
HVF BM or tri-fold
faults and go to
appropriate RAP.
Printing can continue
to all available output
trays

Status
Code
UI Message
12-744-00 Tray 6 (Inserter) is

unavailable. Check for
obstructions. Power off
then on
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
The inserter is unavailable
The post process

inserter is not available. Switch the
GP 14. Check the current fault code list for
inserter faults and go
to appropriate RAP
12-745-00 Finisher top tray and main Top tray and stacker are
tray are not available
unavailable (only the booklet
maker tray is available)

and the tri-folder.
Check that the HVF
BM and tri-folder
Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14.
Check the current
appropriate RAP.
Sheet detected near the trifold entry sensor

RAP
Sheet detected near the trifold exit sensor

problem persists, perform the 12-185-00171 to 12-187-00-171
Sheet detected near the trifold assist sensor

problem persists, perform the 12-185-00171 to 12-187-00-171
RAP
An insert sheet has not

arrived at its intended output
destination
See the message

text. If the problem
12-191-00-171, 12193-00-171, 12-19400-171, 12-196-00171 RAP and 12-12500-171, 12-126-00171 RAP
12-749-00 Insert sheet sent to a different tray to the rest of

the job
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
12-750-00 Unexpected paper size or A shorter than expected sheet Follow the message
type detected from tray 6 has been fed from the inserter text. Check the size of
(Inserter)
the paper in the
inserter. Refer to 12J171 RAP
A page is over the buffer path Clear the area. If the

sensor
RAP
A page is near the buffer path Clear the area. If the

sensor
RAP
The finisher has detected a

50 sheet staple cartridge. A
100 sheet staple cartridge
should be used
Install a 100 sheet

staple cartridge
12-762-00 Finisher communication

error. Check cabling.
power off then on
Communication failure
between IME and finisher
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14.
Check the finisher
communication harness. If the problem
persists, perform 12762-00-110, 12-76400-110, 12-765-00110 RAP for LCSS.
12-762-00-171, 12764-00-171, 12-76500-171 RAP for HVF.
12-764-00 Finisher communication

error. Check cabling.
power off then on
The IME cannot detect a finisher plugged in (including

catch tray)
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14.
Check the finisher
communication harness. If the problem
persists, perform 12762-00-110, 12-76400-110, 12-765-00110 RAP for LCSS.
12-762-00-171, 12764-00-171, 12-76500-171 RAP for HVF.
February 2013
2-545
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
12-765-00 Incompatible or unknown The IME interface indicates

finisher detected. Check that the finisher is incompatible / unknown.
finisher compatibility

Reference / Action
Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14.
Check the finisher
communication lead.
If the problem persists, perform the 12762-00-110, 12-76400-110, 12-765-00110 RAP for LCSS.
12-762-00-171, 12764-00-171, 12-76500-171 RAP for HVF
12-901-00 Unable to staple. Check The finisher is in degraded

for obstructions in the out- mode, unable to staple
put trays
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14. If
perform 12F-171 RAP
12-902-00 Finisher main tray out of

service. Check for
obstructions in the main
tray
The finisher is in degraded

mode, stacker tray is out of
service.
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14.
Check for obstructions in the tray
12-906-00 Finisher main tray out of

service. Check for
obstructions in the main
tray
The finisher main tray is out of Switch the machine

service, tray home fault
off then on, GP 14.
Check for obstructions in the tray
12-908-00 Hole punching is unavail- The finisher hole punch head Clear the paper jam.
Switch the machine
able. Check for obstruc- motor has failed
tions in the hole puncher
perform the 12-04300-110, 12-046-00110 RAP for LCSS
12-909-00 All output trays are
Status raised based upon the Clear any obstrucunavailable. Check for
report capabilities from the
tions or paper jam.
obstructions in the finisher finisher
Switch the machine
perform the 12-46200-110 RAP for LCSS
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
12-921-00 Stapling not available.

Call for assistance.
The stapler position sensor

indicates the stapler module
is not closed in initialization
Close the BM stapler

module. If the problem persists, perform
the12-063-00-171,
12-411-00-171 RAP
for staple unit 1, and
12-403-00-171, 12413-00-171, 12-41400-171 RAP for staple
unit 2
12-943-00 Booklet making and trifolding are unavailable.

Check for obstructions
Booklet making or tri-folding

capability degraded

and the tri-folder.
Check that the HVF
BM and tri-folder
Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14.
Check the current
appropriate RAP
12-944-00 Tray 6 (Inserter) is

obstructions in the
Inserter
Inserter capability degraded
Check for obstructions in the inserter. If

perform the 12-19100-171, 12-193-00171, 12-194-00-171,
12-196-00-171 RAP
and 12J-171 RAP
12-945-00 All main stacker trays

All trays have degraded capability, except booklet maker
unavailable. Power off
administrator
12-913-00 Booklet making is unavail- Back stop motor fails to move Clear the paper jam.
Switch the machine
able. Check for obstruc- or not home
tions in the BM
perform the 12-06500-171, 12-383-00171 HVF BM Backstop Motor Fault RAP
OF 4a
UI Message
February 2013
2-546
Check for obstructions in the buffer,

stacker and top tray
areas. Switch the
GP 14. Check the current fault codes list for
faults in the buffer,
stacker and top tray
areas and perform the
appropriate RAP

Status
Code

Status
Code
UI Message
14-517-00 Scanner fault. Power

Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Scanner fault.

GP 14. Check the current fault
codes list for faults in the scanner and perform the appropriate RAP.
UI Message
16-501-00 Network services with job

based accounting not
available. Notify your system administrator
16-502-00 The network controller is

about to be reset
16-507-00 Some network services

involving SLP are not
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Job based accounting

not enough DC memory. Some Network
Controller services are
not available
Not enough CCM memory to

run the network accounting
feature. Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14. If the
problem persists, perform
the 16-930-19 to 16-939-19
Other Network Faults 17
RAP
Status active when

Cleared when the network
ever the network con- controller reset is initiated
troller detects that a
platform reset is about
to occur
16-503-00 System error. Power off

Incomplete system
then on and notify system information
administrator
Switch the machine off then

on, GP 14. All machine services are disabled

DDNS error. Some netinvolving DDNS are not
work controller seravailable. Notify your sys- vices are not available
tem administrator
The DDNS address resolution process has failed.

on, GP 14. If the problem
persists check the DDNS
servers network connections
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
SLP process stopped. Switch the machine off then

Some network control- on, GP 14.
ler services are not
available
16-508-00 Autonet functions are not Autonet is not available Switch the machine off then
available. Notify your syson, GP 14. Printing can contem administrator
tinue if other network protocols are used
involving Internet Fax are
not available. Notify system administrator

Status
Code
UI Message
Insufficient memory for Switch the machine off then

internet Fax
on, GP 14. Printing can continue if other network protocols are used
16-510-00 Network services involving Scan to E-mail process

scan to E-mail are not
failed
available. Notify system
administrator

persists check network connections
16-511-00 Network services related

to Internet Fax are not
administrator

Internet Fax process

failed

Simple service discov- Switch the machine off then
involving SSDP are not
on, GP 14.
ery protocol (SSDP)
available. Notify your sysfailed
tem administrator
16-514-00 Network services involving
administrator
Post office protocol

(POP3) (for inbound
IFAX messages) process failed

on, GP 14.
16-517-00 Network services involving SMTP process failed

administrator

on, GP 14.
16-518-00 Network services using

Web services edge cliWS edge client are not
ent interface does not
available. Notify your sys- work
tem administrator


involving scan to E-mail
are not available. Notify
Insufficient memory for Switch the machine off then

E-mail
persists check the network
connections

Web services client
WS edge client are not
controller does not
available. Notify your sys- work
tem administrator

16-506-00 Your administrator is

reconfiguring the system.
Services will not be available
Your administrator is
reconfiguring the system

WS edge client are not
available. Please notify
the system administrator

The system administrator is

saving the machine configuration to a remote station.
February 2013
2-547
Web services server

controller interface
does not work.
OF 4a

Status
Code

Reference / Action
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

The network controlinvolving CPI are not avail- lers CPI service proable. Notify your system
cess has stopped
administrator
Machine services are temporarily disabled. The network

controller connection is
about to be reset
16-536-00 Network controller error.

Some network services
not available. Notify system administrator.
The XSA service is

unavailable. Network
controller error

on, GP 14.

involving job log are not
administrator
Some network services are

not available. The network
about to be reset
16-544-00 Network cable unplugged An Ethernet cable is

unplugged
Ensure cables are properly

connected
16-550-00 Machine entering SW

upgrade mode. ALL jobs
will be cancelled.
The machine entered a software upgrade mode (all jobs

will be deleted). No user
intervention is required.
Machine services are
unavailable until the software
upgrade process has completed.
UI Message
Reason for Message
The network controllers job log service

process has stopped

The network controlwith job tracker are not
lers job tracker service
available. Notify your sysprocess has stopped
tem administrator

about to be reset

The network controlwith Kerberos are not
lers Kerberos service
available. Notify your sysprocess has stopped
tem administrator

not available. The Network
Controller connection is
about to be reset
16-525-00 Scan to distribution services are not available.

Notify your system administrator

about to be reset
The network controllers scan to distribution service process

has stopped

The network controlinvolving SMB are not
lers SMB service proavailable. Notify your sys- cess has stopped.
tem administrator
Some network service are

about to be reset

The network controlinvolving TCP/IP are not
lers TCP/IP service
available. Notify your sysprocess has stopped.
tem administrator

about to be reset

WS scan temp are not
The network controllers WS scan temp

service process has
stopped.

about to be reset
16-529-00 Network services with

Scan compressor are not
The network controllers Scan compressor

service process has
stopped.

about to be reset
16-533-00 Service limit exceeded.

New services will not be
available until some services are removed
Controller software
Remove some existing serservice limit exceeded vices to enable new services
to be added. Machine services are available but may
be degraded
16-535-00 Immediate job overwrite

Immediate job overwrite failed
failed. Perform an on
demand overwrite immediately
OF 4a
Immediate job overwrite

failed. Administrator intervention is required to perform an on demand
overwrite immediately
Machine entering SW
upgrade mode - all
jobs will be canceled.
16-551-00 Accounting out of memory. Network controller Accounting administrator

Notify your system admin- accounting log is full or needs to retrieve accounting
a hard disk full state
data log from the system
istrator
exists
16-553-00 Additional memory is
required to support scan to
file. Notify your system
administrator
Network controller - not Switch the machine off then

enough physical mem- on, GP 14. Hardware must
ory is configured on the be added or replaced.
platform to support
scan to file
16-554-00 Workflow scanning hardware must be added or

replaced. Notify your system administrator
Network controller hardware must be

added or replaced
16-555-00 Insufficient memory for

Fax job. Notify your system administrator.
Network controller - not Additional memory required

enough physical mem- to support Fax. The Fax serory is configured on the vice is not available
platform to support
LAN Fax
There is an authentication problem between

the 802.1x device and
the 802.1x server
User intervention is required

to check the settings on the
802.1x device to ensure they
match the 802.1x server,
then switch the machine off
then on, GP 14.

DC platform recovery not
administrator
Network controller DC
platform recovery
failed

on, GP 14

DC platform recovery not
administrator
Network controller DC Switch the machine off then

communications failed on, GP 14
February 2013
2-548
Hardware must be added or

replaced.

Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Status
Code

BOOTP initialization not
administrator
Network controller
BOOTP initialization
failure
Check the BOOTP Server

and its network connection.
on GP 14

involving HTTP are not

are not available due to a
process error. Notify system administrator.
Some processes on
the network controller
have failed

on, GP 14
16-561-00 Scan to file not available.

Network controller scan to file processes

have failed

on, GP 14

involving LPD are not
Network controller - the

line printer daemon
(LPD) process has
failed

on, GP 14. Printing can continue if other submission
methods are used

involving Novell are not
Network controller - the

Novell netware connectivity process has
failed

methods are used

involving NetBios are not
administrator
Network controller - the Switch the machine off then

NetBIOS connectivity on, GP 14. Printing can continue if other submission
process has failed
methods are used
16-565-00 Network services involving

Apple Talk are not available. Notify your system
administrator
Apple Talk printing

error. Printing can continue using other submission methods

methods are used

involving PostScript are
not available. Notify your
Network controller - a
PostScript interpreter
error has occur, causing the process to fail

methods are used

involving PCL are not
Network controller - a
PCL interpreter error
has occurred, causing
the process to fail

on, GP 14, to enable PCL
printing. Printing can continue if other job format
methods are used
UI Message
16-569-00 Network services involving Network controller a parallel port are not
parallel ports are not
available
administrator

persists, perform the 16-76147 to 16-769-95 Other Network Faults 1 RAP
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Network controller - an
HTTP interpreter error
the process to fail

methods are used. If the
the 16-761-47 to 16-769-95
Other Network Faults 1 RAP
16-571-00 Network printing disabled. Network controller Switch the machine off then
Notify your system admin- print service has failed on, GP 14. Printing cannot
istrator
continue. If the problem persists, perform the 16-770-09
to 16-779-95 Other Network
Faults 2 RAP
16-572-00 Network printing disabled. Network controller Switch the machine off then
Notify your system admin- print service has failed on, GP 14. Printing cannot
continue. If the problem peristrator
sists, perform the 16-770-09
Faults 2 RAP
16-573-00 Network printing disabled. Network controller Notify your system admin- ESS print service has
istrator.
failed

on, GP 14. Printing cannot
Faults 2 RAP
16-574-00 Job queue error. Power off ESS queue utility has
then on and notify system failed. Only a partial list
administrator
is available for display
at this time

16-575-00 The network controller

connection is about to be
reset

ESS registration service process has
stopped
Automatic network controller

reset. If the problem persists,
perform the 16-160-09 ESS
Reg Service Process Death
RAP
16-576-00 Network controller connection is about to be

reset

ESS event notification
service process has
stopped

reset. Switch the machine off
then on, GP 14. If the problem persists, perform the 16161-09, 16-164-09 Cannot
Send Reg Event / List
Access Failure RAP
February 2013
2-549
OF 4a

Status
Code

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

reset

ESS platform manager
service process has
stopped

reset. Machine is unavailable. If the problem persists,
perform the 16-162-09 to 16163-09 Cannot Send Reg
Event / ESS Services Failure
RAP
16-578-00 Incomplete system infor- The network controller

mation. Power off then on ESS fault log service
and notify system adminis- process has stopped
trator
16-579-00 Job status not available.


on, GP 14. Printing and
scanning can continue. If the
the 16-770-09 to 16-779-95
The network controller Switch the machine off then

ESS completed job log on, GP 14. Printing and
service has stopped
the 16-770-09 to 16-779-95
16-580-00 Incomplete system information. Power off then on


ESS configuration utility process has
stopped

the 16-780-00 to 16-789-47
16-581-00 Some network diagnostic

services are not available.

ESS diagnostic service process has
stopped

the 16-770-09 to 16-779-95
and the 16-780-00 to 16789-47 Other Network Faults
3 RAP
16-582-00 Some network authentication services unavailable.


ESS authentication
SPI process has
stopped
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

reset
The network controller Automatic network controller

document manager
reset. Machine is unavailable
agent process has
stopped
16-585-00 Incomplete system information. Power off then on


ESS configuration synchronization process
has stopped

the 16-780-00 to 16-789-47
16-586-00 Incomplete system infor- The network controller

mation. Power off then on agent process has
and notify system adminisstopped
trator

on, GP 14. Print and other
machine services are unaffected. If the problem persists, perform the 16-780-00
Faults 3 RAP
16-589-00 Network services involving The network controller

a serial port are not avail- serial port connectivity
able. Notify system adminhas failed
istrator.

Faults 3 RAP
16-590-00 Network connectivity con- The network controller

figuration server not avail- CCS process has
failed
able. Notify your system
administrator

the 16-800-09 to 16-809-47

Network controller
involving Ethernet are not Ethernet process has
failed
administrator.
Check Ethernet connection.

Switch the machine off, then
switch the machine on GP
14. Local printing can continue. If the problem persists,
perform the 16-800-09 to 16809-47 Other Network Faults
5 RAP

Faults 3 RAP
16-583-00 Incomplete system infor- The network controller Switch the machine off then
mation. Power off then on ESS counters utility
scanning can continue
and notify system adminis- process has stopped
trator
OF 4a
February 2013
2-550

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Status
Code
Reference / Action

Network controller involving DHCP are not
DHCP address resoluavailable. Notify your sys- tion has failed
tem administrator.
Check DHCP server network

connection. Switch the
machine off then on GP 14.
Copying and printing with
local connections can continue. If the problem persists,
5 RAP

Network controller involving RARP are not
RARP address resoluavailable. Notify your sys- tion has failed
tem administrator.
Check RARP server network connection. Switch the

machine off then on GP 14.
Printing can continue with
other submission methods. If
the problem persists, perform the 16-800-09 to 16809-47 Other Network Faults
5 RAP
16-595-00 LAN Fax service error.

The network controller Switch the machine off then

LAN Fax service has
failed
Faults 4 RAP
16-596-00 Some network accounting Some network controlservices are not available. ler services are not
Notify your system admin- available
istrator.
Network accounting error.

to switch the machine off
then on, GP 14. Print and
other machine services are
unaffected. If the problem

involving TIFF are not
TIFF interpreter has
available. Notify your sysfailed
tem administrator.

on, GP 14. Printing can continue with other job formats.
If the problem persists, perform the 16-790-09 to 16799-47 Other Network Faults
4 RAP
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Network controller TCP/IP address is

already in use on the
network
Another IP address needs to

be used. Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14. Copy and
Fax services (if installed) can
Faults 4 RAP
16-599-00 Network services with Port Raw TCP/IP printing

9100 process are not
(port 9100) process
has failed
administrator

on, GP 14. Printing can continue with other submission
methods. If the problem persists, perform the 16-790-09
Faults 4 RAP

involving TCP/IP are not
available. Notify your system administrator.

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
17-510-00 Duplicate IPv6 address

detected. Reconfigure
with a unique address
Duplicate IPv6 address

detected
Reconfigure with a
unique address.
then on, GP 14. Copy
and Fax services (if
installed) can continue
17-512-00 DHCPv6 services are not DHCPv6 Failure status

available. Notify your
system administrator.

then on, GP 14. Printing can continue with
other submission
methods.

detected. Reconfigure
with a unique address
Reconfigure with a
unique address.
then on, GP 14.
Duplicate IPv4 address

detected.
17-514-00 The machine is not avail- External accounting device

communication failure
able. Accounting communication failure
February 2013
2-551
Administrator intervention required to check

the connection to the
external accounting
device
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
17-551-00 Server Fax service cannot register. Power off

then on and notify system administrator
Reference / Action
Server Fax service cannot

register

then on, GP 14. Server
Fax is disabled, print
and other machine services are unaffected. If
16-988-19 Server Fax
Application Registration Error RAP
17-557-00 The internet Fax service Internet Fax service cannot

cannot un-register. Notify un-register
your system administrator

then on, GP 14. Internet Fax is disabled,
print and other
unaffected. If the problem persists, perform
the 16-950-19 to 16959-19 Other Network
Faults 19 RAP
17-558-00 The E-mail service cannot un-register. Notify

Scan to E-mail service cannot Switch the machine off

register.
then on, GP 14. Scan
to E-mail is disabled,
print and other
the 16-950-19 to 16959-19 E-mail Application Registration Error
RAP
17-556-00 The server Fax service Server Fax service cannot uncannot un-register. Notify register
OF 4a
Status
Code
Reason for Message
17-553-00 Internet Fax service can- Internet Fax service cannot

register
not register. Power off
17-554-00 E-mail service cannot

register. Power off then
administrator

then on, GP 14. Server
Fax is disabled, print
16-988-19 Server Fax
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
then on, GP 14. Internet Fax is disabled,
print and other
the 16-950-19 to 16959-19 Other Network
Faults 19 RAP
E-mail service cannot un-reg- Switch the machine off

ister
to E-mail is disabled,
print and other
the 16-950-19 to 16959-19 E-mail Application Registration Error
RAP
17-559-00 Workflow scanning ser- Network scanning service

vice cannot register.
cannot register.

service is disabled,
print and other
the 16-985-19, 16-98619 Network Scanning
17-560-00 The workflow scanning Network scanning service

service cannot un-regis- cannot un-register.
ter. Notify your system
administrator

service is disabled,
print and other
the 16-985-19, 16-98619 Network Scanning
February 2013
2-552

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
17-561-00 The reprint saved jobs

Reprint saved jobs service
service cannot un-regis- cannot un-register.
administrator
17-562-00 No communications with Registration with edge server

Xerox SMart eSolutions fails
server. Contact system
administrator
17-563-00 No communications with Communication with edge

Xerox SMart eSolutions server fails
server. Contact system
administrator

Reference / Action
then on, GP 14. Reprinting of saved jobs
in disabled. If the problem persists, perform
the 16-752-00, 16-75300 File Cabinet Application Registration
Error RAP
User intervention is
required to review
SMart eSolutions settings. Machine services are unaffected. If
16-892-00 Edge
Server Auto Registration Failed RAP
required to review
SMart eSolutions settings. Machine services are unaffected. If
16-892-00 Edge
Server Auto Registration Failed RAP
17-565-00 Extensible services are

not responding. Power
machine off then on
EIP service not responding

then on, GP 14.
Machine services are
unaffected
Communication with NNTP

server failed
required to verify network time protocol
server settings, operability and machine
time. Machine services are unaffected
17-580-00 Please wait disk

encryption operation in
progress.
Disk encryption is in progress No service action

required, please wait
for encryption to finish
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
17-590-00 Image overwrite is in

progress the machine
is offline.
Image overwrite (ODIO) is in

progress
No service action
required, please wait
for the overwrite to finish
17-507-00 On Demand Overwrite

Failed. Perform an On
Demand Overwrite
immediately.
HDD or FAX On Demand

Overwrite Failed.
On Demand Overwrite
error. Administrator
intervention is required
to perform an On
Demand Image Overwrite immediately.
Printing can continue;
other machine services
are unaffected.

Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
19-502-00 Please wait, freeing

memory
UI Message
Out of memory
resources. The machine
has run out of image
processing memory for
the current job
No user intervention required,

please wait, printing will resume
after memory is freed. Other
machine services are unaffected. If the problem persists,
perform the 19-401-00, 19-40200 Stress Out of Memory RAP
19-505-00 Some jobs may have

been deleted
Compressor DVMA
time-out. Current job
has been deleted
Confirm that UI message has

been seen. Re-scan the job. If
the problem persists, perform
the 19-403-00 EPC Out of
Memory RAP
19-506-00 Immediate job overwrite failed. Perform

an on demand overwrite immediately
Immediate job overwrite failed
Administrator intervention is
required to perform an on
demand image overwrite immediately. Printing can continue.
Other machine services are
unaffected
19-507-00 On Demand Overwrite HDD or FAX On

Failed. Perform an On Demand Overwrite
Demand Overwrite
Failed.
immediately.
February 2013
2-553
On Demand Overwrite error.

required to perform an On
Demand Image Overwrite
immediately. Printing can continue; other machine services
are unaffected.
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
19-510-00 Please wait.... the

System is attempting to No service action required.
system is attempting to recover. Image disk
Printing and other machine services are unaffected
recover
error
19-511-00 Image disk is offline.
Job(s) may take longer
than normal. Notify
Image disk unavailable.

Performance is
degraded. Service is
required
The system is unable to read

from the image disk. Jobs may
take longer than normal. Perform the 19-300-00 to 19-31000 Image Disk (HDD) Failure
RAP
19-512-00 Image disk offline.

The image disk cannot

read or write and must
be serviced. Power off/
power on will temporarily alleviate the problem.

from the image disk. Printing
has stopped. Perform the 19300-00 to 19-310-00 Image
Disk (HDD) Failure RAP
19-513-00 Please wait... The

image disk is full
The image disk is full
Print jobs may be delayed. No

service action required. The
system is attempting to recover.
Printing and other machine services are available
19-514-00 All incomplete jobs

have been deleted
Video job integrity fault

detected
Video job integrity error; one or

more jobs were deleted. No
user intervention is required;
the system has recovered.
Printing and other machine services can continue. If the problem persists, perform the 19409-00 Job Integrity Failure
RAP
19-550-00 Configuration mismatch
The single board controller cannot access the

EPC memory or the
image disk
Status
Codes
UI Message
Reason for Message
20-544-00 Please wait... The Fax ser- The Fax service is initializing The Fax service is restarting. No user intervice is initializing
vention is required.
Printing and other
available
20-545-00 Fax job could not be sent
at this time, please try
again
A Fax job could not be sent
Fax job could not be

sent, re-try. Printing
and other machine
services are available
20-546-00 Fax memory is low. Contact your system administrator
Not enough memory to use

Fax service
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14.
Fax and LAN Fax are
disabled. Printing and
other machine services are unaffected.
Fax System Memory
Low RAP
20-547-00 Fax memory is low. Contact your system administrator
Fax memory is low
required to delete
unnecessary mailbox
files or Fax jobs
stored for polling. FAX
and LAN Fax services are disabled.
Printing and other
unaffected. If the
20-324-00 Fax System Memory Low
RAP

GP 14.
Install a new EPC memory
module, PL 3.11 Item 21. Install
a new hard disk drive, PL 3.11
Item 2. Install a new single
board control PWB, PL 3.11
Item 13
20-550-00 Fax line 2 is unavailable. Extended Fax card failure
Notify your system admin- detected
istrator
OF 4a
Reference / Action
February 2013
2-554
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14.
Fax service can continue from line 1.
Printing and other
available

Status
Codes
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
20-556-00 Fax memory error. Power Fax service error. Reset Fax Fax and LAN Fax are
off then on and notify sys- service
disabled. Switch the
tem administrator
GP 14. Printing and
If the problem persists, perform the 20331-00, 20-338-00,
20-339-00, 20-34100, 20-345-00 Fax
Network Line 1 Fault
RAP
20-558-00 Fax memory error. Power Fax memory error
off then on and notify system administrator
Fax and LAN Fax are

GP 14. Printing and
If the problem persists, perform the 20322-00 Non-Volatile
Device not Installed
RAP
20-559-00 Fax memory error. Power Fax service error

Fax and LAN Fax are

GP 14. Printing and
If the problem persists, perform the 20320-00 Fax Fault Not
Cleared by Reset
RAP
Status
Codes
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
20-562-00 Fax line 1 is unavailable. No communication on Fax

Check line connection or line 1
notify your system administrator
required to check the
external phone line
connection. Fax and
LAN Fax are disabled.
Printing and other
unaffected. If the
20-338-00, 20-33900, 20-341-00, 20345-00 Fax Network
Line 1 Fault RAP
20-563-00 Fax line 2 is unavailable. No communication on Fax

Check line connection or line 2
notify your system administrator
required to check the
external phone line
connection. Fax and
Printing and other
unaffected. If the
20-340-00 Fax Network Line 2 Fault RAP
20-565-00 Fax job limit has been

reached. Power off then
administrator
All jobs IDs allocated cannot Switch the machine

create any more
off then on, GP 14.
Fax and LAN Fax are
disabled

February 2013
2-555
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14.
Fax and LAN Fax are
disabled. Printing and
other machine services are unaffected
OF 4a

Status
Codes
UI Message
Reason for Message

20-572-00 Fax line 2 is unavailable.

Call for assistance
20-580-00 Fax service is unavailable. Turn machine off

then on
20-595-00 Fax line 1 is unavailable.

OF 4a
Fax service error. Fax line 2

is unavailable
NVM values supplied by the

Fax are invalid. Fax NVM
data error
Fax service Error. Fax line 1

is unavailable
Reference / Action
Fax line 1 is unavailable. Switch the
GP 14. Fax and LAN
Fax are disabled.
Printing and other
unaffected. If the
20-338-00, 20-33900, 20-341-00, 20345-00 Fax Network
Line 1 Fault RAP
Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14.
Fax and LAN Fax are
degraded. Printing
and other machine
services are unaffected. If the problem
20-332-00, 20-340-00
Fax Network Line 2
Fault RAP
No service action
required. Fax and
Printing and other
unaffected
Fax line 1 is unavailable. Switch the
GP 14. Fax and LAN
Fax are disabled.
Printing and other
unaffected. If the
20-338-00, 20-33900, 20-341-00, 20345-00 Fax Network
Line 1 Fault RAP
Status
Codes
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
22-502-04 Select the current messages button in the

machine status for more
information
An active message has been Go to the Status

produced.
screen and select the
Faults tab. Press the
Active Messages
button and perform
the action appropriate
to the message
22-503-04 All incomplete jobs have

been deleted.
System error. Jobs have

No user intervention is
been lost and must be resub- required. Machine is
temporarily unavailmitted
able
22-503-05 The number of originals

was less than the number
originally scanned
Insufficient originals detected Re-sort and reload all

in the DADH.
originals
22-504-04 No tray is configured with

the required paper size
No paper tray is configured to Print and copy serrun the stock size required for vices are disabled,
other machine serthis job
vices are unaffected
Job must be deleted.
Paper tray must be
configured to match
the job. If the problem
22-310-04 to 22-31804 Other Network
Faults 25 RAP
22-504-05 Invalid original size

detected. It will be treated
as the next largest standard size
Invalid mixed size original

pair detected
Make sure the originals are not creased

or folded
If the problem persists, perform the 05257-00 RAP
22-504-16 Machine is in a non customer mode.
Non customer mode. Auto

configuration is disabled.
Wait for machine to exit Diagnostics mode. The machine
is unavailable
Enter customer mode.

Enter dC131 Read/
Write and check that
NVM ID 425-001 = 0,
425-003 = 0 and 61614 = 4
February 2013
2-556

Status
Codes
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
22-505-00 Remove documents from

the document feeder input
tray or close the document
feeder.
Documents sensed in the

DADH tray during IIT standby
and document handler cover
is open.
To scan from the document glass, remove

documents in the document feeder input
tray. To use the document feeder to scan
your documents,
lower the document
feeder.
22-505-02 Remove documents from

the document feeder input
tray or close the document
feeder
Documents sensed in the

DADH tray during IIT standby
and document handler cover
is open
To scan from the document glass, remove

documents in the document feeder input
tray. To use the document feeder to scan
your documents,
lower the document
feeder
22-505-17 Machine is in a non-customer mode
Machine is in a non-customer Enter customer mode

Enter dC131 Read/
mode
NVM ID 425-001 = 0,
425-003 = 0 and 61614 = 4
22-506-17 Auto configuration is disabled
Machine is in a non-customer Enter customer mode

mode
Enter dC131 Read/
NVM ID 425-001 = 0,
425-003 = 0 and 61614 = 4
22-507-05 The document size was

different than expected.
The job has been deleted
Document is larger than

expected
Try one of the following: Select mixed size

originals and reload
into the document
feeder or make sure
the originals are not
creased or folded and
retry from the document glass. If the
RAP
Status
Codes
UI Message
22-508-04 Scanning will be delayed
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Scan start up delayed whilst

awaiting resources
required. Job will
begin when system is
ready. If the problem
22-330-06 ESS Scan
to Distribution Service not Responding
to List Jobs RPC Call
RAP
22-511-04 Paper required for current Media required for current

job is not available
marking job is not loaded
Load the correct

paper to complete the
held job or cancel the
held job. Other
unaffected
22-512-04 Auto paper select is not

available
All trays direct select only
System administrator
intervention is
required to enable at
least one tray for auto
select. Printing and
copying can continue
without auto select,
other machine services are unaffected
22-513-04 One or more queued jobs

need resources
One or more queued jobs in

the system are being held
due to lack of resources
Add paper to the tray

being used to clear
queued job. Jobs will
be held until
resources become
available. Other
unaffected
22-557-00 Configuration parameter

error.
Serial number sync failure,

power on failed
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14. Go
to dC132, check the
serial number is correct. Enter dC131
NVM ID 616-003,
check machine configuration.
RAP, 22-351-01 to 22351-03 RAP, 22-35200 RAP
February 2013
2-557
OF 4a

Status
Codes
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
22-558-00 -
An HFSI item has reached or Reset Actual count to

exceeded its threshold
zero or reset the
threshold
22-563-00 System error. Power off

administrator
Incomplete system information
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14. All
disabled
22-566-00 The Fax service cannot

register. Notify your system administrator
Fax service cannot register
Switch the machine

off then on, GP 14.
Fax and LAN Fax are
disabled. Other
unaffected. If the
22-372-00 RAP
22-567-00 The Fax service cannot

un-register. Notify your
Fax service cannot un-regis- Switch the machine

ter
off then on, GP 14. All
disabled. If the problem persists, perform
the 22-371-00, 22372-00 RAP
22-568-00 -
Status requiring POPO

detected & auto-reset count
less than 2.
The system will try to

power off then on
twice before asking
for assistance
22-570-00 Cleaning unit needs to be

replaced. Replace the
cleaning unit now
DC1001 command to IME

reports successful entry into
snooze mode
Cleaning unit life

extended. No user
intervention is
required. Print and
copy services are
available, but Image
quality may be
affected.
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
70-111-00
Ready to scan. Copying and printing not

available. Jam in area
1b
Jam in lower feeder vertical

transport (tray 5 not installed)
Clear the media jam.

Copying and printing
are not available. If the
problem persists, perform the 71-101-00 to
71-161-00 RAP, 72101-00 to 72-161-00
RAP
70-111-01

1b

transport (A4 tray 5 installed)

71-161-00 RAP, 72101-00 to 72-161-00
RAP
70-111-02

1b

transport (A3 tray 5 installed)

71-161-00 RAP, 72101-00 to 72-161-00
RAP
70-305-00 Ready to scan. Copying and printing not

available. Bottom left
side door is open
Feeder vertical transport lower Copying and printing

left door is open
are not available. Close
the door. If the problem
70-305-00, 70-325-00
RAP
70-312-00 Trays 1 to 3 are not

Communications failure for

trays 1 to 3

RAP
70-314-00 Tray 1 is not available. Trays 1 - 3 out of service (com- Copying and printing
Notify the system
are not available. Permunications failure)
administrator
form the 70-312-00
Tray 1 to Tray 3 Communication Failure
RAP.
OF 4a
February 2013
2-558

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Misfeed in tray 1

are not available.
If the problem persists,
to 71-161-00 RAP
71-103-00 Unexpected paper size Media size mismatch in tray 1

or type detected from (alternate method)
tray 1
71-300-00 -
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
71-536-00 Tray 1 lifting
Tray 1 lifting
No service action
required. Print and copy
services can continue
from other rays if the
correct media is available
Open tray 1.Check

paper size, orientation
and type. If the problem
71B RAP.

available. Misfeed in
tray 2
Misfeed in tray 2

are not available.
Refer to 72-101-00 to
72-161-00 RAP
Tray 1 is open
Close tray. Printing can

continue from other
trays

tray 2
71-301-00 Tray 1 is open
Dedicated tray 1 is open
Check the paper and

close the tray. Printing
can continue from other
trays.
Refer to WD 7.5
Open tray 2.Check

and type. Print and
copy services can continue from other rays if
the correct media is
available
72-300-00 -
Tray 2 is open
Adjustable tray 1 is open
Check the paper and

close the tray. Printing
trays.
Refer to WD 7.5
Close tray. Printing can

continue from other
trays
72-301-00 Tray 2 is open. Check

paper and close the
tray
Dedicated tray 2 is open
Close tray. Print and

available. Refer to 72320-00 RAP and WD
7.5.

paper and close the
tray

available. Refer to 72320-00 RAP and WD
7.5.

tray 1
71-313-00 Tray 1 is not available. Tray 1 mechanical failure

Notify your system
administrator
71-530-00 Tray 1 is empty. Add

paper
Tray 1 is out of media
71-535-00 Tray 1 is nearly empty. Tray 1 media low

Add paper

are not available.
Tray 1 Elevate Up Failure RAP
Add media. Copying
and printing can continue from other trays.
Refer to 71A RAP and
WD 7.5
Add media. Copying
and printing can continue from other trays.
Refer to 71A RAP and
WD 7.5
UI Message
72-313-00 Tray 2 is not available. T2 out of service (mechanical

Notify your system
failure)
administrator
February 2013
2-559

then on, GP 14. Print
and copy services can
continue from other
trays if the correct
media is available. If
Tray 2 Elevate Up Failure RAP.
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message

paper
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Add media. Print and

copy services can continue from other trays if
available. Refer to 72A
RAP

Add paper

available
No service action
required. Print and copy
services can continue
from other trays if the
correct media is available

tray 3
Tray 2 lifting
Misfeed in tray 3

are not available.
73-161-00 RAP

Tray 3.
Open tray 3.Check

and type. Print and
available
73-111-00

73-161-00 Tray 3 MisFeed Jam RAP
Ready to scan. Copy- Jam in tray 3 horizontal transing and printing not
port
available. Jam in Paper
Transport.

paper and close the
tray
Tray 3 is open
Close Tray. Print and

available
Tray 3 is open
Close Tray. Printing can

continue from other
trays. If the problem
73-320-00 RAP
OF 4a
Status
Code
UI Message

paper and close the
tray
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

available. If the problem
73-320-00 RAP
73-305-00 Ready to scan. Copy- Feeder horizontal transport

drawer is open
ing and printing not
available. Paper transport is open.
Close the feeder horizontal transport. Copying and printing are not
73-325-00 Feeder HT
Drawer Open in Run
RAP
73-313-00 Tray 3 is not available. T3 out of service (mechanical

Notify your system
failure)
administrator

continue from other
RAP, 73-215-00 RAP

paper

available.
perform the 73A RAP

Add paper

available
Tray 3 lifting
Print and copy services

media is available
74-102-00 Misfeed in tray 4

(bypass).
Misfeed in tray 4

are not available.
Refer to 74-101-00, 74160-00 to 74-161-00
RAP
February 2013
2-560

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action

tray 4 (bypass).
Open tray 4, check

and type. Print and
available. Refer to WD
8.3
74-120-00 -
Adjust the paper tray

guides and confirm the
paper tray settings.
Bypass Tray Guides
Move in Run RAP
74-313-00 Tray 4 (bypass) is not

Tray 4 guides move in run
Tray 4 mechanical failure

continue from other
media is available.
Refer to the following,
74-101-00, 74-160-00
to 74-161-00 Bypass
Tray Mis-Feed RAP, 74120-00 Bypass Tray
Guides Move in Run
RAP and 74-214-00
Bypass Tray Nudger
Failure RAP.
74-530-00 -

available
Misfeed in tray 5: A4 PFP

are not available.
75-160-00 to 75-161-00
RAP
Status
Code
UI Message
75-102-01 Misfeed in Tray 5.
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Misfeed in Tray 5: A3 PFP

problem persists, perform the 75-101-00, 75160-00 to 75-161-00
RAP

tray 5
Lower Tray 5 using the

button indicated. Check
and type. Print and
available

tray 5
Lower Tray 5 using the

button indicated.Check
and type.
75-110-00 Jam in tray 5 docking

area
Jam in tray 5 docking area
Clear the misfeed.

are not available. Refer
to 75-101-00, 75-16000 to 75-161-00 RAP.
75-110-01 Jam in tray 5 docking

area
Jam in tray 5 docking area A3

PFP
Clear the misfeed.

are not available. Refer
to 75-101-00, 75-16000 to 75-161-00 RAP.
75-300-00 -
Tray 5 is open

RAP.
Tray 5 is open

RAP.
February 2013
2-561
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message

Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
75-305-00 Tray 5 is undocked
Tray 5 is undocked
Re-dock tray 5 to the

machine. Print and
available. Refer to 75325-00 RAP.

paper
Tray 5 is undocked

machine. Print and
available. Refer to 75325-00 RAP.

Add paper

75B RAP.
75-312-00 Tray 5 is not available. Tray 5 communications failure Switch the machine off,
Notify your system
GP 14. Check cabling
administrator
connections. Switch the
machine on, GP 14.
media is available.
Refer to 75-312-00
RAP.
Tray 5 lifting
No action required.
media is available
75-537-00 Tray 5 lowering
Tray 5 lowering
No action required.
media is available
75-313-00 Tray 5 is not available. Tray 5 mechanical failure

Notify the system
administrator

or type detected from
tray 6 (inserter)
75-525-00 Tray 5 is overloaded.

Remove some paper
OF 4a
Tray 5 is overloaded
Tray 5 is not available.

Remove some media.
75-215-00 RAP.
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

75B RAP
Open tray 6.Check and

confirm paper size, orientation and type.

Status
Code
UI Message

available. Paper jam in
area 1A
February 2013
2-562
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
IME jam at zone 1A (middle

vertical) (tray 5 not installed)
Open middle left door,

clear the paper jam. If
to 82-114-00, 82-15200, 82-157-00 to 82159-00, 82-164-00 to
82-166-00 RAP and
82-133-00 RAP. Copying and printing are not
available

Status
Code
UI Message
82-100-01 Paper jam in area 1A
82-100-02 Paper jam in area 1a.
82-101-00 Paper jam in area 2
82-103-00 The machine is not

available. Paper jam in
areas 2 and 1a

available

Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
IME jam at zone 1A (middle

vertical) (A4 PFP installed)
Slide tray 5 away from

the machine, open the
middle left door, clear
the paper jam. If the
82-114-00, 82-152-00,
82-157-00 to 82-15900, 82-164-00 to 82166-00 RAP. Copying
and printing are not
available
the machine, open the
middle left door, clear
the paper jam. If the
82-114-00, 82-152-00,
82-157-00 to 82-15900, 82-164-00 to 82166-00 RAP
89-561-00 -
Jam at zone 1A (middle vertical) (A3 PFP installed)
IME jam at zone 2 (upper verti- Open upper left door,

clear the paper jam.
cal)
82-133-00, 82-153-00,
82-160-00, 82-162-00,
82-163-00 RAP, 82132-00, 82-155-00.
are not available
Sensor 16 LE time out that
originated from the A4 PFP
Sensor 16 LE time out that

originated from the A3 PFP

the machine. Open the
top and middle left
side door to clear jam.
RAP.
not available. Slide
tray 5 away from the
machine. Open the top
and middle left side
door to clear jam. If the
RAP.
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
88-510-00 Please wait... Preheater cleaning in

progress
IME preheater cleaning
Please wait until cleaning is completed. The

printer is temporarily
unavailable.
88-511-00 Please wait Print

engine cooling in
progress
Media is exhausted during the No service action

cooling phase of clean for ink required. Please wait,
smears
cooling in progress...
89-525-00 -
IME clam shell open
89-560-00 Registration in progress IME registration calibration
Please wait. The

printer is temporarily
unavailable
NVM entries for RALPH media Refer to OF 12 Service

registration calibration got cor- Code RAP
rupted or reset.

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
91-584-00 Waste tray not detected Waste ink tray is missing (not
(missing). Insert the
full and not present).
waste tray
Reference / Action
Install a waste ink tray,
PL 91.10 Item 15. Print
and copy services are
disabled. If the problem persists, refer to
WD 9.4. and 91-83200 RAP
91-589-00 Waste tray locked while IME waste ink tray is locked in in use. Do not attempt place to allow it to cool
to remove
91-590-00 Waste tray is almost full IME waste tray is almost full
and will need emptying
soon
The tray will need to be

emptied soon. Printing
and copying can continue
91-591-00 Waste tray is full.

IME waste tray is full
Please empty the waste
tray
Empty the tray. Copying and printing are not

available. If necessary
refer to WD 9.4.

available
February 2013
2-563
Head to drum measurement is Head to drum spacing

started.
check in progress.
Please wait, this may
take up to ten minutes
to complete.
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action

available
Waste tray removal detected, The waste tray is curwhen the waste tray is locked. rently in use, please
re-insert the waste
tray. Copying and
printing are not available
91-632-00 -
Print head 1 has changed

since last boot
91-633-00 -

since last boot
91-634-00 -

since last boot
91-635-00 -

since last boot
91-636-00 -
The IOD automatic image

If the problem permaintenance tool has tried
sists, perform the 91repeatedly to run and has
636-00 RAP
failed enough to exceed the
disabled limitation, or has been
manually disabled via diagnostics
91-637-00 -
IOD Y run out NVRAM param- If the problem pereters are reset.
sists, perform the 91637-00 RAP
91-638-00 -
IOD chronic jets detected.
91-639-00 -
Sent once per cold purge. Sent No service action

when the overall purge, which required
might request multiple heads to
be purged, is requested. A cold
purge is performed at power
up. That is, the ink in the system is cold, it is warmed up,
then a purge is performed
91-640-00 -
OF 4a
Perform 91-638-00
RAP
Sent once per warm purge.

No service action
Sent when the overall purge,
required
which might request multiple
heads to be purged, is
requested. A warm purge is
performed during the lifetime of
a power on session. The ink is
already up to temp, then the
print heads are purged
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
91-641-00 -
A freeze off means that 1, or

No service action
more, print heads are allowed required
to cool down so that the ink is
in a solid state. This would then
be followed by a cold purge.
The freeze off would be communicated by the freeze off DC
status updates, and the cold
purges that would follow would
be communicated by the cold
purge DC status updates
91-642-00 -
Sent when a cold purge for

head 1 has completed
No service action
required
91-643-00 -

No service action
required
91-644-00 -

No service action
required
91-645-00 -

No service action
required
91-646-00 -
Sent when a warm purge for

No service action
required
91-647-00 -

No service action
required
91-648-00 -

No service action
required
91-649-00 -

No service action
required
91-650-00 -
Head 1 freeze off - has completed
No service action
required
91-651-00 -
No service action
required
91-652-00 -
No service action
required
91-653-00 -
No service action
required
91-654-00 Please wait... print

Head purge in progress
engine maintenance head purge in progress
No service action
required.
91-659-00 Please wait... automated print engine

maintenance in
progress
Auto maintenance routines in

progress
No service action
required.
91-668-00 Please wait... print

quality maintenance in
progress
IME print quality maintenance

in progress
No service action
required.
February 2013
2-564

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
91-840-00 -
IME in jet substitution and sin- No service action

required.
gle sided print mode. Increments the AIF counter by 1
91-841-00 -
IME in jet substitution and sin- No service action

required.
gle sided print mode. Increments the AIF counter by 2
Empty the waste tray,
then replace it in the
machine
92-530-00 Paper tray communica- IME communications problem

tion fault. Please call for with paper tray. Paper trays 1
to 3 not available
assistance

then on, GP 14. Check
connection on 3 trays
module. If problem
70-312-00 Tray 1 to
Tray 3 Communication
Failure RAP. Copying
available.
92-531-00 Paper tray communica- 3TM Communications probtion fault. Please call for lems (TtmSerialLinkSafety)
assistance

connection on 3 trays
module. If problem
70-312-00 Tray 1 to
Tray 3 Communication
Failure RAP. Copying
available.
92-535-00 Paper feeder communi- IME communications problem

with paper feeder platform.
cation fault. Call for
High capacity paper tray not
assistance
available

connection to printer. If
IME to Tray 5 Communication Failure RAP.
are not available.
Tray 5 communications problems (tray 5 SerialLinkSafety)
UI Message
92-572-00 System fault. Call for

assistance
91-847-00 Waste tray is full.

The waste tray is almost full
Please empty the waste and has also been removed
tray
92-536-00 Tray 5 is unavailable.

Please call for assistance
Status
Code

connection to printer. If
92-536-00 RAP. Copying and printing are not
available.
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
IME. An unrecoverable fault

has occurred

then on, GP 14. Copying and printing are not
available.
92-573-00 Please wait... Printer is Warming Up

warming up
Print and copy services will resume

shortly. Other machine
92-574-00 Please wait... adjustments are in progress
IME mechanical initialization
IME frame buffer borrow busy
Print engine adjustments in progress.

are temporarily
unavailable
Recovery in progress
92-578-00 Print engine in nonthermal mode.
IME in non-thermal mode. Print

engine is operating in non-thermal manufacturing mode. Print
and copy service disabled.
Enter diagnostics
dC335 and select a
heater routine. Run the
routine and then exit
diagnostics. The
machine warms up.
Enter dC131 Read/
NVM ID 425-003 = 0
Select exit and reboot.
92-582-00 Please wait... Warming IME cold boot timeout

up from extremely low
ambient temperature.
Please wait. Printing

and copying are not
available until the
machine temperature
is within specification
92-587-00 Please wait... Printer is IME long term warming up

warming up
The printer is warming

up. Print and copy services will resume
shortly. Other machine
92-802-00 -
Review dC123 PEST

fault history log
February 2013
2-565
PEST soft faults are raised
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
93-500-00 Black Ink is empty.

IME black ink is empty
Load Xerox ColorQube
Black Ink.
Load more black solid

ink. Copying and printing are not available.
Check the ink low sensor and harness. Refer
to WD 9.18.
93-501-00 Black ink stick is

Ink stick loaded sensor actujammed. Call for assis- ated. Ink stick transport motor
operated. Ink stick not detected
tance
by ink out sensor
Clear the ink loader

jam. Copying and
93-505-00 Magenta ink is empty. IME magenta ink is empty

Magenta Ink.
Load more magenta

solid ink. Copying and
printing are not available. Check the ink low
sensor and harness.
Refer to WD 9.18
93-506-00 Magenta ink stick is

tance
by ink out sensor.

jam. Copying and
93-510-00 Cyan ink is empty. Load IME cyan ink is empty

Xerox ColorQube Cyan
Ink.
Load more cyan solid

to WD 9.18
93-511-00 Cyan ink stick is

tance
by ink out sensor.

jam. Copying and
93-515-00 Yellow Ink is empty.

IME yellow ink is empty
Yellow Ink.
Load more yellow solid

to WD 9.18
93-516-00 Yellow ink stick is

tance
by ink out sensor.
93-821-00 Re-order Xerox ColorQube Ink
OF 4a

jam. Copying and
Black ink reorder threshold has Load more black solid

been reached
ink. Copying and printing can continue. If the
ink stick cannot be
loaded, go to OF 11.
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Magenta ink reorder threshold Load more magenta

has been reached
solid ink. Copying and
printing can continue.
If the ink stick cannot
be loaded, go to OF 11
Cyan ink reorder threshold has Load more cyan solid

been reached
ink stick cannot be
Yellow ink reorder threshold

has been reached

ink stick cannot be
93-825-00 Ink levels are low. Load Black ink low threshold has
Xerox ColorQube Ink
been reached
now
Load more black solid

ink sticks. Print and
other machine services are unaffected. If
the ink stick cannot be
93-826-00 Ink levels are low. Load Magenta ink low threshold has Load more magenta
Xerox ColorQube Ink
been reached
solid ink sticks. Print
now
93-827-00 Ink levels are low. Load Cyan ink low threshold has
Xerox ColorQube Ink
been reached
now
Load more cyan solid

93-828-00 Ink levels are low. Load Yellow ink low threshold has
Xerox ColorQube Ink
been reached
now

93-876-00 Ink loader main cover

open
Close the ink loader

door. Refer to WD 8.2.
Check the ink loader
switch (S93-025), PL
93.10 Item 19.
February 2013
2-566
Ink loader door is open. Close

the door. All machine services
are available

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
93-877-00 -
This status is raised when the

detected ink stick is different
from the expected one (as per
the billing type)
Incompatible black ink

detected. Refer to GP
34. Notify the system
administrator. All
available.
93-878-00 -

the billing type)
Incompatible magenta
ink detected. Refer to
GP 34. Notify the system administrator. All
available.
93-879-00 -

the billing type)
Incompatible cyan ink

administrator. All
available.
93-880-00 -

the billing type)
Incompatible yellow ink

administrator. All
available.
93-881-00 -

the billing type)
93-882-00 Incompatible magenta Magenta sold ink stick

ink stick detected,
expected, metered was
please contact the sys- detected
tem administrator.

administrator. All
available.
Check that the
machine is on the correct contract - Print a
configuration page,
General set up, service
plan. Check the ink
loaded is as per the
customers contract GP
34. Check the ink load
sensors dC330 - 93026 to 93-041
Status
Code
UI Message
93-883-00 Incompatible cyan ink

stick detected, please
contact the system
administrator.
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Cyan sold ink stick expected,

metered was detected
Check that the

configuration page,
plan. Check the ink
sensors dC330 - 93026 to 93-041
93-884-00 Incompatible yellow ink Yellow sold ink stick expected,

stick detected, please metered was detected
contact the system
administrator.
Check that the

configuration page,
plan. Check the ink
sensors dC330 - 93026 to 93-041
93-885-00 Incompatible Black ink Black sold ink stick expected,

stick detected. Notify
DMO was detected
your system administrator.
Check that the

configuration page,
plan. Check the ink
sensors dC330 - 93026 to 93-041
93-886-00 Incompatible black ink Black DMO ink stick expected,

sold was detected
Check that the

configuration page,
plan. Check the ink
sensors dC330 - 93026 to 93-041
February 2013
2-567
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
93-887-00 Incompatible black ink Black metered ink stick

expected, DMO was detected
Check that the

configuration page,
plan. Check the ink
sensors dC330 - 93026 to 93-041
93-905-00 -
It is raised when the IME rec- No service action

ognizes that the cyan ink stick required. All services
are available
is consumed. This means it
went past the ink low flag (it's
past the point it can be
removed from the system and
will be consumed). This is critical for supplies replenishment
and is used to estimate the rate
at which ink sticks are being
used
93-888-00 Incompatible black ink Black DMO ink stick expected,

Check that the

configuration page,
plan. Check the ink
sensors dC330 - 93026 to 93-041
93-906-00 -

ognizes that the magenta ink
required. All services
stick is consumed. This means are available
it went past the ink low flag (it's
used
93-907-00 -

ognizes that the yellow ink stick required. All services
are available
used
93-908-00 -

ognizes that the black ink stick required. All services
are available
used
93-889-00 Close the ink loader

main cover
In a recovery sequence or cold Close the ink loader

power start, when ink stick
main cover. Copying
door is open
available. Other
unaffected
93-893-00 Please wait... Automated print engine

maintenance in
progress
This is raised while the IME is No service action

attempting to clear a potentially required. Print and
jammed black ink stick
copy services are temporarily disabled

maintenance in
progress

jammed magenta ink stick

maintenance in
progress

jammed cyan ink stick

maintenance in
progress

jammed yellow ink stick
OF 4a
February 2013
2-568

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
93-925-00 Black ink stick jam. Add Black ink stick jam
black ink to aid jam
recovery.
Black ink stick jam

detected.Load a black
ink stick to aid jam
recovery. Copying and
printing not available.
93-926-00 Magenta ink stick jam. Magenta ink stick jam

Add magenta ink to aid
jam recovery.
Magenta ink stick jam

detected.Load a
magenta ink stick to
aid jam recovery.
not available.
93-927-00 Cyan ink stick jam. Add

cyan ink to aid jam
recovery.
Cyan ink stick jam
Cyan ink stick jam

detected.Load a cyan
ink stick to aid jam
93-928-00 Yellow ink stick jam.

Add yellow ink to aid
jam recovery.
Yellow ink stick jam
93-941-00 -
Magenta sold ink stick

93-942-00 -
93-943-00 -
93-944-00 -
Cyan sold ink stick expected,

DMO was detected

detected.Load a Yellow ink stick to aid jam
available.
administrator. All
available.
Yellow sold ink stick expected, Incompatible yellow ink

DMO was detected
administrator. All
available.
Magenta DMO ink stick
expected, sold was detected
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
93-945-00 -
Cyan DMO ink stick expected, Incompatible cyan ink

sold was detected
administrator. All
available.
93-946-00 -
Yellow DMO ink stick expected, Incompatible yellow ink

sold was detected
administrator. All
available.
93-947-00 -

detected
93-948-00 -
Cyan DMO ink stick expected, Incompatible cyan ink

administrator. All
available.
93-949-00 -
Yellow DMO ink stick expected, Incompatible yellow ink

administrator. All
available.
93-950-00 -
This status is raised when the Incompatible black ink

detected ink stick is not a sup- detected. Refer to GP
ported type
administrator. All
available.
93-951-00 -
This status is raised when the Incompatible magenta

detected ink stick is not a sup- ink detected. Refer to
ported type
available.
available.
February 2013
2-569
available.
OF 4a

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
93-952-00 -
This status is raised when the Incompatible cyan ink

ported type
administrator. All
available.
93-953-00 -
This status is raised when the Incompatible yellow ink

ported type
administrator. All
available.
93-954-00 -
Magenta metered ink stick

available.
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
94-502-00 Cleaning unit is not

Cleaning unit not present or not Install cleaning unit PL
detected. Please insert detected
94.10 Item 21. Refer to
cleaning unit
the 94-568-00, 94-57000, 94-572-00, 94-57300 Cleaning Unit Data
Error RAP. Copying
available
94-503-00 Cleaning Unit will need This status is raised when the
replacing soon. DO
machine is in the last 3000
NOT replace until
impressions
requested
Re-order cleaning unit,

PL 94.10 Item 21, but
do not install unit until
requested. Copying
and printing can continue
94-504-00 -
No service action
required. Machine services are unaffected
Cleaning unit predicted reorder message has been triggered, acknowledged and
temporarily suppressed
93-955-00 -
Cyan metered ink stick


administrator. All
available.
94-505-00 Cleaning unit fault. Call Cleaning unit failure. Replacing Install a new cleaning
for assistance quoting the cleaning unit may correct
unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.
error code 94-505
the fault
are not available.
Other machine services are unaffected
93-956-00 -
Yellow metered ink stick


administrator. All
available.
error code 94-528
the fault
are not available.
94-500-00 Cleaning unit will need Drum maintenance unit - predicted re-order message
replacing soon. Reorder now, DO NOT
replace until requested
Re-order cleaning unit,

PL 94.10 Item 21, but
do not install unit until
requested. Copying
error code 94-532
the fault
are not available.
94-501-00 Cleaning unit needs to

be replaced. Replace
cleaning unit now
Install a new cleaning

are not available
error code 94-533
the fault
are not available.
Cleaning unit is empty of oil

and needs replacing
94-547-00 -
OF 4a
February 2013
2-570
Y - axis belt ratio error. Imaging Install new drum belt,

drum belt is worn
PL 94.20 Item 2.
Refer to OF 12 Service
Code RAP

Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
error code 94-568
the fault
are not available.
error code 94-570
the fault
are not available.
error code 94-572
the fault
are not available.
error code 94-573
the fault
are not available.
94-600-00 Load 8.5 x 11" paper in Letter/A4 chase media needed Load the required
any tray to enable auto- to clean drum
media. Refer to GP 20.
drum cleaning
are not available
94-601-00 Load SRA3 (320 x 450 SRA3 paper needed to clean
mm) paper in any tray drum
to enable auto-drum
cleaning
Load the required

are not available
94-602-00 Load 12 x 18" paper in 12x18 chase media needed

any tray to enable auto- to clean drum
drum cleaning
Load the required

are not available
94-603-00 Please wait... Printer

cleaning in progress

available.
Chase sheet being Fed
94-604-00 Load A4 paper into any A4 chase media needed to

tray to enable autoclean drum
cleaning to proceed
Status
Code
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
94-610-00 Cleaning Unit fault. Call Cleaning unit failure

for assistance quoting
error code 94-610
A fault has occurred in

the cleaning unit.
unit PL 94.10 Item 21.

error code 94-611

the cleaning unit.

error code 94-612

the cleaning unit.

error code 94-613

the cleaning unit.
94-614-00 -
No service action
required
It is raised when the IME recognizes that the DMU has

changed

error code 94-619

the cleaning unit.

error code 94-622

the cleaning unit.
94-628-00 The installed cleaning

unit is not compatible
with this machine
IME has detected an incompat- Install a new cleaning

ible cleaning unit fitted to the
machine
are not available.
94-630-00 Cleaning unit communi- IME is unable to communicate

with the cleaning unit
cation error. Remove
and re-insert the cleaning unit
Remove and install the

cleaning unit. Copying
available.
Load any tray with A4

paper to enable autocleaning. Refer to GP
20.
February 2013
2-571
OF 4a
OF 4b Status Messages in Alphabetical Order
Table 1 Status messages - to F
Status Message Tables

The status message tables contain all the messages to which a status code can be attributed.
Table 1 Status Messages - to F
Table 2 Status Messages G to N.
Table 3 Status Messages O to R.
Table 4 Status Messages S to Y.

UI Message
-
Status
Code
Reason for Message
UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
16-556-00 There is an authentication problem between the

802.1x device and the
802.1x server
User intervention is required to

check the settings on the
802.1x device to ensure they
match the 802.1x server, then
switch the machine off then on,
GP 14.
17-570-00 Communication with

NNTP server has failed

verify network time protocol
server settings, operability and
machine time. Machine services are unaffected
22-502-00 An active message has

been produced
Go to the Status screen and

select the Faults tab. Press the
Active Messages button and
perform the action appropriate
to the message
22-558-00 An HFSI item has

reached or exceeded its
threshold
Reset Actual count to zero or

reset the threshold
22-568-00 A status requiring POPO The system will try to power off
has been detected &
then on twice before asking for
auto-reset count less
assistance
than 2
Reference / Action
01-550-00 NC status code - system

is in power save mode

received or a user initiates a
job at the machine
01-551-00 ESS status code - System is in sleep mode

received or a user initiates a
job at the machine
02-517-00 PagePack grace period

active
No service action required
02-518-00 PagePack grace period

expired
02-521-00 XEIP Browser is dead or

not responding
Perform the 02-321-00 XEIP

Browser Dead RAP.
03-521-00 The CCM to UI communi- Switch the machine off then on,
GP 14.
cation is lost
03-535-00 The machine has entered non-intrusive diagnostic

mode
Close tray. Printing can continue from other trays
Close tray. Printing can continue from other trays
03-536-00 The machine has entered intrusive diagnostic mode
74-120-00 Tray 4 guides have

moved in run
05-501-00 DADH is raised
Close the DADH. If the problem

persists, perform the 05-300-00
DADH Open RAP.
05-525-00 Document feeder tray

empty
Perform the 05B DADH Document Sensor Failure RAP.
05-535-00 The document feeder tray No service action required

is loaded
Adjust the paper tray guides

and confirm the paper tray settings. Print and copy services
can continue from other trays if
the correct media is available.
If the problem persists, perform
the 74-120-00 Bypass Tray
Guides Move in Run RAP
74-530-00 Tray 4 is out of media
Add media. Print and copy services can continue from other
trays if the correct media is
available
Close Tray. Print and copy services can continue from other
available. Refer to 75A RAP.
89-525-00 IME clam shell is open
10-536-00 The transfix calibration

NVRAM parameters are
reset.

RAP
12-410-00 PTU selected whilst

marking job is running
Pressing the Pause to Unload

button will cancel this request.
12-755-00 The finisher has detected Install 100 sheet staple cara 50 sheet staple. A 100 tridge
sheet staple cartridge
should be used
OF 4b
February 2013
2-572

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

UI Message

RAP
91-641-00 A freeze off means that

one or more, print heads
are allowed to cool down
so that the ink is in a solid
state. This would then be
followed by a cold purge.
The freeze off would be
communicated by the
freeze off DC status
updates, and the cold
purges that would follow
would be communicated
by the cold purge DC status updates
91-642-00 Sent when a cold purge No service action required

for head 1 has completed



91-646-00 Sent when a warm purge No service action required




91-650-00 Head 1 freeze off has

completed

completed

completed

completed
91-840-00 IME in jet substitution and No service action required.

single sided print mode.
Increments the AIF
counter by 1
89-561-00 NVM entries for RALPH

media registration calibration got corrupted or
reset
91-632-00 Print head 1 has changed since last boot
91-636-00 The IOD automatic image If the problem persists, perform

maintenance tool has
the 91-636-00 RAP
tried repeatedly to run
and has failed enough to
exceed the disabled limitation, or has been manually disabled via
diagnostics
91-637-00 IOD Y run out NVRAM

parameters are reset

the 91-637-00 RAP
91-638-00 IOD chronic jets are

detected
Perform the 91-638-00 RAP
91-639-00 Sent once per cold purge. No service action required

Sent when the overall
purge, which might
request multiple heads to
be purged, is requested.
A cold purge is performed
at power up. That is, the
ink in the system is cold,
it is warmed up, then a
purge is performed
91-640-00 Sent once per warm

purge. Sent when the
overall purge, which
might request multiple
heads to be purge, is
requested. A warm purge
is performed during the
lifetime of a power on
session. The ink is
already up to temp, then
the print heads are
purged
Status
Code
Reference / Action
February 2013
2-573
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
UI Message
91-841-00 IME in jet substitution and No service action required.

single sided print mode.
Increments the AIF
counter by 2
92-802-00 PEST soft faults are

raised
Review dC123 PEST fault history log
92-820-00 PEST warnings exist
93-877-00 Magenta sold ink stick

expected, DMO was
detected

detected. Refer to GP 34.
Notify the system administrator.
All machine services are available
93-878-00 This status is raised when

the detected ink stick is
different from the
expected one (as per the
billing type)
Incompatible magenta ink


different from the
billing type)


different from the
billing type)


different from the
billing type)

All machine services are available.
93-905-00 It is raised when the IME No service action required. All

recognizes that the cyan services are available
ink stick is consumed.
This means it went past
the ink low flag (it's past
the point it can be
removed from the system and will be consumed). This is critical for
supplies replenishment
and is used to estimate
the rate at which ink
sticks are being used
OF 4b
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

recognizes that the
magenta ink stick is consumed. This means it
went past the ink low flag
(it's past the point it can
be removed from the system and will be consumed). This is critical for

recognizes that the yelservices are available
low ink stick is consumed.
the point it can be

recognizes that the black services are available
ink stick is consumed.
the point it can be
93-941-00 Magenta sold ink stick

expected, DMO was
detected
February 2013
2-574


UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
93-942-00 Cyan sold ink stick

expected, DMO was
detected

93-951-00 This status is raised when Incompatible magenta ink

not a supported type
93-943-00 Yellow sold ink stick

expected, DMO was
detected

93-952-00 This status is raised when Incompatible cyan ink

93-944-00 Magenta DMO ink stick

expected, sold was
detected

93-953-00 This status is raised when Incompatible yellow ink

93-945-00 Cyan DMO ink stick

expected, sold was
detected

93-954-00 Magenta metered ink

stick expected, DMO was detected. Refer to GP 34.
detected
93-946-00 Yellow DMO ink stick

expected, sold was
detected

93-955-00 Cyan metered ink stick

expected, DMO was
detected

93-947-00 Magenta DMO ink stick

detected

93-956-00 Yellow metered ink stick

expected, DMO was
detected


different from the
billing type)
Incompatible Cyan Ink

Notify the System Administrator. All machine services are
available
94-504-00 Cleaning unit predicted

No service action required.
reorder message has
Machine services are unafbeen triggered, acknowl- fected
edged and temporarily
suppressed
93-949-00 Yellow DMO ink stick

detected

94-547-00 Y - axis belt ratio error.

Install new drum belt, PL 94.20
Imaging drum belt is worn Item 2.
RAP
93-950-00 This status is raised when Incompatible black ink

94-614-00 It is raised when the IME No service action required

recognizes that the DMU
has changed
February 2013
2-575
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

UI Message

perform the 20-331-00, 20-33800, 20-339-00, 20-341-00, 20345-00 Fax Network Line 1
Fault RAP
All output trays are

12-909-00 This status is raised
based upon the report
obstructions in the fincapabilities from the finisher
isher
Clear any obstructions or paper

jam. Switch the machine off
then on, GP 14. If the problem
persists, perform the 12-46200-110 RAP for LCSS
Auto configuration is
disabled
22-506-17 The machine is in a non

customer mode.
Enter customer mode

Enter dC131 Read/Write and
check that NVM ID 425-001 =
0, 425-003 = 0 and 616-14 = 4
Auto paper select is

not available
22-512-04 All trays are direct select

only
System administrator intervention is required to enable at

least one tray for auto select.
Printing and copying can continue without auto select, other
machine services are unaffected
Autonet functions are 16-508-00 Autonet is not available.

not available. Notify
your System Administrator

perform the 16-780-00 to 16789-47 Other Network Faults 3
RAP. Printing can continue if
other network protocols are
used
Black Ink is empty.

Load Xerox ColorQube Black Ink
93-500-00 IME black ink is empty
Load more black solid ink.

Copying and printing are not
available. Check the ink low
sensor and harness. Refer to
WD 9.18
Black ink stick is

jammed. Call for
assistance
93-501-00 The ink stick loaded sen- Clear the ink loader jam. Copysor is actuated. The ink
ing and printing are not availstick transport motor has able
operated. The ink stick is
not detected by the ink
out sensor.
Black ink stick jam.

Add black ink to aid
jam recovery
93-925-00 Black ink stick jam
Black ink stick jam detected.

Load a black ink stick to aid
jam recovery. Copying and
Booklet maker staple

cartridge is empty

are empty
The booklet maker staple cartridge is empty. Follow the

instructions at the printer to
load a new staple cartridge, PL
12.185 Item 8. Printing can
continue, but stapled booklet
making is unavailable
A Fax service error

has occurred. Power
off then on
03-550-00 Fax card is unavailable
A Fax service error

has occurred. Power
off then on
03-551-00 Fax service is unavailable Switch the machine off then on,
Fault RAP
A Fax service error

has occurred. Power
off then on
Accounting out of
memory. Notify your
03-547-00 Basic Fax card is not

detected or confirmed

Fault RAP
16-551-00 Network controller Accounting administrator

accounting log is full or a needs to retrieve accounting
hard disk full state exists data log from the system
Additional memory is 16-553-00 Network controller - not

required to support
enough physical memory GP 14. Hardware must be
scan to file. Notify
is configured on the plat- added or replaced
your system adminisform to support scan to
file
trator
All incomplete jobs
have been deleted
All incomplete jobs

have been deleted
19-514-00 A video job integrity fault

has been detected
OF 4b
Video job integrity error; one or

more jobs were deleted. No
user intervention is required;
the system has recovered.
Printing and other machine services can continue. If the problem persists, perform the 19409-00 Job Integrity Failure
RAP
22-503-04 System error. Jobs have No user intervention is

been lost and must be re- required. Machine is temposubmitted
rarily unavailable
All main stacker trays 12-945-00 All stacker trays have

unavailable. Power off
degraded capability,
then on and notify
except the booklet maker
tray
Status
Code
Reference / Action
Check for obstructions in the

buffer, stacker and top tray
areas. Switch the machine off
then on, GP 14. Check the current fault codes list for faults in
the buffer, stacker and top tray
areas and perform the appropriate RAP.
February 2013
2-576
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

UI Message
Status
Code
Booklet maker staple

cartridge is empty

are empty
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
UI Message
Install a new booklet maker

staple cartridge
Booklet Stapler not

available. Power off
then on and notify
Booklet Maker Staple 12-644-00 Booklet maker staples

The booklet maker staple cartridge is empty. User intervenCartridge is empty
are empty and the HVF
finisher front door is open tion is required to install a new
booklet maker staple cartridge,
PL 12.185 Item 8. Printing and
copying can continue without
stapled booklet making.
Booklet Maker staples low. Re-order
Booklet Staple Cartridge

are low
Booklet Making and

12-943-00 Booklet making or tri-folding capability is degraded
Tri-folding are unavailable. Check for
obstructions
The booklet maker staple cartridge supplies are low. Reorder staple cartridge, PL
12.185 Item 8.
HVF BM and the tri-folder.
Check that the HVF BM and trifolder interlocks are made.
codes list for HVF BM or trifolder faults and perform the
appropriate RAP.
Booklet making is
12-913-00 The back stop motor fails Clear the paper jam. Switch the
to move or is not at the
machine off then on, GP 14. If
obstructions in the BM
home position
the 12-065-00-171, 12-383-00171 HVF BM Backstop Motor
Fault RAP
Booklet stapler not
then on and notify
Booklet Stapler not

then on and notify
12-720-00 Failure of any BM or TF

function. The booklet
maker and tri-folder are
currently unavailable

HVF BM and the tri-folder.
appropriate RAP.
12-726-00 Failure of the booklet

Perform 12-063-00-171, 12maker stapling functions. 411-00-171 RAP for staple unit
1, and 12-403-00-171, 12-41300-171, 12-414-00-171 RAP
for staple unit 2
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
12-743-00 Booklet making & tri-fold- Booklet Making and Tri-folding

is unavailable. Switch the
ing are unavailable.
machine off then on, GP 14.
Check the current fault code list
for HVF BM or tri-fold faults and
go to appropriate RAP. Printing
can continue to all available
output trays
Check the settings for 01-540-01 Paper removed or added Confirm tray 1 settings.
tray 1
to tray 1
tray 2
to tray 2
tray 3
to tray 3
tray 4
to tray 4
tray 5
to tray 5
tray 6
to tray 6
Cleaning unit commu- 94-630-00 IME is unable to commu- Remove and install the cleannication error.
nicate with the cleaning
ing unit. Copying and printing
Remove and re-insert
unit
are not available.
the cleaning unit
Cleaning unit fault.
94-505-00 Cleaning unit failure.
Call for assistance
Replacing the cleaning
quoting error code 94unit may correct the fault
505
Install a new cleaning unit, PL

94.10 Item 21. Copying and
printing are not available. Other

Call for assistance
528


Call for assistance
532


Call for assistance
533

February 2013
2-577
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
UI Message

Call for assistance
568

Cleaning unit is not

detected. Please
insert cleaning unit

Call for assistance
570


Call for assistance
572


Call for assistance
573

Cleaning Unit fault.

94-610-00 Cleaning unit failure
Call for assistance
quoting error code 94610.
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
94-502-00 Cleaning unit not present Install cleaning unit PL 94.10

or not detected.
Item 21. Refer to the 94-56800, 94-570-00, 94-572-00, 94573-00 Cleaning Unit Data
Error RAP. Copying and printing are not available
Cleaning unit needs to 94-501-00 Cleaning unit is empty of Install a new cleaning unit, PL
oil and needs replacing. 94.10 Item 21. Copying and
cleaning unit now
Cleaning unit needs to 22-570-00 DC1001 command to
IME reports successful
the cleaning unit now
entry into snooze mode
Cleaning Unit life extended. No

user intervention is required.
Print and Copy services are
available, but Image quality
may be affected
Cleaning unit will

need replacing soon.
Reorder now, DO
NOT replace until
requested
94-500-00 Drum maintenance unit - Re-order cleaning unit, PL

predicted re-order mes- 94.10 Item 21, but do not install
unit until requested. Copying
sage
A fault has occurred in the

cleaning unit. Install a new
cleaning unit PL 94.10 Item 21
Cleaning Unit will

need replacing soon.
Re-order now. DO
NOT replace until
requested
94-503-00 This status is raised when Re-order cleaning unit, PL

the machine is in the last 94.10 Item 21, but do not install
3000 impressions.
unit until requested. Copying

Call for assistance
quoting error code 94611

cleaning unit. Install a new
cleaning unit PL 94.10 Item 21
Close Finisher
Inserter Left Side
Door
12-609-00 Inserter left cover open

(HVF without tri-folder)
Close inserter left cover

cleaning unit, install new cleaning unit PL 94.10 Item 21
Close Finisher Top

Cover
12-602-00 LCSS finisher top cover

open
Close the finisher top cover.

Call for assistance
Close Finisher Top

Cover.
12-606-00 Inserter top cover open
Close the inserter top cover

Close the Finisher

Folder Front Door
12-608-00 The tri-folder unit front

door is open (HVF with
tri-folder)
Close the tri-folder front door

Call for assistance
Close the Finisher

Folder Top Cover
12-607-00 Tri-folder top cover open

Close the tri-folder top cover

Call for assistance


Call for assistance

OF 4b
Close the Finisher Top 12-601-00 Finisher top cover open

Tray.
(cover over output tray)
Close the ink loader
main cover
February 2013
2-578
Close the top cover
93-889-00 In a recovery sequence

Close the ink loader main
or cold power start, when cover. Copying and printing are
ink stick door is open.
not available. Other machine

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

Status
Code
Reference / Action
UI Message
Communication error. 03-597-00 The document feeder is

not available. Use the
notify system adminisdocument glass
trator
Perform the 05-250-00, 05251-00 RAP
DHCPv6 services are 17-512-00 DHCPv6 Failure status


GP 14. Printing can continue
with other submission methods
Communication error. 05-538-00 DADH not available.

A document feeder fault has

occurred, copy jobs can only
be made from the document
glass. Printing can continue.
Do not switch the

power on again while
powering down is in
progress
01-500-00 IME power switch is

moved to the off position
Print jobs sent to the device will

not print and may be lost
Communication error. 05-542-00 DADH document transPower off then on and

port needs service
Perform the 05A RAP
Document feeder feed roller has been

replaced.
05-539-00 DADH feed head CRU

None
replaced. Message automatically cleared half a
second after setting
Configuration mismatch

GP 14.
module, PL 3.11 Item 21. Install
a new hard disk drive, PL 3.11
Item 2. Install a new single
board control PWB, PL 3.11
Item 13
Duplicate IPv4
address detected.
Reconfigure with a
unique address

detected
Reconfigure with a unique

address. Switch the machine
off then on, GP 14.
Duplicate IPv6
address detected.
Reconfigure with a
unique address

detected
Reconfigure with a unique

address. Switch the machine
continue
19-550-00 The single board controller cannot access the

EPC memory or the
image disk.
Configuration parame- 22-557-00 Serial number sync failter error

ure, power on failed

GP 14. Go to dC132, check the
serial number is correct. Enter
dC131 NVM ID 616-003, check
machine configuration.
the 22-350-01, 22-350-02 RAP,
22-351-01 to 22-351-03 RAP,
22-352-00 RAP
Cyan Ink is empty.

Load Xerox ColorQube Cyan Ink
93-510-00 IME cyan ink is empty
Load more cyan solid ink.

WD 9.18
Cyan ink stick is

jammed. Call for
assistance
93-511-00 Ink stick loaded sensor

actuated. Ink stick transport motor operated. Ink
stick not detected by ink
out sensor.
Clear the ink loader jam. Copying and printing are not available
Cyan ink stick jam.

Add cyan ink to aid
jam recovery.
93-927-00 Cyan ink stick jam
Cyan ink stick jam

detected.Load a cyan ink stick
to aid jam recovery. Copying
and printing not available
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
E-mail service cannot 17-554-00 Scan to E-mail service

register. Power off
cannot register.
then on and notify

GP 14. Scan to E-mail is disabled, print and other machine
services are unaffected. If the
problem persists, perform the
16-950-19 to 16-959-19 E-mail
Application Registration Error
RAP
Empty chad bin
Empty chad bin
12-549-00 Hole punch chad bin is

full and needs emptying
Enter your access

03-559-02 Walk up code entered
code or the current job
FDI. Not defined
may be deleted.
The job cannot be completed

due to insufficient funds. Enter
the access code on the external accounting device to continue the job
Extensible services
are not responding.
Power machine off
then on
17-565-00 EIP service not respond- Switch the machine off then on,
ing
GP 14. Machine services are
unaffected
Fax job could not be

sent at this time,
please try again
20-545-00 Fax job could not be sent Fax job could not be sent, retry. Printing and other machine
February 2013
2-579
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
UI Message
Fax job limit has been 20-565-00 All jobs IDs allocated can- Switch the machine off then on,
reached. Power off
GP 14. Fax and LAN Fax are
not create any more
then on and notify
disabled
Fax line 1 is unavailable. Call for assistance.
Fax line 1 is unavailable. Check line connection or notify your

Fax line 2 is unavailable. Check line connection or notify your

20-595-00 Fax service Error. Fax

line 1 is unavailable
20-562-00 No communication on
Fax line 1
20-563-00 No communication on
Fax line 2
Fax line 1 is unavailable.

disabled. Printing and other
Fault RAP
check the external phone line
connection. Fax and LAN Fax
are disabled. Printing and other
Fault RAP
check the external phone line
connection. Fax and LAN Fax
perform the 20-332-00, 20-34000 Fax Network Line 2 Fault
RAP
Fax line 2 is unavail- 20-572-00 Fax service error. Fax line Switch the machine off then on,
2 is unavailable
able. Fax line 1 is still
degraded. Printing and other
available.
perform the 20-332-00, 20-34000 Fax Network Line 2 Fault
RAP
Fax line 2 is unavailable. Notify your system administrator
OF 4b
03-548-00 Extended Fax not

detected/confirmed
Fax line 2 is unavailable. Notify your system administrator
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
20-550-00 Extended Fax card failure Switch the machine off then on,
detected
GP 14. Fax service can continue from line 1. Printing and
other machine services are
available
Fax memory error.

03-549-00 Fax POST failure status.

GP 14.
Fax memory error.

20-556-00 Fax service error. Reset
Fax service
Fax and LAN Fax are disabled.

GP 14. Printing and other
Fault RAP
Fax memory error.

20-558-00 Fax memory error

perform the 20-322-00 NonVolatile Device not Installed
RAP
Fax memory error.

20-559-00 Fax memory error

perform the 20-320-00 Fax
Fault Not Cleared by Reset
RAP
Fax memory error.

20-570-00 Fax service error

Check Fax line connection
February 2013
2-580

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

UI Message
Finisher Communica- 12-764-00 The IME cannot detect a

finisher plugged in
tion Error. Check
(including catch tray)
Cabling. Power Off
then On

GP 14. Check the finisher communication harness. If the
problem persists, perform 12762-00-110, 12-764-00-110,
12-765-00-110 RAP for LCSS.
12-762-00-171, 12-764-00171, 12-765-00-171 RAP for
HVF
Finisher Front Door

Open
12-564-02 Finisher front door open

Close the finisher front door
Finisher is not
docked. Re-dock finisher now
12-600-00 The finisher unit (LCSS)

is not correctly docked.
Printing has stopped
Dock the output module. If the

12-310-00-110, 12-312-00-110,
12-313-00-110 RAP
Finisher is not
12-600-01 The finisher unit (HVF

without tri-folder) is not
correctly docked. Printing has stopped

12-310-00-171, 12-312-00171, 12-313-00-171 RAP
Finisher is not
12-600-02 The finisher unit (HVF

with tri-folder) is not correctly docked. Printing
has stopped.

12-310-00-171, 12-312-00171, 12-313-00-171 RAP
Finisher main tray is

full
12-730-00 The stacker tray is full

(LCSS and HVF)
The middle output bin is full.

This output bin needs to be
unloaded. Printing to this output bin is disabled.
the 12-462-00-110 RAP or 12460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171
RAP

full
12-730-01 The stacker tray is full

(HVF)
The middle output bin is full.

This output bin needs to be
unloaded. Printing to this output bin is disabled.
the 12-460-00-171 to 12-46200-171 RAP
Finisher Main Tray is

nearly full
12-734-00 Stacker tray bin nearly full No action necessary

out of service. Power
12-665-00 Bin 1 out of service status Perform 12-151-00-110, 12(LCSS)

152-00-110 RAP
Fax memory is low.

Contact your system
administrator
20-546-00 Not enough memory to

use Fax service

perform the 20-323-00, 20-32400 Fax System Memory Low
RAP
Fax memory is low.

Contact your system
administrator
20-547-00 Fax memory is low

delete unnecessary mailbox
files or Fax jobs stored for polling. FAX and LAN Fax services
perform the 20-323-00, 20-32400 Fax System Memory Low
RAP
Fax memory. Power

20-571-00 Fax service error
Fax line 1 is unavailable.

Fault RAP
Fax service is unavail- 20-580-00 NVM values supplied by

able. Turn machine off
the Fax are invalid. Fax
then on
NVM data error
No service action required. Fax

and LAN Fax are disabled.
Printing and other machine services are unaffected
Finisher Communica- 12-762-00 Communication failure

tion Error. Check
between IME and finisher
Cabling. Power Off
then On

GP 14. Check the finisher communication harness. If the
problem persists, perform 12762-00-110, 12-764-00-110,
12-765-00-110 RAP for LCSS.
12-762-00-171, 12-764-00171, 12-765-00-171 RAP for
HVF.
Status
Code
Reference / Action
February 2013
2-581
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Status
Code
Reference / Action
UI Message
Finisher main tray out 12-902-00 Finisher is in degraded

of service. Check for
mode, stacker tray is out
obstructions in the
of service.
main tray

GP 14. Check for obstructions
in the tray
12-579-00 Hole punching is not

available
Finisher main tray out 12-906-00 Right center tray out of

of service. Check for
service, tray home fault
obstructions in the
main tray

GP 14. Check for obstructions
in the tray
Hole punching not

available. Power
machine off then on
and notify systems
administrator
Check that the hole punch unit

is correctly installed. Switch the
machine off then on, GP 14. If
the 12-043-00-110, 12-046-00110 RAP for LCSS, 12-044-00171 to 12-047-00-171 RAP for
HVF
Image disk is offline.

Job(s) may take
longer than normal.
Notify system administrator
19-511-00 Image disk unavailable.

Performance is
degraded. Service is
required

from the image disk. Jobs may
take longer than normal. Perform the 19-300-00 to 19-31000 Image Disk (HDD) Failure
RAP
Finisher top tray and

main tray are not
available
Reason for Message
Table 2 Status messages G to N
12-745-00 Top tray and stacker

unavailable (only booklet HVF BM and the tri-folder.
maker tray available)
appropriate RAP
Finisher top tray is full. 12-692-00 Top tray is full

Empty top tray
Empty top tray
Finisher top tray is

nearly full
12-729-00 The top output bin is

nearly full
The top output bin is nearly full.

This output bin may need to be
unloaded soon. Printing can
continue
Front door is open
01-510-00 The front door is open

available. Perform the 01-51000 Front Door Open RAP

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Hole punch not

12-640-00 Finisher punch unit is
detected (missing).
missing or incorrectly
Please insert the hole
installed
punch.
Make sure that the punch unit

is correctly installed.
the 12-043-00-110, 12-046-00110 RAP
Hole punching is
12-908-00 Punch head motor fails
obstructions in the
hole puncher
Clear the paper jam. Switch the

perform the 12-043-00-110, 12046-00-110 RAP for LCSS
OF 4b
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Image disk offline.

19-512-00 The image disk cannot
read or write and must
notify system adminisbe serviced. Power off/
power on will tempotrator
rarily alleviate the problem

from the image disk. Printing
has stopped. Perform the 19300-00 to 19-310-00 Image
Disk (HDD) Failure RAP
Image overwrite is in
progress the
machine is offline
No service action required,

please wait for the overwrite to
finish
17-590-00 Image overwrite (ODIO)

is in progress
Image rotation is not 03-564-00 Image rotation is not

available

GP 14
Immediate job overwrite failed. Perform

an on demand overwrite immediately
19-506-00 Immediate job overwrite

failed
demand image overwrite
immediately. Printing can continue. Other machine services
are unaffected
Immediate job over16-535-00 Immediate job overwrite

failed
write failed. Perform
and on demand overwrite immediately
Immediate job overwrite failed.

demand overwrite immediately
Incompatible black ink 93-887-00 Black metered ink stick

expected, DMO was
your system adminisdetected
trator
Check that the machine is on

the correct contract - Print a
configuration page, General set
up, service plan. Check the ink
loaded is as per the customers
contract GP 34. Check the ink
load sensors dC330 - 93-026
to 93-041
February 2013
2-582

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

Status
Code
Reference / Action
UI Message
Incompatible black ink 93-888-00 Black DMO ink stick

trator

to 93-041
Incompatible or
unknown finisher
detected. Check Finisher compatibility
12-765-00 The IME interface indicates that the finisher is

incompatible / unknown

GP 14. Check the finisher communication lead. If the problem
persists, perform 12-762-00110, 12-764-00-110, 12-76500-110 RAP for LCSS. 12-76200-171, 12-764-00-171, 12765-00-171 RAP for HVF
Incompatible black ink 93-885-00 Black sold ink stick

expected, DMO was
trator.

contract GP 34.
Check the ink load sensors
dC330 - 93-026 to 93-041
Incompatible yellow
ink stick detected,
please contact the
93-884-00 Yellow sold ink stick

detected

contract GP 34.
dC330 - 93-026 to 93-041
Incompatible black ink 93-886-00 Black DMO ink stick

expected, sold was
trator.

to 93-041
Incomplete system
information. Power off
ESS counters utility pro- GP 14. Printing and scanning
then on and notify syscan continue
cess has stopped
tem administrator
Incompatible Cyan ink 93-883-00 Cyan sold ink stick

stick detected, please
contact the system
detected
administrator
Incompatible FAX
software detected
(upgrade required)

contract GP 34.
dC330 - 93-026 to 93-041
03-546-00 Incompatible Fax softThe embedded Fax software

ware detect at power on version is incompatible with the
system. A software upgrade
should be performed
Refer to 03-417-00 RAP
Incompatible Magenta 93-882-00 Magenta sold ink stick

ink stick detected,
please contact the
detected

contract GP 34.
dC330 - 93-026 to 93-041
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Incomplete system
ESS configuration synthen on and notify syschronization process has
tem administrator
stopped

GP 14. Printing and scanning
can continue. If the problem
Faults 3 RAP
Incomplete system
agent process has
then on and notify sysstopped
tem administrator

GP 14. Print and other
RAP
Incomplete system
ESS configuration utility
then on and notify sysprocess has stopped
tem administrator

Faults 3 RAP
Incomplete system
information. Switch
the machine off then
on, GP 14 and notify

Faults 2 RAP
February 2013
2-583

ESS fault log service
process has stopped
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Ink levels are low.

Load Xerox ColorQube Ink now
93-825-00 The black ink low thresh- Load more black solid ink
sticks. Print and other machine
old has been reached
ink stick cannot be loaded, go
to OF 11
Ink levels are low.

93-826-00 The magenta ink low

threshold has been
reached
Ink levels are low.

Ink levels are low.

Load more magenta solid ink

to OF 11
93-827-00 The cyan ink low thresh- Load more cyan solid ink
old has been reached
to OF 11
93-828-00 The yellow ink low
threshold has been
reached
Load more yellow solid ink

to OF 11
Ink loader main cover 93-876-00 The ink loader door is

open
open. Close the door. All
available
Close the ink loader door.

Refer to WD 8.2. Check ink
loader door switch (S93-025),
PL 93.10 Item 19
Insert sheet sent to a

different tray to the
rest of the job
See the message text. If the

12-191-00-171, 12-193-00171, 12-194-00-171, 12-19600-171 RAP and 12-125-00171, 12-126-00-171 RAP
12-749-00 An insert sheet has not

arrived at its intended
output destination
Insufficient memory
16-555-00 Network controller - not Additional memory required to
for Fax job. Notify your
enough physical memory support Fax. The Fax service is
is configured on the plat- not available
form to support LAN Fax
Internet Fax service
17-553-00 The internet Fax service
cannot register. Power
cannot register

GP 14. Internet Fax is disabled, print and other machine
16-950-19 to 16-959-19 Other
Network Faults 19 RAP
Invalid original size

detected. It will be
treated as the next
largest standard size
Make sure the originals are not

creased or folded
the 05-257-00 RAP
OF 4b
22-504-05 Invalid mixed size original pair is detected
UI Message
Status
Code
Jam in tray 5 docking

area
75-110-00 A Jam in tray 5 docking

area
Clear the misfeed. Copying

and printing are not available.
Refer to 75-101-00, 75-160-00
to 75-161-00 RAP
Jam in tray 5 docking

area.
75-110-01 A Jam in tray 5 docking

area A3 PFP
Clear the misfeed. Copying

Refer to 75-101-00, 75-160-00
to 75-161-00 RAP
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Job queue error.

16-574-00 The ESS queue utility
has failed. Only a partial
then on, GP 14 and
list is available for disnotify system adminisplay at this time
trator

RAP
Job status information 16-579-00 The network controller

not available. Power
ESS completed job log
service has stopped

Faults 2 RAP
Load 8.5 x 11" paper

in any tray to enable
auto-drum cleaning
94-600-00 Letter / A4 chase media

is needed to clean the
drum
Load the required media. Refer

to GP 20. Copying and printing
are not available
Load 12 x 18" paper in 94-602-00 12x18 chase media is

any tray to enable
needed to clean the
auto-drum cleaning.
drum
Load the required media. Refer

are not available
Load A4 paper into

any tray to enable
auto-cleaning to proceed
Load any tray with A4 paper to

enable auto-cleaning. Refer to
GP 20.
94-604-00 A4 chase media is

needed to clean the
drum
Load SRA3 (320 x

94-601-00 SRA3 paper is needed to Load the required media. Refer
450 mm) paper in any
clean the drum
tray to enable autoare not available
drum cleaning
Machine Active Regis- 03-538-00 The machine active reg- Re-enable the active registratration disabled. Turn
istration has been distion mode in dC715
power off then on to
abled via the DC_715
enable
diagnostic routine
Machine entering SW 16-550-00 Machine entering SW
upgrade mode. ALL
upgrade mode - all jobs
jobs will be cancelled.
will be canceled.
February 2013
2-584
The machine entered a software upgrade mode (all jobs

will be deleted). No user intervention is required. Machine
services are unavailable until
the software upgrade process
has completed.

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

UI Message
Enter customer mode

0, 425-003 = 0 and 616-14 = 4
Misfeed in tray 5
75-102-00 Misfeed in tray 5 A4 PFP Clear the media jam. Copying

and printing are not available. If
the 75-101-00, 75-160-00 to
75-161-00 RAP
Misfeed in tray 5.
75-102-01 Misfeed in tray 5: A3
Clear the media jam. Copying

and printing are not available. If
the 75-101-00, 75-160-00 to
75-161-00 RAP
Network cable
unplugged
16-544-00 An Ethernet cable is

unplugged
Ensure cables are properly

connected
Network connectivity
configuration server

CCS process has failed

Faults 3 RAP
Machine is in a non
customer mode.
22-504-16 Non customer mode.

Auto configuration is disabled. Wait for machine
to exit Diagnostics mode.
The machine is unavailable
Machine is in a noncustomer mode
22-505-17 The machine is in a non- Enter customer mode

customer mode
0, 425-003 = 0 and 616-14 = 4
Machine power on
failed. Power off then
administrator
02-590-00 Configurable services

are not stable at power
on
Magenta Ink is empty. 93-505-00 IME magenta ink is

Load Xerox Colempty
orQube Magenta Ink.
Magenta ink stick is

jammed. Call for
assistance

perform the 02-390-00 Configurable Services RAP
Load more magenta solid ink.
WD 9.18.
93-506-00 The ink stick loaded sen- Clear the ink loader jam. Copysor is actuated. The ink ing and printing are not available
stick transport motor is
operated. The ink stick is
not detected by the ink
out sensor
Magenta ink stick jam. 93-926-00 Magenta ink stick jam

Add magenta ink to
aid jam recovery.
Magenta ink stick jam

detected.Load a Magenta Ink
stick to aid jam recovery.
GP 14.
Middle left side door is 01-505-00 The IME middle left door Copying and printing are not
open
(below bypass tray) is
available. Perform the 01-505open (without tray 5
00 Middle Left Door Open RAP.
installed)
Middle left side door is 01-505-01 The IME middle left door Copying and printing are not
open
(below bypass tray) is
available. Perform the 01-505open (with tray 5
00 Middle Left Door Open RAP.
installed)
Misfeed in tray 4
(bypass).
Status
Code
Reference / Action
Clear the media jam. Copying

Refer to 74-101-00, 74-160-00
to 74-161-00 RAP
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Network controller
connection is about to
ESS event notification
be reset
service process has
stopped

reset. Switch the machine off
persists, perform the 16-16109, 16-164-09 Cannot Send
Reg Event / List Access Failure
RAP
Network controller
ESS platform manager
be reset
service process has
stopped

reset. Machine is unavailable.
the 16-162-09 to 16-163-09
Cannot Send Reg Event / ESS
Services Failure RAP
Network controller
document manager
be reset
agent process has
stopped

reset. Machine is unavailable
Network controller
error. Some network
services not available. Notify system
administrator.

GP 14
February 2013
2-585
16-536-00 The XSA service is

unavailable. Network
controller error
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Network controller not 03-518-00 The network controller is

not available.

UI Message

GP 14. If the fault remains,
reinstall software, GP 4. If the
03-331-00, 03-332-00 Main
Controller and Network Controller on the SBC PWB Cannot
Communicate RAP
Network services
16-510-00 The scan to E-mail proinvolving scan to Ecess has failed
mail are not available.
Network printing dis- 16-571-00 The network controller

abled. Notify your sysprint service has failed
tem administrator

GP 14. Printing cannot continue. If the problem persists,
RAP

print service has failed
abled. Notify your system administrator

RAP

ESS print service has
abled. Notify your sysfailed
tem administrator.

RAP
Network services
involving a serial port
are not available.

serial port connectivity
has failed

GP 14. Print and other
RAP
Network services
involving Apple Talk
are not available.
Notify your system
administrator
16-565-00 AppleTalk printing error.

Printing can continue
using other submission
methods

GP 14. Printing can continue if
other submission methods are
used
Network services
involving parallel port
are not available.

parallel ports are not
available

RAP
OF 4b
Status
Code
Reference / Action
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
GP 14. If the problem persists
check network connections
Network services
16-514-00 The Post Office protocol Switch the machine off then on,
involving scan to E(POP3) (for inbound
GP 14
IFAX messages) process
Notify system adminhas failed
istrator
Network services
16-517-00 SMTP process has failed Switch the machine off then on,
involving scan to EGP 14
Network services
16-511-00 Internet Fax process
related to Internet Fax
failed
are not available.
Network services
using BOOTP initialization not available.

16-559-00 Network controller

Check the BOOTP server and
BOOTP initialization fail- its network connection. Switch
ure
the machine off then on, GP
14.
Network services
16-557-00 Network controller DC
using DC platform
platform recovery failed
recovery not available.

GP 14
Network services
16-558-00 Network controller DC
using DC platform
communications failed
recovery not available.

GP 14
Network services
16-518-00 Web services edge client Switch the machine off then on,
using WS Edge Client
interface does not work GP 14. If the problem persists
are not available.
Notify your system
administrator
Network services
16-520-00 Web services server
controller interface does GP 14. If the problem persists
are not available.
not work.
Notify your system
administrator
February 2013
2-586

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Network services
16-519-00 Web services client con- Switch the machine off then on,
troller does not work
are not available.
Notify your System
Administrator
Network services
16-528-00 The network controllers
using WS Scan Temp
WS scan temp service
are not available.
process has stopped.
Notify your system
administrator
Some network service are not

available. The network controller connection is about to be
reset
Network services with 16-501-00 Job based accounting

Job Based Accounting
not enough DC memory.
Some network controller
your machine adminservices are not availistrator
able
Not enough CCM memory to

run the Network Accounting
feature. Switch the machine off
Faults 17 RAP
Network services with 16-599-00 The Raw TCP/IP printing

Port 9100 process are
(port 9100) process has
failed.

GP 14. Printing can continue
with other submission methods. If the problem persists,
RAP
Network services with 16-529-00 The network controllers

Scan Compressor are
scan compressor sernot available. Notify
vice process has
your system adminisstopped.
trator
Some network service are not

available. The network controller connection is about to be
reset
No communications
17-562-00 Registration with edge
with Xerox SMart eSoserver fails
lutions server. Contact system
administrator

review SMart eSolutions settings. Machine services are
unaffected. If the problem persists, perform the 16-891-00,
16-892-00 Edge Server Auto
Registration Failed RAP
No communications
17-563-00 Communication with
with Xerox SMart eSoedge server fails
lutions server. Contact system
administrator

review SMart eSolutions settings. Machine services are
unaffected. If the problem persists, perform the 16-891-00,
16-892-00 Edge Server Auto
Registration Failed RAP
Status
Code
UI Message
No tray is configured
with the required
paper size
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
22-504-04 No paper tray is config- Print and copy services are disured to run the stock size abled, other machine services
required for this job
are unaffected Job must be
deleted. Paper tray must be
configured to run the stock
size. If the problem persists,
25 RAP
Table 3 Status messages O to R

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message Reference / Action
On Demand Over- 17-507-00 HDD or FAX On

write Failed. PerDemand Overwrite
form an On
Failed.
Demand Overwrite immediately.
On Demand Overwrite error. Administrator intervention is required to

perform an On Demand Image Overwrite immediately. Printing can continue; other machine services are
unaffected.
On Demand Over- 19-507-00 HDD or FAX On

Demand Overwrite
write Failed. Perform an On
Failed.
Demand Overwrite immediately.
On Demand Overwrite error. Administrator intervention is required to

perform an On Demand Image Overwrite immediately. Printing can continue; other machine services are
unaffected.
One or more
22-513-04 One or more queued
queued jobs needs
job in the system is
resources
being held due to lack
of resources
Add paper to the tray being used to

clear queued job. Jobs will be held
until resources become available.
Output tray offset- 12-701-00 An OCT offset failure

has occurred
ting is not available. Power off
then on and notify
Perform the 12-701-00-65 RAP
Output tray on-line 12-742-00 Pause to unload time- Finisher has gone back on-line
out warning
February 2013
2-587
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
UI Message
Paper feeder com- 92-535-00 IME communications

problem with paper
munication fault.
feeder platform. High
capacity paper tray
not available
Switch the machine off then on, GP

14. Check connection to printer. If
problem persists, perform the 75312-00 IME to Tray 5 Communication Failure RAP. Copying and printing are not available
Paper jam in area

1A
82-100-00 IME jam at zone 1A

(middle vertical) (tray
5 not installed)
Open middle left door, clear the

paper jam. If the problem persists,
perform the 82-110-00 to 82-114-00,
82-152-00, 82-157-00 to 82-159-00,
82-164-00 to 82-166-00 RAP and
82-133-00 RAP. Copying and printing are not available
Paper jam in area

1A
82-100-01 IME jam at zone 1A

(middle vertical) (A 4
PFP installed)
Slide tray 5 away from the machine,

open the middle left door, clear the
perform the 82-110-00 to 82-114-00,
82-152-00, 82-157-00 to 82-159-00,
82-164-00 to 82-166-00 RAP. Copying and printing are not available
Paper jam in Area

1a
82-100-02 Jam at Zone 1A (mid- Slide Tray 5 away from the machine,
dle vertical) (A4 PFP open the middle left door, clear the
installed)
perform the 82-110-00 to 82-114-00,
82-152-00, 82-157-00 to 82-159-00,
82-164-00 to 82-166-00 RAP
Paper jam in area

2
82-101-00 IME jam at zone 2

(upper vertical)
Paper jam in area

3a
01-108-00 IME jam at zone 3a

(registration / preand copy services are disabled.
heat), open front door. Refer to 89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89129-00 RAP, 89-125-00 to 89-12800, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 RAP
Paper jam in area

3a and 4a.

(registration) and 4a 4a. Print and copy services are dis(exit), open front door abled.
Refer to 89-110-00 to 89-113-00, 89129-00 RAP, 89-125-00 to 89-12800, 89-130-00, 89-131-00 RAP, 89110-00 to 89-113-00, 89-129-00 RAP
OF 4b
Open upper left door, clear the paper

jam. Refer to 82-125-00 to 82-13300, 82-153-00, 82-160-00, 82-16200, 82-163-00 RAP, 82-132-00, 82155-00. Copying and printing are not
available
Status
Code
Paper jam in area

3b and 4b.
01-105-00 IME jam at zone 3b

(post transfix) and 4b 4b. Print and copy services are disabled.
(horizontal), open
front door.
Paper jam in area

3b.

(post transfix), open
front door
Paper jam in area

4a.

(exit), open front door. and copy services are disabled.
Refer to 10-110-00 to 10-113-00, 10125-00 to 10-128-00, 10-147-00, 10148-00 RAP, 10-140-00 to 10-14600, 10-149-00 to 10-151-00 RAP, 83110-00, 83-111-00, 83-113-00, 83114-00, 83-118-00 RAP, 83-112-00,
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP
Paper jam in area

4b.

(horizontal), open
front door.


Refer to 82-145-00, 82-146-00, 82150-00, 82-151-00, 82-156-00 RAP,
82-141-00, 82-147-00, 82-148-00,
82-154-00 RAP, 89-110-00 to 89113-00, 89-129-00 RAP
Paper jam in areas 01-112-00 IME jam at zone 3a

3a and 3b.
(post transfix), open
front door.

83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP

3a and 4b.
(horizontal), open
front door

83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP
February 2013
2-588

UI Message
Status
Code
UI Message
Status
Code

3a, 3b and 4a
transfix) and 4a (exit),
open front door

and 4a. Print and copy services are
disabled.
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP
Paper jam in areas 01-106-00 IME jam at zone 3b

3b and 4a.
(post transfix) and 4a 4a. Print and copy services are dis(exit), open front door. abled.
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP

3a, 3b and 4b
transfix) and 4b (horizontal), open front
door

disabled.
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP
Paper jam in areas 01-107-00 IME jam at zone 3b

3b, 4a and 4b.
(post transfix), 4a
(exit) and 4b (horizontal), open front door.

3a, 3b, 4a and 4b.
transfix), 4a (exit) and
4b (horizontal), open
front door
Clear the paper jam in area 3a, 3b,

4a and 4b. Print and copy services
are disabled.
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP

4a and 4b.
(exit) and 4b (horizon- 4b. Print and copy services are distal), open front door. abled.
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP

3a, 4a and 4b.
(registration), 4a (exit)
open front door

disabled.
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP
Paper jam in finisher folder unit.
12-718-00 Sheet over tri-folder

assist sensor

If the problem persists, perform the
12-185-00-171 to 12-187-00-171
RAP
Paper jam in finisher folder unit.
12-719-00 Sheet over tri-folder

exit sensor

12-185-00-171 to 12-187-00-171
RAP
Paper jam in the

document feeder
05-520-00 Post feed and takeaway roll jam
Remove the sheet. If the problem

persists, perform the 05-330-00, 05331-00 Feed Sensor Failure RAP
February 2013
2-589
Clear the paper jam in area 3b, 4a

disabled.
83-115-00, 83-116-00, 83-117-00,
83-119-00 RAP
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
UI Message
Paper jam in the

document feeder
05-522-00 Sheet left over DADH Remove sheet. If the problem perCVT sensor after jam. sists, perform the 05-350-00, 05DADH post feed sen- 352-00 RAP
sor or TAR sensor
Paper jam in the

document feeder
05-526-00 DADH - sheet left over

DADH document
present sensor after
jam. 05-330 fault is
raised
Reset when DADH top cover closed

after jam cleared. If the problem persists, perform the 05-330-00, 05331-00 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-735-00 A sheet is detected

Clear the sheet. If necessary, pernear the buffer sensor form the 12-157-00-171, 12-158-00171 RAP and 12-141-00-171, 12142-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

near the exit from the
HVF to the BM entry
sensor (without trifolder)
Clear the sheet. If necessary, perform the 12-113-00-171, 12-114-00171, 12-190-00-171, 12-192-00-171
RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

near the exit from the
HVF to the BM entry
sensor (with tri-folder)
Clear the sheet. If necessary, perform the 12-113-00-171, 12-114-00171, 12-190-00-171, 12-192-00-171
RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-752-00 A page is detected

over the buffer path
sensor
Clear the area. If the problem persists, perform the 12-198-00-171,

12-199-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-753-00 A page is detected

near buffer path sensor

12-199-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-610-00 Paper is detected

Clear the paper jam. If the problem
over the entry sensor persists, perform the 12-199-00-110
(LCSS)
RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

over the entry sensor persists, perform the 12-125-00-171,
(HVF without tri12-126-00-171 RAP
folder)
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-611-00 After receiving the

paper at IOT exit sen- persists, perform the 12-199-00-110
sor the entry sensor is RAP
not made within 1000
ms. (LCSS). Paper
jam near the entry to
the finisher unit
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-611-01 Paper jam near the

entry to the finisher
unit (HVF without trifolder)
OF 4b

persists, perform the 12-125-00-171,
12-126-00-171 RAP
Status
Code
Paper jam in the

finisher

over the hole punch
position sensor at
12-043-00-110, 12-046-00-110 RAP
power-up, interlock
status change or after
shutdown. (LCSS)
Paper jam in the

finisher

over the top tray exit
sensor at power-up,
interlock status
change or after shutdown. (LCSS)

12-171-00-110, 12-172-00-110 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

over the top tray exit
sensor

12-125-00-171, 12-126-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

output to the top tray.
(LCSS)

12-171-00-110, 12-172-00-110 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

output to the top tray.
(HVF)

12-171-00-171, 12-172-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

over the stacker exit
sensor at power-up,
interlock status
change or after shutdown. (LCSS)

12-151-00-110, 12-152-00-110 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

output to the stacker
tray. Sheet over 2nd
top exit sensor

12-151-171, 12-152-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-621-00 If entry sensor made Clear the paper jam.

to the stacker bin exit If the problem persists, perform the
sensor made exceeds 12-171-00-110, 12-172-00-110 RAP
1600 ms (A4 LEF 1st
page/A3 SEF all
pages) or 1100 ms
(A4 LEF mid set page)
or 900 ms (A4 LEF
last page of set)
(LCSS)
Paper jam in the

finisher

output to the stacker
tray. A sheet is over
the 2nd top exit sensor
February 2013
2-590

12-151-171, 12-152-171 RAP

UI Message
Status
Code
UI Message
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-624-00 A sheet is over the

Clear the area. If the problem perinserter pickup sensor sists, perform the 12-479-00-171
RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

inserter tab standby
sensor
Paper jam in the

finisher
Status
Code
Paper jam in the

finisher.
12-627-02 A page is over exit

HVF into BM sensor
(sensor in area 6a)
Cleared via area 6a
Clear the paper jam
Paper jam in the

finisher.

near the tri-fold entry
sensor
Clear the sheet. If the problem persists, perform the 12-183-00-171,

12-184-00-171 RAP

Clear the area. If the problem perbuffer position sensor sists, perform the 12-198-00-171,
12-199-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher.

near the tri-fold exit
sensor
Clear the sheet. If the problem persists, perform the 12-185-00-171 to

12-187-00-171
Paper jam in the

finisher

Clear the area. If the problem perHVF exit into BM sen- sists, perform the 12-198-00-171,
12-199-00-171 RAP
sor
Paper jam in the

finisher.

Clear the sheet. If the problem pernear the tri-fold assist sists, perform the 12-185-00-171 to
12-187-00-171 RAP
sensor
Paper jam in the

finisher

Clear the area. If the problem perstacker bin exit sensor sists, perform the 12-151-171, 12152-171
Paper jam in the

finisher.
Paper jam in the

finisher
12-629-00 A sheet is over the tri- Clear the area. If the problem perfolder entry sensor
sists, perform the 12-183-00-171,
12-184-00-171 RAP
12-717-01 A sheet is over HVF

BM compiler paper
present sensor (without tri-folder)
Clear the HFV BM paper present

sensor area 6e. If the problem persists, perform the 12-166-00-171
RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher.
Paper jam in the

finisher

booklet maker entry
sensor (without trifolder)
12-717-02 A sheet is over HVF

BM compiler paper
present sensor (with
tri-folder)
Clear the HFV BM paper present

sensor area 6e. If the problem persists, perform the 12-166-00-171
RAP
Paper required for 22-511-04 The media required

current job is not
for the current marking job is not loaded
available
Load the correct paper to complete

the held job or cancel the held job.
Paper tray commu- 92-531-00 3TM Communicanication fault.

tions problems (TtmSerialLinkSafety)
Please call for
assistance.

14. Check connection on 3 trays
module. If problem persists, perform
the 70-312-00 Tray 1 to Tray 3 Communication Failure RAP. Copying
Paper tray commu- 92-530-00 IME communications

problem with paper
nication fault.
tray. Paper trays 1 to
Please call for
3 not available.
assistance.

14. Check connection on 3 trays
module. If problem persists, perform
the 70-312-00 Tray 1 to Tray 3 Communication Failure RAP. Copying
Please complete
03-558-00 Not defined
all steps required
by the external
accounting device
to access this service

12-193-00-171, 12-194-00-171, 12196-00-171 RAP

12-184-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

booklet maker entry
sensor (with tri-folder) 12-184-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher

booklet maker exit
sensor. (without trifolder)
Paper jam in the

finisher

Clear the jam from the output bin. If
booklet maker exit
the problem persists, perform the 12sensor. (with tri-folder) 181-00-171, 12-182-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher.

near the PPI pickup
sensor
Clear the jam. If necessary, perform

the 12-191-00-171, 12-193-00-171,
12-194-00-171, 12-196-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher.

near the PPI tab
standby sensor
Clear the jam. If necessary, perform

the 12-191-00-171, 12-193-00-171,
12-194-00-171, 12-196-00-171 RAP
Paper jam in the

finisher.
12-627-01 A page is over exit

HVF into BM sensor
(sensor in area 6a)
cleared via area 6a
Clear the paper jam
Clear the jam from the output bin. If

the problem persists, perform the 12181-00-171, 12-182-00-171 RAP
February 2013
2-591
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
UI Message
Status
Code
Please enter
access code into
access this service
Please wait...
Automated print
engine maintenance in progress

while the IME is
attempting to clear a
potentially jammed
cyan ink stick.
No service action required. Print and

Please insert card 03-558-01 Not defined

into the external
accounting device
to access this service
Please wait...
Automated print

while the IME is
potentially jammed
yellow ink stick.

Please insert key 03-558-04 Not defined

counter into the
access this service
Please wait...
91-659-00 Auto maintenance
Automated print
routines are in
engine mainteprogress
nance in progress.
Please insert
money into the
access this service
Please wait...
03-555-00 Machine has entered
Maintenance in
intrusive customer
progress. Scan,
tools mode.
copy and print services not available
Go to dC301. Perform a Copier NVM

Initialization and NVM data select All.
After Initialization perform routines
dC977 and dC978.
Please wait, freeing memory
No user intervention required, please

wait, printing will resume after memory is freed. Other machine services
are unaffected. If the problem persists, perform the 19-401-00, 19402-00 Stress Out of Memory RAP
Please wait... Pre- 88-510-00 IME preheater cleanheater cleaning in

ing
progress.
Please wait until cleaning is completed. The printer is temporarily

unavailable
Please wait... print 91-654-00 Head purge is in

engine mainteprogress
nance - head
purge in progress.
19-502-00 Out of memory

resources. The
machine has run out
of image processing
memory for the current job.
Please wait...
92-574-00 Mechanical initializaAdjustments are in
tion
progress
Please wait... print 91-668-00 IME print quality main- No service action required
quality maintetenance is in progress
nance in progress.
Please wait...
92-576-00 IME frame buffer bor- Print engine adjustments in
Adjustments are in
progress. Copying and printing are
row busy
progress
temporarily unavailable
Please wait...
Printer is warming
up
92-573-00 The printer is warming Print and copy services will resume
up
shortly. Other machine services are
unaffected
Please wait...
92-577-00 Recovery in progress Adjustments are in
progress
Please wait...
Printer is warming
up
92-587-00 IME long term warming up
Please wait...
Automated print

while the IME is
potentially jammed
black ink stick.

Please wait... The

Fax service is initializing
20-544-00 The Fax service is ini- The Fax service is re-starting. No

user intervention is required. Printing
tializing
and other machine services are
available
Please wait...
Automated print

while the IME is
potentially jammed
magenta ink stick.

Please wait... The

image disk is full.
19-513-00 The image disk is full
OF 4b
February 2013
2-592
The printer is warming up. Print and

copy services will resume shortly.
Print jobs may be delayed. No service action required. The system is

attempting to recover. Printing and
other machine services are available

UI Message
Please wait... The
output tray is lowering
Status
Code
UI Message

Follow the instructions. If the probpaused for unloading. lem persists, perform the 12H-171
Press the button on
RAP
the pop up screen
Status
Code
Provide payment
03-559-03 Walk up coin entered

FDI. Not defined
Your Job cannot be completed due

to insufficient funds.Please insert
money into the external accounting
device to continue your job.To cancel
this job, press the hard-panel Job
Status button, select the job and then
the Delete button
Please wait... The 19-510-00 The system is

No service action required. Printing
system is attemptattempting to recover. and other machine services are
Image disk error
unaffected
ing to recover.
Provide payment
or the current job
may be deleted.
03-559-00 Generic FDI. Unable

to complete the current job.
Please wait...
Warming up from
extremely low
ambient temperature.
92-582-00 IME cold boot timeout Please wait. Printing and copying are
not available until the machine temperature is within specification

to insufficient funds.Please complete all steps required by the external accounting device to continue
your job
Provide payment
or the current job
may be deleted.
Please
wait...Printer
cleaning in
progress
94-603-00 Chase sheets are

being fed
03-559-05 Walk Up FDI. Unable

to complete the current job - FDI inactivity
timer enabled

to insufficient funds. Please insert
card into the external accounting
device to continue your job. To
immediately delete this job, select
the Close button, then the Job Status
button located on the control panel
and then your job.If no action is
Provide payment
or the current job
may be deleted.
03-559-06 Walk up coin entered

FDI. Not Defined - FDI
inactivity timer disabled

to insufficient funds. Please insert
money into the external accounting
device to continue your job. To
immediately delete this job, select
the Close button, then the Job Status
button located on the control panel
and then your job. If no action is
Provide payment
or the current job
may be deleted.
03-559-04 Walk up key entered

FDI. Not defined

to insufficient funds.Please insert
Key Counter into the external
accounting device to continue your
job.
Please wait... the 03-561-00 The system is recovsystem is attemptering

ing to recover
Please Wait Disk 17-580-00 Disk encryption is in

encryption operaprogress
tion in progress.
Wait until the system recovers
Ready to scan. Copying and printing

not available
Please wait Print 88-511-00 Media is exhausted

No service action required. Please
Engine cooling in
during the cooling
wait, cooling in progress
progress.
phase of clean for ink
smears.
Please wait The 03-556-00 Power on while the IIT No service action required
scanner is initializis being initialized
ing.
Print engine in
92-578-00 IME in non-thermal
non-thermal mode.
mode. Print engine is
operating in non-thermal manufacturing
mode. Print and copy
service disabled.
Enter diagnostics dC335 and select

a heater routine. Run the routine and
then exit diagnostics. The machine
warms up.
Enter dC131 Read/Write and check
that NVM ID 425-003 = 0
Print engine main- 91-564-00 Head purge in

progress
tenance - head
purge in
progress.please
wait.
Provide payment

to insufficient funds.Please complete all steps required by the external accounting device to continue
your job
03-559-01 Walk up FDI. Unable

to complete the current job.
Ready to scan.
70-305-00 The feeder vertical
Copying and printtransport lower left
ing not available.
door is open
Bottom left side
door is open.
Copying and printing are not available. Close the door. If the problem
persists, perform the 70-305-00, 70325-00 RAP
Ready to scan.
70-111-00 Jam in the lower
Copying and printfeeder vertical transing not available.
port (tray 5 not
Jam in area 1b.
installed)
Clear the media jam. Copying and

printing are not available. If the problem persists, perform the 71-101-00
to 71-161-00 RAP, 72-101-00 to 72161-00 RAP
February 2013
2-593
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
UI Message
Ready to scan.
port (A4 tray 5
Jam in area 1b.
installed)

to 71-161-00 RAP, 72-101-00 to 72161-00 RAP
Ready to scan.
port (A3 tray 5
Jam in area 1b.
installed)

to 71-161-00 RAP, 72-101-00 to 72161-00 RAP
Ready to scan.
73-111-00 Jam in the tray 3 horiCopying and printzontal transport
ing not available.
Jam in paper transport.
Remove documents from the

document feeder
input tray or close
the document
feeder
Status
Code
22-505-02 Documents are

sensed in the DADH
tray during IIT standby
and document handler cover is open
To scan from the document glass,

remove documents in the document
feeder input tray. To use the document feeder to scan your documents,
lower the document feeder
Remove the docu- 05-560-00 Upon fault 05-310

being raised
ment. It is too short
to be fed by Document Feeder
Remove document from DADH during jam clearance, If the problem

persists, perform the 05-310-00 RAP

to 73-161-00 Tray 3 Mis-Feed Jam
RAP
Re-order docu05-578-00 DADH roller feeds

reaches near end of
ment feeder - feed
life
roller but DO NOT
replace until
prompted
Order new DADH feed roll assembly,

PL 5.15 Item 1.
Ready to scan.
Copying and printing not available.
Misfeed in tray 1

to 71-161-00 RAP
Ready to scan.
Misfeed in tray 2

printing are not available.
Refer to 72-101-00 to 72-161-00
RAP
Re-order docu05-547-00 DADH feed roll

Re-order feed roll assembly PL 5.15
assembly near end of Item 1.
ment feeder - feed
life
roller but DO NOT
replace until
prompted
Ready to scan.
Misfeed in tray 3
Re-order Xerox
ColorQube Ink
93-821-00 Black ink reorder

threshold has been
reached
Load more black solid ink. Copying

and printing can continue. If the ink
stick cannot be loaded, go to OF 11

Refer to 73-101-00 to 73-161-00
RAP
Re-order Xerox
ColorQube Ink
93-822-00 Magenta ink reorder

threshold has been
reached
Load more magenta solid ink. Copying and printing can continue. If the
ink stick cannot be loaded, go to OF
11
Ready to scan.
73-305-00 the feeder horizontal
Copying and printtransport drawer is
ing not available.
open
Paper transport is
open.
Close the feeder horizontal transport.

Copying and printing are not available. If the problem persists, perform
the 73-325-00 Feeder HT Drawer
Open in Run RAP
Re-order Xerox
ColorQube Ink
93-823-00 Cyan ink reorder

threshold has been
reached
Load more cyan solid ink. Copying

Re-order Xerox
ColorQube Ink
Registration in
progress
89-560-00 IME registration is

being calibrated
Please wait. The printer is temporarily unavailable
93-824-00 Yellow ink reorder

threshold has been
reached
Load more yellow solid ink. Copying

Reload sheets in
document feeder.
05-527-00 There is a document Remove the sheets from the Original

in the DADH at power Input Tray.
on or exit from power
save
Remove documents from the

document feeder
input tray or close
the document
feeder
22-505-00 Documents are

sensed in the DADH
tray during IIT standby
and document handler cover is open
OF 4b
To scan from the document glass,

remove documents in the document
feeder input tray. To use the document feeder to scan your documents,
lower the document feeder
Replace the Docu- 05-579-00 DADH roller feeds

ment Feed Roller.
reaches end of life
Install new DADH feed roll assembly,

PL 5.15 Item 1.
Table 4 Status messages S to Y

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Scan and copy services 05-570-00 DADH jam.

not available. Print service is available
February 2013
2-594
Reference / Action
Remove, then re-load all document in the DADH.

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
UI Message
Scan to Distribution Ser- 16-525-00 The network controllers

scan to distribution services are not available.
vice process has
Notify your system
stopped
administrator

controller connection is about
to be reset
Some jobs may have

been deleted.
Scan to file not available. 16-561-00 The network controller

scan to file processes
notify system administrahave failed
tor

on, GP 14
Scanner fault. Power off 14-517-00 Scanner fault.


on, GP 14. Check the current
fault codes list for faults in the
scanner and perform the
appropriate RAP.
Scanning will be delayed 22-508-04 Scan start up delayed

whilst awaiting
resources
required. Job will begin when
system is ready. If the problem persists, perform the 22330-06 ESS Scan to Distribution Service not Responding
to List Jobs RPC Call RAP
Select confirm if the doc- 05-585-00 When Status 05-579 is Select confirm if the docuument feeder - feed
active and the DADH top ment feeder - feed roller was
roller was replaced
cover is opened (status replaced
05-502)
Select the current mes- 22-502-04 An active message has
sages button in the
been produced
machine status for more
information
Go to the Status screen and

select the Faults tab. Press
the Active Messages button
and perform the action
appropriate to the message
Server Fax service can- 17-551-00 Server Fax service cannot register. Power off
not register

on, GP 14. Server Fax is disabled, print and other
machine services are unaffected. If the problem persists, perform the 16-987-19,
16-988-19 Server Fax Application Registration Error
RAP
Service limit exceeded. 16-533-00 Controller software service limit exceeded

New services will not be
available until some services are removed
Remove some existing services to enable new services

to be added. Machine services are available but may
be degraded
Some jobs may have

been deleted
Removed upon user intervention
03-562-00 Status is raised when

some jobs may have
been deleted
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
19-505-00 Compressor DVMA

Confirm that UI message has
time-out. The current job been seen. Re-scan the job.
has been deleted
If the problem persists, perform the 19-403-00 EPC Out
of Memory RAP
LAN Fax service error.

LAN-Fax service has
notify system administrafailed
tor

Faults 4 RAP
Some network accounting services are not

Network accounting error.

to power off/on the machine.
Print and other machine services are unaffected. If the
16-790-09 to 16-799-47
16-596-00 Some network controller services are not

available
Some network authenti- 16-582-00 The network controller

ESS authentication SPI
cation services unavailprocess has stopped
able. Notify your system
administrator

Faults 3 RAP
Some network diagnos- 16-581-00 The network controller

ESS diagnostic service
tic services unavailable.
process has stopped
Notify your system
administrator

on, GP 14. Printing and scanning can continue. If the
16-770-09 to 16-779-95
and the 16-780-00 to 16-78947 Other Network Faults 3
RAP

are not available due to
a process error. Notify
16-560-00 Some processes on the Switch the machine off then

network controller have on, GP 14.
failed

involving CPI are not
16-521-00 The network controllers Machine services are tempoCPI service process has rarily disabled. The network
stopped
to be reset
February 2013
2-595
OF 4b

UI Message
involving DDNS are not

involving DHCP are not
Status
Code
Reason for Message
16-504-00 DDNS error. Some network controller services

are not available
16-593-00 Network controller DHCP address resolution has failed

UI Message
The DDNS address resolution process has failed.

persists check the DDNS
servers network connections
Some network services 16-563-00 Network controller - the

involving Novell are not
Novell Netware connectivity process has failed
available. Notify the system administrator

methods are used

involving PCL are not
administrator

on, GP 14, to enable PCL
printing. Printing can continue if other job format methods are used
Check DHCP server network

Copying and printing with
local connection scan continue. If the problem persists,
5 RAP
Some Network Services 16-591-00 Network controller

involving Ethernet are
Ethernet process has
not available. Notify sysfailed
tem administrator
Check Ethernet connection.

on, GP 14. Local printing can
Faults 5 RAP

involving HTTP are not
16-570-00 Network controller - an

HTTP interpreter error
the process to fail

methods are used. If the
16-761-47 to 16-769-95

involving Internet Fax
16-509-00 There is insufficient

memory for internet Fax on, GP 14. Printing can continue if other network protocols are used
Some network services 16-522-00 The network controllers

involving Job Log are not
Job Log service process
has stopped
administrator
involving LPD are not
OF 4b

to be reset
16-562-00 Network controller - the Switch the machine off then

line printer deamon
on, GP 14. Printing can con(LPD) process has failed tinue if other submission
methods are used
Some network services 16-564-00 Network controller - the

involving NetBios are not
NetBIOS connectivity
process has failed
administrator
Status
Code
Reference / Action
Reason for Message
16-568-00 Network controller - a

PCL interpreter error
the process to fail
Reference / Action
Some network services 16-567-00 Network controller - a

involving PostScript are
PostScript interpreter
not available. Notify your
error has occur, causing
the process to fail

methods are used

involving RARP are not
Check RARP server network

Printing can continue with
other submission methods. If
the 16-800-09 to 16-809-47
16-594-00 Network controller RARP address resolution has failed
Some network services 16-505-00 There is insufficient

involving Scan to E-mail
memory for E-mail
System Administrator

persists check the network
connections

involving SLP are not
16-507-00 SLP process stopped.

Some network controller services are not
available

on, GP 14

involving SMB are not
16-526-00 The network controllers Some network services are

SMB service process
has stopped.
to be reset

involving SSDP are not
16-513-00 Simple service discovery Switch the machine off then

protocol (SSDP) failed
on, GP 14

involving TCP/IP are not
TCP/IP service process
has stopped.

to be reset

methods are used
February 2013
2-596

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

Status
Code
Reference / Action
UI Message
Some network services 16-598-00 Network controller involving TCP/IP are not
TCP/IP address is
already in use on the
network
Another IP address needs to

be used. Switch the machine
Faults 4 RAP
Stapling not available.

Call for assistance
12-921-00 The stapler position sensor indicates the stapler

module is not closed in
initialisation

involving TIFF are not

on, GP 14. Printing can continue with other job formats. If
the 16-790-09 to 16-799-47
System error. Power off

03-598-00 Unable to set ready

Perform the 03-788-00 CCS
mode. Printing and
Runtime Could Not Enter
copying services are not Power Saver Mode S3 RAP
available

03-565-00 System fault

04-565-00 IME controller communi- System fault. Switch the

machine off then on, GP 14
cation failure

16-503-00 Incomplete system infor- Switch the machine off then

mation
on, GP 14. All machine services are disabled

22-563-00 Incomplete system infor- Switch the machine off then

on, GP 14. All machine sermation
vices are disabled
System Error. Power off

03-505-00 The digital copier is not

available
Perform 03-325-00 RAP and

03-355-00 RAP
System fault. Call for

assistance
92-572-00 IME. An unrecoverable

fault has occurred

on, GP 14. Copying and
The booklet maker tray

in the Finisher is full.
Empty the tray
12-728-00 The booklet maker output tray is full
Empty the tray. If necessary,

perform the 12C-171 RAP
The booklet maker tray

in the finisher is nearly
full.
12-727-00 The booklet maker output tray is nearly full
The booklet maker tray is

near full. User intervention
will be required soon to
empty the tray to allow continued booklet making. Print
and Copy services can continue; other machine services
are unaffected.
The booklet tray in the

finisher is nearly full
12-727-00 The booklet maker output tray is nearly full
The booklet maker output

tray is nearly full. Printing can
continue, but this tray will
need emptying soon.

TIFF interpreter has
failed

with Job Tracker are not
job tracker service process has stopped

to be reset

with Kerberos are not
16-524-00 The network controllers Some network services are

Kerberos service pronot available. The network
cess has stopped
to be reset
Staple cartridge is
empty. Replace now
12-715-00 The finisher's main sta- Install new staple cartridge,

PL 12.55 Item 7
ple cartridge is empty.
Follow the instructions at
the printer to load a new
staple cartridge. Non
staple printing can continue. (LCSS)
Staple cartridge is
empty. Replace now
12-715-01 The HVF staple cartridge is empty
Staple cartridge supplies are low
12-716-00 The LCSS and HVF sta- The finisher's main staple
cartridge supplies are low.
ples are low
Re-order staple cartridge.
Printing can continue. LCSS
PL 12.55 Item 7, HVF PL
12.110 Item 31. HVFBM PL
12.185 Item 8
Stapling fault. Power off

12-653-00 Stapling is disabled, out Perform 12-371-00-110, 12of service (LCSS)

372-00-110, 12-378-00-110
RAP
Stapling fault. Power off

12-721-00 The stapler is not in

position
Install a new staple cartridge.

Perform 12-369-00-171 to
12-377-00-171 RAP
The stapler module is open,

close the stapler module
February 2013
2-597
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Close the BM stapler module.
If necessary, perform the 12063-00-171, 12-411-00-171
RAP for staple unit 1, and 12403-00-171, 12-413-00-171,
12-414-00-171 RAP for staple unit 2

on, GP 14
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
The current job exceeds 12-411-00 Copy job will exceed the Empty the tray
the tray capacity, you will
output destinations
be prompted to empty
capacity
the tray.
The hole punch waste

hole punch waste container.
12-649-00 The hole punch chad bin Hole punch waste container
is full and needs empty- is full, jobs requesting hole
ing. (LCSS)
Empty chad bin
The document feeder

top cover is open
05-502-00 DADH top cover open.
Close the DADH top cover. If

the 05-258-00, 05-307-00
DADH Cover Interlock Open
RAP.
The hole punch waste

hole punch waste container.
12-649-01 The hole punch chad bin Hole punch waste container
is full and needs empty- is full, jobs requesting hole
ing. (HVF)
Empty chad bin
The document size was

The job has been
deleted.
05-546-00 On pre-feed the DADH

fails to recognize the
size of the document
Reload originals or select

size. Perform 05-257-00 RAP
The Hole Punch Waste

Container is not
detected. Please reinsert
12-641-00 The chad bin has been

removed from the finisher
The document size was

The job has been
deleted.
22-507-05 The document is larger

than expected
Try one of the following:

Select mixed size originals
and reload into the document
feeder or make sure the originals are not creased or
folded and retry from the document glass. If the problem
persists, perform the 05-25700 RAP
The installed cleaning

unit is not compatible
with this machine
94-628-00 IME detected an incom- Install a new cleaning unit PL

patible cleaning unit fit- 94.10 Item 21. Copying and
ted to the machine
UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
The E-mail service can- 17-558-00 Email service cannot unregister

not un-register. Notify

on, GP 14. Scan to E-mail is
disabled, print and other
to 16-959-19 E-mail Application Registration Error RAP
The Fax service cannot 22-566-00 Fax service cannot register

register. Notify your system administrator

on, GP 14. Fax and LAN Fax
are disabled. Other machine
22-371-00, 22-372-00 RAP
The Fax service cannot

un-register. Notify your

on, GP 14. All machine services are disabled. If the
22-371-00, 22-372-00 RAP
22-567-00 Fax service cannot unregister
The finisher front door is 12-564-00 The finisher front door is Close the finisher front door
open
open (LCSS)
Reference / Action
Reinstall the chad bin.

If the problem persists, perform the 12-043-00-110, 12046-00-110 RAP
The internet Fax service 17-557-00 Internet Fax service cancannot un-register.
not un-register
Notify your system
administrator

on, GP 14. Internet Fax is
Faults 19 RAP
The machine is not avail- 02-520-00 A software error has

occurred.
able

on, GP 14
The machine is not avail- 82-103-01 Sensor 16 LE time out

able
that originated from the
A3 tray 5.
Copying and printing not

available. Slide Tray 5 away
from the machine. Open the
top and middle left side door
to clear jam. If the problem
The machine is not avail- 91-606-00 Head to drum measure- Head to Drum spacing check
able
ment is started.
in Progress. Please wait, this
may take up to ten minutes to
complete
The machine is not avail- 91-609-00 Waste tray removal
able
detected, when the
waste tray is locked.
The waste tray is currently in

use, please re-insert the
waste tray. Copying and
The machine is not avail- 17-514-00 External accounting

able. Accounting comdevice communication
munication failure
failure
Administrator intervention
required to check the connection to the external
accounting device
The finisher front door is 12-564-01 The finisher front door is Close the finisher front door
open
open (HVF - all variants)
OF 4b
Reason for Message
February 2013
2-598

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
The machine is not avail- 82-103-00 Sensor 16 LE time out

that originated from the
able. Paper jam in areas
A4 PFP.
2 and 1a

Reference / Action
UI Message
Slide Tray 5 away from the

machine. Open the top and
middle left side door to clear
jam. If the problem persists,
perform the 82-133-00 RAP.
The server Fax service

cannot un-register.
Notify your system
administrator
The machine is offline
03-504-00 Network controller status Switch the machine off then

code
on, GP 14
The machine is offline
03-504-01 Network controller status Switch the machine off then

code
on, GP 14

connection is about to be
ESS registration service reset. If the problem persists, perform the 16-160-09
reset
process has stopped
ESS Reg Service Process
Death RAP
The network controller is 16-502-00 Status active when ever Cleared when the network
about to be reset
the network controller
controller reset is initiated
detects that a platform
reset is about to occur
The network controller is 03-563-00 Network service are
initializing. Copy and
being established
print jobs may be
delayed
The number of originals

was less than the number originally scanned
22-503-05 Insufficient originals

detected in the DADH.
The output tray is almost 04-569-00 The OCT detects that it

full
is 90% full
The output tray is full.

Empty the output tray
04-568-00 The OCT is full.
The reprint saved jobs

17-561-00 Reprint saved jobs serservice cannot un-regisvice cannot un-register.
administrator
Please wait, the Network

Controller is initializing. No
user intervention is required.
Printing is currently unavailable. If the problem persists,
perform the 03-331-00, 03332-00 Main Controller and
Network Controller on the
SBC PWB Cannot Communicate RAP
Status
Code
Reason for Message
17-556-00 Server Fax service can- Switch the machine off then
on, GP 14. Server Fax is disnot un-register
abled, print and other
16-988-19 Server Fax Application Registration Error
RAP
The workflow scanning 17-560-00 Network scanning serservice cannot un-regisvice cannot un-register.
administrator
Empty the tray

on, GP 14. Re-printing of
saved jobs in disabled. If the
16-752-00, 16-753-00 File
Cabinet Application Registration Error RAP

on, GP 14. Scan service is
16-986-19 Network Scanning Application Registration
Error RAP
Top left side door is open 01-506-00 The IME upper left door Copying and printing are not
(bypass tray) is open
available. If the problem persists, perform the 01-506-00
Upper Left Door Open RAP.
Tray 1 guides are not set 01-545-01 The dedicated tray 1 is Reload required paper and
properly
closed with media size correctly adjust the paper
other than what was set guides
Tray 1 is empty. Add
paper
Add media. Copying and

printing can continue from
other trays.
Refer to 71A RAP and WD
7.5
Tray 1 is nearly empty.

Add paper
71-535-00 Tray 1 media low
Add media. Copying and

printing can continue from
other trays. Refer to 71A
RAP and WD 7.5
Re-sort and reload all originals.

The Tray is almost full. The
tray may be emptied now or
when it is full. Copy and print
services available. Scan service is available.
Reference / Action

70-314-00 Trays 1 - 3 out of service Copying and printing are not
Notify the system admin(communications failure) available. If the problem peristrator
sists, perform the 70-312-00
Tray 1 to Tray 3 Communication Failure RAP
Notify your system
administrator
February 2013
2-599
71-313-00 Tray 1 mechanical failure

available. Switch the
If the problem persists, perform the 71-215-00 Tray 1
Elevate Up Failure RAP
OF 4b

UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message

Reference / Action
UI Message
Status
Code
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Tray 1 is open
71-301-00 the dedicated tray 1 is

open
Check the paper and close

the tray. Printing can continue from other trays.
Refer to WD 7.5
Tray 2 lifting

Print and copy services can
continue from other trays if
the correct media is available
Tray 1 is open
71-302-00 the adjustable tray 1 is

open
Check the paper and close

the tray. Printing can continue from other trays.
Refer to WD 7.5

paper
Tray 1 lifting

continue from other rays if
Add media. Print and copy

services can continue from
other trays if the correct
media is available.
If the problem persists, perform the 73A RAP
Tray 3 is lifting


Add paper

media is available

Notify your system
administrator
73-313-00 Tray 3 out of service

(mechanical failure)

on, GP 14. Print and copy
media is available. If the
73-212-00 RAP, 73-215-00
RAP
Tray 3 is open
Close Tray. Printing can continue from other trays. If the

73-320-00 RAP
Tray 2 guides are not set 01-545-02 The dedicated tray 2 is Reload required paper and
properly
closed with media size correctly adjust the paper
other than what was set guides
paper

media is available. Refer to
72A RAP

Add paper

media is available

Notify your system
administrator
72-313-00 Tray 2 out of service

(mechanical failure)

72-215-00 Tray 2 Elevate Up
Failure RAP
Tray 2 is open
Tray 2 is open. Check

paper and close tray
OF 4b
72-302-00 The adjustable tray 2 is

open
Close Tray. Print and copy

other rays if the correct
media is available.
Refer to 72-320-00 RAP and
WD 7.5
72-301-00 The dedicated tray 2 is

open
Close tray. Print and copy

other rays if the correct
72-320-00 RAP and WD 7.5

73-300-00 The dedicated tray 3 is
paper and close the tray
open

media is available

73-302-00 The adjustable tray 3 is
paper and close the tray
open

73-320-00 RAP
February 2013
2-600

UI Message
Tray 4 (Bypass) is not
System Administrator
Status
Code
Reason for Message
74-313-00 Tray 4 mechanical failure

Status
Code
Reference / Action
UI Message
Reason for Message
Reference / Action

the following, 74-101-00, 74160-00 to 74-161-00 Bypass
Tray Mis-Feed RAP, 74-12000 Bypass Tray Guides Move
in Run RAP and 74-214-00
Bypass Tray Nudger Failure
RAP
Tray 5 is overloaded.
Remove some paper
75-525-00 Tray 5 is overloaded
Tray 5 is unavailable.
Please call for assistance.
92-536-00 Tray 5 communications Switch the machine off then

problems (PfpSerialLink- on, GP 14. Check connection
to printer. If problem perSafety)
sists, perform the 92-535-00,
92-536-00 RAP. Copying and
Remove some media. Print

and copy services can continue from other trays if the
correct media is available.
Perform 75-212-00, 75-21500 RAP

paper

75B RAP
Tray 5 is un-docked

machine. Print and copy services can continue from other
available. Refer to 75-325-00
RAP

Add paper

75B RAP
Tray 5 is undocked.

machine. Print and copy services can continue from other
RAP
Tray 5 is not available. Print

and copy services can continue from other trays if the
correct media is available. If
the 75-212-00, 75-215-00
Tray 5 Elevate Up Failure
RAP
Tray 5 lifting
75-536-00 Tray 5 is lifting
No action required. Print and

copy services can continue
from other trays if the correct
media is available
Tray 5 lowering
75-537-00 Tray 5 is lowering
No action required. Print and

copy services can continue
from other trays if the correct
media is available
Switch the machine off, GP

14. Check cabling connections. Switch the machine on,
GP 14. Print and copy services can continue from other
RAP
Tray 6 (inserter) is
empty. Add paper
12-617-00 Tray 6 (Inserter) detects Add paper to tray 6.

no paper present
If the problem persists, perform the 12J-171 RAP
12-731-00 Post process inserter
empty. Load more media
tray (tray 6) is empty.
for insertion.
Jobs will be held if
inserts are required.
Load more media. If the

12J-171 RAP
Close tray. Print and copy

75A RAP
obstructions in the
Inserter.

inserter. If the problem persists, perform the 12-191-00171, 12-193-00-171, 12-19400-171, 12-196-00-171 RAP
and 12J-171 RAP

75-313-00 Tray 5 mechanical failNotify the system adminure
istrator

Notify your system
administrator
Tray 5 is open
75-312-00 Tray 5 communications

failure
February 2013
2-601
12-944-00 Inserter capability

degraded
OF 4b

UI Message
obstructions. Power off
then on.
Status
Code
Reason for Message
12-744-00 Inserter unavailable

UI Message
The Post Process Inserter is

not available. Switch the
Check the current fault code
list for inserter faults and go
to appropriate RAP
Unexpected paper size

tray 5
75-103-01 Media size mismatch in Lower Tray 5 using the buttray 5 (alternate method) ton indicated. Check paper
size, orientation and type.

tray 5
75-301-01 Media size mismatch in Lower Tray 5 using the buttray 5 (alternate method) ton indicated.Check paper
size, orientation and type

tray 6 (Inserter)
12-750-00 A shorter than expected Follow the message text.

sheet has been fed from Check the size of the paper
the inserter
in the inserter. Refer to 12J171 RAP

or type detected on tray
6 (inserter)
78-103-00 Media size mismatch in

tray 6
Waste tray is almost full

and will need emptying
soon
91-590-00 IME waste tray is almost The tray will need to be empfull
tied soon. Printing and copying can continue
Tray is ready for unload- 12-740-00 Tray is ready for unload- Follow the instructions to
unload the tray
ing. Press the button on
ing
finisher to return tray to
ready position
Trays 1 to 3 are not
70-312-00 Communications failure

for trays 1 to 3

Unable to staple. Check 12-901-00 The finisher is in

for obstructions in the
degraded mode, unable on, GP 14. If the problem
output trays
to staple.
persists, perform the 12F171 RAP
tray 1
71-103-00 Media size mismatch in Open tray 1.Check paper

tray 1 (alternate method) size, orientation and type. If
the 71B RAP

tray 2
72-103-00 Media match in tray 2

(alternate method)
Open Tray 2.Check paper

continue from other rays if

tray 3
73-103-00 Media size mismatch in Open Tray 3.Check paper

tray 3 (alternate method) size, orientation and type.

tray 4 (bypass)
74-103-00 Media size mismatch in Open Tray 4, check paper

tray 4 (alternate method) size, orientation and type.
Refer to WD 8.3

tray 5
75-103-00 Media size mismatch in Lower Tray 5 using the buttray 5 (alternate method) ton indicated. Check paper
OF 4b
Status
Code
Reference / Action
Reason for Message
Reference / Action
Open Tray 6.Check and confirm paper size, orientation

and type
Waste tray is full. Please 91-847-00 The waste tray is almost Empty the waste tray, then
empty the waste tray
full and has also been
replace it in the machine
removed
Waste tray is full. Please 91-591-00 IME waste tray is full
empty the waste tray.
Empty the tray. Copying and

printing are not available. If
necessary refer to WD 9.4
Waste tray locked while 91-589-00 IME waste ink tray is

in use. Do not attempt to
locked in place to allow it
remove
to cool
Waste tray not detected
(Missing). Insert the
Waste Tray.
91-584-00 Waste ink tray is missing Install a waste ink tray, PL

(not full and not present) 91.10 Item 15. Print and copy
services are disabled. If the
problem persists, refer to WD
9.4 and 91-832-00 RAP
Workflow scanning hard- 16-554-00 Network controller Hardware must be

ware must be added or
added or replaced
replaced. Notify your
Hardware must be added or

replaced
Workflow scanning ser- 17-559-00 Network scanning service cannot register.

vice cannot register

on, GP 14. Scan service is
16-986-19 Network Scanning Application Registration
Error RAP
February 2013
2-602
OF 5 Boot Up Failure RAP

UI Message
Yellow Ink is empty.
yellow ink.
Yellow ink stick is

jammed. Call for assistance
Status
Code
Reason for Message
93-515-00 IME yellow ink is empty
Reference / Action
Load more yellow solid ink.
WD 9.18.
93-516-00 Ink stick loaded sensor Clear the ink loader jam.
actuated. Ink stick trans- Copying and printing are not
port motor operated. Ink available
stick not detected by ink
out sensor
Yellow ink stick jam. Add 93-928-00 Yellow ink stick jam
yellow ink to aid jam
recovery.
Your Administrator is
16-506-00 The administrator is
reconfiguring the sysreconfigure the system
tem. Services will not be
available

detected.Load a yellow Ink
stick to aid jam recovery.
Copying and printing not
available
The system administrator is
saving the machine configuration to a remote station
Use this RAP if the UI displays The machine is not available or Copying and printing not
available or the machine does not come to a Ready to scan your job state. Also, use this RAP
if the software loading procedure fails.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the 7- Segment display unit on the SBC PWB, Table 2. Perform the relevant service actions.
Pull out the image processing module, OF 6. Check the chassis fan assembly, PL 3.11
Item 5
If the boot up failure occurs after new components are installed, make sure the new components are compatible with the machine and all PJs correctly seated. Check that no pins
are damaged.
Check that all the PJs are seated correctly on the single board controller PWB.
Procedure
1.
Disconnect the DADH communication / power cable (PJ188 / PJ851), PL 5.10 Item 6.
2.
If an LCSS or HVF is installed, disconnect the communication cable and the power cord.
Install a finisher bypass connector, PL 26.10 Item 3.
3.
If a fax is installed, remove the fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1.
4.
The machine boots up.

Y
N
Check the state of the LEDs on the single board controller PWB, Figure 1. Refer to
Table 1 which indicates the fault state. Perform the relevant service actions.
Re-install the original fax module. Connect the DADH communication / power cable.
Connect the output device communication cable and power cord.
NOTE: The non-fault state of the LEDs is shown in Figure 1.
Connect the DADH communication / power cable (PJ188 / PJ851). Switch on the machine, GP
14. The machine boots up.
Y
N
Connect the output device communication cable and power cord. Switch on the machine, GP
14. The machine boots up.
February 2013
2-603
OF 4b, OF 5
N
The output device is a HVF with a booklet maker.
Y
N
OCT, PL 12.00 Item 1.
Table 1 Single board controller PWB
Disconnect the booklet maker PWB. The machine boots up.

Y
N
LED ID
LED
colour
CR7
Green
A code appears A alpha-numeric codes appear in the window, refer to OF 16. The decimal point is
the heartbeat and pulses.
CR8
Green
Off
+1.8V SLEEP failure

Indicates a voltage supply or regulation
fault. Install a new single board controller
CR9
Green
Off
Image clock disabled
CR12
Green
Off

PWB, PL 3.11 Item 13. If CR4 or CR5 are
also off, install a new power distribution
CR14
Red
On
Indicates power failure
CR24
Green
On
Indicates that the FPGA is not programmed.

Install a new single board controller PWB,
PL 3.11 Item 13.
CR10, CR11,
CR13
Not used
Green /
Yellow
Off
Check the ethernet cable. If necessary,

install a new single board controller PWB,
PL 3.11 Item 13.
Green /
Yellow
Off
Fault State
Description

If necessary, reload the software. Refer to GP 4 Machine Software.

LED ID
LED
colour
Fault State
Description
CR1
Green
Off
1.8V failure.
CR2
Red
On (with a SIM
card installed)
NOTE: This LED is normally off if a SIM

card is installed, but flashes briefly when
the SIM card is accessed. If the LED does
not flash during SIM card access, this can
indicate a fault. If a SIM card is not installed,
this LED will be on.
The SIM card is corrupt or does not contain
the correct serial number. Install a new SIM
card of the same type, PL 3.11 Item 22.
Refer to GP 19.
CR3
Green
Flashing
Check that the SIM card serial number and

the machine chassis numbers match. Install
a new SIM card of the same type, PL 3.11
Item 22. Refer to GP 19.
If the fault persists, install a new single
CR4
Green
Off
Indicates +3.3V failure. Check harnesses

and install as necessary a new power distribution PWB, PL 3.11 Item 1 and a single
CR5
Green
Off
Indicates +3.3V failure. Check harnesses

and install as necessary a new power distribution PWB, PL 3.11 Item 1 and a single
OF 5
Internet connector left side PJ14

Internet connector right side
PJ14
NOTE: This LED should be on or flashing

during data transfer.
Check the ethernet cable.
Refer to Figure 1 for the location and state of the LEDs on the single board controller PWB in a
non-fault condition.
Table 2 7-Segment LED display
POST code name
Fault
code
Decimal
point
status Code Description
Service action
Display Test
On
Initial 7 segment display LED display or SBC PWB.

Check that the NVM modtest
ule PWB is fitted correctly,
PL 3.11 Item 17. Install a
new SBC PWB, PL 3.11
Item 13
PWBA
Off
Failed explorer controller Install a new SBC PWB,

PL 3.11 Item 13.
February 2013
2-604
POST code name
Fault
code
Decimal
point
Service action
POST code name
System memory
Flashing Failed system memory
Install a new System

memory PWB, PL 3.11
Item 4
Machine attempting sleep wake-up
EPC Memory
Flashing Failed EPC memory

PWB, PL 3.11 Item 21
NVM and RTC

Module
Flashing Failed NVM memory
Install a new NVM module PWB, PL 3.11 Item 17
Flash Module
Flashing Failed flash memory
Flash module. Install a

Item 13.
External Hard Drive
Flashing Failed external hard

drive
Install a new External hard

drive, PL 3.11 Item 2
RTC module
Flashing Failed RTC
RTC module. Install a new

SBC PWB, PL 3.11 Item
13.
Initial entry to kernel code
Flashing Waiting for power normal No action, no POST fault

detected
U-boot complete
Flashing U-boot hand over control to kernel
Kernel software
Kernel starting user

space
Flashing Kernel starting user

space
Kernel / run time software
Machine in ready
mode
Blank Flashing None, no fault detected
Decimal
point
Flashing OS resuming drivers
Service action
None, for diagnostic information only information
only
NOTE: On Application power up the 7-segment display cycles around displaying these codes
until the relevant platform has fully synchronized with the system. Any code left displayed after
power up indicates this event has not been detected in software and is a probable s/w issue
No action, no fault
detected
UI platform available
Flashing UI platform available
See NOTE
IIT comms established
Flashing IIT comms established
See NOTE
NC platform available
Flashing NC platform available
See NOTE
Dc platform available
Flashing Dc platform available
See NOTE
IOT comms established
Flashing IOT comms established
See NOTE
Fax comms established
Flashing Fax comms established

Only if Fax installed
See NOTE
Machine attempting sleep entry
Flashing OS suspending drivers,

entering sleep
(Split power plane TBC)

only
Machine in sleep
state
Flashing Resting in sleep
None, for diagnostic information only
Machine in semiconscious state
Flashing Running in semi-conscious mode
Fault
code
Figure 1 Single board controller PWB
February 2013
2-605
OF 5
OF 7 Sleep Mode RAP
Use this RAP to diagnose faulty machine fans. Faulty fans can cause smells or overheating.
Use this RAP when the machine has problems entering or leaving the sleep (energy saving)
mode.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE: Bear in mind that not all fans operate all of the time that the machine is switched on.
Identify the suspect fan.
Check the harness to the fan.
Check for damage or debris that restricts the movement of the fan.
From Table 1, check that the fan operates and in the correct direction.
In sleep mode, check that the machine is running very quietly and check that only the green
LED on top of the power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2 is lit. In this mode the sleep mode button at
the right end of the UI keyboard, is illuminated with a green lamp. In run mode, all three power
supply LEDs are lit.
Procedure
The following signals are used to control and monitor the active state of the machine:
The indicated PJ.
The indicated PWB that supplies the fan.
As necessary, install a new fan, or the assembly containing the fan, referring to the indicated
parts list reference.
In Table 1. The power supply fan blows air into the machine and the other fans blow air out
towards the back of the machine.
Active 24V. Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4.
Table 1 Fan information
Source - Power Supply Unit, PJDC2, pin 24.

Destination - Drum Driver PWB, PJ902, pin 24.
Action - This signal informs the drum driver PWB that the +24V supply is switched
on. When this supply is on, it also enables the +5V, +12V and -12V supplies.
Active 24V signal level - This is +3.3V when the machine is in the normal mode and
0V in sleep mode.
Active 50V. Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4.
Action - This signal informs the drum driver PWB that the +50V supply is switched
on.
Active 50V signal level - This is +3.3V when the machine is in the normal mode and
0V in sleep mode.
Name
WD No.
PWB
PJ
Parts List Reference
Chassis fan
WD 1.7
Power distribution
PWB
PJ7
PL 3.11 Item 5
Drum cooling fan
WD 9.1
Drum driver PWB
PJ501
PL 94.20 Item 4
Marking unit fan
WD 9.4
Drum driver PWB
PJ901
PL 1.15 Item 23
Abatement fan
WD 9.4
Drum driver PWB
PJ901
PL 94.20 Item 11
Source - Drum Driver PWB, PJ902, pin 27.

Destination - Power Supply Unit, PJDC2, pin 27.
Energy Star 24V. Refer to WD 9.4 and WD 1.4.
Enclosure fan
WD 9.4
Drum driver PWB
PJ901
PL 1.15 Item 6
Power supply fan
Power supply unit
PL 1.15 Item 2
Action - This signal reports back to the power supply unit that the +24V supply was
switched off when the machine entered sleep mode, and Energy Star became
active. Switching this supply off, also switched off the +5V, +12V and -12V supplies.
Energy Star 24V signal level - This is +3.3V when the machine is in the normal mode
and is 0V in sleep mode.
Energy Star 50V. Refer to WD 9.4 and WD 1.4.
OF 6, OF 7
Source - Drum Driver PWB, PJ902, pin 28.
Destination - Power Supply Unit, PJDC2, pin 28.
Action - This signal reports back to the power supply unit that the +50V supply was
switched off when the machine entered sleep mode, and Energy Star became
active.
Energy Star 50V signal level - This is +3.3V when the machine is in the normal mode
and is 0V in sleep mode.
February 2013
2-606
OF 8 Multi-feed RAP
Analogue Power Gauge 24V. Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4.
Action - This signal informs the drum driver PWB that the +24V power used is within
the expected range.
Analogue power gauge 24V signal level - This is an analogue signal between 0V and
+3.3V. When this signal is below +2.11 volts, the power used is within the expected
range.
To solve several sheet multi-feeds or extra blank sheet output problems.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Analogue Power Gauge 50V. Refer to WD 1.4 and WD 9.4.
Action - This signal informs the drum driver PWB that the +50V supply power used is
within the expected range.
Check the condition of the paper. Do not use incorrectly cut paper, damp paper, paper
with rough edges, badly drilled paper, paper with wrapper wax or glue contamination.
Refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Check the paper specification, GP 20.
Multi-feed from the bypass tray, go to 74A By-pass Tray RAP
Analogue power gauge 50V signal level - This is an analogue signal between 0V and
+3.3V. When this signal is below +2.11 volts, the power used is within the expected
range.
The above signals are carried on a ribbon cable and are therefore difficult to measure. Check
that the cable is in good condition and is securely and correctly connected. Install new components as required:
Procedure
When checking for multi-feeds always use a new ream of paper. If a new ream can not be
used, then perform the following:
1.
Fan the paper.
2.
Turn the paper round or turn the paper over.
3.
Remove four or five sheets from the top of the stack.
4.
When loading multi-reams of paper into tray 3. Remove the top and bottom sheet from
each ream. This will prevent ream interface multi-feeds.
Check the power supplies during normal or sleep mode as follows:
Tray 1 and Tray 2
+3.3V ESTAR. Refer to WD 1.3. This supply is switched on both in normal and sleep
modes. If necessary, go to 01B +3.3V ESTAR Distribution RAP.
+3.3V. Refer to WD 1.6. This supply is switched on both in normal and sleep modes. If
necessary, go to 01C +3.3V Distribution RAP.
1.
Check that the paper tray side guides are set to the correct paper size.
2.
+5V. Refer to WD 1.3. This supply is switched on during normal mode and is switched off
during sleep mode. If necessary, go to 01D +5V Distribution RAP.
The paper tray drops down when the tray is pulled out and the tray elevates up when
pushed in.
during sleep mode. If necessary, go to 01E +12V Distribution RAP.
-12V. Refer to WD 1.3. This supply is switched on during normal mode and is switched off
during sleep mode. If necessary, go to 01F -12V Distribution RAP.
+17V. Refer to WD 1.5. This supply changes voltage according to the machine mode.
When the machine is switched on, the machine enters Print Engine Self Test (PEST) and
this supply is measured at about +17V. When the machine enters normal running mode,
this supply rises to +24V. When the machine enters sleep mode, this supply returns to
about +17V. It is used to generate the +3.3V for the IIT. If necessary, go to 01G +17V Distribution RAP.
3.
Check the paper feed rolls, REP 81.4.
c.
Check that the clutch assembly, tray 1, PL 81.25 Item 4 or tray 2, PL 81.26 Item 4,
has a torque resistance and does not rotate freely.
d.
Install new components as necessary, Tray 1, PL 81.25, Tray 2, PL 81.26.
The paper trays for worn, broken or missing components.

a.
Install new components as necessary, PL 70.10 Item 1.

1.
during sleep mode. If necessary, go to 01J +50V Distribution RAP.
Check the paper feed assembly, REP 81.1.
b.
Tray 3
during sleep mode. If necessary, go to 01H +24V Distribution RAP.
-50V. Refer to WD 1.3. This supply is switched on during normal mode and is switched off
during sleep mode. If necessary, go to 01K -50V Distribution RAP.
a.
2.
The tray moves down when the tray is pulled out, and moves up when the tray is closed.
a.
Check tray 3 paper feed assembly, REP 81.2.
b.
Check that the clutch assembly, PL 81.30 Item 4 has a torque resistance and does
not rotate freely.
c.
Install new components as necessary, PL 81.30 Item 1.
The paper tray for worn, broken or missing components. Install new components as necessary, PL 73.15.
February 2013
2-607
OF 7, OF 8
Tray 5
OF 9 Ink Stick Count Mismatch
Use this RAP when the number of ink sticks in the ink loader does not correspond with the percent values shown on the UI display.
1.
The tray moves down when the door is opened, and moves up when the door is closed.
a.
Check the tray 5 paper feed assembly. REP 81.7.
b.
Check the tray 5 paper feed rollers, PL 81.45 Item 2.
c.
Install new components as necessary, PL 75.68, PL 75.70.
The NVRAM value is read by the software and processed internally. It is actually the approximate number of micrograms of ink left in the ink loader and is not a percentage. The percentage is computed by the software and updated by the IME software to the UI.
Bypass Tray
Procedure
1.
Ensure that the customer is not filling the tray above the max fill line.
Only perform this procedure when:
2.
Clean the feed roll and retard pad with a damp cloth with water.
3.
Check that the clutch, PL 74.10 Item 5 has a torque resistance and does not rotate freely.
4.
Install a new clutch, feed roll, nudger and retard roll, PL 74.10.
There is more than one ink stick difference between the number of ink sticks in the ink
loader and the indicated value on the UI.
If the NVM values have been corrupted.

1.
Remove the rear cover, PL 81.10 Item 1.
2.
Remove the ink loader access cover rear, PL 81.10 Item 7.
3.
Check the number of ink sticks in the loader.
4.
Enter Service mode, GP 1.
5.
Select Adjustments.
6.
Select dC131 NVM Read / Write.
7.
Enter the NVM ID from the list below:
Cyan NVM ID 420-001.
Magenta NVM ID 420-002.
Yellow NVM ID 420-003.
Black NVM ID 420-004.
8.
Select Read. The NVM description and value will be displayed.
9.
To calculate the new values which are nominal mass and measured in micrograms:
Black ink stick has a mass value = 204000000 micrograms.
Colour ink stick has a mass value = 189000000 micrograms
Count the number of complete ink sticks and estimate the size of the ink stick in the melt
plate assembly. Make the calculation using the mass values for each ink colour. Enter the
values in the NVM for each colour.
10. To modify the ink level value:

a.
Select the NVM ID for the ink stick to be changed.
b.
Select Read.
c.
Select +/- in the Value of ink level box.
d.
Enter the new value using the key pad. If the wrong value is entered, press C to back
space.
e.
Select Write to enter the new value in the NVM.
f.
Select Call Closeout and Exit only.
11. Switch the machine off, then switch the machine on, GP 14.
12. Check that the number of ink sticks in the ink loader correlates with the ink level indicator
on the user interface.
OF 8, OF 9
February 2013
2-608
OF 10 Intermittent Failure RAP
Use this RAP to locate failures when no specific cause can be found, i.e. if the machine resets
to Ready to scan your job or Please wait during a print / copy run, or a fault code occurs
which cannot easily be repeated.
Initial Actions
Check that the customer power does not drop below the specification when the copier is
making copies; use a digital meter and select Peak Hold. Refer to GP 22 Electrical
Power Requirements.
External Electrical Equipment Checkout

WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
If you suspect that the customer power is incorrect, DO NOT try to correct the customer power.
DO NOT reconnect the machine. Inform the customer and your manager.
WARNING
Ask the customer if there is any electrical equipment, which uses a large amount of current, that is connected to the same supply circuit as the machine.
Ask the customer if there are any specific print / copier functions that cause the fault to
occur; e.g. using the input or output module, or making reduced images.
With the customer's assistance, check if the failure occurs when electrical equipment near
to the machine is switched ON or OFF.
Enter Machine Status and check the active messages and the event log. If a fault code is
raised when the failure occurs, then go to the appropriate RAP.
If possible, connect the machine to a different supply circuit from the equipment that is
causing the problem.
Common Causes Checkout
Make copies and observe where the paper stops and which components are switched ON
or OFF when the failure occurs.
Make the following checks of common causes of intermittent failures:
Check for intermittent connections in the wiring to the LED exposure lamp.
Check if there is a repeating pattern to the failure.
Check that the front door interlock switch is fully actuated by the front door interlock actuator. If the fault is eliminated when an interlock cheater is installed, check that the interlock actuator is not damaged. Install new parts as necessary.
Check that the chassis fan, PL 3.11 Item 5 is working correctly. Refer to OF 6 Fans and
Air Systems RAP.
Perform the following to gather additional information about the fault:
Procedure
Go to the relevant checkout:
Customer Power Supply Checkout
External Electrical Equipment Checkout
Connectors and Wiring Checkout
Common Causes Checkout
Refer to REP 1.1 for details of wiring harness repair.
Connectors and Wiring Checkout
Power Supply Checkout
EPROMs Checkout
Electric Motors Checkout
Solenoids and Clutches Checkout
Switches and Sensors Checkout
Electrostatic Discharge Checkout
Paper Trays 1 to 5 Checkout
Output Device Checkout
Customer Power Supply Checkout

WARNING
CAUTION
If you suspect that the customer AC power is incorrect, DO NOT try to correct the customer
power. DO NOT reconnect the printer. Inform the customer and your manager.
Measure the customer power voltage at the power outlet and check that the customer
power is within specification. Refer to GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements.
Visible signs of damage to the wiring and the ribbon cables. Especially check wiring to
components that move.
Check for pinched wires near moving parts.
The DADH module harness for broken wiring and ensure that the earth terminals are
secure.
To check for wire breaks inside insulation, gently pull the relevant connector and wire
while measuring continuity.
Check that all the PWB and in-line connections are good; refer to PJ Locations.
Check the continuity of the ground connections to the input and output modules.
Check that all the input and output module static eliminators are connected correctly and
in good condition; refer to the relevant input or output module RAP.
Power Supply Checkout

Check the power cord for continuity.
EPROMs Checkout
Check that the NVM module PWB, EPC memory PWB and system memory PWB are installed
correctly. If necessary, reseat or install new components, PL 3.11.
February 2013
2-609
OF 10
Electric Motors Checkout
Ground connection on the power cord, PL 12.75.
Refer to GP 10 How to Check a Motor and perform the following:
Static eliminator on bin 0 entry, PL 12.60 Item 7.
Disconnect each motor in turn to locate the motor that is causing the fault. When the
faulty motor has been located, install a new motor.
Static eliminator on the tamper assembly, PL 12.45 Item 5.
Static eliminator on the bin 1 entry, PL 12.65 Item 7.
If the fault still exists, locate the PWB that drives the motor and install a new PWB.
Check that all of the connectors on the LCSS PWB are pushed fully home. Ensure
that all of the ground wires are connect to the frame.
Check all the harnesses for damage and short circuit to ground.
Solenoids and Clutches Checkout

Refer to GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch and perform the following:
Check that the components are installed correctly.
Check that there is no mechanical binding, slipping or interference.
Ground connection to the power supply unit, PL 12.140 Item 4.
Static eliminator on BM entry. PL 12.150 Item 26.
Exit brush on HVF upper exit guide, PL 12.125 Item 8.
If it is suspected that a clutch or solenoid is faulty, install a new component as necessary.
Static eliminator on BM exit, PL 12.185 Item 16.
If the fault still exists, locate the PWB that drives the component and install a new PWB.
Exit brush on the Tri folder right hand frame, PL 12.215 Item 13.
Ground wire on the BM compiler motor, PL 12.175 Item 1.
Ground wire on the BM back stop motor, PL 12.160 Item 4.
Ground wires to HVF buffer motor and transport motor 2, PL 12.120 Item 1.
Ground wires to HVF transport motor 1 and bypass feed motor, PL 12.120 Item 2.
Ground wire between the BM flapper bracket, PL 12.150 Item 24 and the crease
blade assembly, PL 12.170 Item 13.
Ground wire between the crease blade assembly, PL 12.170 Item 13 and the BM
tamper bracket, PL 12.155 Item 12.
Ground wire between the base of the HVF and the BM.
Check that all of the connectors on the HVF PWB, and BM PWB are pushed fully
home. Ensure that all of the ground wires are connected to the frame.
Where the Tri Folder PWB and the Inserter PWB options are installed check that the
PWB connectors are pushed fully home. Ensure that all of the ground wires are connected to the frame
Ground wire on the Inserter PWB, PL 12.310 Item 9.
Inserter docking PJ and connector.
Check all the harnesses for damage and short circuit to ground.
Enter the relevant output codes and check that the energizing of the components is reliable. Check if the fault is caused when the components de-energize.
Switches and Sensors Checkout

Refer to GP 11 How to Check a Sensor and GP 13 How to Check a Switch and perform the following:
HVF. Check the following:
Check that the components are clean and installed correctly. Ensure that the wiring to the
components is connected correctly.
Enter the relevant input codes and check that the sensing of the components is reliable.
Check if the fault is caused when the components are actuated.
If it is suspected that a switch or sensor is faulty, install a new component as necessary.
If the fault still exists, locate the PWB that controls the component and install a new PWB.
Electrostatic Discharge Checkout

Refer to GP 7 System Grounding Verification and perform the following:
If the fault only occurs when feeding from a specific paper tray, go to Paper Trays 1 to 5
Checkout.
Check that all EPROMs and the NVM module PWB are seated correctly and that the connectors are not damaged.
Paper Trays 1 to 5 Checkout
Check that the paper tray size detection sensors match the size of paper in the trays.
Check that the control panel indicators display the correct size of paper.
Perform the Electrostatic Discharge Checkout.
Refer to the appropriate RAPs to check the operations of sensors, feed components and
associated harnessing.
71-101-00 to 71-161-00 Tray 1 Misfeed RAP
75-101-00, 75-160-00 to 75-161-00 Tray 5 Misfeed RAP
74-101-00, 74-160-00 to 74-161-00 Bypass Tray Misfeed RAP
Output Device Checkout

To run the machine without the output device connected, use a finisher bypass harness, PL
26.10 Item 7. If the problem is cleared, then go to the appropriate output device.
LCSS. Check the following:
OF 10
February 2013
2-610
OF 11 Unable to Load Ink Sticks
OF 12 Service Code RAP
When the machine powers off the key plate is moved to prevent the customer from loading ink
sticks with the power off. This is to ensure that the ink sticks count will be correct.
Where a fault occurs on the machine but the machine is still able to run the status is displayed
in the machine service code.
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
To find out the service code status of the machine select the machine status key. The service
code is displayed on the bottom left of the screen on the Machine Information tab, Figure 1.
Check that the machine is on the correct service plan, GP 34.
Check that the correct ink sticks are being used for the service plan, GP 34.
Machine information tab.
Procedure
CAUTION
The ink key motor can overheat if run repeatedly. Allow 2 minutes between each run of the ink
key motor.
To observe the operation of the key plate when in diagnostics. Open the ink loader access
cover, PL 81.10 Item 5. Use a magnet to cheat the ink loader cover switch, PL 93.10 Item 19.
Enter dC330 code 93-051 or 052 or 053, to run the ink key plate motor, MOT93-051, PL 93.10
Y
N
Refer to:
Ink key plate motor, PL 93.10 Item 14.
Service code number.
Select machine status

key.
The key plate moves when the motor runs.

Y
N
Perform a dC361 NVM Save and Restore. Perform a dC301 NVM Initialization to re-calibrate the machine. The key plate moves to the correct position
Y
N
Perform a NVM restore the original NVM values. Perform a software load GP 4.
If the problem is still present, install a new ink loader upper assembly, PL 93.10 Item
1.
1.
2.
Refer to dC301 and perform the actions required to re-calibrate the machine.
The fault may be intermittent, check the wiring to the ink key plate motor. Clean the ink loading
area to ensure that the ink key plate moves smoothly. If necessary, install a new ink loader
upper assembly, PL 93.10 Item 1.
Figure 1 Service mode screen

Identify the service code in the bottom left corner of the UI, Figure 1.
The service codes are listed in Table 1, the action needed is marked as 1.
The service actions required to correct the faults are listed in Table 2.
If there is more than one fault to the service code, ensure all actions are completed before
moving onto the next stage.
Once the fault is fixed the service code on the UI will refresh to 0 when service mode is closed.
February 2013
2-611
OF 11, OF 12
NOTE: A number other than 0 indicates a fault.
Table 1 Service code table
Drum
Drive
Service Belt
Code
Error
IOD
PEST
Chronic
Warning Jets
Exist
Detected
IOD Y Run
out
NVRAM
Reset
Reg /
IOD in
Preheat
Degraded Calibrated
Mode
Required
Transfix
Calibration
NVRAM
Reset
35
36
37
Drum
Drive
Service Belt
Error
Code
IOD
Chronic
PEST
Warning Jets
Detected
Exist
IOD Y Run
out
NVRAM
Reset
Reg /
Preheat
IOD in
Degraded Calibrated
Required
Mode
Transfix
Calibration
NVRAM
Reset
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
10
48
11
49
12
50
13
51
14
52
15
53
16
54
17
55
18
56
19
57
20
58
21
59
22
60
23
61
24
62
25
63
26
64
27
65
28
66
29
67
30
68
31
69
32
70
33
71
34
72
OF 12
February 2013
2-612
Drum
Drive
Service Belt
Code
Error
IOD
PEST
Chronic
Warning Jets
Exist
Detected
IOD Y Run
out
NVRAM
Reset
Reg /
IOD in
Preheat
Degraded Calibrated
Mode
Required
Transfix
Calibration
NVRAM
Reset
Drum
Drive
Service Belt
Code
Error
IOD
PEST
Chronic
Warning Jets
Exist
Detected
IOD Y Run
out
NVRAM
Reset
Reg /
IOD in
Preheat
Degraded Calibrated
Mode
Required
Transfix
Calibration
NVRAM
Reset
73
111
74
112
75
113
76
114
77
115
78
116
79
117
80
118
81
119
82
120
83
121
84
122
85
123
86
124
87
125
88
126
89
127
90
91
92
93
Table 2 Service Actions
94
Fault
95
96
Drum drive belt error Drum drive belt is worn or dam- Go to 94-547-00, 94-555-00 Y-axis
Belt Ratio Error RAP
aged.
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
PEST Warnings
Exist
Description
Actions Required
Check dC123 PEST Fault His- Go to the appropriate RAP

tory for PEST chain link errors.
Chronic jets detected Chronic jets are detected on

one or more printheads.
Go to 91-638-00 IOD Detects

Chronic Jet Error RAP
Y run out NVM reset The NVRAM has been corPerform dC977 Drum Run out Calirupted and was reset to
bration.
default.or dC301 with Domain =
Copier, NVM Data = System or
All, was done resetting the
NVRAM
IOD in degraded
mode
February 2013
2-613
Print quality is suboptimal.
Go to 91-636-00 IOD in Degraded

Mode RAP. If the fault remains,
check the stitch adjust and roll
adjust motor lead screws, PL 91.20
Item 21 and PL 91.25 Item 21 for
cracks. Install new components as
necessary.
OF 12
OF 13 Convenience Stapler RAP
Table 2 Service Actions

Fault
Description
Registration / Preheat Calibration is

required
The NVRAM has been corPerform dC625 Registration / Prerupted and was reset to default heat Calibration
or dC301 with Domain = Copier,
NVM Data = System or All, was
done resetting the NVRAM
Transfix Calibration
NVRAM Reset
The NVRAM has been corrupted and was reset to default

or dC301 with Domain = Copier,
NVM Data = System or All, was
done resetting the NVRAM
Actions Required
To identify problems with the convenience stapler.
The transfix calibration values need

to be entered from the labels on the
engine frame. Enter dC978 Transfix
Calibration Values.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Incorrect voltage may damage the convenience stapler. The convenience stapler must not be
connected to the power outlet if the voltage is incorrect.
NOTE: There are no serviceable components in the convenience stapler.
Figure 1 shows the convenience stapler.
Check that the power lead is correctly connected to the convenience stapler PL 25.10 Item 1.
Check the AC mains (line) voltage at the customer power outlet. The voltage measured is
within the power requirements, GP 22.
Y
N
If the voltages are incorrect or the wiring of the main supply is found to be defective,
inform your technical manager and the customer. Do not attempt to repair or adjust the
customer supply.
Install a new convenience stapler, PL 25.10 Item 1.
OF 12, OF 13
February 2013
2-614
OF 14 Extensible Interface Platform RAP

Use this RAP when experiencing faults with the Xerox Extensible Interface Platform.
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Refer to WD 3.1. Check the communications cable between PJ905 on the UI PWB to
install a new harness, PL 2.10 Item 7.
Convenience stapler
2.
UI PWB, PL 2.10 Item 2.
Go to 02-321-00 XEIP Browser Dead RAP.
February 2013
2-615
OF 13, OF 14
OF 15 Xerox Secure Access RAP
Overview
Check the connection between the Card Reader and the Secure Access Authentication
Device.
Xerox Secure Access uses an external device, such as a card reader or biometric device, to
authorize access to the machine. The reader then passes the information to the controller,
which handles the authentication process, including which GUI screens are displayed, accepting GUI responses that defines their content and order. The controller can pass user identities
and passwords directly to the machine after gathering the data from an external server. All
communication is via a secure network link, Figure 1 Network Diagram.
Check which LEDs are on or blinking on the Secure Access Authentication Device. If the
LEDs on the Secure Access Authentication Device are not operating, go to Secure
Access Authentication Device Failure.
Check for the LEDs are on or blinking on the Card Reader. If the LEDs on the Card
Reader are not operating, go to Card Reader Failure.
If customers have problems of install / setting up, or any other problems related to their
Secure Access Administrator, they should refer to the Installation / Administration Guide
or contact Xerox Technical Support.
Xerox Secure Access is controlled via the CentreWare Web GUI. The active status is displayed
in tools within Access Control. If communications cannot be established with the Xerox Secure
Access Server, the service may be temporarily disabled by touching the now enabled Off button within the Xerox Secure Access tools window. Once communication is re-established the
stored Xerox Secure Access setting are restored.
Card reader or
biometric device
Secure Access Authentication Device Failure

The primary failure modes are power problems or failed hardware components. The symptom
of these failures can be detected by observing the LEDs on the Secure Access Authentication
Device, Figure 2.
Server
Client PC
Machine
Ethernet - secure link
Ethernet
Authentication device
Controller
Down link port

Up link port
Power supply
connection
Card reader
connection
Figure 1 Network Diagram

Figure 2 Authentication device
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the power to the Secure Access Authentication Device.
Before working on the Xerox Secure Access, test the machine in the service mode to ensure
no faults are displayed and that the machine is functioning properly. If it is not, repair any problems before proceeding with diagnosing the Secure Access Accessory. Diagnostics can be
entered to test copier functionality when Secure Access is installed.
OF 15
Check the power supply at the wall socket. If there is no power at the wall socket, have
the customer restore power and continue when confirmed.
Disconnect the power cord from the wall socket and the power supply. Check the power
cord for continuity and damage. If necessary install a new power cord.
Disconnect the power cord from the power supply and plug the power cord into the wall
outlet. Using a multimeter, check for line voltage at the end of the power cord disconnected from the power supply. If there is power at the wall but not at the end of the power
cord. Install a new power cord.
February 2013
2-616
Disconnect the small power cord from the Secure Access Authentication Device. Check
there is +5V at the connector that plugs into the Secure Access Authentication Device. If
there is no +5V, install a new the power supply.
There is a Keyed switch on the end of the Secure Access Authentication Device. Obtain
the key from the customer. Insert the key into the keyed switch and cycle the switch 1
quarter turn clockwise and then back to its start position. Observe the LEDs and listen for
an audible tone.
The Red LED on the Card Reader is On
If the LEDs on the Secure Access Authentication Device Uplink and Downlink Ethernet
ports do not cycle on and off as the controller goes through its boot-up process, or if the
audible tone is not heard. Install a new Secure Access Authentication Device.
NOTE: A new device will require the Secure Access Administrator to reconfigure the
server with the new MAC address of the new part. Be sure to inform the Secure Access
Administrator of the MAC address of the device being removed and the MAC address of
the new device
Card Reader Failure

The primary failure modes are power problems or failed hardware components. The symptom
of these failures can be detected by observing the LED on the Card Reader. Table 1.
The Green LED on the Card Reader is On
The Green LED on the Card Reader Flashes Rapidly
The Red LED on the Card Reader is On
The Red LED on Card Reader Flashes Slowly
The Red LED on Card Reader Flashes Rapidly
The Card Reader LEDs are not On or Blinking
Red
This indicates the Card Reader is in an idle state. If the red LED remains on, and the UI
remains locked after a card is swiped, re-orient the card and re-swipe.
Try a known good card in the reader. If the other card is working on the problem Card
Reader. Ask customer to make sure the card corresponds to a valid Secure Access
Account.
Try the card in a known good reader. If the card is working on a known good Card Reader,
it may be a problem with the Secure Access Authentication Device. Check to see is the
LEDs on the Secure Access Authentication Device are on.
The Red LED on Card Reader Flashes Slowly
This indicates the reader is connected to the controller but the controller is not connected
to the server. Check the Ethernet green LED on the Authentication Device.
If the Ethernet green LED on the Authentication Device is off, make sure the connectors
of the LAN connections are working properly. If the connections are working, this indicates the network may not work properly. Ask customer to check with Network Administrator.
If the Ethernet green LED on the Authentication Device is either on or flashing, contact
the Secure Access Administrator.
The Red LED on Card Reader Flashes Rapidly
Table 1 LED identification

When the LED on the
card reader is
If the UI on the machine is locked and no secondary PIN is required. Check that the Xerox
Secure Access is installed correctly, and ask customer to check the configuration at the
server.
This indicates a valid card but does not correspond to a valid Secure Access Account at
the server, test with a known valid users card.
If all cards react the same way, this indicates the Server Configuration may not be correct.
Ask customer to check the Server Configuration.
If all the card react this way, this indicates the cards are not valid. Ask customer to check
the Server Configuration
Meaning
The Card Reader LEDs are not On or Blinking
The authentication device is in idle mode; there is no active

session.
Check to see is the Secure Access is correctly installed.
If there is still no LED on the Card Reader, install a new the Card Reader.
Green
The authentication device is in ready mode; a session is active.
Slow flashing red
The authentication device has no connection to the server.
Slow flashing green
The authentication device is communicating to the server.
Fast flashing red
Invalid card / password; access denied
NOTE: if there is another working Card Reader available, the readers can be changed
over to confirm failure.
The Green LED on the Card Reader is On
This indicates an active Secure Access Session and the Card Read correctly corresponds to a valid Secure Access Account.
If the UI on the machine is locked, check with the customer for a second PIN number for
additional security. This PIN number will need to be entered via the soft keys on the UI.
Ensure that the card corresponds to a valid Secure Access Account.
If the Card Reader is not functioning, the web page of the machine has a setting that will
enable UI keypad access. If the users know their card access number, they can use the
machine by manually entering their number. The process is as follows:
1.
Go to the machine web page under properties and then security and check the box
that says Allow local user interface initiation.
2.
Enable the keypad and test with valid credentials. This will validate the rest of the
secure access function.
3.
Leave it in this mode until the new card reader can be installed.
The Green LED on the Card Reader Flashes Rapidly
This indicates a valid card swipe and in the process of authentication on the server.
If the UI on the machine is locked, check with the customer for a second PIN number for
additional security. This PIN number will need to be entered via the soft keys on the UI.
February 2013
2-617
OF 15

Power on Self Test (POST) occurs each time the machine is powered on. POST verifies the
functionality of key subsystems before passing control to Print Engine Self Test (PEST).
Use this RAP when the UI has stalled and shows the splash-logo screen, or the system
appears to have power but the UI is blank.
POST begins when power is switched on before higher level machine functions (such as
the user interface) are operational.
POST is performed by the IME controller PWB and the single board controller PWB.
The IME POST results are displayed using the LEDs on the front of the IME controller
PWB, Figure 1, and two LEDs at the rear on the media path driver PWB, Figure 2.
LEDs on the front of the IME controller PWB, Figure 1.
ENG OK (green, DS302) - Displays IME firmware status.
ENG error (red, DS301) - Displays IME firmware error blink codes, the first digit is 3
or 4.
Cable error (red, DS604) - Displays status of major cables in the IME and -12V
needed for the printhead PWBs.
CPU error (red, DS605) - Displays IME operating system status and error blink
codes, the first digit is 2.
The 2 media path driver PWB LEDs on the back of the machine display the same patterns codes as the 2 engine status LEDs on the front IME. If there is a loss of communication with the media path drive PWB, at PJ 408, only the front LEDs will blink.
LEDs on the Media path driver PWB, Figure 2.
IME OK (green, DS801) - Displays IME firmware status.
IME error (red, DS802) - Displays IME firmware error blink codes.
Red LED, (ENG error) blink

code
Red LED, (CABLE error)
Red LED, (CPU error) blink code
The 7-Segment LED display unit on the rear of the machine attached to the SBC PWB,
Figure 3. This is to help diagnose common faults which prevent the machine from powering up correctly to the point where faults are displayed and diagnostics can be entered.
The LED display should show just a pulsing decimal point when the machine boots correctly, The main codes are displayed for short periods of time during power up depending
on how long each test takes, if any code is left displayed during power up and the
machine appears not to have powered on correctly then this should point to the problem
component. Refer to the Table 3.
OF 16
Green LED, (ENG OK)
February 2013
2-618
Figure 1 POST LED front location
7-Segment LED display unit
Red LED, (IME error)

blink code.
Visible with the rear
cover removed.
Figure 3 SBC LED display unit

Green LED, (IME OK)
Procedure
WARNING
Figure 2 POST LED rear location
The procedure has two elements. The first element is the system power up errors within the
SBC PWB and the second element is the POST errors within the IME.
To check for the system power up error.
1.
Switch off and then switch on the machine, GP 14.
2.
If the system has powered up correctly then there will be a pulsing decimal point on the 7segment display, Figure 3.
3.
If the system power up sequence has failed then check the code on the LED display.
Refer to Table 3 for the actions required for each code.
NOTE: In most cases the power up faults in the CCS tray are not related to any issues
within the IME. But if the IME has a critical PEST fault that prevents the IME from bringing
up the main power (Power Normal not raised) then the 7-segment display will show 0,
which means the CCS OS kernel s/w will not start to bring up the rest of the system due to
a loss of power.
To check for the IME POST error codes which consist of three digits, each digit may be a number from 1 to 9.
1.
Watch the front red (ENG error) and red (CPU error) or the rear red (IME error) LEDs for a
rapid flutter. This indicates that the next blinks will communicate POST error information.
February 2013
2-619
OF 16
The sequence loops continuously so each set of blinks does not need to be read consecutively.
2.
After the flutter count the number of blinks to determine the hundreds digit. At the end of
the first digit there will be a pause.
3.
After the pause count the number of blinks to determine the tens digit. At the end of the
second digit there will be a second pause.
4.
After the second pause count the number of blinks to determine the ones digit.
5.
6.
Error
Code Service action
POST_IMAGE_FPGA_MAPPING_FAILURE 224
Switch off, then switch on the machine,

GP 14. If the fault remains, install a new
POST_IMAGE_FPGA_ID_READ_FAILURE 225

POST_IMAGE_FPGA_ID_MISMATCH
226

POST_IMAGE_FPGA_WRITE_MISMATCH 227

POST_NVRAM_ACCESS_FAILURE
231

ENG_SC_CONNECT_FAULT
321

1. Check (RJ45 connector) PJ16 on
the single board controller PWB.
Refer to Table 1 for a list of POST blink codes and definitions.
IME POST CPU errors are blink codes 2XX.
IME POST Communication errors are blink codes 3XX.
IME POST Engine errors are blink codes 4XX.
Check the wiring and all connectors on the relevant PWB as indicated by the error code.
Perform the service actions shown in Table 1.
NOTE: After completing the service actions to clear the fault the print engine should boot
up normally, but then display a fault code relating to the fault just cleared. Switch off, then
switch on the machine, GP 14 to clear the fault code.
7.
Table 1 POST Hard Fault Codes
If the fault remains or no blink codes are communicated, go to Additional LED Checks.
Error
Code Service action
2.
POST_BAD_ERROR_CODE
211

Check between (RJ45 connector)

PJ16 and PJ401 on the IME controller PWB.
3.
POST_PROG_MACHINE_CHECK
212

Check for +5V supply to the single

board controller PWB, refer to the
4.
POST_PROG_SYS_PANIC
213

POST_ ECM_FPGA_LOAD_FAILURE
215

Check the condition of the LEDs

on the single board controller
PWB, refer to the OF 5 Boot Up
Failure RAP. Perform any relevant
service actions.
5.
If the fault remains, perform an Altboot, GP 4.
POST_ECM_FPGA_MAPPING_FAILURE
216

ENG_TEST4
411
This code is not for field use.
ENG_PWR_NO_HEATER_REQ
412
Install a new IME controller PWB, PL

92.10 Item 1.
POST_ECM_FPGA_ID_READ_FAILURE
217

ENG_SAFETY_TIMEOUT_LNK
413

POST_ECM_FPGA_ID_MISMATCH
218

ENG_SYS_TIMER
414
This code is not for field use.
ENG_PCI_ACCESS_ERROR
415

ENG_ADC_FAILED
416

POST_FPGA_WRITE_MISMATCH
POST_IMAGE_FPGA_LOAD_FAILURE
OF 16
219
223

February 2013
2-620
Error
Code Service action
Error
Code Service action
ENG_ECM_FPGA_ACCESS_ERROR
418

ENG_MP_INT_STORM
443
Go to the 92-546-00, 92-547-00 MP

Interrupt Storm Faults RAP.
ENG_IMD_INT_STORM
444
ENG_ECM_FPGA_VER_MISMATCH
427

92.10 Item 1.
Go to the 92-546-00, 92-547-00 MP

ENG_TTM_INT_STORM
445
ENG_INIT_FAILED
428

92.10 Item 1.
Go to the 92-548-00 TTM Interrupt

Storm Fault RAP.
ENG_PFP_INT_STORM
446
ENG_IMG_FPGA_VER_MISMATCH
429

92.10 Item 1.
Go to the 92-549-00 PFP Interrupt

Storm Fault RAP.
ENG_CIS_INT_STORM
447
ENG_INT_STORM
431

Go to the 92-551-00 CIS Interrupt

Storm Fault RAP.
ENG_SBC_INT_STORM
448
Go to the 92-552-00 SBC Interrupt

Storm Fault RAP
POST_24V_FAIL
449
Perform the 01-540-00, 01-544-00

+24V, +/-12V, +5V Failure RAP. If the
fault remains, perform the 01H +24V
Distribution RAP.
ENG_SW_FAULT
432

ENG_24V_FAIL
433
Perform the 01-540-00, 01-544-00

+24V, +/-12V, +5V Failure RAP. If the
fault remains, perform the 01H +24V
Distribution RAP.
ENG_DD_LINK_DOWN
434

1.
ENG_MP_LINK_DOWN
435
2.
Switch off, then switch on the

machine, GP 14.
3.
Install a new drum driver PWB, PL

1.15 Item 4.
437
Check the connection on PJ402

on IME controller PWB and PJ408
on the media path PWB.
Table 2 LED status

CPU error Cable error Engine error Engine OK
UI Screen Red LED Red LED
Service action
Red LED
Green
Dark
Go to OF 3 RAP
Splash
On dim
Perform IME Blink Condition A
Splash
Off
On Dim
On Dim
On Dim
Splash
Off
On Bright
On Bright
2.
Switch off, then switch on the

machine, GP 14.
Splash
Off
Slow blink
Fast blink
3.
Install a new media path driver

Perform IME Blink Condition B
Splash
Slow blink
On Dim
On Dim
On Dim
Perform IME Blink Condition C
Splash
Off
On Bright
Off
Blink
Check all communication

PJs on the IME controller
PWB and the links to the
printhead PWB.
Go to the 92-541-00 ADC Interrupt

Storm Fault RAP.
ENG_PS_INT_STORM
438
Go to the 92-542-00 PS Interrupt Storm

Fault RAP.
ENG_MU_INT_STORM
439
Go to the 92-543-00, 92-544-00 MU

ENG_MUID_INT_STORM
441
Go to the 92-543-00, 92-544-00 MU

ENG_DD_INT_STORM
442
Go to the 92-545-00 DD Interrupt Storm

Fault RAP.
If the LEDs remain on or dim then refer to Table 2 for the possible patterns. Perform the relevant service actions. If the fault remains, go to the OF 3 Unresponsive Machine RAP.

1.
ENG_ADC_INT_STORM
Check the connection on PJ403

on IME controller PWB and PJ603
on the drum driver PWB.
Additional LED Checks
February 2013
2-621
OF 16

POST code name
Fault
code
Display Test
Decimal
point
On
Off
POST code name

Service action
Initial 7 segment display LED display or SBC PWB.

Check that the NVM modtest
ule PWB is fitted correctly,
PL 3.11 Item 17. Install a
Item 13
PWBA
Failed explorer controller Install a new SBC PWB,

PL 3.11 Item 13.
System memory
Flashing Failed system memory
Install a new System

memory PWB, PL 3.11
Item 4
EPC Memory
Flashing Failed EPC memory

PWB, PL 3.11 Item 21
NVM and RTC

Module
Flashing Failed NVM memory
Install a new NVM module PWB, PL 3.11 Item 17
Flash Module
Flashing Failed flash memory
Flash module. Install a

Item 13.
Hard disk drive
Flashing Failed hard drive
Install new components as

necessary;
Hard disk drive, PL 3.11
Item 2.
Hard disk drive/Single
board controller PWB harness, PL 3.11 Item 3.
13.
RTC module
Flashing Failed RTC
Initial entry to kernel code
Flashing Waiting for power normal No action, no POST fault

detected
U-boot complete
Flashing U-boot hand over control to kernel
Kernel software
Kernel starting user

space
Flashing Kernel starting user

space
Kernel / run time software
Machine in ready
mode
Blank Flashing None, no fault detected
RTC module. Install a new

13.
No action, no fault
detected
Flashing UI platform available
See NOTE:
IIT comms established
Flashing IIT comms established
See NOTE:
Decimal
point
Service action
NC platform available
Flashing NC platform available
See NOTE:
Dc platform available
Flashing Dc platform available
See NOTE:
IOT comms established
Flashing IOT comms established
See NOTE:
Fax comms established
Flashing Fax comms established

Only if Fax installed
See NOTE:
Machine attempting sleep entry
Flashing OS suspending drivers,

entering sleep
(Split power plane TBC)

only
Machine in sleep
state
Flashing Resting in sleep
Machine in semiconscious state
Flashing Running in semi-conscious mode
Machine attempting sleep wake-up
Flashing OS resuming drivers

only
NOTE: On Application power up the 7-segment display cycles around displaying these codes
until the relevant platform has fully synchronized with the system. Any code left displayed after
power up indicates this event has not been detected in software and is a probable s/w issue
IME Blink Condition A
This indicates a power failure or CPU fault.
1.
Check 3.3V on the IME controller PWB at PJ701. Refer to WD 9.6. If the voltage is not
present, go to 01C +3.3V Distribution RAP.
2.
Check memory module is seated correctly, PL 92.10 Item 16.
3.
Check that there is no link between the two pins on J805 (boot) and J806 (mode) on the
IME controller PWB.
4.
IME Blink Condition B

The operating system is OK but engine did not start.
1.
Check that there is no link between the pins on J806 (mode) on IME controller PWB.
2.
Install a new IME Controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
IME Blink Condition C
UI platform available
OF 16
Fault
code
A RAM error has been detected.

1.
Check memory module is seated correctly, PL 92.10 Item 16.
2.
Check 3.3V on the IME controller PWB at J701. Refer to WD 9.6. If the voltage is not
present, go to 01C +3.3V Distribution RAP.
3.
Install new memory module, PL 92.10 Item 16.
4.
February 2013
2-622
3 Image Quality
Image Quality RAPs
IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.........................................................................................
IQ 2 Copy or Print Damage RAP.....................................................................................
IQ 3 Blurred Image on Copies RAP ................................................................................
IQ 4 Wrong Copied Colours RAP....................................................................................
IQ 5 Jagged or Blurry Lines or Text RAP ........................................................................
IQ 6 Missing Ink or Grainy Output RAP...........................................................................
IQ 7 Metering Blade Timing RAP ....................................................................................
IQ 8 Cross Process Ink Artifacts (Smudge) RAP ............................................................
IQ 9 Deletions in the Process Direction RAP ..................................................................
IQ 10 Incorrect Margin, Misregistration or Skew RAP.....................................................
IQ 11 Smudges, Debris, Smears in the Process Direction, or Paper Stack Marks RAP.
IQ 12 Missing or Partial Image RAP................................................................................
IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP .......................................................................................
IQ 14 Some Colours Uneven RAP ..................................................................................
IQ 15 Wrong Colour RAP ................................................................................................
IQ 16 Scratches or Gloss Marks in the Process Direction RAP ......................................
IQ 17 Gloss Marks in the Cross-Process Direction RAP.................................................
IQ 18 Irregular Duplex Gloss Differences RAP ...............................................................
IQ 19 Image Ghosting RAP.............................................................................................
IQ 20 Wavy or Stringy Lines RAP ...................................................................................
IQ 21 Oil on Output RAP .................................................................................................
IQ 22 Repeating Spot Deletions RAP .............................................................................
IQ 23 Residual Ink From Previous Print RAP..................................................................
IQ 24 Wrinkling RAP .......................................................................................................
IQ 25 Random Spots RAP ..............................................................................................
IQ 26 Poor Ink Adhesion RAP.........................................................................................
IQ 27 Unacceptable Received Fax Image Quality RAP ..................................................
IQ 28 Show Through on Copies RAP..............................................................................
IQ 29 DADH, Document Glass and Scanner RAP ..........................................................
IQ 30 Blocking RAP.........................................................................................................
3-3
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-29
3-31
3-32
3-34
3-41
3-43
3-46
3-47
3-53
3-58
3-62
3-63
3-65
3-66
3-68
3-69
3-71
3-72
3-74
3-76
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-80
3-81
TP 23 Drum Run Out and Y-Stitch Test Pages...............................................................

TP 24 Registration Calibration Page ...............................................................................
TP 25 IME Test Print .......................................................................................................
TP 26 Print Head Uniformity/Colour Bands Test Page ...................................................
3-102
3-103
3-104
3-105
Image Quality Specifications

IQS 1 Registration and Skew ..........................................................................................
IQS 2 Image Area............................................................................................................
IQS 3 Y-Dot Position .......................................................................................................
IQS 4 Y-Stitch..................................................................................................................
IQS 5 X-Stitch..................................................................................................................
IQS 6 Blurry Text.............................................................................................................
IQS 7 Curl........................................................................................................................
IQS 8 Uniformity in the Process Direction .......................................................................
3-107
3-108
3-109
3-109
3-110
3-110
3-111
3-111
Image Quality Test Prints

TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages............................................................................................
TP 2 to TP 10 Solid Fill Test Pages ................................................................................
TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages .................................................................
TP 12 Chase Page ..........................................................................................................
TP 13 Text Test Pages....................................................................................................
TP 14 Drum Stripper Blade Test Page............................................................................
TP 15 Media Path Test Pages ........................................................................................
TP 16 Stitch Identification Test Pages ............................................................................
TP 17 Service Usage Profile ...........................................................................................
TP 18 TRC Generation Test Pages ................................................................................
TP 19 Y-Dot Position Correction Test Page....................................................................
TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing Test Pages ........................................
TP 21 Jet Test Pages......................................................................................................
TP 22 Cleaning Pages ....................................................................................................
3-83
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-87
3-88
3-89
3-91
3-92
3-93
3-94
3-95
3-97
3-101
February 2013
3-1
Image Quality
Image Quality
February 2013
3-2
IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP
Procedure
Use this RAP to determine the source of an image quality problem.
NOTE: If possible, use the customer job to recreate the image quality defect.
Symptom descriptions use terminology listed in Table 1. Refer to the example illustrations in
each RAP for a representation of the symptom.
Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Check in the list below for any common defects that the test pages may have:
Test pages are listed in Table 2.
Initial Actions
NOTE: To aid in troubleshooting image quality issues, use media from an unopened ream
acclimatized to room temperature.
Do not use cleaning pages (TP 22) to evaluate image quality.
If possible, run a customer print job using default settings.
Use approved media within specifications, GP 20. Check media in the tray is clean and
there are no loose particles which can cause ink blisters where ink adheres to the debris,
not the media. If necessary, turn over the media in the tray.
Check the operating environment is within specifications, GP 23.
Make sure the machine is positioned to allow adequate airflow at all vents. Refer to GP 21
Installation Space Requirements.
Make sure the interior of the machine is clean. Refer to GP 27 Machine Cleaning Procedure.
Check that the paper tray guides are set to the correct paper size.
Check that the fixed paper tray guides are set to the correct paper size, ADJ 73.1 Tray 3
Paper Tray Guide Setting, ADJ 75.1 Tray 5 Paper Tray Guide Setting.
Check the document guides on the DADH.
Check that the image adjustment and print mode settings are correct for the image being
printed/copied.
Check the settings for the media size and type are correct for each tray.
NOTE: Always load A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch media as appropriate to your market region in
Tray 4 before printing internal test prints. Failure to do this may result in the test prints
printing the wrong size / location on the media and giving false results.
If possible, check that the customer is not attempting to copy poor quality originals. If the
original is too damaged to successfully feed through the DADH, suggest scanning directly
from the document glass.
Weak Jets with Y-dot Error Checkout in IQ 5.
Missing or Weak Jet Checkout in IQ 9.
The pages have occasional light stripes or bands of a primary colour in the process
direction with corresponding light lines in secondary colours, see IQ 9 Figure 6. Perform the following:
The pages have deletions of a single primary colour that run consistently in the process direction with corresponding light lines in secondary colours see Figure 5
image 2. Perform the following as necessary:
Check the error logs, GP 2 and service code, OF 12 for errors related to the imaging
defect.
NOTE: Chase sheets are printed to the top tray during jam clearance. These must not be confused with blank or partial images.
The pages have light stripes or bands of a primary colour in the process direction
with corresponding light lines in secondary colours, see Figure 13 image 1 and Figure 5 image 2. Perform the following as necessary:
91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error RAP.
Missing or Weak Jet Checkout in IQ 9.
91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error RAP.
The pages have jagged or blurry lines or text in the 3 stitch regions (indicated by the
chevrons), or lighter/darker stripes in the process direction in the stitch regions, see
Figure 12 images 1 and 2, Figure 5 image 1. Perform the following as necessary:
Y-Stitch, Printhead Roll and Drum Runout Checkout in IQ 5.
X-Stitch Defect Checkout in IQ 9.
X-Stitch Checkout in IQ 13.
The pages have missing areas of ink in the process direction from one print head,
see IQ 9 Figure 12. Perform the following:
The pages have bands of missing ink and ink spots in the process direction, see IQ 9
Figure 7. Perform the following:
Internally Leaking Printhead Checkout in IQ 9.
Scraping Checkout in IQ 9.
If none of the descriptions match the image quality defect on the test pages, refer to Table
1. Go to the relevant image quality RAP.
Check the test pages for damage. The test pages are undamaged.
Y
N
Go to IQ 2 Copy or Print Damage RAP.
Print a duplex copy of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Refer to Table 1. Go to the relevant image quality RAP.
If a Fax is installed, send a test Fax to the machine. The test Fax image quality is good.
Y
N
Compare the Fax print with the initial test pages. The Fax print and initial test pages
have the same defect.
A
February 2013
3-3
Image Quality
IQ 1
A
Y
B
Use the DADH to make copies of the initial test pages, TP 1. The copies are good.
Y
N
Go to IQ 29 DADH, Document Glass and Scanner RAP.
N
Go to IQ 27 Unacceptable Received Fax Image Quality RAP.

Make 3 copies of the colour bands test page, TP 26 from the document glass. The copies are
good.
Y
N
Check the image quality defect. The defect on the copies is identical.
Y
N
If possible, use the customer document to make a copy from the document glass or DADH, at
100% magnification. Make another copy at a different magnification setting. Compare the copies. The defect is on the same part of the image.
Y
N
Perform ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning Procedure.
Image Quality Symptoms
Go to the IQ 29 DADH, Document Glass and Scanner RAP.

B
Table 1 Image Quality Symptoms

Term
Description
IQ RAP
Test Pages
Adhesion
Ink flakes can easily be brushed off from the paper. Ink may have a raised spotty texture.
IQ 20, IQ 26
TP 1
Background on copies
Undesirable ink dots on the copy. Uniform darkening across all the non-imaged (white) areas. The ink deposits are localized or IQ 29
may cover the entire copy. Depending on background density, background is referred to as low, medium, high, or very high.
Background may occur in all colors, single colors, or any combination of single colors.
TP 9 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Banding in process direction
A light to dark relative variation in print density within a (near) uniform color across the print. May occur as a wide band or local- IQ 13, IQ 14
ized band in the process direction.
If the defect matches any in Figure 1 or Figure 2, go to the IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP.
TP 11
If the defect matches any in Figure 3 or Figure 4, go to the IQ 14 Some Colours Uneven RAP.
Black print
A print that is completely black or grey all over, but has no visible image of the original document. See digital defects.
TP 1
Blank print
See partial images/missing images.
Blocking
Blocking can occur where ink from one print is deposited on the back of another when prints are allowed to accumulate in a
IQ 30
stack in the output tray. The combination of pressure from the weight of the media and ambient heat may cause partial transfer
of the image to the next print in the stack. Blocking is aggravated by abrasion, vibration, or storage under a large stack of prints
(compression). See also residual image.
Blurred image on copies
Image on copies is blurred.
IQ 3
TP 1
Blurred image on print
See jagged lines, jagged text or digital defects.
Blurry lines
See jagged lines.
Blurry text
See jagged text.
Contamination
See debris.
Copy damage
Creases, curls, cuts, folds, wrinkles, or embossed marks on the print. Also see wrinkling.
IQ 2, IQ 24
N/A
Debris
Ink or other fragments easily wiped from the print which are not adhered to the paper.
IQ 11
TP 9 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Deletions
Areas of the image missing from the print in the form of:
IQ 9, IQ 22, IQ 6
TP 1, TP 9
(TP 2 to TP
10)
N/A
N/A
Digital defects
Image Quality
IQ 1
Process direction deletions. If the defect matches any in Figure 5 or Figure 6, go to the IQ 9 Line Deletions in the Process
Direction RAP.
Spot deletions. If the defect matches Figure 7, go to the IQ 22 Repeating Spot Deletions RAP.
White spots or a grainy appearance. If the defect matches Figure 8, go to the IQ 6 Missing Ink or Grainy Output RAP.
White spots are areas of missing ink caused by poor ink adhesion, see adhesion.
Image is stretched, geometrically relocated, progressively distorted, scrambled, precisely blurred, or colors are geometrically
displaced or switched. Go to the 92-581-00 Image Transfer Error RAP.
February 2013
3-4

Term
Description
IQ RAP
Test Pages
Displaced or Fragmented
Image
Distorted images. Displaced images. See digital defects.
Dropout
Areas of missing ink pixels usually in mid-scale density areas. Image may look grainy.
IQ 6
TP 11
Duplex
Ghosting
Faint image which shows as a gloss differential from the previous print or previous area repeated onto a subsequent print.
IQ 19
TP 4 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Gloss bands (process or

cross process direction)
Lines or bands of irregular gloss, most noticeable in solid areas, in process or cross process direction.
IQ 16, IQ 17
TP 5 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Gloss irregularities
Random changes in gloss level causing an irregular, uneven gloss or matted appearance, most noticeable in solid areas.
IQ 18
TP 5 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Grainy
Speckled or sand-like appearance in what is meant to be a smooth area.
IQ 6
TP 11
Ink discolouration
Color shift noted on the print relative to other prints of the same image. May be localized in process direction wide bands:
If the defect is across some of the printheads and matches any in Figure 3, go to the IQ 14 Some Colours Uneven RAP.
IQ 14, IQ 15, IQ 13 TP 10 (TP 2

to TP 10)
If the wrong colours are printed, Figure 9, go to the IQ 15 Wrong Colour RAP.
If the defect is across all colours and matches any in Figure 1, go to the IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP.
Ink transfer
See residual image.
Irregular line
See jagged lines.
Irregular process direction

streak
See banding.
Irregular text
See jagged text.
Jagged line
Lines meant to be straight in the cross process direction are blurry, jagged or have relative misalignments. May be localized at IQ 5
the 3 boundaries between printheads. Pixel position may be slightly incorrect in the process direction.
TP 1
Jagged text
Text meant to be correctly formed in the cross process direction is blurry, jagged or has relative misalignments. May be localized at the 3 boundaries between printheads. Pixel position may be slightly incorrect in the process direction.
IQ 5
TP 1
Lead edge smear
See smudges, smears
Light image
The image is visible on the print, but with insufficient overall density:
If the defect is across all colours, go to the IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP.
IQ 13, IQ 14
TP 1
If the defect is across some of the colours, go to the IQ 14 Some Colours Uneven RAP.
Light lines in the cross process direction
Image dependent increasingly faint localized bands in the cross process direction, Figure 10.
IQ 13
TP 1
Lines
Lines of missing ink - see deletions.Lines of extra ink - see smudges, smears.
Marks
See spots of ink.See smudges, smears.
Missing colours
See deletions.
Missing images
See partial images.
Non uniformity
See banding.See dropout.See light Image.
Offsetting
See residual image.
Oil on output
Spots or splatter of oil on the output.
IQ 21
TP 1
Partial images
Either the complete or portions of the image are missing.
IQ 12
TP 1
Print damage
Creases, curls, cuts, folds, wrinkles, or embossed marks on the print. Also see wrinkling.
IQ 2
N/A
Repeat images
Gloss - see ghosting
Ink/density - see residual images

IQ 23
TP 10 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Residual image
Ink from a previous print is deposited onto subsequent print. See also blocking.
February 2013
3-5
Image Quality
IQ 1

Term
Description
Rotated image
The image on the printed document has turned 90 degrees to the image printed on the original document. Go to the 62A Scan- N/A
ning Document Size RAP.
IQ RAP
N/A
Scratch
A very thin gloss band or area of removed ink from the image in the process direction caused by obstructions present in the
paper path
IQ 16
TP 5 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Skew
A difference in angular alignment between printed image and the media edge
IQ 10
TP 1
Smudges, smears
Darker irregular streaks of ink in the process or cross process direction, in either the image or non-image areas:
If the defect matches any in Figure 11, go to the IQ 11 Smudges, Smears in the Process Direction or Stack Marks RAP.
IQ 11, IQ 8, IQ 16
TP 1
TP 1
If the image has extra ink in localized areas in the cross process direction, go the IQ 8 Cross Process Ink Artifacts
(Smudge) RAP.
If the image has scratches or marks in the process direction, go to the IQ 16 Scratches or Gloss Marks in the Process
Direction RAP.
Test Pages
Spots of ink
A deposit of ink in an undesired area on the print (usually circular in shape).
IQ 25
Spots of missing ink
See deletions.
Stitch
Alignment is incorrect in either the process or cross process direction at the 3 printhead boundaries causing localized blurry or IQ 5, IQ 9
jagged appearance of the linear elements of the image.
If the defect matches any in Figure 12 or Figure 13, go to the IQ 5 Jagged Lines or Text RAP.
Streaks
TP 1
If the defect matches any in Figure 5 go to the IQ 9 Line Deletions in the Process Direction RAP.
-
Stretched or distorted Image See digital defects.
Uneven density
See banding.
Wavy or stringy lines
Images have wavy or stringy lines of ink, or have a blistered appearance.
IQ 20
TP 1
Wrinkled image
Areas which have distinctive physical distortions in the paper.
IQ 24
TP 2 (TP 2
to TP 10)
Wrong copied colour
The colour of the copy does not match the colour of the original.
IQ 4
TP 1
Wrong printed colour
See ink discoloration.See banding.
Image Quality
IQ 1
See banding.
February 2013
3-6
Figure 1 IQ defects 1
February 2013
3-7
Image Quality
IQ 1
Image Quality
IQ 1
February 2013
3-8
February 2013
3-9
Image Quality
IQ 1
Image Quality
IQ 1
February 2013
3-10
February 2013
3-11
Image Quality
IQ 1
Image Quality
IQ 1
February 2013
3-12
February 2013
3-13
Image Quality
IQ 1
Image Quality
IQ 1
February 2013
3-14
February 2013
3-15
Image Quality
IQ 1
Image Quality
IQ 1
February 2013
3-16
February 2013
3-17
Image Quality
IQ 1
Image Quality
IQ 1
February 2013
3-18
Test Pages
Test pages aid in the identification of print quality problems. Table 2 lists test pages available
from diagnostics, provides a short description, and indicates where the pattern is accessed.
Test pages are described in detail in the Test Pages section, select the appropriate link from
Table 2.
NOTE: These test pages are designed to enhance subtle defects. Defects revealed by these
prints may not occur in the course of ordinary printing. In servicing the system, you should minimize the defects shown by the prints but not necessarily eliminate them. Refer to IQS 1 Image
Quality Specifications.
Table 2 Embedded Test Pages

Simplex or
Duplex
Test Pages
Test Page Name
Description
Media size
TP 1
Initial test print pages
Multiple patterns on four sheets consisting of black text, cross process lines and
colour bands
A4 (8.5 x 11) LEF Simplex or duplex dC612
TP 2 (TP 2 to TP 10) Cyan solid fill test pages
Prints 2 cyan solid fills - 100% coverage within printable margins, primary only
TP 3 (TP 2 to TP 10) Magenta solid fill test pages
Prints 2 magenta solid fills - 100% coverage within printable margins, primary only A4 (8.5 x 11) LEF Simplex or duplex dC612
TP 4 (TP 2 to TP 10) Yellow solid fill test pages
Prints 2 yellow solid fills - 100% coverage within printable margins, primary only
TP 5 (TP 2 to TP 10) Black solid fill test pages
Prints 2 black solid fills - 100% coverage within printable margins, primary only
A4 (8.5 x 11) LEF Simplex or duplex dC612 and dC959
TP 6 (TP 2 to TP 10) Red solid fill test pages
Prints 2 red solid fills - 100% coverage within printable margins
TP 7 (TP 2 to TP 10) Green solid fill test pages
Prints 2 green solid fills - 100% coverage within printable margins
TP 8 (TP 2 to TP 10) Blue solid fill test pages
Prints 2 blue solid fills - 100% coverage within printable margins
TP 9 (TP 2 to TP 10) White solid fill test pages
Prints 2 blank pages
TP 10 (TP 2 to TP
10)
CMYKRGB solid fill test

pages
Prints one set of all solid fill pages
TP 11
Colour bands and dithers test Prints a set of 6 pages of colour bands and dithers
pages
A4 (8.5 x 11) LEF Simplex
dC612
TP 12
Chase page
No ink on page. Does not exercise printheads or use imaging cycles. Used to
clean ink from the drum
dC612
TP 13
Text test pages
Prints 3 pages of portrait and landscape pages of text
dC612
TP 14
Drum stripper blade test page A set of prints used for verifying stripper blade actuation
dC612
TP 15
Media path test pages
A map of the rollers and media path ribs. Used to identify the cause of scuffs and A4 (8.5 x 11) LEF Simplex
scratches
dC612
TP 16
Stitch Identification test pages Clearly identifies the region where printheads stitch the image together
TP 17
Service usage profile
Machine usage and status information.
A4 (8.5 x 11)
TP 18
TRC generation test pages
Dithers test pages for TRC calibration
dC972
(option 4)
TP 19
Y-dot position correction test

page
1 and 5 pixel cross-process lines
dC972
(option 5)
TP 20
Oil bar chase and metering

blade timing test pages
Prints 2 pages to enable a check of the cleaning unit functions
dC959
TP 21
Jet test pages
Prints a sequence of 9 jet test pages
dC968 and dC977
TP 22
Cleaning pages
Prints 2 head purge pages
dC968
TP 23
Drum run out and Y-stitch test Prints 2 pages of horizontal lines
pages
dC977
TP 24
Registration calibration page
Prints a registration target print
dC625
TP 25
IME test print
Prints a simple page of primary colour bars from the IME in isolation
A4 (8.5 x 11)
TP 26
Printhead uniformity/colour
bands test page
Prints 7 solid fill bars of yellow, magenta, cyan, black, red, green and blue.
February 2013
3-19
Print From
dC612
Simplex or duplex dC612
Simplex
dC972 (option 3)
Image Quality
IQ 1
IQ 2 Copy or Print Damage RAP
Use this RAP when the output copies or prints have nicks, tears, creases, folds, or curled
edges.
Ensure IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Procedure
WARNING
N
Press the machine status button on the keypad. Select the Faults tab on the UI, then
Current Messages. If the message Cleaning unit life extended, image quality may
be impacted is displayed, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Or open the
front door and remove the inner cover. Enter dC959 and run the slow speed exerciser. While this is running, ensure the cleaning unit blade and roller is making contact with the drum. The cleaning unit blade and roller are making contact with
the drum.
Y
N
Check the cleaning unit components:
Cam front, PL 94.10 Item 9.
Cam rear, PL 94.10 Item 13.
WARNING
Cleaning unit motor, PL 94.10 Item 24.
Print TP 14 Drum Striper Blade Test Print. The test page is good.
Y
N
Refer to Figure 1. The stripper blade releases from the drum before the
MLE line is reached.
Y
N
Refer to Figure 2. The pattern shown is caused by the stripper blade
bouncing on the drum. The stripper blade releases from the drum at
the intersection of the MLE line.
Y
N
Redefine the image quality defect. Refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry
RAP.
WARNING
WARNING
Take care not to topple the LCSS. The LCSS is unstable when un-docked from the
machine. Do not show the customer how to un-dock the LCSS.
Check the paper trays for damaged paper. The paper in the tray is undamaged.
Y
N
Load new paper in the trays.
Separate the finisher from the printer. Install a finisher bypass harness, PL 26.10 Item 3. Make
test prints. The prints are good.
Y
N
Check the lead edge of the paper for damage. The damage is limited to the lead edge
only.
Y
N
Print chase pages, TP 12 to identify where the prints are damaged. Check the paper
path, GP 29 Component Locations for the following:
Obstructions.
Install a new back latch fork, PL 10.10 Item 12.

Install a new stripper solenoid assembly, PL 10.10 Item 3.
Check that the stripper blade latches correctly at the front and at the rear. The
stripper blade latches correctly.
Y
N
Check the latch components. Install new components as necessary:
Damaged guides and rolls. Pay particular attention to the areas that align with
the damaged on the prints. If necessary, print the Media Path Test Pages, TP
15.
Stripper guide latch cam shaft, PL 10.10 Item 18.
Stripper solenoid assembly, PL 10.10 Item 3.
The edges of the paper path for protruding objects.
Ensure that the paper feed does not skew the paper, go to OF 8 Multi-feed
RAP.
Check the prints for damaged or folded corners (dog ears).
Check the transfix blade for damage, PL 10.20 Item 14. The transfix blade is damaged.
Y
N
Install a new stripper solenoid assembly, PL 10.10 Item 3.
If the damage or fold is upwards, then check the transfix stripper assembly, PL
10.20 Item 14 and the exit path, PL 10.15.
Install a new transfix stripper assembly, PL 10.20 Item 14.
If the damage or fold is downward, then check the drum stripper blade assembly, PL 10.10 Item 18 and PL 10.10 Item 3.
Open the stripper gate, GP 31. Carefully clear any paper debris from the area. Check the
stripper blade for damage, PL 10.12 Item 3. The stripper blade is damaged.
Install a new stripper blade PL 10.12 Item 3.

Remove the finisher bypass connector and dock the finisher to the machine. An
installed
LCSS
is
A
Image Quality
IQ 2
February 2013
3-20
N
Check the alignment of the HVF/HVF BM to the machine, refer to ADJ 12.1-171 Machine
to HVF/HVF BM Alignment. The alignment is good.
Y
N
Perform ADJ 12.1-171 Machine to HVF/HVF BM Alignment.
B
Check the items that follow:
Look for torn paper in the LCSS paper path. Torn fragments can pass through the IOT and
LCSS paper path without causing a problem until they finally wedge themselves at some
point. A likely place for a piece of paper to be wedged is at the hole punch assembly,
where the top and bottom guides form the narrowest part of the paper path.
Ensure that the shaft diverter assembly, PL 12.60 Item 13, operates correctly and has full
movement.
Ensure that the hole punches park at the fully open position. If they protrude even slightly,
a jam will occur in the narrow paper path of the hole punch. If the punch does not park
correctly, refer to the 12-043-00-110, 12-046-00-110 Hole Punch Operation Failure RAP.
Ensure that the jam clearance guide, PL 12.70 Item 6, closes and latches correctly. Check
that the magnet at the rear is located and functions correctly. Check the latch, PL 12.70
Item 7 at the front is positioned correctly and that the guide engages fully with the latch.
Ensure that all idler rolls in the LCSS paper path are free to rotate, particularly those on
the jam clearance guide, PL 12.70 Item 6, where the paper turns through 90 degrees.
Ensure that the paper path ribs of the jam clearance guide, PL 12.70 Item 6, and the entry
guide outer cover, PL 12.70 Item 5, are free of scores and nicks. Check also for contamination and glue from label stock. If necessary, install new parts.
Check the items that follow:
Look for paper fragments in the HVF/HVF BM paper path. Paper fragments can
move through the IOT and HVF/HVF BM paper path without causing a problem until
they finally wedge themselves at some point. A likely place for a fragment of paper to
be wedged is at the hole punch assembly, where the top and bottom guides form the
narrowest part of the paper path.
Ensure that the exit diverter solenoid, SOL 12-225, PL 12.120 Item 4, operates correctly and has its full movement.
Ensure that the hole punches park at the fully open position. If they protrude even
slightly, a jam will occur in the narrow paper path of the hole punch. If the punch
does not park correctly, refer to the 12-044-00-171 to 12-047-00-171 HVF Punch
Head Position RAP.
Check that all the idler rolls in the HVF/HVF BM paper path are free to rotate, particularly those on the jam clearance guides:
Top jam clearance guide, PL 12.115 Item 26.
Buffer pocket jam clearance guide, PL 12.125 Item 10.
Inserter jam clearance guide, PL 12.125 Item 11.
Input jam clearance guide, PL 12.125 Item 12.
Make sure that the jam clearance guides 5a, 5b and 5d close and latch correctly.
Check that the paper path ribs of the jam clearance guide 6e, PL 12.150 Item 7 and
the exit path PL 12.185 are free of scores and nicks. Check also for contamination.
Check that the paper size reported on the user interface corresponds to the actual
paper size loaded in the trays, refer to the 71B Tray 1 Wrong Size Paper RAP or 72B
Tray 2 Wrong Size Paper RAP.
Make sure that the BM tampers move to the correct paper size, refer to the 12-06600-171, 12-384-00-171, 12-419-00-171, 12-420-00-171 HVF BM Tamper Fault RAP.
Ensure that the BM paper guide, PL 12.150 Item 7, closes and latches correctly.
If the top sheet of paper is being been torn from booklets, check that the components
in the lower crease roll gear and clutch assembly are correctly installed. Refer to
REP 12.52-171 BM Crease Rolls.
If heavy-weight paper is used, the paper can stop in the vertical transport and cause
a 10-126 fault. The fault is caused when the vertical transport motor is over loaded.
Check the position of the jam clearance guide 5a, 6a and 5B. Check the vertical
transport rolls and bearings for contamination. If necessary remove and clean the
drive shaft and the bearings. If the problem continues then install a new transport
motor.
Check the alignment of the LCSS to the machine, refer to ADJ 12.2-110 Machine to LCSS
Alignment. The alignment is good.
Y
N
Perform ADJ 12.2-110 Machine to LCSS Alignment.
Figure 1 TP 14 test print
B
February 2013
3-21
Image Quality
IQ 2
IQ 3 Blurred Image on Copies RAP

Use this RAP when copied images are blurred. Refer to Figure 1.
Figure 2 TP 14 test print
Figure 1 Blurred copied image
Image Quality
IQ 2, IQ 3
February 2013
3-22
IQ 4 Wrong Copied Colours RAP
Procedure
WARNING
Use this RAP when the colour of the copy does not match the colour of the original.
NOTE: Due to the nature of solid ink printing, some difference in colour reproduction is normal.
Check that the carriage is fully docked against the drum frame. The carriage is fully docked.
Y
N
Remove any obstructions. Check the wiring that runs along the umbilicals.
Procedure
Check that the print heads are securely attached to the carriage. The
printheads
securely attached.
Y
N
Y
N
are

Make a copy of the text test pages (TP 13) from the document glass. The copy quality is
good.
Y
N
Perform the following
WARNING
Make copies of the customers document with different original type settings and the auto background suppression switched on, then off. The colours are reproduced accurately.
Y
N
Print the colour bands and dithers test pages, TP 11. Make copies and evaluate the differences. The colours are reproduced accurately.
Y
N
1. Refer to WD 3.1. Check that the connector is securely connected to PJ15 on
the single board controller PWB.
2.
Check that the white AGC strip on the CVT glass is at the front and underside
of the glass, refer to REP 62.3.
3.
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Make sure the following IIT DADH NVM settings are set to default:
Scan drive belt, PL 62.16 Item 12.
801-005.
Carriage motor, PL 62.16 Item 3.
801-010.
Scan carriage assembly, PL 62.15 Item 1.
801-015.
Scanner module, PL 62.10 Item 1.
801-016.
801-017.
801-018.
801-020.
801-021.
801-022.
801-023.
801-025.
801-026.
ADJ 62.3 Scan Motor and Scanner Drive Belt.
Make a copy of the text test pages (TP 13) from the DADH. The copy quality is good.
Y
N
ADJ 5.2 DADH Height Adjustment.

ADJ 5.4 DADH Cleaning Procedure.
Feed roll assembly, PL 5.15 Item 1.

CVT roll kit, PL 5.25 Item 17.
Top access cover assembly, PL 5.20 Item 17.
Re-define the image quality defect, refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
4.
If necessary, install a new Scanner PWB:
Refer to WD 3.1, WD 6.1 and WD 9.5. Check the following wiring:
Between PJ15 on the single board controller PWB and PJ922 on the Scanner PWB.
Between PJ5 on the single board controller PWB and PJ401 on the IME Controller
PWB.
Advise the customer which settings to use. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
February 2013
3-23
Image Quality
IQ 3, IQ 4
IQ 5 Jagged or Blurry Lines or Text RAP
Weak intensity and poor Y-dot placement in all colours and all jets of a single printhead, Figure 4. A pale band across the whole width of a head with misplacement in
the process direction. If observed, go to the Weak Intensity and Y-Dot Error in All
Colours Across a Printhead .
Y-dot placement defects in the process direction with acceptable jet intensity, Figure
5. A jagged edge in the process direction on lines and colour bands. If observed, go
to the Y-Dot Error Checkout.
Jagged text, Figure 6. Pixel position may be incorrect in the process direction. If
observed, go to the Blurry / Jagged Text Defect Checkout.
Use this RAP to troubleshoot the following defects:
Jagged lines in the cross process direction
Jagged text in the cross process direction
Blurry text
Irregularly spaced text
2.
Initial Actions
If the defect does not match any of the above, re-define the image quality defect. Refer to
IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Use care when moving the marking unit into the service position when hot. Ink can spill from
the ink reservoir located at the back of the unit if opened with too much force. Cross-colour ink
contamination could also occur.
Y-Stitch, Printhead Roll and Drum Runout Checkout

Procedure
Evaluate TP 16 Stitch Identification Test Page, Figure 1 and Figure 2. The severity of the
stitch defect varies in the process direction, Figure 2.
Y
N
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment up to three times. Print TP 16 Stitch
Identification Test Pages. Refer to IQS 3 Y-Dot Position. The severity of the alignment
defect is within specification.
Y
N
Perform dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test and check for obstructions that block
head alignment motion. The head alignment motion is free from obstructions.
Y
N
Remove obstructions and check printhead stitch and roll motor operation, refer
to:
CAUTION
easily make the printhead unusable.
Check that the printheads are securely attached to the carriage. Run dC967 Printhead to
Drum Spacing. Perform ADJ 91.1 Printhead Attachment Check.
Check that the printhead carriages are fully docked against the drum frame. If not, check
the wiring that runs along the umbilicals. Failure to properly route the upper or lower carriage wiring may lead to jagged or blurry lines or text.
Alignment errors, Figure 1 and Figure 2. Dot placement errors spanning all colours in
one or more of the printhead stitch zones. If observed, go to the Y-Stitch, Printhead
Roll and Drum Runout Checkout.
Misdirected or weak jets, Figure 3. If observed, go to the Weak Jets with Y-Dot Error
Checkout.
91-506-00 to 91-509-00 Roll Motor Over Current RAP.

printheads
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment. Print TP 16 Stitch Identification

Test Pages.
if the severity of the alignment defect exceeds specification, refer to IQS 3 Y-Dot
Position. Perform the following:
Check for obstructions that block carriage and printhead motion.
Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages and TP 16 Stitch Identification Test Pages. Check for
the following defects:
91-504-00, 91-505-00 Printhead Stitch Motor Over Current RAP.
Check that the printheads are securely attached to the carriage. The
are securely attached.
Y
N
Procedure
1.
Clean the IOD, refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.
Clean the drum, refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.

NOTE: Before printing TP 23, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded long edge
feed into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched paper.
Perform dC977 Drum Runout Calibration. Print TP 23 Drum Runout and Y-stitch Test Pages.
The test pages are good.
Image Quality
IQ 5
February 2013
3-24
N
Go to 91-637-00 Drum Runout Calibration Needed RAP.
Figure 2 Drum run-out defect
Weak Jets with Y-Dot Error Checkout

Figure 1 Y-stitch or printhead roll error
Refer to Figure 3.
February 2013
3-25
Image Quality
IQ 5
Weak Intensity and Y-Dot Error in All Colours Across a Printhead

Checkout
Refer to Figure 4.
Figure 3 Weak jets with Y-dot error

Go to 91-638-00 IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error RAP.
Figure 4 Weak intensity and poor Y-dot position
Procedure
Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. Test pages are good.
Y
N
Evaluate the colour bands test print. If the defect is similar to that shown in Figure 4, Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 1. Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. The
test
pages are good.
Y
N
Evaluate the text print. Check the Y-dot position, refer to IQS 3 Y-Dot Position. The
Y-dot position is acceptable.
Y
N
Evaluate the text print, refer to IQS 6 Blurry Text. The blurry text is acceptable.
A
Image Quality
IQ 5
February 2013
3-26
B
Y
N
Y-Dot Error Checkout

Refer to Figure 5.
Figure 5 Abnormal Y-dot position
Procedure
Perform dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check. The head to drum spacing check is successful.
February 2013
3-27
Image Quality
IQ 5
Blurry / Jagged Text Defect Checkout
N
Refer to Figure 6.
Perform dC972 option 5, Y-dot position correction. Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. Compare
the test pages with IQS 3. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Option 2 Head to Head Alignment Adjust.
Option 3 Head to Head Uniformity.
Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. Compare the test pages with IQS 3 and IQS 6. The
test pages are good.
Y
N
Perform dC972 option 5 Y Dot Position Correction. Print TP 1 Initial Test Print
Pages. Compare the test pages with IQS 3 and IQS 6. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Figure 6 Blurry / jagged text
Procedure
Check the position of the carriages. The carriages are docked to the drum.
Y
N
C
Image Quality
IQ 5
February 2013
3-28
C
Y
IQ 6 Missing Ink or Grainy Output RAP
N
Use this RAP when the output has white spots or a grainy appearance, Figure 1.
A grainy appearance can be caused by:
Perform dC972 option 5, Y-dot position correction. Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. Evaluate
the text page only and compare with IQS 6. The text page is good.
Y
N
Perform dC972 option 1, Printhead Uniformity. Option 1 runs options 1 through 5, before
proceeding to run option 5, Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. Evaluate the text page only
and compare with IQS 6. The text pages are good.
Y
N
Perform dC972 option 5, Y-Dot Position Correction. Print TP 1 Initial Test Print
Pages. Evaluate the text page only and compare with IQS 6. The text pages are
good.
Y
N
Image processing on certain postscript print files that contain transition areas between
greys and near-greys.
Inherent graininess in prints.
Missing pixels (known as dropout). This is most visible in halftone regions and is most
prevalent on duplex prints and / or rough / textured media.
NOTE: Media containing cotton, linen or parchments can exhibit dropout due to surface texture. Areas of missing ink on envelopes that outline the seams or flaps is normal.
NOTE: Opening the paper tray or switching from SEF to LEF prints can cause dropout on the
next duplex print. Reprinting the job will normally resolve this issue.

Figure 1 Duplex dropout example
February 2013
3-29
Image Quality
IQ 5, IQ 6
Initial Actions
WARNING
B
Perform dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Check the operating temperature of the
drum and registration/preheat assemblies. The temperatures are within the set point
range.
Y
N
Check the fault history, GP 2, for a corresponding fault code. Perform the relevant
RAP.
WARNING
If the customer is using banner pages, make sure they are printed in the same orientation
as the job. Printing banner sheets in a different orientation to the job can cause dropout.
Check that the defect occurs when making prints and is not related to copy quality. If the
defect is present on copies only, Go to IQ 29 DADH Document Glass and Scanner RAP.
If the graininess only appears on postscript prints in transition areas between greys and
near greys, print the job using composite black (selected from the print driver).
Enter dC978 Transfix Calibration Values. Check the transfix calibration values against
those on the drum frame. The calibration values match.
Y
N
Correct transfix calibration values in NVM, dC131.
Enter dC962 to test the transfix assembly. The transfix assembly operates normally.
Y
N
NOTE: This change can affect billing black / white / grey pages with greater than 1.5%
coverage. It is therefore not recommended to save composite black as the default setting.
Fast colour and standard print resolutions can cause more dropout. If graininess is
observed at either of these resolutions, print the job at a higher resolution (enhanced or
high resolution / photo).
Turn the media over in the tray. Media quality can vary between sides.
Print the job on smoother media. Inform the customer to use the smoothest, best quality
media available.
If the pattern of graininess is exactly the same on multiple copies of the same print, use a
higher print resolution. This is an indication that the defect is inherent in the print file. No
other service action is possible. Defect is within specification.
Enlarging an image may result in a grainy appearance.
Press the Machine Status button on the keypad, select the Fault tab on the UI, then Current Messages. If the message Cleaning unit life extended, image quality may be
impacted is displayed, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.
Check the drum page count in dC131 NVM ID 492-070. If a drum has not been replaced
on this machine, this page count will equal the meter total. If a new drum has been
installed, the meter count will be higher than the drum page count (the offset will equal the
page count that a new drum was installed on). If this NVM value has become corrupt or if
the drum page count was not properly reset when a new drum was installed, images may
have a more grainy appearance.
Transfix roller, PL 10.20 Item 1.
Flexure encoder, PL 10.20 Item 5.
Open the front door and remove the inner cover. Enter dC959, Cleaning Unit Exerciser,
and run the slow speed exerciser. While this is running ensure the cleaning unit metering
blade and roller are making contact with the drum. The metering blade and roller are
making contact with the drum.
Y
N
Check the cleaning unit front cam, PL 94.10 Item 9, rear cam, PL 94.10 Item 13,
drive gear, PL 94.10 Item 23 and cleaning unit motor, PL 94.10 Item 24. Install new
parts as necessary.
No other service action is possible. Defect is within specification.
Instruct the customer to run the job with extra heavy weight selected as the job media
type regardless of the media type being used. Instruct the customer to change the paper
type back to its original setting when finished. Extra heavy weight media selection affects
stapling and hole punching finish options.
Go to IQ 26 Poor Ink Adhesion.
Procedure
Make a duplex print of TP 11 Color Bands and Dithers Test Pages. Look at the last sheet only
(black dither print). The image level of graininess is the same on both sides.
Y
N
Check that the front and rear thermistors are not misaligned or bent and that they are
making contact with the drum. Check that there is no paper or debris between the thermistors and the drum. The thermistors are good.
Y
N
Image Quality
IQ 6
February 2013
3-30
IQ 7 Metering Blade Timing RAP

Use this RAP to diagnose faults with operation of the cleaning unit metering blade.
Blade engage out of
tolerance zone
Procedure
WARNING
1.
Print TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing Test Pages.
2.
Evaluate the metering blade timing test page only. If the metering blade engages and disengages within the tolerance zones, the cleaning unit and cleaning unit drive train are
working correctly.
3.
If the metering blade is engaging or disengaging outside the tolerance zones, Figure 1
either the cleaning unit or the cleaning unit drive train is defective.
4.
Refer to 94-520-00 Cleaning Unit Drive Train RAP to determine if the cleaning unit drive
train is defective. If the drive train is operating correctly, install a new cleaning unit PL
94.10 Item 21.
Blade disengage out

of tolerance zone
Figure 1 Metering blade timing page (too long)
February 2013
3-31
Image Quality
IQ 7
IQ 8 Cross Process Ink Artifacts (Smudge) RAP
Procedure
Use this RAP when the output has extra ink in localized areas in the cross process direction,
Figure 1.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Open the stripper gate, GP 31. Inspect the drum stripper blade for ink accumulation.
NOTE: Occasionally, the combination of rough media, a high coverage image, and a long print
job creates a condition where stripper blade ink accumulation is unavoidable. Advise the customer to consider changing to smoother media.
Print three copies of TP 4 Yellow Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). The test pages are
good.
Y
N
Press the Machine Status button select the Fault tab on the UI and enter Current Messages. Check if the message Cleaning unit life extended, image may be impacted is displayed. A different message is displayed.
Y
N
Open the front door and remove the inner cover. Enter dC959 and run the slow speed
exerciser. While this is running, check that the cleaning unit blade and roller are making
contact with the drum. The cleaning unit blade and roller are making contact with
the drum.
Y
N
Check the front cam, PL 94.10 Item 9, rear cam, PL 94.10 Item 13, drive gear, PL
94.10 Item 23 and the cleaning unit motor, PL 94.10 Item 24 The components are
good.
Y
N
Perform dC969 Clean Ink Smears. Print three copies of TP 4 Yellow Solid Fill
Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). The test pages are good.
Y
N
Install a new stripper blade assembly PL 10.12 Item 3.
Figure 1 Cross process ink artifacts

A
Image Quality
IQ 8
Print TP 14 Drum Stripper Blade Test Print. The stripper blade releases between the
35 mm and the 50 mm mark.
Y
N
Install a new stripper blade solenoid, PL 10.10 Item 3.
B
February 2013
3-32
B
Perform dC969 Clean Ink Smears. Print three copies of TP 4 Yellow Solid Fill Test
pages (TP 2 to TP 10). The test pages are good.
Y
N
Install a new stripper blade assembly, PL 10.12 Item 3.
February 2013
3-33
Image Quality
IQ 8
IQ 9 Deletions in the Process Direction RAP
Scraped Ink - A line of missing ink in the process direction, Figure 7. Edges of the
defect are rough or jagged. Ink may appear in the margin or the trailing edge. Distinct from multiple missing jets by the irregular edges of the deletion. If observed, go
to the Scraping Checkout.
A broad line of missing ink of a single primary colour in the process direction with
straight edges, Figure 8. Distinct from scraping by the uniform edges of the deletion.
If observed, go to the Multiple Missing Jets Checkout.
Multiple deletions and blobs of ink on the print, Figure 9. If observed, go to the Purge
Line Obstruction Checkout.
X-Axis defect - High-frequency bands in the process direction, Figure 10. If

observed, go to the X-Axis Defect Checkout.
Procedure
Missing or discoloured jets caused by a worn wiper blade forcing ink or debris into
the printhead jetstack, Figure 11. If observed, go to the Printhead Maintenance
Checkout.
Light lines in the process direction indicating missing jets, that clear after a head
purge, followed by further missing jets on the same carriage. This is caused by a
dirty wiper blade contaminating the printheads and is known as a roving jet. If this
defect is observed, go to the Printhead Maintenance Checkout.
Multiple missing lines of a primary colour in the process direction in a single printhead, Figure 12. The missing lines will also show up in any secondary colours that
are effected by the primary colour (i.e. missing lines in yellow will also show up in red
and green). If this is observed go to the Internally Leaking Printhead Checkout.
Deletions in the process direction.
Scraped ink in the process direction.
Scratches in the process direction.
X-stitch defects.
Light lines in the process direction.
Roving missing jets.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
2.
If the defect does not match any of the above re-define the image quality defect, refer to
IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
CAUTION
CAUTION
NOTE: Before printing test pages, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded long
edge feed into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched paper.
1.
Evaluate the colour bands test page, TP 26. Check for the following defects:
X - Stitch - Defects along the X-stitch area indicated by the chevrons, Figure 1. Xstitch generally appears as a set of white stripes in the stitch region. X-stitch can
also appear as a darker, more dense strip indicating an overlap of ink. An X-stitch
defect is seen in all colours but it may appear more severe in some colours (especially black. If observed, go to the X-Stitch Defect Checkout.
NOTE: Chevrons on the test pages indicate the X-stitch region between each printhead. X-stitch defects occur along this narrow area of the print.
Missing or weak jet - Deletions of a single primary colour that run consistently in the
process direction, Figure 2. If observed, go to the Missing or Weak Jet Checkout.
Image Quality
IQ 9
February 2013
3-34
X-Stitch Defect Checkout

Y
N
Perform dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test. Check the motion of the printhead stitch adjust motors, PL 91.20 Item 4 and PL 91.25 Item 4. The
stitch
adjust motors run.
Y
N
Check the motion of the printhead X-axis drive motors, PL 91.20 Item 5
and PL 91.25 Item 5.
Refer to Figure 1.
Go to the 91-504-00, 91-505-00 Printhead Stitch Motor Over Current RAP. The
X-axis drive motors run.
Y
N
Go to the 91-510-00, 91-511-00 X Axis Motor Over Current RAP.
Print TP 16. Check the test pages for good alignment following motion testing.
If the defect remains, perform the following:
1.
Check for obstructions that block carriage and printhead motion.
2.
Check the stitch adjust and roll adjust motor lead screws, PL 91.20 Item
21 and PL 91.25 Item 21 for cracks. Install new components as necessary.
3.
Clean the IOD, refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.
4.
Clean the drum, refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.

Print the colour bands test page, TP 26. The test page is good.
Y
N
Go to the Printhead Maintenance Checkout.
If the stitch defect is still present, swap the print heads around to move the artifact to the
outside of the page.
Figure 1 X-stitch defect
Procedure
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment up to 3 times. Print TP 16 Stitch Identification Test Pages after each adjustment. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Manually disable the IOD align calibration:
2.
3.

Y
N
Manually re-enable the IOD align calibration:
2.
3.
February 2013
3-35
Image Quality
IQ 9
Missing or Weak Jet Checkout

Refer to Figure 2.
Table 1 Problem jet identification

Jet number
colour label
Jet problem
Purple
Detected missing jets that have not been labelled as chronic
Red
Chronic jet
Green
Missing jet for which jet substitution is enabled manually
Black
Jetting issue not identified by IOD.
All jets are good.

Y
N
There is a missing jet on dithers only, Figure 3.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 4 TRC Generation. Print TP 11 colour bands
and dithers test pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 6 Reset Head Uniformity Data. Print TP
21 jet test pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Perform dC972 Printhead Uniformity, option 1 Printhead Uniformity.
Print 2 copies of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
1. dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. If the test fails, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10
Item 21.
Figure 2 Missing jet
2.
Procedure
Print TP 21 Jet Test Pages and TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. Identify problem
jets by referring to Table 1 and Figure 4, Figure 5 and Figure 6. The jet test pages are printed
with no jet interlacing, so masked or missing jets will not generate colour bars. Consider the
points that follow:
If ink is missing from at least 4 numerically sequential and identically numbered jets in all
4 colours Figure 11, go to the Printhead Maintenance Checkout.
All jets print their corresponding colour bar on the service jet test page.
Masked (refer to GP 30) and chronic jets usually will not have a colour bar.
Jets that begin to work after being masked (intermittent) will have a colour bar even
though their label is green.
Weak or missing jets that have a black jet number have not been detected by the IOD.
If the IOD sensor has failed, it could report missing jets incorrectly, causing them to be
mislabeled.
Image Quality
Print 2 copies of TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. The test pages are good.
Y
N
IQ 9
Print TP 20 oil bar chase and metering blade timing test pages. Evaluate the oil bar
chase page only. If necessary, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.
February 2013
3-36
Figure 5 Weak jet 187
Figure 6 Sputtering jet 157

Figure 3 Missing jet on dithers only
Figure 4 Missing jet 157
February 2013
3-37
Image Quality
IQ 9
Scraping Checkout
Multiple Missing Jets Checkout
Refer to Figure 7.
Refer to Figure 8. Shows multiple missing jets of a single primary colour.
Figure 7 Scraping
Figure 8 Multiple missing jets
Procedure
Procedure
Check for accumulations of ink or media debris on components that could scrape the drum.

1.
Perform dC968 Head Purge.
1.
Clean the following components, GP 27 or install new components as necessary:
2.
Print the jet test pages, TP 21.
Abatement plenum, PL 94.20 Item 12.
IOD shield and sensor, PL 94.15.
Analyse the jet test pages. The jet test pages are good.
Y
N
2.
If necessary, install a new stripper blade assembly, PL 10.12 Item 3.
3.
IQ 7 Metering Blade Timing RAP.
Print the colour bands test page, TP 26. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Image Quality
IQ 9
February 2013
3-38
Purge Line Obstruction Checkout
NOTE: Drooling may occur after a purge is completed and the printhead will continue to
ooze small amounts of ink out of the printhead. Drooling may also occur at initial warm
up and effects all four printheads and does not continue after the purge cycle.
Refer to Figure 9.
This may eventually lead to clogged jets and may stain the face plate.
X-Axis Defect Checkout

Refer to Figure 10.
Figure 10 X-axis defect
Procedure
Figure 9 Purge line obstruction
Go to IQ 13 Uneven in All Colours RAP. Perform the X-Axis Checkout.
Procedure
Check for purge line issues, refer to the 93-549-00 to 93-552-00 and 93-557-00 to 93-560-00
Printheads 1 and 3 Printhead Reservoir Fill Error RAP or the 93-553-00 to 93-556-00 and 93561-00 to 93-564-00 Printheads 2 and 4 Printhead Reservoir Fill Error RAP. The purge line
errors are found and corrected.
Y
N
Check the printheads for evidence of ink drooling from the printhead jetstack area, for
example: printhead not turning off, ink pouring out of the printhead, ink all over the drum
or waste tray overfilling. If necessary, install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25
Item 2.
C
February 2013
3-39
Image Quality
IQ 9
D
Perform dC965 Printhead Maintenance Cycle Test. Observe wiper motion during the test. Look
for erratic wiper motion that may indicate wiper chatter or motor failure. The wiper moves
smoothly across the printhead jetstack area.
Y
N
1. Check the wiper mechanism, refer to the 91-572-00, 91-573-00, 91-575-00 Wiper
Vertical Error RAP.
Printhead Maintenance Checkout

Refer to Figure 11.
2.
If necessary, install a new HM wiper, PL 91.15 Item 13.

NOTE: Installation of a HM wiper, PL 91.15 Item 13 is recommended if wiper chatter
is observed.
3.
dC968 Head Purge.
Print the jet test pages, TP 21. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Go to the Missing or Weak Jet Checkout.
Figure 11 Clogged or contaminated jets
Procedure
Print the jet test pages, TP 21. Examine the jet test pages to determine the placement of the
missing jets, Figure 11. The ink is missing from 4 numerically sequential and identically
numbered jets in all 4 colours.
Y
N
Go to the Missing or Weak Jet Checkout.
D
Image Quality
IQ 9
February 2013
3-40
Internally Leaking Printhead Checkout
IQ 10 Incorrect Margin, Misregistration or Skew RAP
Procedure
Use this RAP to determine the source of margin, misregistration or skew, Figure 1.
Evaluate the colour bands test page, TP 26. Check for the following defect:
NOTE: Since the printhead is leaking internally, no ink will be visible externally on the print
head or on the printer.
If massive amounts of ink are missing in the process direction in one printhead similar to Figure
12, check for a leaky printhead. Note that the missing ink will generally affect a primary colour
and its associated secondary colours. This issue most commonly shows up in black and yellow
meaning the missing ink will also show up in the red and green bars. Purging the printhead to
recover the missing jets will not resolve this issue. Often the missing ink will be noticed on the
colour bands print on TP 26 but not on the jet tests pages printed from dC968. If this defect is
observed then install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2 and PL 91.25 Item 2.
Figure 1 Image skew
Initial Actions
WARNING
Figure 12 Printhead with internal leak
Perform dC608 Document Feeder Registration.
Perform dC609 Document Glass Registration.
Procedure
Make 3 prints of TP 2, cyan solid fill test page (TP 2 to TP 10). Check the prints for skew, refer
to IQS 1 Registration and Skew. The prints are skewed.
February 2013
3-41
Image Quality
IQ 9, IQ 10
A
Y
N
Make 3, duplex prints of TP 2, cyan solid fill test page (TP 2 to TP 10). Check the prints for
skew, refer to IQS 1 Registration and Skew. The prints are skewed.
Y
N
Make 3 copies of TP 2 from the document glass. Check the copies for skew. The
copies are skewed.
Y
N
Make a copy of TP 2 from the DADH. Check the copies for skew. The copies
are skewed.
Y
N
No skew is present. Re-define the image quality defect. Refer to IQ 1
Image Quality Entry RAP.
B
NOTE: W/TAG 018 machines do not have air pumps install as standard. However,
the preheat air pumps in a replacement registration/preheat assembly will function
when the unit is installed, refer to service bulletin T8009-12-06.
Make 3 prints of TP 2, cyan solid fill test page (TP 2 to TP 10). The prints are good.
Y
N
Make five prints from each tray and the bypass tray to identify the source of skew.
The skew is originating in the DADH. Go to ADJ 5.3 DADH Skew Adjustment.
There is a skew problem originating in the scanner. Perform the following:
Check that the scan carriage is parallel to edge of the document glass. If necessary, perform ADJ 62.2 Scan Carriage Assembly.
Check that the scan cables are wrapped around their drive pulleys, refer to
REP 62.7 Scan Cables.
If necessary, install a new scanner, PL 62.15 Item 1.
Check the tray feed rolls and guides for contamination.
Check the tray feed rolls and transport rolls for wear. Install new components as
necessary.
Check that there is no variation in the size or weight of the sheets of paper in
each tray.
Check the paper path for obstructions. Refer to IQ 2 Copy or Print Damage
RAP.

The skew occurs in the duplex paper path. Check the following nip and drive rolls, refer to
GP 29 Component Locations:
Roller drive J - PL 10.10 Item 1.
Roller drive L - PL 10.10 Item 2.
Roller nip P - PL 10.15 Item 6.
Nip R, C and Q takeaway rolls, PL 82.15 Item 10.
Transport roller drive 2, D, F - PL 82.10 Item 1.
Transport roller TAR vertical, E - PL 82.10 Item 2.
Clean the rolls, GP 27 or install new components as necessary.

Perform dC969 Clean Ink Smears. Print 3 copies of TP 2, cyan solid fill test page (TP 2 to TP
10). Check the prints for skew, refer to IQS 1 Registration and Skew. The prints are good.
Y
N
Perform dC625 Registration/preheat Calibration. The registration calibration is good.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 82-007, nip C release solenoid, PL 82.15 Item 4 and 82-008, nip
D release solenoid, PL 70.30 Item 13. The solenoids energize.
Y
N
Go to the 82-507-00, 82-508-00 Nip C and Nip D Release Solenoid Over Current RAP.
Check the operation of the air pumps, refer to 88-508-00 Registration/preheat Air
Pump Incorrect Current RAP. If the air pumps are working, then install a new registration/preheat assembly, PL 88.10 Item 1.
Image Quality
IQ 10
February 2013
3-42
IQ 11 Smudges, Debris, Smears in the Process Direction,

or Paper Stack Marks RAP
Faint smudges or smears in the process direction at the edges of the print, Figure 1 and
Figure 2.
Faint smudges or smears in the process direction in line with text or printed horizontal
lines, Figure 3.
A
The defect is in the finisher. Dock and connect the finisher. Compare the marks to Figure 1.
The marks are similar to Figure 1, approximately 1 mm wide.
Y
N
The machine has a HVF.
Y
N
Print three copies of TP 4 Yellow Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10) to different
output trays to isolate where the marking is taking place. Inspect the media path of
the LCSS. Look for trapped media debris or a build up of ink. Clean any contamination from the media path.
NOTE:
Most roller and rib marks are inherent to the design and cannot be completely eliminated.
Paper stack marks may only appear on the edge of the stack (but not on the surface of
the print), they should be relatively faint. This type of marking is normal and no permanent
solution is available. To clean, run chase pages, TP 12 to the affected tray until the defect
fades. The benefits of cleaning are temporary.
The marks are similar to Figure 2.

Y
N
Slight amounts of ink accumulation will show up as marks on the edge of the stack
(on a large job). As the accumulation of ink increases, it can cause ink marks on the
surface of the print from the ink transferring from the ribs onto the media. These
marks are approximately 1 mm wide and correspond to the rib locations. Clean any
contamination from the media path.
The booklet maker has additional paper path features which contact the image and create
localized scuff marks. Clean the media path of the booklet maker.
The defect may occur when booklet making with paper above 120 gsm. The ink may
transfer from one sheet to the other sheet it is being folded against. If this occurs then use
paper of 120 gsm or below.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
If media is found between the drum and IOD sensor, remove the IOD sensor before removing
the media. Pulling media out over the IOD can damage the IOD shield.
Print three copies of TP 4 Yellow Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10) to different output trays
to isolate where the marking is taking place. Inspect the media path of the finisher. Look for a
build up of ink on ribs. Clean any contamination from the media path.
Machine Only
Procedure
Check that the front drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 9 and the rear drum thermistor, PL 94.20
Item 10 are not bent or misaligned. Check for paper debris between the thermistors and the
therdrum and ensure that the thermistors are making good contact with the drum. The
mistors are good.
Y
N
Clear the media path. Check the area surrounding the drum, IOD, cleaning unit, abatement plenum, transfix roller, and drum stripper blade for ink debris or for full or partial
sheets of media.
Check the pre-heater for ink debris.
Perform dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Check the drum operating temperature. The
drum temperature is good.
Y
N
Go to 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00, 94-546-00, 94-632-00,
94-633-00 Drum Heat Error RAP.
Procedure
The machine has a finisher fitted.
Y
N
Go to Machine Only.
Separate the finisher from the machine. Install a finisher bypass connector, PL 26.10 Item 3.
Print the initial test pages, TP 1. The prints are good.
Y
N
Go to Machine Only.
A
Perform dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Check the preheat operating temperature. The
preheat temperature is good.
Y
N
Go to 88-500-00 to 88-502-00, 88-512-00 Preheat Thermal Error RAP.
B
February 2013
3-43
Image Quality
IQ 11
B
Refer to 88-508-00 Registration/preheat Air Pump Incorrect Current RAP. The
preheat air pump is good.
Y
N
Install a new registration/preheat air pump, PL 88.10 Item 5.
Registration/
Press the Machine Status button select the fault tab on the UI and enter Current Messages.
Check if the message Cleaning unit life extended, image may be impacted is displayed. A
different message is displayed.
Y
N
NOTE: Installing a new cleaning unit may temporarily make smudging worse.
Enter dC969 and run Clean Print Smears. Print three copies of TP 4 Yellow Solid Fill Test
Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). The test prints are good.
Y
N
Open the stripper gate, GP 31. Check the drum stripper blade for accumulations of ink or
other debris. The stripper blade is clean.
Y
N
1.
Check the stripper solenoid SOL10-021, PL 10.10 Item 3. Refer to 10-570-00

Stripper Solenoid Over Current RAP. If necessary, install a new stripper solenoid assembly, PL 10.10 Item 3.
2.
3.
Inspect the cleaning unit camshaft assembly, PL 94.10 Item 4 for obstructions
that would prevent it from moving freely. Remove the camshaft assembly.
Check the bushings, PL 94.10 Item 8 and PL 94.10 Item 14 for wear or damage. If necessary, install a new camshaft assembly, PL 94.10 Item 4.
4.
If necessary, install a new drum stripper blade, PL 10.12 Item 3.
NOTE: Installing a new cleaning unit may temporarily make smudging worse.
Print TP 15 Media Path Test Pages, to determine where in the paper path the marking is
occurring. Refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure to clean the media path.
If the problem persists, check the following areas for accumulation of ink or media debris.
Clean as necessary:
Cleaning unit metering blade. Only remove paper debris. If the metering blade
appears to have excessive ink build-up, refer to IQ 21.
IOD shield and sensor, PL 94.15 Item 1.
Roller nip N, PL 10.15 Item 1 and roller nip P, PL 10.15 Item 6.
Paper path ribs and guides.

Figure 1 Finisher rib marking example
Image Quality
IQ 11
February 2013
3-44
Figure 3 Streaking from IOT
Figure 2 HVF BM ejector marking example
February 2013
3-45
Image Quality
IQ 11
IQ 12 Missing or Partial Image RAP
Initial Actions
Use this RAP to troubleshoot wide deletions in the process direction that affect a complete
printhead or a when a single colour is missing from a single printhead.
The problem is usually caused by a communication or power error in the marking unit and
causes the substantial or complete loss of a single printhead, Figure 1 and may be seen in one
or all colours. The problem may be an ink supply problem if only a part of the printhead is missing.
NOTE: Blank sheets accompanying multi-feeds or chase pages following a jam are normal.
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Check for media or debris around the printhead and drum. Clean as necessary, refer to
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14. Check the PEST fault history, dC123. New
faults are listed in the PEST history.
Y
N
Print the initial test pages, TP 1. Test pages are good.
Y
N
NOTE: Before printing TP 26, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded
long edge feed into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole
punched paper.
Perform dC968 Head Purge on the affected printhead. Print TP 26 Printhead Uniformity / Colour Bands Test Page. Test prints are good.
Y
N
Reseat the two ribbon cables, PL 92.10 Item 7 and PL 92.10 Item 8, attached to
the affected printhead. Print the initial test pages, TP 1. The prints are good.
Y
N
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Swap the two ribbon cables on the
affected printhead with the two ribbon cables on the working printhead on
the same carriage. Switch on the machine, GP 14. Print the initial test
pages, TP 1. The defect moves to a new location.
Y
N
Install a new quad wave amp PWB, PL 92.10 Item 3. Print the initial
test pages, TP 1. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Install a new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1. Print the initial test pages, TP 1. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item
2.
Figure 1 Printhead 2 failure
A
Image Quality
IQ 12
February 2013
3-46
G
G
IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP

Use this RAP to troubleshoot uneven colours in all four primary colours (cyan, magenta, yellow
and black).

Install new ribbon cables on the printhead that now shows the defect, PL
92.10 Item 7 and PL 92.10 Item 8.
Initial Actions
NOTE: Ensure that the customers Automatic Light Lines and Full Fix settings are
restored to the original settings when the image quality defect has been corrected.

Perform the relevant RAP.
Enter the customer administration tools, GP 5. On the Tools tab select Troubleshooting
then Automatic Light Lines Fix. Set Quick Fix to On. Set Full Fix to Eco Fix.
Try running the customers image in a higher print resolution.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Evaluate the colour bands test page, TP 26. Check for the following defects.
High frequency lines of missing ink, dark lines or both, in the process direction, Figure 1.
The lines are across the width of a printhead. If observed, go to X-Axis Checkout.
Dark or light bands in the process direction, across the width of a printhead, Figure 2. The
defect might be more noticeable in single colours, Figure 3. If observed, go to Uniformity
Checkout.
Faded lines in the process direction with indistinct edges, Figure 4. The defect is noticeable in all colours but may be more apparent in some, Figure 5. If observed, go to Uniformity Checkout.
Faded lines in the cross process direction, Figure 6. Ringing seen between horizontal
lines. If observed, go to Ringing Checkout.
If the defect is not apparent in all four primary colours, go to the IQ 14 Uneven in Some
Colours RAP. If the colours are spatially uniform but incorrect, go to the IQ 15 Wrong
Colour RAP.
February 2013
3-47
Image Quality
IQ 12, IQ 13
X-Axis Checkout
3.
Refer to Figure 1.
Perform dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test to check carriage motion. After correcting any obstructions, perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjust. Reprint
the stitch identification test print, TP 16.
The prints are good.

Y
N
X-axis motor, PL 91.20 Item 5.
Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjust to align the printheads.

Figure 1 X-axis motion error

CAUTION
If carriage motion is obstructed to the point of producing stringy lines of ink, it is likely that
strings of ink are scattered throughout the machines interior. Check the printheads, abatement
plenum, exit module, and transfix roller for ink residue, clean as necessary, GP 27. Refer to IQ
20 Wavy or Stringy Lines of Ink/Blistering RAP.
Procedure
Print the stitch identification test pages, TP 16. The prints are good.
Y
N
1.
2.
Check for restrictions to printhead motion:

a.
Wrong harness routing, refer to GP 28 Marking Unit Assembly Wiring Harnesses.
b.
Umbilical routing, PL 91.20 Item 10 and PL 91.25 Item 10. Check for obstructions or damage.
c.
Contamination of the front and rear bearing shafts on the upper and lower
SFWA frames.
d.
Check that the orange shipping restraint clips are removed from the carriages.
Check the condition of the x-axis motors, PL 91.20 Item 5 and PL 91.25 Item 5:
Check for disconnected or damaged wiring harnesses. Repair as necessary,

REP 1.1.
Check the X-axis drive motor lead screw, and cone nut. Check that the antirotation stop is engaged. Refer to REP 91.9 X Axis Drive Motor.
A
Image Quality
IQ 13
February 2013
3-48
Uniformity Checkout
Refer to Figure 2, Figure 3, Figure 4 and Figure 5.
Figure 3 Printhead non-uniformity on dithers
Figure 2 Printhead wide non-uniformity
February 2013
3-49
Image Quality
IQ 13
Figure 4 Jet to jet non-uniformity
Figure 5 Jet to jet non-uniformity on dithers
Procedure
NOTE: Before printing the test pages, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded
paper.
Evaluate the cyan / magenta test page and the red, blue and green bands in the colour bands
print (TP 1). Check for distinctive non-uniform bands in the process direction. The prints are
good and are without non-uniform bands.
Y
N
Perform the following dC972 Print Head Uniformity routines:
1. Option 3 Head to head uniformity
2.
Option 4 TRC Generation
3.
Option 5 Y-dot position correction
Print TP 1. Evaluate the cyan / magenta test page and the red, blue and green bands on
the colour bands test page for distinctive non-uniform bands in the process direction.
The prints are good and are without non-uniform bands.
Y
N
B
Image Quality
IQ 13
February 2013
3-50
B
1.
Option 6 Reset head uniformity data
2.
Option 2 Head to head alignment adjust
3.
Option 3 Head to head uniformity
4.
5.
Print TP 1. Evaluate the cyan / magenta test page and the red, blue and green
bands on the colour bands test page for distinctive non-uniform bands in the process
direction. The prints are good and are without non-uniform bands.
Y
N
NOTE: The head to head uniformity uses one head as a reference to adjust the
other printheads. Swapping the printheads then changes the reference printhead, which often results in better uniformity.
Swap printhead 1 with printhead 2 and printhead 3 with print head 4. On a 9301
machine make sure there are no chronic jets on print head 1 or printhead 4
before swapping the heads. If chronic jets are present, then install a new printhead to replace the print head that has a difference appearance than the other
printheads. Perform dC972, Print TP 1 and evaluate the cyan / magenta and
the red, blue and green bands in the colour bands prints for distinctive non-uniform bands in the process direction. The prints are good and are without
non-uniform bands.
Y
N
Install new print heads as required, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2.
C
NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are more prone to
show process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the test prints but the issue is
with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all or many shades of a colour, no other
adjustments or repairs actions are possible.
Advise the customer to print the image in another print resolution or colour correction may
result in a more satisfactory image. Changing the colour in the customers application may
result in a more satisfactory image.
NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are more prone to show
process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the test prints but the issue is with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all or many shades of a colour, no other adjustments or
repairs actions are possible.
NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are
more prone to show process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the
test prints but the issue is with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all
or many shades of a colour, no other adjustments or repairs actions are possible.
Advise the customer to print the image in another print resolution or colour correction may result in a more satisfactory image. Changing the colour in the customers application may result in a more satisfactory image.
NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are more
prone to show process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the test prints but
the issue is with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all or many shades of a
colour, no other adjustments or repairs actions are possible.
Advise the customer to print the image in another print resolution or colour correction
may result in a more satisfactory image. Changing the colour in the customers application may result in a more satisfactory image.
February 2013
3-51
Image Quality
IQ 13
Ringing Checkout
Procedure
Refer to Figure 6. This example is LEF in the process direction. Ringing is both pattern and
image orientation dependent.
If printing on A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch paper, change the media orientation in the tray. Reprint the
customer job. The print is good.
Y
N
The printer may be printing within specification. The defect is consistent printhead to
printhead.
Y
N
No service action required. The defect is within specification.
Figure 6 Ringing defect
Image Quality
IQ 13
February 2013
3-52
IQ 14 Some Colours Uneven RAP
Light discolouration in wide bands across a whole printhead in the process direction, Figure 5. Uniform light discolouration across a whole printhead. If observed, go to Ink Mixing
in the Printhead or in the Ink Melt Reservoir Checkout.
Banding in the process direction. Faded bands in the process direction across all colours,
Figure 6 or visible as coloured bands on single colour dithers, Figure 7. If observed, go to
the Banding Checkout.
If the defect is apparent in all four primary colours, go to the IQ 13 Uneven in All Colours
RAP. If the colours are spatially uniform but incorrect, go to the IQ 15 Wrong Colour RAP.
Light lines in the process direction
Dark lines in the process direction
Light discolouration in wide bands across a whole printhead in the process direction
Dark discolouration in wide bands across a whole printhead in the process direction
Discolouration in a single colour primary across the whole page
Banding in the process direction
Initial Actions
Enter the customer administration tools, GP 5. On the Tools tab select Troubleshooting
then Automatic Light Lines Fix. Set Quick Fix to On. Set Full Fix to Eco Fix.
NOTE: Ensure that the customers Automatic Light Lines and Full Fix settings are
restored to the original settings when the image quality defect has been corrected.
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Evaluate the colour bands test page, TP 26. Check for the following defects:
Light lines in the process direction in a primary colour with corresponding light lines in
secondary colours, Figure 1. Distinct parallel lines, often in groups of six lines, within a
single primary colour and the corresponding secondary colours. If observed, go to the
Missing Jet Checkout.
Dark lines in the process direction in a primary colour with corresponding dark lines in
secondary colours, Figure 3. Distinct parallel lines, often in groups of six lines, within a
single primary colour and the corresponding secondary colours. If observed, go to the Ink
Mixing at the Printhead Faceplate Checkout.
Dark discolouration in wide bands across a whole printhead in the process direction, Figure 4. Uniform dark discolouration across a whole printhead. If observed, go to Ink Mixing
in the Printhead or in the Ink Melt Reservoir Checkout.
Discolouration across the whole page, Figure 5. Uniform discolouration in a single colour
across the whole page. If observed, go to Ink Mixing in the Printhead or in the Ink Melt
Reservoir Checkout.
February 2013
3-53
Figure 1 Missing jet example
Image Quality
IQ 14
Missing Jet Checkout
Ink Mixing at the Printhead Faceplate Checkout
Missing jets usually occur on a single printhead. Figure 2 shows examples of missing jets on
multiple printheads to indicate various combinations of colours. The illustration shows a cyan
missing jet on printhead 1, a magenta missing jet on printhead 2, a yellow missing jet on printhead 3, and a black missing jet on printhead 4. The defect is the width of a single jet. The
defect could involve more than one jet of one or more colours.
Figure 3 is an example of ink mixing at the surface of the printhead faceplate, showing the
defect clearing up over a series of prints. This symptom appears as yellow ink looking black. To
a lesser degree, cyan and magenta may look darker. Black is generally not affected.
NOTE:
Missing cyan jets affect green and blue
Missing magenta jets affect red and blue
Missing yellow jets affect red and green
Missing black jets affect dark shades of all colours
Figure 3 Ink mixing clearing with repeated prints
Procedure
Figure 2 Missing jets on multiple printheads
Procedure
Go to 91-638-00, IOD Detects Chronic Jet Error RAP.
Image Quality
IQ 14
Perform dC965 Printhead Maintenance Test. Check carriage and wiper motion. The
contacts and moves smoothly across the printhead faceplate area.
Y
N
Wiper chatter is observed.
Y
N
Go to the 91-572-00, 91-573-00, 91-575-00 Wiper Vertical Error RAP.
wiper
Install a new wiper blade, PL 91.15 Item 13.

Print 3 sets of cleaning pages, TP 22. Print the Initial Test Print Pages, TP 1. If ink mixing is still
present, the defect is not caused by printhead faceplate mixing. Re-define the image quality
defect, refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
February 2013
3-54
Ink Mixing in the Printhead or in the Ink Melt Reservoir Checkout

Ink mixing may occur in the printhead or in the ink melt reservoir. Ink mixing in the printhead
appears as a band across the image, Figure 4. Ink mixing in the ink melt reservoir appears as
discolouration in all four printheads, Figure 5.
Figure 5 Ink mixing in the ink melt reservoir
Procedure
Figure 4 Ink mixing in printhead 4
Check for evidence of overfilling of the reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10. The reservoir is filled to
the correct level.
Y
N
Go to 93-901-00 to 93-904-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Fill Failure RAP.
Check for evidence of cross contamination of the ink melt reservoir. The reservoir is clear of
cross contamination.
Y
N
1.
Install a new reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10.
2.
dC968 Head Purge 3 times.
Check for leaks in the umbilical connections. The umbilical connections are good.
Y
N
Go to 93-937-00 to 93-940-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Leak Error RAP.
A
February 2013
3-55
Image Quality
IQ 14
A
Banding Checkout
Refer to Figure 6 and Figure 7.
Print the colour bands test page, TP 26. Evaluate the test page. All colours are good except
cyan (cyan is mixed with green).
Y
N
Ink discolouration is across all 4 printheads.
Y
N
Perform dC968 Head Purge 3 times. Purge all 4 printheads. The
discolouration
has increased and affects all four heads.
Y
N
Check the service log for previous instances of ink mixing. Ink mixing is a
new fault.
Y
N
Perform dC968 Head Purge 3 times. Record which printhead had ink discolouration in the service log. Enter GP 5 Customer Administration Tools. Check if
Intelligent Ready power save mode is on. If necessary, advise the customer
that using Intelligent Ready power save mode may avoid future ink discolouration.
NOTE: Do not change the customer settings.
Install a new reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10. Perform dC968 Head Purge 3 times.
Install a new reservoir, PL 93.10 Item 10. Perform dC968 Head Purge 3 times.
Perform dC968 Head Purge 3 times. Enter GP 5 Customer Administration Tools. Check if Intelligent Ready power save mode is on. If necessary, advise the customer that using Intelligent
Ready power save mode may avoid future ink discolouration.
Figure 6 Banding on colour bands
Image Quality
IQ 14
February 2013
3-56
B
Print TP 1. Evaluate the cyan / magenta test page and the red, blue and green bands on
prints
the colour bands test page for non-uniform bands in the process direction. The
are good and are without non-uniform bands.
Y
N
1. Option 6 Reset head uniformity data
2.
Option 2 Head to head alignment adjust
3.
Option 3 Head to head uniformity
4.
5.
Print TP 1. Evaluate the cyan / magenta test page and the red, blue and green
bands on the colour bands test page for non-uniform bands in the process direction.
The prints are good and are without non-uniform bands.
Y
N
NOTE: The head to head uniformity uses one head as a reference to adjust the
other printheads. Swapping the printheads then changes the reference printhead, which often results in better uniformity.
Swap printhead 1 with printhead 2 and printhead 3 with print head 4. On a 9301
machine make sure there are no chronic jets on printhead 1 or printhead 4
before swapping the heads. If chronic jets are present, then install a new printhead to replace the print head that has a difference appearance than the other
printheads. Perform dC972, Print TP 1 and evaluate the cyan / magenta and
the red, blue and green bands in the colour bands prints for a distinctive nonuniform bands in the process direction. The prints are good and are without
non-uniform bands.
Y
N
Install new printheads as required, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25 Item 2.
Figure 7 Banding in dithers
NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are
more prone to show process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the
test prints but the issue is with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all
or many shades of a colour, no other adjustments or repairs actions are possible.
Procedure
CAUTION
Ink mixing and ink discolouration must be corrected first. If not, printer calibration is performed
with the wrong colour ink, and will require a future service call.
Advise the customer to print the image in another print resolution or colour correction may result in a more satisfactory image. Changing the colour in the customers application may result in a more satisfactory image.
Try running the customers image in a higher print resolution.

NOTE: Before printing the test pages, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded
paper.

NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are more
prone to show process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the test prints but
the issue is with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all or many shades of a
colour, no other adjustments or repairs actions are possible.
Evaluate the cyan / magenta test page and the red, blue and green bands in the colour bands
print (TP 1). Check for non-uniform bands in the process direction. The prints are good and
are without non-uniform bands.
Y
N
1. Option 3 Head to head uniformity
2.
3.
B
Advise the customer to print the image in another print resolution or colour correction
may result in a more satisfactory image. Changing the colour in the customers application may result in a more satisfactory image.
B
February 2013
3-57
Image Quality
IQ 14
B
NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are more prone to
show process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the test prints but the issue is
with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all or many shades of a colour, no other
adjustments or repairs actions are possible.
IQ 15 Wrong Colour RAP
Use this RAP when the colours on the image are wrong. Refer to Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3
and Figure 4 to compare the defect to the colour band service test pattern, Figure 5.
Initial Actions
WARNING
NOTE: Certain colours (such as darker shades of blue, red and green) are more prone to show
process direction banding. If banding is not seen on the test prints but the issue is with a particular shade of a colour as opposed to all or many shades of a colour, no other adjustments or
repairs actions are possible.
WARNING
Do not touch the ink reservoir while it is hot.
CAUTION
Enter GP 5 Customer Administration Tools. Check if Intelligent Ready power save mode
is on. If necessary, advise the customer that using Intelligent Ready power save mode
may avoid future ink discolouration.
Ensure that all inks are loaded in their correct channel in the ink loader. If necessary, rub
the ink sticks on a clean sheet of white paper to determine the stick colour.
Procedure
The colour band service test pattern (XTP 798.000), PL 26.11 Item 15 is used to determine if
there are large differences in colour. No action should be taken to correct minor differences in
colour that may occur between test pages and the service test pattern. Magenta is a colour that
may look darker on the service test pattern, but this is normal.
Print the colour bands test page, TP 26. Compare the print with Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3
and Figure 4. Wrong colours are seen across the entire print.
Y
N
Go to the IQ 14 Uneven in Some Colours RAP.
Check for ink leakage around the umbilical connections. The umbilical connections
good.
Y
N
Go to the 93-937-00 to 93-940-00 Ink Melt Reservoir Leak Error RAP.
are
Print the colour bands and dithers test pages, TP 11. The colours are correct compared to
the service test pattern.
Image Quality
IQ 14, IQ 15
February 2013
3-58
N
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14, to clear any corrupt data. Print the colour
bands and dithers test pages, TP 11. The colours are correct compared to the service
test pattern.
Y
N
Perform dC968 Head Purge 3 times. Print 3 sets of cleaning pages, TP 22. Print the
colour bands and dithers test pages, TP 11. The colours are correct compared to
the service test pattern.
Y
N
Install a new ink reservoir PL 93.10 Item 10. Perform dC968 Head Purge 3
times to prime the ink delivery system. Print the colour bands and dithers test
pages, TP 11. The colours are correct compared to the service test pattern.
Y
N
Reseat all connections on the IME Controller PWB. If necessary, install a
new IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
If TP 11 is good but the customers print jobs are incorrect, advise the customer to check the
print driver settings.
Figure 1 Ink discolouration
February 2013
3-59
Image Quality
IQ 15
Figure 3 Incorrectly loaded ink black into cyan
Figure 2 Ink mixing (cyan into yellow)
Image Quality
IQ 15
February 2013
3-60
Figure 4 Corrupt image data
Figure 5 Service test pattern
February 2013
3-61
Image Quality
IQ 15
IQ 16 Scratches or Gloss Marks in the Process Direction

RAP
Use this RAP when the output displays scratches or gloss marks in the process direction.
Scratches or marks typically result from contact with transport components rollers and ribs or
debris in the media path.
B
Print TP 15 Media Path Test Pages to isolate where the marking is taking place. Inspect,
clean, or install new rollers as necessary.
If the problem persists perform the following:
Check the following components for accumulations of ink or media debris.
IOD shield and sensor PL 94.15.
Inspect the drum for scratches, if necessary install a new drum, PL 94.20 Item 1.
This defect may be accompanied with ink that is smudging in the non-imaged area of the
media in line with the rollers or ribs. Roller marks usually have a well defined width of 10 to 15
mm, and run in the process direction, and are evenly spaced across the print. Rib marks are
faint, narrow (up to 2 mm) burnish marks evenly spaced in the process direction. These typically come from the finishers. The HVF finisher and booklet maker have features which contact
the image and can create localized scuff marks.
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Print 3 duplex copies of TP 5 Black
Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10) and evaluate the prints for scratches or gloss
marks
Re-install the original cleaning unit. The problem is not in the cleaning unit. Re-define the
image quality defect, refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Scratches or gloss marks are present.

Y
N
Procedure
WARNING
The defect is located in the finisher. Dock and connect the finisher. Isolate the location where
the marking is taking place by printing one copy of TP 6 Red Solid Fills Test Page (TP 2 to TP
10) to each output tray. Inspect the media path of the finisher. Look for a build up of ink on ribs
and rollers. Clean any contamination from the media path. Check for dislodged rollers, install
new components as necessary.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE: There are usually no corrective actions for the defect. Some ribs can be cleaned, refer
to GP 27. Printing up to 50 TP 12 Chase pages can clean the ribs temporarily. Advise the customer that simplex jobs on light weight media cause fewer problems than duplex jobs on heavy
weight media.
Check the cleaning unit metering blade for pieces of paper.
NOTE: Ink pixel build up on the metering blade is normal and should not be cleaned off.
The metering blade is good.
Y
N
Clean the metering blade of paper debris.
Separate the finisher from the printer. Install a finisher bypass connector, PL 26.10 Item 3. Print
a duplex copy of TP 6 Red Solid Fill Test Page (TP 2 to TP 10). Evaluate both sides of the test
page for process direction gloss streaks. The test page is good.
Y
N
Open the stripper gate, GP 31. Check the stripper blade for accumulations of ink or media
debris. The stripper blade is clean.
Y
N
A
B
Image Quality
IQ 16
February 2013
3-62
IQ 17 Gloss Marks in the Cross-Process Direction RAP

Use this RAP when the output has gloss marks in the cross process direction.
Typical defects include:
Chatter, refer to Figure 1. The cleaning unit metering blade is vibrating as it spreads oil
onto the drum. Trace amounts of chatter on duplex is normal.
Insufficient oil. Insufficient oil causes the inked sheet to appear glossier than normal and
may also have cross-process cracking marks. This defect can also be caused by high
drum temperature.
Jagged streaks, refer to Figure 1. The metering blade is leaving excess oil on the drum.
When the registration/preheat assembly is too hot, on a duplex print, the side that is face
up in the output tray can have significantly lower gloss than the side that is face down.
Gloss band. Some print sequences may result in a gloss band, usually 2 to 3 inches wide,
that may be visible under some lighting conditions. This is normal.
Duplex gloss marks may appear for the first several duplex sheets following a simplex
print job. Gloss marks will likely diminish after several prints. This is normal.
Initial Actions
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Press the Machine Status button on the keypad, select the Fault tab on the UI, then Current
Messages. If the message Cleaning unit life extended, image quality may be impacted is displayed, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21.
A
Print 5 duplex copies of TP 6 Red Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). Inspect the final test
page only for metering blade chatter, refer to Figure 1. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Print 5 duplex copies of TP 6 Red Solid Fill
Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). Inspect the final test page only for metering blade chatter,
refer to Figure 1. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Re-install the original cleaning unit. The problem is not in the cleaning unit. Redefine the image quality defect, refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Y
N
Clean the metering blade of paper debris.
Enter dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser and run the slow speed exerciser. The slow speed
exerciser completes successfully.
Y
N
Go to 94-520-00 Cleaning Unit Drive Error RAP.
and run the slow speed exerciser. While this is running ensure the cleaning unit metering
Y
N
Check the cleaning unit cams mechanism PL 94.10 Item 9, PL 94.10 Item 13 and
the cleaning unit drive gear and motor PL 94.10 Item 23, PL 94.10 Item 24. Install
new parts as necessary.
Check that the front drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 9 and the rear drum thermistor, PL
94.20 Item 10 are not bent or misaligned. Check for paper debris between the thermistors
and the drum and ensure that the thermistors are making good contact with the drum.
The thermistors are good.
Y
N
Procedure
Front drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 9
Print 3 simplex copies of TP 6 Red Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). Evaluate the final test
page only for metering blade chatter, refer to Figure 1. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Print 3 simplex copies of TP 6 Red Solid Fill
Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). Inspect the final test page only for metering blade chatter,
refer to Figure 1. Chatter is present.
Y
N
Rear drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 10
Perform dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Check the drum operating temperature.
The drum temperature is good.
Y
N
Go to 94-536-00, 94-538-00, 94-540-00, 94-542-00, 94-544-00, 94-546-00, 94-63200, 94-633-00 Drum Heat Error RAP.
The machine is operating within specification. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Re-install the original cleaning unit. The problem is not in the cleaning unit. Re-define the
image quality defect, refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
A
February 2013
3-63
Image Quality
IQ 17
Feed direction
Metering blade chatter
Jagged streaks
Figure 1 Cross-process gloss defects
Image Quality
IQ 17
February 2013
3-64
A
IQ 18 Irregular Duplex Gloss Differences RAP

Use this RAP when the output displays gloss variations visible on large areas of high ink coverage.
Irregular gloss defects can be in any direction, Figure 1.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Check the media type. Smoother media will provide a more uniform gloss finish.
Check that the gloss defect is found only on the second printed side of a duplex print and
has an irregular shape.
If the gloss defect is present on simplex prints and runs in either the process or cross process direction, go to:
IQ 16 Scratches or Gloss Marks in the Process Direction RAP
IQ 17 Gloss Marks in the Cross-Process Direction RAP
IQ 19 Image Ghosting RAP
Procedure
NOTE: When printing TP 5 from dC959, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded
paper.
Print four duplex copies of TP 5 Black Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). Evaluate the final
prints for irregular gloss defects.
Figure 1 Irregular gloss print defect
NOTE: It is normal for the second printed side (page 1) to be glossier than the first printed side
(page 2).
Check that page 1 shows uniform gloss across the page and that no gloss defects are visible.
Page 1 is good.
Y
N
Run dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser Check the registration/preheat assembly temperature. Select RaLPH in the component list. The registration/preheat temperature is
good.
Y
N
Check the registration/preheat air pump, refer to 88-508-00 Registration/Preheat Air
Pump Incorrect Current RAP. The registration/preheat air pump is good.
Y
N
Install a new registration/preheat air pump, PL 88.10 Item 5.
The printer is operating within specifications. Refer to IQ 19 Image Ghosting RAP for
additional fixes.
A
February 2013
3-65
Image Quality
IQ 18
IQ 19 Image Ghosting RAP

Use this RAP to fix image ghosting problems. Two types of ghosting are possible, simplex and
duplex. Examples of each type are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
NOTE: Blocking, where ink from one print is deposited on the back of another print, can occur
when prints stack in the output tray. The combination of pressure from the weight of the media
and ambient heat may cause partial transfer of the image to adjacent prints.
B
Y
N
Y
N
Initial Actions
WARNING
Duplex ghosting may be caused by oil from the first side of the print transferring to the
second side via the transfix roller. Some amount of transfix roller ghosting is normal. This
type of ghosting is most pronounced on the first 2-sided print. Ghosting should fade on
subsequent prints. When duplex ghosting is evident run multiple 2-sided prints to attempt
to clear the defect and inform the customer.
Attempt to repeat the customer's job using their print sequence and media.
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Print TP 13, Text Test Pages, followed by
four prints of TP 5 Black Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2 to TP 10). Evaluate the third and
fourth prints for evidence of text in the black solid fills, visible as a gloss difference. The
prints are good
Y
N
Re-install the original cleaning unit. The problem is not in the cleaning unit. Redefine the image quality defect, refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
The defect is duplex ghosting which is inherent to the product. To reduce the defect,
inform the customer to:
Procedure
NOTE: Before printing TP 5 or TP 20, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded long
Print TP 13, Text Test Pages, followed by four prints of TP 5 Black Solid Fill Test Pages (TP 2
to TP 10). Evaluate the third and fourth prints for evidence of text in the black solid fills, visible
as a gloss difference. The prints are good.
Y
N
The defect is simplex ghosting. Enter dC959 and run the Cleaning Unit Self Test. The
self test is successful.
Y
N
Perform dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser and run the slow speed exerciser. The
speed exerciser completes successfully.
Y
N
Go to 94-520-00 Cleaning Unit Drive Error RAP.
Reprint the job.
Print multiple, 2-sided sheets with heavy ink coverage (solid fill), then reprint the job.
If possible, use different media.
Print the jobs that exhibit this defect in simplex only.
The defect is duplex ghosting which is inherent to the product. To reduce the defect, inform the
customer to:
Reprint the job.
Print multiple, 2-sided sheets with heavy ink coverage (solid fill), then reprint the job.
If possible, use different media.
Print the jobs that exhibit this defect in simplex only.
slow
Print TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing Test Pages. Evaluate the metering
blade timing test page only. The test pages are good.
Y
N
Go to IQ 7 Metering Blade Timing RAP.
Image Quality
IQ 19
February 2013
3-66
Figure 1 Example of simplex ghosting
Figure 2 Duplex transfix roller ghosting
February 2013
3-67
Image Quality
IQ 19
IQ 20 Wavy or Stringy Lines RAP

Use this RAP to fix images that have wavy or stringy lines of ink, or have a blistered appearance.
Obstruction of the carriage drive causes lines of ink to be deposited on the drum, Figure
1. When this ink gets transfixed onto the media, it will have an embossed texture and
appears wavy. This defect is usually found on individual carriages.
Excessive oil on the drum can result in a similar artifact with ink having a raised or blistered appearance where the ink can be rubbed off. Refer to IQ 26.
A
Perform dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser and run the slow speed exerciser. The slow speed
Y
N
Go to 94-522-00 Cleaning Unit Motor Stall RAP.
NOTE: Another defect (not shown on the illustration) may occur on a single printhead where a
ribbon cable has become unseated. This defect can look like a muddy strip with the stringy
lines along one or both edges of the defect.
Open the front door and remove the inner cover. Enter dC959, Cleaning Unit Exerciser, and
run the slow speed exerciser. While this is running ensure the cleaning unit metering blade and
roller are making contact with the drum. The metering blade and roller are making contact
with the drum.
Y
N
Check the cleaning unit cams mechanism PL 94.10 Item 9, PL 94.10 Item 13 and the
cleaning unit drive gear and motor PL 94.10 Item 23, PL 94.10 Item 24. Install new parts
as necessary.
CAUTION
If carriage motion is obstructed to the point of producing stringy lines of ink, it is likely strings of
ink are scattered throughout the machines interior. Check the area surrounding the drum paying particular attention to the abatement plenum, IOD sensor, transfix roller, and exit module.
Printhead jetting may also be affected.
Procedure
WARNING
The defect is across the entire width (inboard to outboard) of the image.
Y
N
Check that the printhead ribbon cables are correctly seated. The ribbon
seated correctly.
Y
N
Reseat the ribbon cables.
cables
are
Go to IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP. Perform the X-Axis Checkout.

Remove the cleaning unit. Inspect the cleaning unit metering blade for pieces of paper.
Y
N
Remove the paper pieces from the cleaning unit metering blade.
Go to dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. Print TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing
Test Pages. Evaluate the metering blade timing test page only. If the metering blade engages
and disengages within the tolerance zones, the cleaning unit and cleaning unit drive train are
working correctly. The metering blade engages and disengages inside of the tolerance
zones.
Y
N
Figure 1 Wavy or stringy lines defect
A
Image Quality
IQ 20
February 2013
3-68
IQ 21 Oil on Output RAP

Chronic spots or streaks
of oil. May indicate a fault
with the cleaning unit.
Use this RAP when prints are contaminated with cleaning unit oil.
Oil can transfer to prints in the form of spots, streaks, or cross-process lines from the metering
blade or drum stripper blade. The oily stain may appear clear or have traces of colour when
held up to light. Refer to Figure 1.
Recycled, cotton, carbonless, parchment, linen or rough media are prone to poor ink transfer,
causing gel to build up in the cleaning unit which may be transferred to the print.
Oil stains may appear at the leading corners following the printing of several sheets where the
leading edge is narrower than the following job, for example short edge feed A4 or 8.5 x 11
inch followed by long edge feed A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch. This is expected behavior and will stop
after a few prints.
Oil spots may appear after clearing paper jams. The oil spots should stop after several prints.
This is expected behavior and will stop after a few prints.
Oil stains at corners after switching from

short edge feed to long edge feed.
Should stop after several prints.
Oil stain due to gel build up in the cleaning

unit. Indicates that a new cleaning unit should
be installed.
Figure 1 Examples of oil contamination
February 2013
3-69
Image Quality
IQ 21
Initial Actions
C
Y
Check that the media is free of defects. Media defects can resemble oil spots.
Press the Machine Status button on the keypad, select the Fault tab on the UI, then Current Messages. If the message Cleaning unit life extended. Image quality may be
impacted is displayed, install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Inspect the area
around the drum for splattered oil. Clean as necessary, GP 27.
N
Re-install the original cleaning unit. Go to IQ 7 Metering Blade Timing
RAP.
Re-install the original cleaning unit. Perform the following:
Procedure
1.
Inspect the area around the drum for splattered oil. Clean as necessary,
GP 27.
2.
Check the drum grounding, GP 7 System Grounding Verification.
The drum grounding is good.

Y
N
Go to GP 7 System Grounding Verification and correct the drum grounding.
WARNING
WARNING
Install a new cleaning unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Print TP 20 oil bar chase and metering
blade timing test pages. Evaluate the oil bar chase page only. The test page is
good.
Y
N
Re-install the original cleaning unit. Go to IQ 7 Metering Blade Timing RAP.
WARNING
WARNING
Check the machine for oil spillage and clean as necessary GP 27. Machine oil spillage indicates that the cleaning unit has failed.
NOTE: A thin film of oil on the chassis pan below the cleaning unit is normal.

Oil spillage is indicated.
Y
N
Remove the cleaning unit PL 94.10 Item 21. Remove any pieces of paper from the metering blade and roller area. Do not wipe the metering blade. Ink pixel build up on the metering blade is normal. Print TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing test pages.
Evaluate the oil bar chase page only.
NOTE: A thin line of oil approximately 35 mm below the horizontal line and no more than
1 mm wide is acceptable.
The test page is good.
Y
N
The oil bar chase page has an oil spot similar to Figure 2.
Y
N
If the oil spots are randomly scattered on most prints, install a new cleaning
unit, PL 94.10 Item 21. Print TP 20 oil bar chase and metering blade timing test
pages. Evaluate the oil bar chase page only. The random oil spots are still
present.
Y
N
Inspect the area around the drum for splattered oil. Clean as necessary,
GP 27.
Evaluate the metering blade timing test page. The test page is good.
A
Image Quality
IQ 21
February 2013
3-70
IQ 22 Repeating Spot Deletions RAP

Use this RAP when the output displays spot deletions, Figure 1.
Initial Actions
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
render the printhead inoperative.
Check the media path for dust or debris accumulations. Clean as necessary, refer to GP
27 Cleaning Procedure.
Inform the customer that using the best quality, smoothest media available will reduce the
likelihood of encountering spot deletions.
NOTE: Media containing cotton, linen or parchments can exhibit deletions due to surface texture. Carbonless media, especially in large quantities, can also exhibit deletions. Areas of
missing ink on envelopes that outline the seams and flaps is normal.
Figure 2 Oil spot
Figure 1 Drum defect
February 2013
3-71
Image Quality
IQ 21, IQ 22
Procedure
IQ 23 Residual Ink From Previous Print RAP
Check the stripper gate transport rollers J and L, PL 10.10 for dirt or debris. The rollers are
clean.
Y
N
Clean the rollers, GP 27 or install new components as necessary:
Use this RAP when the output has residual ink from a previous image. Refer to Figure 1 and
Figure 2.
Roller drive J, PL 10.10 Item 1
Roller drive L, PL 10.10 Item 2
Print TP 2 to TP 10 Solid Fill Test Pages. Inspect all pages for scratches or marks caused by
the drum or the transfix roller, refer to Table 1.
Table 1 Repeating rotational defects
Component
Defect Spacing
Transfix
Roller
A transfix roller defect appears approximately every 9 inches in the process

direction and in the same location in the cross-process direction.
Drum
The drum's circumferential home position varies from print to print, so defect
spacing changes in the process direction. The drum defect remains in the
same location in the cross-process direction, Figure 1.
Test pages are good.

Y
N
Inspect the drum and transfix roller for ink, media debris, or cleaning unit residue. The
drum and transfix roller are clean.
Y
N
Clean the drum and transfix roller, refer to GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.
Inspect the drum and transfix roller for damage. Install new components as necessary:
Drum, PL 94.20 Item 1
Transfix roller, PL 10.20 Item 1
Image Quality
IQ 22, IQ 23
NOTE: Image transfer may also occur between media in the output tray. This effect, known as
blocking, may have a similar appearance to residual images from previous prints. Refer to IQ
30 Blocking RAP.
Initial Actions
The blocking defect may occur when booklet making with paper above 120 gsm. The ink
may transfer from one sheet to the other sheet it is being folded against. If this occurs
then use paper of 120 gsm or below.
Procedure
WARNING
Print the solid colour test pages (TP 2 to TP 10). Inspect the lead and trail edge of the test
test
pages for ink that is not fully transfixed, Figure 1 and for image skew, Figure 2. The
pages are good.
Y
N
Perform dC625 Registration/preheat Calibration. The calibration completes without
error.
Y
N
Go to the 89-550-00, 89-551-00 Media Registration Error RAP.
Go to the IQ 6 Missing Ink or Grainy Output RAP.
February 2013
3-72
Figure 2 Residual ink due to excessive skew
Figure 1 Residual ink due to incomplete transfix
February 2013
3-73
Image Quality
IQ 23
IQ 24 Wrinkling RAP
Use this RAP when the output is wrinkled. Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
NOTE: Some wrinkling of envelope flaps is normal.
Figure 2 Wrinkles related to uneven ink coverage
Figure 1 Wrinkles, reduced margins or image skew
Image Quality
IQ 24
February 2013
3-74
Procedure
WARNING
Test the customers print job on the newly opened media.
If the wrinkle defect is on a print job. Enter the Print Setup options / Properties /
Advanced / Image Options and select Paper Compensation.
There is a slight increase in drop out and a small decrease in productivity when this
option is used. Only use when the wrinkle defect is present.
WARNING
WARNING
If the wrinkle defect is on a copy job. Select Image Quality and then Paper Compensation tab on the user interface.
There is a slight increase in drop out and a small decrease in productivity when this
option is used. Only use when the wrinkle defect is present.
WARNING
C
If the defect persists, inform the customer to use heavier weight media, a different
orientation or increase image margins.
NOTE: Wrinkling can be aggravated by extreme temperature and humidity environments. To
reduce wrinkling, advise the customer to use a heavier weight media, change the feed orientation from LEF to SEF or increase the size of the image margins.
Go to IQ 10 Incorrect Margin, Misregistration or Skew RAP.
Print TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages. Check the prints for skew, refer to IQS 1 Registration and
Skew. The prints are skewed.
Y
N
Using a fresh ream of paper, print 4, duplex TP 2 cyan solid fill test pages (TP 2 to TP
10). The prints are good.
Y
N
Perform dC625 Registration/preheat Calibration. Print 4, duplex Cyan Solid Fill test
pages (TP 2 to TP 10). The prints are good.
Y
N
Perform dC962 Transfix Load Test. The transfix loading is within specification.
Y
N
Perform dC978 Transfix Calibration Values. Check the stored transfix calibration values against those on the machine frame. If the stored values
are different, correct the transfix values in NVM. If the values are the
same, go to 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP.
Open the stripper gate, GP 31. Check the drum stripper blade for damage,
debris or accumulation of ink. If necessary, install a new stripper blade, PL
10.12 Item 3. Print 4, duplex Cyan Solid Fill test pages (TP 2 to TP 10) The
prints are good.
Y
N
Enter dC330 code 82-007, nip C release solenoid, PL 82.15 Item 4 and
82-008, nip D release solenoid, PL 70.30 Item 13. The solenoids energise.
Y
N
Go to the 82-507-00, 82-508-00 Nip C and Nip D Release Solenoid
Over Current RAP.
If the defect persists, inform the customer to use heavier weight media, a
different orientation or increase image margins.
A
February 2013
3-75
Image Quality
IQ 24
IQ 25 Random Spots RAP
Initial Actions
WARNING
Use this RAP when the output has random spots. Refer to Figure 1.
Random spots are usually ink debris from the stripper blade, abatement plenum or printheads.
Spots can appear on the image if the cleaning unit fails to thoroughly clean the drum. Large
spots of primary colours can be caused by a faulty printhead.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Press the Machine Status button on the keypad, select the Fault tab on the UI, then Current Messages. If the message Cleaning unit life extended. Image quality may be
Check the media. If low grade or recycled media is found, suggest using a better grade of
media. Defects in the media may appear as spots of ink, Figure 2.
Procedure
Print TP 14 Drum Stripper Blade Test Print. The stripper blade releases between the 35
mm and the 50 mm mark.
Y
N
Install a new stripper blade solenoid, PL 10.10 Item 3.
Perform dC969 Clean Ink Smears. Print three copies of TP 4 Yellow Solid Fill Test pages
(TP 2 to TP 10). The test pages are good.
Y
N
Figure 1 Random spots from incomplete drum cleaning
Perform the self test routine in dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. The cleaning unit self test is
successful.
Y
N
Remove the cleaning unit PL 94.10 Item 21. Check the metering blade and roller area for
paper debris. The metering blade and roller area are free of paper debris.
Y
N
Remove the paper debris from the metering blade and roller area. Do not wipe the metering blade.
A
Image Quality
IQ 25
February 2013
3-76
A
NOTE: Ink pixel build up on the metering blade is normal and should not be cleaned off
Perform the slow speed exerciser routine in dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. The test is successful.
Y
N
Go to the 94-520-00 Cleaning Unit Drive Error RAP.
Open the front door and remove the inner cover. Enter dC959 and run the slow speed exerciser. While this is running, check that the cleaning unit blade and roller are making contact
with the drum. The cleaning unit blade and roller are making contact with the drum.
Y
N
Check the front cam, PL 94.10 Item 9, rear cam, PL 94.10 Item 13, drive gear, PL 94.10
Item 23 and the cleaning unit motor, PL 94.10 Item 24
Print TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing Test Pages. Evaluate the metering blade
timing page only. The metering blade test page is good.
Y
N
Go to the IQ 7 Metering Blade Timing RAP.
Check the area surrounding the drum, transfix assembly, and exit module for ink residue or
media debris. The areas are clean.
Y
N
Clean the areas surrounding the drum, transfix assembly, and exit module, refer to GP 27
Cleaning Procedure. Print TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages. The prints are
good.
Y
N
Examine the test pages. The spots are a primary colour, raised, round or
oblong shaped, Figure 2.
Y
N
Perform dC969 Clean Ink Smears. Repeat cleaning until chase sheets are
clean.
Figure 2 Ink spots
The machine has a jetting fault. Go to the IQ 9 Deletions RAP.

Go to the IQ 6 Missing Ink or Grainy Output RAP.
February 2013
3-77
Image Quality
IQ 25
IQ 26 Poor Ink Adhesion RAP
Initial Actions
WARNING
Use this RAP when the ink does not adhere to the media. Refer to Figure 1.
Poor ink adhesion can be caused by overly glossy media coatings, improper oil application, or
errors in drum or preheat temperature regulation.
NOTE: A similar defect, known as x-axis motion error, may be caused by obstruction of the
carriage drive which causes lines of ink to be deposited on the drum. When this is transfixed it
has an embossed texture and appears wavy. Typically x-axis motion error affects individual
carriages. Refer to IQ 20 Wavy or Stringy Lines RAP.
Some customer actions will cause ink to be removed from the image such as scratch or abrading the surface of the image or applying / removing tape or sticky notes. This is expected
behavior. No further service actions can correct this behavior.
If the customer is using glossy or heavyweight media, ensure the correct media type is
selected in the user interface (UI).
Ensure the customer is using supported media, refer to GP 20 Paper and Media Size
Specifications.
Procedure
WARNING
NOTE: When printing TP 5 from dC959, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded
paper.
Check the media type and finish, refer to GP 20. If the media appears glossy, load new media.
Print TP 5 Solid Black Fill test page (TP 2 to TP 10). The image on the test page is good
with no missing ink.
Y
N
Y
N
Front drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 9
Rear drum thermistor, PL 94.20 Item 10
Y
N
Perform dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser. Check the preheat temperature. The preheat temperature is good.
Y
N
Figure 1 Poor ink adhesion
Enter dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser. Run the cleaning unit self test. The cleaning unit
self test completes successfully.
A
Image Quality
IQ 26
February 2013
3-78
A
Y
IQ 27 Unacceptable Received Fax Image Quality RAP
N
Use this RAP to identify the causes of poor reception.
Initial Actions

Y
N
Clean the metering blade of pieces of paper.
WARNING
Enter dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser and run the slow speed exerciser. The slow speed
Y
N
and run the slow speed exerciser. While this is running check if the cleaning unit metering
Y
N
Check the cleaning unit cams mechanism PL 94.10 Item 9, PL 94.10 Item 13 and
the cleaning unit drive gear and motor PL 94.10 Item 23, PL 94.10 Item 24. Install
new parts as necessary.
Enter dC978 Transfix Calibration Values. Check the transfix calibration values against
those on the drum frame. The calibration values match.
Y
N
Correct the transfix calibration values in NVM, dC131.
Enter dC962 to test the transfix assembly. The transfix assembly operates normally.
Y
N
Transfix roller, PL 10.20 Item 1.
Flexure encoder, PL 10.20 Item 5.
Verify the following:
This problem occurs only when receiving transmissions.
This problem occurs on all receiving transmissions.
Check that the Fax country setting, NVM location 200-043, is correct. Refer to Fax Document.
Procedure
The condition of the original transmission document is good.
Y
N
Generate a new document from the original.
If possible, establish voice contact using the same telecommunication link as used to receive
the document. The line is free of interference sounds and the normal voice can be heard
clearly.
Y
N
Go 20G Fax Module Checkout.
Receive the document at a slower receive speed. Set the NVM location 200-089 Line 1 = 11
and location 200-090 Line 2 = 11. Refer to Fax Document. The image quality is acceptable.
Y
N
The telecommunication links and harnesses are connected properly and there is
no visible damage.
Y
N
Correct the connections. If necessary install a new line cable and connectors.
The machine is operating within specification. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.

Verify the operation of the machine and the communication link by transmitting between
machines over a known good link. All received documents have an acceptable image
quality.
Y
N
Install a new Fax module, PL 20.05 Item 1.
Go 20G Fax Module Checkout.
Inform the remote user of the required changes to the settings.
February 2013
3-79
Image Quality
IQ 26, IQ 27
IQ 28 Show Through on Copies RAP
IQ 29 DADH, Document Glass and Scanner RAP
Use this RAP when copies have show through.
Use this RAP to identify defects caused by the DADH, document glass or scanner.
Show through can be caused by the exposure lamp shining through low weight paper picking
up both sides of a duplex master. This can happen on duplex masters of 60 gsm or less.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
CVT and Document Glass Checkout
DADH Checkout
Scanner Checkout
CVT and Document Glass Checkout
Ensure the master is scanned on the document glass with the DADH in the down position.
1.
Clean the top surface of the CVT glass and the document glass. Perform ADJ 62.1 Optics
Cleaning Procedure.
2.
Check the position of the document pad, refer to ADJ 5.6 DADH Document Pad.
3.
Check that the white AGC strips on the document glass and the CVT glass are at the front
and underside of the glass.
4.
The AGC portion of the CVT glass should be clean and at the front bottom of the CVT
glass, PL 62.10 Item 3. If it is missing, dirty or the glass is not properly installed then this
will cause faint, washed out, light copies from the DADH only.
5.
dC609 Document Glass Registration.
DADH Checkout
1.
Clean the underside of the DADH area around the CVT roll, PL 5.25.
2.
Clean the top surface of the CVT glass and the document glass. Perform ADJ 62.1 Optics
Cleaning Procedure.
3.
If the documents are skewed. Check that the document input guides are correctly
adjusted.
4.
Check that the DADH is seated correctly, perform ADJ 5.2 DADH Height Adjustment.
5.
Make copies from the DADH. If the copies have a background problem, perform the following:
6.
a.
Check the DADH height, Refer to ADJ 5.2 DADH Height Adjustment.
b.
Check the mylar guide strip for damage, PL 5.30 Item 12. If necessary install a new
mylar guide strip, PL 31.11 Item 14.
c.
dC608 Document Feeder Registration.
d.
Copying thick documents can leave the DADH raised above the document glass.
Raise and lower the DADH five times. If the DADH is still raised, install new counterbalances, PL 5.10 Item 2 and PL 5.10 Item 4.
Make copies from the DADH. If the copies are stretched or smudged, perform the following:
a.
Image Quality
IQ 28, IQ 29
February 2013
3-80
Lower the height of the DADH by half a turn of the setting screws, refer to ADJ 5.2
DADH Height Adjustment. Make copies from the DADH after each adjustment. If the
fault persists, re-adjust the height of the DADH as necessary.
b.
If the fault persists after the height of the DADH has been adjusted, install a new
lower baffle assembly, PL 5.30 Item 14. Re-adjust the height of the DADH to the
default setting, refer to ADJ 5.2 DADH Height Adjustment.
Scanner Checkout
Use this RAP when the output has ink transfer between images in the output tray stack.
If the copy of the internal test page is fragmented and displaced, check the following:
NOTE: A residual image may also occur when ink has been retained on the drum. Ink from an
earlier print then appears on the next sheet. Residual images may have a similar appearance
to blocking. Refer to IQ 23 Residual Ink From Previous Print RAP.
a.
Check the harness connections from the full width array to the single board controller
b.
Procedure
Advise the customer that this may be resolved by the use of lighter weight media. Alternatively
emptying the output tray more frequently may help. No other service actions will correct this
issue.

1.
IQ 30 Blocking RAP
Check the harness connections from the Scanner PWB to the single board controller PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8 and PL 3.11 Item 13.
c.
If fragmented and displaced images appear in a regular pattern across process

direction, remove and re-seat all EPC memory PWBs, PL 3.11 Item 21.
d.
If necessary, go to the 62-310-00 Scanner to Single Board Controller Communication Fail Entry RAP.
2.
Raise the DADH. Make a copy from the document glass. If the exposure lamp does not
illuminate or partially illuminates, go to the 62-450-00 to 62-472-00 Calibration Failure
RAP.
3.
February 2013
3-81
Image Quality
IQ 29, IQ 30
Image Quality
IQ 29, IQ 30
February 2013
3-82
TP 1 Initial Test Print Pages

These A4 (8.5 x 11) pages are a set of diagnostic test prints used to initially diagnose image
quality issues in IQ 1. TP 1 prints the five test pages shown in Figure 1.
Cyan/magenta test page

Text print test page
Initial test print pages are printed from dC612.

NOTE: All test prints should be printed on A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper and long edge feed.
Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched paper. Failure to do this will
result in an error message being printed instead of the test page.
NOTE: Always load A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch media as appropriate to your market region in Tray 4
before printing internal test prints.
NOTE: When the paper selected for the test print pages is correct, the test pages will be
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name, the LEF status and
that double chevrons will be printed if the paper used is A4. The chevrons indicate the stitch
position between print heads.
Purpose
These test pages are printed as part of an evaluation of image quality performance in IQ 1.
Examine each print for the defect that follow:
The colour bands print is useful for identifying:
Jetting defects, refer to IQ 5, IQ 20 and IQ 25.
Stitching defects, refer to IQ 5, IQ 9 and IQ 13.
Uniformity defects, refer to IQ 5, IQ 13 and IQ 14.
The horizontal lines print is useful for identifying:
Y-dot position defects, refer to IQ 5.
Y-stitch defects, refer to IQ 5.
Print head alignment defects, refer to IQ 5, IQ 9, IQ 12, IQ 13 and IQ 14.
The text print is useful for identifying:
Text defects, refer to IQ 5.
Resolution defects, refer to IQ 5.
The cyan/magenta print is useful for identifying:
Horizontal lines test page
Uniformity defects, refer to IQ 14.

Colour bands test page
Figure 1 Image quality analysis test pages
February 2013
3-83
Image Quality
TP 1
TP 2 to TP 10 Solid Fill Test Pages
TP 2 Cyan solid fill
Solid fills are used to purge the jets of contamination or to correct cross-colour contaminated
jets. Solid fills are also used to examine media damage, cleaning unit function, skew, and margins.
TP 3 Magenta solid fill

Solid fill test pages are printed from dC612. TP5 black solid fill can also be printed from dC959.
Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched paper.
TP 4 Yellow solid fill

TP 5 Black
solid fill
NOTE: When printing TP 5 from dC959, ensure that the paper is loaded LEF into tray 4.
Purpose
Figure 1. These single-sided prints provide solid-fills in all eight colours:.
Select TP 2 to print two cyan solid fills
Select TP 3 to print two magenta solid fills
Select TP 4 to print two yellow solid fills
Select TP 5 to print two black solid fills
Select TP 6 to print two red solid fills
Select TP 7 to print two green solid fills
Select TP 8 to print two blue solid fills
Select TP 9 to print two white solid fills
Select TP 10 to print a single set of all eight solid fills (cyan, magenta, yellow, black, red,
green, blue and white).
To solve image quality problems associated with solid fills, refer to IQ 5, IQ 9, IQ 10 and IQ 24.
TP 6 Red solid fill
TP 7 Green solid fill
TP 8 Blue solid fill
TP 9 White solid fill

Figure 1 Solid fill pages
Image Quality
TP 2 to TP 10
February 2013
3-84
TP 11 Colour Bands and Dithers Test Pages

These six A4 (8.5 x 11 inch) pages are a set of 6 diagnostic test prints used to diagnose image
quality issues related to colour uniformity. Figure 1 shows the test pages printed.
Colour bands and dithers test pages are printed from dC612.
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name, LEF status and
Purpose
These pages are used to evaluate print quality problems caused by drifting or mis-adjusted
print heads.
To solve image quality problems associated with colour uniformity, refer to IQ 13.
Figure 1 colour bands and dithers test pages
February 2013
3-85
Image Quality
TP 11
TP 12 Chase Page
Chase pages are picked from the selected tray and fed through the media path. No image is
jetted onto the drum.
Chase pages are printed from dC612.
Purpose
Chase pages are used to clear the drum of any residual image or possible contamination.
Chase pages are also useful for examining jam conditions and media damage. Use chase
pages to clear the media path, clean light contamination from the registration/preheat assembly, drum, or transfix roller.
Image Quality
TP 12
February 2013
3-86
TP 13 Text Test Pages

Figure 1 shows the three text test pages used to represent black, text-only printed documents.
Text test pages are printed from dC612.
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name, LEF status and
Purpose
Text test pages are used to diagnose text quality defects. There are no known imaging problems that affect only text and allow all other printed objects, such as fills, dithers, lines, and pictures to be defect-free. Text quality is particularly sensitive to incorrectly placed dots; thus it is
most dependent on proper print head operation, mechanical alignment, and motion. The third
page of landscape text repeats the same characters over and over again across the page to
aid in detecting spatial variations in dot placement. Look for relative differences between the
quality of the characters across the print.
To solve image quality problems associated with text, refer to IQ 5 and IQ 19.
Figure 1 Text test pages
February 2013
3-87
Image Quality
TP 13
TP 14 Drum Stripper Blade Test Page

This page is a diagnostic test print used to diagnose errors related to the drum stripper blade
and stripper drive. The drum stripper blade test page records stripper blade activity during two
typical drum stripper activation sequences. In addition to blade timing, anomalies in the blade
such as warping, bounce, or edge damage may be visible in the stripped area of the image.
The drum stripper blade test page is printed from dC612.
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name and the LEF status.
The test page is designed to print in a particular resolution in order for the scale to be representative of millimeters. First, the image is created on the drum. The drum stripper blade is activated to simulate the stripping of one sheet of media. The area where the stripper blade
contacts the drum is visible on the print as the wiped off region. Figure 1 is an example of a
normal drum stripper blade activation sequence. The test print is followed by two chase sheets
to clean the drum.
Purpose
To record drum stripper blade action. Refer to Figure 1 showing test page details. Test page
features include a background, a metric scale graduated in millimeters along each edge, a
Start line that corresponds to the point where the stripper drive solenoid is commanded to
actuate, and a MLE line that corresponds to the point on the drum where the media leading
edge would fall. During normal operation, the drum stripper blade makes contact in the 10 to
20 mm window (left side scale). The drum stripper blade releases from the drum in the 35 to 50
mm window (left side scale).
To solve image quality associated with the drum stripper blade, refer to IQ 8 Cross Process Ink
Artifacts (Smudge) RAP.
Figure 1 Drum stripper blade test page
Image Quality
TP 14
February 2013
3-88
TP 15 Media Path Test Pages

Figure 2 shows the media path test page. Print the media path test page using the same size
media as the affected print. Reconstruct the media path by aligning the test pages vertically.
Jam zone 1a at the top to 4b at the bottom. Compare markings on the affected print to the features on the test print to determine the jam zone, nip, or ribs affecting the output. The test
image is cropped according to the media size selected for printing. To see the complete image,
use A3 (11 x 17 inch) media.
Media path test pages are printed from dC612.
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name and the LEF status.
Purpose
The media path test page is used to locate the source of scratches, marks, or gloss differences
on the output due to transport components. The page is organized according to the media path
layout shown in Figure 1. Each of the jam areas (1a to 4a) is segregated on the test print with a
horizontal line. Rollers for each nip are identified by letter, and rib locations are indicated by
rectangles or hash marks.
For example, jam zone 1a, located at the top of sheet 1, includes nips H and F and ribs to
guide media up the vertical transport. The roller contact locations, both drive and idler, are
shown along with contact points for the ribs.
To solve image quality associated with scratches, marks, or gloss differences, refer to IQ 16.
Figure 1 Media path jam zone and nip layout
February 2013
3-89
Image Quality
TP 15
Figure 2 Media path test pages
Image Quality
TP 15
February 2013
3-90
TP 16 Stitch Identification Test Pages

The print heads work together to stitch the image together. The X-stitch and Y-stitch pages
print when the stitch identification selection is made from dC612.
Stitch identification test pages are printed from dC612.
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name, the LEF status and
Purpose
The X-stitch and Y-stitch pages indicate the accuracy of print head alignment. Refer to Figure
1.
NOTE: The X-Stitch print is made up of an interference pattern. The degree of an x-stitch issue
is highly exaggerated on this print. The actual x-stitch error will appear less pronounced on a
customer image. If in doubt about the severity of an x-stitch issue print a customer image to
determine if it is visible.
To solve image quality problems associated with stitch errors, refer to IQ 5, IQ 9 and IQ 13.
Figure 1 Stitch identification test pages
February 2013
3-91
Image Quality
TP 16
TP 17 Service Usage Profile

This series of A4 (8.5 x 11 inch) prints list the information about the machine usage and printer
status, Figure 1.
Purpose
The service usage profile tracks printer activity, consumable usage and printer history. This
data is stored in NVRAM. Service usage profile data includes error logs that retain detail on the
type, date, location and frequency of engine and jam errors. While the service usage profile
includes data on all aspects of the printer, this section focuses on accessing these error logs to
review printer history.
The service usage profile list can be printed from dC612.
Figure 1 Service usage profile
Image Quality
TP 17
February 2013
3-92
TP 18 TRC Generation Test Pages

These four A4 (8.5 x 11 inch) pages have red, green, blue, or black step dithers.
TRC generation test pages are printed from dC972 option 4.
NOTE: Before printing this test page, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded LEF
into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched paper.
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming that double chevrons will be printed if
the paper used is A4. The chevrons indicate the stitch position between print heads.
Purpose
Figure 1. The TRC Generation Test Pages are a test print suite used to diagnose image quality
issues related to colour uniformity in dithers. This page is part of the print head uniformity
adjustment sequence used to correct print quality problems related to colour uniformity and dot
position.
To solve image quality problems related to colour uniformity in dithers, refer to IQ 13 and IQ 14.
Figure 1 TRC generation dithers
February 2013
3-93
Image Quality
TP 18
TP 19 Y-Dot Position Correction Test Page

This A4 (8.5 x 11 inch) print consists of 1 and 5 pixel thick lines in the cross process direction.
The colours of the lines are blue, green, red, black, yellow, magenta, and cyan.
The Y-dot position correction test page is printed from dC972 option 5.
NOTE: Before printing this test page, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded LEF
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name. Double chevrons
will be printed if the paper used is A4. The chevrons indicate the stitch position between print
heads.
Purpose
Figure 1. The Y-Dot Position Correction test page is a diagnostic test print used by service to
diagnose image quality issues related to dot position errors in the process direction. This page
is part of the print head uniformity adjustment sequence used to correct print quality problems
related to colour uniformity and dot position.
To solve image quality problems associated with dot position in the process direction, refer to
IQ 5.
Figure 1 Y-dot position pages
Image Quality
TP 19
February 2013
3-94
TP 20 Oil Bar Chase and Metering Blade Timing Test Pages

These test pages are used to check the operation of the cleaning unit.
The oil bar chase and metering blade timing test pages are printed from dC959 cleaning unit
exerciser. Both pages are printed when the oil bar chase test page is selected.
NOTE: Before printing this test page, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded long
printed with annotations on the bottom edge of the visible image confirming the test print name.
Purpose
The oil bar chase test page is used to check that the metering blade leaves no more than a thin
bar of oil on the drum when disengaging. The metering blade timing test page is used to
ensure that the metering blade engages and disengages with the drum at the correct time.
1.
Oil bar chase, A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch image, Figure 1. A good oil bar chase page will have no
oil contamination.
NOTE: A thin line of oil approximately 35 mm below the horizontal line and no more than
1 mm wide is acceptable.
Cleaning unit problems that may be indicated by this test page are described in IQ 21 Oil
on Output RAP.
Figure 1 Oil bar chase page

2.
Metering blade timing test, A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch image, Figure 2. Cleaning unit problems
that may be indicated by this test page are described in IQ 7.
February 2013
3-95
Image Quality
TP 20
NOTE: The metering blade may not completely remove all pixels from the drum in the
wiped area, this is normal behavior.
Blade engage
nominal target line
Blade disengage
nominal target line
Tolerance zones are

marked by dashed lines
on either side of the
nominal target line
Tolerance zones are

marked by dashed lines
on either side of the
nominal target line
Figure 2 Metering blade timing test page
Image Quality
TP 20
February 2013
3-96
TP 21 Jet Test Pages

These A4 (8.5 x 11 inch) pages are a set of diagnostic test prints used to check print head jet
status. There are service jet test pages and customer jet test pages.
The service jet test pages, shown in Figure 1, consists of eight test pattern pages. The first 4
pages show the conditions of print heads 1 and 2. The second 4 pages show the condition of
print heads 3 and 4. After completing the jet test pages, a page containing a print quality management status check is produced, Figure 2. This table indicates the status of the each routine,
refer to 91-636-00 IOD in Degraded Mode RAP for the corrective actions.
The condition of each jet is shown in a bar of ink with the jet number directly beneath.
The machine is able to detect the condition of jets in some conditions. Detected defective
jets are indicated by a pointer beneath the number. The jet number and pointer for defective jets are colour coded according to the known condition of the jet.
The total number of missing, chronic and masked jets per print head is shown to the side
of the jet indicators.
JSC[On,On]: indicates jet substitution is enabled (On) for both customer and machine settings. The machine may override the customer setting temporarily if the Quick Light Lines
fix has been selected from the Tools/Fix Image Quality menu. After the next purge or
machine reboot, the settings revert to customer settings. When jet sub is enabled, print
speed slows down only when a jet is missing and is required for the current print.
PC[On,On]: means the purge configuration is set to purge at night/when idle for both customer setting and machine setting. Same override rule applies. The purge here is jet fix
purge that will only occur if the machine needs to auto recover an intermittent, weak, or
missing jet.
Beneath the data for print head jet status the test page lists the print head serial number,
page count, current resolution, IME software version and page number.
Printheads occasionally get clogged jets that require user intervention to restore jet function.
When a clogged jet occurs, areas of solid colour may show signs of light stripes.
Jet test pages are used to check print head jet status. Two versions are available, service and
customer. Jet test pages demonstrate effective print quality and provide visual feedback on the
health of print head jet stack.
Service Jet Test Pages

Service jet test pages are printed from dC968 and dC977.
To solve image quality problems related to weak, missing or sputtering jets, refer to IQ 9.
Figure 2 Print quality status
Figure 1 Jet test pages
February 2013
3-97
Image Quality
TP 21
Definitions of Jet Conditions

NOTE: Service jet test pages are printed without jet substitution turned on and therefore will
always show the true condition of each jet. The detected machine status may not always match
the true condition of a jet at the time the jet pages are printed. Even if a jet number is purple,
red or green you may see a colour bar over the jet number if the jet has managed to recover on
its own.
Masked jets may be visible on the jet test pages as white space where the coloured bar
for the jet should be. Problem jets identified by the customer but not by the machine,
which cannot be revived, can be masked manually. Once masked, the jet number will be
green with a green pointer indication beneath the jet number, Figure 5.
There are 3 jet conditions indicated by the jet test pages:
Missing Jets
Missing jets may be visible on the jet test pages as white space where the coloured bar
for the jet should be. When a missing jet is detected by the machine, the jet number will
be purple with a purple pointer indication beneath the jet number, Figure 3.
Figure 5 Masked jet number
Customer Jet Test Pages

NOTE: Information on the customer jet test pages is included here for completeness. Customer jet test pages are not used for fault isolation.
The customer jet test pages, shown in Figure 6, are located in Fix Image Quality and available
for customers to use when diagnosing print quality problems. Figure 7 shows how the customer jet test pages includes jet status information for each print head and the current status of
jet substitution. The customer jet test pages use jet substitution if enabled.
Figure 3 Missing jet number
Chronic Jets
Chronic jets may be visible on the jet test pages as white space where the coloured bar
for the jet should be. If the machine detects a missing jet but is unable to retrieve it with
maintenance or corrective action the missing jet is designated as chronic. The jet number
will be red with a red pointer indication beneath the jet number, Figure 4.
Figure 4 Chronic jet number
Masked Jets (GP 30 How to Mask Jets/Jet Substitution)
Image Quality
TP 21
February 2013
3-98
Figure 6 Customer version of the jet test pages

Figure 7 shows the customer version of the jet test page. This version also prints long-edge
feed with the default source being tray 3. The image portion of the print is intended to show the
customer effective print quality with current jet substitution settings. The IOD can miss weak
jets, that is why the customer needs this print to provide a tool when the machine has not self
corrected. If the customer is not happy with these defects the light lines options in Fix Image
Quality window provides tools to do both an align and a purge, which should fix the problems.
This page helps customer service (or a customer) correct issues the machine cannot.
Figure 7 Jet status information, customer page
February 2013
3-99
Image Quality
TP 21
The text at the bottom of the customer version, Figure 7, provides the following:
Max left/right: Indicates shift position in relation to the drum. Shifting involves all the jets in
the imaging process.
JSC[On,On]: indicates jet substitution is enabled (On) for both customer and machine settings. The machine may override the customer setting temporarily if the Quick Light Lines
fix has been selected from the Tools/Fix Image Quality menu. After the next purge or
machine reboot, the settings revert to customer settings. When jet sub is enabled, print
speed slows down only when a jet is missing and is required for the current print.
PC[On,On]: means the purge configuration is set to purge at night/when idle for both customer setting and machine setting. Same override rule applies. The purge here is jet fix
purge that will only occur if the machine needs to auto recover an intermittent, weak, or
missing jet.
This info is followed by each print head serial number and the total number of IWMs (intermittently weak or missing jet) or CWMs (continuously weak or missing jet) for each print
head as defined by the IOD information. Manually masked jets are identified after chronic
jets.
W (weak) indicates the number of detected missing jets that have not been labelled
as chronic.
C (chronic) indicates the number of missing jets that have been purged 3 times,
including a cool down/melt cycle (to power the machine off and allow to cool down)
for models 9302 and 9303.
M (masked) indicates the number of missing jets for which jet substitution is enabled
either manually or by the machine.
For instance:
H4:<serial number>; W2;C0;M1
Print head number 4:<serial number> has 2 weak jets, no chronic jets and one manually masked jet
describes
Image Quality
TP 21
February 2013
3-100
TP 22 Cleaning Pages
NOTE: Do not use the cleaning pages to evaluate image quality.
The two-sheet cleaning page, Figure 1, prints following a purge from dC968 to clear the jets of
any ink discolouration. The cleaning page must print long-edge feed on A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch
media. Tray 3 is the default source.
Cleaning pages are printed from dC968.
NOTE: If the machine detects a paper jam when printing cleaning pages, the machine may
automatically recover and purge the sheet. This will result in the cleaning page being printed
on multiple sheets.
Purpose
The cleaning page flushes the jet nozzles of possible contamination or colour contaminated
jets. The first sheet cleans print heads 2 and 4 on the upper carriage. The second sheet cleans
print heads 1 and 3 on the lower carriage. Three sets of prints typically clear any ink mixing or
discolouration associated with print head maintenance.
To solve image quality problems related to ink discolouration, refer to IQ 14.
Figure 1 Cleaning pages
February 2013
3-101
Image Quality
TP 22
TP 23 Drum Run Out and Y-Stitch Test Pages

Figure 1 shows the drum run out test pages without the defect on the horizontal lines. The twopage drum run out test print provides visual indication on the success or failure of drum run out
and Y-stitch calibrations. Two pages of horizontal lines are printed to cover the entire drum.
The print order is marked in the upper left corner (P1 and P2).
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the test print name. Double chevrons
will be printed if the paper used is A4. The chevrons indicate the stitch position between print
heads.
Drum run out and Y-stitch test pages are printed from dC977.
Purpose
To provide a visual indication of drum run out and Y-stitch accuracy.
To solve image quality problems related to drum run out and y-stitch errors, refer to IQ 5.
Figure 1 Drum run out and Y-stitch pages
Image Quality
TP 23
February 2013
3-102
TP 24 Registration Calibration Page

This print is generated by dC625 to calibrate the registration/preheat assembly. Calibration
procedure requires A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch media.
The registration calibration page is printed from dC625.
Purpose
Figure 1, serves as a target image for calibration of the registration/preheat assembly. Ten
sheets are printed for each of the three stances of the registration/preheat assembly. The
images are fed back through the duplex path and scanned by the registration sensor. Values
for process, cross-process, and skew are calculated and stored in NVM.
To solve image quality problems related to registration calibration, refer to IQ 8 Cross Process
Ink Artifacts (Smudge) RAP and IQ 10 Incorrect Margin, Misregistration or Skew RAP.
Figure 1 Registration calibration page
February 2013
3-103
Image Quality
TP 24
TP 25 IME Test Print
The front and rear LEDs give the same information.
This test print isolates the IME from other system issues. The image is a simple pattern of
coloured bars as shown in Figure 1. The image includes primary colour bars printed by all four
print heads. Image size is the width and length of the media less the 4.3 mm (0.017 inch) margins. The tray selection is from tray 1 or 2 and prints on A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch media only.
There is a 7-segment LED display unit on the rear of the machine attached to the SBC
PWB. The LED display should show just a pulsing decimal point when IME test print is
being produced. Refer to OF 16 POST Error RAP.
Procedure
Check that either A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch size media is loaded in tray 1 or tray 2. Also check that ink
and the other printing prerequisites are met. Print the IME test print using these steps:
NOTE: All test prints should be printed on A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper. Use the best quality
media available. Do not use hole punched paper.
1.
Turn the machine off, GP 14.
2.
Open the mid left door, PL 70.30 Item 16.
3.
Remove the waste tray.
4.
Insert an interlock cheater in the front door interlock.
5.
Turn the machine on, GP 14.

During power-up, the IME checks for the combination of waste tray and left side door sensors that activates the test print mode. PEST does not run in this mode.
The red IME error LED begins a repeating series of three blinks with a slight pause
between (111, 111, 111). This sequence indicates IME test print mode is detected.
6.
Close the left side door and install the waste tray. The red IME Error LED turns off and the
green IME OK LED begins a sequence of three blinks. This indicates the IME is in test
print mode. The IME generates the print as soon as the thermals come up to temperature
and any errors are resolved.
NOTE: The red IME Error LEDs blink an error code if the IME determines it is unable to continue (e.g. out of media or ink). After printing the IME test page, the machine reboots to customer mode.
Errors and status are reported by blinking the status LEDs (IME OK and IME Error LED).
Figure 1 IME Test Print

The print is produced simplex with a 600 x 600 resolution. Print orientation (LEF vs. SEF) is
determined by how the selected tray is loaded. The tray is selected automatically based upon
the same priority system used to select a chase source. An error is noted if none of the trays
contain valid media. If a finisher is installed, the sheet is sent to the catch tray on the finisher.
In the absence of a fault the green IME OK LED flashes in groups of three to indicate normal test print mode.
During normal test print mode, the red IME error LED is turned Off.
When an error is detected, the red IME error LED flashes an error code and the green
IME OK LED remains Off.
For example, an error code of 124 is indicated on the red IME error LED by one flash followed
by a brief pause, followed by two flashes and another brief pause, followed by four flashes followed by a longer pause. Between each sequence, the LED flutters to indicate the sequence is
repeating.
Three results may occur:
Status Indication
There is a set of LEDs on the front of the IME controller PWB (front of machine), the red
LED is the IME error LED, the green LED is the IME OK LED. Refer to OF 16 POST Error
RAP.
There is a set of LEDs on the rear of the media path driver PWB (rear of machine), the
red LED is the IME error LED, the green LED is the IME OK LED. Refer to OF 16 POST
Error RAP.
Image Quality
TP 25
111 indicates to close the door and replace the waste tray to proceed with the test print.
The close cover result is flashed to indicate test print mode is detected. Replace the
waste tray and close the left side door. When these actions are completed, the IME Error
LED turns Off, and the IME OK LED flashes the three short flashes followed by a pause.
February 2013
3-104
123 indicates a media resource error. Load the proper media or other needed items (ink,
cleaning unit, etc.). This error can occur during warm-up if the drum is dirty. A resource
error detected during warm-up may require larger than the A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch media in
order to clean the drum. In this case, load A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch size media in tray 1 or 2 or
the resource error will return when the printer checks for available media.
124 indicates a test print creation error. Install the waste tray, close the doors, and reboot
to run PEST (Print Engine Self Test dC123). This error usually indicates insufficient memory and should not occur normally, but if detected, may indicate a hardware fault. PEST
should indicate any IME issues preventing printing.
TP 26 Print Head Uniformity/Colour Bands Test Page

This A4 (8.5 x 11 inch) page has seven solid fill bars of colours, yellow, magenta, cyan, black,
red, green and blue.
The print head uniformity/colour bands test page is printed from dC972, option 3.
printed with annotations on the bottom edge confirming the name of the test print. Double
chevrons will be printed if the paper used is A4. The chevrons indicate the stitch position
between print heads.
Purpose
The print head uniformity test page, Figure 1 is used to diagnose image quality issues related
to colour uniformity in solid fills.
To solve image quality problems associated with print head uniformity, refer to IQ 13, IQ 14 and
IQ 15.
February 2013
3-105
Image Quality
TP 25, TP 26
Figure 1 Print head uniformity/colour bands test page
Image Quality
TP 26
February 2013
3-106
IQS 1 Registration and Skew
NOTE: The measurement for skew and margin for Side 1 and Side 2 may not match
Image Registration
Margins
Table 1 lists the registration specifications of the DADH, IIT and IOT.
Refer to Figure 1. Process direction margin is measured on the leading edge at the center (3).
Cross-process margin is measured on the rear edge near the leading edge corner (4).
Table 1 Registration Specifications
Print IOT
Document
Glass Scan
IIT
DADH Scan
IIT
2.6 mm
2.0 mm
0.7 mm
1.7 mm
4.1 mm
2.5 mm
0.7 mm
3.2 mm
Registration
Document
Glass
DADH
Process direction
2.1 mm
Cross-process
2.6 mm
Skew
To measure skew use this formula, Figure 1.
Skew (mrads) = Leading edge margin at rear corner (1) minus leading edge margin at front
corner (2) divided by (media width - 8.6 mm) multiplied by 1000.
Refer to Table 2 for the skew specifications in mrads.
Table 2 Skew Specifications (mrads)
Skew specification
Document
Glass
DADH
6.2 mrad
9.0 mrad
Print IOT
Document
Glass Scan
IIT
DADH Scan
IIT
5.4 mrad
3.1 mrad
7.2 mrad
Skew for envelopes will exceed the limits stated.
Skew for A5 / 8.5 x 5.5 shall be +/- 10 mrads.
Lead edge skew
Cross process margin
Table 3 lists the skew specifications (mm) for the standard paper sizes.
Table 3 Skew Specifications (mm)
Document
Glass
DADH
Scan IIT
Scan IIT
Media
Media Size Document

DADH
(mm)
Glass
A4 long edge
297 mm
1.79 mm 2.6 mm
A4 short edge
210 mm
1.25 mm 1.81 mm 1.09 mm 0.62 mm 1.45 mm
8.5 x 11 inch
long edge
279 mm
1.68 mm 2.43 mm 1.46 mm 0.84 mm 1.95 mm
8.5 x 11 inch
short edge
216 mm
1.29 mm 1.87 mm 1.12 mm 0.64mm
Print IOT
Figure 1 Skew and margin measurement
1.56 mm 0.89 mm 2.8 mm
1.49 mm
February 2013
3-107
Image Quality
IQS 1
IQS 2 Image Area

Image Area
Guaranteed image area is the maximum area over which IQ specifications are valid.
Refer to Table 1 and Figure 1.
Table 1 Image Area Specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Maximum image area
448.6 mm (17.6 inches) (process) x 300.3 mm (11.8 inches)

(cross-process)
Minimum image area
210 mm (8.2 inches) (process) x 104 mm (4 inches) (cross-process)
Guaranteed image area
448.6 mm (17.6 inches) (process) x 298.648 mm (11.7 inches)

(cross-process)
Resolution/gradation
Fast colour: 300 x 300 dpi

Standard:450 x 567 dpi
Enhanced: 600 x 600 dpi (Image processing at 600 x 2400)
Photo / Hi Res: 525 x 1200 dpi
Figure 1 Maximum image area
Image Quality
IQS 2
February 2013
3-108
IQS 3 Y-Dot Position
IQS 4 Y-Stitch
Specification
Specification
Figure 1, shows a level of position error that provides a basis for determining defect severity. If
Y-dot position error exceeds Figure 1, corrective action is necessary. Refer to IQ 5.
Figure 1 shows a level of y-stitch error that provides a basis for determining defect severity. If
Y-stitch error exceeds Figure 1, corrective action is necessary.
Figure 1 Maximum specified Y-dot misplacement
Figure 1 Maximum specified Y-stitch error
February 2013
3-109
Image Quality
IQS 3, IQS 4
IQS 5 X-Stitch
IQS 6 Blurry Text
Specification
Specification
Figure 1 shows a level of X-stitch error that provides a basis for determining defect severity. If
X-stitch error exceeds Figure 1, corrective action is necessary.
Figure 1 shows a level of blurry text error that provides a basis for determining defect severity.
If the capital F in line D2 exceeds Figure 1, corrective action is necessary. Refer to IQ 5.
NOTE: The x-stitch print is made up of an interference pattern. The degree of an x-stitch issue
is highly exaggerated on this print. The actual x-stitch error will appear less pronounced on a
customer image. If in doubt about the severity of an x-stitch issue print a customer image to
determine if it is visible.
Figure 1 Acceptable X-stitch example
Figure 1 Blurry text on TP 12
Image Quality
IQS 5, IQS 6
February 2013
3-110
IQS 7 Curl
IQS 8 Uniformity in the Process Direction
Media Curl
Specification
All modules shall handle flat curl of 12 mm in both process and cross process direction in
input and output without degradation in performance. Degraded performance (e.g. increased
jams, reduced tray capacity) can be expected for curl greater than 12 mm.
Figure 1 shows the cyan / magenta and the colour bands print that is printed out in TP 1. No
distinct non-uniformity bands in the process direction should be observed on these prints.
Refer to IQ 13 and IQ 14.
NOTE: Curl is expected to increase above 12 mm when printing very high area coverage
(whole page), especially for duplex and paperweights below 80 gsm, or when using specific
papers and / or paper batches with internal tension.
Curl is assessed as follows: Run 5 sheets of prints with less than 50% area coverage. Place
the set on a flat surface so that the set curls upwards. Measure the height of each corner after
minimum 15 seconds and maximum 1 minute from the output of the final sheet. No corner
should exceed the 12 mm specification in 99.7% of the measurements.
Figure 1 Uniformity test print
February 2013
3-111
Image Quality
IQS 7, IQS 8
Image Quality
IQS 7, IQS 8
February 2013
3-112
4 Repairs/Adjustments
REPs 1 - Standby Power
REP 1.1 Wiring Harness Repairs ....................................................................................
REP 1.2 Molex SL Connectors........................................................................................
REP 1.3 Male Hirose DF1B Connectors .........................................................................
REP 1.4 AMP EI Connectors ..........................................................................................
REP 1.5 Hirose DF11 Connectors ..................................................................................
REP 1.6 AMP CT Connectors .........................................................................................
REP 1.7 Molex Mini-Fit Junior Connectors .....................................................................
REP 1.8 Front Door Interlock Switch...............................................................................
REP 1.9 Power Supply Unit ............................................................................................
REPs 10 - Transfix and Copy/Print Transportation

4-5
4-6
4-8
4-10
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-16
4-16
REPs 2 - User Interface

REP 2.1 User Interface Assembly...................................................................................
REP 2.2 User Interface Touch Screen ............................................................................
REP 2.3 User Interface PWB ..........................................................................................
4-21
4-23
4-24
REPs 3 - Machine Run Control

REP 3.1 IME Controller PWB..........................................................................................
REP 3.2 Quad Wave Amp PWB .....................................................................................
REP 3.3 Marking Unit Heater PWB.................................................................................
REP 3.4 Marking Unit Driver PWB ..................................................................................
REP 3.5 Media Path Driver PWB ....................................................................................
REP 3.6 Drum Driver PWB .............................................................................................
REP 3.7 Single Board Controller PWB............................................................................
REP 3.8 Hard Disk Drive.................................................................................................
REP 3.9 NVM Module PWB and Battery.........................................................................
REP 3.10 Power Distribution PWB..................................................................................
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
REPs 5 - DADH
REP 5.1 Top Cover Assembly.........................................................................................
REP 5.2 Top Access Cover Assembly ............................................................................
REP 5.3 Feed Assembly .................................................................................................
REP 5.4 Input Tray Assembly .........................................................................................
REP 5.5 Baffle Assembly ................................................................................................
REP 5.6 Takeaway Roll Assembly..................................................................................
REP 5.7 Duplex Solenoid................................................................................................
REP 5.8 Takeaway and CVT Sensor ..............................................................................
REP 5.9 DADH Tray Size Sensors .................................................................................
REP 5.10 Registration Sensor ........................................................................................
REP 5.11 Exit Sensor......................................................................................................
REP 5.12 DADH Counterbalance ...................................................................................
REP 5.13 Exit Roll Assembly ..........................................................................................
REP 5.14 Feed Roll Assembly ........................................................................................
REP 5.15 Duplex Gate, CVT Roll and CVT Motor, Drive Belt.........................................
REP 5.16 Document Width Sensor .................................................................................
REP 5.17 Input Tray Static Eliminator.............................................................................
REP 5.18 Exit Roll Idler...................................................................................................
REP 5.19 DADH Removal...............................................................................................
REP 5.20 Mylar Guide Strip ............................................................................................
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-41
4-43
4-44
4-46
4-47
4-47
4-48
4-50
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-54
4-55
4-56
4-57
4-58
REP 10.1 Transfix Roller.................................................................................................

REP 10.2 Front Transfix Linkage and Gear Kit ...............................................................
REP 10.3 Rear Transfix Linkage and Gear Kit................................................................
REP 10.4 Front Transfix Motor........................................................................................
REP 10.5 Rear Transfix Motor ........................................................................................
REP 10.6 Transfix Blade .................................................................................................
REP 10.7 Pre Transfix Sensor ........................................................................................
REP 10.8 Post Transfix Motor (M4) and Gearbox...........................................................
REP 10.9 Stripper Solenoid Assembly............................................................................
REP 10.10 Roller Drive J ................................................................................................
REP 10.11 Roller Drive L ................................................................................................
REP 10.12 Exit / Duplex Solenoid...................................................................................
REP 10.13 Diverter Gate.................................................................................................
REP 10.14 Exit Motor (M5) .............................................................................................
REP 10.15 Duplex Start Sensor (13) ..............................................................................
REP 10.16 Exit Sensor (15) ............................................................................................
REP 10.17 Roller Nip P...................................................................................................
REP 10.18 Roller Nip N...................................................................................................
REP 10.19 Exit Illuminator PWB .....................................................................................
REP 10.20 Exit Paper Path .............................................................................................
REP 10.21 Stripper Blade, Gate and Baffle ....................................................................
REP 10.22 Upper Baffle ..................................................................................................
REP 10.23 Stripper Guide Latch Cam Shaft ...................................................................
REP 10.24 Front and Rear Flexure Encoder ..................................................................
4-59
4-60
4-63
4-67
4-67
4-68
4-69
4-71
4-72
4-73
4-75
4-77
4-79
4-81
4-83
4-84
4-87
4-88
4-89
4-90
4-92
4-95
4-96
4-98
REPs 12-110 - LCSS

REP 12.1-110 LCSS Covers ...........................................................................................
REP 12.2-110 Input Drive Belt and Paper Entry Transport Motor...................................
REP 12.3-110 Intermediate Paper Drive Belt..................................................................
REP 12.4-110 Paper Output Drive Belt and Transport Motor 2 ......................................
REP 12.5-110 Bin 1 Drive Belts ......................................................................................
REP 12.6-110 Tamper Assembly....................................................................................
REP 12.7-110 Hole Punch Unit, Motor and Sensors ......................................................
REP 12.8-110 Stapler Traverse Assembly......................................................................
REP 12.9-110 Staple Head Unit......................................................................................
REP 12.10-110 Ejector Assembly Sensors.....................................................................
REP 12.11-110 Bin 1 Upper Level Sensor......................................................................
REP 12.12-110 Paddle Wheel Shaft Assembly ..............................................................
REP 12.13-110 LCSS Un-Docking..................................................................................
REP 12.14-110 LCSS PWB ............................................................................................
REP 12.15-110 Entry Guide Cover .................................................................................
REP 12.16-110 Docking Latch Assembly .......................................................................
REP 12.17-110 Ejector Belt ............................................................................................
REP 12.18-110 Paddles..................................................................................................
February 2013
4-1
4-99
4-100
4-101
4-102
4-103
4-106
4-107
4-109
4-110
4-111
4-113
4-114
4-117
4-118
4-118
4-120
4-121
4-122
Repairs/Adjustments
REPs 12-171 - HVF

REP 12.1-171 HVF Covers .............................................................................................
REP 12.2-171 HVF Stapler Assembly ............................................................................
REP 12.3-171 Top Tray ..................................................................................................
REP 12.4-171 Bin 1 Removal .........................................................................................
REP 12.5-171 Right Side-Cover Removal ......................................................................
REP 12.6-171 HVF Ejector Assembly.............................................................................
REP 12.7-171 Pressing Plate Fingers ............................................................................
REP 12.8-171 Front and Rear Support Fingers ..............................................................
REP 12.10-171 Stacker Idler Rolls .................................................................................
REP 12.11-171 Front Tamper Motor Assembly ..............................................................
REP 12.12-171 Bin 1 Elevator Motor Assembly .............................................................
REP 12.13-171 HVF/HVF BM Un-Docking .....................................................................
REP 12.14-171 HVF Upper Exit Guide (5c)....................................................................
REP 12.15-171 HVF Rear Tamper Assembly.................................................................
REP 12.16-171 BM Flapper ............................................................................................
REP 12.17-171 BM PWB ................................................................................................
REP 12.18-171 BM Crease Blade Motor ........................................................................
REP 12.19-171 BM Crease Roll Motor ...........................................................................
REP 12.20-171 BM Backstop Motor Assembly...............................................................
REP 12.21-171 BM Backstop Assembly.........................................................................
REP 12.22-171 BM Entry Roll.........................................................................................
REP 12.23-171 BM Entry Sensor ...................................................................................
REP 12.24-171 BM Crease Roll Gate Motor ..................................................................
REP 12.25-171 BM Compiler Motor and BM Flapper Motor...........................................
REP 12.26-171 Back Stop Drive Assembly ....................................................................
REP 12.27-171 BM Staple Heads...................................................................................
REP 12.28-171 BM Stapler Bracket Assembly ...............................................................
REP 12.29-171 BM Conveyor Belts................................................................................
REP 12.30-171 BM Tamper Assembly and Tamper 1 Motor..........................................
REP 12.31-171 HVF Buffer Guide Assembly..................................................................
REP 12.32-171 HVF Input Jam Clearance Guide...........................................................
REP 12.33-171 Buffer Pocket Jam Clearance Guide Assembly.....................................
REP 12.34-171 Inserter Jam Clearance Guide Assembly ..............................................
REP 12.35-171 Diverter Exit Gate ..................................................................................
REP 12.36-171 Crease Blade Assembly ........................................................................
REP 12.37-171 Stacker Driving Shaft Bearings..............................................................
REP 12.38-171 HVF Stacker Driving Belts .....................................................................
REP 12.39-171 HVF BM Diverter Gate...........................................................................
REP 12.40-171 HVF Input Roll .......................................................................................
REP 12.41-171 HVF Inserter Guide Roll ........................................................................
REP 12.42-171 HVF Buffer Pocket Roll..........................................................................
REP 12.43-171 HVF Booklet Entrance Roll....................................................................
REP 12.44-171 HVF Buffer Lower Roll...........................................................................
REP 12.45-171 HVF Buffer Upper Roll...........................................................................
REP 12.46-171 HVF Stacker Exit Feed Roll...................................................................
REP 12.47-171 HVF Top Exit Feed Roll.........................................................................
REP 12.48-171 Compiler Paddle Motor Assembly .........................................................
REP 12.49-171 Compiler Paddle Unit.............................................................................
REP 12.50-171 BM Exit Sensor......................................................................................
REP 12.51-171 Compiler Paper Pusher Motor Assembly ..............................................
Repairs/Adjustments
4-123
4-126
4-128
4-129
4-130
4-131
4-133
4-133
4-134
4-135
4-136
4-137
4-138
4-139
4-141
4-142
4-144
4-146
4-148
4-149
4-151
4-152
4-154
4-154
4-155
4-157
4-159
4-163
4-165
4-167
4-168
4-169
4-170
4-170
4-171
4-174
4-175
4-176
4-177
4-178
4-179
4-180
4-181
4-182
4-183
4-184
4-186
4-187
4-188
4-189
REP 12.52-171 BM Crease Rolls....................................................................................

REP 12.53-171 Compiler Paper Pusher .........................................................................
REP 12.54-171 Pusher Upper and Lower Sensors ........................................................
REP 12.55-171 HVF PSU Assembly ..............................................................................
REP 12.56-171 BM Right Hand Cover............................................................................
REP 12.57-171 HVF Main PWB .....................................................................................
REP 12.58-171 Not Used................................................................................................
REP 12.59-171 Crease Roll Gate Assembly ..................................................................
REP 12.60-171 BM Paper Guide Assembly ...................................................................
REP 12.61-171 BM Module ............................................................................................
REP 12.62-171 BM Slide Assembly................................................................................
REP 12.63-171 Transport Motor 1 ..................................................................................
REP 12.64-171 Bypass Feed Motor ...............................................................................
REP 12.65-171 Buffer Motor...........................................................................................
REP 12.66-171 Transport Motor 2 ..................................................................................
REP 12.67-171 Tri Folder Covers ...................................................................................
REP 12.68-171 Tri-Folder Drive Assembly .....................................................................
REP 12.69-171 Tri Folder Crease Roll Drive Assembly .................................................
REP 12.70-171 Tri-Folder Feed Roller and Drive Belt ....................................................
REP 12.71-171 TF Assist Gate Solenoid........................................................................
REP 12.72-171 Tri Folder Crease Roll Springs ..............................................................
REP 12.73-171 Tri Folder Top Cover and Idler Assemblies ...........................................
REP 12.74-171 Tri Folder Roller Assembly and Diverter Solenoid.................................
REP 12.75-171 Bin 1 Limit Switches ..............................................................................
REP 12.76-171 Bin 1 Upper Level Sensor......................................................................
REP 12.77-171 Tri Folder Door Interlock Switches and Sensor .....................................
REP 12.78-171 Tri Folder Entry and Assist Gate Sensors .............................................
REP 12.79-171 Tri Folder Exit Sensor ............................................................................
REP 12.80-171 Tri Folder PWB ......................................................................................
REP 12.81-171 Tri Folder Main and Bin 2 Tray Harnesses ............................................
REP 12.82-171 Inserter Undocking ................................................................................
REP 12.83-171 Inserter Front and Rear Covers.............................................................
REP 12.84-171 Inserter Motor ........................................................................................
REP 12.85-171 Inserter PWB .........................................................................................
REP 12.86-171 Inserter Clutch .......................................................................................
REP 12.87-171 Inserter Top Cover Interlock Switch ......................................................
REP 12.88-171 Inserter Jam Cover Interlock Switch ......................................................
REP 12.89-171 Main Tray and Paper Length Sensors ...................................................
REP 12.90-171 Bottom Tray and Paper Sensors ...........................................................
REP 12.91-171 Inserter Top Cover and Inserter Pickup Sensor ....................................
REP 12.92-171 Lower Jam Cover and Acceleration Sensor ..........................................
REP 12.93-171 Inserter LE and TE Sensors ..................................................................
REP 12.94-171 Inserter Bottom Plate Sensor ................................................................
REP 12.95-171 Inserter Pickup Assembly and Reverse Feed Roller .............................
REP 12.96-171 HVF Fixed and Adjustable Casters .......................................................
REP 12.97-171 Pause To Unload PWB Assembly .........................................................
REP 12.98-171 Inserter Idle Roller Assembly.................................................................
REP 12.99-171 Tri-Folder Removal ................................................................................
REP 12.100-171 Ejector Paddle Assembly (W/TAG V-004) ...........................................
REP 12.101-171 Paddle Wheel ......................................................................................
February 2013
4-2
4-189
4-192
4-193
4-193
4-194
4-195
4-196
4-196
4-199
4-202
4-207
4-210
4-210
4-211
4-211
4-212
4-213
4-216
4-217
4-217
4-218
4-218
4-219
4-221
4-222
4-222
4-223
4-223
4-224
4-225
4-226
4-227
4-227
4-228
4-229
4-230
4-230
4-231
4-232
4-233
4-233
4-234
4-235
4-235
4-236
4-238
4-238
4-240
4-241
4-242
REPs 62- Scanner

REP 62.1 Scanner Module..............................................................................................
REP 62.2 Top Cover .......................................................................................................
REP 62.3 CVT Glass, CVT Ramp and Document Glass Assembly................................
REP 62.4 Scan Carriage Home Sensor ..........................................................................
REP 62.5 Scan Carriage Assembly ................................................................................
REP 62.6 Carriage Motor and Mounting .........................................................................
REP 62.7 Scan Cables....................................................................................................
REP 62.8 Scan Drive Belt ...............................................................................................
REP 62.9 Input Module Angle Sensor.............................................................................
REP 62.10 LED Exposure Lamps ...................................................................................
REP 62.11 Exposure Lamp Ribbon Harness ..................................................................
REP 62.12 Scanner PWB ...............................................................................................
REP 62.13 Scan Carriage Ribbon Cable ........................................................................
REP 62.14 Document Size Sensor 1 and Document Size Sensor 2 ..............................
4-243
4-246
4-246
4-247
4-248
4-250
4-251
4-255
4-256
4-256
4-257
4-259
4-260
4-260
REPs 70 to 75 - Paper Supply

REP 70.1 3 Tray Module PWB........................................................................................
REP 70.2 Upper Left Hand Door Assembly ....................................................................
REP 71.1 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Removal ............................................................................
REP 71.2 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Paper Guides.....................................................................
REP 71.3 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Lift Gear Assembly ............................................................
REP 73.1 Tray 3 Removal...............................................................................................
REP 73.2 Tray 3 Elevator Motor .....................................................................................
REP 73.3 Tray 3 Elevator Cables ...................................................................................
REP 73.4 Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor ............................................................................
REP 73.5 Tray 3 Home Sensor.......................................................................................
REP 73.6 Tray 3 Elevator Damper and Gears ................................................................
REP 75.1 Tray 5 Empty Sensor ......................................................................................
REP 75.2 Tray 5 Stack Height Sensor ............................................................................
REP 75.3 Tray 5 Down Sensor .......................................................................................
REP 75.4 Tray 5 Elevator Motor Assembly.....................................................................
REP 75.5 Tray 5 Upper Limit Switch...............................................................................
REP 75.6 Tray 5 Down Limit Switch ...............................................................................
REP 75.7 Un-docking and Docking Tray 5......................................................................
REP 75.8 Tray 5 Covers .................................................................................................
REP 75.9 Tray 5 Docking Latch ......................................................................................
REP 75.10Tray 5 Elevator Rack Assembly.....................................................................
REP 75.11 Tray 5 Elevator Tray Guides .........................................................................
4-261
4-262
4-262
4-263
4-264
4-265
4-267
4-267
4-269
4-269
4-270
4-271
4-272
4-273
4-274
4-275
4-276
4-277
4-279
4-280
4-282
4-285
REPs 81 to 89 - Paper Transport

REP 81.1 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Paper Feed Assembly .......................................................
REP 81.2 Tray 3 Paper Feed Assembly .........................................................................
REP 81.3 Bypass Module ...............................................................................................
REP 81.4 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Feed Rolls .........................................................................
REP 81.5 Tray 3 Feed Rolls............................................................................................
REP 81.6 Bypass Tray Feed Rolls..................................................................................
REP 81.7 Tray 5 Feed Rollers ........................................................................................
REP 81.8 Tray 1 or Tray 2 Feed Sensor.........................................................................
REP 81.9 Tray 3 Feed Sensor ........................................................................................
REP 81.10 Bypass Tray Empty Sensor ..........................................................................
REP 81.11 Tray 5 Feed Sensor ......................................................................................
4-287
4-288
4-289
4-291
4-293
4-293
4-294
4-295
4-296
4-297
4-297
REP 81.12 Tray 5 Feed Motor ........................................................................................

REP 81.13 Nip D Release Solenoid................................................................................
REP 82.1 3 Tray Module Transport Motor ......................................................................
REP 82.2 3 Tray Module Transport Drive Belt ................................................................
REP 82.3 Tray 3 Horizontal Transport Assembly............................................................
REP 82.4 Tray 3 Horizontal Transport Rolls ...................................................................
REP 82.5 Tray 5 Transport motor ...................................................................................
REP 82.6 Tray 5 Transport Drive Belt.............................................................................
REP 82.7 Tray 5 Takeaway Roller ..................................................................................
REP 82.8 Confirm Sensor ...............................................................................................
REP 82.9 Vertical Transport............................................................................................
REP 83.1 Horizontal Paper Path.....................................................................................
REP 83.2 Duplex End Sensor, Nip C Solenoid and HPP Diverter Solenoid ...................
REP 83.3 Duplex Sensor (17) .........................................................................................
REP 83.4 Horizontal Transport Motor .............................................................................
REP 83.5 Horizontal Transport Drive Belts And Takeaway Rolls ...................................
REP 89.1 Registration / Preheat Assembly and Lower Platelet Assembly .....................
REP 89.2 Registration / Preheat Pumps .........................................................................
REP 89.3 Registration / Preheat Assembly Nip A Kit......................................................
4-299
4-299
4-300
4-300
4-301
4-301
4-303
4-304
4-305
4-306
4-307
4-309
4-310
4-311
4-312
4-313
4-314
4-317
4-317
REPs 91 - Marking Unit

REP 91.1 Carriage Drive Train........................................................................................
REP 91.2 Vertical Gearbox and Motor ............................................................................
REP 91.3 Head Maintenance Wiper ...............................................................................
REP 91.4 Front and Rear Tensioner Base......................................................................
REP 91.5 Head Maintenance Belts and Belt Retainer Clips ...........................................
REP 91.6 Head Maintenance Horizontal Motion Motor...................................................
REP 91.7 Marking Unit Upper Carriage ..........................................................................
REP 91.8 Upper Carriage Drive Shaft, Cranks, Upper Front and Rear Compliant Links
REP 91.9 X Axis Drive Motor ..........................................................................................
REP 91.10 Lower Carriage Drive Shaft, Cranks, Lower Front and Rear Compliant Links
REP 91.11 Service Loop .................................................................................................
REP 91.12 Purge Line Filter............................................................................................
REP 91.13 Stitch / Roll Motor..........................................................................................
REP 91.14 Marking Unit Lower Carriage ........................................................................
REP 91.15 Ink Loader Assembly ....................................................................................
REP 91.16 Ink Loader Melt Plate Assembly ...................................................................
REP 91.17 Ink Load Sensor Assembly ...........................................................................
REP 91.18 Ink Transport Motor and Drive Gear .............................................................
REP 91.19 Ink Low Sensor Assembly.............................................................................
REP 91.20 Ink Reservoir Assembly ................................................................................
REP 91.21 Reservoir Pump ............................................................................................
REP 91.22 IOD Assembly ...............................................................................................
REP 91.23 Front and Rear Track Guide .........................................................................
REP 91.24 Drum Drive Motor and Belt ...........................................................................
REP 91.25 Drum and Front Drum Frame Assembly .......................................................
REP 91.26 Marking Unit Slide Assembly ........................................................................
REP 91.27 Cleaning Unit Motor Assembly and Home Sensor........................................
REP 91.28 Marking Unit Assembly .................................................................................
REP 91.29 Printhead.......................................................................................................
REP 91.30 Drum Position Encoder Assembly ................................................................
REP 91.31 Umbilical Assembly.......................................................................................
February 2013
4-3
4-319
4-320
4-322
4-325
4-327
4-328
4-329
4-332
4-333
4-334
4-335
4-337
4-338
4-339
4-342
4-345
4-346
4-347
4-348
4-349
4-353
4-354
4-356
4-357
4-359
4-363
4-364
4-365
4-368
4-373
4-374
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.32 Cleaning Unit Cam Shaft Assembly..............................................................

REP 91.33 Cleaning Unit Plug Connector ......................................................................
REP 91.34 Drum Pulley ..................................................................................................
REP 91.35 Front and Rear Drum Thermistor..................................................................
REP 91.36 Abatement Plenum .......................................................................................
REP 91.37 Stitch / Roll Motor Lead Screws....................................................................
4-377
4-379
4-380
4-381
4-383
4-384
ADJs 82 - Paper Transport

ADJ 82.1 Media Registration Calibration ........................................................................
4-425
ADJs 91 - Marking Unit

ADJ 91.1 Printhead Attachment Check...........................................................................
4-427
REPs 94 - Ink Transfer

REP 94.1 Cleaning Unit ..................................................................................................
4-385
ADJs 4 - Machine Lubrication

ADJ 4.1 Machine Lubrication ..........................................................................................
4-387
ADJs 5 - DADH
ADJ 5.1 DADH Drive Belt Adjustment.............................................................................
ADJ 5.2 DADH Height Adjustment..................................................................................
ADJ 5.3 DADH Skew Adjustment ...................................................................................
ADJ 5.4 DADH Cleaning Procedure ...............................................................................
ADJ 5.5 DADH Registration Adjustment .........................................................................
ADJ 5.6 DADH Document Pad .......................................................................................
4-389
4-390
4-392
4-393
4-394
4-394
ADJs 12-110 - LCSS

ADJ 12.1-110 LCSS Bin 1 Level .....................................................................................
ADJ 12.2-110 Machine to LCSS Alignment ....................................................................
ADJ 12.3-110 Hole Punch Position.................................................................................
ADJ 12.4-110 Motor Drive Belt Tensioning.....................................................................
4-395
4-395
4-396
4-397
ADJs 12-171 - HVF

ADJ 12.1-171 Machine to HVF / HVF BM, HVF BM to Tri-Folder Alignment..................
ADJ 12.2-171 Tri-Folder Paper Settings .........................................................................
ADJ 12.3-171 Stapler Anvil Alignment ............................................................................
ADJ 12.4-171 Crease Blade Position..............................................................................
ADJ 12.5-171 Booklet Tamping ......................................................................................
ADJ 12.6-171 Booklet Compiling Position ......................................................................
ADJ 12.7-171 Booklet Crease Position...........................................................................
ADJ 12.8-171 Booklet Staple Position ............................................................................
ADJ 12.9-171 Booklet Maker Skew ................................................................................
ADJ 12.10-171 HVF Motor Drive Belt Tensioning...........................................................
ADJ 12.11-171 HVF Idler Drive Belt Tensioning.............................................................
ADJ 12.12-171 Tri-Folder Fold Adjustment.....................................................................
4-399
4-400
4-401
4-404
4-404
4-406
4-409
4-410
4-411
4-412
4-413
4-413
ADJs 62 - Scanner
ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning Procedure .............................................................................
ADJ 62.2 Scan Carriage Assembly .................................................................................
ADJ 62.3 Carriage Motor and Scanner Drive Belt ..........................................................
ADJ 62.4 Document Glass Registration Adjustment.......................................................
4-415
4-416
4-417
4-417
ADJs 73 to 75 - Paper Trays

ADJ 73.1 Tray 3 Paper Tray Guide Setting.....................................................................
ADJ 75.1 Tray 5 Paper Tray Guide Setting.....................................................................
ADJ 75.2 Tray 5 Module to Machine Alignment..............................................................
ADJ 75.3 Tray 5 Module Tray Alignment ........................................................................
Repairs/Adjustments
4-419
4-421
4-422
4-422
February 2013
4-4
REP 1.1 Wiring Harness Repairs
Purpose
Media path driver PWB to Tray 5 PWB harness, PL 75.68 Item 26.
Tray 5 elevator harness, PL 75.70 Item 20.
Tray 5 elevator motor harness, PL 81.40 Item 16.
Tray 5 centre reg interface harness, PL 81.40 Item 17.
Upper carriage harness, PL 91.20 Item 12.
Lower carriage harness, PL 91.25 Item 12.
WARNING
WARNING
3.
Do not attempt any repairs to the power cord or safety ground harness/conductor.
The following connectors can be repaired by removing the faulty terminals and installing
new terminals:
NOTE: Safety ground connections use green/yellow cables, or green cables with a yellow
stripe or band.
Molex SL connectors - REP 1.2.
Male Hirose DF 1B connectors - REP 1.3.
The steps that follow identify the relevant procedures for repairing the various connectors contained within the copier.
AMP EI connectors - REP 1.4.
Hirose DF11 Connectors - REP 1.5.
1.
If wiring is damaged, use connector splicing blocks to repair damaged wiring.
AMP CT connectors - REP 1.6.
2.
The following harness assemblies are not repairable; install new parts:
Molex mini-fit junior connectors - REP 1.7.
Any ribbon harness.
Bypass extension harness, PL 1.15 Item 8.
Drum driver MR sensor harness, PL 1.15 Item 9.
Chassis interlock harness, PL 1.15 Item 11.
AC chassis heater harness, PL 1.15 Item 13.
Drum driver to front components harness, PL 1.15 Item 14.
Drum driver / media path power harness, PL 1.15 Item 15.
Engine fan harness, PL 1.15 Item 16.
Cleaning unit interface harness, PL 1.15 Item 17.
Media path exit / horizontal harness, PL 1.15 Item 19.
Transfix roller harness, PL 1.15 Item 20.
Media path driver PWB to 3 tray module PWB harness, PL 1.15 Item 21.
Mid rail front door switch harness, PL 1.15 Item 22.
User interface harness, PL 2.10 Item 7.
User interface control PWB to user interface status PWB harness, PL 2.10 Item 9.
LCD to PWB harness, PL 2.10 Item 11.
Hard disk drive / single board controller PWB harness, PL 3.11 Item 3.
PDB to SBC harness (PJ17), PL 3.11 Item 10.
Hard disk drive power harness, PL 3.11 Item 12.
Foreign device interface harness, PL 3.11 Item 23.
Communication/power cable, PL 5.10 Item 6.
Bin 2 tray harness, PL 12.205 Item 19.
BM PWB to tri-folder PWB harness, PL 12.205 Item 20.
LED lamp ribbon harness, PL 62.15 Item 5.
February 2013
4-5
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.1
REP 1.2 Molex SL Connectors
2.
Figure 2. Remove the terminal from the connector housing using the Molex extractor tool.
Removal
WARNING
1
Insert the Molex tool
NOTE: Molex connectors have small black housings in single and double row form with miniature square section pins and sockets.
1.
If the damaged connector is in the centre of a double row housing beneath the latching
clip, the latching prong will not be accessible to release the connector from the housing.
Therefore it will be necessary to disassemble the housing as shown in Figure 1.
2
Press the prong flat
1
Hold the wires from both
row connectors
Attach the Molex tool
3
Push the terminal out of the
housing using a male terminal
from the repair kit
Figure 2 Removing the terminal.
3
Bend the housing open
5
Pull out the A
row connector
4
Pull out the B row connector
3.
Cut off the damaged terminal, then strip 3 mm of insulation from the end of the wire.
Replacement
1.
Select the correct replacement terminal, and identify the appropriate crimp positions for
the terminal.
2.
Figure 3. Insert a male or female terminal into the appropriate position of the crimp tool
and close the tool just enough to hold the terminal.
Figure 1 Disassembling the connector.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.2
February 2013
4-6
5.
Figure 5. Check that the crimp is correctly made.
Correct
Incorrect
Loose strands of wire
Figure 3 Crimping the terminal.

3.
Insert the wire fully into the terminal so that the stripped portion of the wire is within the
inner grip of the terminal. Close the crimp tool fully to make the crimp.
4.
Figure 4. Insert the crimped terminal into the appropriate position of the crimp tool and
close the crimp tool, to fasten the insulation of the wire in the outer grip of the terminal.
Crimp loose
Insulation in the crimp
Wire exposed
Figure 5 Inspecting the finished crimp.

6.
Insert the replacement terminal into the connector housing.
7.
If the repair was carried out on a double row connector that was disassembled, push both
connectors into the housing taking care that the A connector is fitted on the fastener
side.
Figure 4 Crimping the insulation grip.
February 2013
4-7
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.2
REP 1.3 Male Hirose DF1B Connectors
NOTE: These connectors can be repaired using either crimp terminals or pre-crimped terminals with flying lead and butt connector, as required.
Removal
2.
WARNING
Figure 2. Insert the terminal into the appropriate position of the crimp tool and close the
tool just enough to hold the terminal.
1.
Figure 1. Remove the damaged terminal from the housing.
1
Raise the plastic tab
with a suitable tool, to
release the terminal

3.
Insert the wire fully into the terminal so that the stripped portion of the wire is within the
longer grip of the terminal and the insulation of the wire is within the cable grip of the terminal. Close the crimp tool fully to make the crimp; check that the wire is firmly crimped in
the terminal.
2
Remove the terminal
from housing
Figure 1 Remove the terminal

2.
Replacement
CAUTION
There are different terminals for large gauge and small gauge wire. Ensure that the correct
replacement terminal is used.
1.
Select the correct replacement terminal and identify the appropriate crimp positions for
the terminal.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.3
February 2013
4-8
4.
close the crimp tool to firmly fasten the insulation of the wire in the cable grip of the terminal.
5.
Correct
Incorrect
Wire exposed
Insulation In the crimp
crimp loose
Figure 3 Crimping the insulation grip.
Figure 4 Inspecting the finished crimp.

6.
February 2013
4-9
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.3
REP 1.4 AMP EI Connectors

Removal
WARNING
2
Remove the terminal from the
housing
NOTE: The male housings contain socket terminals, and the female housings contain pin terminals.
1.
Use the extractor tool, to release the terminal from the housing. Refer to Figure 1 to identify the male housing and terminal type. Refer to Figure 2 to identify the female housing
and the terminal type.
1
Depress the prong with a small
flat head screw driver to release
the terminal
1
Insert a paper clip to
release the prong
Figure 2 Terminal removal; female housing.

2.
2
Remove the terminal
from the housing
Figure 1 Terminal removal; male housing.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.4
February 2013
4-10
Replacement
4.
1.
Select the correct replacement terminal and identify the appropriate crimp positions for
the terminal.
2.
tool enough to hold the terminal.
close the crimp tool to firmly fasten the insulation of the wire in the cable grip of the terminal.
Figure 4 Crimping the insulated grip.

3.
Insert the wire completely into the terminal, so that the stripped portion of the wire is in the
longer grip of the terminal. The insulation of the wire is within the cable grip of the terminal. Close the crimp tool completely to make the crimp. Check that the wire is crimped
firmly in the terminal.
February 2013
4-11
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.4
5.
REP 1.5 Hirose DF11 Connectors

Removal
WARNING
Correct
NOTE: The male housing contains female terminals that cannot be crimped in the field; if a terminal is damaged, install a new terminal with flying lead.
Incorrect
1.
Figure 1. Remove the damaged terminal from the connector housing.
Wire exposed
1
Raise the plastic tab with a suitable tool, to release the
terminal
2
Remove the terminal from
the housing
Crimp loose
Figure 5 Inspect the finished crimp

6.
Figure 1 Terminal removal

2.
Cut the damaged terminal off the wire.
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.4, REP 1.5
1.
Insert the replacement terminal with flying lead into the connector housing.
2.
Use a butt connector to connect the flying lead to the original wire.
February 2013
4-12
REP 1.6 AMP CT Connectors
2.
Figure 1. Remove the damaged crimp terminal from the connector housing.
Removal
WARNING
1
Raise the plastic tab with a suitable tool, to release the
terminal
CAUTION
Amp CT connectors use in-line adaptors to connect housings together. Ensure that the correct
adaptor is used for each in-line connection. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the in-line
adaptors.
2
Remove the terminal
from the housing
NOTE: There are two types of CT connector: insulation displacement connector (IDC) or crimp
terminal. Repairing crimp terminal CT connectors is performed by installing individual replacement terminals with flying leads, connected to the existing wiring with connector splicing blocks
(removal steps 2 and 3). Repairing IDC connectors is performed by installing a complete
replacement housing with wires already fitted, connected to the existing wiring with connector
splicing blocks (removal steps 4 and 5). The replacement procedure is only applicable to crimp
terminal connectors.
1.
Identify the terminal type. Go to step 2 for a housing containing crimp terminals, or go to
step 4 for a housing containing insulation displacement (IDC) terminals.
Figure 1 Terminal removal.

3.
Cut the damaged crimp terminal off of the wire.
4.
IDC housings are repaired by installing a complete replacement housing with wires
already fitted, These are connected with connector splicing blocks to the existing wiring.
Select the correct replacement connector.
5.
Cut one wire from the faulty connector and then reconnect the wire to the appropriate flying lead on the replacement connector. Repeat this process for each wire in turn, until the
faulty connector has been fully disconnected and the replacement connector installed in
its place.
Replacement
1.
Insert the replacement crimp terminal with flying lead into the connector housing.
2.
Use a connector splicing block to connect the flying lead to the original wire.
February 2013
4-13
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.6
REP 1.7 Molex Mini-Fit Junior Connectors
1.
Figure 2. Remove the terminal from the housing, using the Molex, Mini-Fit extractor tool.
Removal
WARNING
2
Withdraw the terminal
from the connector body
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
WARNING
1
Insert the prongs fully down
the sides of the terminal
Figure 2 Removing the terminal

2.
Replacement
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.7
Select the correct terminal type.
February 2013
4-14
2.
tool just enough to hold the terminal.
5.
Correct
Incorrect:

Figure 3 Crimping the terminal
3.
Insert the wire fully into the terminal so that the stripped portion is within the inner grip of
the terminal. Close the crimp tool fully to make the crimp.
4.
close the crimp tool to fasten the wire insulation in the outer grip of the terminal.
Wire exposed
Figure 5 Inspecting the finished crimp

6.
Figure 4 Crimping the insulation grip
February 2013
4-15
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.7
REP 1.8 Front Door Interlock Switch
REP 1.9 Power Supply Unit
Parts List on PL 1.15

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Open the front door.
2.
Remove the front door interlock switch, Figure 1.
NOTE: Some machines may be fitted with a W/TAG 001 power supply unit that has a blanking
cover instead of the sliding cover at the main power cord socket.
1.
2.
Remove the main power cord, PL 1.15 Item 1.
3.
Disconnect the LCSS power cord, PL 12.75 Item 8, if installed, or the HVF power cord. PL
12.140 Item 4 if installed.
4.
Remove the rear cover, PL 70.25 Item 8
5.
Disconnect the harnesses, Figure 1.
2
Disconnect the wires and
remove the switch
1
Lever out the switch body using a flat
blade screwdriver
Figure 1 Front door interlock removal
Replacement
1.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal process.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.8, REP 1.9
February 2013
4-16
6.
Remove the power supply unit, Figure 2.
1
Disconnect the
ribbon cable
from the drum
driver PWB
Lift and remove the

power supply unit
Disconnect
J6AC
Disconnect
Disconnect
J5AC
JDC3
Remove 2
screws
Remove 2
screws
J4AC
J8AC
JDC1
JDC4
Figure 1 Disconnect harnesses

Figure 2 Remove the power supply unit
7.
Remove the ribbon cable, Figure 3.
1
Disconnect JDC2 and
remove the ribbon cable
Figure 3 Remove the ribbon cable
February 2013
4-17
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.9
Replacement
1.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal process.
2.
If a W/TAG 001 power supply unit is being installed, the blanking cover, PL 70.25 Item 14
(supplied with the new power supply unit) must be installed into the lower rear cover, Figure 4.
1
Connect the ribbon
cable to JDC2
Support lugs on the back of the power supply

unit to be located on the frame brackets
Blanking cover
Figure 5 Install the ribbon cable

CAUTION
Blanking cover not installed
Blanking cover installed
Ensure that wires are not pinched between the frame and the back of the power supply during
installation
Figure 4 Blanking cover location

3.
Install the ribbon cable JDC2 and note the location of the support lugs on the rear of the
power supply unit, Figure 5.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.9
February 2013
4-18
4.
Install the power supply unit, Figure 6.
1
Fit the lugs on the rear of the power supply unit over the support brackets
3
Install the 4 fixing screws to
secure the power supply
Rest the power supply

on the supports
Figure 6 Install the power supply unit

5.
Re-connect the connectors to the power supply unit and the ribbon cable to the drum
driver PWB, Figure 1.
February 2013
4-19
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.9
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 1.9
February 2013
4-20
REP 2.1 User Interface Assembly
2.
Prepare to detach the UI control panel, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the user interface assembly.
NOTE: Detachment of the user interface (UI) control panel will enable the replacement of the
user interface control PWBA, PL 2.10 Item 2, user interface status PWBA, PL 2.10 Item 4 and
the user interface touch screen, PL 2.10 Item 3. Only remove the complete user interface
assembly when necessary, e.g reinstallation onto a new scanner assembly.
1.
1
Remove 4 screws
Open the front door. If the complete UI assembly is to be removed, remove the scanner
module, REP 62.1.
NOTE: The UI control panel has 2

hooked retainers, located on the
underside at the left and right rear
corners.
Figure 2 Preparation
February 2013
4-21
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 2.1
8.
Remove the 4 nuts, PL 62.10 Item 8 and the 4 washers.
Ensure no strain is placed upon the UI harness.
CAUTION
9.
Remove the UI base, PL 62.10 Item 19 and the 4 grommets, PL 62.10 Item 6.
3.
Replacement
Detach the UI control panel, Figure 3.
1.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2.
When installing the UI assembly hook the rear retainers into place. Lower the keyboard
fully, then press down and push the UI assembly until it clicks into place. The 4 screws
can then be installed.
Bias the control panel counter

clock wise to access the 3
PWB assemblies and the UI
touch screen.
Hooked retainer
4
See Caution
1
Hold the front edge of the UI control panel, then lift
upwards and away from machine.
2
Release the 2 hooked retainers.
Figure 3 Detach the UI control panel
4.
Remove the scanner rear cover, refer to REP 62.2.
5.
Remove the UI Harness cover, PL 62.10 Item 16.
6.
Release the UI Harness clamp, PL 62.10 Item 9.
7.
Remove the UI control panel with the UI harness, PL 2.10 Item 7.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 2.1
February 2013
4-22
REP 2.2 User Interface Touch Screen
3.
Remove the user interface touch screen, Figure 2.

Removal
4
WARNING
Remove the
retainer
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the user interface touch screen.
1.
Detach the user interface control panel, REP 2.1.
2.
Place the user interface control panel on a flat surface.
1
Remove 3 harness
clips
Disconnect the
harnesses
Remove 3 screws
Figure 2 Remove the user interface touch screen
Replacement
1.
2.
If a problem occurs with the display. Refer to GP 32 User Interface Panel Diagnostics and
check out the functions of the UI.
February 2013
4-23
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 2.2
REP 2.3 User Interface PWB
3.
Remove the user interface PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the user interface PWB.
1.
Detach the user interface control panel, REP 2.1
2.
Place the user interface control panel on a flat surface.
1
Disconnect all 6 harnesses
Remove all 8 screws
Figure 2 Remove the user interface PWB
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 2.3
February 2013
4-24
REP 3.1 IME Controller PWB
5.
Remove the IME controller PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the IME controller PWB.
1.
Open the front door
2.
Remove the inner cover, PL 81.11 Item 2.
3.
Pull out the marking unit, GP 6.
4.
Remove the marking unit enclosure cover, PL 91.10 Item 18.
Transfer the NVRAM
Disconnect PJs marked A.
2
Remove screws marked B then remove the PWB.
Figure 2 IME controller PWB removal
Replacement
1.
Replacement is the reversal of the removal process.
2.
Transfer the NVRAM from the failed PWB and install onto the new PWB, Figure 2.
3.
Install the new NVRAM onto the failed IME Controller PWB to be returned.
If both IME controller PWB and IME NVRAM chip are replaced at the same time. Then
perform the following:
a.
dC977 Drum Runout Calibration.
b.
c.
The front and rear transfix calibration values need to be entered into dC978. The values are located on the front of the drum frame.
d.
Empty the waste tray, since the NVM tracking purge mass has been lost.
e.
Enter dC131 NVM Read / Write at location 492-70 Prints On This Drum and enter
the page count of the machine.
February 2013
4-25
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.1
REP 3.2 Quad Wave Amp PWB
2.
Remove the quad wave amp PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
2
CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the quad
wave amp PWB.
1.

Figure 2 Quad wave amp PWB removal
Remove the IME controller PWB, REP 3.1.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.2
February 2013
4-26
REP 3.3 Marking Unit Heater PWB
6.
Remove the marking unit heater PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
1
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
Remove screws marked B then the PWB.

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the marking
unit heater PWB.
1.
Figure 2 Marking unit heater PWB removal
Open the front door
2.
3.
Pull out the marking unit, REP 91.28.
4.
5.
Remove the clamp, PL 92.10 Item 6.
Replacement
February 2013
4-27
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.3
REP 3.4 Marking Unit Driver PWB
5.
Remove the marking unit driver PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the marking
unit driver PWB.
1.
Open the front door
2.
3.
Pull out the marking unit, REP 91.28.
4.
2
Figure 2 Marking unit driver PWB removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.4
February 2013
4-28
REP 3.5 Media Path Driver PWB
4.
Remove the media path driver PWB, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
1
Remove the screws marked A then remove PWB assembly.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the media
path driver PWB.
Figure 3 Media path driver PWB removal
1.
2.
Remove the enclosure fan, PL 1.15 Item 6.
Replacement
3.
Disconnect the PJs, Figure 2.
1
Figure 2 Disconnect PJs
February 2013
4-29
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.5
REP 3.6 Drum Driver PWB
3.
Disconnect the PJs, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
1
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the drum
driver PWB.
1.
2.
Remove the enclosure fan, PL 1.15 Item 6.
Figure 2 Disconnect PJs
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.6
February 2013
4-30
4.
REP 3.7 Single Board Controller PWB
Remove the drum driver PWB, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
1
Remove screws marked A
then remove the PWB.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the single
board controller PWB.
1.
If installed, remove the following components:
2.
If a new single board controller PWB is to be installed, remove the following components:
Figure 3 Drum driver PWB removal
System memory, PL 3.11 Item 4.
EPC memory PWB, PL 3.11 Item 21.
Product enablement key (SIM), PL 3.11 Item 22.
3.
Disconnect all connectors on the rear of the image processing module. Pull out the image
processing module.
4.
Remove the harness guide plate, PL 3.11 Item 24.
Replacement
Foreign device interface PWB, PL 3.11 Item 14.
5.
Remove the PWB cover, PL 3.11 Item 11.
6.
Disconnect all connectors on the single board controller PWB.

CAUTION
Lift the single board controller PWB. Do not slide the PWB in the image processing module.
The PWB have components on the underside that can be easily damaged.
February 2013
4-31
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.6, REP 3.7
7.
REP 3.8 Hard Disk Drive
Remove the single board controller PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Remove the single board controller PWB.
Remove 9 screws marked A.
1.
Check via either the machine configuration sheet or Centreware Internet Services/Properties/General Setup/ Feature Installation if any optional features are enabled, e.g. McAfee
integrity control enablement. Obtain and note any necessary optional feature installation
keys, GP 48.
2.
Pull out the image processing module.
3.
Remove the Fax module if installed.
4.
Remove the two harnesses from the hard disk drive, Figure 1.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
CAUTION
When installing the PWB cover, PL 3.11 Item 11, ensure that the PJ222 connector for the hard
disk drive/single board controller PWB harness is not unlatched.
1.

NOTE: Before installing the harness guide plate, ensure that the harnesses are correctly
routed. Refer to REP 62.1.
2.
Perform an Altboot, refer to GP 4 Machine Software.
Disconnect 2 harnesses.
Remove the tie wrap.
Figure 1 Hard Disk Drive harness
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.7, REP 3.8
February 2013
4-32
5.
REP 3.9 NVM Module PWB and Battery
Remove the hard disk drive, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the NVM
module PWB.
The NVM module PWB contains the local machine settings. These are retained using battery
backed memory.
Remove 4 screws.
2
Remove the hard disk drive.
This module is extremely reliable and should only be changed as a last resort when all other
possibilities have been ruled out.
Figure 2 Remove Hard Disk Drive
Do not replace the module before the machine has completed the install wizard.
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure that the bracket locates into the slots on the drawer
NOTE: All customer settings, machine configuration settings, customer copy count, usage and
fault counters will be lost. Inform back office and follow the local process.
3.
When the install is complete perform an AltBoot, GP 4.
1.
To prevent the deletion of the soft machine settings, perform an NVM save from service
mode on the UI using dC361 NVM Save and Restore.
2.
Pull out the image processing module.
3.
Remove the harness guide plate, PL 3.11 Item 24.
4.
Remove the PWB Cover, PL 3.11 Item 11.
5.
Remove the NVM module PWB, PL 3.11 Item 17.
6.
If necessary, remove the battery, PL 3.11 Item 18 from the NVM module PWB.
4.
If any optional features were enabled, re-enter the keys for the optional features. Refer to
GP 48 How to Re-Enter Optional Feature Installation Keys.
February 2013
4-33
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.8, REP 3.9
REP 3.10 Power Distribution PWB
Replacement
CAUTION
Do not use a NVM module PWB that has previously been in another machine as it will transfer
the machine serial number and speed to the new machine. Destroy used NVM modules.
1.
If necessary, install the new battery onto the NVM module PWB. Check the battery is
located correctly, GP 45.
2.
Install the NVM module PWB. Make sure the NVM module PWB is fully seated.

Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
3.
Install the PWB Cover, PL 3.11 Item 11.
4.
Install the harness guide plate, PL 3.11 Item 24.
5.
At power up a 'configuration parameter' error will appear as the machine does not know
what the serial number is. Enter the serial number from the machines frame serial number
plate, dC132. Type carefully and double check that the entered number is correct.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
NOTE: An incorrect entry can only be rectified with another new NVM module PWB.
6.
The machine will then retrieve the machine speed from the SIM. If the data cannot be
retrieved from the SIM or the SIM is not present, the machine will default to 9301. Enter
dC131 NVM Read / Write location 616-003. Check that the machine speed is correct. If
the setting is wrong, escalate through the normal channels to have a pre-serialized SIM
sent to you.
7.
Check with the customer that the billing plan and service plan are correct. If the customer
has changed either since the machine was purchased these will not be reflected. Use
dC103 billing plan and dC136 service plan to correct as necessary.
8.
Open / Close all paper trays and confirm the media in each tray.
9.
Enter Service Copy Mode (GP 1). Perform the following:
Select Machine Info / Tools / Device Settings / Paper Management / Paper Size Preferences. Set to inches or metric as necessary.
(XE Only) Check the tray 3 media setting. Select Machine Info / Tools / Device Setting / Paper Management / Tray contents. Set to A4 or 8.5 x 11 as necessary.
CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the power distributionPWB.
1.
Remove the PWB cover, PL 3.11 Item 11.
2.
Disconnect all connectors on the power distribution PWB.
10. Set the correct market region, dC134.

11. If a new NVM module PWB has been installed, perform an Altboot, GP 4.
NOTE: The Altboot is not required if only a new battery has been installed.
12. Perform the following:
NVM restore, dC361 NVM Save and Restore.
NOTE: Using dC131 to make changes to the NVM settings will result in the values being over
written during the next power cycle. Use only the diagnostics routines listed.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.9, REP 3.10
February 2013
4-34
3.
Remove the power distribution PWB, Figure 2.
Remove the power distribution PWB.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
CAUTION
1.
February 2013
4-35
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.10
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 3.10
February 2013
4-36
REP 5.1 Top Cover Assembly

Removal
Remove the 2 latch pins.
Remove the top

cover assembly.
WARNING
1.
Open the DADH top cover.
2.
Remove the DADH top cover assembly, Figure 1.
Take note of the position of

latch pins.
Remove the screw and

the plastic bushing (front
and back).
Disengage the hinges.
Figure 1 Top cover
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure the latch pins are
installed correctly, refer to Figure 1.
February 2013
4-37
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.1
REP 5.2 Top Access Cover Assembly
Replacement

Removal
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure that the 2 springs on the
idler rolls are in the correct position, Figure 2. Then install the top cover.
WARNING
1.
Takeaway idler roll

torsion spring
2.
Remove the DADH rear cover, PL 5.10 Item 1.
3.
Remove the DADH top cover assembly, REP 5.1.
4.
Remove the DADH top access cover assembly, Figure 1.
2
Remove the screw and
the bracket.
3
Remove the top access
cover assembly.
CVT idler roll torsion

spring
Figure 2 Torsion springs
1
Disconnect PJ191 and
the ground harness.
Figure 1 Top access cover assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.2
February 2013
4-38
REP 5.3 Feed Assembly
4.
Remove the feed assembly, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
1
Disengage the hinges.
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Remove the feed roll assembly, REP 5.14.
Remove 4 self tapping

screws marked A.
7
Remove the feed
assembly.
3
Disconnect PJ183,
PJ184 and PJ187.
Disconnect PJ199. Release the

harness.
6
Disconnect the ground
harness.
Figure 1 Feed assembly
Replacement
February 2013
4-39
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.3
REP 5.4 Input Tray Assembly
3.
Remove the input tray assembly, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
Remove the DADH, REP 5.19.
2.
Remove the feed assembly, REP 5.3.
Loosen the
screw.
1.
Remove 3
self tapping
screws
marked A.
WARNING
Remove the
input tray
assembly.
NOTE: To release the tension of the drive belts, refer to ADJ 5.1.
6
Release the
harness.
2
5
Disconnect
PJ190.
4
Release the
tension and
disengage the
drive belt.
3
Disconnect
the ground
harness.
Release the
tension on the
feed motor
drive belt.
Figure 1 Input tray assembly
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.4
1.
2.
Perform ADJ 5.1 DADH Drive Belt Adjustment.
February 2013
4-40
REP 5.5 Baffle Assembly
CAUTION
When the top access cover assembly, feed assembly, input tray assembly and CVT roll are
removed the DADH structure is weak. Do not lower the DADH in this configuration.

Removal
7.
WARNING
WARNING
Carefully install the DADH frame on the machine. Secure the DADH with the two thumbscrews.
CAUTION
Be careful to prevent damage to the document pad when the document pad is removed from
the baffle assembly.
8.
Move the baffle assembly lower cover to give access, Figure 2.
1.
2.
Remove the top access cover assembly, REP 5.2.
3.
4.
Remove the input tray assembly, REP 5.4.
5.
Remove the CVT roll, REP 5.15.
6.
Prepare to remove the baffle assembly, Figure 1.
2
Release the harness.
1
Disconnect the link arm.
3
Disconnect PJ189.
February 2013
4-41
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.5
10. Remove the baffle assembly, Figure 3.

DADH frame.
2
Disengage the hinge
pin.
3
Slide the tab through
slot in DADH frame.
3
Disengage the lugs in the
lower cover.
4
Remove the baffle
assembly.
1
Feed the harness and
ground harness through the
frame.
Solenoid link arm.
Figure 3 Baffle assembly
Remove 2 screws.
4
To help the removal of the
baffle assembly, slide the
lower cover approximately 40
mm (1.5 inches) away from
the document pad.
1
Carefully remove the left hand
end of the document pad from the
baffle assembly.
Figure 2 Lower cover movement

9.
Disconnect PJ196 from the exit sensor and remove the exit sensor, REP 5.11.
CAUTION
Take care removing the baffle assembly, do not damage the solenoid link arm.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.5
February 2013
4-42
Replacement
REP 5.6 Takeaway Roll Assembly
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure that the torsion springs
and harness are in the correct position, Figure 4.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Torsion springs.
Route the harness.
Figure 4 Torsion springs and harness
February 2013
4-43
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.5, REP 5.6
2.
Remove the takeaway roll assembly, Figure 1.
REP 5.7 Duplex Solenoid
NOTE: To release the tension of the drive belt on the feed motor, refer to ADJ 5.1.

Removal
WARNING
2
Remove 2 E-clips.
Small spacers.
WARNING
Large spacer.
1.
2.
Prepare to remove the drive assembly, Figure 1.
3
1
Slide the bearing forward.
Disconnect 3 ground
harnesses.
2
Remove 3 self tapping
screws marked A.
3
PJ204.
1
Release the tension and
disengage the drive belt.
Remove the takeaway roll

assembly.
Release the harnesses.
Figure 1 Takeaway roll assembly
Figure 1 Drives assembly
Replacement
NOTE: To release the tension on the drive belts, refer to ADJ 5.1.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure the spacers and E-clips
are installed correctly, refer to Figure 1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.6, REP 5.7
February 2013
4-44
3.
Remove the drive assembly, Figure 2.
4.
Remove the duplex solenoid, Figure 3.
Disconnect PJ205.
Remove the screw.
1
Disconnect the
link arm.
1
3
Remove the drive assembly.
Release the tension and

disengage the drive
belts.
Release the duplex solenoid from the clips.
Disconnect the ground harness.
Figure 2 Drives assembly
Figure 3 Duplex solenoid
Replacement
CAUTION
The screw that attaches the ground harness to the duplex solenoid is shorter than the other
screws. Do not use the incorrect screw.
1.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure that the wiring is not
caught below the drive assembly.
2.
Perform the DADH motor adjustment, ADJ 5.1.
February 2013
4-45
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.7
REP 5.8 Takeaway and CVT Sensor
Replacement

Removal
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure the spring plate and idler
roll torsion springs are in the correct position. Also make sure that the CVT sensor actuator is
in the correct position below the CVT roll and the idler shaft. Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Then install the top cover assembly,
WARNING
Takeaway idler roll

torsion spring
WARNING
1.
Remove the DADH top cover assembly, REP 5.1.
2.
Remove the takeaway or CVT sensor, Figure 1.
2
Disconnect the correct PJ. Remove the
correct sensor.
1
Remove the screw.
Takeaway sensor.
CVT
sensor.
CVT idler roll torsion

spring
Spring plate.
Figure 2 Torsion springs
CVT idler roll

shaft.
Figure 1 Takeaway and CVT sensors
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.8
February 2013
4-46
REP 5.9 DADH Tray Size Sensors
REP 5.10 Registration Sensor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
Remove the DADH, top cover assembly, REP 5.1.
2.
Remove the registration sensor, Figure 1.

CAUTION
Disconnect the ground harness from the static eliminator before the input tray assembly lower
cover is removed, refer to Figure 1.
2.
Turn the input tray assembly upside down, then remove the Lower cover right, PL 5.35
Item 9.
3.
Remove the relevant sensor, Figure 1.
5
Disconnect PJ192. Remove
the registration sensor
4
Remove the sensor assembly.
1
Remove the ground harness
and bracket.
Ground harness.
See CAUTION.
1
Remove 2 screws.
2
Carefully release the
torsion spring.
3
Remove the pre-scan
idler roll.
Sensor 2.
2
Sensor 1.
Figure 1 Registration sensor
Disconnect the correct PJ. Remove

the correct sensor.
Figure 1 Tray size sensors
Replacement
February 2013
4-47
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.9, REP 5.10
Replacement
REP 5.11 Exit Sensor
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure that the torsion spring is
installed correctly, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
1.
Raise the DADH.

CAUTION
Be careful to prevent damage to the document pad when the document pad is removed from
the baffle assembly.
Torsion spring
location.
Figure 2 Torsion spring location
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.10, REP 5.11
February 2013
4-48
2.
Prepare to remove the exit sensor, Figure 1.
3.
Remove the exit sensor, Figure 2.
1
Disconnect
PJ196. Remove
the exit sensor.
3
Disengage the lugs in the lower
cover.
Remove 2
screws.
Remove the lower cover.
1
Carefully remove the left hand end of the
document pad from the baffle assembly.
Figure 2 Exit sensor removal
Replacement
February 2013
4-49
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.11
REP 5.12 DADH Counterbalance
REP 5.13 Exit Roll Assembly

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1. Remove the feed assembly, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the input tray assembly, REP 5.4.
CAUTION
cover left is removed, refer to Figure 1.
3. Turn the input tray assembly upside down. Remove the Lower cover (right), PL 5.35 Item
9 and Lower cover (left), PL 5.35 Item 20.
4. Remove the exit roll assembly, Figure 1.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Put the DADH upside down on a solid flat surface.
NOTE: The counterbalances are different. The removal procedure for the two counterbalances
is same.
3.
Plastic washers.
Remove the relevant counterbalance, right, PL 5.10 Item 2 (4 screws) or left, PL 5.10 Item
4 (4 screws).
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
DADH height adjustment, ADJ 5.2.
DADH registration adjustment, ADJ 5.5.
If a new right counterbalance has been installed, perform the DADH skew adjustment,
ADJ 5.3.
Ground harness.
See CAUTION.
1
lift the exit roll
assembly to
remove.
Retaining clips
Figure 1 Exit roll assembly removal
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.12, REP 5.13
Place the exit roll assembly in position, ensure that the plastic washers are located on
either side of the housing, refer to Figure 1.
Press the retaining clips into their locating holes, refer to Figure 1.
The remainder of the replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
February 2013
4-50
REP 5.14 Feed Roll Assembly
2.
Remove the DADH feed roll assembly, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
1. Open the DADH top cover.
1
Completely raise the feed
roll assembly (2 clicks).
2
Raise the feed roll assembly
cover.
3
Remove the feed roll assembly.
NOTE: There are three rollers on the feed roll

cartridge.
If the lower feed roll does not come out with feed
roll assembly, then remove it separately from the
machine.
Figure 1 Feed roll assembly
February 2013
4-51
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.14
Replacement
REP 5.15 Duplex Gate, CVT Roll and CVT Motor, Drive Belt
1.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. When the feed rolls are
installed, make sure the lowest roll, (retard roll), is positioned as shown in Figure 2.
2.
If a new feed roll assembly is installed, reset the DADH feed count to zero. Refer to
dC135 CRU / HFSI Status.

Removal
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Remove the DADH drive assembly, refer to REP 5.7.
4.
Remove the duplex gate, Figure 1.
1
Key
Lift out the duplex

gate.
Retard roll
Figure 2 Retard roll position
Figure 1 Duplex gate

CAUTION
When the top access cover assembly, feed assembly, input tray assembly and CVT roll are
removed the DADH structure is weak. Do not lower the DADH in this configuration
5.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.14, REP 5.15
Carefully install the DADH frame on the machine. Secure the DADH with the 2 thumbscrews.
February 2013
4-52
6.
Disengage the back CVT roll bearing, Figure 2.
7.
Release the front CVT roll bearing, PL 5.25 Item 4. Remove the CVT roll and CVT motor,
drive belt, Figure 3.
1
Compress the two ends of
the bearing together.
1
Remove the CVT roll.
Remove the CVT

motor drive belt.
Push the bearing to disengage.
Figure 2 Bearing
Figure 3 CVT roll
February 2013
4-53
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.15
Replacement
REP 5.16 Document Width Sensor
1.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure the white washer is
installed correctly, Figure 4.
2.
Perform the DADH CVT motor adjustment, refer to ADJ 5.1.

Removal
WARNING
CVT roll.
White washer.
1.
2.

CAUTION
cover is removed, refer to Figure 1.
3.
Turn the input tray assembly upside down, then remove the Lower cover right, PL 5.35
Item 9 and Lower cover left, PL 5.35 Item 20
Figure 4 Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.15, REP 5.16
February 2013
4-54
4.
REP 5.17 Input Tray Static Eliminator
Remove the document width sensor, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
1.
Disconnect PJ193.

CAUTION
cover is removed, refer to Figure 1
Arm
2.
Turn the input tray assembly upside down, then remove the Lower cover (right), PL 5.35
Item 9 and Lower cover (left), PL 5.35 Item 20.
3.
Remove the input tray static eliminators, Figure 1.
3
Remove the document width sensor.
Ground harness.
1
Remove the
correct static
eliminator.
Ground harness.
Figure 1 Document width sensor
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure the document width sensor arm is attached correctly, refer to Figure 1.
Figure 1 Static eliminators
Replacement
February 2013
4-55
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.16, REP 5.17
REP 5.18 Exit Roll Idler
4.
Remove the exit roll idlers, Figure 2.

Removal
2
Lift out the exit roll idlers.
Bearing
WARNING
1.
3
Remove the 2 bearings.
Remove the baffle assembly lower cover, PL 5.30 Item 1.
2.
Remove the baffle assembly, REP 5.5.
3.
Prepare to remove the exit roll idlers, Figure 1.
1
Release the link arm.
1
Carefully remove the torsion spring
and the document finger.
Bearing
Figure 2 Exit roll idlers
3
Remove the lift bar and
link arm.
2
Raise one end of the exit roll idler shaft, then release
the lift bar.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.18
February 2013
4-56
Replacement
REP 5.19 DADH Removal
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure that the torsion spring
and document finger are installed correctly, refer to Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Disconnect the communication/power cable, PL 5.10 Item 6 and the DADH ground harness, PL 5.10 Item 11.
2.
Raise the DADH.
Torsion spring.
WARNING
Use safe handling procedures when removing the module, GP 16. The module is heavy.
Document finger.
NOTE: The DADH weight is 13Kg (29lb.).
Figure 3 Torsion spring and document finger
February 2013
4-57
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.18, REP 5.19
3.
REP 5.20 Mylar Guide Strip
Remove the DADH from the machine, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
2
Remove
the DADH.
1.
Raise the DADH.
2.
Open the baffle assembly, PL 5.30 Item 14.
3.
Remove the old mylar guide strip, PL 5.30 Item 12.
4.
Use cleaning fluid to remove any contamination from the baffle assembly.
Replacement
1.
Remove the 3 backing strips from the pressure sensitive adhesive tape on the mylar
guide.
2.
Adhere the mylar guide to the baffle assembly, Figure 1.
Remove 2 thumbscrews.
1
Bias the corner of the
mylar guide with the edge
of the baffle assembly.
Figure 1 DADH removal
2
Position the centre of the
mylar guide over the
centre rib.
Replacement
1.
2.
If a new DADH is installed, perform the steps that follow:

a.
Attach the document pad, refer to ADJ 5.6.
b.
Reset the DADH feed count to zero. Refer to dC135 CRU / HFSI Status.
c.
DADH height adjustment, ADJ 5.2.
d.
DADH registration adjustment, ADJ 5.5.
e.
DADH skew adjustment, ADJ 5.3.
Figure 1 Mylar guide
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 5.19, REP 5.20
February 2013
4-58
REP 10.1 Transfix Roller
5.

Removal
Prepare to remove transfix roll, Figure 1.

NOTE: It may be necessary to use a screwdriver to manually rotate the front and rear
transfix motor shafts to move the transfix roller away from the drum.
WARNING
Location of the front

transfix motor shaft. Rear
shaft in similar position at
rear.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove the exit paper path, REP 10.20.
2.
Remove the cleaning unit, refer to REP 94.1.
3.
Unlock the stripper gate, GP 31 and fully lower/open the gate. This will lower and cover
the stripper blade with its protective guard.
4.
Remove the transfix blade, REP 10.6.
1
Remove 3 screws and
ground lead.
CAUTION
Support the weight at the rear of the transfix roll to avoid damage to the drum.
CAUTION
Make sure all three screws are moved to the adjacent threaded holes during removal. Leaving
one screw in the original position, while attempting to remove the roller with the other two
screws, can break a tab on the transfix roller. Move the screws back over to the larger, nonthreaded holes for installation.
February 2013
4-59
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.1
6.
REP 10.2 Front Transfix Linkage and Gear Kit
Remove transfix roller, Figure 2.

Removal
1
Take note of the cautions
above.
WARNING
2
Install the 3 screws into the
adjacent threaded holes.
Gradually tighten each screw
in sequence to remove the
bearing evenly.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove the transfix roller, REP 10.1.
2.
Remove the front drum shroud, PL 94.20 Item 7.
3.
Prepare to remove the front plate, Figure 1.
3
Remove the transfix roller
from the front
2
Remove 2
long screws
and washers.
Figure 2 Transfix roll removal
Replacement
1.
2.
Clean the transfix roller and housing with a dry cloth. Remove all grease that is not necessary.
NOTE: High pressure bearing grease, PL 26.11 Item 3, is used on the outside diameter of
the transfix roller bearing holder. During normal removal and replacement the existing
bearing grease used during manufacture will be sufficient. Only apply grease when both
sides of any bearing surface are being replaced, or if the surfaces have been wiped clean.
Apply the grease very sparingly.
3.
Ensure that the ground lead between the top transfix roller screw and the front drum
frame is reconnected.
1
Remove 3 T30 screws.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.1, REP 10.2
February 2013
4-60
4.
Remove the front plate, Figure 2.
5.
Prepare to remove transfix linkage and gear, Figure 3.
1
Remove 4 screws
2
Remove 4
screws
3
Remove 2
screws.
1
Support the weight of the
transfix linkage and gear.
Refer to note.
Disconnect the front transfix flexure

Remove the front plate. encoder harness and remove the cover.
Push the bearing out.
Figure 2 Front plate removal

NOTE: The transfix linkage and gear is shown in Figure 5.
February 2013
4-61
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.2
6.
Remove the transfix linkage and gear, Figure 4.
Figure 5 Transfix linkage
Remove the transfix

linkage and gear.
Remove the retract

spring.
Figure 4 Transfix linkage removal

7.
The removed transfix linkage is shown in Figure 5.
Replacement
1.
2.
Before installing the new transfix linkage, use the transfix roller retaining screws to pre tap the three transfix roller retaining holes in the linkage. This will prevent metal shavings
from falling down into the machine during transfix roller installation.
3.
Ensure that the arm is in the correct position relative to the gear.
4.
Ensure that the spring is re-installed.
5.
Ensure that the ground lead between the top transfix roller screw and the front drum
frame is reconnected.
6.
Cross out the old calibration value on the calibration label, Figure 6.
7.
Write the new linkage calibration value on the calibration label, Figure 6.

rear transfix values

8.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.2
Perform dC978 Transfix Calibration Values and load the correct values for the new linkage.
February 2013
4-62
REP 10.3 Rear Transfix Linkage and Gear Kit
6.
Disconnect harnesses, Figure 2.

Removal
1
Disconnect the ground
lead
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove the drum fan shroud, PL 94.20 Item 5.
2.
Remove the drum drive motor and belt, REP 91.24.
3.
Remove the post transfix motor (M4) and gearbox, REP 10.8.
4.
Remove the drum pulley, REP 91.34.
5.
Remove the fan assembly mount, Figure 1.
Disconnect 2 PJs from the motor
Disconnect 2 PJs
1
Remove 5 screws marked A to
remove the fan assembly
mount
Figure 1 Fan mount removal
February 2013
4-63
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.3
7.
Remove 3 gears, Figure 3.
8.
Remove 2 screws and 2 bushes, Figure 4.
3
Remove 1 long screw and 1
bush
2
Remove 2 KL-clips and
2 bushes
1
Remove 1 long screw and 1 bush
1
Remove 3 KL-clips and 3 gears
Figure 3 Gear removal
Figure 4 Screw and bush removal
CAUTION
CAUTION
The bushes might remain in place after the screws are removed. Take care not to drop the
bushes when the rear outer frame is removed.
The rear compound gear can fall away from the rear plate when the rear outer frame is
removed. Take care not to drop the rear compound gear.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.3
February 2013
4-64
9.
Remove the rear outer frame, Figure 5.
10. Prepare to remove the rear transfix linkage and gear, Figure 6.
5
Disconnect the
harnesses from
both sides of
the mount
4
Remove the
rear outer
frame from the
machine. Take
care not to drop
the gear
1
Remove 1
screw to
remove the
lever mount
Remove 6 screws marked A
Remove 3 screws
marked B
Support the weight of the rear

transfix linkage and gear.
Push the bearing out.
Figure 5 Rear outer frame removal
February 2013
4-65
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.3
11. Remove the rear transfix linkage and gear, Figure 7.
Replacement
1.

NOTE: Before tightening the screws, Figure 5, it may be necessary to position the bushes
removed in Figure 4.
2.
Ensure that the arm is in the correct position relative to the gear.
3.
Ensure that the spring is re-installed.
4.
Cross out the old calibration value from the calibration label on the front outer frame, PL
10.20 Item 19, Figure 8.

rear transfix calibration values
Remove the rear transfix linkage
Remove the retract spring
5.
Write the calibration values of the new linkage on the calibration label.
6.
Perform dC978 Transfix Calibration Values and load the correct values for the new linkage.
Figure 7 Rear transfix linkage removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.3
February 2013
4-66
REP 10.4 Front Transfix Motor
REP 10.5 Rear Transfix Motor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
Remove the front transfix motor, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the rear transfix motor, Figure 1.
Figure 1 Front transfix motor removal
Figure 1 Rear transfix motor removal
Replacement
Replacement
1.
1.
Remove screws
Disconnect 2 harnesses. marked A then remove
the motor.
Remove screws
1
Disconnect 2 harnesses. marked A, then remove
the motor.
February 2013
4-67
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.4, REP 10.5
REP 10.6 Transfix Blade
Replacement

Removal
1.
Insert the transfix blade into the machine, Figure 2.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not hit the drum. Use care when you are working near the drum. The drum can be damaged
easily, which will cause print quality defects.
1.
2.
3.
Open the stripper gate, GP 31.
4.
Remove the transfix blade, Figure 1.
1
Insert the tabs on the transfix
blade into the slots on the
machine frame
Figure 2 Transfix blade replacement

2.
Raise the front of the transfix blade until it interfaces with the pins in the front machine
frame.
CAUTION
Be careful when the self tapping screw is installed into a plastic component. Do not over
tighten.
3.
1
Remove the screw.
Install the screw removed in Figure 1.
4.
Close the stripper gate, GP 31.
5.
If a new transfix stripper assembly is installed, reset the transfix stripper count to zero.
Refer to dC135 CRU / HFSI Status.
Remove transfix blade by

pulling it down.
Figure 1 Transfix blade removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.6
February 2013
4-68
REP 10.7 Pre Transfix Sensor

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
February 2013
4-69
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.7
3.
Remove the lower platelet assembly, Figure 1.
Horizontal paper path
2
Raise the cover assembly
and heat shield.
1
To release the cover assembly.
Turn the dial to align the hole
on the dial with the arrow as
shown.
3
Remove the screw
through the hole in the
frame.
5
Remove the lower
platelet assembly.
Front frame
4
Disconnect the connector.
Figure 1 Remove lower platelet assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.7
February 2013
4-70
4.
REP 10.8 Post Transfix Motor (M4) and Gearbox
Remove the air pump cover, Figure 2.

Removal
1
Release the clips marked A to
remove the cover.
WARNING
WARNING
Figure 2 Air pump cover removal

5.
Remove the pre transfix sensor, Figure 3.
1.
2.
Remove drum fan shroud, PL 94.20 Item 5.
3.
Remove the drum motor and drive belt, REP 91.24.
4.
Remove the post transfix motor (M4) (PL 10.10 Item 5) and gearbox (PL 10.10 Item 4),
Figure 1.
Disconnect the harness.
Use the harness to remove

the sensor through the slot.
1
Release the sensor clips.
Figure 3 Sensor removal
Disconnect harness.
2
Remove the screws marked A.
Replacement
1.
2.
If the registration / preheat assembly is removed. Perform the dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration.
Figure 1 Drive motor (M4) and gearbox
Replacement
February 2013
4-71
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.7, REP 10.8
REP 10.9 Stripper Solenoid Assembly
Replacement

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Manually unlock the stripper gate and baffle assembly, refer to GP 31.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove stripper solenoid, Figure 1.
2
Disconnect the inline connector,
then remove the solenoid assembly.
1
Figure 1 Stripper solenoid removal

Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.9
February 2013
4-72
REP 10.10 Roller Drive J
4.
Remove the 25T gear and bearing, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
Unlock and fully open the stripper gate. GP 31.
3.
1
Remove the e-clips,
gear and bearing.
February 2013
4-73
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.10
5.
Lower the upper baffle, Figure 2.
2
Loosen screw by two
turns then lower the baffle.
6.
Remove roller drive J, Figure 3.
Remove screw
Remove the e-clip and

bearing.
Figure 2 Lower the upper baffle
2
Remove roller drive J.
Figure 3 Roller removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.10
February 2013
4-74
REP 10.11 Roller Drive L
4.
Remove the 25T gear and rear bearing, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Unlock and fully open the stripper gate. GP 31.
3.
1
Remove the KL-clip,
gear and bearing.
Figure 1 Gear and bearing removal
February 2013
4-75
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.11
5.
Lower the upper baffle, Figure 2.
6.
Loosen the screw by two

turns then lower the baffle.
Remove screw
Remove the roller drive L, Figure 3.
1
Remove e-clip and bearing.
Figure 2 Lower the upper baffle
2
Remove roller drive L.
Figure 3 Roller removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.11
February 2013
4-76
REP 10.12 Exit / Duplex Solenoid
2.
Open the exit transport jam clearance door, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1
Open the jam clearance door by
releasing the catch.
Figure 1 Open jam clearance door

3.
Remove diverter gate, REP 10.13.
February 2013
4-77
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.12
4.
Remove the paper guide, Figure 2.
5.
Remove the exit/duplex solenoid, Figure 3.
1
With the jam clearance door opened, release the
3 retaining tabs. Then remove the inner paper
guide.
Remove the screw and ground lead.
Figure 3 Solenoid removal
Figure 2 Paper guide removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.12
February 2013
4-78
REP 10.13 Diverter Gate
2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1
February 2013
4-79
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.13
3.
Remove the ground lead, Figure 2.
4.
Remove the diverter gate from the top exit baffle, Figure 3.
1
Remove the screw and ground
lead.
Repairs/Adjustments
Slide to release the guide
Carefully release the tab.
Figure 3 Release the diverter gate
Figure 2 Ground screw removal
REP 10.13
February 2013
4-80
5.
Remove the exit / duplex solenoid from the diverter gate assembly, Figure 4.
REP 10.14 Exit Motor (M5)

Parts List on PL 10.15 Item 11
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the drive gears, Figure 1.
1
Remove 2 screws release the solenoid from the diverter guide.
Figure 4 Remove exit / duplex solenoid
Replacement
1
Remove 2 gears then 2 drive belts.
February 2013
4-81
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.13, REP 10.14
3.
Release the exit motor, Figure 2.
4.
Remove the exit motor, Figure 3.
1
Disconnect the harness then
remove the motor.
1
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 2 Motor release
Figure 3 Motor removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.14
February 2013
4-82
REP 10.15 Duplex Start Sensor (13)
4.
Remove the duplex sensor, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Remove the sensor then

disconnect the harness.
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the diverter gate, REP 10.13.
3.
1
guide.

February 2013
4-83
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.15
Replacement
REP 10.16 Exit Sensor (15)
1.
2.
Ensure that the lugs on the sensor are located correctly in the sensor holder, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1
Check the lugs secures the sensor in position
Figure 3 Sensor location
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.15, REP 10.16
February 2013
4-84
2.
3.
Remove the sensor cover, Figure 2.
1
Release 2 cover
retainers.
Remove the sensor

cover.
Release 2 cover retainers.
1
Figure 2 Cover removal
February 2013
4-85
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.16
4.
1
Check the lugs secure the sensor in position
Figure 4 Sensor location
1
Remove the exit sensor then
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure that the lugs on the sensor are located correctly in the sensor holder, Figure 4.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.16
February 2013
4-86
REP 10.17 Roller Nip P
3.
Remove roller nip P, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the belt and pulley, Figure 1.
2
Remove the roller nip P.
1
Remove the e-clip and bearing.
Figure 2 Roller nip removal
Replacement
1
Remove the e-clip, gear and drive belt.
Figure 1 Belt and pulley removal
February 2013
4-87
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.17
REP 10.18 Roller Nip N
3.
Prepare to remove the roller nip N, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
1
Remove 2 screws.
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the mounting plate, Figure 1.
2
Loosen screw.
Roller nip N housing.
3
Carefully release the gear
tangs, then remove the gear,
belt and pulley.
4
Remove screw.
1
Remove 3 screws then the
mounting plate.
Belt.
Pulley.
Figure 1 Mounting plate removal

NOTE: Carefully remove the roller nip N housing from the exit paper path assembly. The
springs and nip idlers will be ejected.
Remove screw.
Loosen screw.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.18
February 2013
4-88
4.
REP 10.19 Exit Illuminator PWB
Remove roller nip N, Figure 3.
3
Remove the cover
and roller nip N.
2

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
A
A
1.
2.
Remove diverter gate, REP 10.13.
3.
1
guide.
Correct orientation of spring

and nip idler assembly.
Nip idler assembly.
Spring.
Figure 3 Roller nip N removal
Replacement
February 2013
4-89
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.18, REP 10.19
4.
REP 10.20 Exit Paper Path
Remove the exit illuminator PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Release the exit illuminator PWB

from the securing tag, then remove
it.
1.
2.
3.
Remove the finisher.
4.
Remove the right cover, PL 81.10 Item 3.
5.
Remove handle 4a, Figure 1.
Figure 2 LED PWB removal
Replacement
1
Remove the screw then handle 4a.
Figure 1 Handle 4a removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.19, REP 10.20
February 2013
4-90
6.
Replacement
Remove the exit paper path, Figure 2.
1.
2.
Ensure that the exit module counter balance spring is located in the keeper, Figure 3.
Keeper
2
Remove the exit paper path
1
Counter balance spring
Figure 2 Exit paper path removal

Figure 3 Correct location (viewed at the rear)
February 2013
4-91
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.20
3.
REP 10.21 Stripper Blade, Gate and Baffle
Install the exit path, Figure 4.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
3
1
Install the remaining screws

marked C in any order
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the stripper blade retaining tool from the base of the machine, refer to Figure 4.
5.
Use the stripper blade retaining tool to secure the stripper blade in the safe removal position, Figure 1.
2
Install screw B
Install screw A
Figure 4 Securing the exit path

4.
Transfer the finisher docking actuator, PL 12.100 Item 17, if present, from the old exit
paper path assembly to the new exit paper path assembly.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.20, REP 10.21
February 2013
4-92
6.
Remove the stripper blade with the stripper blade retaining tool attached, Figure 2.
1
Squeeze as indicated to open the
stripper blade retaining tool.
2
Position the stripper blade retaining
tool over the stripper blade and
under the cover.
1
Depress the
catch to
release the
stripper
shaft.
Stripper blade retaining

tool
Stripper blade
END VIEW
Cover
2
Withdraw the shaft then remove the stripper blade with the retaining tool
attached.
Figure 2 Stripper blade removal
Stripper blade and

retaining tool
Figure 1 Secure the stripper blade
February 2013
4-93
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.21
7.
Remove the stripper gate and baffle, Figure 3.
3.
After the stripper blade has been installed, remove the stripper blade retaining tool and
store the tool in the base of the machine, Figure 4.
4.
Open and close the stripper baffle several times. Check that the blade guard is correctly
engaged and covering the blade when the baffle is open. If the blade is exposed then
return to Step 4 in the removal process and rectify the problem.
5.
The old stripper blade must be returned with the retaining tool attached.
6.
Ensure that the old stripper blade is removed from the customers site for safe disposal.
1
Lift tab then withdraw
the gate and baffle shaft
from the front.
NOTE: This shaft is
identified by 5 grooves
in the front and is longer
in length than the stripper blade shaft.
Remove the stripper gate

and baffle assembly.
Install the stripper blade retaining tool in the machine

Figure 4 Stripper blade retaining tool
Figure 3 Strip gate and baffle removal
Replacement
WARNING
Do not leave an old stripper blade at the customers site.
1.
2.
The new stripper blade will have a retaining tool already attached.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.21
February 2013
4-94
REP 10.22 Upper Baffle
4.
Prepare to remove the upper baffle, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
1
Disconnect 3 sensors and LED PWB.
5.
Unlock and fully open the stripper gate, GP 31.
February 2013
4-95
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.22
6.
REP 10.23 Stripper Guide Latch Cam Shaft
Remove the upper baffle, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Unlock and fully open the stripper gate, GP 31.
4.
5.
Remove the M4 motor and gearbox, REP 10.8.
1
Remove 2 screws then
remove the baffle.
Figure 2 Remove upper baffle
Replacement
1.
2.
If the upper baffle is cleaned, or a new upper baffle is installed, reset the upper JL baffle
count to zero. Refer to dC135 CRU / HFSI Status.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.22, REP 10.23
February 2013
4-96
6.
Remove the centre 25T gear, Figure 1.
2
Unhook the spring and push the latch fork
away from the shaft.
3
Remove the e-clip then the shaft.
1
Remove the
KL-clip, gear
and bearing.
1
Unhook the spring and
push the latch fork away
from the shaft.
7.
Remove the stripper guide latch cam shaft, Figure 2.
Figure 2 Shaft removal
Replacement
1.
February 2013
4-97
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.23
REP 10.24 Front and Rear Flexure Encoder

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Remove the
motor and
gearbox
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front cover and front flexure encoder, Figure 1.
Disconnect motor harness
Remove 3 screws
Figure 2 Post transfix motor and gearbox

6.
Remove the rear flexure encoder, Figure 3.
1
Remove 2 screws
3
Remove the sensor
2
Disconnect the harness
3
Remove the encoder
Figure 1 Front flexure encoder

4.
5.
Remove the post transfix motor (M4) and gearbox, Figure 2.
2
Remove 2 screws
1
Figure 3 Rear flexure encoder
Replacement
CAUTION
Take care not to damage or contaminate the flexure encoder.
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 10.24
February 2013
4-98
REP 12.1-110 LCSS Covers
Remove the covers, Figure 1.
Parts List on PL 12.10.

Removal
NOTE: Removing the top cover first will allow easy removal of the front and rear covers.
WARNING
Remove the top

cover.
WARNING
Remove the rear cover

assembly.
Open the exit cover,

remove two screws.
5
3
Open the front door,

remove four screws.
Remove the front door

cover assembly.
Remove two screws.
Figure 1 Removing the covers
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the covers.
February 2013
4-99
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.1-110
REP 12.2-110 Input Drive Belt and Paper Entry Transport

Motor
Removal
Replacement
1.
Install the motor screws, but do not tighten.
3.
Install the spring
4.
Rotate the shaft by hand to ensure the belt runs smoothly over the pulleys and allow the
spring to tension the belt, ADJ 12.4-110.
WARNING
Place the belt around the pulleys.
2.
5.
Tighten the motor screws and re-connect the harness.
6.
Install the LCSS rear cover, REP 12.1-110.
WARNING
1.
Remove the LCSS rear cover, REP 12.1-110.
2.
Remove the motor and drive belt, Figure 1.
4
Remove the drive
belt.
3
Remove 2 screws
and motor
Remove the
spring.
Disconnect the
motor harness.
Figure 1 Removing the drive belt
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.2-110
February 2013
4-100
REP 12.3-110 Intermediate Paper Drive Belt
Replacement

Removal
1.
Lubricate the belt tensioner, refer to ADJ 4.1.
2.
Install the belt over the pulleys, ensuring that the belt is on all five pulleys.
NOTE: Two of the pulleys are free to slide along the shaft. Ensure the belt is correctly
located on these pulleys.
WARNING
3.
WARNING
1.
Remove the LCSS rear cover REP 12.1-110.
2.
Remove the intermediate paper drive belt, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect the spring.
4
Remove the drive belt.
Disconnect PJ307.
Disconnect the bulkhead connector.
February 2013
4-101
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.3-110
REP 12.4-110 Paper Output Drive Belt and Transport Motor

2

Removal
Remove the
motor and
belt.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the LCSS rear cover, REP 12.1-110.
2.
Remove the intermediate drive belt, REP 12.3-110.
3.
Remove the output drive belt and motor, Figure 1.
3
Support the motor
and remove three
screws.
2
Remove the
belt tensioner
spring.
1
Disconnect PJ309.
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.4-110
Install the belt over the pulleys.

Install the motor pivot shouldered screw and fully tighten.
Install the two motor mounting bracket securing screws but do not tighten them.
Install the belt tensioner spring.
Rotate the belt by hand to allow the spring to tension the belt, ADJ 12.4-110. Tighten the
screws.
Install the intermediate drive belt, REP 12.3-110.
February 2013
4-102
REP 12.5-110 Bin 1 Drive Belts

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the LCSS front and rear covers, REP 12.1-110.
February 2013
4-103
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.5-110
2.
Remove the bin 1 drive belt (rear) Figure 1.
NOTE: Keep all of the components removed as a set. The set of rear frame components
are different from the front frame set.
7
Remove 2 screws
6
Remove 3 screws and
release the lower and middle
PWB standoffs, leaving the
PWB attached by only the top
standoff.
8
Move motor assembly to
the right
9
Remove 2 screws and
upper pulley.
10
Release the tensioner spring.
Disconnect PJ316 and release the belt

from behind the PWB and drive pulley.
11
Remove screw and
remove the belt clamp.
Disconnect PJ318.
Fully lower bin 1.
12
Remove 2 screws, lower
pulley and drive belt.
3
2
Remove E-clip and bearing.
Remove 3 screws, remove

bracket with Bin 1 elevator
motor.
Figure 1 Bin 1 drive belt (rear)
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.5-110
February 2013
4-104
3.
Replacement
Remove the bin 1 drive belt (front) Figure 2.
NOTE: Ensure the correct set of components are used for each side of the LCSS.
1.
If not already lowered,

fully lower bin 1, refer to
figure 1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the bin 1 drive belts.

NOTE: The bin 1 level can critically affect the overall stack registration. Refer to ADJ
12.1-110 if adjustment is necessary.
2.
Install the front and rear covers REP 12.1-110.
5
Remove 2 screws, upper
pulley and drive belt.
4
Remove screw and
front belt clamp.
3
Remove two screws
and lower pulley.
2
Release the tensioner spring.
Figure 2 Bin 1 drive belt (front)
February 2013
4-105
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.5-110
REP 12.6-110 Tamper Assembly
3.
Figure 2, remove the tamper assembly.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the LCSS covers REP 12.1-110.
2.
Prepare to remove the tamper assembly Figure 1.
Release the harness from the retainer

next to the paddle motor assembly, PL
12.25 Item 10.
Release the harness

from all retainers along
the tamper assembly.
1
Remove 2 screws
2
Lift the tamper
assembly upwards
and remove from the
LCSS
Disconnect the tamper

motors harnesses.
1
Disconnect 4 sensor harnesses marked A and
release the harnesses from the retainers.
Figure 2 Removing the tamper assembly
Figure 1 Preparing the tamper assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.6-110
February 2013
4-106
Replacement
REP 12.7-110 Hole Punch Unit, Motor and Sensors
NOTE: Ensure that the slots in the tamper assembly locate correctly in the LCSS frame.

Removal
NOTE: Ensure that the sensors are correctly located in the tamper assembly, they are easily
mis-located when being re-connected to the harnesses.
NOTE: Ensure that all connectors in the harness over the tamper assembly are securely connected.
WARNING
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the tamper assembly.
WARNING
1.
Remove the LCSS covers, REP 12.1-110.
2.
Remove and empty the chad bin, PL 12.20 Item 4.
February 2013
4-107
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.6-110, REP 12.7-110
3.
Remove the hole punch unit, motor assembly and sensors, Figure 1.
2
Remove 2 screws.
1
Remove the thumb
screw and slide out
the punch unit.
3
Disconnect the
motor harness and
remove the hole
punch motor
assembly.
7
4
Remove the screw securing the sensor bracket. Disconnect the harnesses and remove the bracket assembly.
Press the tabs together to remove the punch head
home and punch head present sensors.
Remove 2 screws,
remove sensors
and disconnect the
harnesses.
5
Disconnect
the PJ.
6
Remove screw and slide out the bracket.
Figure 1 Hole punch unit, motor and sensors
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.7-110
February 2013
4-108
Replacement
REP 12.8-110 Stapler Traverse Assembly
1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the hole punch unit, motor assembly and sensors.
2.
If necessary, perform ADJ 12.3-110 Hole Punch Position.

Removal
NOTE: When installing the hole punch motor assembly, ensure that the belt tensioner arm
does not get trapped behind the motor assembly plate.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Un-dock the LCSS, REP 12.13-110.
2.
Remove the rear cover and front door cover assembly, REP 12.1-110.
3.
Manually move the ejector, PL 12.50 Item 1 fully to the right.
4.
Figure 1, Disconnect the harness.
1
Disconnect the group
of 4 connectors.
2
Release the harness
from the clip.
NOTE: For clarity the entry

guide cover (PL12.10 item 3)
has been omitted from this
illustration.
Figure 1 Harness disconnection
February 2013
4-109
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.7-110, REP 12.8-110
REP 12.9-110 Staple Head Unit
CAUTION
When removing and replacing the stapler traverse assembly, support the weight of the assembly underneath the stapler and take care not to damage wiring.
5.
Remove the stapler traverse assembly, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Remove 2 screws.
SEE CAUTION
Remove screw.
SEE CAUTION
1.
Remove the stapler traverse assembly, REP 12.8-110.
2.
Place the stapler traverse unit upside-down
3
Remove the stapler
traverse assembly.
SEE CAUTION.
Figure 2 Removing the stapler traverse assembly
Replacement
1.
Ensure the stapling traverse assembly is engaged on the front and rear locating dowels.
2.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the stapling unit.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.8-110, REP 12.9-110
February 2013
4-110
3.
REP 12.10-110 Ejector Assembly Sensors
Remove the staple head unit from the stapling unit Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
A
A
1
Remove 4 screws
marked A then
remove the stapler
cover.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Disconnect the two harnesses between the LCSS and the machine.
2.
Un-dock the LCSS, REP 12.13-110 and move it away from the machine.
3.
Ensure the stapling unit is at the home position.
4.
If necessary, manually move the ejector to the left position.
2
Disconnect the
harnesses.
3
Remove the staple head unit.
Figure 1 Removing the staple head unit
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the staple head unit.
February 2013
4-111
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.9-110, REP 12.10-110
5.
Figure 1, remove the ejector assembly.
6.
Remove the appropriate sensor by releasing the sensor tabs and disconnecting the harness.
Replacement
CAUTION
When installing the ejector assembly onto the LCSS, ensure that the ejector fingers do not
damage the wiring to the staple head unit.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the eject assembly or sensors.
Ejector motor encoder
sensor. Remove 2
screws and cover to
access the sensor
3
Lower the ejector
assembly, disengage
the dowels from the
mounting blocks and
remove.
Ejector out sensor

Q12-185
Ejector home sensor
Q12-184
1
Disconnect 2 bulkhead
connectors.
2
Remove 3 screws.
Figure 1 Removing the ejector assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.10-110
February 2013
4-112
REP 12.11-110 Bin 1 Upper Level Sensor
2.
Remove the bin 1 upper level sensor, Figure 1.

Removal
4
Release the
sensor and
disconnect
harness.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the ejector assembly, REP 12.10-110.
3
Remove 2 screws,
remove sensor support
assembly.
2
Disconnect connector.
1
Remove two screws
and harness retainers.
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the bin 1 level sensor.
February 2013
4-113
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.11-110
REP 12.12-110 Paddle Wheel Shaft Assembly
4.
Figure 1, remove the paddle motor assembly.

Removal
1
Disconnect 2
harnesses
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the stapler traverse assembly, REP 12.8-110.
2.
Remove the tamper assembly, REP 12.6-110.
3.
Remove bin 1, PL 12.10 Item 10.
2
3
Release the
harness from
the retainer
Remove 2
screws
4
Remove the
motor assembly
Figure 1 Paddle motor assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.12-110
February 2013
4-114
5.
Figure 2, prepare the rear components.
6.
Figure 3, prepare the front components.
3
Remove the E-clip
and bearing
2
Remove the
gear and flag
assembly
2
Remove 2
screws
1
Remove the E-clip
4
Remove 3 screws
1
Remove E-clip and bearing
Figure 2 Rear preparation
Figure 3 Front preparation

7.
Ensure that the compiler ejector is in the home position (fully to the left).
February 2013
4-115
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.12-110
8.
Figure 4, remove the paddle wheel shaft assembly.
5.
Install the flag and E-clip, refer to Figure 2.
6.
Figure 5, ensure the paddles and flag are correctly aligned.
1
Align paddles with the output cover
2
Slide shaft assembly
to the rear
3
Remove the
shaft assembly
2
Ensure the encoder flag is within the sensor
Figure 5 Paddle alignment
7.
Install the motor assembly, refer to Figure 1.
Move the output

cover to the right
8.
Test the operation of the paddle roll, enter dC330, output code 12-238. When the code is
cancelled the paddles must stop with both rubber blades inside of the output cover. If necessary, check that the gear assembly and flag are correctly located on the D flats.
Figure 4 Paddle wheel shaft removal
Replacement
1.
Install the paddle wheel shaft, front bearing and E-clip, refer to Figure 3.
2.
Install the output cover, refer to Figure 4.
3.
Install the rear bearing and E-clip, refer to Figure 2.
4.
Install the gear and flag assembly, refer to Figure 2, ensuring that the gear locates onto
the large D flat and the flag locates on the small D flat.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.12-110
February 2013
4-116
REP 12.13-110 LCSS Un-Docking
3.
Figure 1, release the LCSS link bracket assembly.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
If necessary, disconnect the harnesses between the LCSS and the machine.
2.
Open the LCSS front door.
1
Press the latch block forward
to release both latches.
2
Roll the LCSS away from
the machine.
Figure 1 LCSS link bracket assembly
Replacement
Line up the LCSS latches to the machine apertures then push the two units firmly together until
they latch.
February 2013
4-117
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.13-110
REP 12.14-110 LCSS PWB
REP 12.15-110 Entry Guide Cover

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not install a new LCSS PWB until the cause of the damage to the old LCSS PWB has been
determined, go to 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP.
1.
Remove the LCSS top cover, front cover and rear cover, REP 12.1-110.
2.
3.
Disconnect the harness to the entry sensor, PL 12.70 Item 3, at the rear frame.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the LCSS
PWB.
1.
Remove the LCSS rear cover assembly, REP 12.1-110.
2.
Disconnect all harness connectors from the LCSS PWB.
3.
Remove the three screws and release the three standoffs securing the LCSS PWB.
Replacement
NOTE: Before replacing the LCSS rear cover assembly, perform 12F-110 LCSS PWB DIP
Switch Settings RAP.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the LCSS PWB.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.14-110, REP 12.15-110
February 2013
4-118
4.
Replacement
Figure 1, remove the entry guide cover.
1.
Bias the entry guide cover away from the paper guide when you tighten the screws.
2.
The clearance between the entry guide cover and the paper guide must be a minimum of
1 mm. Refer to Figure 2.
NOTE: If the clearance is less than 1 mm, then install a new entry guide cover.
Check for a
minimum
clearance of 1
mm between
the entry
guide cover
and the paper
guide.
3
Remove the entry
guide cover.
2
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 2 Entry guide cover clearance

3.
Run copies through the output device, if possible use heavy weight paper or labels.
Check for marks on the print and for damage to the paper. If there are no marks or damage then install the covers.
1
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 1 Entry guide cover removal
February 2013
4-119
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.15-110
REP 12.16-110 Docking Latch Assembly
4.
Figure 2, remove the docking latch assembly.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
Release the harness retainers.
WARNING
1.
Remove the front and rear covers, REP 12.1-110.
2.
3.
Figure 1, prepare to remove the docking latch assembly.
Disconnect
the switch
harness.
Flanged
hole
3
Remove 2
screws.
4
Remove the latch
assembly.
Figure 2 Latch assembly removal.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the docking latch assembly.
CAUTION
2
Remove 2 screws.
Ensure that the front and rear harness are routed through the flanged holes, refer to Figure 1
and Figure 2.
Flanged hole
1
Disconnect P/J302.
Figure 1 Prepare to remove the latch.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.16-110
February 2013
4-120
REP 12.17-110 Ejector Belt
2.
Figure 1, remove the ejector belt.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the ejector assembly, refer to REP 12.10-110.
1
Remove the clip.
Belt grip.
3
Remove the pulley
then the ejector belt.
2
Remove the E-clip.
Figure 1 Remove the ejector belt
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure that the ejector belt is correctly engaged with the belt grip on the ejector assembly before the clip is reinstalled. Refer to
Figure 1.
February 2013
4-121
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.17-110
REP 12.18-110 Paddles

Removal
WARNING
NOTE: This procedure shows the replacement of the paddles with the paddle wheel shaft
assembly installed. If necessary, remove the paddle wheel shaft assembly before replacing the
paddles. Refer to REP 12.12-110.
1.
If necessary, lower bin 1. Enter code dC330 12-242 bin 1 elevator motor cycle. Press stop
when the bin has lowered.
2.
Rotate the paddle until the two rubber blades are visible.
CAUTION
To ensure that the correct home position of the paddle wheel shaft is maintained, install the
new paddle wheels one at a time.
3.
Squeeze the two rubber blades together and pull to remove the paddle wheel from the
shaft, Figure 1.
Figure 1 Paddle removal
Replacement
1.
Hold the paddle wheel by the two rubber blades and clip onto the shaft.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.18-110
February 2013
4-122
REP 12.1-171 HVF Covers

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE: All major HVF covers are dealt with in this procedure, only remove the covers listed for
the procedure that you are performing.
Remove the HVF covers as follows:
1.
Remove the front door, Figure 1. If required, remove 5 screws to separate the door support from the front door.
1
Remove the hinge pin.
Front cover
Locating tabs
2
Remove the hinge pin (2 places).
3
Remove the front door.
Figure 1 Front door removal
February 2013
4-123
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.1-171
2.
Remove the top cover, Figure 2.
3.
Remove the front cover, Figure 3.
NOTE: In step 1 remove the Inserter unit if fitted (See REP 12.82-171), or remove the
Inserter removable cover, PL 12.100 Item 8.
NOTE: The top cover must be removed before removing the front cover.
4
Remove 2
screws.
3
Lift the top tray to
access 2 screws.
5
Remove the top cover.
2
Remove 2
screws.
Remove the
front cover.
Remove 6
screws.
Remove the inserter cover to

access 2 screws (see note).
2
Lift the cover to disengage the bottom
locating tabs from the frame.
Figure 3 Front cover removal
Figure 2 Top cover removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.1-171
February 2013
4-124
4.
Remove the rear cover, Figure 4.
NOTE: The top cover must be removed before removing the rear cover.
Remove 3 screws
at the rear.
2
Remove 3 screws
at the front.
3
Remove the vent
cover.
2
Remove 3
screws.
1
Remove 2
screws.
3
4
Remove the rear cover.
Lift the rear cover to disengage

the bottom locating tabs from
the frame.
4
Remove
3 screws.
Figure 4 Rear cover removal

5.
Remove the vent cover and foot cover, Figure 5. To provide enough room to remove the
vent cover, undock the HVF, REP 12.13-171.
NOTE: The top front cover and rear cover must be removed before removing the vent
cover and foot cover.
NOTE: The foot cover is not installed if the tri-folder option is installed.
5
Remove the
foot cover.
Figure 5 Vent and foot covers removal
February 2013
4-125
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.1-171
Replacement
REP 12.2-171 HVF Stapler Assembly
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removal
Depending on the installed options and the covers removed, refit covers in the following
sequence:
1.
Vent cover, PL 12.100 Item 6.
2.
Foot cover (if no tri-folder installed), PL
3.
Rear cover, PL 12.100 Item 5.
4.
Front cover, PL 12.100 Item 2.
5.
Top cover, PL 12.100 Item 1.
6.
Inserter cover (if no inserter installed). PL 12.100 Item 8.
7.
Front door, PL 12.100 Item 3.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Slide the HVF away from the machine.
2.
Remove the HVF front door, REP 12.1-171.
3.
Remove the HVF top cover, REP 12.1-171.
4.
Remove the HVF front cover, REP 12.1-171.
5.
Remove the rear cover, REP 12.1-171.
6.
Figure 1. At the rear of the HVF, disconnect three connectors and remove one screw
securing the grounding strap.
Disconnect three PJs.
Remove grounding
strip screw.
REAR VIEW
Figure 1 Disconnect PJs and remove screw
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.1-171, REP 12.2-171
February 2013
4-126
7.
Figure 2. With the power cord disconnected, reach behind the stapler and move the ejector unit to the out position, by turning the encoder of the ejector unit motor, MOT12-236 in
the direction indicated.
8.
Figure 3. Remove the stapler assembly.
1
Remove the screw.
2
Pull and slide the stapler
assembly forward.
1
Move stapler to gain
access.
Turn the encoder wheel.

Figure 3 Removing the stapler assembly.
Figure 2 Move ejector to the out position
Replacement
NOTE: The ejector unit returns to the home position when the HVF is initialized.
1.
Slide the stapler assembly into the tray, taking care not to trap the earth wire at the rear.
2.
February 2013
4-127
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.2-171
REP 12.3-171 Top Tray
4.

Removal
WARNING
Remove the top tray, Figure 2.
Remove top
the tray.
Remove the Eclip and bearing.
WARNING
1.
If fitted, undock the Inserter, REP 12.82-171.
2.
Remove the top and rear covers REP 12.1-171.
3.
Prepare to remove the top tray, Figure 1.
Remove the
E-clip and
bearing.
2
Remove the
inner belt idler
puller and inner
pulley.
1
Remove the E-clip
and outer pulley.
Figure 2 Top tray removal
Replacement
1
Lift the tray and release
the link eyes from the
lugs on the tray.
2
Remove the pin
and spring.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.3-171
February 2013
4-128
REP 12.4-171 Bin 1 Removal
1.
Remove Bin 1. Figure 1

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
2
Lift bin 1 to release the
bin from the lifting bar.
1
Remove the E-clip.
Figure 1 Bin 1 removal
Replacement
February 2013
4-129
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.4-171
REP 12.5-171 Right Side-Cover Removal
4.
Remove the right side-cover, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2
Remove the right
side cover.
With the machine powered on, use the PTU or dC330 code 12-242 to lower Bin 1.
2.
Remove Bin 1, REP 12.4-171.
3.
If a HVF unit only, remove the middle right side cover, PL 12.105 Item 17.
If a HVF BM unit installed, remove the HVF BM bin 2 assembly, PL 12.190 Item 8.
1
Remove 8
screws.
Figure 1 Right side cover removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.5-171
February 2013
4-130
REP 12.6-171 HVF Ejector Assembly
6.
Remove the pressing plate and sensor support bracket. Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove Bin 1, REP 12.4-171.
2.
Remove the right side-cover REP 12.5-171.
3.
Remove the rear cover REP 12.1-171.
4.
Remove the front and rear pressing plate finger, REP 12.7-171.
5.
Disconnect the connectors, Figure 1.
Remove 1 screw, then

release the sensor and
support bracket.
Remove the pressing plate.
Remove 2 screws.
Disconnect 4 harness
connectors to release
the wiring.
Figure 2 Pressing plate removal
Figure 1 Disconnect the connectors
February 2013
4-131
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.6-171
7.
Remove the support bracket and ejector assembly, Figure 3.
3.
When refitting the pressing plate, the shaft of the front support finger drive gear must fit in
the ejector assembly, see Figure 4. Replace the front pressing plate finger.
Front pressing plate finger.
1
3
Remove the ejector assembly
and wiring loom.
Remove the support

bracket.
Remove 4 screws.
Move the cover to the front

to locate the shaft end.
End of the gear
shaft.
Figure 3 Remove the ejector assembly

Figure 4 Reinstalling the Pressing Plate
Replacement
1.
2.
Set the front and rear support fingers so that their ends are aligned when extended. See
REP 12.8-171.
When reinstalling the eject assembly ensure that the tag on the ejector locates into the
slot in the frame.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.6-171
4.
5.
Locate the Mod/Tag plate on the metal panel under the HVF docking latch. Ensure that
Tag 004 is struck off.
February 2013
4-132
REP 12.7-171 Pressing Plate Fingers
REP 12.8-171 Front and Rear Support Fingers

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
Remove the right side cover REP 12.5-171.
2.
Remove the screws and lower the fingers through the cover slots, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the ejector assembly REP 12.7-171.
3.
Remove the ejector front plate and support finger assembly, Figure 1.
FRONT
Front pressing
plate finger.
REAR
Rear pressing
plate finger.
1
Remove 2 screws.
2
Remove the fingers.
1
Remove screw and remove the
front finger.
Remove 2 screws and remove the

rear finger.
Figure 1 Pressing Plate Fingers

Figure 1 Remove front and rear support fingers
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the front and rear pressing plate fingers.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the front or rear support fingers.
February 2013
4-133
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.7-171, REP 12.8-171
NOTE: Set the front and rear support fingers so that their ends are aligned when extended.
See Figure 2.
With the pressing plate installed, set the front and rear support finger alignment, Figure 2. If the
fingers are not aligned, the compiler output will be uneven and cause exit jams.
REP 12.10-171 Stacker Idler Rolls

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Lift the top tray
2.
Figure 1. Raise the paper pusher and remove the four stacker idler rolls.
1
Raise the paper
pusher.
Rotate the encoder wheel

until the finger ends align.
Remove the clip and

disengage the gear.
Remove the rear

pressing plate finger.
Re-engage the gear

and refit the circlip.
Replace the rear

pressing plate finger.
Encoder
Wheel
Idler rolls
3
Remove the
roll.
2
Ease spring brackets
outwards.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
Figure 1 Paper pusher and idler rolls.
Figure 2 Support Finger End Alignment
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.8-171, REP 12.10-171
February 2013
4-134
Replacement
REP 12.11-171 Front Tamper Motor Assembly
1.

Removal
Figure 2. Ensure the sprung brackets are parallel and re-install the idler rolls in the sprung
brackets.
NOTE: To ease the installation of the idler roll, push the spring bracket downwards from
the top. This will provide clearance from the drive roll above.
WARNING
WARNING
Incorrect
1.
Remove the front door and front cover REP 12.1-171.
2.
Remove the ejector assembly, REP 12.6-171.
3.
Remove the tamper motor and bracket assembly, Figure 1.
Correct
1
Disconnect motor harness.
Figure 2 Correct spring bracket position.

2.
Check that the rolls are held securely.
2
Remove 2 screws.
3
Remove the motor and the
support bracket.
Figure 1 Tamper motor
February 2013
4-135
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.10-171, REP 12.11-171
4.
Remove the front tamper assembly, Figure 2.
REP 12.12-171 Bin 1 Elevator Motor Assembly
NOTE: The front tamper home sensor is removed to prevent the sensor from being damage when the front tamper assembly is removed.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the front and rear covers REP 12.1-171.
2.
Remove the rear drive belt lower pulley to relieve the belt tension.
3.
Remove the bin 1 elevator motor assembly Figure 1.

NOTE: The pulley pin may fall when the pulley is removed.
1
Disconnect and remove
the home sensor.
4
Remove the front tamper
assembly.
3
Remove 5 screws to release the
support bracket.
2
Disconnect the away
sensor harness.
Figure 2 Front tamper assembly
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the front tamper motor assembly.
Release the wiring

from the clamps.
Remove the
bearing.
1
Remove the circlip, the
upper pulley and the pin.
Figure 1 Stacker Motor Gearbox Assembly
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the bin 1 motor elevator motor assembly.
NOTE: Check that the flats on the shaft bearing align with the cut-outs in the bracket.
Check that the Bin 1 lift bar is level before refitting the stacker belt lower pulley.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.11-171, REP 12.12-171
February 2013
4-136
REP 12.13-171 HVF/HVF BM Un-Docking

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not show the customer how to un-dock the HVF / HVF BM.
1.
2.
Figure 1, release the docking latch and move the HVF/HVF BM to the right, away from the
machine.
1
Pull the lever forward to release both
latches.
2
Roll the HVF to the right
away from the machine.
Figure 1 Docking latch location
NOTE: Where fitted, the tri folder may remain docked to, and moved with, the HVF.
3.
Disconnect the harnesses between the machine and the HVF/HVF BM if necessary.
Replacement
CAUTION
Take care to align the HVF to the right side of the machine before rolling the HVF into position.
Misalignment will damage or break the interlock actuator.
Reverse the removal procedure to dock the HVF/HVF BM.
February 2013
4-137
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.13-171
REP 12.14-171 HVF Upper Exit Guide (5c)
6.
Figure 2. Remove the inboard pivot screw.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the HVF rear cover, REP 12.1-171.
5.
Figure 1. Remove the outboard pivot screw.
1
Remove the inboard
pivot screw.
REAR VIEW
Figure 2 Inboard pivot screw.
1
Remove the outboard
pivot screw.
FRONT VIEW
Figure 1 Outboard pivot screw.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.14-171
February 2013
4-138
7.
Figure 3. Remove the upper exit guide.
REP 12.15-171 HVF Rear Tamper Assembly

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Remove the ejector assembly REP 12.6-171.
4.
Remove the front tamper assembly, REP 12.11-171.
5.
Remove the pressing and support motor, Figure 1.
1
Twist the upper exit guide
and lift upwards.
Figure 3 Upper exit guide removal.
Replacement
2
Disconnect the motor and
encoder harness.
1
Remove 2 screws.
February 2013
4-139
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.14-171, REP 12.15-171
6.
Replacement
Remove the rear tamper assembly, Figure 2.
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the rear tamper assembly.
2.
Ensure that the rear tamper assembly is located correctly, Figure 3.
1
Disconnect 3 PJs.
1
Ensure that the rear support
pins are located correctly on
the frame bracket.
Ensure that the fixing brackets

are located on the tabs at the
front.
Figure 3 Rear tamper assembly location
2
Remove 2 screws
and remove the
assembly.
Figure 2 Remove rear tamper assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.15-171
February 2013
4-140
REP 12.16-171 BM Flapper
2.
Figure 1, remove the BM flapper bracket assembly.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 14. Disconnect the power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
1.
Open the HVF BM front door and fully pull out the BM module.
1
Remove 4 screws
and the ground
wire.
2
Disengage the
drive belt.
3
Disconnect the
BM flapper roll
home sensor.
Remove the BM
flapper bracket
assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the BM flapper bracket
February 2013
4-141
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.16-171
3.
REP 12.17-171 BM PWB
Figure 2, remove the BM flapper assembly.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
Remove the KL-clip and
the bearing.
Remove the BM flapper

assembly.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
Figure 2 BM flapper assembly removal

4.
CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the BM PWB.
Figure 3, remove the BM flapper.
1.
Remove the top cover, then the rear cover, REP 12.1-171.
1
3
Remove the KL-clip, then
the bearing.
2
Remove the KL-clip, then
the bearing.
Remove the Eclip, pin, then the

pulley.
Figure 3 BM flapper removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.16-171, REP 12.17-171
February 2013
4-142
2.
Replacement
Figure 2, remove the BM PWB.
CAUTION
Figure 2, ensure the BM harness and bin 2 harness are correctly positioned in the retainers to
prevent damaged when the BM is moved to the extremities of its travel.
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the BM PWB.
2.
The booklet maker PWB is supplied with a label with the customized NVM values for the
new BM PWB. Enter the values into the machine dC131 NVM Read/Write at Finisher/DFA
Location 12.
Check and perform the adjustments that follow:
ADJ 12.5-171 Booklet Tamping
ADJ 12.6-171 Booklet Compiling Position.
ADJ 12.7-171 Booklet Crease Position
ADJ 12.8-171 Booklet Staple Position
Bin 2 harness
Harness retainers
1
Disconnect all PWB
PJs.
BM harnesses
2
3
If necessary, release harnesses
from the retainers to allow the
PWB to be removed.
Remove 8 screws and

remove the PWB.
Figure 2 PWB removal
February 2013
4-143
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.17-171
REP 12.18-171 BM Crease Blade Motor

Purpose
This procedure is used to repair the following components:
BM crease blade motor, PL 12.170 Item 3.
Motor encoder, PL 12.170 Item 4.
Bearing, PL 12.120 Item 7.
Crank, PL 12.170 Item 8.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the crease blade knob (6d), PL 12.150 Item 4.
3.
Remove the crease roll handle (6c), PL 12.150 Item 5.
4.
Remove the BM front cover, PL 12.150 Item 3.
5.
Remove the left frame plate, PL 12.155 Item 2.
6.
Remove the motor cover, PL 12.170 Item 11. It is easier to remove the screw using an
open ended spanner, this means the removal of the BM PWB is not necessary.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.18-171
February 2013
4-144
7.
Figure 1, remove the BM crease blade motor assembly.
8
Remove the motor
assembly from the
frame.
7
Remove
circlip, front
crank and
bearing.
1
Remove 4 screws.
2
Remove the E-clip and
bearing, release the
connecting rod.
3
Remove the circlip, rear
crank and bearing.
5
Disconnect the
motor harness.
6
Remove E-clip and
bearing, release the
connecting rod.
Remove 4 screws.
Figure 1 Removing the motor assembly
February 2013
4-145
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.18-171
8.
REP 12.19-171 BM Crease Roll Motor
Figure 2, remove the BM crease blade motor.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
Support the encoder
and slide out the
shaft.
1.
2.
Remove 4 screws securing the BM PWB mounting plate to the frame, allow the PWB and
mounting plate to hang down, giving access to the BM crease roll motor.
Remove the sensor

from the bracket.
2
Remove the
encoder.
Figure 2 Removing the motor
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM crease blade motor.
NOTE: Ensure that the mark on the crease blade knob aligns with the arrow on the front infill
cover when the crease blade is fully withdrawn.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.18-171, REP 12.19-171
February 2013
4-146
3.
Remove the crease roll motor assembly, Figure 1.
Replacement
NOTE: As necessary, cut any tie wraps securing the crease roll motor harness.
1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM crease roll motor.
2.
Before installing the motor check that the bearing is located on the drive shaft, Figure 2.
Check that the bearing is

on the drive shaft.
Figure 2 Location of bearing on drive shaft
3
Pull the motor
assembly off.
1
Remove 3
screws.
2
Disconnect
the motor
harness.
Figure 1 Motor assembly removal
February 2013
4-147
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.19-171
REP 12.20-171 BM Backstop Motor Assembly
2.
Figure 1, remove the BM backstop motor.

Purpose
Ground wire, PL 12.160 Item 1.
Motor damper, PL 12.160 Item 3.
BM backstop drive belt, PL 12.160 Item 7.
Remove allen
the key and
spring.
Removal
WARNING
2
Remove
4 screws.
WARNING
1.
Disconnect the
motor harness.
6
Remove 2 screws, then remove
the motor and ground wire from
the damper.
5
Remove 2 screws to release
the motor assembly from the
bracket.
4
Remove the belt, then lift out the
motor assembly.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM backstop motor.
NOTE: Allow the spring to tension the drive belt while the screws are still loose, then tighten
the 4 screws.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.20-171
February 2013
4-148
REP 12.21-171 BM Backstop Assembly
6.
Remove the two harness clamps, Figure 1.

Removal
1
Lay down the BM assembly to access the
backstop assembly.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the booklet maker, REP 12.61-171.
2.
Rotate the crease roll handle (6c), fully counter clockwise.
3.
4.
5.

CAUTION
The BM harnesses and the backstop assembly harnesses are connected with a catch. Ensure
the catch is released when disconnecting the solenoid harnesses.
Use a flat blade screwdriver

to push out the harness
clamp.
3
Use a flat blade screwdriver
to push out the harness
clamp.
Figure 1 Remove the two harness clamps
February 2013
4-149
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.21-171
7.
Remove the belt clamp, Figure 2.
11. Remove the shaft from the BM backstop assembly, Figure 4.
1
Remove 2 screws.
Remove the belt clamp.
Remove the shaft through the

bottom of the BM assembly.
Figure 2 Belt clamp
BM backstop assembly
Figure 4 Remove the shaft
8.
Use the allen key, PL 12.160 Item 9 to remove the 2 screws and remove shaft support, PL
12.165 Item 10.
9.
Prepare to remove the shaft from the frame, Figure 3.
12. Remove the BM backstop assembly, Figure 5.
Frame locator
Flex the belt upwards.
Remove the E-clip.
Rotate the BM backstop

into this position.
Slide the BM backstop under

the belt.
1
Move the shaft.
Figure 5 Remove the backstop assembly
10. Move the backstop assembly to the bottom of the BM assembly.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.21-171
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the backstop assembly.
February 2013
4-150
2.
When installing the shaft ensure that the anti-play shoe has not moved out of position,
Figure 6.
REP 12.22-171 BM Entry Roll

Purpose
Correct position of the anti-play

shoe.
Ensure that the shaft is gripped
securely.
BM entry roll pulley, PL 12.150 Item 14.
BM entry roll, PL 12.150 Item 15.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Incorrect position of the anti-play

shoe.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 6 Location of the anti-play shoe.

3.
Ensure that all of the cable ties are installed and that the harnesses are in the correct
position.
4.
Check that all of the PJ connections on the BM PWB are connected.
5.
Return the allen key to the storage position inside the drive belt tensioner spring, PL
12.160 Item 9.
6.
Go to ADJ 12.9-171 and complete the adjustments.
February 2013
4-151
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.21-171, REP 12.22-171
5.
REP 12.23-171 BM Entry Sensor
Figure 1, remove the BM Entry Roll.

Removal
WARNING
Remove E-clip, bearing,

pulley and belt.
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 1, remove the BM entry sensor.
2
Remove E-clip and
bearing.
3
Remove the
entry roll.
Figure 1 Roll removal
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM entry roll.
NOTE: Tension the drive belt by loosening then tightening the screw, ADJ 12.10-171
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.22-171, REP 12.23-171
February 2013
4-152
5
Remove the sensor.
3
Disconnect the
sensor harness.
4
Remove the baffle.
2
Remove
2 screws.
1
Remove 2 screws.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM entry sensor.
February 2013
4-153
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.23-171
REP 12.24-171 BM Crease Roll Gate Motor
REP 12.25-171 BM Compiler Motor and BM Flapper Motor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
Fully pull out the BM module.
2.
3.
Figure 1, remove the motor assembly
3.
Figure 1, remove the motor assembly.
1
Remove E-clip
and pulley.
4
Remove the
motor assembly.
2
Remove 2
screws.
3
Disconnect the
motor harness.
3
Remove 3 screws.
2
Disconnect the
ground strap.
Remove the
motor assembly.
Disconnect the
harness.

4.
Remove 3 nuts to release the motor from the bracket.
4.
Remove 2 screws to remove the relevant motor from the bracket.
5.
Remove 2 screws to remove the motor from the damper.
Replacement
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM crease roll gate motor.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM compiler motor or BM flapper motor.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.24-171, REP 12.25-171
February 2013
4-154
REP 12.26-171 Back Stop Drive Assembly

Purpose
2
Remove KL-clip
and pulley.
BM backstop link springs, PL 12.160 Item 15.
BM backstop link, PL 12.160 Item 16.
BM backstop drive shaft, PL 12.165 Item 14.
BM backstop belt, PL 12.160 Item 7.
BM back stop bearing, PL 12.160 Item 11.
BM back stop idler bracket, PL 12.160 Item 12.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the LH frame plate, PL 12.155 Item 2.
6.
Remove the BM tamper assembly, REP 12.30-171.
7.
Remove the backstop motor assembly, REP 12.20-171.
8.
Remove the backstop assembly, REP 12.21-171.
9.
Remove the crease blade assembly, REP 12.36-171.
10. Figure 1, remove the BM backstop drive shaft and bearings.
Remove KL-clip
and bearing.
Remove the
drive shaft.
Remove E-clip
and bearing.
Figure 1 Drive shaft removal
February 2013
4-155
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.26-171
11. Figure 2, remove the backstop link.
12. Figure 3, remove the BM backstop idler bracket assembly.
3
Remove the link
and two springs.
Press down on the link and

release the rear tensioner
link.
Press down on the link and

release the front tensioner link.
2
Remove the bracket
assembly and belt.
Repairs/Adjustments
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 3 Idler bracket assembly removal
Figure 2 Backstop link removal
REP 12.26-171
February 2013
4-156
REP 12.27-171 BM Staple Heads
13. Figure 4, remove the BM backstop belt.

Removal
1
Remove KL-clip, tensioner
link and bearing.
WARNING
2
Slide the shaft

to one side.
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the relevant staple head cover, PL 12.185 Item 14.
3.
Pull the stapler bracket handle, PL 12.185 Item 9. Open the staplers fully.
NOTE: If a 5.5 mm socket and short extension is not available or access to the staple head
securing screws is difficult, remove the BM stapler bracket assembly, REP 12.28-171, then
remove the relevant staple head.
3
Remove the belt.
4.
Figure 1, remove the relevant staple head.
Figure 4 Backstop belt removal
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the removed components. Allow the BM backstop
belt to be tensioned correctly before the bracket assembly securing screws are tightened.
Refer to Figure 3.
February 2013
4-157
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.26-171, REP 12.27-171
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM staple heads.
2.
Perform ADJ 12.3-171, Stapler Anvil Alignment.
2
Loosen 1 screw
using a 5.5 mm
socket and
ratchet driver.
3
Using a 5.5 mm socket
and short extension fully
loosen the screw until the
staple head is released.
Leave the socket and
extension in position on
the screw.
4
Disconnect the
stapler harness
and remove the
stapler.
1
Remove 2 screws
using a 5.5 mm
socket and
ratchet driver.
Figure 1 Staple head removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.27-171
February 2013
4-158
REP 12.28-171 BM Stapler Bracket Assembly
3.
Figure 1, remove the BM staple head carrier closed sensor actuator.

Purpose
This procedure is used to repair the following parts:
Front follower, PL 12.185 Item 1.
Actuator, PL 12.185 Item 2.
Remove
the KL-clip.
Rear follower, PL 12.185 Item 3.
Spring, PL 12.185 Item 4.
BM paper present sensor Q12-190, PL 12.185 Item 5.
Latch slide, PL 12.185 Item 6.
Staple bracket handle, PL 12.185 Item 9.
Stapler bracket assembly, PL 12.185 Item 10.
Torsion spring, PL 12.185 Item 11.
Bearing, PL 12.185 Item 12.
Spring, PL 12.185 Item 13.
BM stapler head carrier closed sensor Q12-421, PL 12.185 Item 18.
Lower shaft, PL 12.185 Item 19.
Upper shaft, PL 12.185 Item 20.
3
Remove the
actuator.
Removal
1
Remove the
sensor.
WARNING
WARNING
Figure 1 Actuator removal
1.
2.
Remove 4 screws securing the BM PWB mounting plate to the frame, allow the PWB and
mounting plate to hang down, giving access to the BM staple head carrier closed sensor.
4.
Temporarily attach the PWB mounting plate using only the top two screws.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove both staple head covers, PL 12.185 Item 14.
February 2013
4-159
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.28-171
10. Figure 2, lower the stapler bracket.
Pull the stapler bracket

Release the rear follower
handle to open the staplers from the slot using a
fully.
screwdriver.
Figure 2 Lowering stapler bracket
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.28-171
February 2013
4-160
11. Figure 3, remove the latch shaft.
1
Remove KL-clip and pull shaft forward
50 mm (2 inches).
5
Pull the shaft completely
to the rear to remove.
2
Remove 2 E-clips and
the front follower.
4
Push the shaft to the rear
to release the latch slide.
3
Compress the spring, remove
the rear follower and spring.
Figure 3 Latch shaft removal
February 2013
4-161
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.28-171
12. Figure 4, prepare to remove the BM stapler bracket assembly.
1
Remove KL-clip.
6
Disconnect harnesses
and ground wire.
4
Release the spring
from the side frame.
5
Remove E-clip.
2
Disconnect
ground wire.
3
Remove 2 E-clips.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.28-171
February 2013
4-162
REP 12.29-171 BM Conveyor Belts
13. Figure 5, remove the BM stapler bracket assembly.

Removal
WARNING
Lever out
the bearing
using a
screwdriver.
WARNING
NOTE: The removal procedure illustrates how to remove the rear conveyor belt. The procedure for the front conveyor belt is similar.
1.
Remove bin 2 by disconnecting the harness, removing the thumb screw then lifting the bin
upwards to release.
2.
Remove the BM bin 2 extension by aligning the pivot pins with the cutouts and snapping
the extension out of engagement.
3.
Turn over bin 2 and remove the base pan, 3 screws.
4.
Remove the BM bin 2 connector from the base pan, 1 screw.
Remove the
bracket
assembly
from the front.
Figure 5 Assembly removal
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM stapler bracket assembly and components.
February 2013
4-163
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.28-171, REP 12.29-171
5.
Figure 1, remove the idler roller.
6.
Figure 2, remove the BM conveyor belt.
1
Release the belt from the drive
pulley.
3
Push the other bearing
though the frame to
remove the idler roller.
2
Push out the shaft and
remove one bearing.
1
Remove the E-clip.
2
Feed the belt through
the cut-out to remove.
Figure 2 Belt removal
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM conveyor belts.
Figure 1 Idler roller removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.29-171
February 2013
4-164
REP 12.30-171 BM Tamper Assembly and Tamper 1 Motor
6.
Figure 1, remove the tamper assembly.

Purpose
Remove 2 screws
Remove 2 screws
and earth connector
BM rear tamper arm, PL 12.155 Item 5.
BM front tamper arm, PL 12.155 Item 6.
BM rear tamper rack, PL 12.155 Item 7.
BM front tamper rack, PL 12.155 Item 8.
BM rear tamper assembly, PL 12.155 Item 9.
BM front tamper assembly, PL 12.155 Item 10.
BM tamper gear,PL 12.155 Item 11.
BM tamper bracket, PL 12.155 Item 12.
BM tamper rack guide, PL 12.155 Item 13.
BM tamper guide plate, PL 12.155 Item 15.
BM rear tamper finger, PL 12.155 Item 16.
BM front tamper finger, PL 12.155 Item 17.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the left frame plate, PL 12.160 Item 17.
Remove the cover and


remove the motor.
3
Remove 2 screws.
6
Move the tampers to align with the
slots to release each tamper from the
slot.
7
Remove the tamper
assembly.
Figure 1 Tamper assembly removal
February 2013
4-165
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.30-171
7.
Figure 2, remove the front and rear tamper assemblies. Also remove the tamper gear and
tamper motor.
8.
Figure 3, remove the tamper guide plate from each of the tamper assemblies.
Remove 2 screws, then

remove the motor.
Remove
the gear.
Remove
the E-clip.
Remove the
screw and
tamper finger.
End
stop
2
Remove the
guide plate.
Guide tab
Guide tab
1
Pull out both tamper
assemblies.
2
Remove 4
screws.
End stop
Remove the BM
tamper rack guide.
Figure 3 Guide plate removal
Figure 2 Dismantling the tamper assembly
Replacement
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.30-171
If the tamper racks were removed from the BM tamper rack guide, perform the following:
a.
Align the guide tabs on both tamper racks with the slots in the BM tamper rack guide.
Refer to Figure 2.
b.
Start both tamper racks into the BM tamper rack guide at the same time. Both
tamper racks must engage with the BM tamper gear simultaneously. To check that
the front and rear tampers are correctly aligned, perform the following:
Fully push in the tampers.
The distance between the end stop on each tamper and the ends of the BM
tamper rack guide should be equal. Refer to Figure 2.
If the distances are different by more than 1 mm (0.040 inches). Perform again
step B.
2.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM tamper assembly and tamper 1 motor.
3.
Perform ADJ 12.5-171 Booklet Tamping.
February 2013
4-166
REP 12.31-171 HVF Buffer Guide Assembly
6.
Figure 2. Remove the pivot screw.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 1. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect the two PJs.
1
Remove the
pivot screw.
Figure 2 Pivot screw removal.
1
Disconnect the
two PJs.
7.
Pass the PJs through the cut-out in the rear frame.
8.
Withdraw the guide through the front opening.
Replacement
Position the spigot at the guide rear in the hole in the rear frame. The rest of the replacement
procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
REAR VIEW
Figure 1 Disconnecting PJs.
February 2013
4-167
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.31-171
REP 12.32-171 HVF Input Jam Clearance Guide
Replacement

Removal
Position the spigot at the guide rear in the hole in the rear frame. The rest of the replacement
procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 1. Remove the pivot screw at the front of the input guide.
1
Remove the
pivot screw.

5.
Remove the guide through the front opening.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.32-171
February 2013
4-168
REP 12.33-171 Buffer Pocket Jam Clearance Guide

Assembly
7.
Figure 2. At the front of the HVF, remove the buffer pocket jam clearance guide.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the buffer pocket roll, REP 12.42-171.
6.
Figure 1. At the rear of the HVF, prepare to remove the buffer pocket jam clearance guide.
Remove the buffer pocket jam

clearance guide.
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 2 Guide removal.
Replacement
1
REAR VIEW
Remove 2 screws.
Bypass feed motor

(MOT 12-263) ref. only.
Figure 1 Rear screw removal.
February 2013
4-169
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.33-171
REP 12.34-171 Inserter Jam Clearance Guide Assembly
REP 12.35-171 Diverter Exit Gate

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the HVF front door, REP 12.1-171
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
Figure 1. Remove the pivot screw from the front end of the Inserter jam clearance guide.
4.
5.
Figure 1. At the rear of the HVF, remove the solenoid arm, the K-L clip and the bush from
the diverter shaft.
1
Remove the pivot screw.
Pull the solenoid arm

from the shaft.
Remove the bush.
2
Remove the K-L clip.
5.
REAR VIEW
Remove the guide through the front opening.
Figure 1 Removal preparation
Replacement
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.34-171, REP 12.35-171
February 2013
4-170
6.
REP 12.36-171 Crease Blade Assembly
Figure 2. Remove the diverter exit gate.

Purpose
Diverter
3
Remove the
diverter exit gate.
Connecting rod, PL 12.170 Item 9.
Crease blade assembly, PL 12.170 Item 13.
Crease blade support guide, PL 12.170 Item 14.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Remove the pivot

screw.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
Open Guide 5c.
Figure 2 Diverter removal
Replacement
CAUTION
After replacement, check the K-L clip is in the correct groove, and the bush cannot be pulled
from the frame.
February 2013
4-171
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.35-171, REP 12.36-171
5.
Figure 1, remove the crease blade assembly.
6.
Figure 2, remove the front blade support.
1
Remove 2
screws.
4
Remove front
blade support.
3
Remove E-clip.
2
Release the front
connecting rod
and bearing.
1
Remove E-clip.
Figure 2 Front support removal
3
Manoeuvre the blade assembly
out from under the front and rear
supports.
2
Remove 4 screws.
Figure 1 Crease blade assembly removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.36-171
February 2013
4-172
7.
Figure 3, remove the rear blade support.
CAUTION
Do not loosen the three red screws that surround the lower support guides
8.
Figure 4, remove the support guides (4 places).
4
Remove rear
blade support.
3
1
Remove E-clip.
Depress the centre

of the guide.
2
Release the rear
connecting rod
and bearing.
1
Remove E-clip.
Red screws see caution.
2
Pull the guide outward to remove.
Figure 3 Rear support removal
Figure 4 Support guide removal
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the crease blade assembly.
February 2013
4-173
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.36-171
REP 12.37-171 Stacker Driving Shaft Bearings

Removal
6
Remove the circlip, thrust
washer and
inner bearing.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the stacker motor and gear assembly REP 12.12-171.
3.
Remove the rear bearing, Figure 1.
5
Remove 2
screws and
the bracket.
5
Remove the
rear bearing.
4
Remove the
outer bearing.
4
Remove the thrust
washer.
Remove the circlip.
Remove the upper

pulley.
Remove the pulley pin.
3
Remove the circlip.
Figure 2 Stacker Shaft Front Bearing
Replacement
2
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the stacker driving shaft front and rear bearings.
Remove the gear

wheel.
NOTE: Make sure that the flats on the bearing align with the cut-outs in the bracket or frame.
1
Remove the circlip.
Figure 1 Rear bearing removal
NOTE: The upper pulley pin may fall when the pulley is removed.
4.
Remove the front bearings, Figure 2.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.37-171
February 2013
4-174
REP 12.38-171 HVF Stacker Driving Belts
3.
Remove the stacker driving belt, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
Remove the circlip

and upper pulley if
required.
WARNING
NOTE: The removal and replacement procedure for the front and rear stacker driving belts is
the same. Support the Bin 1 lift bar if removing the front and rear belts at the same time
1.
Remove the front or rear cover to access the front or rear driving belt REP 12.1-171.
2.
Remove the stacker bin 1 tray REP 12.4-171.
4
Remove the
belt.
1
Remove the screw
and belt clamp.
2
Remove the circlip and
lower pulley.
Figure 1 Stacker Driving Belts
Replacement
NOTE: Check that the bin 1 lift bar is level before fitting the belt clamp.
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the front and rear stacker driving belts.
February 2013
4-175
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.38-171
REP 12.39-171 HVF BM Diverter Gate
6.
Figure 2. Remove the BM diverter gate.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Open Guide 5b.
1.
2.
3.
Remove the
diverter.
4.
5.
Figure 1. prepare to remove the BM diverter gate.
2
Remove the
pivot screw.
1
Pull the solenoid arm
from the shaft.
5
Remove the
bush.
Figure 2 Diverter removal.
Replacement
Remove the spacers.
Remove the pivot arm.
Remove the K-L clip.
REAR VIEW
Figure 1 Removal preparation
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.39-171
February 2013
4-176
REP 12.40-171 HVF Input Roll
6.
Figure 2. At the front of the HVF, remove the circlip and bush.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 1. Remove the black plastic cover.
Remove the circlip

and bush.
Press in the catches,

(2 places).
Figure 2 Circlip and bush removal.
2
Lift out the cover.
Figure 1 Cover removal.
February 2013
4-177
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.40-171
7.
REP 12.41-171 HVF Inserter Guide Roll
Figure 3. At the rear of the HVF, remove the input roll.
3
Lift the shaft and remove
the belt from the pulley.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
4
Remove the pulley and
the bush.
5
Remove the input roll.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open guide 8a.
6.
Figure 1. At the front of the HVF, remove the circlip and the bush.
1
Remove the circlip.
2
Slide the pulley and the
bush along the shaft.
REAR VIEW
Figure 3 Input roll removal.
1
Remove the circlip
and the bush.
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.40-171, REP 12.41-171
February 2013
4-178
7.
REP 12.42-171 HVF Buffer Pocket Roll
Figure 2. At the rear of the HVF, remove the Inserter guide roll.

Removal
1
WARNING
Remove the circlip.
WARNING
2
1.
2.
Slip the belt off of

the pulley.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the punch unit, or the punch unit guide, as appropriate.
6.
Figure 1. At the front of the HVF, remove the circlip and bush.

the bush.
5
Remove the
Inserter guide roll.
REAR VIEW
Figure 2 Inserter guide roll removal
Replacement
1
Remove the circlip
and the bush.
February 2013
4-179
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.41-171, REP 12.42-171
7.
At the rear of the HVF, remove the buffer pocket roll. The bracket can be moved if necessary, to improve access, (two screws), Figure 2.
REP 12.43-171 HVF Booklet Entrance Roll

Removal
WARNING
1
Remove the circlip.
WARNING
3
Slip the belt off the
pulley.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 1. Remove the circlip and bush at the outboard end of the roll.
4
the bush.
5
Remove the buffer
pocket roll.
Bracket
REAR VIEW
Figure 2 Buffer pocket roll removal.
Replacement
Remove the circlip

and the bush.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.42-171, REP 12.43-171
February 2013
4-180
6.
REP 12.44-171 HVF Buffer Lower Roll
Figure 2. At the rear of the HVF, remove the booklet entrance roll.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open jam clearance guide 5b.
6.
Figure 1. Remove the circlip and the bush from the outboard end of the roll.
5
Remove the
booklet
entrance roll.
1
Remove the circlip.


pulley.

the bush.
REAR VIEW
Figure 2 Booklet entrance roll removal.
1
Remove the circlip
and the bush.
Replacement
February 2013
4-181
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.43-171, REP 12.44-171
7.
Figure 2. At the rear of the HVF, remove the buffer lower roll.
REP 12.45-171 HVF Buffer Upper Roll

Removal
WARNING
Remove the buffer

lower roll.
WARNING

the bush.
3
pulley.
Remove the circlip.

REAR VIEW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 1. Remove the circlip and the bush.

Fixed guide
1
Remove the circlip
and the bush.
Figure 2 Buffer lower roll removal.
Replacement
Remove the screw.
3
Loosen screw.
Figure 1 Circlip and bush removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.44-171, REP 12.45-171
February 2013
4-182
6.
REP 12.46-171 HVF Stacker Exit Feed Roll
Figure 2. Remove the buffer upper roll.
Remove the circlip.


Removal
WARNING
Slip the belt off the pulley.
4
the bush.
5
Remove the screw.
6
Loosen the screw.
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 1. Remove the circlip and bush
Pull the upper part of the fixed

guide to the left and then remove
the buffer upper roll.
REAR VIEW
Figure 2 Buffer upper roll removal.
Replacement
1
Remove the circlip
and the bush.
February 2013
4-183
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.45-171, REP 12.46-171
6.
REP 12.47-171 HVF Top Exit Feed Roll
Figure 2. Remove the stacker exit feed roll.

Removal
WARNING
1
Remove the idler,
(1 screw).
2
Remove the circlip,
pulley and bush.
3
Remove the stacker
exit feed roll.
WARNING
1.
If fitted, undock the Inserter, REP 12.82-171.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Figure 1. Raise the top tray and lower the plate beneath it.
REAR VIEW
Figure 2 Stacker exit feed roll removal.
Replacement
Release the
two links.
2
Lower the plate.
Figure 1 Lowering the plate.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.46-171, REP 12.47-171
February 2013
4-184
7.
Figure 2. Remove the circlip and bush. Remove the front magnet bracket screws.
8.
Figure 3. At the rear of the HVF, Remove the circlip, bush, pulley and the rear screws from
the magnet bracket.
1
Remove the circlip.
2
Slide the pulley and
the bush along the
shaft.
3
Slip the belt off of
the pulley.
4
1
Remove the circlip and
the bush.
Remove 2 screws.
Remove 2 screws.

the bush.
REAR VIEW
Figure 2 Feed Roll Front Fasteners.
Figure 3 Rear component removal.
February 2013
4-185
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.47-171
9.
REP 12.48-171 Compiler Paddle Motor Assembly
Figure 4. Remove the top exit feed roll.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the paddle motor assembly, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect the motor
PJ.
Remove the top

exit feed roll.
Remove the
magnet bracket.
Figure 4 Top exit feed roll removal.
2
3
Remove the 2 bracket

screws.
Remove the Paddle Motor.
Replacement
Figure 1 Paddle Motor Assembly
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the compiler paddle motor assembly.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.47-171, REP 12.48-171
February 2013
4-186
REP 12.49-171 Compiler Paddle Unit

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the front, rear and top covers REP 12.1-171.
2.
Remove the HVF stapler assembly, REP 12.2-171.
3.
Remove the compiler paddle motor assembly, REP 12.48-171.

NOTE: The motor coupler should detach with the motor assembly. If the coupler fails to
detach, remove the coupler from the paddle module assembly.
4.
Remove the PJs and screws securing the ribbon cable connectors, Figure 1. Carefully
push the ribbon cable bulkhead connectors through the frame cut-outs.
Paddle unit rear

screws.
Paddle unit cable

connectors.
Paddle unit
front screws.
Figure 1 Paddle Module Attachment

5.
Remove the screws (front and rear) and the front grounding strap then manoeuvre the
module downwards, Remove the module through the stapler aperture, Figure 1.
Replacement
CAUTION
Do not damage or strain the paddle module ribbon cables or connectors
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the compiler paddle unit.
Use the correct screws to secure the compiler paddle unit; do not overtighten.
February 2013
4-187
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.49-171
REP 12.50-171 BM Exit Sensor
3.
Figure 2, remove the BM exit sensor.

Removal
WARNING
Disconnect
the harness
then remove
the sensor.
WARNING
1.
Remove the BM right hand cover, REP 12.56-171.
2.
Remove the exit plate, Figure 1.
1
Remove the screw then
slide out the sensor.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM exit sensor.
1
Remove 4 screws to release the
exit plate.
Figure 1 Remove the exit plate
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.50-171
February 2013
4-188
REP 12.51-171 Compiler Paper Pusher Motor Assembly
REP 12.52-171 BM Crease Rolls

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the top and rear covers REP 12.1-171.
1.
2.
Remove the paper pusher motor assembly, Figure 1.
2.
Release the crease roll nip pressure by fully rotating the crease roll handle (6c) counterclockwise.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the BM right hand top cover, REP 12.56-171.
7.
Remove the BM crease roll motor, REP 12.19-171, but do not disconnect the motor harness or remove the motor from the mounting plate.
8.
Remove the exit plate
1
Remove motor bracket rear screw.
2
Remove motor bracket
front screws.
3
Disconnect the motor PJ.
Figure 1 Paper Pusher Motor Assembly
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the compiler paper pusher motor assembly.
February 2013
4-189
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.51-171, REP 12.52-171
9.
Figure 1, Release the crease roll assembly at the rear.
10. Figure 2, Release the crease roll assembly at the front.
1
Remove 3 screws.
2
Remove E-clip and release the
arm.
Remove 3 screws.
NOTE: Flat washer between

the bearing and arm
2
Remove the E-clip and release the arm.
NOTE: Flat washer between the bearing
and arm
Figure 1 Release the assembly at the rear
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.52-171
Figure 2 Release the assembly at the front
February 2013
4-190
11. Figure 3, Flex the front plate to remove the crease roll assembly.
12. Figure 4, remove the crease rolls.
1
Remove the screws
marked A.
Remove the E-clips and
bearings marked B.
2
Flex the front plate to
remove the crease roll
assembly.
Remove the external circlips to

remove the rolls.
Remove the external circlips to

remove the rolls.
Front
Figure 3 Release the front plate
Rear
Figure 4 Remove the crease rolls
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the crease roll assembly.
February 2013
4-191
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.52-171
REP 12.53-171 Compiler Paper Pusher
6.

Removal
Remove the front and rear screws and push the left edge of the compiler exit guide plate
downward away from the pinion shaft, Figure 2.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the front, rear and top covers REP 12.1-171.
2.
Remove the stacker motor gearbox, REP 12.12-171.
3.
Remove the stacker shaft front bearing bracket and the exit guide plate front and rear
screws, Figure 1.
Pinion Shaft
Pusher Module
Exit Guide Plate
Figure 2 Pusher Guide and Pinion Shaft

Stacker front bearing
bracket
7.
Remove the pinion shaft front and rear circlips, the shaft bearings and the front bearing
thrust washers then remove the pinion shaft, Figure 2.
8.
Lift the pusher module out of the guides. The mylar strips and dampers are attached to
the pusher module, Figure 2.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the compiler paper pusher.
Figure 1 Stacker Shaft Front Bearing Bracket

4.
Remove the pusher driving motor assembly, REP 12.51-171.
5.
Remove the pusher sensor assembly, REP 12.54-171.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.53-171
February 2013
4-192
REP 12.54-171 Pusher Upper and Lower Sensors
REP 12.55-171 HVF PSU Assembly

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the top cover REP 12.1-171.
1.
2.
Remove the upper and lower sensor assembly, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the PSU module, Figure 1.
1
Remove the 5 screws.
1
Remove the screw.
2
Disconnect the grounding
strap and the two PJs.
2
Disconnect the two PJs.
Figure 1 Pusher Sensor Assembly
Figure 1 HVF PSU
Replacement
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Pusher sensor assembly.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the HVF PSU module.
February 2013
4-193
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.54-171, REP 12.55-171
REP 12.56-171 BM Right Hand Cover
Replacement

Removal
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM right hand cover.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Open the BM front door and fully pull out the BM module.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Figure 1, remove the BM top cover.
1
Disconnect the
harness to the
BM entry sensor.
2
Remove 2 screws
then lift and remove
the cover.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.56-171
February 2013
4-194
REP 12.57-171 HVF Main PWB
2.
Disconnect the PJs, remove 9 screws and remove the PWB assembly, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the HVF main
PWB.
WARNING
1.
Figure 2 HVF Main PWB
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the HVF Main PWB.
February 2013
4-195
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.57-171
REP 12.58-171 Not Used
REP 12.59-171 Crease Roll Gate Assembly

Purpose
Crease roll gate rack gear, PL 12.180 Item 8.
Crease roll gate rack drive gear, PL 12.180 Item 13.
Crease roll gate rack, PL 12.180 Item 14.
Crease roll gate front guide, PL 12.180 Item 15.
Crease roll gate rear guide, PL 12.180 Item 16.
Crease roll gate, PL 12.180 Item 19.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.58-171, REP 12.59-171
Open the HVF BM front door and fully pull out the BM.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the BM right hand cover, REP 12.56-171.
6.
Remove the crease roll assembly, REP 12.52-171.
7.
Remove the crease roll gate motor, REP 12.24-171.
February 2013
4-196
8.
Figure 1, remove the crease roll gate rack drive gear and both crease roll gate rack gears.
9.
Figure 2, Remove the front and rear crease roll gate racks.
2
Remove E-clip
and rear rack.
1
Remove the E-clip and 2 gears.
1
Remove E-clip
and front rack.
2
Remove E-clip
and gear.
Figure 2 Removing the racks
Figure 1 Removing gears
February 2013
4-197
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.59-171
10. Figure 3, remove the crease roll gate.
11. Figure 4, remove the grease roll gate front guide.
1
Twist the gate
to allow the
shaft to exit the
slot, then lift
out the gate.
3
Remove the
guide.
2
Remove screw.
Figure 3 Gate removal
1
Remove two screws.
Figure 4 Front guide removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.59-171
February 2013
4-198
REP 12.60-171 BM Paper Guide Assembly
12. Figure 5, remove the grease roll gate rear guide.

Purpose
Paper guide, PL 12.150 Item 7.
Nip spring, PL 12.150 Item 9.
Nip roll, PL 12.150 Item 10.
Nip shaft, PL 12.150 Item 11.

NOTE: If only new nip components are being installed, the BM paper guide assembly
does not need to be removed.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Open the BM front door and fully pull out the BM.
2.
Rotate the crease roll handle (6c) fully counterclockwise.
3.
4.
5.
Remove two screws.
Remove the rear

guide.
Figure 5 Rear guide removal

13. Loosen 3 screws to remove the crease roll gate shaft from the crease roll gate.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the crease roll gate assembly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the crease roll gate shaft is positioned centrally within the crease roll gate.
February 2013
4-199
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.59-171, REP 12.60-171
6.
Figure 1, remove the front bearing.
7.
Figure 2, remove the rear bearing.
Remove
the E-clip.
Remove the
E-clip, then
the bearing.
2
Remove the bearing.
Figure 1 Front bearing removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.60-171
Figure 2 Rear bearing removal
February 2013
4-200
8.
Figure 3, remove the BM paper guide assembly.
9.
Figure 4, remove the components from the BM paper guide assembly.
4
Carefully disengage the
spring legs from the
guide and remove the
shaft assembly.
1
Release the nip
springs to
remove the nip
shaft and nip
rolls.
3
2
Remove 4 screws. Disconnect the
ground harness.
Pivot the BM flapper assembly

down to rest on the crease
blade.
3
Remove E-clip
and front latch.
4
Lift out the BM paper
guide assembly.
2
Remove E-clip and
rear latch.
Figure 4 Paper guide dismantling
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM paper guide assembly.
1
Pull out the 2 harness supports.
Figure 3 Paper guide assembly removal
February 2013
4-201
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.60-171
REP 12.61-171 BM Module
2.
Figure 1, disconnect PJ562 and PJ559 from the BM PWB.

Removal
WARNING
is heavy.
WARNING
Do not undock the HVF BM from the machine. The HVF BM is unstable when undocked
from the machine. Do not show the customer how to undock the HVF BM.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Release the harness

from the retainers.

PJ559.
Figure 1 Disconnect the PJs
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.61-171
February 2013
4-202
3.
Figure 2, disconnect the harness from bin 2.
4.
Figure 3, prepare to remove the BM module.
1
2
Make sure that the top of the paper

stack is level with the base of the BM
module.
Remove 2 screws.
2
Disconnect the harness. Secure the
harness to the harness retainers.
Figure 2 Disconnect the harness
Align approximately two

reams of paper against the
edge of the HVF BM.
February 2013
4-203
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.61-171
5.
Figure 4, prepare to remove the BM module.
6.
Figure 5, Release the latches.
1
Fully pull out the BM
module.
2
Disconnect the ground harness.
Secure the harness to the harness
retainers.
2
Fully push in the slide.
1
Pull up the right side latch to
release the slide from the rail.
4
Fully push in the
slide.
3
Push down the left side latch
to release the slide from the
rail.
Figure 5 Releasing the slides
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.61-171
February 2013
4-204
WARNING
7.
Figure 6, remove the BM module.
Use safe handling procedures when removing the module. Refer to GP 16. The module
is heavy.
WARNING
is heavy.
CAUTION
Do not damage the BM front cover when the BM module is removed.
NOTE: The BM module weight is 23 Kg (50.6 lb.).
NOTE: The BM catch will spring to the rear when the BM module is removed. Refer to Figure
7.
One person must lift the
BM module by the left side
cross member.
1
Carefully remove
the BM module.
A second person must lift the

BM module by the booklet exit
slot.
Figure 6 Remove the BM module
February 2013
4-205
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.61-171
Replacement
4.
Figure 7, prepare to install the BM module.
CAUTION
Do not damage the harnesses when the BM module is installed. Ensure that the rails are correctly aligned with the slides.
1.
Put the BM module on the paper stack in front of the HVF BM.
2.
Route the bin 2 harness and the ground harness to the rear of the HVF BM.
3.
If a new BM is to be installed, perform the following:

a.
Unlatch the slides from the new BM module. Refer to Figure 5.
b.
Install the new BM module onto the existing rails in the HVF BM.
2
Carefully push the BM module into
the HVF BM until the catch is held
under the guide. Do not push the
BM further into HVF BM.
Guide
1
Hold the catch in the forward position.
Figure 7 Position of the catch

5.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the BM module.

CAUTION
Ensure the BM harness and bin 2 harness are correctly positioned in the harness retainers so
that harnesses are not damaged when the BM is moved to the extremities of its travel.
6.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.61-171
Perform the 12D-171 Booklet Quality RAP.
February 2013
4-206
REP 12.62-171 BM Slide Assembly
3.
Figure 1, Remove the slide assembly from the HVF BM frame.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the BM module, REP 12.61-171.
2.
1
Remove screw
2
Move the slide to the rear and
remove the slide assembly.
Remove the
screw.
2
Move the slide to
the rear and
remove the slide
assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the slide assembly
February 2013
4-207
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.62-171
4.
Figure 2. Remove the bracket and the slide rail from the right side of the BM module.
5.
Figure 3. Remove the two brackets from the slide rail.
Remove screw.
Remove screw.
4
Remove the bracket from
the slide rail.
Remove the bracket

from the slide rail.
Figure 3 Remove the bracket from the slide rail
3
Remove the bracket and the
slide rail.
Cut the four cable ties

to release the harness.
Remove four
screws.
Figure 2 Remove the bracket and the slide rail
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.62-171
February 2013
4-208
6.
Figure 4, Remove the bracket and the slide rail from the left side of the BM module.
7.
Figure 5, Remove the two brackets from the slide rail
1
Remove screw.
3
Remove screw.
2
Cut the five cable ties to
release the harness.
3
Remove the bracket
and the slide rail.
Remove the bracket from the

slide rail.
Remove the bracket from

the slide rail.
Figure 5 Remove the bracket from the slide rail
Remove four screws.
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the slide assembly.
2.
Ensure that all of the cable ties are installed and the harness are in the correct position.
3.
Check that all of the PJ connections are connected.
Figure 4 Remove the bracket and slide rail
February 2013
4-209
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.62-171
REP 12.63-171 Transport Motor 1
REP 12.64-171 Bypass Feed Motor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
Remove the transport motor 1 and bracket assembly, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the bypass feed motor and bracket assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove the pivot and
2 bracket screws.
1
Remove the 2
bracket screws.
2
Remove the pivot
screw.
2
Disconnect the
motor PJ.
3
Disconnect the
motor PJ.
Tension Spring
Tension Spring
Figure 1 Transport Motor 1 and Bracket

3.
Figure 1 Bypass Feed Motor and Bracket
Remove 2 screws and the grounding wire to remove the motor and damper from the
bracket.
3.
bracket.
Replacement
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the transport motor 1.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the bypass feed motor.
Set the belt tension ADJ 12.10-171.
Set the belt tension, ADJ 12.10-171.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.63-171, REP 12.64-171
February 2013
4-210
REP 12.65-171 Buffer Motor
REP 12.66-171 Transport Motor 2

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
Remove the buffer motor and bracket assembly, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the exit feed motor and bracket assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove the pivot and
2 bracket screws.
1
Remove the pivot and 2
bracket screws.
Release tension spring.
2
from the motor.
2
Disconnect the
motor PJ.
Tension Spring
Figure 1 Buffer Feed Motor and Bracket

Figure 1 Exit Feed Motor and Bracket
3.
bracket.
Replacement
3.
bracket.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the buffer motor.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the exit feed motor.

Fit the pivot screw and set the belt tension, ADJ 12.10-171. Do not tighten the motor bracket
screws fully until the belt is tensioned by the spring.
Fit the bracket pivot screw and set the belt tension, ADJ 12.10-171.
February 2013
4-211
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.65-171, REP 12.66-171
REP 12.67-171 Tri Folder Covers
2.
Remove the rear cover, the top cover and the right side cover as required, Figure 2.

Removal
NOTE: Open the top cover and remove the rear cover to access to the top cover rear fasteners and the top cover interlock sensor connector.
WARNING
4
Remove the top cover (4 fasteners).
WARNING
1.
1
Remove the rear cover
(4 screws).
Remove the screw and front door hinge pin then move the door from the upper pivot.
Remove 4 screws and remove the front cover Figure 1.
2
Remove the door
from the upper
pivot.
3
Open the front door to
access the top cover
front fasteners.
2
Remove the right hand side cover (5 screws).
Figure 2 Top, Rear and Right side covers
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the Tri-Folder covers.
3
the front cover.
Remove 1 screw then

the front door hinge pin.
Figure 1 Tri-folder Front Door and Cover
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.67-171
February 2013
4-212
REP 12.68-171 Tri-Folder Drive Assembly
Replacement

Removal
1.
Detach the coupler alignment tool from the drive unit, refer to Figure 1.
2.
Install the drive assembly, Figure 2.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the tri-folder rear cover REP 12.67-171.
3.
Remove the tri-folder drive assembly, Figure 1.

Circlip
1
Slide out the booklet
maker.
Drive coupler
1
Remove 2 screws.
2
2
Release the coupler
drive belt tension, then
remove the belt.
Attach the drive assembly,

4 screws.
Figure 2 Attach the drive assembly
3
Drive assembly
Remove 2 screws,
then the tri-folder drive
assembly.
Figure 1 Drive assembly

4.
If necessary, remove the circlip then remove the drive coupler, refer to Figure 1.
February 2013
4-213
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.68-171
3.
Centralize the coupler alignment tool onto the crease roll motor encoder disc, PL 12.175
Item 13 and Figure 3.
5.
Slacken off the drive unit retaining screws, Figure 4.
Drive unit
1
Position the coupler
alignment tool onto
the crease roll motor
encoder disc.
1
Loosen the drive unit,
4 screws.
2
Carefully slide the BM towards the
drive assembly.
Figure 4 Loosen the drive unit
Figure 3 Centralize the alignment tool
4.
Prepare to centralize the drive coupler, refer to Figure 1, with the HVF BM crease roll
motor encoder disc, Figure 3.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.68-171
February 2013
4-214
6.
Centralize the coupler alignment tool with the drive unit coupler, Figure 5.
7.
Secure the drive unit in the centralized position, Figure 6.
Alignment tool
Drive coupler
2
Slide out the BM
and remove the
coupler alignment
tool.
2
Ensure the drive coupler is centralized
with the alignment tool.
1
Secure the drive unit, 4 screws.
Adjust the position of the

drive unit.
Figure 6 Secure the drive unit
Figure 5 Centralize the drive coupler

8.
Attach the alignment tool onto the drive assembly for future use.
9.
Carefully slide back the BM and engage the drive unit coupler.
10. Check that the harnesses do not obstruct the BM crease roll motor encoder disc.
11. Reverse the removal procedures to replace the tri-folder
February 2013
4-215
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.68-171
REP 12.69-171 Tri Folder Crease Roll Drive Assembly
4.
Remove the clutch and bearing from the idler bracket, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the Tri Folder rear cover, REP 12.67-171. Access is improved by removing the
top cover.
2.
Remove the drive coupling assembly bracket, Figure 1.

Clutch torque arm
Remove the
drive belt.
Disconnect the
clutch connector.
Bearing
2
Remove the
driven pulley
and gear.
2
Idler
Crease roll drive belt
Remove the idler assembly.
Figure 2 Idler Assembly and Crease Roll Clutch
Replacement
3
Remove the feed and
the exit roll drive gear
and bearing.
4
Tensioner lock screw.
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the crease roll clutch and drive coupling
assembly.
2.
Replace the idler assembly with the smooth side of the crease roll drive belt towards the
idler, then fit the drive belt over the clutch gear, Figure 2.
3.
Position the clutch torque arm in the slot in the idler bracket, See Figure 2 insert.
4.
Perform ADJ 12.10-171 Motor Drive Belt Tensioning.
Remove 5 screws.
Figure 1 Drive Coupling Assembly

3.
Slacken the tensioner lock screw and move the crease roll tensioner pulley to the left,
then tighten the lock screw, Figure 1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.69-171
February 2013
4-216
REP 12.70-171 Tri-Folder Feed Roller and Drive Belt
REP 12.71-171 TF Assist Gate Solenoid

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Undock the Tri-Folder from the HVF and move the unit to the right to access the left side
of the frame, REP 12.99-171.
1.
Open the TF front door, or remove the Bin 2 assembly, then remove the Tri-Folder rear
cover, REP 12.67-171.
2.
Remove the drive belt, Figure 1.
2.
Disconnect the harness and remove the solenoid and spring, Figure 1. Remove the armature and lever if required.
Feed roller
3
Pull the feed roller through
the frame bearing then
remove the drive belt.
Armature and
lever
1
Release the tension
on the belt.
Driven pulley
Remove the circlip, then move the feed roller

shaft towards the front to remove the drive
pulley.
Remove 2 screws
behind frame.
2
Disconnect harness.
Remove solenoid and

spring.
Figure 1 Feed Roller and Drive Belt

3.
If required, remove the feed roller shaft front circlip and bearing and remove the feed
roller assembly from the Tri-Folder.
Replacement
1.
2.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the feed roller and drive belt.
Before docking the Tri-Folder unit to the HVF, perform ADJ 12.10-171, Motor Driven Belt
Tensioning
Figure 1 Assist Gate Solenoid
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the entry solenoid.
2.
Refit the armature and lever before replacing the spring and solenoid coil. If necessary,
get assistance to hold the armature coil in position when replacing the screws.
February 2013
4-217
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.70-171, REP 12.71-171
REP 12.72-171 Tri Folder Crease Roll Springs
REP 12.73-171 Tri Folder Top Cover and Idler Assemblies

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the front door, front cover and rear cover REP 12.67-171.
1.
2.
Remove the circlip and remove the front or rear spring, Figure 1.
Undock the tri-folder from the HVF and move it to the right to gain access to the left side
of the tri-folder frame, REP 12.99-171.
NOTE: The wiring harnesses to the HVF do not need to be disconnected.
2.
Remove the top cover door assembly, Figure 1.

NOTE: Control the movement of the torsion spring.
Front crease roll spring
Rear crease roll spring
Torsion Spring
Figure 1 Front and Rear Crease Roll Springs
Replacement
Remove the clip.
Release the front of the top

cover door assembly, then
remove.
3
Remove the
front screw.
Remove the rear screw.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the front or rear crease roll spring.
Figure 1 Top Cover Removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.72-171, REP 12.73-171
February 2013
4-218
3.
REP 12.74-171 Tri Folder Roller Assembly and Diverter

Solenoid
Remove the idler assemblies, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
Remove the top cover
(5 screws).
2
Release the springs, then
remove the idler assembly.
1.
Undock the Tri-Folder assembly from the HVF, REP 12.99-171. Position and support the
Tri-Folder so that it is safely accessible from the front, rear and left side.
2.
Release the crease roll drive belt tension, REP 12.69-171. Disconnect the harness from
the diverter and assist gate solenoids.
NOTE: First remove the lower front and rear screws. Support the roller assembly and
remove the upper front and rear screws. If not supported the assembly will fall inside the
Tri Folder frame.
Figure 2 Idler assembly removal
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the idler assemblies and top cover door
assembly.
2.
Make sure that the correct self-tapping screws are used to replace the cover base; do not
overtighten the screws.
3.
Replace, but do not tighten, the rear pivot shaft screw. Position the cover and torsion
spring then fit the front of the pivot shaft in the frame. Replace and tighten both front and
rear pivot shaft screws.
4.
Check that the cable harnesses are not obstructed or touching moving parts when the trifolder is docked to the HVF.
February 2013
4-219
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.73-171, REP 12.74-171
3.
Remove the roller assembly through the front door, Figure 1.
4.
Remove the diverter gate solenoid and crease roll pulleys as required, Figure 2.
Diverter gate
lever.
1
Remove 2
screws.
2
Remove
Diverter gate
solenoid.
Crease roll
pulleys
Remove 2 rear screws.
Disconnect the sensor harness. Remove 2 front screws.
Assist gate solenoid
Figure 2 Positioning The Diverter Gate Lever
Figure 1 Tri Folder Roller Assembly
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.74-171
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to reinstall the pulleys, diverter gate solenoid and Tri
Folder roller assembly.
2.
Before replacing the roller assembly set the diverter operating lever to the forward (solenoid armature extended) position to engage with the right side of the diverter shaft lever,
Figure 2.
3.
Check that the diverter gate operates correctly before tensioning the crease roll drive belt.
February 2013
4-220
REP 12.75-171 Bin 1 Limit Switches
2.

Removal
Disconnect the PJs and remove the upper or lower limit switch and bracket as required,
Figure 1.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1
Remove the screw and then
remove the upper limit switch.
2
Remove the screw and then
remove the lower limit switch.
Figure 1 Bin 1 Limit Switches
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Bin 1 upper and lower limit switches.
February 2013
4-221
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.75-171
REP 12.76-171 Bin 1 Upper Level Sensor
REP 12.77-171 Tri Folder Door Interlock Switches and

Sensor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the HVF front and rear covers, REP 12.1-171.
2.
Disconnect the PJs and remove the receiver or transmitter as necessary, Figure 1.
1.
Remove the tri folder front and top covers, REP 12.67-171.
2.
Remove the front door and top cover interlock switches and the top cover sensor, Figure
1.
Rear receiver
Top cover sensor
Front transmitter
Front door interlock switch
Figure 1 Bin 1 Upper level sensor
Replacement
Figure 1 TF Interlock Switches and Cover Sensor
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the transmitter or receiver of the bin 1 upper level
sensor.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the front door and top cover interlock switches and
the top access cover sensor.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.76-171, REP 12.77-171
February 2013
4-222
REP 12.78-171 Tri Folder Entry and Assist Gate Sensors
REP 12.79-171 Tri Folder Exit Sensor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Undock the tri folder unit from the HVF, REP 12.73-171.
1.
Remove the tri folder top cover, REP 12.67-171.
2.
Disconnect the PJs and remove the entry and assist gate sensors, Figure 1.
2.
1
Disconnect the harness and
remove the exit sensor.
Assist gate sensor
Entry sensor
LEFT SIDE VIEW

Figure 1 TF Entry and Assist Gate Sensors
Figure 1 Tri Folder Exit Sensor
Replacement
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the entry and assist gate sensors.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the exit sensor.
February 2013
4-223
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.78-171, REP 12.79-171
REP 12.80-171 Tri Folder PWB
2.
Remove the PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
Disconnect all connectors from the
PWB.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the tri folder
PWB.
1.
Remove tri folder rear cover, REP 12.67-171.
2
Remove 4 screws,
then the PWB.
Figure 2 Tri Folder PWB
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the tri folder PWB.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.80-171
February 2013
4-224
REP 12.81-171 Tri Folder Main and Bin 2 Tray Harnesses
3.
Remove the bin 2 tray harness, Figure 1.

Removal
Bookletmaker PWB to tri-folder PWB harness.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the tri folder rear cover, REP 12.67-171. If removing the bookletmaker PWB to
tri-folder PWB harness, remove the HVF rear cover, REP 12.1-171.
2.
Disconnect the PJs then remove the bookletmaker PWB to tri-folder PWB harness, Figure 1.
Bin 2 tray harness
Bin 2 tray harness,

PJ660
Figure 1 Tri folder and Bin 2 harnesses
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the bookletmaker PWB to tri-folder PWB and bin 2
tray harnesses.
February 2013
4-225
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.81-171
REP 12.82-171 Inserter Undocking
Replacement

Removal
1.
Reverse the undocking procedure to dock the Inserter unit to the HVF.
2.
Lock the Inserter onto the HVF by sliding the latch handle towards the front, Figure 1.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Place the Inserter on a suitable surface. Do not damage the Inserter locating pins.
CAUTION
Do not show the customer how to undock or dock the Inserter.
1.
Open the HVF front door.
2.
Undock the inserter, Figure 1.
2
Lift the inserter vertically
from the HVF and put it on a
suitable surface.
1
Move the white latch handle
to the rear.
Locating Pins
Figure 1 Tray 6 Inserter Undocking
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.82-171
February 2013
4-226
REP 12.83-171 Inserter Front and Rear Covers
REP 12.84-171 Inserter Motor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Undock the Inserter and put it on a suitable surface, REP 12.82-171.
1.
Remove the Inserter rear cover, and open the top left door, REP 12.83-171.
2.
Remove the front and rear covers, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the inserter motor and bracket, Figure 1.
2
Release the upper tab, then the side
tab. Remove the front cover.
Upper tab
Upper tab
Side tab
Remove 1 screw.
4
3
Remove 1 screw.
Release the upper

tab and side tab,
then remove the rear
cover.
1
Disconnect motor
harness.
2
Remove 3 screws.
Figure 1 Inserter Front and Rear Covers
Remove motor and

bracket.
Figure 1 Inserter Motor
Replacement
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Inserter front and rear covers.
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Inserter motor.
2.
Make sure that the correct screws are used to replace the inserter motor.
February 2013
4-227
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.83-171, REP 12.84-171
REP 12.85-171 Inserter PWB

Removal
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the inserter
PWB.
WARNING
3
1.
Remove the inserter rear cover. REP 12.83-171.
2.
Remove the inserter PWB, Figure 2.
Remove the inserter

PWB.
Remove 4 screws
and the ground strap.
Disconnect all the PJs from

the PWB.
Figure 2 Inserter PWB
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.85-171
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Inserter PWB.
2.
Ensure that the ground strap is secured by one of the fixing screws.
February 2013
4-228
REP 12.86-171 Inserter Clutch
Replacement

Removal
1.
WARNING
WARNING
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Inserter clutch.
2.
When replacing the bracket, check that the clutch torque arm locates in the locating tab.
3.
Put the reverse roll drive belt over the drive idler and check that the reverse roll idler gear
shaft locates properly into the frame.
4.
When the bracket is secured, temporarily remove the circlip and the reverse roll drive pulley to replace the drive belt over the reverse roll drive pulley.
1.
Remove the Inserter rear cover. REP 12.83-171.
2.
Remove the inserter clutch, Figure 1.

NOTE: The reverse roll drive idler and the drive belt are not attached to the clutch bracket
or the Inserter frame.
2
Remove 4 screws, then the bracket.
3
Disconnect the connector, then remove
the inserter clutch.
1
Remove the E-clip
and bearing.
Reverse roll drive
belt
FOR CLARITY
INSERTER MOTOR
NOT SHOWN
Reverse roll drive

idler
Reverse roll drive

pulley
Figure 1 Inserter Clutch Removal
February 2013
4-229
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.86-171
REP 12.87-171 Inserter Top Cover Interlock Switch
REP 12.88-171 Inserter Jam Cover Interlock Switch

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the Inserter front cover, REP 12.83-171.
1.
Remove the Inserter front and rear covers, REP 12.83-171.
2.
Remove the top cover interlock switch, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the inserter motor, REP 12.84-171.
1
2
remove the switch.
Figure 1 Top Cover Interlock Switch
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Inserter top cover interlock switch.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.87-171, REP 12.88-171
February 2013
4-230
3.
REP 12.89-171 Main Tray and Paper Length Sensors
Remove the top cover door and the interlock switch, Figure 1.
3
Remove 2 screws from
the rear.
Remove 2 latch
pins.
Remove the
rear pivot screw,
then the top
cover.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Pull the lug on one side of the tray to disconnect from the frame pivot. Remove the cover
plate then disconnect the PJs and remove the sensors from the bracket clips, Figure 1
3
Remove the relevant paper lengthsensor.
2
Remove 2 screws,
then the cover plate.
5
Release the cable harness
clips and lift the top inside
cover.
4
Remove 2 screws
from the front.
6
Remove the jam cover
interlock switch.
1
Pull the lug on one side of the
tray to disconnect from the
frame pivot.
Figure 1 Jam cover Interlock Switch

Figure 1 Main Tray Assembly
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the jam cover interlock switch.
Replacement
2.
When reinstalling the top inside cover and the top cover door make sure that the correct
screws are used and that the screws are not overtightened.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the Inserter main tray and paper length sensors.
February 2013
4-231
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.88-171, REP 12.89-171
REP 12.90-171 Bottom Tray and Paper Sensors
2.
Remove the bottom tray sensor bracket, Figure 1.

NOTE: Observe the position of the two springs when lifting the bottom tray.

Removal
WARNING
Remove the pivot shaft
WARNING
2
Remove the
circlip and
bearing.
1.
Undock the Inserter, REP 12.82-171.
Paper width
sensors
Paper present
sensor.
4
the sensor bracket.
1
Release the front and rear pivot
tabs and lift the bottom tray.
Remove the relevant

sensor
Figure 1 Bottom Tray and Sensors
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.90-171
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the bottom tray and paper sensors.
Check that the loading levers are at the same angle and that the tray pivot shaft passes
below the front and rear loading levers. Check that the bottom tray is supported horizontally in the frame.
Make sure that the bottom tray springs are correctly aligned before engaging the front and
rear pivot tabs.
February 2013
4-232
REP 12.91-171 Inserter Top Cover and Inserter Pickup

Sensor
REP 12.92-171 Lower Jam Cover and Acceleration Sensor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the Inserter Front Cover, REP 12.83-171.
2.
To release the top cover, remove the pivot screw, Figure 1.
3.
Remove the inserter pickup sensor, Figure 1.
1.
Remove the front and rear covers, REP 12.83-171.
2.
Remove the acceleration sensor. Figure 1.
Top cover pivot screw
Release the guide

from the top cover.
3
Disconnect the harness and
remove the acceleration
sensor.
Remove the screw.
Remove the front

and rear door stop
and door pivot
screws.
3
Remove 2 screws and

lift the inner cover.
4
Release the sensor from
the bracket.
Figure 1 Acceleration sensor
Figure 1 Cover and Inserter Pickup Sensor
Replacement
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the Inserter lower jam cover and the acceleration
sensor.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the inserter pickup sensor and top cover.
February 2013
4-233
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.91-171, REP 12.92-171
REP 12.93-171 Inserter LE and TE Sensors
Replacement

Removal
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the LE and TE paper path sensors.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the Inserter front and rear covers, REP 12.83-171.
2.
3.
Remove the pickup roll assembly, REP 12.95-171.
4.
Remove the top cover, REP 12.91-171.
5.
Remove the top inside cover, REP 12.88-171.
6.
Remove the LE sensor or TE sensor, Figure 1.
Idle Roll Assembly
1
Release the harness clips.
Disconnect the harness,

then remove the relevant
sensor.
Remove 1 screw, then

the sensor bracket.
Figure 1 LE and TE Sensors
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.93-171
February 2013
4-234
REP 12.94-171 Inserter Bottom Plate Sensor
REP 12.95-171 Inserter Pickup Assembly and Reverse

Feed Roller

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Undock the Inserter, REP 12.82-171, and release the front and rear pivot tabs then lift the
bottom tray. Control the movement of the bottom tray springs.
2.
Remove the sensor from the bracket, Figure 1.
WARNING
1.
Remove the pickup roller assembly from the inserter, Figure 1.
Link Arm
2
Remove the
plastic clip.
1
Raise the inserter top
cover.
Bottom Tray
1
Tray down
sensor
Disconnect
the harness.
2
Remove the sensor from the
bracket.
Figure 1 Inserter Tray Down Sensor
3
Pull the pickup roller assembly towards the
front to disengage the roller shaft from the
drive coupling and the link arm.
4
Disengage the shaft from the drive
coupling and remove the pickup
roller assembly.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the Inserter bottom plate sensor.
Figure 1 Pickup roller assembly removal
February 2013
4-235
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.94-171, REP 12.95-171
2.
REP 12.96-171 HVF Fixed and Adjustable Casters
Remove the reverse roller and coupling from the reverse roller shaft, Figure 2.
For clarity the top

cover is not shown.

Removal
1
Release the tab
then remove the
retard cover.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not remove more than one caster at a time unless the HVF frame is properly supported and
stable.
Remove the clip.
Remove the reverse feed roller.
1.
Undock the Tri Folder from the HVF, REP 12.82-171.
2.
Undock the HVF from the copier and remove the HVF front and rear covers, REP 12.1171.
3.
Get help to lift and support the HVF frame securely at a position close to where the caster
is to be removed, GP 16. Support the frame approximately 4 inches (approximately 2
reams of paper) above the floor so that the caster is not supporting the unit.
Figure 2 Reverse roller removal
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the reverse and the pickup roller assemblies.
2.
After replacing the pickup roller assembly close the Inserter top cover fully to engage the
link arm with the pickup roller.
3.
If a new inserter pickup assembly is installed, reset the inserter feed count to zero. Refer
to dC135 CRU / HFSI Status.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.95-171, REP 12.96-171
February 2013
4-236
4.
Remove the 2 screws and remove the fixed caster, Figure 1.
5.
Support the HVF frame. Remove the screw and stop plate and rotate the caster adjustment wheel to unscrew the caster from the frame, Figure 2.
Stop plate
Figure 1 HVF Fixed Caster Removal

Figure 2 HVF Adjustable Caster Removal
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the HVF fixed and adjustable casters.
February 2013
4-237
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.96-171
REP 12.97-171 Pause To Unload PWB Assembly
REP 12.98-171 Inserter Idle Roller Assembly

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the front door, front cover and top cover, REP 12.1-171.
1.
Remove the Inserter front and rear covers., REP 12.83-171.
2.
Remove the pause to unload (PTU) PWB, Figure 1.
2.
3.
Remove the inserter clutch, REP 12.86-171.
4.
Remove the top cover assembly, REP 12.91-171.
5.
Remove the inside top cover and top left door interlock switch, REP 12.88-171.
Bracket
Remove the pause to

unload (PTU) PWB.
Figure 1 Remove the PTU PWB
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the PTU PWB.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.97-171, REP 12.98-171
February 2013
4-238
6.
Remove the 2 screws at the rear of the idle roller assembly, Figure 1.
NOTE: Check that the loading gear remains engaged with the loading shaft gear.
4
Remove the idle roller assembly.
1
Disconnect and then
release the harness
from the frame.
2
Remove 3 screws.
4
Remove 2 screws.
Idle roller
assembly
3
Turn the loading bracket to access
the 2 screws in step 4.
Remove the clip

and idler gear.
Remove the clip

and driven gear.
Move the load lever to release the tension

on the torsion spring.
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 2 Idle Roller Assembly
Figure 1 Idler Assembly Rear Screws

7.
Load Lever
Relieve the torsion spring tension by moving the loading lever and remove 3 of the four
front loading bracket screws. Remove the idle roller assembly, Figure 2.
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the Idle roller assembly.
Replace the loading bracket screws and check that the front loading lever is at the same angle
as the rear loading lever then tension the torsion spring. The loading tray will not operate correctly if it is not supported horizontally in the Inserter frame.
February 2013
4-239
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.98-171
REP 12.99-171 Tri-Folder Removal
7.
Parts List on PL 12.200, PL 12.205

Removal
WARNING
Replacement
Undock the tri-folder from the HVF.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the tri-folder module.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14. Disconnect the power cord from the
customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1.
2.
Remove the tri-folder rear cover, REP 12.67-171.
3.
Remove the coupler drive belt, REP 12.68-171.
4.
Open the tri-folder front door, then remove the front and rear thumb screws, Figure 1.
Rear thumb screw
Front thumb screw
Figure 1 Thumb Screw Removal

5.
Disconnect the bookletmaker PWB to tri-folder PWB and bin 2 tray harnesses from the trifolder module, REP 12.81-171.
6.
Disconnect the harness from PJ 553 & PJ 563 on the BM PWB, PL 12.175 Item 10.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.99-171
February 2013
4-240
REP 12.100-171 Ejector Paddle Assembly (W/TAG V-004)
Replacement

Removal
1.
Rotate the paddle shaft to ensure that the locating tab is uppermost, Figure 2.
2.
Ensure that the longest paddle is positioned towards the stacker tray.
3.
Hold the paddle assembly by the two short tabs and clip onto the shaft.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 14. Disconnect the power cord from the
customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: Ensure that the paddle assembly is correctly oriented to fit onto the plastic locating tab.
WARNING
1.
Rotate the ejector paddle assembly until the two short tabs are visible.
2.
Squeeze the two short tabs together and pull to remove the ejector paddle assembly, Figure 1.
Paddle locating tab
Figure 2 Paddle locating tab
Figure 1 Ejector paddle assembly
February 2013
4-241
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.100-171
REP 12.101-171 Paddle Wheel

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE: This procedure shows the replacement of the paddle wheels with the compiler paddle
unit installed. If necessary, remove the compiler paddle unit before replacing the paddle
wheels. Refer to REP 12.49-171.
1.
Rotate the paddle until the two rubber blades are visible.
CAUTION
To ensure that the correct home position of the paddle wheel shaft is maintained, install the
new paddle wheels one at a time.
CAUTION
Ensure all defective paddles are replaced with a paddle of the same type.The two outer paddles are a different type to the three inner paddles.
2.
Squeeze the two rubber blades together and pull to remove the paddle wheel from the
shaft, Figure 1.
Figure 1 Paddle removal
Replacement
1.
Hold the paddle wheel by the two rubber blades and clip onto the shaft.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 12.101-171
February 2013
4-242
REP 62.1 Scanner Module
2.
Prepare to remove the scanner, Figure 1.

Removal
WARNING
1
the harness guide plate.
WARNING
WARNING
is heavy.
1.
2
Cut the cable
tie that secures
the UI harness.
Post
3.
Remove the SBC PWB cover, PL 3.11 Item 11.
4.
Disconnect PJ15, PJ18, PJ19 and PJ223 from the single board controller PWB.
5.
Disconnect PJ8 from the power distribution PWB.
6.
Release the harnesses from around the post, refer to Figure 1.
WARNING
Use safe handling procedures when removing the module. Refer to GP 16. The module
is heavy.
NOTE: The weight of the scanner is 15Kg (33lb).
7.
Remove the scanner module, Figure 2.
February 2013
4-243
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.1
a.
Remove the scanner rear cover, PL 62.10 Item 14.
b.
Remove the scanner side cover, PL 62.10 Item 15.
Remove the scanner module.
c.
Remove the user interface assembly, REP 2.1.
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure that the SBC PWB and power distribution PWB harnesses are correctly wound
round the post, Figure 3.
1
Wind the harnesses around
the post as shown.
Route the PJs underneath

the harness, then connect
the PJs.
Slide the scanner module off the 2 docking pins

and the 4 base retainers.
Figure 3 Harness winding
1
Remove 2 screws, then push
the scanner to the rear to
unlatch it.
Figure 2 Scanner module removal

8.
If a replacement scanner is to be installed, remove the following components:
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.1
February 2013
4-244
3.
Re-install the harness guide plate. Ensure the harnesses are correctly positioned, Figure
4.
1
Locate the rear
of the harness
guide plate in
the slot.
2
Install the guide plate as shown.
The scanner end of the harnesses
must be routed above guide plate.
The connector end must be
routed below the guide plate. Reinstall the 2 screws.
801-009
801-010
801-011
801-012
801-013
801-014
801-015
801-016
801-017
801-018
801-019
801-020
801-021
801-022
801-023
801-024
801-025
801-026
Figure 4 Guide plate replacement

4.
Check that the image processor module opens and closes smoothly without trapping the
harnesses. If necessary, repeat replacement steps 2 and 3.
5.
If a new scanner module has been installed, perform the following:

a.
b.
c.
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Make sure the following IIT DADH NVM settings are
set to default:
800-005
800-006
800-007
800-008
800-009
801-005
801-006
801-007
801-008
February 2013
4-245
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.1
REP 62.2 Top Cover
REP 62.3 CVT Glass, CVT Ramp and Document Glass

Assembly

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the scanner module, REP 62.1.
1.
3.
Remove the top cover, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the CVT glass, PL 62.10 Item 3.
3.
Remove the CVT ramp and document glass assembly, Figure 1.
Remove the top cover, REP 62.2.
Remove the scanner

rear cover (2 Screws).
2
Remove the top cover (5
Screws).
Replacement
1.
2.
Perform the following procedures:
ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.2, REP 62.3
February 2013
4-246
REP 62.4 Scan Carriage Home Sensor

Removal
1
Remove 4 screws.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the User Interface assembly, REP 2.1.

CAUTION
Do not remove the document glass.

Do not loosen the two screws securing the setting plate, shown in Figure 1.
2.
Figure 1, remove the scan carriage home sensor.
Do not loosen.
Corner brackets
3
Remove the document glass
and CVT ramp assembly.
2
Loosen 6 screws and rotate 6 glass clamps away
from the document glass.
3
Disconnect the sensor.
Figure 1 CVT glass and document glass assembly
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure that the white AGC strips on the document glass and the CVT glass are at the
front and underside of the glass.
3.
Ensure that the document glass is located in the corner brackets, Figure 1. Check that the
CVT ramp is located correctly in the pips on the frame.
4.
Perform ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning as necessary.
5.
If a new document glass assembly has been installed, perform the following:
a.
b.
Remove the
sensor (1
screw).
1
Remove the
screw.
2
Pull forward the sensor
plate.
Figure 1 Scan carriage home sensor
Replacement
1.
Install the sensor on to the sensor plate, ensuring the lugs locate correctly in the slot.
February 2013
4-247
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.3, REP 62.4
2.
Re-connect the sensor.
REP 62.5 Scan Carriage Assembly
3.
Install the sensor plate. Ensure that the three locating lugs are correctly located in the
slots of the mounting plate.
4.
The replacement of the removed components in the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.4, REP 62.5
1.
Remove the CVT glass, REP 62.3.
2.
Remove the CVT ramp and document glass assembly, REP 62.3.
3.
Disconnect the LED exposure lamps ribbon cable, REP 62.11.
4.
Figure 1. Remove the scan carriage assembly.
February 2013
4-248
2.
Figure 2. Place the scan carriage assembly centrally over the springs on the scan cables.
Slide the scan cables under the fixing tabs.
Remove the PJ cover (2

screws) and disconnect the
scan carriage ribbon cable.
NOTE: Observe the spring position between the fixing tabs on the scan carriage assembly.
2
Loosen 1 screw,
then slide out
the cable.
Fixing tab.
Fixing tab.
Spring position.
Figure 2 Alignment of the scan carriage
3.
Reconnect the scan carriage ribbon cable.
4.
Reinstall the PJ cover.
5.
Reconnect the exposure lamp ribbon cable. Ensure that the metal connections face
towards the PWB. Secure the cable clamps.
6.
Close the exposure lamp ribbon harness securing clip.
7.
Perform ADJ 62.2 Scan Carriage Adjustment.
8.
9.
3
4
Remove the scan carriage.
Loosen 3 screws, then slide

out the cables.
Figure 1 Carriage removal
Replacement
1.
Insert the scan carriage ribbon cable through the securing clamp and the square hole.
February 2013
4-249
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.5
REP 62.6 Carriage Motor and Mounting

Removal
WARNING
1.
Remove the scanner top cover, REP 62.2.
2.
Remove the carriage motor cover, (2 screws).
3.
Figure 1. Prepare to remove the carriage motor.
Release the wiring and

disconnect PJ 929.
(Press the top of the PJ)
3
Remove the
mounting (2
screws).
2
Remove the bracket
(2 screws).
Figure 2 Motor and mounting
Replacement
1.
2.
Perform ADJ 62.3 Carriage Motor and Scanner Drive Belt.
1
Remove 3
screws.
4.
Remove the scanner harness bracket, PL 62.16 Item 14, to allow access to PJ 929.
5.
Figure 2. Remove the carriage motor and mounting. Note the orientation of the bracket
and the mounting.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.6
February 2013
4-250
REP 62.7 Scan Cables
2.

Removal
Figure 2. Prepare to install the lower scan cable.

NOTE: The lower scan cable is black and is longer than the upper scan cable.
NOTE: The anchor ball is not installed centrally on the scan cables.
WARNING
NOTE: To assist in holding the scan cables in position, use adhesive tape.
long end.
short end.
WARNING
1.
Remove the scan carriage, REP 62.5.
2.
Remove the scan motor cover, (2 screws).
3.
Slide the cables off the pulleys or capstan.
4.
Remove the springs and lift out the cables.
longer, black cable.
Replacement
1.
Figure 1 shows the general arrangement of the scan cables, when correctly installed.
6 turns on
each cable.
2
Wind three turns below the anchor
point on the capstan.
Upper scan
cable.
1
Install the anchor ball in the anchor
point.
Lower scan cable.
3
Note that the springs are in
the same relative position.
Use adhesive tape to secure the anchor ball in the anchor point.
Figure 2 Mount lower scan cable on the capstan
Figure 1 Scan cable arrangement
February 2013
4-251
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.7
3.
Figure 3. Install the lower scan cable on the rear pulleys.
4.
Figure 4. Prepare to install the upper scan cable.

NOTE: The anchor ball is not installed centrally on the scan cable.
2
Install the cable around the left, rear, lower pulley.
short end.
3
Use adhesive tape to secure the
anchor ball in the anchor point.
long end.
1
Wind three turns above the
anchor point.
1
Install the anchor ball in the
anchor point.
2
Wind three turns below the
anchor point on the capstan.
3
Install the cable around the
right, rear, lower pulley.
Figure 3 Installation of the lower scan cable

Figure 4 Mount upper scan cable on the capstan
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.7
February 2013
4-252
5.
Figure 5. Install the lower scan cable.
6.
Figure 6. Prepare to install the upper scan cable.
1
Wind three turns above the
anchor point.
1
Attach the spring to
the cable.
2
Install the cable around
the front, left pulley.
3
Install the cable over the front,
right pulley.
Figure 5 Installation of the lower scan cable
Figure 6 Installation of the upper scan cable
February 2013
4-253
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.7
7.
Figure 7. Prepare to install the upper scan cable on the pulleys.
8.
Figure 8. Install the upper scan cable.
Install the cable around the left

rear, upper pulley.
Place the cable round the pulley.
2
Attach the spring to the cable.
1
Lift off the right, rear
upper pulley (1 circlip).
5
Reinstall the circlip.
4
Install the pulley on to the shaft.

9.
Remove the adhesive tape used to secure the anchor balls in the anchor points.
10. Reinstall the scan carriage, REP 62.5.

11. Perform ADJ 62.2 scan carriage assembly.
12. Reinstall the CVT glass and document glass, REP 62.3.
13. Reinstall the scanner top cover, REP 62.2.
14. Reinstall the scan motor cover, (2 screws).
15. Reinstall the scanner module, REP 62.1.
16. Reinstall the DADH, REP 5.19.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.7
February 2013
4-254
REP 62.8 Scan Drive Belt

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the scan carriage assembly, REP 62.5.
2.
Remove the scan motor, REP 62.6.
3.
Secure the scan cables, Figure 1.
1
Remove the scan drive
belt from the capstan.
Insulation tape.
2
Carefully thread the scan drive belt over the scan cables.
Remove the scan drive belt.
1
Secure the scan cables to
the capstan.
Figure 2 Removal of the scan drive belt
Replacement
1.
2.
Perform ADJ 62.3 Scanner Motor.
Figure 1 Scan cables and capstan

NOTE: When removing the scan cables from the pulleys, it is not necessary to lift out the
cables from the scanner.
4.
Remove the scan cables from the pulleys, REP 62.7.
5.
Remove the scan drive belt, Figure 2.
February 2013
4-255
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.8
REP 62.9 Input Module Angle Sensor
REP 62.10 LED Exposure Lamps

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
Figure 1, remove the input module angle sensor.
2.
Remove the CVT ramp and document glass assembly REP 62.3.
3.
Figure 1. Remove the LED exposure lamp(s).
2
Depress the actuator
to release the sensor.
Disconnect the sensor from

the harness and remove.
Remove one screw.
Figure 1 Input module angle sensor
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedures to replace the input module angle sensor.
2.
When replacing the input module angle sensor, ensure that the lugs on the sensor are
located in the slot of the frame before tightening the screw.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.9, REP 62.10
February 2013
4-256
REP 62.11 Exposure Lamp Ribbon Harness

2
Remove 1
screw and clip.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove 1 screw and clip.
3.
Remove the scanner PWB cover, PL 62.16 Item 9 (three screws).
4.
Disconnect the exposure lamp ribbon harness, PJ926 on the scanner PWB, PL 62.16
Item 8.
5.
Figure 1. Remove the exposure lamp ribbon harness.
1
Disconnect the ribbon harness.
1
Disconnect the ribbon harness.
3
Remove 2 screws,
then the LED
exposure lamp(s).
Figure 1 Removal of the LED exposure lamps
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure that the ribbon harness is routed flat on the under side of the scan carriage to
avoid rubbing on the scanner PWB cover. When re-connected, the metal contacts on the
ribbon cable must face down, away from the scan carriage.
3.
Perform ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning.
February 2013
4-257
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.10, REP 62.11
2.
Ensure that the ribbon harness is routed flat on the under side of the scan carriage to
avoid rubbing on the scanner PWB cover. When re-connected, the metal contacts on the
ribbon cable must face down, away from the scan carriage.
3.
1
If necessary, carefully
move the scan carriage
assembly to the left.
3
Remove the harness.
Scan carriage
assembly
2
Carefully lower the
securing clip bar.
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.11
February 2013
4-258
REP 62.12 Scanner PWB
801-011

Removal
801-012
801-013
801-014
801-015
801-016
801-017
801-018
801-019
801-020
801-021
801-022
801-023
801-024
801-025
801-026
WARNING
WARNING
Figure 1 ESD Symbol

CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the scanner
PWB.
1.
Remove the document glass, REP 62.3.
2.
3.
Remove the scanner PWB cover, PL 62.16 Item 9.
4.
Disconnect all of the harness connectors from the scanner PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8.
5.
Remove four screws securing the scanner PWB.
6.
Remove the scanner PWB.
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
If a new scanner PWB has been installed, enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Make sure the
following IIT DADH NVM settings are set to default:
800-005
800-006
800-007
800-008
800-009
801-005
801-006
801-007
801-008
801-009
801-010
February 2013
4-259
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.12
REP 62.13 Scan Carriage Ribbon Cable
REP 62.14 Document Size Sensor 1 and Document Size

Sensor 2

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1. Remove the CVT glass, REP 62.3.
2. Remove the CVT ramp and document glass assembly REP 62.3.
3. Remove the scanner PWB cover, PL 62.16 Item 9.
4. Prepare to remove the scan carriage ribbon cable, PL 62.15 Item 4.
5. Figure 1. Remove the scan carriage ribbon cable.
Disconnect the scan

carriage ribbon cable,
PJ928.
Remove the scan

carriage ribbon
cable.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1. Remove the CVT glass, REP 62.3.
2.
3.
Figure 1. Remove document size sensor 1 (Q62-251).

NOTE: The removal of document size sensor 1 (Q62-251) is shown. The removal of document size sensor 2 (Q62-253) is identical.
3
Remove the document size sensor.
2
1
Remove 1 screw.
Disconnect the
harness.
3
Release two harness
retainers
Disconnect the scan

carriage ribbon cable.
Remove the
connector cover.
Figure 1 Ribbon cable removal
Replacement
CAUTION
Take care when replacing the scan carriage ribbon cable. The scan carriage ribbon cable is
easily damaged.
1. The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Perform ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 62.13, REP 62.14
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
1.
2.
February 2013
4-260
REP 70.1 3 Tray Module PWB
2.
Remove the 3 tray module PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
1
Disconnect 8 PJs
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
Remove 7 screws
CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the 3 tray
module PWB.
1.
Remove the (upper) rear cover, PL 81.10 Item 1 and the (lower) rear cover, PL 70.25 Item
8.
Figure 2 Remove the 3 tray module PWB
Replacement
1.
2.
Perform dC625 Registration / Preheat calibration.
February 2013
4-261
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 70.1
REP 70.2 Upper Left Hand Door Assembly
REP 71.1 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Removal

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove bypass tray feed assembly, REP 81.3.
2.
Remove the upper left hand door assembly, Figure 1.
CAUTION
Do not stack the trays one on top of the other tray. The top tray can damage the bottom tray,
which cause misfeeds or paper jams.
1.
Remove the tray 1 or tray 2, Figure 1.

NOTE: The removal procedure for tray 1 and tray 2 is the same.
1
Open the door
Pull tray out, lift front of tray to remove it
Figure 1 Tray 1 and tray 2 removal
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Make sure that the left tray slide is
located inside the tray stop before inserting the right side of the tray. Refer to Figure 1.
2
Lift bypass assembly off the hinges
Figure 1 Upper left hand door removal
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing the hinge pin, do not damage the wire harness.
1.
2.
Make sure that the upper left door assembly is correctly aligned.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 70.2, REP 71.1
February 2013
4-262
REP 71.2 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Paper Guides
3.
To remove the paper width guide, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Remove 2 pulleys
NOTE: The removal procedure is the same for tray 1 and for tray 2.
1.
Remove the paper then remove the tray, REP 71.1.
2.
To remove the elevate plate assemble, Figure 1.
2
Unhook plastic guide
2
Lift the plate straight upwards
away from the tray module.
3
Slide paper width guides to middle and
lift out
Figure 2 Remove the paper width guide
1
Lift the plate to an
upright position.
Figure 1 Remove the paper lift plate
February 2013
4-263
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 71.2
4.
REP 71.3 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Lift Gear Assembly
Remove the paper width guide and the paper tray, Figure 3.
1
Slide paper length
guide to middle

Removal
WARNING
Remove the screw
WARNING
1.
Remove the paper tray, REP 71.1.
2.
Remove the paper lift plate, REP 71.2.
3.
Remove the metal plate, Figure 1.
3
Remove metal guide
2
Remove 2 screws
4
Slide paper length guide to the opening
and remove the guide through the opening
Figure 3 Remove the paper length guide
Replacement
1.
1
Remove E-clip
Figure 1 E-clip removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 71.2, REP 71.3
February 2013
4-264
4.
REP 73.1 Tray 3 Removal
Remove the gear assembly, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
1.
Pull out tray 3.
2.
Remove the paper from the tray.
3.
Remove the right side cover, PL 70.25 Item 4.
4.
Remove tray 1 and 2, REP 71.1.
Quadrant
1
Remove 2 screws
2
Remove the gear assembly, quadrant and
the bush behind the quadrant
Figure 2 Lift gear removal
Replacement
Engage the lift gear assembly with the spigots on the rear of the tray. The remainder of the
replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
February 2013
4-265
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 71.3, REP 73.1
5.
Remove the screws to release the tray rails, Figure 1.
6.
Lift and pull to remove the tray complete with the guide rails.
Replacement
NOTE: When installing tray 3 ensure that the tray rails are located correctly in the base, Figure
2.
Remove the screw
Locate rail hook in guide hole
Figure 2 Location of the tray rails

Remove the screw
Figure 1 Remove tray 3 guide rails
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 73.1
February 2013
4-266
REP 73.2 Tray 3 Elevator Motor
REP 73.3 Tray 3 Elevator Cables

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Pull out tray 3.
2.
Remove the right side cover. PL 70.25 Item 4.
3.
Remove the tray 3 motor, Figure 1.
NOTE: The elevator drives at the front and at the rear are similar for both trays.
1.
Remove tray 3, REP 73.1.
2.
Remove the tray 3 front cover, PL 70.25 Item 3 (2 screws from below the cover).
3.
Remove the cables from the front drive pulley, Figure 1.
Disconnect in-line connector

and connector on sensor.
Remove the short cable from the

drive pulley.
3
Remove the long cable from the
drive pulley.
1
Remove 2 screws.
2
Remove the cable gear
shaft spacer.
2
Remove tray 3 motor and
bracket
1
Remove E
clip.
Figure 1 Elevator motor removal

Figure 1 Front elevator cable removal
Replacement
February 2013
4-267
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 73.2, REP 73.3
4.
Remove the pulley carriers and pass the cables through the base of the tray, Figure 2.
5.
Remove the tray 3 rear elevator cable, Figure 3.
NOTE: Short cable over the outer pulley and the long cable over the inner pulley.
2
Remove the metal plate if
fitted
Pulley carriers
3
Remove the pulley
carrier
4
Remove the drive
dog and cap
5
Remove the cable from
the drive pulley.
1
Remove E-clip
6
Pass cable through the
base of the tray
Long cable
Short cable
Figure 3 Tray 3 rear cable removal
Figure 2 Remove front elevator cables
Replacement
Tray 3 front cables.
1.
Thread the front short cable (silver) over the inner groove on the pulley
2.
Thread the front long cable (yellow) over the outer groove on the pulley.
Tray 3 rear cable.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 73.3
Thread the rear cable (black) over the inner groove on the pulley.
February 2013
4-268
REP 73.4 Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor
REP 73.5 Tray 3 Home Sensor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Pull out tray 3.
The removal procedure is the same for tray 3 and tray 4.
2.
Remove Tray 3 paper feed assembly, REP 81.2.
3.
Disconnect and remove the stack height sensor, Figure 1.
1.
Pull out Tray 3
2.
Remove the right side cover, PL 70.25 Item 4.
3.
Remove the tray 3 home sensor and holder, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect the
harness
2
1
Remove screw
2
Press the tabs to release the sensor.
Figure 1 Stack height sensor

Figure 1 Tray home switch and holder
Replacement
Replacement
February 2013
4-269
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 73.4, REP 73.5
REP 73.6 Tray 3 Elevator Damper and Gears
3.
To remove the drive gears, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Pinch the two sections of the

shaft together and pull off the
gears
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. Sharp edges may be present can cause injury.
1.
2.
To remove the damper from tray 3, Figure 1.
Figure 2 Remove the gears
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure the gears are correctly aligned, Figure 3.
Align the two gears as shown

and then push the gears onto
the shaft
Lift and remove the

damper
Remove the screw
Figure 1 Tray 3 damper
Figure 3 Install the gears
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 73.6
February 2013
4-270
REP 75.1 Tray 5 Empty Sensor
3.
Remove tray 5 empty sensor, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Prepare to remove the tray 5 empty sensor, Figure 1.
1
2
Press the tabs to release the
sensor.
Figure 2 Remove tray 5 empty sensor
Replacement
Remove eight screws

marked A
1.
2.
Make sure that the torsion nudger spring on the paper feed assembly is in the correct
position, Figure 3.
3
Lift the upper feed
assembly top cover.
Locate the torsion nudger

spring under the post.
Figure 3 Spring location
February 2013
4-271
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.1
3.
Make sure that the housing spring is positioned on top of the takeaway idler roller shaft
when the upper feed assembly top cover is installed, Figure 4.
REP 75.2 Tray 5 Stack Height Sensor

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Housing spring position
1.
2.
Prepare to remove the tray 5 stack height sensor, Figure 1.
Figure 4 Spring position

4.
Check that the correct screw is used to attach the upper feed assembly top cover.
5.
Make sure that the torsion chute spring is positioned on top of the chute upper insert, Figure 5.
1
3.
Remove tray 5 stack height sensor, Figure 2.
Position the torsion chute spring on the

top of the chute.
6.
Check that the harness routing is correct, Figure 1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.1, REP 75.2
February 2013
4-272
REP 75.3 Tray 5 Down Sensor

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the rear cover, REP 75.8.
2.
Remove the tray 5 down sensor, Figure 1.
Press the tabs to release the sensor
Figure 2 Remove the sensor
Replacement
1.
2.
Remove sensor from

bracket
Disconnect the
harness
Replacement
February 2013
4-273
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.2, REP 75.3
REP 75.4 Tray 5 Elevator Motor Assembly
4.
If required remove the encoder sensor from the plastic bracket, Figure 2.

Removal
1
Press the tab to release the encoder
sensor
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Disconnect the harness on

the encoder sensor
2.
3.
Remove the tray 5 elevator motor assembly, Figure 1.
Figure 2 Remove the encoder sensor
NOTE: The tray 5 paper tray must be supported before the elevator motor assembly is
removed.
Replacement
1
Disconnect:
PJ518 on the
encoder,
PJ530
and
In-line ground
connectors
1.
To help with the installing of a new elevator motor, support the paper tray on two reams of
paper.
2.
Make sure that the encoder sensor is position on the elevator motor assembly, Figure 2.
3.
4.
Check that the harness is routed in the channel on the plastic bracket, Figure 3.
Check that the wires in the harness are not trapped and are
free to move
Figure 3 Harness position
Slide the motor off

the shaft
Remove the
KL clip
5.
Ensure that there are no twists in the harness when installing the elevator motor.
6.
When the motor is installed, remove the paper supporting the paper tray.
2
3
Release the
cable tie on the
motor
Disconnect the motor

connections
Figure 1 Remove the elevator motor assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.4
February 2013
4-274
7.
Exercise the elevator motor with one sheet of paper in the tray. Observe that the harness
tracks properly between the mylar guide and the rear channel. Figure 4.
Mylar guide
REP 75.5 Tray 5 Upper Limit Switch

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Rear channel
1.
2.
3.
Prepare to remove the tray 5 upper limit switch, Figure 1.
1
Remove two screws
2
Remove E-clip
Ramp to slide against
the mylar, to keep the
harness in the correct
position
3
Loosen the screw to
release belt tensioner
Figure 4 Location of the harness
4
Remove two screws
8.
Check the registration, perform dC625 Registration / preheat Calibration if necessary.

February 2013
4-275
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.4, REP 75.5
4.
REP 75.6 Tray 5 Down Limit Switch
Remove the tray 5 upper limit switch and the actuator if required, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
3
Remove screw and
release the spring to
remove the actuator
WARNING
2
Remove two
screws and
remove switch
1.
If the tray must be repositioned, refer to REP 75.4. Disengage the elevator motor from the
tray and move the tray to the required position. Re-engage the elevator motor to hold the
tray.
2.
Release the paper tray to gain access to the tray 5 down limit switch, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect harness
Figure 2 Remove tray upper limit switch
Replacement
1.
1
Remove three screws
Tray 5 down limit switch
Figure 1 Release the paper tray
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.5, REP 75.6
February 2013
4-276
3.
Lift the tray to access to the tray 5 down limit switch and the actuator if required, Figure 2.
REP 75.7 Un-docking and Docking Tray 5

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Take care not to topple Tray 5. Tray 5 is unstable when undocked from the machine. Do
not show the customer how to undock Tray 5.
Remove two screws
Disconnect harness
1.
2.
Engage the transit lock and pull the tray 5 module away from the machine until the lock
engages, Figure 1.
Remove the E-clip to release

the actuator
Figure 2 Remove tray 5 down limit switch
Replacement
1.
2.
Check that the wires are not trapped when refitting the tray.
To engage - lift the lever and move to

the right
Figure 1 Engage transit lock
February 2013
4-277
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.6, REP 75.7
3.
At the rear of the machine release the latch and pull the tray 5 module away from the
machine, Figure 2.
Replacement
1.
2.
Position the tray 5 module and align the docking guides with the machine, Figure 3.
Press the lever to release

the latch.
Align the tray 5 module with the docking plate
on the machine. Push the module to dock and
lock the tray 5 module to the machine.
Figure 2 Un-dock the tray 5 module
Figure 3 Docking the Tray 5 module
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.7
February 2013
4-278
3.
Release the transit lock and push the tray 5 module into the docked position against the
machine, Figure 4.
REP 75.8 Tray 5 Covers

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
To remove the top cover, Figure 1.
Rear
Catch located onto

the rear cover
2
Slid the cover to the right to release the post
from the frame. Then pull to the front to
release the catch from the rear cover.
Lift the latch and move to the left to

release the lock
Front
Figure 4 Release transit lock
4.
Go to ADJ 75.2 Machine to Tray 5 Alignment and complete the adjustment.

Post located into
the bracket
1
Remove 2 screws
Figure 1 Top cover
February 2013
4-279
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.7, REP 75.8
2.
REP 75.9 Tray 5 Docking Latch
Remove the front or rear cover, Figure 2.

Removal
2
Loosen two screws and
remove the rear cover.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the paper and un-dock the tray 5 module, REP 75.7.
2.
Remove the two screws and unhook the spring, Figure 1.
1
Remove two screws
1
Remove two screws at
the front and two at the
rear
2
Remove the front
cover
Figure 2 Front and rear cover
Remove screw
Replacement
1.
2.
Check that the top cover is located correctly, Figure 1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.8, REP 75.9
1
Remove screw
Unhook the spring
February 2013
4-280
3.
Turn tray 5 onto its end to access the fixing screws on the docking latch main bracket. If
tray 5 has a 11x17 / A3 or 8.5 x 11 / 14 kit then turn the tray 5 on its side. Figure 2.
Replacement
1.
2.
Check that the tabs are located correctly on the base plate when refitting the latch assembly, Figure 4.
Remove 2 screws
Check that the tabs are located correctly in the base
Figure 2 Remove the latch assembly

4.
Note the orientation of the latches and then remove the docking latches, Figure 3.
Figure 4 Location of the tabs

3.
Check that the docking latch spring is located correctly.
Remove the fixing screw and

remove the docking latch
Figure 3 Remove docking latch
February 2013
4-281
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.9
REP 75.10Tray 5 Elevator Rack Assembly
7.
Remove the crash bar, PL 75.68 Item 2.

Removal
8.
Disconnect the transport motor, PL 81.40 Item 2.
9.
Disconnect the feed motor, PL 81.40 Item 3.
10. Remove the upper feeder assembly, PL 81.40 Item 1, refer to REP 82.7.
WARNING
11. Prepare to remove the tray assembly, Figure 2 and Figure 3.
Access slot
WARNING
1.
Release the cable clamp from the rear cover, Figure 1.
Raise the tray assembly until the tray level drive

gear clip is in alignment with the access slot of
the frame.
Remove the front tray level drive gear

clip from the elevator motor shaft.
Figure 2 Tray assembly front view
Press the locking clip towards the

module.
Slide the cable clamp off the

module, in an upwards direction.
Figure 1 Cable clamp

2.
Remove any paper from tray 5, then un-dock the module, REP 75.7.
3.
Remove the two front door hinge pins, PL 75.60 Item 3, then remove the front door
4.
Remove the top, front and rear covers, REP 75.8.
5.
Remove the elevator motor assembly, REP 75.4.
6.
Remove the frame top brace, PL 75.68 Item 3.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.10
February 2013
4-282
NOTE: Only the front elevator rack has a clearance cut-out to accommodate the tray 5
door switch, Figure 4.
Remove the elevator motor shaft.
Remove the tray assembly from

the tray 5 module.
Front elevator rack
1
Ensure the cut-out of the front elevator
rack is orientated towards the tray 5 door
switch.
Tray 5 door switch
Access slot
2
Remove the rear tray level drive gear clip.
Figure 4 Front elevator rack
Raise the tray assembly until the rear tray

level drive gear clip and the elevator
motor shaft are in alignment with the
access slot of the frame.
14. Remove the rear elevator rack, PL 75.68 Item 13. Slide the rear elevator rack upwards
within the frame, then lift the rack away from the tray 5 module.
Figure 3 Tray assembly rear view

12. Remove the front and rear drive gears, PL 75.68 Item 28.
13. Remove the front elevator rack, PL 75.68 Item 14. Slide the rack upwards within the
frame then lift the rack away from the tray 5 module.
February 2013
4-283
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.10
Replacement
4.
1.
2.
After the front and rear drive gears are re-installed ensure that the tray assembly is reinstalled in the same horizontal plane as the base of the tray 5 module, Figure 5.
Raise the tray to ensure that it is in horizontal alignment with the lower feeder assembly,
Figure 6. If necessary remove the elevator motor shaft then repeat the replacement procedure from step 2.
Lower feed assembly.
Tray assembly.
Lower the tray.
Press the tray down firmly onto the base of the tray 5 module.
Figure 6 Tray alignment
Figure 5 Install the tray
3.
Keep the tray assembly against the base of the tray 5 module, then reinstall the elevator
motor shaft.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.10
February 2013
4-284
REP 75.11 Tray 5 Elevator Tray Guides

Removal
Remove and turn

over the lift plate
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the tray assembly from the tray 5 module, refer to REP 75.10 and perform steps
1 to 11.
2.
Remove the infill plate assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove 5 screws
Figure 2 Tray separation
Remove 2
screws
4.
Remove the tray 5 elevator harness, Figure 3.
Remove the
ground screw
1
Retain the spring using
a thumb or finger
Disconnect the
terminals
3
Remove the assembly taking care
not to lose the spring
Figure 1 Infill plate assembly removal
3
3.
Separate the lift plate from the tray lift top cover, Figure 2.
Release the harness

from the 5 retainers
4
Pass the terminals one at a time
through the frame hole and guide
Figure 3 Harness removal
5.
Remove the elevator tray guides, Figure 4.
February 2013
4-285
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.11
3
Insert and tighten
2 screws
2
Locate the
retaining plate
dowels in the
locating holes
1
Remove the screw, then
remove the rear elevator
tray guide
Remove the screw, then remove

the front elevator tray guide
Position the spring stop between the spring and the inside end of the cavity
Figure 4 Elevator tray guides removal
Figure 6 Rear guide assembly install
Replacement
3.
1.
Re-assemble the elevator tray by reversing the removal steps 3 to 5.
2.
Install the rear guide assembly, Figure 5 and Figure 6.
The remainder of the installation is the reverse of the removal procedure, refer to REP
75.10 and perform the replacement procedure.
3
Position the fixing plate over
the actuator
arm and place
the tongue in
the cutout
Compress the spring into the cavity and

retain the spring using a thumb or finger
Position the infill plate

in the tray assembly
Figure 5 Rear guide assembly install
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 75.11
February 2013
4-286
REP 81.1 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Paper Feed Assembly
5.
Disconnect the harness from the feed motor as required, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove tray 1 or tray 2 as required, REP 71.1.
2.
Remove the rear left cover, PL 70.25 Item 7.
3.
Remove the lower left door assembly, Figure 1.

Tray 1 feed
assembly
harness.
1
Disconnect harness as
required.
Tray 2 feed
assembly
harness.
Figure 2 Disconnect harness
1
Mark the position of
the hinge.
2
Remove 3 screws.
3
Unlatch and remove the lower
left door assembly.
Figure 1 Lower left door assembly

4.
February 2013
4-287
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.1
6.
REP 81.2 Tray 3 Paper Feed Assembly
Remove tray 1 or tray 2 feed assembly. Figure 3.
1
Tray 1 feed assembly
Remove the screws then

the cover

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Pull out tray 3.
2.
Remove tray 1 and the horizontal transport, REP 82.3.
3.
Remove the paper feed assembly, Figure 1.
Tray 2 feed
assembly
2
Remove the screws then slide
the feeder out as required.
Figure 3 Removal
Replacement
1.
2.
To install the lower left door assembly. Install the three screws, close the door and align
the hinge with the marking on the frame. Secure the screws and check that the door
opens and closes correctly, Figure 1.
3.
If new feed rolls are installed, reset the tray 1 or tray 2 feed count to zero. Refer to dC135
CRU / HFSI Status.
Push Left, to reveal the harness.
Remove the
screw.
Figure 1 Tray 3 feed assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.1, REP 81.2
February 2013
4-288
4.
REP 81.3 Bypass Module
Disconnect the harness, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Take care when removing the cover. The clips that secure the latch are easily broken.
1.
Remove the bypass upper left door cover, Figure 1.
Latch. See CAUTION.

remove the top cover
5
Remove the upper
left door cover

then slide the feed
assembly out.
Release the top

clip, then remove
the cover.
Replacement
1.
Install the paper feed assembly and push the tray in slowly.
NOTE: Check that the tray does not touch the feed assembly.
2.
If a new feed roll assembly is installed, reset the tray 3 feed count to zero. Refer to dC135
CRU / HFSI Status.
Remove 2 screws.
2
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 1 Bypass cover
2.
Remove the left cover, PL 81.10 Item 2
February 2013
4-289
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.2, REP 81.3
3.
Disconnect the PJs, harness clips and harness to nip D solenoid, Figure 2.
4.
Release the bypass module, Figure 3.
4
Disconnect the nip D
solenoid connector.
1
Remove 3 harness clamp
screws marked A.
Disconnect 2 ground
leads.
Remove 4 screws.
Disconnect harness

Figure 3 Bypass module
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.3
February 2013
4-290
5.
REP 81.4 Tray 1 and Tray 2 Feed Rolls
Remove the bypass module, Figure 4.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove tray 1 or tray 2 as required, REP 71.1.
2.
Un-clip and release the guide, Figure 1.
2
Unhook the module
from the door then
remove the module.
1
Lift the bottom of the
assembly away from
the door.
Press the clip to release the guide
Figure 4 Bypass module
Replacement
Figure 1 Release guide
February 2013
4-291
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.3, REP 81.4
3.
Remove tray 1 or tray 2 feed rolls, Figure 2.
Replacement
NOTE: The removal procedure is the same for tray 1 or tray 2. The feed and nudger rolls
are the same diameter but the retard roll has a larger diameter.
1.
2.
Make sure that the tabs on the feed roll are located in the drive shaft.
3.
Ensure that the guide is located correctly on the feeder assembly, Figure 3.
1
2
3
Lift the tab and remove
the feed roll
Ensure that the location lugs

on the guide are positioned
correctly

the nudger roll

the retard roll
Figure 2 Remove the feed rolls
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.4
Figure 3 Locate the guide

4.
Check the registration, refer to dC625 Registration / Preheat calibration.
5.
When new feed rolls are installed, reset the tray 1 or tray 2 feed count to zero. Refer to
dC135 CRU / HFSI Status.
February 2013
4-292
REP 81.5 Tray 3 Feed Rolls
REP 81.6 Bypass Tray Feed Rolls

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove tray 3 feed assembly, REP 81.2.
1.
Remove the bypass tray cover, refer to REP 81.3.
2.
Remove tray 3 feed rolls, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the feed rolls, Figure 1.
Release the guide
From underneath the

bypass tray assembly, lift
the tab and remove the
retard roll
2
the nudger roll
4
the feed roll

the retard roll
Replacement
1.
2.
Make sure that the tabs on the feed roll are located in the drive shaft.
3
the nudger roll
3.
4.
When new feed rolls are installed, reset the tray 3 feed count to zero. Refer to dC135
CRU / HFSI Status.
Lift the tab and remove Remove 1 screw and

plastic sensor retainer
the feed roll
Figure 1 Remove feed rolls
Replacement
1.
2.
If a new nudger / feed and retard roll are installed, reset the bypass feed count to zero.
February 2013
4-293
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.5, REP 81.6
REP 81.7 Tray 5 Feed Rollers

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Open the tray 5 door and allow the tray to move down.
2.
Remove the nudger and the feed roller from the front. Slide the tray 5 module away from
the machine and remove the retard roller, Figure 1.
2
Lift the tab and slide
the nudger and feed
roll off the drive shaft
1
Lift the guide.
1
Lift the tab and slide the retard roll
off the drive shaft
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.7
1.
2.
Ensure that the tabs on the feed roll are located in the drive shaft.
3.
4.
If a new nudger / feed and retard roll are installed, reset the tray 5 feeds count to zero.
February 2013
4-294
REP 81.8 Tray 1 or Tray 2 Feed Sensor
3.
Remove tray 1 or tray 2 feed sensor, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the Tray 1 or tray 2 paper feed assembly REP 81.1,
2.
Release the clips and

remove the sensor
1
Disconnect harness
Figure 2 Remove the feed sensor
Replacement
1.
2.
Press the clip to release the

guide
Figure 1 Paper guide
Ensure that the location lugs

on the guide are positioned
correctly
Figure 3 Locate the guide
February 2013
4-295
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.8
REP 81.9 Tray 3 Feed Sensor
3.
Remove tray 3 feed sensor, Figure 2.

Removal
1
Disconnect the
harness.
WARNING
2
Release the clips and
remove the sensor
WARNING
1.
Remove tray 3 paper feed assembly, REP 81.2.
2.
Replacement
1
1.
2.
Press tabs to release

cover
1
Ensure location lugs on guide
are positioned correctly.
Figure 1 Release guide
Figure 3 Position the cover
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.9
February 2013
4-296
REP 81.10 Bypass Tray Empty Sensor
REP 81.11 Tray 5 Feed Sensor

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the bypass tray upper left door cover, PL 70.30 Item 14.
1.
Remove the top cover, PL 75.60 Item 10.
2.
Remove the tray empty sensor, Figure 1.
2.
Prepare to remove the tray 5 feed sensor, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect harness
1
2
Remove eight screws
marked A.
Lift the upper feed

assembly top cover.
2
Lift arm and remove sensor
Figure 1 Tray empty sensor
Replacement
February 2013
4-297
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.10, REP 81.11
3.
Remove tray 5 feed sensor, Figure 2.
3.
Make sure that the housing spring is positioned on top of the takeaway idler roller shaft
when the upper feed assembly top cover is installed, Figure 4.
Housing spring position

4.
Press the tabs to release the

sensor
Make sure that the torsion chute spring is positioned on top of the chute upper insert, Figure 5.
Figure 2 Remove the feed sensor
Replacement
1.
2.
Make sure that the torsion nudger spring on the paper feed assembly is in the correct
position, Figure 3.
Locate the torsion nudger

spring under the post
Figure 3 Spring location

Position the torsion chute spring on the
top of the chute
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.11
5.
Check that the correct screw is used to attach the upper feed assembly top cover.
6.
February 2013
4-298
REP 81.12 Tray 5 Feed Motor
REP 81.13 Nip D Release Solenoid

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
Remove the upper left door cover, PL 70.30 Item 14.
2.
Remove tray 5 feed motor, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the bypass top cover, PL 70.30 Item 9.
3.
Remove the nip D release solenoid, Figure 1.
1
the nip release link arm.
NOTE: There is a spring
under the link arm.
1
Remove two screws
2
3
Remove the motor
3
Disconnect the harness,
then remove the nip D
release solenoid.
2
Remove the 2 screws and
ground lead.
Figure 1 Remove the feed motor

Replacement
1.
Replacement
1.
February 2013
4-299
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 81.12, REP 81.13
REP 82.1 3 Tray Module Transport Motor
REP 82.2 3 Tray Module Transport Drive Belt

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
1.
2.
Remove the 3 tray transport motor, Figure 1.
2.
Remove the 3 tray module transport motor, REP 82.1.
NOTE: It is important to mark the position of the motor before the motor is removed.
3.
Remove the transport drive belt, Figure 1.
5
Remove 4 screws.
4
Remove screw and
ground wire.
2
Mark the position of the motor.
1
Disconnect harness.
Loosen the belt tension

screw.
Remove the transport

drive belt.
Figure 1 3 tray module transport motor
Figure 1 Transport drive belt
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
Relocate the 3 tray module transport drive belt.

Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure that the motor is aligned
with the mark.
After completing the replacement procedure, perform the dC625 Registration / Preheat
calibration.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.1, REP 82.2
Replacement
1.
Reverse the removal procedure to replace the transport drive belt.
2.
calibration.
February 2013
4-300
REP 82.3 Tray 3 Horizontal Transport Assembly
REP 82.4 Tray 3 Horizontal Transport Rolls

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove the tray 3 horizontal transport assembly, REP 82.3.
Take care when removing tray 3 support bracket from its snap in mounting.
1.
2.
Remove horizontal transport assembly, Figure 1
Pull out the horizontal transport assembly
Figure 1 Remove transport assembly
Replacement
February 2013
4-301
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.3, REP 82.4
2.
Prepare to remove the transport rolls, Figure 1.
3.
Remove the takeaway rolls, Figure 2.
2
Remove the bearing,
drive gear and belt.
1
Remove the E-clip.
Remove the transport rolls

from the tray 3 horizontal
transport.
Move the transport

rolls to the rear.
Figure 2 Remove the transport rolls
Replacement
1
Remove the Eclip and bearing.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.4
February 2013
4-302
REP 82.5 Tray 5 Transport motor
3.

Removal
Remove tray 5 transport motor, Figure 2.
Ground wire
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the drives plate, Figure 1.
Remove the motor
Remove two screws
1
Remove two screws
Figure 2 Remove the transport motor
Remove E-clip
Replacement
3
Loosen the screw to
1.
2.
Ensure that the ground wire terminal is located under the motor securing screw, Figure 2.
4
Remove 2 screws
5
Disconnect both motor
harnesses
Figure 1 Remove the drives plate
February 2013
4-303
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.5
REP 82.6 Tray 5 Transport Drive Belt
3.
Remove the transport drive belt, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
Remove the drive
belt
1.
2.
Prepare to remove the drive belt, Figure 1.
1
Remove two screws
2
Remove E-clip
Figure 2 Remove the drive belt
3
Loosen the screw to
Replacement
1.
2.
Allow the tension idler to tension the belt and then tighten the screw, Figure 1.
Remove two screws
5
Release the motor assembly from the drive belt
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.6
February 2013
4-304
REP 82.7 Tray 5 Takeaway Roller
6.
Lift off the upper feeder assembly, then remove the lower feed assembly, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Remove the transport drive belt, REP 82.6.
4.
Disconnect the tray 5 door switch harness, PL 75.60 Item 6.
5.
Prepare to remove the upper feeder assembly, Figure 1.
Lift the upper feed

assembly
Remove the lower feed

assembly
Figure 2 Remove lower feed assembly
7.
Remove the one way pulley clutch, Figure 3.
4
Remove the E-clip
and bearing
Lift the upper feeder

assembly
Remove two screws
1
3
Remove two screws
Remove the E-clip

and bearing
2
Remove the one way pulley clutch
1
Remove the E-clip
Figure 3 Remove the one-way pulley clutch
February 2013
4-305
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.7
8.
REP 82.8 Confirm Sensor
Remove the takeaway roller, Figure 4.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
Move the takeaway
roller to the rear
1.
Open the front door and remove the inner cover, PL 81.11 Item 2.
2.
Pull out the marking engine, refer to Marking Unit Service Positions, GP 6.
3.
Remove the marking engine plastic guide, Figure 1.
2
Remove the takeaway
roller from the lower feed
assembly
Figure 4 Remove the takeaway roller
Replacement
1.
2.
Check that the cable routing is correct, Figure 1.
1
Remove 2 screws
Figure 1 Remove marking engine plastic guide
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.7, REP 82.8
February 2013
4-306
4.
REP 82.9 Vertical Transport
Remove the confirm sensor, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the bypass tray upper left door cover, refer to REP 81.3.
3.
Remove the left cover, PL 81.10 Item 2.
4.
Remove the mid left door assembly hinge pin, PL 70.30 Item 22, then remove the mid left
door assembly, PL 70.30 Item 16.
5.
Slide out the marking unit. GP 6.
6.
Release the harness from the cable clips and disconnect the harness from the vertical
transport, Figure 1.
2
Remove 2 screws
Disconnect harness
Figure 2 Remove Confirm sensor and bracket
Replacement
1.
2.
calibration.
1
Release the harness
from the cable clamps.
Figure 1 Release the harness
February 2013
4-307
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.8, REP 82.9
7.
Remove the vertical transport, Figure 2.
8.
If required to install new components on the vertical transport, refer to Figure 3.

Mid door interlock
switch.
Upper door interlock

switch.
Vertical
transport
motor.
Location
lugs
Transport roller.
Transport roller.
Transport
roller.
2
Remove 8 screw marked with A.
Nip F drive belt.

Nip H drive belt.
Support the vertical transport.
3
Remove the vertical transport.
Figure 3 Vertical transport
Figure 2 Release the vertical transport
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 82.9
1.
2.
Ensure that the harness is correctly routed, refer to Figure 1.
3.
Ensure that the vertical transport is correctly located in the location lugs, refer to Figure 2.
4.
calibration.
February 2013
4-308
REP 83.1 Horizontal Paper Path
Replacement

Removal
1.
2.
Hold the heat shield up. Locate the rear left hand V slots on the horizontal transport with
the guide on the top of the marking unit. Holding the unit level slide back in. Do not force
it, try to align the transport location holes with the location pins and it should fall into place.
3.
Run the relevant diagnostic routines, refer to GP 37 Post Part Replacement Routines.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Open the left hand upper door, PL 70.30.
Remove the horizontal paper path, Figure 1.
Remove the screws
Disconnect harness
on the rear frame
4
Lift slightly and pull out the horizontal transport
3
Lift the heat shield and hold in
the up position
Figure 1 Remove the horizontal paper path
February 2013
4-309
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 83.1
REP 83.2 Duplex End Sensor, Nip C Solenoid and HPP

Diverter Solenoid
3.
Remove the duplex end sensor, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
Move sensor
retainer to the left
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the horizontal paper path, REP 83.1.
2.
Prepare to remove the duplex end sensor, Figure 1.
Disconnect harness and remove

sensor
NOTE: Hold down the cover against the force of the spring when removing screws.
Figure 2 Duplex end sensor removal
Remove screws marked A.
Remove the top cover.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 83.2
February 2013
4-310
4.
REP 83.3 Duplex Sensor (17)
Remove the nip C solenoid and HPP diverter solenoid, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
1
Nip C solenoid
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Prepare to remove the duplex sensor (17), Figure 1,
HPP diverter solenoid
Replacement
1.
2.
When replacing the top cover, place the assembly on a flat surface i.e. a desk with the
curled portion hanging off the desk.
3.
Hold the top cover down in the correct position the entire time the screws are being
installed.
4.
Install and tighten down the screws in each corner first, then install and tighten the
remaining screws.
5.
Perform dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration.
Remove screws marked A.
2
Remove the cover.
February 2013
4-311
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 83.2, REP 83.3
3.
REP 83.4 Horizontal Transport Motor
Remove the duplex sensor from the underside of the top cover, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
2
Remove sensor
1.
2.
Prepare to remove the motor, Figure 1.
2
Disconnect harness
1
Disconnect harness
Figure 2 Duplex sensor (17) removal
Replacement
1.
2.
When replacing the top cover, place the assembly on a flat surface i.e. a desk with the
curled portion hanging off the desk.
3.
Hold the top cover down in the correct position the entire time the screws are being
installed.
4.
Install and tighten down the screws in each corner first, then install and tighten the
remaining screws.
5.
3
Remove 3 screws
from the cover.
1
Remove the screw
and unclip the harness guide.
Figure 1 Cover removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 83.3, REP 83.4
February 2013
4-312
3.
Remove the motor, Figure 2.
REP 83.5 Horizontal Transport Drive Belts And Takeaway

Rolls
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Prepare to remove the duplex drive belts, Figure 1.
1
Remove 2 screws
Figure 2 Transport motor removal
Replacement
Open the Jam clearance door
Remove screws
3
Remove the door latch
Figure 1 Door latch removal
February 2013
4-313
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 83.4, REP 83.5
3.
REP 89.1 Registration / Preheat Assembly and Lower

Platelet Assembly
Remove the duplex drive belts and takeaway rolls, Figure 2.

Procedure
1
slide off the pulleys and belt
WARNING
WARNING
Registration / Preheat Assembly Removal
Lower Platelet Assembly Removal
Registration / Preheat Assembly Removal

CAUTION
Do not touch the printheads.
CAUTION
Protect the surface of the drum with paper.
1.
Open the front door. Remove the inner cover, PL 81.11 Item 2.
2.
Remove the horizontal transport, REP 83.1.
2
Slide takeaway roll to front
of paper path to remove it
1
slide off the pulleys and belt
Figure 2 Drive belts and takeaway rolls removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 83.5, REP 89.1
February 2013
4-314
3.
Replacement
Remove the registration transport, Figure 1.
1.
2.
Ensure the ribbon cable is routed and connected before installation, Figure 2.
1
Ribbon cable connected correctly.
1
Disconnect 4 harnesses
2
Ribbon cable routed correctly.
2
Remove the screw.
3
Rotate and lift out the Registration
transport assembly.
Figure 2 Location of the ribbon cable
Figure 1 Registration transport removal
February 2013
4-315
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 89.1
3.
If the registration / preheat assembly does not seat properly, verify that the locating tab on
the rear of the registration / preheat assembly is correctly seated in the frame, Figure 3.
Correct seating position of

the locating tab in the frame
1
To open the cover assembly. Turn the
dial to align the hole on the dial with the
arrow, as shown.
2
Raise the cover
assembly.
Frame
3
Remove 1 screw.
Figure 3 Locating tab on rear of machine

4.
When installing the horizontal transport leave the single mounting screw for the registration / preheat assembly loose. Use the top of the registration / preheat assembly as a
guide for when sliding the horizontal transport into position.Tighten the screw after the
horizontal transport is installed.
5.
Enter diagnostics dC131 and enter NVM ID 435-13, 435-14 and 435-15 and reset the values to zero.
NOTE: Only perform step 5 if new parts (new registration / preheat assembly or new nip A
rollers) are installed and before the dC625 routine is run.
6.
Lower Platelet Assembly Removal

1.
Open the front door. Remove the inner cover, PL 81.11 Item 2.
2.
Remove the lower platelet assembly, Figure 4.
5
Remove the lower plate
assembly.
4
Disconnect the connector.
Figure 4 Removal
Replacement
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 89.1
February 2013
4-316
REP 89.2 Registration / Preheat Pumps
REP 89.3 Registration / Preheat Assembly Nip A Kit

Removal

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
To remove the upper air pump.
1.
Remove the registration / preheat transport, REP 89.1.
a.
Remove the registration / pre-heat transport, REP 89.1.
2.
Remove the bearing cover, Figure 1.
b.
Remove the pump cover, PL 88.10 Item 8.
c.
Remove the registration / pre-heat air pump, PL 88.10 Item 5.
To remove the lower air pump.

a.
Remove the lower air pump assembly. Refer to REP 10.7 and follow steps 1 and 2.
b.
Remove the air pump cover, PL 88.10 Item 7.
c.
Remove the registration / pre-heat air pump, PL 88.10 Item 5.
Replacement
1.
2.
If the registration / preheat assembly has been removed, perform the dC625 Registration
/ Preheat Calibration.
installed.
Remove 4 screws.
These W/TAG 018 machines will have their NVM written (independent of software version)
such that PEST pump open faults 99-730 are not reported. This NVM will remain written across
software reloads and NVM initializations. To restore the PEST pump open fault NVM, perform
the following:
1.
Find the first unused NVM field in the range 498-002 through 498-017. The field is considered unused if its value is -1.
2.
Write this field with the value 730.
Disconnect the
ground harness.
3
Carefully unclip the cover
from the bearings.
Figure 1 Bearing cover removal
February 2013
4-317
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 89.2, REP 89.3
3.
Remove the front nip A drive belt and roller, Figure 2.
4.
Remove the rear nip A drive belt and roller, Figure 3.
2
Disengage the drive belt from the front motor.
1
Disengage the drive belt
from the rear motor.
Remove the front nip A roller in

the direction of the arrow.
Remove the drive belt.
2
Remove the rear nip A
roller in the direction of the
arrow.
Remove the KL-clip

and the 2 gears.
Figure 2 Front belt and roller removal
Figure 3 Rear belt and roller removal
Replacement
1.
2.
Enter diagnostics dC131 and enter NVM ID 435-13, 435-14 and 435-15 and reset the values to zero.
NOTE: Only perform step 2 if new parts (nip A kit or new registration / preheat assembly)
are installed and before the dC625 routine is run.
3.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 89.3
Perform the dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration procedure.
February 2013
4-318
REP 91.1 Carriage Drive Train
3.
Disconnect the harnesses from the marking unit driver PWB, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Slide out the marking unit to the maintenance position, Refer to GP 6.
2.
Remove the marking unit enclosure, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect PJ605 and PJ607.
2
Remove the marking unit
enclosure.
Loosen 2 outer screws and

remove the middle screw.
Figure 1 Enclosure removal
February 2013
4-319
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.1
4.
REP 91.2 Vertical Gearbox and Motor
Remove the carriage drive train, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
destroy the printhead.
1.
2.
Remove the marking unit cover, Figure 1.
1
Remove the screw, then
the upper carriage drive
gear.
2
Remove 3 screws then the
drive train.
Figure 3 Carriage drive train removal
Replacement
1.
2.
The screw thread is at an angle. Tabs on the gear stop prevent the screw from being
driven in straight, refer to Figure 3 step 1.
2
Remove the marking unit
cover.
Loosen 2 outer screws and

remove the middle screw.
Figure 1 Enclosure removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.1, REP 91.2
February 2013
4-320
3.
Disconnect the PJ401 from the marking unit driver PWB, Figure 2.
4.
Remove the vertical gearbox and motor, Figure 3.
1
Disconnect PJ401.
1
Remove 3 screws then the vertical
gearbox.
Figure 3 Vertical gearbox removal
Replacement
1.
2.
To ensure the wiper is level:

a.
Lower the head maintenance wiper by rotating the upper drive shaft until sufficient
clicking (belt jumping teeth is heard to assure horizontally level).
b.
Rotate the upper drive shaft in the opposite direction until the belt clips are at the top
of the tracks.
c.
Check that both front and rear belt clips are touching the upper end of the track limit.
Figure 4 shows the head maintenance wiper fitted level and not level.
February 2013
4-321
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.2
REP 91.3 Head Maintenance Wiper

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not touch the wiper pads.
1.
2.
Move the head maintenance wiper shaft down to and out of the removal slots, Figure 1.
1
Example of the head maintenance wiper not level.
Wiper drive shafts.
Turn the upper drive shaft to lower

the wiper drive shafts.
2
Correctly seated and level head maintenance wiper.
Figure 4 Level head maintenance wiper

3.
Ensure that both carriages are parked and the wiper is in the home position, all the way
up or down.
3
Removal slot.
3
Removal slot.
Figure 1 Move the HM wiper shafts
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.2, REP 91.3
February 2013
4-322
3.
Remove the head maintenance wiper shaft, Figure 2.
4.
Remove the head maintenance wiper from shafts, Figure 3.
1
Remove the E-clip.
2
Slide the head maintenance wiper off of the
drive shafts.
1
Remove the upper and lower
wiper shafts from the slots and
belt clips.
Figure 3 Remove wiper
Figure 2 HM wiper removal
February 2013
4-323
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.3
Replacement
Figure 5 shows the head maintenance wiper fitted level and not level.
4.
CAUTION
Ensure the head maintenance wiper is in the correct orientation with the wiper facing up, Figure 4.
1.
2.
Before installing the head maintenance wiper check the orientation of the wiper pads, Figure 4.
up or down.
Wiper pads
Rear
Front
Arrow points towards printheads
1
Example of the head maintenance wiper not level.
Figure 4 Wiper orientation

3.
To ensure the wiper is level:

a.
Lower the head maintenance wiper by rotating the upper drive shaft until sufficient
clicking (belt jumping teeth is heard to assure horizontally level).
b.
Rotate the upper drive shaft in the opposite direction until the belt clips are at the top
of the tracks.
c.
Check that both front and rear belt clips are touching the upper end of the track limit.
2
Correctly seated and level head maintenance wiper.
Figure 5 Level head maintenance wiper
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.3
February 2013
4-324
REP 91.4 Front and Rear Tensioner Base
3.
Release the tension springs, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
Lower the head maintenance wiper, Figure 1.
1
Release the tension
springs.
Figure 2 Spring release
1
To lower the head maintenance
wiper: Turn the upper drive shaft
until the belts slip.
Figure 1 Lower the head maintenance wiper
February 2013
4-325
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.4
4.
Remove the front and rear tensioner bases, Figure 3.
Front Belt
Remove the e-clip then the

front tensioner base.
Remove the e-clip then

the rear tensioner base.
Figure 3 Tensioner base removal
Replacement
Rear Belt
1.
2.
Figure 4 shows the correct route for the front and rear belts.
3.
up or down.
Figure 4 Belt routing
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.4
February 2013
4-326
REP 91.5 Head Maintenance Belts and Belt Retainer Clips
3.
Remove the head maintenance belt clips, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove the head maintenance wiper, refer to REP 91.3 only perform the steps necessary to remove the head maintenance wiper from the marking unit.
2.
Remove the front and rear head maintenance belts, Figure 1.
1
To remove the clip lift the belt
over the tabs.
1
Remove 2 E-clips, then the drive shaft.
Figure 2 Head maintenance belt clip
Replacement
1.
2.
The drive shaft is a tight fit in the vertical drive motor.
3.
up or down.
3
Remove the front and rear
head maintenance belts.
2
Remove the E-clip and belt
pulley.
Figure 1 Head maintenance belt removal
February 2013
4-327
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.5
REP 91.6 Head Maintenance Horizontal Motion Motor
3.

Removal
Remove the wiper shuttling yoke, Figure 2.

NOTE: Keeping the wiper shuttling yoke and horizontal drive cable connected will make
reinstallation easier.
WARNING
Push the cable guides

up to remove them.
Remove the e-clip

and pulley.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
Lower the head maintenance wiper, Figure 1.
3
Remove the wiper shuttling yoke
and horizontal drive cable.
Figure 2 Wiper shuttling yoke removal
1
To lower the head maintenance
wiper: Turn the upper drive shaft
until the belts slip.
Figure 1 Lower the head maintenance wiper
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.6
February 2013
4-328
4.
REP 91.7 Marking Unit Upper Carriage
Remove the horizontal motion motor, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
Remove the e-clip and

pulley.
2
Remove 2 screws.
WARNING
CAUTION
Disconnect harness.
NOTE: Rotate the wiper drive shaft, move the head maintenance wiper to the front of the lower
printheads. This is to provide protection during the procedure. Move the head maintenance
wiper back when the procedure is complete.
Remove the motion

motor.
1.
If possible print the initial test print pages, TP 1. These test pages are used to check the
print quality after the machine has been repaired. Refer to GP 37.
2.
Remove upper printheads, REP 91.29.
Figure 3 Motion motor removal
Replacement
1.
2.
Figure 4 shows the correct wiper shuttling yoke position.
Ensure the cable sits in this slot.
Ensure the tab is located at the top left.
Figure 4 Wiper shuttling yoke position

3.
up or down.
February 2013
4-329
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.6, REP 91.7
3.
Disconnect the carriage harness, Figure 1.
4.
Disconnect the umbilical from the carriage, Figure 2.
A
A
1
Disconnect harnesses from the stitch/roller motors.
Disconnect harnesses from the inline connectors on the carriage

marked A and release the cable
clips.
A
A
1
Use a bladed screwdriver to unclip the umbilical from the carriage. Insert
the screwdriver between the umbilical and carriage then rotate the blade to
release the umbilical (4 positions marked A).
Figure 2 Unclip the umbilical
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.7
February 2013
4-330
5.
Disconnect the ground lead, Figure 3.
6.
Remove the marking unit upper carriage, Figure 4.
Remove the front and rear

e-clip and link.
Remove the carriage by lifting off

the front and rear pivot.
1
Remove the screw to
release the ground
lead.
Figure 4 Upper carriage removal
Figure 3 Disconnect ground lead
February 2013
4-331
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.7
REP 91.8 Upper Carriage Drive Shaft, Cranks, Upper Front

and Rear Compliant Links
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure all ground lead connections are firmly remade.
3.
When installing a new carriage, ensure the shipping restraint clips are removed before
installation, Figure 5.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove marking unit upper printheads, REP 91.29.
2.
Remove marking unit upper carriage, REP 91.7.
3.
Remove marking unit upper drive gear, Figure 1.
1
1
Remove both shipping

restraint clips.
Remove the screw

then the drive gear.
Figure 5 Shipping restraint clips

4.
Ensure the harnesses are routed correctly, refer to GP 28.
5.
6.
up or down.
Figure 1 Drive gear removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.7, REP 91.8
February 2013
4-332
4.
REP 91.9 X Axis Drive Motor
Remove the upper carriage drive shaft, cranks and compliant links, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
1
Remove the E-clip.
WARNING
CAUTION
2
Slide the shaft towards
the front of the
machine.
1.
Remove the marking unit carriage, refer to REP 91.7 for upper carriage and REP 91.14
for lower carriage.
2.
Remove the x axis drive motor, Figure 1.
3
Remove the upper carriage
drive shaft.
Figure 2 Drive shaft assembly removal
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure that the bearings are reinstalled at both ends of the drive shaft.
3.
The drive gear screw is angled. Tabs on the gear prevent the screw from being driven in
at 90 degrees.
4.
up or down.
Disconnect harness.
Remove 3 screws.
Figure 1 Printhead motor removal
February 2013
4-333
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.8, REP 91.9
REP 91.10 Lower Carriage Drive Shaft, Cranks, Lower

Front and Rear Compliant Links
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure the rotation stop is correctly located when securing the motor to the frame, Figure
2.

Removal
WARNING
Ensure the motor rotation stop

is located correctly onto the
frame.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove marking unit lower printheads, REP 91.29
2.
Remove marking unit lower carriage, REP 91.14
3.
Remove the lower drive gear, Figure 1.
Figure 2 Motor Location

3.
Remove the screw

then the drive gear.
Figure 1 Lower drive gear
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.9, REP 91.10
February 2013
4-334
4.
REP 91.11 Service Loop
Remove the lower carriage drive shaft, cranks and compliant links, Figure 2.

Removal
1
Remove the E-clip.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Slide the shaft towards

the rear of the machine.
Remove the lower carriage drive shaft.
1.
2.
Remove the marking unit, REP 91.28.
Figure 2 Drive shaft assembly removal
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure that the bearings are reinstalled at both ends of the drive shaft.
3.
The drive gear screw is angled. Tabs on the gear prevent the screw from being driven in
at 90 degrees.
4.
up or down.
February 2013
4-335
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.10, REP 91.11
3.
Release the service loop from the draw slide and cable clamps, Figure 1.
6.
Remove the service loop, Figure 2.
1
Release cables from the cable clips.
2
Disconnect the in-line connector.
Figure 2 Service loop removal
Replacement
1
Remove the screws.
1.
2.
Push the marking unit slides into the machine with the marking unit removed.
Figure 1 Release Service loop

4.
5.
Disconnect the following harnesses:
PJ 408, media path PWB.
PJ 603, drum driver PWB.
Remove the PSU, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.11
February 2013
4-336
REP 91.12 Purge Line Filter
CAUTION
Take care not to insert twists into the cable during installation.
3.

Removal
Install the service loop using the slides as a guide, Figure 3.
WARNING
1
Screw the service loop
to the draw slide.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
Remove the printheads, REP 91.29.
2.
Remove the purge line filter, Figure 1.
Lay the service loop in its home position as

shown, then replace the cable clamps.
Push forward from the

rear then lift at the front.
Disconnect the air

tube.
Figure 3 Service loop replacement

4.
Check the operation of the marking unit slides before replacing the marking unit assembly. Ensure it fully extends and that the service loop does not get trapped when the slides
are returned into the machine.
Figure 1 Purge line filter removal
Replacement
1.
February 2013
4-337
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.11, REP 91.12
2.
3.
Insert the 2 tabs on the filter into the black housing. Apply a slight downward force on the
filter while sliding the filter into the housing. Ensure there is no gap between the rear of
the cone and the front of the housing, refer to Figure 2. Check that the filter is securely
held in the housing.
If the umbilical snap feature breaks off during replacement of the filter, use the replacement clip included with the replacement filter. If necessary, remove the cap from the filter,
Figure 2.
REP 91.13 Stitch / Roll Motor

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
If the roll or stitch motor is to be removed form the lower carriage assembly, also move the
lower printhead carriage into the maintenance position, GP 6.
3.
Remove the relevant stitch adjust or roll adjust motor, Figure 1.

NOTE: The procedure for removing each motor is the same. The removal of printhead 2
roll adjust motor is shown in Figure 1. For clarity, printhead 2 is not shown.
Clip
Cap
Ensure the rear of the cone

is against the front of the
housing.
1
4.
2
Remove the retaining
clip, then remove the
stitch / roll motor.
Figure 1 Stitch / roll motor removal
Replacement
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.12, REP 91.13
February 2013
4-338
2.
Verify the motor assembly cannot rotate relative to the carriage.
REP 91.14 Marking Unit Lower Carriage
3.
Check that there is no gap between the carriage and the motor face. If there is a gap,
check the guide pin is located in the hole.
4.
up or down.

Removal
5.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE: Rotate the wiper drive shaft, move the head maintenance wiper to the front of the upper
printheads. This is to provide protection during the procedure. Move the head maintenance
wiper back when the procedure is complete.
1.
If possible print the initial test print pages, TP 1. These test pages are used to check the
print quality after the machine has been repaired. Refer to GP 37.
2.
Remove lower printheads, REP 91.29.

NOTE: After the printheads are removed leave the carriage in the lower service position.
February 2013
4-339
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.13, REP 91.14
3.
Disconnect the carriage harness, Figure 1.
4.
Disconnect the umbilical from the carriage, Figure 2.
Release the wiring

from the top of the
umbilical.
Disconnect harnesses from the stitch/roller motors.
2
Disconnect harnesses from the inline connectors on the carriage
marked A and release the cable
clips.
A
A
2
Use a flat bladed screwdriver to unclip the umbilical from the carriage. Insert the screwdriver between the umbilical and carriage then rotate the blade to release the umbilical
(4 positions marked A).
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.14
February 2013
4-340
5.
Disconnect the ground lead, Figure 3.
6.
Remove the marking unit lower carriage, Figure 4.
1
Remove the carriage by unclipping
the front and rear links then lifting
out the carriage.
Figure 4 Lower carriage removal
1
Remove the screw to release the
ground lead.
Figure 3 Disconnect ground lead
February 2013
4-341
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.14
Replacement
REP 91.15 Ink Loader Assembly
1.
2.
Ensure all ground lead connections are firmly remade.
3.
When installing a new carriage, ensure the shipping restraint clips are removed before
installation, Figure 5.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Remove the ink loader access cover rear, PL 81.10 Item 7. The cover is secured by a clip
on the left side, Figure 1.
Ink loader access

cover rear.
1
Remove both shipping
restraint clips.
1
Release the clip then remove the
cover towards the rear.
Figure 5 Shipping restraint clips
Figure 1 Release the access cover
4.
5.
6.
up or down.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.14, REP 91.15
February 2013
4-342
4.
Remove the ink loader backup cover, PL 81.10 Item 8 and ink loader top, PL 81.10 Item
6. Refer to Figure 2.
5.
Disconnect the media path driver PWB, Figure 3. See note.
Note: View on the underside of the media

path driver PWB.
3
Remove 3 screws
marked A.
Remove the ink

loader top by lifting at
the rear then sliding
to the front.
Disconnect PJ406.
Remove 2
screws.
2
Feed the cable through the
machine frame and release from
the cable clips.
1
Remove 2 screws, then remove the ink
loader backup cover.
Figure 2 Ink loader backup cover and top cover
February 2013
4-343
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.15
6.
Disconnect the ink loader upper assembly, Figure 4.
7.
Release the ink loader bracket, PL 81.10 Item 9, Figure 5.
1
Remove 2 screws
Figure 5 Release the ink load bracket
Remove the screw.
8.
Remove the ink loader upper assembly, Figure 6.
1
Slide from the top and allow the
assembly to move downwards
Figure 4 Disconnect the assembly
2
Support at the bottom
Figure 6 Ink loader upper assembly removal
Replacement
1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.15
February 2013
4-344
2.
Ensure that the locating pins on the ink loader upper assembly are fully seated into the
holes in the chassis, Figure 7.
REP 91.16 Ink Loader Melt Plate Assembly

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not break off the partial used ink block. Do not re-use the partial used ink blocks.
1.
Remove the ink loader assembly, REP 91.15.
2.
Remove the ink loader melt plate assembly, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect the 4
heater harnesses and
the single thermistor
harness.
Align the pins on the

ink loader upper
assembly with the
holes in the frame
Figure 7 Ink loader locating pins

CAUTION
Do not re-use partially melted ink sticks as this may result in cross contamination of the ink
melt reservoir.
3.
Check the following to reset the ink level:

a.
If you replace part of the ink loader upper assembly and leave the ink level close to
the original (within one ink stick of each color), there is no need to interact with the
NVM values. This should be the majority of cases.
b.
If you replace part of the ink loader upper assembly and are going to power up the
machine with a big difference from the original ink level (over one ink stick of a given
color), do the following:
i.
Remove all of the ink sticks from the ink loader upper assembly.
ii.
Power up the machine, which will reset the NVM values to zero.
iii.
Reload the ink sticks.
This scenario would also apply for cases where the ink level gauges on the UI are
way off (the NVM values have been corrupted). If the NVM values have been corrupted, refer to OF 9 Ink Stick Count Mismatch.
February 2013
4-345
2
Remove 2 retaining clips, then
the ink loader melt plate
assembly.
Figure 1 Melt plate assembly removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.15, REP 91.16
Replacement
REP 91.17 Ink Load Sensor Assembly
1.
2.
The 4 heater harnesses are colour coded to the corresponding letter on the ink melt plate
assembly. Ensure the correct harness is connected to the correct colour.

Removal
3.
When installing the retaining clips, ensure that the slots on the base of the clips are fully
seated on the plastic tabs on the new ink melt plate assembly, Figure 2.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Record the location of the ink load entry PWB connectors before disconnecting them.
1.
2.
Remove the ink load sensor assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove 4 screws
marked A.
1
Ensure the clips are seated over the locating
tabs on the ink melt plate assembly.
A
A
Figure 2 Clip alignment

4.
Release the metal

retaining clip and
remove the ink key plate
motor.
Refer to the replacement of the ink loader assembly REP 91.15, to reset the ink levels.
3
Disconnect 3 PJs 901,
601 and 301.
Figure 1 Ink load sensor assembly
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.16, REP 91.17
February 2013
4-346
Replacement
REP 91.18 Ink Transport Motor and Drive Gear
1.
2.
Take care not to bump or damage the plastic flags on the assembly while inserting it
under the belts.

Removal
3.
When reinstalling the key plate motor, ensure the locator pin is seated correctly before
installing the retaining clip.
WARNING
5.
6.
Verify that the key plate moves by entering one of the following diagnostics codes 93-051,
93-052 or 93-053.
4.
Ensure that the motor harness is connected to the motor before reinstallation.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the ink transport motor, cover and gear, Figure 1.
1
Remove 3 screws and
the cover.
2
Disconnect harness.
3
Remove the drive
gear and motor.
Figure 1 Transport motor removal

NOTE: After removal, inspect the compound gear pin and boss for cracks or damage,
Figure 2.
February 2013
4-347
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.17, REP 91.18
Replacement
REP 91.19 Ink Low Sensor Assembly
1.
2.
Refer to Figure 2. Use NYE Rheolube grease PL 26.11 Item 4 to grease the following
points before reinstalling:

Removal
WARNING
a.
Worm gear.
b.
Compound gear boss.
c.
Drive shaft.
d.
Ink transport drive cover shaft hole.
e.
Ink transport drive gear, PL 93.10 Item 6.
WARNING
WARNING
A
Worm gear.
1.
2.
Disconnect PJ601 from the ink load entry PWB, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect PJ601.
Ink transport drive

cover shaft hole.
Drive shaft.
B
Compound gear boss.
Figure 2 Grease points
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.18, REP 91.19
February 2013
4-348
3.
REP 91.20 Ink Reservoir Assembly
Remove sensor assembly, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1
the ink low sensor
assembly.
CAUTION
CAUTION
The drum is exposed when the marking unit is pulled out.
CAUTION
Allow 30 minutes for the umbilicals and reservoir to cool down before starting this repair. It
takes 30 minutes for the ink to solidify.
1.
Slide out the marking unit to the maintenance position, refer to GP 6.
2.
Remove the side and umbilical end insulation from the ink reservoir, Figure 1.
1
Remove the umbilical end
insulation.
Figure 2 Sensor assembly removal
Replacement
Remove the side insulation.
1.
2.
Figure 1 Insulation removal
February 2013
4-349
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.19, REP 91.20
3.
Disconnect the upper and lower umbilicals from the ink reservoir, Figure 2.
4.
Remove the marking unit enclosure, Figure 3.
1
the umbilical clamp.
2
Disconnect the
umbilicals from the
ink reservoir.
3
Remove the gasket from
the ink reservoir or from
the umbilical.
2
Remove the enclosure.
Figure 2 Umbilical removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.20
Loosen 2 outer screws then remove

the middle screw.
Figure 3 Marking unit enclosure removal
February 2013
4-350
5.
Disconnect PJ201 from the marking unit heater PWB and PJ801 from the marking unit
driver PWB, Figure 4.
6.
Remove the ink reservoir, Figure 5.
NOTE: A new marking unit heater PWB to solenoid patch PWB harness is supplied with a
new ink reservoir.
Disconnect PJ201.
Disconnect PJ801 (see NOTE).
Remove 2 screws, then lift the ink

reservoir to remove it.

PJ630 from the solenoid patch PWB.
Disconnect upper and

lower purge hoses.
Figure 5 Ink reservoir removal
February 2013
4-351
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.20
7.
Take note of the routing of the harness. Remove the old marking unit driver PWB to solenoid patch PWB harness from the marking unit.
7.
Ensure that the umbilicals are seated correctly, Figure 7.
Replacement
1.
2.
Ensure the new marking unit heater PWB to solenoid patch PWB harness is correctly
routed along the marking unit.
3.
Ensure that the ink debris is cleared away from the purge hose connections before
removing or re-attaching the hoses to the reservoir.
Ensure the top of the umbilical connector is level with or slightly below
the top of the side insulation,
as shown by the dashed line.
4.
Ensure that the purge hoses are located correctly and that the rib on the tube points
towards the drum, Figure 6.
Figure 7 Umbilical seating
Ribs
8.
Firmly tighten the screws on the umbilical clamp, failure to do so can result in ink leaks.
CAUTION
Failure to properly prime the new umbilical will lead to permanent damage to the ink reservoir
and the new umbilical.
NOTE: Only perform Step 9 if a new umbilical has been installed at the same time as the ink
reservoir. If only the ink reservoir has been replaced then go to Step 10 and do not run dC976.
9.
Power the machine directly into IME diagnostics mode, refer to GP 1. This will prevent the
thermals from warming up and delivering / pumping ink from the reservoir through the
umbilicals. When the machine has booted into IME diagnostics mode, log into diagnostics
and perform dC976 Ink Delivery Fault Recovery, to prime the umbilicals.
10. Run the relevant diagnostic routines, refer to GP 37 Post Part Replacement Routines.
Lower purge hose pair.
Upper purge hose pair.
Figure 6 Air tube replacement

5.
When replacing the umbilical, ensure that there is only one silicone gasket between the
ink reservoir and umbilical.
CAUTION
Do not use a metal tool to clean the interface area between the umbilical and ink reservoir.
Doing so may cause ink leakage.
6.
Ensure there is no ink debris between the ink reservoir and the umbilical before connection.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.20
February 2013
4-352
REP 91.21 Reservoir Pump
5.
Remove the reservoir pump, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect PJ130 and the air tube from the ink reservoir assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove the screw from the underside of the ink reservoir then
remove the reservoir pump.
Figure 2 Reservoir pump removal
Replacement
1.
2.
Perform dC976 Ink Delivery Recovery.
1
Disconnect PJ130.
2
Disconnect the centre air
pipe air pipe.
Figure 1 Disconnect harness and air tube.
February 2013
4-353
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.21
REP 91.22 IOD Assembly
5.
Protect the underside of the drum with media to prevent damage.

Removal
6.
Remove the IOD assembly, Figure 2.
WARNING
2
Use a small screw driver
under the frame near the clip.
Rotate the screw driver blade
to pop the clip out of the hole.
Rotate the IOD assembly
counterclockwise to remove
it.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove abatement plenum, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect harness and
tuck it under the cleaning
unit camshaft.
Figure 2 IOD assembly removal
2
1
Remove 3 screws and the
lever assembly. Note the
position of the bearing.
Remove the abatement

plenum.
Figure 1 Abatement plenum removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.22
February 2013
4-354
Replacement
5.
When refitting the plenum. Ensure that the location lug on the plenum aligns with the pin
on the rear frame, Figure 4.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect and reconnect the flex cables at the IOD PWB. The flex cables are easily
1.
2.
Position the front of the IOD even with the back of the IOD, lying over the cable harness.
Slide the assembly into place, allowing the IOD to rotate up and into position, Figure 3.
NOTE: If the assembly begins to bind/wedge during installation, stop and pull the assembly back. Then restart the installation.
Rear
2
3
1
Pull the handle
1
Line the IOD up with the track
guides, then push and rotate to
install.
Push the plenum

into position
Align the plenum with the

support pin
Figure 4 Install the plenum

6.
Front
Figure 3 IOD replacement

3.
Press the retainer clip to seat it into its hole in the IME chassis.
4.
Connect the harness. Ensure the connector is fully seated.
February 2013
4-355
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.22
REP 91.23 Front and Rear Track Guide
3.
Remove the drum and abatement fan assembly from the rear of the machine, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the IOD assembly, REP 91.22.
2.
Remove the front track guide, Figure 1.
1
2
Disconnect harnesses.
Remove the screw then the

drum and abatement fan
assembly.
Figure 2 Drum and abatement fan removal
1
Remove 2 gold screws.
2
Remove the front track guide
from behind the front bracket.
Figure 1 Front track guide removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.23
February 2013
4-356
4.
REP 91.24 Drum Drive Motor and Belt
Remove the rear track guide, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
Remove the drum and abatement fan assembly from the rear of the machine, Figure 1.
Remove 2 gold screws.
Remove the rear track guide

from the inside of the machine.
Figure 3 Rear track guide removal
Replacement
CAUTION
Do not over tighten the screws as the track guide will crack.
1.
2.
Remove the screw then lift

and remove the abatement
fan assembly.
Disconnect harness.
Figure 1 Drum and abatement fan removal
February 2013
4-357
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.23, REP 91.24
CAUTION
4.
Remove the drum drive motor, Figure 3.
Take care when releasing or tensioning the drive belt not to trap or damage the adjacent wiring
harness.
CAUTION
Unhook the spring from

the lever.
Ensure that the inside surface of the drive belt does not become contaminated with oil, ink or
paper debris during removal or installation. Clean the drive belt as necessary, refer to GP 27.
3.
Remove the drum drive belt, Figure 2.
4
Remove the e-clip.
1
Release the tension on
the belt by pulling the
lever down and rotating
the drum drive motor.
2
Disconnect the top
harness from the
drum drive motor.
2
Remove the belt from
the drum pulley.
Rotate the drum drive motor in

an anti clockwise direction then
remove it from the shaft.

from the PSU.
Figure 3 Drum drive motor removal
3
Remove the belt from
the drum drive motor.
Replacement
1.
2.
Before installing the drum drive belt, clean the drum pulley, PL 94.20 Item 3. Refer to GP
27.
Figure 2 Drum drive belt removal
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.24
February 2013
4-358
3.
When installing the motor, first rotate it counter clockwise before pushing onto the shaft.
Refer to Figure 4.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove the horizontal paper path assembly, REP 83.1.
4.
Remove the exit paper path assembly, REP 10.20.
5.
Remove the registration / preheat assembly, REP 89.1.
NOTE: Removing the marking unit is optional. If space to store the marking unit is limited then
the unit can be left in the machine. But the removal does allow more space to remove the drum
unit.
6.
Remove the marking unit, REP 91.28.
Rotate the drum drive motor then push it

onto the shaft. The motor should slide on
without snagging.
7.
Remove the transfix roll, REP 10.1.
8.
Remove the IOD front track guide, REP 91.23.
9.
Remove the front drum fan shroud, PL 94.20 Item 7.
10. Remove the front drum thermistor, REP 91.35.

11. Remove the drum position encoder, REP 91.30.
Figure 4 Motor installation
12. Remove the stripper blade and store in a safe place. Refer to REP 10.21.
13. Cover the drum with the drum protector, PL 94.20 Item 13.
CAUTION
Ensure that the inside surface of the drive belt does not become contaminated with oil, ink or
paper debris during removal or installation. Clean the drive belt as necessary, refer to GP 27.
4.
15. Remove the rear drum thermistor, REP 91.35.

16. Unplug the front transfix motor harnesses, REP 10.4.
Ensure the ribbed side of the belt faces inward when replacing it.
5.
Check when tensioning the drive belt not to trap or damage the adjacent wiring harness.
6.
14. Remove the drum pulley, REP 91.34.
February 2013
4-359
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.24, REP 91.25
17. Install the removal drum alignment tool on the rear of the drum prior to removal, Figure 1.
18. Prepare to remove drum and front drum frame assembly, Figure 2.
4
Remove 2
recessed long
screws.
Align the hole in the tool

with the guide pin.
Remove 2 screws.
2
Tighten the T30 screw to
secure the tool
1
Remove 2 screws (T30). High torque is
required to remove the screws.
Remove screw. If
transfix linkage is
obstructing the
removal, rotate the
transfix drive screw,
5, until it no longer
obstructs the screw.
Figure 1 Drum alignment tool

Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.25
February 2013
4-360
CAUTION
20. Release the drum from the front drum frame assembly, Figure 4.
If the marking unit has not been removed. Take care not to contact the printheads with the
drum during removal.
NOTE: Use the top section of the replacement drum packaging to support the old drum.
This will help to keep the drum stable during the separation.
19. Remove drum and front drum frame assembly, Figure 3.
1
Support the rear
underside of the
drum with right
hand through the
opening.
Remove the drum and

front drum frame assembly by pulling them away
from the rear assembly.
Hold front assembly

with left hand.
Remove 3 screws.
Separate the drum and front

drum frame assembly.
Figure 4 Release the drum
Figure 3 Removal
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Observe the following points at the
appropriate steps.
NOTE: High pressure bearing grease, PL 26.11 Item 3, is used in the following locations.
Drum bearing housing in the front drum frame casting.
Drum pulley bearing housing in the rear drum frame casting.
Outside diameter of the transfix roller bearing holder at the front of the transfix roller.
During normal removal and replacement the existing bearing grease used during manufacture
will be sufficient. Only apply grease when both sides of any bearing surface are being
replaced, or if the surfaces have been wiped clean. Apply the grease very sparingly.
1.
A replacement drum will have a drum protector and drum alignment tool supplied with the
drum. Install these items onto the drum before installing the drum.
2.
Attach the drum to the front drum frame assembly.
February 2013
4-361
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.25
NOTE: When installing new drum assembly, the three screw holes referenced in Figure 4
are not pre-tapped. There will be resistance when the screws cut new threads. Ensure the
screws are fully seated.
CAUTION
If the marking unit has not been removed. Take care not to contact the printheads with the
drum during the replacement.
Take care not to contact the drum or pinch the encoder wiring when installing the front frame
assembly.
3.
Place the drum and front frame assembly in the machine.
4.
Reinstall the screws in the front assembly, Figure 5. Before tightening all the screws,
ensure the pin and bearing are seated correctly, Figure 6. Open and close the stripper
gate, GP 31 checking that the stripper latch mechanism moves freely, Figure 6. If not then
loosen the screws and correct the location of the latching arm before tightening the
screws.
2
Pin seated correctly.
1
3
4
Install the screw.
4
Replace 2 long
screws.
5.
Replace 2 screws.
6.
Replace the drum pulley, REP 91.34.
7.
Reinstall the drum drive motor and belt, REP 91.24. Ensure the inner belt surface and
outer pulley surface are thoroughly cleaned before replacement.
8.
Reinstall the rear drum thermistor, REP 91.35.
9.
Reinstall the stripper blade. Check that the blade cover is sitting in the guide at the rear of
the machine, REP 10.21.
Replace screw
Replace 2 screws (T30).
Figure 6 Correct seating
Bearing seated correctly.
Manually rotate the latch

camshaft to verify that the
latching mechanism
slides freely.
Remove the drum pulley replacement tool.
10. Reinstall the drum encoder, REP 91.30.

11. Reinstall the front drum thermistor, REP 91.35.
12. Reinstall the front shroud, PL 94.20 Item 7.
13. Reinstall the front IOD track guide, REP 91.23.
Figure 5 Screw Replacement
14. Reinstall the IOD assembly, cleaning unit latch handle and abatement plenum, REP
91.22. Check that the harness is connected.
15. Remove the protective drum cover, PL 94.20 Item 13.
16. Connect the harnesses on the front transfix motor, REP 10.4.
17. Reinstall the transfix roll, REP 10.1.
18. Reinstall the transfix blade, REP 10.6.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.25
February 2013
4-362
19. Reinstall the marking unit if removed, REP 91.28.
REP 91.26 Marking Unit Slide Assembly
20. Reinstall the registration transport, REP 89.1.

Removal
21. Reinstall the exit transport, REP 10.20.

22. Reinstall the horizontal paper path transport, REP 83.1.
WARNING
23. Boot up the machine directly into IME diagnostics mode, GP 1.

25. If a new drum was installed. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write location 492-70 Prints On This
Drum and reset the value to zero.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove marking unit assembly, REP 91.28.
4.
Remove marking unit fan, PL 1.15 Item 23.
5.
Prepare to remove drawer slide assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove service
loop from the
slide.
2
Remove 2 screws
then the cross brace.
February 2013
4-363
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.25, REP 91.26
6.
REP 91.27 Cleaning Unit Motor Assembly and Home

Sensor
Remove slide drawer assembly, Figure 2.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the rear covers, PL 81.10 Item 1.
2.
Remove the rear drum fan shroud, PL 94.20 Item 5.
3.
Lower the power supply. Removing the 4 screws that restrain the power supply. Lift the
power supply so the supporting hooks are no longer seated then lower the power supply
onto the machine base. It is not necessary to disconnect the power supply wiring for this
procedure.
4.
Remove the cleaning unit motor assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove 2 screws.
Extend the drawer slide to align

apertures with screw heads.
Remove 3 screws then remove the

drawer slide.
Figure 2 drawer slide removal
Replacement
1.
2.
Take care not to insert any twists into the cable, refer to Figure 1 for correct cable route.
2
Disconnect the harnesses,
then remove the motor
assembly.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.26, REP 91.27
February 2013
4-364
5.
If necessary, remove the cleaning unit home sensor, PL 94.10 Item 17 from the motor
assembly.
Replacement
1.
2.
After reinstalling the power supply, ensure there are no wires trapped between the rear of
the power supply and the machine frame.
REP 91.28 Marking Unit Assembly

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE: If the frame has been damaged then the enclosure assembly is available as a spare,
PL 91.10 Item 12. The marking unit components can be transferred to a new marking unit
enclosure by following the appropriate repairs.
1.
Open front door.
2.
3.
February 2013
4-365
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.27, REP 91.28
4.
Disconnect the harnesses and ground lead to the rear of the marking unit, Figure 1.
5.
Remove the right marking unit securing screws, Figure 2.
1
Remove 2 screws.
2
Remove the ground
lead.
1
Disconnect 5 harnesses.
Figure 2 Remove screws
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.28
February 2013
4-366
6.
Remove the left marking unit securing screws, Figure 3.
CAUTION
Do not touch the printhead faces.
7.
1
Remove the screw.
Remove the marking unit, Figure 4.
Remove the screw.
Lift from the left side of the marking unit to avoid

damage to the printheads. Lift the marking unit
using front and rear handles.
Figure 3 Remove screws

Figure 4 Marking unit removal
February 2013
4-367
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.28
Replacement
REP 91.29 Printhead
1.
2.
When locating the marking unit onto the rails line up the service loop so that it goes
though the gap between the reservoir and marking unit, refer to Figure 5.

General Guidelines
Be aware of the following:
Do not use printheads as troubleshooting tools. Do not install, then remove the new printhead.
When unpacked, install the new printhead immediately.
Complete, then return the checklist supplied with the new printhead.
Two types of printhead and cables can be installed in the machine. Refer to GP 46 to
identify both types. This procedure is clearly marked where a step is relevant to a specific
type of printhead.
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
destroy the printhead. Keep hot printheads level.
1
Line up the service loop with the gap
between the reservoir and the marking unit.
1.
Open front door.
2.
3.

NOTE: For lower printheads, move the lower carriage into its service position to allow
access to the harness connections, refer to GP 6.
Figure 5 Marking unit replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.28, REP 91.29
February 2013
4-368
4.
Type A printhead only. Release the cable clips from the relevant flex cables, Figure 1.
Flex cable
5.
Type A printheads only. Disconnect the flex cables, Figure 2.
Release the fixing tab, then slide the clip

up and along the flex cable.
Figure 1 Clip removal (type A)
1
Release clips.
2
Rotate forward then lift to disconnect
flex cable.
Figure 2 Cable disconnection (type A)
February 2013
4-369
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.29
6.
Type B printheads only. Disconnect the flex cables, Figure 3.
NOTE: Hooks on the printhead will prevent it from falling after the screws are loosened.
1
Disconnect the harness marked A.
2
Disconnect the flex cable.
2
Support the printhead by the black
insulation and undo the 2 screws.
Undo each screw a little at a time
until the printhead becomes free.
1
Carefully raise the latch.
Figure 4 Printhead removal

Figure 3 Cable disconnection (type B)
8.
7.
Set the printhead down on a level surface.
Remove the printhead, Figure 4.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.29
February 2013
4-370
CAUTION
6.
Type A printheads only. Connect the flex cables, Figure 6.
Do not adjust the ball plate screws (A), Refer to Figure 5.
1
Line up the legs behind the
receptacle.
2
Rotate back until the connector
clips into place.
Figure 5 Ball plate screws
Replacement
1.
Correctly connected flex cable.

NOTE: If a type A printhead is being replaced with a type B printhead the following new
cables will also need to be installed:
Video cable (type B) PL 92.10 Item 7
Wave amp cable (type B) PL 92.10 Item 8

CAUTION
Failure to do the following may result in printhead or drum damage.

2.
Remove the faceplate cover and umbilical port cover from a new printhead.
3.
If there is solidified ink on the umbilical nozzles, carefully remove the ink.
4.
Gently push in on printhead when starting screws.
5.
When screwing the printhead back onto the carriage start by rotating the left screw 2 revolutions, then alternate between the screws doing about 2 revolutions per screw.
February 2013
4-371
Figure 6 Cable connection (type A)
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.29
7.
Type A printheads only. Secure the flex cables with the cable clips, Figure 7.
8.
Type B printheads only. Connect the flex cables, Figure 8.
Press down on the outside

edges of the clip to install.
1
Line up the connector.
Carefully push the
connector until it
latches into place.
The clip tab will snap into position to

indicate the correct installation.
2
Correctly connected
flex cable.
Figure 7 Reinstall the cable clips
Figure 8 Cable connection (type B)

CAUTION
Failure to do the following may result in printhead or drum damage.
9. If reinstalling the same printhead in the same position, boot the machine directly into IME
diagnostics mode, GP 1. When the machine has booted into IME diagnostics mode, log
into diagnostics and perform dC967 to check head to drum spacing.
NOTE: Booting into IME diagnostics will prevent the normal power up / docking
sequence.
10. Ensure that both carriages are parked and the wiper is in the home position, all the way
up or down.
NOTE: New printheads may not have all sections of NVRAM initialized. This may cause a
fault when the machine is switched on, refer to 91-519-00 to 91-522-00, 91-655-00 to 91658-00, 91-683-00 to 91-690-00, 91-807 to 91-811-00 Printhead NVM Read or Write Error
RAP. These faults will be cleared after performing dC972.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.29
February 2013
4-372
REP 91.30 Drum Position Encoder Assembly
Replacement

Removal
1.
2.
Orientate the encoder as shown in Figure 2. Feed the harness through the centre of the
encoder and align the drum heater bar with the centre opening.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Open front door.
2.
3.
Remove the front drum shroud, PL 94.20 Item 7.

CAUTION
Do not remove gold coloured screws from the encoder.

4.
Remove the drum position encoder, Figure 1.
4
Pull encoder away
from the drum. Feed
the harness through
the centre of the
encoder.
1
Disconnect harnesses.
2
Remove the ground plate
and centre screw, A.
Remove 3 silver coloured

screws. See CAUTION.
Do not remove gold coloured
screws.
Figure 2 Encoder replacement

3.
Rotate the encoder until the screw holes line up and then press it on fully in this orientation.
4.
Replace the lower and upper left screws. Replace the grounding plate, along with the centre and upper right screws.
5.
Reconnect the harness.
6.
Ensure the wiring is not pinched when replacing the ground plate and screw, Figure 1.
7.
Figure 1 Encoder removal
February 2013
4-373
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.30
REP 91.31 Umbilical Assembly

A

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Allow 30 minutes for the umbilicals and reservoir to cool down before starting this repair. It
takes 30 minutes for the ink to solidify.
1.
Slide out the marking unit to the maintenance position, refer to GP 6.
2.
Remove the upper or lower printheads as required, REP 91.29.
A
1
NOTE: For lower printheads, move the lower carriage into its service position to allow access
to the harness connections, refer to GP 6.
3.
Disconnect harnesses from the stitch/roll adjust motors, carriage and the end of
the umbilical, Refer to locations marked A.
Release the wiring harness from the required umbilical, Figure 1.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.31
February 2013
4-374
4.
Remove the required umbilical from the carriage, Figure 2.
5.
Remove the side and end insulation from around the umbilical on the ink reservoir, Figure
3.
Release the wiring

from the top of the
umbilical.
A
A
Remove the umbilical end

insulation and plastic surround.
2
Remove the side insulation.
2
Use a flat bladed screwdriver to unclip the umbilical from the carriage. Insert the screwdriver between the umbilical and carriage then rotate the blade to release the umbilical
(4 positions marked A).

Figure 3 Insulation removal
February 2013
4-375
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.31
6.
Remove the required umbilical, Figure 4.
7.
Remove the purge hoses from the reservoir, Figure 5.
1
the umbilical clamp.
Lower Umbilical
Upper Umbilical
2
Disconnect the required
umbilical and remove it
from the machine.
Lower purge
hose pair.
Upper purge
hose pair.
Rib
1
Remove the required purge
hose pair.
Figure 5 purge hose removal
Figure 4 Umbilical removal
Replacement
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.31
1.
2.
Ensure that the ink debris is cleared away from above and around the purge hose connections before removing or re-attaching the hoses to the reservoir.
3.
Ensure that the purge hoses are located correctly and that the rib on the tube points
towards the drum, refer to Figure 5.
4.
When replacing umbilicals, ensure that there is only one gasket between the umbilical
and the ink reservoir (new umbilicals come with a gasket installed).
5.
Ensure there is no ink debris between the ink reservoir and the umbilical before connection.
February 2013
4-376
6.
REP 91.32 Cleaning Unit Cam Shaft Assembly
Ensure that the umbilicals are seated correctly, Figure 6.

Removal
1
Ensure the top of the umbilical connector is level with or slightly below
the top of the side insulation,
as shown by the dashed line.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the cleaning unit cam shaft, Figure 1.
Figure 6 Umbilical seating

7.
Firmly tighten the screws on the umbilical clamp, failure to do so can result in ink leaks.
8.
up or down.
9.
CAUTION
Remove e-clip
and bearing.
10. Power the machine directly into IME diagnostics mode, refer to GP 1. This will prevent the
thermals from warming up and delivering / pumping ink from the ink reservoir through the
umbilicals. When the machine has booted into IME diagnostics mode, log into diagnostics
and perform dC976 Ink Delivery Fault Recovery, to prime the umbilicals.
2
Lift shaft at front until the front cam
clears the machine frame, then
remove the washer.
NOTE: If a new umbilical has been installed then run the routine a second time. A single
priming routine may not be sufficient in all cases.
Figure 1 Cam shaft removal
Replacement
1.
Pull outward and rotate until the drive

pin is released from the gear slot at
the rear.
Failure to properly prime the new umbilical will lead to permanent damage to the ink reservoir
and the new umbilical.
February 2013
4-377
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.31, REP 91.32
2.
Before installing a new camshaft, ensure that the slot in the drive gear is aligned with the
slot in the machine frame, Figure 2.
4.
Lower the camshaft into place at the front of the machine. Align the washer with the
machine frame, at the same time as aligning the locating tags on the bottom of the lock
mount with the holes in the machine frame, Figure 3.
1
Ensure the driver gear is aligned
with the slot in the machine
frame.
2
Align the camshaft with the slot in
the machine frame. Ensure the
longer side of the drive pin is
pointing to the right.
Place the washer on the shaft, then lower the

shaft into place. Ensure the cam lock is seated
correctly and that the washer is seated correctly in the frame.
Cam lock locator and hole.
Figure 2 Camshaft alignment

Figure 3 Camshaft relocation
3.
Ensure that the black cam on the new camshaft points towards the rear of the machine.
Align the drive pin with the slot in the drive gear, longer side pointing to the right. Press
the camshaft into the drive gear until the pin is fully seated, Figure 2.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.32
February 2013
4-378
5.
REP 91.33 Cleaning Unit Plug Connector
Ensure the camshaft is seated correctly and that the cam lock is engaged, Figure 4.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the cleaning unit plug connector, Figure 1.
2
Replace the bearing and eclip.
Ensure the cam lock is

engaged (Fully forward) and
that the cam is in the correct
position as shown.
Figure 4 Cam lock check
Squeeze the tabs on either

side of the connector and
push the connector towards
the machine. The connector
will fall into the cleaning unit
area, accessible front the
front of the machine.
Figure 1 Plug connector removal
Replacement
February 2013
4-379
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.32, REP 91.33
REP 91.34 Drum Pulley
5.

Removal
Refer to Figure 1. From the drum pulley removal kit:

a.
Install the T30 screw into the centre hole of the pulley.
b.
Use the 5 screws to secure the plate to the pulley.
WARNING
2
Secure the plate to
the pulley.
WARNING
1.
The drum pulley removal kit, PL 31.11 Item 9 is required to remove the drum pulley. Do
not proceed with this procedure if the kit is unavailable.
2.
3.
Remove the rear drum fan shroud, refer to REP 91.24, figure 1.
4.
Release the tension on the drum drive belt by pulling the lever down. Remove the drum
drive motor and belt, REP 91.24.
1
Install the T30 screw
into the centre hole.
Do not overtighten
the screw.
Figure 1 Kit installation

6.
Prepare to remove the drum pulley, Figure 2.
1
Remove 3 long screws.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.34
February 2013
4-380
REP 91.35 Front and Rear Drum Thermistor
CAUTION
Take care not to insert the screw driver handle too far into the drum as damage to the heater
may occur.
7.
Remove the drum pulley, Figure 3.

Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Insert a screwdriver handle to prevent the drum

pulley from rotating when
turning the centre screw.
See CAUTION
2.
Remove the front drum thermistor, Figure 1.
1
Disconnect harness
3
Use the T-handle T30 driver to
unscrew the centre screw. Thread
resistance increases as the drum
pulley is released.
2
Support the drum pulley.
2
Remove securing screw
Figure 3 Drum pulley removal

Figure 1 Front thermistor
Replacement
1.
2.
If a new drum pulley is to be installed, remove the 5 securing screws, plate and T30 screw
from the old drum pulley, then install them onto the new drum pulley.
3.
Ensure the guide pin is at 12:00.
3.
CAUTION
Do not force the pulley on. If there is any resistance, remove the pulley and start again. The
pulley must go on smoothly.
4.
Ensure the pulley centre is straight, then push evenly into the machine until it is almost
flush with the assembly.
5.
Finish seating the pulley by tightening the T30 centre screw.
6.
Secure the pulley with the 3 long screws.
7.
Remove the 5 securing screws, plate and T30 screw from the drum pulley for future use.
8.
February 2013
4-381
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.34, REP 91.35
4.
Remove the rear thermistor, Figure 2.
NOTE: Ensure that the thermistor points in the same direction as the rotation of the drum.
Locate the lugs on the thermistor

into the support bracket holes.
Ensure that the thermistor is flat
against the bracket before tightening the screw.
3
Remove thermistor
Figure 4 Rear thermistor location
Remove the securing

screw
Figure 2 Rear thermistor
Replacement
CAUTION
Take care not to damage or bend the thermistor.
1.
2.
Ensure that the location lugs on the front thermistor locate in the holes on the support
bracket, Figure 3.
NOTE: Ensure that the thermistor points in the same direction as the rotation of the drum.
Locate the lugs on the thermistor

into the support bracket holes.
Ensure that the thermistor is flat
against the bracket before tightening the screw.
Figure 3 Front thermistor location

3.
Ensure that the location lugs on the rear thermistor locate in the holes on the support
bracket, Figure 4.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.35
February 2013
4-382
REP 91.36 Abatement Plenum
Replacement

Removal
Ensure that the plenum is correctly located in the support housing on the rear frame.
CAUTION
WARNING
1.
2.
Ensure that the location lug on the abatement plenum aligns with the pin on the rear
frame, Figure 2.
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Remove the abatement plenum, Figure 1.
2
1
Pull the handle
3
Push the abatement
plenum into position
Align the abatement plenum

with the support pin
1
Pull the lever to release
the abatement plenum
Remove the abatement

plenum
Figure 1 Removal
February 2013
4-383
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.36
REP 91.37 Stitch / Roll Motor Lead Screws

Parts List on PL 91.20 and PL 91.25
Removal
WARNING
can cause death or injury.
WARNING
1. Remove the relevant stitch adjust or roll adjust motor, REP 91.13.
2.
Use a flat bladed screwdriver to carefully unscrew the relevant lead screw, PL 91.20 Item
21 or PL 91.25 Item 21.
Replacement
1.
2.
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 91.37
February 2013
4-384
REP 94.1 Cleaning Unit

Removal
Use this repair when replacing a cleaning unit that has failed.
WARNING
WARNING
1.
If fault codes 94-611-00, 94-616-00 or 94-629-00 are present, the cleaning unit has failed
in a way that may have spilled oil inside the machine, continue at step 2. Otherwise, continue at step 3.
2.
Prepare an area in front of the machine by placing a barrier layer over the customer floor.
3.
Remove the new cleaning unit from the shipping box. Take care not to damage the zipper
bag. Place the new cleaning unit away from any oil contamination.
4.
The failed cleaning unit must be removed from the machine with extreme care to prevent
oil dripping onto the customers floor. If the cleaning unit is locked in place and cannot be
removed, go to GP 36 and unlock the cleaning unit.
5.
Place the failed cleaning unit into the zipper bag and seal the bag with the zip. Place the
failed cleaning unit into the shipping box. Follow the instructions included in the shipping
box to return the failed cleaning unit. Use the shipping label supplied in the shipping box.
6.
Inspect the chassis pan directly below the cleaning unit cavity for a pool of oil. A thin film
of oil is normal. Clean up any oil pool, GP 27 Cleaning Procedure.
Replacement
Install the new cleaning unit.
February 2013
4-385
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 94.1
Repairs/Adjustments
REP 94.1
February 2013
4-386
ADJ 4.1 Machine Lubrication
LCSS Drive Belt Tensioners
Purpose
1.
Remove the LCSS top cover and rear cover, REP 12.1-110.
To correctly lubricate the machine to prevent noise and wear.
2.
Remove the relevant belt tensioner:
Lubrication
Intermediate paper drive belt tensioner, PL 12.60 Item 17.
Bin 1 drive belt tensioner, PL 12.30 Item 13.
3.
Remove the E-clip and pulley from the belt tensioner. Apply plastislip grease, PL 26.10
Item 4 to the shaft and pulley bore. Re-assemble the pulley and E-clip on the belt tensioner.
4.
Clean off the old lubricant and any contamination from the belt tensioner and LCSS frame
using a micro fiber wiper, PL 26.10 Item 6. Apply Molub grease 777, PL 26.10 Item 12, to
the whole contact face of the belt tensioner.
The following list gives the parts of the machine where lubrication is permitted. Go to the relevant procedure:
5.
Reinstall the belt tensioner.
LCSS Drive Belt Tensioners.
1.
LCSS Bin 1 Drive Belt Pulleys and Idler.
2.
Remove the relevant pulley or idler:
LCSS Bin 1 Elevator Motor Worm and Gear.
Bin 1 drive belt idler, PL 12.30 Item 1.
LCSS Tamper Assembly.
Bin 1 drive belt pulleys, PL 12.30 Item 6.
HVF BM Support Pin.
Refer to GP 18 Machine Lubrication for general guidance on the use of lubricants.
WARNING
LCSS Bin 1 Drive Belt Pulleys and Idler
3.
Remove the E-clip and pulley or idler from the belt tensioner. Apply plastislip grease, PL
26.10 Item 4 to the shaft and pulley or idler bore. Re-assemble the pulley or idler and Eclip on the belt tensioner.
4.
Reinstall the belt tensioner.
LCSS Bin 1 Elevator Motor Worm and Gear
1.
2.
Use plastislip grease, PL 26.10 Item 4, to lubricate the worm and gear on the Bin 1 elevator home motor, PL 12.30 Item 8.
February 2013
4-387
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 4.1
LCSS Tamper Assembly
HVF BM Support Pin
1.
Remove the LCSS top cover, REP 12.1-110.
1.
Open the BM front door.
2.
Figure 1, use plastislip grease, PL 26.10 Item 4, to lubricate the tamper assembly.
2.
Fully pull out the BM unit.
3.
Figure 2, use plastislip grease, PL 26.10 Item 4, to lubricate the BM support pin.
Apply grease to the pin
Figure 2 Support pin lubrication

Apply grease to the
shaft
4.
Fully push in the BM unit and close the HVF BM front door.
Figure 1 Lower vertical slides
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 4.1
February 2013
4-388
ADJ 5.1 DADH Drive Belt Adjustment

Parts List on PL 5.15, PL 5.25 and PL 5.35
Purpose
To correctly set the tension of the feed motor and the CVT motor drive belts.
Adjustment
WARNING
CAUTION
Before this adjustment is performed, make sure all components removed in the repair procedure are installed correctly.
NOTE: This procedure shows how to adjust the feed motor drive belt. The adjustment procedure for the CVT motor drive belt is identical.
1.
2.
Adjust the correct motor drive belt, Figure 1. When the feed motor is adjusted correctly,
engage the gears on the feed motor and the feed clutch. Check that the pitch rings just
touch.
Pitch rings
Feed motor
1
Loosen the 3
screws.
CVT motor
Feed motor
Tighten the 3 screws.
Allow the spring to apply the tension to the drive belt.
Figure 1 Drive belt
February 2013
4-389
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 5.1
ADJ 5.2 DADH Height Adjustment

Parts List on PL 5.10 and PL 5.25
Purpose
To correctly set the distance between the scanner module and the DADH.
Front DADH standoff.
Check
WARNING
CVT glass.
NOTE: The DADH standoffs include the CVT roll bearings, PL 5.25 Item 4 and PL 5.25 Item
13.
1.
Check the height of the DADH. The two standoffs touch the CVT glass when the DADH is
closed, Figure 1. Check that the DADH is parallel to the scanner module. Perform the
steps that follow. Refer to Figure 2:
a.
2.
Put a strip of paper on the CVT glass below the back DADH standoff.
b.
Close the DADH.
c.
Carefully pull the paper. Make sure that the paper was pressed between the CVT
glass and back DADH standoff.
d.
Repeat A to C for the front DADH standoff.
If the DADH height is incorrect, perform the Adjustment.
Back DADH standoff.
CVT glass.
Figure 1 DADH standoffs
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 5.2
February 2013
4-390
Adjustment
CVT glass.
Back DADH standoff.
NOTE: The factory setting of the counterbalances is approximately 3 mm (0.125 inch), refer to
Figure 3. The same adjustment applies to the left counterbalance and right counterbalance.
Adjust the two counterbalances.
1.
If the height of the DADH is wrong, adjust the counterbalances, Figure 3.
2
Use an allen key to adjust the setting screw to raise or
lower the DADH.
Lower the DADH.
1
Loosen the lock nut.
3
Tighten the lock nut.
Approximately 3 mm
(0.125 inch)
Strip of paper.
Figure 2 Clearance check

Raise the DADH.
Figure 3 Counterbalances
2.
If mis-registration is found after the DADH is set to the correct height, go to ADJ 5.5
DADH Registration Adjustment.
February 2013
4-391
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 5.2
ADJ 5.3 DADH Skew Adjustment
3.
Adjust the setting screw on the right counterbalance to correct the skew, Figure 1.

Purpose
1
Loosen the lock nut.
To correct document feed skew induced by the DADH.
Preparation
Tighten the lock nut.

1.
Clean the CVT glass. Refer to ADJ 5.4 DADH cleaning procedure.
2.
Check that the document width guides are adjusted correctly.
3.
Make sure that the DADH is set to the correct height. Go to ADJ 5.2 DADH Height Adjustment.
4.
Check the document path for obstructions or foreign objects.
5.
Perform the Skew Check.
Skew Check
1.
Use the DADH to make 5 copies. Check the skew, refer to IQS 1 Registration and Skew.
NOTE: Skew is always measured on the lead edge, irrespective of paper orientation.
2.
If necessary, perform the Adjustment.
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Raise the DADH.
2.
Loosen both DADH thumbscrews, PL 5.10 Item 12.
2
Adjust the setting
screw (see NOTE).
Figure 1 Skew adjustment
NOTE: Turn the setting screw in direction A to move the right side of the DADH to the
front. Turn the setting screw in direction B to move the right side of the DADH to the rear.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 5.3
4.
Pull the DADH forward, then tighten the thumbscrews.
5.
Perform again the Skew Check.
6.
When the DADH skew is good, check the DADH registration. Go to ADJ 5.5 DADH registration Adjustment.
February 2013
4-392
ADJ 5.4 DADH Cleaning Procedure
CAUTION
When the under side of the input tray is cleaned, do not damage the restack arm, PL 5.35 Item
3.

Purpose
This procedure describes how to clean the DADH. The wear of the feed rolls, paper dust and
dirt in the environment can cause copy quality defects.
15. Clean the input tray assembly, PL 5.35 Item 1 and the exit area below the input tray with a
micro fiber wiper and antistatic fluid.
16. Clean the CVT glass and the document glass. Refer to ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning Procedure.
The supplies required:
Dry micro fiber wiper, PL 26.10 Item 6.
Brush.
Cleaning fluid, PL 26.10 Item 1.
Antistatic fluid, PL 26.10 Item 11.
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Use a brush to clean the document length sensors, PL 5.35 Item 8.
2.
Use a brush to clean the DADH feed sensor and the area around the sensor, PL 5.15 Item
2.
3.
4.
Use a dry micro fiber wiper, or brush to clean the document path area, top and bottom.
Remove all loose material.
5.
Clean the CVT roll, PL 5.25 Item 5 with a micro fiber wiper and water.
6.
Clean the CVT idlers and the takeaway idlers, PL 5.20 Item 3 with a micro fiber wiper and
water.
7.
Remove the DADH rear cover, PL 5.10 Item 1. Clean the takeaway rolls, PL 5.35 Item 17
with a micro fiber wiper and water.
8.
Clean the exit rolls, PL 5.35 Item 6 with a micro fiber wiper and water.
Key
Retard roll
Figure 1 Retard roll position
CAUTION
When the feed rolls are installed, make sure the lowest roll, (retard roll), is correctly positioned
on the assembly as shown in Figure 1.
9.
Remove the feed roll assembly, REP 5.14. Clean the 3 rolls and the pad, PL 5.35 Item 2
with a micro fiber wiper and water. Use a brush to clean the paper dust from the assembly
and from the area around the assembly. Install the feed roll assembly.
10. Leave the top cover open and raise the DADH assembly.
11. Lower the lower baffle assembly, PL 5.30 Item 14. Clean the post scan idlers, PL 5.30
Item 4 with a micro fiber wiper and water.
12. Clean the exit roll idlers, PL 5.30 Item 6 with a micro fiber wiper and water.
13. Clean the document pad, PL 5.10 Item 3 with a micro fiber wiper and water.
14. Lower the DADH assembly. Install the DADH rear cover.
February 2013
4-393
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 5.4
ADJ 5.5 DADH Registration Adjustment
ADJ 5.6 DADH Document Pad

Purpose

Purpose
To measure and adjust the image to paper registration.
To correctly align the DADH document pad with the document glass.
Adjustment
Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
Perform the following as required:
dC608 DADH Registration.
NOTE: If a new document pad is installed, make sure that the protective paper is removed
from the adhesive pads.
1.
Raise the DADH. Put the document pad with the adhesive pads face-up on the document
glass.
2.
Align the document pad with the document registration guides as shown in Figure 1.
Document registration
guides
Document pad
Figure 1 Document pad alignment

3.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 5.5, ADJ 5.6
Carefully lower then raise the DADH. Make sure the document pad is attached correctly.
February 2013
4-394
ADJ 12.1-110 LCSS Bin 1 Level
ADJ 12.2-110 Machine to LCSS Alignment

Purpose

Purpose
To ensure bin 1 is level, and achieve the best stacking performance.
To correctly align the LCSS to achieve reliable transfer of paper from the machine to the LCSS.
Adjustment
Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Remove the rear cover and bin 1 motor, refer to REP 12.5-110.
Turn the hand wheels above the castors below bin 1 to adjust the alignment:
2.
Move bin 1 to the lowest position.
3.
Remove the rear clamp, ensure the bin is fully down on both sides, then install the rear
clamp.
4.
Re-install the bin 1 motor, refer to REP 12.5-110.
5.
6.
Enter dC330 code 12-242, bin 1 elevator motor cycle. Check that bin 1 cycles without giving any fault indications.
Figure 1, turn both hand wheels in the same direction to adjust the vertical alignment
between the LCSS and the machine. The LCSS should be in vertical alignment with the
machine, viewed from the front and rear.
Figure 1 Machine to LCSS alignment
February 2013
4-395
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.1-110, ADJ 12.2-110
ADJ 12.3-110 Hole Punch Position
Adjustment
WARNING

Purpose
To optimize the position of the hole punch.
Check
1.
Ask the customer which trays are used to feed from for hole punching.
2.
Load the indicated trays with A4 (8.5x11 inch) paper.
3.
Make a set of five punched copies or prints from each of the indicated trays. Mark the top
edge (towards the front of the machine) of each set to indicate the tray from which it was
fed.
4.
Evaluate the average hole positions in each set, referring to Figure 1. The distances
shown should be equal at the top and bottom of the sheet. If the distances are different by
more than 1 mm (0.040 inches), perform the adjustment.
1.
Remove the chad bin and unscrew the thumb screw retaining the hole punch assembly.
2.
Pull out the hole punch assembly a short distance to access the spacer, if installed, refer
to Figure 2. The following settings can be made:
NOTE: If the spacer cannot be found, suitable washers up to a total thickness of 2 mm
(0.080 inches) may be used.
With no spacer installed the holes are punched closest to the bottom of the sheet.
With the spacer installed unfolded the holes are punched 1 mm (0.040 inches) closer
to the top of the sheet.
With the spacer installed folded the holes are punched is 2 mm (0.080 inches) closer
to the top of the sheet.
Spacer unfolded to give 1 mm

(0.040 inches) offset towards
the top
Spacer folded to give 2 mm

(0.080 inches) offset
towards the top
Figure 1 Hole positions

Figure 2 Hole punch spacer
3.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.3-110
Evaluate the movement needed and re-position the hole punch assembly. If the spacer is
removed, tape it next to the TAG label on the LCSS frame for future use.
February 2013
4-396
4.
Make sets from each of the indicated trays once more and ensure that the hole alignment
is now optimized, make further adjustment if necessary.
5.
If necessary, re-load the paper trays as they were before the adjustment was performed.
ADJ 12.4-110 Motor Drive Belt Tensioning

Purpose
To set the tension of directly or indirectly driven belts that are tensioned by a spring attached to
the motor.
Check
1.
The shafts and pulleys are installed and properly located.
2.
The drive belt is undamaged and correctly routed.
3.
The adjustable motor or tensioning pulley bracket is positioned with fastening screws not
tightened fully.
NOTE: For motors with pivoted brackets, the pivot screw must be fitted and tightened.
4.
The tensioning spring is fitted between the bracket and frame locating point.
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Figure 1 shows a typical arrangement. Press the belt midway between pulleys and check
that the bracket moves in the direction of the spring pull; slacken the bracket screws if
necessary.
2.
Release the belt and allow the spring to pull the bracket and tension the drive belt then
tighten the lock and bracket screws.
February 2013
4-397
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.3-110, ADJ 12.4-110
NOTE: Check the belt condition and routing if the tension spring is not extended or the
locking screw is at the end of the bracket adjustment slot.
Drive belt
Pivot Screw
Bracket
Tension spring
Adjustment slot
Lock screw
Typical spring tensioning arrangement
Figure 1 Drive Belt Tensioning
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.4-110
February 2013
4-398
ADJ 12.1-171 Machine to HVF / HVF BM, HVF BM to TriFolder Alignment

Purpose
To correctly align the HVF / HVF BM to achieve reliable transfer of paper from the machine to
the output tray.
To correctly align the tri-folder, to achieve reliable transfer of paper from the HVF BM to the output tray
Check
Ensure the HVF / HVF BM is aligned both vertically and horizontally with the machine. If
necessary perform the adjustment, Figure 1.
Ensure the Tri-folder is aligned vertically and horizontally with the HVF / HVF BM. If necessary perform the adjustment, Figure 2.
Adjustment
WARNING
2
1
Rotate the adjustable casters.
Ensure the tri-folder is

aligned vertically and horizontally with the HVF BM.
Figure 2 Tri-folder to HVF BM alignment
2
1
Rotate the adjustable casters
Ensure the HVF / HVF BM is

aligned vertically and horizontally
with the machine.
Figure 1 Machine to HVF BM alignment
February 2013
4-399
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.1-171
ADJ 12.2-171 Tri-Folder Paper Settings
4.
Purpose
The purpose of the procedure is to place the fold in the correct position on 8.5 x 11 inch and A4
paper.
Set the folder to the appropriate paper size:
To set the folder for A4 paper, Figure 1.
To set the folder for 8.5 x 11 inch paper, Figure 2.
NOTE: Do not over loosen the adjuster screws. The adjusters can detach from the backstop. Make sure the position of the backstop changes when the adjusters are moved.
Check
1.
Ensure that the tri-folder is at the same height as the HVF, ADJ 12.1-171.
2.
Run a copy job 4 sheets and check that the folds are in the correct place.
3.
The paper should be folded into three equal parts and the folds parallel to the edge of the
paper. If necessary perform the adjustment.
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Remove the front door, PL 12.200 Item 2.
2.
Remove the front cover, PL 12.200 Item 12.
3.
At the rear
At the front
Loosen the screw and move the
adjuster to the A4 setting.

adjuster to the A4 setting.
Figure 1 A4 paper setting
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.2-171
February 2013
4-400
ADJ 12.3-171 Stapler Anvil Alignment

Purpose
To ensure the correct alignment of the stapler anvil to the stapler throat.
Special Tools Required

Stapler alignment tool, supplied with the HVF BM, located on the left of the BM frame.
NOTE: This procedure illustrates the front stapler. The procedure for adjusting the rear stapler
is identical.
Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
At the front
At the rear

adjuster to the 8.5 x 11 setting.
Loosen the screw and move

the adjuster to the 8.5 x 11
setting.
1.
To improve the access to the two clamp screws for the anvil, remove the tamper assembly, REP 12.30-171.
2.
Fully pull out the BM module. Remove the stapler cover(s), one screw on each. Pull the
stapler bracket handle and swing open the stapler bracket.
Figure 2 8.5 x 11 inch paper setting

5.
Ensure the front door interlock switch is cheated, PL 12.115 Item 24. Run a four sheet C
fold and Z fold copy job. Check that the copies are folded into three approximately equal
parts, with the folds parallel to the edge of the paper.
6.
Check the C and Z folded copies meet the customer requirements. If necessary make fine
adjustments to the position of the folds. ADJ 12.12-171 Tri-Folder Fold Adjustment.
February 2013
4-401
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.2-171, ADJ 12.3-171
3.
Figure 1, insert the alignment tool.
4.
Figure 2, loosen the anvil.
1
Insert the stapler
alignment tool into
the stapler throat.
Loosen 2 clamp screws so
that the anvil can move freely,
see note.
2
Press the tool firmly into
place and slowly close
the stapler bracket.
Figure 1 Alignment tool insertion
Figure 2 Loosening the anvil

NOTE: Take great care not to drop the anvil, spacer or clamp plate, Figure 3, as they can
fall to the bottom of the BM module. If parts need to be retrieved from the bottom of the
BM module it may be necessary to tilt the whole HVF BM to make the loose parts slide to
the centre of the base, from where they can be easily removed.
5.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.3-171
Figure 3, close the stapler.
February 2013
4-402
2
Continue to rotate the
stapler gear so that the
two protrusions on the
tool engage with the
depressions in the
anvil. Move the anvil if
necessary using the
two clamp screws.
Anvil
Spacer
Clamp plate
1
Rotate the stapler gear counterclockwise
to begin closing the stapler.
3
Continue to rotate the stapler gear
until the anvil is tightly clamped by
the alignment tool and the stapler
will close no further.
4
Tighten the two screws alternately a little at a time, while
holding the free screw with a finger. Ensure that the anvil
does not move as the screws are tightened.
Figure 3 Closing the stapler
6.
Open the stapler fully by use of the stapler gear, Figure 3, then remove the alignment tool.
7.
Perform the adjustment on the other stapler anvil if necessary.
8.
Check the operation of the stapler by making a few stapled sets using 2 sheets of 80gsm
(20 pound) paper. check the quality of the staple clinch.
February 2013
4-403
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.3-171
ADJ 12.4-171 Crease Blade Position
ADJ 12.5-171 Booklet Tamping
Purpose
Purpose
NOTE: There is no adjustment needed for the crease blade position.
To set the tamper travel to give neat booklets without edge damage.
The crease blade assembly is supplied with the blade set at the nominal position.
If the crease blade assembly is damaged or requires adjustment, install a new crease blade
Procedure
WARNING
Go to the appropriate check and adjustment from the following options:
If only A4 paper is available, go to A4 Paper Procedure.
If only 8.5 X 11 inch paper is available, go to 8.5 X 11 Inch Procedure.
A4 Paper Procedure
Check
1.
Open the HVF BM front door and insert an interlock cheater into the front door interlock
switch.
2.
Fully pull out the BM module and release the jam clearance handle PL 12.150 Item 8, fully
open the paper guide, PL 12.150 Item 7.
3.
Repairs/Adjustments
Enter Service mode GP 1.
b.
Select Adjustment Routines.
c.
d.
Enter NVMID 12-006 BookMkrTampRdyOff-set.
e.
Select Read / Write and reduce the original value by 8.
f.
Select Save, select OK, select Close, select Exit.
4.
Enter Diagnostic Routine dC330 code 12-255 BM Backstop Motor, select Start, allow the
backstop to raise to the receive position (where it will pause), select Stop.
5.
Enter dC330 code 12-256 BM tamper 1 motor. Select Start to run the tamper motor, allow
the tampers to move into the tamped position (where they will pause), select Stop.
6.
Insert a single sheet of A4 paper, short edge downward into the booklet maker compiling
area, so that it rests on the backstop and is located between the two tampers
7.
Bias the sheet towards the rear of the machine until the sheet touches the rear tamper,
Figure 1.
8.
ADJ 12.4-171, ADJ 12.5-171
Do the following:
a.
Observe the position of the sheet between the tampers, Figure 1.
If the sheet cannot reach the backstop because the tampers are too close together,
the NVM value will need to be decreased to move the tampers further apart, perform
the adjustment.
If the front tamper is not within 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) of the sheet edge without touching
the sheet, the NVM value will need to be increased to move the tampers closer
together, perform the adjustment.
If the tampers are in the correct position, within 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) of the sheet edge
without touching the sheet, do the following:
February 2013
4-404
a.
Enter Service Mode GP 1.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Select Read / Write and increase the value by 8.
f.
7.
8.
Bias the sheet towards the rear of the machine until the sheet touches the rear tamper,
Figure 1.
Observe the position of the sheet between the tampers, Figure 1.
If the sheet cannot reach the backstop because the tampers are too close together,
the NVM value will need to be decreased to move the tampers further apart, perform
the adjustment.
If the front tamper is not within 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) of the sheet edge without touching
the sheet, the NVM value will need to be increased to move the tampers closer
together, perform the adjustment.
If the tampers are in the correct position, within 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) of the sheet edge
without touching the sheet, do the following:
Adjustment
1.
Do the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Select Read / Write and enter the new value to correct the error found during the
check. Increasing the value lengthens the tamping stroke (tamps to a narrower
dimension between the tampers. Decreasing the value shortens the tamping stroke
(tamps to a wider dimension between the tampers). One step = 0.53 mm.
f.
2.
Repeat the check to ensure the tampers are set correctly.
3.
When the tamper travel is correct, do the following:
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Adjustment
1.
Switch the machine off then on, GP 14.
Do the following:
a.
Enter Service Routine GP 1.
b.
c.
d.
e.
check. Increasing the value lengthens the tamping stroke (tamps to a narrower
dimension between the tampers. Decreasing the value shortens the tamping stroke
(tamps to a wider dimension between the tampers). One step = 0.53 mm.
f.
8.5 X 11 Inch Procedure

Check
1.
a.
switch.
2.
Repeat the check to ensure the tampers are set correctly.
3.
When the tamper travel is correct, do the following:
2.
Fully pull out the booklet maker and release the jam clearance handle PL 12.150 Item 8,
fully open the paper guide PL 12.150 Item 7.
a.
3.
Do the following:
b.
a.
c.
b.
d.
c.
e.
d.
f.
e.
Select Read/Write and reduce the original value by 19.
f.
4.
4.
5.
Enter Diagnostic Routine dC330 code 12-256 BM tamper 1 motor. Select Start to run the
tamper motor, allow the tampers to move into the tamped position (where they will pause),
select Stop.
6.
Insert a single sheet of 8.5 X 11 inch paper, short edge downward into the booklet maker
compiling area, so that it rests on the backstop and is located between the two tampers
Switch the machine off then on, GP 14.
February 2013
4-405
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.5-171
ADJ 12.6-171 Booklet Compiling Position

Purpose
To set the compiling position to ensure correct compiling without damage. When the compiling
position is correctly set, each sheet is fed behind the BM entry roll to rest against the right side
of the compiler.
Procedure
WARNING
Front tamper
Paper sheet
Paper sheet
Rear tamper
Go to the appropriate check and adjustment from the following options:
If only A4 paper is available, go to A4 Paper Procedure.
If only 8.5 X 11 inch paper is available, go to 8.5 X 11 Inch Procedure.
A4 Paper Procedure
Check
1.
switch.
2.
Fully pull out the BM module and release the jam clearance handle PL 12.150 Item 8, fully
open the paper guide PL 12.150 Item 7.
3.
4.
Insert a single sheet of A4 paper short edge downward into the booklet maker compiling
area, so that it rests on the backstop and is approximately central front to back. Tuck the
top of the sheet behind the BM entry roll, PL 12.150 Item 15.
5.
If the BM right hand cover does not have a viewing hole, remove the BM right hand cover,
REP 12.56-171.
Booklet maker staplers
Figure 1 Observing the tamper positions.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.5-171, ADJ 12.6-171
February 2013
4-406
6.
Adjustment
Figure 1, check the alignment of the sheet against the scale.
1.
Top of sheet must align

with the 0 mark on the
B scale.
Do the following
a.
b.
c.
d.
Enter NVMID 12-003 BookMkrCompileOff-set.
e.
check. Increasing the value will raise the sheet. Decreasing the value will lower the
sheet. One step = 0.1137 mm.
f.
2.
Repeat the Check to ensure the compiling position is correctly set.
3.
When the compiling position is correct, switch the machine off then on, GP 14.
8.5 X 11 Inch Procedure

Check
1.
switch.
2.
Fully pull out the BM module and release the jam clearance handle PL 12.150 Item 8. fully
open the paper guide PL 12.150 Item 7.
3.
Do the following
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Select Read / Write and increase the original value by 80.
f.
4.
5.
Insert a single sheet of 8.5 X 11 inch paper short edge downward into the booklet maker
compiling area, so that it rests on the backstop and is approximately central front to back.
Tuck the top of the sheet behind the BM entry roll, PL 12.150 Item 15.
6.
If the BM right hand cover does not have a viewing hole, remove the BM right hand cover,
REP 12.56-171.
Figure 1 Top edge alignment

7.
If the sheet is correctly aligned, exit diagnostics and re-install the BM right hand cover, if
removed in step 5. If the sheet is not correctly aligned, perform the adjustment.
February 2013
4-407
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.6-171
7.
Figure 2, check the alignment of the sheet against the scale.
e.
9.
Select Read / Write and decrease the value by 80, this will return the NVM value to
the original setting.
f.
g.
Re-install the BM right hand cover, if removed in step 5.
If the sheet is not correctly aligned, perform the adjustment.
Adjustment
1.
Top of sheet must align

with the bottom mark
on the B scale.
2.
3.
4.
Do the following
a.
Enter Service Routine GP 1.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Select Read/Write and enter the new value to correct the error found during the
check. Increasing the value will raise the sheet. Decreasing the value will lower the
sheet. One step = 0.1137 mm.
f.
Repeat the Check to ensure the compiling position is correctly set.

Do the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Select Read / Write and decrease the value by 80.
f.
g.
Re-install the BM right hand cover, if removed in step 5.
When the compiling position is correct, switch the machine off then on, GP 14.
Figure 2 Top edge alignment

8.
If the sheet is correctly aligned, do the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.6-171
February 2013
4-408
ADJ 12.7-171 Booklet Crease Position
3.
Purpose
Check the backstop home sensor bracket is in the correct position. Ensure the flag is central to the locator, Figure 1.
To set the crease position of the booklet in relation to the left edge of the top sheet of the booklet.
CORRECT POSITION
Check
1.
Run a copy job of 3 stapled 4 sheet booklets.
2.
Observe the position of the crease in relation to the open end of the booklet. The fold
should be central, so that the open end of the booklet pages are equal from the fold. If
necessary perform the adjustment.
Ensure the connector is

connected.
Ensure the flag moves

through the centre of the
sensor.
The bracket is in the

upright position.
INCORRECT POSITION
Bend the bracket towards the

flag, until it is located in the
middle of the sensor.
Figure 1 Booklet maker back stop sensor bracket
February 2013
4-409
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.7-171
ADJ 12.8-171 Booklet Staple Position
Adjustment
WARNING
Purpose
To set the position of the staples so that they are positioned on the fold of the booklet.
1.
1.
a.
2.
Observe the position of the staple in relation to the fold of the booklet. The staple should
be positioned in the middle of the fold. If necessary perform the adjustment.
Enter Service Mode GP 1
b.
c.
Select 131 NVM Read / Write...
d.
Enter NVMID 12-005 BookMrkFoldOffset.
e.
Select Read/Write.
f.
Enter the new value to correct the error found during the check.
Adjustment
WARNING
NOTE: Increasing the value increases the width of the top sheet of the booklet
(moves the fold away from the left edge). Decreasing the value decreases the width
of the top sheet of the booklet (moves the fold towards the left edge). One step =
0.1137 mm.
g.
Check
1.
Select Save, then OK.
2.
Select Save, then select OK.
3.
When the crease position is correct, switch the machine off then on, GP 14.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Enter the NVMID as required:
12-004 BookMrkStapleOffset for 8.5 x 11 inch and A4.
12-012 BookMrkStapleOffsetM for 8.5 x 13 inch and 8.5 x 14 inch.
12-013 BookMrkStapleOffsetL for 11 x 17 inch and A3.
e.
Select Read / Write.
f.
Enter the new value to correct the error found during the check.
NOTE: One step = 0.1137 mm. If it is necessary to change the value for one size,
the values of other sizes may also be incorrect. If paper is available, perform the
Check for all size settings.
g.
h.
Enter NVMID 12-005 BookMrkFoldOffset.
i.
Select Read / Write.
j.
Change the value by the same amount as the BookMrkStapleOffset value.

NOTE: Increasing both values moves the staple position toward the left edge of the
top sheet. Decreasing both values moves the staple position away. Changing only
the BookMrkStapleOffset value will move the staple position and fold position the
same amount.
k.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.7-171, ADJ 12.8-171
2.
Repeat the Check to ensure the staple position is correct.
3.
When the staple position is correct, switch the machine off then on, GP 14.
February 2013
4-410
ADJ 12.9-171 Booklet Maker Skew

Purpose
Correct position of the

crease blade fold
To adjust the skew of the booklet crease.

Check and complete the following adjustments:
ADJ 12.6-171 Booklet compiling position.
ADJ 12.8-171 Booklet staple position.
ADJ 12.7-171 Booklet crease position.
Check
1.
2.
Observe the position of the crease in relation to the open end of the booklet. The fold
should be central, so that the open end of the booklet pages are equal from the fold. If
necessary perform the adjustment.
Angle of adjustment
Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
Slide out the booklet maker and locate the adjustment screw on the booklet backstop,
Figure 1.
Use a 2.5 mm allen head driver and turn the adjustment screw as follows:
Turn the screw clockwise to rotate the crease clockwise relative to the centre line.
Turn the screw anti-clockwise to rotate the crease anti-clockwise relative to the centre line.
One half turn of the adjustment screw will change the crease angle approximately 3
to 4 mm over the length of the crease.
Adjustment screw
Run a copy job of 3 stapled 4 sheet booklets to check that the crease is in the centre of
the book. Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
Figure 1 Booklet crease adjustment
February 2013
4-411
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.9-171
ADJ 12.10-171 HVF Motor Drive Belt Tensioning
NOTE: Check the belt condition and routing if the tension spring is not extended or the
locking screw is at the end of the bracket adjustment slot.
Purpose
To set the tension of belts that are tensioned by a spring attached to a motor. See also ADJ
12.11-171 Idler Drive Belt Tensioning.
Drive belt
Check
1.
2.
3.
The adjustable motor or tensioning pulley bracket is positioned with fastening screws not
tightened fully.
Pivot Screw
NOTE: For motors with pivoted brackets, the pivot screw must be fitted and tightened.
4.
The tensioning spring is fitted between the bracket and frame locating point.
Adjustment
WARNING
Bracket
1.
2.
Figure 1 shows a typical arrangement. Press the belt midway between pulleys and check
that the bracket moves in the direction of the spring pull; slacken the bracket screws if
necessary.
Tension spring
Release the belt and allow the spring to pull the bracket and tension the drive belt then
tighten the lock and bracket screws.
Adjustment slot
Lock screw
Typical spring tensioning arrangement
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.10-171
February 2013
4-412
ADJ 12.11-171 HVF Idler Drive Belt Tensioning
ADJ 12.12-171 Tri-Folder Fold Adjustment
Purpose
Purpose
To set the tension of drive belts that are tensioned by a spring attached to an idler. See also
ADJ 12.10-171 Motor Drive Belt Tensioning.
To adjust C or Z folded copies in accordance with the customer requirements.
Check
Check
1.
1.
2.
Ensure the tri-folder and the HVF BM are aligned correctly, ADJ 12.1-171 Machine to HVF
/ HVF BM, HVF BM to Tri-Folder Alignment.
3.
The tensioning spring is fitted between the idler bracket and frame locating point.
2.
Ensure the tri-folder is set for the correct size of paper, ADJ 12.2-171 Tri-Folder Paper
Size Setting.
3.
The NVM settings. Enter dC131 then check the values for NVMID 12-009 (C folds), 12010 (Z folds) and 12-011 (Trifold deskew) are set in accordance with the values on the
HVF/BM label, Figure 1.
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Figure 1 shows a typical arrangement. Loosen the adjustment screw and allow the spring
to tension the belt.
2.
Tighten the adjustment screw.
3.
If no more adjustment is available, install new components as necessary.
If necessary, enter dC131 and change the NVM values for codes 12-009, 12-010
and 12-011 to match with the values on the HVF BM label.
4.
Ensure the front door interlock switch is cheated,PL 12.115 Item 24. Run a four sheet C
fold and Z fold copy job. Check that the copies are folded into three approximately equal
parts, with the folds parallel to the edge of the paper.
5.
Check that the C and Z folded copies meet with the customer requirements. If necessary
make fine adjustments to the length of folds A and / or B. Figure 2.
1
Open the HVF BM front door, then
pull out the booklet maker module
from the HVF BM.
Mod/TAG plate
Tension spring
Adjustment slot
Check that the values on the

HVF / BM label match the
NVM values of the machine.
Booklet maker
Figure 1 HVF/BM NVM Value Label Location
Locking screw
Bracket
Typical idler tensioning arrangement

February 2013
4-413
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.11-171, ADJ 12.12-171
Adjustment
Lower the paper setting adjusters to increase fold B.
WARNING
1.
Perform the adjustments that follow as necessary to meet with the customer C fold and Z
fold requirements, Figure 2.
2.
Move the adjuster
Move the adjuster.
Fasten the screw.

C Fold profile
Z Fold profile
Figure 2 C folded and Z folded output copy profiles
Fasten the screw.
Loosen the screw.
Loosen the screw.
Figure 3 Set the paper size adjusters.
NOTE: Figure 2. Shows the orientation of a C and Z folded copy on the tri-folder output tray, as
viewed from the front of the machine.
A Folds
Figure 2. The folds marked A are created within the booklet maker module. The length of the A
fold is determined by the NVM values in dC131. An increase to the NVM value by 30 will
decrease the A fold by 1 mm. A decrease to the NVM value by 30 will increase the A fold by 1
mm.
Use dC131 code 12-009 to make adjustments to C folded copies.
Use dC131 code 12-010 to make adjustments to Z folded copies.
B Folds
Figure 2. The folds marked B are created within the tri-folder module. The length of the B fold is
determined by the position of the paper setting adjusters. If necessary remove the front door,
PL 12.200 Item 2, front cover PL 12.200 Item 12 and the rear cover PL 12.200 Item 3, then
reposition the paper setting adjusters. Figure 3. An adjustment of 1 graduation on the paper
size adjuster scale will adjust the position of fold B by 1 mm.
Raise the paper setting adjusters to decrease fold B.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 12.12-171
February 2013
4-414
ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning Procedure

Purpose
Scan carriage
To clean the optical components of the scanner ensuring optimum image quality.
NOTE: This adjustment must only be performed if directed to it from an Image Quality RAP, or
if the optics cavity was opened to install a new component and contamination can be seen.
Exposure
lamps
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Observe ESD precautions during this procedure.
1.
2.
Remove the CVT ramp, CVT glass and document glass assembly, REP 62.3.
3.
4.
5.
Inspect the LED exposure lamps, Figure 1. If necessary, clean them as follows:
a.
Vacuum clean the area to remove all visible contamination. Take care not to touch
the LED exposure lamps with the cleaning nozzle. It may be necessary to move the
scan carriage assembly gently to the left. It is advisable to leave it in this position, but
it can be returned to the home position by depressing slightly to allow the flag to
enter the gap in the scan carriage home sensor.
b.
Wash your hands.
c.
Carefully clean the LED exposure lamps, with a micro fibre cleaning cloth, PL 26.10
Item 6, dampened with antistatic fluid, PL 26.10 Item 11.
d.
Polish the LED lamps and top of the scan carriage with a dry micro fibre cleaning
cloth, PL 26.10 Item 6.
Flag
Scan carriage
home sensor
Figure 1 Optics cleaning
Clean the lenses of the document size sensors, PL 62.16 Item 10, with a micro fibre
cleaning cloth, PL 26.10 Item 6.
Inspect the document glass and CVT glass and if necessary, clean them as follows:
a.
Clean the under side of document glass and CVT glass using a micro fibre cleaning
cloth, PL 26.10 Item 6, dampened with antistatic fluid, PL 26.10 Item 11.
b.
Polish the under side of document glass and CVT glass with a dry micro fibre cleaning cloth, PL 26.10 Item 6.
c.
Install the document glass and CVT glass, taking care not to smear the cleaned
underside, REP 62.3.
NOTE: Ensure that the white AGC strip on both the CVT glass and the document
glass, are at the front of the machine and on the underside of the glass.
6.
d.
Clean the upper side of document glass and CVT glass using a micro fibre cleaning
cloth, dampened with film remover, PL 26.11 Item 14.
e.
Polish the upper side of document glass and CVT glass using a dry, micro fibre
cleaning cloth.
Re-install the remainder of the removed components.
February 2013
4-415
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 62.1
ADJ 62.2 Scan Carriage Assembly

Alignment
stops

Purpose
To align the scan carriage assembly correctly in relation to the right hand edge of the document
glass.
NOTE: Perform the Preparation, then the Check if entering this procedure from the Image
Quality section. Otherwise, perform the Adjustment only.
Preparation
1.
2.
3.
Remove the CVT ramp, CVT glass and document glass assembly, REP 62.3.
Check
1.
Gently move the scan carriage to the right, lowering it so the flag at the front passes into
the slot in the scan carriage home sensor, PL 62.15 Item 7.
2.
Check that the scan carriage touches both alignment stops, Figure 1. If they do not both
touch, perform the Adjustment.
Mark cable here

(optional)
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Gently move the carriage away from the alignment stops.
2.
Loosen the four screws securing the fixing tabs, Figure 1.
3.
Ensure the scan cable is in the slot under the front, left fixing tab.
4.
Tighten the rear, left fixing tab screw.
5.
Slide the carriage towards the alignment stops, lowering it so the flag on the front of the
carriage enters the slot in the scan carriage home sensor.
6.
Press the scan carriage against the alignment stops at the right end of its travel and hold
it there.
7.
Tighten the other three fixing tab screws.
Fixing tab
(4 off)
Guide rail
Position the cable in

the slot, on this tab
NOTE: The scan carriage is correctly positioned on the cables, when the scan carriage is
lightly biassed towards the front of the machine, and runs against the guide rail.
8.
Run prints from all trays in all modes. Check the registration, refer to dC608 Registration
Setup and check the copy quality, refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 62.2
February 2013
4-416
Figure 1 Scan carriage alignment
ADJ 62.3 Carriage Motor and Scanner Drive Belt
ADJ 62.4 Document Glass Registration Adjustment

Purpose

Purpose
To ensure the carriage motor will drive the capstan without strain or slipping.
To measure and adjust the image to paper registration.
Adjustment
Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
1.
Go to dC609 Document Glass Registration.
2.
3.
Remove the carriage motor cover, (2 screws).
4.
Perform the adjustment, Figure 1.
3
Tighten 3
screws
Capstan
Belt
Scan motor
Adjust for 2 mm
movement
1
Loosen 3 screws
Figure 1 Carriage motor drive belt adjustment

5.
Turn the capstan several turns to centre the scanner drive belt on the pulleys. Check the
play of the scanner drive belt and re-adjust if necessary.
February 2013
4-417
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 62.3, ADJ 62.4
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 62.3, ADJ 62.4
February 2013
4-418
ADJ 73.1 Tray 3 Paper Tray Guide Setting

Purpose
To adjust the paper tray guide in tray 3 and tray 4 for A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch paper.
Adjustment
WARNING
Locate tab in correct position
1.
Pull out the tray to be adjusted and remove the paper from the tray.
2.
Push in the retaining clips and release the paper tray guides, Figure 1.
Release 4 clips
Locate paper guide in

correct slot
Figure 1 Remove the paper guides

3.
To reset the front and rear paper tray guides:
Go to Figure 2, to set the paper tray guides to A4 paper size and reposition the
retaining clips.
Go to Figure 3, to set the paper tray guides to 8.5 x 11 paper size and reposition the
retaining clips.
February 2013
4-419
Figure 2 A4 size
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 73.1
4.
5.
To lock the paper tray guide in position, push the retaining clips in the reverse direction as
shown in Figure 1.
To reset the right side paper tray guides, Figure 4:
(A) to set the paper tray guides to A4 paper size.
(B) to set the paper tray guides to letter size.
Locate tab in correct position
Use the handles to move the paper

guides to A4 paper size.
Locate paper guide in

correct slot
Use the handles to move the paper

guides to letter size.
Figure 4 Right side paper tray guides
Figure 3 8.5 x 11 size
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 73.1
February 2013
4-420
ADJ 75.1 Tray 5 Paper Tray Guide Setting

Purpose
Paper size indicator window
To adjust the paper tray guides in tray 5 for A4 / A3 or 8.5 x 11 / 11 x 17 inch paper.
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Open tray 5 door and allow the tray to lower and remove the paper stack.
2.
Adjust the paper guide to the required paper size, Figure 1.
3.
Move the handle up to

release the lock on the
paper guide
To set the paper tray guide to A4 / A3 paper size, move the paper guide to the outer
position.
Use the handle to move

the paper guide to the
required paper size
To set the paper tray guide to 8.5 x 11 / 11 x 17 inch paper size, move the paper
guide to the inner position.
3
Move the handle down
to lock the paper guide
Check the registration, refer to dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration.
Figure 1 Paper guide adjustment
February 2013
4-421
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 75.1
ADJ 75.2 Tray 5 Module to Machine Alignment
ADJ 75.3 Tray 5 Module Tray Alignment

Purpose

Purpose
To correctly align the tray 5 module to achieve correct top edge registration and reliable transfer of paper from the tray 5 module to the machine.
To align the tray 5 module paper tray with the paper trays in the IOT module. Use this adjustment when the top edge registration cannot be achieved using dC625 Registration / Preheat
Calibration.
Adjustment
WARNING
The adjustment must be performed in the following order:
NOTE: Perform ADJ 75.2, Tray 5 Module to Machine Alignment, before starting this adjustment procedure. Use both ADJ 75.2 and this adjustment to achieve correct hole punch alignment.
Before performing this adjustment return the NVM values for tray 5 to the nominal values.
Adjustment
1.
Figure 1, turn the hand wheel in the centre of the tray 5 module to raise the casters off of
the floor.
2.
Check the registration, refer to dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration.
WARNING
Make a sample print and determine which way and how far the tray needs to be moved. After
the adjustment is made, take a sample print.
1.
Loosen the two screws on the docking pin bracket, Figure 1.
1
Turn the hand wheel to
obtain alignment
1
Loosen two screws
2
Raise front and rear casters off of the
floor
Figure 1 Docking pin bracket
2.
Turn the adjusting screw to move the docking pin bracket to the front or to the rear, Figure 2
Figure 1 Machine to tray 5 alignment
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 75.2, ADJ 75.3
February 2013
4-422
1
Turn the adjusting screw as
necessary
2
The bracket moves
1
Tighten two screws
Figure 2 Adjusting screw

Use the scribed indicator to determine the amount of movement, Figure 3.
Figure 4 Secure the docking pin bracket

4.
Make sample prints and check the top edge registration.
5.
Enter dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration.
6.
If the top edge registration is still out of range, then repeat the adjustment.
Use the scribed indicators to

determine the amount of
adjustment required.
The indicator is in 1 mm
increments.
Figure 3 Adjustment indicator

3.
Secure the docking pin bracket, Figure 4.
February 2013
4-423
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 75.3
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 75.3
February 2013
4-424
ADJ 82.1 Media Registration Calibration

Purpose
To set the media registration and skew to the image set on the drum. Refer to dC625 Registration / Preheat calibration.
February 2013
4-425
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 82.1
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 82.1
February 2013
4-426
ADJ 91.1 Printhead Attachment Check

Purpose
To check the attachment of the printheads to the carriages. This procedure should be performed if the dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check has failed.
Adjustment
WARNING
NOTE: The dC967 routine will stop if a faulty or incorrectly fitted printhead is identified.
1.
Check that the suspect printhead is securely attached to the ball plate, refer to REP
91.29.
2.
Check for obstructions or debris blocking movement of the suspect printhead.
3.
Make sure the harnesses are correctly routed along the carriage with the suspect printhead, refer to GP 28.
4.
Remove the suspect printhead, refer to REP 91.29. Check for debris on the ball plate and
the back surface of the printhead. Remove any excess ink from umbilical ink nozzles,
then re-install the printhead. Re-run dC967. If the spacing check again fails, perform the
following:
a.
Swap the faulty printhead with a printhead from a different position.
b.
Re-run dC967.
c.
If the fault follows the printhead, install a new printhead, PL 91.20 Item 2 or PL 91.25
Item 2.
d.
If the fault remains with the printhead position, check the ball plate and SFWA frame.
Install new components as necessary, PL 91.20 or PL 91.25.
February 2013
4-427
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 91.1
Repairs/Adjustments
ADJ 91.1
February 2013
4-428
5 Parts Lists
PL 12.125 HVF Feed Assembly and Punch (1 of 3) .......................................................
PL 12.140 HVF Power and Control .................................................................................
PL 1 - Standby Power
PL 1.15 Main Power Supply ............................................................................................
5-3
PL 2 - User Interface and Secure Access

PL 2.00 Secure Access Additions ...................................................................................
PL 2.10 User Interface ....................................................................................................
5-4
5-5
PL 12 - HVF Booklet Maker
PL 3 - Machine Run Control

PL 3.11 Image Processing Module .................................................................................
5-6
PL 5 - DADH
PL 5.10 DADH (Complete), Covers, DADH PWB ...........................................................
PL 5.15 Feed Assembly ..................................................................................................
PL 5.20 Top Cover Assembly..........................................................................................
PL 5.25 CVT....................................................................................................................
PL 5.30 Baffle Assembly .................................................................................................
PL 5.35 Input Tray Assembly ..........................................................................................
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
PL 12.200 Tri-Folder Covers ...........................................................................................

PL 12.205 Tri-Folder Drives Module ...............................................................................
PL 12.210 Tri-Folder Top Door Cover Assembly ............................................................
PL 12.215 Tri-Folder Main Drives Assembly...................................................................
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
PL 12 - LCSS
PL 12.10 LCSS Covers ...................................................................................................
PL 12.15 LCSS Docking Latch........................................................................................
PL 12.20 LCSS Hole Punch Unit.....................................................................................
PL 12.25 LCSS Paddle Wheel ........................................................................................
PL 12.30 LCSS Bin 1 Control Components (1 of 2) ........................................................
PL 12.35 LCSS Bin 1 Control Components (2 of 2) ........................................................
PL 12.40 LCSS Paper Entry Transport ...........................................................................
PL 12.45 LCSS Tamper Assembly..................................................................................
PL 12.50 LCSS Ejector Assembly...................................................................................
PL 12.55 LCSS Staple Head Unit/Traverse Assembly....................................................
PL 12.60 LCSS Bin 0 Entry .............................................................................................
PL 12.65 LCSS Bin 1 Entry .............................................................................................
PL 12.70 LCSS Entry Guide Cover/Jam Clearance Guide .............................................
PL 12.75 LCSS Electrical ................................................................................................
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-54
PL 12.300 Inserter Covers ..............................................................................................

PL 12.305 Inserter Main Drives (1 of 3) ..........................................................................
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-58
PL 20 - Fax
PL 20.05 Fax Module ......................................................................................................
PL 20.10 Line 1 & 2 Fax Kits...........................................................................................
5-59
5-60
PL 25 - Accessories
PL 25.10 Convenience Stapler........................................................................................
5-61
PL 26 - Consumables and Tools

PL 26.10 Consumables and Tools (1 of 2)......................................................................
PL 26.11 Consumables and Tools (2 of 2)......................................................................
5-62
5-63
PL 28 - Covers
PL 28.10 Covers..............................................................................................................
5-64
PL 31 - Maintenance/Installation/Removal Kits
PL 12 - HVF
PL 12.100 HVF Covers and Docking ..............................................................................
PL 12.105 HVF Stacker...................................................................................................
PL 12.110 HVF Ejector, Pressing and Support (1 of 2)...................................................
PL 12.115 HVF Ejector, Pressing and Support (2 of 2)...................................................
PL 12.120 HVF Main Drives............................................................................................
5-41
5-42
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
PL 12 - Inserter
PL 12 - OCT
PL 12.00 OCT .................................................................................................................
PL 12.145 HVF BM Module (Complete)..........................................................................

PL 12.150 HVF BM Entry and Front Cover .....................................................................
PL 12.155 HVF BM Tamper Assembly ...........................................................................
PL 12.160 HVF BM Back Stop Motor..............................................................................
PL 12.165 HVF BM Back Stop assembly........................................................................
PL 12.170 HVF BM Crease Blade Motor ........................................................................
PL 12.175 HVF BM Crease Rolls Motor and PWB .........................................................
PL 12.180 HVF BM Crease Rolls and Support Leg ........................................................
PL 12.185 HVF BM Stapler Assemblies..........................................................................
PL 12.190 HVF BM Bin 2 ................................................................................................
PL 12 - Tri-Folder
PL 10 - Transfix and Copy/Print Transportation

PL 10.10 Stripper System (1 of 2) ...................................................................................
PL 10.12 Stripper System (2 of 2) ...................................................................................
PL 10.15 Exit Paper Path ................................................................................................
PL 10.20 Transfix Roller Assembly .................................................................................
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
PL 31.10 Maintenance/Installation/Removal Kits (1 of 3)................................................

February 2013
5-1
5-65
5-66
5-67
Parts Lists
PL 62 - Scanner
PL 62.10 Scanner Module, CVT/Document Glass ..........................................................
PL 62.15 Electrical Components (1 of 2) ........................................................................
PL 62.16 Electrical Components (2 of 2) ........................................................................
PL 93 - Ink Delivery
5-68
5-69
5-70
PL 70 - Paper Supply
PL 70.10 Tray 1 and 2 Assembly ....................................................................................
PL 70.25 3 Tray Module Covers .....................................................................................
PL 70.30 Left Hand Upper Door Assembly .....................................................................
5-71
5-72
5-73
PL 93.10 Ink Loader Assembly .......................................................................................
5-102
PL 94 - Ink Transfer
PL 94.10 Cleaning Unit ...................................................................................................
PL 94.15 IOD Assembly ..................................................................................................
PL 94.20 Drum Assembly ...............................................................................................
Common Hardware .........................................................................................................
5-103
5-104
5-105
5-106
PL 73.15 Tray 3 Assembly ..............................................................................................
PL 73.16 3 Tray Module ..................................................................................................
5-74
5-75
PL 74.10 Bypass Module (Tray 4)(1 of 2) .......................................................................
PL 74.11 Bypass Module (Tray 4) (2 of 2) ......................................................................
5-76
5-77
PL 75.60 Tray 5 Covers ..................................................................................................
PL 75.62 Tray 5 Base .....................................................................................................
PL 75.64 Tray 5 Guides ..................................................................................................
PL 75.68 Tray 5 Lift Assembly (1 of 2)............................................................................
PL 75.70 Tray 5 Lift Assembly (2 of 2)............................................................................
5-78
5-79
5-80
5-81
5-82
PL 81 - Paper Transport
PL 81.10 Main Covers.....................................................................................................
PL 81.11 Front Door Assembly .......................................................................................
PL 81.25 Tray 1 Paper Feed Assembly ..........................................................................
PL 81.35 3 Tray Module Transport Assembly.................................................................
PL 81.40 Tray 5 Feed Assembly (1 of 3) ........................................................................
5-83
5-84
5-85
5-86
5-87
5-88
5-89
5-90
5-91
PL 82 - Paper Transport
PL 82.10 Vertical Paper Path..........................................................................................
PL 82.15 Horizontal Paper Path......................................................................................
5-92
5-93
PL 88 - Registration/Preheat Assembly
PL 88.10 Registration/Preheat Assembly (1 of 2) ...........................................................
PL 88.11 Registration/Preheat Assembly (2 of 2) ...........................................................
5-94
5-95
PL 91 - Marking Unit
PL 91.05 Marking Unit Slide Assembly ...........................................................................
PL 91.10 Marking Unit Drive Assembly...........................................................................
PL 91.15 Marking Unit Belt and Drive .............................................................................
PL 91.20 Marking Unit Upper Carriage Assembly ..........................................................
PL 91.25 Marking Unit Lower Carriage Assembly ..........................................................
5-96
5-97
5-98
5-99
5-100
PL 92 - IOT Process Control

PL 92.10 Marking Unit Electronic PWB's ........................................................................
Parts Lists
5-101
February 2013
5-2
PL 1.15 Main Power Supply

Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
7
152S06414
152S06400
152S06413
152S06402
152S06415
152S06416
112K01070
110K21010
960K71860
960K46462
127E16360
110K21111
8
9
117E35720
117E35610
10
117E35590
11
12
117E35560
13
117E35550
14
117E35581
15
117E35600
16
17
117E35620
117E35650
18
117E35690
19
117E35710
20
21
117E35750
117E35530
22
23
117E35700
127K62260
Main power cord (see below for

variants)
United Kingdom
USSG/XCL
XE
Argentina
Denmark
Switzerland
Power supply unit (REP 1.9)
Main power rocker switch
Drum driver PWB (REP 3.6)
Media path driver PWB (REP 3.5)
Enclosure fan (MOT42-063)
Front door interlock switch (S01103) (REP 1.8)
Bypass extension harness (PJ405)
Drum driver MR sensor harness
(PJ701)
Drum driver power supply interface
cable (PJ902)
Chassis interlock harness
Drum driver PWB bracket (P/O PL
1.15 Item 4)
AC chassis heater harness
(PJ5AC)
Drum driver to front components
harness (PJ501)
Drum driver/Media path power
harness (PJ602, PJ803)
Engine fan harness (PJ901)
Cleaning unit interface harness
(PJ601, PJ802)
Media path driver PWB to RALPH
harness (PJ202)
Media path exit/horizontal harness
(PJ905)
Transfix roller harness (PJ401)
Media path driver PWB to 3 tray
module PWB harness (PJ401)
Midrail front door switch harness
Marking unit cooling fan
February 2013
5-3
Parts Lists
PL 1.15
PL 2.00 Secure Access Additions

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
101E28760
105E24030
146E02130
146E02140
146E02150
146E02160
117E35360
117E35340
Secure access controller

Xerox secure access power supply
Xerox secure access card reader
(HID)
(MAGSTRIPE)
(MIFARE)
(LEGIC)
Xerox secure access power cord
(UK)
Xerox secure access power cord
(NA)
Parts Lists
PL 2.00
February 2013
5-4
PL 2.10 User Interface

Item
Part
Description
960K66481
123K08482
4
5
960K52290
6
7
952K00890
8
9
962K76550
10
11
12
13
848E40401
962K76560
14
15
16
17
848K31214
848K31224
User interface control panel

housing (XE) (P/O PL 2.10 Item 17)
User interface control panel
housing (USSG/XCL) (P/O PL 2.10
Item 17)
User interface control PWB (REP
2.3)
User interface touch screen (REP
2.2)
User interface status PWB
French/Canadian overlay label (P/
O PL 31.11 Item 8)
Retainer touch screen (Not spared)
User interface harness (PJ19 to
PJ905, PJ223 to PJ900)
UI harness cover (Not spared)
User interface control PWB to user
interface status PWB harness
(PJ907 to PJ908)
UI inlay
LCD to PWB harness
Harness clip (Not spared)
User interface harness clip (P/O PL
31.10 Item 12)
Numeric keys (P/O PL 2.10 Item
17)
Service keys (P/O PL 2.10 Item 17)
Power keys (P/O PL 2.10 Item 17)
UI plastic housing (XE) (REP 2.1)
UI plastic housing (USSG/XCL)
(REP 2.1)
February 2013
5-5
Parts Lists
PL 2.10
PL 3.11 Image Processing Module

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
960K66422
121E27750
960K66471
960K66440
5
6
7
127K68673
8
9
10
11
12
13
960K66413
14
15
960K27451
16
012E21850
17
18
19
960K66434
105K36240
20
21
960K66450
22
23
952K00240
24
25
26
Power distribution PWB

Hard disk drive (REP 3.8)
Hard disk drive/Single board
controller PWB harness (PJ222)
System memory PWB (DDR2 1GB)
(PJ10)
Chassis fan assembly
Inner fan duct (P/O PL 3.11 Item 5)
Fax connector PWB ribbon cable
(PJ49) (Not spared)
Heatsink assembly (Not spared)
Hard disk drive damper kit (P/O PL
3.11 Item 15)
PDB to SBC harness (PJ17) (Not
spared)
PWB Cover (Not spared)
Hard disk drive power harness (PJ3
)(P/O PL 3.11 Item 15)
Single board controller PWB (REP
3.7)
Foreign device interface PWB
Single board controller PWB
module (Not spared)
SBC drawer service loop harness
(PJ1, PJ13, PJ14, PJ20, PJ604)
NVM module PWB (REP 3.9)
Battery
Shoulder screw (P/O PL 3.11 Item
9)
Grommet (P/O PL 3.11 Item 9)
EPC memory PWB (DDR 1GB)
(U98)
Product enablement key (SIM) (P/O
PL 31.12 Item 2)
Foreign device interface harness
(PJ16)
Harness guide plate (Not spared)
Wireless network adapter (P/O PL
31.11 Item 4)
Extension cable (P/O PL 31.11 Item
4)
Parts Lists
PL 3.11
February 2013
5-6
PL 5.10 DADH (Complete), Covers,

DADH PWB
Item
Part
Description
1
2
802E19352
036K01701
3
4
019K13350
036K01630
5
6
960K51762
962K62932
8
9
084K36766
10
121E17510
11
12
13
017E11301
Rear cover
Right counterbalance (REP 5.12,
ADJ 5.2, ADJ 5.5)
Document pad (ADJ 5.6)
Left counterbalance (REP 5.12,
ADJ 5.2, ADJ 5.5)
DADH PWB
Communication/power cable
(PJ188, PJ851)
Harness support (P/O PL 5.10 Item
9)
Top cover (REF: PL 5.20 Item 15)
DADH (complete) (REP 5.19, ADJ
5.2, ADJ 5.5)
DADH Platen down sensor magnet
(See NOTE)
DADH ground harness (P/O PL
5.10 Item 9)
Thumbscrew (Not spared)
End stop
NOTE: To clean the DADH, refer to ADJ 5.4. For the platen
down sensor (Q62-019) refer to PL 62.16 Item 5.
February 2013
5-7
Parts Lists
PL 5.10
PL 5.15 Feed Assembly

Item
Part
Description
113R00718
2
3
4
130E11200
6
7
8
9
10
11
110E13480
12
13
14
15
16
125E00430
127K53770
17
18
19
20
21
22
802E87730
23
24
25
004E22560
26
27
28
604K61440
29
30
Feed roll assembly (REP 5.14)

(See NOTE 2)
DADH feed sensor (Q05-204)
Front cover (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
Feed housing (P/O PL 5.15 Item
18)
Nudger Motor (MOT05-098) (P/O
PL 5.15 Item 18)
Feed yoke (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
Spring (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
Bearing (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
DADH feed clutch (CL05-062) (W/
O TAG D-005) (Not spared)
Rear cover (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
DADH cover interlock switch (S05212)
Front feed gate (P/O PL 5.15 Item
18)
Rear feed gate (P/O PL 5.15 Item
18)
Static eliminator
Gear (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
DADH feed motor (MOT05-074)
(ADJ 5.1)
Feed motor tension spring (red) (P/
O PL 5.10 Item 9)
Feed assembly (complete) (REF:
PL 31.10 Item 15) (REP 5.3)
Shaft (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
Bracket (P/O PL 5.15 Item 18)
Feed roll assembly cover
Intermediate feed bearing (P/O PL
5.15 Item 18)
Feed motor bracket
Ground harness (P/O PL 5.15 Item
18)
Not used
Motor bracket (P/O PL 5.15 Item
18)
Feed clutch and spacer kit (W/TAG
D-005)
Spacer (P/O PL 5.15 Item 28) (W/
TAG D-005)
Feed clutch (P/O PL 5.15 Item 28)
(W/TAG D-005)
NOTE: 1: For the feed motor drive belt, refer to PL 5.35 Item
5.
NOTE: 2: To reset the count, go to dC135.
Parts Lists
PL 5.15
February 2013
5-8
PL 5.20 Top Cover Assembly

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
022E25061
806E19680
6
7
8
038E22914
9
10
11
029E37810
130K73960
12
130K73970
13
14
15
16
17
802K62453
802K93770
055K37570
Hinge (P/O PL 5.20 Item 16)

Bushing (P/O PL 5.20 Item 16)
CVT/Takeaway idler
Shaft
Torsion spring (green) (P/O PL 5.20
Item 17)
Base
Torsion spring (silver) (P/O PL 5.20
Item 17)
Latch pin
Spring plate (P/O PL 5.20 Item 17)
DADH TAR sensor (Q05-096) (REP
5.8)
DADH CVT Sensor (Q05-097)
(REP 5.8)
Sensor support (P/O PL 5.20 Item
17)
Shaft securing bracket (P/O PL
5.20 Item 17)
Top cover
Top cover assembly (REP 5.1)
Top access cover assembly (REP
5.2)
NOTE: For the top cover interlock switch (S05-212), refer to

PL 5.15 Item 11.
February 2013
5-9
Parts Lists
PL 5.20
PL 5.25 CVT
Item
Part
Description
130K73980
3
4
5
013E21103
6
7
8
9
022E25061
127K53780
10
11
023E25420
12
13
14
15
16
17
050E14972
013E21094
004E22560
DADH pre registration sensor

(Q05-206) (REP 5.10)
Sensor support (P/O PL 5.10 Item
9)
Torsion spring (P/O PL 5.10 Item 9)
Front CVT roll bearing
CVT Roll (P/O PL 31.10 Item 11)
(REP 5.15)
Pre-scan idler
Base (P/O PL 5.10 Item 9)
Shaft (Not spared)
DADH CVT Motor (MOT05-099)
(ADJ 5.1)
CVT Motor tension spring (silver)
(P/O PL 5.10 Item 9)
CVT Motor drive belt (195T) (REP
5.15, ADJ 5.1)
Duplex gate (REP 5.15)
Rear CVT roll bearing
Spacer (white) (P/O PL 5.10 Item 9)
CVT Motor bracket
Ground harness (Not spared)
CVT roll pulley (P/O PL 5.25 Item 5)
Parts Lists
PL 5.25
February 2013
5-10
PL 5.30 Baffle Assembly

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
038E34361
121E20060
4
5
6
7
8
022E25061
059K43910
10
11
12
13
130E11500
14
15
055K37583
16
121K44520
Lower cover (P/O PL 5.30 Item 14)

Lower baffle
DADH Duplex solenoid (SOL05100) (REP 5.7)
Post scan idlers
Exit roll idlers (REP 5.18)
Document finger (P/O PL 5.30 Item
14)
Torsion spring (P/O PL 5.30 Item
14)
Lift bar (P/O PL 5.30 Item 14)
Link arm (P/O PL 5.30 Item 14)
Mylar guide strip (P/O PL 31.11
Item 14) (REP 5.20)
DADH exit sensor (Q05-209) (REP
5.11)
Lower baffle assembly (REP 5.5)
Solenoid spring (P/O PL 5.30 Item
16)
DADH Duplex solenoid assembly
February 2013
5-11
Parts Lists
PL 5.30
PL 5.35 Input Tray Assembly

Item
Part
Description
050K67465
2
3
4
5
004K00971
031E11310
050E22922
6
7
8
059K84630
125E00430
130E18340
10
11
115K02540
103K01511
12
13
14
15
16
014E61020
17
18
059K43920
19
20
130E11200
Input tray assembly (complete)

(REP 5.4)
Pad
Restack arm
Input tray
Feed Motor Drive Belt (86T) (ADJ
5.1) (Not spared)
Takeaway roll assembly (REP 5.6)
Static eliminator (small) (REP 5.17)
DADH Tray size sensor 1 (Q05221)/DADH Tray size sensor 2
(Q05-222) (See NOTE) (REP 5.9)
Lower cover (right) (P/O PL 5.35
Item 1)
Static eliminator (large)
DADH width sensor
(Potentiometer) (Q05-095) (REP
5.16)
Spacer (black)
Nylon washer (P/O PL 5.35 Item 1)
Pulley (P/O PL 5.35 Item 1)
Sensor bracket (P/O PL 5.35 Item
1)
Exit roll assembly (REP 5.13)
Input guide rack assembly (P/O PL
5.35 Item 1)
DADH Document sensor (Q05-102)
Lower cover (left) (P/O PL 5.35
Item 1)
NOTE: This item is also supplied as a pair as a kit PL 31.11

Item 17.
Parts Lists
PL 5.35
February 2013
5-12
PL 10.10 Stripper System (1 of 2)

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
059E10700
059E10890
121K50591
130E12950
7
8
9
055K43331
10
11
12
13
14
15
803E13460
803E13451
807E29000
809E34520
16
007K19810
17
18
130E12940
006K32500
19
20
Roller drive 'J' (REP 10.10)

Roller drive 'L' (REP 10.11)
Stripper solenoid assembly
(SOL10-021) (REP 10.9)
Gearbox (P/O PL 10.10 Item 16)
(REP 10.8)
Post transfix motor (M4) (MOT10018) (P/O PL 10.10 Item 16) (REP
10.8)
Post transfix sensor (11) (Q10015)/Pre exit sensor (12) (Q10-016)
Sensor cover (Not spared)
Bushing roller (Not spared)
Upper baffle assembly (See NOTE)
(REP 10.22)
Stripper jam clearance LED
assembly (P/O PL 10.10 Item 9)
Front latchfork
Back latchfork
Gear drive (25T Symetric)
Return spring
Stripper latch cam (P/O PL 10.10
Item 18)
Motor drive and gearbox assembly
(REP 10.8)
Stripper latch sensor (Q10-014)
Stripper guide latch cam shaft
assembly (REP 10.23)
Upper baffle (P/O PL 10.10 Item 9)
Camshaft (P/O PL 10.10 Item 18)
NOTE: HFSI. This component must be cleaned at regular

intervals, refer to SCP 4 subsystem maintenance. To reset
the HFSI count, go to dC135.
February 2013
5-13
Parts Lists
PL 10.10
PL 10.12 Stripper System (2 of 2)

Item
Part
Description
055K43271
2
3
4
5
6
604K73430
Stripper gate and baffle assembly

(REP 10.21)
Gate and baffle shaft (Not spared)
Stripper blade assembly (P/O PL
10.12 Item 5) (See NOTE) (REP
10.21)
Stripper shaft (Not spared)
Stripper blade kit
Stripper blade retaining tool (P/O
PL 10.12 Item 5)
Grounding strip (Not spared)
NOTE: Supplied with a stripper retaing tool, PL 10.12 Item 6.
Parts Lists
PL 10.12
February 2013
5-14
PL 10.15 Exit Paper Path

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
059E10720
130E12950
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
059E10730
020K20480
023E31390
023E31400
020K20460
127E16370
12
13
14
807E28980
807E28990
121E26500
15
16
17
18
19
038K23770
20
21
22
Roller nip 'N' (REP 10.18)

Exit sensor (15)(Q10-017)(REP
10.16)/Duplex start sensor
(13)(Q83-110)(REP 10.15)
Handle (Not spared)
Static brush (P/O PL 10.15 Item 19)
Roller nip 'P' (REP 10.17)
Pulley 3mm (driven)
Belt 3mm (112T)
Belt 3mm (92T)
Pulley 3mm (21T one way)
Exit Motor (M5) (MOT83-001) (REP
10.14)
Driven compound gear
Idler compound gear
Exit/duplex solenoid (SOL83-006)
(REP 10.12)
Upper exit guide (P/O PL 10.15
Item 19)
Exit illuminator PWB (P/O PL 10.15
Item 19) (REP 10.19)
Diverter gate assembly (P/O PL
10.15 Item 19) (REP 10.13)
Top exit baffle (P/O PL 10.15 Item
19)
Exit paper path assembly (REP
10.20)
Upper exit idler (P/O PL 10.15 Item
19)
Upper baffle idler (P/O PL 10.15
Item 19)
Upper baffle idler spring (P/O PL
10.15 Item 19)
February 2013
5-15
Parts Lists
PL 10.15
PL 10.20 Transfix Roller Assembly

Item
Part
Description
1
2
059K78250
4
5
848E34280
146K01011
6
7
10
11
127K62320
12
801K37690
13
14
801K37940
041K06800
15
16
17
18
117E35760
19
20
21
22
Transfix roller (REP 10.1)

Bearing retainer (P/O PL 10.20
Item 1)
Transfix bearing carrier (P/O PL
10.20 Item 1)
Transfix encoder cover
Front transfix flexure encoder/Rear
transfix flexure encoder (REP
10.24)
Front compound gear (P/O PL
10.20 Item 16)
Front transfix linkage assembly (P/
O PL 10.20 Item 16) (REP 10.2)
Rear compound gear (P/O PL
10.20 Item 18) (REP 10.3)
Rear transfix linkage assembly (P/
O PL 10.20 Item 18) (REP 10.3)
Front transfix motor (MOT10-019)
(REP 10.4), Rear transfix motor
(MOT10-020) (REP 10.5)
Front drum frame assembly (REP
10.2)
Rear outer frame (REP 10.3)
Transfix stripper assembly (See
NOTE) (REP 10.6)
Not used
Front transfix linkage and gear kit
(REF: PL 31.11 Item 21) (REP
10.2)
Transfix bearing ground cable
Rear transfix linkage and gear kit
(REF: PL 31.11 Item 22) (REP
10.3)
Front outer frame (P/O PL 10.20
Item 12)
Front inner frame (P/O PL 10.20
Item 12)
Latch (P/O PL 10.20 Item 12)
Spring (Not spared)
NOTE: To reset the HFSI count go to dC135.
Parts Lists
PL 10.20
February 2013
5-16
PL 12.00 OCT
Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
826E32840
130E81311
OCT (complete) (P/O PL 31.11 Item

1)
Tray (P/O PL 12.00 Item 1)
Thumbscrew
OCT 90% full sensor (Q12-211)
February 2013
5-17
Parts Lists
PL 12.00
PL 12.10 LCSS Covers

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
802K31380
848K31340
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
017K03750
017K04520
802K48320
050K67380
050K68490
848K31320
12
13
019K13380
Exit cover
Top cover (REP 12.1-110)
Entry guide cover (REF: PL 12.70
Item 5) (REP 12.15-110)
Front door cover assembly (P/O PL
31.11 Item 2) (REP 12.1-110)
Fixed caster
Adjustable caster
Output cover (Not spared)
Lower right hand cover
Bin 0
Bin 1 (ADJ 12.1-110)
Rear cover assembly (REP 12.1110)
Upper right hand cover (Not
spared)
Bin 1 alignment clip
NOTE: Refer to ADJ 12.2-110 to align the LCSS to the

machine.
Parts Lists
PL 12.10
February 2013
5-18
PL 12.15 LCSS Docking Latch

Item
Part
Description
1
2
110K13980
4
5
6
7
8
120K03450
003K20930
003K20940
Sensor cover (P/O PL 12.15 Item 9)

Docking interlock (S12-177) (See
NOTE)
Link bracket assembly (P/O PL
12.15 Item 8)
Stopper (P/O PL 12.15 Item 9)
Docking latch (P/O PL 12.15 Item
8)
Not used
Docking actuator (See NOTE)
Docking latch assembly (See
NOTE) (REP 12.16-110)
Mounting stay assembly
NOTE: Also comes as part of mounting stay assembly PL

12.15 Item 9.
February 2013
5-19
Parts Lists
PL 12.15
PL 12.20 LCSS Hole Punch Unit

Item
Part
Description
130E10360
127K55900
4
5
6
7
180K01330
180K01340
093E03930
130E10380
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
014K10610
Punch head home sensor (Q12194), Punch head present sensor

(Q12-195) (REP 12.7-110)
Punch head motor assembly
(MOT12-243) (REP 12.7-110)
Hole punch unit (see below for
variants) (REP 12.7-110, ADJ 12.3110) (See NOTE)
2 Hole (XE)
3 Hole (USSG/XCL)
Chad bin
Thumbscrew (Not spared)
Punch sensor 1 (Q12-078), Chad
bin level sensor (Q12-193) (P/O PL
12.20 Item 14) (REP 12.7-110)
Sensor bracket (Not spared)
Not used
Bracket (Not spared)
Punch drive gear (Not spared)
Punch cam (Not spared)
Punch spacer (Not spared)
Punch sensor assembly (Not
spared)
Hole punch assembly cover
NOTE: Refer to PL 31.10 Item 5 for other LCSS hole punch

kits.
Parts Lists
PL 12.20
February 2013
5-20
PL 12.25 LCSS Paddle Wheel

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
013E25790
10
127K62580
11
130E10360
Bushing (Not spared)

Paddle wheel (4 off) (REF: PL
31.10 Item 4) (REP 12.18-110)
Paddle wheel shaft assembly(W/
TAG F-016) (REF: PL 31.11 Item
6)(REP 12.12-110)
Nylon bearing
Gear (Not spared)
Flag (Not spared)
Cable clamp (Not spared)
Output cover (REF: PL 12.10 Item
7)
Paddle roll motor assembly
(MOT12-238)
Paddle roll home sensor (Q12-186)
February 2013
5-21
Parts Lists
PL 12.25
PL 12.30 LCSS Bin 1 Control

Components (1 of 2)
Item
Part
Description
1
2
023E24320
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
110E20180
130E10360
127K55890
10
11
130E12330
12
13
14
15
Bin 1 drive belt (REP 12.5-110)

Rear belt clamp (Not spared) (ADJ
12.1-110)
Bin 1 upper limit switch (S12-190)
Bin 1 90% full sensor (Q12-187)
Pulley (Not spared)
Bearing (Not spared)
Bin 1 elevator motor (MOT12-241)
Front belt clamp (Not spared) (ADJ
12.1-110)
Motor bracket (Not spared)
Bin 1 motor encoder sensor (Q12163)
Pulley assembly (Not spared)
Belt tensioner (Not spared)
Spring (Not spared)
Idler (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.30
February 2013
5-22
PL 12.35 LCSS Bin 1 Control

Components (2 of 2)
Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
110K13990
130E10360
4
5
Bin 1 lower limit switch (S12-191)

Not used
Bin 1 Upper level sensor (Q12-188)
(REP 12.11-110)
Actuator (Not spared)
Sensor support assembly (Not
spared)
February 2013
5-23
Parts Lists
PL 12.35
PL 12.40 LCSS Paper Entry Transport

Item
Part
Description
1
2
023E24340
127K55860
3
4
5
6
7
8
013E37460
013E37470
9
10
006K32780
Input drive belt (REP 12.2-110)

Transport motor 1 (MOT12-223)
(REP 12.2-110)
Spring (Not spared)
Pulley (Not spared)
Dry bearing
Feed roll shaft (short) (Not spared)
Bearing
Paper entry guide assembly (REF:
PL 12.70 Item 1)
Feed roll shaft (long) (Not spared)
Thumb wheel
Parts Lists
PL 12.40
February 2013
5-24
PL 12.45 LCSS Tamper Assembly

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
049K12120
130E10360
Tamper assembly (REP 12.6-110)

Tamper unit (P/O PL 12.45 Item 1)
Front tamper home sensor (Q12180),Front tamper away sensor
(Q12-182), Rear tamper home
sensor (Q12-181), Rear tamper
away sensor (Q12-183) (See
NOTE)
Sensor bracket (P/O PL 12.45 Item
1)
Static eliminator (stacker) (REF: PL
12.65 Item 7)
Sensor retainer (P/O PL 12.45 Item
1)
NOTE: The front tamper home sensor (Q12-180) and rear

tamper home sensor (Q12-181) are bonded onto the tamper
unit and are not replaceable. Failure of either of these
sensors will require the replacement of the tamper assembly.
February 2013
5-25
Parts Lists
PL 12.45
PL 12.50 LCSS Ejector Assembly

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
054K43580
130E10360
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
023E24330
019K13390
020K21490
12
13
14
604K67690
Ejector assembly (REP 12.10-110)

Ejector base (P/O PL 12.50 Item 1)
Ejector home sensor (Q12-184),
Ejector out sensor (Q12-185),
Ejector motor encoder sensor
(Q12-096) (REP 12.10-110)
Ejector belt (REP 12.17-110)
Clip (P/O PL 12.50 Item 1)
Support finger set (Qty. 4)
Pulley/drive gear
Slide ejector bearing (P/O PL 12.50
Item 14)
Wide slide ejector bearing (P/O PL
12.50 Item 14)
Cushion washer (P/O PL 12.50
Item 14)
LCSS bearing assembly kit
Parts Lists
PL 12.50
February 2013
5-26
PL 12.55 LCSS Staple Head Unit/

Traverse Assembly
Item
Part
Description
130E10360
4
5
6
7
8
130E10380
029K04690
008R12941
Stapler traverse assembly (P/O PL

31.11 Item 15) (REP 12.8-110)
Head traverse unit (P/O PL 12.55
Item 1)
Stapler home sensor (Q12-135),
Stapler index sensor (Q12-168)
SH1 Paper sensor (Q12-196)
Staple head unit (REP 12.9-110)
Stapler cover (P/O PL 12.55 Item 1)
Staple cartridge
Staple head assembly (P/O PL
12.55 Item 1)
February 2013
5-27
Parts Lists
PL 12.55
PL 12.60 LCSS Bin 0 Entry

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
006K32810
013E25790
023E24330
127K55870
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
115E13440
013E25800
117K54510
130E11440
121K45010
14
023E24340
15
16
17
18
19
20
006K32840
006K33960
Top tray exit shaft

Nylon bearing
Pulley (Not spared)
Intermediate paper drive belt (REP
12.3-110)
Transport motor 2 (MOT12-224)
(REP 12.4-110)
Spring (Not spared)
Static eliminator
Feed roll shaft (short) (Not spared)
Copper bearing
Paper guide
Top tray exit sensor (Q12-107)
Exit diverter solenoid (SOL12-225)
Shaft diverter assembly (P/O PL
31.11 Item 18)
Paper output drive belt (REP 12.4110)
Drive shaft assembly
Drive shaft assembly knob
Spring (Not spared)
Washer (Not spared)
Actuator (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.60
February 2013
5-28
PL 12.65 LCSS Bin 1 Entry

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
032K04610
032K04590
006K32790
130E11440
013E25790
115E11810
023E24340
10
11
013E25800
Left hand paper guide

Lower right hand paper guide
Ejector drive shaft
Compiler exit sensor (Q12-107)
Nylon bearing
Pulley (Not spared)
Static eliminator (stacker)
Paper output drive belt
Upper right hand paper guide (Not
spared)
Copper bearing
Mylar safety cover (P/O PL 12.65
Item 1)
February 2013
5-29
Parts Lists
PL 12.65
PL 12.70 LCSS Entry Guide Cover/

Jam Clearance Guide
Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
032K09670
003K17531
130E10380
848K31330
Jam clearance guide assembly

Jam clearance handle
Entry sensor (Q12-077)
Entry guide cover (REP 12.15-110)
Jam clearance guide (P/O PL 12.70
Item 1)
Latch (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.70
February 2013
5-30
PL 12.75 LCSS Electrical

Item
Part
Description
960K58411
2
3
4
5
105K35842
960K34490
962K56951
110K13980
110K13970
LCSS PWB (CAUTION) (REP

12.14-110)
Power supply module
Pause to unload PWB
Cord bracket assembly
Front door interlock switch (S12303)
Top cover interlock switch (S12197)
LCSS communications harness
(Not spared)
LCSS power cord (Not spared)
CAUTION
Do not install a new LCSS PWB until the cause of the

damage to the old LCSS PWB has been determined. Go to
the 12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP.
February 2013
5-31
Parts Lists
PL 12.75
PL 12.100 HVF Covers and Docking

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
848E40510
848K12501
848E17790
848K12510
848E40521
848K12530
848E17800
848E17810
848E40500
017K04830
12
13
14
017K04630
15
16
17
017K04760
110K13980
120K03450
18
049K13570

Front cover (REP 12.1-171)
Front door (REP 12.1-171)
Door support (REP 12.1-171)
Rear cover (REP 12.1-171)
Vent cover (REP 12.1-171)
Foot cover (REP 12.1-171)
Inserter cover (REP 12.1-171)
Top tray (REP 12.3-171)
Seal (Not spared)
Fixed caster assembly (REP 12.96171)
Fixed caster bracket (P/O PL
12.100 Item 11)
Adjustable caster (REP 12.96-171)
Adjustable caster washer (P/O PL
12.100 Item 13)
Mounting bracket assembly
Docking interlock switch (S12-177)
Docking actuator (P/O PL 12.100
Item 15)
Bookletmaker interlock bracket
Parts Lists
PL 12.100
February 2013
5-32
PL 12.105 HVF Stacker

Item
Part
Description
848E40530
2
3
848E17840
130E12830
023E31220
110K20890
8
9
10
127K56591
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
050E28941
848E17830
110K20880
20
21
22
23
019K13380
110K21060
Upper right side cover (REP 12.5171)

Lower right side cover
Bin 1 90% full sensor (Q12-187)/
Bin 1 motor encoder sensor (Q12163)
Rear main belt clamp (1 of 2) (Not
spared)
Rear main belt clamp (2 of 2) (Not
spared)
Bin 1 main drive belt (REP 12.38171)
Bin 1 upper limit switch (REP
12.75-171) (S12-190)/Bin 1 lower
limit switch (REP 12.75-171) (S12191)
Main belt pulley (Not spared)
Main belt tensioner (Not spared)
Bin 1 elevator motor assembly
(MOT12-241) (REP 12.12-171)
Bin 1 rear lift bar bracket (Not
spared)
Bin 1 front lift bar bracket (Not
spared)
Bin 1 lift bar (Not spared)
Front main belt clamp (2 of 2) (Not
spared)
Front main belt clamp (1 of 2) (Not
spared)
Bin 1 (REP 12.4-171)
Middle right side cover
Bin 1 lift bar brace (Not spared)
Stacker full sensor and lower limit
switch assembly (REP 12.75-171)
Bin 1 retaining clip (REP 12.4-171)
Sensor/switch bracket (Not spared)
Stacker channel bracket
February 2013
5-33
Parts Lists
PL 12.105
PL 12.110 HVF Ejector, Pressing and

Support (1 of 2)
Item
1
2
3
Part
059K69943
6
7
049K23160
003K20652
8
9
003K20662
10
11
12
019K13380
13
14
15
029K04671
130E12830
16
130K75470
17
18
19
130K75900
127K56550
20
130K75480
21
22
033K04850
23
24
032E35301
25
26
27
868E36871
28
29
032K09681
30
31
032E35341
32
33
34
35
003K21100
962K82410
36
37
Parts Lists
PL 12.110
Description
Front tamper bracket (Not spared)
Ejector assembly (REP 12.6-171)
Rear tamper support bracket (P/O
PL 12.110 Item 29)
Front pressing plate finger (P/O PL
12.110 Item 33) (REP 12.7-171)
Rear pressing plate finger (P/O PL
12.110 Item 33) (REP 12.7-171)
Pressing plate bracket
Front support finger (REP 12.8171)
Rear support finger (REP 12.8-171)
Pressing and support motor
(MOT12-323) (Not spared)
Offset rod (Not spared)
Offset rod KL clip
Stapler unit (P/O PL 12.110 Item
14) (REP 12.2-171)
Front tamper (Not spared) (REP
12.11-171)
Stapler assembly (REP 12.2-171)
Pressing and support encoder
sensor (Q12-093)/Stapler unit
home sensor (Q12-135)/Stapler
unit mid home sensor (Q12-176)/
Stapler unit index sensor (Q12168)/Rear tamper away sensor
(Q12-183)/Rear tamper home
sensor (Q12-181)
Bin 1 upper level sensor (receiver)
(Q12-188) (REP 12.76-171)
Paper pressing sensor (Q12-322)
Motor encoder assembly
Rear tamper motor (MOT12-227)
(P/O PL 12.110 Item 29) (REP
12.15-171)
(transmitter) (Q12-188) (REP
12.76-171)
Ejector paper present sensor (Q12202) (P/O PL 12.110 Item 2)
Ejector paddle assembly (W/TAG
V-004) (REP 12.100-171)
Rear tamper arm
Rear tamper pulley (P/O PL 12.110
Item 29)
Pressing and support sensor A
(Q12-172), B (Q12-171), C (Q12173) (P/O PL 12.110 Item 29)
Front tamper arm
Stapler unit 1 motor (MOT12-249)
(P/O PL 12.110 Item 14)
Rear tamper (P/O PL 12.110 Item
29)
Rear tamper assembly (REP 12.15171)
Set of front and rear tamper arms
Staple cartridge (REF: PL 26.10
Item 15)
Support bracket (Not spared)
Pressing plate kit
Stapler harness and P-clip
Ejector assembly safety cover (P/O
PL 31.11 Item 10)
Rear tamper drive belt (P/O PL
12.110 Item 29)
Rear tamper bracket (P/O PL
12.110 Item 29)
February 2013
5-34
PL 12.115 HVF Ejector, Pressing and

Support (2 of 2)
Item
Part
Description
2
3
033K04642
4
5
6
7
8
050K68501
9
10
11
12
13
674K03550
14
15
16
130E12830
17
18
19
20
21
006K32980
22
23
674K03541
013E37150
24
110K20900
25
033K04651
26
27
28
059K69931
013E25800
110K13980
29
30
006K33390
Paper pusher (P/O PL 12.115 Item

8)
Paddle unit (REP 12.49-171)
Pusher mylar (P/O PL 12.115 Item
8)
Timing belt pulley (Not spared)
Timing belt tensioner (Not spared)
Front stacker pulley bracket (Not
spared)
Thrust washer (Not spared)
Paper pusher assembly (REP
12.53-171)
Not used
Compile exit upper guide (Not
spared)
Stacker main drive gear shaft (Not
spared) (REP 12.37-171)
Stacker main drive gear (Not
spared) (REP 12.37-171)
Paper pusher motor assembly
(MOT12-265) (REP 12.51-171)
Pinion gear (Not spared)
Pinion gear shaft (Not spared)
Paper pusher upper sensor (Q12092)/Paper pusher lower sensor
(Q12-094) (REP 12.54-171)
Stapler gate safety switch (S12319) (P/O PL 12.115 Item 22)
Sensor screw (P/O PL 12.115 Item
22)
Sensor assembly bracket (P/O PL
12.115 Item 22)
Stacker idler roll (REP 12.10-171)
Pusher dampers (P/O PL 12.115
Item 8)
Sensor assembly (REP 12.54-171)
Stacker driving shaft bearing (REP
12.37-171)
Top cover interlock switch (S12197)
Paddles (A) outer 2 off, (B) inner 3
off (REP 12.101-171)
Top jam clearance guide assembly
Copper bearing
Front door interlock switch (S12303)
Lower exit guide (Not spared)
Exit idler roller (x4)
February 2013
5-35
Parts Lists
PL 12.115
PL 12.120 HVF Main Drives

Item
Part
Description
127K56570
127K56560
121K45290
5
6
127K56610
10
11
Buffer motor (MOT12-262) (REP

12.65-171)/Transport motor 2
(MOT12-224) (REP 12.66-171)
Transport motor 1 (MOT12223)(REP 12.63-171)/Bypass feed
motor (MOT12-263)(REP 12.64171)
Solenoid bracket (P/O PL 12.120
Item 4)
BM diverter solenoid (SOL12-258)/
Exit diverter solenoid(SOL12-225)/
Set clamp solenoid (SOL12-056)
Solenoid connector (Not spared)
Paddle unit motor assembly
(MOT12-239) (REP 12.48-171)
Transport motor 1 drive belt (Not
spared)
Bypass feed motor drive belt (Not
spared)
Buffer feed motor drive belt (Not
spared)
Transport motor 2 drive belt (A)
(Not spared)
Transport motor 2 drive belt (B)
(Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.120
February 2013
5-36
PL 12.125 HVF Feed Assembly and

Punch (1 of 3)
Item
Part
Description
2
3
604K83750
4
5
6
059K59551
127K62570
7
8
038E41350
9
10
038E41341
059K69950
11
059K69981
12
059K69961
13
059K69972
14
15
16
17
121K45300
130E12810
18
19
130E12840
604K55210
498K17930
498K17940
HVF 2 hole punch assembly (P/O

PL 31.10 Item 5)
HVF 3 hole punch assembly (P/O
PL 31.10 Item 5)
HVF chad bin
Hole punch thumb screw (P/O PL
12.125 Item 1)
Hole punch blanking assembly
Front tamper arm (Not spared)
Front tamper motor assembly
(MOT12-226) (REP 12.11-171)
Diverter exit gate (REP 12.35-171)
Upper exit guide (5c) (Not spared)
(REP 12.14-171)
BM diverter gate (REP 12.39-171)
Buffer pocket jam clearance guide
(REP 12.33-171)
Inserter jam clearance guide
assembly (8a) (REP 12.34-171)
Input jam clearance guide (5a)
(REP 12.32-171)
Buffer guide assembly (5b) (REP
12.31-171)
Nip split motor cover (P/O PL
12.125 Item 13)
Nip split motor (MOT12-264) (P/O
PL 12.125 Item 13)
Magnet
Chad bin level sensor (Q12-193)/
Punch sensor 1 (Q12-078)/Punch
sensor 2(Q12-075)/Punch sensor
3(Q12-076)
Chad bin present sensor (Q12-118)
2 hole punch module (XE)
4 hole punch module (XE)
4 hole punch module (Swedish)
February 2013
5-37
Parts Lists
PL 12.125

Punch (2 of 3)
Item
Part
Description
006K32840
006K32850
3
4
5
6
7
019K13660
006K32820
006K32810
013E25800
019K14420
Feed roll assembly (Short shaft

type)
Buffer upper roll (1A) (REP 12.45171)
Inserter guide roll (1B) (REP 12.41171)
Buffer pocket roll (1C) (REP 12.42171)
Input roll (1D) (REP 12.40-171)
Top exit feed roll (1E) (REP 12.47171)
Feed roll assembly
Stacker exit feed roll (2A) (REP
12.46-171)
Buffer lower roll (2B) (REP 12.44171)
Booklet entrance roll (2C) (REP
12.43-171)
Buffer clamp assembly
Stacker exit roll
Top exit roll
Copper bearing
Buffer clamp shaft (P/O PL 12.130
Item 3)
Buffer clamp
Parts Lists
PL 12.130
February 2013
5-38

Punch (3 of 3)
Item
Part
Description
130E12830
130E12810
130E12840
Tamper front home sensor (Q12180)/Tamper front away sensor

(Q12-182)/Nip split sensor (Q12091)/Nip home sensor (Q12-088)
Entry sensor (Q12-077)/Compiler
exit sensor (Q12-106)/Buffer
position sensor (Q12-086)/Buffer
path sensor (Q12-321)/Inserter
standby sensor(Q12-320)
Top tray exit sensor (Q12-107)/HVF
Booklet exit sensor (Q12-087)
February 2013
5-39
Parts Lists
PL 12.135
PL 12.140 HVF Power and Control

Item
Part
Description
105K35831
2
3
960K52570
960K41780
4
5
105K36840
6
7
952K00410
HVF power supply unit (REP 12.55171)

HVF PWB (REP 12.57-171)
Pause to unload (PTU) PWB (REP
12.97-171)
Power cord
In-line fuse (10A slo-blow) (Not
spared)
Harness (Not spared)
Power communications cable
Parts Lists
PL 12.140
February 2013
5-40
PL 12.145 HVF BM Module (Complete)

Item
1
2
Part
Description
084K37050
BM Module (REP 12.61-171)

Slide assembly (Not spared) (REP
12.62-171)
February 2013
5-41
Parts Lists
PL 12.145
PL 12.150 HVF BM Entry and Front

Cover
Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
003E69092
848E40470
803E14110
803E13850
013E12610
10
11
022E30620
12
130K74072
13
14
020E39990
15
16
006K28660
130K74110
17
18
19
20
21
22
125E00430
809E46411
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
125K03831
059K52940
Drawer handle
Crease roll leaf spring (Not spared)
BM Front cover
Crease blade knob (6d)
Crease roll handle (6c)
Nylon bearing
Paper guide (6e) (P/O PL 12.150
Item 22) (REP 12.60-171)
Jam clearance handle (Not spared)
(REP 12.60-171)
Nip spring (P/O PL 12.150 Item 22)
(REP 12.60-171)
Nip roll (REP 12.60-171)
Nip shaft (P/O PL 12.150 Item 22)
(REP 12.60-171)
Flapper home sensor (Q12-207)
(REP 12.16-171)
BM Entry roll pulley (REP 12.22171)
BM Entry roll (REP 12.22-171)
BM Entry sensor (Q12-089) (REP
12.23-171)
Static eliminator
Rear latch (Not spared)
Shaft (Not spared)
Latch spring
Front latch (Not spared)
Entrance baffle assembly (Not
spared) (REP 12.60-171)
BM Flapper (P/O PL 12.150 Item
30) (REP 12.16-171)
BM flapper bracket (P/O PL 12.150
Item 30)
BM Compiler shaft (Not spared)
Static eliminator
Top baffle (Not spared)
Pulley (Not spared)
BM flapper drive belt (Not spared)
BM Flapper assembly (REP 12.16171)
Parts Lists
PL 12.150
February 2013
5-42
PL 12.155 HVF BM Tamper Assembly

Item
Part
Description
107E22600
2
3
127K47660
007K13190
10
007K13180
11
12
807E15450
13
14
15
802E59410
16
17
18
125K03593
BM Tamper 1 home sensor (Q12205)

LH Frame plate (Not spared)
BM Tamper 1 motor (MOT12-256)
(REP 12.30-171)
BM Tamper spring (P/O PL 12.155
Item 10)
BM Rear tamper arm (P/O PL
12.155 Item 9) (REP 12.30-171)
BM Front tamper arm (P/O PL
12.155 Item 10) (REP 12.30-171)
BM Rear tamper rack (P/O PL
12.155 Item 9) (REP 12.30-171)
BM Front tamper rack (P/O PL
12.155 Item 10) (REP 12.30-171)
BM Rear tamper assembly (REP
12.30-171)
BM Front tamper assembly (REP
12.30-171)
BM Tamper gear (REP 12.30-171)
BM Tamper bracket (Not spared)
(REP 12.30-171)
BM Tamper rack guide (Not spared)
(REP 12.30-171)
BM Connector cover
BM Tamper guide plate (Not
spared) (REP 12.30-171)
BM Rear tamper finger (Not
spared) (REP 12.30-171)
BM Front tamper finger (Not
spared) (REP 12.30-171)
BM Static eliminator
February 2013
5-43
Parts Lists
PL 12.155
PL 12.160 HVF BM Back Stop Motor

Item
Part
Description
2
3
5
6
023E23300
809E78370
9
10
11
848E40480
12
13
14
15
809E25100
16
17
18
19
012E20870
107E22600
127K54710
Ground wire (P/O PL 12.160 Item

19)
Motor damper (P/O PL 12.160 Item
19) (REP 12.20-171)
BM back stop motor (MOT12-255)
(P/O PL 12.160 Item 19) (REP
12.20-171)
Pulley (Not spared)
BM back stop bearing (Not spared)
(REP 12.26-171)
BM back stop drive belt (REP
12.20-171)
BM back stop tensioner spring
(REP 12.20-171)
Allen key (3mm) (Not spared)
Sensor cover
BM back stop bearing (Not spared)
(REP 12.26-171)
BM back stop idler bracket (Not
spared) (REP 12.26-171)
BM back stop idler shaft (Not
spared)
BM back stop tensioner link (Not
spared)
BM back stop link spring (REP
12.26-171)
BM back stop link (REP 12.26-171)
LH frame plate (Not spared)
BM guide home sensor (Q12-204)
BM back stop motor assembly
(REP 12.20-171)
Parts Lists
PL 12.160
February 2013
5-44
PL 12.165 HVF BM Back Stop

assembly
Item
Part
Description
1
2
019E74451
4
5
6
031E11300
8
9
809E71970
10
11
12
13
14
006K30790
15
16
17
023E23140
18
019K14160
Anti-play shoe
BM back stop lock washer (P/O PL
12.165 Item 18)
Cable fastener (P/O PL 12.165 Item
18)
Anti-rattle arm
Screw (P/O PL 12.165 Item 18)
Flanged hex nut (P/O PL 12.165
Item 18)
Back stop adjust spring (P/O PL
12.165 Item 18)
Antiplay spring
Solenoid spring (P/O PL 12.165
Item 18)
Shaft support (Not spared)
Belt clamp (P/O PL 12.165 Item 18)
BM back stop solenoid nut (P/O PL
12.165 Item 18)
Pivoting clamp (P/O PL 12.165 Item
18)
BM back stop drive shaft (REP
12.26-171)
BM back stop belt (REP 12.26-171)
BM back stop shaft (Not spared)
BM stack hold solenoid (SOL12259) (P/O PL 12.165 Item 18)
BM back stop assembly (REP
12.21-171)
February 2013
5-45
Parts Lists
PL 12.165
PL 12.170 HVF BM Crease Blade

Motor
Item
Part
Description
107E22600
127K54690
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
014E47460
806E36200
007E69830
413W30654
008E08220
012E20860
802E59171
809E42861
14
032E19330
15
16
17
18
815E56520
BM Crease blade motor encoder

sensor (Q12-215), BM Crease
blade home sensor (Q12-214)
(REP 12.18-171)
3)
BM Crease blade motor assembly
(MOT12-252) (REP 12.18-171)
Motor encoder (REP 12.18-171)
Drive shaft
Drive gear (40T)
Bearing (REP 12.18-171)
Crank (REP 12.18-171)
Connecting rod (REP 12.36-171)
Motor cover
Crease nip spring (REP 12.36-171)
Crease blade assembly (Not
spared) (REP 12.36-171, ADJ 12.4171)
Crease blade support guide (REP
12.36-171)
Crease blade home sensor bracket
(Not spared)
Lower mounting plate (P/O PL
12.170 Item 13)
Crease blade folder plate
Upper mounting plate (P/O PL
12.170 Item 13)
Parts Lists
PL 12.170
February 2013
5-46
PL 12.175 HVF BM Crease Rolls Motor

and PWB
Item
Part
Description
127K43751
3
4
5
6
007E69000
7
8
127K54680
127K53620
107E22600
10
11
960K52781
12
127K62560
13
14
15
16
014E47460
023E25430
127K55520
17
18
19
BM compiler motor (MOT12-251)/

BM flapper motor (MOT12-271)
(REP 12.25-171)
Damper bracket (P/O PL 12.175
Item 16) (REP 12.25-171)
Ground wire (P/O PL 12.175 Item
16)
Gear (50T)/pulley (24T)
Tri-folder logic cheat (PJ563) (Not
spared)
BM Crease roll motor assembly
BM crease roll gate motor (MOT12273) (REP 12.24-171)
BM Crease roll gate home sensor
(Q12-222), BM Crease roll motor
encoder sensor (Q12-216)
BM PWB (REP 12.17-171)
12)
BM Crease roll motor (MOT12-253)
(REP 12.19-171)
BM Crease roll motor encoder
Support bracket (Not spared)
Compiler motor belt
BM Compiler motor assembly (REP
12.25-171)
BM flapper motor pulley (Not
spared)
BM flapper motor drive belt (Not
spared)
Tri-folder interlock cheat (PJ553)
(Not spared)
February 2013
5-47
Parts Lists
PL 12.175
PL 12.180 HVF BM Crease Rolls and

Support Leg
Item
Part
Description
006K32721
006K32731
006K32740
006K32750
5
6
7
8
807E34231
807E34240
807E34280
007E69081
9
10
11
12
13
807E34261
007E69070
14
007E68951
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
020E54110
020E54120
050E23160
809E95060
809E95071
016E20010
413W88650
807E34251
807E34270
016E20000
Crease roll assembly 1 (REP

12.52-171)
12.52-171)
12.52-171)
12.52-171)
Gear crease roll 4
Lower compound gear
Upper compound gear
Crease roll gate rack gear (REP
12.59-171)
Gear plate (Not spared)
Gear (16T)
Drive shaft (Not spared)
Crease roll gate rack drive gear
(REP 12.59-171)
Crease roll gate rack (REP 12.59171)
Crease roll gate front guide
Crease roll gate rear guide
Crease roll drive shaft (Not spared)
Crease roll gate shaft (Not spared)
Crease roll gate (REP 12.59-171)
Front frame assembly (Not spared)
Spring arm nip 1
Spring arm nip 2
Rear frame assembly (Not spared)
Nip release shaft (Not spared)
Bush roll release
Bearing flanged
Gear (15T)
Gear (30T)
Bush follower
Parts Lists
PL 12.180
February 2013
5-48
PL 12.185 HVF BM Stapler

Assemblies
Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
020E38513
016E17732
809E44010
130K74090
6
7
008E06850
029K03232
10
11
12
809E48830
13
14
15
802E42770
16
17
125K03831
130E11640
18
107E22600
19
20
21
22
055E51870
Front follower
Actuator
Rear follower (Not spared)
Spring
BM Paper present sensor (Q12170)
Latch slide
BM Staple head assembly (REP
12.27-171, ADJ 12.3-171)
Item 17)
Staple bracket handle (Not spared)
(REP 12.28-171)
Stapler bracket assembly (Not
spared) (REP 12.28-171)
Torsion spring (REP 12.28-171)
Bearing (Not spared) (REP 12.28171)
Spring (Not spared) (REP 12.28171)
Staple head cover
BM right hand cover (Not spared)
(REP 12.56-171)
Static eliminator
BM exit sensor (Q12-213) (REP
12.50-171)
BM Stapler head carrier closed
sensor (Q12-217) (REP 12.28-171)
Lower shaft (Not spared) (REP
12.28-171)
Upper shaft (Not spared) (REP
12.28-171)
Mylar guide
Exit plate (Not spared)
February 2013
5-49
Parts Lists
PL 12.185
PL 12.190 HVF BM Bin 2

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
023E18612
050E21971
127K53630
019E61171
7
8
9
826E32840
050K67740
10
11
809E47341
007E69000
Conveyor belt (REP 12.29-171)

HVF BM Bin 2 extension
HVF BM Bin 2 upper cover (P/O PL
12.190 Item 8)
BM Conveyor drive motor (MOT12274)
HVF BM Bin 2 90% full sensor
(Q12-206)
HVF BM Bin 2 lower cover (P/O PL
12.190 Item 8)
Thumbscrew
HVF BM Bin 2 assembly
HVF BM Bin 2 connector (Not
spared)
HVF Bin 2 actuator spring
Gear (50T)/pulley (24T)
Parts Lists
PL 12.190
February 2013
5-50
PL 12.200 Tri-Folder Covers

Item
Part
Description
1
2
802K94010
3
4
848K11740
6
7
802E93931
848E17430
8
9
10
107E26490
11
12
13
802E99581
017K04190
Door pin (Not spared)

Front cover assembly (REP 12.67171)
Rear cover (REP 12.67-171)
Top cover door assembly (P/O PL
12.200 Item 8) (REP 12.73-171)
Top cover door assembly spring (P/
O PL 12.200 Item 8)
Top cover
Right hand side cover (REP 12.67171)
Tri-Folder (complete) (Not spared)
Top cover door assembly shaft (P/O
PL 12.200 Item 8)
Tri fold top cover interlock sensor
(Q12-210) (REP 12.77-171)
Top cover locking stud (Not spared)
Front cover
Caster
NOTE: For detail of bin 2, refer to PL 12.190.
February 2013
5-51
Parts Lists
PL 12.200
PL 12.205 Tri-Folder Drives Module

Item
Part
Description
2
3
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
023E30780
007K14460
005K12690
14
675K53640
15
16
17
18
19
20
960K24000
962K49592
962K49571
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
023E23370
020E39921
020E39930
Drive coupling assembly bracket

(P/O PL 12.205 Item 13)
Feed/exit roll drive gear (40T) (P/O
PL 12.205 Item 13)
Gear (40T) (Black) (P/O PL 12.205
Item 13)
Driven pulley (P/O PL 12.205 Item
13)
Idler assembly bracket (P/O PL
12.205 Item 13)
Drive clutch (CL12-269) (P/O PL
12.205 Item 13)
Crease roll belt (Not spared)
Coupler drive belt (REP 12.68-171)
Install kit drive assembly
Drive coupling assembly (REP
12.69-171)
Tri-Folder install kit (REP 12.68171)
Thumb screw (P/O PL 12.205 Item
14)
Tri-folder PWB (REP 12.80-171)
Drive coupler (Not spared)
Align gauge coupler (Not spared)
Bin 2 tray harness (REP 12.81-171)
Bookletmaker PWB to Tri-folder
PWB harness (PJ602)
Drive belt tensioner pulley (Not
spared)
Feed roller bearing (Not spared)
Feed roll pulley (Not spared) (REP
12.70-171)
Feed roll belt (Not spared) (REP
12.70-171)
Feed roll drive belt
Pulley gear (19T/20T) (BM)
Pulley (38T)
Parts Lists
PL 12.205
February 2013
5-52
PL 12.210 Tri-Folder Top Door Cover

Assembly
Item
Part
Description
8
9
059K58690
10
848K11680
11
Top access cover (P/O PL 12.210

Item 10)
Top cover door assembly spring (P/
O PL 12.210 Item 10)
Top cover door assembly shaft (P/O
PL 12.210 Item 10)
Latch hook (P/O PL 12.210 Item
10)
Top door cover assembly base (P/O
PL 12.210 Item 10)
Latch handle (P/O PL 12.210 Item
10)
Latch spring (P/O PL 12.210 Item
10)
Idler assembly (REP 12.73-171)
Idler spring (P/O PL 12.210 Item
10)
Top cover door assembly (REP
12.73-171)
Idler assembly (P/O PL 12.210 Item
10)
February 2013
5-53
Parts Lists
PL 12.210
PL 12.215 Tri-Folder Main Drives

Assembly
Item
Part
Description
110E19840
110E19831
130E11861
7
8
020E38480
121K44660
011E13832
10
11
809E44040
130K74920
12
130K74051
13
14
15
16
121K44650
17
18
19
050E23180
050E28950
809E95080
Roller assembly (Not spared) (REP

12.74-171)
Front door interlock switch (S12209) (REP 12.77-171)
Top cover interlock switch (S 12210) (REP 12.77-171)
Top access cover docking catch
(Not spared)
Pressing and stacking assembly
(Not spared)
Assist gate sensor (Q12-165) (REP
12.78-171)
Centerfold pulley (REP 12.74-171)
Assist gate solenoid (SOL12-268)
(REP 12.71-171)
Centerfold entry gate lever (REP
12.74-171)
Crease roll spring (REP 12.72-171)
Tri folder entry sensor (Q12-164)
(REP 12.78-171)
Tri folder exit sensor (Q12-166)
(REP 12.79-171)
Static eliminator (Not spared)
Feed roller bearing (Not spared)
Feed roller (Not spared) (REP
12.70-171)
Tri folder diverter solenoid (SOL12267) (REP 12.74-171)
Diverter gate
Diverter gate spring clip
Nip spring
Parts Lists
PL 12.215
February 2013
5-54
PL 12.300 Inserter Covers

Item
Part
Description
4
5
6
848K31360
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
050K68510
848K31350
22
23
24
848K31370
Front cover (Not spared) (REP

12.83-171)
Rear cover (Not spared) (REP
12.83-171)
Sensor tray (P/O PL 12.300 Item
20) (REP 12.89-171)
Bottom tray spring (Not spared)
Bottom tray shaft (Not spared)
Bottom tray (P/O PL 12.300 Item
19) (REP 12.90-171)
Lower jam cover (P/O PL 12.300
Item 21) (REP 12.92-171)
Top cover door (REF: PL 12.310
Item 17)
Pivot pin (Not spared)
Inserter acceleration sensor (Q12316) (P/O PL 12.300 Item 21) (REP
12.92-171)
Inserter unit empty sensor (Q12082) (Not spared) (REP 12.90-171)
Inserter paper length 1 sensor
(Q12-079)/Inserter paper length 2
sensor (Q12-080),Inserter paper
length sensor 3 (Q12-090) (Not
spared) (REP 12.89-171)
Paper width sensor 1 (Q12081),Paper width sensor 2 (Q12169) (Not spared) (P/O PL 12.300
Item 19) (REP 12.90-171)
Bottom tray bracket (P/O PL 12.300
Item 19)
Bottom tray rack (P/O PL 12.300
Item 19)
Inserter bottom plate sensor (Q12085) (P/O PL 12.300 Item 19) (REP
12.94-171)
Top inside cover (Not spared)
Inserter jam cover interlock switch
(S12-179) (Not spared) (REP
12.88-171)
Bottom tray assembly
Sensor tray assembly
Lower jam cover assembly (Not
spared)
Main tray assembly
Lower jam inner cover (P/O PL
12.300 Item 21)
February 2013
5-55
Parts Lists
PL 12.300
PL 12.305 Inserter Main Drives (1 of 3)

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Idler (Not spared)

Idler pin (Not spared)
Gear (Not spared)
Pulley (Not spared)
Belt (Not spared)
Bracket (Not spared)
Jam drive belt (Not spared)
Inserter top cover interlock switch
(S12-178) (Not spared) (REP
12.87-171)
Loading lever (Not spared)
Loading gear (Not spared)
Torsion spring (Not spared)
Loading shaft (Not spared)
Front loading bracket (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.305
February 2013
5-56

Item
Part
Description
050K68520
2
3
005K12890
6
7
8
9
10
960K46170
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
050K68090
19
006K32860
20
21
22
23
24
25
848K31360
848K37330
Pickup assembly (REP 12.95-171)

(See NOTE)
Pickup gear (Not spared)
Inserter clutch (CL12-260) (REP
12.86-171)
Reverse roller drive idler (Not
spared)
Pickup assembly bracket (Not
spared)
Reverse roller drive belt (Not
spared)
Reverse roller drive (Not spared)
Inserter PWB (REP 12.85-171)
Inserter pickup sensor (Q12-315)
(REP 12.91-171)
Inserter LE sensor (Q12-083)/
Inserter TE sensor (Q12-084) (REP
12.93-171)
Idle roller (Not spared) (REP 12.98171)
Idler roller bracket (Not spared)
Idler roller spring (Not spared)
Top inside cover (Not spared)
Idler roller cover
Reverse feed roller (REP 12.95171)
Idle roller assembly (REP 12.98171)
Top cover door assembly
Retard cover
Drive coupling (Not spared)
Reverse feed roll core (Not spared)
Pin (Not spared)
Shaft (Not spared)
NOTE: To reset the HFSI count, go to dC135.
February 2013
5-57
Parts Lists
PL 12.310

Item
Part
Description
127K61990
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Inserter motor (MOT12-261) (REP

12.84-171)
Idler (Not spared)
Driver gear (Not spared)
Idler (Not spared)
Tray down gear (Not spared)
Gear cover bracket (Not spared)
Idler (Not spared)
Bottom shaft drive (Not spared)
Feed roller drive gear (Not spared)
Tray down clutch (Not spared)
Tray down clutch assembly (Not
spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.315
February 2013
5-58
PL 20.05 Fax Module

Item
Part
Description
2
3
117K45260
117K45390
117K45270
117K45280
117K45290
117K45310
117K45320
117K45330
117K45340
117K45350
117K45360
117K45370
117K45380
Fax module
1 line (P/O PL 20.10 Item 1)
2 line (P/O PL 20.10 Item 2)
Fax connector PWB (Not spared)
Telephone cable (not shown on
illustration, see below for variants)
United Kingdom
USSG/XCL
Germany
Italy
Netherlands
Belgium
Switzerland
Denmark
Austria
Sweden
France
Norway
Portugal/Spain
Finland
Thumbscrew
February 2013
5-59
Parts Lists
PL 20.05
PL 20.10 Line 1 & 2 Fax Kits

Item
Part
Description
497K06230
497K11280
497K06250
497K06060
497K06090
497K06080
497K06070
497K06240
497K11290
497K06260
497K06100
497K06130
497K06120
497K06110
497K08460
Line 1 Fax Kits (see below for

variants)
USSG/XCL
USSG/XCL (CIF)
XE (CIF)
United Kingdom/Spain/Portugal/
Greece/Ireland
Austria/Germany/Switzerland/Italy
Sweden /Norway/Finland/Denmark
Netherlands/Belgium/France
Line 2 Fax Kits (see below for
variants)
USSG/XCL
USSG/XCL (CIF)
XE (CIF)
United Kingdom/Spain/Portugal/
Greece/Ireland
Austria/Germany/Switzerland/Italy
Sweden /Norway/Finland/Denmark
Netherlands/Belgium/France
Australia, New Zealand, Hong
Kong, Singapore
Parts Lists
PL 20.10
February 2013
5-60
PL 25.10 Convenience Stapler

Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
Convenience stapler kit (REF: PL

31.11 Item 3)
Power cord (P/O PL 25.10 Item 1)
PSU (P/O PL 25.10 Item 1)
Item 16)
Convenience stapler (P/O PL 25.10
Item 1) (XE)
NOTE: The convenience stapler has no serviceable parts.
February 2013
5-61
Parts Lists
PL 25.10
PL 26.10 Consumables and Tools (1

of 2)
Item
1
Part
008R90176
4
5
6
7
099P03227
099P03228
099P03229
099P03230
019P03025
108R00834
108R00830
108R00838
108R00833
108R00829
10
11
12
13
14
108R00837
108R00835
108R00831
108R00839
108R00836
108R00832
108R00840
15
008R12912
008R12898
008R12919
008R12920
16
17
008R12964
108R00493
050K21270
008R12897
008R12941
Description
Cleaning fluid (IPA &
water)(WARNING)
Ethernet crossover cable (PWS to
SBC PWB) (Not spared)
Finisher bypass connector (Not
spared)
Plastislip grease (Not spared)
Disposable gloves (general
protection- see below for varaints)
(Qty. 100) (WARNING)
Small
Medium
Large
Extra large
Microfibre cleaning cloth
Magenta solid ink stick (Metered)
Magenta solid ink stick (Sold)
Magenta solid ink stick (Sold DMO)
Cyan solid ink stick (Metered)
Cyan solid ink stick (Sold USSG/
XCL/XE)
Cyan solid ink stick (Sold DMO)
Yellow solid ink stick (Metered)
Yellow solid ink stick (Sold)
Yellow solid ink stick (Sold DMO)
Black solid ink stick (Metered)
Black solid ink stick (Sold)
Black solid ink stick (Sold DMO)
Antistatic fluid (Not spared)
Molub grease 777 (Not spared)
Cable tie (P/O PL 31.10 Item 12)
Foreign interface test tool (USSG/
XC)
Staple cartridge (HVF - 100 sheet)
(1 x 5000)
Staple cartridge (HVF- 100 sheet)
(3 x 5000)
Staple cartridge (HVF - 50 sheet) (1
x 5000)
Staple cartridge (HVF - 50 sheet) (3
x 5000)
Staple cartridge (LCSS) (1 x 5000)
Staple cartridge (LCSS) (3 x 5000)
Staples (1 x 2000)
Staples (8 x 2000)
Staples (3 x 5000)
WARNING
Wear protective gloves when using solvents and
cleaning agents, PL 26.10 Item 5.
Parts Lists
PL 26.10
February 2013
5-62
PL 26.11 Consumables and Tools (2 of

2)
Item
Part
Description
1
2
600T91961
3
4
070E01000
070E00890
5
6
600T91960
7
8
9
600T00563
043P00067
10
11
12
600T91959
13
14
15
16
17
18
082E14750
114E24550
146E02700
Stripper blade retaining tool

Drum alignment tool (P/O PL 31.11
Item 11)
High pressure bearing grease
Grease (NYE Rheolube 368F- 10oz
tube)
Drum removal wrench (T30)
USB Flash drive (2GB memory
stick) (Not spared)
Safety glasses
Xerox Clean - ups (IPA & water)
Cleaning cloth (P/O PL 31.11 Item
32)
Oil spillage syringe (P/O PL 31.11
Item 32)
Drum protective cover
Oil spillage plastic bottle (1.5L) (P/
O PL 31.11 Item 32)
Absorbent fabric mat (P/O PL 31.11
Item 32)
Film remover (Not spared)
Service test pattern
Line test tool (Not spared)
Scanner transport lock
USB reader
WARNING
Wear protective gloves when using solvents and
cleaning agents, PL 26.10 Item 5.
February 2013
5-63
Parts Lists
PL 26.11
PL 28.10 Covers
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part
Description
DADH covers (REF: PL 5.10)

Main covers (REF: PL 81.10)
LCSS covers (REF: PL 12.10)
Scanner covers (REF: PL 62.10)
HVF covers (REF: PL 12.100)
Tray 5 covers (REF: PL 75.60)
Tri-folder covers (REF: PL 12.200)
Parts Lists
PL 28.10
February 2013
5-64
PL 31.10 Maintenance/Installation/
Removal Kits (1 of 3)
Item
Part
Description
604K67590
604K67600
604K67610
604K67620
604K73110
2
3
497K07760
130K75900
4
5
604K73050
604K55160
604K55190
604K55170
498K14041
604K55200
604K55180
8
9
498K12130
10
498K12150
11
12
13
14
15
604K48370
604K61780
498K17780
604K54972
604K67570
Fax adapter kit (see below for

variants)
United Kingdom, Ireland, Spain,
Portugal, Greece
France, Netherlands, Belgium
Germany, Austria, Italy, Switzerland
Sweden, Norway, Finland,
Denmark
Australia, New Zealand, Hong
Kong, Singapore
Foreign device interface kit
HVF Low level sensor - spares
pack
LCSS paddle spares kit
Hole punch kit (see below for
variants)
2 hole punch kit (XE)
2 hole punch kit (legal) (XE)
3 hole punch kit (USSG/XCL)
4 hole punch kit (Sweden)
USB print connectivity kit (Not
spared)
Finishing devices (variants below)
LCSS (no hole punch) (Not spared)
LCSS (no hole punch) (Not spared)
(30 ppm)
Tray 5 (Not spared)
Tray 5 paper feed kit (A3 SEF
option) (Not spared)
Tray 5 paper feed kit (A4 SEF
option) (Not spared)
CVT Roll KIt
GUI gasket kit
Generic installation request kit (XE)
Umbilical kit
Feedhead assembly kit (REP 5.3)
NOTE: 498K part numbers should not be ordered by the

CSE. 498K part numbers are customer install kits and are
shown for reference only.
February 2013
5-65
Parts Lists
PL 31.10
Item
1
2
3
Part
604K54580
604K41411
604K35700
604K35710
5
6
7
497K04690
604K73060
604K54870
8
9
10
897E31770
604K67940
604K73400
11
12
13
604K73340
604K67130
604K61410
14
15
16
604K60701
604K67230
17
18
604K62080
604K83720
19
604K54990
20
130K75140
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
604K54320
604K54330
604K54100
498K19200
604K55480
29
30
31
32
33
604K61420
604K61370
604K61710
604K61640
650K33140
Description
OCT centre registration kit
LCSS Front cover Kit
Stapler kit (XE)
Stapler kit (USSG/XCL)
Wireless network adapter kit
(NOTE 3)
Tri-folder install kit (complete)
LCSS paddle shaft assembly kit
Registration/Pre-heat pump kit
(Contains 2 air pumps)(W/O TAG
018)
French/Canadian UI overlay kit
Drum pulley removal kit
HVF ejector assembly safety cover
kit
Drum repair kit
Tray 3 guide kit
Wave amp cable and clip kit (Type
A)
DADH mylar guide kit
LCSS traverse kit
Smartcard enablement kit (Not
spared)
DADH sensor replacement kit
LCSS diverter gate assembly
spares kit
Nip A replacement kit (Contains 2
belts and 2 Nip A roller assemblies)
LCSS stapler edge registration
sensor kit
Front transfix linkage and gear kit
Rear transfix linkage and gear kit
Hardware kit (see NOTE 2)
20 Amp adapter kit
Not used
Feed roll kit
Install NAT kit (XE) (Not spared)
Install NAT kit (USSG/XCL) (Not
spared)
Video cable and clip kit (Type A)
3TM Cable kit
Tray 3 kit
Silicon oil removal kit
UI overlay kit (English)
NOTE: 1: 498K part numbers should not be ordered by the

NOTE: 2: Refer to GP 24 for contents of the hardware kit.
NOTE: 3. Part number not available at time of publication.
Parts Lists
PL 31.11
February 2013
5-66
Item
Part
Description
301K23410
301K23420
301K23470
301K23480
301K19430
497K07630
Initialisation kits (variants below)

9301 (2 tier) (Metered) (Not spared)
9301 (3 tier) (Sold DMO) (Not
spared)
Product enablement kits (variants
below)
9301 (3 tier) (Not spared)
9301 (Sold USSG/XCL/XE) (Not
spared)
spared)
spared)
9301 (Sold DMO) (Not spared)
Scan to PC desktop kits (variants
below)
Standard (USSG/XCL) (V10)
Standard (XE) (V10)
Professional (USSG /XCL) (V10)
Professional (XE) (V10)
Workgroup edition (XE)
Xerox copier assistant kit (USSG/
XCL) (Not spared)
Xerox copier assistant kit (XE) (Not
spared)
Filter kit (Canada only)
NOTE: 498K part numbers should not be ordered by the

February 2013
5-67
Parts Lists
PL 31.12
PL 62.10 Scanner Module, CVT/

Document Glass
Item
Part
Description
1
2
062K28322
3
4
090E02581
090K02560
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
032K09770
12
13
952K00380
14
15
848E69071
16
17
18
19
20
Scanner module (REP 62.1)

Top cover (P/O PL 62.10 Item 1)
(REP 62.2, ADJ 62.4)
CVT Glass (See NOTE) (REP 62.3)
Document glass assembly (REP
62.3)
CVT Ramp assembly (REP 62.3)
Grommet (Not spared)
Not used
Nut (Not spared)
Harness clamp (Not spared)
Top cover plug (Not spared)
Document glass securing bracket
(P/O PL 62.10 Item 1)
DADH/IIT power comms harness
(PJ8, PJ18, PJ920) (REF: PL 62.16
Item 7)
IIT video/SBC PWB harness (PJ15,
PJ922)
Scanner rear cover
Scanner side cover (RH) (Not
spared)
UI harness cover (Not spared)
Latch plate (Not spared)
Not used
UI Base (Not spared) (REP 2.1)
Rubber stop (Not spared)
NOTE: 1. Refer to ADJ 62.1 for the optics cleaning

procedure.
Parts Lists
PL 62.10
February 2013
5-68
PL 62.15 Electrical Components (1 of

2)
Item
Part
Description
062K28310
2
3
122E03431
962K50450
962K26830
130K75130
8
9
10
110K14010
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Scan carriage assembly (REP 62.5,

ADJ 62.2)
LED exposure lamp (REP 62.10)
Inline ribbon harness (P/O PL 62.10
Item 1)
Scan carriage ribbon cable (PJ928)
(REP 62.13)
LED lamp ribbon harness (PJ926,
CN1) (REP 62.11)
Scan carriage (P/O PL 62.15 Item
1)
Carriage home sensor (Q62-018)
(REP 62.4), Angle sensor (Q62301)
Actuator support (Not spared)
Actuator spring (Not spared)
Input module angle sensor actuator
(REP 62.9)
Cable clamp (P/O PL 62.15 Item 1)
Harness retainer (Not spared)
Connector cover (P/O PL 62.15
Item 1)
Lower skid (P/O PL 62.15 Item 6)
(See NOTE)
Upper skid (P/O PL 62.15 Item 6)
Clip (Not spared)
NOTE: Refer to ADJ 62.1 for the optics cleaning procedure.
February 2013
5-69
Parts Lists
PL 62.15
PL 62.16 Electrical Components (2 of

2)
Item
Part
Description
4
5
6
020K12510
130E18530
952K00380
952K00400
8
9
10
960K66391
130E12320
11
12
13
14
023E25140
15
127K44880
Carriage motor bracket (P/O PL

62.16 Item 15)
Carriage motor mounting (P/O PL
62.16 Item 15) (REP 62.6)
Carriage motor (MOT62-023) (P/O
PL 62.16 Item 15) (REP 62.6, ADJ
62.3)
Scan idler pulley
Platen down sensor (Q62-019)
IIT video/SBC PWB harness
(PJ922)
DADH/IIT power comms harness
(PJ920, PJ921, PJ852)
Scanner PWB (REP 62.12)
Scanner PWB cover (Not spared)
Document size sensor 1 (Q62-251),
Document size sensor 2 (Q62-253)
(REP 62.14)
Scan cables (Not spared) (REP
62.7)
Scan drive belt (REP 62.8)
Not used
Scanner harness bracket (Not
spared)
Carriage motor and bracket
assembly
NOTE: Refer to ADJ 62.1 for the optics cleaning procedure.
Parts Lists
PL 62.16
February 2013
5-70
PL 70.10 Tray 1 and 2 Assembly

Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
003E77651
130E18220
19
20
21
604K55411
22
23
Tray 1 and 2 tray assembly (P/O PL

70.10 Item 21) (REP 71.1)
Paper tray (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
Plate arm (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
Paper width guide (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1) (REP 71.2)
Latch guide right (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1)
Latch guide left (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
Handle release (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
Gear 60 (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
(REP 71.3)
Gear 13/60 (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
(REP 71.3)
Gear 13 dog (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
Elevate plate assembly (P/O PL
70.10 Item 1) (REP 71.2)
Length sensing bracket (P/O PL
70.10 Item 1)
Width sensing bracket (P/O PL
70.10 Item 1)
Actuator bracket (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1)
E-clip (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
Metal link arm (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
Tray location catch
Lower door interlock sensor (Q01102)
Tray 1 & 2 Kit (Contains tray
assembly and front cover)
Paper length guide (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1) (REP 71.2)
Rear plate (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
February 2013
5-71
Parts Lists
PL 70.10
PL 70.25 3 Tray Module Covers

Item
Part
Description
4
5
6
848E23153
802K93695
8
9
10
11
848E23142
848E23161
12
13
14
604K55440
Tray 1 front cover (P/O PL 70.10

Item 21)
Item 21)
Item 31)
Right side cover
Lower left door assembly
Lower left door latch (P/O PL 70.25
Item 5)
Rear left cover (P/O PL 70.25 Item
13)
Rear cover (Not spared)
Cover front LH
Cover infill
Left lower door latch retainer plate
(Not spared)
Rear left cover infill (P/O PL 70.25
Item 13)
Rear left cover assembly
Blanking cover (W/TAG 001)
Parts Lists
PL 70.25
February 2013
5-72
PL 70.30 Left Hand Upper Door

Assembly
Item
Part
Description
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
848E40430
16
17
18
848K71910
038E41190
848K24560
19
20
21
22
Bypass assembly (Not spared)

(REP 70.2)
Bypass Module (P/O PL 70.30 Item
1) (REP 81.3)
Upper door stiffener plate (P/O PL
70.30 Item 18)
Nip 'D' roller (A)/Nip 'F' roller (B) (P/
O PL 70.30 Item 18)
Tension spring (P/O PL 70.30 Item
18)
Nip E support (P/O PL 70.30 Item
18)
Upper door base (P/O PL 70.30
Item 18)
Nip release link arm (P/O PL 70.30
Item 18)
Pivot block (P/O PL 70.30 Item 18)
Nip 'E' roller (P/O PL 70.30 Item 18)
Nip 'D' release solenoid (SOL82008) (P/O PL 70.30 Item 18) (REP
81.13)
Upper left door cover
Upper door divider (P/O PL 70.30
Item 1)
Mid left door assembly
Lower guide (PFP)
Upper left door assembly (REP
70.2)
Latch (P/O PL 70.30 Item 18)
Latch spring (P/O PL 31.11 Item
23)
Latch clip (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
Hinge pin (Not spared)
February 2013
5-73
Parts Lists
PL 70.30
PL 73.15 Tray 3 Assembly

Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
055E55332
019K13770
7
8
10
11
007K20290
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Tray 3 assembly (Complete) (REF:

PL 31.11 Item 31) (See NOTE)
(REP 73.1)
LH Slide (P/O PL 73.15 Item 1)
RH Slide (P/O PL 73.15 Item 1)
Baffle lead edge
Pad Tray bottom
Front cable gear (Black) (P/O PL
73.15 Item 1)
Cable gear shaft spacer (P/O PL
73.15 Item 1)
Rear cable gear (White) (P/O PL
73.15 Item 1)
Dog drive elevate (P/O PL 73.15
Item 1)
Damper and gear assembly (REP
73.6)
Cable gear shaft (P/O PL 73.15
Item 1)
Washer elevate (Not spared)
Retainer roller (P/O PL 73.15 Item
1)
Clip guide retainer (P/O PL 73.15
Item 1)
Front short cable (Silver) (P/O PL
31.11 Item 30) (REP 73.3)
Front long cable (Yellow) (P/O PL
31.11 Item 30) (REP 73.3)
Rear cable (Black) (P/O PL 31.11
Item 30) (REP 73.3)
Paper edge guide (P/O PL 31.11
Item 12)
Guide securing stud (P/O PL 31.11
Item 12)
NOTE: Refer to ADJ 73.1 to set the tray 3 paper guides.
Parts Lists
PL 73.15
February 2013
5-74
PL 73.16 3 Tray Module

Item
Part
Description
1
2
003E71520
127K62350
127K53792
4
5
6
7
960K52111
017K04222
017K04232
130E18220
059K50851
10
11
130E11610
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
604K55421
003K20701
Latch stop (See NOTE)

Tray 3 elevate motor (MOT 73-002)
(REP 73.2)
3 Tray transport motor (MOT70025) (REP 82.1)
3 Tray module PWB (REP 70.1)
Rear caster
Front caster (Brake)
Drive belt (P/O PL 73.16 Item 13)
(REP 82.2)
Tray 3 home sensor (Q73-303)
(REP 73.5)
Takeaway roll 1 (A) / Takeaway roll
2 (B)
Not used
TAR sensor 1 (Q 71-395),TAR
sensor 2 (Q72-396)
Lower guide (Not spared)
TAR Drives kit
Idler pulley (P/O PL 73.16 Item 13)
HT & main harness latch
NOTE: The Latch stop is also supplied as part of tray 3

assembly kit PL 31.11 Item 31.
February 2013
5-75
Parts Lists
PL 73.16
PL 74.10 Bypass Module (Tray 4)(1 of

2)
Item
Part
Description
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
019K13770
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
130E18220
19
130E11610
20
21
22
Bypass Module (Not spared) (REP

81.3)
Bypass feed motor (MOT74-420)
(P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Support retard (P/O PL 74.10 Item
1)
Spring retard (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Clutch (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Coupling (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Retard roll assembly (REP 81.6) (P/
O PL 31.11 Item 26) (See NOTE)
Guide lower (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Pad tray bottom
Support nudger (P/O PL 74.10 Item
1)
Spring nudger (P/O PL 74.10 Item
1)
Pulley nudger (P/O PL 74.10 Item
1)
Nudger roll assembly (REP 81.6)
(P/O PL 31.11 Item 26) (See
NOTE)
Feed roll assembly (REP 81.6) (P/
Clutch assembly (P/O PL 74.10
Item 1)
Guide upper detach (P/O PL 74.10
Item 1)
Flag media present (P/O PL 74.10
Item 1)
Bypass empty sensor (Q74-335)/
Nudger home sensor (Q74-413)
(REP 81.10)
Bypass feed sensor (Q74-406)
(XBRA)
Guide upper (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Roller assembly housing (P/O PL
74.10 Item 1) (REP 81.3)
Drive belt (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 74.10
February 2013
5-76
PL 74.11 Bypass Module (Tray 4) (2 of

2)
Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
7
130E18220
8
9
10
11
Tray extension (P/O PL 74.10 Item

1)
Tray base (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Tray deck (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Rack front (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Rack rear (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Bypass width sensor (Q74-350)
Mounting bracket (P/O PL 74.10
Item 1)
Lever (P/O PL 74.10 Item 1)
Potentiometer (P/O PL 74.10 Item
1)
February 2013
5-77
Parts Lists
PL 74.11
PL 75.60 Tray 5 Covers

Item
Part
Description
1
2
802K93561
6
7
8
9
10
11
110E20570
848K19110
802E82351
802E82363
12
13
848E05863
14
15
16
17
Front door assembly

Front door hinge (P/O PL 75.60
Item 1)
Front door hinge pin (P/O PL 75.60
Item 1)
Trail edge guide assembly (P/O PL
75.60 Item 1)
Front door latch (P/O PL 75.60 Item
1)
Tray 5 door switch (S75-010)
Interlock switch plate (Not spared)
Front cover (REP 75.8)
Rear cover (REP 75.8)
Top cover (REP 75.8)
Label (Tray 5) (P/O PL 75.60 Item
8)
Bias knuckle cover
Front door interlock harness (Not
spared) (PJ507)
Tamper guide lever (P/O PL 75.60
Item 1)
Tamper lever compression spring
(P/O PL 75.60 Item 1)
Label (Max) (P/O PL 75.60 Item 8)
Cable clamp (P/O PL 75.60 Item 9)
Parts Lists
PL 75.60
February 2013
5-78
PL 75.62 Tray 5 Base

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
009E74211
003E76870
003E78020
10
11
12
13
803E13680
068K54910
14
15
16
17
049K00270
003K20681
Adjustable caster (Not spared)

Caster (Not spared)
Platform assembly (Not spared)
Spring Bias
Latch bias
Docking latch (REP 75.9)
Docking latch spring (P/O PL 75.62
Item 16)
Docking latch bracket (P/O PL
75.62 Item 16)
Docking latch main bracket (P/O PL
75.62 Item 16)
Docking latch thumb screw
Docking plate
Slide assembly (Not spared)
Docking guides (P/O PL 75.62 Item
16)
Slide assembly locking nut (Not
spared)
Docking kit
Latch assembly
Adjuster wheel (Not spared)
February 2013
5-79
Parts Lists
PL 75.62
PL 75.64 Tray 5 Guides

Item
Part
Description
110K21080
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
038E34401
12
13
038K17713
029K04680
Tray 5 docking interlock switch

(S75-017)
Handle latch (Not spared)
Latch spacer (Not spared)
Slide latch (Not spared)
Spring leaf (Not spared)
Rear guide (P/O PL 75.64 Item 12)
Front guide assembly (Not spared)
Guide strip
Adjustment plate (Not spared)
Interlock guide (Not spared)
Rear guide assembly spring (P/O
PL 75.64 Item 12)
Rear guide assembly
Docking pin assembly
Parts Lists
PL 75.64
February 2013
5-80
PL 75.68 Tray 5 Lift Assembly (1 of 2)

Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
130K74380
7
8
9
960K34453
130K75511
10
11
12
13
110E06961
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
127K56330
24
007K19660
25
26
003K20950
962K82710
27
28
29
Tray assembly (complete) (Not

spared)
Crash bar (Not spared)
Frame top brace (Not spared)
Elevator motor (MOT75-019) (P/O
PL 75.68 Item 23)
Elevator encoder sensor (Q75-015)
Elevator motor bracket (P/O PL
75.68 Item 23)
Elevator motor shaft (Not spared)
Tray 5 Control PWB (Centre reg)
Tray down sensor (Q75-012) (REP
75.3)
Standoff (Not spared)
Tray level drive gear clip (Not
spared)
Upper limit switch (S75-412)
Rear elevator rack (P/O PL 75.68
Item 24)
Front elevator rack (P/O PL 75.68
Item 24)
Retard roller shield (P/O PL 81.46
Item 1)
Shipping pin bearing (Not spared)
Shipping pin spring (Not spared)
Shipping pin (Not spared)
Shipping pin handle (Not spared)
Cable tie (Not spared)
Clinch stud (Not spared)
Cable holder (Not spared)
Elevator motor assembly (REP
75.4)
Elevator rack assembly (REP
75.10)
Shipping pin handle assembly
Media path driver PWB to Tray 5
PWB harness (PJ502, PJ513)
Upper limit switch actuator (Not
spared)
Tray level drive gear (Not spared)
Actuator spring (Not spared)
February 2013
5-81
Parts Lists
PL 75.68
PL 75.70 Tray 5 Lift Assembly (2 of 2)

Item
Part
Description
1
2
110E06961
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
025E06871
019K13470
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
612W25655
815K11380
962K50461
032E29800
22
032E29790
Tray lift assembly (Not spared)

Tray down limit switch (S75-415)
(REP 75.6)
Lower safety bar
Lift plate (Not spared)
Fixing plate (Not spared)
Infill plate (P/O PL 75.70 Item 19)
Cork pad
Tray lift top cover (Not spared)
Lift plate crash bar actuator 2 (Not
spared)
Lift plate crash bar actuator 1 (Not
spared)
Crash bar actuator spring (Not
spared)
Not used
Infill actuator arm (P/O PL 75.70
Item 19)
Infill actuator arm spring (P/O PL
75.70 Item 19)
Infill actuator arm pin (P/O PL 75.70
Item 19)
Infill plate spring (P/O PL 75.70
Item 19)
Lower safety spring (Not spared)
Tray down limit switch screw
Infill plate assembly
Tray 5 elevator harness (PJ504)
Rear elevator tray guide (REP
75.11)
Front elevator tray guide (REP
75.11)
Parts Lists
PL 75.70
February 2013
5-82
PL 81.10 Main Covers

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
848K66280
848E15831
848E45840
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
848K31762
848E45881
848E45890
848E45950
848E45961
014E68060
019E81431
016E20080
Rear cover
Left cover
Right cover
Front door assembly (REF: PL
81.11 Item 11)
Ink loader access cover
Ink loader top
Ink loader access cover rear
Ink loader backup cover
Ink loader bracket
Not used
Rear standoff (duct)
Ink loader rotary damper clip
Ink loader rotary damper
February 2013
5-83
Parts Lists
PL 81.10
PL 81.11 Front Door Assembly

Item
Part
Description
2
3
848K31753
4
5
6
7
848E45930
848E45940
9
10
848E45920
848E46011
11
12
13
848K66270
14
898E35560
898E35570
898E35580
Front door shield (P/O PL 81.11

Item 13)
Inner cover
Hinge assembly (P/O PL 81.11 Item
13)
Foam seal (P/O PL 81.11 Item 13)
Dongle cover
Shipping restraint cover
Front door moulding (P/O PL 81.11
Item 13)
Access magnetic catch (P/O PL
81.11 Item 11)
Front door handle
Front door bracket (attached to
frame)
Front door assembly
Xerox logo (P/O PL 81.11 Item 11)
Door shield assembly (P/O PL
81.11 Item 11)
Name plate label (see below for
variants)
9301 Label
9302 Label
9303 Label
Parts Lists
PL 81.11
February 2013
5-84
PL 81.25 Tray 1 Paper Feed Assembly

Item
Part
Description
1
2
059K64454
5
6
10
11
809E95240
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
130E18220
038E41151
130E11610
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
014E68410
019E74540
Feedhead assembly (REP 81.1)

Retard roll support (P/O PL 81.25
Item 1)
Retard roll shaft (P/O PL 81.25 Item
1)
Item 1)
Nudger roll support (P/O PL 81.25
Item 1)
Nudger pulley (P/O PL 81.25 Item
1)
NOTE)
Spring
Drive clutch (P/O PL 81.25 Item 1)
Feed pulley (P/O PL 81.25 Item 1)
Washer (P/O PL 81.25 Item 1) (
Stack height sensor (Q71-336)
Guide
Tray 1 empty sensor (Q71-201)/
Feed sensor (Q71-101) (REP 81.8)
Cover (P/O PL 81.25 Item 1)
Elevator coupling assembly (P/O
PL 81.25 Item 1)
T1 feed/elevator motor (MOT71002) (P/O PL 81.25 Item 1)
Nudger roll shaft (P/O PL 81.25
Item 1)
Dog spacer (P/O PL 81.25 Item 1)
Feed roll kit (REF: PL 31.11 Item
26)
Shim
Slide pad
February 2013
5-85
Parts Lists
PL 81.25

Item
Part
Description
1
2
059K64454
5
6
10
11
809E95240
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
130E18220
038E41151
130E11610
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
014E68410
019E74540

Item 1)
1)
Item 1)
Item 1)
1)
NOTE)
Spring
Washer (P/O PL 81.26 Item 1)
Guide
Tray 2 empty sensor (Q72-201)/
Feed sensor (Q72-102) (REP 81.8)
PL 81.26 Item 1)
T2 feed/elevator motor (MOT72001) (P/O PL 81.26 Item 1)
Item 1)
Dog spacer (P/O PL 81.26 Item 1)
26)
Shim
Slide pad
NOTE: To reset the HFSI count, got to dC135

.
Parts Lists
PL 81.26
February 2013
5-86

Item
Part
Description
1
2
059K64464
5
6
10
11
809E94921
12
13
14
15
16
17
130E18220
18
19
038E41311
130E11610
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
014E68410

Item 1)
1)
Item 1)
Item 1)
1)
NOTE)
Spring
(REP 73.4)
Guide
Tray empty sensor (Q73-201)/Feed
sensor (Q73-103) (REP 81.9)
PL 81.30 Item 1)
T3 feed motor (MOT73-001) (P/O
PL 81.30 Item 1)
Item 1)
Tray up limit switch (S73-384) (P/O
PL 81.30 Item 1)
26)
Shim
NOTE: To reset the HFSI count, go to dC135

.
February 2013
5-87
Parts Lists
PL 81.30
PL 81.35 3 Tray Module Transport

Assembly
Item
Part
Description
059K50816
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
806E19670
130E11610
Horizontal transport assembly

(REP 82.3)
Horizontal transport base (P/O PL
81.35 Item 1)
Sleeve spring location (P/O PL
73.16 Item 13)
Horizontal transport lid (P/O PL
81.35 Item 1)
Idler roll (P/O PL 81.35 Item 1)
Clip (P/O PL 81.35 Item 1)
Transport roll 1 (P/O PL 81.35 Item
1) (REP 82.4)
Transport roll 2 (P/O PL 81.35 Item
1) (REP 82.4)
Transport roll 3 (REP 82.4)
Pulley DD (P/O PL 81.35 Item 1)
Tray 3 transport sensor (2)(Q70398)/TAR 3 sensor (Q73-397)
Parts Lists
PL 81.35
February 2013
5-88
PL 81.40 Tray 5 Feed Assembly (1 of

3)
Item
Part
Description
127K56453
127K61980
4
5
6
7
8
423W09050
9
10
11
12
13
14
125E00430
15
16
17
18
962K50475
962K82710
007K14401
Upper feeder assembly (REF: PL

81.45 Item 1)
Tray 5 transport motor (MOT75018) (REP 82.5)
Feed motor (MOT75-117) (REP
81.12)
Gear 14T (P/O PL 81.40 Item 3)
Feed/elevator motor harness (Not
spared)
Drive belt (REP 82.6)
Upper limit actuator spring (Not
spared)
Upper limit actuator (Not spared)
Belt tensioner spring (Not spared)
Elevator harness shield (Not
spared)
Static eliminator
Transport motor harness (Not
spared) (PJ511)
Tray 5 upper feeder assembly
harness (Not spared) (PJ505)
Elevator motor harness (PJ504)
Centre reg interface harness
Gear 30T Bearing
February 2013
5-89
Parts Lists
PL 81.40

3)
Item
Part
Description
1
2
059K69991
130E11610
130E12060
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Upper feeder assembly (REP 82.7)

Feed roller (REP 81.7) (P/O PL
81.45 Item 20) (See NOTE)
1)
One way coupling (P/O PL 81.45
Item 1)
Take away idler roller (P/O PL
81.45 Item 1)
Tray 5 empty sensor (Q75016)(REP 75.1)/Feed sensor (Q75105)(REP 81.11)
(REP 75.2)
Nudger roller (P/O PL 81.45 Item
20) (REP 81.7)
Torsion spring (P/O PL 81.45 Item
1)
Gear (29T) (P/O PL 81.45 Item 1)
Housing spring (P/O PL 81.45 Item
1)
Torsion chute spring (P/O PL 81.45
Item 1)
Roller belt (P/O PL 81.45 Item 1)
Upper feed assembly top cover (P/
O PL 81.45 Item 1)
Upper feed assembly base (P/O PL
81.45 Item 1)
Torsion nudger spring (P/O PL
81.45 Item 1)
Feed roll kit (Pack of 3) (REF: PL
31.11 Item 26) (REP 81.7)
Parts Lists
PL 81.45
February 2013
5-90

3)
Item
Part
Description
1
2
059K70530
3
4
6
7
8
10
11
12
Lower feed assembly (REP 82.7)

Retard roller (P/O PL 81.45 Item
20)
Retard clutch (P/O PL 81.46 Item 1)
One way pulley clutch (P/O PL
81.46 Item 1)
Take away roller (P/O PL 81.46
Item 1) (REP 82.7)
Torsion retard spring (P/O PL 81.46
Item 1)
Retard roller shaft (P/O PL 81.46
Item 1)
Lower feed assembly base (P/O PL
81.46 Item 1)
Actuator pivot shaft bearing (P/O
PL 81.46 Item 1)
Actuator pivot shaft (P/O PL 81.46
Item 1)
February 2013
5-91
Parts Lists
PL 81.46
PL 82.10 Vertical Paper Path

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
059E10710
059K63990
807E28960
807E28950
807E28970
023E31410
130E12950
8
9
10
023E31470
110E20810
11
12
020K20450
127K62280
13
14
15
16
17
18
807E29010
807E28940
038K23761
020K20620
023E31480
Transport roller drive 2

Transport roller TAR vertical
Pulley M2 (90T)
Gear 25T M08
Nip F idler pulley
Nip 'H' drive belt
Confirm sensor (16) (Q82-125)/
Vertical transport sensor (5) (Q82110) (REP 82.8)
Nip F drive belt (90T)
Upper door interlock switch (S01100)/Mid door interlock switch
(S01-101)
Nip H drive pulley
Vertical transport motor (M2)
(MOT82-001) (M2)
Gear 46T-M08
Gear 58T
Vertical paper path
Nip F drive pulley
Motor M2 drive belt
Inner frame assembly (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 82.10
February 2013
5-92
PL 82.15 Horizontal Paper Path

Item
Part
Description
038K23501
2
3
130E12950
121E26510
121E26500
6
7
020K20480
023E31410
8
9
023E31490
127K62291
10
059E10740
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
807E29170
807E29160
18
19
20
020E53880
868E53910
Horizontal paper path assembly

(REP 83.1)
Duplex sensor (17)(Q83-010)(REP
83.3)/Duplex end sensor (14)(Q83125)(REP 83.2)
Nip 'C' release solenoid (SOL82007) (REP 83.2)
HPP diverter solenoid (SOL83-004)
(REP 83.2)
Pulley M6 (21T)
Horizontal transport drive belt front
(REP 83.5)
Drive belt M6
Horizontal transport motor (M6)
(MOT82-003) (REP 83.4)
Nip R,C and Q takeaway rolls (REP
83.5)
Horizontal illuminator (Q82-005) (P/
O PL 82.15 Item 1)
Heatshield (P/O PL 82.15 Item 1)
Heatshield lift gear
Spacer (Not spared)
Heatshield sector gear
Reg/Preheat illuminator PWB (P/O
PL 82.15 Item 12)
Pulley M6 (80T)
Release latch
Spring (Not spared)
February 2013
5-93
Parts Lists
PL 82.15
PL 88.10 Registration/Preheat
Assembly (1 of 2)
Item
Part
Description
801K37710
604K54870
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
130E12950
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Registration/Preheat assembly
(complete) (REP 89.1)
Registration scan bar (Q89-005)
(Not spared)
Registration/Preheat pump kit (REP
89.2) (W/O TAG 018)
Rubber mounting (Not spared)
Registration/Preheat air pump
(MOT 88-008) (P/O PL 31.11 Item
7) (REP 89.2)
Rubber mounting (Not spared)
Lower platelet assembly cover (Not
spared)
Pump cover (Not spared)
Registration/Preheat interface PWB
(Not spared)
Thermal cutout PWB (Not spared)
Pre transfix sensor (20) (Q89-006)
(REP 10.7)
Lower heat plate (Not spared)
Lower platelet base assembly (Not
spared)
Lower platelet assembly (Not
spared) (REP 89.1)
Frame and jam clearance assembly
(Not spared)
Registration scan bar cover (Not
spared)
Upper heat plate (Not spared)
Idler assembly spring (Not spared)
Idler assembly (Not spared)
Front inverter (Not spared)
Rear inverter (Not spared)
Grounding plate (Not spared)
Upper housing (Not spared)
Shaft (Not spared)
Suction plate (Not spared)
Gear (Not spared)
Shaft (Not spared)
Gear (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 88.10
February 2013
5-94
PL 88.11 Registration/Preheat
Assembly (2 of 2)
Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Nip 'A' replacement kit (REF: PL

31.11 Item 19) (REP 89.3)
Bearing cover (Not spared)
Front drive gear (Not spared)
Nip 'A' roller (P/O PL 88.11 Item 1)
Compound gear (Not spared)
Registration motor A1 (M3)(MOT
89-007)/Registration motor
A2(M3)(MOT 89-008) (Not spared)
Cover (Not spared)
Nip 'A' pulley (P/O PL 88.11 Item 5)
One way gear (Not spared)
Nip 'A' ground plate (Not spared)
February 2013
5-95
Parts Lists
PL 88.11
PL 91.05 Marking Unit Slide Assembly

Item
Part
Description
010K04820
010K04830
674E02850
4
5
130E18210
Left hand slide assembly (REP

91.26)
Right hand slide assembly (REP
91.26)
Slide assembly cross brace (REP
91.26)
Waste tray sensor (Q91-019)
Marking unit assembly (Not spared)
(REP 91.26)
Parts Lists
PL 91.05
February 2013
5-96
PL 91.10 Marking Unit Drive

Assembly
Item
Part
Description
1
2
041K06600
012K06940
012K06950
012K06930
012K06920
130E12970
9
10
11
12
13
807E29030
807E29040
120K03490
116K00812
011K03140
14
15
16
011K03130
050E28780
17
18
19
Carriage drive train (REP 91.1)

Upper front compliant link (REP
91.8)
Upper carriage drive shaft (Not
spared) (REP 91.8)
Upper rear compliant link (REP
91.8)
Lower rear compliant link (REP
91.10)
Lower carriage drive shaft (Not
spared) (REP 91.10)
Lower front compliant link (REP
91.10)
Lower carriage home sensor (Q91011)/Upper carriage home sensor
(Q91-012)
Lower carriage drive gear
Upper carriage drive gear
Waste tray lock solenoid assembly
Marking unit enclosure (frame only)
Upper carriage crank (See NOTE)
(REP 91.8)
Lower carriage crank (See NOTE)
Waste tray
Carriage docking motor (MOT 91031) (P/O PL 91.10 Item 1)
Waste tray lock solenoid (SOL91044) (P/O PL 91.10 Item 11)
Marking unit enclosure cover (Not
spared)
Carriage drive bushing (P/O PL
31.11 Item 23)
NOTE: If an entire crank (PL 91.10 Item 13 or PL 91.10 Item

14 ) needs to be replaced then 2 parts need to be ordered.
February 2013
5-97
Parts Lists
PL 91.10
PL 91.15 Marking Unit Belt and Drive

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
007K19800
023E31420
019E80820
801E11470
033K04550
020K20630
020K20470
022E38380
801E11480
13
14
15
033K04560
009K02440
007K19790
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
023K01420
130E18200
020K20560
020K20570
Vertical gearbox (REP 91.2)

HM belt (REP 91.5)
HM belt clip (REP 91.5)
Front tensioner base (REP 91.4)
Horizontal drive paddle
Horizontal drive shaft (Not spared)
Upper drive shaft (Not spared)
Drive pulley
Belt pulley
Tensioner pulley
Back tensioner base (REP 91.4)
HM vertical motion motor (MOT91023) (P/O PL 91.15 Item 1) (REP
91.2)
HM wiper (REP 91.3)
HM tensioner spring
HM Horizontal motion motor
(MOT91-025) (REP 91.6)
Horizontal drive cable
HM position sensor (Q91-014)
HM drive pulley
HM idler pulley
HM drive cable stop (Not spared)
Belt pulley shaft (Not spared)
Parts Lists
PL 91.15
February 2013
5-98
PL 91.20 Marking Unit Upper Carriage

Assembly
Item
1
Part
041K06790
604K83791
127K62310
127K62300
7
8
10
11
819E15800
12
117E35770
13
14
15
16
17
18
604K54961
19
20
21
22
826E66290
Description
Upper carriage assembly (REP
91.7)
Printhead (Type A) (see NOTE)
(REP 91.29) (Not spared)
Printhead (Type B) (see NOTE)
(REP 91.29)
Printhead PWB (P/O PL 91.20 Item
2)
Printhead stitch adjust motor 2
(MOT91-030)/Printhead roll adjust
motor 2 (MOT91-026)/Printhead roll
adjust motor 4 (MOT91-028) (REP
91.13)
X-axis drive motor upper (MOT91033) (REP 91.9)
Printhead drive motor bracket (P/O
PL 91.20 Item 5)
Not used
Mounting bracket (Not spared)
(REP 91.10)
Purge line filter (P/O PL 91.20 Item
17, PL 91.20 Item 20) (REP 91.12)
Umbilical (REP 91.31)
Purge line (P/O PL 91.20 Item 17,
PL 91.20 Item 20) (REP 91.12)
Upper carriage harness (PJ102,
PJ401)
Upper carriage frame assembly (P/
O PL 91.20 Item 1)
Purge line filter cap (P/O PL 91.20
Item 17)
SFWA upper frame (P/O PL 91.20
Item 1)
Cable clip (Type A) (P/O PL 31.11
Item 29, PL 31.11 Item 13) (see
NOTE)
Purge line filter assembly
Reservior gasket (P/O PL 91.20
Item 20)
Check valve unit (P/O PL 91.20
Item 20)
Umbilical kit (REF: PL 31.10 Item
14)
Lead screw (REP 91.37)
Spring clip (Not spared)
NOTE: To identify the type of printhead, refer to GP 46.
February 2013
5-99
Parts Lists
PL 91.20
PL 91.25 Marking Unit Lower Carriage

Assembly
Item
Part
Description
041K06780
604K83791
127K62310
127K62300
7
8
9
10
11
12
819E15800
117E35660
13
14
15
16
17
18
604K54961
19
20
21
22
826E66290
Lower carriage assembly (REP

91.14)
Printhead (Type A) (see NOTE)
(REP 91.29) (Not spared)
Printhead (Type B) (see NOTE)
Printhead PWB (P/O PL 91.25 Item
2)
Printhead stitch adjust motor 1
(MOT91-029)/Printhead roll adjust
motor 1 (MOT91-024)/Printhead roll
adjust motor 3 (MOT91-027) (REP
91.13)
X-axis drive motor lower (MOT91034)
Printhead drive motor bracket (P/O
PL 91.25 Item 5)
Not used
Purge line filter (P/O PL 91.25 Item
17)
Umbilical (REP 91.31)
Purge line (P/O PL 91.25 Item 17)
Lower carriage harness (PJ303,
PJ701)
Lower carriage frame assembly (P/
O PL 91.25 Item 1)
Purge line filter cap (P/O PL 91.25
Item 17)
SFWA lower frame (P/O PL 91.25
Item 1)
Cable clip (Type A) (P/O PL 31.11
Item 29, PL 31.11 Item 13) (see
NOTE)
Purge line filter assembly
Reservior gasket (P/O PL 91.25
Item 20)
Check valve unit (P/O PL 91.25
Item 20)
Umbilical kit (P/O PL 31.10 Item 14)
Lead screw (REP 91.37)
Spring clip (Not spared)
NOTE: To identify the type of printhead, refer to GP 46.
Parts Lists
PL 91.25
February 2013
5-100
PL 92.10 Marking Unit Electronic

PWB's
Item
Part
Description
1
2
960K66590
3
4
5
6
7
960K46471
960K46440
960K46451
117E37130
117E37140
9
10
11
12
130E18790
237E23880
117E35680
13
117E35800
14
117E35670
15
117E35730
16
133K27860
IME Controller PWB (REP 3.1)

Mounting Plate (P/O PL 92.10 Item
1)
Quad Wave amp PWB (REP 3.2)
Marking unit driver PWB (REP 3.4)
Marking unit heater PWB (REP 3.3)
Clamp (Not spared)
Video cable (Type A) (P/O PL 31.11
Item 29) (see NOTE)
Video Cable (Type B) (see NOTE)
Wave amp cable (Type A) (P/O PL
31.11 Item 13) (see NOTE)
Wave amp cable (Type B) (see
NOTE)
Service loop (REP 91.11)
Not used
8 Pin NVRAM
Marking unit heater PWB cable
(PJ901)
Quad Wave amp PWB cable
(PJ590)
Marking unit driver PWB cable
(PJ203)
Marking unit front components
harness (PJ304)
Memory module (256 MB)
NOTE: To identify the type of cable, refer to GP 46.
February 2013
5-101
Parts Lists
PL 92.10
PL 93.10 Ink Loader Assembly

Item
Part
Description
815K11623
130K15852
815K11610
4
5
848E34260
127K62270
807E29020
130K15870
10
11
12
13
14
15
057E03690
127K62310
16
17
18
19
20
057E03700
117E35640
130E12930
21
22
23
24
25
26
604K67923
Ink loader upper assembly (REP

91.15)
Ink low sensor assembly (REP
91.19)
Ink loader melt plate assembly
(REP 91.16)
Ink transport drive cover
Ink transport motor (MOT93-048)
(REP 91.18)
Ink transport drive gear (REP
91.18)
Ink load sensor assembly (REP
91.17)
Ink load entry PWB (P/O PL 93.10
Item 7) (REP 91.17)
Solenoid patch PWB (P/O PL 93.10
Item 26)
Ink reservoir (P/O PL 93.10 Item
26) (REP 91.20)
Reservoir pump (MOT93-050) (P/O
PL 93.10 Item 16) (REP 91.21)
Reservoir mounting bracket (P/O
PL 93.10 Item 26)
Side insulation
Ink keyplate motor (MOT93-051)
LPA valve solenoid (SOL91-045)
(P/O PL 93.10 Item 16)
Reservoir pump assembly (P/O PL
93.10 Item 26)
Umbilical end insulation
Ink level sensor cable (PJ760)
Ink loader door switch
Magenta solid ink stick (REF: PL
26.10 Item 7)
Cyan solid ink stick (REF: PL 26.10
Item 8)
Yellow solid ink stick (REF: PL
26.10 Item 9)
Black solid ink stick (REF: PL 26.10
Item 10)
Ink loader housing (P/O PL 93.10
Item 1)
Harness, Solenoid patch PWB to
Marking unit heater PWB (PJ630 to
PJ801) (P/O PL 93.10 Item 26)
Ink reservoir assembly (REP 91.20)
Parts Lists
PL 93.10
February 2013
5-102
PL 94.10 Cleaning Unit

Item
Part
Description
4
5
6
7
020K20530
114E24380
9
10
008E08570
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
130E12940
18
19
020K20543
20
21
108R00989
22
23
24
Cleaning unit lid (P/O PL 94.10

Item 21)
Return reservoir pump (P/O PL
94.10 Item 21)
Delivery reservoir pump (P/O PL
94.10 Item 21)
Cam shaft assembly
Reservoir (P/O PL 94.10 Item 21)
Connector 12 pin (REP 91.33)
Thrust washer (P/O PL 31.11 Item
23)
Bushing roller (P/O PL 31.11 Item
23)
Cam front
Spring lock cam (P/O PL 94.10 Item
4)
Mount lock cam (P/O PL 94.10 Item
4)
Cam rear (P/O PL 94.10 Item 4)
Bushing shaft (P/O PL 94.10 Item
4)
Pin dowel (P/O PL 94.10 Item 4)
Lift gear (Not spared)
Cleaning unit home sensor (Q94105) (REP 91.27)
Gear train housing (P/O PL 94.10
Item 19)
Cleaning unit motor assembly (See
NOTE 1)
Encoder (P/O PL 94.10 Item 19)
Cleaning unit (complete) (REP
94.1)
Connector housing (Not spared)
Drive gear (P/O PL 94.10 Item 19)
Cleaning unit motor (P/O PL 94.10
Item 19)
NOTE: 1: Drum cleaning motor assembly is mounted onto

rear frame.
NOTE: 2: A Cleaning unit handle kit is also available, refer to
PL 94.20 Item 27 .
February 2013
5-103
Parts Lists
PL 94.10
PL 94.15 IOD Assembly

Item
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
020K20580
032E35160
032E35170
117E35570
IOD assembly (REP 91.22)

Front guide track (REP 91.23)
Rear guide track (REP 91.23)
IOD Pre-amplifier PWB (P/O PL
94.15 Item 1)
IOD to drum driver PWB cable
Parts Lists
PL 94.15
February 2013
5-104
PL 94.20 Drum Assembly

Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
023E32380
020K20552
020K20510
7
8
054E43470
020K20520
9
10
11
130K15841
130K15860
12
13
054E43480
14
15
16
127K68890
801K37690
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
604K60830
31
Drum (P/O PL 31.11 Item 11) (REP

91.25)
Drum belt (REP 91.24)
Drum pulley (REP 91.34)
Drum fan (MOT42-064) (P/O PL
94.20 Item 15)
Drum fan shroud (P/O PL 94.20
Item 15) (See NOTE)
Drum drive motor (MOT94-009)
(REP 91.24)
Front drum shroud
Drum position encoder assembly
(Q94-101) (REP 91.30)
Front drum thermistor (REP 91.35)
Rear drum thermistor (REP 91.35)
Abatement fan assembly (MOT42062) (P/O PL 94.20 Item 15)
Abatement plenum (REP 91.36)
Drum protector cover (REF: PL
26.11 Item 11)
Drum encoder bracket (Not spared)
Drum and abatement fan assembly
Front drum frame assembly (REP
91.25)
Not used
Locating screw (P/O PL 94.20 Item
27)
Handle (P/O PL 94.20 Item 27)
Latch cam (P/O PL 94.20 Item 27)
Latch base (P/O PL 94.20 Item 27)
Retaining washer (P/O PL 94.20
Item 27)
Cleaning unit handle kit
Drum heater (P/O PL 94.20 Item 1)
Not used
Rear drum support (P/O PL 94.20
Item 1)
Drum fan retaining plate (P/O PL
94.20 Item 15)
NOTE: HFSI. This component must be cleaned at regular

intervals refer to SCP 4 subsystem maintenance. To reset the
HFSI count go to dC135.
February 2013
5-105
Parts Lists
PL 94.20
Common Hardware
Item
Part
Description
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AV
AW
Screw M4x10 Torx (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23) (Silver finish)

Screw M3x6 Torx (Silver finish)
Screw M4.5x12 Hex head
Screw M3x7.5 Hex head (Silver finish)
Screw M4x30 Torx (Black finish)
Screw M4x12 Torx (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
Screw M4x 12 Slot
Screw M3x16 Phillips
Screw M3x16 Torx
Screw M4x10 Torx
E-Clip M4 (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
E-Clip M5
Screw M4x12 Self Tapping
Screw M4x7.5 Torx (Zinc finish)
Screw M4x11.5 Torx
Screw M3x6 Phillips (Black finish)
Screw M4x11 Philips (Black finish)
KL clip M5 (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
Screw M4x20 Torx (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
Screw M4x8 Phillips
Screw M3x5.5 Phillips (Black finish)
Screw M3x4.5 Phillips (Black finish)
Screw M3x6 Phillips (Silver finish)
Screw M3x7 Torx (Zinc finish)
Screw M4x25 Torx (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23) (Zinc finish)
Screw M3x8 Torx
Washer M4
Screw M3x5.5
Screw M3x8 Phillips
Screw M3x6 Taptite (Zinc finish)
E clip M8
Screw M4x8 Machine
Screw M4x6 Machine
Screw M4x10 Machine
Screw M3x8 Taptite
Screw M4x8 Machine
Screw 3x5 machine
E-Clip M3.5
Screw M3x5.5 Taptite
Parts Lists
Common Hardware
AX
AY
AZ
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
BG
BH
BI
BJ
BK
BL
BM
BN
BO
BP
BQ
BR
BS
BT
BU
BV
BW
BX
BY
BZ
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
CG
CH
CI
CJ
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CP
CQ
CR
CS
CT
CU
CV
CW
February 2013
5-106
Screw M3x14 Machine

Washer M4
Screw M4x16 Machine
Screw M4x5 Machine
Screw M3x10 Machine
Screw M3x6 Machine
Screw M4x6 Machine
Screw M4x5 Machine
Screw M4x7 Taptite
Pivot pin M4x10 Hex Head
6mm x 10mm x 13 bush (bronze)
Washer M3
Spring Washer M3
Screw M4x16 Taptite
Screw M3x10 Machine
Screw M3x5.5 Self Tapping
Washer M4
Screw M3x10 Self tapping
Circlip M5
Circlip M7
Circlip M10
Circlip M6
Screw M5x6 Machine
Screw M4x12 Torx (Zinc finish)
Screw 3.5x10 Self Tapping
Screw 3.5x10 Torx
Screw M2.5x8 Taptite
Screw M3x17 Taptite
Screw M4x8 Machine
Screw M3x11.5 Torx (Pan head)
Screw 3x9.5 Self Tapping
Screw 4x 15 Torx (Black finish)
KL clip M6
Screw M4 x12 Machine, capture washer (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
Screw M6x15 Machine, Button head (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
KL clip M8 (P/O PL 31.11 Item 23)
Screw M3x23 Torx
Washer M6
6 General Procedures/Information
GP 40 to GP 49
GP 1 to GP 9
GP 1 Service Mode .........................................................................................................
GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files ................................................................................
GP 3 Service Information ................................................................................................
GP 4 Machine Software ..................................................................................................
GP 5 Customer Administration Tools ..............................................................................
GP 6 Marking Unit Maintenance Positions......................................................................
GP 7 System Grounding Verification...............................................................................
GP 8 Special Tools and Consumables............................................................................
GP 9 UI Services User Menu Map ..................................................................................
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-12
6-16
6-23
6-34
6-34
GP 10 to GP 19
GP 10 How to Check a Motor..........................................................................................
GP 11 How to Check a Sensor .......................................................................................
GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch .....................................................................
GP 13 How to Check a Switch ........................................................................................
GP 14 How to Switch Off the Machine or Switch On the Machine..................................
GP 15 Location and Function of PWB LEDs...................................................................
GP 16 How to Safely Lift or Move Heavy Modules .........................................................
GP 17 Network Clone Procedure ....................................................................................
GP 18 Machine Lubrication .............................................................................................
GP 19 Machine SIM Card Matrix.....................................................................................
6-39
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-46
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-55
GP 20 to GP 29
GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications...................................................................
GP 21 Installation Space Requirements .........................................................................
GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements ............................................................................
GP 23 Environmental Data..............................................................................................
GP 24 Hardware Kit Contents .........................................................................................
GP 25 First Copy/Print Out Time and Power On/Off Time..............................................
GP 26 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) .....................................................
GP 27 Cleaning Procedure .............................................................................................
GP 28 Marking Unit Assembly Wiring Harnesses ...........................................................
GP 29 Component Locations ..........................................................................................
6-57
6-73
6-75
6-76
6-76
6-77
6-77
6-78
6-81
6-82
GP 30 to GP 39
GP 30 How to Mask Jets / Jet Substitution .....................................................................
GP 31 How to Open and Close the Stripper Gate...........................................................
GP 32 User Interface Panel Diagnostics.........................................................................
GP 33 Machine Features ................................................................................................
GP 34 Service Plan .........................................................................................................
GP 35 Copy and Print Speeds ........................................................................................
GP 36 How to Unlock the Cleaning Unit .........................................................................
GP 37 Post Part Replacement Routines .........................................................................
GP 38 How to Set the Date and Time .............................................................................
GP 39 How to Enable HTTP ...........................................................................................
6-89
6-90
6-91
6-95
6-98
6-99
6-101
6-101
6-103
6-104
GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................

GP 41 How to Configure the PWS to Ping a Device .......................................................
GP 42 How to Set the IP Address of the PWS................................................................
GP 43 How to Change Ethernet Speed ..........................................................................
GP 44 How to Disable the Firewall of the PWS ..............................................................
GP 45 How to Check the Battery on the NVM Module PWB ..........................................
GP 46 How to Identify the Different Printhead Connectors .............................................
GP 47 Remote Diagnostics .............................................................................................
GP 48 How to Re-Enter Optional Feature Installation Keys............................................
GP 49 USB Connection Mode.........................................................................................
Diagnostic Codes dC103 to dC123

dC103 Billing Plan ...........................................................................................................
dC104 Usage Counters...................................................................................................
dC108 Software Version .................................................................................................
dC113 Fast Time to Ready .............................................................................................
dC120 Fault Counters .....................................................................................................
dC122 Fault History.........................................................................................................
dC123 PEST Fault History ..............................................................................................
6-125
6-125
6-126
6-126
6-127
6-127
6-128
Diagnostic Code dC131

dC131 NVM Read/Write..................................................................................................
6-129

dC132 Serial Number......................................................................................................
dC134 Market Region .....................................................................................................
dC135 CRU/HFSI Status.................................................................................................
dC136 Service Plan.........................................................................................................
dC137 Page Pack ...........................................................................................................
dC140 Analog Monitor.....................................................................................................
6-255
6-256
6-256
6-258
6-258
6-259

dC301 NVM Initialization .................................................................................................
dC312 Network Echo Test ..............................................................................................
dC330 Component Control..............................................................................................
dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser ..............................................................................
dC361 NVM Save and Restore .......................................................................................
6-261
6-263
6-263
6-278
6-279

dC608 Document Feeder Registration............................................................................
dC609 Document Glass Registration ..............................................................................
dC612 Print Test Pattern.................................................................................................
dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration (RaLPH).........................................................
dC640 Video Path Integrity .............................................................................................
6-281
6-281
6-282
6-282
6-283

dC708 Drum Drive Control Test ......................................................................................
dC715 Active Registration Control ..................................................................................
6-105
6-115
6-116
6-118
6-119
6-121
6-122
6-123
6-124
6-124
February 2013
6-1
6-285
6-285
General Procedures/Information

dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test .............................................................................
dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser .......................................................................................
dC962 Transfix Load Test...............................................................................................
dC965 Printhead Maintenance Cycle Test......................................................................
dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check .............................................................................
dC968 Head Purge .........................................................................................................
dC969 Clean Ink Smears ................................................................................................
dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment ..................................................................
dC972 Printhead Uniformity ............................................................................................
dC976 Ink Delivery Fault Recovery.................................................................................
dC977 Drum Runout Calibration .....................................................................................
dC978 Transfix Calibration Values..................................................................................
6-287
6-288
6-288
6-289
6-290
6-290
6-291
6-291
6-292
6-297
6-298
6-298
Change Tags
Tags ................................................................................................................................
Processor Tags ...............................................................................................................
DADH Tags .....................................................................................................................
Finisher (2K LCSS) Tags ................................................................................................
Finisher (HVF) Tags ........................................................................................................
Post Process Inserter Tray 6 (PPI) Tags ........................................................................
Fax Tags .........................................................................................................................
Tray 5 Tags .....................................................................................................................
6-299
6-300
6-301
6-302
6-304
6-305
6-305
6-306
February 2013
6-2
GP 1 Service Mode
10. Select the required tab from the service mode screen.
Purpose
11. To return to Ready to scan, select Exit Only or Exit and Reboot.
Service Info Tab
This procedure describes the following items:
How to Enter Service Mode.
How to Boot/Power Up Directly into IME Diagnostics Mode.
Service Info Tab.
Diagnostics Tab.
Adjustments Tab.
Maintenance Tab.
Call Closeout Tab.
User Interface Diagnostics.
Service Copy Mode.
The service info routines are used to track faults that have occurred in the machine. Refer to
Table 1.
Table 1 Service Info Tab
NOTE: When service mode is entered, all existing copy jobs are cancelled. The network controller will stop accepting jobs and a Offline screen message is displayed. When exiting service mode an Online screen message is displayed.
NOTE: Machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. To log into service mode
remotely refer to GP 47.
Routine
Description
dC104
Usage Counters
dC108
Software Version
dC113
Fast Time to Ready
dC120
Fault Counters
dC122
Fault History
dC123
PEST Fault History
dC135
CRU/HSFI Status
Diagnostics Tab
The diagnostic routines are used to test specific areas of the machine. Refer to Table 2.
Table 2 Diagnostics Tab
How to Enter Service Mode

Routine
2.
When the machine is ready, press and hold the # key, * key and the Stop key.
dC140
Analog Monitor
3.
dC312
Network Echo Test
NOTE: . An invalid passcode causes a delay of five seconds before another passcode
can be entered.
dC330
Component Control
dC335
Heater Monitor and Exerciser
Select the required tab from the service mode screen.
dC612
Print Test Pattern
To return to Ready to scan, select Exit Only or Exit and Reboot.
dC640
Video Path Integrity
How to Boot/Power Up Directly into IME Diagnostics Mode
dC708
Drum Drive Control Test
This mode will allow the system controller to boot but not the IME. The IME will have power but
will not go through initialization, POST or PEST. The IME will not initiate movement of components until commanded to do so via Service Mode DC routines (e.g. component control) or
rebooted into normal customer mode. The IME will be dormant and the heaters are not
switched on. The drum will not rotate and the print head carriages remain parked. The machine
has no marking capabilities.
dC715
Active Registration Control
dC914
Head to Head Alignment Test
dC959
Cleaning Unit Exerciser
dC962
Transfix Load Test
dC965
Printhead Maintenance Cycle Test
dC967
Head to Drum Spacing Check
1.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Open the left hand upper door assembly, PL 70.30.
Follow the on screen instructions, install the waste tray, close the front door and close the
left hand upper door.
The UI displays Ready to scan and an error code 000-000 (takes a few minutes).
NOTE: . An invalid passcode causes a delay of five seconds before another passcode
can be entered.
Description
Adjustments Tab
Adjustment routines are used to modify the set-up or to calibrate specific areas of the machine.
Refer to Table 3.
Table 3 Adjustments Tab
Routine
Description
dC131
NVM Read / Write
dC301
NVM Initialization
dC361
NVM Save and Restore
dC608
Document Feeder Registration
dC609
Document Glass Registration
February 2013
6-3
GP 1
Table 3 Adjustments Tab

Routine
Description
dC625
Registration / Preheat Calibration (RaLPH)
dC971
Head to Head Alignment Adjustment
dC972
Printhead Uniformity
dC977
Drum Runout Calibration
dC978
Transfix Calibration Values
1.
2.
NOTE: In service copy mode, the customer administration tools are also available.
Maintenance Tab
Refer to Table 4.
Table 4 Maintenance Tab
Routine
Description
dC103
Billing Plan
dC132
Serial Number
dC134
Market Region
dC136
Service Plan
dC137
Page Pack
dC968
Head Purge
dC969
Clean Ink Smears
dC976
Ink Delivery Fault Recovery
Call Closeout Tab

NOTE: Do not exit service mode until the machine has recovered from all diagnostic routines.
1.
Touch the Call Closeout button to exit service mode.
2.
Touch the appropriate button to complete the exit procedure.
Reset Waste Counter

Reset Counters.
Touch the button to reset the following counters:
Faults.
Last 40 faults.
Total Images made after the last service call.

Exit. If the button is touched the machine will exit diagnostics.
Exit and Reboot. If the button is touched, the network controller is reset.
NOTE: . If the machine is rebooted, the exit time from diagnostics is increased.
NOTE: . It will be necessary to select Exit and Reboot to clear a system fault from
the UI and return the machine to an operational state.
User Interface Diagnostics

To access user interface diagnostics press and hold the # key, * key and the phone key
together. Refer to GP 32 User Interface Panel Diagnostics and check the functions of the UI.
Follow the on screen instructions.
Service Copy Mode

To access normal user privileges when the machine is password protected. Perform the following:
GP 1
February 2013
6-4
GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files
Table 1 Function and fault code prefixes
Purpose
Chain Code
Function
To describe access to fault history information and explain the fault code structure.
02
User interface
03
Machine run control
History files can be accessed from the UI using the Machine Status Button or from Service Mode under the Service Info tab, refer to Fault Data Available from Service Mode.
05
Document transport
10
Transfix and copy/print transportation
For information on fault codes, refer to Function, Fault, Component Codes.
12
Finishers
For information on service codes which indicate non critical faults that do not stop the
machine, refer to OF 12 Service Code RAP.
16
Network controller
19
Video image manipulation
20
Fax
22
System Errors
42
Fans and cooling
63
Scanner
7X (X = tray No.)
Paper supply (paper trays and bypass)
81
Paper feed
82
Pre registration transport
83
Duplex paper path
88
Media premarking conditioning
89
Paper registration
Service Mode (GP 1) gives access to 3 fault history options:
91
Marking Unit
92
IOT Process control
93
Ink delivery
94
Ink transfer
99
PEST
For information on status codes, refer to OF 4 Status Codes and Messages RAP.
For information on power on self test (POST) refer to OF 16 POST Error RAP.
For information on the machine usage and history, refer to TP 17 Service Usage Profiles.
Machine Status Button

The most recent fault and status codes can be displayed on the UI by pressing the Machine
Status button. Touch the Faults tab on the UI then select the appropriate option:
Fault History.
Current Messages - status codes and a status message.
Current Faults.
Fault Data Available from Service Mode

Fault Counters (dC120) - Displays the titles of all faults separated into chains, sortable by
chain or frequency.
Fault History (dC122) - Displays the last 40 faults. Selecting a fault will display it in detail.
PEST Fault History (dC123) - Displays the history of faults recorded during Print Engine
Self Tests.
Function, Fault, Component Codes

Refer to:
Table 1 Function and fault code prefixes. Also known as the chain code.
Table 2 Fault and control code suffixes. Also known as the link code.
Table 3 Finisher fault code and status code suffixes. Also known as the extension code.
For example. Displayed code 373-215 Tray 3 hoist failure:
3 - This serves no purpose and can be ignored. This digit is not shown on any fault codes
in this manual.
73 - The fault is located in chain 7, Paper supply and tray 3, Table 1.
215 - The first digit 2 indicates it is a System timing code, Table 2. The 1 and the 5 are
sequence numbers and have no other significance.
NOTE: Where possible, the component related fault codes are the same as the component control codes.
Table 1 Function and fault code prefixes

Chain Code
Function
01
Standby power
February 2013
6-5
GP 2
GP 3 Service Information
Table 2 Fault and control code suffixes
Purpose
Link Code
Description
To provide machine hardware and software information.
000 to 099
Output
Service Information From The Service Mode Screen
100 to 199
Jams
Enter service mode, GP 1. Select the Service Info tab. This gives the following options:
200 to 299
System timing
300 to 399
Controls
400 to 499
Spare or overflow
dC108 Software Version
500 to 599
Status codes
dC113 Fast Time to Ready
600 to 699
Marking copy / print quality
dC120 Fault Counters
700 to 799
Non-declared defects
dC122 Fault History
800 to 899
Optional use
dC123 PEST Fault History
900 to 999
Operator messages
dC135 CRU/HFSI Status
Information Routines.
TP 17 Service Usage Profiles.

Table 3 Finisher fault code and status code extensions
Suffix No.
General Information
Finisher Identifier
Product Code:
OCT
Serial Number:
2K LCSS
Total Images:
HVF
Images since Last Call:
172
HVF BM (see NOTE)
Software Set Version:
173
HVF BM + tri-fold (see NOTE)
IP Address:
174
HVF BM + inserter (see NOTE)
Service Code:
175
HVF BM + tri-fold (see NOTE)
176
HVF BM + tri-fold + inserter (see NOTE)
65
110
171
Service Information From The UI Machine Information Tab
NOTE: The finisher status code extensions are not normally visible. Throughout this manual,
the code extension 171 is used for all HVF variants.
Press the machine information key to the left of the UI to display the machine information tab.
This gives the following options:
General Information
Customer Support
Website: www.xerox.com
Phone:
Machine Serial Number. See Machine Serial Number
Current System Software
Service Code: see OF 12 Service Codes RAP.
000.00.000
GP 2, GP 3
Paper Tray Status
Information Pages
Installed Options
Maintenance Assistant
February 2013
6-6
Machine Serial Number
The machine serial number is also on the machine TAG label.
Purpose
The serial number for the US markets is in the format
To provide machine software information and explain the software loading procedure.
XXX ######, where XXX is the product code and ###### is the rolling serial number, for
example a US machine might be BRE230511.
Description
The serial number for the XE markets is in the format YYY ######C, where YYY is the location
code, ###### is the rolling serial number and C is a check digit, for example 3642005012.
Software sets are compilations of the various software modules and together with a SCD (software compatibility database) are bundled into a DLM file, available on the CSE USB flash
drive, PL 26.11 Item 6. The method of upgrading the machine software is via a software
upgrade or an AltBoot software loading procedure.
Product Code
Refer to the following items for additional information about machine software:
Primary Build
Modules
BRE: ColorQube, IOT with Scanner and DADH (XC).102 to 140VAC
Software Compatibility Database (SCD)
BRF: ColorQube, GSA Compliant IOT with scanner and DADH (XC).102 to 140VAC
Common Upgrade Behavior
Software Loading Procedure
Troubleshooting
USB Port Security Setting Check
Modules
A software module is defined as a programmable piece of software existing as a file in its own
right. Software modules reside on hardware modules.
The 3 tray module contains firmware and cannot have software upgrades loaded.
NOTE: The software for the DADH, 3 tray module or tray 5 can only be upgraded by installing
a newer version of the relevant PWB on each hardware module.
Software Compatibility Database (SCD)
The SCD is used to describe the machine system software. The SCD comprises of the system
software
version
in
the
format
ColourQube_9301-9303_systemsw#(PPP)(MMM)(YYY)(DDD)(RR)#.dlm and a list of software versions for the different modules.
The description of the system software file name is:
PPP - is the platform identifier.
MMM - is the machine identifier.
YYY - is the year of release.
DDD - is the day, in the year, of release.
RR - is the daily revision number.
NOTE: The system software version is displayed on the UI under Machine Details and on the
Service Info screen in service mode.
The primary function of an SCD is to ensure that all software on the machine is compatible.
Common Upgrade Behavior
A software upgrade is requested if a new hardware module is installed which has an earlier or
later software version.
February 2013
6-7
GP 3, GP 4
When an upgrade has been initiated the machine will reboot with all modules in upgrade mode.
CAUTION
For machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. The AltBoot software loading procedure erases the SMart eSolutions and the wireless settings. These will be automatically reloaded at the end of the Altboot procedure.
Progress and errors are displayed on the UI screen.

When the upgrade is complete, the machine will reboot.
CAUTION
When a machine is switched on, the single board controller PWB (SBC) compares its SCD with
the software in the hardware modules. If necessary, a software upgrade or downgrade is instigated by the single board controller PWB.
NOTE: If a component is installed that has a later version of software than the software set on
the single board controller PWB, at machine startup the software on the new component is
downgraded.
NOTE: For machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. Altboot upgrades should
be performed with the device in wired connectivity mode. Upgrades attempted while the device
is in wireless mode may result in unpredictable network/device behavior that will require a
reset to default configuration action, then a device reboot in order to resolve issues.
NOTE: For machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. If any optional feature kit
e.g., McAfee Integrity Control fails automatically to re-load after an Altboot, refer to GP 48 How
to Re-Enter Optional Feature Installation Keys.
The SCD is updated on successful completion of the upgrade.
Software Loading Procedure
NOTE: To restore the XSA data, use the customers XSA data backup (clone) file on the customers PC. Refer to the Customer Administrators Guide CD.
Before loading software, the following are necessary:
If possible, the machine must be in a fully operational condition. Any active faults or jams
must be resolved before starting this procedure if possible.
A USB flash drive, PL 26.11 Item 6. The ColorQube 9303 family approved USB flash drive
is recommended with a minimum capacity of 1GB.
Ensure the USB ports are enabled and that the customers Print From option is disabled.
If the Print From option is left in the enabled state the Print From dialogue window will display when the USB flash drive is inserted into the machine.
AltBoot software loading procedure erases customers unique network configuration settings. A
backup of this data must be saved and must be performed during this procedure.
Procedure
NOTE: If the machine appears to hang during the AltBoot process (stay on one screen without
apparent progress), wait 10 minutes before switching the machine off, GP 14. The machine
may still be loading software in the background and switching the machine off during this
phase will corrupt the hard disc. A new hard disc is required to recover.
The latest ColourQube_9301-9303_system-sw#pppmmmyyydddrr#.dlm file.
NOTE: The screen capture figures 1 to 6 were taken from software pre version
071.XXX.XXX.XXX. However, the screen messages are similar.
NOTE: The procedure will take approximately 30 minutes. If the software loading procedure fails, go to OF 5 Boot Up Failure RAP.
AltBoot Software Loading
System Software Loading
1.
Create a top level folder on the USB flash drive named AltBoot (this is not case sensitive).
2.
Copy the unzipped ColourQube_9301-9303_system-sw#pppmmmyyydddrr#.dlm file from

the system software CD into the AltBoot folder on the USB flash drive. Make sure that
there is only one .dlm file in the Altboot folder.
AltBoot Software Loading

AltBoot loads machine software. It is used to upgrade, downgrade or reload software onto a
machine that will not come to a ready state. It can also be used to upgrade or downgrade the
software on options fitted to the machine e.g HVF. To force an upgrade or downgrade of all
installed options, a folder titled FORCED_UPGRADE must be put in the Altboot folder with
the.dlm file on the USB thumbdrive. The FORCED_UPGRADE folder can be created or downloaded from GSN library 10480.
AltBoot should be only be used under the following circumstances:
To attempt to recover a corrupt:
Hard disk drive, PL 3.11 Item 2.
After installing a new hard disk drive, PL 3.11 Item 2.
To upgrade machine software without running multiple software upgrades.
To downgrade machine software.
GP 4
NOTE: Ensure the Microsoft Windows Safely remove hardware procedure is followed
before the USB flash drive is removed.
3.
Perform an NVM Save, refer to NVM Save and Restore, dC361. Ensure that the NVM
data is saved to the USB flash drive.
NOTE: The same USB thumbdrive that has the .dlm file can be used to store the NVM.
4.
Perform GP 17 Network Clone Procedure.
5.
If possible, complete or delete all pending print jobs. If the prints jobs cannot be deleted,
warn the customer that all pending jobs will be lost.
6.
7.
Connect the USB flash drive into any of the USB ports.
8.
Switch on the machine, GP 14. The Altboot process will start automatically. No button
presses are required to initiate the Altboot.
9.
The upgrade start screen is displayed, Figure 1.
February 2013
6-8
NOTE: Occasionally the USB flash drive will be incompatible with the machine and the
upgrade start screen, Figure 1 will be continually displayed. If after 10 minutes the screen
has not changed, replace the USB flash drive with a Xerox approved model, PL 26.11
Item 6. Restart the process.
10. The upgrade will begin and the progress screen will open in approximately 2 minutes, Figure 2.
NOTE: If the upgrade process screen is not displayed after 4 minutes, restart the process.
11. The AltBoot process should complete after approximately 5 minutes and the AltBoot complete screen will open, Figure 3. Follow the on screen instructions.
12. If the AltBoot process fails, the AltBoot failed screen will open, Figure 4. Follow the on
screen instructions. Restart the procedure and refer to Troubleshooting as necessary.
13. For machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. When the software loading
is complete, enter Customer Administration tools, GP 5. Select Tools / Device Settings /
Revert to Previous Settings. This will re-load the customer optional services.
NOTE: For machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. If any optional feature kit e.g., McAfee Integrity Control fails automatically to re-load after an Altboot, refer to
GP 48 How to Re-Enter Optional Feature Installation Keys.
NOTE: Do not switch off the machine unless directed to on the UI. During the next 2
reboots, the hard disk drive is encrypted. Switching off the machine can cause only partial
encryption of the partitions on this component. The AltBoot process may need to be rerun if power is removed at this step.
Figure 1 Upgrade start screen
14. The machine will reboot several times before returning to a ready state. In some
instances, a second upgrade progress screen may be displayed, Figure 2 or the Data
Encryption/Decryption in progress screen, Figure 5. If a power on failure screen appears,
Figure 6, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
15. Check that the software set has been installed. Refer to the printed software upgrade
report, Figure 7 or by pressing the machine status button.
16. Perform an NVM Restore, refer to NVM Save and Restore, dC361.
17. Perform a Network Clone Restore, refer to GP 17.
Figure 2 Upgrade progress
February 2013
6-9
GP 4
Figure 3 AltBoot complete
Figure 5 Encryption progress
Figure 4 AltBoot failed
Figure 6 Power on failed

Troubleshooting
Listed below are possible problems that may stop AltBoot software loading:
GP 4
February 2013
6-10
Possible causes and solutions are:
NOTE: The software loading procedure can only be used to upgrade the machine. Downgrading and reloading must be performed via the AltBoot procedure. If the software loading procedure fails, go to the OF 5 Boot Up Failure RAP.
Incompatible USB flash drive. Use a Xerox approved model of USB flash drive, PL 26.11
Item 6.
Corrupt.dlm file. Replace the .dlm file.
Incorrect spelling of the AltBoot directory on USB flash drive.
Bad data connection to the HDD. Reseat the HDD harnesses, PL 3.11 Item 3 and PL 3.11
Item 12.
Software Loading Procedure Via USB Flash Drive
Hard disk drive corruption or failure.
The machine has a PEST fault causing it to re-start PEST. This removes power from the
single board controller PWB when the Altboot process is initiating. Boot the machine
directly into IME Diagnostics Mode GP 1.
1.
Create a top level folder on the USB flash drive or network named upgrade (this is not
case sensitive)
2.
USB port or cable damage, PL 3.11. Use a different USB port or cable.
Copy the ColourQube_9301-9303_system-sw#pppmmmyyydddrr#.dlm file from the system software CD into the upgrade folder of the USB flash drive.
UI failure, PL 2.10.
Check the +5V supply to the USB ports at PJ 17 pin 14 on the single board controller
PWB. Refer to WD 3.2.
3.
If possible, complete or delete all pending print jobs. If the prints jobs cannot be deleted,
warn the customer that all pending jobs will be lost.
For machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. Check that the USB ports
are enabled. USB Port Security Setting Check.
4.
Before software is loaded, ensure that the machine is in a fully operational condition. Any
active faults or jams must be resolved before starting this procedure.
5.
Check the Release Notes and the current software already loaded on the machine.
Ensure that the upgrade can be applied.
6.
For machines with software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only. Check that the USB ports
are enabled. USB Port Security Setting Check.
7.
Connect the USB flash drive into any of the USB ports.
NOTE: The screen capture figures 1 to 6 were taken from software pre version
071.XXX.XXX.XXX. However, the screen messages are similar.
NOTE: Make sure there is only one file in the upgrade folder.
USB Port Security Setting Check

1.
Login to Customer Administration Tools, GP 5.
2.
Press the Machine Status button.
3.
Select the Tools tab, the tools pathway menus are displayed.
4.
Select Security Settings.
NOTE: It is not necessary to switch off the machine to perform a software upgrade.
5.
Select USB Port Security.
6.
If necessary, change the setting to Enabled.
Occasionally the USB flash drive will be incompatible with the machine. Replace the USB
flash drive with a Xerox approved model, PL 26.11 Item 6. Restart the process.
7.
Exit Customer Administration Tools. If the USB port security setting was changed, switch
off, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
8.
The UI power on light will Intermittently light.
9.
The upgrade start screen is displayed, Figure 1.
NOTE: If it is not possible to access Customer Administration Tools, or the USB flash drive is
not recognised, update the software from the PWS.
10. The upgrade will begin and the progress screen will open, Figure 2.
System Software Loading

There are 2 ways to upgrade software:
12. If the system upgrade process fails, the hard disk drive has become corrupt. Perform an
AltBoot Software Loading.
Software Loading Procedure Via USB Flash Drive
Software Loading Procedure Via Network
13. The machine will reboot several times before returning to a ready state. The machine may
also display the upgrade progress screen, Figure 2. If the power on failure screen is displayed, Figure 6, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
11. The system upgrade process should complete after approximately 5 minutes and the
machine will come to a ready state.
14. After the software has upgraded a software upgrade report will be printed, Figure 7.
Software Loading Procedure Via Network
1.
Connect to the machines web pages either from a PC connected to the network or using
the PWS and an ethernet crossover cable.
2.
On the customers workstation, open the web browser. Enter the machines IP address in
the web browser Address field, then press the enter key. The machine web page will
open.
NOTE: Refer to the configuration report for the machines IP address.
February 2013
6-11
GP 4
3.
Enter the Administrator User ID and Password.
4.
Click on Properties.
5.
Select General Setup.
Purpose
6.
Select machine software.
7.
Select upgrades. Then check the Enabled check box.
How to Enter Customer Administrator Tools
8.
Select manual upgrade, then browse. Select the .dlm file from the Upgrade directory.
9.
Select install software.
1.
NOTE: All network connectivity to the machine will be lost. Progress can be monitored
from the UI, Figure 2.
2.
When the machine is ready, select login / out (key symbol) on the key pad or select guest
on the UI.
3.
Enter User Name admin (case sensitive).
10. The machine will reboot before returning to a ready state.
To gain access to customer administration tools.
4.
Select Next.
5.
Enter the Password 1111 (default setting).
6.
Select Enter.
7.
Select machine status key (machine symbol key). To access the customer administration
screen.
When the machine is password protected. To access device setting, network setting and trouble shooting. Perform the following:
1.
2.
Enter the passcode 2732.
3.
Select Enter.
4.
Select machine status key (machine symbol key) and tools. To access the customer
administration screen.
NOTE: In service copy mode, the customer administration tools are also available.
NOTE: After entering customer administration tools, all existing copy jobs are cancelled. The
network controller will stop accepting jobs and a Offline screen message is displayed. When
exiting service mode an Online screen message is displayed.
The tools menu map is also available in the information pages. Select Machine Status /
Machine Information / Information Pages and select the Tools Menu Map.
Figure 7 Software upgrade report
The customer administration Tools menu contains the following features:
GP 4, GP 5
Device Setting - Table 1.
Service Setting - Table 2.
Network Setting - Table 3.
Account Setting - Table 4.
Security Setting - Table 5.
Troubleshooting - Table 6.
February 2013
6-12
Table 1 Device Settings

Feature
Table 1 Device Settings

Feature
Feature options
Selection
General
Energy Saver
Intelligent Ready
Job Activated
Scheduled
Fast Resume
Off/On
Tray Settings
Edit settings
Tray Contents
Paper Size / Type
Auto Resume Timer
Auto Resume / Wait for User
Held Job Timeout
Enable / Disable
System Timeout
Enable / Disable
Auto Color Detection
Scan from Document Glass /

Scan from Document Feeder
Photo / Text Settings
Recognition
Contention Management
Priority / First In, First Out
Out of Staples Options
Complete job without stapling

Fault / Hold Job
Output Location
Copy / Fax / Print
Within Job Offsetting
Enable / Disable
Staple Productivity Mode
Enable / Disable
Enter Supplies Plan Activation Code

Low Supply Warning
Supply Counter Reset
See GP 48
NOTE: Software version

071.XXX.XXX.XXX only
ColorQube solid ink / Cleaning

Unit / Document Feeder Feed
Roll
Reset Counter
Time Zone (GMT Offset)

Date
Time
Languages / Keyboard
Selection
Languages
Keyboard Layout
Custom Keyboard Button
Xerox Customer Support
Phone number
Entry Screen Defaults
Default Pathway
Services Pathway Default
Job Status Pathway Default
Measurements
Units
Numeric Separator
Paper Size Preference
Inches / Metric
Audio Tones
Fault Tone
Conflict Tone
Selection Tone
Timers
Input
Output
Supplies

Feature Installation
Device Software Upgrade

Revert to Previous Settings
Number of days
NOTE: Pre
071.XXX.XXX.XXX software
Paper Management
Paper Type and Color
Plain / Recycled / Colour
Paper Substitution
Enable / Disable
Paper Size Preference
Inches / Metric
Disable / Enable


Low Supply Warning
Selection
Enable / Disable
NOTE: Pre
071.XXX.XXX.XXX software
Date and Time
Billing Impression Mode
Feature options
Standard Size Required
Quick Setup Home
IP Address / contact number
Display Brightness
Brighter / Darker
Configuration / Information
Pages
Administrator Only
Open to All UsersPrint Configuration at Power OnPrint Now
Reset UI to Factory Settings
- Cancel / Reboot
Interrupt Printing Enablement
Enable / Disable
February 2013
6-13
GP 5
Table 2 Service Settings
Table 2 Service Settings
Feature
Feature options
Selection
Service Registration
Copy
ID Card Copy
Scan To
Print From
Fax
Workflow Scanning
Server Fax
Email
Internet Fax
ScanWeblet
Scan To Email Weblet
Xerox Online Support
Enable / Disable
Feature

Device Address Book
Management
Copy Service Settings
ID Card Copy Service
Embedded Fax Settings
GP 5
Selection
Automatic Redial Setup
Automatic Resend
Audio Line Monitor
Send Header Text
Batch Send
Mailbox and Polling Policies
Received Documents
Stored Documents
Mailbox Setup
Setup Fax Reports
Activity Report
Confirmation Report
Broadcast and Multipoll
Report
Print Fax Reports
Activity Report
Protocol Report
Dial Directory Report
Group Directory Report
Options Report
Pending Jobs Report
Print Now
Banner Sheets
Print Banner Sheet Yes / No

Print Driver Override Yes / No
Banner Sheet Identification
Output Error Sheets
Enable / Disable
Paper Type and Color
Paper Type
Paper Color
Weblet Install Policy

Weblet Management
Allow Installation
Do Not Allow Installation
Import / Export / Export Sample
Feature Defaults
Reset / Save
Edge Erase Presets
Undo / Reset / Save
Image Shift Presets
Undo / Reset / Save
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Undo / Reset / Save
Reading Order Options
Scan Order
Print Order
Job Sheets
Auto Image Rotation
When Auto R/E Selected

When Auto Paper Selected
Enablement
Side 1 & 2 Shared
Defaults
Side 1 Defaults
Side 2 Defaults
Reduce / Enlarge Presets
Enable / Disable
Output Color/ ReduceEnlarge/Paper Supply
Original Type/ LightenDarken/Background Suppression
Proportional%/Independent %

Feature options
Transmission Defaults
Weblet Settings

Service Plan
Change Service Plan

Table 3 Network Settings
Feature
Feature Options
Enable / Disable
Online / Offline
Online / Offline
Feature Defaults
Network Connectivity
Fax Country Setting
Current Wired Status

Current Wireless Status
Line 1 Setup
Line 2 Setup
Incoming Fax Defaults
Auto Answer Delay

Junk Fax Prevention
Paper Settings
Ring Volume
Secure Receive
Default Output Options
Fax Setup
NOTE: Software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX only

TCP/IP Settings
February 2013
6-14
TCP/IP Enablement
Dynamic Addressing
IP Address / Host Name
Subnet and Gateway
DNS Configuration
Table 3 Network Settings
Table 5 Security Settings
Feature
Feature Options
Feature
Feature Options
Advanced Settings
Ethernet Physical Media

HTTP Settings
802.1x
Change Admin Password
User Name / Old Password / New Password / Retype

New Password
Network Logs
Basic
Enhanced
Download Basic Log File
USB Settings
Software Tools
Direct Printing using the Driver

IPsec
Valid Recipients
Current Wired Status

Current Wireless Status
Feature Options
Accounting Mode
None
Auxiliary Access
Xerox Standard Accounting
Network Accounting
Copy Activitty Report
Display Network Settings
Enable / Disable
Feature Options
Selection
USB Port Security
Rear USB Port (Pair)

Front USB Port
Disableed / Enabled

Authorization
Job Deletion
All Users
System Administrator Only
Image Overwrite Security
Immediate Job Overwrite
Disable / Enable
On Demand Overwrite
Standard
Full
Overwrite Now
Valid Recipients
Allow any valid E-mail

Address
Limit to Address Book entries
only
Show IPv4 Address / Show Host Name / Hide Network

Information
Feature
Feature options
Support Pages
Troubleshooting Print Quality Page Jet Test Pages

Print
Fix Image Quality
Fix Options:
Light Lines
Smears
Advanced
Print Test Pages
Automatic Light Lines Fix
Quick Fix
Full Fix
On / Off
Eco / Always / Off
Resets
Software Reset
All Software
Network Software
Copy Software
Reset
Document Feeder
Feed Roller
Network
Echo Test
Protocol
Start Test
Fax
Fax Protocol Report
Protocol Report
Print Now

IP Sec
Cancel / Save
Table 6 Troubleshooting
Feature
Down Load Log
Allow any valid Email

Address / Limit to Address
Book entries only

Table 5 Security Settings
Audit Log

Table 4 Accounting Settings

Feature
Disable / Enable

Display Network Settings
Selection
Selection
Disable IP Sec
February 2013
6-15
GP 5
Call Closeout
GP 6 Marking Unit Maintenance Positions
Purpose
1.
Select admin on the UI button to exit Customer Administration Tools.
2.
Select Logout.
To explain how to move the marking unit into the maintenance position.
To explain how to move the marking unit into the operational position.
To explain how to park the printhead carriages.
To explain how to dock the printhead carriages.
To explain how to move the HM wiper blade
To explain how to move the lower printhead carriage into the maintenance position.
NOTE: Definitions of the positions described in this procedure.
The marking unit service position is defined as when the marking unit is withdrawn from
the machine on the slide rails.
The marking unit operation position is defined as when the marking unit is fully home
within the machine as it is when printing.
The printhead parked position is defined as when the carriages are away from the drum.
The printhead docked position is defined as when the printheads are against the drum
and the carriages are docked in contact with the frame.
The printhead carriages can be moved into the docked position when the marking unit is
in the service position. This gives access to the rear of the printheads. In this case the
printheads will not dock as the marking unit is moved away from the frame. Caution is
advised in this situation as the upper printhead can contact the lower printheads.
The lower printhead carriage service position extends the travel of the lower carriage to
allow better access to the top of the lower printheads.
Procedure
WARNING
Preparation
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
GP 5, GP 6
Move the Marking Unit into the Maintenance Position
Move the Marking Unit into the Operation Position
Move the Carriages to the Parked Position
Move the Carriages into the Docked Position
Move the HM Wiper Blade
Move the Lower Printhead Carriage into the Maintenance Position
February 2013
6-16
Move the Marking Unit into the Maintenance Position

CAUTION
Move the marking unit slowly on the rails. If the machine has not been allowed to cool for 30
minutes the ink in the reservoir will be fluid and can spill.
1.
Prepare to move the marking unit into the service position, Figure 1.
2
Remove 2 screws.
1
1
Gently pull the handle to move the marking
unit into the service position.
CAUTION
Ensure the carriages are both in the parked position. If the marking unit is moved while the carriages are not parked the printheads can contact the drum.
2.
Ensure the carriages are in the parked position, Figure 4 and Figure 5.
Figure 2 Marking unit into service position
CAUTION
Do not touch the face plates of the print heads.
3.
4.
Move the marking unit into the service position, Figure 2.
Reinstall the waste tray.

NOTE: The waste tray is attached to the underside of the marking unit assembly by 2 lugs
at the rear and 1 lug at the front.
Move the Marking Unit into the Operation Position

1.
February 2013
6-17
GP 6
CAUTION
4.
Ensure the carriages are both in the parked position. If the marking unit is moved while the carriages are not parked the printheads can contact the drum.
5.
Reinstall the waste tray.

Reinstall the two screws to secure the marking unit.
6.
Reinstall the inner cover.
2.
Ensure the carriages are in the parked position, Figure 4 and Figure 5.
Move the Carriages to the Parked Position
3.
Move the marking unit into the operation position, Figure 3.
1.
Move the upper carriage to the parked position, Figure 4.
NOTE: The marking unit often sticks during the last bit of travel going into the operating
position. Push directly on the two screw hole locations, located at the bottom of the frame
to fully seat the marking unit.
CAUTION
Ensure the guide is correctly positioned.
1
Push the marking unit into
the machine.
Figure 3 Marking unit into operation position

GP 6
February 2013
6-18
1
Move the gear selector to
the bottom of the slot to
select the lower gears.
2
Rotate the lower carriage drive
gear counterclockwise to move
the lower carriage to the parked
position.
2
Rotate the upper carriage
drive gear clockwise to
move the upper carriage to
the parked position.
1
the top of the slot to select
the upper gears.
Figure 4 How to park the upper carriage

2.
Figure 5 How to park the lower carriage
Move the lower carriage to the parked position, Figure 5.
February 2013
6-19
GP 6
Move the Carriages into the Docked Position

CAUTION
Do not move the upper and lower carriages into the docked position at the same time if the
marking unit is in the service position. The printheads can contact each other if the locator pins
do not stop against the frame.
1.
Move the upper carriage into the docked position, Figure 6.
2
Rotate the upper carriage drive
gear counterclockwise to move
the upper carriage to the
docked position.
1
the top of the slot to select
the upper gears.
Figure 6 How to dock the upper carriage

2.
GP 6
Move the lower carriage to the docked position, Figure 7.
February 2013
6-20
Move the HM Wiper Blade

1.
Move the marking unit into the service position.
2.
Rotate the upper drive shaft, PL 91.15 Item 7, so that the HM wiper blade moves to the
required position.
Move the Lower Printhead Carriage into the Maintenance Position

1.
Move the marking unit into the service position.
2.
Move the HM wiper to the top of its travel.
Move the gear selector to the

bottom of the slot to select the
lower gears.
3.
Move the lower printhead carriage into the docked position.
4.
Release the lower front compliant link (PL 91.10 Item 7) from the lower carriage assembly
(PL 91.25 Item 1), Figure 8.
5.
Release the lower rear compliant link (PL 91.10 Item 5) from the lower carriage assembly
(PL 91.25 Item 1), Figure 8.
2
Rotate the lower carriage drive gear
clockwise to move the lower carriage
to the docked position.
Figure 7 How to dock the lower carriage
February 2013
6-21
GP 6
1
Release the lower front
compliant link from the
support dowel.
End stop
2
Release the lower rear
compliant link from the
support dowel on the other
side.
1
Lift the lower printhead carriage over the stops so that
the dowels rest in the lower
supports
Figure 8 Links released from lower carriage

6.
Figure 9 Lower carriage in service position
Lift the lower carriage support dowels over the stops to lower the carriage into the service
position, Figure 9.
GP 6
February 2013
6-22

Purpose
Gate and baffle
shaft
Use this procedure to verify correct system grounding
Procedure
WARNING
Do not switch on the electricity to the machine while a ground circuit is disconnected.
Ground circuits ensure that the machine remains safe during a fault condition.
NOTE: Ground distribution faults must be isolated by continuity checks and visual inspection.
Check all circuits between each connection and ground. When appropriate, insert the meter
probe tip into the head of the screw.
Switch off the machine, GP 14. Disconnect the main power cord from the wall outlet and
the machine. Check the ground conductor of the main power cord for continuity or damage, if necessary install a new main power cord, PL 1.15 Item 1.
Check that the ground connections that follow are secure:
Stripper system
Transfix
Registration / Preheat assembly
Marking Unit
Drum
Exit transport
DADH
Tray 5
Bypass Tray
3 Tray Module
Stripper shaft
Figure 1 Stripper baffle
Stripper system
Figure 1, stripper hinge shafts and stripper baffle. Check for continuity of less than 10
Ohms between the shaft and the machine base with the baffle closed and latched. Check
for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between the baffle and the machine base. To improve
continuity, remove and clean. If necessary, install a new stripper gate and baffle assembly, REP 10.21, PL 10.12 Item 1.
Stripper baffle
Figure 2, stripper baffle hinge shaft ground contact spring. Remove the exit module to see
the contact spring. Remove, clean and reform the spring as necessary.
February 2013
6-23
GP 7
Stripper baffle hinge shaft
1
Remove screw then the
contact spring.
Transfix blade
Figure 2 shaft ground spring
Figure 3 Transfix blade
Transfix
Figure 3, transfix blade. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between the blade
frame and the machine base. To improve continuity, remove and clean or install a new
transfix stripper assembly, PL 10.20 Item 14 as necessary.
GP 7
Figure 4, transfix roller. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between the inner roller
core and the machine base and 10 Ohms between the outer roller and the machine base.
To improve continuity, disconnect the ground strap, clean the contact faces and re-assemble.
February 2013
6-24
1
Lift the hatch.
Preheat plates
Transfix roller ground wire.
Figure 4 Transfix roller
Figure 5 Preheat plates
Figure 5, open the registration / pre heat jam hatch by rotating the gear until the hatch is
unlocked. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between each preheat plate and the
machine base.
Figure 6, to improve continuity, remove, clean the contact faces and re-install the following:
Ground connection to rear outer frame, Figure 6.
Internal ground connections of registration / preheat assembly, Figure 7.
February 2013
6-25
GP 7
Ground wire
Ground contact
Plate ground contacts
Ground contact
Figure 6 Rear frame connection
Plate ground contacts
Figure 7, registration / preheat internal ground. Check the reg/preheat assembly internal
ground wire terminals. If necessary disconnect and clean the contact faces then re-install.
Ground contact
Ground contact
Figure 7 Reg/preheat assembly connections
GP 7
February 2013
6-26
Marking Unit
Figure 8 and Figure 9, marking unit enclosure. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms
between the enclosure and the machine base. To improve continuity, disconnect the terminals, clean the contact faces and re-assemble.
Ground contact
Figure 9 Marking unit machine ground
Figure 10, upper carriage. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between the upper
carriage and the machine base. To improve continuity, disconnect the terminals, clean the
contact faces and re-install.
Ground contact
Figure 8 Marking unit enclosure ground
February 2013
6-27
GP 7
Ground contacts
Ground contacts
Figure 10 Upper carriage ground
Figure 11 Lower carriage ground
Figure 11, lower carriage. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between the lower
carriage and the machine base. To improve continuity, disconnect the terminals, clean the
contact faces and re-install.
GP 7
Drum
Figure 12, drum motor. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between the motor and
the machine base. To improve continuity, clean the contact faces and connections of the
ground lead.
February 2013
6-28
Sensor cover ground

contact
Motor case ground wire.
Connects to PSU at PJ6AC.
Solenoid ground contacts
Figure 12 Drum drive motor ground


ground contact.
Figure 13, horizontal paper path internal ground. Remove the horizontal paper path, REP
83.1. Remove the top cover, refer to REP 83.2. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms
between the solenoids, sensor cover and the horizontal paper path ground contact. To
improve continuity, clean the contact faces and connections of the ground leads.
Figure 13 Horizontal paper path ground

Exit transport
Figure 14, exit transport internal ground lead. Remove the exit module, REP 10.20.
Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between the solenoid, baffle and the ground
contacts. To improve continuity, disconnect the terminals, clean the contact faces, reinstall.
February 2013
6-29
GP 7
Motor ground
connections
Right hinge ground connection
Ground contacts
Auxiliary DADH ground
connections
Figure 14 Exit transport internal grounds

DADH
Figure 15, DADH ground connection. Remove the DADH rear cover, PL 5.10 Item 1.
Check for continuity of less than 10 ohm between the DADH frame and the main frame
ground connection. To improve continuity, check that the hardware is tight and the harness crimping is good. If necessary disconnect the terminals, clean the contact faces and
re-assemble.
Left hinge ground

Main DADH ground
connection
Figure 15 DADH ground connection

Tray 5
GP 7
Figure 16, tray 5 ground connections. Check the ground connection on the frame, the elevator motor and on the base of the paper tray. Ensure that the in-line connectors are connected.
February 2013
6-30
Paper guide ground

connection
Ground connection
under the paper tray
Ground connection
In-line ground
connector
Ground connection
Frame ground connection
Figure 16 Tray 5 ground connections
Figure 17 Bypass tray ground connections
Bypass Tray
3 Tray Module
Figure 17, bypass tray ground connections. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohm
between the bypass paper guide and the main frame ground connection. To improve continuity, disconnect the ground terminals, clean the contact faces and re-assemble.
Bypass internal ground connection. Follow

this wire and check the other end.
Figure 18, 3 tray module motor ground connection. Check for continuity of less than 10
Ohm between the motor case and the main frame. To improve continuity, disconnect the
ground terminals, clean the contact faces and re-assemble.
February 2013
6-31
GP 7
Frame ground
connection
Ground contact pad
3 tray motor ground

connection
Figure 18 3TM motor
Figure 19 Tray 1 and 2 ground
Figure 19, tray 1 and 2 ground contact pad. To improve continuity, remove the tray and
clean the contact face. The tray must be elevated to check for continuity between the
metal tray and the ground pad. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohm between the tray
and the ground pad.
GP 7
Figure 20, tray 3 horizontal transport. To improve continuity, remove the transport and
clean the contact faces. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohm between the paper
transport shafts and the main frame.
February 2013
6-32
Ground contacts
Figure 20 Tray 3 horizontal transport
Tray 3 ground
contact pad
Tray 3 lift plate ground

connection
Ground contact pad
Figure 21 Tray 3 ground connections
Figure 21, tray 3 ground connections. Check for continuity of less than 10 Ohms between
the tray lift plate and the tray base. To improve continuity, disconnect the ground terminals, clean the contact faces and re-assemble.
February 2013
6-33
GP 7
GP 8 Special Tools and Consumables
GP 9 UI Services User Menu Map
For all special tools and consumables refer to the following:
Purpose
PL 26.10 Consumables and Tools (1 of 2).
PL 26.11 Consumables and Tools (2 of 2).
To show the features available on the UI screen in the services mode. The tables below show
the features, options and the selections.
The User Menu Map is also available in the information pages. Select Machine Status /
Machine Information / Information Pages and select the User Menu Map.
The UI services user menu contains the following features:
Copy - Table 1.
Fax - Table 2.
Server Fax - Table 3.
Workflow Scanning - Table 4
Reprint Saved Jobs - Table 5.
E-Mail - Table 6.
Internet Fax - Table 7.
Table 1 Copy features

Feature
Feature options
Selection
Copy
Output Color
Auto Detect
Black and White
Color
Single Color
Reduce / Enlarge
Proportional%
Independent X-Y%
Auto Center
Variable%
Presets
Paper Supply
Tray / Paper Size
2-Sided Copying
1-1 Sided
1-2 Sided
2-2 Sided
2-1 Sided
Rotate Side 2
Copy Output
Collated
Uncollated
Stapling (optional)
Folding (optional)
Original Type
Content Type
How Original was Produced
Image Options
Lighten/Darken
Sharpness
Saturation
Image Enhancement
Background Suppression
Manual Contrast
Auto Contrast
Image Quality
GP 8, GP 9
February 2013
6-34

Feature
Layout Adjustment
Feature options
Selection
Feature
Feature options
Selection
Color Presets
Lively
Bright
Warm
Cool
Job Assembly
Build Job
Off / On
Color Balance
Normal
Basic Color
Advanced Color
Sample Job
Off / On
Save Current Settings
Setting name
Original Orientation
Upright Images
Sideways Images
Portrait Originals
Landscape Originals
Retrieve Saved Settings
Load / Delete setting
Original Size
Book Copying
Output Format
Auto Detect
Preset Scan Areas
Custom Scan Area
Mixed Size Originals
Table 2 FAX features

Feature
Feature options
Fax
Fax Number and Recipient Speed Dial

Recipient List
List
Both Pages
Left Page Only
Right Page Only
Binding Edge Erase
Reading Order (optional)
Selection
Dialing Characters
Character List
Address Book
Individuals
Cover Sheet
Off / On
2-Sided Scanning
1-Sided
2-Sided
2-Sided, Rotate Side 2
Image Shift
Auto Center
Margin Shift
Presets
Original Type
Edge Erase
All Edges
Individual Edges
Presets
Photo and Text

Photo
Text
Resolution
Invert Image
Mirror Image
Negative Image
Standard (200x100 dpi)

Fine (200 dpi)
Super Fine (600 dpi)
Booklet Creation
Off / On
Fold and Staple (optional)
Original Input
Image Quality
Image Options
Lighten/Darken
Sharpness
Image Enhancement
Manual Contrast
Auto Contrast
Special Pages
Covers
Chapter Starts
Inserts
Exceptions
Layout Adjustment
Original Size
Auto Detect
Preset Scan Areas
Custom Scan Area
Annotations
Page Numbers
Comment
Date
Bates Stamp
Reduce / Split
Reduce to Fit
Split Across Pages
Book Faxing
Both Pages
Left Page Only
Right Page Only
Binding Edge Erase
Transparency Separators
Page Layout
Pages Per Slide

Repeat Image
February 2013
6-35
GP 8, GP 9
Table 2 FAX features
Table 3 Server Fax features
Feature
Feature options
Selection
Feature
Feature options
Selection
Fax Options
Confirmation Report
Print Confirmation
Print on Error Only
(Optional)
Layout Adjustment
Starting Rate
Super G3 (33.6 Kbps)

G3 (14.4 Kbps)
Forced (4800 bps)
Upright Images
Sideways Images
Portrait Originals
Landscape Originals
Original Size
Auto Detect
Preset Scan Areas
Custom Scan Area
Delay Send
Off / Specified Time
Send Header Text
Off / On
Mailboxes
Off
Send to Remote Mailbox
Store to Local Mailbox
Print Local Mailbox Documents
Delete Local Mailbox Documents
Local Polling
Off
Non-Secure Polling
Secure Polling
Stored Local Documents - Print All
/ Delete All
Remote Polling
Poll a Remote Fax

Poll a Remote Mailbox
Job Assembly
Build Job
Off / On
Feature
Feature options
Server Fax
Fax Number and Recipient List
Fax Options
Delay Send
Off / Specified Time
Job Assembly
Build Job
Off / On
Table 4 Workflow scanning features

Feature
Feature options
Selection
Workflow Scanning
Template List
All Templates
Local Templates
Network Templates
Scan To Home Templates
Public/Private Templates
Output Color
Auto Detect
Black and White
Gray scale
Color
2-Sided Scanning
1-Sided
2-Sided
Original Type
Photo and Text

Photo
Text
Map
Newspaper/Magazine
Scan Presets
Sharing and Printing

Archival - Small File Size
OCR
High Quality Printing
Simple Scan
Image Options
Lighten/Darken
Sharpness
Saturation
Image Enhancement
Manual Contrast
Auto Contrast
Table 3 Server Fax features
Image Quality
Dialing Characters
Fax Directory
2-Sided Scanning
1-Sided
2-Sided
Original Type
Photo and Text

Photo
Text
Resolution
Standard (200 x 100 dpi)

Fine (200 dpi)
Image Options
Lighten / Darken
Image Enhancement
Manual Contrast
Auto Contrast
GP 9
Selection
Advanced Settings
February 2013
6-36
Table 4 Workflow scanning features

Feature
Feature options
Selection
Reprint Saved Jobs feature
Resolution
72 dpi
100 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Print From
Feature
Feature options
Selection
Normal Quality / Highest Quality

Small File Size / Largest File
Size
E-mail
New Recipient
Address Book
From
Quality / File Size
Layout Adjustment
Default Public Folder

Table 6 E-mail features
Update Now
Subject
Upright Images
Sideways Images
Portrait Originals
Landscape Originals
Output Color
Auto Detect
Black and White
Gray scale
Color
Original Size
Auto Detect
Preset Scan Areas
Custom Scan Area
2-Sided Scanning
1-Sided
2-Sided
Original Type
All Edges
All Edges
Individual Edges
Blank Page Management
Include Blank Pages / Remove

Blank Pages
Photo and Text

Photo
Text
Map
Newspaper/Magazine
Scan Presets
Sharing and Printing

Archival - Small File Size
OCR
High Quality Printing
Simple Scan
Image Options
Lighten/Darken
Sharpness
Saturation
Image Enhancement
Manual Contrast
Auto Contrast
Resolution
72 dpi
100 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Quality/File Size

Small File Size / Largest File Size
File Name
File Format
PDF
PDF/A
XPS
Multi-Page TIFF
TIFF (1 File per Page)
JPEG (1 File per Page)
If File Already Exists
Job Assembly
Saved Jobs
Update Templates

Filing Options
Table 5 Reprint Saved Jobs
Advanced Settings
Add Number to Name

Add Date and Time to Name
Add to TIFF/JPEG Folder
Overwrite Existing File
Do Not Save
Document Management
Add File Destinations
Build Job
Table 5 Reprint Saved Jobs

Reprint Saved Jobs feature
Saved Jobs
NOTE: Pre 071.XXX.XXX.XXX software
February 2013
6-37
GP 9
Table 6 E-mail features

Feature
Feature options
Selection
Layout Adjustment
Upright Images
Sideways Images
Portrait Originals
Landscape Originals
Original Size
E-mail Options
Feature
All Edges
Individual Edges
Blank Page Management
Include Blank Pages / Remove

Blank Pages
Feature options
Selection
File Format
TIFF / PDF / PDF-A

Advanced Settings
Auto Detect
Preset Scan Areas
Custom Scan Area
Edge Erase

Table 7 Internet Fax features
File Name
Scan from a xerox multifunction unit

Undo / Save
File Format
PDF
PDF/A
XPS
Multi-Page TIFF
TIFF (1 File per Page)
JPEG (1 File per Page)
Layout Adjustment
Image Options
Lighten/Darken
Sharpness
Saturation
Image Enhancement
Manual Contrast
Auto Contrast
Resolution
72 dpi
100 dpi
150 dpi
200x100 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Quality / File Size

Small File Size / Largest File Size
Upright Images
Sideways Images
Portrait Originals
Landscape Originals
Original Size
Auto Detect
Preset Scan Areas
Custom Scan Area
File Format
Multi-Page TIFF
PDF
PDF/A
Message
Undo / Save
Reply To
Job Assembly
Build Job
Off / On
Feature
Feature options
Selection
Internet Fax
New Recipient
Address Book
From
Message
Undo / Save
Subject
Reply To
Search / Save
Output Color
Auto Detect
Black and White
Gray scale
Color
Acknowledgement Report
Off / Print Report
Build Job
Off / On
Table 7 Internet Fax features
2-Sided Scanning
1-Sided
2-Sided
Original Type
Photo and Text

Photo
Text
Map
Newspaper/Magazine
GP 9
Internet Fax Options
Job Assembly
February 2013
6-38
DC Motor with Integral Encoder
This procedure describes how to check the following motors:
NOTE: This type of motor has the normal drive voltages for a DC motor, plus the +5V and 0V
lines for the encoder. The encoder has two outputs, A and B, producing +5V pulses when the
motor is on. When the motor is running in one direction, the encoder A pulses lead the encoder
B pulses. In the other direction, encoder B pulses lead encoder A pulses. In this way the controller can detect that the motor is running in the correct direction.
Two Wire DC Motor.
Four Wire Stepper Motor
Six Wire Stepper Motor.

Check the operation of the motor as follows:
Initial Actions
WARNING
Go to wiring diagram shown in Figure 1. Disconnect PJA. Check that the drive voltage, in
this case +50V, is measured between pins 5 and 7 when the component control code for
the motor is entered. If the drive voltage is present, install a new motor.
Disconnect PJ104. Check that the drive voltage is measured between pins 1 and 6, when
the component control code for the motor is entered. If the drive voltage is present, check
the wiring and connectors to the motor. If the drive voltage is not present, check the power
to the media path driver PWB. If the power to the PWB is good, install a new media path
driver PWB.
1.
Check that the motor is free to rotate.
2.
Check that all the motors mechanisms are clean, free to move and lubricated correctly.
3.
Enter the component control code for the motor, refer to dC330. Run the motor for 30 seconds, if the motor shows signs of or can be heard to slow down, then the motor is defective. Install a new motor.
References:
Perform the appropriate procedure:
Two Wire DC Motor.
REP 1.1 Wiring Harness Repairs.
Four Wire Stepper Motor.
Six Wire Stepper Motor.
NOTE: When checking for the presence of +5V pulses, use the standard digital multimeter.
Using the DC volts range, or the AC volts range, expect to obtain a reading greater than 1V
and less than 4 volts, while the motor is running. The actual value will depend on the meters
reaction to square waves and to the particular frequency of the pulses. It is common to obtain a
reading of 2 to 3 volts. If the meter has a minimum and maximum recording facility, expect a
maximum value of around +4.9V, and a minimum value of around +0.2V.
4.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example
only. Go to the wiring diagram associated with the RAP for the correct information.
Two Wire DC Motor
Check the operation of the encoder as follows:
NOTE: In cases where the motor may be driven forward or backward, the same two feed wires
are used, but the voltages on them are reversed, to reverse the motor direction. Such motors
may have two component control codes, for forward and reverse. A typical application is a tray
lift motor with a tray-up and a tray-down direction.
Go to wiring diagram shown in Figure 1. At PJA, check for pulses on pins 2 and 4 to GND
when the motor is running. If pulses are not present, go to the next step on this list. If
pulses are present, check for pulses at PJ104, pins13 and 15 to GND. If pulses are not
present at PJ104, check the wiring to the motor and repair to install new wiring. If pulses
are present at PJ104, install a new media path driver PWB.
Pulses are not present at PJA, pins 2 and 4, when the motor is running. Disconnect PJA
and check for +5V between pins 1 and 3. If +5V is measured, install a new motor. If +5V is
not measured, disconnect PJ104. Check for +5V between pins 2 and 14 on the PWB. If
+5V is measured, check the wiring to the motor, and repair or install new wiring. If +5V is
not measured at the PWB, check the power to the PWB. If the power is good, install a
new media path driver PWB.
Go to the wiring diagram shown in Figure 1. Disconnect R011. Check that the drive voltage, in this case +24V, is measured when the component control code for the motor is
entered. If the drive voltage is measured, install a new motor. If the drive voltage is not
measured, continue to the next step.
Disconnect PJ202. Check that the drive voltage can be measured on the PWB when the
component control code for the motor forward is entered. If no drive voltage is measured,
check the power to the PWB. If the power is good install a new PWB. If the drive voltage
is measured at the PWB, check the wiring to the motor. Repair or install new wiring.
References:
References:
February 2013
6-39
GP 10
Four Wire Stepper Motor

NOTE: A stepper motor with an internal open circuit may appear to be fully functional under
dC330 component control. However, under normal operation it will run with intermittent failure.
Use the standard digital meter to check that the resistance of the stepper motor coils are similar.
Go to wiring diagram shown in Figure 1. Disconnect PJB. Check the phase pulses to
GND on the harness when the component control code for the motor is entered. If the
pulses are present, install a new motor.
Disconnect PJ202. Check the phase pulses to GND at the PWB when the component
control code for the motor is entered. If the pulses are present, check the connections and
wiring. Repair or install new wiring as necessary. If pulses are not present at the PWB,
install a new PWB.
References:
Six Wire Stepper Motor

NOTE: A stepper motor with an internal open circuit may appear to be fully functional under
dC330 component control. However, under normal operation it will run with intermittent failure.
Use the standard digital meter to check that the resistance of the stepper motor coils are similar.
Go to wiring diagram shown in Figure 1. Disconnect T012. Check the +24V supply and
the phase pulses to GND when the component control code for the motor is entered. If
the supply and pulses are present, install a new motor.
Check the connectors and wiring to the motor. Repair or install new wiring, as necessary.
Disconnect PJ102. Check the +24V. If +24V is not present, check the power to the PWB.
If the power is good, install a new PWB. Check the phase pulses at the PWB. If the phase
pulses are not present at the PWB, install a new PWB.
References:
GP 10
February 2013
6-40
+9)3:%
3/;;
5
1,363/,702725
027
3/
$
):'95(99
3-
9
3-
):'95(99

$
7
$
9
$
9

3+$6($
$
3+$6($
$

3+$6(%
$
3+$6(%
$
(175<)(('
02725
027
3/
0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
3/;;
3-$

027250
(1&2'(5
3/;;

9
3-
9
(1&$0272138/6(69

(1&%0272138/6(69
3-
9

9
;;;

3-

):'95(99
):'95(99
%/8
5('
3-%
3+$6($
%51
5('
251
3+$6($
3+$6(%
3+$6(%

027250$
3/;;
<(/
;;;
78$
Figure 1 Wiring diagram
February 2013
6-41
GP 10
GP 11 How to Check a Sensor
Procedure
Description
This procedure applies to both sensor types, but here the upper sensor is used as an example.
Use this procedure to check the operation of all types of sensor.
For the upper sensor in the wiring diagram shown in Figure 1:
NOTE: The upper circuit diagram, in Figure 1 shows a reflective sensor and the lower sensor
is a flag sensor. Some sensors have a resistor within the sensor, as in the upper sensor, and
other sensors require a resistor on the PWB, as in the case of the lower sensor. The resistor
limits the current through the LED. The voltage to the sensor LED with an external resistor, is
typically 1.2V.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are examples only.
Go to the wiring diagram associated with the RAP for the correct information.
NOTE: In some cases, two sensors are used to form an interruptible beam of light. In these
cases, the LED of one sensor and the sensing element of the other sensor are used. Treat the
two sensors as if they were housed in the same body for diagnostic purposes, ignoring the
unused part of each sensor. If the combined sensors do not operate correctly and the beam
path is clear of obstruction, it may be necessary to install both new sensors.
Actuate the sensor and check for a change in voltage at PJ184, pin 5. If the voltage
changes, install a new PWB. If the voltage does not change, continue to the next step.
Disconnect PJ1. Check for +5V and 0V at PJ1 on the harness.
Disconnect PJ184. Check the wiring and the connectors for the sensor circuit.
Check for +5V and 0V at PJ184 on the DADF PWB.
If necessary, install new components or repair the wiring.
References:
Initial Actions
WARNING
1.
Make sure that the sensor is installed correctly.
2.
Clean the sensor and the area around the sensor.
3.
If a flag actuator is installed, check that it has free movement and is aligned correctly with
the sensor.
4.
Check that the paper path is clear.
5.
If the sensor actuates by a surface that reflects, check that the surface is clean. Also
make sure that there is not an obstruction between the sensor and the surface.
6.
If the sensor actuates by an encoder disc, ensure the holes or gaps in the disc are aligned
correctly with the sensor.
Sensor Action
In the upper sensor in Figure 1, when light from the LED is reflected by the paper onto the
photo-sensitive transistor, the sensing line, PJ1, pin 1 is low. When no paper is present, no light
falls on the transistor and the sensing line is high.
In the lower sensor, in Figure 1, when light from the LED is allowed to fall on the photo-sensitive transistor, the sensing line, PJ192, pin1, is low. When light from the LED is blocked by the
flag, the sensing line is high.
Quick Sensor Check

Enter the component control code for the sensor, refer to dC330. Actuate the sensor. If the display changes, the sensor operates correctly. If the display does not change, perform the procedure.
GP 11
February 2013
6-42

Description
Use this procedure to check a clutch or solenoid.
Initial Actions
WARNING
1.
For a clutch, check that the shafts, gears, rolls etc., associated with the clutch are free to
rotate, clean and lubricated where applicable.
2.
For a solenoid, check that the solenoid is free to actuate and that the mechanisms associated with the solenoid are free to move.
Procedure
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
NOTE: When a solenoid is energized in diagnostics, movement is seen. When a clutch is energized in diagnostics, the sound of the clutch action is heard. If possible, run the motor connected to the clutch to confirm when the clutch is energized.
1.
Enter the dC330 output code for the clutch or solenoid. If the clutch or solenoid does not
energize, continue at step2. If the energize of the clutch or solenoid is good, perform SCP
5 Final actions.
2.
Figure 1, disconnect PJ202, check for +24V at PJ202 pin 1 on the wiring side of the connector, If the voltage is not correct, perform 01H +24V Distribution RAP.
3.
Reconnect PJ202, enter the dC330 output code for the clutch or solenoid, while measuring the voltage between PJ183 pin 4 and the machine frame. If the voltage does not
change when the code is entered, Install a new DADH PWB, PL 5.10.
4.
There may be an intermittent fault, perform the actions that follow:
Check the wiring associated with this circuit. Repair or install new components as
necessary
Check that all connectors associated with this circuit are correctly and securely connected.
Operate the clutch or solenoid under normal machine running conditions. If the
clutch or solenoid operates intermittently or with hesitation, install new parts.
Check that the clutch or solenoid has enough drive to operate the mechanism to
which it is attached, if necessary install a new clutch or solenoid.
References:
February 2013
6-43
GP 12
GP 13 How to Check a Switch

Description
Use this procedure to check the operation of a switch.
NOTE: The wiring diagram in Figure 1 shows an home position switch actuated by the movement of a paddle.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Manually check that the switch operates. Ensure that the magnet or other actuator has enough
mechanical movement to operate the switch.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code for the switch, actuate and deactuate the switch. The display changes.
Y
N
Refer to Figure 1. Disconnect T072. +5V is available between pin 1 and pin 2 on the
wiring side of the connector.
Y
N
Disconnect PJ5. +5V is available at PJ5 between pins 3 and 4 on the HVF PWB.
Y
N
Perform 01D +5V distribution RAP and 01L 0V Distribution RAP. If both voltage
supplies are good, install a new HVF PWB.
Check the wiring between PJ5 and T072. Repair or install new parts as necessary.
Install a new ejector lower paddle home switch S11-180, PL 11.140.
The switch is operating correctly, check and adjust if necessary, the mechanism that actuates
the switch.
References:
GP 13
February 2013
6-44
GP 14 How to Switch Off the Machine or Switch On the

Machine
NOTE: If the power lead is removed from the outlet due to a POPO. Wait for at least 1
minute before reinstalling the power lead. This allows time for the power supplies to discharge and reset.
Purpose
To show how to switch off or switch on the machine, without the loss of customer data or damage to the system hardware.
Switch On Procedure
1.
After a machine has been switched off, wait a minimum of one minute before the machine
is switched on.
WARNING
2.
After a service call, ensure that all service tools are removed from the machine.
Do not use the on/off switch as a safety disconnect device. The on/off switch is not a
disconnect device. Disconnect the power cord from the supply to isolate the equipment.
3.
Connect the power lead from the power supply outlet to the machine.
4.
Press the on/off switch.
Refer to:
Switch Off Procedure.
Switch On Procedure.
Power Saver Modes
NOTE: Pressing the on/off switch a second time will cancel the power on request. The
machine will attempt to switch off correctly.
5.
The machine will perform the following:
A power on self test (POST). The POST checks that the hardware resources are
available to run the operating system. If a POST fault is detected, the machine is
prevented from booting. The fault is communicated via a blinking LED on the image
marking engine PWB. Refer to OF 16 POST Error Rap.
A print engine self test (PEST). The PEST checks the heaters, sensors, motors and
mechanical subsystems. If the PEST fails, the most critical fault code is logged in the
fault history. The full list of fault codes is logged in the PEST error log. Refer to
dC123.
Switch Off Procedure

CAUTION
To prevent internal ink spillage, allow 30 minutes before the machine is moved after switching
off.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the power lead or interrupt the electricity supply before the power down is
complete. The data and software can become damaged.
1.
Press the on/off switch. A confirmation window will open.
6.
NOTE: If the machine is in power save mode, the machine will exit to Ready To Scan
before commencing the switch off procedure. If the machine is in software upgrade mode,
a message is displayed to warn against switching off the machine.
2.
The drum, pre-heaters and printheads have reached operational temperature.
Ink purge then wipe of the printheads has been completed.
The printheads have been docked.
Cleaning page and ink on drum routines have been completed.
If the machine does not initialize, go to the appropriate RAP:
If the machine switches on, but the UI is blank.
If the machine does not respond, go to the OF 3 Unresponsive Machine RAP.
If the machine switches on, but does not respond, go to the OF 5 Boot Up Failure
RAP.
Confirm by selecting Power Down on the UI.
Go to the OF 2 UI Touch Screen Failure RAP.
NOTE: If the on/off switch is pressed again before either confirm has been selected or 60
seconds has elapsed, power off will be cancelled. The machine will return to normal operation.
3.
7.
The machine is ready to print after:
Service Mode
When a standard power off has been initiated, the machine will:
Display a power off message.
Power button on the UI will blink.
Go off line and stop receiving jobs.
The machine can be switched on directly into Service Mode, refer to GP 1.
Power Saver Modes
NOTE: The machine will attempt to print the current sheet and send all sheets in the
paper path to the output tray.
The power saver modes are selected from the Tools menu. For the power saver default settings, refer to Table 1.
Table 1 Default settings
4.
Stop processing any remaining jobs in the print queue.
Send the scan carriage assembly to the home position.
Mode
Send the marking unit upper and lower carriages to the parked position. The carriage locking pins will engage.
Intelligent ready with

Fast resume Off
Send the head maintenance wiper assembly to the parked position.
Intelligent ready with

Fast resume On
When the machine has switched off, remove the power lead from the outlet.
February 2013
6-45
Low Power Timeout
Sleep Mode Timeout
5 minutes
60 minutes
60 minutes
120 minutes
GP 14
Table 1 Default settings

Mode
Low Power Timeout
Sleep Mode Timeout
Purpose
Job activated with

Fast resume Off
5 minutes
60 minutes
Use this procedure to check the voltage and the communication status on the PWB.
Job activated with

Fast resume On
60 minutes
120 minutes
Refer to
Scheduled mode (within sched- Not applicable (no low

uled times)
power entry)
Not applicable (no low power

entry)
Power Supply Unit
Scheduled mode (outside

scheduled times)
120 minutes
Drum Driver PWB
Printhead PWB
Low Power Mode
IME Control PWB
Entry to low power mode is from Ready to Copy mode. In low power mode, the following conditions apply:
3 Tray Module PWB
LCSS PWB
HVF PWB
HVF Booklet Maker PWB
Scanner PWB
60 minutes
The Power button on the UI will flash.
All 5V, 12V and 24V supplies are off.
The single board controller hard disk is powered down.
The UI backlight and display are powered down.
The image marking engine thermal system is at low power settings. The printheads are
lowered onto the drum and the drum heated.
The DADH and scanner are powered down.
The AC supply to the LCSS or HVF is switched off.
All power to the USB ports is switched off.
The image marking engine fans are switched off
Power Supply Unit

Table 1 indicates the states of the LEDs on a good working power supply unit, PL 1.15 Item 2.
Table 1 Power supply unit
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
Sleep Mode
DS2
Green
On
+3.3V ESTAR present
Entry to sleep mode is from low power mode. In sleep mode, the following conditions apply:
DS7
Yellow
On
+5V present
The Power button on the UI is lit.
DS1
Red
On
+50V present
All 5V, 12V and 24V supplies are off.
The single board controller hard disk is powered down.
The UI backlight and display are powered down.
The image marking engine thermal system is at sleep settings. The printheads are
retracted. The drum heaters are powered down and the drum will not rotate.
The DADH and scanner are powered down.
Except for the door sensors, the 3 tray module is powered down.
The AC supply to the LCSS or HVF is switched off.
All power to the USB ports is switched off.
The image marking engine fans are switched off
NOTE: Refer to GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements for further information.
GP 14, GP 15
February 2013
6-46
Refer to Figure 1 for the location of the LEDs on the power supply.
Green
Yellow
Refer to Figure 2 for the location of the LEDs on the media path driver PWB.
Red
Figure 2 Media path
Figure 1 Power supply unit
Drum Driver PWB
Table 2 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working media path driver PWB, PL 1.15
Item 5.
Table 3 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working drum driver PWB, PL 1.15 Item 4.
Table 3 Drive Driver PWB
Table 2 Media Path Driver PWB
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
DS601
Green
On
+3.3V ESTAR present
DS802
Red
Off
On during initialization and at IME fault
DS602
Green
On
+12V present
DS801
Green
On
No IME faults detected
DS603
Green
On
+50V present
DS901
Green
On
+50V present
DS902
Green
On
+5V present
February 2013
6-47
GP 15
Refer to Figure 3 for the location of the LEDs on the drum driver PWB.
Refer to Figure 4 for the location of the LEDs on the marking unit driver PWB.
Figure 4 Marking unit driver PWB
Printhead PWB
The Table 5 indicates the state of the LED on a good working printhead PWB, PL 91.20 Item 3.
Table 5 Printhead PWB
Figure 3 Drum driver PWB
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
DS401
Green
On
+3.3V present

Table 4 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working marking unit driver PWB, PL 92.10
Item 4.
Table 4 Marking Unit Driver PWB
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
DS201
Green
On
CPU activity
GP 15
February 2013
6-48
Refer to Figure 5 for the location of the LED on the printhead PWB.
Refer to Figure 6 for the location of the LEDs on the IME control PWB.
Figure 6 IME controller PWB
IME Control PWB

Table 6 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working IME control PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1.
Table 6 IME controller PWB
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
DS610
Green
On
+3.3V ESTAR present
DS609
Green
On
+5V present
DS608
Green
On
+12V present
DS603
Green
On
-12v present
DS607
Green
On
+24Vpresent
DS606
Green
On
+50V present
DS602
Green
On
-50V present
DS601
Green
On
Lit equals CPU ready
DS501
Green
On
Lit equals CPU asleep
DS605
Red
Off
On when a CPU fault
DS604
Red
Off
On when Cable fault detected
DS301
Red
Off
On when IME error detected
DS302
Green
Flashing
IME good
February 2013
6-49
GP 15
Refer to Figure 7 for the location of the LEDs on the single board controller PWB.
Table 7 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working single board controller PWB, PL
3.11 Item 13.
LED ID
LED colour
States
Description
CR1
Green
On
1.8V power is on
CR2
Green
Off
On
SIM is good
Indicates a SIM error
CR3
Green
On
Off
SIM active
No SIM present
CR4
Green
On
3.3V SLEEP present
CR5
Green
On
3.3V present
CR7
Green
On / Puls- Various alpha-numeric codes, refer to OF

16. The decimal point is the heatbeat and
ing
pulses.
CR8
Green
On
+1.8V SLEEP present
CR9
Green
On
Image clock enabled
CR12
Green
On
All power good. Appears too as an I/O for

SW assurance that SLEEP power rails are
restored.
CR14
Red
Off
On
Normal state
Indicates power failure
CR24
Green
Off
FPGA is programmed
CR10, CR11,
CR13
Not used
3 Tray Module PWB
Internet connector
left side PJ14
Green / Yellow On
Internet link made.

Green: 1000
Yellow: 100
OFF: 10
Table 8 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working 3 tray module PWB, PL 73.16 Item
4.
Internet connector
right side PJ14
Green / Yellow On
Flashing
Internet activity
Any link
Transmitting or receiving data
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
CR19
Green
On
+5V present
CR18
Green
On
+24V present
CR20
Green
Flashes
LED flashes for 3TM activity
GP 15
Table 8 Three Trays Module PWB
February 2013
6-50
Refer to Figure 8 for the location of the LEDs on the 3 tray module PWB.
Refer to Figure 9 for the location of the LEDs on the LCSS PWB.
Figure 8 3 tray module PWB
Figure 9 LCSS PWB
LCSS PWB
HVF PWB
Table 9 indicates the state of the LED on a good working LCSS PWB, PL 12.75 Item 1.
Table 10 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working HVF PWB, PL 12.140 Item 2.
Table 9 HVF PWB
Table 10 HVF PWB
LED ID
LED colour
Status
Description
LED ID
LED colour Status
Description
LED 1
Red
Flashes
LED flashes twice a second indicates the

software is running.
LED 1, 2
Red
Not used
LED 3
Red
LED 2
Red
On
Indicates that all interlocks are made

(+24V)
Flashes LED flashes at 2Hz for software operating in normal

mode. This indicates the functioning of the CPU. If
this LED is OFF, the CPU does not function and a new
HVF control PWB is required.
LED 4, 5, 6, 7 Red
Not used
LED 8
Red
On
+24V present and all interlocks are closed
LED 9
Red
On
+5V present
February 2013
6-51
GP 15
Refer to Figure 10 for the location of the LEDs on the HVF PWB.
Refer to Figure 11 for the location of the LEDs on the PWB.
Figure 11 HVF booklet maker PWB
Figure 10 HVF PWB
HVF Booklet Maker PWB
Scanner PWB
Table 11 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good working HVF booklet maker PWB, PL
12.175 Item 10.
Table 12 indicates the state of the LEDs on a good scanner PWB, PL 62.16 Item 8.
Table 12 Scanner PWB
Table 11 HVF BM PWB
LED ID
LED colour Status
Description
LED ID
LED colour Status
Description
D13
Red
On
+24V present
LED 1
Red
Off
Steady indicates a fault or other abnormal status
D14
Red
On
+12 V present
LED 2
Yellow
Flashing Flashing indicates software operating in normal mode
D15
Red
On
+3.3V present
LED 3
Orange
On
D16
Red
On
+5V present
LED 1
Green
Flashing Heartbeat, flashes for software operating in normal mode
LED 2
Red
Off
+24V present and tri-folder door and top cover interlocks

closed. Or without tri-folder interlock cheat in PJ553 and
logic cheat in PJ563.
LED 4
Orange
On
+24V is within the voltage and current limits
LED 5
Blue
On
+5V present
GP 15
February 2013
6-52
If there is a hardware reset, e.g. a voltage dip on the 3.3V

power line, the LED will turn on and only switch off when
the software re-initializes.
Refer to Figure 12 for the location of the LEDs on the scanner PWB.
GP 16 How to Safely Lift or Move Heavy Modules

Purpose
Use this procedure when lifting or moving heavy modules.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
When removing heavy modules from the machine, the following instructions must be observed:
1.
Ensure that a suitable stable surface to support the module after removal is located in
close proximity to the machine.
NOTE: Other parts of the machine are not a suitable stable surface.
2.
Ensure that the height of the support surface is between 750 mm and 1000 mm (30
inches and 39 inches).
3.
Ensure that there are no hazards or obstacles between the machine and the support surface.
4.
If instructed to remove the module toward the rear of the machine and only one person is
available, the module must be removed while standing at the rear of the machine. If two
people are available, the module may be removed while standing at the front of the
machine.
5.
Two people are required if the module is to be lifted on to the floor or lifted from the floor.
Figure 12 Scanner PWB
February 2013
6-53
GP 15, GP 16
NOTE: Refer to the configuration report for the machine IP address.
Purpose
2.
Click on Properties, then General Setup, then Cloning.
To save and restore the customers unique network configuration setting.
3.
Scroll down to the Install Clone File area. Click on Browse to locate the relevant clone file.
4.
Click on Install.
The clone file (to hard disk) must be performed at the first service call and whenever the customer changes the network settings or after the system software is changed.
NOTE: The machine will reboot and be unavailable for several minutes.
Procedure
How to Save a Clone File
1.
On the customers workstation, open the web browser. Enter the machines IP address in
the web browser Address field, then press the enter key. The machine web page will
open.
NOTE: Refer to the configuration report for the machines IP address.
2.
Click on Properties.
3.
4.
Select General Setup.
5.
Select Cloning.
6.
Select the relevant settings to clone.
7.
Select Clone.
8.
In the Cloning Instructions area, right click on the (Cloning.dlm) link. Select Save Target
As.
9.
Ask the customer to specify a file name and location.

NOTE: Ensure the file extension is .dlm.
10. Select Save.

How to Install a Clone File - Option 1
1.
On the customers workstation, open the web browser. Enter the machine IP address in
the web browser address field. Then press the Enter key. The machine web page will
open.
NOTE: Refer to the configuration report for the machine IP address.
2.
Click on Status.
3.
Select Welcome.
4.
Click on the I Have A Cloning File button.
5.
6.
Scroll down to the Install Clone File area. Click on Browse to locate the relevant clone file.
7.
Click on Save.
NOTE: The machine will reboot and be unavailable for several minutes.
How to Install a Clone File - Option 2

1.
On the customers workstation, open the web browser. Enter the machine IP address in
the web browser address field. Then press the Enter key. The machine web page will
open.
GP 17
February 2013
6-54
GP 18 Machine Lubrication
GP 19 Machine SIM Card Matrix
Purpose
Purpose
To give information on the use of lubricants.
To identify the correct SIM card with the correct machine configuration, Figure 1.
Procedure
Procedure
CAUTION
Install the SIM card that is compatible with the machine:
Only use lubricants as directed. Incorrect use of lubricants could seriously affect the performance of the machine.
9301 machine indicated by the letter A or no coloured strip.
Take the following precautions when performing machine lubrication:
9302 machine indicated by the letter B or a green strip.
Wear disposable gloves, PL 26.10 Item 5.
9303 machine indicated by the letter C or a yellow strip.
Only use lubricants that are specified in the Parts List.
Only lubricate parts of the machine as directed in the relevant RAPs, Repairs and Adjustments etc.
Apply only the smallest amount of lubricant, sufficient to lubricate the parts. To prevent
contamination, remove any surplus lubricant before the machine is run.
Take great care not to contaminate other parts of the machine with the lubricant.
NOTE: When the machine is installed, the machine will only recognize a SIM with the
machines serial number written to it. If your customer has lost the SIM or the SIM has been
damaged, a pre-programmed SIM must be ordered. This can be obtained by escalating the
problem through normal channels, and a pre-programmed SIM with the customers serial number will be sent.
The following information is required when ordering a pre-programmed SIM:
Machine serial number.
Machine speed, 9301, 9302 or 9303.
Billing plan, 2 tier or 3 tier.
Service plan, WW metered, XC / XE sold or DMO sold.
February 2013
6-55
GP 18, GP 19
Figure 1 SIM card matrix
GP 19
February 2013
6-56
GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications
Table 2 European papers
Purpose
Paper Size
Nominal gsm
Description
Paper Type
To list the paper and media specifications.
A3
100
Xerox DigitalColour Colotech
Bond
SRA3
100
Bond
Specifications
A3
120
Bond
The machine design and performance is optimized for:
SRA3
120
Bond
A3
90
Bond
Xerox 4200 (20lb / 75 gsm) 8.5 x 11 inch paper.
SRA3
90
Bond
Xerox Premier TCF 80 gsm A4 paper.
A4
80
Exclusive
Bond
A4
90
Exclusive
Bond
Table 1. Performance indication.
A3
90
Exclusive
Bond
Table 2 European papers.
A4
80
Performer
Bond
Table 3 American papers.
A4
80
Xerox Recycled Supreme
Bond
Table 4 Input / output paper sizes. The table defines the paper sizes that are recognized
by the DADH, document glass and the paper trays when using an OCT output device.
A4
80
Xerox Premier
Bond
Table 5 LCSS output paper sizes. The table defines the paper sizes that can be delivered
to the output trays of a LCSS.
A4
80
Xerox Business
Bond
A3
80
Xerox Business
Bond
A5
80
Xerox Premier
Bond
A4
90
Xerox Premier
Bond
Table 7 Output stock performance. The table shows the media (stock) performance constraints for the output. Performance will not be guaranteed for media not listed in the
table. Media that is smaller than 139 mm (5.5 inches) in either the process or cross process direction cannot be duplexed.
A4
120
Xerox Premier
Bond
A4
100
Exclusive
Bond
A4
90
Xerox DigitalColour Colotech +
Bond
A4
100
Bond
Table 8 Input document categories definitions.
A4
120
Bond
Table 9 Input document condition definitions.
A4
80
Xprint
Bond
Table 10 Degraded performance paper list.
A4
90
Xprint
Bond
Table 11 European envelope sizes
A3
90
Xprint
Bond
Table 12 American envelope sizes
A4
100
Xprint
Bond
Table 13 U.S. paper weight conversion. Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than for U.S. bond weight.
A4
120
Xprint
Bond
A4
100
Xerox Colotech + Natural White
Bond
A4
80
Xerox Colour Impressions
Bond
A4
90
Bond
A4
100
Bond
A4
120
Xerox Colotech + (Gold)
Bond
A4
90
Bond
A4
100
Bond
A4
78
Carbonless (W / P)
Carbonless
A4
78
Carbonless (W / C)
Carbonless
A4
78
Carbonless (W / C / P, str collated)
Carbonless
A3
160
Xerox Digital Colour Colotech +
Cover
SRA3
160
Cover
A3
200
Cover
SRA3
200
Cover
A4
160
Cover
Table 6 HVF output paper sizes. The table defines the paper sizes that can be delivered
to the output bins of the HVF.
Table 1 Performance indication

Code
Description
Degraded performance (image quality defects, increased jams or bad stacking)
Good performance (good image quality, some jams and poor stacking)
Excellent performance
Size set by customer
Differentiated by market
Size unrecognized and not acceptable
Size unrecognized but acceptable
Not recommended (outside specification)
Size recognized and accepted
February 2013
6-57
GP 20
Table 2 European papers
Table 3 American papers
Paper Size
Nominal gsm
Description
Paper Type
A4
200
Cover
Paper Size
inches
Paper Weight
US bond lb.
Nominal
gsm
Description
Paper Type
A4
160
Cover
11 x 17
28
105
Xerox Color Xpressions +
Bond
A4
200
Cover
11 x 8.5
32
120
Bond
A4
176
Phaser Trifold Brochures
Cover
11 x 17
32
120
Bond
A4
160
Cover
12 x 18
32
120
Bond
A4
200
Cover
8.5 x 11
20
75
Xerox Business Plus
Bond
Cover
8.5 x 14
20
75
Xerox Business Plus
Bond
Cover
11 x 17
20
75
Xerox Business Plus
Bond
Index
8.5 x 11
24
90
Xerox Business Plus
Bond
Xerox Colour Copier / Laser Labels Label
8.5 x 11
28
105
DuraDocument
Bond
Professional Solid Ink High Resolu- Specially

tion Photo Paper
8.5 x 11
20
75
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
8.5 x 14
20
75
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
Professional Solid Ink Business

Cards
Specially
8.5 x 11
28
105
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
8.5 x 11
24
90
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
A4
160
A3
160
A4
200
A4
Xerox Premier 200 White Card
160
A4
169
A4
220
A4
140
Colotech + Supergloss
Specially
8.5 x 11
20
75
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
A4
140
Colotech + gloss coated
Specially
11 x 17
20
75
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
A3
140
Colotech + gloss coated
Specially
11 x 17
24
90
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
50 x 10
160
Dividers White 5 Tab Reverse Collated
Tab
11 x 17
28
105
Xerox Business 4200
Bond
8.5 x 11
24
90
Premium Multipurpose 4024

(Security) PMP
Bond
8.5 x 11
24
90

(Security) PMP
Bond
8.5 x 11
28
105
Xerox Graphic Xpressions
Bond
11 x 17
28
105
Bond
12 x 18
28
105
Bond
8.5 x 11
20
75
Digital Laser Opaque
Bond
8.5 x 11
24
90
Bond
8.5 x 14
24
90
Bond
8.5 x 11
18
68
Bond
8.5 x 11
28
105
Bond
8.5 x 11
24
90

(Security) PMP
Bond
8.5 x 11
20
75
Recycled Multipurpose
Bond
8.5 x 14
20
75
Recycled Multipurpose
Bond
8.5 x 17
20
75
Xerox Business Recycled
Bond
8.5 x 11
80
216
Xerox Graphic Impressions
Cover
11 x 17
80
216
Cover
12 x 18
80
216
Cover
12 x 18
80
216
Cover
8.5 x 11
60
163
Xerox Color Impressions +
Cover
11 x 17
60
163
Cover
50 x 10
160
Dividers White 10 Tab Reverse Col- Tab

lated
50 x 10
160
Dividers White 10 Tab Reverse Col- Tab

lated - 4 Hole
50 x 10
160
Dividers White 5 Tab Reverse Collated - 4 Hole
Tab
Xerox Digital Transparency Type

CLD
Transparency
A4
5 mil

Paper Size
inches
Paper Weight
US bond lb.
Nominal
gsm
Description
Paper Type
8.5 x 11
24
90
Bond
8.5 x 17
24
90
Bond
8.5 x 11
28
105
Bond
8.5 x 17
28
105
Bond
12 x 18
28
105
Bond
8.5 x 11
24
90
Digital Color Parchment
Bond
8.5 x 11
24
90
Bond
8.5 x 14
24
90
Bond
11 x 17
24
90
Bond
8.5 x 11
28
105
Bond
12 x 18
28
105
Bond
GP 20
February 2013
6-58
Paper Size
inches
Paper Weight
US bond lb.
Nominal
gsm
Description
Paper Type
Paper Size
inches
12 x 18
60
163
Cover
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11
80
216
Cover
11 x 17
80
216
Cover
8.5 x 5.5
Statement SEF
Executive SEF
Folio SEF
12 x 18
80
216
Cover
7.25 x 10.5
8.5 x 11
65
176
Phaser Premium Postcards
Cover
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
65
176
Phaser Trifold Brochures
Cover
8.5 x 11
65
176
Xerox 65# Cover
Cover
8.5 x 11
65
176
Cover
11 x 17
65
176
Cover
12 x 18
65
176
Cover
8.5 x 11
80
216
Cover
11 x 17
80
216
Cover
12 x 18
80
216
Cover
8.5 x 11
90 Index
163
Xerox Multipurpose Whit Index
Index
11 x 17
90 Index
163
Xerox Business 4200
Index
8.5 x 11
110 Index
200
Xerox 110# Index Stock
Index
8.5 x 11
NA
160
Xerox Ink Jet / Laser White

Labels
Label
8.5 x 11
24
90
Xerox Premium Multipurpose

4024 PMP
Punched /
Perfed
8.5 x 11
20
80

4024 PMP
Punched /
Perfed
8.5 x 11
24
90

4024 PMP
Punched /
Perfed
8.5 x 11
20
80

4024 PMP
Punched /
Perfed
8.5 x 11
20
78
Premium Digital Carbonless
Speciality
8.5 x 11
63 Cover
169
Professional Solid Ink High Reso- Speciality

lution Photo Paper
8.5 x 11
NA
220
Professional Solid Ink Business

Cards
Speciality
8.5 x 11
NA
165
Phaser solid ink glossy (2 sided)
Speciality
8.5 x 11
NA
150
Digital colour elite gloss
Speciality
9 x 11
60 Cover
160
Xerox Tabs 5 Bank Single

Reverse Collated / 250 ctn
Tab
9 x 11
60 Cover
160

Tab
9 x 11
60 Cover
160

Tab
9 x 11
60 Cover
160

Tab
5 mil
Digital Color Clear Transparency
Transparency
8.5 x 11
February 2013
6-59
Paper Weight
US bond lb.
Nominal
gsm
Description
Paper Type
5 mil
Transparency
Xerox Professional Solid Ink

Transparency
GP 20
For US paper weight conversions refer to Table 13.

Table 4 Input / output Paper sizes
Paper size
Orientation Paper tray size sensing
DADH size sensing
Document glass size

sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
Inch (W x L) mm (W x L)
LEF / SEF
+/-1/32 inch +/-1 mm
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
Tray 3
tray
Tray 5
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
OCT
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
SEF
Y*
* Requires kit
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
LEF
Ledger/Tab- 11 x 17
loid
279 x 432
SEF
Y*
* Requires kit
Invoice
(statement)
8.5 x 5.5
216 x 138
SEF
Y*
Y*
Y*
*ISO A5 or 8.5 x 5.5 cannot be

detected at the same time - market
differentiated
Invoice
(statement)
8.5 x 5.5
216 x 138
LEF
Y*
Y*
Y*

differentiated
Postcard
4.25 x 5.5
108 x 139
SEF
Postcard
4.25 x 5.5
108 x 139
LEF
Cannot be fed in IME
Legal
8.5 x 14
216 x 356
SEF
Y*
Y*
U*
Y*
*Legal and Folio (8.5 x 13) cannot

be detected at the same time market differentiated
ISO A4
8.26 x 11.69
210 x 297
SEF
Y**
Y*
Y*
Y*
*ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13 cannot be

differentiated
** Requires kit
ISO A4
8.26 x 11.69
210 x 297
LEF
ISO A3
11.69 x 16.54 297 x 420
SEF
Y*
* Requires kit
ISO A5
5.83 x 8.27
148 x 210
SEF
Y*
Y*
Y*

differentiated
ISO A5
5.83 x 8.27
148 x 210
LEF
Y*
Y*
Y*
Cannot be fed in the IME

differentiated
ISO A6
4.13 x 5.83
105 x 148
SEF
ISO A6
4.13 x 5.83
105 x 148
LEF
Foolscap or 8.5 x 13
Euroletter
216 x 330
SEF
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y**
Y**
Y**
*ISO A4 or 8.5 x 13 cannot be

differentiated
** Legal and Folio (8.5 x 13) cannot
be detected at the same time market differentiated
JIS B5
182 x 257
SEF
U/C
U/C
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
* Executive and JIS B5 cannot be

differentiated
7.17 x 10.12
GP 20
February 2013
6-60

Paper size
DADH size sensing
Document glass size

sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
+/-1/32 inch +/-1 mm
LEF / SEF
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
tray
Tray 3
Tray 5
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
OCT
JIS B5
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
LEF
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
* Executive and JIS B5 cannot be

differentiated
JIS B4
10.12 x 14.33 257 x 364
SEF
U/C
U/C
JIS B6
5.08 x 7.17
128 x 182
SEF
JIS B6
5.08 x 7.17
128 x 182
LEF
JIS B6
4.29 x 6.93
1285x 176
SEF
ISO B5
6.93 x 9.84
176 x 250
SEF
ISO B5
6.93 x 9.84
176 x 250
LEF
Cannot feed in the IME
ISO B4
9.84 x 13.9
250 x 353
SEF
SB4
9.9 x 14.09
252 x 358
SEF
PostcardLakes
4.5 x 6
114 x 152
SEF
PostcardLakes
4.5 x 6
114 x 152
LEF
Postcard
5x7
127 x 178
SEF
Postcard
5x7
127 x 178
LEF
OufukuHagaki
Postcard
5.83 x 7.87
148 x 200
SEF
OufukuHagaki
Postcard
5.83 x 7.87
148 x 200
LEF
6 x 9 inch
6x9
152 x 229
SEF
6 x 9 inch
6x9
152 x 229
LEF
Royal
Octavo
6 x 9.5
152 x 241
SEF
Royal
Octavo
6 x 9.5
152 x 241
LEF
Foolscap
Quarto
6.5 x 8.25
165 x 206
SEF
Foolscap
Quarto
6.5 x 8.25
165 x 206
LEF
Crown
Quarto
7.25 x 9.5
184 x 241
SEF
Crown
Quarto
7.25 x 9.5
184 x 241
LEF
February 2013
6-61
GP 20

Paper size
DADH size sensing
Document glass size

sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
+/-1/32 inch +/-1 mm
LEF / SEF
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
tray
Tray 3
Tray 5
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
OCT
Executive
7.25 x 10.5
184 x 267
SEF
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
U*
Y*
* Executive and ISO B5 cannot be

differentiated
Executive
7.25 x 10.5
184 x 267
LEF
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
U*
Y*
* Executive and ISO B5 cannot be

differentiated
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
SEF
16K Taiwan 7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
LEF
Quarto
8 x 10
203 x 254
SEF
Quarto
8 x 10
203 x 254
LEF
8 x 10.5
203 x 267
SEF
8 x 10.5
203 x 267
LEF
8 x 13 inch
foolscap
8 x 13
203 x 330
SEF
8.26 x 10
210 x 254
SEF
8.26 x 10
210 x 254
LEF
8.26 x 10.63
210 x 270
SEF
8.26 x 10.63
210 x 270
LEF
8.26 x 13
210 x 330
SEF
Foolscap
Folio
8.25 x 13.06
209 x 333
SEF
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7
215 x 273
SEF
Demi Quarto 8.46 x 10.7
215 x 273
LEF
8.46 x 10.83
215 x 275
SEF
8.46 x 10.83
215 x 275
LEF
Folio (Spain) 8.46 x 12.4
215 x 315
SEF
8.66 x 13
220 x 330
SEF
8.75 x 11.69
223 x 297
SEF
8.75 x 11.69
223 x 297
LEF
Arch A
9 x 12
229 x 305
SEF
Accounting
10 x 14
254 x 356
SEF
10 x 15
254 x 381
SEF
8K Taiwan
10.51 x 15.28 267 x 388
SEF
12 x 8 (Tab- 12 x 18
loid Extra)
305 x 457
SEF
SRA3
320 x 450
SEF
105 x 241
SEF
12.6 x 17.72
Commercial 4.13 x 9.49

#10 Envelopes
GP 20
February 2013
6-62

Paper size
DADH size sensing
Document glass size

sensing
Output
device Notes
Common
Name
+/-1/32 inch +/-1 mm
LEF / SEF
Tray 1
and 2
Bypass
tray
Tray 3
Tray 5
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
NASG
Eur /
Asia
Latin
OCT
6 x 9 Envelopes
6.00 x 9.00
152 x 229
SEF
DL Envelopes
4.33 x 8.27
110 x 210
SEF
C5 Envelopes
6.34 x 9.00
162 x 229
SEF
C4 Envelopes
9.00 x 12.76
229 x 324
SEF
9 x 12 Enve- 9.00 x 12.00

lopes
152 x 305
SEF
1.
For paper sizes designated Y, no user action will be required beyond correct positioning of
the paper in the input device and confirmation of size loaded on the GUI.
2.
For paper sizes designated U, the user will be able to select the size from a pre-programmed list on the UI.
3.
For paper sizes designated C, the user will have to enter the paper dimensions at the UI.
February 2013
6-63
GP 20
LCSS Output Paper Sizes

The following table defines the size which can be delivered to the 2K LCSS.
Table 5 LCSS output paper sizes
Paper Size
Orientation
Output
Staple position
Option
Common Name
Inch (W x L)
mm (W x L)
LEF / SEF
Top Tray
Stack
Main Tray
Stack
Front
Front Edge Corner
Dual
Hole punch (all types)
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
SEF
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
LEF
Ledger
11 x 17
279 x 432
SEF
Invoice (statement)
8.5 x 5.5
216 x 140
SEF
Invoice (statement)
8.5 x 5.5
216 x 140
LEF
Legal
8.5 x 14
216 x 356
SEF
ISO A4
8.26 x 11.69
210 x 297
SEF
ISO A4
8.26 x 11.69
210 x 297
LEF
ISO A3
11.69 x 16.54
297 x 420
SEF
ISO A5
5.83 x 8.27
148 x 210
SEF
Foolscap or Euroletter
8.5 x 13
216 x 330
SEF
JIS B5
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
SEF
JIS B5
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
LEF
JIS B4
10.12 x 14.33
257 x 364
SEF
SB4
9.92 x 14.09
252 x 358
SEF
ISO A4 Cover
8.78 x 11.69
297 x 223
SEF
ISO A4 Cover
8.78 x 11.69
297 x 223
LEF
ISO A4 Tab Stock
8.78 x 11.69
297 x 223
LEF
Letter Cover
9 x 11
229 x 279
LEF
LEF
8.5 x 11 inch (Tab stock)

Postcard-Lakes
4.5 x 6
114 x 152
SEF
Postcard
5x7
127 x 178
SEF
Oufuku-Hagaki Postcard
5.83 x 7.87
148 x 200
SEF
5.83 x 7.87
148 x 200
LEF
6 x 9 inch
6x9
152 x 229
SEF
6 x 9 inch
6x9
152 x 229
LEF
Royal Octavo
6 x 9.5
152 x 241
SEF
Royal Octavo
6 x 9.5
152 x 241
LEF
Foolscap Quarto
6.5 x 8.25
165 x 206
SEF
Foolscap Quarto
6.5 x 8.25
165 x 206
LEF
Crown Quarto
7.25 x 9.5
184 x 241
SEF
Crown Quarto
7.25 x 9.5
184 x 241
LEF
Executive
7.25 x 10.5
184 x 267
SEF
Executive
7.25 x 10.5
184 x 267
LEF
16K Taiwan
7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
SEF
16K Taiwan
7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
LEF
GP 20
February 2013
6-64
Table 5 LCSS output paper sizes

Paper Size
Orientation
Output
Staple position
Option
Common Name
Inch (W x L)
mm (W x L)
LEF / SEF
Top Tray
Stack
Main Tray
Stack
Front
Front Edge Corner
Dual
Hole punch (all types)
Quarto
8 x 10
203 x 254
SEF
Quarto
8 x 10
203 x 254
LEF
8 x 10.5
203 x 267
SEF
8 x 10.5
203 x 267
LEF
8 x 13
203 x 330
SEF
8.26 x 10
210 x 254
SEF
8.26 x 10
210 x 254
LEF
8.26 x 10.63
210 x 270
SEF
8.26 x 10.63
210 x 270
LEF
Foolscap Folio
8.25 x 13.06
209 x 333
SEF
8.26 x 13
210 x 330
SEF
Demi Quarto
8.46 x 10.7
215 x 273
SEF
Demi Quarto
8.46 x 10.7
215 x 273
LEF
8.46 x 10.83
215 x 275
SEF
8.46 x 10.83
215 x 275
LEF
Folio (Spain)
8.46 x 12.4
215 x 315
SEF
8.66 x 13
220 x 330
SEF
8.75 x 11.69
223 x 297
SEF
8.75 x 11.69
223 x 297
LEF
Arch A
9 x 12
229 x 305
SEF
Accounting
10 x 14
254 x 356
SEF
10 x 15
254 x 381
SEF
8K Taiwan
10.51 x 15.28
267 x 388
SEF
12 X 18
305 X 457
SEF
12.6 X 17.72
320 X 450
SEF
SRA3
February 2013
6-65
GP 20
HVF/HVF Booklet Maker Output Paper Sizes

The following table defines the size which can be delivered to the HVF and HVF Booklet Maker
Table 6 HVF/HVF Booklet Maker output paper sizes
Paper Size
Orientation Output Output
Staple position
Option
Option Option
Common Name
Inch (W x L)
mm (W x L)
LEF / SEF
Stack
Parallel
Corner
Booklet Front
Top Tray maker
Corner (45) Front
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
SEF
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
LEF
Ledger
11 x 17
279 x 432
SEF
Invoice (statement)
8.5 x 5.5
216 x 140
SEF
Invoice (statement)
8.5 x 5.5
216 x 140
LEF
Postcard
4.25 x 5.5
108 x 140
SEF
Postcard
4.25 x 5.5
108 x 140
LEF
Legal
8.5 x 14
216 x 356
SEF
ISO A4
8.26 x 11.69
210 x 297
SEF
ISO A4
8.26 x 11.69
210 x 297
LEF
ISO A3
11.69 x 16.54
297 x 420
SEF
ISO A5
5.83 x 8.27
148 x 210
SEF
ISO A5
5.83 x 8.27
148 x 210
LEF
ISO A6
4.13 x 5.83
105 x 148
SEF
ISO A6
4.13 x 5.83
105 x 148
LEF
Foolscap or Euroletter
8.5 x 13
216 x 330
SEF
JIS B5
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
SEF
JIS B5
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
LEF
JIS B4
10.12 x 14.33
257 x 364
SEF
JIS B6
5.08 x 7.17
128 x 182
SEF
JIS B6
5.08 x 7.17
128 x 182
LEF
ISO B5
6.93 x 9.84
176 x 250
SEF
ISO B5
6.93 x 9.84
176 x 250
LEF
ISO B4
9.84 x 13.9
250 x 353
SEF
ISO A4 Cover
8.78 x 11.69
297 x 223
SEF
ISO A4 Cover
8.78 x 11.69
297 x 223
LEF
ISO A4 Tab Stock
LEF
Letter Cover
9 x 11
229 x 279
SEF
Letter Cover
9 x 11
229 x 279
LEF
8.5 x 11 inch Tab Stock
LEF
Postcard-Lakes
4.5 x 6
114 x 152
SEF
Postcard-Lakes
4.5 x 6
114 x 152
LEF
Postcard
5x7
127 x 178
SEF
Postcard
5x7
127 x 178
LEF
5.83 x 7.87
148 x 200
SEF
GP 20
February 2013
6-66
Parallel
Corner
Rear
Parallel
Parallel Multipl Hole punch
e
Dual
(all types) Insert
Tri-Fold

Paper Size
Staple position
Option
Option Option
Common Name
Inch (W x L)
mm (W x L)
LEF / SEF
Stack
Parallel
Booklet Front
Corner
Top Tray maker
Corner (45) Front
5.83 x 7.87
148 x 200
LEF
6 x 9 inch
6x9
152 x 229
SEF
6 x 9 inch
6x9
152 x 229
LEF
Royal Octavo
6 x 9.5
152 x 241
SEF
Royal Octavo
6 x 9.5
152 x 241
LEF
Foolscap Quarto
6.5 x 8.25
165 x 206
SEF
Foolscap Quarto
6.5 x 8.25
165 x 206
LEF
Crown Quarto
7.25 x 9.5
184 x 241
SEF
Crown Quarto
7.25 x 9.5
184 x 241
LEF
Executive
7.25 x 10.5
184 x 267
SEF
Executive
7.25 x 10.5
184 x 267
LEF
16K Taiwan
7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
SEF
16K Taiwan
7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
LEF
Quarto
8 x 10
203 x 254
SEF
Quarto
8 x 10
203 x 254
LEF
8 x 10.5
203 x 267
SEF
8 x 10.5
203 x 267
LEF
8 x 13
203 x 330
SEF
8.26 x 10
210 x 254
SEF
8.26 x 10
210 x 254
LEF
8.26 x 10.63
210 x 270
SEF
8.26 x 10.63
210 x 270
LEF
Foolscap Folio
8.25 x 13.06
209 x 333
SEF
8.26 x 13
210 x 330
SEF
Demi Quarto
8.46 x 10.7
215 x 273
SEF
Demi Quarto
8.46 x 10.7
215 x 273
LEF
8.46 x 10.83
215 x 275
SEF
8.46 x 10.83
215 x 275
LEF
Folio (Span)
8.46 x 12.40
215 x 315
SEF
8.66 x 13.00
220 x 330
SEF
Arch A
9 x 12
229 x 305
SEF
SB4
9.92 x 14.09
252 x 358
SEF
SB4
9.92 x 14.09
252 x 358
LEF
Accounting
10 x 14
254 x 356
SEF
10 x 15
254 x 381
SEF
8K Taiwan
10.51 x 15.28
267 x 388
SEF
12 X 18
305 X 457
SEF
SRA3
12.6 X 17.72
320 X 450
SEF
February 2013
6-67
Parallel
Corner
Rear
Parallel
Dual
e
(all types) Insert
Tri-Fold
GP 20

Paper Size
Staple position
Common Name
Inch (W x L)
mm (W x L)
LEF / SEF
Stack
Parallel
Booklet Front
Corner
Top Tray maker
Corner (45) Front
Custom sizes
Various
Various
N/A
1.
Option
Option Option
Parallel
Corner
Rear
Parallel
Dual
e
(all types) Insert
Tri-Fold
Staple positions do not apply to Booklet Maker or Top Tray
2.
Hole punch positions do not apply to Booklet Maker.
3.
Correct hole location is dependant on having the correct hole punch module fitted.
GP 20
February 2013
6-68
Media Constraints
Media that is smaller than 140 mm (5.5 inches) in the cross process direction and 210 mm
(8.27 inches) in the process direction cannot be duplexed.
Media that is larger than 297 mm (11.7 inches) in the cross process direction and 432 mm (17
inches) in the process direction cannot be duplexed.
The DADH will feed documents of Condition I and II.
The DADH will not feed documents of Condition III.
Additional limitations:
The input media types and condition are as follows:
Conditions:
Some degradation in feeding performance may occur.
Documents must be in good condition
Extensive use of NCR paper may increase the rate of roll wear.
The following table shows the media (stock) performance constraints for output. Performance
will not be guaranteed for media not listed in the table below.
Categories:
The DADH will be capable of feeding documents in groups 1, III, IV, VI.
The DADH will not feed Group V documents except for paste ups (without loose
ages), hole punched documents, laser print documents and burst CFF.
NOTE: The stock types in Bold will be programmable via the paper tray attributes.
Table 7 Output stock performance

Stock Type
Trays 1
and 2
Tray 3
Bypass Tray 5 Duplex
Offset Stack
Hole
Booklet TriStaple punch Maker folder
Inserter Notes
Bond / standard
Y(1)
Y(1)
Y(2)
Index
Y(1)
Y(2)
Recycled
Y(1)
Y(2)
Transparency (paper backed not Y

supported)
Y(1)
Y(1)
(1) An increase in set scatter or set to set

registration may occur with greater than 20
sheets
Labels
Y(1)
(1) Top tray only.
Card stock, 120 gsm to 200

gsm
Pro-rata reduction in capacity with weight of

stock.
Card stock, 200 to 216 gsm
Tab stock
Tabs must be on trail edge when fed from

trays and bypass, but lead edge when arriving at the output. Therefore tab stock will be
inverted before output. Hole punch registration performance may be degraded
Pre-Punched
Must be loaded with punched holes at trailing edge
Pre-Printed
Envelopes
Y (1)
(1) Top tray only.

Refer to Envelope Specifications
Carbonless paper
Y (1)
Y (1)
Y (1)
Y (2)
(1) Degraded performance

(2) Top tray only
Glossy paper
(1) Degraded performance
February 2013
6-69
(1) Possible performance degradation if

small documents and stacked on large.
(2) For stapled sets, staple build up may
affect stack quality.
GP 20
Table 8 Input document categories definitions

Category
Material
Image Type
Group I. Common usage input.
80 gsm (20lb.) to 120gsm (32lb.) or equivalent weight range (rag bond

offset and ledger paper). This group includes 4040 paper.
Impact typewriter, offset image, Xerographic image, gravure image, Letterpress image, pencil 2H or harder, ballpoint pen, ink pen.
Group II. Heavy weight common usage

input.
121gsm (32.1lb.) to 200gsm (110lb.) index or equivalent weight range

(rag bond and ledger paper).
Group III. Light weight common usage

input.
60gsm (16lb) to 79gsm (19.9lb.) bond or equivalent weight range (rag

bond, offset, mimo / duplicator, and NCR paper).
Group IV. Common surface finished paper. 60gsm (16lb) to 200gsm (110lb.) index or equivalent (Bristol text, maga- Impact typewriter, offset image, Xerographic image, gravure image, Letterzine, cover, vellum, safety paper)
press image, pencil 2H or harder, ballpoint pen, ink pen.
Group V. Uncommon and other input.
80 gsm (20lb.) to 200gsm (110lb.) or equivalent weight: plastic laminated Impact typewriter, offset image, Xerographic image, gravure image, Letterpaper: metallic cover stock: tag stock: plastic transparencies: Telecopier press image, pencil 2H or harder, ballpoint pen, ink pen. Liquid developed
paper: label stock: silver photographic paper: Electrofax paper (ZnO)
electrostatic image.
race-erase: paste ups with loose edges type 1, 2 & 3: XE approved
punched or perforated stock: Continuous computer forms.
Group VI. Light weight input.
49gsm (13lb.) to 59gsm 15.9lb.) bond or equivalent weight range (rag

bond, ledger mimeo or GSE papers).
34gsm (9lb) to 48gsm (12.9lb) bond or equivalent weight range (rag

bond, ledger mimeo or GSE papers).
Group VII.
Table 9 Input document condition definitions

Defect
Acceptable Condition 1B
Holes.
Unacceptable Condition III
Notes
Maximum of three cleanly punched

Four to nine cleanly punched holes.
holes up to 6 mm. (0.25 inch) diameter.
Rough or torn holes.
Staples.
Cleanly removed staples.
Poorly removed staples resulting in dogears*.
Staples not removed.
Edge defects.
None.
Any cut or tear near a corner less than 3 mm. Any cut or tear not at a corner or greater than 3 (0.125 inch) in length.
mm. (0.125 inch) in length,
Folds* (in the

feed direction).
Two letter folds less than 1.5 mm.

(0.062 inch) high.
Two letter folds less than 3 mm. (0.125 inch)

high.
Any fold greater than 3 mm. (0.125 inch) high.
* Folds must be flattened to within 6

mm (0.25 inch) height before placing
in the input device.
Folds* (across
the feed direction)
None.
One fold not to exceed 3 mm. (0.125 inch)

high.
Any fold greater than 3 mm. (0.125 inch) high.
* Folds must be flattened to within 6

mm (0.25 inch) height before placing
in the input device.
Curl (measured
from a flat surface).
None.
In-ream or inherent curl up to 13 mm. (0.5

inch) maximum.
Curl greater than 13 mm.
Wrinkle.
None.
Multiple moderate wrinkles, up to 38 mm. (1.5 Severe wrinkles greater than 38 mm. (1.5 inch) inch) long in any direction, 3 mm. (0.125 inch) long in any direction, greater than 3 mm. (0.125
in height.
inch) in height
Foreign material None.

on the surface.
GP 20
Marginal Condition II
Hole reinforcement, correction fluid or dry

glue no greater than 13 square millimeters.
(0.02 square inch) per correction.
February 2013
6-70
Correction tape major paste-up or correction

fluid greater than 13 square millimeters. (0.02
square inch) per correction.
Table 9 Input document condition definitions

Defect
Acceptable Condition 1B
Marginal Condition II
Bent corners
(dog-ears)*
No bent corners
One bent corner up to 75 mm. (3 inch) diago- One or more bent corner exceeding 75 mm. (3
inch) diagonal length.
nal length
Unacceptable Condition III
* Dog ears must be flattened to within

6 mm (0.25 inch) height before placing in the input device.
Computer fan
fold sheets
Perforated tractor feed edges cleanly

removed.
Perforated tractor feed edges not removed.
Table 10 Degraded performance paper list

Media
Weight (gsm)
Size
40# Starbrite
59 gsm
Letter
Nisshinbo, SER 60 75 gsm
A4
Table 12 American envelope sizes
Undesirable performance
characteristics
Stiffness is too low(<50 mgf)
Buckles and jams in the
media path.
Stiffness is too low (<50mgf)
Buckles and jams in the
media path. Hi static cling
sheet to sheet results in multipacks.
Xerox OPB Phaser 148 gsm

860
Letter, A4
Sticks tenaciously to urethane transfix roller surface.
Never-Tear
Letter
Hi static cling sheet resulting

in multi packs
Nisshinbo SET 130 155 gsm
A4
Hi static cling sheet to sheet

resulting in multipacks.
Crown Vintage,
270 gsm
Curtis BrightWater
100# cover
Letter
Hi weight and stiffness

(4809mgf)
White Stripe trans- any

parencies
Letter, A4
154 gsm
ID
Size
Feed orientation
10#
104.8 x 241.3 mm (4.13 x 9.5

inch)
SEF, Flap closed, Flap outboard

(front)
6x9
152.4 x 228.6 mm (6 x 9 inch)

(front) or leading
9 x 12
228.6 x 304.8 mm (9 x 12 inch)

(front) or leading
NOTE: All envelope sizes quoted are with the flap closed.
Envelopes must be loaded face down in the bypass tray.
Refold of the flap is likely, if this occurs the specification is 2.5 mm up to a maximum of 4 mm
from the original fold of the envelope.
Acceptable flap types:
Diamond / Banker
Wallet
Weight:
May cause paper jams at the

imaging drum.
Envelope Specifications
Standard Envelopes - Bypass Tray only
Lightweight
Medium weight
Acceptable sealing:
Gummed
Press and seal
Exclusions:
Refer to Table 11 and Table 12 for the envelope sizes that can be fed from the bypass tray.
Table 11 European envelope sizes
ID
Size
DL
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inch) SEF, Flap closed, Flap outboard (front)
or leading
C5
162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inch) SEF, Flap closed, Flap outboard (front)
or leading
C4
229 x 324 mm (9.02 x 12.75

inch)
Notes
Feed orientation
Side seam construction
Self adhesive with release strips.
Any type of clasp device
Any type of window
SEF, Flap closed, Flap outboard (front)

or leading
February 2013
6-71
GP 20
Capacity:
15 envelopes
Table 13 U.S. paper weight conversion
US post card thickness

(mm) (see NOTE)
US bond weight
(lb.)
US text / book weight

(lb.)
US cover weight
(lb.)
US Bristol weight
(lb.)
US index weight
(lb.)
US tag weight
(lb.)
Metric weight
(gsm)
16
41
22
27
33
37
60
17
43
24
29
35
39
64
20
50
28
34
42
46
75
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
22
56
31
38
46
51
83
24
60
33
41
50
55
90
27
68
37
45
55
61
100
28
70
39
49
58
65
105
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
34
86
47
58
71
79
128
36
90
50
62
75
83
135
0.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
148
0.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
158
0.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
163
0.23
47
119
65
80
97
108
176
0.25
51
128
70
86
105
117
190
0.26
53
134
74
90
110
122
199
0.27
54
137
75
93
113
125
203
0.29
58
146
80
98
120
133
216
0.32
65
165
90
111
135
150
244
0.33
66
169
92
114
138
154
250
0.34
67
171
94
115
140
155
253
0.35
70
178
98
120
146
162
264
0.36
72
183
100
123
150
166
271
NOTE: U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
GP 20
February 2013
6-72

Purpose
To outline the general space requirements to enable safe use and adequate access for service.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1 m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
WARNING
USA and Canada. Do not install this machine in a hallway or exit route that does not
have 1.12 m (44 inches) of space additional to the normal space requirements in front of
the machine. To conform with fire regulations this additional 1.12 m (44 inches) of space
is needed in front of the machine in hallway and exit routes.
Machine Height
Machine height with the DADH lowered = 1155 mm (45.5 inches)
Machine height with the DADH raised = 1467 mm (58 inches)
Front
Machine Weight
Basic machine with DADH weight = 218.5 kg (480.7 lbs.)

NOTE: Basic machine weight does not include the weight of a finisher or tray 5.
Optional Tray
Figure 1 Installation plan
Tray 5 = 30 kg (66 lbs.)
Finishers
OCT = 2 kg (4.5 lbs.)
2K LCSS = 30 kg (66.5 lbs.)
HVF = 72.8 kg (160 lbs.)
HVF BM with PPI and Tri-folder = 100.3 kg (220.7 lbs.)
Machine dimensions and Installation Space Requirements

ColorQube Standalone Digital Copier
Table 1 shows the dimensions of the ColorQube 9301/9302/9303 standalone digital copier (no
media shelf) machines and the installation space required for safe operation.
NOTE: The dimensions shown in Table 1 allow for a 1 metre (39.4 inches) minimum safety
workspace around the machine. To acquire the minimum safety workspace it may be necessary to move the machine within the area specified.
A gap of 100 mm is required at the rear of the IOT for airflow to the fans. This is also sufficient
for the DADH when raised.
Figure 1 represents a plan view of a machine installation and is to be read in conjunction with
Table 1. The dimensions A and B outline a footprint of the machine within the boundary of safe
operation, dimensions C and D. The dimension E indicates the area required for airflow / workspace at the rear of the machine.
February 2013
6-73
GP 21
Table 1 ColorQube Standalone Digital Copier

Machine depth Moveable install Fixed install width
Machine width (A)
(B)
width required (C)
required (C)
Moveable install
depth required
(D)
Fixed install
depth required
(D)
Moveable install
airflow / service
workspace (E)
Fixed install
airflow / service
workspace (E)
ColorQube 9301/9302/9303
with OCT
1389 mm (54.7in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
2398 mm (94.1in.) 3391 mm (133.5in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
ColorQube 9301/9302/9303
with OCT and Tray 5
1607 mm (63.25in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
2606 mm (103in.)
3619 mm (142.5in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
ColorQube 9301/9302/9303
with 2K LCSS
1651 mm (65in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
2642 mm (104in.)
3632 mm (143in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
ColorQube 9301/9302/9303
with 2K LCSS and Tray 5
1880 mm (74in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
2874 mm
(113.2in.)
3875 mm (152.5in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
ColorQube 9301/9302/9303
with HVF
2075 mm (81.7in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
3076 mm
(121.1in.)
4077 mm (160.5in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
ColorQube9301/9302/9303
with HVF and tray 5
2311 mm (91in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
3312 mm
(130.4in.)
4313 mm (169.8in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
ColorQube 9301/9302/9303
with HVF BM and tri-fold
2443 mm (96.2in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
3444 mm
(135.6in.)
4445 mm (175in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
2678 mm
(105.45in.)
722 mm
(28.5in.)
3680 mm
(144.9in.)
4680 mm
(184.25in.)
1829 mm (72in.)
2722 mm
(107in.)
100 mm (4in.)
1000 mm (39.4in.)
Configuration
ColorQube 9301/9302/9303
with HVF BM, tri-fold and tray 5
GP 21
February 2013
6-74
GP 22 Electrical Power Requirements
Low Power Mode
Go to the relevant section.
The low power mode is automatically entered after a period of non-activity or by pressing the
Energy Saver key on the user interface. The period of non-activity can be set to between 1 and
120 minutes by the system administrator. The mode of power is returned to standby following a
user request, a key press on the user interface or by network activity.
Power Requirements
Power Save Modes
Power Requirements
Sleep Mode
For voltage and current requirements refer to Table 1 and Table 2.
The sleep mode is automatically entered after a period of non-activity after entry into low power
mode. The period of non-activity can be set to between 1 and 120 minutes by the system
administrator. The mode of power is returned to standby following a user request, a key press
on the user interface or by network activity.
Table 1 Supply voltage requirements

Nominal Voltage
Frequency
(VAC)
Maximum (VAC) Minimum (VAC) upper (Hz)
Frequency
lower (Hz)
110 to 127
47
220 to 240
140
99
254
63
187
63
Table 3 Power consumption
47
Configuration
Table 2 Supply current requirements
Plug-inmode
(Watt
@120V)
9301 base machine 40
848
1275
479
220
112
878
1392
479
220
112
Nominal Voltage (VAC)
Frequency (Hz)
Current (A)
110
60
Less than or equal to Specific XLA mar15

kets only.
908
1410
479
220
112
9301 plus LCSS
40
923
1380
489
220
112
Less than or equal to Mandatory for Saudi

15
Arabia only.
9302 plus LCSS
45
953
1497
489
220
112
9303 plus LCSS
50
983
1515
489
220
112
9301 plus HVF
40
993
1565
499
220
112
9302 plus HVF
45
1023
1582
499
220
112
9303 plus HVF
50
1053
1600
499
220
112
127
60
127
60
Comments
Run mode Run mode

Low
average maximum Standby power Sleep
(Watt@ (Watt@ (Watt @
(Watt@
(Watt @
120V)
120V)
120V)
120V) 120V)
PPM
Less than or equal to To operate at 127V

15
+10% for long term
periods. Mandatory
for Mexico only.
120 in run mode
60
Less than or equal to 120V is nominal for

12
USA and Canada.
120 in warm up
60
Less than or equal to All 60Hz markets

15
including USA and
Canada.
Plug-in mode: This is US Presidential Order requirement specifies that any product when
plugged into a mains supply outlet shall consume less than 1W when the product is
switched off.
Sleep mode: Average measurement taken over 2 hours.
220
50
Less than or equal to Europe and other

10
50Hz markets.
230
50

10
50Hz markets.
240
50

10
50Hz markets.
Power Save Modes

There are two customer adjustable power save modes:
Low Power Mode
Sleep Mode
The power usage for all product configuration at nominal and maximum usage for a base configuration with OCT, LCSS and HVF finisher options, refer to Table 3.
February 2013
6-75
GP 22
GP 23 Environmental Data
GP 24 Hardware Kit Contents
Operating
Purpose
Temperature range: 10 to 32 degrees C (50 to 89 degrees F)
To list the contents of the hardware kit, PL 31.11 Item 23.
Humidity: 15% to 85% RH.
Noise:
Kit Contents
NOTE: Blue Angel criteria measured in accordance with ISO 7779

Table 1 Maximum noise limits (dBA), basic machine
PPM
Standby
Run continuous
Run impulse
38/50 ppm
40
58
63
45/55 ppm
40
58
63
55/60 ppm
40
58
63
Table 2 Maximum noise limits (dBA), all configurations
Screw M4x12. Delta point. Torx head. Yellow zinc - 5 off.
Screw M3.5x10. Taptite. Cross head - 5 off.
Screw M4x25. Delta point. Torx head. Yellow zinc - 2 off.
Screw M4x20. Taptite. Torx head. Zinc chromate - 2 off.
Screw M6x15. Machine. Button head - 2 off.
Screw M4x12. Machine. Captive washer - 2 off.
Screw M4x10. Taptite. Torx head - 5 off.
KL-clip M5 - 5 off.
KL-clip M8 - 2 off.
E-clip M4 - 5 off.
E-clip M5 - 5 off.
PPM
Standby
Run continuous
Run impulse
38/50 ppm
40
65
70
Bushing M6 - 2 off.
45/55 ppm
40
65
70
Carriage drive bushing. Refer to PL 91.10 Item 19.
55/60 ppm
40
65
70
Thrust washer - 1 off. Refer to PL 94.10 Item 7.
Latch spring - 2 off. Refer to PL 70.30 Item 20.
Latch clip - 2 off. Refer to PL 70.30 Item 21.
Altitude: 0 to 1829 metres (0 to 6000 feet)
Storage
Temperature and humidity range:
60 degrees C (140 degrees F) 85% RH max.
-30 degrees C (-22 degrees F) 15% RH max.
Altitude: 0 to 3048 metres (0 to 10000 feet).
GP 23, GP 24
February 2013
6-76
GP 25 First Copy/Print Out Time and Power On/Off Time
GP 26 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
The first copy out time (FCOT) is from the start copy request to the delivery of the first copy in
the OCT. Values in Table 1 are based on a standard job where the original is copied at 100%
from the document glass or DADH onto A4 LEF paper fed from the bypass tray.
Purpose
The first print out time (FPOT) is from the print job request to the delivery of the print in the
OCT. FPOT values in Table 1 are based on a 1 byte ASCII text file sent using TCP/IP and LPR,
from a Pentium II 128Mb NT 4.0 PC with 100Mb Ethernet.
Power on / off figures in Table 1 are quoted on the basis that the machine is working in a nominal ambient environment. It has been fully installed and connected to a nominal mains supply.
Is in a fully working condition (no faults or warnings present) and has had all other model compatible components fully installed and pre-configured. All SAKO settings should be set to the
manufacturing default condition.
Table 1 Machine Response Time
Description
9301/9302/9303 9301/9302/9303
(15A)
(20A)
Notes
FCOT from the document

glass.
9 seconds
9 seconds
A4 sheet, bypass tray to

OCT in enhanced mode.
FCOT from the DADH.
11 seconds
11 seconds

FPOT
8 seconds
8 seconds

Warm up from low power

mode.
26 seconds
26 seconds
From low power mode to

ready to copy or scan.
Warm up time from sleep

mode.
Ready to print or copy
2 minutes 46
seconds.
2 minutes 30
seconds.
Ready to print or copy (scan

and mark)
Power on time to ready to 9 minutes 24

copy.
seconds.
9 minutes 24
seconds.
Ready to copy (scan and

mark)
Power on time to ready to 9 minutes 24

print.
seconds.
9 minutes 24
seconds.
Ready to print (receive and

mark)
To give information on the RoHS Directive.

The RoHS Directive restricts the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. It applies to equipment placed in the European Union (EU) market. The
directive takes effect from 1st July 2006.
NOTE: Currently these restrictions are only for the European Union (EU) market and some
associated countries. For more information go to www.Xerox.com.
The hazardous substances are:
Lead (Pb)
Mercury (Hg)
Cadmium (Cd)
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr 6+, Cr [VI])
Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDEs)
Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBBs)
Identification of a RoHS Compliant Machine

Xerox will maintain a central list of RoHS compliant machines.
This general procedure is for information only. All ColorQube 9301/9302/9303 machines are
RoHS compliant.
Power on time to ready to 1 minute 28 sec- 1 minute 28 sec- Ready to Fax (receive and
Fax.
mark)
onds.
onds.
Power off time
45 seconds
45 seconds
From touch of confirmation

button on UI
Quick restart time to ready 3 minutes 8 sec- 3 minutes 8 sec- From re-start option cononds.
onds.
firmed, to ready to print
to print
(receive and mark).
Ready to Fax time from
sleep mode time.
2 minutes 46
seconds.
2 minutes 30
seconds.
From activity detected on

the Fax line to start of paper
feed.
February 2013
6-77
GP 25, GP 26
GP 27 Cleaning Procedure
WARNING
Purpose
Use this procedure when cleaning is required.
WARNING
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Wear protective gloves when using solvents and cleaning agents, PL 26.10 Item 5.
After correcting all causes of contamination perform any of the following procedures as
required:
Oil Spillage
Drum Fan Shroud and Drum Belt
Upper Baffle
Transfix Stripper Assembly
Pre Transfix Sensor (20)
DADH
Optics
Paper Trays and Feed Rolls
Internal Cleaning
Vertical Paper Path
Registration / Preheat Assembly
Marking Unit
Drum
Transfix Roller
Stripper Gate and Baffle
IOD
Cleaning Unit and Abatement Plenum
Oil Spillage
Floor Spillage
Machine Spillage
Procedure
1.
Use a dry cloth, paper towel or cleaning cloth to blot any residue.
3.
Remove all visible material by blotting instead of rubbing.
4.
Inform the customer of the spillage.
5.
Refer to your local process regarding cleaning spillage / customer compensation.
6.
Dispose of all contaminated towels in a covered metal container.
Machine Spillage
Materials:
Silicon oil removal kit, PL 31.11 Item 32.
WARNING
Wear the protective gloves included in the silicon oil removal kit when using the syringe
to remove the oil.
CAUTION
Ensure that the cleaning unit is kept level on removal to avoid oil spillage.
Procedure
1.
Close off the contaminated area. If available, place warning signs around the area.
2.
Place the absorbent fabric mat on the floor in front of the machine to catch drips when the
cleaning unit is removed.
3.
Check the 3 tray horizontal transport assembly PL 81.35 Item 1 and trays 1 and 2 for oil
spillage, discard any damaged media and remove oil from the trays using a cleaning
cloth.
4.
Ensuring that it remains level to avoid oil spillage, remove the cleaning unit and place
directly onto the absorbent fabric mat.
5.
Remove as much oil as possible from the drip tray with a syringe and empty into the container.
6.
When no more silicon oil can be removed using the syringe, remove the remaining oil
using cleaning cloths.
7.
Ensure the area around the machine has no residual silicon oil and that spillages are thoroughly cleaned up.
8.
Dispose of the oil in the container and the absorbent material in accordance with safety
guidelines.
Floor Spillage
Materials:
Close off the contaminated area. If available place warning signs around the area.
2.
Cleaning cloth, PL 26.11 Item 9.
Safety glasses, PL 26.11 Item 7.
Drum Fan Shroud and Drum Belt
Nitrile gloves, PL 26.10 Item 5.
The drum shroud is a HFSI and must be cleaned at regular intervals, refer to SCP 4 Subsystem Maintenance. To reset the HSFI count, go to dC135.
GP 27
February 2013
6-78
Materials:
2.
For access to tray 1 and 2 feed rolls, use REP 81.4.
Clean the feed rolls with a cleaning cloth, dampened with water.

For access to tray 3 feed rolls, use REP 81.5.
Procedure
1.
Remove debris from the drum fan shroud, PL 94.20 Item 5 and clean with a clean dry
cloth.
2.
Clean the drum belt, PL 94.20 Item 2 using cleaning fluid. Refer to REP 91.24.
3.
Clean the drum pulley, PL 94.20 Item 3 using cleaning fluid.
4.
Clean the drum drive motor pulley, PL 94.20 Item 6 using cleaning fluid.
For access to the 3 trays module horizontal transport rolls, remove tray 1, REP 71.1 and pull
out the transport.
For access to the bypass tray feed rolls, use REP 81.6.
Upper Baffle
For access to the tray 5 feed rolls, use REP 81.7.
This component is a HFSI and must be cleaned at regular intervals, refer to SCP 4 Subsystem
Maintenance. To reset the HSFI count, go to dC135.
For access to the inserter pick up and reverse roller assemblies, use REP 12.95-171.
Internal Cleaning
Procedure
1.
To gain access to the upper baffle, PL 10.10 Item 9 remove the exit paper path assembly,
REP 10.20. Remove paper dust with a clean, dry cloth.
Transfix Stripper Assembly

Procedure
Materials:
Materials:
1.
Empty the waste tray and reset waste tray count in the Call Closeout menu or dC968 in
service mode.
2.
Procedure
3.
Remove all loose debris and paper dust.
1.
Clean the transfix stripper assembly, REP 10.6 and the transfix stripper blade area with a
cloth dampened with cleaning fluid.
Vertical Paper Path
2.
Check the transfix stripper blade for damage and deformation. If necessary, install a new
transfix stripper assembly, PL 10.20 Item 14.
Materials:
Pre Transfix Sensor (20)
Procedure
NOTE: Failure to clean paper dust from the pre transfix sensor (20) will result in paper jams.
1.
Un-dock tray 5 and open the upper, lower and mid left doors, PL 70.30.
Procedure
2.
Clean the takeaway sensors 1 and 2, PL 73.16 Item 11.
1.
3.
Clean the vertical transport sensor (5), PL 82.10 Item 7.
2.
Remove the lower platelet assembly, REP 89.1.
4.
Clean the confirm sensor (16), PL 82.10 Item 7.
3.
Clean the pre transfix sensor (20), PL 88.10 Item 12 and surrounding platelet surfaces of
all accumulated paper dust using a lint free cleaning cloth, PL 26.10 Item 6.
5.
Clean the vertical transport with a clean, dry cloth.
6.
Clean the rollers with a cleaning cloth, dampened with water.
DADH
Refer to ADJ 5.4 DADH Cleaning Procedure.
Materials:
Optics
Refer to ADJ 62.1 Optics Cleaning Procedure.
Paper Trays and Feed Rolls

Materials:
Procedure
1.
Clean the paper trays and sensors with a clean, dry cloth.
Procedure
1.
Open the horizontal paper path, PL 82.15, and clean with a dry, cleaning cloth.
2.
Clean the rollers with a cleaning cloth dampened with water.

Materials:
February 2013
6-79
GP 27
Stripper Gate and Baffle
Procedure
WARNING
Materials:
Take care during this procedure. The registration/preheat assembly will become hot
during normal operation.
1.
2.
Run dC969 Clean Ink Smears. Repeat the routine until the output blank sheets are free of
contamination.
Make copies as normal and inspect the result for contamination. If contamination is
present repeat dC969.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
3.
If contamination is still present, switch off the machine, GP 14. Allow the registration / preheat assembly to cool. Refer to REP 89.1, clean the platelets with a cleaning cloth dampened with cleaning fluid.
4.
If the registration / preheat assembly has been removed, perform dC625 Registration /
Preheat Calibration.
2.
If the stripper blade is dirty or damaged then install a new stripper blade, PL 10.12 Item 3.
3.
Clean the rollers J PL 10.10 Item 1 and L PL 10.10 Item 2 with a cloth dampened with
water.
1.
Marking Unit
Open the stripper gate and baffle assembly, GP 31.
IOD
CAUTION
Materials:
Procedure
CAUTION
1.
Perform dC965 Printhead Maintenance Cycle Test.
Do not use any liquid on the IOD sensor.
2.
Empty the waste tray and reset waste tray count in the Call Closeout window in service
mode.
Procedure
1.
Remove the abatement plenum, REP 91.36.
Drum
2.
Only if the IOD appears contaminated should it be removed, REP 91.22.
Materials:
3.
Remove ink or debris from the gears and encoding wheel.
4.
Manual rotate the motor to open the cover shield and reveal the sensor.
5.
Figure 1, Gently clean the IOD sensor, with a dry, cleaning cloth.
6.
Figure 1. Clean the cover shield using a dry cleaning cloth.
7.
Reinstall the IOD assembly, REP 91.22.
CAUTION
Do not use anything sharp or abrasive on the drum as this will damage the drum surface.
Procedure
1.
Enter dC612 and print TP 12 chase pages to clear ink from the drum.
2.
3.
Rotate the drum clockwise while cleaning it with a cleaning cloth dampened with cleaning
fluid.
4.
Use a dull plastic edge to remove any solid ink from the drum.
5.
Once the fault has been rectified, enter dC612 and print TP 14 to check that the stripper
blade is working correctly.
Transfix Roller
Materials:
Procedure
1.
2.
Clean the transfix roller, REP 10.1 with a cloth dampened with cleaning fluid.
GP 27
February 2013
6-80
GP 28 Marking Unit Assembly Wiring Harnesses

Purpose
To show the correct routing of the marking unit wiring harnesses.
Wire Routing
Figure 1 shows the correct harness routing along the upper and lower carriages. Figure 2
shows the correct harness routing at the rear of the marking unit. Ensure the harnesses are
secured by the harness clamps. To move the marking unit into the service position, go to GP 6.
NOTE: For clarity, the printheads are not shown in Figure 1. The marking unit is shown in the
service position in Figure 2.
1
Rotate the motor gears to open the
cover shield and reveal the sensor.
2
Clean the cover shield and the
sensor.
Figure 1 IOD Assembly
Cleaning Unit and Abatement Plenum

Materials:
Procedure
1.
Remove the cleaning unit, refer to REP 94.1. Wipe the top and bottom surfaces with a
clean, dry cloth. Place the cleaning unit on several sheets of paper on a level surface.
Remove any paper debris from the metering blade.
2.
Remove the abatement plenum, REP 91.36. Clean the top surfaces with a clean, dry
cloth.
3.
Reinstall the abatement plenum and then the cleaning unit.
Figure 1 Harness routing
February 2013
6-81
GP 27, GP 28
GP 29 Component Locations
Purpose
To identify the locations of major assemblies within the machine
To identify the locations of rollers, sensors and jam zones along the paper path.
Refer to the relevant section:
Front Component Location
Rear Component Location
Roller Locations, Sensor Locations and Jam Zones
Document Handler (DADH)
Low Capacity Stapler Stacker (LCSS)
High Volume Finisher (HVF)
Figure 2 Harness routing
GP 28, GP 29
February 2013
6-82
Front Component Location
Vertical paper path
Registration preheat assembly
Exit module
Transfix unit
Transfix roller assembly
Marking unit
Drum
Ink on drum (IOD)
Cleaning unit
Figure 1 Major assemblies
February 2013
6-83
GP 29
Rear Component Location

Media path driver PWB
Rear transfix motor
Enclosure fan (MOT42-063)
Ink loader
Drum driver PWB
Ink melt plates
Reservoir
Motor M4
Marking unit cooling fan
Drum drive motor
3TM Motor
Power supply
Drum and abatement fans
3TM PWB
Figure 2 Rear component location
GP 29
February 2013
6-84
Roller Locations, Sensor Locations and Jam Zones
Figure 3 Rollers, sensors and jam zones
February 2013
6-85
GP 29
Document Handler (DADH)
Figure 4 DADH Sensor Map
GP 29
February 2013
6-86
Figure 5 LCSS Sensor Map
February 2013
6-87
GP 29
Figure 6 HVF Sensor Map
GP 29
February 2013
6-88
GP 30 How to Mask Jets / Jet Substitution
Marking restrictions and recommendations
Purpose
The software will restrict the following:
Use this procedure to manually mask jets. The masked jet will be substituted by an adjacent
jet.
Masking more than 40 jets.
Masking a jet adjacent to another masked jet.
Masking a jet adjacent to another chronic jet.
Procedure
Enter Service Mode, GP 1.
Select the Adjustments routine.
Enter the appropriate NVM location.
Select Read.
Do not mask black or colour jets that are within the A4 LEF print zone (i.e. the chronic jet is not
in Head 1 between 1 to 12 or Head 4 between 208 to 220). The software will not restrict masking. The masking of black jets in the print zone is not recommended, but if required the software will allow it. Verify the jet location by printing the service jet test pages from dC968 Head
Purge.
Selecting an unused link

The NVM locations used for manually masking jets is 445-9 through 445-48. When manually
masking a jet, the specific location to use is not important provided the value in the location
where you wish to enter a 5 digit masking value is 0. If a value other than 0 is seen, do not
enter a new value. Keep moving to the next location until a value of 0 is found.
Masking the jet
Enter Chain 445, links (9-48)
Jets are masked in NVM locations 445-9 through 445-48 by entering a 5 digit number which
represents the head, color and number of the jet to be masked. This 5 digit number uses the
format HCJJJ where H = head number, C = colour (Cyan = 1, Magenta = 2, Yellow = 3, Black
(K) = 4) and JJJ = jet. Jet numbers must be 3 digits in length zero-fill as necessary (jet 4
would be 004).
Example: to mask yellow jet 44 on head 2 enter: 23044. Select write.
Verify the masking by printing the service jet test pages from dC968 Head Purge.
The masked jet number should be marked in green text. Refer to TP 21 Jet Test Pages for
more details.
Identify a Masked Jet
To identify the particular masked jet to be cleared, enter the chain 445 and cycle through the
link numbers 9 to 48. Select read every time the link number is changed. Compare the desired
jet to the output. If they matched then proceed to next step, if not enter the next link number
and repeat procedure.
Clearing the masked jet (reset)
Once the link of the desired jet is identified, enter 0 and select write.
Verify the masking by printing the service jet test pages from dC968 Head Purge.
The jet number should be marked in black / purple / red text. Refer to TP 21 Jet Test Pages for
more details.
February 2013
6-89
GP 30
GP 31 How to Open and Close the Stripper Gate

Purpose
To allow access to the stripper jam area.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Go to the relevant procedure
Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the

hole. Rotate the screwdriver to
release the stripper gate.
NOTE: In general use, the power must be on to open the stripper gate.
Open and Close the Stripper Gate When the Power is On
Open and Close the Stripper Gate When the Power is Off
Open and Close the Stripper Gate When the Power is On

1.
2.
Push down handle 3b.
3.
Move up handle 3b to close the gate.
NOTE: The screw slot will be approximately horizontal.
2
Push down handle 3b to open the gate.
Figure 1 Unlock the stripper gate
Open and Close the Stripper Gate When the Power is Off
WARNING
1.
2.
3.
Unlock then open the stripper gate, Figure 1.

NOTE: The screw slot will be approximately horizontal.
4.
Move up handle 3b to close the gate. There is no need to rotate the screw.
GP 31
February 2013
6-90
GP 32 User Interface Panel Diagnostics

Purpose
Use this procedure to calibrate and to test components on the UI.
Description
To enter the user interface diagnostics, simultaneously press the #, * and Dial Pause keys.
The panel diagnostics consists of seven elements. Each element can be selected by pressing
the relevant hard key or selecting the option on the UI. Table 1.
Table 1 Panel Diagnostics
Key
Description
Purpose
LCD Pixel Test
To display a solid fill of the selected colour
Touch Panel Calibration
To position the screen in the correct position
Touch Panel Test
To check touch panel and keypad
Button Test
To check operation of the buttons
Display Vertical Test
Check colour test bars
LED Test
Check that the LEDs lit
Audio Tone Test
To check the audible tones used by the machine.
Figure 1 LCD pixel test

Touch Panel Calibration
The UI will then display the selected test.
The purpose of this test is to perform a 9 point calibration of the UI panel. The calibration points
are arranged in a 3 high by 3 wide pattern. Once the routine starts, the user should press targeted points on the touch panel, Figure 2.
Procedure
LCD Pixel Test
The purpose of the test is to determine whether the pixels in the display are functioning correctly. Select the colour displays in order to identify pixel faults as missing areas in the solid fill,
Figure 1.
1.
1.
Select the hard key 1 to start the calibration.
2.
Touch the centre of the cross hairs as they appear on the screen. Complete the 9 locations.
3.
Press the hard key 0 to return to the main menu.
The LCD pixel test will be displayed as in Table 1.

Table 2 LCD Pixel Test
Key
Pixel Test
Red Pixel Test
Green Pixel Test
Blue Pixel Test
All White Pixel Test
All Black Pixel Test
Back
2.
Select the test by pressing the hard key number or selecting the test on the UI. The UI will
then display the relevant colour. By pressing the hard keys in sequence will index through
each test.
3.
Press the hard key 0 to close the window and return to the main menu.
4.
Each pixel test routine will activate or de-activate the selected pixels. This will check each
pixel on the display.
February 2013
6-91
GP 32
Figure 2 Calibration screen
Figure 3 Touch panel screen
Touch Panel Test

The purpose of the test is to check that the touch panel and touch panel keypad is functioning
correctly.
1.
Press hard key 1 to start the Touch Panel Test.

As the screen is touched the button will be red and once selected turns to grey, Figure 3.
Press hard key 0 to return to the main menu.
2.
Press hard key 2 to start touch panel key test.

The touch panel key panel will appear. Select each key and the number or letter will
appear in the text box, Figure 4.
3.
Select Back to return the main menu.
Figure 4 Touch panel key test

Button Test
The purpose of this test is to provide a mechanism to check that the hard keys associated with
the UI are operating correctly. Upon activation of this test, the UI will display a graphic representation of the hard panel buttons and provide user visual feedback.
GP 32
February 2013
6-92
1.
Select Button Test
Table 3 Vertical test menu
A button panel will appear on the UI. When a button is select then the correlating UI button will change to red. When a different button is selected the red button will change to
green and the selected button to red, Figure 5.
2.
Select Back to return to the main menu.
Key
Scale
Description
Display 50 Vertical
50 equal sized vertical stripes, 16 allocated to the red

gray scale, 16 to the green gray scale and 18 to the
blue gray scale, Figure 7.
Display 100 Vertical

Display 200 Vertical

Back
1.
Press the hard key number to select the test. By pressing the hard keys in sequence will
index through each test.
2.
Select hard key 0 to return to the main menu.
Figure 5 Button test

Display Vertical Test
The purpose of this test is to allow the user to visually detect luminosity defects in the LCD display. The user can select eight different vertical display screens.
Table 3 Vertical test menu
Key
Scale
Description
Red Gray Scale
15 equal sized vertical strips ranging from 0% Red to

100% Red. Figure 6.
Green Gray Scale
15 equal sized vertical strips ranging from 0% Green to

100% Green. Figure 6.
Blue Gray Scale
15 equal sized vertical strips ranging from 0% Blue to

100% Blue. Figure 6.
Display 3 Vertical
3 equal sized vertical strips of 100% Red, then 100%

Green and 100% Blue, Figure 6.
Display 33 Vertical
33 equal sized vertical stripes, 11 allocated to each of

the colours (red, green, blue) showing a gray scale for
each colour over the 11 stripes, Figure 7.
February 2013
6-93
Figure 6 Grey scale and 3 vertical display
GP 32
Figure 7 Vertical displays
Figure 8 LED test display
LED Test
Audio Tone Test
This test verifies that all LEDs are functioning properly. On pressing the associated hard key
the LED will be switched on. Each LED can be instructed to turn on, off or blink.
This test is used to verifying that the audio tone on the UI is working correctly. Upon activation
of the test, the UI will emit a selection of sound tones and sound level tests.
1.
Select the test.
2.
Select the function on the UI screen and observe that the LED is lit, Figure 8.
3.
Select Back to return to the main menu.
Table 4 Audio tone test

Key
Test
Description
Sound Test
Nominal (high)
Sound 1 Test
500Hz (high)
Sound 2 Test
1000Hz (medium)
Sound 3 Test
2500Hz (medium)
Sound 4 Test
4000Hz (high)
Set Level Low
Modifies the volume used in the Test 1 to 5
Set Level Medium
Set Level High
All Tones Test
Perform each of the following tests sequentially: sound

test, sound 1, sound test 3 sound test 4
Back
1.
Press hard key 1 to select Sound Test.

The audio duration ranges from 2 seconds for sound 1 to 4 tests, 5 seconds for the basic
sound and approximately 10 seconds for the All tones tests. Audio levels can be verified
by setting them low, medium or high.
2.
GP 32
Press the hard key 0 to return to the main menu.
February 2013
6-94
Swedish 4 hole punch kit.
Discovery 2.0 Software Platform
2 hole punch kit.(HVF only)
3 hole punch kit (HVF only).
4 hole punch kit (HVF only)
Swedish 4 hole punch kit (HVF only)
No Mod/Tag was issued to identify ColorQube 9303F machines installed with the Discovery 2.0
software platform. The software version number for the Discovery 2.0 platform is
071.XXX.XXX.XXX. To identify a 9303F machine with system software version
071.XXX.XXX.XXX installed:
50 sheet convenience stapler.
Tray 5 short edge registration kit (A4 / 8.5 x 11 inch / 8.5 x 14 inch SEF).
Tray 5 short edge registration kit (A3 / 17 inch SEF).
Xerox copier assistant software Kits.
Select the Machine Status button.
Xerox copier assistant printing Kits.
Select the Machine Information tab to view the Software Version.
Foreign device interface kit.
The Discovery 2.0 software platform software brings a range of new features to the ColorQube
machines;
Xerox Secure Access Mifare card reader
Xerox Secure Access Legic card reader
Wireless network connection
Xerox Secure Access Magstripe card reader
CentreWare Internet Services
Xerox Secure Access MD card reader
Remote Control Panel (enables remote diagnostics GP 47).
Xerox Secure Access Media doc kit
8th Generation user interface
1 Line Fax kit (Embedded Fax)
Automatic Smart eSolutions
2 Line Fax kit (Embedded Fax)
McAfee Integrity control enablement kit,
Scan to PC desktop SE - standard.
Configuration Options
Scan to PC desktop SE - professional.
The ColorQube 9303F machines are available in various configurations using the options that
follow:
FreeFlow Standard
FreeFlow Professional.
Nationalization kits.
Wireless connectivity kit, requires software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX.
McAfee Integrity control enablement kit, requires software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX.
The Discovery 2.0 software platform is used by a new range of Xerox products and it is also
backwards compatible with the 9303F product family.
General
For the space requirements, environment range and the print out time. Refer to:
GP 23 Environmental Data.
GP 25 First Copy / Print Out Time and Power On / Off Time.
NOTE: The service manual covers all of the above configurations. Within the manual, ignore
any references to options that are not installed.
Paper supply and paper handling options
Machine Identification
100 sheet duplex automatic document handler (DADH).
The diagrams that follow illustrate some of the various machine configurations:
4100 sheet high capacity feeder (Tray 5)
ColorQube 9301 with offsetting catch tray, Figure 1.
Output options
ColorQube 9302 with tray 5 and LCSS, Figure 2.
500 sheet offsetting catch tray (OCT).
ColorQube 9303 with tray 5 and HVF, Figure 3.
2250 sheet 2 bin stapler stacker tray (LCSS).
ColorQube 9303 with tray 5, HVF, inserter and tri-folder, Figure 4.
3000 sheet 2 bin stapler stacker with 100 sheet finishing (HVF).
250 sheet post print inserter, PPI Tray 6 inserter (HVF)
Tri-folder (HVF).
2000 sheet 2 bin stapler stacker (HVF BM).
Accessories and Kits
2 hole punch kit.
3 hole punch kit.
4 hole punch kit.
Legal 2 hole punch kit.
February 2013
6-95
GP 33
Figure 1 9301 with OCT
GP 33
Figure 2 9302 with tray 5 and LCSS
February 2013
6-96
Figure 3 9303 with tray 5 and HVF
Figure 4 9303, tray 5, HVF, inserter, tri-folder
February 2013
6-97
GP 33
GP 34 Service Plan
DMO Sold Figure 3.
Purpose
To change the machine service plan from metered to sold.
Description
On receiving the change of contract request, the CCS validates the authorization code to
change the service contract from metered to sold. The CCS updates and saves the new service contract in the CCS NVM.
1 Dot
15 mm
Procedure
WARNING
To change the service plan, go to dC136.
Refer to dC131 CCS NVM 606-269 and use Table 1 to identify which plan the machine is currently on.
Table 1 Service plan
Service Plan
which can be
changed
Figure 1 Xerox North America / Europe Sold
Item #
Type of Service
Plan
Service Plan which cannot be

changed
1.
Sold = 0
Xerox Managed
Supplies = 3
Page Pack = 4, DMO Sold = 5
2.
Non Sold = 1
Sold = 0
Third Party = 2
Xerox Managed Supplies = 3
3.
Third Party = 2
Not applicable
Sold = 0, Non Sold = 1,

3 Dots
4.
Xerox Managed
Supplies = 3
Sold = 0
Non Sold = 1, Third Party = 2

5.
Page Pack = 4
Sold = 0
Non Sold = 1, Third Party = 2

DMO Sold = 5
6.
DMO Sold = 5
Not Applicable
Sold = 0, Non Sold = 1, Third Party = 2

Page Pack = 4
Key plate Adapter Locations

To identify which ink stick locates into the corresponding key plate. These illustrate the notches
and shapes present that suit the specification of each plan.
Xerox North America / Europe Sold (XNA / EU Sold) Figure 1.
Worldwide Metered Figure 2.
GP 34
February 2013
6-98
Figure 2 Worldwide Metered

Purpose
To define copy and print speeds for all models.
Procedure
Go to the relevant section. Also, refer to General Notes:
2 Dots
Print Modes
Copy Speeds
Print Speeds
General Notes
Figure 3 DMO Sold
1.
For systems with weak or missing jets and jet substitution switched on, the productivity
figures will be reduced as the system performs additional image passes to compensate
for the missing jet.
2.
Halve all print speeds for SEF media, except where the SEF media is less than 8.5 inches
in length and greater than or equal to 8.27 inches not including envelopes.
3.
In Standard mode the print rate will be reduced by up to 50% as the percent fill of any
colour increases above 55%.
4.
If photographic original subtype is selected in Photo and Text original type then the
enhanced output quality is selected. Refer to Table 1.
5.
All user selected black and white output modes are always accounted as black and white
pages. Refer to Table 3.
6.
ColorQube 9301 standard colour: Productivity may be reduced for jobs greater than 1200
pages with continuous area coverage greater than 190% for configurations with a HVF.
7.
pages with continuous area coverage greater than 150% for configurations without a HVF.
8.
pages with continuous area coverage greater than 110% for configurations with a HVF.
9.
For modes that run faster than standard colour, there may be some reduction in productivity as area coverage increases.
Print Modes
Refer Table 1.
Table 1 Print Modes
Fast Colour
Postscript
Print quality output is faster, less dense and at a lower resolution
than Standard Mode.
Standard
Postscript
Print quality output is faster, less dense and at a lower resolution
than Enhanced Mode.
Enhanced (default)
Postscript and PCL

Print output quality is the highest speed possible for widely acceptable print quality.
High Resolution / Photo Postscript and PCL

Print output quality is the highest quality output
February 2013
6-99
GP 34, GP 35
Copy Speeds
Maximum copy speeds attained by various models and settings. Refer Table 2.
Table 2 Copy Speeds
Simplex / Duplex / Letter / A4 pages per minute
Copy Mode Name
Colour / Mono
9301
Selection
Resolution (dpi)
9302
9303
Simplex
Duplex
Simplex
Duplex
Simplex
Duplex
Enhanced (Default)
Colour
450 x 567
38
38
45
41
55
45 (40)
High Resolution / Photo
Colour
600 x 600
31
31
35
31
38
31
Enhanced (Default)
Mono
450 x 500
50
39
55
45
60
48 (43)
Mono
600 x 600
32
31
36
31
38
31
Print Speeds
Maximum print speeds attained by various models and settings. Refer to Table 3.
Table 3 Print Speeds
Simplex / Duplex / Letter / A4 pages per minute
Print Mode Name
Colour / Mono
9301
Selection
Resolution (dpi)
9302
9303
Simplex
Duplex
Simplex
Duplex
Simplex
Duplex
Fast Colour
Colour
225 x 450
60
43
70
46
85
53
Standard
Colour
300 x 500
50
40
60
44
70
50
Enhanced (Default)
Colour
450 x 567
38
38
45
40
55
45 (40)
Colour
600 x 600
31
31
35
31
38
31
Fast Colour
Mono
225 x 450
85
43
85
46
85
53
Standard
Mono
300 x 500
70
41
70
44
70
50
Enhanced (Default)
Mono
450 x 500
50
39
55
43
60
48 (43)
Mono
600 x 600
32
31
36
31
38
31
NOTE: These are maximum steady state print speeds. There are many factors that will reduce
performance from these values including image complexity, job length, paper size, tray selection and driver type.
GP 35
February 2013
6-100
GP 36 How to Unlock the Cleaning Unit
Purpose
Use this procedure to determine which service mode routines to run after a part reinstallation
or replacement.
To manually unlock and release the cleaning unit.
Go to the relevant part:
Procedure
Printhead (New Head)
Printhead (Original Head Reinstalled)
Umbilical Assembly (Original Head Reinstalled)
1.
Upper Carriage Assembly (Original Head Reinstalled)
2.
Unlock the cleaning unit, Figure 1.
Lower Carriage Assembly (Original Head Reinstalled)
X Axis Drive Motor
Stitch Roll Motor
Stitch Roll Motor Lead Screws
Purge Line Filter
Reservoir
Drum
Front Drum Frame Assembly
Drum Drive Motor
Drum Position Encoder
Drum Pulley
IOD Assembly
Front Guide Track
Insert a flat blade screwdriver

into the cutout. Slowly rotate the
screwdriver and gently pull the
cleaning unit.
Rear Guide Track
Registration/Pre-heat Assembly
Horizontal Paper Path Assembly
WARNING
1
Move the handle to the
unlock position.
Figure 1 Unlock the cleaning unit
Printhead (New Head)

Refer to PL 91.20 Item 2 and PL 91.25 Item 2.
Perform the following procedures in the order shown:
1.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity. Select Option 1. Select the manual procedure and all 4 printheads.
2.
dC131. Check the following NVM values:
490-020. The value must be 0. If necessary change the value to 0.
490-021. If the value is 2, change the value to 1. If the value is 0, 1 or 3, do not

change the value.
Printhead (Original Head Reinstalled)

1.
dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check.
2.
dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment.
3.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity:
Option 3 Head to Head Uniformity
February 2013
6-101
GP 36, GP 37
Option 5 Y Dot Position Correction
Umbilical Assembly (Original Head Reinstalled)
Purge Line Filter

Refer to PL 91.20 Item 9.
Refer to PL 91.20 Item 10, PL 91.25 Item 10.

Perform dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment.
1.
Reservoir
2.
3.

1.
Drum
Upper Carriage Assembly (Original Head Reinstalled)

1.
2.
3.
Lower Carriage Assembly (Original Head Reinstalled)

1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity. Select Options;

Option 5 Y Dot Position Correction, select all 4 printheads.
Front Drum Frame Assembly

1.
2.
3.
4.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity. Select Options;
X Axis Drive Motor

Option 5 Y Dot Position Correction, select all 4 printheads.
Drum Drive Motor
Stitch Roll Motor
Stitch Roll Motor Lead Screws
1.
2.
Perform dC977 Drum Runout Calibration.

GP 37
February 2013
6-102
Drum Pulley
GP 38 How to Set the Date and Time
Purpose
To set the machines date and time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
dC972 Printhead Uniformity. Select Option 5 Y dot position correction. Select all 4 printheads.
IOD Assembly
Front Guide Track
Procedure
1.
Enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 5.
2.
3.
Select the Tools tab.
4.
Select Device Settings.
5.
Select the General folder.
6.
Select Date & Time.
7.
Set the correct date and time, then select Save.
8.
Log out of Customer Administration Tools.

Rear Guide Track

Registration/Pre-heat Assembly
Horizontal Paper Path Assembly

February 2013
6-103
GP 37, GP 38
GP 39 How to Enable HTTP

Purpose
To enable the hyper text transfer protocol (HTTP) networking protocol.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Advanced Settings.
6.
Select Continue.
7.
Select HTTP Settings.
8.
Select Enable.
9.
Select Save.
10. Select Close.

11. Log out of Customer Administration Tools.
GP 39
February 2013
6-104
GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations

Where possible unit designations as appear in ISO 1000 (International Organization for Standardization) and Xerox Standard MN2-905 have been used. All measurement appear in ISO
units followed by any conversion in brackets e.g.; 22.5 mm (0.885 inches)
Table 1 Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations

Term
Description
BT
Burst Mode
Busy Tone
Copy mode in which two letter / A4 images are on the drum at the same
time - so minimum time to retract / re-engage the Drum stripper / Transfix.
Celsius
Colour Management factors: Calibration - turning of the device for optimal performance and maintaining that quality. Characterization - how
colour gamuts are described for a device. Conversion - how an image is
translated from one device to the next.
Cold Abnormal Purge (temp dropped to low for purging while in standby,
low power or sleep - wont happen unless a hardware problem.)
Customer Admin Tool
Combined Board Controller (or Common Board Controller) - Linux
based.
Chip Boundary Error - refers to possible mis-read of ink on drum if image
aligns with the chip boundary (every 54 bits).
Copy Centre
Copy Controller: controller for input and output and a large portion on the
image path.
Customer Call Assistance
Charged Coupled Device
Copy Controller Module
Copy Control Software - generally used to describe SW crashes in copy
control.
Copy Darker. A copy density setting
Common Device Interface
Compact Disk - Read Only Memory
Customer Expectations Document - Used by sales/marketing to set Customer expectations - how machine will function under various conditions.
Customer Expectations Document (quick ref. that customer may sign
stating equipment capabilities and any expectations to normal expectations)
Corporate Environmental Heath and Safety
CentreWare internet services is the embedded HTTP server application
that is available on network enabled machines. It enables access to printing, faxing and scanning over the internet.
Confirmation To Receive
A piece of paper that is run through the paper path without receiving an
image. The paper is passed through the roller/drum nip under the same
conditions as for an actual print, except that the drum maintenance cycle
is not performed. The chase sheet is run after a printed image and will
collect untransferred pixels that are left on the drum or transfix roller. The
amount of ink on the chase sheet can be measured to the quantify image
transfer efficiency.
Standardize light sources
Refer to Table 1.
Term
Description
3TM
3 paper tray module - the base paper system (also call TTM for Three
Tray Module).
Air system to reduce contaminates on the IOD (Ink On Drum) sensor.
Runs only during print - collects contaminates at bottom of the drum,
before PHs.
Automatic Background Suppression.
Analog to Digital Converter
Automatic Document Feeder
Automatic Duplexing Unit
Automatic Gain Control
Advanced Hardware Architecture
Automated Information Forwarding - sends usage profile to Xerox.
Average Monthly Copy Volume
Advanced Multi Function device
Average Monthly Print Volume
Automatic Meter Read
Automatic Magnification Selection
American National Standards Institute
Advanced Purge
Application Programming Interface
Auto Paper Selection
Address Resolution Protocol. Converts an IP address to a MAC address.
See RARP.
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Authorized Service Provider
Similar to Lakes KIA application
BIOS Extended User Interface
Built In Self Tests
1 = Black or white; 4 bit = 16 colours; 8 bits = 256 colours
Made of pixels that form the shape of letters. Created in specific sizes
and cannot be resized
Wireless local area network
Booklet Maker
Basic Multi Function device
Boot Protocol. AN IP protocol for automatically assigning IP addresses.
Bits Per Second
Abatement
ABS
ADC
ADF
ADU
AGC
AHA
AIF
AMCV
AMF
AMPV
AMR
AMS
ANSI
AP
API
APS
ARP
ASIC
ASP
BC
BEUI
BIST
Bit Depth
Bitmap fonts
Bluetooth
BM
BMF
BootP
BPS
C
Calibration
Characterization
Conversion
CAP
CAT
CBC
CBE
CC
CC
CCA
CCD
CCM
CCS
CD
CDI
CD-ROM
CED
CED
CEH&S
CentreWare
CFR
Chase Sheets
CIE Illuminants
February 2013
6-105
GP 40
Term
Description
Term
Description
CIE L*C*H*
L* = lightness, a* = red/green, b*= yellow blue value - based on theory

that a colour cannot be red and green or yellow and blue at the same
time (most widely used colour model).
Basic CIE 3 dimensional colour space. X = Red, Y = Green, Z = Blue
(based on human capabilities.)
Calling Subscriber Identification
Contact Image Sensor
Copy Lighter. A copy density setting
Closed Loop Drift (CLD). CLD makes a baseline measurement each time
dc972 Option 3 Manual is run. CLD runs automatically on a schedule in
extended Idle time. The measurement is similar to Y Dot position and is
dependent on head to drum and drum size and docking of the heads.
See Mud Page
Charge by copy/print rate
Colour Management Module - Software application. That performs the
conversions from one colour space to another
Colour Management Systems - helps provide colour consistency via calibration and colour characterization - utilizes profiles (characterizations)
for various devices (scanner, monitor and printer)
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow - subtractive primary colours from RGB CMY
used by printers since they are dependant upon reflective light. Two
overlapping subtractive primary colours = R,G or B i.e. M+Y = R;
M+C=B; C+Y=G. (CMY are process primaries.) C is opposite R; M is
opposite G, Y is opposite B. Vary spot size, balance and angle to create
appearance of colours.
Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black
Ink fractures or disintegrates during deformation and heating in the transfixing process. This results in part of the pixel remaining on the drum and
part transferring to the media. Cohesive failure is the loss of the internal
strength of the ink above a critical (drum) temperature.
Results from interaction between light, object and viewer perception.
Consists of Hue, Saturation and Lightness.
Calibration: Measure and adjust the performance of a device
Conversion: Accomplished via SW (i.e. convert RGB to CMYK)
Characterization: How the colour gamut of a devices described
Measure colour by imitating the eye to calculate level or RGB. Tristimulus
device. Breaks light down into its RGB components. Using one of the CIE
standards - used on monitors / light emitters.
Image Format (short for continuous tone) - during RIP contones are converted to halftone dots in each of the four separations.
Cold Purge (normal power up from cold purge)
Copies per minute
Customer perceived Print Quality Defect
Capture / Print, Save and Reprint
Copy Quality
CRD
Colour Rendering Dictionary - used to convert RGB to CMYK data during

RIP
Customer Replaceable Unit
Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor
Customer Service Engineer
Customer Satisfaction Management System
Customer drivers are specially developed generally made with a driver
toolkit. These drivers can provide a full set of features for Xerox printers.
In the past, customers drivers have been provided for all major operating
systems. A customer print driver is costly to develop, and does not used
standard operating system components. For this reason, PPD / GPD
solutions will be used in future whenever possible.
Continue To Correct
Contrast Transfer Function
Change Try Out - testing of changes on machine
Response For Continue To Correct
Clear To Send
The accumulation of ink in the drum maintenance unit. This can build up
on the wiper blade or in the reclaim path.
Cleaning Unit - presently expected to last ~ 240K - DMU is most likely to
casual for side 1 gloss (low gloss = high oil) (high gloss = low oil). Cleaning unit is part of the FSMA contract as a CRU. Customer has option to
return or trash it. Also known as the Drum Maintenance Unit (DMU).
Constant Velocity Transport
Check Valve Unit - on lower end of umbilicals - keeps air & ink from flowing back into ink reservoir - but only functions fully after being primed.
Failure to prime may lead to ink in air system and reservoir r/r
CentreWare
Continuously Weak or Missing Jet/s
CentreWare Web
Digital to Analog converter
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (feeds documents to a different
stack)
Duplex Automatic Document Handler (feeds documents to bottom of
existing feed stack)
Decibel (applies to sound pressure level units)
Drum Driver Board
Diagnostic code
Digital Copier
Device Controller, generic term for any module that acts as a image handling device e.g., SIP. Digital Copier
Direct Current
Digital Copier with embedded Fax card
Disconnect
CIE XYZ
CIG
CIS
CL
CLD
Cleaning Page
Click Charge
CMM
CMS
CMY
CMYK
Cohesive Failure
Colour
Colour Management
Colourmeters
Contone
CP
CPM
CPQD
CPSR
CQ
GP 40
CRU
CRUM
CSE
CSMS
Customer Drivers
CTC
CTF
CTO
CTR
CTS
CU Slime
CU
CVT
CVU
CW
CWM
CWW
DAC
DADF
DADH
dB
DDB
dC
DC
DC
DC
DC + Fax
DCN
February 2013
6-106

Term
Description
DCS
DDF
Delta TRC
Digital Command Signal

Device Description File
Measures the relative intensity between heads at area coverages less
than 100%. If needed, will adjust the image density for improvement.
Densiometer
Measures simple density. Photoelectric device, simply measures and
computes how much of a known amount of light is reflected from - or
transmitted through an object. Works on reflectance
Device Profile
Determines what colours a device is capable of producing - also known
as profiling or characterization. Only accurate if device is working as
designed.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Config Protocol (similar to BootP)
DIMM
Dual In Line Memory Module
Discovery
Base operating system
Dithers
Non solid image area (half ones on B/W)
DLM
Dynamically Loadable Module
DM
Drum Module - Drum is anodized Aluminium and is expected to last
approximately 3 million prints (life of product?) requires a breaking of 15
minutes at new install.
DMO-E
Developing Markets Operations East (was part of RX)
DMO-W
Developing Markets Operations West (was part of ACO)
DMU
Drum Maintenance Unit, also known as the Cleaning Unit (CU)
DOS
Disk Operating Systems
Dosing
Amount of ink which was sent from the ink reservoir to print heads -=
measured in grams.
Dot Spread or Dot A measure of the final size of a single ink pixel on media after the transfixing process. (Dots may grow depending on paper etc.)
Gain
DIS
Digital Identification Signal
DMA
Direct Memory Access
DMO
Developing Markets Operations
DOF
Direction Of Feed, paper width sensors
DPI
Dots per inch
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
Drooling
Small amounts of ink oozing out of the Print Head, this may eventually
lead to clogged jets and may stain the face plate. If it only happen when
the same SWFA is purging the other head - then 1 PH purges should be
avoided.
Drop Mass
The mass of an individual drop of ink that has been ejected by the print
head. Measured during Print Head normalising process. Not field measurable since it requires lab grade scales in zero wind conditions. Drop
mass goes down as a PH ages so compensations / calibration is necessary.
Drop Mass Param- Measures the sensitivity of drop mass and drop position to voltage, in
eters
preparation for running Drop mass reset
Drum Ghosting
Looks somewhat like ink stains.
Term
Description
DSR
DSP, DSP2
DST
DT
DTC
DTMF
DU
DUI
Duplex Dropout
Dust Off
EAA
EBS
EC
ECM
ECAT
EHS
ELOG
Embedded Fax
Embossing
Data Set Ready

Digital Signal Processing
Daylight Saving Time
Dial Tone
Digital Transmit Command
Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
Density Units
Dumb UI - all processing located offline to the UI
Loss of pixels on side 2 - generally due to 1st side oiling of media issues
Routine to return machine to pre-install state
Electron Auditron Administrator
Electronic Billing Service
European Community
(1) Electronics Control Module. (2) Error Correction Mode.
External Customer Acceptance Test
Environmental Health and Safety
Electronic Log
A fax system included in a system device
Outlines of the first printed side seen on the second printed side of a
duplex image. The outlines are at the edge of ink restrictions. The
embossing artifact is highly image dependant.
Electromagnetic Emission
The Drum/Transfix/Drive motor unit together is called the engine block.
End Of Line
End Of Message
End Of Procedure
End Of Retransmission
Environmental Protection Agency
Electronic Page Collation (memory dedicated to temporary retention of
images captured from the scanner and network controller)
Erasable / Programmable Read Only Memory
Electronic Partnership Supervisor (kit)
End Retransmission Response
Engineer Replaceable Unit
Electrostatic Discharge
European Solutions Group
Encoded Skew and Process - refers to RalPH functions of skew and register throughout media.
Electronic Sub-System. For this machine use NC
Electronic Test Pattern
European Union
Europe
Limp mode
EME
Engine Block
EOL
EOM
EOP
EOR
EPA
EPC
EPROM
EP-SV
ERR
ERU
ESD
ESG
ESP
ESS
ETP
EU
EUR
Fault Tolerant
February 2013
6-107
GP 40

Term
Description
FAX
FCC
FCD
FCS
FCOT
FD
FDI
FIFO
FireWire
Facsimile
Federal Communications Commission
Facsimile Coded Data
Facsimile Checking Sequence
First Copy Out Time
Functional Description
Foreign Device Interface
First In First Out
IEEE 1349. High speed serial communications system, comprising hardware plus protocol. Operates at 100, 200 or 400 Mbits/s, with 800 Mbits/s
under development. See USB and RS-232
Firmware
Software in a ROM
FLASH
On board erasable and re programmable non volatile memory
FLUSH
Flush routine to purge contaminated ink reservoir, via multiple purges - if
there is too much mixing the may take over an hour to fully purger reservoirs and PHs, approximately 1 stick of each colour.
FMEA
Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
FOIP
FAX Over Internet Protocol
Foldability
Refers to how well a print withstands folding
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
FPOT
First Print Out Time
Freckle / Freckling A pixel from a previous image that shows up on the next image, usually
left from the drum cleaning.
FRU
Field Replacement Unit
FSK
Frequency Shift Keying
FSMA
Field Service Maintenance Agreement
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FTTR
Fast Time to Ready - allows running paper through machine without print
head use.
FWA
Full Width Array
FX
Fuji Xerox
Gamut
Range of colours that a device can reproduce, the larger the better. RGB
gamut is larger than CMYK
Garfield
IME simulates a function i.e. paperless pump. IME does not contain a
MU, IOD or abatement plenum etc.
GCR
Grey Component Replacement. Black replace greys that would otherwise be created using all three CMYK colours.
GDI
Graphical Display Interface
GEL
Gel (oil and ink mixture) that is removed from the drum by the metering
blade.
Ghosting
A print quality artifact where a previous image can be seen on the current
image.
GIS
Global Imaging Systems
GLCD
Graphic Liquid Crystal Display
GP 40
Term
Description
Gloss Variance
GND
GPD Minidrivers
Mainly duplex - especially at very low usage rates.

Ground
A Generic Printer Description file has a function similar to PPD files. This
format was developed by Microsoft to provide a simple method to
develop drivers for non-postScript printers. Standard GPD mini drivers
share the same lamentations as the PPD mini drivers, but they too can
be enhanced using plug-ins. GPD Mini drivers are a new technology
introduced for Windows 2000 and they will also be supported Windows
NT 4. In Windows 95/98, a similar, but less powerful unidriver format
was used.
German safety
Grams per square metre
Graphics User Interface
Head to Head alignment
Head Alignment Machine - used to align print heads on the SWFA
Head Adjustment Uniformity (refers to printhead NVM data)
Head Adjustment Y delay (refers to printhead NVM data)
High Capacity
Head Configuration Data. Written during manufacture, read at switch on.
Failure prevents machine operation.
High Capacity Feeder
High Capacity Stapler Stacker (3K)
High Capacity Stapler Stacker Booklet Maker
Hard Disk Drive
Measure relative intensity between heads at 100% area coverage. If
needed, will adjust head voltage or norm clicks for improvement.
High Level Data Link Control
Head Field Corrections. Log file of manual and automatic HAU corrections. Failure has no customer impact.
Head Field Data
High - Frequency (random) Line - Edge Noise. image quality metric.
High Frequency Service Intervals
High Level Design. A document that defines the software high level
design.
Head Maintenance
Hue, Saturation and Lightness chart (tristimulus colour space)
Head to drum spacing (critical specification) - also used to name the
sandwich frames of the engine block since it sets the drum and the PH
stop points of reference.
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
Basic colour such as red, pink, blue or orange (determined by wavelength). White, black and grey are not considered to have hue and are
considered neutral colours.
Hybrid User Interface
GS
GSM
GUI
H2H
HAM
HAU
HAY
HC
HCD
HCF
HCSS
HCSS BM
HDD
Head to head uniformity
HDLC
HFC
HFD
HFLEN
HFSI
HLD
HM
HSL
HTD
HTTP
Hue
HUI
February 2013
6-108
Term
Description
Term
Description
HVF
HVF / BM
HVPS
Hz
IB or I/B
I2C-bus
High Volume Finisher

High Volume Finisher Booklet Maker
High Voltage Power Supply
Hertz
InBoard
Inter Integrated Circuit bus. This provides a simple bidirectional 2-wire
bus for efficient inter-IC control. All I2C-bus compatible devices incorporate an interface which allows them to communicate directly with each
other via the I2C-bus.
Internal Customer Acceptance Test
Internal Customer Engagement
Identification
Industrial Design Human Factor, relates to how UI display / labels are
used / presented to the Customer.
International Electrotechnical Commission
Interface. Small Pwba on subassemblies
Internet Fax
Image Input Terminal
Inter Image Zone, are between images on the drum
Interim Maintenance
Image Marking Engine
Undesired transference of image from one sheet to another. Generally in
the output tray while copies are still hot but may be at other times as well.
A change in the colour of ink. Due to the ink being at elevated temperature the printer for extended periods of time. Darkens ink.
Ink smeared down the page. This is generally due to excessive pressure
or pre-heat temperature.
Interlock
Ink On Drum sensor (scanner array being used to monitor the drum surface and to aid in troubleshooting of the drum area). IOD may also be
used to provide an image on the drum surface for analysis.
Ink On Paper
Image Output Terminal
Image Output Terminal Controller (IOT PWB, LVPS and HVPS). Sometimes referred to as the Power and Control Assembly.
Internet Protocol
Image Processing Accelerator. Used by the machine scanning services
to convert scanned images to a standard format e.g. for scan to file /
scan to E-mail for network transmission.
Installation Preparation Document
Images per minute
Internet Printing Protocol
Image Processing Service
Image Processing System
IPX
IQ
IQ with Cold Drum
IQ with Hot Drum
IR
ISDN
Internetwork Protocol eXchange

Image Quality
Spotty looking. Low dot fill, similar to low transfix pressure
Cohesive failures (ink on drum).
Infra Red
Integrated Services Digital Network / International Standard Data Network
International Standards Organization
level-triggered interrupt signal that remains in an asserted state
Internal Test Pattern
Intermittent Weak or Missing Jet/s
Job Based Accounting (Network Accounting)
A line of missing or corrupted information in the fast scan direction.
Joint Photographic Experts Group file interchange format
kilogram
kilohertz
Routine to return all NVM, including protected NVM, to a virgin state.
Factory use only
Key Operator
Local Area Network
Liquid Crystal Display
Liquid Crystal Display Module
Line Conditioning Signal
Low Capacity Stapler Stacker
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (allows sharing of corporate
phone book information)
Lead edge
Light Emitting Diode
Long Edge Feed
Lead Edge Time Out
Legal
Visible part of the electromagnetic spectrum. Consists of waves measure
in nanometers (nanometer = 1 millionth of a meter) 700nm correlates to
Red on high end and 400nm correlates to violet.
Brightness or darkness, determined by wave amplitude.
A line crossing circuit detects the moment when the mains (line) supply
crosses the zero volts point. This a is a safe moment to switch on a
mains operated item, e.g. a heater.
Serial communications fault
Load Object Attributes
Files that lose data when compressed (i.e. JPG). When lossy files are
restored to their original size pixels are permanently lost.
ICAT
ICE
ID
IDHF
IEC
IF
IFAX
IIT
IIZ
IM
IME
Ink blocking
Ink Cooking
Ink Squeegee
Intlk
IOD
IOP
IOT
IOTC
IP
IPA
IPD
IPM
IPP
IPS
IPS1
ISO
Interrupt Storm
ITP
IWM
JBA
Jitter
JPEG
kg
kHz
Kill All
KO
LAN
LCD
LCDM
LCS
LCSS
LDAP
LE
LED
LEF
LETO
LG
Light
Lightness
Line Cross
Link Error
LOA
Lossy
February 2013
6-109
GP 40
Term
Description
Term
Description
Low power mode
Print Head (PH) jetstack, PH reservoir, Drum and RalPH pre-heater are
on at a slightly reduced temperature. Other heaters are off.
Low Pressure Assist. Low pressure applied to print head to allow lubrication of print head with ink for cleaning blade operation
Lines per inch
Large Scale Integration
Low Spec Limit
Letter
Low Voltage Differential Signal (noise tolerant) Custom in house protocol
- data transmission including video from CBC to IME.
Low Voltage Power Supply
Lower
Local user Interface
metre
Media Access Code. This is the basic, unique identifier of a networked
device. An incoming message is analysed and an address in another
form, such as an IP address, is resolved by a lookup table to a MAC
address. The message is then directed to, and accepted by the equipment thus identified. It is the burnt-in, hardware address of a NIC.
the first printed side of a duplex print will have less gloss compared to the
second printed side.
IME without many critical subsystems - used for limited testing of subsystems, not really an IME since no marking can occur. I.e. used for life
testing of an engine block components.
Megabyte (one MB = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes). Mail Box
Mega bit (one million bits)
Message Confirmation
Measures the sensitivity of intensity to voltage and norm clicks, in preparation for running head to head uniformity.
Memory to Memory
Perceived colour changes under varying light sources
Multifunction
Multi-Function Device
Mid - Frequency (random) Lines - Edge Noise
Machine Information Block. SNMP database element
Modular Jack
millimetre
Microsoft Management Console
Modified Modified Read compression
Multi - National
Modem
MOdulator/DEModulator. Hardware unit that converts the one and zero

binary values from the computer to two frequencies for transmission over
the public telephone network (modulation). It also converts the two frequencies received from the telephone network to the binary values for
the computer (demodulation).
Undesirable dot patterns
Composite black (uses all ink colours - YMCK)
Media Path Board for paper path, sometimes MPD - Media Path Driver
Multi-Page Signal
Modified Read compression
Melt Rate
Machine Resident Diskette
Modified Read Compression
millisecond
Multi-Sheet Inserter, also Multi Sheet Input
Marking Unit (drawer that contain the PHs and most PH related circuits).
Page of all colours and some combinations to help clean the print head
area.
Marking Unit Test Bed, generally for testing of the marking unit only.
Newton
North America
North American Solutions Group (equivalent to XCI)
North American Solutions Group (equivalent to USCO)
Network Controller (equivalent to ESS).
Normal Contrast. Copy contrast setting
Normally closed Check valve
Normally open Check valve
Network Core Protocol
No Copying Required
Network Control Unit
NetWare Domain Services or Novell Directory Services
NetWare Domain Services Context
NetWare Domain Services Tree
NetBIOS Extended User Interface. A network device driver or transport
protocol that is the transport driver supplied with LAN Manager. It can
bind with as many as eight media access control drivers.
Network Basic Input / Output System. Software developed by IBM that
provides the interface between the PC operating system, the I?O bus,
and the network. Since its design, NetBIOS has become a de-facto standard.
Next Generation Infrastructure (new files and mail servers)
Network Interface Card. Converts the data to a form suitable for transmission and reception. Uses ARP and RARP.
LPA
lpi
LSI
LSL
LT
LVDS
LVPS
Lwr
LUI
m
MAC Address
Matting
Maxwell
MB
Mb
MCF
Measure head
sensitivity
Mem-Mem
Metamerism
MF
MFD
MFLEN
MIB
MJ
mm
MMC
MMR
MN
Moire
Monochrome
MPB
MPS
MR
MR
MRD
MRC
ms
MSI
MSO
MU
Mud Page
MUT
N
NA
NASG-N
NASG-S
NC
NC
NcCv
NoCv
NCP
NCR
NCU
NDS
NDS Context
NDS Tree
NetBEUI
NetBIOS
NGI
NIC
GP 40
February 2013
6-110
Term
Description
Term
Description
Nm
NOHAD
Normalization
NP
NRSB
NS
NSC
NSF
NSS
NSSD
Newton metre
Noise, Ozone, Heat, Airflow and Dust
Term the refers to PHs being fully calibrated for drop mass, intensity etc.
Printer configuration
No response to start button
Normal Sharpness. Copy sharpness setting
Non-Standard Facilities Command
Non-Standard Facilities
Non-Standard Set-Up
Network. The SESS and CentreWare development team based in Rochester NY. This group is now named CDDU.
Non-Volatile Memory
Non Xerox Ink
Open Architecture
Out Board
Offsetting Catch Tray
On Demand Image Overwrite
Original Equipment Manufacturer
Ink or coloured regions transferred to the backside of a print during or
after duplex printing.
On Going Maintenance
Over Head Projection media (transparency)
Out Of Media
Out Of Paper
Operating Company
Online support Assistant
Office Systems Component Group
Private Automatic Branch Exchange
Personal Computer
Personal Computer Fax
Peripheral Component Interconnect - Internal BUS used for communications between components and boards within CBC
Personal Computer Interface
Printer Control Language
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
Profile Connection Space - converts colour data as it moves from one
device to the next to stay within the devices colour space
Product Certification Test, manufacturing line term
Process Direction
Power Distribution Board
Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format
Page Description Language
Picture Data (Pixel)
PEST
Print Engine Self Test, monitors for shorts and opens via current load
parameters
Paper Feed Module
Paper Feed Platform
Procedural Interrupt Negative
Personal Identification Number
Packet InterNet Groper. Tool to test connections between nodes by sending and returning test data.
Procedural Interrupt Positive
The ability to the transfixing system to transfer pixels from the drum to
the media. Variables that affect pixel picking are ink properties, image
topography, paper porosity, temperature, nip pressure and adequate
release agent on the drum.
Method used to hide missing jets by borrowing pixels from nearest jetbasically try to fill the void with neighboring jets without doing jet substitution which requires an additional pass.
Programmable Logic Device
Printed Job Language. Hewlett Packard page description language.
Programme Management Committee
Power Off Power On
Power On Self Test
Power PC. A EPROM manufacturer
Postscript Printer Description. A PPD file is a simple formatted text file
that contains a description of the printers features and the corresponding
PostScript code needed to activate each feature. Apple LaserWrite drivers and application programs such as Adobe PageMaker can use PPD
files. With a OOD file, many of the printing features of a network printer
can be made available to users. However advanced features such as
LAN Fax, Accounting and Exception Page Programming cannot be provided.
PPD minidrivers are available in Windows operating systems (from Windows 95 onwards). With these, a Xerox - supplied PPD file is used in
conjunction with an operating system supplied driver ton create a PostScript driver tailored for a specific device. In windows 95/98, a driver provided by this method has lamentations and not all devices features can
be made available to the user. With Windows NT 4 and Windows 2000, it
is possible to make more features available by using a user interface rendering plug - in. In this document, if the driver is to be provided with If no
plug-ins are provided, then it is called a standard minidriver.
Problems Per Hundred Installs
Post Process Inserter - capable of inserting sheets (i.e. cover stock or
coloured sheets to mark boundaries within the output set)
Prints per minute / Parts Per Million
Partial page Request
NVM
NXI
OA
OB or O/B
OCT
ODIO
OEM
Offsetting
OGM
OHP
OOM
OOP
OpCo
OSA
OSCG
PABX
PC
PC Fax
PCI
PCI
PCL
PCMCIA
PCS
PCT
PD
PDB
PDF
PDL
Pels
PFM
PFP
PIN
PIN
ping
PIP
Pixel Picking
Pixel Sharing or
Pixel Borrowing
PLD
PJL
PMC
POPO
POO or P of O
POST
PPC
PPD
PPD Minidrivers
PPHI
PPI
PPM
PPR
February 2013
6-111
GP 40

Term
Description
pps
PPS
PQ
Partial Page Signal / pulses per second

Product Performance Specification
Print Quality - PQ is the post-pixel placement, i.e. transfix / mechanical
which differs from IQ which is pre pixel placement.
PQM
Print Quality Maintenance
PRD
Product Requirements Document
PRI-EOM
Procedure Interrupt-EOM
PRI-EOP
Procedure Interrupt-EOP
PRI-MPS
Procedure Interrupt-MPS
PSM1
Power Save Mode 1 (low power mode)
PSM 3
Power Save Mode 3 (sleep mode)
PS
Post Script
PS
Power Supply
PSTN
Private Switched Telephone Network
PSW
Portable Service Workstation
PTC
Positive Temp Coefficient (current limiting/protective) - as heat goes up
resistance goes up and current goes down - safety feature.
PTT
Post, Telephone, Telegraph (national public utilities)
PVC
Poly Vinyl Chloride
PVT
Product Verification Test
PWB
Printed Wiring Board
PWB A
Printed Wiring Board Assembly
PWS
Portable Work Station
RaLPH
Registration and Long Pre Heater (to warm and register the media prior
to meeting the image on the Drum) - detects and corrects skew to within
2.5 Millie-radians. Has three sets of rollers - each set is selected and
used only for certain widths of paper / throughput (i.e. when running small
throughput you would only use the inner pair). The RaLPH is referred to
as the Registration / Preheat assembly in the service documentation.
RAM
Random Access Memory
RARP
Reverse Address Resolution. Reverse of ARP. Converts a MAC address
to an IP address. The document centre resolves its address using RARP.
See also MAC, NIC and ARP.
RBT
Ring Back Tone
RCA
Remote Customer Assistance
RDT
Remote Data Transfer
R/E
Reduction / Enlargement
REN
Ringer Equivalence Number
Reset head sensi- Undo the effects of Measure head sensitivity and Head to head unifortivity data
mity
Resolution
Scanning resolution - generally in PPI or pixels per inch
Reverse Text
Text that is created by printing an ink field around the text letters, leaving
the text visible as the media colour (generally white media).
RGA
Tool for projecting reliability
GP 40
Term
Description
RGB
RPC
RH
RIP
Red/Green/Blue - colours additive primaries - used by emissive devices.

Remote Procedure Call
Relative humidity
Raster Image Processing - Software creates four separate maps or patterns of dots called Raster images for each page of output - one for each
CMYK - called colour separations
Raster Input Scanner
Phone type network connector
Requirements Management
Recommended Media List
Root Mean Square (AC effective voltage)
Receive Not Ready
Regional Operations
Alignment of the print heads (levelling direction)
Refers to transfix roller rolling off the trailing edge (presently maintains
transfix position if in burst mode but releases in say single print mode)
Refers to transfix roller rolling over the leading edge (presently at 90% of
normal pressure) changes somewhat in burst mode.
Inherent to product - generally on duplex - contributors are oiling and
transfix roller
Read Only Memory
Raster Output Scanner
Refers to random missing jets - which the root cause is largely unknown.
Receive Ready
Series of standards for serial communication of data by wire. RS-232
operates at 20 kbits/s, RS-423 operates at 100 kbits/s, RS-422 and RS485 operate at 10 Mbits / s. See FireWire and USB.
Run Test Fixture
Retrain Negative
Retrain Positive
Request To Send
Receive
Concentricity inconsistency in the drum - which may result in PQ defects
unless the IOD fully and correctly compensates for the runout. Runout as
a defect may look like a bump in a line or a non circular circle.
Scan-to-E-mail
Scan-to-File
Scan-to-Export
Systems Administration
Solid Area Density
Systems Administration Key Operator
Service Advertising Protocol. a network device will broadcast its capabilities onto the network at a defined intervals.
RIS
RJ 45
RM
RML
RMS
RNR
RO
Roll
Roll Off
Roll On
Roller Ghosting
ROM
ROS
Roving Jet
RR
RS-232, RS-423,
RS-422, RS-485
RTF
RTN
RTP
RTS
Rx
Runout
S2E
S2F
S2X
SA
SAD
SAKO
SAP
February 2013
6-112

Term
Description
SAF
SAP
SAR
Saturation
Term
Safety
Service Advertising Protocol
Semi-Active Retard feeder
Colours vividness or dullness. Highly saturated are bright colours
whereas low saturation are close to grey.
SBC
Single Board Controller
SCD
Software Compatibility Database
SCM
Software Configuration Management
SCN
Specification Change Notice
SCR
Software Change Request
Screen Frequency Distance between each line of pixels or dots in a raster image. Also
known as screen ruling or line screen.
SCSI
Small computer Systems Interface
SCT
Simple Catch Tray
S/D
Shut Down
SDK
Software Development Kit
SDP
Software Development Plan
SDR
Shut Down Rate
SDRAM
Static Dynamic Remote Access Memory
Server Fax
A fax system that uses a remote Fax server. Faxes transmit as a Scan to
File job sent to the server. Fax receive as print jobs submitted to the Connection Device.
Service Loop
Electrical to MU - we would generally say umbilical but we do not want to
confuse with umbilicals so this electrical harnessing is called the service
loop
SEF
Short Edge Feed
SESS
Strategic Electronic Sub-System
SFWA
Staggered Full Width Array (Four print heads are used to get the full
printing width 1 and 3 are offset from 2 and 4)
SIM
Scanner Input Module
SIP
Scanning and Image Processing
SIR
Standard Image Reduction
SKU
Stock Keeping Unit
SLP
Service Location Protocol (finds servers)
SM
Scheduled Maintenance
SIM card
Subscriber Identity Module
SMART
Systematic Material Acquisition Release Technique
SMB
Server Message Block. Microsoft Server / Client Communications protocol
SMEPTIC
Size Media Environment Product Time usage Image customer
SMP1
Service Maintenance Pack 1 (contains a software package)
SPAR
Software Problem Action Request
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
Description
Snr
SOD
SOPM
Spectral Data
3 Secondary colours solid fill colours the cyan

System Operating Description
Scan Once Print Multiple
Pattern of wavelengths leaving an object - the colours fingerprint reflectance value. Can be plotted - wavelength = horizontal axis and
reflectance intensity the vertical axis. Has several advantages over tristimulus - it is the only true description of the actual colour. Independent of
device and illuminant. Measures composition of light reflected from
object before interpreted by a viewer or device.
Spectrophotometer Used to measure colour - plots its spectral curve (uses multiple wavelengths) Spectral data device. Amount of light energy reflected from an
object at several intervals along the visible spectrum. Can be used to
translate into colourimetric or desitometric data. Most accurate, useful
and flexible instrument available.
SPL
Sound Pressure Level
SPP
Short Paper Path
spi
Spots per inch
SPID
Service Profile Identification
SQA
Software Quality Assurance
Squirm
IQ Defect - Related to transfix roller
SR
Service Representative
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
SRC
Software Requirements Change
SS or S/S
Sub System
SSID
Service Set Identifier
ST
System Terminal Device. Multi-functional device as defined by Energy
Star (includes DC / NC and DC / NC / Fax)
Status Region
The three line display at the top of the user interface.
SR1 - the top line displays critical information, e.g. machine stopped - call
for service.
SR2 - the middle line displays middle ranking information, e.g. action
needed to prevent stoppage.
SR3 - the bottom line displays non critical information, e.g. empty paper
trays or low ink levels.
Stitch
The front to back alignment of the print heads for print quality (determined by IOD)
STP
Standard Test Pattern
STS
Side To Side, paper width sensors
STS
Symptom to Solution
SW
Switch
SW or S/W
Software
SWL
Sound Power Level
system kernel
Minimal operating system
T&M
Time and Materials
February 2013
6-113
GP 40

Term
Description
TAR
TBC
TBD
TCP / IP
TE
Template
TEC
TEI
TETO
TFD
TIFF
TIFF FX
TIFFX
TOF
TP
TPM
Transfix Process
Take away Roller

To Be Confirmed
To Be Defined
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
Trail Edge
A collection of Scan to File attributes that can be conveniently re-used.
Total Electricity Consumption
Terminal Endpoint Identifier
Trail Edge Time Out
Time First Drip
Tagged Image File Format
TIFF Fax eXtended
Tagged Image File Format - for internet FAX
Transfix On Fly
Test Point
Technical Programme Manager
The process of transferring and adhering ink from the print drum to media
by means of passing the media between the nip formed by the imaged
print drum and a roller. During the process, the ink is spread out and is
given a flat and smooth surface.
Transfix Stripper
Mainly for light media and low ink conditions - mylar and is always
loaded.
Transmissive LCD Liquid Crystal Display lit from the back
Trapping
Overlapping colours slightly so that a small degree of mis-registration
does not cause gaps where the paper colour shows through.
TRC
Tonal Reproduction Curve
TRC Generation
Measures the relative intensity between jets at area coverages less than
100%. If needed will adjust the image density for improvement.
Tri-Folder
Output device that creates C and Z folds
Tristimulus
Three dimensional colour values. Must define the illuminance as well.
TSH
Technical Service Hours
TSI
Transmit Subscriber Identification
TTM
Time To Market for Three Tray Module (paper trays)
TTY
Teletype Terminal
TUI
Textual User Interface
Tx
Transmit
UCR
Under Cover Removal. When a hue requires all three CMY colours for
creation, the printers RIP may use UCR to remove a portion if the three
colours from the formula = black and replace with pure black
UGD
An upgrade file, i.e. filename.ugd
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UI
User Interface (display screen)
GP 40
Term
Description
UK
UM
UMR
UNK
UP
United Kingdom
Unscheduled Maintenance
Unscheduled Maintenance Rate
Unknown - generally in reference to why a Purge has occurred.
User Profile - (i.e. average coverage, how many legal pages, prints vs.,
copies to finisher main tray, to finisher aux tray.)
Universal Resource Locator
Universal Serial Bus.
High speed successor to parallel port for local device communications.
Operates at 12 Mbits / s. See FireWire and RS-232.
United States Customer Operations
Upper Spec Limit
Un-shielded Twisted Pair
Modem standards
Value Added Logistic Organization - machines configured prior to shipment to customer.
Level of colours brightness.
Value Added Reseller
Composed of outlines of letters - shapes defined by formulas. Are scalable - meaning they can be sized up or down w/o deterioration.
Video Graphics Array
Visible Orifice Contamination (Print Head term) - multiple meanings for
the acronym, must be deduced by context in which it is being used.
Volatile Organic Compound
Voice Of Customer
Voice Over Internet Protocol
Program utilized in manufacturing to assure 4 print heads act and produce a copy as if there were one. Utilizes a scanner to read output.
Vector Pattern Replacement - improves image quality.
VxWorks is a Unix-like real time operating system.
Term used to define what the paper does in RaLPH - paper is often
skewed twice to align front to rear and remove skew.
Warm Auto Purge - automatic attempt to recover IWM/CWM jets
Drives print head piezo electrical devices - these devices are what activates an individual colour jet in the print head - also called Quad Wave
Amp
Welwyn Garden City (England)
CentreWare Internet Services
JAVA term for shape and shading of buttons on UI display for features /
command buttons - etc.
Window Internet Name Service
Warm Manual Purge (user requested purge)
Most likely transfix roller / pressure related
What You See Is What You Get
URL
USB
USCO
USL
UTP
V.17 / V.29 / V.34
VALO
Value
VAR
Vector Fonts
VGA
VOC
VOC
VOC
VOIP
Voyager
VPR
VxWorks
WAG
WAP
Wave Amp
WGC
WEB UI
Widget
WINS
WMP
Wrinkles
WYSIWYG
February 2013
6-114
GP 41 How to Configure the PWS to Ping a Device

Term
Description
Purpose
XAP
X - Axis
X- Axis Direction
on Print
XCL
XCMI
XCRU
XE
XI
XL
XLA
XOG
XRU
XSA
XUL
Y - Axis
Y dot position
Xerox Asia Pacific

Cross Process direction (front to back)
The X - axis direction on the print is along the length of the drum. This is
also the direction that the print head traverses during printing.
Xerox Canada Limited
Xerox Common Management Interface
Xerographic CRU (also known as XRU)
Xerox Europe
Xerox Initiated
Xerox Limited
Xerox Latin America
Xerox Office Group
Xerographic Replacement Unit
Xerox Unique Login enables use of the xerox corporate directory
Process direction (left side to right side or right side to left side)
Measures the Y dot position of each jet. If needed, it will adjust the firing
time for improvement.
Compensates for variances in diameter of a drum. Computed every 6
degrees. If this value is incorrect and inboard to outboard. Line may have
steps in it.
The Y axis direction on the print is in the direction of drum rotation.
To configure the PWS to ping a device on a network.
Y runout
Y - axis Direction
on Print
Ydp
yNorm
Z - Axis
Procedure
1.
Set the IP address of the PWS one digit higher or lower than the device to be pinged. For
example, if the IP address of the device is 192.168.10.15, set the PWS to 192.168.10.14
or 192.168.10.16. To set the IP address of the PWS, refer to GP 42.
2.
Set the subnet mask of the PWS the same as the devise to be pinged.
3.
On the PWS, Select Start, then Run.
4.
In the Run dialog box, type cmd.
5.
Select OK. A command window will open.
6.
In the command window, type ping and the address of the device. Refer to number 1 in
Figure 1.
7.
If the ping command is successful, a reply from the devise will be received. Refer to number 2 in Figure 1.
Relates to drop mass (measured at the Print Head via manual setup - but
is a calculated value vs. the actual drop mass measured at PH normalisation.
Adjusts the norm values in the PH to correct y dot positions difference
printer to printer. This make horizontal lines not be jagged. Timing of
each jet.
Up and down direction (generally refers to movement or direction)
Figure 1 Successful ping command

8.
If the ping command is unsuccessful, a timed out message will be received, Figure 2.
February 2013
6-115
GP 40, GP 41
GP 42 How to Set the IP Address of the PWS

Purpose
To set the IP address of the PWS
Procedure
Windows 7
Windows XP
Windows 7
1.
Open Start / Control Panel / Network and Sharing Centre.
2.
From the left pane, select Change adapter settings.
3.
Right click on Local Area Connection icon, then select Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties window will open.
4.
Highlight Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4). then select Properties, refer to Figure 1.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window will open.
Figure 2 Unsuccessful ping command
Figure 1 Properties window
GP 41, GP 42
February 2013
6-116
5.
Double-click the entry Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).
6.
Select Use the following IP address. Enter the IP address and Subnet mask, Figure 2.

4.

7.
Click on OK to close the properties dialog box, then OK to close the second properties
dialog box.
8.
Close the Local Area Connection Status dialog box.
Select Use the following IP address. Enter the IP address and Subnet mask, Figure 4.
Windows XP
1.
On the PWS, right click on the My Network Places desktop icon or select Start, then My
Network Places. Select Properties from the menu. The Network and Dial-up Connections
window will open.
2.
Right click on Local Area Connection icon, then select Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties window will open.
3.
Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then select Properties, refer to Figure 3. The Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window will open.
February 2013
6-117
GP 42
GP 43 How to Change Ethernet Speed

Purpose
To change the machines ethernet speed.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Advanced Settings.
6.
Select Continue
7.
Select Ethernet Physical Media.
8.
Select the speed, then Save.
9.
Select Close.
10. Log out of Customer Administration Tools.

5.
Select OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
6.
Select OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
GP 42, GP 43
February 2013
6-118
Windows XP
Purpose
To disable the firewall of the PWS.
Procedure
Windows 7
Windows XP
1.
On the PWS, right click on the My Network Places desktop icon or select Start, then My
Network Places. Select Properties from the menu. The Network and Dial-up Connections
window will open.
2.
Check if the firewall is enabled or disabled. If the Local Area Connection icon has a padlock symbol, the firewall is enabled, Figure 2. If the firewall is enabled, continue with this
procedure.
Windows 7
1.
Open Start / Control Panel / Windows Firewall.
2.
From the left pane, select Turn Windows Firewall on or off.
3.
Select all three Turn off Windows Firewall (not recommended) radio buttons to disable the
windows firewall, Figure 1.
Figure 2 Padlock symbol

3.
Right click on Local Area Connection icon, then select Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties window will open, Figure 3.
Figure 1 Settings buttons

4.
Select OK.
February 2013
6-119
GP 44

4.
Figure 5 Settings button
Select the Advanced tab, then the Settings button, Figure 4. If available, uncheck Protect
my computer and network by limiting or preventing access to the computer from the Internet. Select OK. The Windows Firewall window will open.
6.
Close all open windows.
7.
Disable any other Firewall software or utilities that may be running.
Figure 4 Settings button

5.
Select the Off (not recommended) radio button to disable the windows firewall, Figure 5.
GP 44
February 2013
6-120
GP 45 How to Check the Battery on the NVM Module PWB

Battery
Purpose
To correctly check the battery on the NVM module PWB.
NVM module PWB
Procedure
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure that ESD procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the NVM
module PWB.
1
Connect the probes of the multimeter with
the test points on the battery.
Figure 2 Battery test points

Figure 1 ESD Symbol
1.
Remove the NVM module PWB and battery assembly, REP 3.9.
2.
Use a multimeter to check the voltage of the battery while it is installed on the NVM module PWB, Figure 2. The nominal voltage range of an installed battery is between 2.7 volts
and 2.9 volts.
3.
Install a new battery if the multimeter reading is lower than 2.7 volts. A multimeter reading
higher than 2.9 volts indicates that the battery is unloaded. Check that the battery is
located correctly on the NVM module PWB.
February 2013
6-121
GP 45
GP 46 How to Identify the Different Printhead Connectors
Type B
Purpose
Type B connectors are shown in Figure 2. They are secured to the printheads by a latch mechanism.
To identify both types of connector that can be used to connect the video and wave amp cables
to the printheads.
Description
Two types of connector, type A and type B, can be used to secure the video and wave amp
cables to the printheads. Type A cables can only be used with type A printheads and type B
cables with type B printheads. Both types of cables and printheads may be present in the
machine.
To identify both types of connector, refer to:
Type A
Type B
Type A
Type A connectors are shown in Figure 1. They are secured to the printhead by cable clips.
Figure 2 Type B
Figure 1 Type A
GP 46
February 2013
6-122
b.
Purpose
To show how to remotely log onto the machine and use diagnostics.
Procedure
1.
Before starting this procedure, contact the customer to check that remotely accessing the
machine is convenient. Also ask the customer for the IP address of the machine.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
NOTE: The IP address of the machine is printed on the configuration report.

It may also be necessary to get access to the machine through the customers firewall.
This procedure may be OPCO dependent. Contact your local OPCO.
2.
NOTE: The message Remote session is active is displayed to inform local users
that the machine is being accessed remotely.
Make sure that remote diagnostic login is enabled. Perform the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
In the Login window, enter the User Name diag (case sensitive) and the Password
3424. Select Login.
Select Support.
If necessary enable the Remote Control Panel
Select Remote Control Panel.
To prevent a local user overriding remote selections, in the Access window, select
Block Local Control Panel (user can only observe). Click on Open Remote Control
Panel.
The remote UI will now open and a Service Diagnostics button is available on the
remote UI, Figure 2.
Open a web browser. Enter the machines IP address in the web browser Address
field, then press the enter key. The machines web page will open.
Select Support.
Select Remote Control Panel, then Edit.
In the Login window, enter the User Name admin (case sensitive) and the Password 1111 (default setting). Click Login.
In the Enablement window, select Enable, then For Admin and Diagnostic Users
Only. Click on Save.
NOTE: . Remote UI is disabled by default.
To prevent a local user overriding remote selections, in the Access window, select
Block Local Control Panel (user can only observe).
Select Logout, Figure 1. In the Logout window, click on Logout.
Logout /
Login
Service Diagnostics button

Figure 2 Service Diagnostics button
h.
j.
Click on Service Diagnostics. In the Login window, enter the passcode 1991. Select
Enter.
The machine will enter diagnostics (Service Mode). All diagnostic functions are
available, refer to GP 1 Service Mode.
To exit Service Mode, select Call Closeout, then Exit.
Access remote diagnostics. Perform the following;
k.
NOTE: . If the remote UI session is closed without exiting diagnostics, the machine
will remain in diagnostics and the remote UI will not be accessible.
Close the remote UI window.
a.
l.
Select Login, Figure 1. In the Logout window, click on Logout.
i.
Figure 1 Logout / Login

3.
Select Login, Figure 1.
February 2013
6-123
GP 47
Purpose
Purpose
To explain how to re-enter optional feature installation keys if they fail to reload after an Altboot
or after a hard disk replacement.
To set the USB connection mode.
Procedure
NOTE: McAfee Integrity Control is an optional features available on the ColorQube 9303F with
software version 071.XXX.XXX.XXX.

1.
Procedure
2.
3.
Select Tools.
1.
Obtain the valid Feature Installation key(s) by either:
4.
a.
Asking the customer.
5.
Select USB Settings.
b.
Logging onto the SWAP portal, www.xeroxlicensing.xerox.com/fik. From the Welcome screen, select Find an existing key. Enter the machine serial number in the
window, then select Next.
6.
Select Software Tools.
7.
Select Save.
8.
Exit Customer Administration Tools, GP 5.
c.
2.
Contacting the Licensing Admin Centre (USSG/XCL) or the Xerox sales representative (XE/DMO).
Enter the Feature Installation key(s). Perform the following:

a.
Press the Machine Status key.
b.
c.
Select Device Settings, then General.
d.
Select Feature Installation. Enter the Feature Installation key, then select OK. If necessary, enter the second Feature Installation key.
GP 48, GP 49
February 2013
6-124
dC103 Billing Plan
dC104 Usage Counters
Purpose
Purpose
To change the tiered billing plan.
To display the various usage counters.
Procedure
Procedure
Check that the correct SIM card is installed for the correct machine configuration, go to GP 19
Machine SIM Card Matrix.
1.
2.
Select the Service Info tab.
1.
2.
Select the Maintenance tab.
3.
Select dC103 Billing Plan.
4.
Enter a valid billing plan authorization code.
5.
6.
Select Close to exit the routine.
7.
Select Call Closeout to exit Service Mode.
8.
Switch Off the machine and Switch On the machine, GP 14.
3.
Select dC104 Usage Counters.
4.
Select the relevant counters from the pull down menu.
5.
6.
To restore a customers billing plan, use the following codes.
To restore a machine to a 1 tier billing plan use code 1791.
NOTE: These codes may be used to restore a customers billing plan if it should become corrupted. To change a customers billing plan will require the Billing Plan Conversion Kit which the
customer will need to order from the Xerox sales department.
NOTE: It is not possible for the machine to run in the 3 tier billing plan if it is configured for Billing Impression mode.
February 2013
6-125
dC103, dC104
dC108 Software Version
dC113 Fast Time to Ready
Purpose
Purpose
To identify the version of the installed software on all major modules.
dC113 Fast Time to Ready avoids waiting for the IME to heat-up the ink system.
Procedure
When dC113 is selected the heaters will still come up to printing temperature but functions that
would not normally be enabled are made available before printing temperature is reached.
1.
2.
3.
Select dC108 Software Versions.
Procedure
The dC108 Software Versions screen will display the software and version numbers
installed on the machine.
4.
5.
dC108, dC113
1.
2.
3.
Select dC113 Fast Time to Ready. The UI shows The machine is offline.
NOTE: dC113 Fast Time to Ready Mode has the following characteristics:
When dC113 is selected, no routine or further settings are displayed.
Selecting dC113 after the machine has warmed up will have no effect on the
machine except that the dC113 list item will become greyed out. When the heaters
are up to temperature the feature has no function.
When dC113 has been selected the warming up message is no longer displayed.
When Service Mode is exited the status region displays a message indicating that
scanning and printing are available.
dC113 can only be selected once for each power on cycle and once selected it cannot be cancelled.
4.
5.
February 2013
6-126
dC120 Fault Counters
dC122 Fault History
Purpose
Purpose
To view the faults raised by the machine. dC120 Fault Counters records the number of occurrences of a fault, allows the counters to be sorted by occurrences and allows a specific fault to
be found by chain.
To view shutdown faults in chronological order and more detail than is shown in dC120 Fault
Counters.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
Select dC122 Fault History.
3.
Select dC120 Fault Counters.
4.
The dC122 Fault History screen is displayed with the last 40 faults shown in chronological
order. The most recent fault is at the top of the list.
5.
To observe the details of the fault, select the fault and select Details on the pop-up window. Select Close to return to the fault table.
NOTE: There will be a delay while the machine retrieves the fault counter data.
4.
A list of faults that have occurred on the machine are displayed.
The list can be sorted by number of occurrences and to include zero occurrences.
Selecting these options will resort the list upon selection.
6.
7.
NOTE: When selecting Zero Occurrences there may be a delay as the list is reconfigured.
The list can be sorted by chain.

a.
Select the chain field.
b.
Enter a 3 digit chain number on the numeric keypad.
c.
Select Find.
5.
6.
February 2013
6-127
dC120, dC122
dC123 PEST Fault History
Table 3 PEST fault history with soft and hard faults
Purpose
To display the Print Engine Self Test (PEST) Fault History. PEST errors identify all faults (categorized as hard PEST faults) and anomalies (categorized as soft PEST faults).
Hard PEST faults are defined as faults that stop the machine.
Soft PEST faults are defined as faults that do not stop the machine. These might be components that are operational but not within expected limits. The machine will operate but
the change in the condition of the component might help identify changes or potential
faults in the machine.
The PEST fault history grows upwards The top entry is the latest entry.
Each time the machine starts an entry is entered into the PEST fault history.
XX is a numerical chain number.
YYY is a numerical chain link.
Soft fault
99-442
Soft fault
99-230
Soft fault
99-000
Start of latest PEST
99-000
Start of previous PEST
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Select dC123 PEST Fault History.

The dC123 PEST Fault History is displayed.
The entry format is XX-YYY.
99-213
99-000 is a delimiter that indicates the start of the PEST. If no faults are detected 99-000
is the only entry in the PEST fault history for that start up.
If there are no faults the next entry will be 99-000 indicating the start of the previous
PEST.
If faults are detected they are entered in the fault history above the 99-000 for the start of
the PEST.
Soft faults are listed directly above the 99-000 start of PEST entry.
Hard faults are listed above the soft faults with a delimiter of 99-999 between the hard and
soft faults.
4.
5.
Examples
See Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3.
Table 1 PEST fault history with no soft or hard faults
99-000
99-000
99-000
99-000

Table 2 PEST fault history with soft faults only
99-213
Soft fault
99-442
Soft fault
99-230
Soft fault
99-000
99-000

Table 3 PEST fault history with soft and hard faults
99-365
Hard fault
99-283
Hard fault
99-272
Hard fault
99-999
Separator indicating start of Hard Faults list
dC123
February 2013
6-128
dC131 NVM Read/Write
NOTE: If the NVM default characters exceed 10 characters only the first eight characters are
displayed in the list. The full string is displayed in the Read/Write window.
Purpose
To review and modify values within the machine configuration and control parameters stored in
NVM.
NOTE: This does not include customer administration or accounting data, these are accessible
from the billing facility, refer to the User Guide.
NOTE: The CSE cannot read or modify any NVM that contains customer administrative or
accounting data.
NVM Read / Write Tables

1.
Refer to the following for NVM parameters:
HVF NVM ID 12-xxx, Table 1
IIT DADH NVM ID 800-xxx, Table 2
Each NVM item is identified using an NVM ID and NVM index numbers in the form XXX-XXX,
where XXX- is the ID prefix, and -XXX is the NVM ID. Index numbers range from 0 to 999. For
example 441-001. Refer to GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files.
IOT NVM (IME) ID Range 400 to 439-xxx, Table 3
Procedure
1.
Save the NVM to disk, refer to NVM Save and Restore, dC361.
CCS NVM ID 600-xxx, Table 7
Select the Adjustments tab.
Select dC131 NVM Read/Write.
CCS NVM ID 604-001 to 604-299, Table 10
To read NVM:
1.
Enter the required 3 digit NVM ID in the first field.
Enter the NVM Index in the second field.
Select Read.
Use the Up/Down arrows to move between memory locations.
To write NVM:
1.
Enter the required 3 digit NVM ID in the first field.
2.
Enter the NVM Index in the second field.
Enter a new value in the field beneath the heading Value of xxxx where xxxx is the
description of the NVM location.
NOTE: The Edoc CD must be in the CD drive to use the link below.
Description
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
4.
3.
NOTE: Select +/- to switch between positive and negative values.

4.
Select write.
Refer to the tables that follow for NVM locations and parameters:
NVM Tables for the HVF, IIT and IOT (IME) refer to NVM Read / Write Tables.
For fax NVM tables Refer to Fax Document
When NVM values have been changed, exit Service Mode, switch off the machine, then switch
on the machine, GP 14.
February 2013
6-129
dC131
Table 2 IIT DADH NVM ID 800-xxx
NVM ID
NVM Name
800-006
DADH TE Hotline DADH TE Hot line
Adj 8 mm (increments 0.1 100

mm)
Range = 0 to 160
800-007
Detect Paper Size A4 or 8.5 x 13 inch

1
0 = A4
2
1 = 8.5 x 13
2 = Auto Market Region Set
Range = 0 to 2
800-008
Detect Paper Size A5 or 8.5 x 5.5 inch

2
0 = A5
2
1 = 8.5 x 5.5
2 = Auto Market Region Set
Range = 0 to 2
800-009
DADH Duplex
Speed Mode
DADH duplex speed

(Performance / Noise)
0 = Normal performance
1 = Quiet mode (Reduced
speed)
Range = 0 to 1
801-001
DADH Centre
Reg
CVT centre registration Pixels

Range = 3600 to 3800
3707
801-002
DADH LE Reg
DADH LE registration
Scan Lines
Range = 0 to 150
91
801-003
Platen Top Edge

Reg
Platen top registration
Pixels
Range = 7200 to 7440
7266
801-004
Platen Lead Edge Platen LE registration

Reg
Scan Lines
Range = 0 to 150
80
801-005
Cal Strip Posn
Calibration strip position 0.1 mm increments

(0.1 mm)
Range = 0 to 2715
165
801-006
Test A Posn
Test A position
0.1 mm increments
Range = 0 to 4923
1000
801-007
Test B Posn
Test B position
0.1 mm increments
Range = 0 to 4923
1500
801-008
Test C Posn
Test C position
0.1 mm increments
Range = 0 to 4923
2000
801-009
IIT Power Save
IIT power save
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Range = 0 to 1
801-010
AGC Enable
AGC enable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
Range = 0 to 1
801-011
DarkSetPoint
Dark set point
Grey Level in whole number 0

Range = 0 to 50
801-012
Scanner CVT
position
Scan CVT position
0.1 mm increments
Range 500 to 4923
4913
801-013
Scanner Doc Size Doc size position

Pos
0.1 mm increments
Range = 0 to 2715
700
NVM Description
.
Table 1 HVF NVM ID 12-xxx
NVM ID
NVM Name
12-003
BookMkrCompile- Used to adjust the compiler

position of the booklet maker
Offset
back stop to receive paper.
NVM Description
Settings
Default
0.1137 mm / step
(100 = mid position)
Range = 0 to 200
100
12-004
BookMkrStapleOffset
Used to adjust the staple and 0.1137 mm / step

fold position (together), relative (100 = mid position)
to the Lead Edge of the sheets Range = 0 to 200
100
12-005
BookMkrFoldOff- Used to adjust the fold only,

relative to the Lead Edge of
set
the sheets
0.1137 mm / step
Range = 0 to 200
100
12-006
BookMkrTampRdyOffset
Used to adjust the booklet

tamping ready position. (Sets
home to ready position)
0.265 mm / step (100 100

= mid position)
Range = 0 to 200
12-009
BookMkrTriFoldCFold
Used to position upper tri-fold. 0.1137 mm / step (40 100

Moves fold relative to lead
= mid position)
Range = 60 to 140
edge of C Fold.
12-010
BookMkrTriFoldZ- Used to position upper tri-fold. 0.1137 mm / step (40 100

Moves fold relative to lead
= mid position)
Fold
Range = 60 to 140
edge of Z Fold.
12-011
BookMkrTriFoldDeskew
Used to adjust the amount of 1.745 mm / step

deskew for the 2nd fold in a tri- Range = 90 to 110
fold by varying the amount of
buckle length in registration for
the paper entering tri-folder
100
12-012
BookMkrStapleOffsetM
Used to control the staple offset position for 8.5 x 13 and

8.5 x 14 inch
0.1137 mm / step
Range = 0 to 200
100
12-013
BookMkrStapleOffsetL
Used to control the staple offset position for 11 x 17 inch

and A3
0.1137 mm / step
Range = 0 to 200
100

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
800-005
DADH LE Hotline DADH LE hot line
dC131
Settings
Default
Adj 8 mm (increments 0.1 90

mm)
Range = 0 to 160
February 2013
6-130
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
801-014
Scan LE Hotline
Scan LE hot line
0.1 mm increments
Range = 100 to 900
280
801-024
Speed Mode
Speed mode
801-015
Mono Set Point
Mono set point

Range = 170 to 255
0 = 257 mm/s
1 = 234 mm/s
2 = 234 mm/s
Range = 0 to 3
801-016
Red Set Point
Red set point

Range = 170 to 255
801-025
Scanner Type
801-017
Green Set Point
Green set point

Range = 170 to 255
Scanner type, full width 1 = FWA

array or charged cou2 = CCDS
pled device
Range = 0 to 255
801-026
Blue Set Point
Blue set point

Range = 170 to 255
IQ Parameter
Version
IQ parameter version
801-018
801-019
ReCalMag200
ReCalMag200
0 = Never
1 = Re-calibrate for nonmixed originals
2 = Always Calibrate
Range = 0 to 2
801-020
CvtMonoAgcAdjust
CvtMonoAgcAdjus
% whole numbers. 100 cor- 103

responds to no DADH offset
compensation. Setting
greater than 100 compensates for DADH darker than
platen.
Range = 80 to 120
801-027
DADH / Platen
Configuration
DADH / platen configu- 0 = DADH / Platen present

ration
1 = Platen only
Range = 0 to 1
801-021
801-022
801-023
CvtRedAgcAdjust CvtRedAgcAdjus
CvtGrnAgcAdjust CvtGrnAgcAdjus
CvtBlueAgcAdjust CvtBlueAgcAdjus
Holds the scan parameter

1
version index and distinguishes between minor variations within a scanner
family, e.g. filter change,
lens change. Set to 1 for
ColorQube at launch.
Range = 0 to 255
1
Table 3 IOT NVM (IME) ID Range 400 to 439-xxx

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
410-001
Transfix calibration front
Transfix front load calibration

factor
Range = -1,500 to
3,500
2,200
410-002
Transfix calibration rear
Transfix rear load calibration

factor
Range = -1,500 to
3,500
2,200
410-003
Transfix cal
invalid
Invalidate transfix calibration
Range = 0 to 1

platen.
Range = 80 to 120
410-004
Transfix Load for

Large Envelope
Transfix load value for large

envelopes
Range = 2,000 to
5,100
2,000
420-001
Ink Level Cyan
Track ink mass - cyan
(+) when sticks

0
added
(-) when pixels print
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
Tenths of %. 1000 (100%)

103
corresponds to no DADH
offset compensation. Setting
greater than 1000 compensate for DADH darker than
platen.
Range = 80 to 120
420-002
Ink Level
Magenta
Track ink mass - magenta
(+) when sticks

0
added
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
420-003
Ink Level Yellow
Track ink mass - yellow
(+) when sticks

0
added
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295

platen.
Range = 80 to 120
February 2013
6-131
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
420-004
Ink Level Black
Track ink mass - black
(+) when sticks

0
added
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
420-005
Metered Sticks
Cyan
Track metered stick counts cyan
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-006
Metered Sticks
Magenta
Track metered stick counts magenta
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-007
Metered Sticks
Yellow
Track metered stick counts yellow
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-008
Metered Sticks
Black
Track metered stick counts black
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-009
Sold Sticks Cyan
Track Sold stick counts - cyan Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-010
Sold Sticks
Magenta
Track Sold stick counts magenta
420-011
Sold Sticks Yellow Track Sold stick counts - yellow
420-012
Sold Sticks Black Track Sold stick counts - black Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-013
DMO Sticks Black Track DMO stick counts
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-014
DMO Sticks Cyan Track DMO stick counts
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-015
DMO Sticks
Magenta
Track DMO stick counts
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-016
DMO Sticks Yellow
Track DMO stick counts
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-017
SKU4 Sticks
Cyan
Track SKU4 stick counts
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-018
SKU4 Sticks
Magenta
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-019
SKU4 Sticks Yellow
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-020
SKU4 Sticks
Black
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-021
SKU5 Sticks
Cyan
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-022
SKU5 Sticks
Magenta
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-023
SKU5 Sticks Yellow
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
420-024
SKU5 Sticks
Black
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
dC131
Default
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
425-001
Startup Mode
Startup Mode
0 = Customer mode 255

1 = Developer mode
2 = Diagnostics
mode
3 = Non-thermal
mode
4 = not used
5 = Fast time to
ready mode
255 = default mode
Range = 0 to 255
425-002
Jet Fix Purge
JetFix Purge
0 = Disabled
1 = Purge Always
2 = Purge Ext Idle
Range = 0 to 2
425-003
Non-Thermal
Mode
Thermal Mode
0 = Enable
1 = Disabled
Range = 0 to 1
425-004
Jet Fix Substitute Jet Fix substitute
0 = Enabled
1 = Disabled
Range = 0 to 1
425-005
Max Pages
before IODAlign
Force alignment after this

many pages if alignment has
not occurred
0 = Disabled
n = Number of
pages
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
500
425-006
Board Required
Defines which boards are

required for this system
Range = 0 to 11
425-007
Simulated Motors Defines simulated or real

motors
Range = 0 to 8
425-008
Comm channel
Communication channel for
for command data command data
Range = 1 to 3
425-009
Comm channel
for image data
Range = 2 to 4
425-010
Delay until nomad Startup blocks until nomad

connects
connects
425-011
Nomad IP
address
Specifies the IP address that of Range = 0 to

the nomad server
4,294,967,295
425-012
Port number for

nomad connection
Specifies the well known port Range = 0 to 65,535 25,000

number for nomad connection
425-013
Jet Fix Substitute Jet Fix Substitute Chronic

Chronic
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
February 2013
6-132
Communication channel for

image data
Default
0 = Do not require
0
1 = Require connection
Range = 0 to 1
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Range = 0 to 1
488,717
,837
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
425-014
Not currently
used
Not used
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Range = 0 to 1
435-002
Centerline medium media
Center line of paper for

medium width media
Range = 1,660,000
to 1,740,000
1,700,0
00
435-003
425-015
9301 Chronic
CMY Report
Level
For 9301, minimum Consecu- Range = 0 to 255

tive Chronic CMY Jets needed
to inform CBC
Sensor 10 medium media
Sensor 10 Location for

medium width media
Range = - 2,550,000 to - 2,350,000

2,450,0
00
435-004
Ralph Dark Level Ralph Dark Level
425-016
9301 Chronic
Mono Report
Level
For 9301, minimum Total

Chronic Mono Jets needed to
inform CBC
1
435-005
Sensor 10 to14
Delta
Distance from Sensor 10 to 14 Range = 1,234,000

to 1,334,000
425-017
9302 Chronic
CMY Report
Level

to inform CBC
435-006
Sensor 10 - narrow media
Sensor 10 Location for narrow Range = - 2,550,000 media

to - 2,350,000
2,450,0
00
425-018
9302 Chronic
Mono Report
Level

Chronic Mono Jets needed
Range = 0 to 255
435-007
Ralph scan bar

skew angle narrow
Ralph scan bar skew angle

narrow media
425-019
9303 Chronic
CMY Report
Level

to inform CBC
435-008
Centerline - narrow media
Center line of the path for nar- Range = 1,660,000

to 1,740,000
row media
435-009
425-020
9303 Chronic
Mono Report
Level

Chronic Mono Jets needed
Sensor 10 - wide
media
Sensor 10 location for wide

media
Range = - 2,550,000 to - 2,350,000

2,450,0
00
435-010
Jet Fix soft substi- Enable soft jet substitution for

tute black
black jets
0 = Enabled1 = Dis- 1
abled
Ralph scan bar

skew angle wide

wide media
Range = 350 to 650 500
425-021
435-011
425-022
Soft Jet Substitu- Algorithm for soft jet substitution

tion
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Range = 0 to 1
Centerline - wide
media
Center line of paper path for

wide media
Range = 1,660,000
to 1,740,000
1,700,0
00
435-012
Ralph cal invalid
Invalidate ralph calibration
Range = 0 to 1
0 = Do not log to
NOMAD
1 = Log to NOMAD
Range = 0 to 1
435-013
nip A Scale Fac- The scale factors for Nip A roll- Range = -1000 to
tor Adjust Narrow ers for narrow media
1000
435-014
nip A Scale Fac- The scale factors for Nip A roll- Range = -1000 to
1000
tor Adjust Medium ers for medium media
435-015
nip A Scale Factor Adjust Wide
435-016
Exit skew correc- Use skew correction at exit for Range = 0 to 1

tion for punch
punched media
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
441-001
Validation01
Used for validation
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
413,943,
794
441-002
NVRAM format
NVRAM format
Range = 0 to 255
24
441-003
NVRAM constants rev
NVRAM constants revision

number
Range = 0 to 255
80
441-004
NVRAM dynamics rev
NVRAM dynamics revision

number
Range = 0 to 255
28
425-023
425-024
426-001
NOMAD Enabled Enable / disable NOMAD logging
Range = 0 to 255
Range = 0 to 255
Allow IME SoftUsed during Software Update Range = 0 to 1

ware Downgrade process to allow an older version of IME firmware to be
load.
0 - Don't allow SW downgrade
1 - Allow SW Downgrade
Data Used by CCS for backup Range = 0 to 255

storage. Print Speed
430-001
Service Reason
Chain
Service call reason chain
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
430-002
Service Reason
Link
Service call reason link
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
435-001
Ralph scan bar

skew angle
medium

medium
Range = 350 to 650 500
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
80
1,284,0
00
Range = 350 to 650 500
The scale factors for Nip A roll- Range = -1000 to

1000
ers for wide media
1,700,0
00
February 2013
6-133
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
441-005
Code minor revision number
Code minor revision number
Range = 0 to 255
18
445-009
badJet1
441-006
Number of faults
encountered
Number of faults encountered
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
441-007
Reset count
Reset count
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
441-008
Total print count
Total print count
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
441-011
Constants CRC
Constants CRC
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
Value identifies the location of Set with bad jet for- 0

a jet that will not be used
mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
Colour (CMYK = 14) Z = Jet number
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
441-012
Service Constants CRC
Service Constants CRC
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
445-010
badJet2
441-013
IME Serial Number
Marking Engine Serial Number Range = 0 to 0
441-014
NVRAM serviced NVRAM constants which need Range = 0 to 255

constants rev
service to reset: revision number
443-001
NVMRAM CRC
Err Count
Number of NVRAM CRC

errors encountered
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
445-001
Printhead 1 Voltage Scaling
Printhead 1 voltage scale factor
Range = 0 to 255
128

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-002
Range = 0 to 255
128
445-011
badJet3
445-003
Range = 0 to 255
128
445-004
Range = 0 to 255
128
445-005
Head 1 Serial
Num
Head 1 Serial Number
Range = 0 to 0
445-006
Head 2 Serial
Num
Range = 0 to 0

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-007
Head 3 Serial
Num
Range = 0 to 0
445-012
badJet4
445-008
Head 4 Serial
Num
Range = 0 to 0

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
dC131
28
February 2013
6-134
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
445-013
badJet5

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-017
badJet9

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-014
badJet6

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-018
badJet10

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-015
badJet7

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-019
badJet11

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-016
badJet8

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-020
badJet12

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
Settings

Default
February 2013
6-135
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
445-021
badJet13

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-025
badJet17

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-022
badJet14

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-026
badJet18

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-023
badJet15

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-027
badJet19

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-024
badJet16

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-028
badJet20

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
dC131
Settings

Default
February 2013
6-136
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
445-029
badJet21

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-033
badJet25

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-030
badJet22

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-034
badJet26

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-031
badJet23

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-035
badJet27

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-032
badJet24

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-036
badJet28

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
Settings

Default
February 2013
6-137
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
445-037
badJet29

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-041
badJet33

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-038
badJet30

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-042
badJet34

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-039
badJet31

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-043
badJet35

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-040
badJet32

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-044
badJet36

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
dC131
Settings

Default
February 2013
6-138
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
445-045
badJet37

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
445-046
445-047
445-048
badJet38
badJet39
badJet40
Settings

Default

mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
mat: HCJet
Read - XYZZZ
X = head (1-4): Y =
(1-220)
Example 23044 =
head 2, Y, jet 44
Clear by writing 0
Range = 0 to 65,535
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
445-049
H2H uniformity
type selection
Select dC972 uniformity and

TRC calculation methods.
0 = Centre pass
turned off
1 = Centre pass on
4 strip TRC pattern
2 = Centre pass on
8 strip TRC pattern
Range = 0 to 2
450-001
PFP Kit Type
Type of kits installed on PFP
0 = Standard (A4
and Letter LEF)
1 = Kit A (A3 SEF
and A4 LEF)
2 = Kit A (11 x 17
SEF and 8.5 x 11
LEF)
3 = Kit B (A4, SEF)
4 = Kit B (Letter,
Legal SEF)
Range = 0 to 4
450-002
MSI motor type
MSI motor type
Range = 0 to 65,535 1
450-003
Tray 1 HW revision
Hardware version for tray 1 of

the TTM
Range = 0 to 1
450-004
Tray 2 HW revision
Hardware version for tray 2 of

the TTM
Range = 0 to 1
450-005
TTM HW revision Hardware version of the TTM
Range = 0 to 2
450-006
TTM1 Min Sheet

Count BTW
Retries
The minimum number of

Range= 0 to
sheets TTM1 has to feed after 4,294,967,295
it attempted extra pick retries
(more than 2 tries), before it
can run extra retries again.
10,000
450-007
TTM2 Min Sheet

Count BTW
Retries

Range= 0 to
10,000
450-008
TTM3 Min Sheet

Count BTW
Retries

Range= 0 to
10,000
450-009
MSI Min Sheet

Count BTW
Retries

Range= 0 to
sheets MSI has to feed after it 4,294,967,295
attempted extra pick retries
10,000
February 2013
6-139
dC131

Settings
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
450-010
PFP Min Sheet

Count BTW
Retries

Range= 0 to
sheets PFP has to feed after it 4,294,967,295
attempted extra pick retries
10,000
464-003
Upper right head

roll factor
Upper right head roll factor
The default is deliber- 2,147,48

3,647
ately out of range
Range = 400,000,000 to
400,000,000
450-011
TTM1 Extra Pick

Retries
Set to 1 to allow a extra pick

retries TTM1
Range = 0 to 1
464-004
Upper cross process head offset
Upper cross process head

offset
450-012
TTM2 Extra Pick

Retries

retries TTM2.
Range = 0 to 1
Range = 100,000,000 to
100,000,000
464-005
450-013
TTM3 Extra Pick

Retries

retries TTM3.
Range = 0 to 1
Lower head stitch Lower head stitch factor

factor
450-014
MSI Extra Pick

Retries

retries MSI.
Range = 0 to 1

3,647
ately out of range
Range = 600,000,000 to
600,000,000
450-015
PFP Extra Pick

Retries

retries PFP.
Range = 0 to 1
464-006
Lower left head

roll factor
Lower left head roll factor
451-001
Sheets Until OC
Tray Full
Number of Sheets after OCT

sensor is met when tray full is
declared
Range = 0 to 100
50

3,647
ately out of range
Range = 400,000,000 to
400,000,000
464-007
Lower right head

roll factor
Lower right head roll factor

ately out of range
3,647
Range = 400,000,000 to
400,000,000
464-008
Lower cross process head offset
Lower cross process head

offset
Range = 100,000,000 to
100,000,000
464-009
Head 1 process
stitch factor
Head 1 process stitch factor Range = 600,000,000 to

600,000,000
464-010
Head 2 process
stitch factor

600,000,000
464-011
Head 3 process
stitch factor

600,000,000
464-012
Head 4 process
stitch factor

600,000,000
464-013
Purge needed
head 1
Purge needed head 1
Range = 0 to 1
464-014
Purge needed
head 2
Purge needed head 2
Range = 0 to 1
464-015
Purge needed
head 3
Purge needed head 3
Range = 0 to 1
464-016
Purge needed
head 4
Purge needed head 4
Range = 0 to 1

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
463-002
DrumTemp:
Paper prints
Temperature of drum when Range = 0 to 2,000

printing on paper
555
463-003
DrumTemp:
Transparency
prints

printing on transparency
555
463-004
DrumTemp: Low
power mode

in low power mode
460
463-005
DrumTemp: Sleep Temperature of drum when Range = 0 to 2,000

mode
in sleep mode
464-001
Upper head stitch Upper head stitch factor

factor
464-002
Upper left head

roll factor
Upper left head roll factor
dC131
Settings
Default

3,647
ately out of range
Range = 600,000,000 to
600,000,000
3,647
ately out of range
Range = 400,000,000 to
400,000,000
February 2013
6-140
Default
- 30,000
- 30,000

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
464-017
Upper SFWA
Upper SFWA heads need
heads need flush flush
Range = 0 to 1
465-009
Temperature of melt reservoir for sleep mode
Range = 0 to 2,000
464-018
Lower SFWA
Lower SFWA heads need
heads need flush flush
Range = 0 to 1
Melt Reservoir
Temp: Sleep
mode
465-010
Amount of waste
ink in tray
Amount of waste ink in tray Range = 0 to

4,294,967,295
500,000
Umb Upr Temp:

non-TEC Sleep
mode
Temperature of upper
Range = 0 to 2,000
umbilical for non-TEC sleep
mode.
464-019
464-022
Xaxis Scaling:
Upper 2 heads
Cross-process movement Range = 35,535 to

scale factor for mechanism 85,535
that holds upper two heads
65,850
465-011
Umb Lwr Temp:

non-TEC Sleep
mode
Temperature of lower umbil- Range = 0 to 2,000

ical for non-TEC sleep
mode.
464-023
Xaxis Scaling:
Lower 2 heads
Cross-process movement Range = 35,535 to

scale factor for mechanism 85,535
that holds lower two heads
65,850
465-012
MeltRes Temp:
non-TEC Sleep
mode
Temperature of melt reservoir for non-TEC sleep

mode.
464-024
LPA Step Time
Time delay to switch to sec- Range = 0 to

4,294,967,295
ondary pump duty cycle
465-013
930
464-025
Initial LPA Duty
Low pressure initial assist

pump duty cycle
60
Umbilical Lwr
Temperature of lower umbil- Range 0 to 2,000
Temp: Pre-Ready ical when in ink delivery on
demand pre-ready mode.
465-014
Umbilical Upr
Temp: Pre-Ready umbilical when in ink delivery on demand pre-ready
mode.
Range 0 to 2,000
930
465-015
Melt Reservoir
Temperature of melt reser- Range 0 to 2,000
Temp: Pre-Ready voir when in ink delivery on
demand pre-ready mode.
930
465-016
TIDO threshold
time for K
TIDO threshold time

remaining at which the ink
delivery system starts warmup for black ink.
Range 0 to 65,535
120
465-017
TIDO threshold
time for CMY
TIDO threshold time

delivery system starts warmup for CMY ink.
Range 0 to 65,535
300
465-018
TIDO threshold
mass for K
TIDO threshold mass

delivery system starts warmup for black ink.
Range 0 to 65,535
125
465-019
TIDO threshold
mass for CMY
TIDO threshold mass

delivery system starts warmup for CMT ink.
Range 0 to 65,535
125
465-020
TIDO time after

print job
TIDO time to wait after print Range 0 to 65,535

job completes before cooling the ink delivery system
to its pre-ready state.
Range = 0 to 255
464-026
Second LPA Duty Low pressure secondary

pump duty cycle
464-027
Single head
purge pre-wipe
LPA
The initial lpa pwm value for Range = 0 to 255

the wipe when purging only
one head
464-028
Single head
purge post-wipe
LPA
The value of the lpa pwm

Range = 0 to 255
that is set after lpaStepTime
has expired when purging
only one head
465-001
Umbilical Upr
Temp: Printing
umbilical for printing
Range = 0 to 2,000
1,103
465-002
Umbilical Upr
Temp: Low Power umbilical for low power
Range = 0 to 2,000
930
465-003
Umbilical Upr
Temp: Sleep
mode
umbilical for sleep mode
Range = 0 to 2,000
465-004
Umbilical Lwr
Temp: Printing

ical for printing
465-005
Umbilical Lwr
Temp: Low Power ical for low power mode
930
465-006
Umbilical Lwr
Temp: Sleep
mode

ical for sleep mode
465-007
Melt Reservoir
Temp: Printing
Temperature of melt reservoir for printing
Range = 0 to 2,000
1,500
465-008
Melt Reservoir
Temperature of melt reserTemp: Low Power voir for low power mode
Range = 0 to 2,000
930
Range = 0 to 255
60
1,020
February 2013
6-141
Range = 0 to 2,000
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
490-008
H2HUniformity
tool State
H2HUniformity tool State
Read: auto status

0 = optimal
1 = non optimal
2 = disabled
Write: control
3 = disabled auto
4 = enable auto
Range = 0 to 4
490-009
IOD H2Uniformity Time stamp for last success of Range = 0 to

pass timestamp
IOD H2HUniformity
4,294,967,295
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
489-003
PreheatTemp:
Paper prints
Temperature of pre-heater
when printing on paper
Range = 0 to 2,000
610
489-004
PreheatTemp:
Transparency
prints
Range = 0 to 2,000
when printing on transparency
610
489-005
PreheatTemp:
PaperPath clean- when performing paper path
cleaning
ing
Range = 0 to 2,000
489-006
PreheatTemp: For Temperature of pre-heater

jam in prehtr
when jam in pre-heater
Range = 0 to 2,000
560
490-010
IOD DeltaTRC fal Count of failures since last

count
success of IOD Delta TRC
Range = 0 to 255
489-007
PreheatTemp:
Low pwr mode
when in low power mode
Range = 0 to 2,000
500
490-011
TRC tool State
TRC tool State
489-008
PreheatTemp:
Sleep mode
when in sleep mode
Range = 0 to 2,000
490-001
IOD Sensitivity
fail count
Count of failures since last

success of IOD sensitivity
Range = 0 to 255
490-002
Sensitivity tool
State
Sensitivity tool State
Read: auto status

0 = optimal
1 = non optimal
2 = disabled
Write: control
3 = disabled auto
4 = enable auto
Range = 0 to 4
Read: auto status

0 = optimal
1 = non optimal
2 = disabled
Write: control
3 = disabled auto
4 = enable auto
Range = 0 to 4
490-012
IOD DeltaTRC
pass timestamp
Timestamp for last success of

IOD Delta TRC
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
490-019
H2HAlignAdjust
tool State
H2HAlignAdjust tool State
Read: auto status

0 = optimal
1 = non optimal
2 = disabled
Write: control
3 = disabled auto
4 = enable auto
Range = 0 to 4
490-020
UTP index
Index into selected uniformity

time out profile
When changing pro- 0

file choice, set to 0
Range = 0 to 4
490-021
UTP choice
Choice of uniformity time out

profiles
Profile 0:
14.28.56.0.0
Profile 1:
14.28.56.126.0
Profile 2:
28.56.112.0
Profile 3: programable in NVRAM
below
Range = 0 to 3
490-022
UTP Choice 3
Index 0 Day
Count
Uniformity Time out Profile 3,

index 0
0 means end of list

Range = 0 to 255
490-003
IOD Sensitivity
pass timestamp
490-004
IOD YDotPosiCount of failures since last

tionCorrect count success of IOD YDotPositionCorrect
Range = 0 to 255
YDotPositionCor- YDotPositionCorrection tool

State
rection tool Stat
Read: auto status

0 = optimal
1 = non optimal
2 = disabled
Write: control
3 = disabled auto
4 = enable auto
Range = 0 to 4
490-005
Time stamp for last successful Range = 0 to

IOD sensitivity
4,294,967,295
490-006
IOD YDotPosCorect pass

timestamp
Time stamp for last successful Range = 0 to

IOD IODYDotPostionCorrect
4,294,967,295
490-007
IOD H2Uniformity Count of failures since last

Range = 0 to 255
fail count
success of IOD H2HUniformity
dC131
850
0
0
February 2013
6-142
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
490-023
UTP Choice 3
Index 1 Day
Count

index 1
0 means end of list

Range = 0 to 255
490-039
Unif Maint Abort:

Align Errors
Uniformity work begun at night, 0 to clear

but Align Fails: Increment this Range = 0 to 255
count
490-024
UTP Choice 3
Index 2 Day
Count

index 2
0 means end of list

Range = 0 to 255
490-040
490-025
UTP Choice 3
Index 3 Day
Count

index 3
0 means end of list

Range = 0 to 255
490-026
UTP Choice 3
Index 4 Day
Count

index 4
0 means end of list

Range = 0 to 255
IOD Align Cal tool IOD Align Calibration tool State Read: auto status.0 0
State
= optimal, 1 = non
optimal, 2 = disabled. Write:
control3 = disable
auto, 4 = enable
auto
490-041
490-027
9301 Purge for x

Bad Color Jets
9301 Minimum color bad jet

count for jet fix purging
Range = 0 to 255
255
Count of failures IOD Align Cal Fail count

since last success
of IOD Align Calibration
490-028
9301 Purge after

x Bad Mono Jets
9301 Minimum mono bad jet

Range = 0 to 255
490-042
490-029
9302 Purge for x

Bad Color Jets

Range = 0 to 255
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset X1 Front Range = -1000 to

value applied to X
1000
stitch front measurements for
stitch interface 1.
490-030
9302 Purge after

x Bad Mono Jets

Range = 0 to 255
490-043
490-031
9303 Purge for x

Bad Color Jets

Range = 0 to 255
490-032
9303 Purge after

x Bad Mono Jets

Range = 0 to 255
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset X2 Front Range = -1000 to

value applied to X
1000
stitch interface 2.
490-044
30Day Discolora- 30-day discoloration purge

0 = disabled
tion Purge Enable enable (to address ink-cooking 1 = enabled
Range = 0 to 255
in the umbilicals)
490-034
Consec PurgeWhen PQM requested purge

Clean Sheet Errs fails, including mud-page failures increment this count.
Clear on success
0 to clear
Range = 0 to 255
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset X2 Rear Range = -1000 to

value applied to X
1000
stitch rear measurements for
stitch interface 2.
490-033
490-045

and insufficient jets becomes Range = 0 to 255
an impediment: increment this
count.
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset X3 Rear Range = -1000 to

value applied to X
1000
stitch interface 3.
490-046
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset Y1 Front Range = -1000 to

value applied to Y
1000
stitch interface 1.
490-047
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset Y2 Front Range = -1000 to

value applied to Y
1000
stitch interface 2.
490-035
Unif Maint Abort:

Bad Jets
490-036
Unif Maint Abort:

No paper

but no-Paper becomes an
Range = 0 to 255
impediment: Increment this
count
490-037
Unif Maint Abort:

Needs Ink

but insufficient Ink becomes an Range = 0 to 255
impediment: Increment this
count
490-038
Unif Maint Abort:

CleanPage Err

but Mud pages Fail: Increment Range = 0 to 255
this count
February 2013
6-143
Settings
Range = 0 to 4
Default
0
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
490-048
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset Y2 Rear Range = -1000 to

value applied to Y
1000
stitch interface 2.
490-058
16
490-049
A correction offset Stitch Measure Offset Y3 Rear Range = -1000 to

value applied to Y
1000
stitch interface 3.
TMP:Max Fix Jets TMP: A threshold of purge

Range = 0 to 255
Purge Needed
maintenance sessions that
had purges to correct bad jets.
If this threshold is exceeded a
Head x Too Many Purges informational fault is raised and the
heads jet fix purging is
blocked.
490-059
490-050
TMP:H1Fix Jets
Purge Needed
TMP = too many purges fea- Range = 0 to 255

ture
TMP: count of semi-consecuitive nights in which head 1
sees purge needed to fix jets.
TMP:Max Fix Jets TMP: When the number of

Range = 0 to 255
Prg NOT Needed purge maintenance sessions
which requires no purges to fix
bad jets exceeds this value the
Head x Too Many Purges DevFault is lowered
490-060
TMP:H2Fix Jets
Purge Needed
TMP: count of semi-consecui- Range = 0 to 255

tive nights in which head 2
Unif-CLD Baseline Status
490-052
TMP:H3Fix Jets
Purge Needed

CLD = CloseLoopDrift = a new Range = 0 to 255

way to achieve uniformity via
IOD. CLD baseline (via IOD) is
a new calibration required by
uniformity (CLDAdjust). This is
PQM status for CLD baseline.
490-051
490-053
TMP:H4Fix Jets
Purge Needed

0
490-061
TMP:H1Fix Jets TMP: count of semi-consecui- Range = 0 to 255

Prg NOT Needed tive nights in which head 1
sees purge NOT needed to fix
jets.
Unif-CLD Baseline Failure
PQM consecutive failure count Range = 0 to 4

for CLD baseline
490-054
490-062
Unif-CLD BaseWhat is the youngest heads

Range = 0 to
line Last Success time at temp when CLD base- 4,294,967,295
line last succeeded
490-055

jets.
490-063
Wait GelMaint
until CU-PC
Min CU print count before

Range = 0 to
PQM begins running automatic 4,294,967,295
CU Gel Maintenance at night.
25,000
490-064
490-056

jets.
Override Uniformity Algorithm
Switch to go back to old unifor- 0 = New CLD unifor- 0

mity algorithm vs new closed mity
1 = Old uniformity
loop drift algorithm.
Range = 0 to 225
490-065
490-057

jets.
Delta CU-PC
between GelMaint
Min CU print count between

automatic CU Gel maintenances at night
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-144
NVM Description
Settings
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
Default
5,000

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
490-066
PQM ISM Status
ISM Status: PQMs status

Range = 0 to 4
tracking for the ISM feature.
0 = Optimal, PQM has calculated that ISM-Purge is NOT
NEEDED
1 = NonOptimal, PQM has
calculated that ISM-Purge is
NEEDED
3= Manually disabled:ISM feature is Off - default value
4 = Manually Enabled: ISM
feature has been enabled by a
user
490-067
490-068
PQM ISM Calc

Threshold
Settings

Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
492-012
Drum runout cal

#05
Calibration values of the drum Range = -32,768 to

y-run out
32,767
492-013
Drum runout cal

#06

y-runout
32,767
492-014
Drum runout cal

#07

y-runout
32,767
492-015
Drum runout cal

#08

y-runout
32,767
492-016
Drum runout cal

#09

y-runout
32,767
492-017
Drum runout cal

#10

y-runout
32,767
492-018
Drum runout cal

#11

y-runout
32,767
492-019
Drum runout cal

#12

y-runout
32,767
492-020
Drum runout cal

#13

y-runout
32,767
492-021
Drum runout cal

#14

y-runout
32,767
492-022
Drum runout cal

#15

y-runout
32,767
492-023
Drum runout cal

#16

y-runout
32,767
492-024
Drum runout cal

#17

y-runout
32,767
492-025
Drum runout cal

#18

y-runout
32,767
492-026
Drum runout cal

#19

y-runout
32,767
492-027
Drum runout cal

#20

y-runout
32,767
492-028
Drum runout cal

#21

y-runout
32,767
492-029
Drum runout cal

#22

y-runout
32,767
492-030
Drum runout cal

#23

y-runout
32,767
492-031
Drum runout cal

#24

y-runout
32,767
492-032
Drum runout cal

#25

y-runout
32,767
492-033
Drum runout cal

#26

y-runout
32,767
ISM Calc Cycles: Indicates

Range = 0 to 65,535 40
how many of the most recent
Ink Usage Cycles (up to 8)
should be used in the calculation.
PQM Calc Cycles ISM Calc Threshold: It indiRange = 0 to 8

cates the minimum amount of
ink that must be used over the
calculated period to avoid
purging at night.
492-001
Image on drum
Range = 0 to 1
492-002
DM can scrape off DM can scrape off image

image
Range = 0 to 1
492-003
Drum image is 2
pitch
Drum image is 2 pitch
Range = 0 to 1
492-004
Position of dirty
drum image
Drum dirty start position
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
492-005
Size of drum
image X
Size of drum image
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
492-006
Size of drum
image Y
Size of drum image
Range = 0 to 65,535 0
492-007
Position of drum
image
Cross process drum offset

position
Range = -32,768 to
32,767
492-008
Drum runout cal

#01

y-run out
32,767
492-009
Drum runout cal

#02

y-run out
32,767
492-010
Drum runout cal

#03

y-run out
32,767
492-011
Drum runout cal

#04

y-run out
32,767
Image on drum
February 2013
6-145
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
492-034
Drum runout cal

#27

y-runout
32,767
492-056
Drum runout cal

#49

y-runout
32,767
492-035
Drum runout cal

#28

y-runout
32,767
492-057
Drum runout cal

#50

y-runout
32,767
492-036
Drum runout cal

#29

y-runout
32,767
492-058
Drum runout cal

#51

y-runout
32,767
492-037
Drum runout cal

#30

y-runout
32,767
492-059
Drum runout cal

#52

y-runout
32,767
492-038
Drum runout cal

#31

y-runout
32,767
492-060
Drum runout cal

#53

y-runout
32,767
492-039
Drum runout cal

#32

y-runout
32,767
492-061
Drum runout cal

#54

y-runout
32,767
492-040
Drum runout cal

#33

y-runout
32,767
492-062
Drum runout cal

#55

y-runout
32,767
492-041
Drum runout cal

#34

y-runout
32,767
492-063
Drum runout cal

#56

y-runout
32,767
492-042
Drum runout cal

#35

y-runout
32,767
492-064
Drum runout cal

#57

y-runout
32,767
492-043
Drum runout cal

#36

y-runout
32,767
492-065
Drum runout cal

#58

y-runout
32,767
492-044
Drum runout cal

#37

y-runout
32,767
492-066
Drum runout cal

#59

y-runout
32,767
492-045
Drum runout cal

#38

y-runout
32,767
492-067
Drum runout cal

#60

y-runout
32,767
492-046
Drum runout cal

#39

y-runout
32,767
492-068
Drum run out off- Drum y- run out offset

set
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
18
492-047
Drum runout cal

#40

y-runout
32,767
492-069
Drum runout tool

State
Drum runout tool State
Range = 0 to 1
492-048
Drum runout cal

#41

y-runout
32,767
492-070
Prints On This
Drum
Number of prints on the drum
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
492-049
Drum runout cal

#42

y-runout
32,767
493-001
Identification ID
for the DMU
Identification ID for the DMU

unit
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
492-050
Drum runout cal

#43

y-runout
32,767
493-002
SKU of the
installed unit
SKU of the installed unit
Range = 0 to 255
492-051
Drum runout cal

#44

y-runout
32,767
498-001
Disable Hard
Faults for PEST
Range = 0 to 1
492-052
Drum runout cal

#45

y-runout
32,767
If this flag is true, then when

PEST is running the normal
hard faults will behave as soft
faults.
492-053
Drum runout cal

#46

y-runout
32,767
498-002
Pest Fault Override Parameter 1
Space reserved for PEST fault Range = - 32,768 to - 1

override
32,767
492-054
Drum runout cal

#47

y-runout
32,767
498-003

override
32,767
492-055
Drum runout cal

#48

y-runout
32,767
498-004

override
32,767
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-146
Settings
Default

Settings
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
498-005

override
32,767
Default
499-008
Ink SKU motor

type
Ink SKU motor type
Range = 0 to 65,535 1
Default
498-006

override
32,767
499-009
Lp4c paper path

motor2 installed
Lp4c paper path motor 2 is

installed
Range = 0 to 1
498-007

override
32,767
499-010
Lp4c paper path

motor6 installed
Lp4c paper path motor 6 is

installed
Range = 0 to 1
498-008

override
32,767
499-011
Ink plate thermistor type
Ink plate thermistor PT312 is

installed
Range = 0 to 1
498-009

override
32,767
499-012
Printhead carPrinthead carriage sensor

Range = 0 to 1
riage sensor post flags are on the carriage frame
498-010

override
32,767
499-013
Finisher type
Type of finisher installed
499-014
PP1 Rev Melt

Plate installed
The PP1 revision melt plate is 1 = installed

Range = 0 to 1
installed
The PP1 revision ink loader is 1 = installed

installed
Range = 0 to 1
Range = 0 to 65,535 255
498-011
Pest Fault Over- Space reserved for PEST fault Range = - 32,768 to - 1
32,767
ride Parameter 10 override
499-015
498-012
32,767
PP1 Rev Ink

Loader installed
499-016
MSI HW Revision Hardware Version of the MSI
Range = 0 to 1
498-013
32,767
499-017
Upper Stripper
Guide Installed
Range = 0 to 1
498-014
32,767
499-018
Low Friction Strip- Low Friction Stripper Drive is

per Installed
installed
Range = 0 to 1
498-015
32,767
499-019
Finisher Input
Skew Installed
Range = 0 to 1
498-016
32,767
499-020
HW Config Spare Hardware Config Spare value

5
5
498-017
32,767
Range = 2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647
498-018
Suppress PEST
Fault Overrides
Finisher Input Skew Upgrade

has been installed
499-021

6
6
Range = 2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647
Space reserved for PEST fault 0 = Do not suppress 0

override
warning
1 = Suppress warnings
Range = 0 to 1
499-022

7
7
Range = 2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647
Set LVDS frame format
499-023

8
8
Range = 2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647
499-024
Upgrade Sensor
12 Location
Sensor 12 location with Idler

Upgrade
Range = 25,440 to
26,740
26,240
499-025
Upgrade Sensor
15 Location
Sensor 15 location with Idler

Upgrade
Range = 43,481 to
44,781
44,281
499-026
Manufacturing
Use Only 1
Manufacturing Use Only 1
Range = 0 to 255
499-027
Manufacturing
Mode
Indicates the system is in spe- 0 = Not in initial

0
cial manufacturing mode used manufacturing mode
during initial build of IME.
1 = Initial manufacturing mode
Range = 0 to 1
499-001
LVDS frame format
499-002
Air accumulator is Ink purge air accumulator is

installed
installed
499-003
Lower carriage
wiper engage
Lower printhead carriage when Range = - 600 to 0

engaging wiper
499-004
Upper carriage
wiper engage
Upper printhead carriage when Range = - 400 to 0

engaging wiper
499-005
Fast decay stripper is installed
Fast decay stripper is installed Range = 0 to 1
499-006
Spring damper
stripper installed
Spring damper stripper mod is Range = 0 to 1

installed
499-007
Head adjust
motor type
Head adjust motor type
Upper Stripper Guide is

installed
Range = 0 to 2
1 = installed
Range = 0 to 1
Range = 0 to 65,535 1
February 2013
6-147
dC131
Table 7 CCS NVM ID 600-xxx

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
600-024
Image Disk Dirty
Image Disk Dirty
Range = 0 to 1
600-025
IJO Enabled
IJO Enabled
Range = 0 to 1
600-026
Disk Dirty at
power up
Disk Dirty at power up
Range = 0 to 1
600-027
Maximum network read

attempts
Value of maximum network

read attempts
Range = 0 TO 255
600-028
KDrumPixelCount K Drum Pixel Count
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
600-001
Compression
Mode
Compression Mode
Range = 0 to 1
600-002
Reserved Blocks
Reserved blocks
Range = 0 to 5
600-003
Megs of Memory
Megs of memory
Range = 0 to 65,535
16
600-004
EPC memory low EPC memory low percent

percent
Range = 1 to 99
38
600-005
Disk Mode
Disk Mode
Range = 0 to 1
600-006
Memory Out
Bound
Memory Out Bound
Range = 0 to 6
600-029
CDrumPixelCount C Drum Pixel Count
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-007
EPC memory full

percent
EPC memory full percent
Range = 1 to 99
12
600-030
MDrumPixelCount
M Drum Pixel Count
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-008
Use Partial
Blocks
Use Partial Blocks
Range = 0 to 1
600-031
YDrumPixelCount Y Drum Pixel Count
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-009
BlockSize in K
Block size in K
Range = 200 to 200
200
600-032
600-010
Initial Blocks
initial blocks
Range = 12 to 24
12
vramLevel1RecT vram Level1 Rec Threshold

hreshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
471859
200
600-011
Blocks Needed
Blocks Needed
Range = 8 to 20
600-033
600-012
Frame Size
Frame Size
Range = 923 to 923
923
vramLevel1TripTh vram Level 1 Trip Threshold

reshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
419430
400
600-013
Percent of Frame Percent of frame size

Size
Range = 1 to 99
70
600-034
vramLevel2RecT vram Level 2 Rec Threshold

hreshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
367001
600
600-014
Making mode
when EPC full
Making mode when EPC full
Range = 0 to 3
600-035

reshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
314572
800
600-015
Ram Size Mismatch Fault
Fault counter 19-750-00:

Video EPC Size Mismatch
Cntr
Range = 0 to 255
600-036

hreshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
256901
120
600-037
600-016
Disk Mode Mismatch Fault

Video Disk Mismatch Cntr
Range = 0 to 255

reshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
209715
200
600-038
600-017
Out Memory Fault Fault counter 19-401-00:

Range = 0 to 255
- StrNC docFC
Out memory fault - stress document

hreshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
175112
192
600-039

reshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
140509
184
Compressor
DVMA Timeout
Fault
600-040

hreshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
105906
176
600-041

reshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
702545
92
600-042

hreshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
356515
84
600-043

reshhold
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
104857
6
600-044
cacheAIIImagesToDisk
CacheAIIImagesToDisk
Range = 0 to 1
600-045
Total Black Pixel

Count Low
Total black pixel count low
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-018

Range = 0 to 255
Fault Video DVMST Timeout
fault (Compressor DVMA timeout fault)
600-019
Memory on Target Amount of EPC memory
Range = 0 to 65535
512
600-020
AHA End of
Record Fault

AHA end of record fault
Range = 0 to 255
600-021
Disk spin up
delay time
Time before image disk

receives power (sec)
Range = 0 to 30
10
600-022
Platinum Board
Platinum board full concurFull Concurrency rency
Range = 0 to 1
600-023
Image disk partition size
Range = 0 to 30
Image disk partition size
dC131
February 2013
6-148
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
600-046
Total Black Pixel

Count Up
Total black pixel count up
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-067
Toner Coverage
Plane1-10
Toner Coverage Plane1-10
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-047
Total Cyan Pixel

Count Low
Total cyan pixel count low
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-068
Toner Coverage
Plane1-11
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-048
Total Cyan Pixel

Count Up
Total cyan pixel count up
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-069
Toner Coverage
Plane1-12
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-049
Total Magenta
Pixel Count Low
Total magenta pixel count low
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-070
Toner Coverage
Plane1-13
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-050
Total Magenta
Pixel Count Up
Total magenta pixel count up
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-071
Toner Coverage
Plane1-14
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-051
Total Yellow Pixel Total yellow pixel count low

Count Low
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-072
Toner Coverage
Plane1-15
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-052
Total yellow Pixel Total yellow pixel count up

Count Up
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-073
Toner Coverage
Plane1-16
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-053
Total Black Run

Mode AC INT
Total Black Run Mode AC INT Range = 0 to

4.294.967,295
600-074
Toner Coverage
Plane1-17
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-054
Total Cyan Color

Mode AC INT
Total Cyan Color Mode AC INT Range = 0 to

4.294.967,295
600-075
Toner Coverage
Plane1-18
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-055
Total Magenta
Color Mode AC
INT
Total Magenta Color Mode AC Range = 0 to

INT
4.294.967,295
600-076
Toner Coverage
Plane1-19
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-077
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
Total Yellow Color Total Yellow Color Mode AC

Mode AC INT
INT
Toner Coverage
Plane2-1
600-056
600-078
Toner Coverage
Plane2-2
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-057
600-079
Toner Coverage
Plane2-3
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-080
Toner Coverage
Plane2-4
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-081
Toner Coverage
Plane2-5
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-082
Toner Coverage
Plane2-6
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-083
Toner Coverage
Plane2-7
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-084
Toner Coverage
Plane2-8
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-085
Toner Coverage
Plane2-9
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-086
Toner Coverage
Plane2-10
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-087
Toner Coverage
Plane2-11
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-088
Toner Coverage
Plane2-12
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
Total Black Color

Mode AC INT
Total Black Color Mode AC INT Range = 0 to

4.294.967,295
600-058
Toner Coverage
Plane1-1
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-059
Toner Coverage
Plane1-2
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-060
Toner Coverage
Plane1-3
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-061
Toner Coverage
Plane1-4
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-062
Toner Coverage
Plane1-5
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-063
Toner Coverage
Plane1-6
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-064
Toner Coverage
Plane1-7
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-065
Toner Coverage
Plane1-8
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-066
Toner Coverage
Plane1-9
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
February 2013
6-149
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
600-089
Toner Coverage
Plane2-13
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-111
Toner Coverage
Plane3-16
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-090
Toner Coverage
Plane2-14
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-112
Toner Coverage
Plane3-17
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-091
Toner Coverage
Plane2-15
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-113
Toner Coverage
Plane3-18
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-092
Toner Coverage
Plane2-16
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-114
Toner Coverage
Plane3-19
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-093
Toner Coverage
Plane2-17
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-115
Toner Coverage
Plane4-1
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-094
Toner Coverage
Plane2-18
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-116
Toner Coverage
Plane4-2
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-095
Toner Coverage
Plane2-19
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-117
Toner Coverage
Plane4-3
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-096
Toner Coverage
Plane3-1
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-118
Toner Coverage
Plane4-4
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-097
Toner Coverage
Plane3-2
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-119
Toner Coverage
Plane4-5
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-098
Toner Coverage
Plane3-3
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-120
Toner Coverage
Plane4-6
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-099
Toner Coverage
Plane3-4
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-121
Toner Coverage
Plane4-7
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-100
Toner Coverage
Plane3-5
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-122
Toner Coverage
Plane4-8
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-101
Toner Coverage
Plane3-6
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-123
Toner Coverage
Plane4-9
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-102
Toner Coverage
Plane3-7
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-124
Toner Coverage
Plane4-10
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-103
Toner Coverage
Plane3-8
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-125
Toner Coverage
Plane4-11
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-104
Toner Coverage
Plane3-9
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-126
Toner Coverage
Plane4-12
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-105
Toner Coverage
Plane3-10
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-127
Toner Coverage
Plane4-13
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-106
Toner Coverage
Plane3-11
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-128
Toner Coverage
Plane4-14
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-107
Toner Coverage
Plane3-12
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-129
Toner Coverage
Plane4-15
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-108
Toner Coverage
Plane3-13
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-130
Toner Coverage
Plane4-16
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-109
Toner Coverage
Plane3-14
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-131
Toner Coverage
Plane4-17
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-110
Toner Coverage
Plane3-15
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-132
Toner Coverage
Plane4-18
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
dC131
February 2013
6-150
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
600-133
Toner Coverage
Plane4-19
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-149
13 to 16% Black
Area Coverage
600-134
Total Black
Marked Images
Total Black Marked Images
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-135
Total Black
Marked Color
Images
Total Black Marked Color

Images
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
Black area coverage impres- Range = 0 to

4.294.967,295
sions > 13 to 16%
Total number of impressions
between 13 - 16% Black page
coverage.
Image area coverage Plane 122
600-136
Total Cyan
Marked Color
Images
Total Cyan Marked Color

Images
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-151
17 to 20% Black
Area Coverage
600-137
Total Magenta
Marked Color
Images
Total Magenta Marked Color

Images
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295

4.294.967,295
sions > 17 to 20%
coverage.
600-138
Total Yellow
Marked Color
Images
Total Yellow Marked Color

Images
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-153
10 to 11% Cyan
Area Coverage
600-139
Total Black Run

Mode AC FP
Total Black Run Mode AC FP
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
600-140
Total Cyan Color

Mode AC FP
Total Cyan Color Mode AC FP Range = 0 to

4.294.967,295
Cyan area coverage impresRange = 0 to

4.294.967,295
sions > 10 to 11%
between 10 - 11% Cyan page
coverage.
600-141
Total Yellow Color Total Yellow Color Mode AC

Mode AC FP
FP
600-155
11 to 12% Cyan
Area Coverage
600-142

4.294.967,295
sions > 11 to 12%
coverage.
600-157
13 to 16% Cyan
Area Coverage

4.294.967,295
sions > 13 to 16%
coverage.
600-159
17 to 20% Cyan
Area Coverage

4.294.967,295
sions > 17 to 20%
coverage.
Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
Total Magenta
Color Mode AC
FP
Total Magenta Color Mode AC Range = 0 to

FP
4.294.967,295
600-143
Total Black Color

Mode AC FP
Total Black Color Mode AC FP Range = 0 to

4.294.967,295
600-145
10 to 11% Black
Area Coverage

4.294.967,295
sions > 10 to 11%
coverage.
600-147
11 to 12% Black
Area Coverage

4.294.967,295
sions > 11 to 12%
coverage.
February 2013
6-151
Settings
Default
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
600-161
10 to 11%
Magenta Area
Coverage
Magenta area coverage

Range = 0 to
impressions > 10 to 11%
4.294.967,295
between 10 - 11% Magenta
page coverage.
Settings
600-173
13 to 16% Yellow Yellow area coverage impres- Range = 0 to

Area Coverage
4.294.967,295
sions > 13 to 16%
between 13 - 16% Yellow page
coverage.
600-163
11 to 12%
Magenta Area
Coverage

Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
page coverage.
600-175

Area Coverage
4.294.967,295
sions > 17 to 20%
coverage.
600-165
13 to 16%
Magenta Area
Coverage

Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
page coverage.
NVM ID
NVM Name
602-001
DiagJobIDGenerator
602-002
Head Purge
Mode Policy
Head purge mode

Automatic head fix - Clean
printheads setting
602-003
Jet Substitution
Policy
Jet substitution mode

0 = Never (jet substi- 1
Automatic head fix - temporary tution is disabled)
fix setting
1 = Immediately (Initate jet substitution
immediately a
blocked jet is
detected)
Range = 0 to 1
602-004
Cust init Jetfix Jet Customer initiated Jetfix

Range = 0 to 65535
Sub
Substitution
Integer count of customer
selecting Quick fix banding
that resulted in Jet substitution
numTotalJetFixJetSubstitution
17 to 20%
Magenta Area
Coverage

Range = 0 to
4.294.967,295
page coverage.
600-169

Area Coverage
4.294.967,295
sions > 10 to 11%
coverage.

Area Coverage
4.294.967,295
sions > 11 to 12%
coverage.
dC131
Settings
Default
600-167
600-171
NVM Description
February 2013
6-152
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Range = 1 to 999
0 = Never (auto head 1

purge disabled)
1 = Immediately (Perform an auto head
purge immediately
when blocked jets
detected)
2 = When idle (Perform a head purge
during the next idle
time window)
Range = 0 to 2
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
602-005
Cust Init Jetfix

Purge
Customer initiated Jetfix

Purge
that resulted in a purge
numTotalJetFixPurge
Range = 0 to 65535
603-007
Counter-COPY- Counter - copy marked images Range = 0 to

-copy marked images
16777215
MarkedimagesCOPYMarkedImages
603-008
COPYMarkedIm- Determines whether copy

0 = False
agesDisplayable marked images counter is dis- 1 = True
playedable.
Range = 0 to 1
603-009
Counter-COPYSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-010
COPYSheetsDis- Determines whether copy

sheets counter is displayable
playable
0 = False
1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
603-011
Counter-COPYDuplexSheets
Counter-COPY Duplex Sheets Range = 0 to

16777215
603-012
COPYDuplexSheetsDisplayable
Determines whether copy

duplex sheets counter is displayable
0 = False
1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
603-013
Counter-COPYLargeSheets
Counter-COPY large sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-014
COPYLargeSheetsDisplayable
Determines whether copy

11x17 inch and A3 sheets
counter is displayable
0 = False
1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
603-015
Not displayed
Counter-COPY simplex platen Range = 0 to

jobs
16777215
603-016
Not displayed
Counter-COPY duplex platen

jobs
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-017
Not displayed
Counter-COPY DADH jobs
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-018
Not displayed
Counter-COPY build jobs
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-019
Not displayed
Counter-COPY set from jobs
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-020
Not displayed
Counter-COPY single set jobs Range = 0 to

16777215
603-021
Not displayed
Counter-COPY platen scans
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-022
Not displayed
Counter-COPY DADH side 1

scans
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-023
Not displayed
Counter-COPY DADH side 2

scans
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-024
crashRecoveryEnabled
Determines whether copy job

recovery is enabled
0 = False
1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
602-006
602-007
Cust Init Jetfix No Customer initiated Jetfix No Range = 0 to 65535

Problem
Problem
that resulted in no problem
found by IOD
numTotalJetFixNoProblem
Cust Init Jetfix

Head Align
Customer initiated Jetfix

Head Align Adjust
that resulted head alignment
adjusted
numTotalJetFixHeadAlignAdjust
Range = 0 to 65535

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
603-001
ARPSPaperSizeinterval
Interval of APS recognition of

standard size (mm)
Range = 1 to 65535
603-002
APSStandardSiz- Determines weather APS

0 = False (off)
requires input to be a standard 1 = True (On)
eRequired
size.
Range = 0 to 1
603-003
CopySimplexOut- Number of images inputted

putStart
before simplex copy job is
released for marking
Range = 0 to 65535
603-004
CopyDuplexOutputStart
Number of images inputted

before duplex copy job is
released for marking
Range = 0 to 65535
The priority set by SA / KO of

copy job (used for job contention)
Range = 0 to 65535
Value of next copy jobs ID
Range = 1 to 999
603-005
603-006
CopyJobPriority
NextCopyJobID
February 2013
6-153
NVM Description
Counter-COPY Sheets
Settings
Default
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
603-025
ABSPrescanAllowed
Disable and enable ABS prescan
0 = False
1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
603-045
Not displayed
Counter-SJ doc info
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-046
Range = 1 to 4
Not displayed
Counter-Copy Job CR Data
Range = 0 to
16777215
CopyJobReleaseThreshold
CopyJobReleaseThreshold
603-026
603-048
Not displayed
Counter-Scan document programme data
Range = 0 to
16777215
Platen Copied
Lifetime Images
603-028
Not displayed
Counter-Processing document programme
Range = 0 to
16777215
Platen Copied Lifetime Imag- Range = 0 to

esNumber of images that have 16777215
been scanned off the platen
glass that were for Copy jobs.
603-027
603-049
Not displayed
Counter-Mark document programme data
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-030
Not displayed
Counter-Job programme data
Range = 0 to
16777215
ADF Copied Life- ADF Copied Lifetime ImagRange = 0 to

time Images
been scanned from the ADF
that were for Copy jobs.
603-029
603-031
Not displayed
Counter-Scan Job CR Data
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-032
Not displayed
Counter-Processing job programme
Range = 0 to
16777215
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
604-001
603-033
Not displayed
Counter-Mark job programme

data
Range = 0 to
16777215
Feeder Module
Type
Defines the feeder module

types
603-034
Not displayed
Counter-Copy job defaults
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-035
Not displayed
Counter-Copy documents
default
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-036
COPYMarkedCol- Determines whether copy

orImagesDisplay image counter is displayable
0 = False
1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
603-037
COPYColorSheetsDisplay
Determines whether color

0 = False
copy sheets counter is display- 1 = True
able
Range = 0 to 1
603-038
COPYDuplexCol- Determines whether color

orSheetsDisplay copy duplex sheets counter is
displayable
0 = Invalid Module
0
55 = SMH
57 = HCF
58 = HCF with covers
60 = PFP (tray 5)
62 = Envelope
Feeder
221 = Standard PFP
(tray 5)
223 = Large Kit PFP
A4 LEF / A3 SEF
224 = Short edge kit
A4 SEF
225 = Short edge kit
Letter SEF / Legal
SEF
Range = 0 to 255
603-039
604-002
Finisher Module
Type
Defines the finisher module

65 = OCT
type that has been detected by 100 = No finisher
110 = 2K LCSS
the system (Read only)
171 = HVF
172 = HVF BM
173 = HVF inserter
174 = HVF BM
Inserter
175 = HVF Tri-folder
176 = HVF Tri-folder
Inserter
Range = 65 to 255
Table 10 CCS NVM ID 604-001 to 604-299
0 = False
1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
COPYLargeColorSheetsDisplay
Determines whether large

0 = False
copy sheets counter is display- 1 = True
able
Range = 0 to 1
603-040
Not displayed
Counter-Copy color sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-041
Not displayed
Counter-Copy large color

sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-042
Not displayed
Counter-Copy duplex color

sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-043
Not displayed
Counter-Copy marked color

images
Range = 0 to
16777215
603-044
Not displayed
Counter-SJ job info
Range = 0 to
16777215
dC131
February 2013
6-154
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
604-004
MSDefaultColor
Defines the default color
0 = White
1 = Green
2 = Buff
3 = Yellow
4 = Golden rod
5 = Blue
6 = Pink
7 = Transparent
8 = Ivory
9 = Gray
10 = Red
11 = Orange
Range = 0 to 20
604-037
Not displayed
Counter-Punched Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-040
Not displayed
Counter - Outboard Staples
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-043
Not displayed
Counter - Inboard Staples
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-046
Not displayed
Counter -Staples sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-049
Not displayed
Counter - Tabs
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-052
Not displayed
Counter - Transparencies
Range = 0 to
16777215
0 = Standard
1 = Drilled (prepunched)
2 = Envelopes
4 = Transparency
5 = Letter head
6 = Labels
7 = Recycled
Range = 0 to 60
604-055
Not displayed
Counter - Collated staples
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-058
Not displayed
Counter - Single Pitch Images Range = 0 to

16777215
604-061
Not displayed
Counter - Dual Pitch Images
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-064
Not displayed
Counter - Stapled 2_15
Range = 0 to
16777215
75
604-067
Not displayed
Counter - Stapled 16_30
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-006
MSDefaultType
Defines default type
604-008
MSDefaultWeight Defines medium weight (not

used) (gsm)
Range = 56 to 203
604-010
PEAutoResume
Resume time out settings in

seconds
0 = Disabled
30
> 0 = time in seconds
(sec)
Range = 0 to 120
604-070
MSDefaultFinisherAR
Default finisher auto resume

settings
0 = Disabled
30
> 0 = time in seconds
(sec)
Range = 0 to 120
604-017
PrintModuleInfo
Debug switch settings
0 = Off
1 = On
Range = 0 to 1
604-084
MSFaceUpEnabled
Enable face up setting
604-019
Counter-Marked- Stores the count of all small / Range = 0 to

Images
medium black printed images 16777215
when traditional billing configuration is set
0 = Off (normal deliv- 0

ery)
1 = Deliver face up
Range = 0 to 1
604-090
Not displayed
Images During Service Call
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-092
Not displayed
Images During Service Call
Total Images Dis- Enable display of total images 0 = Off

playable
1 = On
0 = false, 1 = true
Range = 0 to 1
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-021
604-094
Not displayed
Sheet Out Of Sequence
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-025
Not displayed
Counter - Collated Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-099
Not displayed
Module Registration Error
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-028
Not displayed
Counter - Dual Staples
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-101
Not displayed
No Completions Error
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-031
Not displayed
Counter - Envelopes
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-105
Not displayed
Completion While Idle
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-034
Not displayed
Counter-Folded Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-107
Not displayed
Tray Does not Exist
Range = 0 to
16777215
February 2013
6-155
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
604-109
Not displayed
No Finisher Capability Found
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-134
ModuleHasBeenSetUp
Module has been set up
Range 0 to 1
604-111
Not displayed
No IOT Capability Found
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-135
Not displayed
Counter - Stapled31_50
Range 0 to 16777215 0
604-136
Not displayed
Counter - Stapled51_100
Range 0 to 16777215 0
604-112
MSDefaultTrayTrain
Range 0 to 2
604-137
Propose Count
MCSS Finisher
Propose Count MCSS Finisher Range 2 to 16
12
604-113
MSDefaultTrayStack
Range 0 to 1
604-138
IOT Diag Enter

TO SEC
IOT Diag Enter TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
30
604-114
MSDefaultTrayId
Range 0 to 4
604-139
30
Propose Count
No Finisher
Range 2 to 16
12
IOT Diag Exit TO IOT Diag Exit TO SEC

SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-115
604-140
LastJobIDToRecover
Last job ID to recover
Range 0 to 65535
IOT Diag Test

Pattern TO SEC
IOT Diag Test Pattern TO SEC Range = 0 to 1800
604-116
604-141
Last document ID to recover doc to recover
Range 0 to 65535
IOT Diag Device Status TO

SEC
Not displayed
IOT Diag Device

Status TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-117
604-142
Last image ID to recover
Range 0 to 65535
IOT Diag Analog Monitor TO

SEC
LastImageIDToRecover
IOT Diag Analog

Monitor TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-118
604-143
IOT Comm Fault Count
Range 0 to 3
IOT Diag In Out Manual TO

SEC
IOTCommFaultCount
IOT Diag In Out

Manual TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-119
604-144
PrintPagesCompleted
Print Pages Completed
Range 0 to 65535
IOT Diag PP Tim- IOT Diag PP Timing TO SEC

ing TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-120
604-145
Last set Completed
Range 0 to 65535
IOT Diag MSI side guide TO

SEC
SetsCompleted
604-122
LastServiceIDToRecover
Last service ID to recover
Range 0 to 65535
IOT Diag MSI

Side Guide TO
SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-121
604-146
Range = 0 to 1800
QtyToRecover
Quantity to recover
Range 0 to 65535
IOT Diag Sys

Regi TO SEC
IOT Diag Sys Regi TO SEC
604-123
604-124
Not displayed
Tag matrix
Range 0 to 65535
604-147
Range = 0 to 1800
MSDefaultDecurler
Default decurler level settings
0 = Low decurler
1 = Normal decurler
2 = High decurler
Range 0 to 2
IOT Diag Reg

Setup TO SEC
IOT Diag Reg Setup TO SEC
604-125
604-148
IOT Diag Reg

Check TO SEC
IOT Diag Reg Check TO SEC Range = 0 to 1800
604-149
Not displayed
Serial number
Range 0 to 1
IOT Diag Reg Sens Check TO Range = 0 to 1800

SEC
604-127
MSOffsetEnabledPolicy
Enable offset policy
0 = Off
1 = On
Range 0 to 1
IOT Diag Reg

Sens Check TO
SEC
604-126
604-150
IOT ATC Sensor

Setup TO SEC
IOT ATC Sensor Setup TO

SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-128
SerNumSet
Serial number set
Range 0 to 1
604-151
Out of staples policy setting
0 = Hold
1
1 = Stapling defeated
Range 0 to 1
IOT Diag Belt Edge Learn TO

SEC
MSOutOfStaplesPolicy
IOT Diag Belt

Edge Learn TO
SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-129
604-152
Range = 0 to 1800
ProdCfgNvm
ProdCfgNvm
Range 0 to 65535
IOT TRC Adjust

TO SEC
IOT TRC Adjust TO SEC
604-131
604-132
Last sheet to
recover
Last sheet to recover
Range 0 to 108
106
604-153
IOT Diag Tone Up IOT Diag Tone Up Down TO

Down TO SEC
SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-133
TotalQuanitityMade
Total quantity requested for the Range 0 to 65535

current job
604-154
IOT Diag No
Paper Run TO
SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
dC131
February 2013
6-156
IOT Diag No Paper Run TO

SEC

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
604-155
IOT Diag ProCon IOT Diag ProCon ON Off TO

On Off TO SEC
SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-275
Tray2MisfeedJam Fault counter 72-101:

Range = 0 to 255
CountFC
Tray 2 Misfeed Jam Count FC
604-156
IOT Diag Binary

Cal TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-280

Range = 0 to 255
CountFC
604-157
IOT Diag Fold

IOT Diag Fold Position TO
Position TO SEC SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-285

Range = 0 to 255
CountFC
604-158
IOT Diag
CTRACS TO
SEC
IOT Diag CTRACS TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
604-159
IOT Diag Comp

Ctrl TO SEC
IOT Diag Comp Ctrl TO SEC
Range = 0 to 1800
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
604-160
CCMCannotCom- Fault counter 03-316:

municateWithlo- CCM Cannot Communicate
With lot FC
tFC
Range = 0 to 255
604-372
DFinBufferPathSnrOffJam FC
Fault Counter 12-141: DFinBufferPathSnrOffJam FC
Range = 0 to 255
604-397
Not displayed
Fault counter 12-113:

Booklet in Snr On Jam FaultCount FC
Range = 0 to 255
Range = 0 to
16777215
BookletinSnrOnJamFaultCountFC
TotalIOTJamsC30TotalIOTJamsC30
604-398
Not displayed
604-172
BookletinSnrOffJamFaultCountFC

Booklet in Snr Off Jam FaultCount FC
Range = 0 to 255
AttemptedFeedsfromBypassTr Range = 0 to
ayC3916777215
AttemptedFeedsfromBypassTr
ayC39
604-399
Not displayed
GateSnrOnJamFaultCountFC

Range = 0 to 255
Gate Snr On Jam Fault Count
FC
ActualFeedsfromBypassTrayC Range = 0 to
4016777215
ActualFeedsfromBypassTrayC
40
604-174
604-175
XportEntSnrOnJamFaultCountFC
Xport Ent Snr On Jam Fault

Count FC
604-400
Not displayed
AttemptedPaperFeedsC32AttemptedPaperFeedsC32
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-401
Not displayed
ActualPaperFeedsC33ActualPaperFeedsC33
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-402
Not displayed
KnownJamsinFinishingdevices Range = 0 to
C3116777215
KnownJamsinFinishingdevices
C31
604-403
Not displayed
AllsheetsfedfromTray1AllsheetsfedfromTray1
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-404
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-405
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-406
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-407
Not displayed
AllsheetsfedfromBypassTrayAllsheetsfedfromBypassTray
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-408
Not displayed
TotalSheetsside1TotalSheetsside1
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-409
Not displayed
TotalSheetsside1and2TotalSheetsside1and2
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-171
604-176
NVM Description
IOT Diag Binary Cal TO SEC
Range = 0 to 255
Range = 0 to 255
604-177
CompilerExitSnrOffJamFC

Compiler Exit Snr Off Jam FC
Range = 0 to 255
604-178
CompilerExitSnrOnJamFaultCountFC

Compiler Exit Snr On Jam
Fault Count FC
Range = 0 to 255
TopTrayExitSnrOnJamFaultCountFC

Top Tray Exit Snr On Jam
Fault Count FC
Range = 0 to 255
604-182
TopTrayExitSnrOffJamFaultCountFC

Top Tray Exit Snr Off Jam
Fault Count FC
Range = 0 to 255
604-241
OCTOffsetFailCountFC

OCT Offset Fail Count FC
Range = 0 to 255
604-271

Range = 0 to 255
CountFC
Settings
Default
BufferPathSnrOn- Fault counter 12-142:

JamFaultBuffer Path Snr On Jam Fault
CountFC
Count FC
604-181
NVM Description
February 2013
6-157
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
604-410
Not displayed
TotalFeedsTray1TotalFeedsTray1
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-429
604-411
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-412
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
LastFinishingLast capability ID that sheet

Range = 0 to 65535
CapIDToRecover were being delivered to for a
normal job. Used to ensure
sheets are delivered to the correct tray after crash recovery
604-430
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-414
Not displayed
TotalFeedsBypassTray-TotalFeedsBypassTray
Range = 0 to
16777215
LastIntFinishing- Last capability ID that sheet

Range = 0 to 65535
CapIDToRecover were being delivered to for an
interrupt job. Used to ensure
sheets are delivered to the correct tray after crash recovery
604-413
604-415
MSDefaultPrintBin
# of Bins
Range = 0 to 5
604-431
InteruptingQuanti- Interrupting quantity made

tyMade
Range = 0 to 65535
604-416
MSDefaultCopyBin
# of bins
Range = 0 to 5
604-432
MSInvertDuplex
Range = 0 to 1
604-433
Range = 0 to 1
604-417
MSDefaultFaxBin # of bins
Range = 0 to 5
MSMirrorInvertDuplex
604-418
MSDefaultOtherBin
# of bins
Range = 0 to 5
604-434
Total Color
Images Displayable
Range = 0 to 1
604-419
MSAutoHoldEnable
Enable auto hold
Enable Auto Hold set- 1

tings:
0 = Off
1 = On
Range = 0 to 1
604-435
Total BW and
Total BW and Color Images
Color Images Dis- Displayable
play
Range = 0 to 1
604-436
Not displayed
MarkedColorImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-437
Not displayed
MarkedBWColorImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-438
Not displayed
OCT Total Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-439
Not displayed
LargeMarkedBlackImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-440
Not displayed
LargeMarkedColorImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-441
Not displayed
LargeMarkedImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
604-442
MSMediaSizeGroup
Media Order Group
1 = MSGXc
2 = MSGXe
3 = MSGFx
4 = MSGFxap
5 = MSGGco
6 = MSGDmoEast
7 = MSGDmoWest
Range = 0 to 7
604-443
MSMediaSizeCon Media size conversion policy

vPolicy85x14
8.5 x 14 inch to larger size
0 = Off
1 = On
Range 0 to 1
604-444
T5MisfeedJamCo Fault counter 75-101:

Number of faults
Fault Counter:T5 Misfeed Jam Range = 0 to 255
unt
604-420
InteruptingJobID- Interrupt job to recover # of

jobs
ToRecover
Range = 0 to 65535
604-421
Not displayed
Interrupt document to recover Range = 0 to 65535

# of documents-docToRecover
604-422
InteruptImageIDToRecover
Interrupt image to recover # of Range = 0 to 65535

images
604-423
InteruptPagesCompleted
Interrupt pages completed
Range = 0 to 65535
604-424
InteruptingSetsCompleted
Interrupt set to recover # of

sets
Range = 0 to 65535
604-425
InteruptingLastServiceID
Interrupt service to recover #

of services
Range = 0 to 65535
604-426
QtyToRecover;
Interrupt quantity to recover
Range = 0 to 65535
604-427
lastSheetToRecover
Interrupt last sheet to recover
Range = 0 to 65535
604-428
MSMediaSizeConvPolicy
Media Size Conversion Policy Media Size Conversion Policy settings:

0=Off
1=On
Range = 0 to 1
dC131
February 2013
6-158
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
604-445
LElateT1ToTAR1
FC

LE late to TAR1 sensor from
T1 Fault CounterLElateT1ToTAR1FC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-458
T1OpenInRunFC Fault counter 71-320:

T1 opened in run Fault
Counter-T1OpenInRunFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-459
LElateT2ToTAR1 Fault counter 72-110:

FC
LE late to TAR1 sensor from
T2 Fault CounterLElateT2ToTAR1FC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-446
604-460
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
LElateToTAR2FC Fault counter 72-106:

LE late to TAR2 sensor Fault
Counter-LElateToTAR2FC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

604-461
LElateToTAR3FC Fault counter 73-106:

LE late to TAR3 sensor Fault
Counter-LElateToTAR3FC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
T4UndockedInRu Fault counter 75-325:

Number of faults
nFC
T5 undocked in run Fault
Range = 0 to 255
Counter-T4UndockedInRunFC
604-462
FeederHTOpenInRunFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
LElateToFeederHTFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Feeder HT drawer opened in
run Fault Counter-FeederHTOpenInRunFC
604-463
FeederVTOpenInRunFC

Number of faults
Feeder VT door opened in run Range = 0 to 255
Fault Counter-FeederVTOpenInRunFC
604-464
IMEtoT123Comm Fault counter 70-312:

IME to T1-3 comms failure
sFailFC
Fault CounterIMEtoT123CommsFailFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-465
IMEtoT5CommsF Fault counter 75-312:

Number of faults
IME to T5 comms failure Fault Range = 0 to 255
ailFC
CounterIMEtoT5CommsFailFC
604-467
ImeOvercurr24VS Fault counter for 01-525: Over Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
upplyFC
current 24V supplyImeOvercurr24VSupplyFC
604-468
ImeOvercurr48VS Fault counter for 01-530: Over Number of faults

upplyFC
current 48V supplyRange = 0 to 255
ImeOvercurr48VSupplyFC
604-447
604-448
604-449

LE late to Feeder HT sensor
Fault Counter-LElateToFeederHTFC
NVM Description
604-450
MSINudgerFailureFC

Number of faults
MSI Nudger failure Fault
Range = 0 to 255
Counter-MSINudgerFailureFC
604-451
T1HoistFailureFC Fault counter 71-215:

Number of faults
T1 hoist failure Fault Counter- Range = 0 to 255
T1HoistFailureFC
604-452

Number of faults
T2HoistFailureFC
604-453

Number of faults
T3HoistFailureFC
T3HoistEncoderF Fault counter 73-212:

ailFC
T3 encoder failure on hoist
Fault CounterT3HoistEncoderFailFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-455
T4LowerEncoder Fault counter 75-213:

FailFC
T5 encoder failure on lower
Fault CounterT4LowerEncoderFailFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-469
ImeMPS11Sheet
TooLongFC
Fault counter for 10-110: IME

Media Path Sensor 11 sheet
too longImeMPS11SheetTooLongFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-456
T4HoistEncoderF Fault counter 75-212:

ailFC
T5 encoder failure on hoist
Fault CounterT4HoistEncoderFailFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-470
ImeMPS11Sheet
TooShortFC

too shortImeMPS11SheetTooShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-457
MSIGuidesMoveInRunFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-471
ImeMPS11LETim Fault counter for 10-112: IME Number of faults

eoutFC
Media Path Sensor 11 LE time- Range = 0 to 255
out-ImeMPS11LETimeoutFC
604-454

MSI guides move in run Fault
Counter-MSIGuidesMoveInRunFC
February 2013
6-159
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
604-472
ImeMPS11TETim Fault counter for 10-113: IME Number of faults

eoutFC
Media Path Sensor 11 TE tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout-ImeMPS11TETimeoutFC
604-485
ImeTfixLoadRear- Fault counter for 10-505: IME Number of faults

Transfix Load rear force failure Range = 0 to 255
ForceFailFC
604-486
ImeMPS12Sheet Fault counter for 10-125: IME

TooLongFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeTfixFault counter for 10-510: IME

LoadTimingErrFC Transfix Load timing error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-473
604-489
ImeTfixLoadMotorFailFC
Fault counter for 10-525: IME Number of faults

Transfix Load Home Motor dis- Range = 0 to 255
able failure

TooShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-490
ImeTfixGapSetFailedFC

Transfix gap set failed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-491
ImeTfixLoadCalFailFC

Transfix Load calibration failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-492
ImeTfixTaskLateFC

Transfix task late
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-493
ImeTfixDrumInitPosWrongFC

Transfix Drum initial position
wrong
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-494
ImeTfixDrumStallFC

Transfix Drum stall
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-495
ImePostTransfixMtr(M4)OvercurrFC

M4 over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-496
ImeTfixFrontOvercurrFC

Transfix front over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-497
ImeTfixRearOver- Fault counter for 10-565: IME

currFC
Transfix rear over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-499
ImeAbatFanOver- Fault counter for 42-505: IME

Abatement fan over current
currFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-500
ImeVertTransS5S Fault counter for 82-110: IME Number of faults

heetTooEarlyFC Media Path Sensor 5 sheet too Range = 0 to 255
early
604-501
ImeVertTransS5S Fault counter for 82-111: IME

heetMisLongFC Media Path Sensor 5 sheet
mismatch long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-474
604-475
NVM Description
Settings

NVM Description
Settings
Default

eoutFC
Media Path Sensor 12 LE tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout-ImeMPS12LETimeoutFC
604-476

eoutFC
eout-ImeMPS12TETimeoutFC
604-477

TooLongFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

TooShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Media Path Invert Sensor 15
Range = 0 to 255
sheet too longImeMPInvS15SheetTooLongF
C

Range = 0 to 255
sheet too shortImeMPInvS15SheetTooShortF
C
604-481

eoutFC
eout-ImeMPS15LETimeoutFC
604-502
ImeVertTransS5S Fault counter for 82-112: IME

heetMisShortFC Media Path Sensor 5 sheet
mismatch short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-482

eoutFC
eout
604-503
ImeVertTransS5L Fault counter for 82-113: IME Number of faults

ETimeoutFC
Media Path Sensor 5 LE time- Range = 0 to 255
out
604-483
ImeMPInvS15LE
TimeoutFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-504
ImeVertTransS5T Fault Counter 82-114: IME

ETimeoutFC
Vertical Trans Sensor 5 TE
timeout
604-484
ImeTfixLoadFault counter for 10-500: IME Number of faults

FrontForceFailFC Transfix Load front force failure Range = 0 to 255
604-478
604-479
604-480
ImeMPInvS15Sh
eetTooLongFC
ImeMPInvS15Sh
eetTooShortFC

LE timeout
dC131
February 2013
6-160
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
604-505
ImeConfirmS16S Fault counter for 82-125: IME

heetTooEarlyFC Media Path Sensor 16 sheet
too early
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-522
ImeDuplexEndS1 Fault counter for 82-151: IME Number of faults

4TETimeoutFCa Media Path Duplex Sensor 14 Range = 0 to 255
TE timeout
604-506

heetTooLongFC Media Path Sensor 16 sheet
too long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-523
ImeVertTransMo- Fault counter for 82-500: IME

tor (M2)Overcur- M2 over current
rFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-507

TooShortFC
too short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-524
ImeVertTransMo- Fault Counter 82-501: IME

tor(M2)StalledFC Vert Trans Motor (M2) stalled
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-525

heetMisLongFC Media Path Sensor 16 sheet
mismatch long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeHorzTransMo- Fault Counter 82-502: IME

tor (M6)Overcur- Horiz Trans Motor (M6) over
rFC
current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-508
604-526

heetMisShortFC Media Path Sensor 16 sheet
mismatch short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeHorizTransFault counter for 82-503: IME

Motor(M6)Stalled M6 stalled
FC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-509
604-527
ImeConfirmS16L
ETimeoutFC

eout
ImeNipCSolOver- Fault counter for 82-507: IME

Nip C solenoid over current
currFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-510
604-528
ImeNipDSolOver- Fault counter for 82-508: IME

Nip D solenoid over current
currFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-511
ImeConfirmS16T Fault counter for 82-131: IME Number of faults

ETimeoutFC
eout
604-529
ImeTrailerCalcFailFC

Trailer slowdown calculation
fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-512
ImeConfirmDuple Fault counter for 82-132: IME Number of faults

xS16LETimeoutF Media Path Duplex Sensor 16 Range = 0 to 255
C
LE timeout
604-530

TooLongFC
too long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-513
ImeDuplexEndFault counter for 82-140: IME

SheetTooWideFC Media Path sheet too wide
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-531
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-514
ImeDuplexEndS1 Fault counter for 82-141: IME

4SheetTooEarlyF Media Path Sensor 14 sheet
C
too early
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

TooShortFC
too short
604-532
ImeMPInvS13Sh
eetTooLongFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-515
ImeMPSheetTooNarrowFC

Media Path sheet too narrow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

sheet too long
604-533

4SheetTooLongF Media Path Sensor 14 sheet
C
too long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeDupStartInvS Fault counter for 83-113: IME

13SheetTooShort Media Path Invert Sensor 13
FC
sheet too short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-516
604-534

4SheetTooShortF Media Path Sensor 14 sheet
C
too short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeDupStartS13L Fault counter for 83-114: IME Number of faults

ETimeoutFC
eout
604-517
604-535

4LETimeoutFC
eout
ImeDupStartS13T Fault Counter 83-115: IME

Number of faults
ETimeoutFC
Duplex Start Sensor 13 TE tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout
604-518
604-536

4TETimeoutFC
eout
ImeDupStartInvS Fault Counter 83-116: IME

13LETimeoutFC Duplex Start Invert Sensor 13
LE timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-519
604-537

4LETimeoutFCa Media Path Duplex Sensor 14 Range = 0 to 255
LE timeout
ImeDupStartInvS Fault Counter 83-117: IME

13TETimeoutFC Duplex Start Invert Sensor 13
TE timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-521
NVM Description
February 2013
6-161
NVM Description
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
604-538
ImeExitMotorFault counter for 83-500: IME

Fwd(M5)Overcur- M5 over current
rFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-555
ImeM3_2Overcur Fault counter for 89-502: IME

rFC
M3_2 over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-556
ImeDiverterSolOvercurrFC

Diverter solenoid over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeLatDriveOver- Fault counter for 89-504: IME

Lat sensor drive over current
currFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-539
604-560
ImeDuplexSolOvercurrFC

Duplex solenoid over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeStanceSensorTimeoutFC

Stance sensor timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-540
604-562
ImePreheatTooHotFC

Preheat heater is too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeRegFailedDe- Fault counter for 89-531: IME

Registration Scanner failed to
tectLatdetect lateral edge
eralEdgeFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-541
604-542
ImePreheatTooSlowFC

Preheat is heating too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-563
ImeScanTimedOutFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-543
ImePreheatTher- Fault counter for 88-502: IME

Preheat thermistor failure
mFailFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Scan timed out and failed to
complete normally
604-564
ImeRegAirPumpOverCurrFC

RALPH Air PuM Over Curr
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeRegProcFailFC

Registration processing failure Range = 0 to 255
604-544
604-565

TooLongFC
too long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeRegProcLENotDetectedFC

Registration processing leading edge not detected
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-545
604-566

TooShortFC
too Short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeRegProcLatEdgeNotDetFC

Registration processing lateral Range = 0 to 255
edge not detected
604-546
604-567

eoutFC
eout
ImeRegProcLEErrFC

Registration processing leading edge error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-547
604-568

eoutFC
eout
ImeRegProcLateralEdgeErrFC

Registration processing lateral Range = 0 to 255
edge error
604-548
604-569

TooLongFC
too Long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeRegProcLECrossingToSmallFC

Registration processing leading edge crossing to small
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-549
604-570

TooShortFC
too Short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeRegSkewExcessiveFC

Registration skew excessive
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-550
604-571
ImeRegOffsetEx- Fault counter for 89-551: IME

Registration offset excessive
cessiveFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-551

eoutFC
eout
604-572
ImeHeadInitPosErrFC

Printheads initial position error Range = 0 to 255
604-573

eoutFC
eout
ImeHeadImagingTimingErrFC

Printheads imaging timing
error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-552
604-574
ImeMPSheetFault counter for 89-129: IME

TooTateAtNipAFC Media Path sheet too tate at
Nip A
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeMarkingSeFault counter for 91-502: IME Number of faults

quenceTimingEr- Marking sequence timing error Range = 0 to 255
rFC
604-553
604-575
ImeM3_1Overcur Fault counter for 89-500: IME

rFC
M3_1 over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImePrintImageDataTimeoutFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-554
604-576
ImeHead3StitchO Fault counter for 91-504: IME Number of faults

vercurrFC
Printhead 3 stitch over current Range = 0 to 255
dC131
February 2013
6-162
NVM Description

Print image data timeout

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
604-577
ImeHead4StitchO Fault counter for 91-505: IME Number of faults

vercurrFC
Printhead 4 stitch over current Range = 0 to 255
604-598
604-578
ImeHead1RollOv Fault counter for 91-506: IME

ercurrFC
Printhead 1 roll over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeHead4LHeate Fault counter for 91-526: IME Number of faults

rTooHotFC
Printhead 4 left jet heater is too Range = 0 to 255
hot
604-599

ercurrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rTooSlowFC
slow
604-579
604-580

ercurrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-600
604-581

ercurrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeHead2LHeate Fault Counter 91-528: IME

rTooSlowFC
Print Head 2 left jet heater is
too slow
604-601
ImeUpperXAOvercurrFC

Upper XA over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rTooSlowFC
slow
604-582
604-583
ImeLowerXAOvercurrFC

Lower XA over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-602
604-584
ImeCarriageDriveOvercurrFC

Carriage drive over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rTooSlowFC
slow
604-603
ImeIODDriveOvercurrFC

IOD drive over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-585
meHead1LeftThe Fault counter for 91-531: IME

rmBadReadingFC Printhead 1 left jet thermistor
bad reading
604-586
ImeIODDriveStallFC

IOD drive stall
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-604
ImeHead2LeftThe Fault counter for 91-532: IME

bad reading
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-587
ImeHMVertOvercurrFC

HM vertical over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-605
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-588
ImeLowPressure- Fault counter for 91-516: IME Number of faults

AssistOvercurrFC Low Pressure Assist over cur- Range = 0 to 255
rent

bad reading
604-606
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-589
ImeMUAirPumOvercurrFC

MU Air Pum over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

bad reading
604-607
ImeHead1Nvram Fault counter for 91-519: IME

ErrFC
Printhead 1 NVRam error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeHead1RHeate Fault counter for 91-535: IME Number of faults

rTooHotFC
Printhead 1 right jet heater too Range = 0 to 255
hot
604-591
604-592

ErrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-608
604-593

ErrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rTooHotFC
hot
604-609

ErrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rTooHotFC
hot
604-594
604-595

rTooHotFC
hot
604-610

rTooHotFC
hot
604-596

rTooHotFC
hot
604-611

rTooSlowFC
slow
604-597

rTooHotFC
hot
604-612

rTooSlowFC
slow
NVM Description
Settings
February 2013
6-163
NVM Description
Settings
Number of faultsRange = 0 to 255
Default
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
604-613

rTooSlowFC
slow
604-628
ImeHead2ResHe Fault counter for 91-556: IME

aterThermBadFC Printhead 2 reservoir heater
thermistor bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-614

rTooSlowFC
slow
604-629

thermistor bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-615
ImeHead1RightT Fault counter for 91-543: IME Number of faults

hermBadReadPrinthead 1 right jet thermistor Range = 0 to 255
ingFC
bad reading
604-630

thermistor bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-616

bad reading
ingFC
604-631
ImeMDSysWrongStateFC
604-617

ingFC
bad reading

MD Manager, System not in
Range = 0 to 255
correct state for requested service
604-632
ImeHeadCarriag- Fault counter for 91-560: IME

Printhead carriage timeout
eTimeoutFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-618

ingFC
bad reading
604-634
ImeHeadCarriageNoEdgeFoundFC

Printhead Carriage no edge
found
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-619

aterTooHotFC
Printhead 1 reservoir heater
too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-635
ImeUpperHeadCarrUnexpectEvtFC

Upper Printhead Carriage
unexpected event
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-620

aterTooHotFC
too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-636
ImeUpperHeadCarrTOMovRestrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-621

aterTooHotFC
too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
This NVM ID shown for information only. The machine

does not have carriage
restraint motors.
604-637
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-622

aterTooHotFC
too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeUpperHead- This NVM ID shown for inforCarrRestrStallFC mation only. The machine
restraint motors.
604-638

aterTooSlowFC
too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeLowerHeadCarrNoEdgeFoundFC

Lower Printhead Carriage no
edge found
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-623
604-639

aterTooSlowFC
too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeLowerHeadCarrUnexpectEvFC

Lower Printhead Carriage
unexpected event
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-624
604-640

aterTooSlowFC
too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeLowerHeadCarrTOMovRestrFC

restraint motors.
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-625
604-626

aterTooSlowFC
too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-641
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-627

thermistor bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeLowerHead- This NVM ID shown for inforCarrRestrStallFC mation only. The machine
restraint motors.
604-642
ImeHeadWiperVertNoEdgeFC

Printhead wiper vertical motion Range = 0 to 255
edge not found
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-164
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
604-643
ImeHeadWiperVertUnexpectEvFC

Printhead Wiper vertical
motion unexpected event
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-665
ImePsSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-520: IME Number of faults

Power Supply communications Range = 0 to 255
DownFC
failure
604-644
ImeHeadWiperVertMotionTimeoutFC

timeout
604-666
ImeMpSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-525: IME

DownFC
Media Path communications
failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-645
ImeHeadWiperVertInvMoveFC

invalid move requested
604-667
ImeMpSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-526: IME

Media Path communications
SafetyFC
error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-646
ImeHeadWiperHorizInvalidPosFC

Printhead wiper horizontal
motion invalid position
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-668
Ime3TMSerialLin Fault counter for 92-531: IME

kSafetyFC
Paper Tray Module communications error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-651
ImeIODHomeTimeoutFC

IOD home timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-669
604-653
ImeWaveAMShortFC

Wave AM short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImePfpSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-536: IME Number of faults

SafetyFC
High Capacity Feeder commu- Range = 0 to 255
nications error
604-671
ImeWaveAMToo- Fault counter for 91-587: IME

Wave AM too hot
HotFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeSafetyTimerTimeoutFC

Safety Timer timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-654
604-672
ImeFault counter for 91-588: IME

WaveAMTherm- Wave AM thermistor reading
ReadingInvalidFC invalid
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeSystemTimer- Fault counter for 92-555: IME

SkippedFC
System timer skipped
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-655
604-673
ImeIntStormFC

Interrupt Storm Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeHorizWiperStalledTooSoonFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-674
ImeSWFaultFC

Software fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-675
ImeAdcThermRangeFC

ADC Thermal Out of range
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-677
ImeImageTransferFailFC

Image Transfer failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-678
ImeEngNvCrcDy- Fault counter for 92-598: IME

NVM dynamic data corrupted
namicsFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-679
ImeEngNvCrcNormConstsFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-680
ImeEngNvCrcFault counter for 92-600: IME Number of faults

ServiceConstsFC NVM critical settings corrupted Range = 0 to 255
604-681
ImeMeltResHeat- Fault counter for 93-520: IME

erTooHotFC
Melter reservoir heater is too
hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-682
ImeMeltResHeat- Fault counter for 93-521: IME

Melter reservoir is heating too
ingTooSlowFC
slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-683
ImeMeltResTher- Fault counter for 93-522: IME

Melter reservoir thermistor is
mBadFC
bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-684
ImeCyInkMeltTooHotFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-656

Horizontal Wiper Motion
stalled too soon

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
604-657
ImeHeadAdjMotUninitFC

SFWA Adjustment Motor
Uninitialized
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-659
ImeMuSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-505: IME

Serial Link Down
DownFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-660
ImeMuSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-506: IME

SafetyFC
Serial Link Safety
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-661
ImeMuidSerialLinkDownFC

Drum Unit Serial Link Failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-662
ImeMuidSerialLinkSafetyFC

Drum Unit Serial Link Safety
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-663
ImeDdSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-515: IME

DownFC
Drum Driver communications
failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-664
ImeDdSerialLink- Fault counter for 92-516: IME

Drum Driver communications
SafetyFC
error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
February 2013
6-165
NVM Description
Settings

NVM system constants corrupted

Cyan ink melter is too hot
Default
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
604-685
ImeCyInkMeltTooSlowFC

Cyan ink melter is too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-706
ImeCyInkMeltThermBadFC

Cyan ink melter thermistor is
bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Black melt reservoir level
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-686
ImeBlkMeltResLevelSenseFailFC
604-707
ImeMagInkMeltTooHotFC

Magenta ink melter is too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Magenta melt reservoir level
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-687
ImeMagMeltResLevelSenseFailFC
604-708
ImeMagInkMeltTooSlowFC

Magenta ink melter is too slow Range = 0 to 255
ImeCyMeltResLevelSenseFailFC

Cyan melt reservoir level
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-688
604-689
ImeMagInkMeltThermBadFC

Magenta ink melter thermistor Range = 0 to 255
is bad
604-709
ImeYellMeltResLevelSenseFailFC

Yellow melt reservoir level
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-690
ImeYellInkMeltTooHotFC

Yellow ink melter is too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-710
604-691
ImeYellInkMeltTooSlowFC

Yellow ink melter is too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeHead1BlkRes Fault counter for 93-549: IME Number of faults

FillTimeoutFC
Head 1 Black reservoir fill tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout
604-711

Yellow ink melter thermistor is
bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeYellInkMeltThermBadFC
ImeHead1MagRe Fault counter for 93-550: IME

sFillTimeoutFC
Head 1 Magenta reservoir fill
timeout
604-712
ImeHead1CyRes Fault counter for 93-551: IME Number of faults

FillTimeoutFC
Head 1 Cyan reservoir fill time- Range = 0 to 255
out
604-713
ImeHead1YellRes Fault counter for 93-552: IME Number of faults

FillTimeoutFC
Head 1 Yellow reservoir fill tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout
604-714

FillTimeoutFC
eout
604-715

sFillTimeoutFC
timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-716

FillTimeoutFC
out
604-717

FillTimeoutFC
eout
604-718

FillTimeoutFC
eout
604-719

sFillTimeoutFC
timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-720

FillTimeoutFC
out
604-692
604-693
ImeBlkInkMeltTooHotFC

Black ink melter is too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-694
ImeBlkInkMeltTooSlowFC

Black ink melter is too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-695
ImeBlkInkMeltThermBadFC

Black ink melter thermistor is
bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-696
ImeUpperUmbHeaterTooHotFC

Upper Umbilical heater is too
hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-697
ImeUpperUmbHeaterTooSlowFC

Upper Umbilical heater is too
slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-698
ImeUpperUmbThermBadFC

Upper Umbilical thermistor is
bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-699
ImeLowerUmbHeaterTooHotFC

Lower Umbilical heater is too
hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-700
ImeLowerUmbHeaterTooSlowFC

Lower Umbilical heater is too
slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-701
ImeLowerUmbThermBadFC

Lower Umbilical thermistor is
bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131
February 2013
6-166

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
604-721

FillTimeoutFC
eout
604-736
ImeHead3CyRes Fault counter for 93-575: IME

LevelSenseHead 3 Cyan reservoir level
sense failure
FailFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-722

FillTimeoutFC
eout
604-737
ImeHead3YellRes Fault counter for 93-576: IME

LevelFailFC
Head 3 Yellow reservoir level
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-723

sFillTimeoutFC
timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-738
ImeHead4BlkRes Fault counter for 93-577: IME

LevelFailFC
Head 4 Black reservoir level
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-724

FillTimeoutFC
out
604-739

sLevelFailFC
Head 4 Magenta reservoir
level sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-725

FillTimeoutFC
eout
604-740

FailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-726

LevelFailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-741

LevelFailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-727

sLevelFailFC
level sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-742

LevHead 1 Black reservoir level
elSenseOpenFC sense open
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-728

FailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-743

sLevHead 1 Magenta reservoir
elSenseOpenFC level sense open
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-729

LevelFailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-744

LevHead 1 Cyan reservoir level
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-730

LevelFailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-745

LevHead 1 Yellow reservoir level
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-731

sLevelFailFC
level sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-746

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-732

FailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-747

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-733

LevelFailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-748

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-734

LevelFailFC
sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-749

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-735

sLevelFailFC
level sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-750

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
NVM Description
Settings
February 2013
6-167
NVM Description
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
604-751

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-766

LevelSenseHead 3 Black reservoir level
sense short
ShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-752

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-767

sLevelSenseHead 3 Magenta reservoir
ShortFC
level sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-753

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-768

ShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-754

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-769

LevelShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-755

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-770

ShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-756

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-771

ShortFC
level sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-757

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-772

sense short
ShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-758

ShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-773

LevelShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-759

ShortFC
level sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-774
ImeBlkMeltResLevelSenseOpenFC

sense open
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-760

sense short
ShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-775
ImeMagMeltResLevelSenseOpenFC

sense open
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-761

LevelShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-776
ImeCyMeltResLevelSenseOpenFC

sense open
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-762

ShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-777
ImeYellMeltResLevelSenseOpenFC

sense open
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-763

level sense short
ShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-778
ImeBlkMeltResLevelSenseShortFC

sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-764

ShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-779
ImeMagMeltResLevelSenseShortFC

sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-765

LevelShortFC
sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-780
ImeCyMeltResLevelSenseShortFC

sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131
February 2013
6-168
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
604-781
ImeYellMeltResLevelSenseShortFC

sense short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-810
ImeDrumFrontThermBadFC

Drum front thermistor is bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-811
ImeInkSKUSelOvercurrFaultFC

Ink SKU sel over current fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeDrumRearHeaterTooHotFC

Drum rear heater is too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-782
604-812

Drum Image initial position
fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Drum rear heater is heating
too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeDrumImageInitPosFC
ImeDrumRearHeaterTooSlowFC
604-813

Drum rear thermistor is bad
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-796
ImeDrumImageStallFC

Drum Image stalled
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeDrumRearThermBadFC
604-814
ImeYPosErrFC
ImeDrumImageR- Fault counter for 94-514: IME

Drum Image race timing fault
aceTimingFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Y-axis Position error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-797
604-816
ImeDrumImageT- Fault counter for 94-518: IME

imingFC
Drum Image timing fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeYHomeCalcErrFC

Y-axis Home Calc error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-798
604-817
ImeDMDriveOvercurrFaultFC

Drum Management Unit drive
over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeYInitizationEr- Fault counter for 94-552: IME

rFC
Y-axis Initialization error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-799
604-818
ImeYHomeDataErrFC

Y-axis Home Data error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-800
ImeDMDriveStall- Fault counter for 94-522: IME

FaultFC
Drum Management Unit drive
stall fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-819
ImeStripLatchStimeoutFC

Stripper Latch Sensor timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-820
ImeYAOvercurrFaultFC

YA over current fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeStripLatchBadSstateFC

Stripper Latch Bad Sensor
State
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-801
604-802
ImeYAStallFaultFC

YA stall fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-821
ImeCleaningUnit- Fault Counter 94-558: IME

Cleaning Unit timing error
TimingErrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-803
ImeDDOilPump1
OvercurrFC

Drum Driver oil pump 1 over
current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-822

PosErrFC
Cleaning Unit position error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-823
ImeStripSolOver- Fault counter for 94-530: IME

currFC
Stripper solenoid over current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Cleaning Unit fast forward
FFHomeTimehome timeout
outFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-804
604-805
ImeDDOilPump2
OvercurrFC

Drum Driver oil pump 2 over
current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-824

FwdHomeTime- Cleaning Unit slow forward
outFC
home timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-806
ImeDDOilValveBOverCurrFC

Drum driver oil valve B over
current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-825
ImeCleaningUnitRevHomeTimeoutFC
Fault Counter 94-566: IME

Cleaning Unit reverse home
timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-807
ImeYABeltSlipFaultFC

YA belt slip fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-826
ImeCleanUnitseDataReadErrFC
604-808
ImeDrumFrontHeaterTooHotFC

Drum front heater is too hot
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
Cleaning Unit usage data read Range = 0 to 255
error
604-827
ImeCleanUnitseDataWriteErrFC
ImeDrumFrontHeaterTooSlowFC

Drum front heater is heating
too slow
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
Cleaning Unit usage data write Range = 0 to 255
error
604-828
ImeCleanUnitse- Fault Counter 94-572: IME

DataDetectErrFC Cleaning Unit usage data
detect error
604-795
604-809
February 2013
6-169
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
604-829
ImeCleanUnitUsageDataVerErrFC

Number of faults
Cleaning Unit usage data ver- Range = 0 to 255
sion error
604-831
T5HoistFailureFC T5 hoist failure Fault Counter
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-832
T5LowerFailureF T5 lower failure Fault Counter

C
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-833
PaddleHomeFC
Fault Counter for 12-024: Pad- Number of faults

dle Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-834
PaddleMoveFC

dle Move Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-835
PunchMotorMoveFC
Fault Counter for 12-043: Hole Number of faults

Punch Motor Move Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-836
PunchHeadHomeFC

Punch Head Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-837
PunchHeadMoveFC

Range = 0 to 255
Punch Head Move Fault
604-838
PunchMotorHomeFC

Punch Motor Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-839
PunchUnitMoveFC
Fault Counter for 12-047:

Punch Unit Move Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-840
InserterBottPltHomeFC
Fault Counter 12-056: Inserter Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Bottom Plate Home Fault
604-841
PPIBottPltLiftFC

Bottom Plate Lift Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-842
CreaseBladeMov- Fault Counter for 12-061:

Crease Blade Move Fault.
eFFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-843
CreaseRollMotor- Fault Counter for 12-062:

FailFC
Crease Roll Motor Failed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-844
BMStaplerMoveFC

Booklet Maker Stapler Move
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-845
BackStopMotorMoveFC
Fault Counter for 12-065: Back Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Stop Motor Move Fault
604-846
TampermoveFC

Tamper Move Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-847
PaperPushMotor- Fault Counter for 12-083:

Paper Pusher Motor Stalled
StalledFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-848
EntSnsOfJamFC

Entrance Sensor OFF Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-849
PunchSnrOnJamFC

Punch Sensor ON Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-850
BuffPointSnsOnJamFC

Buffer Point Sensor ON Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131
Settings

Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
604-851
BuffPointSnsOffJamFC

Buffer Point Sensor OFF Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-852
BookletCompExit- Fault Counter for 12-166:

Booklet Compiler Exit Sensor
SenOffJamFC
OFF Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-853
BMExitSnrOnJamFC

Number of faults
Booklet Maker Exit Sensor ON Range = 0 to 255
Jam
604-854
BMExitSnrOffJamFC

Booklet Maker Exit Sensor
OFF Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-855
BMUnexpectedSheetFC

Booklet Maker Unexpected
Sheet
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-856
BMStraySheetFC Fault Counter for 12-184:

Booklet Maker Stray Sheet
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-857
TrifoldExitSnrOn- Fault Counter for 12-185: TriJFC

fold Exit Sensor ON Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-858
TrifoldExitSnrOffJFC
Fault Counter for 12-186: Trifold Exit Sensor OFF Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-859
TrifoldAssistSnrOnJFC
Fault Counter for 12-187: Trifold Assist Sensor ON Jam
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-860
LELateBBEntryS- Fault Counter for 12-190:

Sheet late to BB entry sensor
nrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-861
LELatetoInserter- Fault Counter 12-191: Lead

TabStandbySFC edge late to Inserter Tab
Standby Sensor
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-862
TELatefromBBen- Fault Counter for 12-192:

Sheet late from BB entry sentrySFC
sor
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-863
TELateInserterT- Fault Counter 12-193: Trail

edge late from Inserter Tab
abSnrFC
Standby Sensor
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-864
LeadedgelatetoInserterPickUpSFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-865
TELatefromInFault Counter 12-196: Trail

serterPickUpSFC edge late from Inserter Tray
Pick Up Sensor
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-866
FinStraySheetFC Fault Counter for 12-198: Stray Number of faults

sheet is detected after jam
Range = 0 to 255
clearance
604-867
UnexpectedFault Counter for 12-199:

SheetatFinEntFC Unexpected Sheet at Finisher
Entry
February 2013
6-170
Fault Counter 12-194: Lead

edge late to Inserter Pick Up
Sensor
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
604-868
OffsetUnitInitFC
Fault Counter for 12-273: Offset Unit Init Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-889
StapleJawHomeFC
Fault Counter for 12-375: Sta- Number of faults

pler Jaw Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-869
OffsetUnitHomeFC
Fault Counter for 12-274: Offset Unit Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-890
StapleJawMvFC

pler Jaw Move Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-870
OffsetUnitHomeMvFC
Fault Counter for 12-275: Offset Unit Home Move Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-891
StaplePrimingFC

pler Priming Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-871
OffsetUnitAwayHomeFC
Fault Counter for 12-276: Offset Unit Away Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-892
LCSSStapleIndexFC

LCSS Stapler index Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-872
OffsetUnitAwayHomeMvFC
Fault Counter for 12-277: Offset Unit Away Home Move

Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-893
PunchUnitSideEdgeDetectFC

Punch Unit Side Edge Detect
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-873
NipSplitFC
Fault Counter for 12-288: Nip

Split Failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-894
BackStopHomeFFC
Fault Counter for 12-383: Back Number of faults

Stop Home Fault.
Range = 0 to 255
604-874
NipHomeFC
Fault Counter for 12-289: Nip

Home Failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-895
TampHomeFC

Tamper Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-875
FinUndockedDur- Fault Counter for 12-310: FiningRFC

isher Undocked During Run
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-896
FTampMvFC
Fault Counter for 12-392: Front Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Tamper Move Fault
604-876
TopCoverOpenin- Fault Counter for 12-312: Top

Cover Open in Run
RFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-897
FTampHomeFC

Tamper Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-877
FinDoorOpenInRFC
Fault Counter for 12-313: Finisher Door Open In Run
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-898
FTampAwayFromHomeFC
604-878
InserterTopCoverOpenInRFC

Range = 0 to 255
Top Cover Open In Run

Tamper Away From Home
Range = 0 to 255
Fault
604-899
TrifoldCoverOpenInRFC
Fault Counter for 12-317: Trifold Cover Open In Run
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
FTampAwayFault Counter for 12-395: Front Number of faults

FromHomeMvFC Tamper Away From Home
Range = 0 to 255
Move Fault
604-879
604-880
TrifoldFDoorOpenInRFC
Fault Counter for 12-318: Trifold Front Door Open In Run
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-900
RTampMvFC
Fault Counter for 12-396: Rear Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Tamper Move Fault
604-881
InserterHandDoorOpenInrFC

Range = 0 to 255
Hand Door Open In run
604-901
RTampHomeFC

Tamper Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-882
CompHomeFC

Compiler Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-902
604-883
CompOutFC

Compiler Out Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
RTampAwayFault Counter for 12-398: Rear Number of faults

FromHomeMvFC Tamper Away From Home
Range = 0 to 255
Move Fault
604-903
CompMvFC

Compiler Move Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
RTampAwayFromHomeFC

Tamper Away From Home
Range = 0 to 255
Fault
604-884
604-885
StapleMvFC

pler Move Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-904
BMStapleHead2
MvFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-886
StapleHomeFC

pler Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255

Booklet Staple Head 2 Move
Fault
604-905
StapleMiddleHomeFC

pler Middle Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255

Booklet Stapler Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-887
BMStapleHomeFC
604-906
StapleMiddleMvFC

pler Middle Move Fault
Range = 0 to 255
BMStapleHead2H Fault Counter for 12-413:

omeFC
Booklet Staple Head 2 Home
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-888
February 2013
6-171
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
604-907
BMStapleNotHomeForInFC

Number of faults
Booklet Stapler Not Home For Range = 0 to 255
Init
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
604-925
EjectModHomeM- Fault Counter for 12-457: Ejec- Number of faults

vFC
tor Module Home Move Fault Range = 0 to 255
604-908
RollGateHomeFC Fault Counter for 12-415: Roll

Gate Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-926
EjectModOutPosFC
Fault Counter for 12-458: Ejec- Number of faults

tor Module Out Position Fault Range = 0 to 255
604-909
CreaseBladeHomeFC

Crease Blade Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-927
EjectModOutPosMvFC

tor Module Out Position Move Range = 0 to 255
Fault
604-910
BMFlapperHomeFC

Booklet Maker Flapper Home
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-928
StackBin1MotorSt Fault Counter 12-460: Stacker Number of faults

allFC
Bin 1 Motor Stall
Range = 0 to 255
604-911
BMFlappermvFC Fault Counter for 12-418:

Booklet Maker Flapper Move
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-929
StackBin1LevelF
C
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-930
StackBin1Elevato Fault Counter for 12-462:

rFC
Stacker Bin 1 Elevator Failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-912
BMTamp2HomeF Fault Counter for 12-419:

Number of faults
C
Booklet Maker Tamper 2 Home Range = 0 to 255
Fault
604-931
BMPwrNotPresentFC

Booklet Maker Power Not
Present Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-913
BMTamp2MvFC

Number of faults
Booklet Maker Tamper 2 Move Range = 0 to 255
Fault
604-932
BMPwrFC

Booklet Maker Power Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-914
PapPushHomeFC
604-933
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PaddUpprPosFC Fault Counter for 12-465: Pad- Number of faults

dle Upper Position Fault
Range = 0 to 255

Paper Pusher Home Fault
604-915
604-934
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PaddUpprPosMvFC

dle Upper Position Move Fault Range = 0 to 255
PapPushHomeM- Fault Counter for 12-441:

Paper Pusher Home Move
vFC
Fault
604-935
PaddLwrPosFC

dle Lower Position Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-916
PapPushAwayHomeFC

Paper Pusher Away Home
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-936
PaddLwrPosMvFC

dle Lower Position Move Fault Range = 0 to 255
604-917
PapPushAwayHomeMvFC

Paper Pusher Away Home
Move Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-937
CurlSupprHomeFC
Fault Counter for 12-469: Curl Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Suppressor Home Fault
604-938
CurlSupprMvFC
604-918
EjectModMotorStallFC

tor Module Motor Stall
Range = 0 to 255

Suppressor Move Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-939
EjectPlateMotorStallFC

tor Plate Motor Stall
Range = 0 to 255

Suppressor Away Position
Range = 0 to 255
Fault
604-919
CurlSupprAwayPosFC
604-920
EjectPlateHomeFC

tor Plate Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-940
CurlSupprAwayPosMvFC

Suppressor Away Position
Range = 0 to 255
Move Fault
604-921
EjectPlateMvFC

tor Plate Move Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-941
PressMotorInitFC Fault Counter for 12-473:

Pressing Motor Init Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-922
LwrPaddHomeFC Fault Counter for 12-454:

Lower Paddle Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-942
PressMotorInitM- Fault Counter for 12-474:

Number of faults
Pressing Motor Init Move Fault Range = 0 to 255
vFC
604-923
LwrPaddMvFC

Lower Paddle Move Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-943
PressMotorHomeFC

Pressing Motor Home Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-924
EjectModHomeFC

tor Module Home Fault
Range = 0 to 255
604-944
PressMotorHomeMvFC

Pressing Motor Home Move
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-172
NVM Description

Stacker Level Fault
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
604-945
PressMotorOutPosFC

Pressing Motor Out Position
Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-963
ImeDrumDrvCm- Fault Counter for 94-535-00:

Drum Drive Command CurdCurrErrFC
rent Error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-946
PressMtrOutPosMvFC

Pressing Motor Out Position
Move Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-964
ECMInitFailedFC Fault Counter for 92-568-00:

ECM Initialization Failed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-965
InsShtTooShortFC

Insert Sheet Too Short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeMPS16LETo
MSIFC
Fault Counter for 82-133-00:

Number of faults
Media Path Sensor 16 LE Tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout from MSI
604-947
604-948
ImeMPS11LEToo Fault Counter for 10-147-00:

Number of faults
EarlyFC
Media Path Sensor 11 LE Too Range = 0 to 255
Early
604-967
ImeHtrReqUpdFailFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-949

Number of faults
EarlyFC
Early

AC Power Manger heater
requests are not being
updated
604-968
ImeMPS17ShtTo
oLongFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
EarlyFC
Early

Media Path Sensor 17 Too
Long
604-969
ImeMPS17ShtTo
oShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeMPInvS15LE
TooEarlyFC

Media Path Sensor 17 Too
Short
604-970
ImeMPS17LELat Fault Counter for 82-134-00:

Number of faults
eFC
Media Path Sensor 17 LE Tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout
604-971
ImeMPS17TELat Fault Counter for 82-134-00:

Number of faults
eFC
Media Path Sensor 17 TE Tim- Range = 0 to 255
eout
604-972
ImeMPS17InvTE Fault Counter for 82-134-00:

LateFC
TE Timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-973
ImeMPS17LEEarl Fault Counter for 82-134-00:

Number of faults
yFC
Early
604-974
ImeIODStallRecFailFC

IOD Stall Recovery Failed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-950
604-951
NVM Description

LE Too Early
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeMPS5LETooE Fault Counter for 82-152-00:

arlyFC
Media Path Sensor 5 LE Too
Early
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
EarlyFC
Early

Number of faults
EarlyFC
Early
ImeMPDupS16LE Fault Counter for 82-155-00:

Number of faults
TooEarlyFC
Media Path Duplex Sensor 16 Range = 0 to 255
LE Too Early
604-956
ImeMPDupS14LE Fault Counter for 82-156-00:

Number of faults
TooEarlyFC
Media Path Duplex Sensor 14 Range = 0 to 255
LE Too Early
604-975
ImeBlkMeltLvlFailFC

sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-957

Number of faults
EarlyFC
Early
604-976
ImeMagMeltLvlFailFC

sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-958
ImeMPInvS13LE
TooEarlyFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-977
ImeCyMeltLvlFailFC

sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-959

Number of faults
EarlyFC
Early
604-978
ImeYelMeltLvlFailFC

sense failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-962
ImeDrumImageFailFC
604-952
604-953
604-954
604-955

LE Too Early

Drum Imaging Failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
February 2013
6-173
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
604-980
ImeFinCommsFailFC

Cannot communicate with finisher.
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-996
FINISHERFAILCYCLEUPFC
Fault Counter 12-493-00: Fin- Number of faults

isher failure to Cycle Up in time Range = 0 to 255
604-997
ImeFinMissingFC Fault Counter for 12-764-00:

Finisher is not present.
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
FINISHERFAILPREPTIMEFC
Fault Counter 12-494-00: Fin- Number of faults

isher failure to return prep time Range = 0 to 255
604-981
604-982
Total Large
Marked Images
Disp
0 = No Display
1 = Displayed
Range = 0 to 1
Total Large Blk

Enable Display of Large Black 0 = No Display
1 = Displayed
Marked Imgs Disp Marked Images Counter
Range = 0 to 1
604-984
Total Large Col

Enable Display of Large
Marked Imgs Disp Colour Marked Images
Counter
604-985
IODEXCESSIVEYPOSNOISEFC
Fault Counter 91-695: IODEx- Number of faults

cessiveYPosNoiseFC
Range = 0 to 255
IODEXCESSIVEXPOSNOISEFC

cessiveXPosNoiseFC
Range = 0 to 255
604-987
IODEXCESSIVEROLLPOSNOISEFC

cessiveRollPositionNoiseFC
Range = 0 to 255
604-988
IODSTITCHOR- Fault Counter 91-698:

ROLLMISALIGN- IODExcessiveStitchAndRollMENTFC
MisAlignmentFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-989
IODSTITCHOR- Fault Counter 91-699:

ROLLMOTORS- IODStitchorRollMotorNotZeNOTZEROEDFC roedFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IMELOWCURFault Counter 42-504-00: Low Number of faults

RENTFANOVER- Current fan over-current
Range = 0 to 255
CURRENTFC
604-991
IMEMPSENSOR
15TELATEFC
Fault Counter 10-151-00: MP

Sensor15 TE Timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-992
IMEDRUMFANSTALLEDFC
Fault Counter 94-620-00:

Drum Fan Stalled
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
604-993
IMEABATEMENTFANSTALLEDFC

Abatement fan stalled
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PRINTENGRUN- Fault Counter 92-586-00: Print Number of faults

Engine running at default
NINGATDERange = 0 to 255
FAULTSPEEDFC speed
FINISHERCDICOMMSFAILFC
604-983
604-986
604-990
604-994
604-995
Enable Display of Large

Marked Images Counter
Fault Counter 12-492-00: CDI

communications failure with
finisher.
dC131
0 = No Display
1 = Displayed
Range = 0 to 1
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
605-001
NextPrintJobID
Value of next MFPrint job's id.
Range = 0 to 999
605-002
PrintCrashRecov- Enable Print Job Recovery

eryEnable
Print Job Recovery

enable Settings
0 = No Recovery
1 = Recovered
Range = 0 to 1
605-003
MFPrintComplet- This holds the crash recovery Range = 0 to 12

edJob Log Loca- print job information on the alttion
anta side.
605-004
Not displayed
Job log-MFPrintCompleted
Job Log
Range = 0 to 0
605-005
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTMarkedImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-006
MFPRINTMarkedImagesDisplayable
Enable Option to export

marked image counter information to clients
0 = No export
1 = Exported
Range = 0 to 1
605-007
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-008
MFPRINTSheets- Enable Option to export

marked image counter inforDisplayable
mation to clients
0 = No export
1 = Exported
Range 0 to 1
605-009
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-010
MFPRINTDuplex- Enable Option to export

Duplexed counter information
SheetsDisplayto clients
able
0 = No export
1 = Exported
Range 0 to 1
605-011
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTLargeSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-012
MFPRINTLargeSheetsDisplayable
Enable Option to export Large 0 = No export

Sheet counter information to
1 = Exported
clients
Range = 0 to 1
605-013
disturbance time
Maximum time allowed for

Range 0 to 240
ESS to resync before deleting
orphaned print jobs
12
605-014
Not displayed
Counter-PrintServerFAXJobs
February 2013
6-174
Counter-MFPRINTDuplexSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
605-015
Not displayed
Counter-PrintIFAXJobs
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-030
Print Standard
Impressions
605-016
MFPRINTMarkedColorImagesDisplay
Enable Option to export Colour 0 = No export

images counter information to 1 = Exported
Range = 0 to 1
clients
605-017
MFPRINTColorSheetsDisplay
Enable Option to export Colour 0 = No export

Sheet counter information to
1 = Exported
clients
Range = 0 to 1
Print Output Quality Standard Range = 0 to

Lifetime Impressions Total
16777215
Number of print path impressions that were selected by
user at the print driver as Standard Mode
605-031
Print Enhanced
Impressions
Print Output Quality Enhanced Range = 0 to

Lifetime Impressions Total
16777215
Number of print path impressions that were selected by
user at the print driver as
Enhanced Mode
605-032
Print Standard
Print Output Quality Standard Range = 0 to
PCL Impressions PCL Lifetime Impressions.
16777215
Total Number of print path
impressions that were selected
by user at the print driver as
Standard PCL Mode
605-033
Print Enhanced
Print Output Quality Enhanced Range = 0 to
PCL Impressions PCL Lifetime Impressions.
16777215
by user at the print driver as
Enhanced PCL Mode
605-034
Print TransparPrint Output Quality OHP /

Range = 0 to
ency Impressions Tranparency Lifetime Impres- 16777215
sions.
by user as using OHP / Transparency media
605-035
BlackReprintImages
Black reprint image counter
Usage counter
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-036
BlackReprintImagesDisp
Black reprint image counter

displayable
Usage counter
Range = 0 to 1
605-037
ColorReprintImages
Color reprint image counter
Usage counter
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-038
ColorReprintImagesDisp
Color reprint image counter

displayable
Usage counter
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-018
MFPRINTDuplex- Enable Option to export

ColorSheetsDis- Duplex Colour Sheet counter
play
information to clients
605-019
MFPRINTLargeColorSheetsDisplay
605-020
MFPSucCounter
cessImgRecServerFaxDisplay
605-021
MFPSuccessIFaxImagesRecDisplay

Success Ifax images counter 1 = Exported
Range 0 to 1
information to clients
605-022
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTMarkedCol- Range = 0 to
16777215
orImages
605-023
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTColorSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-024
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTDuplexCol- Range = 0 to
16777215
orSheets
605-025
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTLargeColor- Range = 0 to
16777215
Sheets
605-026
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTSuccessrANGE = 0 TO
fulImagesReceivedFromServ- 16777215
erFax
605-027
Not displayed
Counter-MFPRINTSuccessfu- Range = 0 to
16777215
lIFaxImagesReceived
605-028
PrintJobReleaseThreshold
Range 0 to 4
605-029
Print Fast Impres- Print Output Quality Fast Life0

sions
time Impressions Total Number Range 0 to 16777215
of print path impressions that
were selected by user at the
print driver as Fast or Draft
Mode
0 = No export
1 = Exported
Range 0 to 1

Colour Sheet counter informa- 1 = Exported
tion to clients
Range 0 to 1
Range 0 to 1
February 2013
6-175
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
605-039
Print Hi Res /
Photo Impressions
Print Output Quality Hi Resolu- Range = 0 to

16777215
tion / Photo Lifetime ImpressionsTotal Number of print
path impressions that were
selected by user at the print
driver as Hi Resolution / Photo
Mode
Settings
Default
0
605-040
Print High Speed Print output quality high speed Total number of print
PCL Impressions PCL lifetime impressions
path impressions
marked that were
Not displayed
selected by user at
the client PCL print
driver as a high
speed mode.
Range = 0 to
16777215
605-041
Print High Speed

Impressions
Not displayed
Print output quality high speed Total number of print

lifetime impressions
path impressions
marked that were
selected by user at
the client print driver
in high speed mode.
Range = 0 to
16777215
dC131

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
606-001 Tray 1 Media

Type
Tray 1 Media Type

Range = 0 to 102
MTStandard = 0,MTDrilled =
1,MTEnvelope = 3,MTTransparency = 4,MTLetterhead =
5,MTLabels = 6,MTRecycled
= 7,MTOtherType = 9,MTBond
= 12,MTPrePrinted =
13,MTCardStock =
14,MTCustom1 =
15,MTCustom2 =
16,MTCustom3 =
17,MTCustom4 =
19,MTCustom5 =
20,MTCustom6 =
21,MTCustom7 = 22,MTUnspecified = 18,MTSystemDefault = 23,MTPrecutTabs =
37,MTCovers = 38,MTTabs =
39,MTPaperBackedTransparency = 40,MTThin =
41,MTLightCardStock =
42,MTLightGlossy =
43,MTHeavyGlossy =
44,MTLightCardStockSide2 =
45,MTLightGlossySide2 =
46,MTHeavyGlossySide2 =
47,MTCardStockSide2 =
48,MTThinSide2 =
49,MTHeavyLabels =
50,MTHeavyPrecutTabs =
51,MTHeavyCardStock =
52,MTHeavyCardStockSide2
= 53,MTExtraHeavyGlossy =
54,MTExtraHeavyGlossySide
2 = 55,MTExtraHeavyLabels =
56,MTUsedStandard =
57,MTRoughStock =
58,MTPhoto = 59,MTPostcard = 60
February 2013
6-176
Settings
Default
0

Settings
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description

Color
Tray 1 Media Color

Range = 0 to 34
MCWhite = 0,MCGreen =
1,MCBuff = 2,MCYellow =
3,MCGoldenrod = 4,MCBlue =
5,MCPink = 6,MCTransparent
= 7,MCIvory = 8,MCGray =
9,MCRed = 10,MCOrange =
11,MCOtherColor =
12,MCCustom1 =
13,MCCustom2 =
14,MCCustom3 =
15,MCCustom4 =
17,MCCustom5 =
18,MCCustom6 =
19,MCCustom7 = 20,MCUnspecified = 16,MCSystemDefault = 21

Type

Weight
Tray 1 Media Weight
Range = 60 to 216
75
606-004 Tray 1 Direct

Select
Tray 1 Direct Select
0 = TS Direct Only
1 = TS Direct and
Auto
Range = 0 to 1
606-005 Tray 1 Priority
Tray 1 Priority
Range = 0 to 99
30
606-006 Tray 1 Width
Tray 1 Width
Range = 182 to 432
Range and default size in mm
216
606-007 Tray 1 Length
Tray 1 Length
Range = 140 to 297
279
606-008 Tray 1 Percent

Full
Tray 1 Percent Full
Tray 2 Media Type

Range = 0 to 102
= 12,MTPrePrinted =
13,MTCardStock =
14,MTCustom1 =
15,MTCustom2 =
16,MTCustom3 =
17,MTCustom4 =
19,MTCustom5 =
20,MTCustom6 =
42,MTLightGlossy =
43,MTHeavyGlossy =
48,MTThinSide2 =
49,MTHeavyLabels =
56,MTUsedStandard =
57,MTRoughStock =
Range = 0 to 100
606-009 Tray 1 User Type Tray 1 User Type
0 = TA Fixed
1
1 = TA AdjustableAll
2 = TA Adjustable Size
Only
Range = 0 to 1
606-010 Tray 1 Modulus
Tray 1 Modulus
Range = 0 to 100

Position
Tray 1 Modulus Position
Range = 0 to 100
February 2013
6-177
Settings
Default
0
dC131

Settings
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description

Color
Tray 2 Media Color

Range = 0 to 34
11,MCOtherColor =
12,MCCustom1 =
13,MCCustom2 =
14,MCCustom3 =
15,MCCustom4 =
17,MCCustom5 =
18,MCCustom6 =

Type

Weight
Tray 2 Media Weight
Range = 60 to 216
75

Select
0 = TS Direct Only
1 = TS Direct And
Auto
Range = 0 to 1
Tray 2 Priority
Range = 0 to 99
40
Tray 2 Width
Range = 182 to 432
216
Tray 2 Length
Range = 140 to 297
279

Full
Tray 2 Percent Full
Tray 3 Media Type

Range = 0 to 102
= 12,MTPrePrinted =
13,MTCardStock =
14,MTCustom1 =
15,MTCustom2 =
16,MTCustom3 =
17,MTCustom4 =
19,MTCustom5 =
20,MTCustom6 =
42,MTLightGlossy =
43,MTHeavyGlossy =
48,MTThinSide2 =
49,MTHeavyLabels =
56,MTUsedStandard =
57,MTRoughStock =
Range = 0 to 100
0 = TA Fixed
1
1 = TA Adjustable All
2 = TA AdjustableSize
Only
Range = 0 to 1
Tray 2 Modulus
Range = 0 to 100

Position
Range = 0 to 100
dC131
February 2013
6-178
Settings
Default
0

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description

Color
Tray 3 Media Color

Range = 0 to 34
11,MCOtherColor =
12,MCCustom1 =
13,MCCustom2 =
14,MCCustom3 =
15,MCCustom4 =
17,MCCustom5 =
18,MCCustom6 =

Type

Weight
Tray 3 Media Weight
Range = 60 to 216
75

Select
0 = TS Direct Only
1 = TS Direct And
Auto
Range = 0 to 1
Tray 3 Priority
Range = 0 to 99
10
Tray 3 Width
Range = 182 to 432
A4 = 210
8.5 x 11 = 216
216 for
US
210 for
Europe
Tray 3 Length
Range = 257 to 297
A4 = 297
8.5 x 11 = 279
279 for
US
297 for
Europe

Full
Tray 3 Percent Full
Range = 0 to 100
606-049 Tray 3 User Type Tray 3 User Type (fixed size)

Note that the GUI uses the
range to determine if other
selections should be possible
0 = TA Fixed
Tray 4 Media Type

Range = 0 to 102
= 12,MTPrePrinted =
13,MTCardStock =
14,MTCustom1 =
15,MTCustom2 =
16,MTCustom3 =
17,MTCustom4 =
19,MTCustom5 =
20,MTCustom6 =
42,MTLightGlossy =
43,MTHeavyGlossy =
48,MTThinSide2 =
49,MTHeavyLabels =
56,MTUsedStandard =
57,MTRoughStock =
Tray 3 Modulus
Range = 0 to 100

Position
Range = 0 to 100
Settings
February 2013
6-179
Settings
Default
0
dC131

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description

Color
Tray 4 Media Color

Range = 0 to 34
11,MCOtherColor =
12,MCCustom1 =
13,MCCustom2 =
14,MCCustom3 =
15,MCCustom4 =
17,MCCustom5 =
18,MCCustom6 =

Type

Weight
Tray 4 Media Weight
Range = 60 to 216
75

Select
0 = TS Direct Only
1 = TS Direct And
Auto
Range = 0 to 1
Tray 4 Priority
Range = 0 to 99
99
Tray 4 Width
Range = 182 to 432
216
Tray 4 Length
Range = 140 to 320
279

Full
Tray 4 Percent Full
Range = 0 to 100
606-069 Tray 4 User Type Tray 4 User Type (Bypass

tray)
Note that the GUI uses the
range to determine if other
selections should be possible
Range = 1 to 1
Tray 4 Modulus
Range = 0 to 100

Position
Range = 0 to 100
Tray 5 Media Type

Range = 0 to 102
= 12,MTPrePrinted =
13,MTCardStock =
14,MTCustom1 =
15,MTCustom2 =
16,MTCustom3 =
17,MTCustom4 =
19,MTCustom5 =
20,MTCustom6 =
42,MTLightGlossy =
43,MTHeavyGlossy =
48,MTThinSide2 =
49,MTHeavyLabels =
56,MTUsedStandard =
57,MTRoughStock =
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-180
Settings
Default
0

Settings
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description

Color
Tray 5 Media Color

Range = 0 to 34
11,MCOtherColor =
12,MCCustom1 =
13,MCCustom2 =
14,MCCustom3 =
15,MCCustom4 =
17,MCCustom5 =
18,MCCustom6 =

Type

Weight
Tray 5 Media Weight
Range = 60 to 216
75

Select
0 = TS Direct Only
1 = TS Direct And
Auto
Range = 0 to 1
Tray 5 Priority
Range = 0 to 99
Tray 5 Width
Range = 182 to 432
216
Tray 5 Length
Range = 140 to 297
279

Full
Tray 5 Percent Full
Tray 6 Media Type

Range = 0 to 102
= 12,MTPrePrinted =
13,MTCardStock =
14,MTCustom1 =
15,MTCustom2 =
16,MTCustom3 =
17,MTCustom4 =
19,MTCustom5 =
20,MTCustom6 =
42,MTLightGlossy =
43,MTHeavyGlossy =
48,MTThinSide2 =
49,MTHeavyLabels =
56,MTUsedStandard =
57,MTRoughStock =
Range = 0 to 100
0 = TA Fixed
0
Only
Range = 0 to 1
Tray 5 Modulus
Range = 0 to 100

Position
Range = 1 to 100
February 2013
6-181
Settings
Default
0
dC131

Settings
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name

Color
Tray 6 Media Color

Range = 0 to 34
11,MCOtherColor =
12,MCCustom1 =
13,MCCustom2 =
14,MCCustom3 =
15,MCCustom4 =
17,MCCustom5 =
18,MCCustom6 =
606-154 Cyan Lifetime Ink Cyan Lifetime Ink Sticks Con- Range = 0 to
Sticks Used
4,294,967,295
sumed
Total Number of cyan ink
sticks consumed since Activation
606-155 Magenta Lifetime Ink Sticks

Used
Magenta Lifetime Ink Sticks

Range = 0 to
Consumed
4,294,967,295
Total Number of magenta ink
606-156 Yellow Lifetime

Ink Sticks Used
Yellow Lifetime Ink Sticks Con- Range = 0 to

sumed
4,294,967,295
Total Number of yellow ink
Tray 6 Media Weight
Range = 60 to 216
75

Select
0 = TS Direct Only
1 = TS Direct And
Auto
Range = 0 to 1
Total Maintenance Kits

Range = 0 to
Installed
4,294,967,295
Identifies the total number of
maintenance kits that have
been installed on the machine
since activation

Weight
606-157 Total Maintenance Kits

Installed
606-159 Cleaning Pages
Range = 1 to 99
99
Cleaning Pages
Range = 0 to
Total cleaning sheets reported 16777215
by marking engine since activation
numCleaning Pages
606-160 Printhead Clean

WarmPurge
Printhead Clean Count - Warm Range = 0 to

Purge
16777215
Identifies the number of times
any printhead has been
cleaned by a Warm Purge
numTotalStandbyTimeHours
606-161 Printhead Clean

ColdPurge
Printhead Clean Count - Cold Range = 0 to

Purge
16777215
cleaned by a Cold Purge.
606-162 Printhd Clean

Printhead Clean Count Range = 0 to
FreezeOff Purge Freeze-off Purge
16777215
cleaned by a Freeze Off
Purge.
Tray 6 Priority
Tray 6 Width
Range = 182 to 432
216
Tray 6 Length
Range = 182 to 297
279

Full
Tray 6 Percent Full
Range = 0 to 100
0 = TA Fixed
1
Only
Range = 0 to 1
Tray 6 Modulus
Range = 0 to 100

Position
Range = 1 to 100
Range = 0 to
4,294,967,295
606-153 Black Lifetime Ink Black Lifetime Ink Sticks Con- Range = 0 to
Sticks Used
4,294,967,295
sumed
Total Number of black ink
606-152 Print Engine Life- Print Engine Lifetime Jamtime Jams

sNumber of Marking Engine
Jams since activation
dC131
February 2013
6-182
NVM Description
Settings
Default

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
606-167 Plain Sheets

Used
Plain Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
16777215
Total of normal size Plain
media sheets since activation
date.
numNormalPlainMedia
606-175 Extra HW Plus

RL Sheets Used
606-168 Bond Sheets

Used
Bond Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
16777215
Total of normal size Bond
date
numNormalBondMedia
Extra Heavyweight Plus

Range = 0 to
Reloaded Sheets UsedTotal of 16777215
normal size Extra Heavyweight Plus Reloaded media
sheets since activation datenumNormalExtraHWPlusReloadedMedia
606-176 Gloss Coating

Sheets Used
Range = 0 to
16777215
LetterHead Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
Total of normal size Letter16777215
Head media sheets since activation date
numNormalLetterHeadMedia
Gloss Coating Sheets UsedTotal of normal size Gloss

Coating media sheets since
activation datenumNormalGlossMedia
Pre-Printed Sheets Used

Total of normal size PrePrinted media sheets since
activation date
numNormalPrePrintedMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215

Gloss Coating Reloaded
Range = 0 to
Reloaded Sheets Sheets UsedTotal of normal
16777215
size Gloss Coating Reloaded
datenumNormalGlossReloadedMedia
606-178 HW Gloss Coating Sheets Used
606-171 Heavyweight
Sheets Used
Heavyweight Sheets Used

Total of normal size Heavyweight media sheets since
activation date
numNormalHWMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215
Heavyweight Gloss Coating

Range = 0 to
Sheets UsedTotal of normal
16777215
size Heavyweight Gloss Coating media sheets since activation
datenumNormalHWGlossMedia
606-172 Extra Heavyweight Sheets

Used
Extra Heavyweight Sheets

Used
Total of normal size Extra
heavyweight media sheets
since activation date
numNormalExtraHWMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-179 HW Gloss Coating Reloaded

Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215

Range = 0 to
Reloaded Sheets UsedTotal of 16777215
normal size Heavyweight
datenumNormalHWGlossReloadedMedia
606-180 Extra HW Gloss

Coating Sheets

Range = 0 to
Sheets Used Total of normal
16777215
size Extra Heavyweight Plus
datenumNormalExtraHWPlusMedia
Extra Heavyweight Gloss

Range = 0 to
Coating Sheets Used Total of 16777215
normal size Extra Heavyweight Gloss Coating media
sheets since activation datenumNormalExtraHWGlossMedia
606-169 LetterHead
Sheets Used
606-170 Pre-Printed
Sheets Used
606-173 Extra HW
Extra Heavyweight Reloaded
Reloaded Sheets Sheets Used
Total of normal size HeavyUsed
weight Reloaded media
sheets since activation date
numNormalExtraHWReloadedMedia
606-174 Extra HW Plus
Sheets Used
Settings
February 2013
6-183
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
606-181 Ex HW Gloss
Coat Reload
Sheets

Range = 0 to
Coating Reloaded Sheets
16777215
Used
Total of normal size Extra
Reloaded media sheets since
activation date
numNormalExtraHWGlossReloadedMedia
606-189 Other Sheets

Used
Other Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
Total of Other media (not cap- 16777215
tured above) sheets since activation date
numNormalOtherMedia
606-190 Plain Large

Sheets Used
Plain Large Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
Total of large size Plain media 16777215
numLargePlainMedia
Transparency Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
Total of normal size Transpar- 16777215
ency media sheets since activation date
numNormalTransparencyMedia
606-191 Bond Large

Sheets Used
Bond Large Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
Total of large size Bond media 16777215
numLargeBondMedia
606-183 Pre-Cut Tabs

Sheets Used
Pre-Cut Tabs Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
16777215
Total of normal size Pre-Cut
Tabs media sheets since activation date
numNormalPreCutTabMedia
606-192 LetterHead Large LetterHead Large Sheets

Range = 0 to
Sheets Used
Used
16777215
Total of large size Leterhead
date
numLargeLetterHeadMedia
Labels Sheets Used

Range = 0 to
Total of normal size Labels
16777215
date
numNormalLabelMedia
606-193 Pre-Printed
Large Sheets
Used
Pre-Printed Large Sheets

Range = 0 to
Used
16777215
Total of large size Pre-Printed
date
numLargePrePrintedMedia
606-184 Labels Sheets

Used
606-185 Heavyweight
Labels Sheets
Used
Heavyweight Labels Sheets

UsedTotal of normal size
Heavyweight Labels media
sheets since activation datenumNormalHWLabelMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-194 Heavyweight
Large Sheets
Used
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-186 Recycled Sheets Recycled Sheets Used Total of Range = 0 to

Used
normal size Recycled media
16777215
sheets since activation datenumNormalRecycledMedia
Heavyweight Large Sheets

Used
Total of large size Heavyweight media sheets since
activation date
numLargeHWMedia
606-195 Extra Heavyweight Large

Sheets
606-187 Hole Punched

Sheets Used
Extra Heavyweight Large

Range = 0 to
Sheets Used Total of large
16777215
size Extra Heavyweight media
sheets since activation datenumLargeExtraHWMedia
606-196 Ex HW Reloaded Extra Heavyweight Reloaded Range = 0 to

Large Sheets
Large Sheets Used Total of
16777215
Used
large size Extra Heavyweight
activation datenumLargeExtraHWReloadedMedia
606-182 Transparency
Sheets Used
606-188 Custom Paper

Type Sheets
Used
Hole Punched Sheets Used

Total of normal size Hole
Punched media sheets since
activation date
numNormalHolePunchMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215
Custom Paper Type Sheets

Used
Total of normal size Custom
Paper media sheets since
activation date
numNormalCustomMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-184
Settings
Default

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
606-197 Ex HW Plus
Large Sheets
Used
Extra Heavyweight Plus Large Range = 0 to

Sheets Used
16777215
Total of large size Extra
Heavyweight Plus media
numLargeExtraHWPlusMedia
606-203 Ex HW Gloss
Large Sheets
606-198 Ex HW Plus
Reloaded Large
Sheets

Range = 0 to
Reloaded Large Sheets Used 16777215
Heavyweight Plus Reloaded
date
numLargeExtraHWPlusReloadedMedia

Range = 0 to
Coating Large Sheets Used
16777215
date
numLargeExtraHWGlossMedia
606-204 Ex HW Gloss
Reload Large
Sheets

Large Sheets
Used
Gloss Coating Large Sheets

Range = 0 to
Used
16777215
Total of large size Gloss Coating media sheets since activation date
numLargeGlossMedia

Range = 0 to
Coating Reloaded Large
16777215
Sheets Used
activation date
numLargeExtraHWGlossReloadedMedia
606-205 Recycled Large

Sheets Used
606-200 Gloss Reloaded

Large Sheets

Range = 0 to
Large Sheets Used
16777215
Total of large size Gloss Coating Reloaded media sheets
numLargeGlossReloadedMedia
Recycled Large Sheets Used Range = 0 to

Total of large size Recycled
16777215
datenumLargeRecycledMedia
606-206 Hole Punched

Large Sheets
Used
Hole Punched Large Sheets

Used
Total of large size Hole
punched media sheets since
activation date
numLargeHolePunchMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-201 HW Gloss Large

Sheets Used

Large Sheets Used
Total of large size Heavyweight Gloss Coating media
numLargeHWGlossMedia
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-207 Other Paper Type Other Paper Type Large

Range = 0 to
Large Sheets
Sheets Used
16777215
Total of large size Other media
(not captured above) sheets
numLargeOtherMedia
606-202 HW Gloss
Reload Large
Sheets

Range = 0 to
Reloaded Large Sheets Used 16777215
Total of large size Heavyweight Gloss Coating
activation date
numLargeHWGlossReloadedMedia
606-208 Letter Sheets

Used
Letter (8.5 x 11) Sheets Used

Total of 8.5x11 inch sheets
numLetterSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-209 Tabloid Sheets

Used
Tabloid (11 x 17) Sheets Used Range = 0 to

16777215
Total of 11x17 inch sheets
numTabloidSheets
606-210 Legal Sheets

Used
Legal (8.5 x 14) Sheets Used

Total of 8.5 x 14 inch sheets
numLegalSheets
Settings
February 2013
6-185
Settings
Range = 0 to
16777215
Default
dC131

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-222 Postcards Used
Postcards Used
Range = 0 to
Total of Postcard sheets since 16777215
activation date.
numPostcardSheets
606-223 Tabbed Media

Sheets Used
Tabbed Media Sheets Used

Total of Tabbed sheets since
activation date
numTabbedSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-212 Executive Sheet- Executive (7.25 x 10.5) Sheets Range = 0 to

Used
16777215
sUsed
Total of 7.25 x 10.5 inch
numExecutiveSheets
606-224 Envelopes Used
606-213 8 x 10 Sheets
Used
Envelopes Used
Range = 0 to
Total of Envelope sheets since 16777215
activation date
numEnvelopeSheets
606-225 Custom Size

Sheets Used
Custom Size Sheets Used

Total of Custom Size sheets
numCustomSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-226 Other Size

Sheets Used
Other Size Sheets Used

Total of Other Size sheets
numOtherSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-227 Number of Jobs

of 1 page
Number of Jobs of 1 page

Range = 0 to
since activation
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 1 sheet since activation
numPagesPerJobCounters[0]

of 2 - 4 pages
Number of Jobs of 2 - 4 pages Range = 0 to

since activation
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 2 - 4 sheets since activation

of 5 - 9 pages
Number of Jobs of 5 - 9 pages Range = 0 to

since activation
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 5 - 9 sheets since activation

of 10 - 19 pages
Number of Jobs of 10 - 19
Range = 0 to
pages since activation
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 10 - 19 sheets since
activation
606-211 Statement Sheets Statement (5.5 x 8.5) Sheets

Used
Used
Total of 5.5 x 8.5 inch sheets
numStatementSheets
8 x 10 inch Sheets Used

Total of 8 x 10 inch sheets
num8x10Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215

num12x18Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215

Total of 12x19 inch sheets
num12x19Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-216 13 x 19 Sheets
Used

num12x19Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-217 A4 Sheets Used
A4 Sheets Used
Total of A4 sheets since activation date
numA4Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
A3 Sheets Used
numA3Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-219 SRA3 Sheets

Used
SRA3 Sheets Used

Total of SRA3 sheets since
activation date
numSRA3Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
A5 Sheets Used
numA5Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
A6 Sheets Used
numA6Sheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-214 12 x 18 Sheets
Used
606-215 12 x 19 Sheets
Used
dC131
February 2013
6-186
Settings
Default

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description

of 20 - 29 pages
Range = 0 to
16777215
activation

of 5 - 9 sets
Number of Jobs of 5 - 9 sets Range = 0 to

since activation
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 5 - 9 sets since activation

of 30 - 49 pages
Range = 0 to
16777215
activation

of 10 - 19 sets

since activation
16777215
numSetsPerJobCounters[3]

of 50 - 74 pages
Range = 0 to
16777215
activation

of 20 - 29 sets

since activation
16777215

of 75 - 99 pages
Range = 0 to
16777215
activation

of 30 - 49 sets

since activation
16777215
606-235 Number of Jobs Number of Jobs of 100 - 249 Range = 0 to

(100 - 249 pages) pages since activation
16777215
activation

of 50 - 74 sets

since activation Total Number 16777215
of Jobs Consisting of 50 - 74
sets since activationnumSetsPerJobCounters[6]
Number of Jobs of 250+

Range = 0 to
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 250 plus sheets since
activation

of 75 - 99 sets

since activation
16777215

of 250+ pages
Number of Jobs of 1 set Total Range = 0 to

Number of Jobs Consisting of 16777215
1 Set since activation

of 2 - 4 sets
Number of Jobs of 2 - 4 sets

Range = 0 to
since activation
16777215
606-245 Number of Jobs Number of Jobs of 100 - 249 Range = 0 to

of 100 - 249 sets sets since activation
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 100 - 249 sets since
activation

of 1 set

of 250+ sets
Settings
February 2013
6-187
Settings
Number of Jobs of 250+ sets Range = 0 to

since activation
16777215
Total Number of Jobs Consisting of 250 plus sets since activation
Default
dC131

NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID NVM Name
NVM Description
606-247 All sheets fed

from Tray #5
All sheets fed from Tray #5

Range = 0 to
16777215
Total number of Sheets Fed
from Tray 5 - Read Only Accumulated Value
numTray5Sheets
606-255 Level 1 Impressions
Level 1 Impressions This

Range = 0 to
counter supports tiered
16777215
billingnumTieredBillingLevel1I
mpressions

Range = 0 to
16777215
numTray6Sheets

Range = 0 to
16777215
mpressions

from Tray #6

Range = 0 to
16777215
numTray7Sheets

Range = 0 to
16777215
mpressions

of 2 pages
All sheets fed from Tray

Range = 0 to
#8Total number of Sheets Fed 16777215
from Tray 8 - Read Only Accumulated
ValuenumTray8Sheets
Number of Jobs of 2 pages

Range = 0 to
of Jobs Consisting of 2 sheets
since activationnumPagesPerJobCounters[10]

of 3 pages
606-251 Color Maintenance Impressions
Color Maintenance ImpresRange = 0 to

16777215
sions. The total number of
color impressions that were
made while the machine was
in service mode. For Jupiter
this includes amy MUD pages
numColorMaintenanceImpressions

Range = 0 to
since activationTotal Number 16777215

of 4 pages

Range = 0 to
606-252 Black Maintenance Impressions
Black Maintenance ImpresRange = 0 to

sionsThe total number of black 16777215
impressions that were made
while the machine was in service mode. For Jupiter this
includes amy MUD pages
numBlackMaintenanceImpressions
606-253 Lifetime Sheets
Lifetime Sheets Total sheets

successfully delivered to output destination since activationnumtotalSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-254 Black in Color

Mode Impressions
Black in Color Mode Impres- Range = 0 to

sions Total black impressions 16777215
made in Mixed or Color Mode
since activation

from Tray #7

from Tray #8
dC131
Settings

Settings
Default
606-267 TransFixLFault Counter for 10-537-00:

dRevHomeTime- Transfix Load Reverse Home
Timeout Front
OutFrontFC
Range = 0 to 255
606-268 TransFixLFault Counter for 10-538-00:

dRevHomeTime- Transfix Load Reverse Home
OutRearFC
Timeout Rear
Range = 0 to 255
606-269 Service Plan
February 2013
6-188
Service Plan (Contract) - Col- Range = 0 to 5

orQube Family 0 = XE/NA Sold, 1 = Default
(has been set by SIM), 2 = Not
used, 3 = Metered, 4 = XE
Page Pack, 5 = DMO sold.

NVM ID
NVM Name
606-270
BW & Color Level This NVM location is increRange = 0 to

1 Impressions
16777215
mented when ever the calcuNot displayed
lated % area coverage for the
impression is less than or equal
to the 2 Tier Billing Threshold
value
606-271
Color Level 2
Impressions
Not displayed
Color Level 2
Impression_T2This counter
supports 2 tier billing
Range = 0 to
16777215
606-272
TB Configuration
Billing Configuration. This

counter supports tier billing
0 = BC traditional
1 = BC 2 tier
2 = BC 3 tier
Range = 0 to 2
606-273
3TB Val 1
Not displayed
3 Tier Billing Threshold 1. This Range = 0 to 3,000 9

NVM supports the Threshold
value between Level 1 and 2 for
the 3 tier billing counters.
606-274
NVM Description
Settings
Default
3TB Val 2
Not displayed
3 Tier Billing Threshold 2. This Range = 0 to 3,000 68

NVM supports the threshold
606-275
2TB Val 1
Not displayed
2 Tier Billing Threshold. This

Range = 0 to 3,000 9
NVM supports the Threshold
606-276
Not displayed
Paper Trays Last 30 Jams NVM Range = 0 to 0

allocated to maintain this Log
606-277
Not displayed
Printhead 1 Installation Time

and Date NVM allocated to
maintain this Log
Range = 0 to 0
606-278
Not displayed

maintain this Log
Range = 0 to 0
606-279
Not displayed

maintain this Log
Range = 0 to 0
606-280
Not displayed

maintain this Log
Range = 0 to 0
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
606-283
Not displayed
Printhead 3 Clean Log NVM

Range = 0 to 0
606-284
Not displayed

Range = 0 to 0
606-285
Not displayed
Missing Jet Printhead 1 Impres- Range = 0 to 0

sion Number Log NVM allocated to maintain this Log
606-286
Not displayed

606-287
Not displayed

606-288
Not displayed

606-289
Not displayed
Chronic Jet Date Log Head

Range = 0 to 0
1NVM allocated to maintain this
Log
606-290
Not displayed

Range = 0 to 0
Log
606-291
Not displayed

Range = 0 to 0
Log
606-292
Not displayed

Range = 0 to 0
Log
606-293
Printhead 1
Chronic Jet Flag
Chronic Jet Flag Head 1NVM

Range = 0 to 1
606-294
Printhead 2
Chronic Jet Flag

Range = 0 to 1
606-295
Printhead 3
Chronic Jet Flag

Range = 0 to 1
606-296
Printhead 4
Chronic Jet Flag

Range = 0 to 1
606-298
24VFailFC
Fault Counter for 1-540-00: 24V Number of faults

Fail
Range = 0 to 255
606-299
50VFailFC
Fault Counter for 1-542: 50V

Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-281
Not displayed

Range = 0 to 0
606-300
24VTurnOnFailFC Fault Counter for 1-544: 24V

TurnOn Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-282
Not displayed

Range = 0 to 0
606-301
50VTurnOnFailFC Fault Counter for 1-546: 50V

TurnOn Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
February 2013
6-189
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
606-302
TransfixCalNvramResetFC

Transfix Calibration NVRAM
Reset
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-322
Head4FieldDataC Fault Counter for 91-617: Head Range = 0 to 255

orruptFC
#4 Head Field Data Corrupt
606-323
MPS5TooLongFC Fault Counter for 82-157: MP

Sensor 5 Too Long
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IODScanProcess- Fault Counter for 91-630: IOD

Scan process failed
FailedFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-303
606-324
MPS5TooShortFC Fault Counter for 82-158: MP

Sensor 5 Too Short
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IODDarkAdjustfailedFC
Fault Counter for 91-631: IOD

Dark Adjust failed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-304
606-325
MpMp2StallBridge Fault Counter for 82-159: MP

dSheetZone1AFC MP2 Stall Bridged Sheet Zone
1A
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IODDegradedMo- Fault Counter for 91-636: IOD

in Degraded Mode
deFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-305
606-326
IODYRunoutNvramResetFC
Fault Counter for 91-637: IOD Y Number of faults

Runout NVRAM Reset
Range = 0 to 255
606-306
MPMP2StallBridg Fault Counter for 82-160: MP

edSheetZone2FC MP2 Stall Bridged Sheet Zone
2
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-327
IODChronicJetsDetectedFC

Chronic Jets Detected
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-328
NipESolOverCurrFC
Fault Counter for 82-509: Nip E Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Sol Over Curr
IODHead1RollNot Fault Counter for 91-701: IOD

ConvergingFC
Head 1 roll: not converging
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-307
606-329
ScanHWFailedFC Fault Counter for 89-534: Scan Number of faults

HW failed
Range = 0 to 255
IODHead1RollPos Fault Counter for 91-702: IOD

itionLimitFC
Head 1 roll: position limit
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-308
606-330
RegCorrParFault Counter for 89-555: Reg- Number of faults

mOutOfRangeFC istration correction parm out of Range = 0 to 255
range
IODHead1XNotCo Fault Counter for 91-703: IOD

nvergingFC
Head 1 X: not converging
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-309
606-331
IODHead1XPositi Fault Counter for 91-704: IOD

onLimitFC
Head 1 X: position limit
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-311
MediaRegParmResetFC
Fault Counter for 89-561: Media Number of faults

Registration Parm Reset,
Range = 0 to 255
RALPH Calibration Needed
606-332
IODHead1YNotCo Fault Counter for 91-705: IOD

nvergingFC
Head 1 Y: not converging
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-312
MuMotorShortedFC
Fault Counter for 91-605: MU

Motor Shorted
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-333
IODHead1YPositi Fault Counter for 91-706: IOD

onLimitFC
Head 1 Y: position limit
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-313
HeadtoDrumCon- Fault Counter for 91-607: Head Number of faults

to drum contact
tactFC
Range = 0 to 255
606-334

ConvergingFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-314
HeadtoDrumMea- Fault Counter for 91-608: Head Number of faults

to drum measurement is outsOutsideTolerRange = 0 to 255
anceFC
side tolerance
606-335

itionLimitFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-336
Head1WaveAmp
Cal ErrFC
Fault Counter for 91-610: Head Number of faults

1 Wave Amp Calibration Error Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-315

nvergingFC
606-337
Head2WaveAmpC Fault Counter for 91-611: Head Number of faults

alErrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-316

onLimitFC
606-338

alErrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-317

nvergingFC
606-339

alErrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-318

onLimitFC
606-340
Head1FieldDataC Fault Counter for 91-614: Head Number of faults

orruptFC
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-319
IODHead3RrollNo Fault Counter for 91-713: IOD

tConvergingFC
606-341

Range = 0 to 255
orruptFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-320

itionLimitFC
606-342

orruptFC
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-321

ConvergingFC
606-343

itionLimitFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131
February 2013
6-190
NVM Description
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
606-344

nvergingFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-367
InkLoadMotorOverCurrFC
Fault Counter for 93-891: Ink

Load Motor Over Current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-345

onLimitFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-368
InkSkuSelDriverOverCurrFC
Fault Counter for 93-892: Ink

SKU Sel Driver Over Current
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-346

nvergingFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-373
BlackMeltResOverFillFailFC
Fault Counter for 93-901: black Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
melt reservoir over fill failure
606-347

onLimitFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-374
606-348
IODCalFC

calibration
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MagentaMeltRes- Fault Counter for 93-902:

Number of faults
magenta melt reservoir over fill Range = 0 to 255
OverFillFailFC
failure
606-375
IODCal2DFC

calibration 2D
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
CyanMeltResOverFillFailFC
Fault Counter for 93-903: cyan

melt reservoir over fill failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-349
606-376
IODTargetFC

target
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
YellowMeltResOverFillFailFC
Fault Counter for 93-904: yellow melt reservoir over fill failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-351
606-352
IODTargetMissingFC

target: missing
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-377
CleanUnitResPressLowFC
Fault Counter 94-504: Cleaning Unit Res Press Low
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-353
IODTargetCorrupt- Fault Counter for 91-727: IOD

edFC
target: corrupted
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-378
CleanUnitResPressHighFC
Fault Counter 94-505: Cleaning Unit Res Press High
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-354
IODTargetMissingOrCorruptedFC

target: missing or corrupted
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-379
CleanUnitSynFault Counter 94-574: CleanchAccessErrorFC ing Unit Synch Access Error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-355
IODTargetYPosOutOfRangeFC

target: Y position out of range
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-380
Fault Counter 94-610: CleanNumber of faults

ing Unit Delivery Pump Test Fail Range = 0 to 255
606-356
IODTargetYPosOutofFarRangeFC

target: Y position out of far
range
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
CleanUnitDeliveryPumpTestFailFC
606-381
Fault Counter 94-611: Cleaning Number of faults

Unit Removal Pump Test Fail
Range = 0 to 255
IODHead3YPosLi Fault Counter for 91-732: IOD

mitFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
CleanUnitRemovePumpTestFailFC
606-382
606-359
IODNonStaticScanbarArtifactFC

non-static scanbar artifact
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
CleanUnitValveT- Fault Counter 94-612: CleanestFailFC

ing Unit Valve Test Fail
606-384
606-360
IODStaticScanbarArtifactFC

static scanbar artifact
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-361
EcmPciAccessFailedFC

EcmPciAccessFailed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-362
EcmAdcFailedFC Fault Counter for 92-557:

EcmAdcFailed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-363
EcmPsLineCross- Fault Counter for 92-558:

EcmPsLineCrossFailed
FailedFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-364
EcmCallistoAccessErrorFC
Fault Counter for 92-559: Ecm- Number of faults

CallistoAccessError
Range = 0 to 255
606-365
BlackheartVerMis- Fault Counter for 92-569:

matchFC
BlackheartVerMismatch
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-366
MUAirSolOverCurrFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-358
NVM Description
Fault Counter for 93-890: MU

Air Sol Over Currunt
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ImeUnitFirmwareVerMismatchFC
Fault Counter for 92-560: Mark- Number of faults

ing Unit firmware version mis- Range = 0 to 255
match.
606-385
ImeDeliveryFirmwareVerMismatchFC
Fault Counter for 92-561: Mark- Number of faults

ing Unit Ink Delivery firmware
Range = 0 to 255
version mismatch
606-386
DrumDriverFirmwareVerMismatchFC
Fault Counter for 92-562: Drum Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Driver firmware version mismatch
606-387
PowerSupplyFirm- Fault Counter for 92-563:

Number of faults
Power supply firmware version Range = 0 to 255
wareVerMismatchFC
mismatch
606-388
MediaPathFirmwareVerMismatchFC
February 2013
6-191
Fault Counter for 92-564: Media Number of faults

Path firmware version misRange = 0 to 255
match
dC131

Settings
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
606-389
PaperTrayFirmwareVerMismatchFC
Fault Counter for 92-565: Paper Number of faults

Tray Module firmware version Range = 0 to 255
mismatch.
606-408
Booklet maker
errors
Booklet maker errors
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-409
Registration Jams Registration Jams
PfpFirmwareVerMismatchFC
Fault Counter for 92-566: Paper Number of faults

Feeder Platform firmware ver- Range = 0 to 255
sion mismatch.
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-390
606-410
606-391
CcsSwVerMismatchFC
Fault Counter for 92-567: single Number of faults

board Controller software ver- Range = 0 to 255
sion mismatch
606-392
PrePunchMediaEraseValue
Default sheet edge erase value Number of faults

for pre-punched, pre-cut tab
Range = 0 to 255
stock. Please refer FS 16.020
for more details related to this
feature. Also refer to IDs 2680
and 2681
20
Installed Maint Kit Maintenance Kit Installation

Range = 0 to
Impressions
ImpressionsTotal number of
4294967295
sheets that have been successfully delivered to output destination since the current kit was
installed.
606-411
BW Color 1 Copy
Impressions T3
Black + Color Level 1 Copied

Impressions_T3
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-412
Color 2 Copy
Impressions_T3
Color Level 2 Copied

Impressions_T3
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-413
Color 3 Copy
Impressions T3

Impressions_T3
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-414
BW Color 1 Print
Impressions T3
Black + Color Level 1 Printed

Impressions_T3
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-415
Color 2 Print
Impressions T3
Color 2 Print Impressions T3
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-416
Color 3 Print
Impressions T3
Color Level 3 Printed

Impressions_T3
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-417
BW Color 1 Copy
Impressions T2
Black + Color Level 1 Copied

Impressions_T2
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-418
Color 2 Copied
Impressions T2

Impressions_T2
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-419
BW Color 1 Print
Impressions T2
Black + Color Level 1 Printed

Impressions_T2
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-420
Color 2 Print
Impressions T2
Color Level 2 Printed

Impressions_T2
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-421
0% Total Color
Coverage
Not displayed
0% Total Color Coverage Identi- Range = 0 to

fies the number of impressions 16777215
with 0% Total Coverage for all
CMY colors.numTotalColorPixelCoverage[0]
606-422
0 To 0.2% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed
0>and <=0.2% Total Color Cov- Range = 0 to

erage Identifies the number of 16777215
impressions greater than 0%
and <=.2% Total Coverage for
all CMY colors.numTotalColorPixelCoverage[1]
606-393
Tray 1 Jams
Tray 1 Jams - Usage Counter
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-394
Tray 2 Jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-395
Tray 3 Jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-396
Tray 4 Jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-397
Tray 5 Jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-398
Tray 6 Jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-399
Tray 7 Jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-400
Tray 8 Jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-401
IOT comm faults

counter
IOT comm faults counter
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-402
Finisher comm
faults counter
Finisher comm faults counter
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-403
Protocol comm
faults counter
Protocol comm faults counter
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-404
Paper trays currently installed
Paper trays currently installed
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-405
Output jams
Output jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-406
Compile jams
Compile jams
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-407
Staple errors
Staple errors
Range = 0 to
4294967295
dC131
February 2013
6-192

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
606-423
0.2 To 0.4% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
0.2 > and <=0.4% Total Color

Range = 0 to
Coverage Identifies the num16777215
ber of impressions greater than
.2% and <= .4% Total Coverage
for all CMY colors.numTotalColorPixelCoverage[2]
606-430
4 To 5% Tot Color 4 > and <= 5% Total Color Cov- Range = 0 to

Coverage
Not displayed
and <= 5% Total Coverage for
606-424
0.4 To 0.6% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
0.4> and <=0.6% Total Color

Range = 0 to
606-431
5 To 6% Tot Color 5> and <= 6% Total Color Cov- Range = 0 to

Coverage
Not displayed
606-425
0.6 To 0.8% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
0.6 > and <=0.8% Total Color

Range = 0 to
606-432

Coverage
16777215
erageIdentifies the number of
Not displayed
606-426
0.8 To 1% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed
0.8> and <= 1% Total Color

Range = 0 to
.8% and <= 1% Total Coverage
606-433

Coverage
Not displayed
606-427

Coverage
Not displayed
606-434

Coverage
Not displayed
606-428

Coverage
Not displayed
606-435
9 To 10% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed
9 > and <= 10% Total Color

Range = 0 to
9% and <= 10% Total Coverage
606-429

Coverage
Not displayed
606-436
10 To 11% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
10% and <= 11% Total Coverage for all CMY colors.numTotalColorPixelCoverage[15]
Settings
February 2013
6-193
NVM Description
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
606-437
11 To 12% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-444
18 To 19% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-438
12 To 13% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-445
19 To 20% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
CoverageIdentifies the number 16777215
of impressions greater than
606-439
13 To 14% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-446
20 To 21% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-440
14 To 15% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-447
21 To 22% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-441
15 To 16% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-448
22 To 23% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-442
16 To 17% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-449
23 To 24% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-443
17 To 18% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-450
24 To 25% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-194
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
606-451
25 To 30% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-458
100 To 125% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
100 > and <= 125% Total Color Range = 0 to

606-452
30 To 35% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-459
125 To 150% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed

606-453
35 To 40% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-460
150 To 175% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed

606-454
40 To 45% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-461
175 To 200% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed

606-455
45 To 50% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-462
200 To 225% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
"200 > and <= 225% Total Color Range = 0 to

200% and <= 225% Total Coverage for all CMY colors.numTotalColorPixelCoverage[41]"
606-456
50 To 75% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
606-463
225 To 250% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed

606-457
75 To 100% Tot
Color Coverage
Not displayed

606-464
250 To 275% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed

Settings
February 2013
6-195
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
606-465
275 To 300% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed

606-470
Actual M Pix In
BW Mode Up
606-466
Actual K Pix In
BW Mode Up
Not displayed
Actual Black Pixels MarkedRange = 0 to

Black & White Up (1K) This
4294967295
item conveys the Actual total
number of Black pixels printed
on Black and White impressions for any media size as
reported by the IME Values are
given in K (1000) units.numTotActualBWModeKPixelCountUp
Actual Magenta Pixels Marked- Range = 0 to

4294967295
number of Magenta pixels
printed on Black and White
impressions for any media size
as reported by the IME Values
are given in K (1000)
units.numTotActualBWModeMPixelCountUp
606-471
Actual M Pix In
BW Mode Low

Black & White Low (1K) This
4294967295
number of Black pixels printed
given in K (1000) units.numTotActualBWModeKPixelCountLow

4294967295
units.numTotActualBWModeMPixelCountLow
606-472
Actual Y Pix In
BW Mode Up
Actual Cyan Pixels MarkedRange = 0 to

4294967295
number of Cyan pixels printed
given in K (1000) units.numTotActualBWModeCPixelCountUp
Actual Yellow Pixels MarkedRange = 0 to

4294967295
number of Yellow pixels printed
given in K (1000) units.numTotActualBWModeYPixelCountUp
606-473
Actual Y Pix In
BW Mode Low

4294967295
number of Cyan pixels printed
given in K (1000) units.numTotActualBWModeCPixelCountLow

4294967295
number of Yellow pixels printed
given in K (1000) units.numTotActualBWModeYPixelCountLow
606-474
Actual K Pix In
Color Mode Up

Color Up (1K) This item con4294967295
veys the Actual total number of
Black pixels printed on color
units.numTotActualColorModeKPixelCountUp
606-467
606-468
606-469
Actual K Pix In
BW Mode Low
Actual C Pix In
BW Mode Up
Actual C Pix In
BW Mode Low
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-196
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
606-475
Actual K Pix In
Color Mode Low

Color Low (1K) This item con- 4294967295
Black pixels printed on color
units.numTotActualColorModeKPixelCountLow
606-480
Actual Y Pix In
Color Mode Up

Yellow pixels printed on color
units.numTotActualColorModeYPixelCountUp
606-476
Actual C Pix In
Color Mode Up
Actual Cyan Pixels PrintedRange = 0 to

Cyan pixels printed on color
units.numTotActualColorModeCPixelCountUp
606-481
Actual Y Pix In
Color Mode Low

Yellow pixels printed on color
units.numTotActualColorModeYPixelCountLow
606-477
Actual C Pix In
Color Mode Low

Cyan pixels printed on color
units.numTotActualColorModeCPixelCountLow
606-482
DADHRollFeeds
DADH Feed Roll Number of

feeds
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-483
PPIRollFeeds
PPI Feed Roll Number of feeds Range = 0 to

4294967295
606-484
3TMtray1RollFeed 3TM Tray1 Feed Roll - Number Range = 0 to

s
of feeds
4294967295
606-485

s
of feeds
4294967295

Magenta pixels printed on color
units.numTotActualColorModeMPixelCountUp
606-486

s
of feeds
4294967295
606-487
MSIRollFeeds
MSI Feed Roll nbr of feeds
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-488
InserterRollReplacements
Inserter Feed Roll - Number of

replacements
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-492
DADHRollReplacements
DADH Feed Roll nbr of replace- Range = 1 to

ments
65535
606-493
0
InserterRollReplacements
Inserter Feed Roll - Number of

replacements
Range = 1 to
65535
Actual Magenta Pixels Printed- Range = 0 to

4294967295
units.numTotActualColorModeMPixelCountLow
606-494
3TMtray1RollRepl 3TM Tray1 Feed Roll nbr of

acements
replacements
Range = 1 to
65535
606-495

acements
replacements
Range = 1 to
65535
606-496

acements
feeds
Range = 1 to
65535
606-497
MSIRollReplacements
MSI Feed Roll nbr of replacements
Range = 1 to
65535
606-498
PFPRollReplacements
PFP Feed Roll nbr of replacements
Range = 1 to
65535
606-478
606-479
Actual M Pix In
Color Mode Up
Actual M Pix In
Color Mode Low
Settings
February 2013
6-197
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
606-515
Cleaning Unit Life DMU Life Expectancy

Expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
140000
606-545
606-516
DADHRollLife
DADH Feed Roll Life Expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
150000
Head 1 Field Cor- Fault Counter 91-655: Head

1Head Field Corrections Corrections Corrupt
rupt
606-517
InserterRollLife
Inserter Feed Roll Life Expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
80000
606-518
3TMtray1Life
3TM Tray1 Feed Roll Life

Expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
600000
606-519
3TMtray2Life

Expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
600000
606-520
3TMtray3Life

Expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
600000
606-521
MSIRollLife
MSI Feed Roll Life Expectancy Range = 0 to

4294967295
600000
606-522
PFPRollLife
PFP Feed Roll Life Expectancy Range = 0 to

4294967295
600000
606-526
Not displayed
DADH Feed Roll Install Date
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-527
Not displayed
PPI Feed Roll Life Install Date
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-528
Not displayed
3TM Tray1 Feed Roll Install

Date
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-529
Not displayed

Date
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-530
Not displayed

Date
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-531
Not displayed
MSI Feed Roll Life Install Date
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-532
Not displayed
PFP Feed Roll Life Install Date Range = 0 to

4294967295
606-537
Last Auto Mainte- Last Auto Maintenance Update Range = 0 to

4294967295
nance Update
606-539
InhibitMarkOnTab- Inhibit Mark On Tabs Policy

sPolicy
Range = 0 to 1
606-541
Head 1 Link Broken
Fault Counter 91-660: Head 1

Link Broken
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-542
Head 2 Link Broken

Link Broken
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-543
Head 3 Link Broken

Link Broken
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-544
Head 4 Link Broken

Link Broken
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131
Settings
Default
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-546
Head 2 Field Cor- Fault Counter 91-656: Head 2 Number of faults

rections Corrupt
Head Field Corrections Corrupt Range = 0 to 255
606-547

rections Corrupt
606-548

rections Corrupt
606-549
Head 1 Thermal
Fail

Thermal Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-550
Head 2 Thermal
Fail

Thermal Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-551
Head 3 Thermal
Fail

Thermal Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-552
Head 4 Thermal
Fail

Thermal Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-553
DSP2 overlay
setup timeout
Fault Counter 92-803: DSP2

overlay setup timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-554
DSP2 overlay
cleanup timeout
Fault Counter 92-804: DSP2

overlay cleanup timeout
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-608
Not displayed
MSBLACKRUNLENGTH1This
supports the AIF counter 1
Black Impression Run Length
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-609
Not displayed
MSBLACKRUNLENGTH24This Range = 0 to
supports the AIF counter 2 to 4 4294967295
606-610
Not displayed
MSBLACKRUNLENGTH59This Range = 0 to
supports the AIF counter 5 to 9 4294967295
606-611
Not displayed
MSBLACKRUNLENGTH1019T Range = 0 to
his supports the AIF counter 10 4294967295
to 19 Black Impression Run
Length
606-612
Not displayed
Length
606-613
Not displayed
Length
February 2013
6-198
NVM Description

Settings
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
606-614
Not displayed
Length
606-626
Not displayed
MSCOLORRUNLENGTH10024 Range = 0 to
9This supports the AIF counter 4294967295
100 to 249 Color Impression
Run Length
606-615
Not displayed
Length
606-627
Not displayed
MSCOLORRUNLENGTH1This
supports the AIF counter 250+
Color Impression Run Length
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-689
Not displayed
MSBLACKRUNLENGTH10024 Range = 0 to
9This supports the AIF counter 4294967295
100 to 249 Black Impression
Run Length
Total Standby
Time (hours)
Not displayed
Total Standby Time (hours)Total Range = 0 to

number of hours the machine
16777215
has been in Standby Mode
since activationnumTotalStandbyTimeHours
606-616
606-617
Not displayed
MSBLACKRUNLENGTH250Thi Range = 0 to
s supports the AIF counter
4294967295
250+ Black Impression Run
Length
606-690
0 to 6 Minutes
Standby Time
Not displayed
606-618
Not displayed
MSCOLORRUNLENGTH1This Range = 0 to
supports the AIF counter 1
4294967295
Color Impression Run Length
0 to 6 Minutes Standby TimeTo- Range = 0 to

16777215
tal number of times the
machine has been in Standby
Mode between 0 and 14 minutes.numTotalStandbyTimeHours
606-691
Not displayed
MSCOLORRUNLENGTH24Thi Range = 0 to
s supports the AIF counter 2 to 4294967295
4 Color Impression Run Length
6 to 15 Minutes
Standby Time
Not displayed
606-620
Not displayed
MSCOLORRUNLENGTH59Thi Range = 0 to
s supports the AIF counter 5 to 4294967295
9 Color Impression Run Length
>6 to 15 Minutes Standby Time- Range = 0 to

Total number of times the
16777215
606-619
606-692
Not displayed
MSCOLORRUNLENGTH1019T Range = 0 to
to 19 Color Impression Run
Length
15 to 60 Minutes
Standby Time
Not displayed
606-622
Not displayed
Length
>15 to 60 Minutes Standby

Range = 0 to
TimeTotal number of times the 16777215
606-621
606-693
606-623
Not displayed
Length
60 to 120 Minutes >60 to 120 Minutes Standby

Range = 0 to
Standby Time
TimeTotal number of times the 16777215
Not displayed
Mode between 120 and 299
minutes.numTotalStandbyTimeHours
606-694
120 to 240 Min>120 to 240 Minutes Standby

Range = 0 to
utes Standby Time TimeTotal number of times the 16777215
Not displayed
Mode between 300 and 599
minutes.numTotalStandbyTimeHours
606-695
240+ Minutes
Standby Time
Not displayed
606-624
Not displayed
Length
606-625
Not displayed
Length
February 2013
6-199
Settings
>240 Minutes Standby TimeTo- Range = 0 to

16777215
tal number of times the
Mode for 600 minutes or morenumTotalStandbyTimeHours
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
606-696
Not displayed
All sheets fed from Tray #1Total Range = 0 to

number of Sheets Fed from
16777215
Tray 1 - Read Only Accumulated ValuenumTray5Sheets
606-711
Average AC Cyan. Average Area Coverage for

Int.
Cyan channel for life of
machine. Integer value.
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-712
Not displayed

16777215
Average AC
Magenta. Int.
Average Area Coverage for

Magenta channel for life of
machine. Integer value.
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-697
606-713
Average AC Yellow. Int.

16777215
Average Area Coverage for Yel- Range = 0 to

low channel for life of machine. 4294967295
Integer value.
606-714
Avg AC Black in
Color Int.

Range = 0 to
Black channel in color mode for 4294967295
life of machine. Integer value.

16777215
606-715
Not displayed
Standby Counter Overflow

Tracking Register
Range = 0 to 255
606-716
ImeTfixUnFault Counter 10-512: IME

LoadTimingErrFC Transfix UnLoad timing error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-718
ImeSubmitSheetErrorFC
Fault Counter 92-579: IME CDI Number of faults

Submit sheet Error
Range = 0 to 255
606-719
Not displayed
DMU (Cleaning Unit) Install

Date
606-720
UnusableCleanUnitDetectedFC
Fault Counter 94-622-00: IME- Number of faults

UnusableCleanUnitDetectedFC Range = 0 to 255
606-721
IME24VOLTAFuse Fault Counter 92-805-00:

FailedFC
IME24VOLTAFuseFailedFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-723
IME24VOLTBFus Fault Counter 92-806-00:

eFailedFC
IME24VOLTBFuseFailedFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-724
IMEDiagRouFault Counter 92-807-00: IMEtineNotImplement- DiagRoutineNotImplementedFC

edFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-725
IMEHead1NVRA
MErrorFC

IMEHead1NVRAMErrorFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-726
IMEHead2NVRA
MErrorFC

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-727
IMEHead3NVRA
MErrorFC

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-728
IMEHead4NVRA
MErrorFC

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-698
606-699
Not displayed
Not displayed
Settings
606-700
Total Black
impressions.
Not displayed
Internal Use Only - Total Black

Marked Images
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-701
Total Black in
Color Imp.
Not displayed

Marked Color Images
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-702
Total Cyan
Impressions.
Not displayed
Internal Use Only - Total Cyan

Marked Color Images
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-703
Total Magenta
Impressions.
Not displayed
Internal Use Only - Total

Range = 0 to
Magenta Marked Color Images 4294967295
Total Yellow
Impressions.
Not displayed
Internal Use Only - Total Yellow Range = 0 to

Marked Color Images
4294967295
606-704
NVM Description
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-705
Avg AC Black. FP Internal Use Only - Total Black

Run Mode AC FP
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-706
Avg AC Cyan. FP Internal Use Only - Total Cyan

Not displayed
Color Mode AC FP
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-707
Avg AC Magenta. Internal Use Only - Total

FP
Magenta Color Mode AC FP
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-708
Avg AC Yellow. FP Internal Use Only - Total Yellow Range = 0 to

Not displayed
Color Mode AC FP
4294967295
606-729
IMEHeadNVRAM- Fault Counter 91-811-00: IMESyncErrorFC

HeadNVRAMSyncErrorFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-709
Avg AC Black in
Color FP
Not displayed

Color Mode AC FP
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-730
IMEHead1Adjust
mentExceedsMaxFC

IMEHead1AdjustmentExceeds
MaxFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-710
Average AC
Black. Int.

Range = 0 to
Black channel in black mode for 4294967295
life of machine. Integer value.
606-732
IMEHead2Adjust
mentExceedsMaxFC

MaxFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
dC131
February 2013
6-200
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
606-733
IMEHead3Adjust
mentExceedsMaxFC

MaxFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-753
OilDelivPumpEarl- Fault Counter 94-527-00: Oil

yLifeOverCurrFC Delivery Pump early life over
current
Settings
Default
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-734
IMEHead4Adjust
mentExceedsMaxFC

MaxFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-754
OilRemovPumpEarlyLifeOverCurrFC
Fault Counter 94-531-00: Oil

Number of faults
Removal Pump Early Life Over Range = 0 to 255
Current
606-735
IMEHead1AdjustC Fault Counter 91-816-00:

Number of faults
overageFailedFC IMEHead1AdjustCoverageFaile Range = 0 to 255
dFC
606-755
YAxisCalibrationHalSensorErrorFC
Fault Counter 94-545-00: YAxis Calibration Hal Sensor

Error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-736

Number of faults
dFC
606-756
YAxisCalibraFault Counter 94-549-00: YtionEncodrSenEr- Axis Calibration Encoder SenrorFC

sor Error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-737

Number of faults
dFC
606-757
ATSWithFinishingEnable
606-738
Fault Counter 91- IMEHead4AdjustCoverageFaile Number of faults

819-00:
dFC
Range = 0 to 255
IMEHead4AdjustC
overageFailedFC
606-739
IMETransfixLoad- Fault Counter 10-521-00: IMEFrontPosErrorFC TransfixLoadFrontPosErrorFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Folding job with

0
Tray selected
switches to another
tray when selected
tray runs out of
media
Set via Web UI.
1 = Enabled
Range = 0 to 1
606-740
IMETransfixLoa- Fault Counter 10-522-00: IMEdRearPosErrorFC TransfixLoadRearPosErrorFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-758
IMETransfixUnloadFrontPosErrorFC
Fault Counter 10-523-00: IMETransfixUnloadFrontPosErrorFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-741
IMEHead1LinkErr Fault Counter 91-820-00:

orFC
Head1 link error
606-759

orFC
Head2 link error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-742
IMETransfixUnloa- Fault Counter 10-524-00: IMEdRearPosErrorFC TransfixUnloadRearPosErrorFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-760

orFC
Head3 link error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-761
IMEUnexpecteFault Counter 92-554-00: IMEdACPowerLossFC UnexpectedACPowerLoss
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

orFC
Head4 link error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-743
606-762

Number of faults
IMEMiddleLeftDoorOpenInRun Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IMEMiddleLeftDoorOpenInRunFC
IMEADCInterrupt- Fault Counter 92-541-00: ADC

Interrupt Storm
StormFC
606-763
IMEPSInterruptStormFC
Fault Counter 92-542-00: PS

Interrupt Storm
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-749
IMEUpperLeftDoorOpenInRunFC
Fault Counter 01-506-00: IMEUpperLeftDoorOpenInRun
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-764
IMEMUInterruptStormFC
Fault Counter 92-543-00: MU

Interrupt Storm
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-765
IMEFrontDoorOpenInRunFC
Fault Counter 01-510-00: IMEFrontDoorOpenInRun
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IMEMUIDInterruptStormFC
Fault Counter 92-544-00: MUID Number of faults

Interrupt Storm
Range = 0 to 255
606-750
606-766
YAxisBel RatioEr- Fault Counter 94-547-00: YAxis Belt Ratio Error

rorFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IMEDDInterruptStormFC
Fault Counter 92-545-00: DD

Interrupt Storm
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-751
606-767
CleanUnitPressureSensorOpen
Fault Counter 94-506-00: DMU Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
pressure sensor open
IMEMPInterruptStormFC
Fault Counter 92-546-00: MP

Interrupt Storm
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-752
606-768
IMEIMDInterruptStormFC
Fault Counter 92-547-00: IMD

Interrupt Storm
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-748
February 2013
6-201
NVM Description
Folding job with Tray selected

switches to another tray when
selected tray runs out of
media:When the default is off a
minority of users may have to
reload the tray they asked for
more often.When the default is
on some jobs may come out on
media they explicitly did not
select.
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
606-769
IMETTMInterrupt- Fault Counter 92-548-00: TTM

Interrupt Storm
StormFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-790
UpperJLBaffleUsage
Upper JL Baffle - Number of

impressions
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-770
IMEPFPInterrupt- Fault Counter 92-549-00: PFP

Interrupt Storm
StormFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-791
DrumFanShroudCleanings
Drum Fan Shroud - Number of

cleanings
Range = 1 to
65535
606-771
IMECISInterruptStormFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-792
TransfixStripperCleanings
Transfix Stripper - Number of

cleanings
Range = 1 to
65535
606-772
IMESBCInterrupt- Fault Counter 92-552-00: SBC

Interrupt Storm
StormFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-793
UpperJLBaffleCleanings
Upper JL Baffle - Number of

cleanings
Range = 1 to
65535
606-773
IMECalScanDetectedFPExceptionFC
Fault Counter 89-567-00: Calibration scan detected floating

point exception
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-794
DrumFanShroudMaintThreshold
Drum Fan Shroud - Maintenance threshold
Range = 1 to
4294967295
500000
606-795
PQM Insufficient
Ink
Fault Counter 91-824-00: PQM Number of faults

Insufficient Ink
Range = 0 to 255
TransfixStripperMaintThreshold
Transfix Stripper - Maintenance Range = 1 to

threshold
4294967295
125000
606-774
606-796
PQM Insufficient
Jets

Insufficient Jets
Range = 0 to 255
UpperJLBaffleMaintThreshold
Upper JL Baffle - Maintenance

threshold
400000
606-775
606-797
Not displayed
PQM Insufficient
Jets

Range = 0 to 255
Insufficient Jets
Drum Fan Shroud Last Cleaned Range = 1 to

Date
4294967295
606-776
606-798
Not displayed
PQM Align
Needed

Align Needed
Range = 0 to 255
Transfix Stripper Last Cleaned

Date
Range = 1 to
4294967295
606-777
606-799
Not displayed
PQM Y Dot Position Needed

Y Dot Position Needed
Range = 0 to 255
Upper JL Baffle Last Cleaned

Date
Range = 1 to
4294967295
606-778
606-801
PQM Drum
Runout Needed

Range = 0 to 255
Drum Runout Needed
PapPusherSwitchFC
Fault Counter 12-444: Paper

Pusher Switch Fault
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-779
606-802
PQM Uniformity
Needed

Uniformity Needed
Range = 0 to 255
BlackInkLoaderJammedFC
Fault Counter 93-501-00: Black Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
Ink loader Jammed
606-780
606-803
606-781
PQM Uniformity
Reset Needed

Uniformity Reset Needed
Range = 0 to 255
MagentaInkLoad- Fault Counter 93-506-00:

Magenta Ink loader Jammed
erJammedFC
606-804
606-782
PQM Empty
Waste Tray

Range = 0 to 255
Empty Waste Tray
606-783
PQM Cleaning
Pages Needed

Cleaning Pages Needed
Range = 0 to 255
606-784
PQM Tool Not

Usable

Tool Not Usable
Range = 0 to 255
606-785
PQM Tool Manually Disabled

Range = 0 to 255
Tool Manually Disabled
606-786
PQM: System
Busy
Fault Counter 91-836-00: PQM- Number of faults

00: System Busy
Range = 0 to 255
606-787
FS23.201 Table
Version
Default is the version number of Range = 0 to

the Excel table used to create 65535
the NVM
1249
606-788
DrumFanShroudUsage
Drum Fan Shroud - Number of

impressions
Range = 0 to
4294967295
606-789
TransfixStripperU- Transfix Stripper - Number of

impressions
sage
Range = 0 to
4294967295
Fault Counter 92-551-00: CIS

Interrupt Storm
dC131
Range = 1 to
4294967295
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
CyanInkLoaderJammedFC
Fault Counter 93-511-00: Cyan Number of faults

Ink loader Jammed
Range = 0 to 255
606-805
YellowInkLoaderJammedFC
Fault Counter 93-516-00: Yellow Ink loader Jammed
606-806
Default Staple
Position
Default Staple position (HVF

Range = 1 to 2
only)(Staple positioning: trades
best position verses best productivity) Default set to best
productivity to give best BLI test
result. Customer can then
select which mode best suites
them.
606-807
Head1NvramJetM Fault Counter 91-842-00: Head Number of faults

askReadErrorFC #1 Nvram jet mask section read Range = 0 to 255
or decode error
606-808

or decode error
February 2013
6-202
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
606-809

or decode error
606-835
B5 Sheets Used
Not displayed
B5 Sheets used total of B5

numB5Sheets
Range = 0 to ###
606-810

or decode error
606-836
JIS B4 Sheets
Used
Not displayed
JIS B4 Sheets used total of JIS Range = 0 to ###

B4 sheets since activation date
numJISB4Sheets
606-811
MP16TooLongAut Fault Counter 82-162: MP16

oPurgeFC
Too Long Auto Purge
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
606-837
MP16TooShortAut Fault Counter 82-163: MP16

oPurgeHC
Too Short Auto Purge
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
JIS B5 Sheets used total of JIS Range = 0 to ###

B5 sheets since activation date
numJISB5Sheets
606-812
JIS B5 Sheets
Used
Not displayed
606-852
MP5TooLongAuto Fault Counter 82-164: MP5 Too Number of faults

PurgeFC
Long Auto Purge
Range = 0 to 255
1.0 to 1.2% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
606-814
MP5TooShortAuto Fault Counter 82-165: MP5 Too Number of faults

PurgeFC
Short Auto Purge
Range = 0 to 255
606-823
Not displayed
Print Standard (300x500) mode Range = 0 to 4000 588

colour coverage scaler
1.0 > and < =1.2 Total color

Range = 0 to ###
coverage identifies the number
of impressions greater than 1.0
>and < =1.2 total coverage for
all CMY colors.
numTotalColorPixelCoverage(45)
606-813
606-824
Not displayed
Print Fast (225x450) mode

Range = 0 to 4000 397
606-853
1.2 to 1.4% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
606-825
Not displayed
Print Enhanced (450x567)

mode colour coverage scaler
Range = 0 to 4000 1000
606-826
Not displayed
Print Hi Res mode (600x600)

Range = 0 to 4000 1339

Range = 0 to ###
all CMY colors.
606-827
Not displayed
Print Transparency mode

(525x400) colour coverage
scaler
Range = 0 to 4000 823
606-854
1.4 to 1.6% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
606-828
Not displayed
Copy Photo mode (600x600)

Range = 0 to 4000 1339
606-829
Not displayed
Copy Default mode (450x567)

Range = 0 to 4000 1000

Range = 0 to ###
all CMY colors.
606-830
Not displayed
Copy Transparency mode

(525x400) colour coverage
scaler
Range = 0 to 4000 823
606-855
1.6 to 1.8% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
606-831
Head Not Warming Up
Fault counter 91-804: Head not Number of faults

warming up
Range = 0 to 255
606-832
8.5x13 Sheets
Used
Not displayed
8.5 x 13 Sheets used total of

Range = 0 to ###
8.5 x 13 sheets since activation
date
num85x13Sheets

Range = 0 to ###
all CMY colors.
606-856
1.8 to 2.0% Tot

Color Coverage
Not displayed
606-833
9x11 Sheets Used 9 x 11 Sheets used total of 9 x Range = 0 to ###

11 sheets since activation date
Not displayed
num9x11Sheets
606-834
B4 Sheets Used
Not displayed

Range = 0 to ###
all CMY colors.
NVM Description
B4 Sheets used total of B4

numB4Sheets
Settings
Range = 0 to ###
February 2013
6-203
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
606-857
BlackNeutral(1)Countdown
Number of Black neutral ink

sticks allowed (1)
Limits neutral
4
usage to 5 units.
Starts at the high
limit (4) and counts
down with each
replacement. At
value of 0, no more
neutral replacements allowed.
Range = 0 to 4
606-861
CyanNeutralCountdown
Number of Cyan neutral ink

sticks allowed
Limits neutral
4
usage to 5 units.
Starts at the high
down with each
replacement. At
value of 0, no more
Range = 0 to 4
606-858
BlackNeutral(2)Countdown
Number of Black neutral ink

sticks allowed (2)
Limits neutral
4
usage to 5 units.
Starts at the high
down with each
replacement. At
value of 0, no more
Range = 0 to 4
606-889
Not displayed
Print toner saver mode colour

coverage scaler
Range = 0 to ###
606-890
Machine GUID for Entry to store the machine

Byte array of 37
Nomad Server
GUID assigned by the Nomad- characters includNot displayed
Server after cinnecting
ing a terminating
Null.
Range = 0 to 0
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
607-001
Not displayed
Support for Job recovery-Fax

image number 1
Range = 0 to 0
607-002
Not displayed
Support for Job recovery-Fax

image number 2
Range = 0 to 0
606-859
606-860
YellowNeutralCountdown
MagentaNeutralCountdown
Number of Yellow neutral ink

sticks allowed
Limits neutral
4
usage to 5 units.
Starts at the high
down with each
replacement. At
value of 0, no more
Range = 0 to 4
Number of Magenta neutral ink Limits neutral

4
sticks allowed
usage to 5 units.
Starts at the high
down with each
replacement. At
value of 0, no more
Range = 0 to 4
dC131
Default
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
608-001
BoardlinkMUDLinkBrokenFC

Number of faults
BOARDLINKHEAD1SLOWLIN Range = 0 to 255
KBROKEN
608-002
BoardlinkPSLink- Fault Counter 99-053-00:

Number of faults
BOARDLINKHEAD1SLOWLIN Range = 0 to 255
BrokenFC
KBROKEN
608-003
BoardlinkHead1Sl Fault Counter 99-055-00:

Number of faults
owLinkBrokenFC BOARDLINKHEAD1SLOWLIN Range = 0 to 255
KBROKEN
608-004

Number of faults
KBROKEN
608-005

Number of faults
KBROKEN
February 2013
6-204
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
608-006

Number of faults
KBROKEN
608-022
BoardlinkMPDSafemodeFC

Number of faults
BOARDLINKMPDSAFEMODE Range = 0 to 255
608-023
BoardlinkHead1F Fault Counter 99-059-00:

astLinkBadFC
BOARDLINKHEAD1FASTLIN
KBAD
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorHBridgeen- Fault Counter 99-121-00:

ableMPDOpenFC MOTORHBRIDGEENABLEMPDOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-007
608-024

astLinkBadFC
KBAD
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

ableMPDShortFC MOTORHBRIDGEENABLEMPDSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-008
608-025

astLinkBadFC
KBAD
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SolenoidNipCOClogicFC

SOLENOIDNIPCOCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-009
608-026
SolenoidNipDOClogicFC

SOLENOIDNIPDOCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-010

astLinkBadFC
KBAD
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-027
SolenoidNipEOClogicFC

SOLENOIDNIPEOCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-028
BoardlinkWavAmpCabledetectFailFC

BOARDLINKWAVEAMPCABLEDETECTFAILURE
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SolenoidDuplexOClogicFC

SOLENOIDDUPLEXOCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-011
608-029
BoardlinkTTMLinkBrokenFC

BOARDLINKTTMLINKBROKEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SolenoidCARDiverterOClogicFC

Number of faults
SOLENOIDCARDIVERTERO- Range = 0 to 255
CLOGIC
608-012
608-030
BoardlinkPFPLinkBrokenFC

BOARDLINKPFPLINKBROKEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
BoardlinkMUDSafemodeFC

Number of faults
BOARDLINKMUDSAFEMODE Range = 0 to 255
608-013
608-031
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-014
BoardlinkDDBSafemodeFC

Number of faults
BOARDLINKDDBSAFEMODE Range = 0 to 255

ableMUDOpenFC MOTORHBRIDGEENABLEMUDOPEN
608-032

Number of faults
ableDDBOpenFC MOTORHBRIDGEENABLED- Range = 0 to 255
DBOPEN

ableMUDShortFC MOTORHBRIDGEENABLEMUDSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-015
608-033

Number of faults
ableDDBShortFC MOTORHBRIDGEENABLED- Range = 0 to 255
DBSHORT
SolenoidInkValve- Fault Counter 99-150-00:

sOClogicFC
SOLENOIDINKDELIVERYVALVESOCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-016
608-034
SolenoidCleaFault Counter 99-110-00:

nUnitValveOClog- SOLENOID Cleaning Unit
VALVEOCLOGIC
icFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SolenoidLPAValveOClogicFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-017
608-035
SolenoidStripper- Fault Counter 99-111-00:

OClogicFC
SOLENOIDSTRIPPEROCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PumpInkDelivery- Fault Counter 99-153-00:

PUMPINKDELIVERYAIROAirOClogicFC
CLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-018
608-036
CleanUnitPumpDelOClogicFC

PUMP Cleaning Unit DELIVERYOCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
BoardlinkTTMSafemodeFC

Number of faults
BOARDLINKTTMSAFEMODE Range = 0 to 255
608-019
608-037
BoardlinkPFPSafemodeFC

Number of faults
BOARDLINKPFPSAFEMODE Range = 0 to 255
608-020
CleanUnitPumpReturnOClogicFC

PUMP Cleaning Unit
RETURNOCLOGIC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-038
Power50Vstartup Fault Counter 99-200-00:

Number of faults
shutdownFC
POWER50VSTARTUPSHUTD Range = 0 to 255
OWN
608-021
FanRearEnclosureOClogicFC
Fault Counter 99-114-00: FAN- Number of faults

REARENCLOSUREOCLOGIC Range = 0 to 255
NVM Description
Settings
February 2013
6-205

SOLENOIDLPAVALVEOCLOGIC
Settings
Default
0
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
608-039
Power50Vstartup Fault Counter 99-201-00:

Number of faults
enableopenFC
POWER50VSTARTUPENABL Range = 0 to 255
EOPEN
608-057
FuseMPD24VCO Fault Counter 99-285-00:

penFC
FUSEMPD24VCOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-058
Power24VBaseA Fault Counter 99-212-00:

boveMaxFC
POWER24VBASEABOVEMA
X
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
FuseMPD50VAO Fault Counter 99-286-00:

penFC
FUSEMPD50VAOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-040
608-059
FuseMPD50VBO Fault Counter 99-287-00:

penFC
FUSEMPD50VBOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-041
Power50VBaseA Fault Counter 99-216-00:

boveMaxFC
POWER50VBASEABOVEMA
X
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-060
FuseMPD50VCO Fault Counter 99-288-00:

penFC
FUSEMPD50VCOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-061
PowerDDBADC5. Fault Counter 99-240-00:

Number of faults
0VOff-missingFC POWERDDBADC5VOFFMISS Range = 0 to 255
ING
FuseMUD3.3VOp Fault Counter 99-290-00:

enFC
FUSEMUD33VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-042
608-062
FuseMUD12VOp Fault Counter 99-291-00:

enFC
FUSEMUD12VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-043
PowerDDBADC+12VOffmissingFC

POWERDDBADCPLUS12VO
FFMISSING
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-063

enFC
FUSEMUD24VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-044
PowerDDBADC12VOff-missingFC

POWERDDBADCMINUS12V
OFFMISSING
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-064

enFC
FUSEMUD50VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-065

Number of faults
POWERDDBADC50VOFFMIS Range = 0 to 255
SING
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PowerDDBADC+50VOffmissingFC
ConnectorFault Counter 99-300-00:

MUotherOpenFC CONNECTORMUOTHEROPEN
608-066
0
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PowerIMECADC- Fault Counter 99-244-00:

Number of faults
50VOff-missPOWERIMECADCMINUS50V Range = 0 to 255
ingFC
OFFMISSING
ConnectorMUD- Fault Counter 99-301-00:

toLwrcarrOpenFC CONNECTORMUDTOLWRCARROPEN
608-067
FuseDDB5VOpen Fault Counter 99-270-00:

FC
FUSEDDB5VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-047
ConnectorMUD- Fault Counter 99-302-00:

toUprcarrOpenFC CONNECTORMUDTOUPRCARROPEN
608-048
FuseDDB12VOpe Fault Counter 99-271-00:

nFC
FUSEDDB12VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-068
ConnectorMUDtoHMHWTLOpenFC

CONNECTORMUDTOHMHWTLOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-049
FuseDDB24VAO
penFC

FUSEDDB24VAOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-069
FuseDDB24VBO Fault Counter 99-273-00:

penFC
FUSEDDB24VBOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

CONNECTORMUDTOIDSOLENOIDSOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-050
ConnectorMUDtoIDsolenoidsOpenFC
608-070
FuseDDB50VOpe Fault Counter 99-274-00:

nFC
FUSEDDB50VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ConnectorMUDtoInkResLevSenOpenFC

CONNECTORMUDTOINKRESLEVELSENSEOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-051
608-052
FuseMPD3.3VOp Fault Counter 99-280-00:

enFC
FUSEMPD33VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-071
ConnectorMUHtoMUDOpenFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-053
FuseMPD5VOpe Fault Counter 99-281-00:

nFC
FUSEMPD5VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

CONNECTORMUHTOMUDOPEN
608-072
FuseMPD12VOp Fault Counter 99-282-00:

enFC
FUSEMPD12VOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ConnectorMUHtoLwrheadsOpenFC

CONNECTORMUHTOLWRHEADSOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-054
608-055
FuseMPD24VAO Fault Counter 99-283-00:

penFC
FUSEMPD24VAOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-073
FuseMPD24VBO Fault Counter 99-284-00:

penFC
FUSEMPD24VBOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

CONNECTORMUHTOUPRHEADSOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-056
ConnectorMUHtoUprheadsOpenFC
608-045
608-046
NVM Description
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-206
NVM Description

NVM ID
NVM Name
608-074
ConnectorMUH- Fault Counter 99-309-00:

toInkResOpenFC CONNECTORMUHTOINKRESOPEN
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-089
ConnectorDDBtoTfixsenseOpenFC

CONNECTORDDBTOTFIXSENSEOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-075
ConnectorMUSO Fault Counter 99-310-00:

Number of faults
LtoV1OpenFC
CONNECTORMUSOLTOV1O Range = 0 to 255
PEN
608-090
ConnectorDDBto- Fault Counter 99-327-00:

fansOpenFC
CONNECTORDDBTOFANSOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-076

Number of faults
LtoV2OpenFC
PEN
608-091

Number of faults
CONNECTORDDBTODRUM- Range = 0 to 255
Drum-FrontOpenFC
FRONTOPEN
608-077

Number of faults
LtoV3OpenFC
PEN
608-092
ConnectorDDBtoIODOpenFC

CONNECTORDDBTOIODOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-078

Number of faults
LtoV4OpenFC
PEN
608-093
ConnectorIODto- Fault Counter 99-330-00:

CISOpenFC
CONNECTORIODTOCISOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-079

Number of faults
LtoV5OpenFC
PEN
608-094
ConnectrCleanUnitOtplugOpenFC

Number of faults
CONNECTORCleanUnitHOT- Range = 0 to 255
PLUGOPEN
608-080
ConnectorMUSO- Fault Counter 99-315-00:

CONNECTORMUSOLTOALtoAPLPAOpenFC
PLPAOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-095
ConnectorReg/
PreheattoMPDOpenFC

CONNECTORReg/PreheatTOMPDOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-081

LtoLevelYCONNECTORMUSOLBOpenFC
TOLEVELYBOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-096
ConnectorRegPreheatAirPumpOpenFC

CONNECTORReg/PreheatTOAIRPUMPSOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-082

Number of faults
CONNECTORMUSOLTOLEV- Range = 0 to 255
LtoLevelCMOpenFC
ELCMOPEN
608-097
ConnectorReg/
PreheattoCISOpenFC

CONNECTORReg/PreheatTOCISOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-083
ConnectorIMEotherOpenFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-098
ConnectorMPDto Fault Counter 99-340-00:

Number of faults
M2M3A1A2Open CONNECTORMPDTOM2M3A Range = 0 to 255
FC
1A2OPEN
608-084
ConnectorDDB- Fault Counter 99-321-00:

toPSdataOpenFC CONNECTORDDBTOPSDATAOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-099
ConnecFault Counter 99-341-00:

Number of faults
torMPD>M2enRe CONNECTORMPDTOM2ENC Range = 0 to 255
gPreheatOpFC
Reg/PreheatOPEN
608-085

CONNECTORDDBTOCleaCleanUnitOpenFC
nUnitOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-100

M456solenoidOp CONNECTORMPDTOM456S
enFC
OLENOIDOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-086
ConnectorDDBtoDM-StripperOpenFC

CONNECTORDDBTODMSTRIPPEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-101

Number of faults
M6encCONNECTORMPDTOM6ENC Range = 0 to 255
LEDOpenFC
LEDOPEN
608-087
ConnectorDDB- Fault Counter 99-324-00:

toRALPHOpenFC CONNECTORDDBTOReg/
PreheatOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-102
ConnectorMPDto- Fault Counter 99-344-00:

inkloaderOpenFC CONNECTORMPDTOINKLOADEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-088
ConnectorDDBtoTfixmotorOpenFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-103

MSItray4OpenFC CONNECTORMPDTOMSITR
AY4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
NVM Description

CONNECTORIMEOTHEROPEN

CONNECTORDDBTOTFIXMOTOROPEN
February 2013
6-207
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
608-104
ConnectorMPDha Fault Counter 99-346-00:

Number of faults
rnessM3OpenFC CONNECTORMPDHARNESS Range = 0 to 255
M3OPEN
608-119
FanPowerSupply- Fault Counter 99-380-00: FAN- Number of faults

ShortFC
POWERSUPPLYSHORT
Range = 0 to 255
608-120

Number of faults
rnessM2OpenFC CONNECTORMPDHARNESS Range = 0 to 255
M2OPEN
FanPowerSupply- Fault Counter 99-381-00: FAN- Number of faults

OpenFC
POWERSUPPLYOPEN
Range = 0 to 255
608-105
608-121
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
rnessM5dplxOpe CONNECTORMPDHARNESS Range = 0 to 255
nFC
M5DPLXOPEN
PowerTriacsPSS- Fault Counter 99-394-00:

hortedTriacFC
POWERTRIACSPSSHORTEDTRIAC
608-122

Number of faults
rnessM6LEDOpe CONNECTORMPDHARNESS Range = 0 to 255
nFC
M6LEDOPEN
PowerTriacsMU- Fault Counter 99-395-00:

Number of faults
HShortedTriacFC POWERTRIACSMUHSHORT- Range = 0 to 255
EDTRIAC
608-123
ConnectorTTMco Fault Counter 99-360-00:

Number of faults
nn1OpenFC
CONNECTORTTMCONN1OP Range = 0 to 255
EN
HeaterHeadSafe- Fault Counter 99-400-00:

Number of faults
tyCircuitErrorFC HEATERHEADHEATRange = 0 to 255
ERSSAFETYCIRCUITERROR
608-124

Number of faults
nn2OpenFC
EN
PowerHeadTher Fault Counter 99-401-00:

Number of faults
mH1SafeCircErro POWERHEADTHERMISTOR Range = 0 to 255
rFC
SH1SAFETYCIRCUITERROR
608-125

Number of faults
nn3OpenFC
EN

Number of faults
mH2SafeCircErro POWERHEADTHERMISTOR Range = 0 to 255
rFC
608-126
PowerRelayPStoFinisherOpenFC

Number of faults
POWERRELAYPSTOFINISH- Range = 0 to 255
EROPEN

Number of faults
mH3SafCircError POWERHEADTHERMISTOR Range = 0 to 255
FC
608-127
ConnectorMPDtoFinisherOpenFC

Number of faults
CONNECTORMPDTOFINISH- Range = 0 to 255
EROPEN

Number of faults
mH4SafCircError POWERHEADTHERMISTOR Range = 0 to 255
FC
608-128
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-113
ConnectorACPSh Fault Counter 99-370-00:

Number of faults
eater1OpenFC
CONNECTORACPSHEATER1 Range = 0 to 255
OPEN
PowerHeadThermSafCircErrorFC
608-129

Number of faults
eater2OpenFC
OPEN
HeaterHeadRese Fault Counter 99-410-00:

rvoir1OpenFC
HEATERHEADRESERVOIR1
OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-114
608-130

Number of faults
eater3OpenFC
OPEN

rvoir2OpenFC
OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-115
608-131
ConnectorACPSf Fault Counter 99-373-00:

use1OpenFC
CONNECTORACPSFUSE1O
PEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rvoir3OpenFC
OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-116
608-132

use2OpenFC
CONNECTORACPSFUSE2O
PEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rvoir4OpenFC
OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-117
608-133

use3OpenFC
CONNECTORACPSFUSE3O
PEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rvoir1ShortFC
SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-118
608-106
608-107
608-108
608-109
608-110
608-111
608-112
NVM Description
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-208
NVM Description

POWERHEADTHERMISTORSSAFETYCIRCUITERROR
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
608-134

rvoir2ShortFC
SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-149
HeaterJetStackH
3LeftShortFC

Number of faults
HEATERJETSTACKH3LEFTS Range = 0 to 255
HORT
608-135

rvoir3ShortFC
SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-150
HeaterJetStackH
3RightShortFC

Number of faults
HEATERJETSTACKH3RIGHT Range = 0 to 255
SHORT
608-136

rvoir4ShortFC
SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-151
HeaterJetStackH
4LeftShortFC

Number of faults
HORT
608-137
HeaterJetStackH
1LeftOpenFC

Number of faults
HEATERJETSTACKH1LEFTO Range = 0 to 255
PEN
608-152
HeaterJetStackH
4RightShortFC

Number of faults
SHORT
608-138
HeaterJetStackH
1RightOpenFC

Number of faults
OPEN
608-153
HeaterUmbilicalUpperOpenFC

HEATERUMBILICALUPPEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-139
HeaterJetStackH
2LeftOpenFC

Number of faults
PEN
608-154
HeaterUmbilicalLowerOpenFC

HEATERUMBILICALLOWEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-140
HeaterJetStackH
2RightOpenFC

Number of faults
OPEN
608-155
HeaterUmbilicalUpperShortFC

HEATERUMBILICALUPPERSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-141
HeaterJetStackH
3LeftOpenFC

Number of faults
PEN
608-156
HeaterUmbilicalLowerShortFC

Number of faults
HEATERUMBILICALLOWER- Range = 0 to 255
SHORT
608-142
HeaterJetStackH
3RightOpenFC

Number of faults
OPEN
608-157
HeaterMeltReser Fault Counter 99-470-00:

voir1OpenFC
HEATERMELTRESERVOIR1
OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-143
HeaterJetStackH
4LeftOpenFC

Number of faults
PEN
608-158

voir2OpenFC
HEATERMELTRESERVOIR2
OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-144
HeaterJetStackH
4RightOpenFC

Number of faults
OPEN
608-159

Number of faults
voir1ShortFC
HEATERMELTRESERVOIR1S Range = 0 to 255
HORT
608-145
HeaterJetStackH
1LeftShortFC

Number of faults
HORT
608-160

Number of faults
voir2ShortFC
HEATERMELTRESERVOIR2S Range = 0 to 255
HORT
608-146
HeaterJetStackH
1RightShortFC

Number of faults
SHORT
608-161
HeaterInkMelterC Fault Counter 99-480-00:

1OpenFC
HEATERINKMELTERC1OPE
N
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-147
HeaterJetStackH
2LeftShortFC

Number of faults
HORT
608-162

2OpenFC
N
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-148
HeaterJetStackH
2RightShortFC

Number of faults
SHORT
608-163

3OpenFC
N
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
NVM Description
February 2013
6-209
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
608-164

4OpenFC
N
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-180
HeaterDrumRear- Fault Counter 99-513-00:

Number of faults
HEATERDRUMREARSHORT Range = 0 to 255
ShortFC
608-181

1ShortFC
HEATERINKMELTERC1SHO
RT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
HeaterMediaPreh Fault Counter 99-522-00:

eat1and2OpenFC HEATERMEDIAPREHEAT1A
ND2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-165
608-182

2ShortFC
RT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

eat1ShortFC
HEATERMEDIAPREHEAT1S
HORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-166
608-183

3ShortFC
RT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

eat2ShortFC
HEATERMEDIAPREHEAT2S
HORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-167
608-184

4ShortFC
RT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ThermistorUmbili- Fault Counter 99-530-00:

Number of faults
calUpperOpenFC THERMISTORUMBILICALUP- Range = 0 to 255
PEROPEN
608-168
608-185
ThermistorInkMelt Fault Counter 99-500-00:

Number of faults
erC1OpenFC
THERMISTORINKMELTERC1 Range = 0 to 255
OPEN

calLowerOpenFC THERMISTORUMBILICALLOWEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-169
608-186

Number of faults
erC2OpenFC
OPEN

Number of faults
calUpperShortFC THERMISTORUMBILICALUP- Range = 0 to 255
PERSHORT
608-170
608-187

Number of faults
erC3OpenFC
OPEN

calLowerShortFC THERMISTORUMBILICALLOWERSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-171
608-188

Number of faults
erC4OpenFC
OPEN
ThermistorDrum- Fault Counter 99-534-00:

THERMISTORDRUMFRONFrontOpenFC
TOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-172
608-189

Number of faults
erC1ShortFC
SHORT

Number of faults
RearOpenFC
THERMISTORDRUMREARO- Range = 0 to 255
PEN
608-173
608-190

Number of faults
erC2ShortFC
SHORT

Number of faults
THERMISTORDRUMFRONT- Range = 0 to 255
FrontShortFC
SHORT
608-174
608-191

Number of faults
erC3ShortFC
SHORT

THERMISTORDRUMREARRearShortFC
SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-175
608-192

Number of faults
erC4ShortFC
SHORT
ThermistorWaveAmpOpenFC

THERMISTORWAVEAMPOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-176
608-193
HeaterDrumFron- Fault Counter 99-510-00:

Number of faults
tOpenFC
HEATERDRUMFRONTOPEN Range = 0 to 255
ThermistorWaveAmpShortFC

THERMISTORWAVEAMPSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-177
608-178
HeaterDrumRearOpenFC

HEATERDRUMREAROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-194
608-179
HeaterDrumFrontShortFC

HEATERDRUMFRONTSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ThermistorJetSta Fault Counter 99-540-00:

Number of faults
ckH1RightOpenF THERMISTORJETSTACKH1R Range = 0 to 255
C
IGHTOPEN
dC131
February 2013
6-210
NVM Description
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
608-195

Number of faults
ckH1LeftOpenFC THERMISTORJETSTACKH1L Range = 0 to 255
EFTOPEN
608-210
ThermistorHeadR Fault Counter 99-556-00:

Number of faults
eservoirH1OpenF THERMISTORHEADRESERV Range = 0 to 255
C
OIRH1OPEN
608-196

Number of faults
C
IGHTOPEN
608-211

Number of faults
C
OIRH2OPEN
608-197

Number of faults
EFTOPEN
608-212

Number of faults
C
OIRH3OPEN
608-198

Number of faults
C
IGHTOPEN
608-213

Number of faults
C
OIRH4OPEN
608-199

Number of faults
EFTOPEN
608-214

Number of faults
eservoirH1ShortF THERMISTORHEADRESERV Range = 0 to 255
C
OIRH1SHORT
608-200

Number of faults
C
IGHTOPEN
608-215

Number of faults
C
OIRH2SHORT
608-201

Number of faults
EFTOPEN
608-216

Number of faults
C
OIRH3SHORT
608-202

Number of faults
ckH1RightShortF THERMISTORJETSTACKH1R Range = 0 to 255
C
IGHTSHORT
608-217

Number of faults
C
OIRH4SHORT
608-203

Number of faults
ckH1LeftShortFC THERMISTORJETSTACKH1L Range = 0 to 255
EFTSHORT
608-218
SensorADCinklev Fault Counter 99-568-00:

elHead1C1Open SENSORADCINKLEVELHEA
FC
D1C1OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-204

Number of faults
C
IGHTSHORT
608-219

FC
D1C2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-205

Number of faults
EFTSHORT
608-220

FC
D1C3OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-206

Number of faults
C
IGHTSHORT
608-221

FC
D1C4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-207

Number of faults
EFTSHORT
608-222

FC
D2C1OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-208

Number of faults
C
IGHTSHORT
608-223

FC
D2C2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-209

Number of faults
EFTSHORT
608-224

FC
D2C4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
NVM Description
Settings
February 2013
6-211
NVM Description
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
608-225

FC
D2C4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-240

elHead2C3ShortF SENSORADCINKLEVELHEA
C
D2C3SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-226

FC
D3C1OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-241

C
D2C4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-227

FC
D3C2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-242

C
D3C1SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-228

FC
D3C3OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-243

C
D3C2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-229

FC
D3C4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-244

C
D3C3SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-230

FC
D4C1OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-245

C
D3C4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-231

FC
D4C2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-246

C
D4C1SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-232

FC
D4C3OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-247

C
D4C2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-233

FC
D4C4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-248

C
D4C3SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-234

C
D1C1SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-249

C
D4C4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-235

C
D1C2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-250
ThermistorMeltFault Counter 99-564-00:

reservoirOpenFC THERMISTORMELTRESERVOIROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-236

C
D1C3SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-251
ThermistorMeltFault Counter 99-565-00:

reservoirShortFC THERMISTORMELTRESERVOIRSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-237

C
D1C4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-252
SolenoidInkPurge Fault Counter 99-600-00:

Number of faults
ValveH1OpenFC SOLENOIDINKPURGEVALVE Range = 0 to 255
H1OPEN
608-238

C
D2C1SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-253

Number of faults
H2OPEN
608-239

C
D2C2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-254

Number of faults
H3OPEN
dC131
February 2013
6-212
NVM Description

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
608-255

Number of faults
H4OPEN
608-270
SolenoidInkDose Fault Counter 99-618-00:

Number of faults
ValveH4C3Open SOLENOIDINKDOSEVALVEH Range = 0 to 255
FC
4C3OPEN
608-256

Number of faults
FC
1C1OPEN
608-271

Number of faults
FC
4C4OPEN
608-257

Number of faults
FC
1C2OPEN
608-272

Number of faults
ValveH1ShortFC SOLENOIDINKPURGEVALVE Range = 0 to 255
H1SHORT
608-258

Number of faults
FC
1C3OPEN
608-273

Number of faults
H2SHORT
608-259

Number of faults
FC
1C4OPEN
608-274

Number of faults
H3SHORT
608-260

Number of faults
FC
2C1OPEN
608-275

Number of faults
H4SHORT
608-261

Number of faults
FC
2C2OPEN
608-276

Number of faults
ValveH1C1ShortF SOLENOIDINKDOSEVALVEH Range = 0 to 255
C
1C1SHORT
608-262

Number of faults
FC
2C3OPEN
608-277

Number of faults
C
1C2SHORT
608-263

Number of faults
FC
2C4OPEN
608-278

Number of faults
C
1C3SHORT
608-264

Number of faults
FC
3C1OPEN
608-279

Number of faults
C
1C4SHORT
608-265

Number of faults
FC
3C2OPEN
608-280

Number of faults
C
2C1SHORT
608-266

Number of faults
FC
3C3OPEN
608-281

Number of faults
C
2C2SHORT
608-267

Number of faults
FC
3C4OPEN
608-282

Number of faults
C
2C3SHORT
608-268

Number of faults
FC
4C1OPEN
608-283

Number of faults
C
2C4SHORT
608-269

Number of faults
FC
4C2OPEN
608-284

Number of faults
C
3C1SHORT
NVM Description
Settings
February 2013
6-213
NVM Description
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
608-285

Number of faults
C
3C2SHORT
608-301
SenADCinklevMe Fault Counter 99-691-00:

ltResFullC4Open SENSORADCINKLEVELMEL
FC
TRESFULLC4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-286

Number of faults
C
3C3SHORT
608-302

ltResRefC1Short SENSORADCINKLEVELMEL
FC
TRESREFC1SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-287

Number of faults
C
3C4SHORT
608-303

FC
TRESREFC2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-288

Number of faults
C
4C1SHORT
608-304

FC
TRESREFC3SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-289

Number of faults
C
4C2SHORT
608-305

FC
TRESREFC4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-290

Number of faults
C
4C3SHORT
608-306

ltResFullC1Short SENSORADCINKLEVELMEL
FC
TRESFULLC1SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-291

Number of faults
C
4C4SHORT
608-307

FC
TRESFULLC2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-292
SolenoidLPAValveOpenFC

SOLENOIDLPAVALVEOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-308
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-293
SolenoidLPAValveShortFC

Number of faults
SOLENOIDLPAVALVESHORT Range = 0 to 255

FC
TRESFULLC3SHORT
608-309

ltResRefC1Open SENSORADCINKLEVELMEL
FC
TRESREFC1OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

FC
TRESFULLC4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-294
608-310

FC
TRESREFC2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

PUMPINKDELIVERYAIROAirOpenFC
PEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-295
608-311

FC
TRESREFC3OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

AirShortFC
PUMPINKDELIVERYAIRSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-296
608-312

FC
TRESREFC4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SenADCinkairpumpcurrentOpenFC

Number of faults
SENSORADCINKDELIVERY- Range = 0 to 255
AIRPUMPCURRENTOPEN
608-297
608-313

FC
TRESFULLC1OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SenADCinkairpumpcurrentShortFC

Number of faults
SENSORADCINKDELIVERY- Range = 0 to 255
AIRPUMPCURRENTSHORT
608-298
608-314

FC
TRESFULLC2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
FanRearEnclosureOpenFC

REARENCLOSUREOPEN
Range = 0 to 255
608-299
608-315
FanRearEnclosureShortFC

REARENCLOSURESHORT
Range = 0 to 255

FC
TRESFULLC3OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-316
FanMarkingDraw- Fault Counter 99-716-00: FAN- Number of faults

erShortFC
MARKINGDRAWERSHORT
Range = 0 to 255
608-300
NVM Description
dC131
Settings
February 2013
6-214
NVM Description

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
608-317
FanDrumCooling- Fault Counter 99-721-00: FAN- Number of faults

ShortFC
DRUMCOOLINGSHORT
Range = 0 to 255
608-336
FanAbatementShortFC

FANABATEMENTSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

SOLENOIDCleanUnitVALVESHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-318
SolenoidCleanUnitValveShortFC
608-337
PumpReg/PreheatAirPumpsShortFC

PUMPReg/PreheatAIRPUMPSSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PumpCleanUnitDeliveryOpenFC

PUMPCleanUnitDELIVERYOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-319
608-338
ThermistorMedi- Fault Counter 99-735-00:

aPreheatOpenFC THERMISTORMEDIAPREHEATOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PumpCleanUnitDeliveryShortFC

PUMPCleanUnitDELIVERYSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-320
608-339
ThermistorMedi- Fault Counter 99-736-00:

aPreheatShortFC THERMISTORMEDIAPREHEATSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PumpCleanUnitReturnOpenFC

PUMPCleanUnitRETURNOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-321
608-340
SolenoidCARDiverterOpenFC

Number of faults
SOLENOIDCARDIVERTERO- Range = 0 to 255
PEN
PumpCleanUnitReturnShortFC

PUMPCleanUnitRETURNSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-322
608-341
SolenoidCARDiverterShortFC

SOLENOIDCARDIVERTERSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
ADCCleanUnitOilResLevsenOpenFC

SENSORADCCleanUnitOILRESLEVELSENSEOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-323
608-342
SolenoidDuplexOpenFC

SOLENOIDDUPLEXOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SenADCCleanUnitpresssensOpenFC

SENSORADCCleanUnitPRESSURESENSEOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-324
608-325
SolenoidDuplexShortFC

SOLENOIDDUPLEXSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-343
SolenoidNipCOpenFC

SOLENOIDNIPCOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

SENSORADCCleanUnitOILRESLEVELSENSESHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-326
ADCCleanUnitOilResLevSenShortFC
608-344
SolenoidNipCShortFC

SOLENOIDNIPCSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SenADCCleaFault Counter 99-793-00:

nUnitpresssensS- SENSORADCCleanUnithortFC
PRESSURESENSESHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-327
608-328
SolenoidNipDOpenFC

SOLENOIDNIPDOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-345
SolenoidNipDShortFC

SOLENOIDNIPDSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
SENSORCleanUnitIBUTTONI- Range = 0 to 255
ICFAILURE
608-329
SenCleanUnitIbuttonIICfailureFC
608-346
608-330
SolenoidNipEOpenFC

SOLENOIDNIPEOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
SenCleanUnitIFault Counter 99-796-00:

Number of faults
buttPresfailureFC SENSORCleanUnitIBUTTON- Range = 0 to 255
PRESENTFAILURE
608-331
SolenoidNipEShortFC

SOLENOIDNIPESHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-347
MotorDrumMaintOpenFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-332

OpenFC
SOLENOIDSTRIPPEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-348
MotorDrumMaint- Fault Counter 99-802-00:

Number of faults
ShortFC
MOTORDRUMMAINTSHORT Range = 0 to 255
608-333

Number of faults
SOLENOIDSTRIPPERSHORT Range = 0 to 255
ShortFC
608-349
MotorDrumMaintEncoderFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-334
SolenoidWasteT- Fault Counter 99-771-00:

rayLockShortFC SOLENOIDWASTETRAYLOCKSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-350
MotorHeadRoll1S Fault Counter 99-811-00:

hortFC
MOTORHEADROLL1SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-335
SolenoidCleanUnitValveOpenFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-351

hortFC
MOTORHEADROLL2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
NVM Description

SOLENOIDCleanUnitVALVEOPEN
Settings
February 2013
6-215

MOTORDRUMMAINTOPEN

MOTORDRUMMAINTENCODER
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
608-352

hortFC
MOTORHEADROLL3SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-368
MotorXaxisLowerOpenFC

MOTORXAXISLOWEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-353

hortFC
MOTORHEADROLL4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-369
MotorXaxisLowerShortFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-354
MotorHeadStitch3 Fault Counter 99-821-00:

Number of faults
ShortFC
MOTORHEADSTITCH3SHOR Range = 0 to 255
T

MOTORXAXISLOWERSHORT
608-370
MotorIODShuttle- Fault Counter 99-861-00:

Number of faults
MOTORIODSHUTTLESHORT Range = 0 to 255
ShortFC
608-355
MotorHeadStitch4 Fault Counter 99-823-00:

Number of faults
ShortFC
MOTORHEADSTITCH4SHOR Range = 0 to 255
T
608-371
MotorInkSKUShortFC

MOTORINKSKUSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-372
608-356
MotorCarrRestraintLowerShortFC

restraint motors.
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorInkLoadFault Counter 99-876-00:

BeltDriveShortFC MOTORINKLOADBELTDRIVESHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-373
MotorDrumDrive- Fault Counter 99-880-00:

MOTORDRUMDRIVEOPEN
OpenFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorCarrRestraintUpperShortFC

restraint motors.
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-374

Number of faults
ShortFC
MOTORDRUMDRIVESHORT Range = 0 to 255
608-375

MotorEncoderFC MOTORDRUMDRIVEMOTORENCODER
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-376

DrumEncoderFC MOTORDRUMDRIVEDRUMENCODER
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-377
MotorTransfixFrontForceEncoderFC

MOTORTRANSFIXFRONTFORCEENCODER
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-378
MotorTransfixRearForceEncoderFC

MOTORTRANSFIXREARFORCEENCODER
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-379
MotorTransfixFrontOpenFC

MOTORTRANSFIXFRONTOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-380
MotorTransfixFrontShortFC

MOTORTRANSFIXFRONTSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-381
MotorTransfixFrontMotorEncoderFC

MOTORTRANSFIXFRONTMOTORENCODER
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-382
MotorTransfixRearOpenFC

MOTORTRANSFIXREAROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-383
MotorTransfixRearShortFC

MOTORTRANSFIXREARSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-357
608-358
NVM Description
MotorCarriageSe- Fault Counter 99-830-00:

MOTORCARRIAGESELEClectOpenFC
TOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorCarriageSe- Fault Counter 99-831-00:

lectShortFC
MOTORCARRIAGESELECTSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorCarriagedri- Fault Counter 99-832-00:

MOTORCARRIAGEDRIVEOveOpenFC
PEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorCarriagedriveShortFC

MOTORCARRIAGEDRIVESHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorHeadMaintVerticalOpenFC

MOTORHEADMAINTVERTICALOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorHeadMaintVerticalShortFC

MOTORHEADMAINTVERTICALSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorHeadMaintHorizontalOpenFC

MOTORHEADMAINTHORIZONTALOPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorHeadMaintHorizontalShortFC

MOTORHEADMAINTHORIZONTALSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-366
MotorXaxisUpperOpenFC

MOTORXAXISUPPEROPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-367
MotorXaxisUpperShortFC

Number of faults
MOTORXAXISUPPERSHORT Range = 0 to 255
608-359
608-360
608-361
608-362
608-363
608-364
608-365
dC131
February 2013
6-216
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
608-384
MotorTransfixRe- Fault Counter 99-897-00:

Number of faults
MOTORTRANSFIXREARMO- Range = 0 to 255
arMotorEncoderFC
TORENCODER
608-403
MotorTTMTray2F Fault Counter 99-944-00:

eedShortFC
MOTORTTMTRAY2FEEDSH
ORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-385
MotorMP2OpenF Fault Counter 99-901-00:

C
MOTORMP2OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-404
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-386
MotorMP2ShortF Fault Counter 99-902-00:

C
MOTORMP2SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

eedShortFC
MOTORTTMTRAY3FEEDSH
ORT
608-405
MotorMP2Encode Fault Counter 99-903-00:

rFC
MOTORMP2ENCODER
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorPFPTray5Tr Fault Counter 99-951-00:

Number of faults
ansportShortFC MOTORPFPTRAY5TRANSPO Range = 0 to 255
RTSHORT
608-387
608-388

C
MOTORMP6OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-406
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-389

C
MOTORMP6SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorPFPTray5El Fault Counter 99-954-00:

evateShortFC
MOTORPFPTRAY5ELEVATE
SHORT
608-407
MotorMP6Encode Fault Counter 99-907-00:

rFC
MOTORMP6ENCODER
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
MotorPFPTray5F Fault Counter 99-957-00:

Number of faults
eedShortFC
MOTORPFPTRAY5FEEDSHO Range = 0 to 255
RT
608-390
608-391
RegistrationMotor Fault Counter 99-910-00: Reg- Number of faults

istration Motor A1 (M3) OPEN Range = 0 to 255
A1M3OpenFC
608-408
MotorOCTOffset- Fault Counter 99-961-00:

Number of faults
MOTOROCTOFFSETSHORT Range = 0 to 255
ShortFC
608-392

A1M3ShortFC
istration Motor A1 (M3)
Range = 0 to 255
SHORT
608-409
MISCAbortFC
Fault Counter 99-996-00: MIS- Number of faults

CABORT
Range = 0 to 255
608-410
MISCErrorFC
608-393

istration Motor A2 (M3) OPEN Range = 0 to 255
A2M3OpenFC
Fault Counter 99-997-00: MIS- Number of faults

CERROR
Range = 0 to 255
608-411

A2M3ShortFC
istration Motor A2 (M3)
Range = 0 to 255
SHORT
Stapler End
Home Failure
Fault Counter 12-370-00: Sta- Number of faults

pler End Home Failure
Range = 0 to 255
608-394
608-412
Stapler Return
Fault Counter 12-369-00: Sta- Number of faults
End Home Failure pler Return End Home Failure Range = 0 to 255
608-395

C
MOTORMP4OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-413
Punch - side
edge2 detect fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-396

C
MOTORMP4SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Punch Unit paper side edge 2
detecting failure
608-414

C
MOTORMP5OPEN
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Punch Unit paper side edge 3
detecting failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-397
Punch - side
edge3 detect fail
608-398

C
MOTORMP5SHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-415
No Specified
Media available
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-399
MotorMSITray4Fe Fault Counter 99-931-00:

Number of faults
edShortFC
MOTORMSITRAY4FEEDSHO Range = 0 to 255
RT

NOMEDIAOFSPECIFIEDTYPEAVAILABLE
608-416
608-400
MotorTTMHoriz- Fault Counter 99-936-00:

TransportShortFC MOTORTTMHORIZONTALTRANSPORTSHORT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IOD Alignment
Number of faults
needed before cal IODALIGNMENTNEEDEDBE- Range = 0 to 255
FORECAL
608-417
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-401
MotorTTMTray3El Fault Counter 99-938-00:

Number of faults
evateShortFC
MOTORTTMTRAY3ELEVATE Range = 0 to 255
SHORT
Fault Counter 89- Cal image creation failed

564-00: FAILEDTOCREATECALIMAGE
608-418
0
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

eedShortFC
MOTORTTMTRAY1FEEDSH
ORT
Intermediate cal
not valid
608-402
NVM Description
Settings
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
February 2013
6-217
NVM Description

INTERMEDIATECALIBRATIONNOTVALID
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
608-419
Cal parameter out Fault Counter 89-566-00: CAL- Number of faults

of range
IBRATIONPARAMETERRange = 0 to 255
OUTOFRANGE
608-434
Head4 Cyan Rev Fault Counter 93-923-00:

Lev FP Excep.
HEAD4CYANRESERVOIRLE
VSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-420
Head1 Black Rev Fault Counter 93-909-00:

Lev FP Excep.
HEAD1BLACKRESERVOIRL
EVSENSFPEXCEPTION
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-435
Head4 Yellow
Rev Lev FP
Excep.
608-421
Head1 Magenta
Rev Lev FP
Excep.

Number of faults
HEAD1MAGENTARESERVOI Range = 0 to 255
RLEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-436
Oil Delivery pump Fault Counter 94-617-00:

stall
OILDELIVERYPUMPSTALL
608-437
608-422

Lev FP Excep
VSENSFPEXCEPTION
Default
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
HEAD4YELLOWRESERVOIR Range = 0 to 255
LEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Oil Removal
pump stall
Fault Counter 94-618-00: OIL- Number of faults

REMOVALPUMPSTALL
Range = 0 to 255
608-438
MaintenanceKitInstallDate
Current Maintenance Kit Install Range = 0 to

Date
4294967295

Number of faults
LEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-450
CleaninUnitPrematureOilLowFC

CLEANINGUNITPREMATUREOILLOW
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-451
CleanUnitOilLineBlockageFC

CLEANINGUNITOILLINEBLOCKAGE
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
RLEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-452
EarlyConfirmTim- Fault Counter 82-161-00:

eOutFC
EARLYCONFIRMTIMEOUT
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-453
ESDCount1Exce
ededFC

ESDCOUNT1EXCEEDED
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-454
ESDCount2Exce
ededFC

ESDCOUNT2EXCEEDED
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-455
ExcessivePaperSkewFC

ExcessivePaperSkew
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-456
Scanned Image
Out Of
SequenceFC

Scanned Image Out Of
Sequence
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-457
Fiducials could
not be foundFC
Fault Counter 91-671-00: Fidu- Number of faults

cials could not be found
Range = 0 to 255
608-458
Too Many missing Fault Counter 91-672-00: Too

JetsFC
Many missing Jets
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-459
Floating Point
ErrorFC

Floating Point Error
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-460
HD1 adjustment
exceeds maxFC
Fault Counter 91-674-00: HD1 Number of faults

Range = 0 to 255
adjustment exceeds max
608-461
HD2 adjustment
exceeds maxFC

Range = 0 to 255
608-462
HD3 adjustment
exceeds maxFC

Range = 0 to 255
608-463
HD4 adjustment
exceeds maxFC

Range = 0 to 255
608-464
HD1 adjust converge failedFC

adjust converge failed
Range = 0 to 255
608-424

Lev FP Excep.
EVSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-425
Head2 Magenta
Rev Lev FP
Excep.
608-426

Lev FP Excep.
VSENSFPEXCEPTION
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
LEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-427
Head2 Yellow
Rev Lev FP
Excep.
608-428

Lev FP Excep.
EVSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-429
Head3 Magenta
Rev Lev FP
Excep.
608-430

Lev FP Excep.
VSENSFPEXCEPTION
608-431
Head3 Yellow
Rev Lev FP
Excep.
608-432

Lev FP Excep.
EVSENSFPEXCEPTION
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
RLEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
LEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
RLEVSENSFPEXCEPTION
dC131
Settings
Head1 Yellow
Rev Lev FP
Excep.
Head4 Magenta
Rev Lev FP
Excep.
NVM Description
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-423
608-433
Settings
February 2013
6-218

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
608-465

Range = 0 to 255
608-490
Head 3 purge fail- Fault Counter 93-935-00:

Head 3 purge failure
ureFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-466

Range = 0 to 255
608-491

ureFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-467

Range = 0 to 255
608-492
TtmSerialLinkDownFC
Fault Counter 92-530-00: Ttm- Number of faults

SerialLinkDown
Range = 0 to 255
608-468
Amb. thermist
reading invalidFC Ambient thermistor reading is
invalid
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-493
PfpSerialLinkDownFC

PfpSerialLinkDown
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-494
HD1 TRC read

failedFC

Range = 0 to 255
TRC read failed
ColdTemperature- Fault Counter 92-583-00: Cold Number of faults

Temperature Boot Timeout
BootTimeoutFC
Range = 0 to 255
608-471
608-506
HD2 TRC read

failedFC

TRC read failed
Range = 0 to 255
HEAD1THERMA
LGLITCHFC

Head1 Thermal Glitch
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-472
608-507
HD3 TRC read

failedFC

TRC read failed
Range = 0 to 255
HEAD2THERMA Fault Counter 91-801-00:

LGLITCHFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-473
608-508
HD4 TRC read

failedFC

Range = 0 to 255
TRC read failed

LGLITCHFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-474
608-509
HD1 TRC write

failedFC

TRC write failed
Range = 0 to 255

LGLITCHFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-475
608-510
HD2 TRC write

failedFC

TRC write failed
Range = 0 to 255
HEADCOMMUNI- Fault Counter 91-805-00:

Head Communications Glitch
CATIONSGLITCHFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-476
608-477
HD3 TRC write

failedFC

Range = 0 to 255
TRC write failed
608-511
608-478
HD4 TRC write

failedFC

TRC write failed
Range = 0 to 255
HEADCOMMUNI- Fault Counter 91-806-00:

Number of faults
CATIONSFAILHead Communications Failure Range = 0 to 255
UREFC
608-512
LVDSContoneEr- Fault Counter 92-585-00:

LVDS Contone Terminal Error
rorFC
During Image Transfer
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-484
BlackMeltResLeakDetectedFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
CleanUnitPredic- Cleaning Unit - Maintenance

Kit. Percent Remaining.CCS
tOilRemaining
Counter used to keep track of
the remaining DMU Oil Percent Remaining
608-479
608-514
PQMAlignCalError
Fault Counter 91-837: IMEPQ- Number of faults

MAlignCalError
Range = 0 to 255
608-515
IODAlignCalXerror
Fault Counter 91-848: IMEIODAlignCalXerror
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-516
IODAlignCalYerror
Fault Counter 91-849: IMEIODAlignCalYerror
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-517
IODAlignCalXOff- Fault Counter 91-850: IMEIOsetError

DAlignCalXOffseError
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-518
IODAlignCalYOff- Fault Counter 91-851: IMEIOsetError

DAlignCalYOffseError
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-519
Single pitch prints Jet Substitution Mode Single

in Jet Sub
Pitch Impressions
Range = 0 to
4294967295
608-520
Dual pitch prints

in Jet Sub
Jet Substitution Mode Dual

Pitch Impressions
Range = 0 to
4294967295
608-521
Black - MeteredExp - SoldDet
Black Metered ink stick

expected, Sold detected
Range = 0 to 65535

Black melt reservoir leak
detected
Settings
608-485
MagentaMeltRes- Fault Counter 93-938-00:

LeakDetectedFC Magenta melt reservoir leak
detected
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-486
CyanMeltResLeakDetectedFC

Cyan melt reservoir leak
detected
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-487
YellowMeltResLeakDetectedFC
Fault Counter 93-940-00: Yellow melt reservoir leak

detected
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-488

ureFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-489

ureFC
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
February 2013
6-219
NVM Description
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
608-522
Cyan - MeteredExp - SoldDet
Cyan Metered ink stick

Range = 0 to 65535
608-542
Cyan - DMOExp - Cyan DMO ink stick expected, Range = 0 to 65535

SoldDet
Sold detected
608-523
Magenta Magenta Metered ink stick

MeteredExp - Sol- expected, Sold detected
dDet
Range = 0 to 65535
608-543
Magenta DMOExp - SoldDet

Range = 0 to 65535
608-524
Yellow - MeteredExp - SoldDet
Yellow Metered ink stick

Range = 0 to 65535
608-544
Yellow - DMOExp Yellow DMO ink stick

- SoldDet
Range = 0 to 65535
608-525
Black - MeteredExp - DMODet
Black Metered ink stick

expected, DMO detected
Range = 0 to 65535
608-545
Black - Unknown
type Det
Black unsupported ink stick

type detected
Range = 0 to 65535
608-526
Cyan - MeteredExp - DMODet
Cyan Metered ink stick

Range = 0 to 65535
608-546
Cyan - Unknown
type Det
Cyan unsupported ink stick

type detected
Range = 0 to 65535
608-527
Magenta MeteredExp DMODet
Magenta Metered ink stick

Range = 0 to 65535
608-547
Magenta Unknown type

Det
Magenta unsupported ink stick Range = 0 to 65535

type detected
608-528
Yellow - MeteredExp - DMODet
Yellow Metered ink stick

Range = 0 to 65535
608-548
Yellow - Unknown Yellow unsupported ink stick

type Det
type detected
608-529
Black - SoldExp - Black Sold ink stick expected,

MeteredDet
Metered detected
Range = 0 to 65535
608-549
608-530
Cyan - SoldExp - Cyan Sold ink stick expected,

MeteredDet
Metered detected
Range = 0 to 65535
WaveAmpCableV Fault Counter 99-080-00:

Number of faults
PPHead1Open
WaveAmpCableVPPHead1Op Range = 0 to 255
en
608-550
Magenta Sold ink Magenta - SoldExp - Metered- Range = 0 to 65535

Det
stick expected,
Metered detected

Number of faults
PPHead2Open
en
608-531
608-551
Yellow - SoldExp - Yellow Sold ink stick expected, Range = 0 to 65535

MeteredDet
Metered detected

Number of faults
PPHead3Open
en
608-532
608-533
Black - SoldExp - Black Sold ink stick expected,

DMODet
DMO detected
Range = 0 to 65535
608-552
608-534
Cyan - SoldExp - Cyan Sold ink stick expected,

DMODet
DMO detected
Range = 0 to 65535

Number of faults
PPHead4Open
en
608-553
608-535
Magenta - SoldExp - DMODet
Range = 0 to 65535

Number of faults
SSHead1Open
WaveAmpCableVSSHead1Op Range = 0 to 255
en
608-536
Yellow - SoldExp - Yellow Sold ink stick expected, Range = 0 to 65535

DMODet
DMO detected
608-554
608-537
Black - DMOExp - Black DMO ink stick expected, Range = 0 to 65535

MeteredDet
Metered detected

Number of faults
SSHead2Open
en
608-555
608-538
Cyan - DMOExp - Cyan DMO ink stick expected, Range = 0 to 65535

MeteredDet
Metered detected

Number of faults
SSHead3Open
en
608-539
Magenta DMOExp MeteredDet

expected, Metered detected
Range = 0 to 65535
608-556

Number of faults
SSHead4Open
en
608-540
Yellow - DMOExp Yellow DMO ink stick

- MeteredDet
expected, Metered detected
Range = 0 to 65535
608-557

Number of faults
PPHead1Short
WaveAmpCableVPPHead1Sh Range = 0 to 255
ort
608-541
Black - DMOExp - Black DMO ink stick expected, Range = 0 to 65535

SoldDet
Sold detected
Magenta Sold ink stick

dC131
February 2013
6-220
NVM Description
Settings
Range = 0 to 65535
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
608-558

Number of faults
PPHead2Short
ort
608-737
IOD Excessive
H1 roll pos noise
Fault Counter 99-937-00: IOD Number of faults

excessive head 1 roll position Range = 0 to 255
noise
608-559

Number of faults
PPHead3Short
ort
608-738
IOD Excessive
H2 roll pos noise

noise
608-560

Number of faults
PPHead4Short
ort
608-739
IOD Excessive
H3 roll pos noise

noise
608-561

Number of faults
SSead1Short
WaveAmpCableVSSead1Shor Range = 0 to 255
t
608-740
IOD Excessive
H4 roll pos noise

noise
608-562

Number of faults
SSHead2Short
WaveAmpCableVSSHead2Sh Range = 0 to 255
ort
608-833
ImeCleaningUnit- Fault counter 94-629-00 IME

EoIFC
cleaning unit EOL due to gel
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-835
0
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

Number of faults
SSHead3Short
ort
TTM1 TE Late at
TAR
Fault counter 71-130-00
608-563
608-836
TTM1 LE Too
Early at TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-564

Number of faults
SSHead4Short
ort
608-837
TTM1 Too Long

At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-838

Range = 0 to 255
excessive head 1 X position
noise
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IOD Excessive
H1 X pos noise
TTM1 Too Short

At TAR
608-729
608-839
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IOD Excessive
H2 X pos noise

Range = 0 to 255
noise
TTM1 Too Long

at TAR NoAutoPurge
608-840
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IOD Excessive
H3 X pos noise

Range = 0 to 255
noise
TTM1 TooShort at Fault counter 71-153-00

TAR NoAutoPurge
608-841
TTM2 TE Late at
TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-732
IOD Excessive
H4 X pos noise

Range = 0 to 255
noise
608-842
TTM2 LE Late at
TAR1
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-733
IOD Excessive
H1 Y pos noise

excessive head 1 Y position
Range = 0 to 255
noise
608-843
TTM2 LE Too
Early at TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-844
IOD Excessive
H2 Y pos noise

Range = 0 to 255
noise
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-734
TTM2 LE Too
Early at TAR1
608-845
TTM2 Too Long

At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-735
IOD Excessive
H3 Y pos noise

Range = 0 to 255
noise
608-846
TTM2 Too Short

At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-847

Range = 0 to 255
noise
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IOD Excessive
H4 Y pos noise
TTM2 Too Long

at TAR NoAutoPurge
608-736
608-730
608-731
NVM Description
Settings
February 2013
6-221
Settings
Default
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
608-848
TTM2 Too Short

at TAR NoAutoPurge
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-867
Head 3 Thermal
Persistent Glitch
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-868
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
TTM3 TE Late at
TAR
Head 4 Thermal
Persistent Glitch
608-849
608-869
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
TTM3 LE Too
Early TAR
PQM too many

purges head1
608-850
608-870
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
TTM3 TE Late at
HZ XP
PQM too many

purges head2
608-851
608-871
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
TTM3 LE Too
Early HZ XP
PQM too many

purges head3
608-852
608-872
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
TTM3 Too Long

At TAR
PQM too many

purges head4
608-853
608-873
TTM3 Too Short

At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-855
TTM3 Too Long

at TAR NoAutoPurge
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IODInvalidFault counter 91-945-00

CLDow
MeasmntAvgHea
d1
608-854
608-874
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-856
TTM3 Too Short

at TAR NoAutoPurge
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

CLDow
MeasmntAvgHea
d2
608-875
TTM HZXp Bridge Fault counter 82-166-00

Sheet Zone 1A
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-858
PreheatHtr unsta- Fault counter 88-512-00

ble during print
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

CLDow
MeasmntAvgHea
d3
608-857
608-876
MPSensor20stati Fault counter 89-131-00

cjam sensor dusty
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-859
608-860
CLD Baseline
Needed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

CLDow
MeasmntAvgHea
d4
608-877
PQM:Unif WaitForYposSVD
Complete
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-861
IODCLDbaseline- Fault counter 91-949-00

MeasmntOORng
eHead1
608-878
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PQM:Unif WaitForYposSVD
Complete

MeasmntOORng
eHead2
608-879
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
PQM:Ydp WaitForYposSVD
Complete

MeasmntOORng
eHead3
608-880
Thermal Safety
Circuit Fail
Fault counter 91-855
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-864

MeasmntOORng
eHead4
608-865
Head 1 Thermal
Persistent Glitch
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-881
IOD CLD Adj

Measmnt
OORnge Head1
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-866
Head 2 Thermal
Persistent Glitch
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-882
IOD CLD Adj

Measmnt
OORnge Head2
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-862
608-863
dC131
February 2013
6-222
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
608-883
IOD CLD Adj

Measmnt
OORnge Head3
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-902
Head2LJetStckHt Fault counter 91-975-00

rUnstableinPrint
NVM Description
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-903
IOD CLD Adj

Measmnt
OORnge Head4
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

rUnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-884
608-904

rUnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-885
IOD CLD Fiducial Fault counter 91-957-00

searchErr Head1
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-905
Head1ResrvoirHtr Fault counter 91-978-00

UnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-886

searchErr Head2
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-906

UnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-887

searchErr Head3
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-907

UnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-888

searchErr Head4
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-908

UnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-889
IOD CLDAdj
MeasNotConverg
edHead1
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-909
MpSerialLinkSafetyTransient
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-910
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
IOD CLDAdj
MeasNotConverg
edHead2
MuSerialLinkSafetyTransient
608-890
608-911
MuidSerialLinkSafetyTransient
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-891
IOD CLDAdj
MeasNotConverg
edHead3
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-912
DDSerialLinkSafetyTransient
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-892
IOD CLDAdj
MeasNotConverg
edHead4
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-913
PsSerialLinkSafe- Fault counter 91-519-00

tyTransient
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-914
IOD CLD Sensi- Fault counter 91-965-00

tivity error Head1
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-893
Inval NVM MagicNo. Detect

ByIME
608-894

tivity error Head2
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-915
Inval NVM FormatNo. Detect

ByIME
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-895

tivity error Head3
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-916
IOT CDI NVM

Factory Init Done
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-896

tivity error Head4
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-917
IOT CDI NVM

SysInit Performed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-897
Head1RJetStckHt Fault counter 91-970-00

rUnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-918
IOT CDI NVM

UsrInit Performed
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-898

rUnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-919
MeltResrvoirHtr
UnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-899

rUnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-920
UpperUmbHtr
UnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-900

rUnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-921
LowerUmbHtr
UnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-901

rUnstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-922
DM ConnectorFault counter 91-631-00

Persistent Failure
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
February 2013
6-223
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
608-923
Drum Front Htr

unstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-924
Drum Rear Htr

unstableinPrint
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-925
TTM1 Mismatch
Long At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-926
TTM1 Mismatch
Short At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-927
TTM2 Mismatch
Long At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-928
TTM2 Mismatch
Short At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-929
TTM3 Mismatch
Long At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-930
TTM3 Mismatch
Short At TAR
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-931
ImelncompatibleFinisherFC
608-940

NVM ID
NVM Name
610-001
Copy ABS Detect Background detection window Range = 0 to 1000

Window FS Start fast scan start, defined in tenth
of percentage point of document fast scan dimension. Values from 0 to 1000 (e.g. 1% is
10, 10% is 100, 100% is 1000).
75
610-002
Copy ABS Detect Background detection window Range = 0 to 1000

Window FS Size fast scan dimension, defined in
tenth of percentage point of
document fast scan dimension. Values from 0 to 1000
(e.g. 1% is 10, 10% is 100,
100% is 1000).
850
610-003
Copy ABS Level

Platen
Auto Background Suppression level for platen
Range = 0 to 4

Number of faults
Incompatible Finisher detected Range = 0 to 255
610-004
Copy ABS Level

DADH
Auto Background Suppression level for DADH
Range = 0 to 4
DMU Thermistor
Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
610-005
Copy Auto Con- Auto Contrast level for platen

trast Level Platen
Range = 0 to 4
608-941
DMU Pressure
Sensor Fail
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
610-006
Copy Auto Con- Auto Contrast level for DADH

trast Level DADH
Range = 0 to 4
608-964
TTM1 Extra Pick

Retry Fail
Fault Counter 71-161 TTM1

Extra Pick Retry Fail
Range = 0 to 255
Number of faults
610-007
Copy Auto Color

Detect FS Start
64
608-966
BillingImpressions Mode
Billing Impressions Mode
Range = 0 to 65535
608-983
TTM1 Extra Pick

Retry Ok

Extra Pick Retry Ok
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Auto Color detection window

Range = 0 to 1000
fast scan start, defined in tenth
10, 10% is 100, 100% is 1000).
608-985
TTM2 Extra Pick

Retry Ok

Extra Pick Retry Ok
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
610-008
Copy Auto Color

Detect SS Start
64
608-986
TTM2 Extra Pick

Retry Fail

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-987
TTM3 Extra Pick

Retry Ok

Extra Pick Retry Ok
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

slow scan start, defined in
document slow scan dimension. Values from 0 to 1000
(e.g. 1% is 10, 10% is 100,
100% is 1000).
608-988
TTM3 Extra Pick

Retry Fail

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
610-009
Copy Auto Color

Level Pixel Plat
608-989
MSI Extra Pick

Retry Ok
Fault Counter 74-160 MSI

Extra Pick Retry Ok
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
608-990
MSI Extra Pick

Retry Fail
Fault Counter 74-162 MSI

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Auto Color Detection Level for Range = 0 to 4

platen at pixel level. Defines a
value that dictates how chromatic a pixel has to be in order
to be considered color
610-010
PFP Extra Pick

Retry Ok
Fault Counter 75-160 PFP

Extra Pick Retry Ok
Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255
Copy Auto Color

Level Page Plat
608-992
PFP Extra Pick

Retry Fail
Fault Counter 75-162 PFP

Number of faults
Range = 0 to 255

platen at page level. Defines a
608-991
dC131
February 2013
6-224
NVM Description
Settings
Range = 0 to 1000
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
610-011
Copy Auto Color Auto Color Detection Level for Range = 0 to 4

Level Pixel DADH DADH at pixel level. Defines a
value that dictates how many
color pixels have to be on a
page so that the document is
considered color
610-022
Scan Auto Con- Auto Contrast level for DADH

trast Level DADH
610-023
Scan Auto Color

Detect FS Start
64
Copy Auto Color

Level Page
DADH

DADH at page level. Defines a
considered color

Range = 0 to 1000
10, 10% is 100, 100% is 1000).
610-024
Scan Auto Color

Detect SS Start
64
610-013
K only (only black Dictates if black & white copies Range = 0 to 1

ink for B&W)
are printed in K-only or composite black

slow scan start, defined in
document slow scan dimension. Values from 0 to 1000
(e.g. 1% is 10, 10% is 100,
100% is 1000).
610-014
Copy Photo/Text
Segmentat'n Ctrl
Photo/Text Segmentation
Range = 0 to 4
Threshold will control the Galileo segmentation. When it
changes, the part of the input
that will be considered text will
vary as well as the part that will
be considered photo.
610-025
Scan Auto Color

Level Pixel Plat

platen at pixel level. Defines a
610-026
Scan Auto Color

Level Page Plat

platen at page level. Defines a
considered color
610-027
Scan Auto Color Auto Color Detection Level for Range = 0 to 4

Level Pixel DADH DADH at pixel level. Defines a
610-028
Scan Auto Color

Level Page
DADH

DADH at page level. Defines a
considered color
610-029
Scan Photo/Text
Segmentat'n Ctrl
Range = 0 to 4
be considered
610-030
Scan White Reference
Defines the type of paper used Range = 0 to 127

(4024, 4200, Xpressions, recyclable, etc)
610-012
NVM Description
Settings
610-015
Copy White Reference
Defines the type of paper used Range = 0 to 127
610-016
Copy Im Path
Type (bit depth)
Defines the binary vs. contone Range = 1 to 16

image path/printing
610-017
Scan ABS Detect Background detection window Range = 0 to 1000

Window FS Start fast scan start, defined in tenth
10, 10% is 100, 100% is 1000).
75
610-018
Scan ABS Detect Background detection window Range = 0 to 1000

Window FS Size fast scan dimension, defined in
(e.g. 1% is 10, 10% is 100,
100% is 1000).
850
610-019
Scan ABS Level

Platen
Range = 0 to 4
610-020
Scan ABS Level

DADH
Range = 0 to 4
610-021
Scan Auto Con- Auto Contrast level for platen

trast Level Platen
Range = 0 to 4
February 2013
6-225
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to 4
Range = 0 to 1000
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
610-031
Fax ABS Detect

Window FS Start
Background detection window Range = 0 to 1000

10, 10% is 100, 100% is 1000).
610-032
Fax ABS Detect

Window FS Size
Settings

Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
75
612-005
Queue To S2Distr
Timeout
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
616-001
Market region
Defines the market region.

0 = US (North America)
1 = XCL (Canada)
2 = FX (Fuji Xerox Japan)
3 = FXAPO (Fuji Xerox Asian
Pacific)
4 = ACO (Latin)
5 = RX (Europe)
6 = MRDmo East
7 = MRDmo West
Range = 0 to 7
850
610-033
Fax ABS Level

Platen
Range = 0 to 4
610-034
Fax ABS Level

DADH
Range = 0 to 4
610-035
Auto Contrast
level for platen
Fax Auto Contrast Level

Platen
Range = 0 to 4
610-036
Fax Auto Contrast Auto Contrast level for DADH

Level DADH
Range = 0 to 4
610-037
Fax Photo/Text
Segment'n Control
Range = 0 to 4
be considered
610-038
Fax White Refer- Defines the type of paper used Range = 0 to 127
ence
610-047
Print ImagePath
Type (bit depth)
NVM Name
Settings
Default
612-001
Queue To NC
Print TimeoutFC
Range = 0 to 255
612-002
Queue To S2F
Timeout
Range = 0 to 255
612-003
Queue To FaxSend Timeout
Range = 0 to 255
612-004
Queue To
DCCopy Timeout
Range = 0 to 255
NOTE: Do not use

see dC134
NOTE: Do not use see dC134
NVM ID
dC131
Default
Range = 0 to 255
616-002
Power Saver
Enabled
Enable Power Saver feature
616-003
Product Configuration
ColorQube Family - Defines

Range = 0 to 114
Product Configuration. 112 =
9301, 113 = 9302, 114 = 9303,
49 = Unknown (Default), 0 =
Acquire Speed from non-serialized SIM
49
616-004
System Configuration
Defines System Configuration Range = 0 to 8

(type of system)
616-005
DST Start
Defines start day of daylight

savings time
Range = 0 to 366
616-006
DST End
Defines end day of daylight

savings time
Range = 0 to 366
616-007
Time Display For- Defines time display format 0 = Range = 0 to 1

mat
12 hour format, 1 = 24 hour
format
616-008
power off enabled Determines whether power

saver's power off option is
enabled. 0 = False, 1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
616-009
power off timeout Determines whether power

Range = 0 to 1
enabled
saver's power off option using
timers is enabled. 0 = False, 1
= True

NVM Description
Settings
Background detection window Range = 0 to 1000

fast scan dimension, defined in
(e.g. 1% is 10, 10% is 100,
100% is 1000).
Defines the binary vs. contone Range = 1 to 16

image path/printing
NVM Description
February 2013
6-226
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Range = 0 to 1

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
616-010
powersaver idletime
Defines time in "normal" mode Range = 0 to 255

where system has been idle to
enabled transition into power
saver.
616-026
auto promotion
enabled
Determines whether to
Range = 0 to 1
increase job priority longer job
is in system. 0 = False, 1 =
True
616-011
power saver in
mode time
Defines time in "mode 1"

before transitioning to "mode
3" for appropriate configurations.
Range = 0 to 255
60
616-027
previous market
region
Defines previous market

Range = 0 to 5
region 0=USCO, 1 = XCL, 2 =
FX, 3 = FXAPO, 4 = ACO, 5 =
RX
616-012
power saver
power off time
Defines time in "lowest" power Range = 0 to 255

saver mode before powering
off.
45
616-028
modeChangeClientId
Defines client who did the

most recent system mode
change.
16
616-013
Date Display For- Defines date display format 0 Range = 0 to 3

mat
= mm/dd/yy, 1 = dd/mm/yy, 3 =
yy/mm/dd
616-029
latest EOD event Defines last day that an end of Range = 0 to

day was reached.
4294967295
616-030
system install
phase
Defines system's current

installation phase.
Range = 0 to 4
previous product
config
Defines previous product con- Range = 0 to 255

figuration (All Products)
106
616-014
616-031
-SMFCustomerServiceNumber Range = 0 to 0
Defines previous line frequency 0 = 50Hz, 1 = 60Hz
Not displayed
previous line frequency
Range = 0 to 1
616-015
616-016
power up reason
Defines reason for previous

power off.
Range = 0 to 6
616-032
Range = 0 to 3
616-017
Contention Algorithm
Defines the order algorithm for Range = 0 to 1

queues/ contention: FIFO vs.
priority
previous line volt- Defines previous line voltage

age
0=Unknown, 1 = 100V, 2 =
115V, 3 = 230V
616-033
nvm copyright
years
Range = 0 to
4294967295
616-018
Extra Time
Amount of additional time after Range = 0 to 5

power up before system can
enter power saver.
616-034
desired install cli- Defines current client of sysent

tem installation.
Range = 0 to 255
616-035
system mode
Defines system's overall mode Range = 0 to 12
remoteIntrusiveDiagEnabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-019
616-020
auto configuration enabled
Determines if the system runs Range = 0 to 1

through auto configuration,
detect at power on. 0 = False,
1 = True
1
616-036
value added
reseller
Range = 0 to 255
255
616-037
GMT Offset
line voltage
Defines system line voltage

0=Unknown, 1 = 100V, 2 =
115V, 3 = 230V
Range = 0 to 3
Used by platforms to insure

system clocks are set to correct time zones.
Range = -43200 to
50400
616-021
616-038
NC OnlineNvm
line frequency
Defines system line frequency Range = 0 to 1

0 = 50Hz, 1 = 60Hz
Determines whether ESS is

On (Off) line. 0 = False, 1 =
True
Range = 0 to 1
616-022
616-023
Not displayed
system serial number
Range = 0 to 0
616-039
Job Hold Time
serial number
enabled
Determines whether serial

number has been set. 0 =
False, 1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
Max time a job can be held

Range = 0 to 7200
before it is deleted by the system
4320
616-024
616-040
promotion time
Defines time interval for

increasing job's priority based
on time in system.
Range = 15 to 1440
120
Job Hold Timer

enabled
SA/KO setting to enable/disable hold job timer
616-025
616-041
ScanToFileinstalled count
Counter used for secure install Range = 0 to 65535

and remove operations of the
optional features
Settings
February 2013
6-227
List of system's copyright

years.
Determines whether remote

intrusive diagnostics is
enabled. 0 = False, 1 = True
Settings
Range = 0 to 9994
Range = 0 to 1
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
616-042
LanFaxinstalled
count

optional features
616-058
Software Upgrade
Status
Range = 0 to 7
616-059
JBAinstalled
count

optional features
DeclassifySyste- declassify system - operation

mOperationStatus status
Range = 0 to 5
616-043
616-060
Declassify system
- retry count
Range = 0 to 255
616-044
ScanToFileenabled
616-045
LanFaxenabled
616-046
616-047
Settings

NVM Description
Range = 0 to 1
616-061
Declassify system
- client id
Range = 0 to 255
Specifies whether Lan Fax is

Enabled on the machine.
Range = 0 to 1
616-062
DeclassifySysdeclassify system - platform

temPlatformMask mask
Range = 0 to 65535
JBAenabled
Specifies whether JBA is

allowed to be turned Enabled
on the machine.
Range = 0 to 1
616-063
Not displayed
declassify system - platform

Range = 0 to 0
status array-declassify system
- platform status array
NC TTY enabled
Used by PWS to determine if

ESS terminal window is
enabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-064
Not displayed
-declassify system - pattern list Range = 0 to 0
616-065
Declassify system-pattern
length
declassify system - pattern list Range = 0 to 255

length
616-048
NC Config - Type
Range = 0 to 99
42
616-049
NC Config Option
Range = 0 to 99
42
616-066
Declassify system declassify system - number of Range = 0 to 255

# repetitions
repetitions
616-050
NC Config - Storage
Range = 0 to 99
42
616-067
Declassify system declassify system - number of Range = 0 to 255

- # of retries
retries
616-051
NC Config - Software Options
Range = 0 to 99
42
616-068
Declassify system declassify system - number of Range = 0 to

- Timeout
retries
4294967295
616-052
Product Identifier Product Identifier (e.g. Market- Range = 0 to 65,535

ing product name)
167 = ColorQube 9301 [Tesla]
207 = ColorQube 9401 [Tesla
Plus Adv.]
Plus Adv.]
Plus Adv.]
616-069
DiskOverwriteinstalled count
Range = 0 to 65535
616-070
DiskOverwriteenabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-071
ScanToFilehwsw
available
Range = 0 to 1
616-072
ScanToFileinstalled
Range = 0 to 1
616-073
LanFaxhwsw
available
Range = 0 to 1
616-053
HeapLimits
F:MaxImages
T:MaxJobs
Range = 0 to 1
616-074
LanFaxinstalled
Range = 0 to 1
616-054
InternetFaxinstalled count
Range = 0 to 65535
616-075
JBAhwsw available
Range = 0 to 1
616-055
ScanToEmailinstalled count
Range = 0 to 65535
616-076
JBAinstalled
JBA always installed with Col- Range = 0 to 1

orQube
616-056
InternetFaxenabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-077
ScanToEmailhwsw available
Range = 0 to 1
616-057
ScanToEmailenabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-078
ScanToEmailinstalled
Scan to E-mail always installed Range = 0 to 1

with ColorQube
HeapLimits F:max images

T:max jobs
dC131
February 2013
6-228
Scan to file always installed

with ColorQube
Land fax always installed if

hard ware installed with ColorQube

NVM ID
NVM Name
616-079
InternetFaxhwsw
available
616-080
InternetFaxinstalled
616-081
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to 1
616-097
Zone1Page1Byte SIM data mirror

2
Range = 0 to 255
Range = 0 to 1
616-098

3
Range = 0 to 255
DiskOverwritehwsw available
Range = 0 to 1
616-099

4
Range = 0 to 255
616-082
DiskOverwriteinstalled
Disk overwrite always installed Range = 0 to 1

with ColorQube
616-100

5
Range = 0 to 255
616-083
JobOverwritehwsw available
Range = 0 to 1
616-101

6
Range = 0 to 255
616-084
JobOverwriteinstalled
Job overwrite always installed Range = 0 to 1

with ColorQube
616-102

0
Range = 0 to 255
616-085
JobOverwriteinstalled count
Range = 0 to 65535
616-103

1
Range = 0 to 255
616-086
JobOverwriteenabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-104

2
Range = 0 to 255
616-087
EmbeddedFaxhwsw available
Range = 0 to 1
616-105

3
Range = 0 to 255
616-088
EmbeddedFaxinstalled
Range = 0 to 1
616-106

4
Range = 0 to 255
616-089
EmbeddedFaxinstalled count
Range = 0 to 65535
616-107

5
Range = 0 to 255
616-090
EmbeddedFaxenabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-108

6
Range = 0 to 255
616-091
Heavy Weight
Fuser Enabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-109

0
Range = 0 to 255
616-092
software upgrade
monitor enabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-110

1
Range = 0 to 255
616-093
Not displayed
Range = 0 to 0
616-111
Geographic
region

2
Range = 0 to 255
616-094
616-112

3
Range = 0 to 255
616-113

4
Range = 0 to 255
616-114

5
Range = 0 to 255
616-115

6
Range = 0 to 255
616-116
SWUP NVM Save SWUP NVM Save Switch

Switch
Range = 0 to 255
616-117
delete settings
delete settings
Range = 0 to 1
616-118
NC OnlineValidNvm
EssOnlineValidNvm
Range = 0 to 1
Internet fax always installed

with ColorQube
Geographic region
0 = Unspecified
0
1 = Eastern
2 = Western
3 = Not Applicable
A setting of 3 (GRNotApplicable) indicates
the CRUs are not to
be differentiated by
geo Region, but by
service plan
Range = 0 to 3
616-095

0
Range = 0 to 255
616-096

1
Range = 0 to 255
February 2013
6-229
NVM Description
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
616-120
SearchPDFhwsw SearchPDFhwsw available

available
Range = 0 to 1
616-134
616-121
SearchPDFinstalled
SearchPDFinstalled
Range = 0 to 1
616-122
SearchPDFinstalled count
SearchPDFinstalled count
Range = 0 to 65535
Hours Since Last Hours Since Last Power OnTo- Range = 0 to

Power On
16777215
tal number of hours the
machine has been powered on
since last po/po.numPowerOnHoursSincePoPo
616-135
SearchPDFenabled
SearchPDFenabled
Range = 0 to 1
Total Time On
(hours)
Range = 0 to
16777215
616-123
616-124
Cpsrhwsw available
Cpsrhwsw available
Range = 0 to 1
616-125
Cpsrinstalled
Cpsrinstalled. Always installed Range = 0 to 1

with ColorQube
616-143
Fast Resume sta- Fast Resume status

tus
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-126
Cpsrinstalled
count
Cpsrinstalled count
Range = 0 to 65535
616-144
Power Management mode
Power Management mode
616-127
Cpsrenabled
Cpsrenabled
Range = 0 to 1
616-128
Power on 0 to 1
Hours
Power on 0 to 1 HoursTotal
Range = 0 to
number of times the machine 16777215
has been powered on for 0 to 1
hoursnumPowerOnHours01
0 = Intelligent ready
1 = Job active
2 = Scheduled
Range = 0 to 2
616-145
Scheduled wake
time - Sunday
Power Management Scheduled wake time - Sunday
Power on 2 to 3
Hours
Range = 0 to
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
23hrs (hourly increments)
Range = 0 to 23
616-146
Scheduled wake
time - Monday
Power Management Scheduled wake time - Monday
Power on 4 to 9
Hours
Range = 0 to
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
616-147
Scheduled wake
time - Tuesday
Power Management Scheduled wake time - Tuesday
Power on 10 to 23 Power on 10 to 23 HoursTotal Range = 0 to

Hours
has been powered on for 10 to
23
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
616-148
Scheduled wake Power Management Schedtime - Wednesday uled wake time - Wednesday
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
Power on 24 to
167 Hours
Power on 24 to 167 HoursTotal Range = 0 to

has been powered on for 24 to
167
7
616-149
Scheduled wake
time - Thursday
Power Management Scheduled wake time - Thursday
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
616-150
Scheduled wake
time - Friday
Power Management Scheduled wake time - Friday
Power on 168+ HoursTotal

number of times the machine
has been powered on for 168
or more
numPowerOnHours168Plus
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
616-151
Scheduled wake
time - Saturday
Power Management Scheduled wake time - Saturday
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
616-129
616-130
616-131
616-132
616-133
Power on 168+
Hours
NVM Description
dC131
Range = 0 to
16777215
February 2013
6-230
NVM Description
Total Time On (hours)Total

number of hours the machine
has been powered on since
last po/po.numTotalPowerOnHours
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
616-152
Scheduled pwr
saver time Sunday
Power Management Scheduled power saver time - Sunday
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
17
616-165
Schedule type Saturday
Power Management daily

Schedule type - Saturday
0 = Job activated
1 = Specified time
Range = 0 to 1
616-166
Scheduled pwr
saver time Monday
Power Management Scheduled power saver time - Monday
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
17
Yesterday's Activ- Intelligent Ready Yesterday's

ity IR1b array
Activity IR1b array
Not displayed
Range = 0 to 0
616-153
616-167
Range = 0 to 0
Scheduled pwr
saver time Tuesday
Power Management Scheduled power saver time - Tuesday
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
17
Yesterday's Activ- Intelligent Ready Yesterday's

Activity IR2b array
ity IR2b array
Not displayed
616-168
Today's Activity
IR1b array
Not displayed
Intelligent Ready Today's

Activity IR1b array
Range = 0 to 0
616-155
Scheduled pwr
saver time Wed.
Power Management Scheduled power saver time Wednesday
0 = 00hrs to 23 =
Range = 0 to 23
17
616-169
Today's Activity
IR2b array
Not displayed
Intelligent Ready Today's

Activity IR2b array
Range = 0 to 0
616-170
17
Intelligent Ready IR3 week

array
Scheduled pwr
Power Management Sched0 = 00hrs to 23 =
saver time Thurs. uled power saver time - Thurs- 23hrs (hourly increday
ments)
Range = 0 to 23
IR3 week array

Not displayed
Range = 0 to 0
616-156
616-171
IR Low Power
Timeout
Not displayed
Intelligent Ready Low Power

Timeout
Range = 1 to 120
Scheduled pwr
saver time Friday uled power saver time - Friday 23hrs (hourly increments)
Range = 0 to 23
17
616-172
IR Sleep Timeout Intelligent Ready Sleep TimeNot displayed

out
Range = 1 to 240
60
616-173

uled power saver time - Satur- 23hrs (hourly increday
ments)
Range = 0 to 23
17
Intelligent Ready - pre-populated array daily usage flags
Range = 0 to 0
Scheduled pwr
saver time Sat.
IR pre-populated
usage flags
Not displayed
616-180
Not displayed
Install Wizard (FS22.020):

deviceSettings
Range = 0 to 1
616-159
Schedule type Sunday

Schedule type - Sunday
0 = Job activated
1 = Specified time
Range = 0 to 1
616-181
Not displayed
Install Wizard (FS22.020):lan- Range = 0 to 1

guageSelection
616-182
Not displayed
Schedule type Monday

Schedule type - Monday
0 = Job activated
1 = Specified time
Range = 0 to 1
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):timeAndDate
Range = 0 to 1
616-160
616-183
Not displayed
Install Wizard (FS22.020):Net- Range = 0 to 1

workConnection
616-161
Schedule type Tuesday

Schedule type - Tuesday
0 = Job activated
1 = Specified time
Range = 0 to 1
616-184
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):pagePackPasscode
Range = 0 to 1
616-162
Schedule type Wednesday

Schedule type - Wednesday
0 = Job activated
1 = Specified time
Range = 0 to 1
616-185
Not displayed
Install Wizard (FS22.020):mini- Range = 0 to 1

WizardHomepage
616-186
Not displayed
Schedule type Thursday

Schedule type - Thursday
0 = Job activated
1 = Specified time
Range = 0 to 1
Install Wizard (FS22.020):cus- Range = 0 to 1

tomerSupport
616-163
616-187
Not displayed
Install Wizard (FS22.020):net- Range = 0 to 1

workSettings
Schedule type Friday

Schedule type - Friday
0 = Job activated
1 = Specified time
Range = 0 to 1
616-188
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):eMailSettings
616-154
616-157
616-158
616-164
February 2013
6-231
Range = 0 to 1
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
616-189
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):scanSettings
Range = 0 to 1
616-209
Not displayed
Tiered Billing Password - 2 tier Range = -1 to

2147483645
2487
616-190
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):eFaxLine1
Range = 0 to 1
616-210
Not displayed
Tiered Billing Password - 3 tier Range = -1 to

2147483645
3258
616-191
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):eFaxLine2
Range = 0 to 1
616-211
Not displayed
System serial number checksum
616-192
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):MediaSizes
Range = 0 to 1
616-212
Fast Resume
popup enabled
Fast Resume popup message Range = 0 to 1

enabled status
616-193
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):spare1
Range = 0 to 1
616-213
FullODIOTimeout defines system manager full

ODIO timeout
616-194
Not displayed
Install Wizard
(FS22.020):spare2
Range = 0 to 1
616-214
StandardODIOTimeout
defines system manager stan- Range = 0 to 255

dard ODIO timeout
50
616-195
Not displayed
Lockout Timer
Range = 0 to
4294967295
86400
616-215
Not displayed
SAKO tools - Install wizard Restrict tool access screen
616-196
Not displayed
Password Attempts
Range = 0 to 5
0 = Display screen
1 = Do not display
Range = 0 to 1
616-197
Not displayed
Days Until Expiration
Range = -1 to
2147483645
-1
616-216
Auto-Reset Count Automatic System Reset

Count
Range = 0 to 2
616-198
Not displayed
SMFSuppliesTelephoneNum- Range = 0 to 0
ber
616-217
Not displayed
PagePack Grace Prints Left
Range = 0 to 2000
1000
616-218
Not displayed
Range = 0 to 1
AIF Activation Counter
Defines whether or not the

machine is in Grace Period.
616-219
Not displayed
Navigation flag for Installer

Profile screen in LUI install
wizard Install Wizard
(FS22.020)
Range = 0 to 1
616-220
Not displayed
Navigation flag for Welcome

screen in LUI install wizard
Install Wizard (FS22.020)
Range = 0 to 1
616-221
Not displayed
Navigation flag for Completed

screen in LUI install wizard
Install Wizard (FS22.020)
Range = 0 to 1
616-222
Not displayed
Navigation flag for PagePack Range = 0 to 1

Grace Period confirm screen in
LUI install wizard Install Wizard
616-223
Not displayed
Used by platforms to set the

Range = 0 to 0
timezone link to ensure system
clocks are set to correct
616-224
Not displayed
Intelligent Ready History Log
Range = 0 to 0
616-225
IR1a values day

array
Not displayed
IR1a byte array
Range = 0 to 0
616-226
IR2a values day

array
Not displayed
IR2a byte array
Range = 0 to 0
616-199
AIF Activation
Counter
616-200
NumFault Counter 22-330: number Range = 0 to 255

TimesPagePack- of times page pack pin has
PinlockedFC
been locked out
616-201
Not displayed
616-202
Current language Current language (as set on

Range = 0 to 255
(as set on UI)
UI)This is a copy of the language set on the UI. Predominantly needed as the CCS
becomes ready at power on
before the UI and needs to
process language specific routines (e.g. maintenance pages
etc)
616-203
Disk Encryption - Disk Encryption - hwsw availhwsw available

able
Range = 0 to 1
616-204
Disk Encryption - Disk Encryption - Installed

Installed
Range = 0 to 1
616-205
Disk Encryption
Installed Count
Range = 0 to 65535
616-206
Disk Encryption
Disk Encryption Enabled/DisEnabled/Disabled abled
Range = 0 to 1
616-208
Not displayed
SMFSuppliesTelephoneNumber
Disk Encryption Installed

Count
Range = 0 to 0
Tiered Billing Password - tradi- Range = -1 to

2147483645
tional
dC131
Range = 0 to
4294967295
1791
February 2013
6-232
Settings
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 255
Default
0
110
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
616-227
IR1a last bin

updated
Not displayed
IR1a last updated binId
Range = 0 to 0
616-235
RegDiff
Regional Differentiator value
616-228
IR2a last bin

updated
Not displayed
IR2a last updated binId
Range = 0 to 23
616-229
Display Snooze
Message
When the CCS instructs the

IME to enter Snooze mode, it
needs to remember that
snooze was initiated since the
IME does not report this mode.
When a new unit is detected,
the flag should be reset. Note
setting this NVM will not
induce snooze mode, it merely
determines whether the Status
is set for displaying the UI
message.
0 = IME not in snooze 0

mode
1 = IME in snooze
mode
Range = 0 to 1
616-230
RefurbModeNVM Indicates that the machine has 0 = Not refurbed

been refurbed, therefore the
1 = Refurbed
activation date and CRU Install Range = 0 to 1
dates are not be updated upon
completion of Install Wizard.
Initially this will be

1
settable via DC131 however it must be
changed to RO once
the secure mechanism for setting this is
available.
NA_Classic = 1
NA_Enterprise = 2
XE_Classic = 3
XE_Enterprise = 4
DMO_Classic = 5
DMO_Enterprise = 6
Metered = 7
FX_Classic = 8
FX_Enterprise = 9
SR_Classic = 10
SR_Enterprise = 11
WW_Classic = 12
WW_Enterprise = 13
NA_XE_Classic = 14
NA_XE_Enterprise =
15
Factory = 63
616-232
powersaver fast
resume idletime
60
616-236
Not displayed
JBA Cost Control: Enable/Dis- 0 = Disable JBA Cost 0

able
Control1 = Enable
JBA Cost Control
616-238
UI System Timeout Warning

Enabled
UI System Timeout Warning

Enabled / Disabled
0 = Disable1 =
Enable
616-240
Not displayed
Tiered billing password (Pin

) Bik+2 tier
##
##
616-246
CheckVanillaRun- Check vanilla routine has been 0 = Unknown

executed on machine
Result
1 = Pass
2 = Fail
Range = 0 to 255
616-233
616-234
Defines time in "normal" mode

where system has been idle to
enabled transition into power
saver WITH fast resume set
powersaver fast Defines time in "mode 1"

resume in mode1 before transitioning to "mode
3" WITH fast resume set.
UI system Timeout value
UI system Timeout value
The idle time in minutes before the

machine will enter
Low power with Fast
resume set
Range = 1 to 225
The idle time in min- 120

utes the machine will
remain in Low power
before entering Sleep
with Fast Resume set
Range = 0 to 225
Range = 15 to 3600
60
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
617-001
Not displayed
-Fault Log
Range = 0 to 0
617-002
faults displayed
on TTY
Range = 0 to 1
617-003
display faults
Range = 0 to 1
617-004
Not displayed
StapleMv
Range = 0 to 0
617-005
Not displayed
StapleMv
Range = 0 to 256
February 2013
6-233
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
617-006
Not displayed
PunchUnitSideEdgeDetect
Range = 0 to 256
620-020
Range = 0 to 65535
617-007
Not displayed
PunchUnitSideEdgeDetect
Range = 0 to 256
YEL aChromaticValueLow
620-021
YEL aChromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-022
MAG chromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
620-023
MAG chromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
100
620-024
MAG aChromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535

NVM Description
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
620-001
IISS Version No
Upper Level
Range = 0 to 65535
620-002
prescanType
Range = 0 to 1
620-003
photoTextSeparationLevel
Range = 0 to 4
620-025
MAG aChromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-004
photoReproLevel
Range = 0 to 2
620-026
25600
bwSeparationLevel
Range = 0 to 4
CYA chromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
620-005
620-027
RED chromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
CYA chromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-006
620-028
RED chromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
25700
CYA aChromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
620-007
620-029
RED aChromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
CYA aChromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-008
620-030
100
RED aChromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
BLA chromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
620-009
620-031
GRN chromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
25600
BLA chromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-010
620-032
GRN chromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
25600
BLA aChromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
620-011
620-033
GRN aChromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
BLA aChromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-012
620-097
62-277 counter
Range = 0 to 255
620-013
GRN aChromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-099
62-310 counter
Range = 0 to 255
620-014
BLU chromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
25600
620-015
BLU chromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
63
NVM ID
NVM Name
620-016
BLU aChromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
620-101
620-017
BLU aChromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
620-018
YEL chromaticValueLow
Range = 0 to 65535
620-019
YEL chromaticValueHigh
Range = 0 to 65535
dC131

Settings
Default
Market Information
Range = 0 to 3
620-102
IISS Major Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-103
IISS Minor Version
Range = 0 to 65535
25600
620-104
IISS Revision
Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-105
IISS Patch Version
Range = 0 to 65535
February 2013
6-234
NVM Description

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
620-106
ADF Major Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-129
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-3 (203.2)
CVT FS Offset Side 1: Side1-3 Range = 0 to 240

(203.2)
120
620-107
ADF Minor Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-130
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-3 (203.2)

(203.2)
120
620-108
ADF Revision
Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-131
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-4 (210)

(210)
120
620-109
ADF Patch Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-132
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-4 (210)

(210)
120
620-110
IPL Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-133
IIT fail bypass
Range = 0 to 1

(214.9 to 215.9)
620-112
Fan control mode
Range = 0 to 1
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-5 (214.9215.9)
120
620-111
620-113
the number of
APS sensors
Range = 0 to 1
620-134

(214.9 to 215.9)
120
620-114
Lamp Fan fal

bypass
Range = 0 to 1
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-5 (214.9215.9)
620-135
Lamp Fan Low

rotation ON time
Range = 0 to 60
15
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-6 (254257)

(254 to 257)
120
620-115
620-116
Lamp Fan Off

time
Range = 0 to 60
620-136
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-6 (254257)

(254 to 257)
120
620-117
FL timer set
Range = 0 to 1
620-137
Lamp On interval
Range = 0 to 60
30

(266.7 to 267)
620-119
Lamp On time
Range = 0 to 60
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-7 (266.7267)
120
620-118
620-120
IIT failure parts

diagnosis
Range = 0 to 65535
620-138

(266.7 to 267)
120
620-121
Platen SS Regis- Platen SS Registration Adjust- Range = 16 to 184

tration Adjust
ment
100
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-7 (266.7267)
620-139
Platen SS Magni- Platen SS Magnification

Adjustment
fication Adjust
Range = 44 to 56
50
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-8 (279.4)

(279.4)
120
620-122
620-140
Platen glass type
Range = 0 to 2
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-8 (279.4)

(279.4)
120
620-123
620-124
REGI corr valueFS dir on Platen
REGI correction value in FS

direction on Platen
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-141
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-9 (297)

(297)
120
620-125
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-1 (139.7148)

(139.7 to 148)
120
620-142
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-9 (297)

(297)
120
620-143
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-1 (139.7148)

(139.7 to 148)
120
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-1 (139.7148)

(139.7 to 148)
120
620-126
620-144
CVT FS Off
S1:S1-2 (182194)

(182 to 194)
120
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-1 (139.7148)

(139.7 to 148)
120
620-127
620-145
CVT FS Off
S2:S2-2 (182194)

(182 to 194)
120
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-2 (182194)

(182 to 194)
120
620-128
NVM Description
February 2013
6-235
Settings
Default
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
620-146
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-2 (182194)

(182 to 194)
120
620-165
W-Ref adjustment factor BW-Y
620-166
620-147
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-3 (203.2)

(203.2)
120
W-Ref adj factor

Red (sheet)
620-167
620-148
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-3 (203.2)

(203.2)
120
620-149
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-4 (210)

(210)
120
620-150
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-4 (210)

(210)
120
620-151
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-5 (214.9215.9)

(214.9 to 215.9)
120
620-152
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-5 (214.9215.9)

(214.9 to 215.9)
120
620-153
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-6 (254257)

(254 to 257)
120
620-154
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-6 (254257)

(254 to 257)
120
620-155
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-7 (266.7267)

(266.7 to 267)
120
620-156
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-7 (266.7267)

(266.7 to 267)
120
620-157
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-8 (279.4)

(279.4)
120
620-158
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-8 (279.4)

(279.4)
120
620-159
CVT FS Off
S1:S3-9 (297)

(297)
120
620-160
CVT FS Off
S2:S4-9 (297)

(297)
120
620-161
W-Ref adjustment factor Red
Range = 70 to 255
620-162
W-Ref adjustment factor Green
Range = 70 to 255
140
620-163
W-Ref adjustment factor Blue
Range = 70 to 255
140
620-164
W-Ref adjustment factor BW-X
Range = 70 to 255
140
dC131
Settings

Settings
Default
Range = 70 to 255
140
W-Ref adjustment factor Red

(each sheet)
Range = 0 to127
63
W-Ref adj factor

Green (sheet)
W-Ref adjustment factor

Green (each sheet)
Range = 0 to 127
63
620-168
W-Ref adj factor

Blue (sheet)
W-Ref adjustment factor Blue

(each sheet)
Range = 0 to 127
63
620-169
W-Ref adj factor

BW (sheet)
W-Ref adjustment factor BW

(each sheet)
Range = 0 to 127
63
620-170
IIT paper code
Range = 0 to 8
620-171
Optical axis
adjustment: front
Range = 0 to 1980
990
620-172
Optical axis
adjustment: rear
Range = 0 to 1980
990
620-173
CVT FS Offset
Side 1: Side1
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-174
CVT FS Offset
Side 2: Side2
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-175
CVT FS Offset
Side 1: Side3
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-176
CVT FS Offset
Side 2: Side4
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-177
BW/Color auto
recognition level
Range = 0 to 1
620-178
Black line adj

Black line adjustment level (for Range = 0 to 15
level (for COLOR) COLOR)
620-179
Black line adj

level (for BW)
620-180
Black line adjustment test mode
Range = 0 to 7
620-181
BW adjustment
table
Range = 0 to 7
620-182
HOSEI_SCAN
(for detection)
Range = 0 to 6
620-183
HOSEI_SCAN
(for image)
Range = 0 to 6
620-184
CCD Calib Y scan

Red
Range = 0 to 1023
620-185
CCD Calib Y
scanned: Green
Range = 0 to 1023
620-186
CCD Calib Y
scanned: Blue
Range = 0 to 1023
140
February 2013
6-236
NVM Description
Black line adjustment level (for Range = 0 to 15

BW)

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
620-187
CCD Calib M
scanned: Red
Range = 0 to 1023
620-206
B4/8-kai FS
threshold setting
Range = 0 to 6
620-188
CCD Calib M
scanned: Green
Range = 0 to 1023
620-207
8-kai/11W17SEF
FS threshold
8-kai/11W17SEF FS threshold Range = 0 to 6

setting
620-189
CCD Calib M
scanned: Blue
Range = 0 to 1023
620-208
Switch B6/5W7
detections
Range = 0 to 2
620-190
CCD Calib C
scanned: Red
Range = 0 to 1023
620-209
Lamp check NG
counts
Range = 0 to 65535
620-191
CCD Calib C
scanned: Green
Range = 0 to 1023
620-210
Data taken at
lamp check NG.
Range = 0 to 1023
620-192
CCD Calib C
scanned: Blue
Range = 0 to 1023
620-211
AOC flow endings the number of AOC flow endings with error
with error
Range = 0 to 255
620-193
CCD Calib PK
scanned: Red
Range = 0 to 1023
620-212
Range = 0 to 4095
620-194
CCD Calib PK
scanned: Green
Range = 0 to 1023
BW Copy BGRAE adjustment

level
620-213
CCD Calib PK
scanned: Blue
Range = 0 to 1023
Color copy BGR- Color copy BGR-AE adjustment level

AE adjust level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-195
620-214
Switching A6/
postcard detect
Switching A6 document / post- Range = 0 to 2

card detection
TP_BW_Copy
BGR-AE-Level
Speed
BW Copy BGR-AE adjustment Range = 0 to 4095

- speed-prioritized
620-196
620-197
A4S/8.5in det.
border switch 2
A4S/8.5in detection border

switching 2
Range = 0 to 6
620-215
B5/8W10 detection switch
Range = 0 to 3
Color copy BGR-AE adjustment - speed-prioritized AE

(Text)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-198
TX_CL_Copy
BGR-AE-Level
Speed
620-216
Switch 8.5W13/
8.5W14 detections
Range = 0 to 3
TP_BW_Contone BW contone scan BGR-AE

Range = 0 to 4095
BGR-AE-Level
adjustment level for speed-prioritized AE (Text photo)
Speed
620-199
620-217
TP_CL_Contone
BGR-AE-Level
Speed
Color contone scan BGR-AE Range = 0 to 4095

adjustment level for speed-prioritized AE (Text photo)
620-218
ABS; FS nondetected area 1
background suppression; FS
non-detected area 1
Range = 0 to 65535
255
620-219
non-detected area 2
Range = 0 to 65535
255
620-220
non-detected area 3
Range = 0 to 65535
255
620-221
non-detected area 4
Range = 0 to 65535
255
620-222
ABS; SS fixed
position
background suppression; SS
fixed position
Range = 0 to 65535
60
620-223
ABS; SS end
position (for HAE) end position (for HAE)
Range = 0 to 65535
240
NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
620-200
Select specialdoc-detect table
Select special-documentdetection table
Range = 0 to 2
620-201
Switch docu size

detect tables
Switch document size detection tables
Range = 1 to 5
620-202
Switch A3/11W17
detections
Range = 0 to 3
620-203
Switch A4/
8.5W11 detections
Range = 0 to 3
620-204
Document size
detection.
Range = 0 to 1
620-224
ABS; SS end
position (for MAE) end position (for MAE)
Range = 0 to 65535
240
620-205
GCO/TFX sizes
switching
Range = 0 to 1
620-225
ABS; SS end
position (for NAE) end position (for NAE)
Range = 0 to 65535
240
February 2013
6-237
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
620-226
LIM control for

BW COPY
Range = 0 to 1
620-244
LIM control for

color COPY
Range = 0 to 1
level for BW COPY FAX and

Range = 0 to 4095
binary scan: text mode (normal
pencil)
620-227
TX_BW_Copy_F
ax Removal Lvl
AE
620-245
1
OFFSET level for BW COPY

FAX and binary scan: text
mode (normal pencil)
273
BW_Copy Varia- LIM control for FAX and binary Range = 0 to 1

tion Control(1-bit) scan
TX_BW_Copy_F
ax Offset Lvl AE
Range = 0 to 4095
620-228
620-229
LIM control for

condone scan
Range = 0 to 1
620-246
ABS threshold
(HAE)
background suppression
threshold (HAE)
Range = 0 to 255
127

binary scan: text/photo mode
(pale-color document)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-230
TPL_BW_Copy_
Fax Removal Lvl
AE
620-247
273
ABS threshold
(NAE1)
threshold (NAE1)
Range = 0 to 255
33
620-232
ABS threshold
(NAE2)
threshold (NAE2)
Range = 0 to 255
204
TPL_BW_Copy_ OFFSET level for BW COPY

Fax Offset Lvl AE FAX and binary scan: text/
photo mode (pale-color document)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-231
620-248
620-233
ABS threshold
(NAE3)
threshold (NAE3)
Range = 0 to 65535
TRP_BW_Copy_ level for BW COPY FAX and

Range = 0 to 4095
Fax Removal Lvl binary scan: text mode (tracing
AE
paper)
620-234
ABS threshold
(NAE4)
threshold (NAE4)
Range = 0 to 65535
620-249
TRP_BW_Copy_ OFFSET level for BW COPY

Fax Offset Lvl AE FAX and binary scan: text
mode (tracing paper)
273
620-235
AE control of FS
size detection
Range = 0 to 1
620-250
TP_CL_Copy
Removal Lvl AE
620-236
Not displayed
level for Color COPY: text/

Range = 0 to 4095
photo mode (print photographic paper copy inkjet highlighter)
620-237
AE param SS
AE parameter SS magnificamag corr TopLimit tion correction upper limit 1
1
Range = 0 to 4000
4000
620-251
620-238
AE param SS
2
Range = 0 to 4000
4000
TP_CL_Copy Off- OFFSET level for Color COPY: Range = 0 to 4095

text/photo mode (print photoset Lvl AE
graphic paper copy inkjet highlighter)
620-252
TX_CL_Copy
Removal Lvl AE
level for Color COPY: text (nor- Range = 0 to 4095

mal)
620-239
AE param SS
3
Range = 0 to 4000
4000
620-253
TX_CL_Copy Off- OFFSET level for Color COPY: Range = 0 to 4095

set Lvl AE
text (normal)
620-254
AE param SS
4
Range = 0 to 4000
4000
TP_BW_Contone level for BW Contone Scan

Removal Lvl AE (text photo)
819
620-240
620-255
TP_BW_Contone OFFSET level for BW Contone Range = 0 to 4095

Offset Lvl AE
Scan: (text photo)
620-241
TX_BW_Fax Off- FAX binary scan: background

suppression Offset level; text
set Lvl AE
mode (normal pencil)
Range = 0 to 8191
620-256
notTP_BW_Cont
one Removal Lvl
AE
819
620-242
TP_BW_Copy_F
ax Removal Lvl
AE

binary scan: Text/photo mode
(print photographic paper
copy)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-257
notTP_BW_Cont OFFSET level for BW Contone Range = 0 to 4095

one Offset Lvl AE Scan: (other than text photo)
620-258

FAX and binary scan: Text/
photo mode (print photographic paper copy)
Range = 0 to 4095
level for Color Contone Scan

(text photo)
Range = 0 to 4095
TP_BW_Copy_F
ax Offset Lvl AE
TP_CL_Contone
Removal Lvl AE
620-259
TP_CL_Contone
Offset Lvl AE
OFFSET level for Color Contone Scan: (text photo)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-243
NVM Description
-Minimum FS detection size for Range = 0 to 65535

AE
dC131
500
273
February 2013
6-238
level for BW Contone Scan

(other than text photo)
Settings
Range = 0 to 4095
Range = 0 to 4095
Range = 0 to 4095
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
620-260
notTP_CL_Conto level for Color Contone Scan

ne Removal Lvl
AE
Range = 0 to 4095
620-280
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustK: hi den

ment level K: high density
Range = 0 to 8
620-281
Range = 0 to 4095
FS magnification correction
(scanned on PLATEN/BELT
DADH)
50
notTP_CL_Conto OFFSET level for Color Conne Offset Lvl AE tone Scan (other than text
photo)
FS mag corr
(PLATEN/BELT
DADF)
Range = 0 to 100
620-261
620-282
Two-face AE control parameter: lower limit of multiplier

coefficient
Range = 0 to 255
FS magnification correction
(scanned on CVT)
50
2F-AE LowLimit
Multiplied Value
FS mag corr
(CVT)
Range = 0 to 100
620-262
620-283
Range = 0 to 65535
2F-AE TopLimit
Multiplied Value
Two-face AE control parameter: upper limit of multiplier

coefficient
Range = 0 to 255
IPS Through
Bypass setting
1(A)
620-284
IPS through
(bypass) setting 2
Range = 0 to 65535
620-264
Offset for 2F AE
Control
Two-face AE control parameter: comparison margin OFST
Range = 0 to 255
620-285
BW COPY: text;
normal dens adj
Range = 0 to 256
128
620-265
Threshold for 2F
AE Control
Two-face AE control parame- Range = 0 to 255

ter: background level threshold
LEVEL_N
16
620-286
BW COPY: text; BW COPY: text; Darker 3 den- Range = 0 to 256

Darker3 dens adj sity adjustment
128
620-287
Mode Control of
2F AE
Two-face AE control parameter: forced selection
Range = 0 to 3
Scan/FAX: text;
normal dens adj
Scan/FAX: text; normal density Range = 0 to 256

adjustment
128
620-266
620-288
Two color copy

control
Range = 0 to 1
Scan/FAX: text;
Scan/FAX: text; Darker 3 den- Range = 0 to 256
Darker3 dens adj sity adjustment
128
620-267
620-289
Range = 0 to 1
Speed prioritized background

suppression; SS non-detection area for Platen M/C
Tracing paper
mode setting
PLTN RAE SS
Not Detect Area
Range = 0 to 65535
620-268
620-269
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustment level Y: low density
Y: low den.
Range = 0 to 8
620-290
Range = 0 to 65535
620-270
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustY: med den.

ment level Y: medium density
Range = 0 to 8
DADF-P-Job RAE Speed prioritized background

SSNotDetect
suppression; SS non-detection area for platen job on
Area
DADH M/C
620-271
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustY: hi den.

ment level Y: high density
Range = 0 to 8
620-291
Range = 0 to 65535
620-272
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustment level M: low density
M: low den.
Range = 0 to 8
DADF-D-Job
RAE SSNotDetect Area
620-273
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustRange = 0 to 8

M: med den.
ment level M: medium density
620-292
Hue angle B start
Range = 0 to 360
270
620-293
Hue angle B end
Range = 0 to 360
320
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustM: hi den.

ment level M: high density
Range = 0 to 8
620-294
Hue angle G start
Range = 0 to 360
110
620-295
Hue angle G end
Range = 0 to 360
200
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustment level C: low density
C: low den.
Range = 0 to 8
620-296
Hue angle R start
Range = 0 to 360
350
620-297
Hue angle R end
Range = 0 to 360
60
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustC: med den.

ment level C: medium density
Range = 0 to 8
620-298
Hue angle Y start
Range = 0 to 360
60
620-277
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustC: hi den.

ment level C: high density
Range = 0 to 8
620-299
Hue angle Y end
Range = 0 to 360
120
620-278
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustment level K: low density
K: low den
Range = 0 to 8
4
NVM ID
NVM Name
620-300
Hue angle M start
620-263
620-274
620-275
620-276
620-279
NVM Description
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustK: med den

ment level K: medium density
Range = 0 to 8
255
4
4
NVM Description
BW COPY: text; normal density adjustment
Speed prioritized background

suppression; SS non-detection area for DADH job on
DADH M/C
February 2013
6-239
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to 360
320
dC131

NVM Description
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
620-301
Hue angle M end
Range = 0 to 360
360
620-334
620-302
Hue angle C start
Range = 0 to 360
190
IPS-EXT Connection Fail
620-303
Hue angle C end
Range = 0 to 360
280
620-335
Not displayed
620-304
IISS-DADF communication Fail
Range = 0 to 65535
620-336
IPS-YATA Connection Fail
620-305
Not displayed
IISS-DADH communication
Fail
Range = 0 to 65535
620-337
Not displayed
620-338
EXT-YATA Connection Fail
620-339
Not displayed
620-340
YATA PWBA Fail
620-341
Not displayed
620-306
IISS-Controller
comm Fai
IISS-Controller communication Fail
Range = 0 to 65535
620-307
Not displayed
IISS-Controller communication Fail
Range = 0 to 65535
620-308
DADF EEPROM
Fail
620-309
Not displayed
620-310
IPS Fan Fail
620-311
Not displayed
620-312
CRG Position Fail
620-313
Not displayed
620-314
IISS LOGIC Fail
620-315
Not displayed
620-316
Lamp Illumination Fail
620-317
Not displayed
620-318
CRG Over Run

Fail
620-319
Not displayed
620-320
Lamp Fan Fail
620-321
Not displayed
620-322
CCD Fan Fail
620-323
Not displayed
620-324
AGC Fail
620-325
Not displayed
620-326
AOC Fail
620-327
Not displayed
620-328
IPS PWBA Fail
620-329
Not displayed
620-330
IISS-EXT communication Fail
620-331
Not displayed
620-332
Extension
EEPROM Fail
620-333
Not displayed
DADH EEPROM Fail

IPS Fan Fail
CRG Position Fail
IISS LOGIC Fail
Lamp Illumination Fail
CRG Over Run Fail

Lamp Fan Fail
CCD Fan Fail
AGC Fail
AOC Fail
IPS PWBA Fail
IISS-EXT communication Fail
Extension EEPROM Fail
dC131
NVM Description
IPS-EXT Connection Fail
IPS-YATA Connection Fail
EXT-YATA Connection Fail

YATA PWBA Fail
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
620-342
IPS PWBA Memory Fail
Range = 0 to 65535
620-343
Not displayed
Range = 0 to 65535
620-344
IIT Hot Line Fail
Range = 0 to 65535
620-345
Not displayed
IIT Hot Line Fail
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
620-346
91
Scan Count replacement life

(upper)
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Scan Count
replace life
(upper)
Range = 0 to 65535
620-347
36224
Scan Count replacement life

(lower)
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
Scan Count
replace life
(lower)
Range = 0 to 65535
620-348
Range = 0 to 65535
109
Range = 0 to 65535
Lamp-On time
Lamp-On time Count replacereplace life (max) ment life (upper)
620-349
Range = 0 to 65535
56576
Range = 0 to 65535
Lamp-On time
replace life (min)
Range = 0 to 65535
620-350
Lamp-On Count Lamp-On Count Replacement Range = 0 to 65535

replace life (max) life (upper)
91
Range = 0 to 65535
620-351
Lamp-On Count
replace life (min)
Lamp-On Count Replacement Range = 0 to 65535

life (lower)
36224
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
620-352
Fax doc Size

detect DADF
Fax Document Size Detection Range = 0 to 1

for DADH
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 0 to 65535
620-353
JAM bypass
Range = 0 to 1
Range = 0 to 65535
620-354
Range = 1993 to
2193
2093
Range = 0 to 65535
8.5 W11 LEF

threshold
Range = 0 to 65535
620-355
Range = 0 to 1
Range = 0 to 65535
B5SEF / 8 W10
SEF switching
Range = 0 to 65535
620-356
11x15 SEF/8-kai
switch (AP Mkt)
Range = 0 to 1
Range = 0 to 65535
620-357
FS MAX value
2970
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 1297 to
3070
620-358
FS MIN value
2970
Range = 0 to 65535
Range = 1297 to
3070
February 2013
6-240
IPS PWBA Memory Fail
Lamp-On time Count replacement life (lower)
11 W15 SEF / 8-kai switching

in AP market

NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
620-359
SS MAX value
Range = 1297 to
4418
2100
620-380
Fax job Mix Size

Standard mode
Range = 0 to 1
620-360
SS MIN value
Range = 1297 to
4418
2100
620-381
DADF DPM
selection
Range = 0 to 65535
80
620-361
Document Size
Range = 3 to 20
620-382
Specify document feed direction
Range = 0 to 1
Magnification correction control
Range = 0 to 1
620-362
620-383
Color BW judgment level
Range = 0 to 4
620-384
textmode Photo/
Text RecogLvl
YATAGRS text mode Photo

and Text Recognition level
Range = 0 to 4
620-385
BW copy (text
photo) AE adj lvl
BW copy (text photo) AE

adjustment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-386
CL copy (text
photo) AE adj lvl
Color copy (text photo) AE

adjustment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-387
BW Copy text AE BW Copy (text) AE adjustadjustment level ment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-388
CL Copy (text) AE Color Copy (text) AE adjustment level

adj lvl
Range = 0 to 4095
620-389
BW CopyFor B
AE adjust level
BW Copy for B AE adjustment Range = 0 to 4095

level
BW Copy for G and R AE

adjustment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-363
DADF Doc Size

Detection Table
620-364
NVM Description
Range = 0 to 1
S Size Side2
S-size document Side2 Lead
Lead Regi Adjust Regi correction value
Range = 217 to 283
250
620-365
M Size Side2
M-size document Side2 Lead
Range = 217 to 283
250
620-366
L Size Side2
L-size document Side2 Lead
Range = 217 to 283
250
620-367
Size Mismatch
Set(Simp)
Size mismatch Jam detection Range = 1 to 2

setting (applicable to only Simplex Mode)
620-368
Alternate Size
switching 1
Range = 1 to 2
620-390
BW Copy G and
R AE adj lvl
620-369
Alternate Size
switching 2
Range = 1 to 2
620-391
CL Copy B AE adj Color Copy for B AE adjustment level

lvl
Range = 0 to 4095
620-370
Alternate Size
switching 3
Range = 0 to 2
620-392
CL Copy G and R Color Copy for G and R AE

AE adj lvl
adjustment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-371
Alternate Size
switching 4
Range = 0 to 2
620-393
BW Copy (text) B BW Copy (text) for B AE

AE adj lvl
adjustment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-372
Alternate Size
switching 5
Range = 0 to 2
620-394
BW Copy (text) G BW Copy (text) for G and R AE Range = 0 to 4095

& R AE adj lvl
adjustment level
620-373
Alternate Size
switching 6
Range = 0 to 3
620-395
CL Copy (text) B
AE adj lvl
Color Copy (text) for B AE

adjustment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-374
Alternate Size
switching 7
Range = 0 to 3
620-396
CL Copy (text) G
& R AE adj lvl
Color Copy (text) for G and R

AE adjustment level
Range = 0 to 4095
620-375
Alternate Size
switching 8
Range = 0 to 4
620-397
EXT. Tail Reg. adj EXT. Tail Reg. adjustment

(55.0 mm/sec)
(55.0 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-376
Alternate Size
switching 9
Range = 0 to 2
620-398

(73.3 mm/sec)
(73.3 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-377
Alternate Size
switching 10
Range = 0 to 2
620-399

(82.5 mm/sec)
(82.5 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-378
Alternate Size
switching 11
Range = 0 to 3
620-379
Size-Mix Mode
Assumed Size
Size-Mix Mode temporary size Range = 0 to 1

direction
Select DADH document size

detection table custom registration
NVM Description
February 2013
6-241
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
620-400
NVM Description
Settings
Default

(110.0 mm/sec)
(110.0 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-401

(146.7 mm/sec)
(146.7 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-402

(165.0 mm/sec)
(165.0 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-403

(293.3 mm/sec)
(293.3 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-404
EXT. Tail Reg. adj EXT. Tail Reg. adjustment (220 Range = 0 to 244
(220 mm/sec)
mm/sec)
122
620-405
(330 mm/sec)
mm/sec)
122
620-406
(440 mm/sec)
mm/sec)
122
620-407
EXT. LE. adj (55.0 EXT. Lead Edge. adjustment

mm/sec)
(55.0 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-408

mm/sec)
(73.3 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-409

mm/sec)
(82.5 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-410
EXT. LE. adj

(110.0 mm/sec)
EXT. Lead Edge. adjustment

(110.0 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-411
EXT. LE. adj

(146.7 mm/sec)

(146.7 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-412
EXT. LE. adj

(165.0 mm/sec)

(165.0 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-413
EXT. LE. adj

(293.3 mm/sec)

(293.3 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-414
EXT. LE. adj (220 EXT. Lead Edge. adjustment

mm/sec)
(220 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-415

mm/sec)
(330 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-416

mm/sec)
(440 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-417
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-1
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-418
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-2
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-419
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-3
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-420
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-4
Range = 0 to 240
120
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
620-421
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-5
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-422
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-6
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-423
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-7
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-424
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-8
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-425
CVT FS Offset 1p
Duplex Side2-9
Range = 0 to 240
120
620-426
1p Duplex Center
Regi position
Range = 0 to 7196
3598
620-427
CIS black level

Avg # lines
Range = 0 to 3
620-428
Target black level Target for black level auto

auto adjust
adjust
Range = 0 to 255
16
620-429
Target white level Target for white level auto

auto adjust
adjust
Range = 0 to 1023
820
620-430
Digital Offset
Level
Range = 0 to 1023
512
620-431
Black Level Correction Value
Range = 0 to 255
128
620-432
White Level Correction Value
Range = 0 to 255
255
620-433
DIPS white level; DIPS white level; the average

Avg # lines
number of lines
Range = 0 to 4
620-434
white stability adj white stability adjustment start Range = 0 to 4095

start point
point
10
620-435
white stability adj white stability adjustment aver- Range = 0 to 255

age area
Avg area
217
620-436
white stability adj white stability adjustment Ref- Range = 0 to 1023

Ref value
erence value
962
620-437
W-Ref density
correction factor
Range = 100 to 255
158
620-438
Fine adj hilite

WhiteStability
Fine adjustment factor for

highlight at white stability
adjustment
Range = 80 to 120
100
620-439
W-Ref den. corr

factor set value
W-Ref density correction factor Range = 0 to 255

set value
620-440
EXT. Lead Reg.

EXT. Lead Reg. adjustment
adj (460 mm/sec) (460 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
620-441
EXT. Tail Edge.

EXT. Tail Edge. adjustment
adj (460 mm/sec) (460 mm/sec)
Range = 0 to 244
122
February 2013
6-242
NVM Description
CIS black level Average number of lines
255

NVM ID
NVM Name
620-442
Switching main /
sub
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to 1
620-464
TX_BW_Copy_F
ax Removal lvl
AE

binary scan: (normal pencil)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-443
Ship Garbage
detection Thresh
620-444
EXT Fail bypass
Range = 0 to 1
620-465
TX_BW_Copy_F
ax Offset lvl AE

FAX and binary scan: (normal
pencil)
Range = 0 to 4095
273
620-445
Daimajin Fail
bypass
Range = 0 to 1
620-446
Data on WhiteSt- Data obtained at white stability Range = 0 to 1023

adjustment failure
ability adj fail
1023
620-466
TPL_BW_Copy_
Fax Removal lvl
AE

binary scan: (pale-color document)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-447
Pre ASIC
Through setting 1
Range = 0 to 8191
448
620-467
TPL_BW_Copy_
Fax Offset lvl AE

FAX and binary scan: (palecolor document)
Range = 0 to 4095
273
620-448
BW-PG density
Range = 0 to 255
128
620-449
FS non-detection
area 1
Range = 0 to 65535
255
620-468
TRP_BW_Copy_ level for BW COPY FAX and

Fax Removal lvl binary scan: (tracing paper)
AE
Range = 0 to 4095
620-450
FS non-detection
area 3
Range = 0 to 65535
255
620-469
TRP_BW_Copy_ OFFSET level for BW COPY

Fax Offset lvl AE FAX and binary scan: (tracing
paper)
Range = 0 to 4095
273
620-451
SS fixed position
Range = 0 to 65535
60
620-452
LIM control for

BW COPY
Range = 0 to 1
620-470
level BW Cont.
Scan (TP)

(text photo)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-453
LIM control FAX

and binary scan
LIM control for FAX and binary Range = 0 to 1

scan
620-471
Off level BW
Cont. Scan (TP)
OFFSET level for BW Contone Range = 0 to 4095

Scan: (text photo)
620-454
LIM control for

contone scan
Range = 0 to 1
620-472
level BW Cont.
Scan (not TP)

Range = 0 to 4095
620-455
AE FS size detection control
Range = 0 to 1
620-473
OFFSET level for BW Contone Range = 0 to 4095

Scan: (other than text photo)
620-456
Not displayed
Off level BW
Cont. Scan (not
TP)
620-474
TopLimit SS mag Upper Limit of SS Magnifica- Range = 0 to 4000

corr AE param1
tion correction AE Parameter1
4000
EXT Major Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-457
620-475
ship Thresh of
Garbage Detect
2000
EXT Minor Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-458
620-476
Adjusting all Lead

Regi at once
Range = 0 to 244
122
EXT Revision
Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-459
620-477
Adjusting all Taile

Edge at once
Range = 0 to 244
122
EXT Patch Version
Range = 0 to 65535
620-460
620-478
Adjusting all FS
offset at once
Range = 0 to 240
120
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustK: low den(2)

ment level K: low density
Range = 0 to 8
620-461
620-479
TP_BW_Copy_F
ax Removal lvl
AE

binary scan: (print photographic paper copy)
Range = 0 to 4095
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustK: med den(2)

ment level K: medium density
Range = 0 to 8
620-462
620-480
Def. ColorBal adj Default color balance adjustment level K: high density
K: hi den(2)
Range = 0 to 8
TP_BW_Copy_F
ax Offset lvl AE

FAX and binary scan: (print
photographic paper copy)
Range = 0 to 4095
620-481
Photo and Text

Recognition level
Range = 0 to 4
620-482
FS mag Adjust (at FS Magnification Adjustment

CVT scan)
(at CVT scan)
Range = 0 to 100
50
620-463
NVM Description
Shading correction dust detec- Range = 0 to 5000

tion threshold at shipment
-Minimum FS detection size for Range = 0 to 65535

AE

tion threshold in market
500
500
273
February 2013
6-243
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
620-483
IPS Through
Bypass setting
1(B)
NVM Description
620-484
BW COPY; text;
normal den. adj
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Range = 0 to 511
620-505
ADF Lifetime 2
Sided Sheets
Range = 0 to 256
128
ADF Lifetime 2 Sided Sheets- Range = 0 to

Total number of duplex sheets 16777215
run through the ADF in support
of any service since activation
620-509
BWCopyTextBW COPY; text; darker 3 den- Range = 0 to 256

Darker 3 Density- sity adjustment
Adjust
128
72 x 72 Scanned
Lifetime Docs
Not displayed
620-486
Scan/FAX; text
normal den. adj
Scan/FAX; text normal density Range = 0 to 256

adjustment
128
72 x 72 Scanned Lifetime Doc- Range = 0 to

16777215
umentsNumber of jobs (not
impressions) that were
scanned where the user
selected 72 x 72 resolution
620-485
620-510
Scan/FAX; text
darker3 den. adj
Scan/FAX; text darker 3 density adjustment
Range = 0 to 256
128
620-488
SS non-detection
band
Range = 0 to 65535
100 x 100 Scanned Lifetime

Range = 0 to
DocumentsNumber of jobs
16777215
(not impressions) since activation that were scanned where
the user selected 100 x 100
resolution
620-487
100 x 100
Scanned Lifetime
Docs
Not displayed
620-489
SS end position
(noise removal)
SS end position (for noise

removal)
Range = 0 to 65535
240
620-511
param SS mag
corr TopLimit
Parameter SS Magnification
correction Upper Limit
Range = 0 to 4000
4000
620-491
dust detect
threshold in market

tion threshold in market
500

Range = 0 to
16777215
resolution
620-490
200 x 100
Scanned Lifetime
Docs
Not displayed
620-512
ShadingData
blackline remove
Selection of Shading data for

removing black line
620-493
White Reference White reference value at ship- Range = 0 to 1000

ValueAtShipment ment
636
200 x 200
Scanned Lifetime
Docs
Not displayed
620-494
White-corr multiplier coeff
Range = 0 to 1

Range = 0 to
16777215
resolution
620-492
620-513
Paper dust detection threshold
Range = 0 to 10000
150
620-496
VALID starting
position
Range = 0 to 1000
288
300 x 300
Scanned Lifetime
Docs
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
16777215
resolution
620-495
620-514
400 x 400
Scanned Lifetime
Docs
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
16777215
resolution
620-515
600 x 600
Scanned Lifetime
Docs
Not displayed

Range = 0 to
16777215
resolution
BW COPY; text; normal density adjustment
White-correction multiplier
coefficient
Range = 0 to 1

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
620-500
Platen Lifetime
Images
Not displayed
Platen Lifetime ImagesTotal

Range = 0 to
number of images scanned off 16777215
the platen glass in support of
any service since activation
ADF Lifetime 1
Sided Sheets
Not displayed
ADF Lifetime 1 Sided Sheets- Range = 0 to

Total number of simplex sheets 16777215
run through the ADF in support
of any service since activation
620-504
dC131
Settings
Default
February 2013
6-244
Settings
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
620-516
Black Scanned
Lifetime Docs
Not displayed
Black Scanned Lifetime Docu- Range = 0 to

16777215
mentsNumber of jobs (not
impressions) since activation
that were scanned while Black
Mode is selected
620-528
LE late to Reg.
Sensor S7 FC
05-340 Fault Counter: LE late

to Reg. Sensor S7
Range = 0 to 255
620-529
LE late to Exit
sensor S8 FC

to Exit sensor S8 (FWD)
Range = 0 to 255
620-530
0
05-346 Fault Counter: TE late

to Exit sensor S8 (FWD)
Color Scanned Lifetime Docu- Range = 0 to

16777215
that were scanned while Color
Mode is selected
TE late to Exit
sensor S8 FC
Range = 0 to 255
Color Scanned
Lifetime Docs
Not displayed
620-531
LE late to CVT
sensor S10 FWD to CVT sensor S10 (FWD)
FC
Range = 0 to 255
Greyscale
Scanned Lifetime
Docs
Not displayed
Greyscale Scanned Lifetime

Range = 0 to
16777215
(not impressions) since activation that were scanned while
Greyscale Mode is selected
620-532
LE late to CVT
sensor S10 REV
FC

to CVT sensor S10 (REV)
Range = 0 to 255
620-533
IIT comm faults
Text Scanned
Lifetime Docs
Not displayed
Text Scanned Lifetime DocumentsNumber of jobs (not

that were scanned while Text
Mode is selected
Range = 0 to
16777215
IIT comm faults: Used to count Range = 0 to

a collection of IIT Comms
4294967295
faults that may occur.(e.g. not
just linked to one single fault)
620-535
Tot. Scanner
Total number of Scanner Jams Range = 0 to 65535
Jams since power since activation.
on
Photo Scanned
Lifetime Docs
Not displayed
Photo Scanned Lifetime Docu- Range = 0 to

16777215
that were scanned while Photo
Mode is selected
620-548
KernelCheckSumErrorFC
620-549
ApplicaFault Counter 05-251-00:

tionCheckSumEr- Application checksum error
rorFC
Range = 0 to 255
Mixed Scanned
Lifetime Docs
Not displayed
Mixed Scanned Lifetime Docu- Range = 0 to

16777215
that were scanned while Mixed
Mode is selected
620-550
StepperControllerCommsErrorFC

Stepper Controller Comms
Error
Range = 0 to 255
620-551
IIT-DADHcommsErrorFC
Fault Counter 05-253-00: IITDADH Comms Error
Range = 0 to 255
620-517
620-518
620-519
620-520
620-521
Settings
Fault Counter 05-250-00: Ker- Range = 0 to 255

nel Checksum Error
620-522
DADH OpenDuringRunFC
05-300 Fault Counter: DADH

open during run
Range = 0 to 255
620-552
CommsSequenceErrorFC

Comms Sequence Error
Range = 0 to 255
620-523
DADHLHCovIntlockOpenDuringRunFC
05-307 Fault Counter: DADH Range = 0 to 255

LH cover interlock opened during run
620-553
DADHhotlineErrorFC

DADH Hotline Error
Range = 0 to 255
620-554
DADH Source
05-310 Fault Counter: DADH
Doc Too Short FC Source Doc Too Short For
DADH
Range = 0 to 255
DADHnotInStand- Fault Counter 05-260-00:

byFC
DADH not in standby
Range = 0 to 255
620-524
620-556
620-525
LE late to post
feed sensorS5 FC to post feed sensor S5 (misfeed)
Range = 0 to 255
Num of jobs
scanned at
150 x 150
620-526
TE late to post
05-331Fault Counter: TE late
feed sensorS5 FC to post feed sensor S5 (multifeed)
Range = 0 to 255
620-527
LE late to TAR
sensor S6 FC
Range = 0 to 255

to TAR sensor S6
February 2013
6-245

Range = 0 to
4294967295
resolution
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
621-001
NUP Layout Pattern
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to 1
633-001
spuiNeedsToInitNvm
spuiNeedsToInitNvm
Range = 0 to 1
621-002
Rotation enabled Determines whether rotation is Range = 0 to 1

for RE
enabled for reduction/ enlargement. 0 = False, 1 = True
621-003
Rotation enabled Determines whether rotation is Range = 0 to 1

for APS
enabled for APS. 0 = False, 1
= True
1
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
641-001
Signature Layout
Changeable
Range = 0 to 1
Internal ImagePrintJobPriority
internal image print job priority Range = 1 to 65535
621-004
641-002
Use New Messaging
Range = 0 to 1
NextTestPatternJobID
Value of next test pattern job's Range = 1 to 999

id.
621-005
621-006
Rotation Debug
Range = 0 to 1
621-007
Not displayed
Range = 0 to
16777215
Range = 0 to
16777215
621-008
621-009
621-010
Not displayed
Previous Market
Region
NVM Description
Number of Multiple Images

Number of Rotated Images
NVM Name
625-001
625-002
625-003
Platen Scanned
Lifetime Images
ADF Scanned
Lifetime Images
Range = 0 to 1
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NextScanJobID
Range = 1 to 199
Platen Scanned Lifetime Imag- Range = 0 to

been scanned off the platen
glass that were not for Copy or
Embedded Fax jobs.
ADF Scanned Lifetime Imag- Range = 0 to

been scanned from the ADF
that were not for Copy or
Embedded Fax jobs.
dC131
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
648-001
rs422 Configured Determines whether RS422 is Range = 0 to 1

configured. 0=False, 1=True
648-002
accessory Card
Configured
Determines whether accessory Range = 0 to 1

card is configured. 0=False,
1=True
648-003
foreign interface
Configured
Determines whether foreign

interface is configured.
0=False, 1=True
Range = 0 to 1
648-004
rdt Modem Configured
Determines whether RDT

Range = 0 to 1
Modem is configured. 0=False,
1=True
648-005
RS422 (EPSV)
Config Mismatch
Fault counter for RS422 configuration mismatch.
Range = 0 to 255
648-006
Accessory Card
Config Mismatch
Fault counter for accessory

card configuration mismatch.
Range = 0 to 255
648-007
RDT Config Mismatch Fault
Fault counter for RDT configu- Range = 0 to 255

ration mismatch.
648-008
NC Comm Lost
Fault
Fault counter for ESS commu- Range = 0 to 255

nication lost fault.
648-009
DC Crash
Detected Fault
Fault counter for detection of

DC crash on power up.
Range = 0 to 255
648-010
UI Comm Lost
Fault
Fault counter for UI communi- Range = 0 to 255

cation lost fault.
648-011
Power Loss
Detected Fault
Fault counter for power loss

detected fault.
Range = 0 to 255
648-012
DC Platform
Install Phase
Defines DC platform's current

install phase.
Range = 0 to 4

NVM ID
Settings
Defines previous market

Range = 0 to 5
region 0 = USCO, 1 = XCL, 2 =
FX, 3 = FXAPO, 4 = ACO, 5 =
RX
Lakes Legacy
Scan
February 2013
6-246
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
648-013
UI Comms failureFC
Fault Counter 03-346-00: UI

communication failure.
Range = 0 to 255
649-007
EnableOnInternalCredits
Range = 0 to 1
648-014
NC Comm Dead
Fault
Fault Counter 03-332-00: ESS Range = 0 to 255

communication is down fault.
649-008
DeviceType
Range = 0 to 4
649-009
PremiumSelect
Range = 0 to 5
649-010
CopyRestricted
Range = 0 to 1
649-011
PrintRestricted
Range = 0 to 1
649-012
s2fRestricted
Range = 0 to 1
649-013
EFaxSendRestricted
Range = 0 to 1
649-014
EFaxReceiveRestricted
Range = 0 to 1
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
652-001
User Accounts
User Accounts
Range = 0 to 65535
2001
652-002
General Accounts General Accounts
Range = 0 to 65535
501
652-003
Not displayed
AuditronAccounts
Range = 0 to 0
652-004
submitPolicy
submitPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-005
jobMgmtPolicy
jobMgmtPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-006
authPolicy
Copy Authentication Policy

Range = 0 to 8
(none, internal, external, EPSV
or JBA)
652-007
acctPolicy
Copy Accounting Policy (none, Range = 0 to 8

internal, external, EPSV, or
JBA)
652-008
invalidAccountPolicy
invalidAccountPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-009
nullAccountPolicy nullAccountPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-010
PrintAuthenticationPolicy
Print Authentication Policy

Range = 0 to 8
or JBA)
652-011
PrintAccountingPolicy
Print Accounting Policy (none, Range = 0 to 8

internal, external, EPSV or
JBA)
652-012
InvalidAccountPolicy
InvalidAccountPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-013
NullAccountPolicy NullAccountPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-014
ScanToFileAuScan to File Authentication

Range = 0 to 8
thenticationPolicy Policy (none, internal, external,
EPSV or JBA)
648-015
648-016
DCPMF.SPMGR. Defines current state of communication to the PWS.

PWS
Range = 0 to 10
Machine Phone
Number Setup
Range = 0 to 1
648-017
DC Platform Post
Upgrade Phase
648-018
DCPlatformPostUpgradeRetry
Cnt
648-019
Power On Initiated
648-020
648-021
648-022
Not displayed
Controller comm
faults
UI comm faults
Defines whether machine

phone number has been set
up. 0=False, 1=True
0
0
Range = 0 to 1
DC Platform Post Upgrade

Retry Count
Range = 0 to 255
Power On InitiatedTotal number of times that the machine

was po/po-ed
Range = 0 to
16777215
PowerOn ImpressionsNVM
Range = 0 to 0
Controller comm faults: Used Range = 0 to

to count a collection of Control- 4294967295
ler Comms faults that may
occur.(e.g. not just linked to
one single fault)
UI comm faults: Used to count Range = 0 to

a collection of UI Comms faults 4294967295
that may occur.(e.g. not just
linked to one single fault)

NVM ID
NVM Name
649-001
649-002
NVM Description
Settings
Default
LargePaperCount Determines whether double

count is enabled 0=False,
1=True
Range = 0 to 1
CancelJobTimer- This specifies the amount of

time FI will wait (seconds)
Value
before deleting a job when
authentication has been
removed.
Range = 0 to 900
60
649-003
PreCountDuration
Range = 0 to 200
100
649-004
CountDuration
Range = 0 to 200
100
649-005
PostCountDuration
Range = 0 to 200
100
649-006
ExitDuration
Range = 0 to 200
100
NVM Description
February 2013
6-247
dC131

Settings
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
652-015
ScanToFileAccountingPolicy
Scan to File Accounting Policy Range = 0 to 8

or JBA)
652-036
Not displayed
CopyActivity
Range = 0 to 0
652-037
Not displayed
CopyActivity
Range = 0 to 0
652-038
HolePunchCount HolePunchCount
Range = 0 to
4294967295
652-039
StapleCount
StapleCount
Range = 0
to4294967295
652-040
CustomerName
CustomerName
Range = 0 to
4294967295
652-041
MonoImpression- MonoImpressionCount
Count
Range = 0 to
4294967295
652-042
ColourImpressionCount
ColourImpressionCount
Range = 0 to 1
652-043
CopyActivityPen
CopyActivityPen
Range = 0 to 4
652-044
Not displayed
CopyActivity
Range = 0 to 0
652-045
Not displayed
JobIdGenerator
Range = 1 to 999
652-046
CopyActivityJobIDGenerator
CopyActivityJobIDGenerator
Range = 2 to 65535
256
652-047
Not displayed
AuditronAccounts
Range = 0 to 1
652-048
Not displayed
AuditronAccounts
Range = 1 to 65535
652-049
PermServiceSOAValues
PermServiceSOAValues
Range = 0 to 255
652-050
PermCreateJob
PermCreateJob
Range = 0 to 255
652-051
PermCancelJob
PermCancelJob
Range = 0 to 255
23
652-052
PermInterruptJob PermInterruptJob
Range = 0 to 255
652-053
PermPauseJob
PermPauseJob
Range = 0 to 255
652-054
PermQueryJob
PermQueryJob
Range = 0 to 255
652-055
PermResumeJob PermResumeJob
Range = 0 to 255
652-056
PermSubmitJob
Range = 0 to 255
652-057
PermJobLOAVal- PermJobLOAValues
ues
Range = 0 to 255
652-058
PermJobSOAVal- PermJobSOAValues
ues
Range = 0 to 255
652-059
PermCreateDocument
PermCreateDocument
Range = 0 to 255
652-060
PermDeleteDocu- PermDeleteDocument
ment
Range = 0 to 255
18
652-061
PermDocumentLOAValues
PermDocumentLOAValues
Range = 0 to 255
652-062
PermDocumentSOAValues
PermDocumentSOAValues
Range = 0 to 255
652-063
PermProofJob
PermProofJob
Range = 0 to 255
652-064
PermProofDocument
PermProofDocument
Range = 0 to 255
652-016
ScanToFileInvalidPinPolicy
ScanToFileInvalidPinPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-017
ScanToFileNullPinPolicy
ScanToFileNullPinPolicy
Range = 0 to 2
652-018
Auditron - Set
Hour
Auditron - Set Hour
Range = 0 to 23
652-019
Auditron - Set
Minute
Auditron - Set Minute
Range = 0 to 59
652-020
Auditron - Set
Second
Auditron - Set Second
Range = 0 to 59
652-021
Auditron - Set
Month
Auditron - Set Month
Range = 0 to 12
652-022
Auditron - Set
Day
Auditron - Set Day
Range = 0 to 31
652-023
Auditron - Set
Year
Auditron - Set Year
Range = 70 to 135
70
652-024
652-025
652-026
652-027
Auditron - Wall
Clock
Auditron - Wall Clock
Fax Send Authen- Fax Send Authentication Polticity Policy

icy (none, internal, external,
EPSV or JBA)
Range = 0 to
4294967295
Range = 0 to 8
Fax Send
Fax Send Accounting Policy
Range = 0 to 8
Accounting Policy (none, internal, external, EPSV
or JBA)
Fax Send Invalid

Pin Policy
Fax Send Invalid Pin Policy
652-028
Fax Send Null Pin Fax Send Null Pin Policy

Policy
652-029
Fax Receive
Authenticity Policy
652-030
Range = 0 to 2
Range = 0 to 2
Fax Receive Authentication

Range = 0 to 8
Policy (none, internal, external,
EPSV or JBA)
Fax Receive
Fax Receive Accounting Policy Range = 0 to 8
Accounting Policy (none, internal, external, EPSV
or JBA)
652-031
Fax Receive
Fax Receive Invalid Pin Policy Range = 0 to 2
Invalid Pin Policy
652-032
Fax Receive Null Fax Receive Null Pin Policy

Pin Policy
Range = 0 to 2
CopyAcivity
Range = 0 to
4294967295
652-033
CopyAcivity
652-034
Not displayed
XSAAccountArray
Range = 0 to 0
652-035
Not displayed
CopyActivity
Range = 0 to 0
dC131
February 2013
6-248
PermSubmitJob

NVM ID
NVM Name
652-065
PermPromoteJob PermPromoteJob
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to 255
652-066
PermHoldJob
652-067
PermReleaseJob PermReleaseJob
Range = 0 to 255
35
652-068
Not displayed
TripleAServicePolicies
Range = 0 to 0
652-069
Tiered level 1
copy accounting
Tiered level 1 copy
Range = 0 to 1
652-070
Tiered level 1
print
Tiered level 1 print accounting Range = 0 to 1
652-071
JBA display
restricted
JBA display restricted
Range = 0 to 1
652-072
Not displayed
JBA display restricted
Range = 0 to 0
652-073
Not displayed
JBA default value 1
Range = 0 to 0
652-074
Not displayed
JBA labels 0
Range = 0 to 0
652-075
Not displayed
JBA labels 1
Range = 0 to 0
652-076
JBA display fields JBA display fields 0

0
Range = 0 to 1
PermHoldJob
652-077
JBA display fields JBA display fields 1

1
Range = 0 to 1
652-078
JBA display
masks 0
JBA Display masks 0
Range = 0 to 1
652-079
JBA diplay masks JBA Display masks 1

1
Range = 0 to 1
652-080
Copy Feature
Account Policy
652-081
Print Feature
Account Policy
Copy feature account policy

0 = NA
(none, full service XSA, colour 1 = Full service XSA
2 = Colour only
Only)
Range = 0 to 2
Print feature account policy

0 = NA
(none, full service XSA, colour 1 = Full service XSA
2 = Colour only
Only)
Range = 0 to 2
Scan Feature
Account Policy
Scan to file feature account

0 = NA
policy (none, full service XSA, 1 = Full service XSA
2 = Colour only
colour Only)
Range = 0 to 2
652-083
Fax Rx Feature
Account Policy
Fax send feature account pol- 0 = NA

icy (none, full service XSA,
1 = Full service XSA
2 = Colour only
colour Only)
Range = 0 to 2
Fax receive feature account

0 = NA
policy (none, full service XSA, 1 = Full service XSA
2 = Colour only
colour Only)
Range = 0 to 2
Fax Tx Feature
Account Policy
NVM Name
Settings
Default
656-001
Image Disk READ Fault Counter

Failure.
Range = 0 to 255
656-002
Image Disk
WRITE Failure.
Fault Counter
Range = 0 to 255
656-003
Image Disk BAD

DATA ERROR.
Fault Counter
Range = 0 to 255
656-004
ImageDiskUnaFault Counter
bleToFormatError.
Range = 0 to 255
656-005
Image Disk
NoDiskCapacityError
Fault Counter
Range = 0 to 255
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Job Log Data-Completed Job

Log
Range = 0 to 0
657-001
652-082
652-084

NVM ID

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
658-001
TonerEmptyDspLoc
Toner empty display location
Range = 0 to 3
658-002
FdRollLife
Range = 0 to 200
150
658-003
PDRNNotify
Range = 0 to 16
658-004
SupplyInfoFlag
0 = UI, 1 = Network, 2 = Both,

3 = Neither
Range = 0 to 3
658-005
CruMgrDebugPrint
CRU manager debug printouts 0 = False, 1 = True
Range = 0 to 1
658-006
PDRNNotifyProc
0 = False, 1 = True
Range = 0 to1
658-007
FuserReorderMs- Reorder message displayed

gTrig
(days before End of Life)
Range = 1 to 25
658-008
XeroReorderMsgTrig
Range = 1 to 25
658-009
FuserReorderDspLoc
Range = 0 to 3
658-010
XeroReorderDspLoc
Range = 0 to 3
658-011
FuserReplDspLoc
Range = 0 to 3
658-012
XeroReplDspLoc
Range = 0 to 3
February 2013
6-249
Reorder message displayed

(days before End of Life)
dC131
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
658-013
ColorantReorderMsgTrig XC
Market
Reorder Threshold value

(days) for Ink (US market
region setting)
Stores remaining
threshold value to
trigger low supplies
warning.
Range = 0 to 65535
658-026
ImpressionSnap- Captured at the end of each

Range = 0 to
day, to be used for comparison 4294967295
shot
to total impressions to determine daily usage
658-027
adpv
Average daily volume
DADHRollReorderMsgTrig XC
Market
Reorder Threshold value for

DADH Roller (if CRU) (US
market region setting)
Stores remaining
threshold value to
warning.
Range = 0 to 65535
10
Range = 0 to
4294967295
1000
658-014
658-028
PagesBlackCRU
Pages per Black Colorant
Range = 0 to
4294967295
5680
658-029
PagesColorCRU
Pages per Color Colorant
Range = 0 to
4294967295
5520
658-030
Last ADPV Calc

Date
Last ADPV Calc Date
Range = 0 to
4294967295
658-032
ScanFeedDayCounter
Counts the number of days in Range = 0 to 255

which a threshold number of
DADH feeds have occurred.
After {ScanFeedUsageCalcDuration} days, this is reset to
0.
658-033
ScanFeedDayUsage
Stores the number of scan

feeds made every day being
counted for up to {ScanFeedUsageCalcDuration} days
658-034
adsfvThreshold
Minimum number of DADH

Range = 0 to 65535
feeds to consider the day to be
a usage day. If the machine
has not made at least n feeds,
dont count the day
658-035
DADFFeedsSnapshot
Captured at the end of each

Range = 0 to
day, to be used for comparison 4294967295
to total DADH feeds to determine daily usage
658-036
adsfv
Average daily scan feed volume
Range = 0 to
4294967295
100
658-037
Last ADSFV Calc Last ADSFV Calc DateDate

Date
captured when ADSFV is calculated
Range = 0 to
4294967295
658-038
ScanFeedUsage- This determines how often the Range = 1 to 255

ADSFV calculation is
CalcDuration
refreshed
10
658-039
MarkUsageCalcDuration
658-015
658-016
658-017
658-018
658-023
658-024
658-025
CleanUnitReorderMsgTrigXCMarket

Cleaning Unit (CU/DMU) (US
market region setting)
Stores remaining
threshold value to
warning.
Range = 0 to 65535
17
ColorantReorderMsgTrig XE
Market

Ink (European market region
setting)
Stores remaining
threshold value to
warning.
Range = 0 to 65535
DADHRollReorderMsgTrig XE
Market

DADH Roller (if CRU) (European market region setting)
Stores remaining
threshold value to
warning.
Range = 0 to 65535
CleanUnitReorderMsgTrigXEMarket

Cleaning Unit (CU/DMU)
(European market region setting)
Stores remaining
threshold value to
warning.
Range = 0 to 65535
13
DayCounter
Counts the number of days in

which a threshold number of
impressions have occurred.
After {MarkUsageCalcDuration} days, this is reset to 0.
Range = 0 to 255
DayUsage
adpvThreshold
Stores the number of impres- Range = 0 to

4294967295
sions made every day being
counted for up to {MarkUsageCalcDuration} days
Minimum number of impresRange = 0 to 65535

sions to consider the day to be
a usage day. If the machine
has not made at least n
impressions, dont count the
day
20
dC131
February 2013
6-250
NVM Description
Settings
Range = 0 to
4294967295
This determines how often the Range = 1 to 255

ADPV calculation is refreshed
Default

NVM ID
NVM Name
658-040
ScanFeedUsage- This determines how often

ADSFV is calculated. This
CalcFrequency
value should never exceed
MarkUsageCalcDuration, but
code will check for this condition
658-041
MarkUsageCalcFrequency
NVM Description
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
Settings
Default
Range = 1 to 255
658-050
day8MarkVolume ADPV Day 8: Number of

impressions made in day 8 of
the adpv duration (ADPV Day
Counter Index = 7)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-051

Counter Index = 8)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-052
day10MarkVolum ADPV Day 10: Number of

Range = 0 to 10000
e
Counter Index = 9)
1000
658-053
day1ScanFeedVo ADSFV Day 1: Number of

lume
the adsfv duration (ADSFV
Day Counter Index 0)
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-054

lume
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-055

lume
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-056

lume
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-057

lume
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-058

lume
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-059

lume
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-060

lume
Range = 0 to 10000
100
This determines how often

Range = 1 to 255
ADPV is calculated. This value
should never exceed ScanFeedUsageCalcDuration, but
code will check for this condition
658-042
LowInkMsgTrigPercent
Low Ink threshold value (Percent %) for Ink warning.
Stores threshold
value (in percent) to
trigger low ink warning.
Range = 0 to 255
10
658-043

Counter Index = 0)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-044

Counter Index = 1)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-045

Counter Index = 2)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-046

Counter Index = 3)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-047

Counter Index = 4)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-048

Counter Index = 5)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
658-049

Counter Index = 6)
Range = 0 to 10000
1000
February 2013
6-251
NVM Description
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
658-061

lume
Settings
Default
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Range = 0 to 10000
100
658-076
Hide Cleaning
Unit Re-order
Msg
658-062
day10ScanFeedV ADSFV Day 10: Number of

Range = 0 to 10000
olume
100
658-063
Not displayed
Current K Toner Cartridge

Total Area Coverage
658-064
Not displayed
Current C Toner Cartridge

Total Area Coverage
Flag to indicate if the user cho- Range 0 to 1

sen to acknowledge and temporarily suppress the Cleaning
Unit Re-order message (displayed at the local UI).
Intended to allow user to
acknowledge the message
and remove (from the local UI)
temporarily. Reset when new
Cleaning Unit is
installed.FALSE => Msg Displayed (Default) TRUE => Msg
suppressed
658-065
Not displayed
Current M Toner Cartridge

Total Area Coverage
658-083
658-066
Not displayed
Current Y Toner Cartridge

Total Area Coverage
Latch Cleaning
Unit Re-order
Msg
658-067
APPC ink level

lower limit
Solid Ink - Average pages per

chute - ink level lower limit for
tracking algorithm
Latch for the re-order message FALSE = Re-order

0
on the cleaning unit (DMU).
not raised (Default)
TRUE = Re-order has
been raised
Range = 0 to 1
658-084
Previous DMU
Life Remaining
Previous cleaning unit has %

remaining
100
658-068
APPC Ink level

upper limit
Solid Ink - Average pages per Range = 0 to 100

chute - ink level upper limit for
tracking algorithm
70
0 - 100% of life
remaining at last
power off
Range = 0 to 100
658-085
APPC pages
lower limit

chute - pages lower limit for
tracking algorithm
Range = 0 to 20000
20
New DMU
Threshold
% threshold for new cleaning

unit detection
0 - 100% of life
remaining at last
power off
Range = 0 to 100
100
658-069
658-070
APPC pages
upper limit

chute - pages upper limit for
tracking algorithm
Range 0 to 20000
10000
658-071
APPC chute con- Solid Ink - Average pages per

chute - chute constant for
stant
tracking algorithm (tenths)
Range 10 to 200
50
APPC Cyan ink

life expectancy

chute - Cyan ink life expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
46400
APPC Magenta
ink life expectancy

chute - Magenta ink life
expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
46400
APPC Yellow ink

life expectancy

chute - Yellow ink life expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
46400

chute - Black ink life expectancy
Range = 0 to
4294967295
658-072
658-073
658-074
658-075
APPC Black ink

life expectancy
NVM Description
dC131
Range = 0 to 10000
Range = 0 to 100
20
Settings
Default
0

NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
665-001
Out Of Resource
Policy
Specify what JBA should do

when it runs out of space.
Range = 0 to 1
665-002
Comm Failed Pol- Specify what JBA should do if

it can't communicate with the
icy
ESS.
Range = 0 to 2
665-003
EAS Validation
Enable
Specify if JBA should Authorize logins and submit jobs

with the ESS.
Range = 0 to 1
665-004
Not displayed
JBA Data-JBA Database
Range = 0 to 0
665-005
Not displayed
JBA User Data-Default JBA

User
Range = 0 to 0
665-006
Not displayed
JBA Account Data-Default JBA Range = 0 to 0

Account
47700
February 2013
6-252

NVM ID
NVM Name
671-001
EFaxSendJobPriority
671-002
Not displayed
671-003
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Range = 1 to 65535
EmbeddedFaxSendDocumentsDefaults
Range = 0 to 0
Not displayed
EMBFAXSENDTransmitImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
671-004
EMBFAXSENDTransmitImagesDisplay
EMBFAXSENDTransmitImag- Range = 0 to 1
esDisplayable
671-005
Not displayed
EMBFaxPlatenScans
Range = 0 to
16777215
671-006
Not displayed
EMBFaxDADHSide1Scans
Range = 0 to
16777215
671-007
Not displayed
EMBFaxDADHSide2Scans
Range = 0 to
16777215
671-008
Not displayed
EmbeddedFaxSendJobDefaults
Range = 0 to 0
Not displayed
EMBFaxStoredPollingImages
Range = 0 to
16777215
671-010
Not displayed
EMBFaxAllSendJobs
Range = 0 to
16777215
671-011
SendShortJobRecoveryWaitTime
Range = 1 to 255
671-012
SendJobRecov- SendJobRecoverySenderySendRespTim- ResponseTimeout

eout
Range = 1 to 255
120
671-013
SendJobRecoveryWaitTime
Range = 1 to 255
120
671-014
SendJobRecover- SendJobRecoveryImageReImageRespTime- sponseTimeout

out
Range = 1 to 255
120
671-015
SendJobRecovComplQUpdate
Timeout
Range = 1 to 255
120
671-016
SendJobRecoveryCreateJobTimeout
Range = 1 to 255
671-017
SendLowFaxMemoryWaitTime
Range = 1 to 255
20
671-018
SendJobRecoveryRetryCounter
Range = 1 to 255
NVM Name
NVM Description
Platen Emb Fax

Lifetime Images
Platen Embedded Fax Lifetime Range = 0 to

Images SentNumber of
16777215
images that have been
scanned off the platen glass
that were for Embedded Fax
jobs.
Settings
Default
671-020
ADF Embedded
Fax Lifetime
Images
ADF Embedded Fax Lifetime Range = 0 to

ImagesNumber of images that 16777215
have been scanned from the
ADF that were for Embedded
Fax jobs.
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
672-001
EFaxReceiveJobPriority
672-002
Not displayed
672-003
Not displayed
672-004
EMBFAXRECEIVESheetsDisplayable
672-005
Not displayed
672-006
671-009
SendJobRecoveryCompletedQUpdateTimeout
NVM ID
671-019
Settings
Default
Range = 1 to 65535
EFaxRecieveJobDefaults
Range = 0 to 0
EMBFAXRECEIVESheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
Range = 0 to 1
EMBFAXRECEIVEDuplexSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
EFaxRecPlexSheetsDisplayable
EMBFAXRECEIVEDuplexSheetsDisplayable
Range = 0 to 1
672-007
Not displayed
EMBFAXRECEIVELargeSheets
Range = 0 to
16777215
672-008
EMBFAXREEMBFAXRECEIVECEIVELargeSheetsDisplayable
LargeSheetsDispl
ay
Range = 0 to 1
672-009
Not displayed
print crash recovery
Range = 0 to 1
672-010
Not displayed
EMBFaxReceiveMarkedJobs
Range = 0 to
16777215
672-011
Not displayed
EFaxRecieveDocumentDefaults
Range = 0 to 0
672-012
Not displayed
EMBFAXRECEIVEMarkedIm- Range = 0 to
16777215
ages
672-013
Emb Fax Rec

Marked Images
Disp
EMBFAXRECEIVEMarkedIm- Range = 0 to 1
agesDisplayable
February 2013
6-253
dC131

NVM ID
NVM Name
672-014
NextImageTimeOut
672-015
Not displayed
672-016
EFPrintCompletedJob Log Location
672-017
EF Card Disturbance Timeout
NVM Description
Settings

NVM ID
NVM Name
Range = 100 to 1000 300
Default
673-014
Fax NV Device
Not Present Fault
EFPrintCompleted Job Log
Range = 0 to 0
673-015
EFPrintCompleted Job Log

Location
Range = 0 to 70
Fax System Low

Mem Recover
Fault
673-016
Range = 1 to 255
12
Settings
Default
Range = 0 to 255
Range = 0 to 255
Fax Out Of File

Memory Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-017
Fax File Integrity

Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-018
Fax Network Line

1 Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-019
Fax Network Line

2 Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-020
Fax Port 1 Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-021
Fax Port 2 Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-023
Fax comm faults
Fax comm faults: Used to

count a collection of Fax
Comms faults that may
occur.(e.g. not just linked to
one single fault)
Range = 0 to
4294967295
NVM ID
NVM Name
NVM Description
Settings
Default
Efax recovery last image service ID
Range = 0 to 65535

NVM ID
NVM Name
673-001
NVM Description
NVM Description
Fax System Low Memory

Recoverable Fault
Settings
Default
Postpone fax
install
Range = 0 to 1
673-002
EmbeddedFax
Basic Previous
State
Range = 0 to 2
673-003
EmbeddedFaxEx- EmbeddedFaxExtendedPrevi- Range = 0 to 2

tendedPreviousState
ousState
Not displayed
673-004
Not displayed
Range = 0 to 0
673-005
Basic FAX Not

Detected Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-006
Fax Phonebook
Download Fault
Range = 0 to 255
674-001
LastXferImageServiceId
673-007
Extended FAX
Not Detected
Fault
Range = 0 to 255
674-002
LastXferImageJo- Efax recovery last image job

bId
ID
Range = 0 to 65535
674-003
Fax Unexpected
Reset Fault
Range = 0 to 255
LastXferImageDocId
Range = 0 to 65535
673-008
674-004
Fax BasicCardUnrecoverable
Fault
Fax BasicCardUnrecoverable
Fault
Range = 0 to 255
LastXferImageIm- Efax recovery last image

image ID
ageId
Range = 0 to 65535
673-009
673-010
Fax Sys Low

Mem Unrecover
Fault
Fax System Low Memory

Unrecoverable Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-011
Fax Not Cleared

By Reset Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-012
Fax Basic Card

Failed Fault
Range = 0 to 255
673-013
Fax Extended
Card Failed Fault
Range = 0 to 255
-card installed id
dC131
February 2013
6-254
Efax recovery last image doc

ID
dC132 Serial Number

Purpose
To display the machine serial number.
Procedure
1.
Enter service mode, GP 1.
2.
3.
Select dC132 Serial Number.
4.
The machine serial number or ########## is displayed.
5.
If ########## is displayed a 03-398-00 fault has occurred and the serial number is corrupt. Perform Serial Number Restore.
Serial Number Restore

1.
Locate the machine serial number label, Figure 1.

NOTE: Take great care when entering the serial number. Ensure that you have correctly
read the serial number label. If you enter an incorrect number it cannot be changed without performing an NVM reset. This will cause the machine to run at a default 30 pages per
minute.
2.
Enter the serial number.
3.
Select Save.
4.
Select Save on the confirmation screen.
5.
6.
Select Call Closeout to exit service mode.
Figure 1 Location of machine serial number label
February 2013
6-255
dC132
dC134 Market Region
dC135 CRU/HFSI Status
Purpose
Purpose
NOTE: This procedure is

071.XXX.XXX.XXX or higher
only
applicable
to
machines
with
software
To provide the option to select and set an interminable market region for the machine.
Procedure
versions
To view the counters for customer replacement units and high frequency service items indicating the type, name and percent remaining.
There are two types of CRUs. Some of the CRUs are equipped with CRU Manager (CRUM)
chips that are used for the management of data relevant to that particular CRU. Other CRUs
do not have CRUMs; the management of these consumables is dependant upon the user to
confirm replacement.
1.
2.
Select the maintenance tab.
3.
Select dC134 Market Region from the scroll list.
4.
Select the 0 - US button for operation in North America or Canada.
5.
Select Save.
6.
Select Close to exit routine.
7.
1.
To apply the change, select Exit and Reboot.
2.
Select the 5 - Europe button for operation in all other market regions.
8.
ERUs Engineer Replaceable Units. These are typically replaced by service technician, and
do not trigger user warnings as end of life is reached. Of these, some are classified as HFSIs
High Frequency Service Items, meaning that it can be anticipated that these will need to be
replaced at some point during the normal life expectancy of the machine.
Procedure
3.
Select dC135 CRU / HFSI.
4.
Refer to Table 1 to observe the status of the items.
5.
To reset the HFSI File:

a.
dC134, dC135
Select the HFSI item.
b.
Select Reset HFSI.
c.
Select Reset to confirm.
6.
7.
February 2013
6-256
Table 1 CRU / HFSI Details

User
Cleaning
Prompt to Gas
Gauge
Est Life Frequency Replace
Reset
Count
Reorder
XC
Threshold
NVM
Reorder
XE
Threshold Reorder
Threshold
NVM
XC
XE
Reorder Reorder
Default Default
Low Ink
Refill
warning
Low Ink
Warning
Default%
Type
Name
Mgmt Type
CRU
Magenta Ink stick
Mech Keyed
CRU
Variable N/A
Pages
Remain
%
Remain
No
658-013
658-016
0 to 20 Days
Remain
8 Days
5 Days
658-42
10
Cyan Ink Stick
Mech Keyed
CRU
Variable N/A
Pages
Remain
%
Remain
No
658-013
658-016
0 to 20 Days
Remain
8 Days
5 Days
658-42
10
Yellow Ink Stick
Mech Keyed
CRU
Variable N/A
Pages
Remain
%
Remain
No
658-013
658-016
0 to 20 Days
Remain
8 Days
5 Days
658-42
10
Black Ink Stick
Mech Keyed
CRU
Variable N/A
Pages
Remain
%
Remain
No
658-013
658-016
0 to 20 Days
Remain
8 Days
5 Days
658-42
10
Cleaning Unit
CRUM
140K
N/A
Pages
Remain
%
Remain
No
658-015
658-018
0 to 20 Days
Remain
17 Days 13 Days
N/A
N/A
Document Feeder
Feed Roll
Costumer confirmation
150K
N/A
None
%
Remain
Yes
658-014
658-017
None
10 Days 6 Days
N/A
N/A
PPI Feed Roll Set
ERU
80K
N/A
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3TM Tray 1 Feed Roll

Set
ERU
600K
N/A
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Set
ERU
600K
N/A
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Set
ERU
600K
N/A
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MSI Feed Roll Set
ERU
600K
N/A
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PFP Feed Roll Set
ERU
600K
N/A
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Transfix stripper
ERU
460K
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Drum fan shroud
N/A
N/A
500k
N/A
N/A
Yes
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Upper JL baffle
N/A
N/A
400k
N/A
N/A
Yes
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
HFSI
February 2013
6-257
dC134, dC135
dC136 Service Plan
dC137 Page Pack
Purpose
Purpose
To allow the service plan to be changed from metered to sold. An authorization code is
required from the Xerox service centre.
To enable or disable the page pack function. When enabled the page pack function, a customer typically pays a fixed amount per month, or per page, for supplies and / or service plan.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
Select dC136 Service Plan.
3.
Select dC137 Page Pack.
The service plan information is displayed.

4.
The Page Pack screen is displayed.
Enter the authorization code to change the service plan.
NOTE: The page pack function is only enabled in XE installations. Depending on the customer's full service maintenance agreement, the page pack function needs to be enabled
when a USSG/XCL machine is installed in an XE region.
NOTE: The authorization code generator can be down loaded from GSN library 10480.
NOTE: The service plan can be changed from and to any service plan.
5.
Select Close to exit routine.
6.
7.
To apply the change switch the machine off and switch the machine on again, GP 14.
dC136, dC137
4.
Select Disabled or Enabled.
5.
Enter the PagePack passcode, a 4 digit authorization code. The authorization code can
be found in the customers machine installation pack.
6.
The Save button will appear. Select Cancel or Save.
7.
February 2013
6-258
dC140 Analog Monitor
Table 1 Component List
Purpose
ID Code
Component Name
Range
Comments
To provide tools to start (activate) and stop (deactivate) monitoring of specific analog components. The nominal range of the analog value and, when monitoring is active, the current value
is displayed. The values are updated at least every second to allow the component state to be
monitored.
091 - 017
IOD Shuttle Motor Encoder
0 - 65535
Display value in ticks
094 - 101
Drum Drive Motor Encoder
0 - 65535
094 - 102
0 - 65535
094 - 103
Cleaning Unit Motor Encoder
0 - 65535
Refer to Table 1 for the component list.
Procedure
1.
2.
Select the Diagnostics tab.
3.
Select dC140 Analog Monitor. The dC140 Analog Monitor screen is displayed.
4.
Scroll the table to display the available analog components.
5.
Select the required item from the table.
6.
A popup menu will be displayed, select start to confirm.
The table will display a status against the selected component.
While service mode is activated the components are not active so the value will not
change.
To check the component either manipulate the component manually or make a note
of the value, exit Analog Monitor go to dC330 Component Control, to run the component and return to dC140 Analog Monitor.
Multiple components may be selected.
To stop monitoring select the required component and select stop.
Selecting Close will stop monitoring all components.
7.
Select Close to return to the Diagnostic Routine window.
8.
Table 1 Component List

ID Code
Component Name
Range
Comments
010 - 010
Rear Transfix Flexure Encoder, PL

10.20 Item 5
0 - 65535
010 - 011
Rear Transfix Motor Encoder
0 - 65535
010 - 012
Front Transfix Flexure Encoder
0 - 65535
010 - 013
Front Transfix Motor Encoder
0 - 65535
042 - 100
Abatement Fan Tachometer
0 - 37500
Zero RPM with fan off
073 - 003
Tray 3 Elevator Encoder
0 - 255
Zero ticks with tray 3

down
074 - 415
Bypass Width Potentiometer
0 - 65535
Move guides to change

tick value
075 - 015
Tray 5 Elevator Encoder
0 - 255
Zero ticks with tray 5

down
082 - 100
Vert Trans Motor Encoder (M2)
0 - 65535
082 - 102
Horiz Trans Motor Encoder (M6)
0 - 65535
February 2013
6-259
dC140
dC140
February 2013
6-260
dC301 NVM Initialization
9.
General
10. Select Call Closeout to exit service mode.
The purpose of the NVM initialization routine is to reset the values of all applicable NVM
parameters to default. There are three machine domains and three types of initialization.
Exit dC301 NVM initialization.
11. Reboot the machine for the changes to take effect.

NOTE: If a Reset All has been performed then go to the Post Reset All Procedure.
The three machine domains are:
Copier NVM Initialization
Network Controller NVM Initialization
Fax NVM initialization
Post Reset All Procedure

If a Reset All has been selected then perform the steps that follow:
NOTE: The network controller does not contain any NVM values that are accessible by
the NVM features. The NVM parameters for the network controller are stored on the hard
disk. The only option for the CSE is to clear the network controller NVM parameters by
performing an Altboot, GP 4.
The three types of initialization are:
1.
The paper trays should be opened and allowed to go the bottom sensor and then closed
to allow them to determine amount of paper correctly.
2.
If there is a Tray 5 kit installed, the media type will need to be re-entered. Enter DC131
NVM Read / Write and location NVM ID 450.001. Enter the appropriate value, 0 = Standard (A4 or 8.5 x 11 LEF), 1 = Kit A (A3 SEF or A4 LEF), 2 = Kit A (11x17 SEF or 8.5 x 11
LEF), 3 = Kit B (A4 SEF) and 4 = Kit B (8.5 x 11 Legal SEF)
3.
Perform the following calibrations in order and then reboot the system.
User data That data which defines the way the customer prefers that the equipment operates (i.e. customer preference, SA/KO settings, configuration).
a.
dC978 Transfix Calibration Values
b.
dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment
System data That data which defines the way the equipment operates in relation to its
environment (i.e. machine variables).
c.
dC977 Drum Runout Calibration
d.
All data: That additional data (on top of System and User data) which may be initialized
without significantly impacting the machines operation. (i.e. machine variables, SA/KO
settings, Fault log).
e.
dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration
Copier NVM Initialization
Fax NVM initialization
Purpose
Purpose
To reset specific machine variable NVM or all machine variable NVM non-volatile memory (with
the exception of protected NVM for which a password is required) to their default values.
To return to default the fax NVM settings that are stored on the fax card. Refer to Fax Document.
NOTE: Initialization does not affect the billing counter and accounting.
NOTE: The Edoc CD must be in the CD drive to use the Fax Document link.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
Select dC301 NVM Initialization.
4.
Select dC301 NVM Initialization.
5.
Select Copier.
5.
Select Fax.
6.
Select the sub-domain. Refer to Table 1 for the functions in each sub domain.
6.
7.
Copy Controller
User
Scanner
System
Print Engine
All
Finisher
NOTE: Deletion of all data.
Select the NVM data to reset. Refer to Table 1 for the functions that are reset to default.
User
7.
Select Initialize when the pop-up window appears confirm the request.
System
8.
A message will be displayed to indicate successful completion.
All
9.
Exit dC301 NVM Initialization.
8.
Select the NVM data to reset. Refer to Table 2 for the functions that are reset to default.
Select Initialize, when the pop-up window appears confirm the request.
A message will be displayed to indicate successful completion.
11. Switch off and switch on the machine, GP 14, for the changes to take effect.
February 2013
6-261
dC301
(1) These counters are reset using the Reset Counters option provided in the Call Closeout
feature.
Table 1 Copier NVM
Sub-Domain
NVM Initialization Type
User Data System

All Data
NVM
Data NVM NVM
Copy Controller
All
Billing Counter
N
Y
Fault Counter (1)
User Data
NVM Initialization Type NVM
Controlled Access (2)
Completed Job Log
Fault Log
Auditron
Configuration
Configuration
Diagnostics
SA / KO Setting
Debug
SA / KO Setting
Machine Variable
Machine Variable Xero
Machine Variable Registration
Machine Variable Paper Path
Machine Variable DADH
Machine Variable Platen
Auditron
ESS
JBA Database
JBA Configuration
Auditron Configuration
HFSI Counter
NVM Machine Variable
(2) The Fax functionality for the NVM All Data Initialization will result in all of the NVM data
being deleted, which is why the other categories are shown in brackets.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
dC301
(Y)
Configuration
Configuration
(Y)
SA / KO Setting
(Y)
Y
Y
N
Configuration
Finisher
(Y)
Controlled Access
Machine Speed, Market Region
SA / KO Setting
Completed Job Log
SA / KO Setting
System Data
NVM
All Data NVM
Y
N
Crash Recovery Type
Printer
Table 2 Fax NVM
System Usage Counter

Diagnostic Counter (1)
Scanner
NOTE: The booklet maker NVM is not reset as it is custom set for each unit.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
February 2013
6-262
dC312 Network Echo Test
dC330 Component Control
Purpose
Purpose
To check network connectivity.
To show the status of input components e.g. sensors, and to run or energize output components e.g. motors, solenoids.
Procedure
Description
2.
3.
Select dC312 Network Echo Test.
Output and input component codes are entered into the Component Control Table on the UI,
and then checked individually or in permitted groups. The codes in the tables are grouped in
function chain order, refer to GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files.
1.
4.
Select the required protocol from TCP / IP, AppleTalk or Novel or IPX.
5.
Select Start Test.

The status region at the top of the user interface will indicate that the test is in progress.
The status region will indicate the result of the test before returning to the previous display.
6.
7.
NOTE: To check the operation of motor encoders, abatement fan tachometer and the bypass
width potentiometer refer to dC140 Analog Monitor.
Go to the appropriate procedure:
Input Components
Output Components
Input Components
When the appropriate code is entered the status of the component will be shown on the UI.
NOTE: The logic level shown on the circuit diagrams with the signal name will be the actual
signal as measured with a service meter. This will not necessarily be the same as the logic
state shown on the UI, especially where the output is inverted. When testing components using
these control codes, look for a change in state, not for a high or low.
The displayed status of the input component can be changed by causing the component status
to change, e.g. operating a sensor with a sheet of paper.
Go to the appropriate table:
Table 1 Input codes 01

Table 2 Input Codes 05
February 2013
6-263
dC312, dC330
Output Components
Input Codes
When the appropriate code is entered, the component will run or energize for a set time. The
default time-out for most components is set at 90 seconds, but can be as short as 5 seconds.
Some components require that other components are run or energized at the same time. It is
possible to enter and run or energize up to six component control codes (not fax), but only in
permitted groups. If illegal combination of codes are entered the components will not run or
energize.
Code
Go to the appropriate table:
Table 18 Output Codes 05

3.
Select dC330 Component Control.
General
01-100 Upper Door Interlock
Sensor to detect Upper left hand

door position
High = door closed, low =

door open
01-101 Mid Door Interlock
Mid door interlock

door open
01-102 Lower Door Interlock
Lower Door Interlock

door open
01-103 Front Door Interlock
Front Door Interlock

door open
Code
Description
General
DADH input tray document width

sensing potentiometer (Q05-095).
Displayed as Zone 1 or Zone 2 or
Zone 3...Zone 6
Zones 1-6
Displayed Name
05-095 DADH Width sensor
05-096 DADH TAR sensor DADH takeaway roll sensor (Q05096)
High = document present,

low = no document
05-097 DADH CVT sensor DADH upper CVT sensor (Q05097)

low = no document
05-102 DADH Document

sensor

low = no document
Paper detected on document sensor (Q05-102)
05-204 DADH feed sensor Feed sensor (Q05-330).

low = no document
05-206 DADH pre-reg sen- Pre-registration Sensor (Q05-206). High = document present,
sor
low = no document
2.
Description
Procedure
1.

Displayed Name
05-209 DADH Exit sensor
DADH Exit sensor (Q05-209).

low = no document
05-212 DADH cover interlock switch
DADH cover interlock open (S05212).

door open
05-221 DADH Tray size

sensor 1
Tray size sensor 1 (Q05-221).

low = no document
05-222 DADH Tray size

sensor 2
Tray size sensor 2 (Q05-222).

low = no document
a. Touch the Chain field and enter the 3 digit chain number using the numeric key pad.
b. Touch the Link field and enter the required link number using the numeric key pad.
c. Touch Add.
Once the required component control codes are in the lower list select the required code
and choose options from the menu as required.
Code
Description
General
Stripper latch sensor.
High/Low
10-015 Post transfix sensor Post transfix sensor (11)

(11)
High/Low
6.
Select close to exit dC330 Component Control.
10-016 Pre exit sensor (12) Pre exit sensor (12)
High/Low
7.
CAUTION
Check the component control tables for components that will damage the machine if run
together.
4.
Select the required codes as follows:

If the component control code is not known:
a.
Select a chain from the drop down list.
b.
Select the required component and touch Add.

If the required component control code is known:
5.
dC330
Displayed Name
10-014 Stripper latch sensor
February 2013
6-264

Code
Displayed Name
10-017 Exit sensor (15)
Description
General
Code
Exits sensor (15)
High/Low
12-090 Inserter paper length

sensor 3
Displayed Name
HVF BM inserter paper length sen- High = sheet size

detected
sor 3 (Q12-090) detects the DOF
(Direction Of Feed) sheet size in
inserter tray.
12-091 Nip Split Sensor
HVF nip split sensor (Q12-091)

detects the position of the buffer
movement tray in ascending.
High = Nip split home
12-092 Paper Pusher Upper

Sensor
HVF paper pusher upper sensor

(Q12-092) detects if the pusher is
in the upper position.
High = upper position
12-093 Pressing and Support

Encoder Snr
HVF pressing and support encoder High = made, low = not

sensor (Q12-093) detects the tim- detected
ing for pressing and support motor.
12-094 Paper Pusher Lower

Sensor
HVF paper pusher lower sensor

(Q12-094) detects if paper pusher
is in lower position.

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
12-075 Punch sensor 2
HVF punch position sensor 2 (Q12- On = Made

075).
12-076 Punch sensor 3
HVF punch position sensor 3 (Q12- On = Made

076).
12-077 Entry sensor
LCSS and HVF entry sensor (Q12- On = Made

077).
12-078 Punch sensor
LCSS and HVF punch position sen- On = Made

sor (Q12-078).

sensor 1
HVF inserter paper length sensor 1 High = sheet size

(Q12-079) detects the DOF (Direc- detected
tion Of Feed) sheet size in inserter
tray.

sensor 2
HVF inserter paper length sensor 2 High = sheet size

tray.
Description
General
High = made, low = not

detected
12-096 Ejector motor encoder HVF/LCSS ejector module motor

sensor
encoder sensor (Q12-096) detects detected
the timing for ejector module motor.
12-097 Ejector roll motor
encoder sensor
HVF ejector roll motor encoder sen- High = made, low = not
sor (Q12-097) detects the timing for detected
ejector plate motor.
12-098 Ejector plate home

sensor
HVF ejector plate home sensor

(Q12-098) detects if ejector plate is detected
in home position.
12-099 Ejector lower paddle

home sensor
HVF ejector lower paddle home

sensor (Q12-099) detects if eject
unit lower paddle is in home position.

detected
12-081 Inserter paper width

sensor 1
HVF inserter paper width sensor

(Q12-081) detects STS (Side To
Side) sheet size in inserter tray.
High = sheet size

detected
12-082 Inserter unit empty

sensor
HVF inserter unit empty sensor

(Q12-082) detects paper present
inserter tray.
High = paper present,

low = no paper
12-083 Inserter LE sensor
HVF inserter LE sensor (Q12-083) High = LE detected, low

detects the LE of the paper.
= LE not detected
12-084 Inserter TE sensor
HVF inserter TE sensor (Q12-084) High = TE detected, low

detects the TE of the paper.
= TE not detected
12-106 Compile exit sensor
HVF/LCSS Compile exit sensor

(Q12-106)
On/Off
12-085 Inserter bottom plate

sensor
HVF inserter bottom plate sensor

High = home position,
(Q12-085) detects the bottom plate low = not home
in home position.
12-107 Top tray exit sensor
HVF/LCSS Top tray exit sensor

(Q12-107)
On/Off
HVF Buffer position sensor (Q12086) detects paper.
12-114 Punch unit home sensor
HVF Punch unit home sensor

(Q12-114)
On/Off
12-086 Buffer position sensor
HVF booklet exit sensor (Q12-087) High = paper present,

detects paper exiting the finisher to low = no paper
enter into booklet maker.
12-118 Chad bin present sen- HVF Chad bin present sensor
sor
(Q12-118)
On/Off
12-087 HVF booklet exit sensor

12-088 Nip home sensor
HVF nip home sensor (Q12-088)

detects the position of the buffer
movement tray in descending.
High = Nip home
12-089 BM entry sensor
HVF BM entry sensor (Q12-089)

detects paper entry to the booklet
maker.

low = no paper

low = no paper
12-133 LO staple sensor
HVF/LCSS LO staple sensor (Q12- On/Off

133)
12-134 SELF PRIMING sensor
HVF/LCSS SELF PRIMING sensor On/Off

(Q12-134)
12-135 Staple home sensor
HVF/LCSS Staple home sensor

(Q12-135)
February 2013
6-265
On/Off
dC330

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
Code
HVF/LCSS bin 1 motor encoder

sensor (Q12-162) detects the timing for stacker unit motor

detected
12-179 Inserter jam cover

interlock
HVF inserter jam cover interlock

sensor (Q12-179) detects if inserter detected
jam cover is closed
12-164 Tri Folder Entry Sensor HVF BM tri folder entry sensor
(Q12-163) detects the booklet and
tri folder entry. Trigger point for
CL80

detected
12-180 Tamp front home sensor
LCSS and HVF front tamper home High = home, low = not
sensor (Q12-180) detects if front
home
tamper is home
12-181 Tamp rear home sensor
LCSS and HVF rear tamper home

sensor (Q12-181), detects if rear
tamper is home
High = home, low = not

home
12-182 Tamp front away sensor
LCSS and HVF front tamper away

sensor (Q12-182), detects if front
tamper is away

home
12-183 Tamp rear away sensor
LCSS and HVF rear tamper away

sensor (Q12-183), detects if rear
tamper is away

home
12-184 Ejector home sensor
HVF ejector home sensor (Q12184) detects the home (closed)

position of the ejector housing.
LCSS ejector home sensor (Q12184) detects the home position of
the ejector assembly

home
High = out, low= not out
12-163 Bin 1 Motor Encoder

Sensor
12-165 Tri Folder Assist Gate

Sensor
HVF BM tri folder assist gate sen- High = made, low = not
sor (Q12-164) detects trigger point detected
for L81
12-166 Tri Folder Exit Sensor
HVF BM tri folder exit sensor (Q12- High = made, low = not
165) detects booklet and tri folder detected
exit to tray
12-168 Stapler index sensor
HVF/LCSS stapler unit is in index

position (Q12-168)
12-169 Inserter paper width

sensor 2
HVF inserter paper width sensor 2 High = sheet size

tray.
12-170 BM paper present sen- HVF BM paper present sensor

(Q12-170)
sor
On = made
Displayed Name
On = made
Description
General

B Sensor
HVF pressing and support B sensor High = made, low = not

(Q12-171) detects the initial posi- detected
tion sensor
12-185 Ejector out sensor
LCSS and HVF Ejector out sensor

(Q12-185) detects the out position
of the ejector assembly

A Snr
HVF pressing and support A sensor High = made, low = not

(Q12-172) detects the home posi- detected
tion sensor
12-186 Paddle roll home sensor

C Snr
HVF pressing and support C sen- High = made, low = not

sor (Q12-173) detects the out posi- detected
tion sensor
LCSS paddle roll position sensor,

HVF paddle roll home sensor (Q12- home
186) detects the home position of
the paddle roll
12-187 Bin1 90% full sensor
12-174 Paddle Unit Upper

Sensor
HVF paddle unit upper sensor

(Q12-174) detects the paddle unit
position

detected
LCSS and HVF bin 1 90% full sen- High = 90% or more full,
sor (Q12-187) detects when bin 1 is low = less than 90% full
90% or more full
12-188 Bin1 upper level sensor
12-175 Paddle Unit Lower

Sensor
HVF paddle unit lower sensor

(Q12-175) detects paddle unit
lower position

detected
LCSS and HVF bin 1 upper level

High = stack sensed,
sensor (Q12-188) detects the top of low = stack not sensed
the paper stack in bin 1
12-176 Stapler unit mid home

sensor
HVF stapler unit mid home sensor

(Q12-175) detects if stapler unit is
in mid home position

detected
12-177 Docking interlock
LCSS and HVF docking interlock

switch (S12-176)
High = docked, low =

un-docked
12-178 Inserter top cover

interlock
HVF inserter top cover interlock

sensor (Q12-178) detects if inserter detected
tray top cover is closed
dC330
12-190 Bin1 upper limit switch LCSS and HVF bin 1 upper limit
High = bin detected, low
switch (S12-190) detects the upper = bin not detected
limit of bin 1 movement
12-191 Bin1 lower limit switch LCSS and HVF bin 1 upper limit
High = bin detected, low
switch (S12-191) detects the lower = bin not detected
limit of bin 1 movement
12-193 Chad bin Lvl sensor
LCSS and HVF chad bin full sensor High = bin full, low = bin
(Q12-193) detects when the level of not full
the chad reaches a pre-set value
12-194 Punch head home

sensor
LCSS and HVF punch head home High = punch home, low
sensor (Q12-194) detects the home = punch not home
position of the punch head
February 2013
6-266

Code
Displayed Name
Description

General
Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
12-195 Punch hd present sen- LCSS punch head present sensor High = punch installed,
(Q12-195) detects if a hole punch is low = punch not
sor
installed
installed
12-216 BM crease roll motor

encoder
HVF BM crease roll motor encoder High = bar in encoder

sensor (Q12-216) generates motor wheel, low = gap in
speed pulses
encoder wheel
12-196 SH1 paper sensor
LCSS staple head 1 home sensor High = home, low = not

(Q12-196) detects when the staple home
head is fully open (home position)
12-217 BM SH carrier closed
HVF BM staple head carrier closed High = closed, low = not

sensor (Q12-217) detects when the closed
carrier is in the closed position
12-197 Top cover interlock
Detects if finisher top cover is open High = closed
12-202 Ejector paper present

sensor
HVF ejector paper present sensor

(Q12-202) detects compiled paper
for stapling
12-218 BM SH1 home sensor HVF BM staple head 1 home sensor (Q12-218) detects when the
staple head is fully open (home
position)
On = made
12-204 BM guide home sensor HVF BM backstop guide home sen- High = home, low = not
home
sor (Q12-204) detects when the
backstop is in the home position
12-219 BM SH1 staples low
12-205 BM tamper 1 home

sensor
12-220 BM SH2 home sensor HVF BM staple head 2 home sensor (Q12-220) detects when the
staple head is fully open (home
position)
HVF BM tamper 1 home sensor

(Q12-205) detects when the BM
tampers are in the home position

home
12-206 BM Bin2 90% full sen- HVF BM bin 2 90% full sensor
(Q12-206) detects when bin 2 is
sor
90% or more full
High = 90% or more full,

low = less than 90% full
12-207 Flapper home sensor
High = home
HVF booklet maker flapper home

sensor (Q12-207)
12-208 PTU switch
HVF PTU switch (S12-208) detects High = made, low = not

if pause to unload button is pressed detected
12-209 TriFold front dr interlock
HVF tri fold door interlock (S12High = closed, low =

209) detects if the tri fold front door door open
is closed
12-210 TriFold top cover inter- HVF tri fold top cover interlock
(S12-210) detects if the tri fold top
lock
cover is closed
High = closed, low =

cover open
12-211 OCT 90% Full sensor
OCT level sensor (Q12-211)

detects when the tray is 90% full
High = 90% full
12-212 OCT index sensor
OCT index sensor (Q12-212)

detects when a tray is in an index
position
High = at index position
12-213 BM exit sensor
HVF BM exit sensor (Q12-213)

High = detected, low =
detects booklets exiting the booklet not detected
maker
12-214 BM crease blade home HVF BM crease blade home sensor High = home, low = not
(Q12-214) detects when the crease home
blade is fully retracted
12-215 BM crease blade
motor encoder
HVF BM crease blade motor

encoder (Q12-215) generates
motor speed pulses
High = bar in encoder

wheel, low = gap in
encoder wheel

home
HVF BM staple head 1 staples low High = almost empty,

sensor (Q12-219) detects when
low = plentiful staples
staple cartridge is almost empty
home
12-221 BM SH2 staples low
HVF BM staple head 2 staples low High = almost empty,

sensor (Q12-221) detects when
low = plentiful staples
staple cartridge is almost empty
12-222 BM crease roll gate

home
HVF BM crease roll gate home

High = gate raised, low
sensor (Q12-222) detects when the = gate not raised
gate is fully raised (home position)
12-303 Front door interlock
LCSS and HVF front door interlock High = closed, low =

(Q12-303) detects if the finisher
open
front door is open
12-315 Inserter pickup sensor Inserter pickup sensor (Q12-315)

detects trail edge of paper
On = made
12-316 Inserter acceleration

sensor
Inserter acceleration sensor (Q12316) detects acceleration position

of paper
On = made
12-317 Stapler cartridge sensor
HVF Stapler cartridge sensor
On = made
Off = clear
12-318 Stapler jaw home sen- HVF/LCSS Stapler jaw home sensor
sor
On = made
Off = clear
12-319 Stapler safety switch
HVF Stapler safety switch
On = made
Off = clear
12-320 Inserter standby sensor
Inserter standby sensor
On = made
Off = clear
12-321 Buffer path sensor
HVF Buffer path sensor
On = made
Off = clear
12-322 Paper pressing sensor HVF Paper pressing sensor
February 2013
6-267
On = made
Off = clear
dC330

Code
Displayed Name
Description
62-018 Carriage Home Sensor Scan carriage home sensor (Q62018) detects the home position of
the scan carriage

General
Code
High = Home, low = not

home
71-395 TAR 1 sensor
62-019 Platen down sensor
Scanner platen down sensor (Q62- High = closed, low =

019) detects DADH is closed.
open
62-020 24v detect
Detects 24v in scanner
High = +24v present,

low = +24v not present
62-021 12v detect
Detects 12v in scanner
High = +12v present,

low = +12v not present
62-022 DADH hotline detect
DADH active hotline detection sen- High = Hotline active

sor
Low = Hotline inactive
Displayed Name
Description
General
3TM. Detects presence of paper at High = made

TAR 1 sensor (Q71-395)
Description
General
72-102 T2 feed sensor
3TM. Detects when lead edge of

paper at tray 2 feed sensor (Q72101)
High = paper present
72-201 Tray 2 empty sensor
3TM. To detect tray 2 empty sensor High/low

on (Q72-201). Not used for SAR
feeders.
62-251 Document size sensor Document size sensor 1(Q62-251) High = paper present
1
located under the platen glass
72-321 T2 Size Switch 1
Size switch 1 (S72-321)
High = made
62-253 Document size sensor Document size sensor 2(Q62-253) High = paper present
2
located under the platen glass
High = made
High = made
High = made
Size switch 5 (Q72325), Not used

for SAR feeders
High = made
72-337 T2 Stack Height Sensor
3TM. Detects paper stack is in cor- High = stack up

rect position to feed from T2 (Q72337)
72-396 TAR 2 sensor
3TM. Detects presence of paper

sheet at TAR 2 sensor (Q72-396)
62-301 Angle sensor
Scanner angle sensor (Q62-301)
High/Low
Code
Displayed Name

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
70-100 Horz transport home

switch
3TM. Detects presence of horizon- High/low

tal transport in home position
70-101 Vert transport home

sensor
3TM. Detects presence of vertical

transport in home position.
70-398 Tray 3 transport sensor
3TM. Detects presence of sheet in High = paper present

horizontal position
High/low

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
3TM. Detects when lead edge of

paper at Tray 1 feed sensor (Q71101)
71-201 Tray 1 Empty Sensor
3TM. To detect Tray 1 empty sensor on (Q71-201). Not used for

SAR feeders.
High/low
High = made
High = made
71-101 T1 Feed Sensor
High = made
High = made
High = made
71-336 T1 Stack Height Sensor
3TM. Detects paper stack is in cor- High = stack up

rect position to feed from tray 1
(Q71-336)

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
73-103 T3 feed sensor
Detects when lead edge of paper at High = paper present

tray 3 feed sensor
73-201 T3 empty sensor
To detect tray 3 empty sensor on
High/low
73-303 T3 home sensor
Detects when tray 3 home
High/low
73-383 T3 stack height sensor Tray 3 elevated to feed position
dC330
High = made
73-397 TAR 3 sensor
High/low
Detects presence of paper sheet at High/low

TAR 3 sensor
Code
Description
General
74-335 Bypass empty sensor
Bypass paper empty sensor (Q74335)
74-350 Bypass width sensor
Bypass analogue width sensor

(Q74-350)
Voltage range (for p1)

width (in mm/inch post
p1)
74-406 Bypass feed sensor
Detects the lead edge of paper at

bypass feed sensor
February 2013
6-268
Displayed Name

Code
Displayed Name
74-413 Bypass nudger home

sensor
Description

General
Code
Bypass nudger home sensor (Q74- On/off

413)
74-415 Bypass width pot value Returns actual width size based on Value between 0 and
width sensor state (Q74-415)
3.65
Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
Detects presence of tray 5 door in

closed position / toggle switch up
position
High = door closed =

toggle switch up
75-011 Tray 5 stack height

sensor
Detects paper stack is in correct

position to feed from tray 5
High = stack up
75-012 Tray 5 down sensor
Detects when tray 5 is lowered
High = paper tray lowered
75-016 Tray 5 empty sensor
Detects when the tray is empty
High = tray empty
75-017 Tray 5 docking switch
Detects when the tray is docked

against the machine
High = tray docked
75-010 Tray 5 door switch

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
91-011 Lower carriage home

sensor
Displayed Name
IME lower carriage home sensor
High/low
91-012 Upper carriage home

sensor
IME upper carriage home sensor
High/low
91-014 HM Position Sensor
IME HM position sensor
High/low
91-019 Waste tray sensor
IME waste tray sensor
High/low

Code
Description
General
93-025 Ink load door switch
Displayed Name
IME ink load door switch
High/low
93-026 Ink load entry snr

Magenta 1
IME Ink load entry sensor Magenta High/low

1
93-027 Ink load entry snr Cyan IME Ink load entry sensor Cyan 2
2
High/low
93-028 Ink load entry snr Yellow 3
IME Ink load entry sensor Yellow 3 High/low
93-029 Ink load entry snr

Black 4
IME Ink load entry sensor Black 4
93-030 Ink load low snr

Magenta 1
IME Ink load low sensor Magenta 1 High/low
High/low
Description
General
82-110 Vertical transport sensor (5)
IME vertical transport sensor (5)
High/low
93-031 Ink load low snr Cyan

2
IME Ink load low sensor Cyan 2
High/low
82-125 Confirm sensor (16)
IME confirm sensor (16)
High/low
93-032 Ink load low snr Yellow 3
IME Ink load low sensor Yellow 3
High/low
93-033 Ink load low snr Black

4
IME Ink load low sensor Black 4
High/low
93-034 Ink load sensor Black

1
IME Ink load sensor K1
High/low

Code
Description
General
83-010 Duplex sensor (17)
Displayed Name
Duplex sensor (17)
High/Low
83-110 Duplex start sensor

(13)
IME duplex start sensor (13)
High/low
93-035 Ink load sensor

Magenta 1
IME Ink load sensor M1
High/low
83-125 Duplex end sensor

(14)
IME duplex end sensor (14)
High/low
93-036 Ink load sensor Cyan 1 IME Ink load sensor C1
High/low
93-037 Ink load sensor Yellow IME Ink load sensor Y1

1
High/low
93-038 Ink load sensor Black

2
IME Ink load sensor K2
High/low

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
89-004 Reg / Preheat Home

sensor
IME RLPH reg / preheat home sen- High/low

sor
93-039 Ink load sensor

Magenta 2
IME Ink load sensor M2
High/low
89-005 Registration scan bar
IME registration scan bar
On/off
93-040 Ink load sensor Cyan 2 IME Ink load sensor C2
High/low
High/low
93-041 Ink load sensor Yellow IME Ink load sensor Y2

2
High/low
89-006 Pretransfix sensor (20) IME pretransfix sensor (20)
February 2013
6-269
dC330

Code
Displayed Name
94-105 Cleaning unit home

sensor
Table 20 Output codes 12
Description
General
Code
IME cleaning unit home sensor
High/low
12-045 SU1 motor backward
Displayed Name
Output Codes
Displayed Name Description
General
05-062 DADH feed clutch DADH feed clutch (CL05-062)
On/off. Normally linked with

feed motor. 30 seconds timeout.
05-074 DADH feed motor DADH feed motor (MOT05-074)
On/off. 90 seconds timeout
05-098 DADH nudger

motor
General
HVF/LCSS Staple unit 1 motor reverse On/off. 110 millisec(MOT12-045)

onds time out.
CAUTION
Do not run the following codes
together: 12-045, 12-233, 12-236, 12242, 12-244, 12-249, 12-250. Running these codes at the same time can
cause damage to the machine.

Code
Description
12-056 SetCamp SolenoidOn
HVF SetClamp SolenoidOn (SOL12056)
On/off. 100 milliseconds time out.
12-059 Elevator motor up
HVF/LCSS Elevator motor up
On/off.
500miliseconds timeout.
12-060 Elevator motor down
HVF/LCSS Elevator motor down
On/off.
500miliseconds timeout.
DADH nudger motor (MOT05-098) On/off. 10 seconds time out
05-099 DADH CVT motor DADH CVT stepper motor

(MOT05-099)
05-100 DADH duplex

solenoid
12-223 Transport Motor 1
High = Active. 90 seconds

time out
Runs the LCSS transport Motor 1, and On/off. 90 seconds

HVF transport motor 1A and Transport time out
motor 1B (MOT12-223)
12-224 Transport Motor 2
Runs the LCSS, and HVF transport

motor 2 (MOT12-224)
12-225 Exit Diverter Solenoid
Runs the LCSS, HVF exit diverter gate On/off. 5 seconds

solenoid and HVF BM upper diverter time out
solenoid (SOL12-225)
12-226 Front Tamper Motor

Home
Runs the LCSS and HVF front tamper On/off. 5 seconds

motor (MOT12-227) to the home posi- time-out
tion.
12-227 Rear Tamper Motor

Home
Runs the LCSS and HVF rear tamper

motor (MOT12-228) to home position
12-228 Front Tamper Motor

Move
Runs the LCSS and HVF front tamper On/off. 5 seconds

motor (MOT12-226) move inbound.
time out
12-229 Rear Tamper Motor

Move
Runs the LCSS and HVF rear tamper

motor (MOT12-227) move inbound.
On/off. 5 seconds
time out
12-230 Tampers to A4LEF
Moves the LCSS tampers to A4LEF

position.
On/off. 5 seconds
time out
DADH duplex/exit solenoid

(SOL05-101)
05-101 DADH Active Hot- DADH Active Hotline. Required to

keep alive until DADH Hotline
line
Detect sensor can be run.
Code
Description
General
10-018 Post Transfix

motor (M4)
Displayed Name
Post transfix motor M4 (MOT10018)
On/off.
10-019 Front Transfix

Motor
Front Transfix Motor (MOT10-019) On/off.
10-020 Rear Transfix

Motor
Rear Transfix Motor (MOT10-020) On/off.
10-021 Stripper Solenoid
Stripper Solenoid (SOL10-021)
On/off.
10-022 Stripper Jam

Clearance LED
Stripper Jam Clearance LED
On/off.
10-023 Strip Gate Latch
Strip Gate Latch
On/off.
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
On/off. 5 seconds
time out
10-024 Transfix Front and Transfix Front and Back

Back
On/off.
12-231 Tampers to 8.5x11LEF Move the LCSS tampers to 8.5x11

LEF position.
On/off. 5 seconds
time out
10-025 Strip Gate Unlatch Strip Gate Unlatch
On/off.
12-232 Tamper Motor Cycle
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
dC330
February 2013
6-270
Cycles the LCSS tampers in and out

until time-out or stop.

Code
Displayed Name
12-233 Ejector Roll Motor
Description
General
Code
Runs the HVF ejector roll motor

(MOT12-235)
CAUTION
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
12-244 Punch Head Run
Displayed Name

Description
General
Runs the LCSS and HVF hole punch

motor (MOT12-244) continuously
CAUTION
On/off. 15 seconds
time out

12-234 Ejector Motor Home
Runs the LCSS ejector motor

(MOT12-236) to the home position
On/off. 5 seconds
time out
12-245 Punch Unit Motor For- Runs the HVF punch unit motor
(MOT12-245) forward
ward
On/off.
12-235 Ejector Motor Move
Runs the LCSS ejector motor

(MOT12-237) to the out position
On/off. 5 seconds
time out
12-246 Punch Unit Motor

Reverse
Runs the HVF punch unit motor

(MOT12-245) in reverse
On/off.
12-236 Ejector Motor Cycle
Runs the LCSS and HVF ejector motor On/off. 90 seconds

(MOT12-238) cycle routine until time time out
out or stop.
CAUTION
12-247 Staple Head 1 Motor
Runs the LCSS and HVF staple head

1 motor (MOT12-247)
CAUTION
On/off. 15 seconds
time out

12-237 Paddle Roll Motor
Home
Runs the LCSS paddle roll motor

12-238 Paddle Roll Motor Run Runs the LCSS and HVF paddle roll
motor (MOT12-240) until timeout or
stop
On/off. 15 seconds
time out
On/off. 15 seconds
time out
12-239 Paddle Unit Motor

Descend
Runs the HVF lower paddle unit motor On/off. 90 seconds

(MOT12-241) in reverse.
time out
12-240 Paddle Unit Motor Lift
Runs the HVF paddle unit motor

(MOT12-242) to lift the paddle unit
12-241 Bin 1 Elevator Motor

Home
Runs the LCSS and HVF bin 1 elevate On/off. 15 seconds

motor (MOT12-241) to the home posi- time out
tion.
12-242 Bin1 Elevator Motor

Cycle
Runs the LCSS and HVF bin 1 elevate On/off. 90 seconds

motor (MOT12-242) to cycle bins up/ time out.
down until time-out or stop.
CAUTION
Runs the LCSS hole punch motor

12-248 SH 1 Motor Reverse

Home
Runs the LCSS and HVF staple head On/off. 15 seconds

1 motor (MOT12-248) in reverse to the time out
home position
12-249 SU 1 Motor Forward
Runs the LCSS and HVF stapling unit On/off. 15 seconds

1 motor (MOT12-249) increment for- time out
ward.
CAUTION
On/off. 90seconds
timeout

12-243 Punch Head Move
Home
Do not run code 12-247 without 2

sheets of paper in the stapler jaws.
Running this code without the paper in
position can cause damage to the
machine.
On/off. 15 seconds
time out
12-250 SU1 Motor Cycle
Runs the LCSS and HVF stapling unit On/off. 90 seconds

1 motor (MOT12-250) cycle routine
time out
CAUTION
12-251 BM Compiler Motor
Runs the HVF BM compiler motor

(MOT12-251)
12-252 BM Crease Blade

Motor
Runs the HVF BM crease blade motor On/off. 90 seconds

(MOT12-252) cycle routine
time out
12-253 BM Crease Roll Motor Runs the HVF BM crease roll motor
(MOT12-253)
February 2013
6-271
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
On/off. 6 seconds
timeout
dC330

Code
Displayed Name
Description

General
Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
12-254 BM Staple Head 1

Motor
Runs the HVF BM staple head 1 motor On/off. 5 seconds

(MOT12-254)
time out
12-275 BM Staple Hd 2 Motor Runs the HVF BM staple head 2 motor On/off. 5 seconds
(MOT12-275)
time out
12-255 BM Back Stop Motor
Runs the HVF BM backstop motor

(MOT12-255) to receive, staple, then
crease positions
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
12-276 BM Crease Roll Gate

Motor Open
12-256 BM Tamper 1 Motor
Runs the HVF BM tamper 1 motor

(MOT12-256)
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
12-300 OCT feed offset motor Runs the OCT feed offset motor
(MOT12-300)
On/off.
12-258 BM Diverter Solenoid
Energizes the HVF BM diverter solenoid (SOL12-258)
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout

Motor
Runs the pressing and support motor

(MOT12-323)
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout.
12-259 BM Stack Hold Solenoid
Energizes the HVF BM stack hold

solenoids (SOL12-259) part of back
stop assembly
On/off. 5 seconds
time out
12-324 PTU LED
Energizes the pause to unload LED.
On/off
12-325 Inserter Bottom Plate

Sensor
Runs the HVF inserter unit motor to

On/off. 90 seconds
lower the inserter bottom plate sensor. timeout.
12-260 Inserter Clutch.
Energizes the HVF inserter clutch

(CL12-260) to drive the pickup roll
On/off.
12-261 Inserter Motor
Runs the HVF inserter motor (MOT12- On/off.

261) to drive the inserter rolls
Code
12-262 Buffer Motor
Runs the HVF Buffer motor (MOT12262) to drive the buffer rolls
On/off.
Runs the HVF bypass feed motor

(MOT12-263) to drive the feed rolls
On/off.
12-263 Bypass Feed Motor

12-264 Nip Split Motor
12-265 Paper Pusher Motor
12-266 Curl Suppressor Sole- Energizes the HVF curl suppressor

solenoid (SOL12-266) to activate the
noid
pressing device
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
Runs the HVF nip split motor (MOT12- On/off.

264) to activate the buffer movement
tray
Runs the HVF paper pusher motor
(MOT12-265) to drive the paper
pusher
Runs the HVF BM crease roll gate

motor (MOT12-276) to the open position
On/off.
Displayed Name
Description
General
20-002 Diag. LED 30 Red
Switches diagnostic LED 30 red
On/off
20-003 Diag. LED 30 green
Switches diagnostic LED 30 green
On/off
20-010 Sngl Tone 0Hz Ln1
Emits single tone 0Hz on line 1
On/off
20-011
On/off
On/off
On/off
On/off
On/off
On/off
Sngl Tone 400Hz Ln1
20-017 ANSAM Ln1
On/off.
On/off
20-018 CI Ln1
On/off
20-020 DTMF # Line1
Emits DTMF # on line 1
On/off
20-021 DTMF * Line1
Emits DTMF * on line 1
On/off
20-022 DTMF 0 Line1
Emits DTMF 0 on line 1
On/off
20-023 DTMF 1 Line1
Emits DTMF 1on line 1
On/off
20-024 DTMF 2 Line1
On/off
20-025 DTMF 3 Line1
On/off
20-026 DTMF 4 Line1
On/off
20-027 DTMF 5 Line1
On/off
Energizes the HVF clutch drive (CL12- On/off. 5 seconds

269) to drive tri folding rolls
timeout
20-028 DTMF 6 Line1
On/off
20-029 DTMF 7 Line1
On/off
Runs the HVF Booklet maker flapper

motor (MOT12-271)
On/off. 90 seconds
timeout
20-030 DTMF 8 Line1
On/off
20-031 DTMF 9 Line1
On/off
12-273 BM Crease Roll Gate

Motor
Runs the HVF BM crease roll gate

motor (MOT12-273) cycle routine
On/off. 15 seconds
time out
20-032 DTMF A Line1
Emits DTMF A on line 1
On/off
12-274 BM Conveyor Drive

Motor
Runs the HVF BM conveyor drive

motor (MOT12-274)
On/off. 90 seconds
time out
20-033 DTMF B Line1
Emits DTMF B on line 1
On/off
20-034 DTMF C Line1
Emits DTMF C on line 1
On/off
12-267 Tri Folder Diverter

Solenoid
12-268 Tri Folder Assist Gate

Solenoid
12-269 Clutch Drive

12-271 BM Flapper Motor
Energizes the HVF tri folder diverter

On/off.
solenoid (SOL12-267) to activate the
tri folder diverter gate to divert paper to
tri fold path
Energizes the HVF tri folder assist
On/off.
gate solenoid (SOL12-268) to activate
the tri folder assist gate to assist C fold
into second nip
dC330
February 2013
6-272

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
Code
Description
General
20-035 DTMF D Line1
Emits DTMF D on line 1
On/off
20-088 CI Ln2
On/off
20-040 V.21 300 bps Line1
Emits V.21 300 bps on line 1
On/off
20-090 DTMF # Line2
Emits DTMF # on line 2
On/off
20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line1
Emits V.27ter 2400 bps on line 1
On/off
20-091 DTMF * Line2
Emits DTMF * on line 2
On/off
20-042 V.27ter 4800 bps Line1
On/off
20-092 DTMF 0 Line2
On/off
20-043 V.29 7200 bps Line1
On/off
20-093 DTMF 1 Line2
Emits DTMF 1on line 2
On/off
20-044 V.29 9600 bps Line1
On/off
20-094 DTMF 2 Line2
On/off
20-045 V.17 7200 bps Line1
On/off
20-095 DTMF 3 Line2
On/off
20-046 V.17 9600 bps Line1
On/off
20-096 DTMF 4 Line2
On/off
20-047 V.17 12000 bps Line1
On/off
20-097 DTMF 5 Line2
On/off
20-048 V.17 14400 bps Line1
On/off
20-098 DTMF 6 Line2
On/off
20-049 V.34 2400 bps Line1
On/off
20-099 DTMF 7 Line2
On/off
20-050 V.34 4800 bps Line1
On/off
20-100 DTMF 8 Line2
On/off
20-051 V.34 7200 bps Line1
On/off
20-101 DTMF 9 Line2
On/off
20-052 V.34 9600 bps Line1
On/off
20-102 DTMF A Line2
Emits DTMF A on line 2
On/off
20-053 V.34 12000 bps Line1
On/off
20-103 DTMF B Line2
Emits DTMF B on line 2
On/off
20-054 V.34 14400 bps Line1
On/off
20-104 DTMF C Line2
Emits DTMF C on line 2
On/off
20-055 V.34 16800 bps Line1
On/off
20-105 DTMF D Line2
Emits DTMF D on line 2
On/off
20-056 V.34 19200 bps Line1
On/off
20-110
V.21 300 bps Line2
On/off
20-057 V.34 21600 bps Line1
On/off
20-111
V.27ter 2400 bps Line2
On/off
20-058 V.34 24000 bps Line1
On/off
20-112
V.27ter 4800 bps Line2
On/off
20-059 V.34 26400 bps Line1
On/off
20-113
V.29 7200 bps Line2
On/off
20-060 V.34 28800 bps Line1
On/off
20-114
V.29 9600 bps Line2
On/off
20-061 V.34 31200 bps Line1
On/off
20-115
V.17 7200 bps Line2
On/off
20-062 V.34 33600 bps Line1
On/off
20-116
V.17 9600 bps Line2
On/off
20-070 ISDN mode Loopback
Applies a loop back of both B channels to the On/off

network
20-117
V.17 12000 bps Line2
On/off
20-118
V.17 14400 bps Line2
On/off
20-071 ISDN tst mode info 1
Provides INFO 1 signals on both B channels
On/off
20-119
V.34 2400 bps Line2
On/off
20-072 ISDN tst mode info 0
Provides INFO 0 signals on both B channels
On/off
20-120 V.34 4800 bps Line2
On/off
20-073 ISDN PH-ACT-REQ
Able to initiate activation procedures (PHACTIVATE REQUEST) primitive
On/off
20-121 V.34 7200 bps Line2
On/off
20-122 V.34 9600 bps Line2
On/off
20-074 ISDN LED 10/18 Red
Switches ISDN LED 10/18 red
On/off
20-123 V.34 12000 bps Line2
On/off
20-075 ISDN LED 10/18 Grn
Switches ISDN LED 10/18 green
On/off
20-124 V.34 14400 bps Line2
On/off
20-076 ISDN line relay
Switches SDN line relay
On/off
20-125 V.34 16800 bps Line2
On/off
On/off
20-126 V.34 19200 bps Line2
On/off
On/off
20-127 V.34 21600 bps Line2
On/off
On/off
20-128 V.34 24000 bps Line2
On/off
On/off
20-129 V.34 26400 bps Line2
On/off
On/off
20-130 V.34 28800 bps Line2
On/off
On/off
20-131 V.34 31200 bps Line2
On/off
On/off
20-132 V.34 33600 bps Line2
On/off
20-087 ANSAM Ln2
On/off
February 2013
6-273
Displayed Name
dC330

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
Code
42-062 Abatement fan
Runs the abatement fan
On/off
42-063 Enclosure fan
Runs the enclosure fan
On/off
71-002 T1 feed / elevate motor Runs the tray 1 feed / elevate motor
(MOT 71-002).
Displayed Name
Description
General
42-064 Drum fan
Runs the drum fan
On/off
Code
Description
General
Energizes the exposure lamp
On/off. 300 seconds

timeout. Can stop
before timeout

Displayed Name
62-002 Exposure lamp
62-023 Carriage move home
Moves scanner carriage to home posi- On/off. can only be

run independently
tion.
of other carriage
move components
62-024 Carriage mv doc size
Moves scanner carriage to document

size sensing position
62-025 Carriage Mv CVT

Code
Displayed Name
On/off. can only be

run independently
of other carriage
move components
62-026 Carriage Mv A pos
Moves scanner carriage to scan audit

position A
On/off. can only be

run independently
of other carriage
move components
62-027 Carriage Mv B pos

position B
On/off. can only be

run independently
of other carriage
move components
62-028 Carriage Mv C pos

position C
On/off. can only be

run independently
of other carriage
move components
Displayed Name
Description
70-025 3 Tray transport motor Feeds paper to vertical transport of

3TM
dC330
General
On/off. Linked to
tray 2 home sensor.
Paper tray must be
open when motor is
running. 90 seconds
timeout

Code
Description
General
73-001 T3 feed motor
Displayed Name
Runs the tray 3 feed motor (MOT73001)
On/off. Linked to
tray 3 home sensor.
Paper tray must be
open when motor is
running. 90 seconds
timeout
73-002 T3 elevate motor
Runs the tray 3 elevator motor

(MOT73-002) up.
On/off. Linked to
tray 3 home sensor.
Only run with tray
out. 10 seconds timeout
Code
Description

Displayed Name
74-420 Bypass feed motor

Code
Description
72-001 T2 feed / elevate motor Runs the tray 2 feed / elevate motor.
(MOT72-001)
On/off. can only be

run independently
of other carriage
move components
Moves scanner carriage to CVT position
On/off. Linked to
tray 1 home sensor.
Paper tray must be
open when motor is
running. 90 seconds
timeout
General
General
Runs the MSI feed motor (MOT74-420) On/off. 2 seconds

in the feed direction.
timeout
On/off. 60 seconds
timeout
Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
75-018 Tray 5 transport motor Feeds paper to middle door vertical

transport
On = Running
Off = Stop 60 seconds timeout
75-019 Tray 5 elevator motor

up
On = Running
February 2013
6-274

(MOT75-019) up

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
Code
75-020 Tray 5 elevator motor

down

(MOT75-019) down
On = Running
89-008 Registration Motor A2
75-117 Tray 5 feed motor
Runs the tray 5 feed motor (MOT75117) to drive the nudger and feed rolls
On=running
Off = stop. 60 seconds timeout

Code
Displayed Name
Displayed Name
Description
General
Runs registration motor A2 (MOT89008)
On/off
89-009 Reg / Preheat illumina- Reg / preheat illuminator

tor
On/off
89-011 Nip A: open
Nip A: open
On/off
89-012 Nip A: narrow
Nip A: narrow
On/off
89-013 Nip A: medium
Nip A: medium
On/off
89-014 Nip A: wide
Nip A: wide
On/off
Reg / preheat hatch close
On/off
On/off
Description
General
82-001 Vertical Trans Motor

Fwd (M2)
Runs vertical transport motor M2 forward (MOT82-001)
On/off
89-015 Reg / Preheat Hatch

close
Runs vertical transport motor M2

reverse (MOT82-001)
On/off
89-016 Reg / Preheat Hatch

open
Reg / Preheat hatch open
82-002 Vertical Trans Motor

Rev (M2)
Code
Description
General
91-016 IOD scanbar
Energizes the IOD scanbar
On/off
91-021 Carriage drive select

motor
Runs the carriage drive select motor

(MOT91-021)
CAUTION
On/off
82-003 Horizontal Trans Motor Runs horizontal transport motor M6 for- On/off
ward (MOT82-003)
Fwd (M6)
82-004 Horizontal Trans Motor Runs horizontal transport motor M6
Rev (M6)
reverse (MOT82-003)
82-005 Horizontal illuminator
Energizes the horizontal paper path

illuminator
On/off
On/off
82-007 Nip C release solenoid Energizes the nip C release solenoid

(SOL83-007).
On/off
82-008 Nip D solenoid
On/off
Energizes the nip D solenoid (SOL82008)

Code
Displayed Name
Description
General
83-001 Exit Motor Fwd (M5)
Exit motor M5 forward (MOT83-001)
On/off
83-002 Exit Motor Rev (M5)
Exit motor M5 reverse (MOT83-001)
On/off
83-003 Exit illuminator
Exit illuminator
On/off
83-004 HPP diverter solenoid
HPP diverter solenoid
On/off
83-006 Exit duplex diverter

solenoid
Exit duplex diverter solenoid
On/off
Code
Description
General
Reg / preheat air pumps
On/off

Displayed Name
88-008 Reg / Preheat Air

Pumps

Code
Displayed Name
89-007 Registration Motor A1
Description
General
Runs registration motor A1 (MOT89007)
On/off

Displayed Name

together: 91-021, 91-023, 91-031, 91032, 91-035, 91-036. Running these
codes at the same time can cause
damage to the machine.
91-023 HM vertical motion
motor
Runs the HM vertical motion motor

(MOT91-023)
CAUTION
On/off. Carriage
needs to be parked
prior to running this
test
91-024 Printhead roll adjust

motor 1
Runs the printhead roll adjust motor 1

(MOT91-024)
On/off
91-025 HM horizontal motion

motor
Runs the HM horizontal motion motor

(MOT91-025)
On/off

motor 2

(MOT91-026)
On/off

motor 3

(MOT91-027)
On/off

motor 4

(MOT91-028)
On/off
91-029 Printhead stitch adjust Runs the printhead stitch adjust motor
motor 1
1 (MOT91-029
On/off
February 2013
6-275
dC330

Code
Displayed Name
Description

General
Code
Description
General
91-030 Printhead stitch adjust Runs the printhead stitch adjust motor
motor 2
2 (MOT91-030)
On/off
93-049 Ink transport motor

backward
Ink transport motor backward
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
91-031 Upper carriage docking
On/off
93-050 Reservoir pump
Runs the ink load air pump

CAUTION
Upper carriage docking
Displayed Name
NOTE: Both carriages will be docked

when running either upper or lower
docking sequence
CAUTION
91-032 Lower carriage docking
Lower carriage docking
On/off
93-051 Ink key plate position 1 Ink key plate position 1
On/off
On/off
On/off
93-059 Purge Solenoid Valve

1
Purge solenoid valve 1 (printhead 2)

CAUTION

2

CAUTION

3

CAUTION

4

CAUTION
93-063 Black Ink Solenoid

Valve 5
Black ink solenoid valve 5 (printhead 3) On/off. Do not enerCAUTION

gize at the same
Do not run 93-050 at the same time as time as the inkload
air pump
running 93-059 to 93-078. Running
NOTE: Both carriages will be docked

when running either upper or lower
docking sequence
CAUTION
91-033 X axis drive motor U
Runs the X axis drive motor U (MOT91- On/off

033)
91-034 X axis drive motor L
Runs the X axis drive motor L (MOT91- On/off

034)
91-035 Upper carriage ship

restraint
This code is shown for information only.

The machine does not have carriage
restraint motors.
91-036 Lower carriage ship

restraint
This code is shown for information only.

The machine does not have carriage
restraint motors.
91-043 IOD shuttle motor
Runs the IOD shuttle motor (MOT91043)
91-044 Waste tray lock solenoid
Energizes the waste tray lock solenoid On/off

(SOL91-044)
91-045 Low pressure assist

valve
Energizes low pressure assist valve

(SOL91-045)
Code
Description
On/off. Do not run at

the same time as
Do not run 93-050 at the same time as the air router solenoids
these codes at the same time can
On/off
On/off
On/off. Do not energize at the same

air pump
air pump
air pump
air pump


Displayed Name
93-048 Ink transport motor fwd Ink transport motor fwd
dC330
General
On/off. 5 seconds
timeout
February 2013
6-276

Code
Displayed Name

Valve 6
Description

General
Code

gize at the same
air pump
Displayed Name

gize at the same
air pump
93-072 Cyan Ink Solenoid

Valve 14
Cyan ink solenoid valve 14 (printhead

2)
CAUTION

Valve 15

3)
CAUTION

Valve 16

1)
CAUTION
93-075 Magenta Ink Solenoid

Valve 17
Magenta ink solenoid valve 17 (printhead 1)

CAUTION

Valve 18

CAUTION

Valve 8

gize at the same
air pump
93-067 Yellow Ink Solenoid

Valve 9
Yellow Ink Solenoid Valve 9 (printhead On/off. Do not ener4)

gize at the same
time as the inkload
CAUTION
Do not run 93-050 at the same time as air pump

Valve 10
Yellow ink solenoid valve 10 (printhead On/off. Do not energize at the same
2)
time as the inkload
CAUTION

Valve 11
Yellow ink solenoid valve 11 (printhead On/off. Do not ener3)

gize at the same
CAUTION
time as the inkload

Valve 12
General

4)
CAUTION

Valve 7
Description

Valve 13
Yellow ink solenoid valve 12 (printhead On/off. Do not ener1)

gize at the same
time as the inkload
CAUTION

time as the inkload
time as the inkload
time as the inkload
time as the inkload
time as the inkload
On/off. Do no energize at the same
time as the inkload

February 2013
6-277
dC330
dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser

Code
Displayed Name

Valve 19

20
Description
General
Purpose

CAUTION

time as the inkload
Magenta ink solenoid 20 (printhead 4)
CAUTION

air pump
Code
Displayed Name
94-009 Drum Drive Motor

Slew Speed

Transfix Speed
General
Runs the drum drive motor (MOT94009) at slew speed
On/off. Motor must

be home before
running

Imaging Speed
Runs the drum drive motor (MOT94009) at transfix speed
Runs the drum drive motor (MOT94009) at imaging speed
dC330, dC335
Printheads - operation of the reservoir and jetstack heaters for each thermal setpoint on
the printheads.
Drum - operation of the front and rear drum surface heaters.
Registration preheat assembly (RaLPH) - operation of the registration preheat assembly

heater. Select RaLPH in the component list, refer to GP 40.
Umbilical - operation of the upper and lower umbilical heaters.
Ink loader melt plate assembly and ink melt reservoir - operation of the ink loader melt
plates and the ink melt reservoir heater.
dC335 generates a graph showing the temperature of the chosen component against the target temperature.
The term setpoint mode is used to describe the machine mode which defines the temperature
of the heater being exercised. The four modes are:
Description
94-012 Drum Drive Motor Rev Runs the drum drive motor (MOT94009) in reverse
To allow the heater systems of the machine to be run in specified modes and to measure the
temperature of those systems. The systems include the following components:
On/off. Motor must

be home before
running. If slewing
is stopped, the
drum heater needs
to be turned off
On/off. Motor must
be home before
running. If slewing
is stopped, the
drum heater needs
to be turned off
On/off. Motor must
be home before
running. If slewing
is stopped, the
drum heater needs
to be turned off
Ready = The heaters will run at the same operational temperature as printing copies.
Low = Heaters running at low temperature mode. Used to conserve electrical power while
still being able to quickly return to Ready / Standby
Sleep = Very conservative heater low temperature mode. Keeping only the printheads
slightly warm while the rest of the machine is allowed to cool to room temperature.
Off = Heaters are turned off (setpoint mode value = ambient temperature)
The temperatures for each component with the associated setpoint modes are listed in Table 1.
Table 1 Setpoint Temperatures
Component
Setpoint Ready
Setpoint Low
Setpoint Sleep
Setpoint Off
Printhead
reservoir
115 C
105 C
95 C
Ambient
Printhead
left jetstack
117 C
107 C
95 C
Ambient
Printhead
right jetstack
117 C
107 C
95 C
Ambient
Drum front
55 C
51 C
Ambient
Ambient
Drum rear
55 C
51 C
Ambient
Ambient
Registration preheat assembly

(RaLPH)
61 C
50 C
Ambient
Ambient
Umbilical upper
110 C
93 C
Ambient
Ambient
Umbilical lower
102 C
93 C
Ambient
Ambient
Ink melt reservoir
115 C
93 C
Ambient
Ambient
February 2013
6-278
dC361 NVM Save and Restore
The ink melt plate heaters only have options for On and Off as listed in Table 2.
Purpose
Table 2 Ink Melt Temperatures

Component
Setpoint on
Setpoint off
Ink melt Y
120 C
Ambient
Ink melt M
120 C
Ambient
Ink melt C
120 C
Ambient
Ink melt K
120 C
Ambient
To restore the NVM parameters of the machine to their previous values following a service
action; i.e. NVM expansion, Single Board Controller (SBC) Printed Wiring Board (PWB)
replacement, or any others that would necessitate a full NVM initialization. It can also be used
to recover a machines NVM values to a recent service call, in the event that a complete NVM
failure occurred. As an additional tool, the ability to copy files between the hard drive and a
USB drive is provided.
NOTE: The ink melt heater Setpoint Mode for On is displayed as 120 degrees C. This is a target temperature only. The heater will turn on for a few seconds each time it is activated. It is not
intended to reach 120 degrees. Due to the risk of overflow if the ink melt is continuously activated the software will ignore the command.
This procedure will save and restore only the SBC, IIT and IME NVM.
NOTE: After a USB flash drive is first connected to the machine a UI sceen message offering
scan to and print from USB options will display. This screen message can be closed or left
open before entering diagnostics without effecting the NVM save / restore processes. If you
choose to close the scan to and print from USB screen message it will not reappear on exit
from diagnostics. Therefore, leave this message screen open if the scan to and print from USB
options are to be required after a NVM save / restore.
Procedure
1.
The NVM save to hard disk must be performed at the first service call and whenever the system software is changed.
2.
3.
Select dC335 Heater Monitor and Exerciser.
4.
Select a component from the menu at the bottom left of the screen.
Procedure
As each component is selected the corresponding buttons will change to match the
options for that component.
NVM Save
The screen displays a blank graph with options to select the required component.
NOTE: If the setpoint mode of any of the printhead heaters (reservoir, left jetstack or right jetstack) is changed, the other two heaters will change to the same setpoint mode automatically.
This is to ensure that the printhead is not subjected to undue stress due to temperature variation between the different heaters.
5.
Select the component and options required.
6.
Select the Graph button
The graph will display a trace indicating the temperature change in real time.
The green line indicates the time.
The blue line indicates the current temperature.
The yellow line indicates the target temperature.
1.
If necessary, connect the USB flash drive to the USB port on the left side of the machine.
2.
3.
4.
Select dC361 NVM Save and Restore.

The screen displays the NVM data.
NOTE:
7.
To view the graph in more detail, touch the UI to zoom in. Touch the screen again to zoom
out.
8.
Analyze the results and take the appropriate action as required.
9.
Select stop to finish monitoring the temperature of the component.
5.
10. Select Close to return to the service mode window.
The top entry displays the live NVM data for the machine.
If the data has previously been saved to the hard disk these will be displayed in a list
below the live data.
If a USB device containing NVM data is connected these will be displayed below the
hard disk data. To be recognized by the machine the USB device must be connected
at the time dC361 is started.
Save the NVM data.
To save the live data to the hard disk select the live data entry and select save to
hard disk.
To save the hard disk data to a USB device select the hard disk entry and select
save to USB device.
To save the USB data to the hard disk select the USB entry and select save to HDD.
NOTE: Data cannot be saved or restored directly to or from the USB device to the
machine.
6.
Select Close to return to the service mode window.
7.
Select Call Closeout to exit service mode
February 2013
6-279
dC335, dC361
NVM Restore
1.
If necessary, connect the USB drive to the USB port on the left side of the machine.
2.
3.
4.
Select dC361 NVM Save and Restore.

The screen displays the NVM data.
5.
Restore the NVM data.

a.
Select the entry from the available NVM data on the hard drive.
NOTE: NVM data on a USB device should be copied to the hard drive before it can
be restored.
b.
Select Restore Machine NVM.

The status region at the top of the screen will report that the NVM was restored successfully.
6.
7.
dC361
February 2013
6-280
dC608 Document Feeder Registration
dC609 Document Glass Registration
Purpose
Purpose
This feature checks the registration of the document feeder and corrects any misalignments.
The process runs automatically and does not require any user intervention other than inserting
three blank sheets in the document feeder.
This feature checks the registration of the document glass and corrects any misalignments.
The process runs automatically and does not require any user intervention other than keeping
the document feeder open during the operation.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
Select dC608 Document Feeder Registration.
3.
The screen displays the current registration values
Select dC609 Document Glass Registration

The screen displays the current registration values.
4.
Insert 3 blank A4 (or 8.5 x 11 inch) white sheets, any orientation, into the document
feeder.
5.
Ensure the document feeder guides are correctly adjusted.
6.
Select Start.
4.
Open the document feeder and remove any paper from the document glass.
NOTE: The document feeder should remain open until this procedure is complete.
5.
Select Start to run the routine.

The screen displays the values for before and after registration.
The document feeder feeds the documents.

The screen displays the values for before and after registration.
6.
7.
7.
8.
February 2013
6-281
dC608, dC609
dC612 Print Test Pattern
dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration (RaLPH)
Purpose
Purpose
To print the internal test patterns.
To manually initiate calibration of the registration / preheat assembly with the rest of the print
engine.
NOTE: All test prints should be printed long edge feed.
Initial Action
Procedure
1.
Perform the following procedures:
2.
3.
Select dC612 Print Test Pattern
4.
Select the test pattern required. Refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
Ensure no missing black jets with jet substitution routine.
Select from the available options for the required test pattern.
Ensure the IME is ready to print by exiting service mode.
NOTE: In most instances the recommended paper size is Letter/A4, but the test can be
run from all trays, paper sizes or paper types.
NOTE: Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
5.
Select Close to exit the routine
NOTE: The dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration procedure is required after replacing,
removing or reinstalling:
6.
Registration / preheat assembly
NOTE: For details of test patterns, descriptions of their application, media size and other features refer to IQ 1 Image Quality Entry RAP.
IOD sensor
The test patterns that follow can be printed from dC612:
Procedure
TP 1
TP 2 to TP 10
TP 11
TP 12
TP 13
TP 14
TP 15
TP 16
TP 17
NOTE: If dC625 is run directly after the machine is switched on, a cleaning unit pump diagnostic cycle may run during calibration. After printing several calibration printouts, the machine
may raise a cleaning unit communication error instructing the cleaning unit be re-installed.
This causes the calibration to fail. After re-installing the cleaning unit, the machine raises fault
94-532 DMU oil pump over current. If this occurs, re-install the cleaning unit, switch off, then
switch on the machine, GP 14. Make at least 20 copies then re-start dC625.
1.
If performing this procedure directly after installing a new cleaning unit or switching on the
machine, make at least 20 copies before performing dC625.
2.
3.
4.
Select dC625 Registration / Preheat Calibration (RaLPH).
5.
6.
Select Start and the process runs.
7.
dC612, dC625
The Registration / Preheat Calibration in Progress screen appears.
Prints a registration image on up to 30 sheets of plain white paper (A4 or 8.5 x 11

LEF) as per chase sheet selection.
The printed registration calibration pages (TP 24) are fed back through the registration / preheat assembly via the duplex paper path.
Registration image is read by the CIS scan bar located on the registration / preheat
assembly:
The adjustment is made automatically after 30 successful scans are analyzed.
8.
9.
February 2013
6-282
dC640 Video Path Integrity

Purpose
The Video Path Integrity test validates the video path within the single board controller.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Select dC640 Video Path Integrity.
4.
Select Start to run the test. A screen displays the progress. During the test, the machine
performs the following check:
a.
A golden test pattern is held within the machine. This pattern is not a printable image
but is data that is used as a standard for comparison to data generated by, and
transmitted through the machine.
b.
A test pattern is generated and transferred to EPC memory. The test pattern is compared to the golden test pattern for verification.
c.
An image is then transferred from EPC to the single board controller PWB. The
image is then compared to the golden test pattern.
5.
At the end of the test a pass / fail result is returned on the UI.
6.
7.
Select Call Closeout to exit service mode and return to the original procedure.
February 2013
6-283
dC640
dC640
February 2013
6-284
dC708 Drum Drive Control Test
dC715 Active Registration Control
Purpose
Purpose
The Drum Drive Control Test is used to perform diagnostic tests on the Drum Drive Subsystem.
Active registration is a feature of the machine that ensures the media is in the best registration
by correcting inboard and outboard variance and eliminating skew.
Before running the Drum Drive Control Test the following PEST (Print Engine Self Test) errors
should be checked and cleared. The PEST Fault History can be accessed at dC123.
99-880 Motor, Drum drive open
99-881 Motor, Drum drive short
99-882 Motor, Drum drive power low
99-883 Motor, Drum drive power high
99-886 Motor, Drum drive current feedback
99-887 Motor, Drum drive thermal fuse
Active registration is normally set to on. However, if a paper feed problem occurs, active registration can make it difficult to identify where a problem is occurring.
The dC715 Active Registration Control enables the engineer to disable active registration to
help diagnose paper feed problems. When active registration is disabled, the machine will
operate in a degraded mode until re-enabled or reset. Once the paper path is optimized, active
registration would be set back to enabled before ending the service call.
For any of these faults perform 99-872-00 to 99-887-00 PEST Error 40 RAP.
NOTE: On issue of the service manual (March 2011), dC708 was considered to be unreliable.
Therefore, it is advisable to go to dC122 Fault History and dC123 PEST Fault History then
check for drum drive related faults.
Procedure
1.
2.

3.
Select dC708 Drum Drive Control Test.
4.
Select Start.
Procedure
If the engineer forgets to re-enable active registration, the system will automatically return to
enabled during machine power on or system reset. A message will indicate when active registration has been disabled.
1.
2.
3.
Select dC715 Active Registration Control.
4.
Select Disabled and follow the on screen instructions.
5.
6.
If required select Call Closeout to exit service mode while determining the source of the
paper feed problem.
5.
At the end of the routine the test results will be displayed. Refer to 94B Drum Drive Control Test Actions RAP for actions resulting from faults indicated by the test.
6.
7.
Run a series of copy / print jobs, from different trays, simplex and duplex pathways.
8.
Identify the cause of the problem and take the appropriate action.
9.
When the problem has been corrected return to dC715 and select Enable in the routine.
7.
10. Select Close to exit the routine.

February 2013
6-285
dC708, dC715
dC708, dC715
February 2013
6-286
dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test
b.
Purpose
The dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test is a set of internal test routines to help identify head
to head alignment issues.
Select the required test option to move the motor:
Start Motion
Observe Motion
NOTE: If an error occurs the IME will stop the test and report the appropriate error message.
NOTE: Ensure that the front door interlock switch is cheated when running the routines.
c.
Close the marking unit after observing the motor, refer to GP 6.
Procedure
d.
Select another test or Close the window and select Call Closeout.
1.
2.
NOTE: The printheads will be unaligned whenever a roll motor is moved. Refer to
dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment to align printheads.
3.
Select dC914 Head to Head Alignment Test.
4.
There are 10 routines listed under Test Options.
NOTE: If a large roll motion is performed, Y norm (process direction) may be out of
calibration.
Select the component to test from the list.
Move IOD Scan Bar
Move Upper Carriage Motor/Move Lower Carriage Motor
a.
NOTE: There is one motor for each carriage:
b.
Remove the abatement plenum, REP 91.36.
Lower carriage directly attached to head 3 (anchor head)
c.
Select the required position from the drop down menu:
Upper carriage directly attached to head 4
Home
Park
Front
Rear
Select Set Position to begin the test and move the IOT scan bar to the selected
position.
The procedure is the same for each motor.
d.
a.
Fully open the marking unit for observation, GP 6.
b.
Select the required test option to move the motor.

Observe Motion
e.
Reinstall the cleaning unit and the abatement plenum.
c.
Close the marking unit after observing the motor.
f.
d.
Select another test or close the window and select Call Closeout.
Move Upper Stitch Motor/Move Lower Stitch Motor
NOTE: The printheads will be unaligned whenever a carriage motor is moved.

Refer to dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment to align printheads.
NOTE: The procedure is the same for each stitch motor.

a.
Fully open the marking unit for observation, GP 6.
b.
Select the required test option to move the motor and observe the motion
c.
Close the marking unit after observing the motor, GP 6.
d.
NOTE: The printheads will be unaligned whenever a stitch motor is moved. Refer to
dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment to align printheads.
Measure Head Alignment

NOTE: This routine will measure the head alignment using a front scan and then a
rear scan. No adjustments will be made.If a fault occurs on either scan, the scan will
terminate and the appropriate chain-link-extension will be returned.
NOTE: If an error occurs the IME will stop the test and report the appropriate
error message.
Home Motor
error message.
error message.
5.
a.
Select Measure to measure the head alignment.
b.
The results are combined into a table for analysis (values that are not applicable to a particular scan are left blank for clarity).
c.
After moving any motor run dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment
Move Roll Motor 1, 2, 3 or 4

NOTE: There is one roll motor per printhead (1, 2, 3 and 4).
The procedure is the same for each motor.
a.
Fully open the marking unit for observation, refer to GP 6.
February 2013
6-287
dC914
dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser
dC962 Transfix Load Test
Purpose
Purpose
To observe the cleaning unit routines in action to troubleshoot problems with drum cleaning,
lubrication. copy quality and paper handling.
To test the transfix load system by performing the following:
The Cleaning Unit Exerciser provides the following features:
To cycle and observe operation of the cleaning unit while in the normal installed position.
To perform an internal cleaning unit self test.
To print specific test patterns to diagnose problems related to drum maintenance.
Load transfix system record load of the transfix front and rear
Unload transfix system record unload of the transfix front and rear
NOTE: The transfix load test may return no failure results even when a transfix load issue is
present. Print quality, noise or other symptoms may not be captured by this test.
Procedure
1.
Home the transfix load system and verify the position
NOTE: The transfix load test does not run media as part of the test. If a fault has been indicated while printing but that fault cannot be replicated when running this test then a media
related problem may be indicated.
To operate drum cleaning in slow speed mode for difficult to observe problems.
2.
Procedure
3.
Select dC959 Cleaning Unit Exerciser.
1.
4.
Select a routine:
2.
3.
Select dc962 Transfix Load Test.
NOTE: Follow the instructions on screen before starting these routines. The cleaning unit
must be installed before running the self test.
Self Test - the result will be displayed on the screen, see Table 1.
Full Speed Exerciser - the drum will rotate at full speed for about 2 seconds.
Slow Speed Exerciser - the drum will rotate at slow speed for about 8 seconds.
5.
Print Test Patterns:
Black Solid Fill (TP 2 to TP 10)
Oil Bar Chase Test Page (TP 20)
4.
Select Start to automatically begin the transfix load test.
Home the transfix load system (approximately 2 seconds)
Load the transfix system (approximately 30 seconds)
Unload the transfix system (approximately 30 seconds)
On completion of the test the results table opens. Refer to Table 1.

Table 1 Test results
Reference
Fault Description
NOTE: Before printing test pattern TP 5 or TP 20, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain
paper is loaded LEF into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole
punched paper.
10-500
Insufficient front transfix load force
10-505
Insufficient rear transfix load force
10-510
Transfix load timing error
NOTE: The cleaning unit self test requires approximately 2 minutes and the result will be
shown on the UI screen. Refer to Table 1.
10-515
Transfix load position error
10-521
Transfix load front position error
5.
When the tests are complete, select Close to exit routine.
10-522
Transfix load rear position error
6.
10-523
Transfix unload front position error
10-524
Transfix unload rear position error
10-525
Transfix load home motor disable failure
Self Test Result Self Test Result Message
10-530
Transfix gap set failure
Self Test was successful
10-535
Transfix load calibrate failure
Vacuum control failure
10-537
Transfix load reverse home timeout front
Fluid flow rate failure
10-538
Transfix load reverse home timeout rear
Cleaner unit / drum contact test failure
Cleaner unit lift test failure
Delivery pump test failure
Removal pump test failure
Table 1 Self test results
dC959, dC962
6.
If errors are indicated go to 10-500-00 to 10-540-00 Transfix Error RAP after exiting service mode.
7.
Select Close to return to dc962 Transfix Load Test window.
8.
Select Close to return to service mode window.
9.
February 2013
6-288
dC965 Printhead Maintenance Cycle Test
10. Select Close to return to the service mode window.
Purpose
11. Exercise all colors by printing test print TP 1, refer to dC612 Print Test Patterns.
To run the printhead wiping cycle while the marking unit drawer is in the open position.
Procedure
WARNING
To enable the marking unit drawer to operate in the open position requires the waste tray to be
in position. The waste tray interlock will be ignored (bypassed by software) and normal purge
replaced by low pressure assist (LPA).
1.
2.
3.
Insert an interlock cheater in the front door interlock switch assembly.
4.
5.
6.
Select dC965 Printhead Maintenance Cycle Test.
7.
Select Start.
The IME will position the printhead carriages away from the drum in the parked position.
Once the two carriage assemblies are parked, follow the instructions on the screen.
a.
b.
Reinstall the waste tray under the marking unit.

CAUTION
The waste tray must be installed under the opened marking unit during the wiping cycle
test to capture melted ink.
NOTE: The waste tray is attached to the underside of the marking unit assembly by 2 lugs
at the rear and 1 lug at the front.
c.
Select Continue on the user interface.
d.
Select which carriage (upper, lower or both) to perform the wiping action.
Upper = Printheads 2 and 4
Lower = Printheads 1 and 3
Both = Printheads 1, 2, 3, 4
The Printhead wiping cycle will run for approximately 3 minutes for 1 carriage or 5
minutes for 2 carriages.
8.
e.
On completion of the printhead wiping cycle, select a different carriage if required.
f.
Select Finish on the user interface.
g.
Move the marking unit back into the operational position, GP 6.
Select dC968 Head Purge to print a cleaning page.

NOTE: It is not necessary to perform a full head purge.
9.
Return to dC965 once the cleaning pages have printed.
February 2013
6-289
dC965
dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check
dC968 Head Purge
Purpose
Purpose
To check the head to drum spacing. The procedure checks for contact between each printhead
and the drum.
To force ink through all jets on the selected printheads.
Initial Actions
This check will run automatically if a new printhead serial number is detected during power-up.
The dc967 window will not be present, but a status message will reflect this check is taking
place.
If a printhead is reinstalled (not replaced) in the same position on a carriage, the machine will
not recognize it as new during power-up, and this check will not automatically occur. To prevent
carriages from automatically docking during power-up, boot the machine directly into IME
Diagnostics Mode, GP 1 and then proceed to step 1 anytime a printhead has been reinstalled.
Before running this routine check the following:
Sufficient ink must be available for each colour.
The waste tray must not be full.
A4 or letter size paper should be loaded.
The IME is ready to print.
Procedure
Procedure
The procedure normally takes approximately 7 - 10 minutes to run and cannot be stopped once
in operation.
1.
2.
3.
Select dC968 Head Purge.
NOTE: The dC967 routine will stop if potential printhead to drum contact is detected. If potential printhead to drum contact is identified, perform ADJ 91.1 Printhead Attachment Check.
The dC968 Head Purge window opens. Follow the on screen instructions.
Jet test pages (TP 21)
1.
Boot the machine directly into IME Diagnostics Mode, GP 1.
Cleaning pages (TP 22)
2.
Purge head routine
3.
Select dC967 Head to Drum Spacing Check.
4.
Select Start. The following sequence of events are controlled by the IME:
The IME brings the printhead and drum to operating temperature.
The drum is stopped.
4.
Both the upper and lower carriage assemblies are placed into the docked position.
The upper carriage assembly is parked while the lower carriage is docked and the
process is reversed.
Once the temperature measurements are complete, the IME will move the carriage
assemblies into the parked position.
Results are reported:
Passed.
Head to Drum Spacing Check Failed.
5.
Select Start to repeat the process or Close to exit the procedure.
6.
7.
NOTE: The main head purge screen has 3 selectable routines:
Select Jet Test Pages. The machine will run the jet test routine which will print 2 pages for
each colour.
NOTE: Before printing the jet test page, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x11 inch plain paper is
loaded LEF into tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched
paper.
5.
Use the jet test pages to identify any defective heads. Refer to TP 21 Jet Test Pages to
interpret the jet test output.
CAUTION
Empty the waste tray before purging the heads. When the waste tray has been emptied touch
the Reset Waste Counter button.
6.
Select head 1, 2, 3 or 4 from the Purge Heads buttons and touch the Purge button to start
the purge routine.
NOTE: The Head Purge routine takes from 4 to 8 minutes depending on the number of
heads selected.
When the heads have finished purging the machine will run a cleaning page for the
purged heads. Depending on the number of heads purged the machine will print 1 or 2
cleaning pages with 2 heads cleaned on each page.
7.
Select Jet Test Pages.

The machine will run the jet test routine which will print 2 pages for each colour.
8.
Inspect the Jet Test Pages. If a defect is found repeat the procedure.
9.
Select Close to return to the maintenance window.
10. Select Call Closeout.

dC967, dC968
February 2013
6-290
dC969 Clean Ink Smears
Purpose
Purpose
To remove all unwanted ink from the registration / preheat assembly to liquefy any unwanted
ink.
To adjust the head to head alignment for all four printheads.
Procedure
The procedure normally takes approximately 2 minutes to run and cannot be stopped once in
operation. If it is necessary to run dC968 Head Purge the total procedure for Head to Head
Alignment Adjustment will increase to 10 minutes.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Select dC969 Clean Ink Smears.
1.
4.
NOTE: To adjust head to head alignment there can be no more than 10 missing jets in
total across all 4 printheads. To find out the number of missing jets:
a.
Select Start. The following actions occur:
b.
Select dC968 Head Purge to print jet test pages.
The temperature of the registration / preheat assembly is increased to loosen ink for
removal. The warm-up procedure takes approximately 30 seconds.
c.
If there are excessive missing jets run the Head Purge routine before adjusting.
10 sheets of A4 size (or 8.5 x 11) plain paper are fed in long edge feed through the
duplex path to absorb and remove the unwanted ink:
The first 5 sheets are biased inboard (toward the rear).
The next 5 sheets are biased outboard (toward the front).
2.
Select the Adjustments tab
3.
Select dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment. The Head to Head Alignment Adjustment window opens.
4.
NOTE: Running the 10 sheets takes approximately 1 minute.
The temperature is set to return to normal.

A number of sheets, up to 25 are fed through the simplex path to cool the registration
/ preheat assembly to normal operating temperature:
5.
If a chase sheet paper jam occurs during the procedure the registration / preheat assembly is locked until it cools to a safe normal operating temperature.
NOTE: The procedure can be repeated as necessary until all ink smears are removed.
6.
Select Close to return to the maintenance window.
7.
Select the relevant routine:
Head to Head Alignment Adjust
Head to Head Without Recovery
Set Alignment Baseline
Follow the on screen instructions. Select Start to run the routine.

NOTE: A head purge is required before head alignment can be performed. If a head
purge has not been carried out prior to the head alignment dC971 will automatically purge
the printheads and report head to head alignment failure. Running dC971 after the heads
have been purged will complete the alignment procedure.
NOTE: Running the cool down chase sheets requires approximately 2 minutes but
will vary according to local conditions.
5.
NOTE: This procedure must run to completion. To stop the routine would require excessive time to recover and add to customer/service cost. The full procedure takes approximately 6 minutes to complete.
6.
If head to head alignment fails refer to dC122, Fault History, and perform the RAP for the
error code indicated.
7.
8.
February 2013
6-291
dC969, dC971
dC972 Printhead Uniformity
Purpose
The automatic dC972 runs periodically in the background during periods of inactivity and
does not require user intervention. It is only to be used when specifically directed.
Procedure
To adjust the printheads and jets to maintain uniform image quality.
Printhead Uniformity adjusts individual printheads and jets for image quality. Printhead characteristics change during use and at different rates. This procedure adjusts the printheads to
compensate for any change in their characteristics.
1.
Load at least 40 sheets of the required media into tray 3. To guarantee that tray 3 is used,
open all other trays.
2.
Media Requirements
3.
The required media size is A4 or 8.5x11 inch. Use the best quality, bright white plain paper
available. Do not use glossy, colored, preprinted or punched media. Do not mix media types.
4.
Select dC972 Printhead Uniformity.
5.
The routine provides 6 options:

a.
Option 1 - Printhead Uniformity
b.
Option 2 - Head to Head Alignment Adjust
c.
Option 3 - Head to Head Uniformity
Do not use card stock or media less than or equal to 18lbs (68 gsm). Failure to follow media
requirements may result in incorrect adjustments.
d.
Option 4 - TRC Generation
e.
Option 5 - Y Dot Position Correction
Refer to Table 1 for the required media quantity and routine duration.
f.
Option 6 - Reset Head Uniformity Data
Use media that is as close as possible to 90gsm (24lb) and 98 brightness.

NOTE: In North America only, the brightness rating is printed on the paper ream wrapper.
Table 1 Media and time requirements
NOTE: If an option fails to complete, go to Fault Recovery.
Option
Required Media Quantity
Duration (minutes)
6.
Select Close to return to the Adjustment routines window.
1. Printhead Uniformity - Manual

(runs options 2 through 5)
17 sheets.
18 - 32
7.
Select Call Closeout, then Exit Only to exit service mode.
1. Printhead Uniformity - Automatic

(runs options 2 through 5)
8 sheets.
9 -24
2. Head to Head Alignment Adjust
N/A
1 -3
The routine provides the following options:
3. Head to Head Uniformity - Manual 13 sheets.
6 -18
3. Head to Head Uniformity - Automatic
6 sheets.
Select Heads 1, 2, 3 or 4 - Select required printheads. It is recommended that all printheads are selected, irrespective of which printhead was replaced.
4. TRC Generation - Manual
2 sheets.
Manual - Select for best results, this requires test patterns to be scanned using the
DADH. Manual operation is recommended for printhead calibration.
4. TRC Generation - Automatic
N/A
N/A
Auto - Refer to General Guidelines.
5. Y Dot Position Correction
N/A
4-8
Start - Select to run the routine. Follow the instructions on the UI.
6. Reset Head Uniformity Data
N/A
Less than 1
For additional information and checks that must be performed before running Option 1, refer to:
Option 1 - Printhead Uniformity

NOTE: The Printhead Uniformity routine (option 1) runs options 2 through 5.
General Guidelines
NOTE: The order of adjustments is important and must be performed in numerical order
(except option 6) unless instructed otherwise.
When instructed to run dC972 without any options specified, run the manual Printhead
Uniformity (Option 1).
When instructed to run dC972 without manual or automatic specified, choose manual.
The Reset Head Uniformity Data routine (option 6) deletes the current adjustments (nonrecoverable) and restores the manufacturing settings. Only perform this routine if
instructed.
The printer will save the adjustments after each option. If something interrupts the completion of a selected option, restart from the beginning of the interrupted option.
dC972

The routine aligns the printheads with X-stitch, Y-stitch and roll adjustments automatically and
requires no intervention. This is the same routine as dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment.
Start - Select to run the routine.
During the routine:
1.
The test image is printed and scanned on the drum, then cleaned off. No pages are
printed.
February 2013
6-292

The routine balances the color intensity in solid fills across all 4 printheads. The routine provides the following options:
Manual - Select for best results - Internal test patterns are printed. Manual is recommended for printhead calibration.
Auto - Refer to General Guidelines.
Print Test - Select to print the colour bands test print, refer to TP 26 Printhead Uniformity /
Colour Bands Test Page.
NOTE: Before printing TP 26, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch plain paper is loaded LEF
NOTE: TP 26 can be printed to check image quality before or after running the routine.
TP 26 is not scanned when the routine is run.
Start - Select to run the routine. Follow the instructions on the UI.
Before the starting the routine:

1.
Ensure enough of the correct media is loaded, refer to Media Requirements.
2.
To prevent registration errors, ensure nothing is placed on the DADH top cover.
3.
Check that at least 1 full ink stick of each colour is loaded. If necessary, load additional ink
sticks.
4.
To prevent document skew, ensure the DADH document width guides are correctly
adjusted.
5.
Check that the CVT glass is clean. If necessary, clean the CVT glass, refer to ADJ 62.1
Figure 1 Test print order
During the routine:

1.
The machine performs automatic checks. If necessary, an error window will open requesting a dC968 Head Purge, a dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment or a dC977 Drum
Runout Calibration. After performing the requested routines, re-enter dC972, option 3.
2.
The machine will print 3 sets of cleaning pages. A dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment will then run. A new CLD baseline is created.
3.
An internal test pattern is printed, Figure 1. The test pattern must be scanned using the
DADH. Scan the test pattern SEF in the orientation shown in Figure 2 with the arrows
pointing in the direction of feed. If this fails, a new test pattern will be printed. Use the new
test pattern each time this step is repeated. This step may have to be repeated up to 10
times, not including test patterns printed after failed attempts.
After successful completion of the routine:

1.
Perform Option 4 TRC Generation - Manual, then Option 5 Y Dot Position Correction.
February 2013
6-293
dC972
5.
Check that the CVT glass is clean. If necessary, clean the CVT glass, perform ADJ 62.1
During the routine:

1.
The machine performs automatic checks. If necessary, an error window will open requesting a dC968 Head Purge, a dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment or a dC977 Drum
Runout Calibration. After performing the requested routines, re-enter dC972, option 4.
2.
The machine will print 3 sets of cleaning pages. A dC971 Head to Head Alignment Adjustment will then run.
3.
Two internal test patterns are printed. The test patterns must be scanned using the
DADH. Scan the test patterns SEF in the order shown in Figure 3 and in the orientation
shown in Figure 4 with the arrows pointing in the direction of feed.
Figure 2 Test prints orientation

The routine balances the color intensity in dithers across all 4 printheads. The routine provides
the following options:
Print Test button - Select to print Test Pattern 18. Refer to TP 18 TRC Generation Test
Pages.
Figure 3 Test prints order
Before starting the routine:

1.
Ensure enough of the correct media is loaded, refer to Media Requirements.
2.
To prevent registration errors, ensure nothing is placed on the DADH top cover.
3.
Check that at least 1 full ink stick of each colour is loaded. If necessary, load additional ink
sticks.
4.
To prevent document skew, ensure the DADH document width guides are correctly
adjusted.
dC972
February 2013
6-294
Option 6 - Reset Head Uniformity Data

CAUTION
The routine deletes the current adjustments (non-recoverable) and restores the manufacturing
settings. Only perform this routine if specifically instructed.
The routine provides the following options:
Printheads 1, 2, 3 or 4 - Select the required printheads.
After completion of the routine:

1.
Perform Printhead Uniformity - Manual (option 1) to re-calibrate the printheads.
Fault Recovery
If the adjustment routine fails or an error is displayed, perform the relevant action in Table 2.
Table 2 Fault recovery
Fault
Action
A Service Code may indicate faults

with dC972 adjustments.
Go to OF 12 Service Code RAP. Perform the relevant procedures. Correct the service fault, then reenter the adjustment procedure at the step that was
interrupted.
A generic fault window, Figure 5.
The text in the fault window has suggestions for

identifying and correcting common faults. It is not a
checklist of everything that must be corrected. Specific faults can be:
A calibration related device fault. Refer to Calibration Related Device Faults.
Perform each corrective action, then re-enter the

adjustment procedure at the step that was interrupted.
Figure 4 Test prints orientation

The routine ensures that all ink drops are deposited on the drum in the correct location in the
process direction. The routine provides the following options
A fault window with one of these error

messages:
Ink needs to be added.
Select Heads 1, 2, 3 or 4 - Select all printheads unless specifically directed otherwise.
Print test - Select to print test pattern 19. Refer to TP 19 Y-Dot Position Correction Test
Page.
Load 8.5 x 11 or A4 LEF paper

into a paper tray.
Head purge needs to be performed.
Head to head alignment adjust

needs to be performed.
Drum run out needs to be performed.
A fault window with this warning message: Step 1 Unable to Scan Test
Prints - Iteration <#>.
Before starting the routine:

1.
The machine will perform a head to head alignment.
During the routine:

1.
The test image is printed and scanned on the drum, then cleaned off. No pages are
printed.
Colour mixing. Go to the IQ 14 Some Colours

Uneven RAP.
February 2013
6-295
Perform the corrective actions, then retry the adjustment procedure.
Correctly load the test prints, refer to Figure 1, Figure

2, Figure 3 and Figure 4. Follow the instructions on
the UI.
If the test prints were loaded correctly, check for a
calibration related device fault. Refer to Calibration
Related Device Faults.
dC972
Table 2 Fault recovery

Fault
Action
The progress bar stops at 99% or

stops updating.
An internal communications error occurred. Re-run

the incomplete dC972 adjustment. If canceling the
adjustment does not work, switch the machine off,
then on, GP 14. Retry the adjustment procedure
from the step that was interrupted.
The UI reboots during dC972 adjustment and machine goes offline.
Login in as, or contact the system administrator, then

put the machine back online. Re-run the dC972
adjustment.
Figure 5 Generic fault window

Calibration Related Device Faults
Check dC122 Fault History for any of the faults listed below. If any of the fault codes are found,
perform the relevant RAP:
91-513-00 IOD shuttle motor current inconsistent with expected value.

91-514-00 IOD drive stall.
91-519-00 Printhead 1 NVM error detected.
91-581-00 IOD home timeout.
91-583-00 IOD stall recovery failed.
91-630-00 IOD scan process failed.
91-636-00 IOD in degraded mode.
91-637-00 IOD Y runout adjustment needed.
91-638-00 IOD detects chronic jet error.
91-655-00 Printhead 1 field corrections corrupt.
dC972

91-669-00 The registration / preheat assembly could not correct for media skew.
91-670-00 The expected image did not match the scanned image.
91-671-00 The test pattern fiducials (on/off line pattern) for jet alignment could not be
found.
91-672-00 Too many missing jets were detected to perform the operation.
91-673-00 The machine has detected a floating point calculation error.
91-695-00 IOD excessive Y position noise.
91-696-00 IOD excessive X position noise.
91-697-00 IOD excessive roll position noise.
91-698-00 IOD excessive stitch or roll misalignment.
91-699-00 IOD stitch / roll motors not zeroed.
91-701-00 IOD head 1 roll: not converging.
91-702-00 IOD head 1 roll: position limit.
91-703-00 IOD head 1 X: not converging.
91-704-00 IOD head 1 X: position limit.
91-705-00 IOD head 1 Y: not converging.
91-706-00 IOD head 1 Y: position limit.
February 2013
6-296

91-721-00 IOD calibration.
91-722-00 IOD calibration 2D.
91-725-00 IOD target.
91-726-00 IOD target: missing.
91-727-00 IOD target: corrupted.
91-728-00 IOD target: missing or corrupted.
91-729-00 IOD target: Y position out of range.
91-730-00 IOD target: Y position out of far range.
91-735-00 IOD non-static scanbar artifact.
91-736-00 IOD static scanbar artifact.
91-811-00 Machine has timed out waiting for the adjustment load task to complete reading printhead NVM.
91-824-00 MARKDWR-PQM insufficient ink.
91-825-00 MARKDWR-PQM insufficient paper.
91-826-00 MARKDWR-PQM insufficient jets.
91-827-00 MARKDWR-PQM align needed.
91-828-00 MARKDWR-PQM Y dot position needed.
91-829-00 MARKDWR-PQM drum runout needed.
91-830-00 MARKDWR-PQM uniformity needed.
91-831-00 MARKDWR-PQM uniformity reset needed.
91-832-00 MARKDWR-PQM empty waste tray.
91-833-00 MARKDWR-PQM cleaning pages needed.
91-834-00 MARKDWR-PQM tool not usable.
91-835-00 MARKDWR-PQM tool manually disabled.
91-836-00 MARKDWR-PQM: system busy.
92-803-00 DSP2 overlay setup time-out.
92-804-00 DSP2 overlay cleanup time-out.
92-807-00 In dC972 automatic TRC generation is not implemented.
dC976 Ink Delivery Fault Recovery

Purpose
To prime the umbilical assembly and check valve unit after replacement of the umbilical
assembly, check valve unit (CVU), attached to and included with the umbilical assembly.
Failure to prime the CVU and umbilical assembly may result in:
Purge air pressure leaking backwards through the assembly.
Ink bubbling up from the reservoir into the ink reservoir air manifold.
Reservoir assembly replacement.
Umbilical replacement, if ink enters the purge line.
After umbilical or ink melt reservoir replacement, purge line connections to the reservoir must
be physically verified. The correct orientation of the connections is shown in REP 91.20.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Select dC976 Ink Delivery Fault Recovery.
4.
Select the component that has been replaced:
Lower Umbilical
Upper Umbilical
Ink Reservoir (This option has no benefit, use the other two options).
5.
Select the start button to begin the procedure.
6.
On completion of the procedure a message will be displayed of the success or failure.

NOTE: If a new umbilical has been installed then run the routine a second time. A single
priming routine may not be sufficient in all cases.
7.
Select Close to return to the Maintenance routine window.
8.
February 2013
6-297
dC972, dC976
dC977 Drum Runout Calibration
dC978 Transfix Calibration Values
Purpose
Purpose
To measure minute inaccuracies in the concentricity of the drum, then adjust the printheads as
necessary.
To display and update the transfix calibration load values to ensure proper operation of the
transfix load system.
If the following parts are removed or replaced the Drum Runout Calibration routine is required:
This procedure is required when replacing transfix load arm assemblies or if incorrect transfix
calibration values are suspected.
Drum
Drum encoder
Drum pulley
Transfix linkages
Procedure
1.
Procedure
NOTE: Before printing test pages, ensure that A4 or 8.5 x11 inch plain paper is loaded LEF into
tray 4. Use the best quality media available. Do not use hole punched paper.
3.
Select dC978 Transfix Calibration Values.
4.
The transfix calibration values are displayed with an option to write new values if required.
NOTE: New transfix calibration values must also be written on the calibration label on the
front drum frame, refer to REP 10.3 or REP 10.2.

1.
2.
3.
Select dC977 Drum Runout Calibration.
4.
Select the Runout Test Page button.
2.
5.
Follow the on screen instructions to read and amend the values as necessary.
6.
Select Close to return to the Adjustments window.
7.
The machine will print a drum runout test page. Check the test page to confirm that calibration is required, (TP 23) and (IQ 5).
If calibration is not required select Close to exit the routine.
5.
Select Jet Test Page. The machine will run the jet test routine which will print 2 pages for
each colour.
6.
Use the jet test pages to identify any defective heads. Check the test page to interpret the
jet test output (TP 21) and (IQ 9).
If more than 10 jets are missing run dC968 Head Purge before continuing with this
procedure.
If less than 10 jets are missing select Calibrate Runout.
NOTE: Calibration requires the following:
Sufficient ink in all reservoirs.
The waste tray must not be full.
The marking unit must be ready to print.
7.
Select Calibrate Runout. The calibration routine takes approximately 5 minutes.
8.
On completion of the Calibration Runout routine. Select Close to return to the Adjustments window.
9.
dC977, dC978
February 2013
6-298
Tags
Purpose
To provide a list of all the tag numbers used together with a description of each of the machine
modifications.
Inserter Tray 6. Remove the inserter module and turn it upside down. The Mod/Tag plate
is located on the bottom cover.
Classification Codes
The Class or Classification code is explained in Table 1
Table 1 Classification codes
Description
Each modification to the system is assigned a unique tag number. This section of the service
documentation contains a listing and brief description of all change tags.
Change tags listed in this section are listed by machine module. The module to which the tag
relates is identified by the tag prefix letter, for example; Tag F048 applies to the Finisher - module. The module prefixes are:
Processor module - 001 to 100 (no prefix).
DADH module - D-001 to D-100.
Finisher (LCSS) module - F-001 to F-100.
Finisher (HVF) module - V-001 to V-100.
Fax module - X-001 to X-050.
Inserter tray 6 module - I-001 to I-020.
Tray 5 module - P-001 to P-100.
NASG XE
code code Description
-
Safety: Install this tag immediately.
Mandatory: Install this tag at the next opportunity.
Repair: Install this tag as a repair, at the failure of a component.
Optional: Install as a customer option or a field engineering decision.
Situational: Install as the situation demands.
Manufacturing: Cannot be installed in the field.
Refurbishing only.
Tag Information
Information that may be included with each tag item is as follows:
Tag - gives the control number for the tag.
Class - gives the classification codes as listed in Table 1.
Use - indicates the multinational operating markets affected by the modification.
Manufacturing Serial Number - gives the serial number of the factory built machines with
the modification installed.
Purpose - gives a brief description of the modification.
Name - gives the name of the part or modification.
Kit Number - gives the part number of the kit or part required to install the modification.
Reference or Parts List On - indicates the parts list where the kit or modification part can
be found.
Mod/Tag Plate Location
The processor module. Open the front door and the Mod/Tag plate is located on the right
side of the machine frame above the 4a jam clearance area.
The scanner module. The Mod/Tag plate is located on the rear cover of the scanner unit.
The tray 5 module. Un-dock tray 5 and the Mod/Tag plate is located on the back plate of
the module.
The DADH module. Lift up the DADH and the Mod/Tag plate is located on the rear of the
DADH.
The LCSS module. Un-dock the LCSS and the Mod/Tag plate is located in the base pan
of the LCSS.
The HVF module. Un-dock the HVF and the Mod/Tag plate is located on the metal panel
under the docking latch.
Embedded Fax. The Mod/Tag plate is located on the cover, PL 20.05.
February 2013
6-299
Tags
Processor Tags
TAG:
001
CLASS:
NAME:
3
Introduces an improved power supply with lower power consumption in off
mode, better altitude performance and removal of the 20A inlet and associated
parts.
KIT NUMBER:
112K01070
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 1.15 Item 2
015
CLASS:
NAME:
Announcement to check machines for suspect ink
PURPOSE:
Power supply unit
PURPOSE:
TAG:
N/A. Refer to service bulletin T7948.
PARTS LIST ON:
N/A
TAG:
TAG:
004
CLASS:
NAME:
3 Tray Module latch and tray
PURPOSE:
To identify the removal of ink from machines that were built with suspect ink
KIT NUMBER:
016
CLASS:
NAME:
Magenta and cyan ink removal
PURPOSE:
Replacement tray 3 assembly.
KIT NUMBER:
604K61710
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 31.11 Item 31
To identify the removal of magenta and cyan ink from machines that were built
with suspect ink
KIT NUMBER:
N/A. Refer to critical service bulletin C7930.
PARTS LIST ON:
N/A
TAG:
018
CLASS:
012
NAME:
Manufacturing removal of air pumps from registration/preheat assemblies
CLASS:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Void
TAG:
PURPOSE:
Do not reference. This tag has been struck on some machines by accident.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
PARTS LIST ON:
N/A
TAG:
NOTE: Although the W/TAG 018 machines do not have air pumps install as
standard. The preheat air pumps in a replacement registration/preheat assembly will function when the unit is installed, refer to service bulletin T8009-12-06.
014
CLASS:
NAME:
Cyan ink check at customer locations
PURPOSE:
Cost down. Extensive testing ascertained that the air pumps in the registration/
preheat assembly could be removed with the associated internal hoses and
plastic pump cover. Springs have been added to carry the weight of the metal
heat plates. This change was cut into manufacturing starting with machine
serial number: XE: 3661864396, XC: XNE133202.
Do not reference. This tag has been superseded by TAG 016
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
PARTS LIST ON:
N/A
Processor Tags, DADH Tags
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 88.10 Item 3
February 2013
6-300
TAG:
050
CLASS:
NAME:
Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
PURPOSE:
DADH Tags
TAG:
D-001
To identify RoHS compliant machines. Refer to GP 26.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
CLASS:
NAME:
Feed yoke kit
PURPOSE:
Applicable to machines with a TAG D002 DADH only. To improve actuation of

the DADH feed gates.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 5.15 Item 6
TAG:
D-002
CLASS:
NAME:
Introduction of the Quiet 100 sheet DADH
PURPOSE:
Features a motorized nudger in place of the feed solenoid to give a quieter

working performance.
New DADH PWB introduced with driver circuitry to support the motorized
nudger.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 5.10 Item 5 and PL 5.15 Item 5
TAG:
D-003
CLASS:
NAME:
Shim washer added to the quiet 100 sheet DADH motorized nudger
PURPOSE:
Applicable to machines with a TAG D002 DADH only. Nylon shim washer
added to the motorized nudger to improve nudger cam reliability.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
P/O PL 5.15 Item 5
February 2013
6-301
DADH Tags, DADH Tags
TAG:
D-004
CLASS:
NAME:
White CVT roll Kit
PURPOSE:
Finisher (2K LCSS) Tags

TAG:
F-001
To eliminate grey circles appearing on prints when copying hole punched originals.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 5.25
TAG:
D-005
CLASS:
NAME:
Feed clutch and spacer kit
PURPOSE:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 5.15 Item 28
TAG:
D-007
CLASS:
NAME:
DADH sensor replacement kit
PURPOSE:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 31.11 Item 17
New LCSS graphic labels
PURPOSE:
New jam clearance instructions
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
F-002
CLASS:
NAME:
LCSS tamper arms and exit sensor timing
PURPOSE:
New style DADH input tray sensors which are less sensitive to bright overhead
lighting which causes wrong size detection, wrong size Fax sent, enlarge or
reduce the document size.
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
TAG:
Design improvement on the original clutch
KIT NUMBER:
CLASS:
To improve stacking performance
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
TAG:
F-003
CLASS:
NAME:
LCSS entry guide cover change
PURPOSE:
Improve performance
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
TAG:
F-004
TAG:
D-050
CLASS:
CLASS:
NAME:
LCSS noise reduction kit
PURPOSE:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
Finisher (2K LCSS) Tags, Finisher (2K LCSS) Tags
Reduction of operational noises
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
February 2013
6-302
TAG:
F-005
TAG:
F-011
CLASS:
CLASS:
NAME:
LCSS elevator motor encoder sensor.
NAME:
Re-routed harness
PURPOSE:
A new sensor with an improved response time.
PURPOSE:
To improve the routing of the staple harness by using a longer harness.
KIT NUMBER:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PARTS LIST ON:
TAG:
F-007
TAG:
F-013
CLASS:
CLASS:
NAME:
LCSS rear frame cutout modified.
NAME:
LCSS bin 1 kit
PURPOSE:
Change to the cutout in the rear frame to accommodate all configurations of

hole punches
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
TAG:
F-009
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 12.10 Item 10
TAG:
F-016
CLASS:
3
LCSS Paddle assembly
CLASS:
NAME:
NAME:
Sharp edges removed from area 5 (safety)
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
Modified angle to the output tray to reduce problem with paper curl.
KIT NUMBER:
New paddle wheel shaft assembly featuring increased grip paddles that are
now a clip in fitting.
To make safe the customer interaction area around the hole punch.
KIT NUMBER:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 12.25 Item 4
TAG:
F-010
TAG:
F-050
CLASS:
CLASS:
NAME:
20 ohm tamper motor
NAME:
PURPOSE:
To eliminate the tamper motor from stalling.
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 12.45
PARTS LIST ON:
February 2013
6-303
Finisher (HVF) Tags, Finisher (HVF) Tags
Finisher (HVF) Tags

TAG:
V-001
CLASS:
NAME:
2
Pin 3 (ground 24V) and pin 4 (24V) on the bulk head connector on the HVF for
the inserter unit are to close together and could be shorted.
On the HVF PWB, PJ703 pins 2 and 3 are changed position. On the Inserter
PWB, PJ 5 pins 2 and 3 are changed position. This changes the position of the
ground 24V.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
V-004
CLASS:
NAME:
Ejector with removable paddle assembly
PURPOSE:
Modification to the inserter connector
PURPOSE:
TAG:
Allows replacement of Ejector paddle assembly without needing to replace

entire ejector.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 12.110 Item 2, PL 12.110 Item 22
TAG:
V-005
CLASS:
NAME:
Three blade lower paddle.
PURPOSE:
Located in the paddle unit to improve the contact force on documents in the
ejector assembly.
TAG:
V-002
CLASS:
KIT NUMBER:
Lower paddle switch
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 12.115 Item 2
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Mod TAG002 may have been struck in manufacturing, but is not a valid mod
tag.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
TAG:
V-050
CLASS:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
TAG:
V-003
KIT NUMBER:
CLASS:
PARTS LIST ON:
NAME:
Guide hinge pin
PURPOSE:
Mod TAG003 may have been struck in manufacturing, but is not a valid mod
tag.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
Finisher (HVF) Tags, Post Process Inserter Tray 6
February 2013
6-304
Post Process Inserter Tray 6 (PPI) Tags

TAG:
I-001
Fax Tags
TAG:
X-050
CLASS:
CLASS:
NAME:
Modification to the inserter connector
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Pin 3 (ground 24V) and pin 4 (24V) on the bulk head connector on the HVF for
the inserter unit are to close together and could be shorted.
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
On the HVF PWB, PJ703 pins 2 and 3 are changed position. On the Inserter
PWB, PJ 5 pins 2 and 3 are changed position. This changes the position of the
ground 24V.
PARTS LIST ON:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
February 2013
6-305
Post Process Inserter Tray 6 (PPI) Tags, Fax Tags
Tray 5 Tags
TAG:
P-001
CLASS:
NAME:
Central foot
PURPOSE:
To facilitate top edge registration set-up.
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
TAG:
P-002
CLASS:
NAME:
Feed roll retrofit kit
PURPOSE:
Spares kit
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
PL 31.11 Item 26
TAG:
P-050
CLASS:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PARTS LIST ON:
February 2013
6-306
7 Wiring Data
Plug Jack Locations
PJ Locations....................................................................................................................
7-3
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams..............................................................................................................
7-23
February 2013
7-1
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-2
PJ Locations
24. Registration / preheat Interface PWB, Figure 11.
PJ Location Tables
25. Scanner PWB, Figure 5.
To locate a PJ, go to the appropriate table.
26. Single board controller PWB, Figure 29.

27. Solenoid patch PWB, Figure 18.
PJ1 to PJ99, Table 1.
PJ number PJ location figure
PJ location
Wiring
diagram
Figure 2
WD 1.6
Figure 11
Registration / Preheat Interface PWB
WD 8.6
Figure 13
IOD pre amplifier board PWB
WD 9.1
PJDC1 to PJDC4, Table 12.
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.21
Figure 29
N/A
Figure 7
Fax connector PWB
WD 3.1
Figure 2
WD 1.6
NOTE: Part list references are given with each figure.
Figure 11
WD 8.6
1.
3 tray module PWB, Figure 9.
Figure 13
IOD pre amplifier board PWB
WD 9.1
2.
BM PWB, Figure 25.
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.21
3.
DADH PWB, Figure 4.
Figure 7
Fax connector PWB
WD 3.1
4.
Drum driver PWB, Figure 12.
Figure 2
WD 1.7
5.
Fax connector PWB, Figure 7.
Figure 11
WD 8.6
Foreign device interface PWB, Figure 28
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.21
HVF PWB, Figure 21.
4AC
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.1
8.
IME Controller PWB, Figure 14.
Figure 11
WD 8.6
9.
Ink load entry PWB, Figure 19.
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.21, WD
12.22
5AC
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.2
Figure 11
WD 8.6
Figure 24
Inserter
WD 12.21
Figure 29
WD 3.1
6AC
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.1
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.21
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.21
8AC
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.1
Figure 2
WD 1.7
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.21, WD
12.22
Figure 2
WD 1.7
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.22
Location Figures for PWB Connectors and In-line Connectors
6.
7.
28. Tray 5 control PWB, Figure 8.

29. Tri folder PWB, Figure 23.
30. UI PWBs, Figure 3.
Table 1 PJ1 to PJ99
10. Inserter PWB, Figure 24.

11. IOD pre amplifier PWB, Figure 13.
12. In-line connector PJ140 and in-line PJ, Figure 30.
13. In-line connector PJ530, Figure 22.
14. In-line connectors PJ704, PJ851, PJ904, Figure 6.
15. LCSS PWB, Figure 26.
16. Marking unit driver PWB, Figure 16.
17. Marking unit heater PWB, Figure 15.
18. Media path driver PWB, Figure 10.
19. Offline staple PWB (LCSS), Figure 27.
20. Power Supply Unit, Figure 1.
21. Power Distribution PWB, Figure 2.
22. Printhead, Figure 20.
23. Quad wave amplifier PWB, Figure 17.
February 2013
7-3
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Table 1 PJ1 to PJ99

PJ location
Table 2 PJ100 to PJ149

Wiring
diagram
PJ location
Wiring diagram
104
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.8
10
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.22
105
Figure 14
IME controller PWB
WD 9.5
10
Figure 29
WD 3.1
110
Figure 17
Quad wave amplifier PWB
WD 9.13
11
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.22
110
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.14
11
Figure 29
N/A
111
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.8
12
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.22
112
Figure 21
HVF PWB
12
Figure 29
N/A
WD 12.6, WD
12.8
13
Figure 24
Inserter PWB
WD 12.22
113
Figure 21
HVF PWB
13
Figure 29
WD 3.1
WD 12.6, WD
12.8
15
Figure 29
WD 3.1
121
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.9
16
Figure 28
WD 3.3
130
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.14
16
Figure 29
WD 3.2
131
Figure 21
HVF PWB
17
Figure 29
WD 3.2
WD 12.6, WD
12.9
18
Figure 29
WD 3.2
132
Figure 21
HVF PWB
19
Figure 29
WD 3.2
WD 12.6, WD
12.9
20
Figure 29
WD 3.3
133
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.9
21
Figure 29
N/A
140
Figure 30
In line connector (on the rear frame)
WD 1.2
24
Figure 29
WD 3.3
25
Figure 29
WD 3.3
45
Figure 29
WD 3.3
49
Figure 29
WD 3.1

PJ location
Wiring diagram
100
Figure 28
WD 3.3
101
Figure 20
Printhead 1 PWB
WD 9.20
101
Figure 20
Printhead 2 PWB
WD 9.20
101
Figure 20
Printhead 3 PWB
WD 9.21
101
Figure 20
Printhead 4 PWB
WD 9.21
101
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.1
101
Figure 10
WD 8.2
101
Figure 15
Marking unit heater board PWB
WD 9.8
101
Figure 16
Marking unit driver PWB
WD 9.9
101
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.7
102
Figure 16
WD 9.9
102
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.7, WD
12.8
103
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.8
104
Figure 10
WD 8.1
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
PJ location
Wiring diagram
150
Figure 17
WD 9.13
181
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.1
183
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.1
184
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.1
186
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.1
187
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.1
188
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.2
189
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.2
190
Figure 4
DADH PWB
WD 5.2

PJ number PJ location figure PJ location
Wiring diagram
201
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.5
201
Figure 15
Marking unit heater PWB
WD 9.8
201
Figure 19
Ink load entry PWB
WD 9.17
202
Figure 10

Refer to in-line PJ connector at Figure
30
WD 8.1
February 2013
7-4
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram
202
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.9, WD
12.10
311
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.3
312
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
203
Figure 16
WD 9.10
WD 12.3, WD
12.4
206
Figure 10
WD 8.2
313
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.4
210
no link
Hard Disc Drive
WD 3.3
314
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.4
211
no link
Hard Disc Drive
WD 3.3
315
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.4
222
Figure 29
WD 3.3
316
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.5
223
Figure 29
WD 3.2
317
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.5
318
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.5
350
Figure 27
LCSS Pause to unload PWB
WD 12.4
380
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.16

Wiring diagram
300
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.1
301
Figure 20
Printhead 1 PWB
WD 9.20
301
Figure 20
Printhead 2 PWB
WD 9.20
PJ number
PJ location figure PJ location
Wiring diagram
301
Figure 20
Printhead 3 PWB
WD 9.21
401
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.1
301
Figure 20
Printhead 4 PWB
WD 9.21
401
Figure 10
WD 8.2
301
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.5
401
Figure 21
HVF PWB
301
Figure 19
Ink load entry PWB
WD 9.17
WD 12.11, WD
12.12
301
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.10
401
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.5
301
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.1
401
Figure 15
WD 9.8
302
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.11
401
Figure 16
MU driver PWB
WD 9.11
WD 12.1
402
Figure 10
WD 8.2

WD 8.1, WD 8.2
Refer to in-line PJ connector located on
the rear frame above A4 jam clearance
guide
402
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.5
402
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.12
403
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.6
403
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.12
405
Figure 10
WD 8.3
406
Figure 10
WD 8.4
408
Figure 10
WD 8.4
410
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.15
430
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.14
302
303
303
Figure 26
Figure 10
Figure 16
LCSS PWB
WD 9.10, WD
9.11
303
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.11
303
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.1
304
Figure 16
WD 9.11
304
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.11
304
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.1
305
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.1
306
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.2
307
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.2
308
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
WD 12.2, WD
12.3
309
310
Figure 26
Figure 26
LCSS PWB
LCSS PWB
WD 12.3
WD 12.3

Wiring diagram
495
no link
OCT PWB
WD 12.23
496
PJ at component
OCT 90% full sensor
WD 12.23
497
PJ at component
OCT index sensor
WD 12.23
February 2013
7-5
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Wiring diagram
Connection PJ location figure PJ location
Wiring diagram
496
WD 12.23
566
PJ at component
BM Backstop Guide Home Sensor
WD 12.18
567
PJ at component
BM Tamper Home Sensor
WD 12.18
568
PJ at component
BM Paper Present Sensor
WD 12.18
570
PJ at component
BM Exit Sensor
WD 12.18
571
PJ at component
BM Stapler Head Carrier Closed Sensor WD 12.16
PJ at component
OCT offset motor

Wiring diagram
572
PJ at component
BM Crease Blade Home Sensor
WD 12.16
501
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.1
573
PJ at component
BM Crease Roll Gate Home Sensor
WD 12.16
501
Figure 19
Ink load entry PWB
WD 9.17
574
PJ at component
WD 12.16
501
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.12
BM Crease Blade Motor Encoder Sensor
502
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.1
575
PJ at component
BM Crease Roll Motor Encoder Sensor
WD 12.17
502
Figure 19
Ink load entry PWB
WD 9.17
576
PJ at component
Bin 2
WD 12.17
502
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.13
577
PJ at component
Bulkhead Connector
WD 12.18
503
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.1
581
PJ at component
Backstop Assembly
WD 12.17
503
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.24
582
PJ at component
Backstop Assembly
WD 12.17
504
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.1
583
PJ at component
Tri-folder attachment
WD 12.18
505
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.2
585
PJ at component
BM Stapler Head 1
WD 12.16
506
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.2
586
PJ at component
BM Stapler Head 2
WD 12.16
507
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.2
590
Figure 17
WD 9.13
511
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.2
513
Figure 8
Tray 5 control PWB
WD 7.1
530
Figure 22
In-line connector
WD 7.1
Wiring diagram
601
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.2
601
no link
Cleaning Unit PWB
WD 9.19
Wiring diagram
601
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.13
551
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.16
601
Figure 10
Not used
552
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.16, WD
12.17
601
Figure 19
Ink load entry PWB
WD 9.18
601
Figure 23
Tri folder PWB
WD 12.6, WD
12.20
601
Figure 20
Printhead PWB
WD 9.20, WD
9.21
553
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.16, WD
12.17
554
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.17
555
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.17, WD
12.18
602
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.2
602
no link
Cleaning Unit PWB
WD 9.19
556
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.18
602
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.13
557
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.18
602
Figure 23
Tri folder PWB
WD 12.20
559
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.6, WD
12.19
603
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.2
603
Figure 23
Tri folder PWB
WD 12.20
560
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.19
604
Figure 23
Tri folder PWB
WD 12.20
562
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.19
604
no link
Inline connector between PS and HDD
WD 1.5
563
Figure 25
BM PWB
WD 12.19
605
Figure 16
WD 9.11
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
February 2013
7-6
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram
605
Figure 23
Tri folder PWB
WD 12.20
901
Figure 15
WD 9.8
607
Figure 16
WD 9.11
901
Figure 19
Ink load entry PWB
610
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.15
WD 9.17 WD
9.18
630
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.14, WD
9.15 WD 9.16
902
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.4
902
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.6
660
PJ at component
Bin 2
WD 12.18
902
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.15
660
Figure 13
IOD pre amplifier PWB
WD 9.1
903
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.7
701
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.2
903
Figure 3
UI PWB
WD 3.1
701
no link
Cleaning Unit PWB
WD 9.19
904
Figure 10
WD 8.5
701
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.6
904
Figure 14
IME Controller PWB
WD 9.7
701
Figure 15
WD 9.8
904
Figure 6
In-line Connector from output device
WD 8.5
701
Figure 16
WD 9.12
905
Figure 3
UI PWB
WD 3.1
701
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.13, WD
12.14
905
Figure 10
WD 8.5
906
Figure 3
UI PWB
WD 3.1
702
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.14
907
Figure 3
UI PWB
WD 3.1
703
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.6, WD
12.14
910
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.16
920
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.1
921
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.1
922
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.1
923
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.2
924
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.2
925
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
Not used
926
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.2
927
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.2
928
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.3
929
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.2
930
Figure 5
Scanner PWB
WD 6.2
930
Figure 17
WD 9.13
950
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.3
951
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.3
952
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.3
953
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.4
954
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.4
955
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.4
956
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.5
957
Figure 9
3 tray module PWB
WD 7.5
970
Figure 17
WD 9.13
704
Figure 6
In-line Connector from tray 5
WD 8.4
760
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.16
780
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.16
801
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.3
801
Figure 10
Not used
801
Figure 16
WD 9.12
801
Figure 19
Ink load entry PWB
WD 9.17
801
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.14, WD
12.15
802
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.3, WD 9.4
802
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.15
803
Figure 10
WD 8.5
810
Figure 18
Solenoid patch PWB
WD 9.15
851
Figure 6
In-line Connector from DADH
WD 5.2
860
PJ at component
Foreign Interface Device
WD 3.3

Wiring diagram
900
Figure 3
UI PWB
WD 3.1
901
Figure 12
Drum Driver PWB
WD 9.4
901
Figure 21
HVF PWB
WD 12.15
901
Figure 3
UI PWB
WD 3.1
February 2013
7-7
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Power Supply Unit

Location: PL 1.15 Item 2
Table 12 PJDC1 to PJDC4
PJ location
Wiring
diagram
DC1
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.4
DC2
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.4
DC3
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.5
DC4
Figure 1
Power Supply Unit
WD 1.5
Figure 1 Power supply unit
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
February 2013
7-8
User Interface PWB
Location: PL 2.10 Item 2 and PL 2.10 Item 4
PJ9
PJ1
PJ8
PJ3
PJ2
Figure 2 Power distribution PWB
Figure 3 UI PWBs
February 2013
7-9
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
DADH PWB
Scanner PWB
Figure 4 DADH PWB
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Figure 5 Scanner PWB
February 2013
7-10
In-line Connectors PJ704, PJ851, PJ904
Fax Connector PWB
Location: PL 75.68, PL 5.10 Item 6, PL 12.00 (OCT), PL 12.75 (LCSS), PL 12.140 (HVF),
PJ2
PJ1
PJ851
Figure 7 Fax connector PWB

PJ904
PJ704
Figure 6 PJ704, PJ851, PJ904
February 2013
7-11
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Tray 5 Control PWB
3 Tray Module PWB
Location: PL 73.16 Item 4.
Figure 9 3 Tray module PWB
Figure 8 Tray 5 control PWB
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
February 2013
7-12
Figure 10 Media path driver PWB
Figure 11 Registration / preheat interface PWB
February 2013
7-13
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Drum Driver PWB
IOD Pre Amplifier PWB
Location: PL 94.15
Figure 13 IOD pre amplifier PWB
Figure 12 Drum driver PWB
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
February 2013
7-14
IME Controller PWB
Figure 15 Marking unit heater PWB
Figure 14 IME controller PWB
February 2013
7-15
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Quad wave amp PWB
Figure 16 Marking unit driver PWB
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Figure 17 Quad wave amp PWB
February 2013
7-16
Solenoid Patch PWB
Ink Load Entry PWB
Figure 19 Ink load entry PWB
Figure 18 Solenoid patch PWB
February 2013
7-17
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Printhead PWB
HVF PWB
Location PL 12.140 Item 2
Figure 21 HVF PWB
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
February 2013
7-18
In-Line Connector PJ530
Tri Folder PWB
PJ530
Figure 22 PJ530
Figure 23 Tri folder PWB
February 2013
7-19
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Inserter PWB
BM PWB
Figure 24 Inserter PWB
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Figure 25 BM PWB
February 2013
7-20
LCSS PWB
Pause to Unload PWB (LCSS)
Figure 27 Pause to unload PWB

Figure 26 LCSS PWB

Figure 28 Foreign device interface PWB
February 2013
7-21
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
In-Line Connector PJ140 and In-Line PJ
Bracket located on the rear frame that supports two in line connectors.
PJ17
PJ49
PJ18
PJ20
PJ5
PJ222
PJ1
In-line PJ from
PJ202 on media
path driver PWB
PJ21
PJ10
PJ15
PJ16
PJ19
PJ45
PJ223
PJ140
Ground connection
PJ13
PJ14
PJ12
PJ11
PJ24
PJ25
Wiring Data
PJ Locations
Figure 30 PJ140 and in-line PJ
February 2013
7-22
Wiring Diagrams
WD 9.15 Solenoid Patch PWB (2 of 3) Figure 41
Introduction

WD 9.17 Ink Load Entry PWB (1 of 2) Figure 43
The main PWB connections are in the following wiring diagrams:
WD 9.18 Ink Load Entry PWB (2 of 2) Figure 44
WD 1.1 Power Supply Unit (1 of 5) Figure 1
WD 9.19 Cleaning Unit PWB Figure 45
WD 9.20 Printhead 1 PWB and Printhead 2 PWB Figure 46
WD 9.21 Printhead 3 PWB and Printhead 4 PWB Figure 47
WD 9.22 IOD Pre Amp PWB Figure 48
WD 12.1 LCSS PWB (1 of 5) Figure 49
WD 1.6 Power Distribution PWB (1 of 2) Figure 6
WD 1.7 Power Distribution PWB (2 of 2) Figure 7
WD 3.1 Single Board Controller PWB (1 of 3) Figure 8
WD 12.6 HVF PWB (1 of 11) Figure 54
WD 5.1 DADH PWB (1 of 2) Figure 11
WD 5.2 DADH PWB (2 of 2) Figure 12
WD 6.1 Scanner PWB (1 of 3) Figure 13
WD 7.1 Tray 5 Control PWB (1 of 2) Figure 16
WD 7.2 Tray 5 Control PWB (2 of 2) Figure 17
WD 7.3 Tray 3 Module PWB (1 of 3) Figure 18
WD 12.16 BM PWB (1 of 4) Figure 64
WD 8.1 Media Path Driver PWB (1 of 5) Figure 21
WD 12.20 Tri Folder PWB Figure 68
WD 12.21 Inserter PWB (1 of 2) Figure 69
WD 8.6 Reg/Preheat IF PWB Figure 26
WD 12.22 Inserter PWB (2 of 2) Figure 70
WD 9.1 Drum Driver PWB (1 of 4) Figure 27
WD 12.23 OCT PWB Figure 71

WD 9.5 IME Controller PWB (1 of 3) Figure 31

The diagrams have the following features:
The connections on the PWBs are in PJ numerical sequence where possible.
The complete component to PWB wiring is shown. All interconnecting connectors are
shown, in part or in whole. Connectors shown in part have reference to other wiring diagrams as necessary.
The following colours are used to differentiate the voltages shown on the wiring diagrams:

WD 9.8 Marking Unit Heater PWB Figure 34
WD 9.9 Marking Unit Driver PWB (1 of 4) Figure 35
Purple = 0V.
Green = +3.3V.
Blue = +5V.
Yellow = +12V.
WD 9.13 Quad Wave Amplifier PWB Figure 39
Black = +17V.
February 2013
7-23
Wiring Data
Red = +24V.
Where necessary, components have references to show additional connections to them.
Straight through tracks on the PWBs are shown.
How to use Wiring Diagrams

NOTE: All adjustment, repair and part list references are shown in the relevant RAP.
Wiring diagrams are used in conjunction with their supporting RAPs. The steps that follow
should be used:
1.
From the RAP, note the name of the PWB.
2.
Note the component and its harness connection on the PWB.
3.
Go to the relevant Wiring Diagram.
4.
Locate the connector on the PWB.
5.
Assess the dependency of other components in the same harness connected to the
PWB.
6.
Isolate and repair the wiring fault.
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-24
WD 1.1 Power Supply Unit (1 of 5)

32:(56833/<81,7
3/
3-$&
/,1(,1&&7
$&/
/
9$&
,1387
:'
(
3-$&
:'
:'
/
9$&
,1387
:'
$&1
(
62&.(7'(7(&7
6:,7&+
3-$&

$&/
3-$&
0$,132:(5
52&.(56:,7&+
3/
&20
12
9
0$,132:(5
52&.(5
6:,7&+6833/<
35(66('+9

32:(5
)$&725
&255(&7,21
9%86
'580'5,9(
02725
027
3/
&1
3+$6(8

3+$6(9

1&

$&1
)
/
1
+20(+9
.
08+($7(5
3:%
$&/
:'
3-
$&1
$&1
*5<
%/8
251
%51
3-$&
:'
9
:'
3-'&
'580
'5,9(53:%
),1,6+(521
3-$&
%

%

)
3-$&
3-$&
3-$&
32:(56833/<81,7
*51
%/8
9,2

:+7

:+7
'580
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
5('
%/.
9

'580+20(
6(1625
:'
3-
9
)
2138/6(69
)
9
)
2138/6(69

'580
(1&2'(5
4
32:(5)$&725&255(&7,21
'580'5,9(02725
3-$&
3-$&
3-$&
<(/
25*
'580326,7,21(1&2'(5
$66(0%/<
3/
)
$&/

%/.
'580
3/
3-$&
$&/

02725&$6(
3+$6(:

),1,6+(5
'580'5,9(
02725
(1&2'(5
'(7(&7256
,16,'(02725
/&66:'
&1
+9):'
&1
6/(:63(('
5(9(56(
75$16),;63(('
,0$*,1*63(('
78$
Figure 1 Wiring diagram 1.1
February 2013
7-25
Wiring Data

32:(56833/<81,7
3/
$&/
,1/,1(
3-
3-$&
)
$&/
:'
$&1
G&

3-;

,1.0(/7+($7(5$&/
:+7
%/$&.+($7(5
G&

G&
<(//2:+($7(5
3-;

,1.0(/7+($7(5$&/
&<$1+($7(5
6833/<9$&/
6833/<9$&/
$79$&
$79$&
6833/<9$&1
6833/<9$&/
$79$&6833/<9$&1
$79$&6833/<9$&1
%/8

G&

%
G&

%
)
)
)25,1.0(/7+($7(5
7+(50,672566((:'

0$*(17$+($7(5
5('
)
$&1
$&/
0$*(17$,1.
0(/7+($7(5
<(/
$&/
:+7
9,2
<(/
%

%

$&/
'580
+($7(5
6:,7&+,1*
&&7
G&

%

%

$&/7+(50$/&2
+($7(521/$&/
+($7(521/$&/
251
+($73/$7(
:+7

:+7
9,2
<(/
251
7+(50,6725
6((:'
%/.
3-;
9,2
9,2
$&/7+(50$/&2
'580
$66(0%/<
3/
5('

+($7(521
5(*,675$7,21
35(+($7
$66(0%/<
3/
251
$&/
:+7
833(5+($7
3/$7(

%
<(/
251
9,2
7+(50$/&87
2873:%
3-
$&/
3-$&
&<$1,1.
0(/7+($7(5
3-;
G&
$&/
$79$&
$79$&
$&/
<(//2:,1.
0(/7+($7(5
,1./2$'(50(/7
3/$7($66(0%/<
3/
<(/
:+7
%/.
3-;

%/$&.,1.
0(/7+($7(5
'580+($7(5
9,2

%/.
:+7

+($7(521
:+7
32:(56833/<81,7
'580+($7(5
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-26
32:(56833/<81,7
3/
9
9
35(6(17
5('
9
9
99
*(1(5$7,21
9
9
$&/
:'
9
99
*(1(5$7,21
$&1
:'
:'
:'
:'
:'
9
:'
9
9
9
*(1(5$7,21
32:(5
)$&725
&255(&7,21
9%86
9
:'
:'
:'
9
9
35(6(17
9
8160227+('
251
9
9
*(1(5$7,21
9
:'
:'
9
*51

(67$5
*(1(5$7,21
:'
9(67$5
9(67$5
*(1(5$7,21
9(67$5
32:(5)$&725&255(&7,21
'580'5,9(02725
:'
:'
6/((302'(9
5819
:'
9
9
:'
:'
78$
February 2013
7-27
Wiring Data

32:(56833/<81,7
3/
3-'&
9
9
9
9
<$;,6&855(176(1625
9
9
9
:+7
9
*5<
9
9,2
9
%/8
9
*51
9
<(/
9
,0(&21752//(5
3:%
:'
3-
9
3-'&
9
251
9
99*5281'6(16(
5('
%51
9
%/.
9
:+7%51
9
:+75('
9
:+7251
96(16(
:+7<(/
9
:+7*51
9
:+7%/8
9
:+79,2
9
:+7*5<
9
:'
3-
'580+($7(5693$5$//(/
'580+($7(5696(5,(6
),1,6+(521+9
9
<$;,63+$6(8

9

9

9

9

9
9
9
(67$5
9
'580'5,9(7;3685;

'580'5,9(365;3687;
9
$&7,9(9

$&7,9(9

(1(5*<67$59

9
9
9
(1(5*<67$59

9
9
9
$1$/2*8(32:(5*$8*(9

9
32:(56833/<81,7
+($7(5(1$%/(

368)$121+9

9
3-'&

9
3-'&
9

$1$/2*8(32:(5*$8*(9

32:(5)$,/

9

&/..+=,1

9
'580
'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
9

9

<$;,602725(1$%/(

5,%%21&$%/(
<$;,63+$6(9

,0(&20+($7(55(/$<
9

9
3-'&
'580
'5,9(5
3:%

$1$/2*8(6,*1$/%(7:((19
$1'9:+(17+(6,*1$/,6
$%29(97+(32:(586(',6
:,7+,1(;3(&7('9$/8(
<$;,63+$6(:

9

9
0$&+,1(,11250$/02'(9
0$&+,1(,16/((302'(9
<$;,6&855(176(1625
9
9
9
9
(67$5
:'
9
5,%%21&$%/(
9
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-28

32:(56833/<81,7
3/
3-'&
9
9
9
(67$5
9
:'
*15
9
251
9
%15

9

9
9
'580
'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
9
%51
9
9
9
9
5('
251
<(/
*51
9
%/.
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
9
9
9
%51
5('
251
9
<(/
9
9
*51
%/8
'580
'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
9
%/.:+7
9
9
9
%51:+7
5(':+7
251:+7
9(67$5
9
9
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
9(67$5
9
<(/:+7
*51:+7
%51:+7
5(':+7
251:+7
9

9

9
32:(5
',675,%87,21
3:%
9
%/.

5(':+7
:'
3-
5('251
9
5('%/.
9
:+7%/.
9
:+7*51

9
:+7251
,1/,1(
3-

9
9
912786('
<(/
9
%/.

995(712786('
995(7
%/.
+$5'',6.
'5,9(
:'
3-
5('

9

9
6/((302'(9
5819
9
9(67$5

9

%/.:+7

%/8
9
9
9
9

3-'&
%/.
9
<(/
5('
9
9
9(67$5

3-'&
9

3-'&
9
9
32:(56833/<81,7
78%
February 2013
7-29
Wiring Data
WD 1.6 Power Distribution PWB (1 of 2)
32:(5',675,%87,213:%
3/
3-
9
9
9
9
9
32:(56833/<
81,7
9
:'
3-'&
<(/
251

5('

9
%51

:+7*51
:+7251
9
*(1(5$7,21
6%&

9
9

9
9

9
9

6/((302'(9
5819
2)),16/((302'(
9
:+7
9
:+7
9
:+7
9
:+7
*5281'6(16(
:+7
9
:+7
6,1*/(%2$5'
&21752//(5
3:%
9
:+7
1&
:+7%/.
9 :+7*51
9
5(':+7

9
9
9

5('251
9

%/.
3-
*51
:'
3-
9
:+7
:+7
:+7
9
9
9
:+7
96(16(
:+7
9
:+7
:+7
9
,,73:5(1$%/(
:+7
9
:'

9
9
*(1(5$7,21
,,7
9
9
:'
9
3-
3-
)
)
)
3-
3-
3-
32:(5',675,%87,21
3:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-30
WD 1.7 Power Distribution PWB (2 of 2)

32:(5',675,%87,213:%
3/
3-
9
9
:'
5('
9
)
9
9,2
9
9
9
9

9
9
9

<(/

9
9
9,2
)
9
9
9
5('
9,2
)
:+7
9

9
9,2

9
251

:'
3-
9

9
6&$11(53:%
9
9
9,2
9
3-
9
5('
9
5('

9
9,2

9
251
9
9
9,2

9

9,2
9
3-
&+$66,6)$1
3/
'$'+3:%
:'
3-
9,2
5('
9
9
6/((302'(9
5819
5('
)$121
)$1)$,/'(7(&7
%/.
%/8
3-
3-
9
)
)
)
3-
3-
3-
32:(5',675,%87,21
3:%
78$
February 2013
7-31
Wiring Data
WD 3.1 Single Board Controller PWB (1 of 3)

6,1*/(%2$5'&21752//(53:%
3/
)$;&211(&7253:%
3/
3-
3-
3-
3-

5,%%21
&$%/(
)$;
02'8/(
3/

3-
'$7$
'$7$
,0(&21752//(5
3:%
&/.
&/.
:'
3-
'$7$
'$7$
'$7$
'$7$
3$,5

3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

86%3257
3-
3$,5
3$,5

3-
,11(56+,(/'

6<67(0
0(025<
3:%
3/
,11(56+,(/'
3$,5
3$,5
3$,5
3$,5
3$,5
3$,5
3$,5
3$,5
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3-
3$,5
3$,5

:'
3-
3$,5

6&$11(5
3:%
3-
)$;&211(&7253:%
3-
3-
3-
3$,5
3-
3$,5
,11(56+,(/'
,11(56+,(/'
6((:'
)2532:(5727+(
6,1*/(%2$5'
&21752//(53:%
3-
6%&3:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-32
3-
3-
3-
9
:+7
9
:+7
9
:+7
9
:+7
:+7
9
32:(5
',675,%87,21
3:%
:+7
9
9
:'
3-
:+7
:+7
9
:+7
9
:+7
9
:+7
96(16(
9
:+7
:+7
9
:+7
,,73:5(1$%/(
:+7
6%&7;6&5;
6%&5;6&7;
:'
3-
6%&7;6&5;
6%&5;6&7;
%51
%/8
*5<
5('

9

9
9

9

8,67$7863:%
9

3-

9 9
3-

9

3-
9

9

9

9

72

9

3-
9

3-
72
%/.
9

72

86(5,17(5)$&(
67$7863:%
3/
9
9
&1

5,%%21
&$%/(
9

9

3-

3-

/&'&/2&.

9

/&'&/2&.

9

3-
72

/&''$7$
5,%%21
&$%/(

/&''$7$
/&''$7$
86(5,17(5)$&(
728&+6&5((1
3/
3-
/&''$7$
3-
6&$11(53:%
/&''$7$

3-
/&''$7$

*5281'6(16(
86(5,17(5)$&(
&21752/3:%
3/
6,1*/(%2$5'&21752//(53:%
3/
19002'8/(3:%
3/
:$.(8332:(5/9
3-
3-
3-

3-

6%&5;8,7;
6%&5;8,7;
6%&7;8,5;
6%&7;8,7;
6%&3:%

3-

9
9
9

9
3-
3-
9

3-
3-
3-
8,&21752/3:%

9
78$
February 2013
7-33
Wiring Data

)25(,*1,17(5)$&(.,73/
3-
5(6(7/

3-
9
03'7;6%&5;
03'7;6%&5;
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
03'5;6%&7;

9
:$.(83/
32:(51250$/
9

72

5,%%21
&$%/(
&20321(17
6,'(
)'(1$%/(
&23<&2817%
)'35(6(17
287387$
9
9
3-
3-

03'5;6%&7;
:,5,1*
6,'(
9
3-

9
:'
3-
)25(,*1'(9,&(
,17(5)$&(3:%
6,1*/(%2$5'&21752//(53:%
3/

6,0&$5'
3- &211(&725

287387%
287387$
287387%
287387%
287387$
9

3-
(3&0(025<
3:%
3/
)25(,*1'(9,&(
,17(5)$&(3:%

3-

72:$<
'7<3(
%8/.+($'
&211(&725
287387$
287387%
-1+
&23<&2817$
5,%%21
&$%/(
+$5'',6.'5,9(
3/
3-
32:(5
6833/<
81,7
:'
3-'&
<(/
%/.
9

9

995(7851
12786('
9
5('

995(7851
%/.
3-
3-

912786('
9
9
+''5;&&%7;
+''5;&&%7;
9
+''7;&&%5;
+''7;&&%5;
9

5,%%21
&$%/(
9
3-
3-
9
3-
9
6((:'
)2532:(5727+(
6,1*/(%2$5'
&21752//(53:%
3-
6%&3:%
3-
78%
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-34
WD 5.1 DADH PWB (1 of 2)
3-
027252138/6(69

'$'+&97
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
'$'+3:%
3/
3-
9
9
251

%/8

5('

3-
027252138/6(69
'$'+)(('02725
027
3/

251
027252138/6(69
%/8
027252138/6(69
9

(1(5*,6('/9
251
%/8
%/.
9
'$'+)(('
6(1625
4
3/
*5<
<(/
9,2
3-
9

'2&80(176(16('/9
9

'$'+'2&80(17
6(1625
4
3/
9
9
,17/.
5('
3-
%/.
9,2
3- 3-

<(/
'$'+'83/(;
62/(12,'
62/
3/
'2&80(176(16('/9
<(/
9
9,17/.
3-
9
*5<
9

027252138/6(69

<(/
3-

9
3-
9

9
*5<
'2&80(176(16('/9

<(/

3-
9
9,2
'$'+35(
5(*,675$7,21
6(1625
4
3/
9
3-
18'*(502725
027
3/
9,17/.

0272521/9
251
9
9
,17/.
3-

3-
9

<(/

%/8
9
3-
'$'+)(('
&/87&+
&/
3/
9,17/.
%/.
9
9
,17/.
(1(5*,6('/9
251
%/8
%/.

*5<

9,2

*5<

<(/

9,2
3-

'2&80(176(16('/9
9
3-
9

9
9
'$'+&97
6(1625
4
3/
3-
'2&80(176(16('/9
9

'$'+7$5
6(1625
4
3/
9
3-
6((:')25
32:(5727+,6
3:%
9
,17/.
3-
9
6833/<

3-
3-

3-
3-
'$'+3:%
9
251
9
&29(5&/26('+9
251
'$'+&29(5,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6

3/
6:,7&+,6&/26(':+(1
&29(5,6&/26('
78$
February 2013
7-35
Wiring Data
WD 5.2 DADH PWB (2 of 2)
'$'+3:%
3/
3-
9

32:(5
',675,%87,21
3:%

:'
3-

5('
9
5('
995(7
995(7
995(7
995(7
9
9
9
9
3-
9

9
5('
251
9,2
9,2
9,2
9,2

9

9

6&$11(5
3:%

&&5;'$'+7;
&&5;'$'+7;

:'
3-
&&7;'$'+5;

&&7;'$'+5;
%/.
*51
1&
9
3$3(56(16('/9
9
*5<
<(/
9,2
'2&80(176(16('/9
<(/
9
9,2
'$'+75$<6,=(
6(1625
4
3/
9
9
*5<
'2&80(176(16('/9
<(/
9
9,2
'$'+75$<
6,=(6(1625
4
3/

9
9
3-

9
9
3-

:+7
<(/
1&
1&
3-
'$'+(;,7
6(1625
4
3/
%/8
9
*5<
3-

'$'+$&7,9(
9
9

3-
3-

9
9
*5<
9729
<(/
9
9,2

'$'+:,'7+
6(1625
4
3/

9
9
3-
3-
9
9
*(1(5$7,21
3-
'$'+3:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-36
WD 6.1 Scanner PWB (1 of 3)
6,1*/(%2$5'
&21752//(5
3:%
6%&7;6&5;
6%&5;6&7;
:'
3-
6%&7;6&5;
6%&5;6&7;
%51
%/8
*5<
5('
9
9
9
5('
9,2
5('
9,2
9
9
:'
3-
9
9
9
9
<(/
9,2
:+7
9,2
'$'+3:%
*51
:'
3-
%/.

9
9

9

9
9

9
9
9
251

9
&&7;'$'+5;
&&7;'$'+5;
&&5;'$'+7;
&&5;'$'+7;
<(/
*51
%/.

:+7
:+7

%/8

'$'+$&7,9(
1&
%/8
%/8
%/8

3-
,11(56+,(/'
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3$,5
3$,5

3$,5

,11(56+,(/'
3-
3-

9,2
<(/
3-

9
9
32:(5
',675,%87,21
3:%
6&$11(53:%
3/
3-
:'
3-
3$,5

3$,5

3$,5

3$,5

3$,5

3$,5

,11(56+,(/'

6,1*/(%2$5'
&21752//(53:%
,11(56+,(/'
3-
3-
6&$11(53:%
78$
February 2013
7-37
Wiring Data
'2&80(17
6,=(6(1625
4
3/
6(16('/9
*5<
%/.
9
%/.
&$55,$*(
+20(6(1625
4
3/
%51
5('
9
251
$1*/(6(1625
4
3/
&1
1&
5,%%21&$%/(
9

&1

9
9

<(/

&1
1&
1&
/('
(;32685(
/$03
3/
9
9
9
9
9
9
5,%%21&$%/(
+20(/9
9
3-
9
6(16('/9
(1$%/(
%/.

/('
(;32685(
/$03
3/
9
9
9

&1
9

*5<
9
3-
9
9
*5<
'2&80(17
6,=(6(1625
4
3/
3-
9
6&$11(53:%
3/
9
1&
1&
9
3-
5$,6('/9

*51
9
%/8
3-
3-
3-

'$'+'2:1/9
%/.
9

9
%/.
9
3/$7(1'2:1
6(1625
4
3/
3-
3-

6((:'
)2532:(572
7+,63:%

3-
251
%/8
5('
<(/
6&$11(53:%
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
&$55,$*(
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69
029(72
+20(
'2&80(176,=(
&97
326,7,21$
326,7,21%
326,7,21&
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-38
6&$11(53:%
3/
6&$1&$55,$*($66(0%/<
3/
3-
,17

9
9

9

9
&+

9
&+
&+
9

9
9

/567
9

%:25&

9

9

9
&+
/567

9
9
9

3;&/.

3;&/.
9

9

9

9

9
9

9

1&

1&
9

9

1&

1&
9

9

9

5,%%21&$%/(
9
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+(
6&$11(53:%
3-
6&$11(53:%
78$
February 2013
7-39
Wiring Data
WD 7.1 Tray 5 Control PWB (1 of 2)

75$<&21752/3:%
3/
9,1
3-
9
251
9
251
9
251
9
9
251
5('
9
5('
9
5('
9
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
9,2

9,1
9

9,1
9
9
83

'2:1

251
9
251
027252138/6(69
%/8
027252138/6(69
<(/
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
:+7
83+'2:1/9
5('
75$<
75$163257
02725
027
3/
*51
3-
9
(/(9$725
02725
027
3/
83/'2:1+9
%/8
3-
1&
75$<35(6(17/9
75;03'7;
75;03'7;
&/.
&/.
77;03'5;
77;03'5;
3-
9

9

9

9
3-
251
$&78$7('/9
251
9
*5<
3$3(535(6(17/9
<(/
9
9,2
9

9
3-
9

75$<'2:1
/,0,76:,7&+
6
3/

3-
9

3-
$7833(5/,0,7/9
251
3-
833(5/,0,7
6:,7&+
6
3/
9
251
9

3-
3-
3-
9
9
*5<
75$<(037<+9
%51
9
9,2
)(('6(1625
4
3/
75$<(037<
6(1625
4
3/
9
75$<&21752/
3:%
)257+(02725(1&2'(5
6((:'
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-40
WD 7.2 Tray 5 Control PWB (2 of 2)

75$<&21752/3:%
3/
3-
67$&.+(,*+7
6(1625
4
3/
9
9
*5<

67$&.83/9
67$&.'2:1/9
%/.
9
*5<
,1'(;('+9
*51
9

9

%/.
9
:+7
027252138/6(69
5('
027252138/6(69
<(/
027252138/6(69
%/8
251
027252138/6(69

)(('02725
027
3/

9
9
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%

'&

9
9
3-
75$<'2&.('/9
9
9
9,2
75$<'2&.,1*
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6
3/
9
9

9

9,2
3-
3-
(/(9$725
(1&2'(5
6(16254
3/

9
*5<
9

9,2

75$<'2:1
6(1625
4
3/
:+7
9
3-
3-
9
9
%/8
9,2

3-
3-

9
9
3-
3-
75$<'225
6:,7&+
6
3/

'225&/26('/9
9
<(/
9,2

3-
9
75$<&21752/
3:%
)257+(75$<(/(9$725
027256((:'
78$
February 2013
7-41
Wiring Data
WD 7.3 Tray 3 Module PWB (1 of 3)
3-
3-
9

9

7)(('
(/(9$725
02725
027
3/
75$<02'8/(3:%
3/
9

%/.

*5<

5('
*51
<(/
%/8
9

67$&.83
/9
9
&5
*51
9

251

9

%/.
9,2

9
9
027252138/6(69
9
251
9
9,2
9
:'
3-
9
9
707;03'5;
707;03'5;
3-
&5
&5
3-
705;03'7;
&/.$
705;03'7;
&/.%
9

&5
*51
9

9,2
9
9
9
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
251
9
9

9
9
9
5('

9,2
<(/
9,2
%51
9

9
(67$5

75$<02'8/(3:%

251
:+7
9,2

%/.
3-

*5<
5('

9
*51
%/8

*51
<(/
%/8
251
%/.
9,2
9

3$3(535(6(17
/9
9
)(('6(1625
4
3/

3-
9

9

7)(('
(/(9$725
02725
027
3/

3-

9
67$&.83
/9
9
67$&.+(,*+7
6(1625
4
3/
251
*5<

9,2

251

9
75$<(037<
+9

9
75$<(037<
6(1625
4
3/

3-

9
9

9
9

75$<(037<
6(1625
4
3/
3-

:+7

9

*5<
75$<(037<
+9
9
9
9
%/.
3-

9,2

3-
9

3-

9

*5<
9
3-

9
251

9
9
9

9
3-
67$&.
+(,*+7
6(1625
4
3/
9
3-
3-
9
3-

3-
9
:+7
9,2

9
3$3(535(6(17
/9
9
)(('6(1625
4
3/

78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-42

3-
3-
9

9

7)(('
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

3-
9

67$&.+(,*+7
6(1625
4
3/
67$&.83/9

9

3-

75$<(037<
6(1625
4
3/
9
75$<(037<+9
9

)(('6(1625

4
3/
3$3(535(6(17/9
9

3-
/2:(5
'225
,17(5/2&.
4
3/
5('
*51
<(/
%/8
251

%/.
9,2
9

251
*51
9,2

9

9

251
:+7
9,2

9
9
9

9
9
251

9
9
G&

%51
9
9,2
:+7
9
9,2
75$<
75$163257
6(1625
4
3/
9
251
3$3(535(6(17
/9
%51
9
9,2

9
251
2138/6(6
%/8
7$56(1625
4
3/
75$<(/(9$725
02725
:'
3-
9
9,2
9

3-
9
9

9

3$3(535(6(17/9
*51
9
7$56(1625
4
3/
9,2
9
9
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
3-
9
251

9
3-

3-
3$3(535(6(17
/9
9
9
9,2
3-

5('
75$<+20(
6(1625
4
3/
9 9
'225&/26('/9
3-
3-
+20(/9
9
9
251
9

3-
9
9
9
9 9
9
3-

9
9
251
3-
9

3-
9
%/.
*5<
75$<02'8/(3:%
3/
9
3-
3-

9
251
3$3(535(6(17/9
<(/
9
9,2
7$56(1625
4
3/
9
75$<02'8/(3:%
78$
February 2013
7-43
Wiring Data

75$<02'8/(3:%
3/
9
3-
3-
9

75$<
75$163257
02725
027
3/
:+7
027252138/6(69
5('
027252138/6(69
<(/
027252138/6(69
%/8
027252138/6(69
75$<83
/,0,76:,7&+
3/
%/.
9
251
5('

9
(67$5
9

9
(67$5
75$<(/(9$7(02725
3/
75$<
(/(9$7(
02725
027
6:
75$<6,=(
6:,7&+
12 6
6:
75$<6,=(
12 6:,7&+
6
6:
75$<6,=(
6:,7&+
6
6:
75$<6,=(
6:,7&+
6
6:
75$<6,=(
12 6:,7&+
6
6:
75$<6,=(
12 6:,7&+
6
6:
75$<6,=(
12 6:,7&+
6
6:
75$<6,=(
6:,7&+
6
6:
75$<6,=(
6:,7&+
6
6:
12
0272521/9
75$<6,=(
12 6:,7&+
6
9
(67$5
9
%/.

9
(67$5
3-
(/(9$725
02725
(1&2'(5
6(1625
4
9
75$<
02'8/(3:%
2138/6(69
$//21%2$5'6:,7&+(6
$&78$7('/9
$//21%2$5'6:,7&+(6
12,67+(&(175(&217$&7
12
:'
3-
9
9
(67$5
9
(67$5
6:
6:
6:
3-
6:
9
(67$5
6:
6:
12
6:
6:
3-
6:
75$<02'8/(3:%
5($5
9
&20
9
&20
9
&20
9
&20
9
&20
9
9
(67$5
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
6:
&20
6:
9
(67$5

7
3-
21%2$5'6:,7&+(6
+25,=217$/75$163257
12 +20(6:,7&+
6
3-
9
7

9
(67$5
9
(67$5
6:
6:
12
6:
75$<02'8/(3:%
)5217
&20
9
&20
9
&20
9
&20
9
&20
9
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-44
WD 8.1 Media Path Driver PWB (1 of 5)

0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
3/
3-
3-;
0,''225
,17(5/2&.
6
3/
,1/,1(
3-
1&
9
%/.
&/26('/9

:+7
3-;
833(5'225
,17(5/2&.
6
3/
9(67$5
&/26('/9
6(16('/9
5('

9
6(16('/9
%/.
%/8
9
5('
3-;
2138/6(69
2138/6(69
5('
<(/
9
%/.
251
:+7

9
6(16253$3(5/9
%/.
<(/
%/8
5$/3++20(+9
9,2
9
5('

251
027252138/6(69
3-
):'

5(9

G&

G&

5('
:+7
%51
581
1,3$23(1
1,3$1$552:
1,3$0(',80
1,3$:,'(
5/3++$7&+&/26(
5/3++$7&+23(1

:+7

%51

+25,=217$/
75$163257027250
:'
):'95(99
9
9

5(*,675$7,21
02725$0
027
,1/,1(
3):'95(99

:+7

%/8
9

9
(67$5

:+7

%/.
9

5('
5('
9
+25,=217$/3$3(53$7+
,1/,1(
3-
3-
(1(5*,6('/9

<(/

027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
9
027252138/6(69
5(*,675$7,21
02725$0
027
3-
027252138/6(69
<(/

$,53803621/9
3-
9
5(*,675$7,2135(+($7
$66(0%/<
3/
027252138/6(69
251
$,5380369
3-
35(+($77+(50,67259729
581
5/3++$7&+&/26(
5/3++$7&+23(1
3-
027252138/6(69
5('
%51
:'
3-
0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
%51
9
9
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
$
,1/,1(
3-
3027252138/6(69
5(*,675$7,21
35(+($7
,17(5)$&(3:%
%51
%
9
9

9(57,&$/
75$163257
027250
(1&2'(5
027
3/
9
(67$5
):'95(99
%51
3-;
&21),50
6(1625
4
3/
%/.
%/8
9
):'95(99
:+7

9(67$5

%/.
:+7
9

9
(67$5
3-;
9(57,&$/
75$163257
6(1625
4
3/
3-
):'

5(9

1,3&5(/($6(
62/(12,'
62/
3/
,1/,1(
3-
3-
(1(5*,6('/9
5('
5('

+33',9(57(5
62/(12,'
62/
3/

9
,1/,1(
3-
9
9

:+7
9,2

(;,73$3(53$7+
,1/,1(
33-
9
5('
(1(5*,6('/9
%/8
5('
5('

(;,7'83/(;
',9(57(562/(12,'
62/
3/
78$
February 2013
7-45
Wiring Data
3-

326775$16),;
027250
027
3/
%51
251
027252138/6(69
5('
027252138/6(69

3-

(;,7027250
027
3/
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69

0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
3/
3-
027252138/6(69
,1/,1(
3
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

<(/
3-

9
9
75$<
02'8/(
3:%
:'
3-
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
9
%51
251
5('
<(/
251
251
9,2
9,2
5('
9,2
9
9
707;03'5;
707;03'5;
<(/
9,2
*51
%51
5817$.($:$<52//6
/$7&+675,3*$7(
81/$7&+675,3*$7(
&/.$
*5<
705;03'7;
%/8
&/.%
3-
3-
9
9

03'7;6%&&&%5;
9
):'

5(9

9
%/.
705;03'7;
:+7
03'5;6%&&&%7;
9

9
:$.(83/
32:(51250$/

9

5,%%21
&$%/(
9
(67$5

3-
9

9
9
&/26('/9

9
(67$5
9

9
:'
3-
03'5;6%&&&%7;

6,1*/(%2$5'
&21752//(53:%
03'7;6%&&&%5;

3-
9
5(6(7
9
9

,1./2$'(5
'2256:,7&+
6
3/
9
(67$5

9
3-

(6'
$17(11$

9

9
3-
3- 3-
0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
78%
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-46

0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
3/
%<3$6602'8/(
3-
3-
3-
9
9

%<3$66)(('
027250
027
3/
%/.
9
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
5('
*51
027252138/6(69
<(/
027252138/6(69
%/8
9

9

%<3$66:,'7+
6(1625
4
3/
9,2

5('
9
251
9
9,2
3-
9
9,2
18'*(5+20(/9
*5<
9
9,2
18'*(5+20(
6(1625
4
3/

/()7+$1''225
3-
9

9

9
9
5('
%/.

(1(5*,6('/9

1,3'5(/($6(
62/(12,'
62/
3/

9

9
9
:+7
9
3-;

251
,1/,1(
3
9
9,2

9

9
9729

%/.

G&

9

3-;

%<3$66)(('
6(1625
4
3/
251
75$<(037</9
327(17,20(7(5
4
3/
9
6(16('/9

%<3$66(037<
6(1625
4
3/

3- 3-
9

9
*5<
%<3$6602'8/(
3-
251
9
9,2

9
9
3-
3$3(535(6(17/9

%/.
9
251
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
9

9

0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
78$
February 2013
7-47
Wiring Data
,1.75$163257
02725
027
3/

,1/,1(
3- 33-
):'/5(9+9
%/.
):'+5(9/9
%51
:+7
5('
0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
3/

3-
):'

5(9

9
(67$5
6:,7&+('9(67$5
6:,7&+('9(67$5
<(//2$'35(6(17/9
5('
5('
<(/
0$*/2$'35(6(17/9
0$*
&<1/2$'35(6(17/9
%/./2$'35(6(17/9
%/./2$'35(6(17/9
,1./2$'
(175<3:%
<(//2$'35(6(17/9
:'
3-
0$*/2$'35(6(17/9
%/.5('
%/.:+7
%/.
<(/
&<1/2$'35(6(17/9
0$*
&<1

027252138/6(69

5('
027252138/6(69
<(/
027252138/6(69
251
027252138/6(69
%51
3-;

,1..(<3/$7(02725
027
3/

3-
,0(7;03'5;
9
(67$5
,0(7;03'5;
9(67$5
&/.

&/.

5(6(75(48(67

,0(5;03'7;

,0(
&21752//(5
3:%
:'
3-
,0(5;03'7;

9(67$5
3-
%/.7(039729
%/.
<(/7(039729
<(/
0$*7(039729
0$*
&<17(039729
&<1
9
%/.
9
&<1/2$'/2:+9
%/.
&<1
,1./2$'
(175<3:%
:'
3-
0$*/2$'/2:+9
<(//2$'/2:+9
0$*
<(/
%/./2$'/2:+9
%/.
,1./2$'
(175<3:%
:'
3-
&<1(175<35(6(17/9
0$*(175<35(6(17/9
<(/(175<35(6(17/9
&<1
0$*
<(/
%/.(175<35(6(17/9
%/.

9(67$5

9(67$5

9(67$5

9(67$5

9
75;03'7;
&/.
&/.
77;03'5;
75$<&21752/
3:%
:'
3-

77;03'5;

9
9
9

9
326,7,21
326,7,21
326,7,21
735(6(17/9
9
9
9 (67$5

75;03'7;
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
9(67$5
9
9
9
75$<&21752/
3:%
:'
3-
3-
9
9
9
3-
3-
0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-48

0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%
3/
9
3-
9
*51
9
<(/
9
251
9
5('
9
32:(56833/<81,7
%51
9
:'
3-'&
%/.
9
9
9
251:+7
%/.:+7
%/8:+7
9

'6
*51
9

9

9
9
9

9
03'7;/&66+9)5;
'(9,&(6(/(&7
2&702725(1$%/(/9
2&79
2&79
287387
'(9,&(

'(9,&(6(/(&7
9
03'5;/&66+9)7;
2&7:'
3-
03'5;/&66+9)7;
/&663:%:'
3-
'(9,&(6(/(&7
+9)3:%:'
3-
75$</(9(/,1
9
9
3-
3-
3-
9
9

9(67$5

9
'6
0(',$3$7+'5,9(53:%

9

9

9

9
5('

9

%/.
%/8
5('
%/8
:+7
%/8
:+7
%/.
%/8

,1/,1(
3

3-;

3$3(535(6(17/9
9
9

3-;

3$3(535(6(17/9
9
/('/,7/9

(;,7,//80,1$725
3/
3-;

9
9
(;,7
6(1625
4
3/
3-;
9
/('/,7/9
'83/(;67$57
6(1625
4
3/
+25,=217$/
,//80,1$725
3/
3-;

3$3(535(6(17/9
9
'83/(;
6(1625
4
3/
5('
9

9

:+7

/('/,7/9
3-;

9
5(*35(+($7
,//80,1$725
3/
%/8
9
9

G&

<(/

9(67$5

5('
G&

%/8

9

9

%/.
251

9
3-;
2138/6(69
2138/6(69

1&
9

9
%/.

9
'6
*51
9

%/8
5('

9
3$3(535(6(17/9
9
+25,=217$/
75$163257
027250
027
$1'(1&2'(5
3/
:'
3-

9
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%

9
'6

1&
3-
03'7;/&66+9)5;
5('
,1/,1(
3-
9
5(':+7
9(67$5
9

%51:+7
3-

3-;

'83/(;(1'
6(1625
4
3/
9
78$
February 2013
7-49
Wiring Data
WD 8.6 Reg / Preheat IF PWB

5(*,675$7,2135(+($7
,17(5)$&(3:%
3/
3-
9
95()
9287
'580'5,9(5
3:%
67$5738/6(
9
:'
3-
&/.
/('(1$%/(
9
%51
251
<(/
9,2
%/.
31.
*5<
:+7
3-
9
9

6&5((1
*5281'

9/('
9
9
3-

9
9
9

9
9
$,53803621/9
$,538039
3-
7+(5092/769729
:+7
:+7
9
*(1(5$7,21
5('
%/8
%/.
9
3$3(5/9
9
%/.
5(*,675$7,2135(+($7
,17(5)$&(3:%)5217
3-
9
5$/3++20(+9
5('
%/.
5('
5(*35(+($7+20(
6(1625
4

21/9
9

9
3-
1&
3$3(5
35(+($7(5
7+(50,6725
3/
35(75$16),;
6(1625
4
3/
9
3-
5(*,675$7,2135(+($7
,17(5)$&(3:%%$&.
9
3-

:'
3-
5,%%21
&$%/(
/2:(53/$7(/(7$66(0%/<
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
3-

9
3-
9
6(16253$3(5/9

1&

9

5('/('

35(+($77+(50,6725
9729
*51/('

9
%/8/('
&/.
9
67$5738/6(
9
9
6(16255()92/7$*(
9
9
9
9
9
5(*,675$7,216&$1%$5
4
3/
,0$*(9,'(2
9

5(*,675$7,2135(+($7
$66(0%/<
3/
5(*35(+($7$,5
3803
027
3/
3803
%2'<
21/9
9
5(*35(+($7$,5
3803
027

3/
3803
%2'<
78%
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-50
WD 9.1 Drum Driver PWB (1 of 4)
&$%/(
6&5((1
%/.
9287
<(/
95()
251
9
67$5738/6(
&/2&.
,2'35($03/,),(5
3:%
%51
9,2
3,1.
9
%/.
:'
3-
/('$12'(
%/8/('
*51/('
5('/('
02725(1&2'(5$
02725(1&2'(5%
):'+5(9/9
):'/5(9+9
%/.
%/8
*51
5('
<(/
251
:+7
*5<
3-;
027252138/6(69

5($575$16),;
02725
027
$1'(1&2'(5
3/
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

3-;

%/.
9
<(/
9
9
9
%51
251
5('
9
9
(67$5

%
9
$
%/.
<(/
5('
<(/
9
5('
$
$

$
9

9
$

,1/,1(
39
7(039729
9
%
%
%
251
9

%

9
9
%
%
63(('&21752/38/6(6
<(/
9
%/.
5('

%

5('
9,2
<(/
%/8
%/8
%/.
5('
9,2

'580)$1
027
3/

9
9
'580
326,7,21
(1&2'(5
9
:'
*5<
:+7%/.
:+7251
:+75('
2138/6(69

9
2138/6(69
:+7251
&$%/(6&5((1
3-
'580'5,9(53:%
)257+('580+($7(566((:'
)257+(5($57+(50,67256((:'
&2'(5816%27+)5217$1'
5($575$16),;027256
(1&2'(5'&
(1&2'(5'&
251
<(/
)5217'580
7+(50,6725
3/
+20(+9
%/8
3-
'580'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
251
1&
3-
3-;
%/.
9

7$&+2138/6(6
251

%51
%/.
,1/,1(
33-;
:+7
%

251

2138/6(69
%51
)5217
75$16),;
)/(;85(
(1&2'(5
3/
9

<(/
9
$
2138/6(69
$
027252138/6(69

3-;
9
G&
3-;
9
%/.
9
027252138/6(69
$
$
5('
027252138/6(69
G&
'580'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
027252138/6(69
$
$
3-;

G&
251
)521775$16),;
02725
027
$1'(1&2'(5
3/
3-
$
3-
<(/
9
'580'5,9(53:%
3/
3-
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+('580
'5,9(53:%
78$
February 2013
7-51
Wiring Data

'580'5,9(53:%
3/
&/($1,1*81,7
02725
$66(0%/<
3-
):'95(99
:'
):'95(99
:+7
%51
675,33(562/(12,'
62/
3/
3-

,1/,1(3(1(5*,6('/9
*5<
5('
9
9,2
5('

9

9
9(67$5
,1/,1(
3-
&/($1,1*
81,73:%
:'
&211(&725
3,1
9
9
(1(5*,6('/9
5('
%51
9
380321/9
9

380321/9
5('
<(/
5('
:+7

''5;,0(7;
:'
3-
08,17/.&/26('
&/.
&/.
,0(&20021+($7(55(/$<
''7;,0(5;
''7;,0(5;
9

9
(67$5
9

9

*51
9
'6
9

9
<(/
9
251
9
5('
9
%51
32:(5
6833/<81,7
9
%/.
:'
3-'&
9
*51:+7
<(/:+7
9(67$5
9
251:+7
9
5(':+7
9
%51:+7
%/.:+7
9
9
%/8:+7
9
9
3-
''5;,0(7;

9

9
,0(
&21752//(5
3:%
9
9
*51
3-
*51
9
'6

3-

9
'6
9
'6
,0(&20
+($7(5
5(/$<
*51
9
'6
3-
3-
'6
'580'5,9(53:%
3-
9
9

9
9

9
%51
251
9
95()
9287
<(/ 67$5738/6(
9,2
%/.
31.
*5<
9
&/.
5(*,675$7,2135(
+($7,17(5)$&(3:%
:'
3-
/('(1$%/(
9
:+7
6&5((1
*5281'
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-52
833(5%$))/($66(0%/<3/
675,33(5-$0
&/($5$1&(/('
/('6/,7/9
%51
9

:+7
,1/,1( ,1/,1(
,1/,1(
3333-;
9(67$5

5('
&/26('/9

%/.
)5217'225
,17(5/2&.6:,7&+
6
3/
3-;
:+7
/$7&++20(+9
%/.
9
9,2
3-;
%/8
9
5('
3-;
5($5'580
7+(50,6725
3/
%/.
3$3(535(6(17/9

729
:+7
%/.
%/.
5($575$16),;
02725
:'
3-;
:+7
9
%/.
9
)521775$16),;
02725
:'
3-;
%
9
%/.
<(/
5('
%
9
)25'580+($7(566((:'
)257+()52177+(50,6725$1'
7+('580&22/,1*)$16((:'
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%

9
G&

9
(67$5
%/.

9

9

9
(67$5

<(/
5('
):'9
5(99

9

9
9

9

9
G&

9

9

3-;
027252138/6(69
<(/
%/.
&/($1,1*81,702725
$66(0%/<
3/
3-;

):'9
5(99
9
5('
027252138/6(69
1&
9
251

3-;
9
&/($1,1*81,7+20(+9
5('
9
&/($1,1*81,7
+20(6(1625
4

3-;
3$3(535(6(17/9
%/8

%/.
,1/,1(
3-
&/($1,1*81,7
02725
(1&2'(5

9
251
:+7
5($575$16),;
)/(;85(
(1&2'(5
3/
<(/
1&
9

5('
9
G&

9
251
'580'5,9(53:%

9
(67$5
9
3-
9
9
9
:'
3-
G&

3-;
251

%/.
'580
'5,9(53:%
1&

9

9
9
(67$5

251

1&
3-
3-
G&

G&
9
9
(67$5
,1/,1(
3-
%/.
9
9
(67$5
9

9
833(5%$))/($66(0%/<3/
35((;,7
6(1625
4
9
,1/,1(
3-
3-

9
9
675,33(5/$7&+
6(1625
4
3/
'580'5,9(53:%
3/
3-
3-;
9
%/.

326775$16),;
6(1625
4
3/
9
%/.
<(/
251
8
027252138/6(69
8
027252138/6(69
9
027252138/6(69
9
027252138/6(69
:
027252138/6(69
:
027252138/6(69
*51
%/8
9,2
'580'5,9(
02725(1&2'(5
:'
:+7
9
5('
7+(50,6725
:+7
7+(50,6725
%/.
78$
February 2013
7-53
Wiring Data
,1/,1(
3-
9((5$0

&/($1,1*
81,73:%

$%$7(0(17
)$1
$66(0%/<
027
3/
%/8
251
:+7
)$121/9
5('

5('
%/.
9
9
:+7
9
%/.
9
9
9
(67$5

32:(5
6833/<81,7
:'
3-'&

9
9
(67$5

3-
'580'5,9(53:%
$&7,9(9

,0(
+($7(5
5(/$<
$&7,9(9
(1(5*<67$59
(1(5*<67$59

$1$/2*8(32:(5*$8*(9

$1$/2*8(32:(5*$8*(9
9

127&211(&7('

6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
9

9

9
32:(5)$,/

5,%%21&$%/(

9

$%$7(0(177$&+20(7(5
'&
'580'5,9(365;

:'
3-'&
'580'5,9(7;

9
32:(56833/<81,7
9

9
9
9
3-
3-
&/..+=

9
9

9
<$(1$%/(

,0(&20+($7(55(/$<
9

3-
),1,6+(521+9

9
5('
'5809
9
<$3+$6(8
9
9
$1$/2*8(6,*1$/%(7:((19
$1'9:+(17+(6,*1$/,6
$%29(97+(32:(586('
,6:,7+,1(;3(&7('9$/8(
<$3+$6(9

9

0$&+,1(,11250$/02'(9
0$&+,1(,16/((302'(9
<$3+$6(:

9
'5809
9

2138/6(69
<$&855(176(1625

9
)$121/9

9
9
9

%/.

<$&855(176(1625

9
9
9
9
3-

3-
9,2
%/.
*5<
35(6685(6(16('/9
:+7
9
%/.
75$<+20(+9
0$5.,1*
81,7&22/,1*)$1
3/
/(9(/6(16('/9
9(67$5
(1&/2685()$1
027
3/
9

:$67(75$<
6(1625
3/
((5$0

:'
&211(&725
3,1
'580'5,9(53:%
3/
3-
36)$121

5,%%21&$%/(
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-54
WD 9.5 IME Controller PWB (1 of 3)
,0(&21752//(53:%
3/
3-

3-

48$':$9(
$033:%
:'
3-
&/.
72
:,5(6
'$7$
+($'
3:%
:'
3-
'$7$
3-
'$7$

:,5(6
72
&211(&725
&$6(
9

5,%%21&$%/(
3-
3-

+($'
3:%
9(67$5
:'
3-
:,5(6

72

5,%%21&$%/(

3-
3-
:'
3-
'$7$
5,%%21&$%/(
6,1*/(%2$5'
&21752//(53:%
&/.

'$7$
'$7$
,0(7;03'5;
,0(7;03'5;
9(67$5
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
&/.
:'
3-
&/.
5(6(75(48(67
,0(5;03'7;
,0(5;03'7;
3-

3-
3-
,0(&21752//(5
3:%)5217
,0(&21752//(5
3:%%$&.
32:(5287217+,63-
9(67$53,1
93,1
93,1
93,1
93,1672
93,1672
32:(5,1217+,63-
93,16$1'
93,1
93,1
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
78$
February 2013
7-55
Wiring Data

,0(&21752//(53:%
3/
3-

''5;,0(7;
&/.
9
%/8
9
9,2
9
''7;,0(5;
*51
''7;,0(5;
9
,0(&20+($7(55(/$<
9
<(/
&/.
9
251
*5<
9
9
%2'<
9
9
9(67$5
9
9
5('
08,17/.&/26('
:'
3-
''5;,0(7;
'580
'5,9(5
3:%
9
3-
99*5281'6(16(
%51
9
32:(56833/<81,7
:+7
:'
3-'&
9

9

9(67$5
9(67$5

96(16(

9
9

9
9

9
9
9

9

3-

72
35,17+($'
3:%
:,5(6
:'
3-

3-
5,%%21&$%/(
3-
3-
,0(&21752//(5
3:%)5217
32:(5217+,63-
9(67$53,16$1'
93,1
93,1
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-56

,0(&21752//(53:%
3/
9
9

,0(5;08'7;
9
9
9
9
,0(7;08'5;
9

9
0$5.,1*81,7
'5,9(53:%
9
:'
3-
9

9

,0(7;08'5;
9

9
&/.

5,%%21&$%/(
9
3-
&/.
:'
3-
3-

9

,0(5;08'7;
0$5.,1*81,7
'5,9(53:%
3-
9

9(67$5

9(67$5
9
9
(67$5

9(67$5
35,17+($'
3:%
72
:,5(6

9
:'
3-

9
5,%%21&$%/(
9
9

9

9

,17(5/2&.&/26('+9
9
9
9

9
9
9

5,%%21&$%/(
3- 3-
,0(&21752//(5
3:%)5217

7+(&$55,$*('5,9(02725,6,1+,%,7(':+(1
7+(:$67(,1.75$<,65(029('$1'7+(
0$5.,1*81,7$:$<)5207+(+20(326,7,21
32:(5217+,63-
9(67$53,16$1'
93,1
93,1
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
78$
February 2013
7-57
Wiring Data
WD 9.8 Marking Unit Heater PWB

0$5.,1*81,7+($7(53:%
3/
3-
$&/
*5<
32:(56833/<81,7
$&/
%/8
:'
3-$&

%
%

$&1
251
$&1
5(6(592,5
3/
%51
+($7(521$&1$&/
,1.
5(6(592,5
+($7(56
2+06
+($7(521$&1$&/
:+7
:+7
2+06
$&/
<(/
$&/
5('
/,1(
/,1(
)
/,1(
)

G&
$&1
G&

G&
G&
/,1(
<(/
2+06

/,1(
/,1(
/,1(

G&
/,1(
<(/
G&

G&

3-;
+($'
5(6(592,5
+($7(5
-(767$&.
+($7(5
+($7(521$&1$&/
%51
2+06
$&/
+($7(521$&1$&/
%51
%51
2+06
$&/
+($7(521$&1$&/
%51
%51
2+06
/,1(
9
(67$5
G&
G&
+($'
5(6(592,5
+($7(5
-(767$&.
+($7(5
2+06

G&
G&
9
251
$&/
+($7(521$&1$&/

2+06
251
251
$&/
+($7(521$&1$&/
251
251
/,1(
2+06
5('
$&/
+($7(521$&1$&/
5('

G&
/,1(
+($7(521$&1$&/
5('
1&

9
G&
3-
9(67$5
9(67$5
9
9
9
9

)25833(580%,/,&$/
7+(50,67256((:'
)25/2:(580%,/,&$/
7+(50,67256((:'
)25,1.5(6(592,5
7+(50,67256((:'
0$5.,1*81,7
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
08+5;08'7;
3-
9
3-
1&
9
08+7;08'5;

+($'
5(6(592,5
+($7(5
-(767$&.
+($7(5
&/.,1

9
2+06
9

2+06

3-;
2+06
$&/
5('

2+06
+($7(521$&1$&/
5('
+($'
5(6(592,5
+($7(5
-(767$&.
+($7(5
+($7(521$&1$&/

9
$&/
%/8
2+06

+($7(521$&1$&/
%/8

+($7(521$&1$&/
2+06

%/8
3-;
$&/
/,1(

%/8
3-;

+($7(521$&1$&/
2+06
9,2
+($7(521$&1$&/
/2:(5
80%,/,&$/
+($7(5
9,2
%/8

1&

/,1(
3-;
$&/
G&

+($7(521$&1$&/
3-
$&/
G&
3-;
/,1(
833(5&$55,$*($66(0%/<3/
833(5
80%,/,&$/
+($7(5
G&
3-
3-;
/2:(5&$55,$*($66(0%/<3/
3-
1&
3-
3-
3-
0$5.,1*81,7
+($7(53:%
5,%%21&$%/(
78%
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-58
WD 9.9 Marking Unit Driver PWB (1 of 4)

0$5.,1*81,7'5,9(53:%
3/
,1.5()92/7$*(
9
,1..+,/9
,1../2/9
62/(12,'3$7&+
3:%
3-
$
3-

$
$
9
$
:'
3-

$
,1.&+,/9
,1.&/2/9
,1.0/2/9
,1.0+,/9
$
$
$

$
$
%
)257+(833(580%,/,&$/
+($7(56((:'
%

%
%

3-
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
%
%
9
(67$5
3-
'&
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
%/.
027252138/6(69
3-;
027252138/6(69
*51
027252138/6(69
*51
027252138/6(69
*51
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

9,2
027252138/6(69
9,2
027252138/6(69
9,2
5('
;$;,6'5,9(
02725833(5
027
3/
80%,/,&$/3/
3-;
7(039729
:+7
9
:+7
*5<
1&
%
%
%
35,17+($'52//
$'-86702725
027
3/
,1/,1(
33-;
9,2
5('
35,17+($'52//
$'-86702725
027
3/
%/.
1&
9
9
%/.
%
0$5.,1*81,7
'5,9(53:%
027252138/6(69
%
%
3-;
%/.
*51
35,17+($'
67,7&+$'-867
02725
027
3/
%/8

027252138/6(69
5,%%21&$%/(
027252138/6(69

%/8

$
,1.<+,/9
%/8

$
,1.</2/9
027252138/6(69

3-;
027252138/6(69
%/8

833(580%,/,&$/
7+(50,6725

12786('
833(5&$55,$*(7(03
*5<
78$
February 2013
7-59
Wiring Data
,0(5;08'7;
9
$
$
,0(7;08'5;
$
9
$
9
$
&/.
&/.
$
9
$

9(67$5

9(67$5
9
9
(67$5
$
$

027252138/6(69
9(67$5
$

9

9
9

9
$
9
027252138/6(69
9
%

,17(5/2&.&/26('+9
9
%
9

251
3-;
027252138/6(69
%/.
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
%/.
027252138/6(69
%/.
3-;
027252138/6(69
*51
027252138/6(69

9
9
027252138/6(69
*51
027252138/6(69
*51
1&
<(/
<(/
%
'&
%

%
9

9
9
%

9
%
35,17+($'52//
$'-86702725
027
3/
*51

1&
9
9
35,17+($'52//
$'-86702725
027
3/
%/.
$

251

35,17+($'
67,7&+$'-867
02725
027
3/
251

9
027252138/6(69
,0(7;08'5;
3-;
027252138/6(69

251

9
3-
$
,0(5;08'7;
,0(&21752//(5
3:%
:'
3-
0$5.,1*81,7'5,9(53:%
3/
3-
9
80%,/,&$/3/
3-;
7(039729
:+7
9
:+7
/2:(5
80%,/,&$/
7+(50,6725

1&
12786('
1& /2:(5&$55,$*(7(03
3- 3-

9

9
9
9

9

5,%%21&$%/(
7+(&$55,$*('5,9(02725,6
,1+,%,7(':+(17+(:$67(,1.75$<
,65(029('$1'7+(0$5.,1*81,7
$:$<)5207+(+20(326,7,21
)257+(833(5
80%,/,&$/+($7(56((
:'
0$5.,1*81,7
'5,9(53:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-60
,1/,1(
3-
3-;

;$;,6'5,9(
02725/2:(5
027
3/

027252138/6(69

%51
027252138/6(69
%51
027252138/6(69
%51
027252138/6(69
%51
/2:(5
&$55,$*(
+20(6(1625
4
3/
9
9
:+7
3-;
9

<(/
9
*51
+20(+9
*51
9
*51
3-;
):'/5(9+9
1&
3-
&$55,$*('5,9(75$,13/
):'+5(9/9
3-;

9(67$5
):'/5(9+9
&$55,$*(
'5,9(6(/(&7
02725
027
9

9(67$5
'5,9(67+(833(5&$55,$*(
'5,9(67+(/2:(5&$55,$*(
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
9

9(67$5

9,2
9
81/2&./9
9,2
9,2

/2&./9

5('
5('
3-;
):'+5(9/9

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

&$55,$*(
'2&.,1*
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69

9(67$5 9
027252138/6(69
3-;
3-

9
(67$5
+20(+9
:$67(75$<
/2&.
62/(12,'
62/
3/
%
<(/
3-;
+0+25,=217$/
027,2102725
027
3/
<(/
027252138/6(69
9(67$5
9
+0326,7,21
6(1625
4
3/
%
027252138/6(69

+09(57,&$/
027,2102725
027
3/
027252138/6(69

%
+20(+9
027252138/6(69
:+7
833(5
&$55,$*(
+20(6(1625
4
3/
:+7
3-;
3-

%
3-
3-;

0$5.,1*81,7'5,9(53:%
3/
3-

3-

9

3-

3-
3-
3-
0$5.,1*81,7
'5,9(53:%
78$
February 2013
7-61
Wiring Data

0$5.,1*81,7'5,9(53:%
3/
3-
9(67$5
9(67$5
9
9
&/.287
9
0$5.,1*81,7
+($7(53:%
9
3-
9
(67$5
9
$
:+7
$
:+7
$
:+7
$
:+7
$
:+7
$

:+7
$
9
9
:+7
$
$
$

:+7
:+7
:+7
$
:'
3-
:+7
9

08+5;08'7;
9
9
9
08+7;08'5;
9
$
9
$
9
(67$5
9

9
9
:+7
$
%
%
9

%
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
9,2
9,2
%
9
3-
%
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9
,1.5(67(039729
62/(12,'
3$7&+
3:%
:'
3-
9
9
9,2
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
9,2
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
%
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(12,'
3$7&+
3:%
:'
3-
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
3-
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
%
0$5.,1*81,7'5,9(5
3:%
9
:'
3-
%
%
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
%
%
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(12,'
3$7&+
3:%
:'
3-
9,2
%
9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(12,'
3$7&+
3:%
9,2
%

%
9,2
%

9
5,%%21&$%/(
:+7
$

:+7
$,5380321/9
62/(12,'
3$7&+
3:%
:'
3-
9
/3$9$/9(21/9
9,2
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-62
WD 9.13 Quad Wave Amplifier PWB

48$':$9($03/,),(53:%
3/
3-
3-

35,17+($'
3:%
35,17+($'
3:%
72
:'
3-
:'
3-
:,5(6
72
:,5(6

5,%%21&$%/(
5,%%21&$%/(
3-

35,17+($'
3:%
:'
3-
:,5(6
72

5,%%21&$%/(
3-
,0(
&21752//(5
3:%
32:(5,1217+,63-
9(67$53,1
93,1
93,1
93,1
93,1672
93,1672

:'
3-
72
:,5(6

3-
3-
5,%%21&$%/(
3-

35,17+($'
3:%
3-
:'
3-
:,5(6
72

3-
5,%%21&$%/(
3-
48$':$9($03/,),(53:%
78$
February 2013
7-63
Wiring Data
WD 9.14 Solenoid Patch PWB (1 of 3)
3-
62/(12,'3$7&+3:%
3/
9
$,5380321/9
:+7
9
/3$9$/9(21/9
9
$

9
$
%

3-;
9
9,2
$,5380321/9
9
:+7
3-;
9
5(6(592,5
3/
3-
/3$9$/9(21/9
9
9
%
9,2
3-
5(6(592,5
3803
027
/2:
35(6685(
$66,679$/9(
62/
3-;
9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
:+7
$

9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9

9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
0$5.,1*
81,7'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
385*(
62/(12,'
9$/9(672
62/(1(5*,6('/9
%
9,2
62/(1(5*,6('/9

$
:+7
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2
62/(1(5*,6('/9

%

9
3-
3-;
9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
$

:+7
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
%

9,2
9

9
%/$&.,1.
62/(12,'
9$/9(672
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9

$
:+7
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
9
9
9,2

%
62/(1(5*,6('/9
3-
%
3-
$
9
3-

)253-6(($/62
:'$1':'
3-
:+(1(17(5('
$,5380321/9
:,//'523729
62/(12,'3$7&+3:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-64

62/(12,'3$7&+3:%
3/

3-
9
3-
9
3-;
5(6(592,5
3/
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
$

:+7
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
%

9,2
9
<(//2:
,1.
62/(12,'
9$/9(6
72
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
$

:+7
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
9,2

%
3-
9
9
3-;
62/(1(5*,6('/9
:+7
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9

$
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9

%
0$5.,1*
81,7'5,9(5
3:%
9
9,2
9

62/(1(5*,6('/9

$
:'
3-
&<$1,1.
62/(12,'
9$/9(6
72
62/(1(5*,6('/9
:+7
62/(1(5*,6('/9
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
%

9,2
3-
9
9
3-;
62/(1(5*,6('/9
:+7
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
$

9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
%

9,2
9

9

62/(1(5*,6('/9
0$*(17$,1.
62/(12,'
9$/9(6
72
62/(1(5*,6('/9
$

:+7
9

9

3-
62/(1(5*,6('/9
62/(1(5*,6('/9
%
9
3-
3-
$
9
9
9
%
3-
62/(12,'3$7&+
3:%

9,2
)253-6((
$/62:'$1'
:'
78$
February 2013
7-65
Wiring Data
,1.5(67(039729
3-
:+7
9
9,2
5(6(592,5
3/
62/(12,'3$7&+3:%
3/
0$5.,1*
81,7'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
$
3-

'&
%
<(//2:/29
<(//2:+,9

9
&<$1+,9
&<$1/29
0$*(17$/29
0$*(17$+,9

%/$&.<(//2:
5(6(592,5
/(9(/6(16256
%/$&./2
<(//2:/2
<(//2:+,
3-
3-;
%/$&.+,
,1.5()92/7$*(
9
9
%/$&./29
0$5.,1*
81,7'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
3-

9
%/$&.+,/9
,1.5(6(592,5
7+(50,6725

9
3-
9
3-;
9
9
,1.5()92/7$*(
,1.5(67(039729
,1.5()92/7$*(
3-;
9
&<$1+,
&<$1/2
&<$10$*(17$
5(6(592,5
/(9(/6(16256
0$*(17$/2
0$*(17$+,
3-

3-
3-
)253-6(($/62
:'$1':'
)257+(,1.
5(6(592,5+($7(56
6((:'
3-
3-
62/(12,'3$7&+
3:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-66
WD 9.17 Ink Load Entry PWB (1 of 2)

,1./2$'(175<3:%
3/
3-;
9
%/.,1./2$'
(175<
6(1625
4
3/
5('
9

%/.
,1.35(6(17/9
%/8
3-;
<(/,1./2$'
(175<
6(1625
4
3/
%/.
0$*,1.
/2$'(175<
6(1625
4
3/
5('
9

%/.
,1.35(6(17/9

3-;
%/8
3-
9
&<$1,1.
/2$'(175<
6(1625
4
3/

%/8
3-;
3-;

3-;

0$*,1./2$'35(6(17/9
0$*
<(/,1./2$'35(6(17/9
<(/
%/.,1./2$'35(6(17/9
%/.
%/.,1./2$'35(6(17/9
%/.:+7
%/.5('
0$*
&<1,1./2$'35(6(17/9
0$*,1./2$'35(6(17/9
<(/,1./2$'35(6(17/9
<(/

9
9
(67$5

9(67$5

9
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
9(67$5

&<1
9(67$5
9(67$5
9
(67$5
5('
5('
9(67$5
%/.(175<35(6(17/9
%/.
<(/(175<35(6(17/9
<(/
0$*(175<35(6(17/9
0$*
&<1(175<35(6(17/9
&<1

,1/,1(
3-
&<17(039729
&<1
3-
&<1
9
&<1
:+7
%/.
9
(67$5

&<1,1./2$'35(6(17/9

,1.35(6(17/9
9
9(67$5
%/.
:+7
,1./2$'
6(16256
2))
,1.0(/7/2$'(53/$7($66(0%/<
3/
3-;
9
(67$5
5('
9
%/$&.
7+(50,6725
%/8
3-
9
3-

9
,1.35(6(17/9
3-;
<(//2:
7+(50,6725
5('
9

0$*(17$
7+(50,6725
3-
9
9
(67$5
9

&<$1
7+(50,6725
,1./2$'(175<3:%
3/
9(67$5
3-
9
0$*
%/.
0$*
:+7
<(/

0$*7(039729
0$*
9

0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
<(/7(039729
<(/
9
9
:+7
<(/
%/.
%/.
9
%/.
%/.

6((3-$/62
21:'
)25,1.0(/7
+($7(566((
:'

%/.7(039729
%/.
9
3-
3-
3-
3-
3-
3-

9
3-
,1./2$'(175<3:%
78$
February 2013
7-67
Wiring Data
WD 9.18 Ink Load Entry PWB (2 of 2)

,1./2:6(1625$66(0%/<
3/
,1./2$'(175<3:%
3/
3-;

%/.,1./2:
6(1625
4
9

251
:+7
,1.35(6(17/9
%/.
3-;
9

251
:+7

9

,1.35(6(17/9
<(/
0$*,1./2:
6(1625
4
&<1,1./2:
6(1625
4
5('
9

9
9
(67$5

9(67$5
9

,1.35(6(17/9
3-;
251
:+7
3-
9(67$5
9
9
9
(67$5

3-;

9
(67$5

9

9(67$5
9(67$5
9

<(/,1./2:
6(1625
4
3-
9
251
:+7
,1.35(6(17/9
%/8

9

%/.
<(/
0$*
%/.,1./2:+9
<(/,1./2:+9
0$*,1./2:+9
&<1,1./2:+9
&<1
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
9
%/.
9
%/.
9
9
(67$5

6((3-
$/6221
:'
)2532:(5
,1727+,63:%
6((:'
3-
3-
,1./2$'(175<3:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-68
WD 9.19 Cleaning Unit PWB
&/($1,1*81,7
3/
,1/,1(
3-
&211(&7253,1
3/
,1/,1(
35('
'580'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
%51
5('
<(/
5('
:+7
251
'580'5,9(5
3:%
:'
3-
%/.
*5<
:+7
%/8
%/8
,1/,1(
3-

5('
5('
<(/
:+7
,1/,1(
35('
5('
:+7
:+7
3-
9
251
(1(5*,6('/9
%51
5('
&/($1,1*81,7
'(/,9(5<3803
&/($1,1*81,7
5(7851
5(6(592,5
3803
&/($1,1*81,73:%
9
3-
9
9
(1(5*,6('/9
&/($1,1*81,7
62/(12,'
9$/9(
9
380321/9
<(/
9
5('
:+7
5('
%/.
*5<
380321/9
9
9((5$0
/(9(/6(16('/9
35(6685(6(16('/9
:+7
((5$0
<(/
%/8
9
9

9((5$0

9
3-
9

9

1&
/(9(/6(16('/9
9
9

5(('6:,7&+
$66(0%/<

9
9
9
*(1(5$7,21
9
78$
February 2013
7-69
Wiring Data
WD 9.20 Printhead 1 PWB and Printhead 2 PWB

35,17+($'
3/
35,17+($'3:%
3-

3-
,0(
&21752//(5
3:%
72

:'
3-
5,%%21&$%/(
72
:,5(6
3-

48$':$9(
$03/,),(5
3:%
5,%%21&$%/(
9
(67$5
3-
72
:'
3-
:,5(6

3-
3-
'6
*51
9
(67$5
32:(5,1217+,63-
9(67$53,16$1'
93,1
93,1
5,%%21&$%/(
9
&211(&7672/(9(/
6(16256,17+(
35,17+($'
35,17+($'
3/
/('
35,17+($'3:%
35,17+($'3:%
3-

3-
,0(
&21752//(5
3:%
:'
3-
72

:,5(6
5,%%21&$%/(
72
3-

48$':$9(
$03/,),(5
3:%
5,%%21&$%/(
9
(67$5
72
:'
3-
:,5(6

'6
*51
9
(67$5
5,%%21&$%/(
9
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-70
WD 9.21 Printhead 3 PWB and Printhead 4 PWB
35,17+($'
3/
35,17+($'3:%
3-

3-
,0(
&21752//(5
3:%
72

:'
3-
5,%%21&$%/(
72
:,5(6
3-

48$':$9(
$03/,),(5
3:%
5,%%21&$%/(
9
(67$5
3-
72
:'
3-
:,5(6

3-
3-
'6
*51
9
(67$5
32:(5,1217+,63-
9(67$53,16$1'
93,1
93,1
5,%%21&$%/(
9
&211(&7672/(9(/
6(16256,17+(
35,17+($'
35,17+($'
3/
/('
35,17+($'3:%
35,17+($'3:%
3-

3-
,0(
&21752//(5
3:%
:'
3-
72

:,5(6
5,%%21&$%/(
72
3-

48$':$9(
$03/,),(5
3:%
5,%%21&$%/(
9
(67$5
72
:'
3-
:,5(6

'6
*51
9
(67$5
5,%%21&$%/(
9
78$
February 2013
7-71
Wiring Data
WD 9.22 IOD Pre Amp PWB

,2'$66(0%/<
3/
,2'6+877/(
02725
027
(1&2'(5
,2'35($03/,),(53:%
3/
3-
3-
3-;
02725(1&2'(5$
2138/6(69

2138/6(69
9
):'/5(9+9

5,%%21
&$%/(
9
9
95()
67$5738/6(
&/.
/('$12'(
%/8/('
*51/('
5('/('
9
9
*(1(5$7,21
):'/5(9+9

*5<

9
9
9

9287
<(/
95()
251
9
%51
9,2
3,1.
67$5738/6(
&/2&.
9
%/.
9
/('$12'(

%/.
%/8
*51
%/8/('
*51/('
5('/('
5('

9
3-
:'
3-
9
'580
'5,9(5
3:%
&$%/(
6&5((1

):'+5(9/9

:+7
9
3-
,2'9,'
9
02725(1&2'(5%
251
):'+5(9/9
02'(
<(/
9
3-;
9
9
,2'6&$1%$5
4
'&

'3,9
'3,9
3-
3-
,2'35($033:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-72
WD 12.1 LCSS PWB (1 of 5)

/&663:%
3/
32:(56833/<
02'8/(
3/
&1
9

&1
$&/
368
:'
3-$&
$&1
(
%51
%/8
*51
<(/

3-
9
3-
251
9
%51
9
9
9
:+7
5('
251
9
9
9
%51
:+7

9

9
9
9

9
9
03'7;/&665;
%/.
'(9,&(6(/(&7
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
:'
3-
%51
1&
1&
%/8
9,2
/&667;03'5;
/&667;03'5;
<(/
251

9 9

9
:+7

9 9

3-
3-
3-
3-
'2&.,1*
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6
3/
)5217
'225
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6
3/
3-
)86(
/&663:%
1&
12
9
'2&.('/9
:+7
:+7
'2&.('+9
:+7
&20
:+7
'225&/26('/9
1&
:+7
12
'225&/26('+9
:+7
3-
):'95(9967239
3-
3-
&20

(-(&725
02725
027
%/.
):'95(9967239

9 9
9

38/6(6/9
%/.
9
%/.
9
%/.
9
%/.
9
%/.
%/.

/&663:%
:'
3-

9
%/.
(-(&725,1+9
%/.

(175<6(1625
4
3/
(-(&72502725
(1&2'(5
6(1625
4
3/
(-(&725287
6(1625
4
3/
9

%/.

5('

%/.
(-(&725$66(0%/<
3/
(-(&725+20(
6(1625
4
3/
3-
9
9
%/.
:+7

%,102725
(1&2'(5
6(1625
4
3/
9

9
%/.
(-(&725287+9

3-
+20(
029(
&<&/(
9

1&
3$3(56(16('+9

%/.
9

%/.
9
%/.
9
3-
*5<
02725029,1*
938/6(6
9
5('
03'7;/&665;
9
%/.
9 9

9
%/.
%/8

<(/
%51
9
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
75$163257
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
78$
February 2013
7-73
Wiring Data

/&663:%
3/
3-
(;,7',9(57(5
62/(12,'
62/
3/
(1(5*,6('+9
:+7
9
5('
&+$'%,1/(9(/
6(1625
4
3/
%/.
%,1)8//+9
%/.
9
%/.
381&+6(1625
4
3/
3$3(5,1381&++9
%/.
%/.
$
$
9

9 9
9

$
9
;;;

$
9
9
%/.

9

$
$
9
%/.
9
%/.
$

$

9
$
381&++20(+9
%/.
$
9
9
9

$
9
381&+,167$//('/9
%/.
9
381&++($'
35(6(176(1625
4
3/
%/.
9
%/.
3- 3-

9

9
&<&/(
5(9
02725+20(/9
%/.
&$575,'*(6(16('/9
%/.
67$3/(6/2:+9
%/.
9
%/.
9
%/.
):'95(99
%/.
):'95(99
%/.
):'95(99
%/.
):'95(99
%/.

<(/
<(/

9

<(/
<(/
<(/
<(/
<(/
6++20(6(1625
4

6+&$575,'*(
6(1625
9
6+/2:67$3/(6
6(1625
4

9
67$3/(+($'
02725
027
9
%/.
%/.
3$3(535(6(17+9
%/.
9
%/.

9
%/.
6+3$3(5
6(1625
4
3/
%/.

9
9
%

%
9

$
$
3-
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
%/.

381&++($'35(6(17+9
%/.
9
67$3/(+($'81,7
3/
6+35,0,1*6(1625
4
9
9
%/.
67$3/(35,0('/9
%/.
9
$
9
381&++($'
+20(6(1625
4
3/

9
9
9
3-
3-
9
9

9

%
9
%/.
9
%/.
,1'(;('+9
%/.
67$3/(5,1'(;
6(1625
4
3/
)86(
/&663:%
78%
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-74

/&663:%
3/
3-
67$3/(5+20(
6(1625
4
3/
9
9
9
9
,1'(;('+9
%
%/.

%/.
%51
251
<(/

9
9
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
:+7
5('
%
%
$
%
<(/
%51
%
9
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

%/8
$
$
$
$

7$03(581,7
3/
9
%/.
%/.
9
027252138/6(69
%/. 027252138/6(69

%/. 027252138/6(69
%/.
027252138/6(69
%/.
5('
5('
)5217
7$03(5
02725
027
%/.
%51
251
<(/
$
9
%/.
%/.
9
027252138/6(69
%/. 027252138/6(69

%/. 027252138/6(69
%/.
027252138/6(69
%/.
5('
5('
5($57$03(5
02725
027
%/.
%51
251
<(/
3-
9
9

5('
9
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
3- 3-
7$03(5672$/()
7$03(5672;/()
7$03(5602725&<&/(
+20(

,1%5'

5('
%51
$
$
%
:+7
<(/
$
%
$
9
027252138/6(69
381&++($'02725
$66(0%/<
027
3/
9
%/.
027252138/6(69
3$''/(52//
02725
$66(0%/<
027
3/
9
75$163257
02725
027
3/
+20(

,1%5'

):'

5(9

&<&/(

%
%/8
3-
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
%
$
$
%
%
21/9
%/.
3-
%
%
%/.
%/.

9
5('
9
21+9
9
5('
581

+20(

%
%
%/.
+($'75$9(56(81,7
3/
6802725
027
3-
%
%
%/.
%

%/.
+20(

581

%51
251
<(/
3-
9
5('

3-
3-
3-
%
9

9

%
%
9

%/.

9

/&663:%
%
9
%/.
7$03(5+20(+9
%/.
9
%
)86(
9
9
%/.
7$03(5+20(+9
%/.

3-
9
%/.
)52177$03(5
+20(6(1625
4
3/

5($57$03(5
+20(6(1625
4
3/

78$
February 2013
7-75
Wiring Data

/&663:%
3/
3-
9

5($57$03(5
$:$<6(1625
4
3/
%/.
9
%/.
7$03(5,1326,7,21+9
%/.
%

9
%
%
9
%
%
9
%
9
9

%

/('21+9
%/.
9
6:,7&+
6
%/.
%
%
9
%/.
%

9
&203,/(5
(;,76(1625
4
3/

3$3(56(16('/9
9
%/.
%/.
%

9

72375$<
(;,76(1625
4
3/
9
%/.
3$3(56(16('/9
9
%/.
%/.
9
%/.
%

7$03(5,1326,7,21+9
)52177$03(5
$:$<6(1625
4
3/
%/.
9
%/.
9
%/.
%,1833(5
/(9(/6(1625
4
3/
67$&./(9(/+,*+/9
%/.
9
%/.
3$''/(52//
+20(6(1625
4
3/
9
%/.
3$''/($7+20(+9
%/.
9
9

%

9
9
%

%/.
9
3-

9
9

%
%

6:,7&+35(66('/9

%

3-
3$86(72
81/2$'
3:%
3/
%

9
%/.
9
9
/('

3-
9
%

9
3-

9

%

:+7
9
833(5/,0,75($&+('/9
:+7
%,1833(5
/,0,76:,7&+
6
3/
9
9 9
:'
3-

9

&20
:+7
:+7
:+7
&29(5&/26('/9
1&
&29(5&/26('+9
12

723&29(5
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6
3/
9
,17/.
3-

6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
3-
3-
3-
)86(
/&663:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-76
/&663:%
3/
3-
9

%,1)8//
6(1625
4
3/
%,1/2:(5
/,0,76:,7&+
6
3/
%/.
9
%/.
%,1)8//+9
%/.
9
/2:(5/,0,75($&+('/9
9
%

9
:+7

%

9
%

83+'2:1/9

5('
%/.
83/'2:1+9
%,1(/(9$725
02725
027
3/
9
9
3-
:+7
3-
%

9
+20(
83
'2:1
&<&/(
6((:'
)2532:(5
727+,63:%
)86(
3-
3-
3-
/&663:%
78$
February 2013
7-77
Wiring Data
WD 12.6 HVF PWB (1 of 11)
+9)3:%
3/
+9)32:(56833/<
81,7
3/
%03:%
3/
/936
&5
7
&1
%51
368
%/8
(
*51<(/
9 9
9
9
%51
) $
3-

9
9 6833/<
9
9
9
%51
9
9
9
9

9
75,)2/'(5
,17(5/2&.
9
9
9
32:(5
&21752/
3-
3-
3-
3-
9
6833/<
3-
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+(6
9
9,17/.
,16(57(5
3:%

9,17/.
9
9
3-
+9)3:%
3-
75,)2/'(53:%
9
3-
&5
9
*22'
/('
9
3-

9
9

9
9,17/.
9
9
251
9

251
9
9

251
3-
3-
<(/
9
9
3-
9
3-
9
3-

:+7
9
6833/<
5('

$&1
:'
3-$&
3-
9
$&/
75,)2/'(53:%
3/
9,17(5
/2&./('
3-
<(/
723&29(5

)5217'225

9'2&.,1*
,17/.
5()(572:'3-
5()(572:'3-
5()(572:'3-
3-
%03:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-78
75
7
9

(175<6(1625
4
3/
3$3(535(6(17
+9
9
+9)3:%
3/
3-
3-
%
%
$
$
$
9

9
9
9
9

+9)%22./(7
(;,76(1625
4
3/
9
$
9
9

5

%8))(53$7+
6(1625
4
3/
$
$
9
72375$<(;,7
6(1625
4
3/

&203,/(5(;,7
6(1625
4
3/

%
$
9

9
9
%
%
9
1,363/,76(1625
4
3/
9
1,3+20(
6(1625
4
3/
5 7
9
3$3(535(6(17
+9
9
%8))(5
326,7,21
6(1625
4
3/

7
%

%

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
75$163257
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69

7

%
$
9
%

%
$
9
%

$
%
$
/('
/('

9
$
$
/('VWR
9
%8))(575$<'2:1
+9
%
$

6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
9
9
3-
9
%
$
$
9

%

9
%
%
$

9
3$3(535(6(17
+9
$
%
$
$
3-
9
5 5
9
7
9
%8))(575$<83
+9
5
9

%
%
9
$
9
7

9
3$3(535(6(17
+9
9
$
9
9
9
5

%
%

9
3$3(535(6(17
+9
9
9

9
$
9
7
$
3$3(535(6(17
/9
%
%
5

5
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

%8))(502725
027
3/

3-
+9)3:%
78$
February 2013
7-79
Wiring Data
5
1,363/,702725
027
3/
3-
):'95(99
%
$
%

75$163257
02725
027
3/
%
%
9
%
%
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
%
%51
'2&.,1*
,17/.6:,7&+
6
&20 3/
3-
9
81'2&.('+9
%

(;,7',9(57(5
62/(12,'
62/
3/

%

%<3$66)(('
02725
027
3/
9
9
%
9
%
3+$6($

/('
9
,17/.
3+$6(%
3+$6(%
9

(1(5*,6('/9
9
9
1&
23(1+9
1&
9,17(5/2&.
12
3-
9
9
3- 3-
3-

3-
6(7&/$0362/(12,'
62/
3/
9,17/.
3+$6($
9

3-
723&29(5
,17/.6:,7&+
6
&20 3/
%
(1(5*,6('/9
12
9
9
1&
23(1+9

7

%
)5217'225
,17/.6:,7&+
6
&20 3/

%

12
%
%
(1(5*,6('/9
%51

%51
) $
9
9
%51
%

251
9
%
251
9
7
%0',9(57(5
62/(12,'
62/
3/
9
251
9

9
9
9

%
9
+9)32:(56833/<81,7
3/
7
%

7
%

3-
%
$
):'95(99
+9)3:%
3/
/('
3-
3-
9

/('VWR

/('
3-
+9)3:%
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-80
3-
03'7;+9)5;
9

9
03'5;+9)7;
,'
,'5(7851
9
9
9

9

9
3-
9
$
$
9
9
9
$
9

9
9
3-

9
9
$
$
9
9
+9)5;
:'
3-
+9)7;
+9)7;
9
%035(6(17/9
%035(6(17/,1.
/('
%
3$3(535(6(17
+9
9

9

%
%
%
9
386+(5+20(
+9
9
3$3(5386+(5
833(56(1625
4
3/

7

9
9

9

9
3$''/(81,7
/2:(56(1625
4
7

9
3-
+9)5;
5,%%21&$%/(
9
3$''/(81,7
833(56(1625
4
5
9
%03:%
9
:'
3-
81,783
+9
3-;

1&
5,%%21&$%/(

%03:%
9
9
:'
3-

$
3$''/(52//(5
+20(6(1625
4
5,%%21&$%/(
3-;
5
9
'(9,&(6(/(&7
3$''/(52//(5
+20(+9
$
$
'(9,&(6(/(&7
%03:%

3-;
9
$
9
03'7;+9)5;
:'
3-
5
3-
03'5;+9)7;
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
3$''/(81,7
3/
+9)3:%
3/
9

9

9
%
%

9
386+(5$:$<
+9
9
3$3(5386+(5
/2:(56(1625
4
3/
%
3-
/('VWR
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
%
12786('
,17+,6
&21),*85$7,21
%
3-
/('
3-
3- 3-
78$
+9)3:%
February 2013
7-81
Wiring Data
WD 12.10 HVF PWB (5 of 11)
3-
7
9
%

3$''/(81,702725
$66(0%/<
027
3/
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
%
$
'2:1

83

9
$
5
33$''/(52//(5
02725
027
):'95(99
):'95(99
5
9

$
9

12786('
9

$
%
%
9
%
%
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

9
9

5
6

9
%
9
%

%

%
3-
3-

+20(
&<&/(
83
'2:1
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
9
67$3/(5$7,1'(;
+9
9
67$3/(581,7
,1'(;6(1625
4
3/

7
9
67$3/(535,0('
/9
6(/)35,0,1*
6(1625
4
67$3/(5
&$575,'*(
6(1625
4
9
9
/('VWR
9
1&

9
67$3/(581,7
+20(6(1625
4
3/
67$3/(581,7
3/

/('
67$3/(5+20(
+9
7
$
027252138/6(69
7
9
$
9
5,%%21
&$%/(
3$3(5386+(502725
$66(0%/<
027
3/
02725):'/027255(9+9
9

%,1(/(9$725
02725
$66(0%/<
027
3/
02725):'/027255(9+9
3- 5

9
3$''/(81,7
3/
%
$
$
02725):'+027255(9/9

02725):'+027255(9/9
%
%
$
027252138/6(69
3-
%
9
%
$
9
%

+9)3:%
3/

&$575,'*('(7(&7('
/9
9
+($'+20(
/9
9

/('

67$3/(6/2:
+9
9
67$3/(5-$:
+20(6(1625
4
/267$3/(6
6(1625
4
9
+9)3:%
78%
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-82
WD 12.11 HVF PWB (6 of 11)

+9)3:%
3/
7
67$3/(581,7
0,'+20(
6(1625
4
3/
9
67$3/(5$70,'
+20(+9
67$3/(5*$7(
6$)7(7<6:,7&+
6
3/
1&
3$3(5386+(583+9
9
+20(+9
9

7
9

5($57$03(5
$:$<6(1625
4
3/
$:$<+9
9
9
9
9

%

%

5
$
$

972
:'
$
9
9
$

9

$

9
$
5
$
9

9
9
9

$
9
%

9

%
9
$

$

$
9

9

9

9

9
9
/('

3-
3-
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5

5
5
%

%

5
5
%

%
%
/('VWR
9

9
3-
7
9
+20(+9
9
(-(&725+20(
6(1625
4

7
3-
6
$

9

9
6
$
9
3-;; 3-
3$3(5386+(5'2:1+9
3-

7
5($57$03(5
+20(6(1625
4
3/
9
&20
12
5
5 5
9
9
5
(-(&725$66(0%/<
3/
3-
9

9

%
%
%
9
287+9
9
9
(-(&725287
6(1625
4

7

0272521
38/6(69
9
(-(&72502725
(1&2'(5
6(1625
4

7
9
+20(/9
9
7

287+9
9
9
+20(+9
9
(-(&725/2:(5
3$''/(+20(
6:,7&+
6
(-(&72552//
02725(1&2'(5
6(1625
4

7

(-(&7253/$7(
+20(6(1625
4
/('
+9)3:%
78$
February 2013
7-83
Wiring Data
WD 12.12 HVF PWB (7 of 11)
7
(-(&7253$3(5
35(6(17
6(1625
4
3/
9
(-(&725$66(0%/<
3/

5
9
),1*(5+20(
+9

9
7
9
%
%
9
9
9
35(66,1*$1'
6833257&
6(1625
4
),1*(5287
+9
9
9

3-
5 3-

9
9

9
9

9

$
$
$
0272521
38/6(69
9
9
9

9

9

9

9

$
$
3$3(535(6(17/9

7
%
%
%
%
%
%
9
9

9

9

9
9

9
9
9

9

%
$
/('
+9)3:%
381&++($'
+20(+9
9
%
%
%
%
%
%
381&++($'
+20(6(1625
4
3/

6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
9
$
$
$
$
$
$

$

%
$
$

$
$
%,135(6(17
+9
9
9

6
%
$
$
%
$
$

%

9
%
381&+
35(6(17
/9
%
%
381&+35(6(17
/,1.
381&+81,7
+20(6(1625
4
3/
7
9
$
9
381&++($'
+20(+9
%
%
3-
9
9
&+$'%,1
35(6(17
6(1625
4
3/

7

)8//+9
9

9

/('
/('VWR
9
3$3(5
35(66,1*
6(1625
4
3/
+2/(381&+02'8/(
3/
7
5 6
5
3-
3-
3-
9
5 6

$
%

7
9
9

9
$
7
35(66,1*
6833257
(1&2'(5
6(1625
4
9
7
9
5
7

),1*(5,1,7
+9
%
5
3-
9
9
+9)3:%
3/
3-

7

35(66,1*$1'
6833257%
6(1625
4
5
3$3(56(16('+
9

35(66,1*$1'
6833257$
6(1625
4
9
5

9
&+$'%,1
/(9(/
6(1625
4
3/

7
9
'(7(&7('
+9
9
381&+
6(1625
4
3/
%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-84
WD 12.13 HVF PWB (8 of 11)

+9)3:%
3/
3-
381&++($'
02725
):'95(99
:'
$2
381&+81,7
02725
:'
72$

9
9
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

7

9
$
$
,16(57(5(037<6(1625
$

9

$
$
$

$
$
$

$
$

$
$
,16(57(53$3(5/(1*7+
6(1625
$
,16(57(53$3(5/(1*7+
6(1625
$

$
$
$

9

$
$
$

$
$
$

$
$
$

9
%,1+20(+9
9
9

9
1&

%,175$<
%,1833(5/(9(/6(1625
75$160,7(54
3/
9
9
9

9
9
,16(57(57(6(1625
,16(57(5/(6(1625
9
5
9
,16(57(5723&29(5
,17(5/2&.

9
9
$
5
,16(57(53$3(5:,'7+
6(1625
,16(57(5%277203/$7(
6(1625
,16(57(5$&&(/(5$7,21
6(1625
1&
3-
/('
:'
3-
12786('
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
/('VWR
9
3-

9
9

7
%,1)8//
6(1625
4
3/
:'
3-
9
,16(57(53:%
,16(57(53$3(5:,'7+
6(1625
+9)3:%
75$160,77(5
&20
$
9
%,1029,1*38/6(69

(1$%/()25:$5'/9
$
):'

5(9

%,1/2:(5
/,0,76:,7&+
6
3/
1&
$
9
$7/,0,7+9
3- 7 7
&20
1&

%,1833(5/(9(/6(1625
5(&(,9(54
3/
(1$%/(5(9(56(/9
%,1833(5/,0,7
6:,7&+
6
3/
1&
9
3-
9

027252138/6(69
9
$7/,0,7+9
027252138/6(69
%,102725
(1&2'(5
6(1625
4
3/

9
9
9
3-

):'95(99
9
)8//+9
9

3-
9
3-
/('
3-
9

+9)3:%
78%
February 2013
7-85
Wiring Data
WD 12.14 HVF PWB (9 of 11)
+9)3:%
3/
7 7
9
%
%
9
%
%
$
9
%
$
9
9
%
%
9
9
$
,16(57(535(6(17/,1.
%
,16(57(53,&.836(1625
3$3(535(6(17/9
,16(57(5
3:%
:'
3-
,16(57(5-$0&29(5
,17(5/2&.
,16(57(50272563(('
6(/(&7
,16(57(50272563(('
6(/(&7
%
%
$
9
%
%
%

%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
%
$
9)520
:'
,16(57(502725&/2&.
,16(57(53$3(5/(1*7+
/9
,16(57(502725
',5(&7,21
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

5

,16(57(5
67$1'%<
6(1625
4
3/
9
5

9
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
%

%

6
%
%

%
%

%

%

%

%

):'9
%

67$3/(+($'
02725
027
):'9

5(99
5

9
9

5 3-
9
+20(
,1%2$5'
7$03(5672$/()
7$03(5672;/()
7$03(502725&</&(
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
3-
67$3/(581,7
3/
5(99

5($57$03(5
02725
027
3/
7
3-
1&
,16(57(5
3:%
:'
3-
027252138/6(69
6 7

5,%%21
&$%/(

9
3$3(535(6(17
/9
027252138/6(69
5

9
,16(57(502725(1$%/(
7
5
3-
9
%
$
3-
/('
3-

/('VWR
3-
3-
9
/('
+9)3:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-86
WD 12.15 HVF PWB (10 of 11)

+9)3:%
3/
3-
5
5

5
5

3-
7
9
%

67$3/(581,7
02725
027
3/
%
027252138/6(69
5
7
5
5

(-(&725
02725
027
5
5
5

5

%
5
5

5
5

):'95(99
):'

5(9

&<&/(

9
9

9
9
9

9
7$03(5$:$<+9

9

9

12786('

9
9

1&

/('
7
/('21+9

9
6:,7&+386+('/9

3-
9
$
3-
+20(
,1%2$5'
7$03(5672$/()
7$03(5672;/()
7$03(502725&<&/(
$
$
$

%,1833(5/(9(/
6(162575$160,77(5
:'
5
9

/('
9

$
$
+9)3:%
7$03(5)5217
$:$<6(1625
4
3/
9
9

9
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
9

):'95(99
7$03(5)5217
+20(6(1625
4
3/
7
):'95(99
9
):'95(99
35(66,1*
6833257
02725
027
3/
7
3-
3-
3-
7$03(5+20(+9
9
9

/('VWR
3-

3-
):'95(99
7
(-(&72552//
02725
027
%
027252138/6(69

%
027252138/6(69
):'95(99

%
%
027252138/6(69
(-(&725$66(0%/<
3/
%
%
9
%

9
9
7
/('

3$86(72
81/2$'3:%
3/
6:,7&+
6
5
9
9
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
%

%

)52177$03(5
02725$66(0%/<
027
3/

78$
February 2013
7-87
Wiring Data
WD 12.16 BM PWB (1 of 4)
%03:%
3/
%067$3/(+($'
3/
3-
9

%0(175<
6(1625
4
3/
9
*5<

9

3$3(535(6(176(1625/9

<(/
9
9,2

)/$33(5+20(
6(1625
4
3/
*5<

67$3/(6/2:/9

9
9

9
6++20(/9

9

9,2
9
3-
9
67$3/(6/2:/9
*5<
9
9,2
+20(/9
%06+02725
027
+9)3:%

:'
3-
3-
%067$3/(6/2:6:,7&+
6
%067$3/(6+20(6:,7&+
6

9
%067$3/(+($'
3/
*51
):'95(99

%/8
9
9

):'95(99
%/8
):'95(99
5('

9
9

9
9

:'
3-
9
*5<
5('
<(/
9
9
9
9,2
9
*5<
<(/
9
9,2

9
*5<
<(/
9

6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
9
9
9

9,2
9
38/6(6+9

<(/
9
3-

9
9,2
%0&5($6(52//
*$7(+20(6(1625
4
3/
3-
*5<
/('6
%0&5($6(%/$'(
+20(6(1625
4
3/
3-
+20(+9

%067$3/(5+($'
&$55,(5&/26('
6(1625
4
3/
3-

9
%06+02725
027
+20(+9

%06+67$3/(6
+20(6:,7&+
6
3-
&/26('+9

%03:%
):'95(99
9
<(/
%06+67$3/(6
/2:6:,7&+
6
*51
+20(/9

9,2
9

3-
*5<

9
9
3-
9
%0&5($6(%/$'(
02725(1&2'(5
6(1625
4
3/
3-
%03:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-88
WD 12.17 BM PWB (2 of 4)
3-
3-
%0&5($6(52//
02725(1&2'(5
6(1625
4
3/
3-

9
9
3-
%03:%
3/
*5<
9

<(/
9
9,2
3-

251
9,17/.

9
<(//2:
9
9,17/.
,1',&$725 9
9

%0&203,/(5
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69

%0%$&.6723
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69

75,)2/'(5
$77$&+0(17
3-
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69

<(/
%/8
251
%067$&.+2/'
62/(12,'
62/

3-
21/9
21/9
3-

:+7%51
9
251:+7

%067$&.+2/'
62/(12,'
62/
(1(5*,6('/9
9
%/8:+7

9
:+7%/8
+9)%0%,1
$66(0%/<
3/
%0&219(<25
'5,9(02725
027
3/

3-
3-

5('
<(/

%0%$&.6723$66(0%/<
3/
3-
9

5('
9
9
3-

027252138/6(69
(1(5*,6('/9

3-
251
027252138/6(69
3-
%/.
027252138/6(69
*5<
%/8
3-
:'
3-
9
%07$03(5
02725
027
3/
9
251
9
027252138/6(69

75,)2/'(53:%
027252138/6(69
<(/

3-
96833/<

38/6(6+9

5('
%/8
251

3-
/('6
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
3-
%03:%
78$
February 2013
7-89
Wiring Data
WD 12.18 BM PWB (3 of 4)

%0&5($6(52//
*$7(02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69
3-

5('
<(/
027252138/6(69

027252138/6(69

3-
%0*8,'(+20(
6(1625
4
3/

251
%/8
3-
9
%03:%
3/
3-
*5<

&<&/(

23(1

3-
9

9
9

9

<(/
9
9,2

%07$03(5+20(
6(1625
4
3/
+20(+9
<(/
9

9,2
9

9

9

*5<

3$3(535(6(17/9
<(/
9
9,2

9,2
3-

3-
9
%22./(7'(7(&7('
/9

9
):'95(99%5$.(9
5('
):'95(99%5$.(9
%/8
9
9

+9)%0%,1
)8//6(1625
4
3/
%0(;,76(1625
4
3/
3-

<(/
9
9
9
9
9
9
*5<

3-
%03$3(5
35(6(176(1625
4
3/

9
*5<
+9
:+7*51
+9)%0%,1
$66(0%/<
3/
9
3-
9
%51:+7
3-
3-
9
:+7%51
9
+20(+9
75,)2/'(5
$77$&+0(17
3-
):'95(99%5$.(9
5('
%/8
):'95(99%5$.(9
%0&5($6(52//
02725
027
3/
%0&5($6(%/$'(
02725$66(0%/<
027
3/

9
3-

6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
3-
/('6
3-
%03:%
78$

Wiring Data
February 2013
7-90
WD 12.19 BM PWB (4 of 4)
3-
9
+9)3:%
9
:'
3-
9
:'
3-
5('
%/8
%06+
02725
):'95(99
:'
3-
5('
):'95(99
%/8

5('
027252138/6(69
<(/
027252138/6(69
%/8
027252138/6(69
*51
3-
3-

%

%/.

%

9

1&
1&

9
9
3-
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
9
9
027252138/6(69
:'
3-
9
3-
):'95(99
+9)3:%
%05;

):'95(99
%07;
%05;
9
9
:'
3-
%07;

9
9
%06+
02725
%0)/$33(5
02725
027
3/
9
3-
9
+9)3:%
%03:%
3/
9
%51
5('
251
<(/
*51
%/8
9,2
*5<
723&29(5&/26('/9
7)'225&/26('/9
7)&/87&+(1(5*,6('/9
7)$66,67*$7(62/(1(5*,6('/9
7)',9(57(562/(1(5*,6('/9
9
12786('
7)(;,73$3(56(16('+9
75,)2/'(5
3:%
:'
3-
7)$66,673$3(56(16('+9
7)(175<3$3(56(16('/9
:+7
251
7)35(6(17/9
251
/('6
3-
3-
%03:%
78$
February 2013
7-91
Wiring Data
WD 12.20 Tri Folder PWB

75,)2/'(53:%
3/
3-
723&29(5
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6
3/
12
3-
9
+9)3:%
:'
3-
251
9,17/.
251
9
*5<
9
9,1
&20
3-
:+7
*5<
7)(;,73$3(56(16('+9
9,2
7)'225&/26('/9
%51
723&29(5&/26('/9
%/.
9
*51
12786('
%/8
7)&/87&+(1(5*,6('/9
7)$66,67*$7(62/(1(5*,6('/9
7)',9(57(562/(1(5*,6('/9
5('
251
<(/
3-
9
251
(1(5*,6('/9

%/8
251
(1(5*,6('/9

%/8

9

9
251
(1(5*,6('/9
%/8
1&
1&
9
1&
1&
%
$
'225&/26('/9
<(/
9
9,2
9
3-

9
9
&29(5&/26('/9
<(/

9
75,)2/'(5723
&29(5,17(5/2&.
6(1625
4
3/
*5<

9
,17/.
75,)2/'(5(;,7
6(1625
4
3/
3-
9

9,2
3-

9
,17/.
9
<(/

3$3(535(6(17+9
1&
9
*5<

9
,17/.
9

9

9,2
9
3-
'5,9(&/87&+
&/
3/
75,)2/'(5
$66,67*$7(
6(1625
4
3/
3-
9

9
9,2
3-
*$7(6(16('+9
<(/
9
%

3-
$66,67*$7(
62/(12,'
62/
3/
*5<
9
7)$66,673$3(56(16('+9
75,)2/'(5',9(57(5
62/(12,'
62/
3/
9
9
:'
3-
7)(175<3$3(56(16('/9
%03:%
75,)2/'(5
(175<6(1625
4
3/
3-
9
9,1
9,2
9
9,2
'225&/26('/9
9
3$3(535(6(17/9
<(/
9
251
<(/
*5<
251
12
3-
9
9,17/.
12
%/.
3-
9
&20

9
9
&20
)5217'225
,17(5/2&.6:,7&+
6
3/
3-
3-
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
3-
3-

3-
75,)2/'(53:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-92
WD 12.21 Inserter PWB (1 of 2)
,16(57(5723
&29(5
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6
3/
9,1
&20
3-

12
9
9
:'
3-
3-
:'
3-%

9,17/.
9,17/.
7
,16(57(5
%277203/$7(
6(1625
4
3/

9
3/$7(+20(+9
9
9
9
&29(523(1/9
,16(57(57(6(1625
3$3(535(6(17/9
,16(57(5/(6(1625
3$3(535(6(17/9
,16(57(5(037<+9
3$3(5:,'7+/9
3$3(5/(1*7+/9
3$3(5:,'7+/9
$&&(/(5$7,216(16('/9
3-
3-
1&
9
:'
3-%
$
9
9
$
$
$
$
$
7
9

:'
3-
:'
3-
:'
3-
:'
3-
,16(57(5
3,&.836(1625
4
3/
1&
3-
9
9
$
$
3$3(535(6(17/9
$
,16(57(5/(
6(1625
4
3/
7
%
$
3$3(535(6(17/9
9
,16(57(581,7
(037<6(1625
4
3/
9
7
9
9
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
3-
,16(57(57(
6(1625
4
3/
3$3(535(6(17/9
3-

$
3$3(5/(1*7+/9

9
3-
3-
9
9
%277203/$7(+20(+9
+9)3:%
3$3(535(6(17/9
3-
9
7
9
:'
3-
9
9
9

7
56

9
9
9
,17/.
(1(5*,6('/9

'225&/26('/9
12
:'
3-
3-
&20
1&
9

7
9
+9)3:%
&29(5&/26('/9
1&
,16(57(5-$0
&29(5
,17(5/2&.
6:,7&+
6
3/
,16(57(53:%
3/
3-
7
3-
3$3(535(6(17/9

9
3$3(5:,'7+
6(1625
4
3/
9
3- 3-
3-
,16(57(53:%
1&
78$
February 2013
7-93
Wiring Data
WD 12.22 Inserter PWB (2 of 2)

,16(57(53:%
3/
3-
9
/+'225&/26('+9
%
+9)3:%
0272563(('6(/(&7+25/9
0272563(('6(/(&7+25/9
02725&/2&.38/6(69
3$3(5$7/(1*7+/9
3-
9

9
9
9
9
,16(57(5
3$3(5/(1*7+
6(1625
4
3/
9
3-

7
9
,16(57(5
$&&(/(5$7,21
6(1625
4
3/
9
:'
3-$

9
3$3(535(6(17/9
:'
3-$
3-
7
7

9
9
3$3(535(6(17/9
9
3$3(535(6(17/9
,16(57(53$3(5
/(1*7+
6(1625
4
3/

9
7

3-
%
027252138/6(69
%
027252138/6(69
,16(57(5
02725
027
3/
027252138/6(69
%
027252138/6(69
%
9
%
02725(1$%/('/9
9
:'
3-
:'
3-
%
02725',5(&7,21+25/9

9,17/.
%
9
,16(57(5&/87&+
&/
3/

(1(5*,6('/9
:'
3-
9,1
%
9
%
,16(57(535(6(17/9
,16(57(53,&.836(1625
3$3(535(6(17/9
3$3(5:,'7+
6(1625
4
3/
3-
9,17/.
9,1
%
%
9
:'
3-

9
:'
3-$
3$3(535(6(17/9

9
9
7
,16(57(53$3(5
/(1*7+
6(1625
4
3/
9

9

3$3(535(6(17/9
9

9
3-
:'
3-$
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5
3-
3-
3-
3-
3-
,16(57(53:%
78$
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-94
WD 12.23 OCT PWB

2&7
3/
2&73:%
3/
9
9
5('
%/.
2))6(702725'5,9(
9
'(9,&(,'
9

9,2
21/9

2&72))6(7
02725
027
%/8

9
9

9
3-

*5<

9
0(',$3$7+
'5,9(53:%
251

9
3-
9
9
*51
*5<

:+7
3-
9
3-
9
9,2
2&7,1'(;
6(1625
4
:'
3-
3-
9

9
9
*5<
9
9,2

2&7
)8//
6(1625
4
3/

2&7,1'(;('/9
2&7)8///9
<(/
<(/
78$
February 2013
7-95
Wiring Data
WD 12.24 HVF PWB (11 of 11)

+9)3:%
3/
+2/(381&+02'8/(
3/
7
6
5
9

381&+6(1625
4
3/
3-
7

9
9
'(7(&7('+9

9
9
7
9

381&+6(1625
4
3/

9
6
5

7

381&+81,7
02725
027

9
5
'(7(&7('+9
9
9
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
027252138/6(69
9

9
7$
3-
+9)3:%
/('
:'
3-
/('VWR
3-
6
5
$

381&++($'
02725
027
/('
+9)3:%
):'95(99

):'95(99

+9)3:%
:'
3-
6((:'
)25+9)32:(5

7
7
78%
Wiring Data
February 2013
7-96
8 Principles of Operation
System Overview ............................................................................................................
System Electronics..........................................................................................................
System Communications.................................................................................................
Power On Self Test (POST) ............................................................................................
Print Engine Self Test (PEST).........................................................................................
Sensor Types and Function ............................................................................................
Print Process ...................................................................................................................
Media Paths ....................................................................................................................
Image Input Terminal ......................................................................................................
Image Output Terminal....................................................................................................
Duplex Automatic Document Handler (DADH)................................................................
Full Width Array Raster Input Scanner............................................................................
Fax ..................................................................................................................................
Three Tray Module (3TM) ...............................................................................................
Bypass tray 4...................................................................................................................
Tray 5 Module .................................................................................................................
Image Marking Engine (IME)...........................................................................................
Print Marking Unit and Drum Assembly ..........................................................................
Output Transport .............................................................................................................
Offsetting Catch Tray (OCT) ...........................................................................................
Low Capacity Stapler Stacker (LCSS) ............................................................................
High Volume Finisher (HVF) ...........................................................................................
8-3
8-14
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-25
8-32
8-33
8-34
8-35
8-40
8-42
8-42
8-47
8-52
8-56
8-63
8-82
8-84
8-84
8-92
February 2013
8-1
February 2013
8-2
System Overview
NOTE: To ensure complete understanding of the product, participation in ColorQube 9301/02/
03 Service Training is strongly recommended.
The ColorQube 9301/02/03 is an A3 color MFP platform utilizing Xerox's Solid Ink marking
technology.
ColorQube 9302/03 options. A 4000-Sheet Feeder (Tray 5) is available. On the output side, a
2000-sheet, low-capacity stapler/punch/stacker is available, or a high-volume finisher with
optional booklet-maker, tri-fold, punch, and inserter.
Refer to Table 2 for Acronym definitions.
Table 2 Acronym Definitions
The ColorQube is available in three speed combinations with the following major attributes
50 ppm mono on all models

40, 45 and 50 ppm color - depending upon model
85 ppm high speed draft mode
Duplex capable document handler
Scanner with document illumination
1 or 2-Line fax module
100 sheet bypass tray
3 trays (3200 sheet total capacity at 75 gsm)
Optional Paper Feed Platform (4000 sheets at 75 gsm (18 lb.)
A wide range of available Finishing Options
Print speed ranges from 31 pages per minute (ppm) for the ColorQube 9301 up to 38 ppm for
the ColorQube 9303 at 600 x 600 dpi in single or duplex modes. Table 1 lists the main printing
modes and associated resolutions / speeds for sheets 8.5 inches or less in the process direction that can be fed and imaged 2-up (burst mode). Speeds are half those given below for
media sizes that cannot be imaged 2-up.
Table 1 Print Speed by Model and Mode
Print Mode
9303 Simplex/
Duplex
9302 Simplex/
Duplex
9301 Simplex/
Duplex
Fast Color
85/53
70/46
60/43
Fast Black/White
85/53
85/46
85/43
Standard Color
70/50
60/44
50/40
Standard Black/White
70/50
70/44
70/41
Enhanced Color (Default)
55/45 (40)
45/40
38/38
Enhanced Black/White (Default)
60/48 (43)
55/43
50/39
High Resolution / Photo color
38/31
35/31
31/31
High Resolution / Photo Black/White 38/31
36/31
32/31
NOTE: These are maximum steady state print speeds. There are many factors that will reduce
performance from these values including image complexity, job length, paper size, tray selection and driver type.
The base configuration (ColorQube 9301) includes three paper trays (Trays 1, 2, and 3) providing 3200-sheet input capacity, a 100-sheet bypass tray from which specialty media, card stock,
larger format paper, and envelopes are fed. Also included is a DADH / Scanner. Network connectivity for all models is available utilizing Ethernet or USB.
Acronyms
Definition
3TM
3 Tray Module (Trays 1 to 3)
CVU
Check Valve Unit
EOL
End Of Life
FRU
Field Replaceable Unit
H2H
Head to Head
HVF
High Volume Finisher
IIT
IMD
Ink Module Driver
IME
Integrated Marking Engine
IOT
LCSS
Low Capacity Stacker/Stapler
LCSS
Low Capacity Stacker/Stapler
LPA
Low Pressure Assistance (valve)
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signalling
MFP
Multi Functional Printer
MPD
Media Path Driver board
MPT
Multi Purpose Tray
MSI
Multi-sheet Inserter
MU
Marking Unit
OCT
Offset Catch Tray
PFP
Paper Feed Platform (tray 5)
PLD
Programmable Logic Device
PTC
Positive Temperature Coefficient (heater)
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation
RTC
Real Time Clock
SBC
SFWA
Staggered Full Width Array

The Image Input Terminal (IIT) includes the following components:
Duplex Automatic Document Handler (DADH)
Scanner with Platen
Control Panel with Graphical User Interface (GUI)
February 2013
8-3
Duplex Automatic Document Handler

The DADH offers the capability to feed a document stack of up to 100 sheets. The DADH contains its own software, which controls the hardware to move input documents between predefined locations within the DADH. Figure 1.
Figure 2 Scanner location

Control Panel
The control panel is housed in a plastic housing containing:
Figure 1 DADH location
Scanner and Platen
The scanner will support a monochrome scan speed of 361 mm/sec and a colour scan speed
of 234 mm/sec. The scanner also includes more illumination for the higher colour speeds.
Refer to Figure 2.
800 by 600 pixel display
20 by 8 touch screen overlay
25 hard keys
6 status LEDs
Hard Button Functions

The hard buttons activate functionality, change between services and control the machine.
Numeric keypad: to enter numeric information (e.g. copy count, fax phone number, etc.)
Additional characters: asterisk, hash and dial pause for fax functionality
Cancel: to cancel any numeric information input via the keypad
Start: to commence copying, scanning and job recovery cycles
Stop: to stop the machine while running
Clear All: to cancel selected features and return them to their default values
Job Interrupt: to suspend the current job and allow another job to be carried out. Pressing
Job Interrupt a second time returns to the original job. An LED, next to the button, illuminates to indicate when Job Interrupt is active
? (Help button): to provide information about features provided on the machine. An LED
positioned next to the button illuminates to indicate when Help is active
Language: toggle the display text between different languages resident on the machine.
Key Symbol (Log In/Out button): to access secure areas, e.g. Key Operator set ups
February 2013
8-4
Machine Status: to access status information on the machine
Job Status: to access information on the job queues
Features: to access the Copy, Fax etc. features soft buttons
Power Saver: puts the machine into Low Power mode or reboot
Control Panel Right

Figure 4 shows the controls located on the right side of the control panel.
Status LEDs
The Status LEDs indicate active functionality, refer to Table 3.
Table 3 LED function
LED
Function
Color
Feature path selected
Blue
Job status path selected
Blue
Machine status path selected
Blue
Help mode
Green
Interrupt mode
Green
Power saver key
Green
The arrangement of control panel hard buttons is illustrated in the following figures.
Control Panel Left
Figure 3 illustrates the functions available on the left side of the control panel.
Figure 4 Control panel right
Control Panel Display
The touch-sensitive control panel is the primary system interface. Figure 5 illustrates areas of
the display. The display is divided into pathways, as illustrated in the following sub-sections. To
access the tools option it is necessary to log in as an administrator. The default screen displayed is set in Screen Defaults of the Tools area. Different feature menus are selected with
the hard buttons. Refer to GP 5 Customer Administration Tools.
Figure 3 Control panel left
February 2013
8-5
Bypass Tray 4
The bypass tray is located on the left side of the IME and accepts standard or specialty media.
The user can fold the bypass tray upward when not in use. Bypass tray capacity is 100 sheets.
Figure 6
Sensors in the bypass tray detect the presence and approximate size of input media. When
media is detected by the input sensor, the IME prompts the user, via the control panel display,
to confirm media characteristics. The IME estimates the cross-process width of the sheet in the
bypass tray when the side guide has been correctly positioned. The bypass tray guide position
is zoned, with each zone attributed with a default media size(s). For certain sizes, the default is
dependent on market region. The default media size is also associated with a collection of similar sizes. The user will be allowed to select the default media size indicated by the bypass tray
guide position, or to select from the list of similar sizes and types.
If the user loads envelopes, the bypass tray will initially detect them as one of the standard
media. The user will then have to select the envelope option, which will trigger the bypass tray
to default to one of the standard envelope types. If the user loads custom size media, the
bypass tray will initially detect it as one of the standard media. The user will then have to select
the custom size option and enter the exact size of the custom media loaded.
Figure 5 Control panel display

Fax
The ColorQube 9301/02/03 can be used to send and receive fax information via the optional 1
or 2-line fax module located in the controller drawer beneath the scanner. Fax functionality is
selected and controlled via the main control panel.

The Image Output Terminal (IOT) is an integrated module consisting of the following major
components:
Bypass tray 4
3TM adjustable trays (Trays 1 and 2)
3TM fixed-size tray (Tray 3)
Power supply
IME that includes
Vertical transport
Horizontal transport
Marking unit
Printheads
Tray 1 and Tray 2
Ink loader
Ink delivery system
Drum and transfix roller
Drum maintenance unit
Figure 7. Trays 1 and 2 are fully adjustable and many supported media sizes are detected via
automatic size sensing. The tray side guides feature detent positions at the supported media
sizes (refer to GP 20 Paper and Media Size Specifications) for the guides to lock to. In between
these standard sizes, the guides will still lock in position via a ratchet / pawl feature to support
custom sized media.
Print engine electronics
Figure 6 Bypass tray
February 2013
8-6
Power Supply
See Figure 9
Figure 7 Tray 1 and tray 2

Tray 3 and Horizontal Transport
Figure 8. Tray 3 is a fixed size (A4 / Letter) tray with a 2100-sheet capacity. An integrated horizontal transport moves picked media across the 3TM to the vertical transport.
Figure 9 Power supply location
Figure 8 Tray 3
February 2013
8-7
Image Marking Engine
Vertical Transport
The IME contains several modules responsible for media transport and imaging. Figure 10.
The vertical transport moves media upwards along the left side of the IME to the horizontal
transport. Several access points along the vertical transport are provided for jam clearance.
Figure 11.
Figure 10 IME components
Figure 11 Vertical transport
February 2013
8-8
Horizontal Transport
The horizontal transport moves media from the vertical transport to the entrance of the registration / preheat assembly. The horizontal transport also serves as part of the duplex media
path. Figure 12.
The registration / preheat assembly receives media from the horizontal transport. Using multiple sets of driven rollers, the media is registered, centered in the path, and subjected to heat in
preparation for image transfix. Figure 13 shows the location of the registration / preheat
assembly in the IME.
Figure 12 Horizontal transport

Figure 13 Registration / Preheat assembly location
February 2013
8-9
Drum Assembly
The drum and enclosed heaters form the key area of the system where imaging takes place.
The drum assembly and transfix system are separate, but interrelated. This section discusses
the drum assembly. The next section goes into more detail on the transfix system. Figure 14.
Drum temperature is critical for print quality and because of this, the temperature is closely
monitored. Since melted ink (132 degrees C which is 270 degrees F) is hotter than the drum
surface (55.5 C or 139 F) when applied, long, high area coverage print runs may raise the temperature of the drum to the point where no drum heating is required and eventually the drum
cooling fan cannot maintain the correct drum operating temperature. System software should
slow the machine down or inhibit printing temporarily while the drum cools to the proper temperature range. This should only happen with jobs of >150% coverage and > 350 copies.
The drum heating AC circuits are routed through the thermal cutout board that forms part of the
registration / preheat assembly. The thermal cutout board sits directly above the drum and
should the drum overheat, the thermal cutouts should permanently open and remove power
from the drum heater circuits. Drum Heaters also are inhibited unless the drum is turning.
Drum Encoder
The drum encoder helps to track runout variations in the drum surface which can result in a distance variance between the drum and the printheads. The encoder keeps track of the home
position of the encoder and the IOD reads the drum distance at six degree intervals. This information is used by the system to help set printhead 'Y' direction compensation to properly set
the jet firing timing. Drum home position may also be used in fault tolerance mode if it is known
there is a defect in the drum surface. The encoder signal can be used to prevent printing in the
defect area whenever possible. Figure 15.
Figure 14 Drum assembly location

Drum Heaters
The drum heater consists of two independent heating sections (front and rear). Each section
contains four heating coils wrapped externally over glass rods. The drum heaters take approximately five minutes to go from room temperature to operating temperature. As the ink reservoir takes 20 minutes to reach operating temperature, drum heating is not a limiting factor in
the machine start-up time.
If line voltage is below 180V, the front four coils are configured in series and then placed in parallel to the rear four coils. If voltage is greater than 180V, all eight coils are placed in series.
This ensures that the current drawn by the coils remains consistent regardless of the operating
voltage. The automatic re-configuration of the coils is accomplished by a relay located within
the power supply and activated when detected line voltage exceeds 180V.
In the event of a single coil failure, 110 VAC machines will still have one heater section working
(front and rear connected in parallel). However, 220VAC machines would lose all drum heating
in the event of a single coil failure (all coils connected in series).
February 2013
8-10
Figure 15 Drum encoder
Cleaning Unit
Transfix Assembly
The Cleaning Unit (CU) is a Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) that cleans and applies a
release agent to the drum. The customer periodically replaces the CU as directed by status
messages.
The transfix linkages apply force to the transfix roller to bond the image to the media. Figure 17
illustrates the transfix linkages.
The CU operates until the release agent is depleted from the internal reservoir and roller. The
CU actively maintains life remaining and other information in an internal memory device. This
life information is calculated from the initial amount of release agent in the reservoir, data from
two level sensors contained within the cleaning unit, and software algorithms in the machine.
One sensor is a float with a magnet and reed switch that is triggered when approximately 75%
of the oil is used. The second sensor is a pressure transducer that detects when the reservoir
is completely empty. The percentage of life remaining and number of prints remaining information is frequently sent to the Single Board Controller PWB. Since the life remaining data is
stored on a memory device internal to the CU, it is retained if the CU is moved from one
machine to another. Figure 16.
Figure 17 Transfix assembly location
Figure 16 Cleaning unit location
February 2013
8-11
Stripper Assembly
The stripper assembly is actuated and placed against the drum just prior to paper arrival. The
stripper assembly is necessary to break the bond of the media with the drum surface. Once the
edge is lifted the stripper blade is retracted until the next lead edge is almost to the stripper.
The stripper blade is grounded via the conductive plastic in the assembly. This provides the
path back to the metal paper path plate and back to the ground of the electrical connector on
the stripper latch assembly. Failure of this ground may lead to ESD hits to the communications
lines. Figure 18.
During normal operation, the stripper assembly is locked in position. When the front door is
opened while a jam is present in the stripper area, the stripper cam arm should move to the
home position which allows the stripper assembly to be unlatched. There is a concern that this
may confuse customers and this latch may be broken. Should the stripper fail to home and
unlatch, there is a screw slot accessible through the front motor block frame (to the right and
below the transfix flexure encoder) which will allow the technician to manually turn the M4
motor to home the cams.
The stripper blade is coated with Teflon to reduce the build up of ink. However, debris on the
stripper blade can contribute to damage on the lead edge of the media. Additionally the contamination on the blade may come off the blade when it is brought off contact with the drum
and comes up, striking the media approximately 15 mm from the leading edge. The stripper
blade mechanism is ordinarily locked and does not release until the front door is opened. This
is necessary due to the mass of the stripper transport and blade assembly. If it is necessary to
unlock the stripper assembly with power off, a screw slot within the front drum plates that
allows the drives to be turned to an unlocked position (screw slot will be approximately horizontal). The stripper blade is manufactured with a blunt point to greatly reduce the possibility of
personal injury while handling the stripper blade by service personnel for the purposes of
removal and installation. Care should still be taken when handling the unsaddled stripper blade
assembly.
Exit Module
Figure 19.
Figure 18 Stripper assembly location

The M4 drive motor is run in reverse to lock and unlock the stripper assembly. M4 also provides drive to the 'J' and 'L' paper path nips (part of the stripper assembly). Unlatching can also
be achieved via a screw at the front of the motor block. Placing the screw slot at approximately
the horizontal position will unlock the stripper assembly. During normal machine operation the
mechanism will automatically move to the unlocked position when a jam occurs.
The stripper cam home sensor sits behind the front stripper cam latch arm. This is an optical
sensor which is blocked by a flag when in the stripper operation position. However, the stripper
assembly can be unlatched and still have the arm in the home position. Since the stripper handle must be in the operational position before the front door is closed, this is not considered an
issue by the PDT but means that the operator cannot be informed they have failed to close the
stripper assembly.
February 2013
8-12
Figure 19 Exit module location
Tray 5
The optional Tray 5, Figure 20, is positioned on the left-hand side of the IME (when viewed
from the front) and feeds media into the IME through a slot in Door A, below the bypass tray.
The unit undocks from the IME to allow jam access through Door A.
The PFP consists of the following major elements:
Single media tray
Media lift drive
Feeder
Controller Board
Figure 21 OCT location

Low Capacity Stacker/Stapler (LCSS)
Figure 22. The LCSS provides collating, stacking, stapling and hole punching operations on
paper delivered center registered, face-up or face-down from the IME. The LCSS offers two
trays: a stacker tray with a capacity of up to 2000 sheets, and a top tray with a capacity of up to
100 sheets. The user may select from up to three stapling options (single front corner, single
front edge and dual) dependant on paper size and orientation. Punch operations include two,
three or four-hole options in accordance with the selected mode.
Figure 20 Tray 5 location
Finishing Options
The following finishing options are available:
Offset Catch Tray (OCT)
Low Capacity Stacker / Stapler (LCSS)
High Volume Finisher (HVF).
Offset Catch Tray (OCT)

Figure 21. The Offsetting Catch Tray (OCT) is an optional output device attached to the right
hand side of the IME. Output is stacked face down or face up in the tray. The user can select to
have alternate sets offset from one another to provide set distinction, including single sheet
sets. A fill sensor is activated when the tray reaches 90% capacity.
Figure 22 LCSS location
February 2013
8-13
System Electronics
Figure 23. The HVF performs collating, stacking, stapling and optional hole punching operations on paper delivered (face-up or face-down) from the IME. The HVF offers two trays: a
stacker tray with a capacity of up to 3000 sheets (reduced to 2000 if Tri-Folder is installed), and
a top tray with a capacity of up to 250 sheets.
What follows is an overview of the primary electronic components. The discussions begin with
the power supply.
The HVF has several optional components:
The auto-ranging power supply provides AC and DC power for all systems electronics, motors
and heaters. The power supply employs three separate switching supplies. The 3.3V ESTAR
and +17V outputs are supplied whenever the power switch is closed (the green LED on the
power supply indicates these outputs are available). The remaining outputs are supplied by
two separate converters when requested by the printer. +24V, 12V, and +5V outputs are supplied by one converter (as indicated by the amber LED), and the 50V outputs are supplied by
the other (as indicated by the red LED). No other outputs are available unless the 3.3V ESTAR
and 17V outputs are on. Refer to WD 1.3 for more details.
Booklet Maker - collects and processes IME output to form booklets from A3, A4, 11 x
17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 and 8.5 x 11 short feed stock to form A4, A5, 11 x 8.5, 8.5 x 7, 8.5 x
6.5 and 8.5 x 5.5 booklets respectively (stapled or unstapled) and stack booklets on a single tray. Staple and fold modes are user-selectable.
Post-Process Inserter (PPI) Tray 6 - allows a minimum of 250 sheets, such as cover
stock, to be inserted into a build job, without having been passed through the IME. The
PPI cannot handle tab stock.
Tri-Folder - mounted to the right-hand side of the HVF Booklet Maker, provides either a
straight-through path to accommodate the production of booklets, or an additional fold to
create C or Z folds (the first fold being created by the Booklet Maker).
NOTE: When a Tri-Folder is fitted, the stacking capacity of the main HVF tray is reduced
to 2000 sheets.
Hole Punch Modules (LCSS or HVF) - These are options providing 2 or 3 hole options,
4 hole, Swedish 4 and Legal 2 hole. For the LCSS, the user may select any of the five
hole punch options without restriction. For the HVF, the hole punch kits are located in a
mount. Therefore the user must purchase one of the two basic hole punch kits (2 or 3
hole) as a prerequisite to permit fitting the 4, Swedish and Legal hole punch kits.
Power Supply
AC Input
The Power Supplys AC input specifications are listed in Table 1.
Table 1 AC Input Specifications
Line Operation Requirement Nominal Value
Limits and Condition
120 Volt Operation
115 VAC
99 - 140 Volts AC
240 Volt Operation
230 VAC
187 - 254 Volts AC
Frequency Range
50-60 Hz
47 - 63 Hz
In-Rush Current
Less than 60 A
Full Load
Leakage Current
Less than 2.4 mA
250 Volts AC 50Hz Operation
Sustained Current at 115VAC 12 ~ 16 A
15 ~ 20 A max during warm-up
Sustained Current at 230VAC 10 A
Warm-up and high area coverage jobs
If the AC power is interrupted for any period of time, the power supply powers up based on the
power switch position. If a current limit is exceeded, or an over voltage occurs, the power supply can be re-started by cycling the AC line. The power AC line is required to be a minimum of
250ms when cycled.
AC Output
Refer to WD 1.6 and WD 1.7 Power Distribution PWB. The power supply has eight, triac-controlled AC output channels. Each channel is controlled by the IOT on a half-line-cycle basis.
The IOT enables the triacs according to the heater demand and input voltage. A half line cycle
dropping algorithm is used (for example, the heater will be on for one half line cycle, followed
by off for seven half line cycles) to control the average power supplied to the heater.
Figure 23 HVF location
February 2013
8-14
The IOT measures the line current and voltage to schedule heater requests. The line current
measured includes the DC converter and finisher currents. The IOT limits heater requests
when required so that the line current rating is not exceeded. Table 2 lists heater electrical
characteristics.
Table 2 Power Supply Output Ratings
DC Output
The power supplys DC outputs are listed in Table 3.
Table 3 DC Output Specifications
DC Voltage
Min/Nom/Max Peak
Current (A)
Regulation, PARD
Min/Nom/Max Peak
Power (W)
3.3V ESTAR
2/4/7
3.32.5%, 300mv at
2MHz
7/13/23
+ 17VDC
0.55/2.7/3.4
N/A, source from+24 V

supply, 500mV at 2MHz
BW
13/63/80
+5 VDC
0.25/3.9/6
5.15 2%, 300mv at

2MHz
1/20/30
Channel and Function
Average RMS Current @

Heater Ohms Wattage 115VAC
Ink Melt Color 1
92
109 W
1.1 A
Ink Melt Color 2
92
109 W
1.1 A
Ink Melt Color 3
92
109 W
1.1 A
Ink Melt Color 4
92
109 W
1.1 A
Pre-Heater 1
53
250 W
2.17 A
Pre-Heater 2
53
250 W
2.17 A
+12VDC
0.2/6/10
12 5%, 300mv at 2MHz 2/72/120
-12VDC
0.1/0.5/1
-12 5%, 300mv at

2MHz
1/6/12
+24VDC
0.55/7.7/13
+24.5 5%, 300mv at

2MHz
13/190/320
+50VDC
0.2/3.5/6 peak for

30ms, all at 0.6hz
rate
+50 2%, 500mv at

2MHz
10/175/300
-50VDC
0.0/1.5/3
-50 2%, 500mv at

2MHz
0/175/150
Drum 1
22/88
600 W
5.2 / 2.6 A
Drum 2
22/88
600 W
5.2 / 2.6 A
NOTE: Drum channels have relays to put two heaters in parallel or series depending upon AC
input line voltage 115/230VAC.
AC Output Load Control
The eight heater channels are controlled by a serial data link isolated from the secondary. Each
channels output Triac has an associated relay used to disable the channel when the power
switch is opened or when the Heater2_ON signal is not present. The Heater2_ON signal is a
3.3V TTL signal. The serial data link reports line voltage and current back to the IME.
Printhead Heater Control
The Common Heater Relay Enable signal controls the Printhead heaters. In the event of a
thermistor short or thermal runaway, the relay disconnects the printhead heaters by disabling
the power to the marking unit heater board. This relay is driven by the 3.3V TTL signal, Common Heater Relay. This relay is intended to disconnect the heaters in case of a shorted triac
and thermal run-away of heaters.
The power supply includes thermal protection that shuts down the power supply if the temperature exceeds the set point. If the set point is reached and thermal protection activated, cycle
the power switch to reset the power supply.
DC Interlock
An interlock is present in the power supply to protect the Quad Wave Amp. The 50V outputs
are disabled any time the +24V, 12V, and +5V outputs are disabled.
Over Voltage and Over Current Protection
Drum Heater Selection

The high-level on the Drum 115-1 signal activates the drum heaters in parallel. A high-level on
the Drum 230-1 puts the drum heaters in series. These relays are controlled by a 3.3V TTL signal.
Drum Drive Motor Inverter
The 3-phase drum drive motor inverter is implemented in the AC section. This output uses the
400V DC link from the power factor connector as its power source. The inverter phase current
is 3A, with a maximum phase current of 5A. The inverter is controlled by three phase signals
and an enable signal that are optically coupled from the secondary. The power supply also
sends a motor phase current sense signal back to the IOT. The required combination of signals
is computed by the IOT according to drum drive motor position and current. Refer to WD 1.3.
Thermal Protection
During over-voltage or current limit conditions of the 3.3V ESTAR or 17V supplies, the power
supply shuts off and requires a cycling of the AC power switch to restart. If an over current or
over voltage occurs on +24V, 12V, or 5V, these outputs will be disabled in addition to the 50V
outputs. If an over current on 50V occurs, only these outputs will be disabled. The shutdowns
will be indicated by faults 01-525-00 through 01-546-00. Table 4 lists the voltage and current
limits.
Table 4 Over voltage and current limits
DC Voltage
Shutdown Voltage
Shutdown Current
+3.3 V
+ 4.5 V
12 A
+5V
+ 6.2 V
9A
+ 12 V
+ 16 V
16 A
-12 V
-16 V
February 2013
8-15
Table 4 Over voltage and current limits
Table 5 Power supply information
DC Voltage
Shutdown Voltage
Shutdown Current
Signal Name
Description
+17 V
N/A, limited by 3V3/24V

OVP
4A
Inverter Phase V Control
As phase U, but controls the phase V half-bridge of the drum

motor inverter.
+24 V
+30 V
16 A
Inverter Phase W Control
+50 V
+54 V
12 A for 1 second max, and 20 A for 200ms max
As phase U, but controls the phase W half-bridge of the

drum motor inverter.
-50 V
-54 V
6A
Drum Motor CS+
A differential current is output between this signal and drum

Motor CS-. This current is proportional to drum motor phase
at a ratio of 1:100.
Drum Motor CS-
As CS+
24V Active
A 3.3V TTL-compatible high-level signal is output to indicate

that the +24V, 12V, and 5V outputs are active. A low-level
signal indicates these outputs are disabled (due to 24V
Enable in low state, over voltage or over current on the
+24V, 12V, or +5V outputs).
50V Active
A 3.3V TTL-compatible high-level signal is output to indicate

the 50V outputs are active. A low-level signal indicates these
outputs are disabled (due to 50V Enable in low state, 24V
Enable in low state, over voltage or over current on the 50V,
+24V, 12V, or +5V outputs).
Power Fail
Common Heater Relay Enable A 3.3V high level activates the relays to connect the marking
unit (J4AC) heaters to neutral and line It also activates the
relays controlled by the Heater2 On signal. A low level disconnects both neutral and line. This signal disconnects the
power to the marking unit, in case of thermal run-away.
A 3.3V TTL-compatible low-level signal is output from the

power supply to indicate that a limited amount of time
remains before loss of 3.3V ESTAR and 17V regulation,
based on the DC link voltage. An open state indicates that
supply operation should continue indefinitely.
24V Enable
A 3.3V TTL low-level signal low-level signal disables 50V,

+24V, 12V, and +5V outputs. A high level enables the +24V,
12V, and +5V outputs.
Heater2 On
A 3.3V TTL high level activates the relays to connect the AC

Outputs (other than to J4AC) to Line. A low level deactivates
these relays.
50V Enable
A 3.3V TTL low-level signal disables 50V outputs. A high

level enables these outputs.
Analog Power Gauge 50
130kHz Clock
A 3.3V TTL 130kHz clock signal is input to the power supply.

This signal must be low or clocked. It cannot be held high for
any period of time.
Data In
A 3.3V 130kHz data signal is input to the power supply. this

signal directly drives an opto coupler in the power supply, so
it will not be at TTL levels. This signal carries heater request
data to the power supply.
This analog output indicates the 50V output power at

approximately 400 watts/volt, 5%, with a source impedance
of 20 k ohms. The power supply outputs at least 2.2V when
output is within 5% of shutdown (this signals the printer to
reduce power consumption to prevent shutdown).
Analog Power Gauge 24
This analog output indicates the +24V, 12V, and 5V output

power at approximately 400 watts/volt, 5%, with a source
impedance of 20 K ohms. The power supply outputs at least
2.2V when the power output is within 5% of shutdown (this
signals the printer to reduce power consumption to prevent
shutdown).
3V3 Remote Volt Sense
This analog input is connected to the IME Controller Board

to remotely sense 3.3V ESTAR voltage. The power supply
operates with an open sense line.
3V3 Remote Ground Sense
This analog input is connected to the IME Controller Board

to remotely sense ground. The power supply operates with
an open sense line.
Control Signal Descriptions

Each power supply control signals is defined in Table 5
Signal Name
Description
115V Drum Relay Enable
A 3.3V high level activates the drum heater relays for parallel operation. A low level disconnects the drum heater connections.
230V Drum Relay Enable
A 3.3V high level activates the drum heater relays for series
operation. A low level disconnects the drum heater connections.
Finisher Relay Enable
A 3.3V high level activates the relay to connect the finisher

output to neutral and line. A low level disconnects both neutral and line.
Data Out
A 3.3V TTL signal is output from the power supply. This signal is transmitted via an optically isolated data path from the
power supply triac PLD. This signal contains zero cross timing, line current, and line voltage information.
Drum Motor Inverter Enable
A 3.3V TTL high level signal is input to enable the drum

motor inverter. A low level disables the inverter by opening
all inverter transistors. This signal is optically isolated from
the drum motor inverter.
Inverter Phase U Control
A 3.3V TTL signal is input to control the inverter phase U

half-bridge. This signal is optically isolated.
February 2013
8-16
Ink Entry Board
Signal Name
Description
Fan Enable
A 3.3V high-level signal enables the power supply fan. A low

level signal disables the fan.
Circuit Board Descriptions

Refer to Section 7 of the service manual for wiring diagrams for the boards listed below.
Located on the ink loader, the ink entry board connects the Ink Loader and its functions to the
IME Controller Board through the media path driver board.
The ink entry board receives analog input from the ink thermistors and the ink entry, ink stick
low, and ink SKU sensors. This board also drives the ink SKU motor, ink drive motor, and processes input from the ink drive motor encoder. The thermistor data is input to four A/D converters. Sensor data from the ink stick level sensors, ink drive motor encoder, and the digitized
thermistor data is transmitted from the ink entry board to the media path driver board through a
serial interface. Ink drive motor control data is received from the media path driver board.
IME Controller Board
Drum Driver Board
The IME controller generates and sends control information to the printhead driver, drum
driver, media path driver, marking unit driver boards, and the wave amplifiers. It also receives
and processes image data and control signals sent from the system controller board specific
connector information including specific signal names, quantities, supply voltages being sent
across the interfaces, and pinouts are contained in Section 7.
The drum driver board is located behind the marking engine on the right, inboard side of the
IME. The circuit board's primary function is to provide the interface for the drum drive motor,
power supply, drive the transfix motors, digitize video from the IOD and registration / preheater
scan bars. Other functions include driving the stripper solenoid, fans, cleaning unit, and monitoring several sensors.
Thermal Cutout Board
The single board controller consists of two sections:
Fuses on the thermal cutout board protect the drum from overheating.
Copy and process controller
Network controller.
Figure 1, illustrates the location of the thermal cutout board mounted on the registration / preheat assembly.
The copy and process control circuitry comprises a dedicated processor, complete with hard
disk drive, whose main function is to provide overall control, (inter-device communications),
and to handle the flow of data to and from the following modules and devices:
Scanner
DADH
Control panel
IME
Foreign device interface
Power supply and distribution
This is the equivalent of a combination of the main controller PWB and the SIP, (Scanned
Image Processor), in previous machines.
The network controller provides control of the communications data entering and leaving the
machine via the following:
Ethernet 10/100/1000 port, using a standard, RJ-45 connection,
USB 2.0 ports, using standard, 4-pin connections,
Serial port, using a standard, DB-9 connection.
Media Path Driver Board

The Media Path Driver board (MPD) contains circuitry that performs the following functions:
Drives various motors and contains associated circuitry,
Drives various solenoids and contains associated circuitry,
Reads various sensors, thermistors etc.
Communications link interface for IMD, PFP, OCT, LCSS, HVF, 3TM, and SBC.
Marking Unit Heater Board

The marking unit heater board controls the four AC printhead heaters, AC heaters for the ink
reservoir, and the ink umbilical heaters.
Figure 1 Thermal cutout board
February 2013
8-17
Solenoid Patch PWB
Vertical Transport Motor
The solenoid patch PWB is located on the ink reservoir assembly and connects the ink reservoir solenoid valves, purge solenoid valve, reservoir pump and ink reservoir level sensors and
their functions to the marking unit driver PWB.
The vertical transport uses a series of rollers, a belt, and a single motor to move media from
the 3TM and PFP to the horizontal transport:
Motors
Vertical transport motor (M2) and encoder, MOT82-001. Refer to WD 8.1 Media Path
Driver PWB.
Horizontal Transport Motor

The registration / preheat assembly contains two stepper motors that drive the rollers to transport and align the media in the path:
The horizontal transport uses a series of rollers, a belt, and a single motor to move media from
the vertical transport to the registration / preheat Assembly:
Horizontal transport motor (M6), MOT82-003. Refer to WD 8.5 Media Path Driver PWB.
Registration motor A1 (M3), MOT89-007. Refer to WD 8.1 Media Path Driver PWB,
Post Transfix Transport Motor
Registration motor A2 (M3), MOT89-008. Refer to WD 8.1 Media Path Driver PWB.
The post transfix transport assembly uses a series of gears and a single motor to deliver the
printed sheet from the drum to the output transport:
Figure 2 shows the location of the registration motors.
Post transfix transport Motor (M4), MOT10-018. Refer to WD 8.2 Media Path Driver PWB.
Exit Motor
The exit module uses a single motor, multiple rollers pairs, and a gate to move media to either
the IME exit or back into the Horizontal Transport for duplex prints:
Exit motor (M5), MOT83-001. Refer to WD 8.2 Media Path Driver PWB.
Bypass Feed Motor

The bypass tray uses a single motor and multiple rollers, to move media to the vertical transport:
Bypass feed motor (M7), MOT74-420. Refer to WD 8.3 Media Path Driver PWB.
Carriage Motors
The marking unit uses multiple carriage motors to move the printheads along the X-Axis:
X Axis drive motor upper, MOT91-033. Refer to WD 9.9 Marking Unit Driver PWB.
X Axis drive motor lower, MOT91-034. Refer to WD 9.11 Marking Unit Driver PWB.
Drum Drive Motor

The drum drive motor rotates the drum using a belt and pulley system. The drum drive motor
receives power directly from the power supply at PJ6AC:
Drum motor, MOT94-009. Refer to WD 1.1 Power Supply Unit.
Cleaning Unit Motor

The cleaning unit motor drives the cleaning unit using a series of gears.
IOD Shuttle Motor

The IOD shuttle motor drives the IOD sensor in the cross-process direction to scan the drum:
IOD shuttle motor, MOT91-043. Refer to WD 9.22 IOD Pre Amp PWB.
Front and Rear Transfix Motors

The transfix motors drive the transfix flexure linkage through a system of gears:
Figure 2 Registration motors
Reg/preheat air pump, MOT88-008. Refer to WD 8.6 Reg/Preheat IF PWB and W/TAG
018 Registration Preheat Air Pump Removal.
Front transfix motor, MOT10-019. Refer to WD 9.1 Drum Driver PWB
Rear transfix motor, MOT10-020. Refer to WD 9.1 Drum Driver PWB
Ink Transport Motor
Two Air Pumps generate pressure to keep the media from contacting the heater plates:
The ink transport motor drives a series of belts to transport ink sticks through the ink loader to
the ink melt heaters:
Ink transport motor, MOT93-048. Refer to WD 8.4 Media Path Driver PWB.
February 2013
8-18
Ink Key Plate Motor
Duplex Solenoid
The ink key plate motor positions the key plate to allow insertion of the correct ink stick type
(SKU) based on product information stored in NVRAM.
The electrical characteristics of the duplex solenoid are listed in Table 10.
Table 10 Duplex Solenoid
Ink key plate motor, MOT93-051. Refer to WD 8.4 Media Path Driver PWB.
Solenoids
Parameter
Solenoids activate gates and engage rollers. Refer to GP 29 Component Locations.
Terminal Voltage
Min
Maximum
48 V
Continuous Current
C Nip Release Solenoid
Typical
1.2 A
Transient Current
2A
3A
The electrical characteristics of the c nip release solenoid are listed in Table 6.
Bypass Tray Nudge Solenoid
Table 6 C Nip Release Solenoid

Parameter
Min
Typical
Terminal Voltage
Maximum
The electrical characteristics of the bypass tray nudge solenoid are listed in Table 11.
48 V
Continuous Current
260 mA
Transient Current
1A
2A
D Nip Release Solenoid
Table 11 Bypass Tray Nudge Solenoid

Parameter
Min
Typical
Maximum
Terminal Voltage
24 V
Continuous Current
.7 A
Transient Current
1.4 A
The electrical characteristics of the d release solenoid are listed in Table 7.

Thermal Lock Solenoid
Table 7 D Nip Release Solenoid

Parameter
Min
Typical
Terminal Voltage
Maximum
The electrical characteristics of the thermal lock solenoid are listed in Table 12.
48 V
Continuous Current
260 mA
Transient Current
1A
2A
HPP Diverter Solenoid
Table 12 Thermal Lock Solenoid

Parameter
Min
Typical
Maximum
Terminal Voltage
24 V
Continuous Current
.75 A
Transient Current
1.5 A
The electrical characteristics of the hpp diverter solenoid are listed in Table 8.
Table 8 HPP diverter Solenoid
Parameter
Min
Typical
Terminal Voltage
Maximum
48 V
Continuous Current
260 mA
Transient Current
1A
2A
Car Diverter Solenoid

The electrical characteristics of the car diverter solenoid are listed in Table 9.
Table 9 Car Diverter Solenoid
Parameter
Min
Typical
Terminal Voltage
Continuous Current
Transient Current
Maximum
48 V
1A
2A
3A
February 2013
8-19
Fans
Airflow through the chassis is indicated in Figure 4.
Several Fans are used to cool system components and evacuate particulates.
Drum Fan
Abatement Fan
Top Enclosure Fans
Bottom Enclosure Fan
Marking Unit Fan
Power Supply Fan Figure 3.
Figure 4 Chassis airflow
Figure 3 IME Fan Locations
February 2013
8-20
System Communications
Power On Self Test (POST)
Communications
The ColorQube Power On Self Test (POST) checks the following:
This section describes the system-wide Low-voltage differential signaling (LVDS) serial communications links.
Communication between the main IME PWBs including:
LVDS Serial Data / Control
IME controller PWB, PL 92.10 Item 1
The serial I/O bus provides communication between the IME controller board, drum driver
board, marking unit driver board, media path driver board, individual printhead driver boards,
and system controller boards. Each of these interfaces implements one dedicated serial path.
The serial bus is comprised of differential clock, differential receive, and differential transmit
pairs. These are generically called clk/clk*, rx/rx*, and tx/tx*. It should be noted that each interface signal group may differ slightly; for instance, the system controller has only a transmit path
to the IME Controller.
The system controller communicates control information to each of the above interfaces over
the serial bus, and also accepts return data. This information is organized in data frames. Each
frame contains 64 time slots, one serial clock in duration each and beginning with frame signal
encoded throughout the frame set. The LVDS switching levels are centered around +1.25V,
with each side of the differential pair switching between +1.1V and +1.4V.
In the LVDS scheme, the logic state of the transmitted bit is represented by the difference
between Vout+ and Vout-, with a 1 represented by a positive difference (greater than +100mV)
of the two, and a 0 represented by a negative difference (greater than -100mV) of the two. This
scheme has the advantage of common-mode noise rejection, since such noise will be filtered
out by the signal differential.
Image Data
The objective of this interface is to provide a high bandwidth path to transfer images to the IME
in the format and at the time required. Image data is sent by a four channel LVDS interface.
Three of the channels transfer 6 bits per clock cycle. The fourth channel is a 33.3 MHz clock.
The start of serial frame is indicated by the rising edge of the clock. The receiver must create a
6x clock (200MHz) from the LVDS clock to clock in the six data bits on each channel. They are
then combined to form an 18 bit serial frame.
Since the image data is post processed on the IME controller board, it does not need to be
transmitted in sync with marking unit activity. Rather, an entire image is transmitted at approximately four times the average data bandwidth to minimize the transfer latency to improve
FCOT/FPOT. The entire interface is unidirectional (output from SBC, input to IME). Any status
and setup information is communicated over the command interface.
High Speed Communications
The communications link between the IME controller board and the media path driver (MPD)
board is a standard ColorQube fast link. Originally for LP1 this link was based on a 66.3 MHz
clock. Data frames of 1s were sent between the IME controller and the MPD. Each data frame
contained 64 slots of data. These data frames contained drive signals, sensor signals etc. to
and from the MPD.
The system memory and NVRAM.
Compatible software and firmware versions are installed.
Power supply to the main IME components.
The POST runs automatically as part of the machine power-on sequence and is performed
before higher level machine functions, such as the user interface (UI), are operational. The
POST can therefore be used to diagnose faults on a machine with an unresponsive UI which
prevents access to the fault lists and service messages.
The POST results are displayed using the LEDs on the front of the IME controller PWB, the
media path driver PWB and the single board controller PWB. Refer to OF 16 POST Error RAP
for details of the LED locations.
LEDs on the IME controller PWB:
ENG OK (green, DS302) - Displays IME firmware status.
ENG error (red, DS301) - Displays IME firmware error blink codes, the first digit is 3 or 4.
Cable error (red, DS604) - Displays status of major cables in the IME and of the -12V
needed for the printhead PWBs.
CPU error (red, DS605) - Displays IME operating system status and error blink codes, the
first digit is 2.
LEDs on the media path driver PWB:
IME OK (green, DS801) - Displays IME firmware status.
IME error (red, DS802) - Displays IME firmware error blink codes.
If a loss of communication to the media path driver PWB occurs, only the IME controller PWB
LEDs displays POST results.
The 7-segment LED display unit on the rear of the machine attached to the single board controller PWB. The LED display should show just a pulsing decimal point when the machine
boots correctly. The main codes are displayed for short periods of time during power up
depending on how long each test takes. If any code is left displayed during power up and the
machine appears not to have powered on correctly then this should point to the problem component.
Refer to OF 16 POST Error RAP for information on interpreting the POST error codes.
Low Speed Communications

For satellite boards of the MPD, and various peripherals, a slower link of 1.036 MHz is used.
Devices on the slow link decode their data on the positive edge of the 1.036MHz clock. Data is
transferred to the media path driver on the positive edge of the 1.036MHz clock. The actual
decoding of data received occurs on IME controller board.
February 2013
8-21
Print Engine Self Test (PEST)
Sensor Types and Function
The ColorQube Print Engine Self Test (PEST), which runs automatically as part of the image
marking engine (IME) boot-up sequence, detects basic electrical wiring or electro-mechanical
faults in the IME. The PEST raises error codes to identify the IME component where the fault
has occurred.
The system contains sensors of various types that perform a variety of functions. One group of
sensors track the progress of the media along the media path, and detects if a jam occurs.
Other sensors detect the presence of the Ink Sticks, stop system activity if a door is open
(interlock), detect the presence and size of media, and monitor system temperatures.
The PEST activates each of the primary components in the IME and monitors the power consumed during the test along with any associated sensor or feedback signals. The test induces
only limited component motion, does not feed any media through the IME and cannot test sensors activated by media or door and cover interlocks. Media sensor and door interlock errors or
more advanced calibrations and mechanical defects are detected by the IMEs run-time firmware. An advantage of the PEST over run-time error detection is the PESTs ability to test individual components in isolation, allowing more accurate pin-pointing of the fault location. PEST
can also detect partially damaged components that might pass run-time component control
tests.
Sensor Types
Both hard and soft faults can be detected by the PEST:
Hard errors indicate that a fault has occurred in a component critical to marking functionality and/or damage could occur to the machine if it continues to operate with the fault
present. Hard errors prevent the IME from booting and are viewable via the user interface
(UI) fault list or by entering dC123 PEST Fault History.
Soft errors indicate that a fault has occurred in a non-critical component of the IME or that
the component may still retain some level of functionality. Soft errors do not prevent the
machine from booting, allowing the machine to continue being used at a reduced level of
functionality instead of keeping the IME shutdown until attended by the CSE. Soft PEST
fault codes are only viewable by entering dC123 PEST Fault History.
The types of sensors used vary with function. In general, there are several types in use:
Photo Sensors
Microswitches
Hall Effect Sensors
Temperature Sensors
Scan Bars
Two types of photo sensors are used, photo-reflective and photo-receptive. Photo-reflective
sensors use light reflected back from an object to detect its presence. Photo-receptive sensors
use an actuator or the object itself to block the light path to detect an object or condition. Photoreflective sensors have the light emitter and light receiver aligned on a single surface. Output
of the photo-receptor is High when light is being reflected back and Low when it isnt. Photoreceptive sensors consist of a LED in one arm of a U-shaped holder, and a photo-transistor in
the other arm. When the sensing area is vacant, nothing is between the arms of the sensor,
light falls on the photo-receptor sending a high signal. If the light is interrupted, the photo-transistor goes low.
Microswitches are used primarily as paper size sensors and cover interlocks. They are in a
normally open state, and close when actuated. A bank of microswitches is used to detect paper
size in the universal trays. Microswitches also employ hooks or catches for retention in the
bracket or frame.
Hall effect sensors are used to detect the presence of the waste tray, the status of the ink
loader door and to detect the drum motor position.
Temperature sensors (thermistors) have a known value of resistance whose value varies with
temperature. Used primarily in the preheater, drum, ink melt heaters, ink reservoir, and printheads for temperature sensing.
The IOD sensor and registration / preheat assembly scan bar outputs are digitized with a high
speed ADC. The ADC is implemented with a 10-bit CCD image digitizer. The IOD scan bar
connects to the drum driver circuit board with a 28-pin connector. The registration / preheat
assembly scan bar connects to the drum driver circuit board with an 11-pin connector.
IME Sensors
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 IME Sensor Functions
Sensor
Function
Type
Output
IOD Scanbar
Scan images on the Drum
Optical
Analog
Registration Scan Bar

(#10)
Detect media edge
Optical
Analog
February 2013
8-22
Sensor
Function
Type
Output
Sensor
Function
Type
Output
Provide Drum position
Hall
Analog
T3 Stack Height Sensor
Media Stack Height in Tray 3
Optical
Digital
Rear Drum Thermistor
Provide temperature data
Thermistor Analog
Tray 1 Empty Sensor
No Media in Tray 1
Optical
Digital
Front Drum Thermistor
Thermistor Analog
Tray 2 Empty Sensor
No Media in Tray 2
Optical
Digital
Drum Motor Hall Encoder
Provide differential phase information
Magnetic
Tray 3 Empty Sensor
No Media in Tray 3
Optical
Digital
Drum Motor Temperature
Thermistor Analog
Tray 1 Media Size Switch
Tray 1 Media size (5 switches) Open/Close Mechanical Digital
Drum Home
Provide Drum position
Optical
Digital
Tray 2 Media Size Switch
Tray 2 Media size (5 switches) Open/Close Mechanical Digital
Cleaning Unit Motor

Encoder
Cleaning unit motor position
Optical
Digital
Tray 3 Home Sensor
Tray 3 Open/Close
Optical
Digital
Media stuck in Vertical Transport
Optical
Digital
Cleaning Unit Home Sensor
Cleaning unit position
Optical
Digital
Vertical Transport Sensor

(#5)
Confirm Sensor (#16)
Media at top of Vertical Transport
Optical
Digital
Front Transfix Motor

Encoder
Front Transfix Motor shaft position
Optical
Digital
Duplex End Sensor (#14)
Media edge at start of Horizontal Transport Optical
Digital
Duplex Sensor (#17)
Media edge at Upper Duplex Gate
Optical
Digital
Rear Transfix Motor

Encoder
Rear Transfix Motor shaft position
Duplex Start Sensor (#13) Media past Lower Duplex Gate
Optical
Digital
Front Transfix Flexure

Encoder
Front Transfix Linkage motion
Pre-transfix Sensor (#20)
Media exiting Registration / Preheat Assy
Optical
Digital
Exit Sensor (#15)
Media past Exit Module
Optical
Digital
Front Door status
Mechanical Analog
Rear Transfix Flexure

Encoder
Rear Transfix Linkage motion
Optical
Optical
Analog
Digital
Analog
Optical
Analog
Upper door interlock
Upper door status
Mechanical Analog
Post Transfix Sensor (#11) Media exiting transfix and stripper blade
Optical
Digital
Mid door interlock
Mid door status
Mechanical Analog
Pre-exit Sensor (#12)
Media at Stripper Gate
Optical
Digital
Lower door interlock
Lower door status
Mechanical Analog
Stripper Latch Sensor
Stripper latch position
Optical
Digital
Inkload Door Switch
Inkload Door status
Magnetic
Bypass Width Sensor
Bypass media width detection
Resistive
Analog
Waste Tray Sensor
Waste Tray / MU Drawer position
Mechanical Digital
Bypass empty sensor
Bypass tray empty
Optical
Digital
Preheater
Registration / Preheat temperature data
Thermistor Analog
Bypass Feed Sensor (#7)
Media fed from bypass tray to vertical

transport
Optical
Digital
Ink Load Low Sensor
Ink Stick level in Ink Loader (1 board)
Optical
Digital
Ink Load Sensor
Ink Stick level full in Ink Loader
Optical
Digital
Digital
Digital
Tray 5 feed sensor (#6)
Media fed from Tray 5 to vertical transport Optical
Digital
Ink key plate Position
Ink Stick Type (3 sensors)
Optical
Tray 5 Empty
No media in Tray 5
Optical
Digital
Ink Melt Temperature
Provide ink melt heat temperature data
Thermistor Analog
Tray 5 Docking
Tray 5 docking status
Optical
Digital
Optical
Digital
Tray at upper limit, feed position
Optical
Digital
Upper Carriage Home

Sensor
Provide Upper Carriage position
Tray 5 Stack-up
Tray 5 Stack-down
Tray at lower limit of travel
Optical
Digital
Optical
Digital
Status of Tray 5 door
Optical
Digital
Lower Carriage Home

Sensor
Provide Lower Carriage position
Tray 5 Door Switch

TAR 1 Sensor
Media past Tray 1 take away rollers
Optical
Digital
Head Maintenance Home
Provide head maintenance Wiper position Optical
Digital
Ink Reservoir Thermistor
Provide Ink Reservoir temperature data
Thermistor Analog
Cleaning unit Home Sensor
Provide cleaning unit Camshaft position
Optical
TAR 2 Sensor
Media past Tray 2 take away rollers
Optical
Digital
T1 Feed Sensor
Media fed from Tray 1 of 3TM
Optical
Digital
T2 Feed Sensor
Optical
Digital
T3 Feed Sensor (#1)
Optical
Digital
TAR 3 sensor
Media in 3TM in horizontal path
Optical
Digital
Tray 3 Transport Sensor

(#2)
Media stuck in 3TM horizontal path
Optical
Digital
3TM Horizontal Home
Position of the 3TM horizontal path
Optical
Digital
Optical
Digital
Optical
Digital
Digital
Sensors in the Media Path

The movement of media through the media path is monitored by a number of sensors. Figure
1.
February 2013
8-23
Figure 1 Sensors in the media path
February 2013
8-24
Interlock Switches
Print Process
Interlock switches are safety switches positioned on the main access doors of the machine.
When the access doors are opened the interlock switches interrupt power to the machines
components ensuring that no moving parts that might cause injury are operational. Figure 2
shows the locations of the main system interlock switches.
Once an image is processed, the print cycle begins. The printheads and drum are brought to
their operating temperatures and the ink levels are checked.
DADH Cover Interlock
In the ready state, the print process consists of the following steps:
Image Processing
Ink Delivery
Printhead Alignment
Drum Oiling
Printing
Registration and Preheat
Image Marking
Transfix/Strip
Purge System
Duplex and Exit
Ink Delivery
Upper Door Inter- Mid Door Interlock

lock
Lower Door Interlock
The ink delivery system is comprised of four subsystems: ink loader, ink melt heaters, melt reservoir and umbilicals. The system interacts directly with the customer at one end and with the
printheads at the other. The ink loader receives the ink from the customer and transports it to
the ink melter. The ink moves towards the melter via belt drive and gravity as it transitions from
the horizontal plane to the vertical. One melt plate per color, a total of four, acts to change the
ink from solid to liquid. The ink is forced on to the melt plate by gravity. The melt plates are
positioned at an angle to the horizontal and are shaped as to promote the liquid ink to flow off
of the plate and into the melt reservoir. The purpose of the melt reservoir is to route the ink
from four inputs to sixteen outputs, four colors to each of the four printheads. The melt reservoir provides a means of transporting the ink from the phase-change location to the printhead.
Air pressure is used to route the ink through the melt reservoir and into the umbilical on its way
to the printhead. The umbilical attaches to the melt reservoir at one end and the printhead at
the other. There are two umbilicals, each provides ink to two print heads. Figure 1
Figure 2 Main system interlock switches.
February 2013
8-25
Figure 2 Ink stick shapes
Figure 1 Ink Flow

Ink Sticks
Ink Melt Heaters
Ink sticks are loaded into the IME through an access door near the control panel. The ink sticks
pass through the ink loader key plate as they drop into the ink loader. The shapes of the ink
sticks are keyed to prevent an incorrect stick from being loaded. There are four sets of ink stick
shapes; NA, EU, metered, and DMO sold. Each Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) set is unique to the
market segment. Figure 2 shows the various ink stick shapes.
Ink sticks are delivered by the ink loader and held against the ink melt plates by gravity. The
system contains four melt heater / plate assemblies, one for each ink stick colour (cyan,
magenta, yellow and black). The ink melt plate is heated using a ceramic Positive Thermal
Coefficient (PTC) disk as a safety measure in the ink melt system; as the temperature of the
melt plate rises, the electrical resistance increases reducing the electrical current drawn by the
heater. When the melt heater reaches the correct temperature the end of the ink stick contacting the plate melts and the liquid ink runs into the low pressure ink reservoir below.
Each SKU family consists of 4 colors, resulting in a total of 16 unique ink stick shapes. In all
cases, features unique to each color of ink prevent insertion into the wrong color key plate
opening. The ink loader uses an adaptable key plate, mechanically actuated by software to
adjust the key plate opening to accept the appropriate SKU version. The adaptable key plate
allows insertion of NA/EU and DMO sticks into a metered printer, but does not allow any other
cross-SKU insertions.
Ink Reservoir
The function of the ink reservoir is to:
Receive melted ink from the Ink melt heaters
Maintain liquefied ink at the set point temperature
Deliver liquefied ink to the Umbilicals
February 2013
8-26
Figure 3 shows the ink reservoir attached to the inboard side of the marking unit.
Figure 4 Ink reservoir components

Figure 3 Ink reservoir and umbilicals
Umbilicals
The Ink reservoir requires AC and DC connections. Drive signals for the air solenoids come
from the Marking Unit Driver Board via PJ480 and PJ130. AC for the umbilicals and reservoir
heaters comes from the Marking Unit Heater Board. Figure 4
The umbilical provides a flexible, heated distribution conduit between the melt reservoir and
printhead reservoirs. A total of 16 ink conduits and 4 air purge conduits are used to feed the
four printheads. Snapped to the melt reservoir end of the umbilical is a check valve unit, (CVU).
A gasket is placed between the CVU and the umbilical. During installations of the umbilical, a
gasket is placed between the CVU and the melt reservoir.
The Umbilicals are manufactured from a flexible, silicon-based material and contain eight
heated ink tubes to maintain the ink in a liquid state as it travels from the reservoir to the printheads. Each umbilical attaches to one of the carriages. Each carriage contains two printheads.
The upper carriage contains printheads 2 and 4, the lower carriage contains printheads 1 and
3. Figure 5
February 2013
8-27
Printheads
The printheads apply the image to the drum, Figure 6.
Figure 6 Printhead components

Stitch Motion
Figure 7
Figure 5 Umbilical components

The CVU contains valves which will allow ink to flow toward the printhead but not back toward
the reservoir. This valve is primarily used by the system during an air purge of the printheads
without a CVU, ink would be forced back into the air router and replacement of the reservoir
and umbilical assembly would be necessary.
NOTE: For the CVU to work properly it must be 'primed' with ink prior to a purge. Failure to
'prime' the CVU will likely lead to a replacement of the ink reservoir when ink and air are forced
back into the reservoir and air router during a purge routine.
Printhead Alignment
The Ink On Drum (IOD) detection system collects data used for printhead interlacing alignment, missing jet detection, jet substitution and to check for the presence of stray pixels left
behind on the drum after transfix. The latter is required to ensure good image quality and also
to prevent the build up of residual ink on the drum, which could eventually damage the printheads.
Figure 7 Stitch motor motion

February 2013
8-28
Roll Motion
Cleaning Cycle Error Handling
Figure 8
Error handling for a preheater cleaning cycle requires cooling down the preheater to 65
degrees Centigrade, and then handling the error before returning the system to the standby
state.
Possible errors that can occur during preheater cleaning cycle are:
Resource not available - media tray empty.
Paper jams - Any occurrence that prevents the machine from printing a blank sheet and
passing it through the paper path.
During any jam, if the MediaSeq catches it, then it will raise the fault to EngMgr for action. EngMgr will first cool down the preheater to CoolTemp, scrub the pre heater cleaning service,
recover from the jam and clear the DevFault flags (both preheater clean flag and jam flag). Pre
heater clean command's status is reported as failure to SC while scrubbing the service. In this
case, the system enters into recovery mode for first cooling down the pre heater to CoolTemp
degree C and then to recover from the paper not available, jam faults. After recovering the system goes into the standby state.
When the printer is not in a printable state for printing blank sheets (which clean and cool the
preheater), the preheater clean service handles the cooling of preheater by simply waiting until
the temperature drops. Then the service reports the failure status to SC. In this case the cooling down is handled by preheater clean service, so the system goes into standby state directly
if any other subsystems hasn't raised any faults to EngMgr.
Dust Abatement
Figure 8 Roll motor motion
Printhead Maintenance
To clear jets that have been identified by the IOD system as being partially or completely
blocked by waste ink or paper debris, the printheads are purged by forcing air at a pressure of
4psi through the jets. The function of the printhead maintenance assembly is to wipe the printheads after the purge to remove waste ink and debris. The wiper moves within a wiper track
that guides the vertical motion of the wiper parallel to the printhead face during the jetstack
wipe. The wiper carriage wipes two heads at a time, either both upper heads or both lower
heads. The lower part of the printhead face is shaped so that any excess ink will be directed
into the waste tray below, Figure 6.

Cleaning Cycle
Duplex printing leaves ink residues on the preheater plates in the registration / preheater
assembly. A preheater cleaning cycle removes ink residues from the preheater plates.
The purpose of the abatement system, Figure 9, is to minimize the contamination found in the
vicinity of the printheads. This debris can cause print quality problems and printhead failures by
partially or completely blocking the ink jets. Reducing the amount of contamination in this area
improves printhead reliability. The abatement system is active during printing (off in Standby or
Sleep modes).
A small vacuum plenum is mounted in close proximity to the drum. The output port of the plenum is connected to duct and a blower creates the required vacuum. The vacuum created
removes particles and fibers from the surface of the drum and airborne contamination that
might make its way to the face of the printhead.
Additionally, the abatement system provides a small cooling effect on the drum when it is
actively pulling air. This cooling is slightly beneficial during drum over-temperature conditions.
Power for the blower is supplied from the Media Path Driver Board. The blower fan operates at
12VDC. Air is exhausted out the back of the chassis.
Preheater cleaning involves three steps:

1.
Heat the preheater plates. The air pump is turned off and preheater plate's temperature is
raised to 85 degrees Centigrade.
2.
Clean the preheater plates. Sheets are run through the assembly in simplex mode. Media
is alternately shifted off center to maximize the cleaning area.
3.
Cool the pre heater plates. The air pump is turned on and sheets are run though the
assembly in duplex mode until the set point of 65 C is reached.
February 2013
8-29
Drum
Blade
Figure 9 Dust abatement system

Oil Roller
Service Access
Drum Maintenance
Camshaft
The abatement plenum is located directly below the drum between the IOD and the cleaning
unit. It is removed by removing the cleaning unit, then pull the cleaning unit handle while pulling
the abatement plenum to the right.
Drum Imaging
Figure 10 Drum Oiling
Drum Oiling
Figure 10. To prepare the Drum to receive an image, a thin coating of silicone oil is applied to
the Drum surface. To oil the Drum, the Drum is rotated by the Drum Motor. The drum maintenance camshaft is rotated. Cams on each end of the drum maintenance camshaft contact followers on the oil roller and blade forcing both against the drum. The blade followers,
independent of the oil roller followers, use small springs to regulate the pressure being applied
to the surface of the drum.
As the drum continues to rotate, excess oil is removed by the blade and captured in the cleaning unit reservoir. The blade distributes an even coat of oil across the surface of the drum.
Imaging Resolution
Four printheads create an image on the drum. Each printhead contains 300 jets per inch
arranged in an array, providing a total jet count per printhead of 880 (3520 jets for the complete
4-head imaging system). The printheads operate at 41kHz, jetting ink onto the drum. Each
Printhead creates a portion of the image. Pixel matching, monitored by the IOD Sensor,
ensures a seamless stitching together of Printhead output to deliver a single image. The image
resolution achievable using a single pass is 75dpi.
To increase image resolution in the cross process direction, the image is built up using several
passes to achieve the required image resolution. At each pass of the image by the printheads,
the printheads are slightly offset to avoid the build-up of ink drops on top of each other.
February 2013
8-30
NOTE: PCL input is typically 600x600. The ColorQube scales this to 450x500 at normal mode
resolution to provide Normal mode performance.
Transfix
Transfix Roller
The transfix linkages apply force to the transfix roller to bond the image to the media.
Transfix Stripper Blade
The transfix stripper blade removes adhered paper from the transfix roller and directs it to the
exit portion of the paper path. The assembly is constrained in proximity to the transfix roller
such that the blade is always in contact with the roller surface.
Output Transport
The output transport delivers sheets to the output module (LCSS, HVF or OCT). The output
transport is also responsible for returning sheets to the duplex path for second-side marking.
Figure 11 Multi-pass image development

As an example, to develop an image of 375dpi on the drum, the image is built up over 5 passes
(75dpi x 5 passes = 375dpi). Figure 11.
The image resolution in the process direction is determined by the speed of the Drum while in
the imaging cycle. The expression below shows the relationship: Y-resolution (in DPI) = 25.4 x
head frequency (Hz) / imaging speed (mm/s). In order to achieve any different resolution in the
process direction the speed of the drum must change, therefore the imaging time will change
for each revolution.
February 2013
8-31
Media Paths
The following describes the sequence of events as media moves through the IME media path.
Refer to Figure 1.
The sheet then enters the transfix area. The transfix sub-system consists of two major elements:
Transfix linkages that apply force to the transfix roller.
A transfix roller, which presses the sheet to the drum so that image transfer occurs.
Just beyond the transfix point the stripper blade is located, which strips the lead edge of the
media from the drum to ensure that it enters output portion of the paper path. If a sheet is not
successfully stripped, it can wrap around the drum and collide with the printheads, which are
mounted in close proximity to the drum. This can cause blocked jets due to the transfer of
paper fibres to the printheads. Damage to the printheads is undesirable as they are expensive
to replace.
At nip L the paper path divides. Sheets can either be sent to the exit module, or diverted into
the duplex path, Figure 3. The duplex path is used both for sheets to be duplexed and for
sheets that require inverting prior to exit (e.g. tab stock which must be fed tab-trailing through
the IME, but tab-leading into a finisher). The duplex path extends all the way back beyond nip
F in the left-hand vertical paper path. Once sheets have been reversed down the vertical paper
path, they then proceed as for the first side. However transfix is performed at half speed to
avoid damage to the image already marked (solid ink images are vulnerable to scratching and
burnishing when still tacky from the transfix process).
When operating in burst mode, the second sheet of a pair is held back once it is through transfix in order that sheets are delivered to the finisher at a regular pitch. Timing sensors are
placed throughout the paper path in order to facilitate the timely movement of sheets. The sensors are also used for jam detection.
Input Paper Path

Figure 1 Simplex path
Media is delivered to the IME from the following sources:
Sheets enter the IME media path from the optional Tray 5, Tray 4 (bypass tray), or one of Trays
in the 3TM. Sheets enter the vertical transport on the left side and are fed into the horizontal
transport. Sheets exit the feeders at a regular pitch. If the machine is operating in burst mode,
the first sheet in a burst mode pair is held at nip C reducing the inter-document gap between
the pair.
Trays 1 to 3
Tray 4 (bypass tray)
Tray 5
Output Paper Path

Media exits the IME through the exit module.
Following traversal of a portion of the horizontal transport, the media enters the registration /
preheat assembly. Within the registration / preheat assembly are plates that warm the sheets
to improve the transfer of the image to the media. Heavier media moves more slowly through
the preheater in order for it to reach the required temperature.
The skew and position of the media is determined by a scan bar. This information is then used
to determine how to get the paper to be de-skewed and orientated correctly from inboard to
outboard. This is generally accomplished by intentionally skewing the paper twice. The sum of
the two actions causes the media to be both aligned inboard to outboard and the lead edge to
be de-skewed. The movement of the paper through the registration / preheat assembly is
called 'wag' because of these unusual movements.
This intentional skewing of the paper is accomplished by the steering rollers. These shafts
align with one another but are separate and are driven by separate stepper motors. Depending
upon the width of the media, various idlers are engaged to provide drive to the paper. This is
accomplished with the rear drive motor by running it in reverse.
February 2013
8-32
IME Simplex Path
Figure 2 shows the media path through the IME.
Figure 1.The IIT generates the image data for copies and scans and is made up of three major
subsystems:
Scanner Assembly
Control Panel
Figure 2 Simplex path
IME Duplex Path

Figure 3 shows the duplex media path through the IME.
Figure 1 IIT
Figure 3 Duplex Path
February 2013
8-33
Bypass Tray 4 rollers are shown in Figure 2.
The image output terminal consists of the following elements:
Bypass Tray
Three Tray Module
Offset Catch Tray
Low Volume Staple Stacker (LCSS)
High Volume Finisher Booklet Maker (HVF)
Bypass Tray 4
Figure 1
Figure 2 Tray 4 rollers
Figure 1 Bypass Tray 4
February 2013
8-34
Table 1 Document size
Overview
Document Size
SEF Document
LEF Document
The Duplex Automatic Document Handler (DADH) is described under the following headings:
A5
5.5 x 8.5
Counterbalances
B5
Input Tray
A4
Feeder
8.5 X 11
De-skew - Takeaway Rolls (TAR)
8.5 X 13
Constant Velocity Transport (CVT)
8.5 X 14
Duplex Inverter
B4
Re-stack
A3
Drives
11 X 17
Covers
Interlocks
Document Size Sensing and Selection
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the component locations.
Document size sensing and selection is achieved by a combination of:
Width sensing (cross-process direction).
Static and active length detection (process direction).
Two counterbalance assemblies secure the document handler to the scanner frame. They are
the primary locators for the DADH to the scanner. Counterbalancing force is generated by
compression springs acting on a cam-follower arrangement, all housed within sheet metal
brackets. Above a set drop-down angle, the DADH will hold or rise slowly to the maximum
opening angle. Below the set drop-down angle, the DADH will gently close onto the scanner. In
addition, the counterbalance assemblies are double-hinged to allow a customer to close the
DADH onto books of up to 25 mm in thickness without applying excessive force to the document glass of the scanner. This feature is known as book-mode operation
Customer selectable NVM settings.
Mixed Length Mode selection by operator.
Input Tray
This sensing method is sufficiently accurate to differentiate between document widths that differ by 8 mm or more.
Counterbalances
Copies are placed into the tray, face up, 1 to N order. The nominal capacity of the input tray is
50 originals of 75 GSM (20 lb.) weight. The minimum size original is A5 (5.5 X 8.5 inch), SEF or
LEF. The maximum size of original is A3 (11 X 17 inch), SEF only. The maximum weight is 120
GSM (30 lb.) The input tray is capable of accepting of 100 good condition originals, size up to
A4 or 8.5 X 11 inch, SEF or LEF, weight up to 80 gsm. Table 1 lists recognized paper sizes and
orientations. Intermixed lengths (feed direction) are acceptable for a limited number of document pairs, which are described below in the Mixed Size Mode section. The tray will provide
for centre feeding in 1 to N sequence. Movable tray guides for the width condition are provided.
Correct guide adjustment by the operator is imperative for reliable feeding and auto paper
select. The DADH document sensor, Q005-102, detects originals loaded against an input gate.
The gate moves out of the way prior to the feed of the first original and it remains so for the
entire job (see Feeder).
Width Detection
Width sensing is accomplished by means of a variable linear potentiometer Q005-095. The
potentiometer slide is directly connected to one of the two paper width guides. The output signal from the potentiometer is converted into a physical dimension of the paper guide from the
paper path centre line.
Length Detection
Static length detection is used to determine document length for most (high percentage use)
document sizes and orientations. This is accomplished with two sensors, Q005-221 & Q005222, located in the input tray, which are at appropriate distances from the lead edge of the
paper stack. The state of these two stack length sensors, when documents are loaded in the
input tray at start of a job will determine the stack length range.
Active length detection is used to distinguish between 8.5 X 11 inch SEF and A5 (5.5 X 8.5
inch) LEF. Discrimination between these two sizes is accomplished by checking whether the
DADH feed sensor, Q005-204, is covered as the first document passes the DADH pre-reg
Sensor, Q005-206. If the DADH feed sensor senses a document at this point, then the 8.5 X 11
inch. size is indicated. If the sensor is clear, then A5 (5.5 X 11 inch) is indicated. Active length
detection is used only when conditions at the input guides and tray sensors indicate that there
is not enough information to determine document size and orientation.
An active minimum length check is also included, and any sheets shorter than 110 mm (corresponding to the longest distance between two successive nip rolls) will not be allowed to proceed beyond the upper portion of the paper path. A fault is declared and the customer is
informed to use the document glass to copy or scan the original(s).
February 2013
8-35
Size Sensing NVM Settings

In addition to the above, two of the systems NVM settings are used to set customer preferences with respect to two low percentage use document size pairs. These document pairs
are very close in either one or both dimensions and cannot be distinguished with the above
length and width size detection methods. The customer must decide, in each case, which document size is automatically selected when either of the two sizes is placed in the input tray.
NVM1 will allow the customer to choose between automatic detection of A4 SEF or 8.5 X 13
inch The DADH will automatically recognize only the selected size when either of these documents is placed in the input tray. Auto-detection of A4 LEF would be unaffected by either
choice in setting. The default setting of NVM1 = 0 is for A4 SEF and a customer or CSE
change to 1 will enable the 8.5 X 13 inch choice.
NVM2 will allow the customer to choose between automatic detection of A5 or 5.5 X 8.5 inch
Depending on the setting, the DADH will recognize documents within the size range of A5 or
5.5 X 8.5 inch as only the preferred size. This preference will apply to both SEF and LEF orientations. The default is NVM2 = 0 and will enable A5, whereas a customer or CSE setting to 1
will enable the 5.5 X 8.5 inch preference.
Mixed Length Mode Job Setting
There are 6 pairs of mixed length document sizes that will automatically be distinguished when
the operator selects the mixed length mode job. They are:
A3 inch SEF and A4 LEF
8.5 x 14 inch SEF and 8.5 x 11 inch SEF
8.5 x 5 inch LEF and 8.5 x 11 inch SEF
A4 inch SEF and A5 LEF
B4 SEF and B5 LEF
11 x 17 inch SEF and 8.5 x 11 inch LEF
Sensing the largest document in each pair in the input tray will identify the document pair.
Uncommon Document Sizes
Many uncommon sizes will be recognized by the DADH as being the same as the nearest
standard size.
Document Sizes not Recognized in Auto-detect Mode
For those sensor combinations not recognized by the DADH, the operator is alerted to perform
the following actions:
Re-sort (or re-stack / realign) and then reload originals.
Ensure guides in the input tray are positioned snugly against the sides of the document
stack.
If the document remains unrecognized, select the document size manually and load the
correct paper size into a tray if necessary.
Press start to continue.
Sensor Location
Figure 1 shows the locations of the DADH sensors.
February 2013
8-36
DADH TAR sensor

Q005-096
DADH Feed motor
MOT005-074
DADH Feed clutch

CL005-062
DADH Nudger motor
MOT005-098
Nudger roll
DADH CVT motor

MOT005-099
Document
stack
DADH Tray
size sensor 1
Q005-221
DADH CVT
sensor
Q005-097
Duplex
diverter
DADH Document
sensor Q005-102
DADH Feed
sensor Q005-204
DADH Tray size

sensor 2 Q005-222
DADH Width sensor

Q005-095
TAR
DADH Duplex solenoid
SOL005-100
Exit / duplex nip
Scan glass
Pre-scan nip
DADH Pre- reg

sensor Q005-206
Platen
DADH Exit sensor

Q005-209
Post scan nip
Output tray
Platen down sensor Q062-019
Angle sensor
Q062-301
Figure 1 DADH component location 2
February 2013
8-37
Feeder
Duplex Inverter
The feed mechanism is a top friction feeder with semi-active retard. The feeder consists of an
input gate, nudger roll, feed roll, and a retard roll. The nudger, feed and retard rolls are Customer Replaceable Units, (CRUs).
The inverter function is provided by a reversing roll nip. The elements include the nip, a duplex
gate, the feed motor, MOT005-074, and the DADH duplex solenoid, SOL005-100. The document is inverted after the trail edge is sensed by the DADH exit sensor, Q005-209. By controlling the time beyond the DADH exit sensor, the document is stopped by the DADH feed motor,
Q005-074, after the trail edge passes the duplex gate, but prior to leaving the nip. At this time,
the DADH feed motor is reversed. The DADH feed motor continues to drive the document
along the duplex path, so that it re-enters the original input path. The document lead edge
arriving at the DADH CVT sensor causes the DADH duplex solenoid, SOL005-100, to open.
The DADH CVT Motor continues to feed the document past the scanning position, as in simplex mode. After side 2 is scanned, the document is re-inverted, prior to being re-stacked for
correct document orientation. This is accomplished by sending the document through the
duplex path at maximum speed, without scanning, to the exit.
The nudger and feed rolls are driven by the DADH feed motor, MOT005-074, through an electromechanical friction feed clutch, CL005-062. A DADH nudger motor, MOT005-098, is operated to lower the nudger roll to contact the top sheet of the stack while simultaneously
disengaging the input gates until the first sheet is acquired from the stack. The input gates are
prevented from returning to their reset position until after the last sheet is fed off the stack.
The clutch de-energizes and the DADH nudger motor returns to the nudger roll up position,
when the lead edge of the document arrives at the DADH feed sensor, Q005-204, except in the
case of the first sheet, when both the clutch remains energized and the DADH nudger motor
remains at its current position, until the LE of the sheet arrives at the DADH TAR sensor, Q005096. When the document is called for, this event being triggered by the TE departure of the
previous sheet from the takeaway sensor, the clutch is re-energized and the (DADH nudger
motor returns to the nudger roll down position), until the LE reaches the take away sensor.
The semi-active retard roll consists of an elastomer-covered outer member and a stationary
inner member, with a wrap spring slip clutch between them. Spring loaded against the feed roll
to provide the required force, the retard rotates during feed and the wrap spring winds until its
slip torque is developed, at which point it overruns in the feed direction. The device maintains
this condition when a single sheet is in the pinch. When two sheets are fed into the nip, the torsion spring unwinds, thus turning the retard roll in the reverse direction and driving the multi-fed
sheet backwards out of the feed/retard nip and towards the stack. In the case of singly fed
sheets, the semi-active retard roll is driven in the direction of feed by the motion of the drive
roll.
De-skew - Takeaway Rolls (TAR)
Re-stack
The document re-stack function is provided by passing the documents through the inverter nip
into a catch tray above the manual platen cover. The profile of the exit tray together with a restack arm ensures an orderly document re-stack.
Drives
Refer to Figure 2. The DADH is driven by two 24V DC stepper motors. The DADH CVT motor,
MOT005-099, drives the CVT roll by means of a synchronous belt. The DADH feed motor,
Q005-074, provides drive to the feed assembly rolls, TAR assembly and exit roll. The feed
shaft is isolated from the motor by the DADH feed clutch, CL005-062. The DADH feed motor,
Q005-074, drives the exit roll assembly in both forward (exit) and reverse (duplex) directions.
In addition, the DADH duplex solenoid SOL005-100, is required to open the exit / duplex nip
during document inversion in duplex mode. This is necessary because the document is
wrapped around the CVT roll and both the leading and trailing edges are passing through the
exit / duplex nip.
Document de-skew and lead edge registration for both simplex and duplex paths are accomplished by a combination of the following methods:
Document lead edge buckle at TAR - By driving the document with the feed roll assembly
at a higher speed than the TAR rolls, a buckle is formed. This allows the document lead
edge to help correct any skew that exists during this first stage of feeding.
Width Guides - The position of the width guides relative to the edges of the stack is the
most important factor in the control of skew within the DADH. Easy movement of the
guides is a requirement to ensure customers can easily obtain a tight stack.
Constant Velocity Transport (CVT)

The document is scanned as it passes over the CVT glass with the scan carriage parked
beneath. During this time the document is driven by one large diameter CVT roll and is in contact with a minimum of 2 double nip rolls. The DADH CVT sensor, Q005-097, positioned before
the scan zone, detects the documents arrival to begin the scan. This sensor also detects the
documents departure for end of scan or jam detection. Image registration correction occurs at
the image processing PWB.
February 2013
8-38
The platen down sensor, Q062-019, is located at the front of the scanner module. It is actuated
by a magnet at the front of the DADH. It is not a power interlock, but it monitors of the DADH
open or closed condition.
The angle sensor, Q062-301, is located in the scanner module. It detects that the DADH is currently open more or less than a fixed angle.
Top cover
interlock
switch
S005-212
CVT motor
MOT005-099
DADH Feed clutch
CL005-062
DADH Feed
motor
MOT005-074
Figure 2 DADH component location
Covers
The DADH covers set consist of four main enclosures:
the top cover assembly,
the baffle assembly,
the rear cover and
input tray.
The top cover assembly pivots on the left for jam clearance to the upper paper path. Access to
the exit/duplex paper path is achieved through the baffle assembly, which can be opened after
raising the DADH. Access to the drives requires the removal of the rear cover. Access to the
input tray components requires removal of the input tray. The top cover assembly and baffle
assembly are for customer access to jam clearance areas. Access inside all other covers
requires the removal of screws and is intended for Xerox service personnel only.
Interlocks
The DADH top cover interlock switch, S005-212, is located at the rear of the DADH. This supplies the DADH PWB with +24V for clutches solenoids and motors. There is no +24V indicator
on the DADH PWB.
February 2013
8-39
Full Width Array Raster Input Scanner
Document Glass
Overview
The document glass can accept documents up to A3 or 11 x 17 inches, Figure 1. A registration

scale is provided on the right and rear of the document glass and the registration position is at
the right rear corner.
The 600dpi scanner uses a full width array and minimal optical path between the document
and the light sensing devices. The full width array is mounted on the scan carriage together
with the LED exposure lamps.
CVT Glass
The scanner has two modes of operation. In CVT mode, the scan assembly stays fixed in
place while documents are moved over it. In document glass mode, the document remains stationary while the scan carriage moves beneath the document.
The CVT (Constant Velocity Transport) glass is a separate piece of glass positioned to the left
of the document glass, Figure 1. In CVT mode, the scan carriage is positioned under the CVT
glass. Documents from the DADH pass over the glass and are returned to the DADH.
The scanner uses mechanical drives to scan documents on the document glass, or to position
the scan carriage under the CVT glass, when the document handler is used in CVT mode.
Document size Sensing
Document registration on the document glass is from the right rear corner of the glass. Documents up to A3 or 11 by 17 inches can be accommodated.
Two document size sensors are located in the base of the scanner. The output of the sensors
together with edge position data from full width array sensors is used by the scanner PWB to
send document size information to the image processing PWB when in scanning mode. The
signal from the input module angle sensor is used to provide timing information to the scanner
PWB, so that the document size measurement is taken before the DADH is closed.
Scan Carriage Assembly

The scan carriage assembly, Figure 2, is arranged to slide on front and rear rails, being controlled by scan cables driven by the scan motor. The scan carriage has three upper skids that
are held in contact with the lower surface of the document glass, by two spring loaded lower
skids. This arrangement gives a constant length of light path between the document and the
full width array.
A ribbon cable supplies power from the scanner PWB to the exposure lamp inverter. A
shielded ribbon cable supplies the analogue image data from the full width array to the scanner
PWB.
Scan Carriage Drive

Scan cables connected to a capstan are routed around the periphery of the scanner cavity, by
scan idler pulleys. The scan carriage is clamped to these cable, so that rotation of the capstan
causes the scan carriage to translate to the left or right. The capstan is driven by the scan drive
belt from the scan motor. The scan motor power and control comes from the scanner PWB
located in the scanner assembly.
Full Width Array Calibration

At power on initialization and every pattern scan and start of DADH job a calibration is performed. The scan carriage is positioned so that the full width array is below the calibration strip
on the underside of the document glass.
The reflected light from the calibration strip is received by the elements of the full width array.
The resulting analogue signal is sent from the full width array PWB to the scanner PWB where
the analogue signals are converted to a digital video signal and then a gain adjustment is
applied for each individual element, each individual element of the full width array to achieve a
uniform gain for the whole array.
When the exposure lamp switches off, further readings are taken that represent a black image.
These values are used to set the automatic offset control (AOC). These values are automatically calculated, but can be adjusted using the Image Quality Adjustment routine in the tools
menu.
LED illuminator
Two LED exposure lamps are mounted on the scan carriage, one on each side of the light sensor. The surface of each lamp is shaped to diffuse the light from the LEDs, and together they
produce a light of even intensity and generate negligible heat when energized. The LED supply
is +24V, via a ribbon cable from the scanner PWB to lamp 1. A second ribbon cable takes the
supply from lamp 1 to lamp 2.
Optical Path
Light from the exposure lamps on the scan carriage, is directed through the document glass to
illuminate the document. Light from the document passes vertically downwards through the
document glass, through the selfoc lens to the full width array.
Full Width Array

The full width array contains an array of twenty silicon detector chips which are bonded to the
full width array PWB. Each detector chip contains 384 detectors of 43 microns diameter. The
total width of the array being 330 mm or 7680 pixels. The silicon detectors convert the light levels reflected from the document into analogue voltage levels.
Each silicon detector produces one pixel (picture element) of image information. Each pixel
represents one spot of white, grey or black corresponding to the image on the document.
Selfoc Lens
The Selfoc (self focusing) lens consists of 650 Selfoc rods of 0.5 mm diameter, Figure 2. Each
rod is set in to a resin-type material to form a 325 mm wide lens.The lens sits above the full
width array in the scan carriage.
Scanner Initialization
At power on initialization and at timed intervals between jobs, scanner initialization is performed. The scan carriage moves to the scan carriage home sensor to set the home position of
the carriage. This is used as a reference from which all scan carriage movements are calculated.
February 2013
8-40
Image Processing
Figure 2
Digital image information from the scanner PWB passes to the single board controller PWB
and stored on the EPC memory. Storage in the EPC allows multiple copies and the image can
be modified according to the selections made by the user, such as reduction / enlargement,
copy lighter / darker or booklet mode. The image is then sent to the Fax module, the network
controller or the IME for processing or printing.
The single board controller PWB provides scanner control and processing of the scanned
image. Communications with the scanner components use an RS422 asynchronous serial
interface in full duplex mode. The link is used to send commands to the scanner to control
actions such as a document glass or scanner calibration.
The single board controller PWB has a NVM module PWB.
LED Exposure
lamps
The NVM module PWB contains the local machine settings and the image processing NVM,
which are maintained by an integral battery.
Interfaces for foreign devices are also provided.
Component Location
Figure 1
Rear registration edge

Full width array
assembly
Selfoc lens
Figure 2 Cross section of the scan carriage
CVT glass
Document glass
Right registration edge
Figure 1 External view of the scanner
February 2013
8-41
Three Tray Module (3TM)
Figure 3
Overview
Scanner PWB
Scan idler pulley
Inter module angle

sensor
Scan motor
Capstan
Scan drive
belt
Scan idler
pulley
The three tray module consists of three trays. Figure 1 shows the positions of the trays.
Trays 1 and 2 are adjustable between A5 SEF and 11 x 17 inch SEF. The paper stack is loaded
centrally in the tray and the side guides move jointly and an equal distance relative to the centre of the tray. Movement of both the side and end guides are moved individually by the customer using pinch grip / release handles. The slides have detentes at given sizes. In between
these standard sizes, the guides will still lock in position via a ratchet / pawl feature to support
custom sized media.
Tray 3 is a dedicated size tray, either A4 LEF or 8.5 x 11 inch LEF. The controller will supply an
NVM value to distinguish between the two possible sizes. The side guides and trail edge
guides in the tray to support the paper stack, are adjustable and lockable between the two
sizes. The paper tray is aligned with the centre of the paper path to the IME.
Scan idler pulley
Scan carriage
Document size
sensors
Tray 3
Scan carriage home
sensor
Scan idler pulley

Tray 1
Figure 3 Scanner components

Tray 2
Fax
The L1 common interface Fax (ICF) has an optional 1 or 2 line fax module located in the image
processing module draw beneath the scanner.
Figure 1 Three tray module
The fax PWB is fitted with either one or two MultiTech MT9234SMI modems. The PWB supports fax modem reset control, presence indicator, audio volume control and board revision
information. The Fax PWB is connected into a fax connector PWB, which in turn is connected
by a ribbon cable to the single board controller PWB.
Configuration
The fax is controlled by the copy and process controller on the single board controller PWB.
The main features of the three tray module are:
Fax functionality is selected and controlled via the main control panel.
Tray 1 and 2 each have a capacity of 550 sheets of 80gsm paper.
Tray 1and 2 paper sizes are between A5 or 5.5 x 8.5 inch SEF to A3 or 11 x 17 inch SEF.
Tray 3 has a capacity of 2100 sheets of 80 gsm paper.
Tray 3 paper sizes are A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch LEF.
Paper weights from 60 gsm to 216 gsm.
The three tray module feeds paper that is centre registered to the IME.
February 2013
8-42
Paper low warning utilizing the elevate pulses taken to reach a given elevate plate position equivalent to 25% stock remaining in tray 1 and tray 2 and 10% for tray 3.
Tray 1 and 2 will be used to feed tab stock and labels.
The 3TM has a PWB without an intelligent controller. This provides the following information to the IME, via PJ950 on the media path driver PWB:
The paper path sensors status.
Paper present status for each tray, (tray empty sensors).
Tray open / closed status for each tray.
Approximate paper levels for each tray, (encoder pulse count for tray 3 elevator
motor).
Tray in use status.
Paper size detected by the use of 5 switches for trays 1 and 2.
Left hand lower door open / closed status.
3TM horizontal transport open / closed status, (transport closed switch).
The 3TM horizontal transport home sensor is the topmost switch on the 3TM PWB, located at
the rear of trays 1 and 2.
The 3TM left hand door closed sensor is located at the front of the jam clearance door, behind
the lower left door. Figure 3 shows the vertical transport closed sensor.
3TM left hand door

closed sensor
Machine Interface
The three tray module PWB receives and sends serial input and output data to and from the
Media Path Driver PWB.
Tray and Transport Closed Sensing

For trays 1 and 2, the 3TM PWB detects the tray open if none of the five media size switches at
the rear of the drawer is actuated. This is because no paper size switches for that drawer can
be actuated while the drawer is open.
Tray 3 has a dedicated tray home sensor, located at the rear of the tray. Figure 2 shows the
tray 3 home sensor.
Figure 3 3TM left hand door closed sensor
Tray 3 home sensor
Figure 2 Tray 3 home sensor
February 2013
8-43
Paper Size Sensing

Trays 1 and 2 can accommodate various paper sizes which the machine can detect, according
to the position of the paper guides. The paper guide positions are detected by five switches at
the rear of each drawer, mounted on the 3TM PWB. As the paper guides are adjusted, slotted
guide brackets slide to the left or to the right. When the drawer is then closed, the combination
of the switches actuated, informs the 3TM PWB which size paper is held in the drawer. Figure
4 shows the components of the trays 1 and 2 paper size sensing function.
Tray 3 has a dedicated elevator motor. Stack elevation is achieved with a parallel elevate plate
and supporting hoist cables and pulleys. The drive for this system is by a motor with a coupling
to a gear box. A stack height sensor detects the correct paper stack height and an over run
switch removes the power from the elevator motor if necessary. Figure 6 shows the tray 3 elevator components.
Feed and elevate motor

Tray 1 media size
sensors PWB
Elevator clutch
Three trays module

PWB
Drive dog
Elevate drive gears
Stack height
sensor
Paper length
guide bracket
3TM horizontal
transport home
switch
Paper width
guide bracket
Paper width
guide
Media size switch,

(5 per tray)
Paper tray plate
Paper length
guide
Figure 4 Tray 1 and 2 paper size components

Paper tray plate lift
bar
Paper Tray Elevation

Trays 1 and 2 each have an elevate system which lifts the stack. A stack height sensor detects
and maintains the top of the paper stack at the correct height. An elevate plate is pivoted at the
right hand edge of the tray and the left edge is raised by a lift bar. The method of elevation is
achieved by driving the feed motor in reverse through a gear train and a one-way clutch. Figure
5 shows the tray 1 and 2 elevator components.
Figure 5 Tray 1 and 2 elevate system
February 2013
8-44
Note that after the sheet has left the tray 1, 2 or 3 feed sensor, and before it enters take away
roll, there is a short wait period. This is to synchronize the leading edge of the sheet with the
marking operation. This is the case with all three trays in the module.
When the sheets leave the 3TM vertical transport, they enter the main vertical transport. This is
described in the Paper Path section.
Hoist cable
Elevate damper
assembly
Tray elevator motor
REAR VIEW
Figure 6 Tray 3 elevator system
Feed roll
Paper Feed
Trays 1 and 2 have identical paper feed components. Figure 7 shows the paper feed components for trays 1 and 2. When the tray is closed the nudger roll is released and rests permanently on the top sheet. The force with which rests on the stack is controlled by a spring. The
nudger roll is turned by a small belt drive from the feeder roll shaft, which is driven by the elevate / feed motor for the tray.
Feed sensor
Tray empty
sensor
Retard roll
Stack height
sensor
Nudger roll
Figure 7 Trays 1 and 2 paper feed
When the top sheet is fed to the feed roll, a single sheet has sufficient friction to turn the retard
roll, and continue being fed. If two sheets are fed, there will not be enough friction between the
two sheet to drive the retard roll, and therefore the lower of the two sheets is stalled in the nip
and is not fed through the feed nip.
The feed sensor detects the sheet, which is passed to the next nip, located in the 3TM vertical
transport. The sheet from tray 1 is passed to take away roll 1 with its associated sensor, TAR 1.
The sheet from tray 2 is passed to take away roll 2 with its associated sensor., TAR 2. The nips
in the 3TM vertical transport are driven by the 3TM transport motor. This motor also drives the
3TM horizontal transport. Figure 8 shows the 3TM vertical transport.
February 2013
8-45
3TM transport
motor
Take away roll 1
TAR 1 sensor
Take away
roll 2
TAR 2 sensor
Figure 8 3TM vertical transport drive and nips

The tray 3 feed roll, retard roll and nudger roll are the same as for trays 1 and 2. Tray 3 also
has the same feed sensor, tray empty sensor and stack height sensor arrangement. However,
tray 3 features an additional switch: the overrun switch described in the paper tray elevation
section above. The overrun switch is actuated in the event of tray 3 over running the control of
the stack height sensor. When actuated the power is switched off from the tray 3 elevator
motor. Figure 9 shows the tray 3 paper feed components.
Feed sensor
Feed roll
Tray 3
empty sensor
Q73-201
Overrun
switch
Stack height
sensor
Q73-383
Tray 3 feed
motor
Nudger roll
Figure 9 Tray 3 paper feed

When a sheet has been fed from tray 3, it enters take away roll 3, the first nip in the 3TM horizontal transport. This has an associated TAR 3 sensor. The sheet is then fed to nip V and then
on past the 3TM horizontal transport jam sensor and into nip U. Figure 10 shows the components of the 3TM horizontal transport. When the sheet leaves the 3TM horizontal transport, it
enters the main vertical transport.
When the sheets leave the 3TM horizontal transport, they enter the main vertical transport.
This is described in the Paper Path section.
February 2013
8-46
Bypass tray 4
Transport drives
Overview
The bypass tray 4 is a media feeding device integrated into the IME. The bypass tray can be
folded away when not in use.
The main function of the bypass tray is to enable the loading of special material that is either
not already in a paper tray, or that cannot be fed from existing trays.
Configuration
The paper tray will accept 100 sheets either A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch of 80 gsm, (20 lb.).
The main features of the bypass are:
Take away
roll 3 sensor
Feeds up to 100 sheet capacity at 80 gsm (20lb).
Allows feeding of A5 / 5.5 x 8.5 inch SEF.
Allows feeding of paper size up to 12 x 18 inch / SRA3 SEF.
Allows feeding of paper weight from 60 to 216 gsm, (US bond weight 16 to 58lb).
Allows feeding of transparencies, labels, tab stock, cover and envelopes.
The Bypass is controlled directly by software located in the IME.

Take away
roll 3 W
3TM transport
motor
Nip roll U
3TM horizontal transport

jam sensor
Nip roll V
Machine Interface
The bypass receives and sends serial input and output data to and from the media path driver
PWB
Bypass Feeder
The Bypass feeder components are:
Figure 10 3TM horizontal transport
Retard roll and feed roll
Registration gate
Feed motor
Width sensor
Tray empty sensor
Media size potentiometer
Feed sensor
Nudger home sensor
Media Loading and Registration

The top edge registration of the stack is achieved by the user pushing the synchronously moving media guides against the front and rear edges of the stack.
This de-skews and registers the stack in the cross process direction.
The user must then push the stack forward into the bypass feeder until its lead edge touches
the registration gate. The registration gate consists of two pairs of vertical fingers aligned symmetrically around the centre of the paper path.
February 2013
8-47
The inner two fingers are approximately 56 mm apart for registering thinner media fed by the
bypass and the outer two fingers are approximately 250 mm apart for registering the wider
media fed by the bypass.
Table 1 covers each regions width boundaries, default media by market and other media.
Table 1 Region width boundaries
Region width
(mm)
The registration gate is positioned such that when the stack is registered:
the stacks lead edge will be at the base of the ramp between the nudger and the feed nip,
the nudger will be above the stack ready to lower and feed, and
the media present sensor flag will be resting on the top of the stack indicating that media
is present.
Width Region
US default
EU default
Other media sizes

in region
Min
Max
Region 1
100
126
ENV US#10 SEF
Env dl SEF
Region 2
122
170
Statement SEF
A5 SEF
Env C5 SEF, Env 6

x 9 SEF
Region 3
166
206
Executive
Media Size Detection
Region 4
202
256
Letter SEF
A4 SEF
The media size detection in the bypass tray is achieved using the width of the stack indicated
by the position of the media guides.
Env C4 SEF, Env 9

x 12 SEF
Region 5
252
290
Letter LEF
Tabloid SEF
Region 6
286
314
Tabloid extra SEF
A4 LEF
A3 SEF
Region 7
310
322
SRA3 SEF
The customer is required to set the media guides to the front and rear edges of the stack to
enable accurate media width sensing.The user must correctly adjust the guide position, as
there is no alternative mechanism for sensing the media width in the bypass tray.
The media guides move synchronously when the customer moves either guide due to a double
rack and pinion mechanism. This ensures that the rack connected to the rear guide is always in
the same place for any specific media width.
The bypass tray features a potentiometer that has its follower sprung loaded against a ramp
profile in the rear rack. As the guides are moved further apart the voltage output from the
potentiometer decreases and when the guides are moved closer together the voltage output
from the potentiometer increases.
Also housed in the bypass tray is an opto-interrupt sensor called the media width sensor. The
activation flag of this sensor is part of the rear rack. The flag in the rack has three sections to it
giving a total of 7 regions.
There are 3 regions with a voltage high response and 4 regions with a voltage low response.
The combination of the potentiometer output voltage and the state of the media width sensor
indicates to the bypass tray software which width region the rear guide is in.
Each region has a defined maximum and minimum stack width that could be in the tray. This
information is then passed onto the IME code where the user is required to confirm the media
size in the tray.
As the width sensing is market differentiated, the default media size that will be presented to
the user for any given width region will depend on the worldwide location of the machine.
The media size in the cross process direction is detected using the potentiometer and flag sensor, attached to the paper width guides. The user is asked to confirm the detected width size
via the UI or to enter a custom size. The size in the process direction is measured when the
edge of the paper activates the paper path timing sensor #16.
Nudger and Registration gate Operation

The nudger is lifted and lowered via a cam mechanism that is driven when the stepper motor is
reversed. Rotating the motor in reverse does not drive either the feed or the nudger roll due to
the one-way clutches on the feed shaft. The cam can only be driven in one direction by virtue
of a one way bearing housed in one of the gears in the gear train driving the cam. There are 2
V profiles on the cam surface that interact with the nudger follower and an additional spring
loaded locking lever. These enable the following functionality;
1.
When the nudger follower is in either V it prevents the nudger from lowering onto the
stack
2.
When the additional locking lever is in a V it prevents the cam rotating and lifting the
nudger during feeding, or affecting the nudger load.
3.
Enables a large stop position window for all functional positions as the Vs enable the
mechanism to self centre when stopped (the self centring also provides positional robustness to any system vibrations should they occur)
The registration gate in its media loading position has its four fingers vertical in the paper path
at the base of the ramp between the nudger and the separation nip. The reg gate hard stop is
provided by a sprung loaded locking lever that prevents the rotation of the reg gate at its cam
follower. As the cam is rotated it first lifts the locking lever, thus removing the reg gate hard
stop, and then rotates the reg gate so its fingers retreat out of the paper path. The cam is
designed so that the nudger is not lowered until the reg gate is completely out of the paper path
and the reg gate is not raised until the nudger has been lifted off the stack. The reg gate returns
to its hard stopped position using a return spring. The forces have been balanced to ensure
that the reg gate spring will always overcome the locking lever spring forces. This ensures that
when media is removed from the bypass tray the reg gate will always return to its media load
locked position.
February 2013
8-48
Multifeed Prevention Pre-Separation Nip
There are three functional cam rotational positions;

1.
Jam clear position the nudger is up, the reg gate is held down and the cam rotation is
prevented by the nudger follower in the first V.
2.
Media load position the nudger is up, the reg gate is up and locked and the cam rotation
is prevented by the nudger follower in the second V.
When nudging sheets to the separation nip, the ideal situation is that only the top sheet is
moved each time. To help facilitate this, the bottom of the stack is retarded using a cork pad
positioned directly underneath the nudger. The high coefficient of friction of the media to the
pad prevents the stack as a whole moving forward, but slug feeds of multiple sheets above the
base of the stack can still occur.
3.
Feed position the nudger is down, the reg gate is down and the cam is locked by the
additional lever in the second V.
The separation nip can feed these slugs one sheet at a time if:
The cam includes a sensor vane that runs in an opto-interrupt sensor called the nudger home
sensor. The lead edge of this vane indicates the number of steps left to both the jam clear and
the media load position. The trail edge of this vane indicates the number of steps left to lower
the nudger. The nudger roll can be lowered over the whole stack height negating the need for
stack elevation. The mechanism does not continually adjust the nudger position; it allows the
nudger to travel over the full stack height under the force of its spring.
Whenever a jam is detected the nudger will be raised to the jam clear position. Once clear, the
nudger should be moved to the media load position
the slug is 2 sheets in number, or
the slug is shingled with the top-most sheet further forward and each consecutive lower
sheet slightly further behind.
To aid in the shingling of any multiple sheet slug feeds, the bypass tray drives all sheets into a
steep sheet metal ramp between the nudger roll and the separation nip. The shingle ramp
angle, nudger load and distance between the nudger roll and the ramp have been optimized to
minimize miss-feeds whilst maximizing the ability to shingle multiple sheet slug feeds.
Multifeed Prevention at the Separation Nip

When feeding sheets the separation nip performs the following functions:
Feeding operation
When media has been loaded and its size confirmed by the user, feeding can begin.
The stepper motor is rotated in reverse, lowering the registration gate out of the paper path and
then lowering the nudger onto the stack. A wait period is then observed to ensure that the
nudger has settled on the stack prior to commencing feeding. The stepper motor is then driven
forward, feeding the top sheet into the shingle ramp and then into the separation nip.
If more than one sheet has been fed off the top of the stack then the shingle ramp will shingle
them, minimizing the number of cases where more than two sheets enter the separation nip.
The separation nip then feeds the top sheet forward, (retarding the second lower sheet if it has
entered the nip), until its lead edge is seen at the feed sensor.
The sheet is then be delivered to a specified stage location after the feed nip but before nip E
where the sheet waits. This wait period will be adjusted for each sheet to enable the correct
delivery time of the sheet to the confirm sensor 16, but will also be of a minimum value to
enable the system dynamics to settle prior to an additional move. The sheet is then be fed on
to nip E and sensor 16.
Once the sheets lead edge has been seen at the confirm sensor #16 the bypass feed motor
stops and nip E drags the sheet out of the bypass tray. This guarantees an inter document gap
between consecutive sheets. To minimize the drive force required at nip E to pull a sheet
through the bypass tray, the feed roll and nudger roll one-way clutches over-run when the
sheet is dragged through. This disengages the motor and gear train from the drag requirement.
If a single sheet enters the nip it will feed the sheet.
If 2 sheets enter the nip it will feed the top sheet whilst retarding the bottom sheet.
The separation nip consists of a feed roll mounted on a feed shaft. The feed roll is driven by an
in-line mechanical one-way clutch only when the feed shaft is rotated in the feed direction. A
retard roll is then sprung loaded against the feed roll, with the pivot point a known X and Y distance from the feed roll centre line. The retard roll has an in-line mechanical slip clutch that will
rotate when a known torque has been achieved. If a single sheet enters the nip then there is
enough drive from the feed roll to overcome the retardation of the slip clutch. Therefore the
sheet is fed and the slip clutch rotates. If two sheets enter the separation nip then the drive
exerted from the top sheet to the bottom sheet is not enough to overcome the slip clutch
torque. Therefore the top sheet is feed over the bottom sheet which is retarded by the stationary retard roll.
D Solenoid
The solenoid at the D nip rolls opens and closes the nip. This is to accommodate the trailing
edge of the second side prints and to assist the registration / preheat assembly operation.
Figure 1 shows the bypass attached to the machine. Figure 2 shows the rack assembly and
media width sensors. Figure 3 shows the media feeding components. Figure 4 shows the
nudger home sensor, media present sensor and the feed sensor. Figure 5 shows the D and
sensor 16.
Once the sheets trail edge has been seen at the feed sensor, the presence of the next sheet
can be confirmed. The next sheet can then be acquired. This is repeated until either the
bypass tray runs out of media or all desired sheets have been fed. The stepper motor is then
reversed to raise the nudger and return the registration gate to the media load position. Note
that the nudger remains down on the stack throughout the full multiple sheet feeding
sequence.
February 2013
8-49
Rear rack
Bypass tray 4
Rear guide
Flags
Bypass width Sensor

Q74-350
Front rack
Figure 1 Bypass tray 4 installed on IME

Potentiometer
Figure 2 Bypass width sensors
February 2013
8-50
Feed motor
Bypass Nudger home sensor

Q74-413
Feed roll
Feed sensor
Retard roll
Nudger roll
Figure 3 Bypass media feed components
Registration gates
(4 off)
Media
present
actuator
Media present
sensor
Figure 4 Bypass media feed components
February 2013
8-51
Tray 5 Module
Overview
The tray 5 module is a high capacity paper source that can be used as the primary paper
feeder for the system. It provides a single tray with a dedicated paper size setting that can be
set to A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch, long edge feed, (LEF). It provides paper at the rate required by the
machine to which it is attached.
Nip rolls D
D Solenoid
Paper path
sensor 16
Bypass Tray 4
Nip rolls E
Tray 5
VIEW INSIDE TOP LEFT OF IME
Figure 1 Tray 5
Figure 5 Bypass feed operation
The tray 5 module is positioned to the left of the machine Figure 1. It is attached to the machine
by a fixed base. Runners on the base allow the unit to be moved to the left for access to the left
hand door, for jam clearance.
Power is derived from the main machine via a combined, communications connector. The tray
can be reloaded with paper while other paper sources are in use.
A transport lock mechanism allows the tray 5 module to be moved safely, when not attached to
the IME.
Configuration
The paper tray size is a mechanical setting that can be adjusted to accept 4000 sheets either
A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch (80 gsm / 20 lb.), long edge feed stock. The paper size is pre-set at the factory and is dependant on the market region. There is no paper size sensing available in tray 5.
Kits are available to convert tray 5 to accept the following media:
A4, short edge feed
8.5 x 11 inch, short edge feed
February 2013
8-52
8.5x14 inch, short edge feed
A3, short edge feed
11 x 17 inch, short edge feed
When one of these kits is installed, the door is not present and the door switch is replaced by a
manual tray loading switch.
Tray 5 contains the following main elements:
Paper tray
Semi-active retard feed head, (SAR)
Paper transport system
Tray elevator
Docking and interlocks
Component location
Bypass (multi sheet inserter)
Transport rolls
Machine Interface
The serial interface is a hi-speed communication interface for transferring low-level data. This
is done in the form of sensor data from the tray 5 hardware to the IME and control data from
the IME to the tray 5 hardware.
Feed sensor
The machine interface comprises of the tray 5 control PWB, the communication cable, a bulkhead connector, a harness and the host controller PWB.
The communication cable also provides +5V and +24V to the tray 5 components.
Nudger and feed rolls
If any communications data lines become open circuit or short circuit, a communications fault
is indicated by the IME.
The software is capable of handling all stock formats, and the GUI setting should match the
tray setting. As there is no paper size detection on tray 5, and therefore no size information is
fed to the machine, failure to set the GUI size to match the tray 5 stock may result in faults such
as: jams, image quality faults, finisher tamping errors, etc.
Interlock
Interlock switches in the tray 5 module interrupt the +24V power when the front door interlock
or the docking interlock are opened for jam clearance or service. The interlocks must be closed
to enable initialization.
Paper Path
Figure 2 shows the paper path between tray 5 and the IME.
Figure 2 Paper path

The nudger roll and the feed rolls are driven by the tray 5 feed motor, and feed the sheet to the
feed rolls, (SAR feeder). The feed rolls transport the sheet past the feed sensor to the tray 5
transport rolls. Because of the inherent slippage in SAR feed heads, the paper does not arrive
at a well defined time. The transport rolls, which are not SAR, are driven by the tray 5 transport
motor, whose speed is controlled by the software. The time for the sheet to reach the paper
feed sensor is measured, and the speed of the transport motor is adjusted to ensure the leading edge of the sheet arrives at the IME at the correct time.
Semi-Active Retard Feed Head (SAR)

This consists of a nudger roll, mounted on a pivoting arm, as shown in Figure 3.
February 2013
8-53
Paper Present Detection

Nudger roll
Tray elevated in the up and
ready to feed position
Stack height
sensor
When the tray is less than 10% full, and the tray is in the up position, the software checks after
each sheet feed for an out of paper condition. The tray 5 empty sensor is a reflective type and
is situated directly over a hole in the paper tray, normally covered by paper. There will be no
reflection when the last sheet has been fed, and an out of paper condition will be declared.
The GUI instructs the operator to refill the tray and further paper feeds will be inhibited. In a
normal tray 5 module, with A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch LEF stock and a door present, the tray is automatically lowered. If there is no door, and a paper kit is installed, the tray is lowered when the
manual push button is pressed and released. The out of paper status is raised to the host controller. The tray will elevate again when the door is closed after refilling the tray.
Tray Height Sensor
Nudger roll
Stack height
sensor
The machine keeps track of the tray height, based on the distance travelled from the start of lift.
A software height counter is zeroed when the tray starts to rise and the stack down sensor
goes low. As the tray rises, the elevator motor encoder sensor increments the height counter
for each pulse sensed from the vertical encoder track. When the tray reaches its upper position, and the stack height sensor is actuated by the nudger roll, the value of the height counter
is passed to the IME, as a percentage of the tray 5 paper stock left on the tray. The IME holds
the stack height value as 0%, 5%, 10% and at 10% intervals up to 100% full, and this is available for display to the remote web UI. The counter value is updated whenever the elevator
motor encoder sensor, changes state, and is saved to the NVM each time. If an expected
change in state of the height encoder does not occur, when the elevator motor is operating, a
fault condition is declared.
Stack Height when Feeding
Note: Retard roll and other parts of

SAR assembly not shown
The stack height sensor maintains the stack height by triggering activity of the elevator motor.
When a change in the condition of this sensor is detected, there is a de-bounce delay of 33
milli-seconds to allow the condition to settle, and if the change in the state of the sensor is confirmed, the elevator motor raises the tray, after the paper leading edge has passed the transport rolls. The amount of movement is determined by the current position of the tray. This
position is used to read the motor-on time from a look-up table, held within the machine.
Figure 3 SAR Feeders

A separation nip is formed by the nudger roll and a retard roll which is not shown. The nudger
roll is sprung and rests on the stack to feed the top sheet. If the stack is not within the feeding
position, the stack height sensor triggers the elevator to rise to the feeding position.
Tray Overload
The SAR mechanism substantially reduces the incidence of multi-sheet feeding.
If the stack height sensor indicates the tray is at the feeding position, and at the same time the
stack down sensor detects the tray in the fully lowered position, the overloaded tray status is
raised. The elevator motor movement is inhibited and an error is raised. This error condition is
maintained until the conditions producing it no longer apply.
Because the speed of the sheet is slightly reduced by the effect of the retard roll, when the
leading edge reaches the paper feed sensor, the feeding speed is controlled to ensure the
sheet reaches the hand-over point in the IME within the allowable time window.
Elevator Motor Stop
Paper Feed and Retard Rolls

Tray 5 feed roll / retard rolls are accessible from tray door access and by sliding the tray away
from the IME. The host controller monitors their usage, recording the sheet feed count in the
NVM, along with their life expectancy, to inform the customer service engineer (CSE) when
their end of life occurs.
The elevator motor is never stopped by simply removing the power and allowing it to coast to a
stop. Whenever the motor is stopped, it is dynamically, actively braked to a stand still.
Elevator Upper and Lower Positions

The commonly used tray control sensors are:
The stack height sensor
The stack down sensor
The paper empty sensor
The elevator motor encoder sensor.
February 2013
8-54
The safety limit switches are:
Refer to Figure 4 for the location of components motors and sensors.
The tray down limit switch
The tray upper limit switch
The down limit switch breaks the +24V supply to the elevator motor in the down direction only.
The upper limit switch breaks the +24V supply to the elevator motor in the up direction only.
This allows the tray to recover its position, while preventing damage that would occur through
further movement in the wrong direction.
Tray 5 feed sensor
Tray 5 empty sensor
The limit switches are connected to the tray 5 control PWB motor drive circuitry, rather than the
sensing circuitry. Therefore, if one of the limit switches is actuated, the elevator movement is
stopped, the lack of movement is detected by the software and a fault condition is declared
Stack height sensor
Component Location
Tray 5 feed motor
Table 1 lists the active components of tray 5.

Table 1 Active components
Name
Function
Tray 5 feed sensor
Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper
Tray 5 empty sensor
Detects paper present in the tray
Stack height sensor
Detects the tray at the feed position
Stack down sensor
Detects the tray in the fully lowered position
Elevator motor encoder

sensor
Detects teeth on the vertical encoder, used to determine

stack height
Tray 5 docking switch
Detects tray 5 in the docked position
Tray 5 door closed switch
Detects the tray 5 door open or closed
Tray 5 upper limit switch
Cuts the +24V to stop tray when moving to the up position
Tray 5 down limit switch
Cuts +24V to stop tray when moving in the down direction
Tray 5 transport motor
Stepper motor feeding paper out of tray 5
Tray 5 feed motor
Stepper motor to separate sheets and move the paper to

the transport rolls
Tray 5 elevator motor
Moves the tray up and down
Tray 5 control PWB
Controls the operation of tray 5
Upper limit switch
Tray 5 transport
motor
Tray 5 control PWB
Tray 5 docking
switch
Tray 5 elevator motor and

encoder sensor
Stack down sensor
February 2013
8-55
Image Marking Engine (IME)
Figure 5 Transit lock, paper size adjustment door switch and limit switch
Figure 1. The IME includes these components:

Upper tray limit
actuator
Vertical transport
Registration
Print marking unit and drum assembly
Door closed switch
Paper size adjustment

Transit lock
Figure 1 Image marking engine
Vertical Transport
Adjustment
The vertical transport nips takes the sheets from the 3TM, tray 5 or the bypass tray. The components associated with the vertical transport are:
The following tray 5 adjustment procedures are described in the service manual:
ADJ 75.1, Tray 5 Paper Tray Guide Setting. This is performed to adjust the paper tray guide in
tray 5 for A4 / A3, or for 8.5 x 11 inch / 11 x 17 inch paper.
ADJ 75.2, Tray 5 Module to Machine Alignment. This is performed to align the tray 5 module to
the IME. This is the first adjustment in achieving correct registration and reliable paper transfer
between tray 5 and the IME.
ADJ 75.3, Tray 5 Module Tray Alignment. This is the second adjustment to be performed when
aligning tray 5 to the IME. It is performed when top edge registration cannot be achieved, using
only the NVM values in Registration Setup Procedure.
Vertical transport motor, M2 - A servo motor located at the top rear of the transport. The vertical
transport motor drives the vertical transport nips via a train of gears and a toothed belt. Figure
2.
Nip H - On leaving the 3TM area, the sheets are taken by nip H, the lowest nip in the main vertical transport. Refer to Figure 2.
The vertical jam sensor - This checks for the presence of the sheet after nip H and before nip F.
Refer to Figure 2.
Nip F - This nip accepts sheets from the 3TM area and also takes sheets from tray 5. Refer to
Figure 2.
February 2013
8-56
Nip E and the confirm sensor - This nip accepts sheet from nip H and it also accepts sheets
from the bypass tray. When a sheet arrives from the bypass tray, the leading edge passes
through nip E. Once its presence is confirmed by the confirm sensor (#16), the sheet is pulled
from the bypass tray by nip E. Refer to Figure 2.
NOTE: after the sheet has left the bypass tray feed sensor, and before it enters nip E, there is
a short wait period. This is to synchronize the leading edge of the sheet with the marking operation
Nip D - This is the last set of rolls to be driven by the vertical transport motor. This nip can be
opened or closed by the action of the nip D solenoid. It is necessary to open the nip to accommodate duplex sheet feeding. Refer to Figure 2.
Horizontal Transport
The horizontal transport handles sheets being fed to the marking process. Simplex sheets or
duplex sheets for first-side marking are fed from the vertical transport. Duplex sheets for second-side marking are fed back into the horizontal transport from the duplex transport. The horizontal transport is also used when performing the final inversion on single-side printed tabs
and duplex pre-drilled or pre-printed stock. The components associated with the horizontal
transport are:
Horizontal transport motor, M6 - This is a servo motor, located at the rear of the transport. This
motor drives nips C, R and Q via a 90-tooth gear and two, 108-tooth drive belts. Refer to Figure
3.
Duplex sensor (#14) - A reflective sensor, located on the top of the horizontal transport. When
the sheet is fed from the vertical transport, this sensor detects the leading edge. Nip C rotates
in the forward direction to transport the sheet for first-side marking. When the sheet returns via
nip C for second-side marking, the duplex sensor detects the sheet leading edge. Nip C rotates
in the reverse direction and continues to do so until the sensor detects the sheet trailing edge.
Nip C then changes to rotates in the forward direction to feed the second side of the sheet for
marking. Refer to Figure 4.
Nip C - Driven by motor M6 and can opened when necessary, by the nip C solenoid.
Nip roll D
Nip C solenoid - A 48V solenoid located on top of the horizontal transport. The nip C solenoid
actuates to open nip C. Nip C opens to allow nip A in the registration / preheat assembly module to control the speed and skew of the sheet. Refer to Figure 4.
Vertical
transport
motor
Gear
train
Confirm
sensor
Diverter solenoid - A 48V solenoid, located on top of the horizontal transport. The diverter solenoid actuates to allow sheets to return from the duplex transport to nip C, rotating in reverse,
for second-side marking. It de-actuates to feed sheets to the drum, with nip C rotating forwards. Refer to Figure 4 and Figure 5.
Duplex sensor (#17) - A reflective sensor, located on the top of the horizontal transport. Duplex
sensor 17 detects the leading and trailing edges of sheets returning along the horizontal transport for second-side marking. Refer to Figure 4.
Nip E
Nip F
Toothed
belt
Vertical jam
sensor
Nip roll R and nip roll Q - Fixed nips driven by motor M6. Nips R and Q transport the sheets
returning along the horizontal transport, for second-side marking. Refer to Figure 4.
Nip H
Figure 2 Vertical transport components
February 2013
8-57
108T drive belts

Heat shield
90T gear
motor, M6
REAR VIEW
Figure 3 Horizontal transport motor and drives
Nip Q
Duplex
sensor 14
Nip C
Diverter
solenoid
Nip C
solenoid
Duplex
sensor 17
Nip R
LED PWB
Figure 4 Horizontal transport components
February 2013
8-58
Nip C release solenoid
LED PWB
Heat shield
HPP diverter
gate solenoid
Paper path to drum

Diverter gate
Figure 6 Heat shield LED PWB
Figure 5 Marker diverter components

Heat shield - A hinged plate, located to the right of nip Q. It protects the rollers from the heat of
the registration / preheat module and the drum, and it hinges up when the clamshell on the registration / preheat module is raised. Refer to Figure 3.

Figure 7 shows the location of the registration / preheat assembly.
Illumination LEDs - Are mounted on PWBs located in the heat shield and in the horizontal
transport jam clearance door. The LEDs assist the customer and the service engineer when
clearing media jams. Refer to Figure 6.
February 2013
8-59
Figure 7 Registration/preheat assembly location
Figure 8 Skew correction drive
The registration / preheat assembly uses a single CIS scan bar to detect the rear lateral edge
of the sheet. Based on the location of this edge it can be determined if the sheet is wider or
narrower than expected by more than 10 mm. If the rear edge is within 10 mm of the expected
position, the lateral location of the sheet is corrected by the registration mechanism. If the rear
edge is more than 10 mm from the expected position a jam is declared by the machine. As the
CIS scan bar is mounted at an angle relative to the lateral direction, it can also detect sheet
skew.
Figure 8. The intentional skewing of the paper is accomplished by the steering rolls. The steering roll shafts align with one another but are separate and are driven by separate stepper
motors. Depending upon the width of the media, various idlers will be engaged to provide drive
to the paper. This is accomplished with the rear drive motor by running in reverse. Figure 9.
The registration / preheat assembly reads the skew and position of the media and uses this
information to determine the amount of de-skew required to orient the media correctly from
inboard to outboard. De-skewing is accomplished by intentionally skewing the paper twice. The
sum of the two actions causes the media to be both aligned inboard to outboard and the lead
edge to be de-skewed. Due to these movements, the motion of the paper through the registration / preheat module is sometimes referred to as 'wag'.
February 2013
8-60
Figure 9 Registration skew drive
Figure 10 Registration / Preheat airflow
The knob on the front of the registration / preheat assembly is marked with dots indicating the
current operating position. If there is no dot in alignment with the arrow, the registration / preheat assembly is in the ready to open position.
Figure 10. Air pumps are activated just before the paper enters the registration / preheat
assembly and deactivated soon after the paper exits the registration / preheat assembly.
Position 1 = widest stance = ~ 11 inch (LEF) or B size - Load outer rollers only
Position 2 = narrowest stance = Statement, A5, Smaller Envelopes. Load inner-most rollers
only
Position 3 = middle stance = ~8.5 inch Load middle most rollers only. Generally for 8.5 X 11
inch SEF or legal (8.5 X 14 inch)
Position 0 = Open, when set to 0, the registration / preheat assembly can be opened via motor
or manually
To assist in making these rapid movements, the registration / preheat assembly employs an air
system which reduces friction on the media while helping to hold it in contact with the heated
lower plate. Air from two air pumps (connected in parallel) is fed to the center of the eight upper
platelets. Four platelets on each end of the registration / preheat module. This air helps to force
the media down while 'floating' the platelets, thereby allowing easy movement of the media.
Loss of this air system may cause smearing on duplex prints, poor lead edge registration,
image quality issues due to poor heating of the media and / or skewing of the media.
February 2013
8-61
Figure 11.
Jam Clearance
If the machine jams and media is located in the registration / preheat assembly, the inboard
paper path drive motor will run in reverse until the stance sensor (at the rear) is actuated indicating the registration / preheat assembly is in the '0' position. This is the position which will
allow the registration / preheat assembly to open. The outboard motor will then run in reverse
for a designated amount of time to open the registration / preheat assembly and to position the
heat shield (which hangs from the bottom of the horizontal paper path) in the open position.
The motor then maintains this open position. Two LEDs on the bottom of the heat shield will be
illuminated to help in jam clearance. To close the registration / preheat assembly, the front
motor will run very slowly in the forward direction to lower the registration / preheat assembly.
Jams may occur in the registration / preheat assembly if the scan bar senses more skew or lateral movement than the registration / preheat assembly can rectify, resulting in a partial image
being left on the drum and / or transfix roller.
Drum Thermal Cutout
AC power to the drum heaters run through the thermal cutouts on the registration / preheat
assembly thermal cutout PWB. If the drum temperature is higher than the nominal operating
range (108 C), the thermal cutouts on the PWB open and interrupt AC power to the drum heaters.
Figure 11 Preheater plates and air supply

Heating of the media
In order to assure a good transfer of image from the drum to the media and to assure a good
bond of the ink, the media is pre-heated. This is accomplished by a large heating surface
below the lower paper path plate of the registration / preheat assembly. Air pressure forces the
paper to contact the heated lower metal plate. A loss of air pressure to the platelets will probably not result in jams but may contribute to lead edge mis-registration. Often the first indication
of an air pressure failure is missing pixels on side two of two-sided media. This is mainly
caused by insufficient heat since the paper is not being held fully against the heated plate.
February 2013
8-62
Print Marking Unit and Drum Assembly

Marking Unit
The Marking Unit (MU) is composed of an enclosure (drawer) mounted on rails that allow the
MU to be pulled out from the IME for service. A fan and duct cools the electronics. The drawer
structure is composed of two injection molded plastic frames connected by sheet metal, which
is comprised of the MU frame mid-wall and MU frame floor. A MU Electronics Cover is removable for servicing the MU electronics. Figure 1 illustrates the MU construction.
The MU includes the Staggered Full Width Array (SFWA) carriages that support the printheads
which deposit ink on the drum, the electronics to drive them and the Head maintenance system. A series of linkages are employed to move the carriages between functional positions
using the drive mechanism on the back of the enclosure. The ink reservoir and valve manifold
are also attached to the back of the MU and the heated ink umbilicals run from the reservoir to
the carriages. Figure 2. The MU comprises the following components:
Printheads
Head Maintenance Wiper
Waste Tray
Umbilicals
Carriages
Ink Reservoir
Carriage Drive
Figure 1 Marking unit drawer

The drawer is mounted on full extension drawer slides, allowing it to be pulled out for service.
When the drawer is pushed back into the machine it registers to the chassis at four points, two
at the front and two at the back. The connection is made by two cylindrical protrusions moulded
into the front and two cylindrical holes moulded into the rear drawer frames that are mated with
features (extruded hole and raised pins) in the chassis. Once the drawer is pushed in and registered by the frame pins, fasteners are used to secure the drawer. Two fasteners are installed
near the front registration pins.
Figure 2 Marking unit components

The carriages register to the drum frame at three points. Three pins on each carriage, two primary pins front and back, are forced into contact with features on the drum frame and a third
secondary pin, is forced against an additional contact point to lock the carriage.
February 2013
8-63
Head Maintenance
Carriage Motion
Figure 3. During head maintenance activities, the carriages are positioned for optimal purge
and wiping efficiency. The carriage drive system positions the carriages as required
The carriages are supported by the MU drawer frames by two different methods. The lower
carriage is supported on either end by two support pins attached to the carriage end plates.
These pins slide along slots in the frames resulting in linear motion between functional positions. The upper carriage is supported by an arm on either end that pivots about a pin on the
drawer frames. The carriage drive system for each carriage incorporates a drive shaft connected to crank links at either end of the carriage. This crank link is pined to another link that is
in turn pinned to the carriage. When the drive shaft turns, the carriage is moved left and right
as shown in Figure 4.
The printheads are purged with a 4psi pressure purge to correct weak or missing jets. The
function of the printhead maintenance system is to wipe the printheads after ink purge to
remove waste ink and debris. The wiper moves in a wiper track that guides the vertical motion
of the wiper parallel to the printhead face during the jet stack wipe. The two wipers on the wiper
carriage wipe two heads at a time; both upper heads or both lower heads. The wiper drive system moves the wiper carriage to the home position, to the upper heads, and to the lower
heads. The shuttling gearbox and cable / paddle system move the wipers in the cross-process
direction to align with either the upper or lower printheads. Figure 3 shows the location of the
printhead maintenance components.
Figure 4 Cross-process (X-axis) carriage motion
Figure 3 Head maintenance components
February 2013
8-64
Marking Unit Drive

The MU drive employs a two-output gearbox contained in the SFWA carriages. A gearbox that
allows active switching between two output shafts is depicted in Figure 5.
A stepper motor operates through an idler gear to drive a pair of cog gears. These gears have
square tooth cogs on the top of the gears. On top of these gears are mating pairs of gears with
a spring between to keep the gears separated enough that cogs cannot mesh. On top of the
cog gear pairs is another spring and selector slide. A small, open loop DC motor, through one
reduction stage (compound gear) drives the previously mentioned selector slide. This slide has
inclined surfaces, one on either side of the cog gear shafts. Figure 6.
Figure 5 Marking unit drive

Figure 6 Gear rotation
February 2013
8-65
To select an output (Figure 7 and Figure 8, upper or lower carriage), the DC motor is activated
moving the output selection slide completely in one direction until the appropriate feature on
the top of the gear runs into a mating surface on the gearbox cover. The inclined slide surface
pushes on the upper cog spring driving the cog gear down to mesh with it's mating cog gear.
Each upper cog gear is connected to a reduction section (two compound gears) and through
idlers to the output gear that is connected to the carriage drive shafts.
Figure 8 Gear rotation lower carriage

A home sensor is employed to initialize carriage motion. The sensor is located on the front
frame of the Marking Unit, and detects home position via a feature molded into the underside
of the Upper and Lower Carriage Output Gears.
Upper and Lower Carriages
Figure 7 Gear rotation upper carriage
The SFWA and carriage are known as the SFWA-Carriage when assembled together. SFWA
refers to the inner, moving portion, which holds 2 printheads. The SFWA travels along the xaxis while supported by the carriage. The carriage provides a structure that is fixed to the drum
frame during printing. The carriage retracts away from the drum to allow printheads to be
purged and wiped clean. In addition, there is a carriage position farthest from the drum in which
the SFWA is locked to the service drawer frame. This restrains the SFWA-Carriage and x-axis
relative to the drawer structure during shipping.
February 2013
8-66
Marking Unit Electrical
Ink Loader
The MU electrical components are illustrated in Figure 9.
Figure 10. Ink can be added to the ink loader provided that the machine is powered on and sufficient space is available to accommodate additional ink. An ink loader door sensor is actuated
when the ink loader door is opened.
Figure 10 Ink loader components
Figure 9 Marking unit electrical

Service Access
Moving the upper carriage to the full forward (print) position allows access to components on
the top side of the upper carriage. The Lower Carriage must be moved to the forward (print)
position and then disengaged from the compliant link arms. The lower carriage can then be
moved even further forward and rotated down with the carriage support pin resting on a service
support shelf to allow access to the top of the lower carriage printheads.
February 2013
8-67
Key Plate
Figure 11. The key plate moves to a position determined by the configuration.
Figure 12 Ink stick loading

If the SKU sensors detect the correct ink stick, then the belts continue to advance the ink into
the ink loader, allowing additional sticks to be inserted. If the SKU sensors detect an incorrect
ink stick, a user interface message requests that the user remove the stick and a software
counter is updated to record that an incorrect ink stick was inserted. It is possible for the user to
force the ink stick forward into the ink loader rather than removing the ink stick as requested. If
this happens, the printer will continue to operate. Figure 12.
Figure 11 Key plate

Once inserted, the ink stick is advanced by the belt drive approximately 50 mm. Stock Keeping
Unit (SKU) sensors in the ink loader check features on the bottom of the ink stick and determine which type of ink is present. One sensor is employed for the CMY sticks, distinguishing
between the NA/EU sold sticks and the other 2 SKU's. The black ink loader chute employs 2
SKU sensors which can distinguish all three SKU families.
February 2013
8-68
Ink stick transport
Ink Stick Transport
If the stick is confirmed as being of an approved shape, the loader then feeds the stick past the
SKU sensor shown in Figure 13. The ink stick moves past the ink present sensor and by drive
and gravity to the ink low sensor and eventually to the melt plate. The ink block drive belts turn
for a sufficient length of time to ensure that the ink block will traverse the entire length of the
loader channel if necessary (i.e even if only one ink stick is present in the loader channel).
Figure 14
Figure 14 Ink Stick Transport

If the ink loader suspects an ink stick jam, the ink belt drive motor is run in reverse for one second and then forward again to attempt to clear the jam. This may occur if the system does not
detect an ink stick via the low ink sensor within an appropriate length of time after detecting its
insertion into the loader.
Figure 13 Ink stick detection

Each ink loader chute includes an ink low sensor, which is actuated when about two usable ink
sticks remain in the chute. The ink low sensor (reflective) is used to estimate when ink will run
out. Once the ink low sensor is no longer actuated, an algorithm determines by average usage
in copies and area coverage when it is anticipated to run out of this color ink. An appropriate
message is displayed on the user interface in time for the customer to insert additional ink
sticks. In order to ensure that the algorithm works consistently if the ink loader is replaced, the
NVM counters should be reset and the new ink reservoir should be filled at least to the ink low
sensor while power is on.
Printing stops when the ink loader has about one-third ink stick remaining in any chute. Control
panel messages indicate time to order ink, ink low, or ink out. True ink empty is detected by
monitoring the temperature change rate of the melt plates, when no ink is present the warm up
is much quicker and an ink empty message can be displayed on the user interface.
February 2013
8-69
Ink Melt Heaters

Ink sticks are delivered by the ink loader and held against the ink melt plates by gravity only.
The system contains four melt heater / plate assemblies, one for each ink stick colour (cyan,
magenta, yellow and black), Figure 15. The ink melt plate is heated using a ceramic Positive
Thermal Coefficient (PTC) disk to emphasis safety in the ink melt system; as the temperature
of the melt plate rises, the electrical resistance increases reducing the electrical current drawn
by the heater. When the melt heater reaches the correct temperature the part of the ink stick
that contacts the plate melts and the liquid ink runs into the low pressure ink reservoir below.
CVU (Check valve unit)
Figure 16 Ink reservoir detail
Figure 15 Ink melt heaters
Ink Reservoir
The ink reservoir consists of a low pressure ink reservoir, a high pressure ink reservoir, 16 disk
valves, a reservoir heater and manifold plates. Refer to Figure 16.
Melted ink is received on the low pressure side from the ink loader melt plates through holes at
the top of each color reservoir. Each color reservoir is divided into four areas (one for each
printhead). If the air solenoid for a particular area is not energized, then a mechanical flapper
valve between the low and high pressure side opens to allow the ink level in the low and high
pressure side to equalize up to the fill limit determined by the ink level sensor. If the air solenoid
for the a particular storage area is enabled then the high pressure side will go to ~ 4 lbs. of
pressure and this pressure will close the mechanical 'flapper' valve between the high and low
pressure sides of the reservoir. The low pressure side may continue to fill but the high pressure
side cannot fill until the air solenoid for that storage area is de-energized.
Varying air pressure (purge, fill or low pressure assist) is accomplished by an electrically operated valve on the air pump motor assembly. When energized (open) the pressure drops for low
pressure assist which places enough pressure on the jets so that the ink will stick out of the jet
and provide lubrication for the cleaning blade but will not run, resulting in increased wastage.
When the solenoid is energized, ink flows from the high pressure side to the ink router plates
which comprise the lower portion of the ink reservoir, then to the appropriate umbilical connection and on to the appropriate printhead.
February 2013
8-70
Low Pressure Reservoir
Ink Reservoir Heater
The low pressure reservoir is a thermally conductive part with four chambers, each of which
has four outlets at the bottom for a total of sixteen outlets. Ink travels out at the bottom of the
chamber, and each outlet orifice also houses a disk valve. A wire mesh filter is placed inside of
each low pressure chamber to remove contaminants.
Figure 18. Sandwiched between the manifold plate and the high pressure reservoir, the reservoir heater maintains the set point temperature. The ink reservoir is brought to and maintained
at temperature by two rod type AC heaters which are thermally protected from overheat.
High Pressure Reservoir

The high pressure reservoir is a thermally conductive part with sixteen chambers, four per
color. Features in the dividing walls of the chamber act to stop the disk valve in its open position. Upon actuation, pressurized air enters the opening at the top of the chamber, and ink is
forced against the disk valve, which causes it to close and directs the ink through an exit path
opposite the disk valve.
Normally Open Disk Valve
The normally open disk valve is 7 mm in diameter. The contact seat is an O shaped flat
around the outlet orifice of the low pressure ink reservoir. Figure 17.
Figure 18 Ink reservoir heaters

Manifold Plate
The manifold plate routes ink from the 16 high pressure reservoir chamber outlets to the umbilicals. The manifold plate channels the ink into four rows, each row containing CYMK. Each
channel has an outlet, which passes through a small boss on the other side of the plate. This
boss acts as a seat for a normally-closed check valve.
Umbilical Connector Plate
The connector plate completes ink routing to the umbilicals. The start of each ink channel
houses a spring and provides a recess for the normally closed check valve. The outlet of each
channel is a through hole where the tube fitting will be pressed in.
Normally Closed Check Valves
The normally closed check valves press against the top of the boss on the manifold using a
spring that acts on the metal side. The pressure applied to the high pressure ink reservoir in
order to deliver ink will act to overcome the spring force and open the valve.
Ink Level Sense
Figure 17 Check valves
Ink level detection, Figure 19 is provided by one of two capacitive sensor assemblies. Each
assembly has two capacitive sensor probes that sit in the low pressure reservoir and monitor
ink level for two colors (1 probe in each ink reservoir). One set monitors the black and yellow
while the other set monitors magenta and cyan.
February 2013
8-71
Service Access
The ink reservoir is attached to the rear frame of the marking unit. It is held in place by two
screws and is removed by lifting the reservoir until the two locating pins clear the frame.
Remove the ink reservoir with the marking unit drawer fully extended.
Waste Tray
Waste Tray Detect Sensor
Refer to Figure 20.
Figure 19 Level detection

Mica Insulation Plates
Mica insulation plates surround the ink reservoir and help to maintain the ink reservoir temperatures. The plates provide excellent thermal qualities at a low cost but are fragile and are
therefore spared separately.
Air Pump
A rolling diaphragm air pump provides the air pressure required to:
Supply ink to the printheads.
Purge the printheads.
Following a purge, provide low pressure assist until the printheads have been wiped by
the head maintenance (HM) assembly.
Figure 20 Waste tray detect sensor
A manifold and a series of valves direct the air pressure to perform these functions. The system contains twenty normally-vented three-way valves. Sixteen of the valves are used for ink
delivery and four for printhead maintenance. The air pump relies on pulse width modulation
(PWM) control to provide the correct flow rate for the varying functions.
The Low Pressure Assist (LPA) valve and the air pump are connected to an accumulator. The
LPA valve is a normally-open two way valve that closes when the system is required to
increase pressure for ink supply or a printhead purge, and opens, venting system pressure,
when ink supply or the purge is complete. To provide LPA, the pump shifts PWM values and
the LPA valve opens, dropping system pressure from approximately 4 psi to approximately
0.05 psi. The accumulator is a small plastic tank that houses an air filter and provides additional air volume rendering the purge and ink supply masses more robust to air leakage and
system variation.
February 2013
8-72
Waste Tray Lock Solenoid
Ink on Drum (IOD) Monitoring
Refer to Figure 21.
The IME contains a subsystem that periodically monitors the quality of the image being applied
to the drum. This system automatically detects and corrects a number of parameters in order to
maintain optimum print quality. The IOD is an A size scan bar located at the 6 o'clock position
beneath the drum. This is the same type of scan bar used in the registration / preheat assembly for skew measurement. The primary function of the IOD scanbar is to read special test
prints on the drum and send this information to the controller to maintain alignment and efficiency of the four printheads.
Figure 22 IOD components

As the scan bar is ~ 8.5 inches long and the drum is ~ 12 inches in length, the IOD is mounted
to a rail system that allows movement of the IOD to front and rear positions. This assures the
IOD can properly 'see' the transition area between each of the four printheads. Figure 22.
Figure 21 Waste tray lock solenoid
Since the IOD is located beneath the drum, it is possible to contaminate the IOD lens. To help
avoid this, the IOD lens is covered by a plastic shield which remains in place except when the
IOD is actually reading images on the drum.IOD calibrations occur on a regular basis depending on setting in software, but checks of the printhead alignment are more frequent until the
machine is considered thermally stable. This is to reduce misalignment caused by thermal
shifts to the Staggered Full Width Arrays (SFWAs) and Image Marking Engine (IME). Presently,
when the heads are re-docked, the thermal 'timer' restarts and IOD calibrations will be more
frequent until considered thermally stable. There is no post-adjustment IOD validate process;
adjustments are made and then assumed to be correct.
The IOD has three color outputs (RBG) that are used to achieve the best contrast for the various colors printed on the drum.
February 2013
8-73
The IOD module enables a variety of system functions on the ColorQube. Its primary function
is to align the four printheads to create a seamless image. This is called head-to-head alignment, or H2H alignment. A second function is to adjust the jetting intensity of the heads, again
to maintain consistent intensity across the entire image. This is called head-to-head intensity,
or H2H intensity. Intensity for the whole printhead is set at once, jets cannot be individually
adjusted for intensity. A third function is to detect and correct weak and missing jets by substitution, a process known as jet masking.
Table 1 Measurement and corrective Actions for Front and Rear IOD Scans
Table 1 Measurement and Correction Actions for Front and Rear IOD Scans
Head Positions
Front Scan
Rear Scan
Head 1 Roll
Measure and adjust.
Cannot be measured during a rear

scan. Adjustment cannot be performed.
Head 2 Roll
Measure. Do not adjust.
Measure and adjust.
IOD Operational Sequence
Head 3 Roll
Measure and adjust.
The IOD sequence is only performed from standby state. The IOD sequence typically occurs
every 500 pages. The printer stops and performs an IOD rear scan then waits another 500
pages and performs IOD front scan. Scans continue to alternate between rear and front every
500 pages. Manually activated scans are executed from diagnostics. The technician selects
either a front or rear IOD scan.
Head 4 Roll
Cannot be measured during a

front scan. Adjustment cannot
be performed.
Measure and adjust.
Head 1 Y-offset
Measure and adjust.

scan. Adjust as if stitched to printhead
2.
Head 2 Y-offset
Measure and adjust.
Head 3 Y-offset
Anchor.
Anchor.
Head 4 Y-offset

front scan. Adjustment cannot
be performed.
Measure and adjust.
Head 1 X-stitch
Measure and adjust.

scan. Adjust as if stitched to printhead
2.
When an IOD sequence is executed, the following steps are performed:

1.
A drum maintenance cycle is performed to prepare the drum for imaging.
2.
The scan bar is moved to the rear (or front) position. The unmarked drum surface is read
with and without illumination to establish black and white calibration levels. This is done
while the drum is rotating, so that an average is achieved. After calibration, the scan bar
moves to the park position, which is the approximate center of travel of the IOD assembly.
3.
The target image is jetted onto the drum.
4.
The scan bar is moved to the rear (or front) position. A snapshot of the image is acquired
by the IOD by rotating the drum with the target image across the scan bar. After the IOD
has acquired the image, the scan bar is protected and then moved to the park position.
Head 2 X-stitch
Measure and adjust.
The acquired target is analyzed to calculate head position.
Head 3 X-stitch
Anchor.
Anchor.
Appropriate head position corrections are calculated and applied. There are four types of
corrections:
Head 4 X-stitch

front scan, Adjustment cannot
be performed.
Measure and adjust.
5.
6.
Each printhead has a small motor to adjust printhead rotation in the radial axis. The
IOD correction step immediately moves these motors.
Each printhead has a Y-axis offset value from the drum home position that controls
jet timing for all jets on that head during imaging. The IOD correction step updates
these Y-offset values.
Each SFWA has an X-Axis offset value from the SFWA home position that controls
the starting position of the SFWAs during imaging. The IOD correction step updates
these X-offset values.
7.
Each SFWA has a head that is fixed, and a second head with a small motor to adjust
X-position relative to the fixed head. The IOD correction step immediately moves
these motors.
A cleaning unit cycle is performed to scrape the target image from the drum.
IOD Sequence Types

Since the IOD cannot see one of the printheads during a scan, it is unable to correct head
alignment for all four heads in one scan sequence. In its present form, the IOD system is only
able to correct printhead alignment based on what it sees during that sequence. Also, it does
not retain scan data to be interpreted by a subsequent scan sequence to provide a single
adjustment covering all printheads.
The IOD has no home sensor. It drives fully in one direction until it stalls and assumes it is fully
forward or rearward. Then it counts clock pulses to the central park position.
IOD reads drum run out at home (from the drum encoder) and at 6 degree intervals. These values are stored and used to set Y axis run out variance of timing of the jets on the printheads.
This calibration should be performed whenever the drum encoder is serviced (which may
change the home position) or whenever the drum is changed (which will change the run out).
IOD Printhead efficiency maintenance
The efficiency of the printheads is measured by Closed Loop Dropmass (CLD) calibration.
There are two CLD measurement processes, cldBaseline and cldAdjust. The cldBaseline process measures the efficiency of each printhead when it is first installed onto a printer (time
zero). The value of the cldBaseline measurement is stored in the machines NVRAM. The cldAdjust process measures the efficiency of each printhead periodically over its life time, and
applies incremental head-drive voltage adjustments to maintain the original printhead efficiency captured by the cldBaseline process at time zero.
The cldAdjust and cldBaseline process are similar and include the following steps;
Calibration of the IOD scanbar sensor.
Render and print measurement target into the drum surface.
Scan an image of the drum surface using the IOD scan bar.
February 2013
8-74
An analysis algorithm identifies the printed pattern kernals scanned from the drum surface
and then performs digital signal processing to reduce the raw image data into a set of
numerical arrays which quantify the efficiency of the printhead at the time of printing.
The image is scrape from the drum surface using the drum maintenance subsystem.
In the case of cldBaseline calibration, the efficiency valuations are stored to the machines
NVRAM, and later used for the cldAdjust calibration process.
In the case of cldAdjust calibration, the efficiency valuations are used to calculate a voltage correction that is applied to the printheads in order to maintain the printhead efficiency captured at the original cldBaseline measurement.
Drum
The Drum and enclosed heaters form the key portion of the system where imaging takes place.
The Drum Assembly and transfix system are separate, but interrelated. The front and rear
drum frames provide support to the drum and transfix assembly, Figure 23. This section
describes the drum assembly. The next section goes into more detail about the transfix system.
In operation, the image to be printed is formed on the rotating drum. The registration / preheat
assembly heats the media to prepare it for image transfer. The heated media is then passed
between the drum (now rotating much more slowly) and the transfix roller. Under the pressure
between the drum and the transfix roller, the image is transferred. An encoder disk and sensor
on the front end of the drum monitors the drums speed and position.
The drum heater heats the surface of the drum for imaging, Figure 24. The drum heater does
not rotate. The heater is located inside the drum and is controlled by the drum driver PWB. The
drum heater consists of two resistive heater coils that operate in series for 220V and in parallel
for 110V operation. The series / parallel operation is controlled by the drum driver PWB. Two
temperature sensors (one front and one rear) in contact with the drum surface monitor the
drum temperature. The drum driver PWB interprets the sensors signal and turns on the drum
heater and drum fan to heat the drum, or turns on the drum fan alone to cool the drum.
Figure 24 Drum heaters and temperature sensors
Figure 23 Drum frames
The drum is driven by the drum drive motor through a single reduction belt drive, the motor
rotates the drum at a high speed for imaging and a constant low speed for image transfer. The
drum drive, Figure 25, uses an active tension system to allow the drum pulley to float while the
spring adjusts the belt tension.
February 2013
8-75
Cleaning Unit
The function of the cleaning unit is to uniformly apply a thin layer of release agent (silicon oil)
onto the drums surface, while clearing the drum surface of contaminants. Prior to imaging, the
drum receives a uniform coating of release agent applied by the cleaning unit roll. The amount
of release agent used is bounded by major failure modes and controlled by the oil metering
blade. If too little release agent is applied to the drum, the ink will not completely transfer and
the print quality will degrade as well as increase the amount of ink that the cleaning unit must
clean off the drum before making the next print. In addition, too little release agent will cause
stripping failures, as the ink will not release from the drum. If too much release agent is
applied, it saturates the paper with release agent and, during duplex printing, prevents complete transfer to the second side of the paper. Once the drum has been coated with release
agent, the roller is moved away from the drum surface to enable the written image to be
formed.
Figure 27. The cleaning unit utilizes two release agent level sensors; a low sensor consisting of
a hall effect switch on a float and an out sensor that detects the pressure difference when
pumping air instead of release agent. This can occur when the release agent reservoir is
depleted. A software algorithm is used to estimate the amount of release agent remaining in
the cleaning unit based on the amount of paper and ink run through the printer. This algorithm
in combination with the two level sensors and the knowledge of the release agent in the reservoir in a new cleaning unit, allows an approximate level sensing ability at all release agent levels.
Figure 25 Drum drive
Drum Encoder
Figure 26. The drum encoder provides drum position information.
Once the release agent reservoir is depleted, the cleaning unit can support the printing of several thousand additional prints by using the release agent in the cleaning unit roller. All level
sense and life information is stored in an EEPROM inside of the cleaning unit allowing a cleaning unit to be moved from machine to machine without loss of information.
The cleaning unit provides approximate percentage of life information until the reservoir is
depleted. When the unit can support a further 30,000 A-size prints, the cleaning unit low
release agent state is reported. When the reservoir is depleted, the cleaning unit reports a very
low release agent state and begins an A-size print remaining countdown, starting from 3000
prints. The cleaning unit reorder message will appear based on a calculated number of days
remaining. When the counter reaches zero, the cleaning unit is no longer functional and must
be replaced. The average cleaning unit life is 285,000 prints for the average ink coverage of
11% fill on A / A4 size office media. As ink coverage increases, the cleaning unit life will
decrease. Coated and smooth media will also use more release agent, which also causes the
cleaning unit life to decrease.
Figure 26 Drum encoder
February 2013
8-76
Figure 27 Cleaning unit components

Because the oil metering blade must engage and disengage from the drum a narrow oil bar
naturally occurs where disengagement of the oil metering blade occurs. The speed with which
the roll and blade are removed from contact with the drum, as well as the timing of the blade
and roll movement will determine the size and shape of the oil bar. The amount of gel (oil and
ink mixture) in the oil, will also impact the oil bar geometry. If the oil bar is too large, the transfix
roll or stripper blade will pass through the oil bar and potentially become contaminated with oil.
NOTE: As the cleaning unit is removed, the cleaning unit latch is moved to the front to lock the
mechanism in place. The cams are locked in the down position and the cleaning unit can be reinstalled easily.Care should be taken not to run the cams while in diagnostics unless this latch
is unlatched (in and down). CRUM corruption may occur if cleaning unit is removed while writing. To avoid this, the cleaning unit latch solenoid waits ~2 seconds after opening the front door
interlock before unlocking the cleaning unit.
Cleaning Unit initialization
Figure 28. Cleaning unit presence is determined by attempting to communicate with the
CRUM. If the cleaning unit is present, full cleaning unit travel operation is checked during system initialization. During the full travel operation, the cam position required to lift the blade to
the blade engage position is determined by monitoring the cleaning unit lift motor following
error. The position where the oil metering blade makes contact with the drum will also be determined based on a spike in either the motor drive voltage of the drum (as it is spinning) and/or a
spike in the motor drive voltage while lifting the cleaning unit. A cleaning unit operation is performed at the end of mechanical initialization.
Figure 28 Cleaning unit unitization
February 2013
8-77
Figure 29. Cleaning unit processing
Cleaning unit Components

The cleaning unit comprises the following components:
Oil roller
Metering blade
Cleaning unit drive motor
Solenoid valve
Sump pump
Delivery pump
Oil return
Oil Roller
The oil supply roller is loaded with oil that is applied to the drum when the roll is moved into
contact with the drum surface. It is made from a continuous web wrapped into a roll and then
loaded with oil. The amount of oil applied to the drum is dependent on the penetration of the
roll into the drum surface and the amount of oil left in the roll. The rate of oil migration through
the roll is another factor in determining the oil applied to the drum surface.
Metering Blade
The metering blade meters the oil applied to the drum by the roller. The blade is spring loaded
against the drum. The amount of blade force on the drum determines the oil rate. In addition,
the roughness of the drum, as well as the edge condition of the blade have an affect on the oil
rate. The metering blade is required to clean any ink that has not been transferred to paper off
of the drum.
Cleaning Unit Drive
The roll and blade are driven into engagement with the drum via a stepper motor and the
cleaning unit camshaft, Figure 31. The camshaft supports two sets of cams for independently
actuating the roller and blade assembly. The stepper motor must be able to move fast enough
to disengage the cleaning unit in sufficiently short time so as to minimize the size of the oil bar.
In addition, the timing between the two sets of cams are such that the roller touches the drum
after the blade has been dropped and leaves the drum before the blade has been lifted. This
order of disengagement minimizes the size of the oil bar. The motor that drives the cleaning
unit engagement is a 1.8 degree stepper motor. This motor is operated at 8 microsteps per natural motor step. The resistance of the motor is 1.8 ohms and the current necessary to drive the
motor is 3 amps.
Oil Return
Figure 30. The return oil wick is used to recirculate the oil that is metered off of the drum by the
blade back into the roll to be reapplied to the drum. The oil rate through this wick must be
greater than the amount of oil metered off the drum by the metering blade. The gel shield prevents the gel (oil and ink mixture) that is removed from the drum by the metering blade from
contaminating the oil roller. The shield directs the gel away from the roll and accumulates the
gel in the housing. The shield also acts as a spring to hold the wick material against the oil
roller.
Figure 29 Cleaning unit management
February 2013
8-78
Once the cam has been homed, Figure 31, the cleaning unit drives to an engaged position.
There are two variables to the motor profile that will be changed as a function of the cleaning
unit supply roll age. These two variables are the penetration of the supply roll into the drum
surface and the time between blade landing and supply roll landing. The engage motion profile
is initiated by the drum position. When the drum (and the expected location of the lead edge of
the image) rotates to the required position, the engage profile described below is commanded.
The variable time and penetration will be adjusted based on the age of the supply roll in the
machine. As the roll ages, the roll penetration will have to be increased and the time from blade
engage and roll touch will be shortened.
Figure 30 Cleaning unit oil path

Figure 31 Cleaning unit camshaft
Cleaning Unit Operation

For every print cycle, the home, engage, and disengage moves are required. During the normal run mode, the drive motor will first position the cam so that the sensor signal will transition
from high to low, refer to Table 2:
Table 2 Motor position
Motor Direction
Home Sensor State
CCW
Low
CW
High
The motor motion profile to disengage the cleaning unit is again initiated by the drum position.
The motion profile is the inverse of the engage and must accommodate the total engage
motion, which is a function of the cleaning unit roll age.
At ready state the cleaning unit performs an auto cleaning cycle after every IOD cycle to capture dust particles which may collect on the drum. At the end of every cleaning cycle, the CU
cam will be returned all the way to the home position. When a print cycle is started, the cleaning unit cam is engaged against the cam followers to minimize noise and wear on the cam and
cam followers. During print state, a cleaning cycle is performed after every image transfer
cycle. There may be special multi pass prints which do not require a transfix cycle until the vary
last pass is completed.
Fault state drives the cleaning unit cam to the cleaning unit removal position so that the cam
can be removed by the customer. The cleaning unit is locked if any of the machine doors are
open. The cleaning unit cam motor is locked away from the home position if the cleaning unit
cartridge is not detected.
February 2013
8-79
Stored Parameters
These cleaning unit parameters are stored locally in the End of Life (EOL) device and mirrored
in system NVRAM.
Cleaning unit operations performed (count)
Oil consumption
Initial oil pressure
First use
Cleaning unit serial number
Control Signals
The Drum Driver Board provides control signals to the cleaning unit, refer to Table 3.
Table 3 Cleaning Unit Control Signals
Signal
Description
I/O
Type
Comment
MTR1
Motor drive phase A
Input
Analog
Encoder serial data
MTR2
Motor drive phase A
Input
Analog
Encoder serial data
MTR3
Motor drive phase B
Input
Analog
Encoder serial data
MTR3
Motor drive phase B
Input
Analog
Encoder serial data
Home
Home position sensor
Output TTL level DM Camshaft Home
GND
Ground
Output
+5V
Sensor Vcc
Input
Chassis ground
Figure 32 Transfix components
TTL level Sensor supply voltage

Transfix Linkages
NOTE: The cleaning unit makes a ground connection via a feature at the front of the cleaning
unit. This mechanical ground makes prior to the rear electrical connector connecting and
remains grounded till after the electrical connector at the rear disconnects during cleaning unit
removal. Loss of this ground may lead to cleaning unit circuitry failure because very high electrical charges can build with the movement of the oil over cleaning unit components. The
ground through the electrical connection is insufficient to fully handle the current discharge to
ground.
The transfix linkages apply force to the transfix roller to bond the image to the media. Figure 33
illustrates the transfix linkages.
Transfix/Strip
Figure 32. Transfix assembly comprises the following components:
Transfix linkage assemblies
Transfix motors
Compound transfix gears
Transfix roller
Transfix encoders
Transfix stripper blade assembly
Figure 33 Transfix linkage motion
February 2013
8-80
Transfix Stripper Blade

The transfix stripper blade removes adhered paper from the transfix roller and directs it to the
exit portion of the paper path. The stripper blade is attached to an aluminum extrusion using an
adhesive strip. These components, along with the adhesive, comprise the transfix stripper
assembly. The assembly is constrained in proximity to the transfix roller such that the blade is
always in contact with the roller surface.
Pre exit
sensor, 12
Front latch
cam
REAR VIEW
LED PWB
Front latch
fork
Post Fix Transport

The post fix transport takes the printed sheets from the drum and delivers them to the output
transport. The post fix transport comprises the following components:
Post fix transport motor, M4 - A stepper motor, located at the rear of the post fix transport. The
motor turns in the forward direction to power the nips L and J, via a chain of gears. In the
reverse direction, this motor turns the eccentric cams that slide home the latching mechanism.
Refer to Figure 34.
Latch
sensor
Blade
cover
Post fix sensor (#11) - A reflective sensor, located before nip J. It is the first sensor to detect the
marked sheet, freshly stripped from the drum. Refer to Figure 34.
Stripper
blade
Nip J - Driven by the post fix transport motor, M4. Nip J transports the sheet to the pre-exit sensor, 12 and nip L. Refer to Figure 34.
Nip L
Post fix
sensor, 11
Pre-exit sensor, (#12) - A reflective sensor, located just before nip L. The sensor detects the
sheets fed to nip L, and out to the output transport. Refer to Figure 34.
Nip L - The last nip in the post fix transport. Nip L transfers the sheets to the output transport
and is driven by the post fix transport motor, M4. Refer to Figure 34.
Blade solenoid
Post fix transport
motor, M4
Stripper solenoid - A 48V solenoid, driven from the drum driver PWB. Before the solenoid is
actuated, a small gap is present between the stripper blade and the drum. When the solenoid
is actuated, the gap closes, and the stripper blade contacts the drum momentarily to catch the
leading edge of the sheet and strip it from the drum. Refer to Figure 34.
Jam clearance
damper
Nip J
Figure 34 Post fix transport components
Latch sensor - A flag sensor, located at the front of the post fix transport. The sensor detects
the position of the front latch. A flag under the front latch actuates the sensor in the latched
position. This sensor is under the control of the drum driver PWB. Refer to Figure 34.
Jam clearance latches - Two latch forks, at the front and rear of the post fix transport, operated
by cams, driven by the post fix transport motor, M4. The latches prevent the jam clearance
guide opening during normal operation. Refer to Figure 34.
Jam clearance LEDs - An LED PWB is located between nip J and nip L. This PWB holds four
LEDs, to illuminate the jam clearance area. Refer to Figure 34.
February 2013
8-81
Output Transport
Overview
REAR VIEW
The output transport performs the following functions:
Delivering printed media to output module, (LCCS, HVF or OCT).
Returning the duplex media for second-side marking.
Performing the final inversion on single-side tabs and duplex pre-drilled or pre-printed
stock.
The output transport comprises the following components:

Output transport motor, M5 - A stepper motor, located at the rear of the output transport driving
nip N and nip P via two gears and two toothed belts. Refer to Figure 1.
Output diverter
solenoid
Exit sensor, 15 - A reflective sensor, located immediately before nip N. The sensor detects
sheets being fed either from nip P or nip L, to nip N. Refer to Figure 2.
Nip N - The exit nip, feeding sheets to the output module. Refer to Figure 2.
Nip P - Used to feed sheets back for second-side marking. Nip P is also used, in conjunction
with the output diverters, in performing the final inversion of single-sided tabs and duplex
drilled or pre-printed sheets. Refer to Figure 2.
Output diverters
112T belt
Duplex sensor (#13) - A reflective sensor detecting the sheets going for second-side marking.
The sensor also detects the trailing edges of sheets being inverted before being fed to the output module. Refer to Figure 2.
92T belt
Output diverter solenoid - Before the solenoid is actuated, the diverters are positioned so that
sheets arriving from the post fix transport, or from the horizontal transport, are fed to the output
nip N. When the solenoid is actuated, the diverters are positioned so that sheets from the post
fix transport are fed back to the horizontal transport. Once at the horizontal transport, the
sheets either continue for second-side marking or are fed back for final inversion and output.
Refer to Figure 1.
Output transport
motor, M5
Figure 1 Output transport components 1
Output diverters - A set of two diverters, geared together so they can be controlled by the one
output diverter solenoid. Refer to Figure 1.
Jam clearance LEDs - Two LED PWBs, located in the jam clearance door, provide four LEDs
to assist in the jam clearance process. Refer to Figure 2.
February 2013
8-82
Corrugation roller
Anti static brush
Figure 3 Output transport corrugation and anti-static components
Duplex sensor, 13
Nip roll P
LED PWBs
Exit sensor, 15
Nip roll N
Figure 2 Output transport components 2

Corrugation roller - A spring-loaded, swinging roller at the exit nip gives the sheets a degree of
corrugation, increasing stiffness as the sheets leave the exit nip for the output module. Refer to
Figure 3.
Anti-static brush - An earthed anti-static brush at the exit removes any static from the sheets
that may have been picked up during transportation. This helps to produce even stacking at the
output module. Refer to Figure 3.
February 2013
8-83
Offsetting Catch Tray (OCT)
The OCT is an optional device, attached to the right hand side of the IME. The output is
stacked in 1 to N order, face down or face up in the tray. The user can select to have alternate
sets offset to provide set differentiation, including single-sheet sets.
Overview
A sensor detects when the tray has reached 90% of its full capacity.
The offset function is controlled on the OCT PWB, initiated by a motor enable signal from the
media path driver PWB.
The OCT is controlled from the media path driver PWB. The tray capacity is as follows:
The OCT tray capacity is as follows:
The LCSS provides two selectable destinations bins, a 250 sheet capacity top tray (80 gsm /
20 lb.) and a high capacity 2000 sheet stacker tray (80 gsm / 20 lb.). When the top tray is
selected the output will be stacked in an un-tamped manner. When the high capacity stacker
tray is selected the output will be complied and tamped.
The user may choose from the following finishing options when output is directed to the stacker
tray.
Offsetting of sets (25 mm) to create a visible set boundary stacking feature.
Hole punching of sheets 2, 3 or 4 hole, Swedish 4 and Legal 2 hole configuration.
500 sheets, A4 80gsm / Letter 75gsm flat output
Automatic stapling of up to 50 sheets (80gsm) sets, with the user able to select one of the
following three positions dependant upon paper size and feed direction:
300 sheets, A4 80gsm / Letter 75gsm with 12 mm curl
Single front
Single rear
Dual
Up to 50% reduction in capacity will occur for other sizes, weights and environments. With
sheets larger than A3 60gsm, there may be a greater reduction in capacity.
Configuration
The LCSS is configured with two output bins: bin 0 and bin 1. The LCSS will carry up to 50
sheets in collating or collating and stapling mode.
Machine Interface
The LCSS receives and sends serial input and output data to and from the IME.
The machine interface comprises of the LCSS PWB, the communication cable, a bulkhead
connector, a harness and the IME PWB.
The communication cable is the electrical connection between the IME and the LCSS PWB.
Communications between the IME PWB and the LCSS PWB are provided by the communication cable. If any communications data lines become open circuit or short circuit, a communication s fault is declared by the IME.
Power / Interlock
The LCSS requires a dedicated power cord which is connected to the self adjusting LCSS
power supply module located inside the LCSS. The power supply module will accept 90 to 265
volts AC at 50 or 60Hz.
Interlock switches in the LCSS interrupt +24V power when the front door interlock, docking
interlock or top tray jam access cover are opened for jam clearance or service.
Entrance Paper Path

The entrance paper path is located in the middle left side of the LCSS. It receives printed
sheets from the host machine and moves them into the diverter gate and through the hole
punch unit and into the stacker tray.
February 2013
8-84
Entry Sensor
Entry Sensor Q12-077 is located in the LCSS entrance paper path. In addition to supplying the
LCSS PWB with jam detection information, the sensor signal is used to time the operation of
components in the LCSS. Refer to Figure 1.
As the paper is ejected, it drops vertically to the bin 0 surface. Subsequent sheets settle on top
of the previous sheets, creating a stack.
Vertical Paper Transport

The vertical paper transport is used to feed the printed sheets to the compiler.
Hole Punch Unit

As sheets are received in the LCSS entrance paper path, sets of nip rollers transport the
sheets through the hole punch unit.
If hole punching has been requested by the operator, the punch sensor, Q12-078 senses the
trail edge of the sheet, The sheet is halted in the correct position by the LCSS PWB controlling
transport motor, MOT12-223. Hole punch motor, MOT 12-243 is then energized to punch the
sheet, the hole punch motor continues to be driven until the hole punch home sensor, Q12-194
sends a signal to the LCSS PWB, so that the hole punch motor is stopped at the home position.
If hole punching is not requested by the operator, sheets pass straight through the hole punch
unit to the vertical transport.
Compiler Carriage
The sheets are transported through the vertical transport by two sets of nip rolls, powered via
toothed timing belts from transport motor 1, MOT12-223. Refer to Figure 1.
Sheets arrive at the compiler tray and are reversed against the backstops by the combined
action of the angle of the compiler tray and the rotation of the paddle wheel. The paddle wheel
is driven by the paddle roll motor, MOT12-237. The paddle wheel position is set by the paddle
roll position sensor, Q12-186, adjacent to the motor.
As each sheet is registered against the backstops, it is tamped to ensure a neat set. When the
set is complete it is stapled, if required, before being ejected into bin 1.
The eject assembly then ejects the set into the stacker tray.
Transport Motor 1
Transport motor 1, MOT12-223, is a stepper motor located on the rear frame. The output shaft
of the motor drives a toothed timing belt, that transfers mechanical drive to two sets of nip rolls
in the entrance paper path. Refer to Figure 1.
Compiler Stapler Operation

The purpose of the compiler carriage stapler is to staple the compiled sets in the compiler tray.
Up to 50 sheets of (80gsm / 20lb) paper can be stapled. Single or double stapling is available in
portrait or landscape mode, corner stapling is also available.
Diverter Gate
Sheets continue up the entrance paper path, by way of two sets of nip rolls, to the diverter gate.
The diverter gate is opened by the diverter gate solenoid, SOL 12-225.
If the diverter gate is open, the sheets are diverted to bin 0. If the diverter gate is closed, sheets
continue to the vertical paper transport. Refer to Figure 1.
Bin 0
Bin 0 receives all transparency jobs, label jobs and all jobs not selected by the operator to be
made into compiled sets or compiled and stapled sets.
The staple head unit 1 assembly is mounted on the stapler mount and traverse shaft, which
moves the stapler to the various stapling positions within the compiler. Drive is provided by the
stapling unit traverse motor, MOT 12-249 which drives the stapler mount and traverse shaft
assembly, to position the stapler. The stapling unit home sensor, Q12-135 senses when the
stapler is at the home position.
Once the signal has been received to staple, the staple head 1 motor, MOT 12-247 (located
within the staple head) is energized. The motor remains energized until the cam has made a
complete revolution and the SH1 home sensor, Q12-318 has been actuated. The one revolution of the cam enables a staple to be driven though the set, clinched, and then return the staple head to the home (open) position for the next staple.
Bin 0 Paper Path and Transport Motor 2

Transport motor 2, MOT12-224, is a stepper motor located on the rear frame. The output shaft
of the motor drives a toothed timing belt, that transfers mechanical drive to the driven components in the upper paper path. Sheets leaving the vertical transport via the opened upper
diverter gate are transported to bin 0 by the upper paper path. Refer to Figure 1.
Bin 0 Operation
Top exit sensor, Q12-107 is used to detect jams in the bin 0 area. When the trail edge clears
the top exit sensor it signals the control logic that the sheet has exited the upper paper path.
Sheet edge detection is disabled until just before either edge is expected (approx. 30 mm).
This is done to avoid reading false signals caused by sensor bounce.
Stapler Unit 1 Home Sensor

The stapling unit (SU1) home sensor, Q12-135 is located at the front of the compiler carriage.
All stapler traverse positions are calculated using this home reference.
When the stapler transport is started for the first time the 2K LCSS PWB starts the stapling unit
traverse motor, MOT12-249, towards the rear for 200 steps. After this movement, the motor is
stopped and driven towards the front until the home sensor is detected. This is the home position, and all traverse values for stapling positions are relative to it.
Stapler Unit Transverse Motor

The stapler transport consists of a linear slide and traverse shaft assembly which is driven by
the stapling unit traverse motor, MOT12-249. The transport system positions the stapler at the
various positions necessary for the stapling operation.
February 2013
8-85
SH1 Priming Sensor

Priming of the staple head is the pre-forming of the first two staples in the staple stick. If the
staple head home sensor is low at machine initialization, the SH1 priming sensor (located
within the staple head) is checked for staple head primed (H) (high = primed). If the sensor is
high then the initialization is complete. If the staple head primed signal is low, the control logic
will cycle the staple head 1 motor until the SH1 priming sensor signal goes high.
SH1 Home Sensor

After the staple has been formed in the compiled set, the staple head cam continues to rotate
until it has made one complete revolution and the staple head home sensor, Q12-318 (located
within the staple head) has been actuated, sending a (H) signal to the control logic to stop the
staple head 1 motor at the home position.
As the paper stack increases in the tray, the bin 1 elevator motor, MOT 12-241 lowers the tray
to the appropriate eject height to receive the set.
The bin 1 upper level sensor, Q12-188 measures the height of the stack in bin 1. This signal is
used by the LCSS PWB to determine when to lower bin 1 in steps to maintain the correct stack
height, with regard to the output from the compiler. The 90% full sensor, Q12-187 is used to
signal when bin 1 is 90% full, together with the bin 1 lower limit switch, S12-191 being made.
The control logic will allow 10% more set feeds prior to declaring a bin 1 full status to the IME.
Figure 1 LCSS rear view
Figure 2 LCSS left view
Figure 3 LCSS paper path
SH Low Staples Sensor
Figure 4 LCSS Paddle wheel and stapler unit
The SH1 low staples sensor (located within the staple head) is used to detect the presence of
staples (and therefore a staple cartridge) in the compiler carriage stapler. The sensor signals
the control logic when the cartridge is missing or low on staples.
Figure 5 LCSS Stapler head
Figure 6 LCSS tramper unit
Figure 7 LCSS hole punch unit (rear view)
Figure 8 LCSS ejector unit
Figure 9 LCSS stacker unit
Figure 10 LCSS Manual stapler button
Tamping
The purpose of the tamping function is to align the sheets in the compiler carriage to eliminate
skew and offset. Tamping registers all sheets in the correct position, as a set, for correct stapling.
The front tamper arm is driven by the front tamper motor, MOT12-226. The rear tamper arm is
driven by the rear tamper motor, MOT12-227.The tamper motors are mounted on the front and
rear frames of the compiler carriage and drive their respective tamper arms using a toothed
belt driven lead screw for each tamper.
Home Position
The tamper arms are initially at a home position that puts them outside of the paper path. The
home positions are detected by the front tamper home sensor, Q12-180 and the rear tamper
home sensor, Q12-181, which monitor flags located on the tamper arms. These two sensors
are bonded the compiler carriage frames. If a sensor failure occurs, a new compiler carriage
must be installed.
Tamp Position
Upon actuation of the compiler sensor by the first sheet of a set, the tamper arms are moved
from the home position to the ready position. The ready position is paper size dependent and
the information is obtained from the IME. When each sheet of the set is fully within the compiling area, the tamper arms are moved to the tamp position and then back to the ready position
to wait for the next sheet. The tamper arms are moved back to the ready position at a slower
speed so that an over tamp buckle is avoided which could move sheets out of the registered
position.
Bin 1 Stacking
Bin 1 of the LCSS provides a platform to stack up to 2000 sheets. The bin 1 tray surface or the
top of the stack in bin 1, assists in the compiling mode by providing an extended surface to
support longer documents, e.g. SEF A4 and A3 (SEF 8.5 x 11 and 11 x 17 inch).
February 2013
8-86
Top tray exit sensor (Q12-107)

Transport motor 2
(MOT12-224)
Diverter gate
solenoid
(SOL12-225)
Compiler exit
sensor
(Q12-106)
Top cover interlock

(S12-197)
Entry sensor
(Q12-077)
Paddle motor assembly

(MOT12-237)
Transport motor 1
(MOT12-223)
Bin 1 upper
level sensor,
(Q12-188)
Docking interlock,
(S12-177)
Bin 1 Upper limit

switch (S12-190)
Bin 1 elevator motor

(MOT12-241)
Ejector motor
Docking interlock,
(S12-177)
Bin 1 Lower limit
switch (S12-191)
Figure 1 LCSS rear view
This shows approximate position of components behind the cover
Figure 2 LCSS left view
February 2013
8-87
Paddle wheels
Paddle roll position

sensor (Q12-186)
Paddle motor
(MOT12-237)
SH1 paper sensor

(Q12-196)
Staple head unit including

(MOT12-247) and SH1
home sensor (Q12-318)
Key:
ENS: Entry sensor, Q12-077
ENR1,2: Rollers driven by transport motor 1
DG: Diverter gate
TXR1,2: Rollers driven by transport motor 2 (to top tray)
SXR1,2: Rollers driven by transport motor 2 (to stacker tray)
TXS: Top tray exit sensor, Q12-107
PPS: Punch sensor, Q12-110
PCH: Hole punch
SXS: Stacker path exit sensor, Q12-140
SH1 priming sensor

(Q12-134)
Figure 4 LCSS Paddle wheel and stapler unit
Figure 3 LCSS paper path
February 2013
8-88
Stapler index sensor,

(Q12-168)
Edge registration
sensor (receiver)
Rear tamper motor

(MOT12-227)
SH1 paper sensor

(Q12-196)
Front tamper
home sensor
(Q12-180)
Self priming sensor

(Q12-134)
Low staples sensor (Q12-133)
Staple cartridge
present sensor
(Q12-363)
SH1 home sensor

(Q12-318)
SH1 motor
(MOT12-247)
Front tamper
away sensor
(Q12-182)
Figure 5 LCSS Stapler head
Rear tamper away

sensor (Q12-183)
Front tamper motor

(MOT12-226)
Rear tamper home

sensor (Q12-181)
Figure 6 LCSS tramper unit
February 2013
8-89
Punch motor
(MOT12-243)
Ejector out sensor

(Q12-185)
Chad bin level sensor

(Q12-193)
Punch head
home sensor
(Q12-194)
Punch sensor
(Q12-078)
Punch head present
sensor (Q12-195)
Ejector motor
encoder sensor
(Q12-096)
Figure 8 LCSS ejector unit
Figure 7 LCSS hole punch unit (rear view)
Ejector motor home Ejector home sensor

(Q12-184)
(MOT12-234)
February 2013
8-90
Upper limit
switch (S12-190)
Pause to
unload LED
Bin 1 upper level

sensor (Q12-188)
Pause to unload
button
Elevator motor
encoder sensor
(Q12-163)
Bin 1 elevator motor

(MOT12-241)
Figure 9 LCSS stacker unit
Figure 10 LCSS Manual stapler button
February 2013
8-91
A harness from the HVF control PWB, (PJ131), to the booklet maker PWB supplies +5V and
+24V. The booklet maker PWB, (via PJ553), supplies the tri-folder with +5V and +24V.
Overview
The high volume finisher (HVF) provides the following functions:
A top tray output for single sheets from the IME module, with a capacity of 250 sheets at
80gsm/20lb.
A bin 1 output, providing compiled, multiple sheet sets, with a capacity of 3000 sheets at
80gsm/20lb. When a tri-folder module is fitted, the bin 1 capacity is 2000 sheets at
80gsm/20lb.
A booklet maker with a minimum capacity of 10 sets of 15-sheet, stapled booklets at

80gsm / 20lb.
A tri-folder, capable of producing Z-folds or C-folds. This has an output bin with a minimum capacity of 50 single-sheet tri-folder jobs at 80 gsm, (20lb). It can fold 60-120gsm,
(15-30lb) sheets.
A HVF stapler with a maximum capacity of 100 sheets at 80gsm/20lb.
A HVF hole punch
Inserter, which will allow paper to be inserted at any point into compiled sets.
The inserter module is powered from the HVF control PWB, through a complex connector at
the base of the inserter. This connector has of two lines of terminals, TO55 / TO77, supplying
the signals and the +5V, and AO55 / AO77. It also provides one higher current terminal at each
corner of the connector body, supplying the +24V, 0V and ground to the inserter, plus the drive
line for the inserter electric clutch.The inserter interlocks are described later in this document in
the Inserter section, and the tri-folder interlocks are described in the Tri-folder section.
In the HVF module, three interlocks, wired in series, pass +24V to the module. These are:
Top cover interlock switch, S12-197,
Front door interlock switch, S12-303.
Docking interlock switch, S12-177.
When all three interlock switches are closed, the +24V interlock indicator, LED 8 on the HVF
control PWB is lit and the +24V supply is available to motors, solenoids and clutches.
Figure 1 shows the LEDs on the HVF PWB. These are:
The range of paper weights handled by the top tray, bin 1, booklet maker and inserter is 60 to
216gsm, 15 to 54lb. The tri-folder paper weight range is 60 to 120gsm, 15 to 30lb.
Configuration
The HVF comprises the following main systems which are described in this document:
Machine Interface
Power / Interlocks
Paper Paths
Compiler
Stacker
Hole Punch
Tri-Folder
Booklet Maker Bin 2 Output Tray
LED 1 - red, toggling. The LED changes state every time one of the following events
occurs:
When the support fingers are fully extended,
When the rear wall sensor stops sensing the paper stack rear wall
When the stapler mode for the current set is not multiple, dual or rear stapling
LED 3 - red, flashing. The LED indicates CPU function. When flashing at 2Hz, (every 1/2
second), the software is running normally. When flashing at about 1/4Hz, (every 4 seconds), this indicates that the software is encountering a code problem and a possible software upgrade is needed. If this LED is OFF, the CPU does not function and a new HVF
control PWB is needed.
Tray 6 Inserter
Booklet Maker Module
LED 5 - red, toggling. The LED changes state whenever the paper is accelerated to 1,300
m/s. It is only used for paper that is longer than 220 mm.
LED 6 - red, steady. When the LED is illuminated, a paper jam has been detected. It
remains illuminated until the HVF successfully initializes. In all other cases this LED is off.
LED 7 - red. The LED is used during the machine production and is connected with the
activity of the stacker nearly full sensor.
LED 8 - red, steady. The indicates that the HVF top cover, front door and docking interlocks are all closed and +24V is available at the HVF module.
LED 9 - red, steady. The LED indicates that the +5V supply is present in the HVF module.
Machine Interface
The harness between the rear of the IME, (PJ121), and the HVF PWB carries the communications between the two modules on serial data lines. The IME identifies the type of output device
by the voltages on the ID lines in this harness.Communications between the HVF PWB,
(PJ133), and the booklet maker PWB are carried on serial data lines. A booklet maker present
link is also present in this harness.The inserter module does not have dedicated communications to the HVF PWB. The inserter present information is carried on PJ701 to the HVF
PWB.The tri-folder module does not include a dedicated communications lines to the booklet
maker PWB. The tri-folder present link is carried in the harness to PJ563 into the booklet
maker PWB.
Power / Interlocks
Power to the HVF module is supplied by a dedicated PSU in the base of the HVF. This supplies
+5V and +24V. This PSU includes its own power cord.
February 2013
8-92
Figure 1 LEDs on the HVF control PWB
Figure 2 LEDs on the BM control PWB
Paper Paths
Figure 2 shows the LEDs on the BM PWB. These are:
This covers the motors, sensors, solenoids, etc., along the paper paths.
LED 1 - red, steady. The LED indicates a fault or other abnormal status.
LED 2 - yellow, flashing at about 1Hz. The LED indicates that the software is operating in
normal mode. In other modes, e.g., software downloading, the flashing rate is higher.
Entry Sensor, Q12-077 - This is a reflective sensor at the HVF input transport, receiving
paper from the IME. Refer to Figure 3.
LED 3 - orange, steady. The LED indicates either:
Transport motor 1, MOT12-223 - This is a stepper motor, located at the rear of the HVF,
and driving a toothed belt. This provides the drive to the input path from the IME. It also
drives the vertical paper path from the inserter and takes the paper through to the hole
punch. Refer to Figure 3.
that the tri-folder front door and top cover interlocks are closed, and +24V is available to the BM module or, if the tri-folder in not installed;
that the interlock cheater is present in PJ553 on the BM control PWB the logic
cheater is present in PL563 on the BM control PWB.
LED 4 - orange, steady. The LED indicates that the +24V supply is within voltage and current limits, and that the power limiting circuit has not been active for over a set time limit.
LED 5 - blue, steady. The LED indicates that the +5V supply is present in the BM module.
February 2013
8-93
HVF booklet exit sensor, Q12-087 - A flag sensor, located in the paper guide leading to
the booklet maker. It senses paper exiting the HVF for the booklet maker. Refer to Figure
4.
Buffer motor, MOT12-262 - A stepper motor located at the rear of the HVF. It takes the
paper from the booklet maker diverter to the top tray or stacker. Refer to Figure 5.
Transport motor 1
(MOT12-223)
Booklet maker diverter
solenoid (SOL12-258)
HVF booklet exit sensor

(Q12-087)
Buffer position sensor
(Q12-086)
Entry sensor
(Q12-077)
Buffer Pocket
Figure 3 Entry sensor and Entry feed motor
Bypass feed motor

(MOT12-263)
Buffer position sensor, Q12-086 - A reflective sensor at the end of the input transport. This
senses paper fed to the hole punch and beyond, to the buffer transport. Refer to Figure 3.
Bypass feed motor, MOT12-263 - A stepper motor, located at the rear of the HVF and
driving a toothed belt. It takes the paper from the hole punch to the buffer transport or to
the booklet maker, depending on the action of the booklet maker diverter solenoid. Refer
to Figure 4.
Set clamp solenoid, SOL12-056 - Actuates during multiple-sheet compiled output jobs.
When actuated, it holds the trailing edge of the first sheet in the buffer pocket until the
arrival of the second sheet, at which time both sheet are fed to the ejector. The action is
as follows:
The first sheet is fed vertically up into the buffer transport until it is released by the
action of the nip split motor, which moved the idler rolls to the left, away from the
paper. At the same time, the buffer feed motor stops.
The sheet then drops into the buffer pocket, where it is held by the set clamp solenoid until the second sheet arrives. This action maintains the inter-set gap. Refer to
Figure 4.
Set clamp solenoid

(SOL12-056)
Figure 4 Buffer area components
Buffer path sensor, Q12-321 - A reflective sensor, located in the buffer transport. It senses
paper being fed to the top tray or stacker. Refer to Figure 5.
Booklet maker diverter solenoid, SOL12-258 - Actuates to pass paper to the booklet
maker. In the non-actuated condition, it allows paper to pass to the buffer transport. Refer
to Figure 4.
February 2013
8-94
Nip split motor (MOT12-264)
Buffer path sensor

(Q12-321)
Buffer motor
(MOT12-262)
Nip split sensor

(Q12-091)
Nip home sensor

(Q12-088)
REAR VIEW
Figure 5 Buffer feed motor and buffer path sensor
Figure 6 Nip split mechanism
Nip split motor, MOT12-264 - A DC motor, located in a housing at the rear of the 5b jam
clearance guide. It opens the nip in the vertical buffer path by moving the idler rolls to the
left, away from the paper. This allows the first sheet of a multi-sheet compiled job, to drop
into the buffer pocket, as explained in the Buffer clamp solenoid bulleted item, above.
Refer to Figure 6.
Nip split sensor, Q12-091 - A flag sensor, operated by a cylindrical flag on the nip split
cam shaft. It senses the open position of the nip. Refer to Figure 6.
Nip home sensor, Q12-088 - A flag sensor, operated by a cylindrical flag on the nip split
cam shaft. It senses the closed position of the nip. Refer to Figure 6.
Transport motor 2, MOT12-224 - A stepper motor, located at the rear of the machine and
driving two toothed belts. It takes the paper from the exit diverter and feeds it either to the
top tray, via the top exit sensor, or to the stacker, via the stacker exit sensor. Refer to Figure 7.
February 2013
8-95
Exit diverter solenoid

(SOL12-225)
Top tray exit sensor
(Q12-107)
Paper pusher upper sensor, Q12-092 - A flag sensor that detects the pusher in the upper
position. Refer to Figure 8.
Paper pusher lower sensor, Q12-094 - A flag sensor that detects the pusher in the lower
Stapler gate safety switch, S12-319 - A micro switch located at the inboard left of the
paper pusher. This switch disables the +24V supply to the stapler when the paper pusher
is away from the lower position. This is to ensure personal safety when it is possible to
reach the stapler jaws, under the paper pusher. Refer to Figure 8.
Paper pusher motor

(MOT12-265)
Paper pusher upper
sensor (Q12-092)
Paper pusher lower

sensor (Q12-094)
Compiler exit
sensor
(Q12-106)
Stacker final roll

Stapler gate safety
switch (S12-319)
Transport motor 2
(MOT12-224)
Figure 7 Top tray and stacker components
Exit diverter solenoid, SOL12-225 - Actuates to divert the paper from the buffer to the top
tray. In the non-actuated condition, it allows the paper to pass to the stacker. Refer to Figure 7.
Top exit sensor, Q12-107 - A flag sensor located in the upper exit paper guide. It senses
paper passing out to the top tray. Refer to Figure 7.
Compiler exit sensor, Q12-106 - A reflective sensor located on the top jam clearance
paper guide. It senses paper passing out to the stacker. Refer to Figure 7.
Figure 8 Paper pusher components
Compiler
This section includes the functions of paper pusher, upper and lower paddles, tamping, stapling, paper ejection, pressing and support.
Paper Pusher: The final roll at the stacker exit, (see Figure 7), corrugates the paper to give it
stiffness. The paper pusher moves down as each sheet leaves the final roll, and pushes the
sheet down to the ejector unit. The components associated with the paper pusher are:
Paper pusher motor, MOT12-265 - A stepper motor located at the inboard end of the compile exit upper guide. The motor drives pinions that engage with racks integral with the
pusher. Refer to Figure 8.
Upper Paddle: As the paper pusher moves down with the first sheet, the paddle unit moves to
the lower position. As the paper pusher returns to the upper position, ready for the next sheet,
the paddles rotate to position the first sheet correctly in the ejector. The sheet is correctly positioned when its trailing edge is in contact with the upright posts in the stapler module.
The number of cycles the paddle rotates depends on the size and orientation of the paper. The
paddle unit remains in the lower position and every sheet in the set is positioned in this way.
When the final sheet in the set has been positioned by the paddle, the paddle unit returns to
the upper position.
February 2013
8-96
The components associated with the paddle unit are:
Paddle roller motor, MOT12-238 - A DC motor located in the paddle unit. The paddle is
turned one complete revolution. Refer to Figure 10.
Paddle unit motor, MOT12-239 - A stepper motor located on the rear frame. It drives the
paddle unit down to the working position and back up at the end of each set. Refer to Figure 9.
Paddle roller home sensor, Q12-186 - A flag sensor located in the paddle unit, and sensing the paddle roller in the home position. Refer to Figure 10.
Paddle unit lower sensor, Q12-175 - A flag sensor located on a bracket beside the paddle
unit, and sensing the paddle unit in the lower position. Refer to Figure 9.
Paddle unit upper sensor, Q12-174 - A flag sensor located on a bracket beside the paddle
unit, and sensing the paddle unit in the upper position. Refer to Figure 9.
Paddle roller
home sensor
(Q12-186)
Pusher
Paddle unit upper
sensor (Q12-174)
Paddle unit lower
sensor (Q12-175)
Paddle roller
motor
(MOT12-238)
Figure 10 Paddle roller components
Paddle unit motor

(MOT12-239)
Figure 9 Paddle unit components
February 2013
8-97
Lower Paddle: A single paddle that is integrated into the ejector unit, which operates on the
first sheet only in each set. The lower paddle turns at the same time as the upper paddle. It is
actuated by the ejector roll motor, turning in the reverse direction. The action of this motor in
the forward direction is described later (See: Eject function). The components associated with
the lower paddle function are:
Ejector roll motor, MOT12-233 - A DC motor located at the rear underside of the ejector
unit. It runs in the reverse direction to rotate the lower paddle. Refer to Figure 11.
Ejector roll motor encoder sensor, Q12-097- A normal flag type encoder sensor, sensing
the motor rotation. Refer to Figure 11.
Ejector home sensor, Q12-184 - A normal flag type sensor, sensing the ejector home.
Refer to Figure 11.
Ejector lower paddle home switch, S12-099 - A micro switch located at the front underside
of the ejector unit, sensing the home position of the lower paddle. This switch allows the
paddle to rotate for one complete cycle. Refer to Figure 12.
Ejector roll motor

(MOT12-233)
Ejector motor encoder sensor

(Q12-097)
Ejector home sensor

(Q12-184)
Figure 11 Ejector roll motor and encoder sensor
February 2013
8-98
Tamping and Offsetting: The operation of offsetting the compiled sets is performed by the front
and rear tampers. Offsetting is performed immediately before ejection. If stapling is selected,
offsetting is performed after stapling. When a stapling operation is selected, the rear tamper
operates before stapling, to ensure that each set is correctly positioned for stapling at its outboard end. After stapling the sets are alternately either left at the outboard end, or offset
towards the inboard end by the front tamper. The components associated with the tamping and
offset functions are:
Front tamper motor, MOT12-266 - A DC motor, located above the bracket on the front
frame. This motor moves the front tamper to the away and home positions. Refer to Figure 13.
Front tamper home sensor, Q12-180 - A flag sensor, located under the bracket on the
front frame. This sensor detects the front tamper in the home position. Refer to Figure 13.
Front tamper away sensor, Q12-182 - A flag sensor, located under the bracket on the
front frame. This sensor detects the front tamper in the away position. Refer to Figure 13.
Front tamper motor
(MOT12-226)
Front tamper away

sensor (Q12-182)
Ejector lower
paddle home
switch (S12-099)
Front tamper home

sensor (Q12-180)
Figure 13 Front tamper components
Ejector lower
paddle
EJECTOR RIGHT UNDERSIDE VIEW
Rear tamper motor, MOT12-227 - A stepper motor, located immediately to the rear of the
ejector unit. This motor between the rear and home positions. Refer to Figure 14.
Rear tamper home sensor, Q12-181 - A flag sensor, located to the rear of the rear tamper
motor. This sensor detects the rear tamper in the home position. Refer to Figure 14.
Rear tamper away sensor, Q12-183 - A flag sensor, located to the rear of the rear home
sensor. This sensor detects the rear tamper in the away position. Refer to Figure 14.
Figure 12 Ejector lower paddle and paddle home switch
February 2013
8-99
Rear tamper motor

(MOT12-227)
Rear tamper away

sensor (Q12-183)
Stapler head motor, MOT12-247 - A DC motor that drives the closing of the stapler jaws
and the forming of the staple from a straight bar. The motor is an integral part of the stapler and cannot be serviced. The high current to the stapler necessitates multiple wires
between the HVF PWB and the stapler unit.
Stapler primed sensor, Q12-134 - This is an integral part of the stapler and cannot be serviced. It detects the staples in the correct position, ready for forming and stapling.
Cartridge sensor, Q12-317 - This is an integral part of the stapler and cannot be serviced.
It detects the presence of cartridge, correctly fitted in position.
Stapler jaw home sensor, Q12-318 - This is an integral part of the stapler and cannot be
serviced. It senses that the stapler jaws are correctly positioned, ready for a stapling
cycle.
Low staples sensor, Q12-133 - This is an integral part of the stapler and cannot be serviced. It senses when the staples are running low and warns the user.
Stapler gate safety switch, S12-319 - This is described also in the paper pusher section,
in this document. The stapler gate safety switch is a micro switch located at the inboard
left of the paper pusher. This switch disables the +24V supply to the stapler motor drive
circuit, when the paper pusher is away from the lower position. This is to ensure personal
safety when it is possible to reach the stapler jaws, under the paper pusher. Refer to Figure 8.
Stapler unit home sensor, Q12-135 - A flag sensor, located at the outboard end of the bed
of the stapler unit. It detects the stapler unit in the home position. Refer to Figure 15.
Stapler unit mid home sensor, Q12-176 - A flag sensor, located towards the inboard end
of the bed of the stapler module. It detects the stapler at the inboard end of its travel.
Refer to Figure 15.
Rear tamper home

sensor (Q12-181)
Figure 14 Rear tamper components

Stapling: The stapling functions of the HVF, are distinct from those of the booklet maker and
are performed on each set immediately after compiling the last sheet of each set. A single,
travelling stapler unit is used. When one staple is selected, the stapler unit remains at the outboard end of its travel, and the corner of each set is stapled. When two or more staples are
selected, the stapler unit travels from outboard to inboard between each staple, then travels to
the mid home position where it remains during the tamping and ejection functions. The stapler
unit then returns to the home position. The components associated with the stapling function
are:
February 2013
8-100
Stapler unit mid home sensor

(Q12-176)
Ejector motor, MOT12-236 - A DC motor, located at the front underside of the ejector unit.
This motor moves the ejector unit to the out and home positions. Refer to Figure 16.
Ejector motor encoder sensor, Q12-096 - A standard flag, encoder-disc sensor, sensing
the rotation of the ejector unit motor. Refer to Figure 16.
Ejector out sensor, Q12-185 - A flag sensor that senses the ejector unit in the out position.
Refer to Figure 16.
Ejector home sensor, Q12-184 - A flag sensor that senses the ejector unit in the home
Stapler home sensor

(Q12-135)
Figure 15 Stapling components

Paper ejection, pressing and support: Includes all actions necessary to transfer the paper sets
from the compiler to the stacker. When the set is compiled, and the paper pusher and paddle
units have returned to the upper position the ejector unit moves to the out position. The support
fingers move out, taking the pressing fingers down to hold the previous set in place on the
stacker. The ejector roll motor turns the belts and the ejector fingers push the set out to the
stacker. The pressing and support fingers then return to the home position. The ejector fingers
are carried round on the belts to their home position as the ejector unit moves back to its home
position. The components associated with these functions are:
February 2013
8-101
Ejector roll motor, MOT12-233 - A DC motor, located at the rear underside of the ejector
unit. This motor turns in the forward direction to move the belts holding the ejector fingers.
Its function in the reverse direction was covered was covered in the Lower Paddle paragraph, earlier in this document. Refer to Figure 17.
Ejector roll encoder sensor, Q12-097 - A flag sensor located at the rear of the ejector roll
motor. This senses the movement of the ejector roll motor.
Ejector plate home sensor, Q12-184 - A flag sensor, located at the rear of the ejector
assembly, under the ejector belt. This detects the eject fingers in the home position.
Ejector motor
(MOT12-236)
Ejector motor
encoder sensor
(Q12-096)
Ejector out sensor (Q12-185)

Ejector home
sensor (Q12-184)
Figure 16 Ejector unit components
February 2013
8-102
Pressing and support motor, MOT12-323 - A DC motor, located below the HVF rear
tamper. This motor moves the support fingers to the out, init and home positions. The
pressing fingers are mechanically linked to the support fingers so that as the support fingers leave the home position, the pressing fingers move down to hold the previous set on
the stack. Refer to Figure 18.
Pressing and support encoder sensor, Q12-093 - This is a standard flag, encoder-disc
sensor, sensing the rotation of the pressing and support motor. Refer to Figure 18.
Pressing and support A sensor, Q12-172 - A flag sensor, detecting the support fingers in
the home position. Refer to Figure 18.
Pressing and support B sensor, Q12-171 - A flag sensor, detecting the support fingers in
the init position. Refer to Figure 18.
Pressing and support C sensor, Q12-173 - A flag sensor, detecting the support fingers in
the out position. Refer to Figure 18.
Ejector roll motor

(MOT12-233)
Ejector roll motor

encoder sensor
(Q12-097)
Ejector plate home

sensor (Q12-184)
Figure 17 Ejector roll components
February 2013
8-103
Stacker
This section covers bin 1 tray movement and control. As the bin fills, the tray moves down to
maintain the top of the stack at the correct level. This is controlled by the bin 1 upper level sensor, which is in two parts, and also by the paper pressing sensor that senses the top edge of
the rear wall of the stack of paper. If the paper stack is flat, the paper pressing sensor will control the stack height, and if the paper stack is curved, the bin 1 upper level sensor will detect
the top of the stack and control its height. There is a 90% full sensor, used to warn the user that
the bin is nearly full, and there are upper and lower limit switches, to keep the tray within its
allowable range of movement. The active components comprising the stacker are:

C sensor (Q12-173)
Pressing and support A sensor (Q12-172)
Bin 1 elevator motor, MOT12-241 - A DC motor, located on the rear frame. This motor lifts
and lowers the paper stack via a gear chain, driving two toothed belts. In the forward
direction, this motor drives the stack down, and in the revers direction, the stack is driven
up. Refer to Figure 19.
Bin 1 encoder sensor, Q12-163 - A standard flag, encoder-disc sensor, sensing the rotation of the bin 1 elevator motor. Refer to Figure 19.
Bin 1 upper level sensor, Q12-188 - Consisting of two sensors, located in the frame at the
front and the rear of the tray. The rear sensor is used as the receiving sensor, while the
front sensor is used as the transmitter sensor. Refer to Figure 19.
Paper pressing sensor, Q12-322 - A reflective sensor, located beneath the ejector front
cover. This sensor detects the top of the rear wall of the paper stack. Refer to Figure 19.
Bin 1 90% full sensor, Q12-187 - A flag sensor, located on the rear frame and mounted on
the same bracket as the lower limit switch. The bracket has two possible positions; the
lower position, used when a tri-folder module is not installed, and the upper position, used
when a tri-folder is present. This sensor is actuated by a flag on the bin 1 rear bar lift
bracket. Refer to Figure 19.
Bin1 upper limit switch, S12-190 - A micro switch, located on the rear frame. This switch
is actuated when the tray is above its normal level of operation. When this switch is actuated, the reverse, upwards, direction of the elevator motor is disabled, but the motor is
allowed to drive the stack down. Refer to Figure 19.
Bin 1 lower limit switch, S12-191 - A micro switch, located on the rear frame and mounted
on the same bracket as the 90% full sensor. The switch is actuated when the tray is at its
lowest allowable limit of operation. When this switch is actuated, the forwards, downwards, direction of the elevator motor is disabled, but the motor is allowed to drive the
stack up. Refer to Figure 19.
Gear wheel
Pressing finger
Support
finger

B sensor (Q12-171)

motor (MOT12-323)

encoder sensor (Q12-093)
Figure 18 Ejector roll components
February 2013
8-104
Hole Punch
The hole punch is an optional module, providing 2 or 3 hole options, 4 hole, Swedish 4 hole
and Legal 2 hole. Each option is provided as a kit, easily installed, using a knurled thumb
screw. When the hole punch module is not installed, a blanking assembly is fitted in its place.
When the hole punch is installed, the punch present link is detected at power-on by the HVF
PWB, and the hole punch is acknowledged on the GUI. The active components of the hole
punch are:
Bin 1encoder sensor (Q12-163)
Bin 1 elevator
motor
(MOT12-241)
Paper pressing sensor (Q12-322)
Punch head motor, MOT12-244 - A DC motor, driving the punch head to operate all
punches simultaneously, via eccentric cams. Refer to Figure 20.
Punch head home sensor, Q12-194 - A flag sensor, detecting the punch head in the home
position, via a notched, cylindrical flag at the end of the cam shaft. Refer to Figure 20.
Punch unit motor, MOT12-245 - A stepper motor, driving the punch unit between the
home and paper edge detected positions. Refer to Figure 20.
Punch unit home sensor, Q12-114 - A flag sensor, detecting the punch unit in the home,
(outboard), position. Refer to Figure 20.
Punch sensor 1, Q12-078 - A reflective sensor, detecting the front, (outboard), edge of
8.5x11 LE fed paper. The punch unit motor MOT12-245, drives the punch unit forwards
until the paper edge is detected. The punch unit is then in the correct position for the
punch head to operate. Refer to Figure 20.
Punch sensor 2, Q12-075 - A reflective sensor, detecting the rear, (inboard), edge of
8.5x11 SE fed paper. The punch unit motor MOT12-245, drives the punch unit forwards
until the paper edge is detected. The punch unit is then in the correct position for the
punch head to operate. Refer to Figure 20.
Punch sensor 3, Q12-076 - A reflective sensor, detecting the rear, (inboard), edge of A4
LE fed paper. The punch unit motor drives the punch unit forwards until the paper edge is
detected. The punch unit is then in the correct position for the punch head to operate.
Refer to Figure 20.

(transmitter) (Q12-188)

(receiver)
Bin 1 upper limit

switch (S12-190)
Bin 1 90% full sensor (Q12-187)
Bin 1 lower limit

switch (S12-191)
Figure 19 Stacker components
February 2013
8-105
Punch head motor

(MOT12-244)
Chad bin level sensor

(Q12-193)
Punch head home

sensor (Q12-194)
Punch unit home

sensor (Q12-114)
Punch unit motor

(MOT12-245)
Chad bin present

sensor (Q12-118)
REAR VIEW
Punch sensor 1
(Q12-078)
Punch sensor 2
(Q12-075)
Punch sensor 3
(Q12-076)
Figure 20 Hole punch components
Figure 21 Chad bin components
Chad bin present sensor, Q12-118 - A flag sensor, detecting the presence of a chad bin,
under the hole punch module. Refer to Figure 21.
Chad bin level sensor, Q12-193 - A reflective sensor, detecting the presence of chad,
through a hole, high in the side of the chad bin. Refer to Figure 21.
Tray 6 Inserter
The Inserter, enables the user to insert a sheet at a pre-defined point in a set. For example it
may be used to insert cover sheets or separators. The media inserted can be hole-punched,
stapled or folded, as required. The active components of the Inserter are:
Inserter motor, MOT12-261 - A stepper motor, located at the rear of the inserter. This
motor runs forward to drive the paper tray up and to feed the paper, and the motor runs in
reverse to drive the paper tray down. This is a variable speed motor, under the control of
the software. The variable speed is used to synchronize the inserted media with the
printed sheets coming from the IME, and compensates for any speed mis-match. In the
forward direction, this motor turns the retard roll in the reverse direction, via a torque limiter. The retard roll thus acts as a retard pad, continually renewing its point of contact with
the paper, thereby increasing its life and effectiveness. Refer to Figure 22.
Inserter clutch, CL12-260 - Located at the rear of the inserter, this clutch passes the drive
to the feeder roll and nudger roll. Refer to Figure 22.
Inserter Pickup sensor, Q12-315 - A reflective sensor, located on the underside of the
inserter top cover. The pickup sensor controls the electric clutch to start feeding. Refer to
Figure 22.
February 2013
8-106
Inserter TE sensor, Q12-084 - This is a reflective sensor, located mid-module, immediately in front of the feeder roll. The pickup sensor detects the trailing edge of the sheet, to
control the electric clutch and is part of the speed compensation system. Refer to Figure
22.
Inserter TE sensor
(Q12-084)
Inserter LE sensor, Q12-083 - A reflective sensor, located mid-module, immediately after

the feeder roll. The paper path sensor detects the leading edge of the sheet, to verify that
the sheet was successfully fed. Refer to Figure 22.
Inserter acceleration sensor, Q12-316 - A reflective sensor, located behind the inserter left
hand door. This sensor detects the leading edge of the sheet and operates together with
the inserter LE sensor, to determine the speed of the paper. When the speed has been
measured, the information is used to control the speed of the inserter motor. Refer to Figure 22.
Inserter standby sensor, Q12-320 - A reflective sensor, located on the HVF vertical transport, below the inserter. It senses the leading edge of the sheet passing into the HVF from
the inserter and provides the final Go / Wait information, for feeding the sheet into the
HVF at the correct inter-document gap (IDG). Refer to Figure 22.
Inserter LE sensor
(Q12-083)
Inserter pickup sensor

(Q12-315)
Inserter Acceleration
sensor (Q12-316)
Inserter clutch,
(CL12-260)
Inserter motor
(MOT12-261)
Inserter standby sensor
(Q12-320)
Figure 22 Inserter Paper Path components
Inserter unit empty sensor, Q12-082 - A reflective sensor, located on the inserter paper
tray. This sensor detects the presence of paper in the inserter tray. In normal operation,
once this sensor detects no paper in the tray, the tray lowers after about two seconds.
Refer to Figure 23.
Inserter paper length sensor 1, Q12-079 - A reflective sensor, located on the sensor tray.
It detects paper longer than 203 x 330 mm (8 x 13 inches). Refer to Figure 23.
It detects paper longer than 203 x 280 mm (8 x 11 inches). Refer to Figure 23.
February 2013
8-107
It detects paper less than 203 x 280 mm (8 x 11 inches). Refer to Figure 23.
Inserter paper width sensor 1, Q12-081 - The detector incorporates two width sensors.
Width sensor 1 is a flag sensor, actuated by the paper width guide position. The sensor
changes state at 285 mm, (11 1/4 inches) and 210 mm, (8 1/4 inches) paper widths. Refer
to Figure 23.
Inserter paper width sensor 2, Q12-169. Width sensor 2 - A flag sensor, actuated by the
paper width guide position. The sensor changes state at 273 mm, (10 3/4) inches paper
width. Refer to Figure 23.
sensor 1 (Q12-081)
Inserter paper
length sensor 2
(Q12-080)
Inserter jam cover interlock

(S12-179)
Inserter paper
length sensor 1
(Q12-079)
Figure 24 Inserter interlocks
Booklet Maker Module
Inserter paper
length sensor 3
(Q12-090)
Inserter unit empty
sensor (Q12-082)
The booklet maker module receives, compiles, staples, folds and delivers finished booklets to
bin 2. Booklets can be up to 15 sheets, including a cover.

sensor 2 (Q12-169)
Compiling and Tamping
Figure 23 Inserter paper sensors
Inserter jam cover interlock, S12-179. A micro switch, located behind the top inside cover.
This switch is wired in series with the inserter top cover interlock, to supply +24V to the
inserter. When both interlocks are closed, the +24V LED on the Inserter PWB is lit. Refer
to Figure 24.
Inserter top cover interlock, S12-178. A micro switch, located behind the front cover. This
switch is wired in series with the inserter left hand door interlock, to supply +24V to the
inserter. When both interlocks are closed, the +24V LED on the Inserter PWB is lit. Refer
to Figure 24.
Inserter top cover interlock

(S12-178)
When a booklet maker job is requested, but prior to the first sheet arriving at the booklet maker,
the BM backstop motor, MOT 12-255 is energized to move the backstop assembly to a preset
receiving position based on the paper size value provided by the media path driver PWB. The
positioning of the backstop is measured in stepper motor pulses from the BM backstop guide
home sensor, Q12-204.
The booklet maker module receives sheets from the lower diverter gate and through the BM
entry roll nips. As each sheet is fed through the entry nip, it is driven downwards until it rests
against the backstop.
February 2013
8-108
The BM entry roll has smaller hard rollers and larger soft foam rollers. As the lead edge of each
sheet touches the backstop, the trail edge is released by the hard roller nip, but is still held by
the soft roller, which pushes the sheet under the roller and against the right side of the booklet
compiler tray. This ensures that the trail edge of every compiled sheet is always located on the
same side of the following sheet, thus eliminating both stubbing and sheet order errors.
When the staplers are actuated, two staples are placed in the centre of the compiled stack,
spaced 120 mm apart. The maximum capacity for the stapling and folding in the booklet maker
is given in Table 1.
Cross process registration is maintained by using two tampers, which move in opposite directions simultaneously, and are driven by the BM tamper 1 motor, MOT 12-256. Tamping aligns
the centre of the sheets with the centre of the booklet compiler tray.
Media
Paper weight
Plain paper
60 to 80gsm (16 to 15
21lb bond)
60
The tamping position is a preset number of motor steps from the BM tamper 1 home sensor,
Q12-205 and is based on the paper size of the compiled sheet, provided by the media path
driver PWB.
Heavyweight
90gsm (24lb bond) 13
52
Heavyweight
120gsm (32lb
bond)
10
40
Heavyweight
160gsm (43lb
bond)
28
Heavyweight
216gsm (58lb
bond)
20
The tampers are moved from the home position to a ready position stored in NVM, when the
lead edge of the first sheet in the set is detected at the BM entry sensor, Q12-089.
As each sheet enters the booklet compiler tray, the tampers are moved from the ready position
to the tamping position, then returned to the ready position. For the last sheet of the set, the
tamping stroke is repeated once more. After the last sheet in a set is compiled and tamped, the
tampers are moved to the home position.
The BM flapper is utilized when the tampers start their return stroke from the tamp position to
the ready position. The BM flapper motor, MOT12-271 provides mechanical drive to the BM
flapper and the position of the flapper is controlled by the flapper home sensor Q12-207. The
fingers on the flapper push the sheet into the booklet tray to aid the registration and de-skewing process. The flapper rotates after each sheet is tamped. The flappers are then parked in
the home position, so that the fingers on the flapper do not impede the next sheet fed into the
booklet compiler tray.
Table 1 Booklet maker stapling and folding capacity

Maximum No. of
sheets
Plain paper with

60 to 80gsm (16 to 14 including 1
heavyweight cover 21lb bond) with
cover
160gsm (43lb
bond) cover
Maximum No. of
booklet pages
56
Each stapler is cam driven by a DC motor and contains a home position switch. Each of the
staplers also contain a low staples switch to inform the control logic of a low staples condition.
The BM paper present sensor, Q12-170 is mounted on the stapler bracket assembly between
the two staplers. This sensor is used to prevent the staplers being energized if there is no
paper present in the booklet compiler tray, thereby preventing staple jams.
The stapling sequence operates as follows:
The set is then ready to be moved into position for the next operation of stapling.
Backstop Movement
The BM backstop system consists of a backstop assembly, mounted on a near vertical slide
driven by BM backstop motor MOT12-255, via a toothed belt. A flag mounted on the backstop
assembly actuates the BM guide home sensor, Q12-204 to signal the home position of the
backstop.
After the last sheet of the set has been received and compiled, the BM stack hold solenoids,
SOL12-259 are energized to hold the set in place. The BM backstop motor then moves the
backstop to the stapling position. The BM motor now performs a short up and then down again
to jog the set into place. After stapling, the BM backstop motor moves the backstop to the
creasing position.
1.
The tampers are energized to engage the stack and keep both edges in place.
2.
After 50 ms, the front stapler is energized.
3.
After a further 80 ms the rear stapler is energized.
This sequence prevents wrinkling of the paper and limits the load imposed on the power supply.
Once the staplers reach the home position, a dynamic brake is applied to prevent overrun. The
stapler motor will be reversed if the home switch is not made, after the stapling operation, in an
attempt to bring the stapler home and avoid a fault.
Folding and Creasing
The booklet creasing system consists of a crease blade, two pairs of crease rolls, a crease roll
gate and the backstop assembly.
Booklet Stapling
Two BM staple head assemblies are mounted on a bracket, which can be pivoted open for staple jam clearance. The BM staple head carrier closed sensor, Q12-217 detects the closed
position of the stapler bracket assembly.
The crease roll gate is used to cover the entry nip into the crease rolls. This prevents sheets
from coming into contact with the crease rolls during compiling.The crease roll gate is raised to
expose the crease rolls, or lowered to cover the opening to the crease rolls, by the crease roll
gate motor, MOT12-273. The home position (fully raised) is sensed by the BM crease roll gate
home sensor, Q12-222.
February 2013
8-109
After the stapling operation is complete, the backstop raises the stapled set to the fold position,
so that the centre line of the set is directly in line with the crease blade. At the same time, the
crease roll gate motor moves the crease roll gate up until it actuates the crease roll gate home
sensor.
The BM crease roll motor, MOT12-253 is energized when the backstop reaches the fold position, and continues to run until 220 ms after the trail edge of the folded book is detected at the
BM exit sensor, Q12-213. An encoder wheel is mounted on the output shaft of the BM crease
roll motor. The encoder wheel is read by the BM crease roll motor encoder sensor, Q12-216 to
control the roll surface speed.
A stapled set is folded by the combined function of the crease rolls and the crease blade. The
crease blade pushes the centre of the set into the crease rolls nip. The crease blade is driven
by the BM crease blade motor, MOT12-252. The BM crease blade home sensor, Q12-214 and
the BM crease blade motor encoder sensor, Q12-215 are used to monitor the location of the
crease blade during the folding process.
The BM bin 2 90% full sensor, Q12-206 is an optical sensor located at the right of bin 2
between the conveyor belts.
As the booklets travel along the conveyor belts, they will actuate the BM bin 2 90% full sensor.
After 2000 ms, the control logic will declare a 90% tray full condition. At this point a counter is
set and the total number of books allowed after that point is determined by the number of
books already on the tray. Any additional books allowed to be stacked is based on the number
of times the BM eject sensor is actuated and the sizes of the books.
BM Paper Path Transport Motor
The BM compiler motor, MOT12-251 is driven at host speed and provides mechanical drive to
the BM entry roll nip.
Component location Figure 25 and Figure 26.
During booklet folding, the crease blade moves from home position when the backstop
reaches the fold position. The blade stroke is 36 pulses of the crease blade motor encoder
sensor from the blade home position.
Crease roll gate

Crease roll
gate motor
During banner sheet folding, a delay of 700 ms from the trail edge at the BM entry sensor is
used before the crease blade moves from the home position.
The crease blade is held at the fold position by a dynamic brake for 250 ms to allow the banner
sheet or stapled set to be drawn into the crease rolls. The BM crease blade motor is then
reversed to drive the crease blade back to its home position as the crease rolls crease and
feed the booklet. The BM exit sensor, Q12-213, located just after the crease rolls, detects jams.
When the BM eject sensor is clear, the crease roll gate motor moves the crease roll gate down
to cover the crease rolls.
For a booklet consisting of 10 or more sheets, or when handling 8.5 x 11 in paper, folding is
executed four times before ejecting to provide extra creasing.
Bin 2
After a booklet is folded, it is ejected onto the bin 2 by the crease roll nip.
The bin 2 is mounted at the lower right side of the booklet maker, below bin 1. Bin 2 has two
bail arms and two parallel conveyor belts over a flat surface. With the tray extension raised, bin
2 has a capacity of 10 booklets of 11-15 sheets, or 20 booklets of 6-10 sheets, or 30 booklets of
1-5 sheets. With the tray extension lowered, the booklets can be allowed to drop into a suitable
box on the floor.
Crease
rolls
BM staple
head carrier
closed sensor
BM staple head assembly

The BM eject sensor, located at the exit, provides control logic signals and monitors the paper
path for jam detection and timing control for actuation of the BM conveyor belt drive motor.
When a booklet has been compiled, it passes under the BM eject sensor and pushes partially
through the bail arm rollers. 200 ms after the lead edge is detected at BM eject sensor, the BM
conveyor belt drive motor, MOT12-274, is turned on and drives the two conveyor belts for a
preset time dependent on the booklet size.
February 2013
8-110
Figure 25 Booklet maker module components (1)
Figure 27 shows how the C-folds and the Z-folds are formed. The difference lies in where the
first fold is made in the sheet, by the booklet maker. For a C-fold, the backstop is raised to produce a fold near the leading edge of the sheet. For a Z-fold, the backstop is lowered to produce
a fold near the trailing edge of the sheet, effectively inverting the sheet.
BM complier motor
BM entry
roll nips
Booklet maker
BM flapper
assembly
C-FOLD
BM
Crease
blade
sensor
Tri-folder
Backstop
Crease
motor
blade
BM
tamper 1
home
sensor
Booklet maker
Z-FOLD
Tri-folder
BM backstop
motor
Backstop assembly
Crease
roll motor
Booklet maker
PWB
Backstop
Backstop guide home sensor

BM stack hold solenoids
Figure 26 Booklet maker module components (2)
Tri-Folder
When the job does not require a tri-fold, the tri-folder becomes a straight-through paper path
from the booklet maker to the output tray. When a tri-fold is requested, the tri-folder clutch,
diverter solenoid, and for C-folds only, the assist gate solenoid are brought into use.
The tri-folder does not require a dedicated drive motor, but takes its motive power using a
toothed belt and drive coupler, from the crease roll motor in the booklet maker. The drive coupler engages when the booklet maker is pushed into the home position. The belt turns as each
sheet is folded and stops as each sheet leaves the tri-folder.
Figure 27 C and Z Folds

The active components of the tri-folder are:
Tri-folder entry sensor, Q12-164 - A flag sensor, located in the input paper guide. This
sensor detects the sheet entering the tri-folder from the booklet maker. Refer to Figure 28.
Crease roll clutch, CL12-269 - The clutch is located at the rear of the tri-folder, and actuates to drive the tri-folder crease rolls via a toothed belt. Refer to Figure 28.
Tri-folder diverter solenoid, SOL12-267 - The solenoid is located at the rear of the trifolder, and diverts single, tri-fold job sheets into the folder mechanism. It is actuated
immediately after the drive belt from the BM starts to turn, and de-actuates as each sheet
leaves the tri-folder. Refer to Figure 28.
Tri-folder assist gate sensor, Q12-165 - A flag sensor, located in the roller assembly, and
is mounted on the adjustable backstop plate. This sensor detects the sheet entering the
roller assembly to be folded. Refer to Figure 28.
When the tri-folder is not installed, a shorting link fitted to PJ553 in the booklet maker PWB,
simulates the tri-folder interlocks, to feed +24V to the booklet maker PWB.
The tri-folder works in conjunction with the booklet maker, to produce C or Z folds. The booklet maker makes the first fold, and passes the sheet to the tri-folder to make the second fold.
One sheet at a time is folded, and the tri-folder can fold 60-120gsm, (15-30lb) sheets.
February 2013
8-111
Tri-folder assist gate solenoid, SOL12-268 - The solenoid is located at the rear of the trifolder. The assist gate solenoid is only actuated during C-folds, to assist the first folded
flap into the crease rolls. It actuates as the sheet enters the crease rolls and ensures that
the trailing edge of the first fold stays inside the crease of the second fold. Refer to Figure
28.
Folder exit sensor

(Q12-166)
Drive clutch
(CL12-269)
Tri-folder entry sensor

(Q12-164)
Tri-folder assist sensor

(Q12-165)
Figure 29 Tri-folder exit sensor

Tri-folder assist gate solenoid
(SOL12-268)
Tri-folder diverter solenoid

(SOL12-267)
Tri-folder top cover interlock switch - A single-pole micro switch, located at the front of the
tri-folder. This switch is connected in series with the front door interlock switch, S12-209.
When both switches are made, the +24V supply is fed to the tri-folder PWB and the BM
PWB. The BM PWB has +24V LED indication, as described in the Power / Interlocks section of this document. Refer to Figure 30.
Top cover interlock sensor, Q12-210 - A flag sensor, located towards the rear of the trifolder top cover. This sensor detects whether the top cover is open or closed. Refer to
Figure 30.
Front door interlock switch, S12-209 - A double-pole switch, located behind the top of the
tri-folder front door. One pole of this switch is connected in series with the TF top cover
interlock switch. When both switches are made, the +24V supply is fed to the tri-folder
PWB and the BM PWB. The second pole of this switch detects whether the tri-folder front
door is open or closed. Refer to Figure 30.
Figure 28 Entry sensor and folding components
Folder exit sensor, Q12-166 - A flag sensor, located in the exit paper guide. This sensor
detects the sheets as they leave the tri-folder. Refer to Figure 29.
February 2013
8-112

interlock (Q12-210)
BM bin 2 90% full

sensor (Q12-206)
BM conveyor drive motor

(MOT12-274)
Figure 31 Bin 2 Output tray components
Tri-folder front door

interlock (S12-209)
Figure 30 Tri-folder interlock components
Booklet Maker Bin 2 Output Tray

Bin 2 receives the folded output from the tri-folder, and the booklets from the booklet maker
and / or the tri-folder module. The components associated with this tray are:
BM conveyor drive motor, MOT12-274 - A stepper motor, driving the conveyer belts.
Refer to Figure 31.
Bin 2 90% full sensor, Q12-206. A flag sensor, detecting a nearly-full tray. Refer to Figure
31.
February 2013
8-113
February 2013
8-114
E-mail:
*Date Report Submitted:
Mailing Address:
Form EH&S-700 Rev 3.0 (18 March 2009)
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red, turquoise wash background
E-Mail:
*Title:
*Organization:
*Name:
E-mail:
*Telephone Number:
*Phone (required for Xerox serviced equipment):
Location:
Individual Providing Notification
Employee:
Fax:
*Telephone:
*Name of Customer Contact Person:
*Name (required for Xerox serviced equipment):
Customer Service Engineer Identification
*Address:
*Customer Name:
Customer Identification
*Location of product and affected part(s):
*Description
List damaged and affected part(s) of the machine by description and part number:
Part Number
Total Copy Meter:
Installation Date:
Date of last service maintenance:
Serial Number(s) of Accessory (ies):
Product Serial Number:
*Model No. or Product Name:
Product Description
*Date Of Incident (mm / dd / yy):
EH&S Office Use ONLY

EH&S Incident Reference Number:
for Incidents Involving a Xerox Product
EHS 700 - Health & Safety Incident Report Form
A4 Format
Yes
Describe:
Identify:
(i.e., source, names of individuals)
Form EH&S-700 Rev 3.0 (18 March 2009)
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red, turquoise wash background
For incidents in Xerox Europe and Developing Markets East

(Middle East, Africa, India, China, and Hong Kong)
Submit to Elaine Grange
e-mail: ehs-europe@xerox.com or fax: +44 (0) 1707 35 3914 [Intelnet 8*668 3914]
For incidents in North America and Developing Markets West
(Brazil, Mexico, Latin America North and Latin America South,
Submit form to Doris Bush
e-mail: usa.xerox.ehs@xerox.com or fax 585-216-8817 [ Intelnet 8*219-8817 ]
Instructions: E-mail or fax both pages of this completed form to EH&S:
*Preliminary actions taken to mitigate incident:
Apparent cause of incident (identify part that is suspect to be responsible for the incident)
Yes
*Did external emergency response provider(s) such as fire department, ambulance, etc. respond?
No
LIST INCIDENT DESCRIPTIONS AND SUPPORT DIAGRAMS/DATA INCLUDED OR ATTACHED:
*Any damage to customer property?
No
Page 2
A4 Format
MANDATORY DESCRIPTION (above): Provide a detailed description of all valid factors that may have
contributed to the incident. Hardware involved in the incident should be preserved and retained for further
investigation should investigation be deemed necessary by EH&S.
Other, Describe:
Fire with open flames seen

Electric shock to operator or service representative
Physical injury/illness to operator or service representative
Describe:
Smoke
Describe quantity and duration of smoke:
*Description Of Incident: (Check all that apply)
Details of Incident
EHS 700 - Health & Safety Incident Report Form for

Incidents Involving a Xerox Product
DUE DATE:
MANAGER:
PCS. NUMBER:
RECEIVED DATE:
FOR OFFICE USE ONLY
WHAT IS YOUR OVERALL SATISFACTION LEVEL

WITH THE MANUAL
DO YOU FIND THE FORMAT OF THE MANUAL EASY

TO USE?
DO YOU FIND THE MANUAL IS TECHNICALLY

ACCURATE?
QUESTION
NOT
APPLICABLE
SATISFIED
NEITHER
SATISFIED
NOR
DISSATISFIED
DISSATISFIED
VERY
DISSATISFIED
Content Development and Language Services

Xerox Global Services
Enterprise Centre
Bessemer Road
Welwyn Garden City
Hertfordshire, AL7 1BU
UK.
Attention: Niki Dow
VERY
SATISFIED
COMMENT
Please submit a marked-up photocopy of the relevant pages
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION QUESTION SET
PAGE NUMBER:
SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL:
CBU/DISTRICT LOCATION CODE:
OPERATING COMPANY:
PRODUCT AND PUBLICATION PUBLICATION REVISION

TITLE:
DATE:
DATE:
CONTACT TELEPHONE NUMBER:
ENGINEER NUMBER:
JOB TITLE:
NAME:
Please copy this master sheet and use it to help us to improve this publication. We would like you to tell us about
improvements to its accuracy, format and quality.
Please give specific references, i.e.: page numbers and figure numbers and attach marked up photocopies wherever possible. If you have identified a solution please include your suggestions with your reply.
Please also answer the customer satisfaction question set.
When you have completed the PCS, send it by internal mail to the address below. You will receive an acknowledgement and feedback on your comments. Please ensure that your name and CBU/District location code are
fully completed.
PUBLICATION COMMENT SHEET
XEROX EUROPE
XEROX EUROPE

Xerox® ColorQube® 9303 Family Service Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Xerox® ColorQube® 9303 Family Service Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

708P90290

Xerox ColorQube 9303 Family Service Manual

ColorQube 9303 Family

ColorQube 9303 Family

About This Manual

Section 5 Parts List

Section 6 General Procedures / Information

Section 3 Image Quality

When there is a personnel or machine safety issue.

When there is a cleaning or a lubricating activity associated with the procedure.

When the part requires an adjustment after a part is installed.

When a special tool is required for removal or installing a part.

ColorQube 9303 Family

About This Manual

How To Use This Manual

Remote Control Panel

How to Differentiate Between Machine Variants

Remotely view the local UI display graphics.

Operate both hard and soft buttons on the control panel.

Warnings, Cautions And Notes

How To Use This Manual,

ColorQube 9303 Family

Bus Update May 2011

Bus Update September 2011

Bus Update June 2012

Bus Update February 2013

Bus Update May 2011

Wiring Diagram 8.2 Media Path Driver PWB (2 of 5)

Bus Update June 2012

12-024-00-171, 12-025-00-171 HVF Paddle Roller Position RAP

12-113-00-171, 12-114-00-171, 12-190-00-171 HVF BM Entry RAP

91-698-00 to 91-732-00 IOD Excessive Head Misalignment RAP

91-827-00 PQM Align Needed RAP

The following procedures are updated:

91-837-00 PQM Align Calibration Needed RAP

92-541-00, 92-570-00 Interrupt Storm Fault RAP

94-535-00 Drum Driver Command Curent Error RAP

94-538-00 to 93-540-00, 93-959-00 Lower Umbilical Thermal Error RAP

99-394-00 to 99-413-00 PEST Error 13 RAP

99-272-00 to 99-292-00 PEST Error 8 RAP

99-444-00 to 99-457-00 PEST Error 16 RAP

99-460-00 to 99-477-00 PEST Error 17 RAP

OF 3 Unresponsive Machine RAP

OF 12 Service Code RAP

IQ 9 Deletions in the Process Direction RAP

IQ 13 All Colours Uneven RAP

12-460-00-171 to 12-462-00-171 HVF Bin 1 Position RAP

REP 91.13 Stitch / Roll Motor

REP 91.29 Printhead

ADJ 12.2-171 Tri-Folder Paper Settings

Parts List updated

Bus Update September 2011

GP 15 Location and Function of PWB LEDs

The following procedures are updated:

GP 37 Post Part Replacement Routines

01E +12V Distribution RAP

12G-110 LCSS PWB Damage RAP

19-300-00 to 19-310-00 Image Disk (HDD) Failure RAP

ColorQube 9303 Family

The following procedures are new:

REP 91.37 Stitch / Roll Motor Lead Screws

Bus Update February 2013

introduction of the dicovery

general update to the ColorQube 9303F procedures.